[" HAVE perufed this Performance, and 
 *- look upon it as a judicious Collection of 
 the moft important Branches and Improve- 
 ments in the various Subjects therein treated 
 of ; and as a Work worthy of Encourage- 
 ment, for its real Ufe, and great Compre- 
 henrivenefs. 
 
 T. S I M P S O N. 
 S'be Royal Academy at 
 Woolwich, Jan. 8. 1744*
 
 Syftemo/ GEOGRAPHY; 
 
 Or, A D I S S E R T A T I O N on the 
 
 Creation and various Phenomena 
 
 OF THE 
 
 Terraqueous GLOBE: 
 
 As it Confifts of 
 
 Subterraneous Caverns, Subterraneous Waters, Mountains, 
 Values, Plains, and Rocks. 
 
 With an Hypothesis concerning their Causes. 
 
 A DESCRIPTION of All the 
 
 Empires, Kingdoms, &c. of the World. 
 
 Exhibiting Their 
 
 Boundaries, 
 Situation, 
 Divifion, 
 Subdivision, 
 Square M'les, 
 Antient Geography, 
 
 Chief Towns in each 
 
 Divifion, 
 Diltance & Bearing 
 
 from the Capital, 
 Climate, 
 Government, 
 
 Remarkable Laws, 
 
 Policy, 
 
 Trade, 
 
 Revenues, 
 
 Forces, 
 
 Curiofities, 
 
 Perfont of the Inha- 
 bitants, 
 Chaiacler, 
 Religion, 
 Cuftoms., 
 Ceremonies. 
 
 With Extracts of Antient and Modern History, and of fome of the 
 moft celebrated Voyages and Travels, intcrfperfed throughout the Whole. 
 
 To which is prefixed, 
 
 i INTRODUCTION to thofe Parts of the Mathematics, neceil'ary to a 
 thorough Knowledge of the Subject of Geography; -viz. 
 
 Algebra, Geometry, Plain Trigonometry, The life of the Globes, Projeclion of the Sphere, 
 Spherical Trigonometry, Geometrical and Pbyfical AJlronomy, great Variety of Geo- 
 graphical and AJlrtr.omical Problems, the Conjlruilion of Maps ; 
 
 Digclted into Definitions, Problems, and Theorems, and fully demonstrated. 
 
 By JOSEPH RANDALL. 
 
 LONDON: 
 
 Printed for Joseph Lord, Bookfeller, in Wakefield; and Sold by him at 
 hit Shops at Barnejly, and at Pontefraa ; And J. Rivington, at the 
 Bible and Crown in St. Paul's Church-yard, London, m d.cc x li v.
 
 12./
 
 To the Right Honourable 
 THOMAS WENTWORTH, 
 
 Earl of Malton; Vifcount Higham of Higham-Fer*. 
 rers ; Baron of Ma I ton, Wath, and Rarrwden ; 
 Knight of the Mofl: Honourable Order of the 
 Bath. 
 
 My Lord, 
 
 IESTEEMita great Happinefs, that I am 
 permitted, under Your Patronage, to offer 
 to the Public this Syftem of Geography. 
 
 That 
 880790
 
 ii DEDICATION. 
 
 That Your Lordfhip may long continue 
 an Honour to Your Country, a Friend to 
 Mankind, happy in Yourfelf, Your Family, 
 and every other Circumftance of Life, is the 
 fincere Wifh of 
 
 Tour Lordship's 
 
 mojl 'Devotedy 
 
 and mqfl Obedient, 
 
 Humble Servant, 
 
 Joseph Randall. 
 
 PRE-
 
 THE 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 HAVE, in the following Treatife, en- 
 deavoured, from very plain and eafy 
 Beginnings, by gentle Degrees, and a 
 continued Chain of Reafoning, to lead 
 the young Beginner into the Demonftra- 
 tions of Truths, neceflary in Aftronomy, which af- 
 fords fuch happy Improvements to Geography. Be- 
 fides the TJfe of Geometry, in Aftronomy and Geo- 
 graphy, the Student, by being accuftomed to clear 
 Ideas, and juft Reafbnings, finds his Mind capable 
 of fuch Exactnefs, Order, and Penetration, as render 
 him judicious and accurate, in almoft all Arts and 
 Employments, to which he applies himfelf. He ad- 
 apts his Methods of Inquiry to the Nature of the 
 Ideas he examines, and the Truth he fearches after ; 
 laying in order thofe intermediate Truths, that de- 
 monitratively lead him, with Pleafure, into Difco- 
 
 a , verres
 
 The P R E F A C E. 
 
 veries, which, at firft Sight, appeared extremely 
 difficult : And indeed, if our Ideas were purfued in 
 the Way familiar to Students in Geometry, they 
 would carry our Thoughts farther, and with greater 
 Evidence and Clearnefs than we are apt to imagine. 
 As to Aftronomy, I have not only explained the ce- 
 leflial Motions, but likewife the Reafons of the fe- 
 veral Phenomena arifing therefrom, fo far as can 
 be underftood and demonftrated by the Help of the 
 Geometry in this Treatife, avoiding thofe things (as 
 Matters of too much Difficulty) which require a 
 thorough Knowledge of the higher Geometry. Be- 
 fides this, I have explained the Caufes of the celeftial 
 Motions ; and demonftrated, that there is an uni- 
 verfal Power of Gravity acting in the folar Syftem, 
 whereby the primary Planets are drawn off from 
 their natural, rectilinear Motions, and kept in their 
 Orbits. That this Power or Force does not tend to- 
 wards the Earth, but the Sun; and that this Force, or 
 Gravity, is the fame which caufes all heavy Bodies to 
 tend to the Centre of the Earth : And, laftly, that 
 the Motion, which caufes the Succeffion of Day 
 and Night, and the apparent Rifing and Setting of 
 the Stars in the Space of Twenty-four Hours, belongs 
 to the Earth, and not to the Heavens. Though the 
 Effect of this Power, or Virtue, is fo vifible, in de- 
 fending Bodies towards the Center of the Earth; 
 yet Nature fcarce affords any Problem, wherein the 
 Caufe is more concealed : It is by this fingle Prin- 
 ciple, that the Earth, and all the celeftial Bodies, are 
 kept from Diffolution, the leaft of their Particles not 
 being fuffered to recede far from their Surfaces, 
 
 with-
 
 The P R E F A C gj 
 
 without being immediately brought down again, by 
 virtue of their natural Tendency to their refpective 
 Centres. Alfo this Law of Gravity is, as it were, 
 the Cement of Nature, and the Principle of Union, 
 by which the heavenly Bodies themfelves remain in 
 their proper State and Order j for the attractive Vir- 
 tue of the Sun detains not only the Planets, but 
 alfo the Comets, within due Bounds, and hinders 
 them from making Excurfions into the immenfe 
 Regions of Space. This noble Science of Aftro- 
 nomy very much improves the Mind alfo, and, by 
 its mod delightful Speculations, increafes the Force 
 and Penetration of the Underftanding ; afiifting our 
 Apprehenfions of the immenfe Power of the Supreme 
 Being, the Magnificence of his Creation, and his 
 tranfcendent Greatnefs. There are many things in- 
 deed in the Aftronomical Part of this Treatife, that 
 feemingly have no apparent Connection with the 
 agreeable Subject of Geography : But then it may 
 be confidered, that they ferve to a farther Acquaint- 
 ance with Aftronomy , and that Improvements in 
 Geography are chiefly expected from the Aftro- 
 nomer. Thofe who have any Experience in the 
 Sciences of Geography and Navigation, cannot be 
 ignorant how much the Difcovery of the Four Moons 
 about Jupiter, and the laborious and accurate Cal- 
 culation made of their Motions, have contributed 
 towards advancing thefe profitable and delightful 
 Studies. 
 
 In the fecond Part of this Work, I have treated 
 of the Creation of the terraqueous Globe ; and endear 
 
 a 2 vourcd
 
 The P R E F A C E. 
 
 voured to cxpofe the wild and extravagant Fancy 
 of thofe, who imagine, that unthinking Matter 
 could, of itfelf, without the Supreme Director, fall 
 into a regular and beautiful Structure, fuch as the 
 primitive Earth was, when it came out of the Hands 
 of its Almighty Creator, and which was evidently 
 adapted to the various Ufes of its needy Inhabitants : 
 And that it did not exift an habitable Earth ab ater' 
 no i but is perifhable, and, in time, will be rendered 
 incapable of being the Habitation of Mankind. I 
 have alfo taken a View of the many ghaftly Caverns, 
 gaping Orifices, and dreadful fubterraneous Pafiages ; 
 and have inquired into that moft terrible Change in 
 Nature, the Deluge, in order to judge what might 
 have been the moft probable Caufe of the apparent 
 Irregularities obfervable in the Frame of the Earth, 
 outward and inward. I have, after this, exhibited 
 the firft grand Divifion of of the terraqueous Globe, 
 the fquare Miles, or fuperficial Content of each Di- 
 vifion and Subdivifion, the capital Cities, with the 
 Diftance and Bearing of each from London ; alio the 
 Time of each Country, compared with that of Eng- 
 land. By this Means the Reader has a comprehen- 
 five View of all the Empires, Kingdoms, &V. of the 
 World, and of the Proportion which one Country 
 bears to another. Then follows the Defcription of 
 every particular Empire, Kingdom, &c. of this 
 firft grand Divifion, as enumerated in the Title-page. 
 Geography, Jlr icily fo called, or an hiftorical and geo- 
 graphical Account of all the Countries on the Face of 
 the Earth, muft certainly be a very agreeable and 
 ufeful Entertainment ; for herein we have a View 
 4 of
 
 The PREFACE. 
 
 of the Revolutions of human Affairs, of the Begin- 
 ning and Fall of Empires, of the furprifing Differ- 
 ence of the Manners, Cuftoms, and Opinions of 
 Mankind. It is not therefore without Reafon, that 
 fuch an hiftorical Defcription has always been con- 
 fidered as a great Improvement to Youth, who are 
 confined, without it, to the Country wherein they 
 live, and fhut up, as it were, within the narrow 
 Circle of their own private Reflections ; continuing 
 in a kind of Infancy, which leaves them Strangers 
 to the reft of the World, profoundly ignorant of all 
 that has preceded, or even furrounds them : It be- 
 comes a School of Morality for them ; it condemns 
 Vice, throws off the Mafk from falfe Virtues, dif- 
 pels the Pomp, which dazzles the Imagination, and 
 ihews, by a thoufand Examples, that Virtue is their 
 real Good, and alone renders them truly great and 
 happy here on Earth, and tends to fecure the Friend- 
 fhip of Him who governs Eternity, and who can 
 reward them with endlefs Blifs. 
 
 I have all along endeavoured to reprefent Man* 
 kind as they really are, and not to impofe upon 
 the World by monftrous Relations of things : I 
 have carefully examined into the Credibility of 
 the Relations of Voyage-writers and Travellers ; par- 
 ticularly thofe of the befl Spanijh Hiftorians, which 
 indeed cannot be always relied on : They have evi- 
 dently made fuch Reprefentations of Anerica, and 
 the Natives, as their Intereft, Vanity, or Superftition, 
 prompted them to make, and have had very little 
 Regard to the Truth of things. And how falfe fo- 
 cver their Relations have been, they have generally 
 
 been
 
 The P R E F A C E. 
 
 been tranfcribed and copy'd by other Nations, who 
 had no other Opportunity of informing themfelves 
 of the State of thofe Countries, before the Spaniards 
 arrived there , inibmuch that it is with fome Diffi- 
 culty we difcover the Falfhood of fuch Relations, 
 elpecially as to what regards the Morals and Religion 
 of the Indians, when the Spaniards came firft amongft: 
 them. As to the numerous Nations of Canibals y 
 Giants, and Monjiers, that were faid to be found in 
 America, the Reader may be fatisfied, that thefe Re- 
 lations were pure Fiction : And as to human Sacri- 
 fices, I am very much in Doubt, after the moft care- 
 ful Inquiry, whether there were any fuch ; the 
 celebrated Acofia , and other Spanijb Writers, charg- 
 ing both the Peruvians and Florida Indians with fa-, 
 crificing Children, which is now known to be falfe ; 
 from whence we have good Reafon to fufpedt the 
 Truth of the pretended human Sacrifices among the 
 other Nations in America. It is indeed extremely 
 difficult to undeceive the general Part of Mankind, 
 efpecially as they are delighted with fuch Relations 
 as are moft monftrous and unnatural, and feem to 
 wiffi they might be true -, efteeming thofe Authors 
 merely for being marvellous. Several of the Heads, 
 mentioned in the Title-page, being Subjects that 
 do not admit of new Relations, I reckon my- 
 felf no Plagiary to grant, that I have made feveral 
 Abftracts from other Volumes : It is what thofe Au- 
 thors themfelves have done, as they judged it need- 
 lefs fometimes to alter a Circumftance, when they 
 found it fuccinclly worded by a credible and able 
 Pen. 
 
 As
 
 The P R E F A C E. 
 
 As to the Mathematical Part of this Syftem, I 
 muft alfo acknowledge my Obligations for fome 
 things borrowed from the illuftrious Sir Isaac New- 
 ton *s Mathematical Principles of natural Philofophy, 
 Dr. Gregory'j Pbyftcal and Geometrical AJlronomy y 
 Dr. Keill'j Aftronomy, Mr. Whiston'j Agrono- 
 mical Leftures, Mr. Martin*^ Trigonometry r , Mr. 
 Ward'; Young Mathematician, Mr. Jones'j Synop/is y 
 and Mr. Hammond'j Algebra. How well I have 
 executed this Work, muft be left to others to deter- 
 mine , but this may be truly faid, that whoever reads 
 the Book over, will find more in it than the Title 
 promifes, or perhaps is expe&ed. The Reafon I 
 have omitted Maps, is, becaufe the Analytical Tables 
 are to be read with Moll's Two- Sheet Maps ; the 
 Scale of the fmall ones, proper to be bound up with 
 this Volume, being fo contracted, renders them al- 
 moft unfit for Ufe j befides, they are very expenfive : 
 And therefore the Reader will, I hope, excufe that 
 Omifllon, as alfo the Errors of the Prefs, which arc 
 almoft unavoidable in a Treatife of this Nature. 
 
 THE
 
 THE 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 . . 
 
 An Intro duct ion to Arithmetic 
 
 and Algebra. 
 Chap. 
 I. AJOTATION, Explication of Notes, Axioms ; 
 Addition, Multiplication, Subtraction, and 
 Divifion of numeral Arithmetic, Pag. i. 
 
 II. Addition, Subtraction^ Multiplication^ and Divi- 
 fion of Algebra, vii 
 
 III. Proportion, xiv 
 
 IV. Vulgar Fractions, xvi 
 
 V. Decimal Fractions^ xxiii 
 
 VI. Involution, xxix 
 
 VII. Evolution, xxxi 
 
 VIII. Surd Quantities, xxxv 
 
 IX. Equations, and the Methods cf reducing them, xl 
 
 X. The Methods of refolving Qucjlions, xlvi 
 
 PART I f 
 
 I. Geometrical Definitions and Problems, i 
 
 II. Geometrical Theorems, 15 
 
 III. Plain Trigonometry, and the ConftruClion of Sines, 
 Tangents, and Secants, 36 
 
 IV. The Ufe of the Globes, 40 
 
 V. The Projection of the Sphere, 58 
 
 VI. Spherical Trigonometry, 76 
 
 VII. Geo-
 
 ThcCONTENTS., 
 
 Chap. Pag. 
 
 VII. Geometrical and lb fa al Afironomy, 92 
 
 VIII. Agronomical and Geographical Problems, 134 
 
 PART II. 
 
 I. The Creation of the Terraqueous Globe, 170 
 
 II. Of the fubterraneous Caverns, fubterraneous Wa- 
 
 ters, fubterraneous Paffages, Mountains, Rocks y 
 Plains, Valleys ; with an Hypothefis concerning 
 their Caufes, 172 
 
 III. 'The Divtfion of the habitable Earth, 186 
 
 IV. The prefent State of Spain, 189 
 
 V. The prefent State of Portugal, 20 r 
 
 VI. The prefent State of France, 206 
 
 VII. The prefent State of Italy, 218 
 
 VIII. The prefent State of Germany, 253 
 
 IX. The prefent State of the United Provinces, 268 
 
 X. The prefent State of the Dominions of Denmark, 
 
 281 
 
 XI. The prefent State of Sweden, 289 
 
 XII. The prefent State of the Dominions of Mufcovy 
 
 in Europe, 295 
 
 XIII. The prefent State of Poland, 305 
 
 XIV. The prefent State of Turky in Europe 3 1 1 
 
 XV. The prefent State of South Britain or England, 
 
 327 
 
 XVI. The prefent State of North Britain or Scotland, 
 
 356 
 
 XVII. The prefent State of Ireland, 372 
 
 XVIII. The prefent State of Turky in Afia, 379 
 
 XIX. The prefent State of Arabia, 414 
 
 XX. The prefent State of Perfia, 419 
 
 XXI. The prefent State of India, 430 
 
 XXII. The prefent State of China, 455 
 
 XXIII. The prefent State of Great Tartary, 467 
 
 Chap.
 
 The CONTENTS. 
 
 Chap: Pag. 
 
 XXIV. Theprefent State of the Afiatic Ides, 475 
 
 XXV. The prefent State of Egypt, 495 
 
 XXVI. The prefent State of "Barbary, ,508 
 
 XXVII. The prefent State of Biledulgerid, Zaara, 
 Negroland, and Guiney, 525 
 
 XXVIII. The prefent State of Ethiopia, 539 
 
 XXIX. Theprefent State of the African lues, 552 
 
 XXX. The prefent State of the Britifh Empire in 
 America, 558 
 
 XXXI. The prefent State of the Spanifh Empire in 
 America, 602 
 
 XXXII. Theprefent State of the Portuguefe Empire 
 in America, 660 
 
 XXXIII. The prefent State of the French Empire in 
 America; the Dutch Dominions^ Terra de 
 Laborador, &c. 665 
 
 Set. I. Of the French Empire in America, ibid. 
 Sect. II. Of the Dutch Dominions in America, 66y 
 Sect. III. Of Terra de Laborador, or New Britain, 
 
 ibid. 
 Sect. IV. Of Groenland, or Weft-Greenland, 669 
 Sect. V. Of Eafi>Greenland, 670 
 
 A SYSTEM
 
 (i) 
 
 A N 
 
 INTRODUCTION 
 
 T O 
 
 Arithmetic and Algebra. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 SECT. I. Notation." 
 
 iMONG the Variety of Ideas that prefent them- 
 felves to our Minds, there is none more fimple 
 than that of Unity or One, every Object our 
 Senfes are employ'd about bringing this Idea along 
 with it. By repeating this Unit in our Minds, we 
 come by the complex Modes of it ; thus, by adding 
 one to one, we have the Number two. And fo proceeding on, 
 frill adding one more to the laft colle&ive Number, and giving a 
 new Name to it, we may count, or have Ideas, for feveral Col- 
 lections of Units, diftinguifh'd one from another, as far as we 
 have a Series of Names in our Language for following Numbers, 
 and a Memory to retain that Series with their feveral Names. 
 For, without fuch Names or Marks, we can hardly make ufe of 
 Numbers in reckoning, efpecially where the Combination is made 
 up of any great Multitude of Units, which, put together, with- 
 out a Name or Mark to diftinguilh that precife Collection, will 
 hardly be kept from being a Heap in Cofffufion. This, perhaps, 
 may be the Reafon, why many of the Jmericans, who are other- 
 wife of quick and rational Parts enough, cannot, as wc do, by 
 any means, count a Thoufand, nor have any difticct Notion of 
 
 a that
 
 ii An Introduction to Chap. 1. 
 
 that Number ; becaufe their Language, being ("canty, and accom- 
 modated only to the few NecefTaries of a needy fimple Life, has 
 neither Words nor Characters to ftand for a Thoufand. 
 
 The Arabians, by a wonderful Contrivance, exprefs'd any 
 Number, how large foever, by a very eafy Method ; for the hap- 
 py Inventor having introduced thefe fimple Characters, *viz. 
 I.' 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. and inftead of uiing nine other Marks, 
 as the Eaftern Nations did, to exprefs the Number of Tens from 
 one to nine, happily hit on this Mark o to fignify nothing, or a 
 Cypher, which was to be infignificant of itielf, but, by its 
 Place, was. to alter the Value of the preceding Figures, in a ten- 
 fold Proportion, the Order being from the Left to the Right : 
 
 Hence the Value of each Place is ten times the Value of the 
 next before it ; for 
 
 1 I A *pi 5 ' ? but in the 2d, 3 d, J l > IO ' IOOO > " 
 
 2 J. m the 1 ft Place isV 2 J- , p . T** '< 20, 200, 2000, &c. 
 
 3} 1 3 ) 4t Plac ' Lc 1 30, 300, 3Q00, arc. 
 
 It Is very renja/kable, that almoft evhy Nation mould, un 
 known to each other, agree in making ufe of juft ten Characters 
 for the Expremon of the ten firft Numbers, when any other Num- 
 ber would have ferv'd ; for the Ihracians had only thefe three 
 fimple Characters, 'viz. i. 2. 3 ; and,- without defigning any other 
 Mark to exprefs the Number of four, from one to three, ufed alfo 
 the Cypher o ;ji,the fame manner as the Arabians or Indians. 
 Thus, 10 the' Thracian Number, ffgnifying 4 by the Arabian 
 Method; 20, 8 ; 30, 12; iqq, 16; &c. The common Way 
 of reckoning on our Fingers may. be admitted as a very probable 
 Reafon of this genera! flopping, when we reckon ten. 
 
 A Number is faid to have fo many Places as there are Figures 
 in it ; thus, 976, (&c. is a Number of three Places, &e. 
 
 To find tne Value of each Figure in any Rank how large 
 foever. 
 
 Set a Mark after every fixth Figure from the Right to the Left, 
 
 and put Names above them as in the following 
 
 . 
 
 T A 8 L E. 
 
 Quadrillions. Trillions. Billions. Millions. Units. 
 
 798765* 987657. 341687. 678943. 785460. 
 
 Which is to be read thus, Seven hundred Ninety-eight thoufand 
 Seven hundred and Sixty-five Quadrillions ; Nine hundred Eighty- 
 feven thoufand Six hundred and Fifty-feven Trillions, &c. 
 
 Befides thefe 1 o Characters, by Help whereof all Numbers, 
 however great, may be exprefs'd, there are other Notes made uf 
 of to fhew the Relation and Dependence of Numbers, or Quan- 
 tities, one upon another, whofe Signification, arc as follow: 
 
 5 Explication
 
 Sed. I. Notation. 4ft 
 
 Explication j/NoteS. 
 -f- Signifies Plus, more, or to be added ; thus 9 -j- 3 fignifies, 
 that 3 is to be added to 9. 
 
 Signifies Minus, lefs, or to be fubtra&ed ; thus 9 3 figni- 
 fies, that 3 is to be fubtrafted from 9. 
 
 x Signifies Multiplied by; thus 9 X 3 fignifies, that 3 is to 
 multiply 9, or that 9 is to be multiply 'd by 3. 
 
 The like is to be underftood of thefe three Notes or Characters, 
 when feveral Numbers, or Letters, are connected together. It 
 is alfo to be obferved, that every Sign belongs to the Quantity 
 which comes immediately after it, and not that which precedes it. 
 
 -j- Signifies Divided by j thus 9-^- 3 fignifies, that 9 is to be 
 
 divided by 3 ; alfo 3) 9 (3 ; or thus , each implying, that 9 is 
 to be divided by 3. 
 
 Signifies equal to ; thus 9 6 -f- 3, fignifies that 9 is 
 equal to 6 r.dded to 3 . 
 
 & Signifies Involution, or Raifing of Powers; thus 7 3 
 fignifies, that j ii involved, or rais'd to the .Square, or Second 
 Power ; and 7 j$> 3, that 7 is to be rais'd to the Cube, or Third 
 Power. 
 
 tW Signifies" Evolution, or Extradlion of Roots ; thus 9 UO 2 
 implies, that the Square Root of 9 is to be extracted ; and 27 LCD 3 
 implies,' that the Cube Root of 27 i^ to be extracted. 
 
 V Signifies a Surd Root, or fuch an one as cannot be exa&Iy 
 extracted ; thus the fquare Root of 5 is expreffed by 1/ 5. 
 
 : :, So is. The Sign of Proportion ; thus 2 : 8 : : 6 : 4 ; that is, 
 as 2 is to 8, fo is 6 to 4. 
 
 Axioms, or Self-evident Truths. 
 
 1. If, to or from equal Things, equal ones be added or fub* 
 traded, their Sums or Difference will be equal. 
 
 2. If Things be x or -- by equal ones, their Produces or Quo- 
 tients will be equal. 
 
 3. Thofe Quantities which are equal to one and the fame Quan- 
 tity, are equal to one another. Thus \zd.r=. 1 Shilling ; and 
 I id. 48 Farthings ; then 1 1. rr 48 Farthings. 
 
 4. The Whole is equal to all its Parts; thus 12 Pence, th 
 Whole, is equal to 8 Pence and 4 Pence, its Parts. 
 
 ft s SECT.
 
 "ft ^Introduction^ Chap. 1. 
 
 SECT. II. Addition. 
 
 DDITION is the collecting of feveral Numbers, confider'd 
 as Parts, into one Number equal to all thofe Parts ; 
 
 A 
 
 thus 4 7k 
 
 ^Parts 
 
 15 = to all the Parts. 
 
 Example 1. Example 2. 
 
 To 123 = 100 -{- 20 -f- 3 7^5 700-f- 80-J-5 
 
 *dd 234 ~ 200 -{- 30 -j- 4 673==: 600 -j~ 70 -j- 3 
 
 Sum 357 300 -j- 50 -f- 7 1458 m 1300 -|- 150-^-8 
 
 COROLLARY. 
 
 Since the Whole is equal to the Sum of all its Parts, therefore 
 to add the Parts, is the fame as to add the Whole. 
 
 SECT. III. Multiplication. 
 
 MULTIPLICATION is a compendious Addition, or the 
 Repeating any Number, a given Number of times, 
 thus 8 N r to be repeated called Multiplicand 7 both are called 
 3 N r of Repetitions called Multiplier J Factors. 
 z^Produtt or Sum of 8 
 
 as in Addition. 
 
 } 
 
 24. 
 
 Exam. 1. Exam. 2. 
 
 432 r= 400 -f- 30 -}- 2 24 r= 20 -}- 4 
 
 3 3 5= 3-4-*. 
 
 1296 1200 -{- 90 -\- 6 120 60 -f" 12 -jr- 40 -4/- S 
 Corollary. 
 Hence the Produft of any two Numbers is equal to the feve- 
 ral Produces made by Multiplying the Parts of one by the Parts 
 of the other. 
 
 Exam.
 
 Se6t.IV. Addition, &V."" 5? 
 
 Exam. 3. r C 5= so- 
 
 ft x < 40 = 240 
 
 245 C200 r= 1200 
 
 26 forfince 
 
 I" 
 
 490 
 
 00 1 / lad Corollary. 
 
 $ 5 = 
 
 X< 40 : 
 
 C 20O == I: 
 
 1470 I 20 X < 40= 800 j 
 
 200 rs 4000 
 
 6370 therefore 26 x 245 = 6 3 70 J 
 
 It mail needs be very eafy to conceive, that the Reafons of 
 Addition and Multiplication evidently flow from the Nature of 
 Notation, Sett. I. 
 
 SECT. IV. Subtraction. 
 
 SUBTRACTION is the taking one Number from another, to 
 find their Difference ; thus, 
 
 if from 8 call'd Minuend, 
 
 we take 5 call'd Subducend ; 
 
 then 3 is the Difference. 
 
 Corollary i. 
 
 Hence Addition and Subtraction ferve reciprocally to prove each 
 other ; for the Subducend and Difference are the Parts of the 
 Minuend, and therefore equal to it per Sett. II. 
 
 !For the Sub- 
 trattion of the 
 Whole, or all 
 the Parts, is the 
 fame per Sett. 
 II. 
 By faying 8 from 1 6, we add ten to the Minuend ; but then we 
 add alfo ten to the Subducend j therefore the Value of the Re- 
 mainder is not chang'd. 
 
 Corollary 2. 
 If, from the Sum of two Numbers, one of them be taken* the 
 Remainder will be the other Number. 
 
 a 3 SECT,
 
 < ^Introduction/*? -Chap. I, 
 
 SECT. V. Division. 
 
 DIVISION is a compendious Subtraction, or finding how 
 often one Number is contain 'd in another i thus, 
 Dividend 
 Divifor 8) 24 (3 Quotient 
 
 Corollary. 
 Hence the Dividend containing the Divifor 3 times, and the 
 Product of the Divifor and Quotient being equal to the Dividend ; 
 it therefore follows, that Multiplication and Diviiion prove each 
 other, being contrary Operations ; for what is done by one, is un- 
 done by the other. 
 
 Scholium. 
 As the Divifor is 8 times as great as Unit or 1, fo 24 the Divir 
 dend is 8 times as great as 3 the Quotient. 
 
 Exam. 1. 
 
 125 100-)- 20 + 5 
 
 <> 4 ! * 2Q -4- 4. -4- I . For as Sub- 
 
 5 = 5 
 
 tra&ing the Whole, is the fame as Subtracting all its Parts ; and as 
 
 Divifion is a compendious Subtraaion, therefore the Divifion of 
 the Whole, and all its Parts, is the fame. Again 
 
 Exam. 2. 
 26) 6347 (200 -f- 40 -f- c, 
 5 2 
 
 1170 
 1040 
 
 130 
 1 jo 
 
 o 
 
 For 5200 1040 130 
 
 26 26 26 
 
 Chap.
 
 Se&. I. Addition. vU 
 
 CHAP. II. 
 
 Of Algebraic Arithmetic, 
 
 SECT. I. Addition, 
 
 Example i. 
 
 A B C D E F G 
 
 1 Rank -J- 4 -f- 4 ~\- 4 -J- 4 -f- 4 -\- 4 ~\- 4 
 
 2 Rank ?j^r 3 -f- 2 -{- 1 -f- o 1 2 3 
 
 3 Rank -}- 7 -f- 6 -4- 5 -f- 4 -f- 3 -f- 2 -f- ^ 
 The Figures in the 2d Rank increafe and decreafe from the Cy- 
 pher ; thus, -{-~ o is one more than 1 ; two more than 2, (57, 
 confequently -f- ', -{-2, -+-3, is two, three, four, more thaa 
 1 -, and therefore -f- 3 is fix more than 3. 
 Manner /"Operation. 
 G F E" 
 
 To +4 -I-4 +4/1 
 
 add 3 2 - 1 
 
 'common Subt raft ion. 
 
 Sum -f- 1 [- 2 {- 3. 
 
 That thefe are the true Sums, may be eafily conceiv'd ; thus, to 
 add 3 to {-* 4, we muft firfr. add o, which gives 4 -p- o ; but 
 we have now added 3 too much, fince o is three more than 3 ; 
 therefore we mull take 3 away from 4-1 o, and then the Expref- 
 fion will Hand thus, 4 -|-r o 3 j that is, 4 3 =: I , by common 
 Subtraction. 
 
 Scholium i. 
 
 Quantities, whereby the different Degrees of Qualities are efti- 
 mated, may be eafily conceiv'd to pafs from Affirmation through 
 Nothing into Negation, as in the Example above, Rank 2d. 
 *\nd indeed, wo are oblig'd to make ufe of thefe negative Ex- 
 preffions, in order to uke in that Univerfality, of which Algebra 
 is capable. 
 
 Again, from the Nature of Debtor and Creditor; the fore- 
 going Example may alfo be il I ultra ted ; thus, let the ill Rank 
 refpe&ively represent the Effects, in Pofleffion, of each Perfon, 
 A, B, ts'c the 2d Rank from } 3 to o what each has owing him, 
 and from o to 3 what each owes i then the 3d Rank (hews the 
 State of their Affairs ; thus, A is worth 7, D is worth 4, G is 
 worth 1 ; fo that a Man who owes 3, and has in Effects only 
 -f- ?, is equal to i , or, in effect, 1 worfe than Nothing. 
 
 a 4 Exam .
 
 viii An In trod u ct ion to Chap. II. 
 
 Exam. 2. 
 ABC 
 
 -4-4-4-1 
 
 O I 2 I 
 
 -4-5 -6j 
 
 add o i 2 l nere J Z; l In Debt * Qr worfe than 
 
 To - 4 - 4 - 4 ") Here A g _^ 
 
 ? "If Nothing. 
 Sum 4 5 6 J c *"~ J 
 
 From what has been faid, we may deduce the following 
 Rules. 
 
 Rule i. 
 
 When the Letters (calPd Quantities) are the fame, and have 
 the fame Sign prefix'd, add the Quantities together, and to the 
 Sum prefix the common Sign. 
 
 Exam. 3. 
 
 Exam. 4. 
 
 Exam. e. 
 
 = 4 
 
 b 2 
 
 a =4 2 
 
 3<x= 12 
 
 $bz=z IO 
 
 a = 4 2 
 
 4 16 6b~ 12 2 2^=8 4 
 
 Scholium 2. 
 Numbers reprefented by the fame Letter, in any Operation, are 
 fuppos'd to be of the fame Value, and thofe reprefented by different 
 Letters, of different Values ; thus, in Example 5, the Letter a 
 reprefents 4 ; and b reprefents 2. Again, The Figure or Number 
 prefix'd to any Letter or Quantity (call'd its Co-efficient) fhews 
 how often that Quantity is tobe taken ; thus, 3 a fhews that the 
 Quantity reprefented by a is to be taken 3 times : And when a 
 Quantity Hands without a Co-efficient, it is always underftood to 
 have an Unit prefix'd : Quantities which differ only in their Co- 
 efficients (as a, 3 a and 5 a) are faid to be like ; but 3 a and c b 
 are unlike. A Quantity which ftands without any prefix'd Sign, 
 is always underftood to have the Sign f- before it ; thus 3 a and 
 {- 3 a, both reprefent the fame Quantity. 
 Rule 2. 
 When the Quantities are like, but have different Signs, fub- 
 traft the Co-efficient of the leffer from that of the greater, and to 
 the Difference prefix the Sign of the greater adjoining the Letter 
 or Letters common to each Quantity. 
 
 Exam. 6. Exam. 7. Exam. 8. 
 
 a 4 -J- b = -f- 2 -f- r=-{-4 2 
 -^ $a=z-\-l2 5^ io a-\~b=: 4~f-2 
 
 -f-2r=-4- 8 4^-rr 8 o. o. o. o. 
 
 Rule 3. 
 When the Quantities are unlike, fet them down in Order, with 
 their proper Signs prefix'd. 
 
 Exam.
 
 Se&.IL ^SiViTRAcrifQNiJ ^ ix 
 
 Exam. 9. Exam. 10. Exam. it. 
 
 a=z 4 3=I2 a b 4 2 
 
 i=z 2 a~ 4 3 =12 
 
 = 4 2 3a 2ir=i2 4 4 6 = 16 2 
 
 SECT. II. .Subtraction. 
 
 Exam. 1. 
 
 Iffrom 4 + 44-4 + 4 + 4 + 4+4 
 We take 3 + 2+1+0 1 2 3 
 
 Then Rem* i+a + 3+4 + 5+6-f-7 
 That 2 from -\-~ 4 gives 7 for the Difference, may be eaftly 
 conceiv'd ; thus, to fubtraft 3 from -\- 4, we muft firft fub- 
 traft o from it, which gives 4 o ; but we have now taken too 
 much by 3 ; fince we fhould have fubtraded but 3, which is 
 3 lefs than o ; therefore we muft add 3 to 4 o, and then we 
 (hall have 4 o -j- 3 ; that is, 4 -j- 3 = 7. 
 
 Corollary i. 
 Henee from -f- is the fame as to add -j- to -\-per this Exam, 
 And -^"from + is the fame as to add to + per Exam. 1. 
 Chap. II. Seft. I. 
 
 Exam. z. 
 
 If from 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 
 We take -f- 3 ~\- 2 -f- I -\- o 1 2 3 
 
 Then Rem 8 7 6 5 43 2 1 
 For if a Perfon is worth 4, or is 4 worfe than Nothing, it 
 is manifeft, that by taking 3 more away, he will be left worth 
 
 7, or 7 worfe than Nothing. But if, from 4, 3 be to be 
 fubtra&ed, we muft firft fubtracl: o, and the Remainder will be 
 
 4 o ; but, by this Operation, we have taken away too much 
 by 3 ; therefore, to have the true Remainder, we muft add 3 to 
 
 4 o ; and then we fliall have 4 o ~f- 3 1 , the 
 fame as above. 
 
 Corollary 2. 
 
 Hence < -f- from is the fame as to add + to 
 
 Hence
 
 x An I nt ROfiSCTiou to Chap. IP. 
 
 Hence alfo, and from the laft- Corollary, we have the following 
 General RxJle. ^ 
 
 Let, or fuppofe, alj the Signs of the Subducend be chang'd, ani 
 add the Quantities as in the laft Seftion, and the Sum thence 
 arifing will be the Difference fought. 
 
 Exam. 3. Exam. 4. Exam. 5. 
 
 a-=z 4 -+- b -\- 2, a-\~b = 4-f~2 
 
 -^-4 =r-4" 16 6zr 12 z zb=z~\-8 4 
 Thefe three Examples are perform'd per Rule 1 in the laft Seft. 
 
 Exam. 6. Exam, y. Exam. 8. 
 
 3 a 12 5 =: 10 a b 4 2 
 
 = 4 = 2 =: 4 2 
 
 2 8 4 = 8 o . o o . o 
 And thefe Examples performed per Rule 2 in the laft Sect. 
 
 Exam. 9. Exam- 10. Exam. 11. 
 
 a 4 3 12 3 12 
 
 -r- 2 2^= 4 c h 4 2 
 
 -{- 4 -j- 2 3 a -f- 2 "j 1 2 -}- 4 2 #-{- 8 -j- 2 
 Examples 9, 10, />^r Rule 3d, laft Se&. and Example 11 per 
 Rule 2d and 3d. 
 
 SECT. III. Multiplication. 
 
 Theorem. 
 
 !M3 
 
 To multiply < > into < ___ J, gives < V in the Produtt. 
 
 That is, like Signs produce -{-, and unlike Signs . 
 For Multiplication is only adding the Number to be repeated, 
 as many times to itfelf, as the Multiplier contains Unit ; confe^ 
 quently -f- into J gives \-. To multiply into , fup- 
 pofe 4 into 3, is to fubtradt 4 from o three times, as Uni{ 
 is fubtratted 3 times from o in 3 ; but to fubtratt 4 three 
 times from o, the Expreffion muft be thus ; 
 -j- o. -j- o- -f- o. 
 
 4 4 4 
 
 9 
 
 4" 4 T" 4 "T" 44" l2 > confequently into ~<~ gives 4- 
 
 And
 
 Sett. III. Multiplication-. xi 
 
 And to multiply -f" into , fuppofe -{- 4 into 3, is to ex- 
 prefs -j- 4 as many times as Unit is in 3 ; but Unit being fub- 
 tracled 3 times from o in 3, we muft fubtraft -{- 4 three times 
 from o ; which gives 
 
 -{- o -f- o-j- o 
 
 + 4-H4-H4 
 
 I 4 4 4 = 12; confequently -{ into gives. 
 
 Laftly, to multiply into -+-, fuppofe 4 into -f- 3, is to 
 add 4 three times to itfelf, and that Sum muft be 12 ; and 
 accordingly as the Multiplier is great or fmall, the Product will 
 be proportionably great or fmall. 
 
 Scholium. 
 In denoting the Product of Quantities reprefented by fmgle 
 Letters, the Sign (x) of Multiplication, is for the general Part, 
 only underftood ; whence a h fignifies the fame Thing as axb; 
 <viz. the Produtt of a multiply'd by b. It is aHo to be ob- 
 ferved, that all Quantities thus exprefled by fingle Letters, or by 
 feveral Letters joined (or multiplied) together, as a or 2 a b, are 
 call'd fimple Quantities. But that Quantity which is compofed of 
 two or more fuch fimple Quantities, connected with the Signs -j- 
 or ; (as a -j- 2 b) is faid to be a compound Quantity, whereof 
 a and 2 a b, are call'd Terms, Members, or Parts. 
 
 Problem i. 
 To multiply fimple Quantities, join the Letters in both Quan- 
 tities together, and prefix the Product of the Co-efficients, if there 
 be any, and obferve the laft Theorem in what relates to the Signs. 
 
 Exam. 1. Exam. 2. Exam. 3. Exam. 4. 
 
 a =4 3<arri2 3 a 12 3 a 12 
 
 b 2 zb 4 2b 4 2^rr 4 
 
 fib 8 tab ^Z 6ab = 48 6 a b = 48, 
 
 Problem 2. 
 To multiply compound Quantities, each Part, or Term, of the 
 Multiplier muft be multiplied into each Part of the Multiplicand. 
 
 Exam. 5 Exam. 6. 
 
 a +b 4 + 2 5 a 36 +3 ss 20 6-f 3 
 
 ab-\-b b . - 8 -J- 4 $ax $b x -\- 5 x \ 20 364-18 
 
 Exam,
 
 xii 'An Introduction to Chap. II. 
 
 Exam. 7. 
 5 a zx =r 2012 
 2 b~\- za JSrj 4+ 8 
 
 io 4Jf =: 160 96 
 10 a $bx = -|- 8o 48 
 
 \oba-\- \qaa ^.bx \ax 80+160 96 48 
 Note, In Multiplication and Divifion, and exprefling the Values 
 of compound Quantities, 'tis indifferent, as to Order, how the 
 feveral Terms or Members ftand, fo each has its own proper Sign. 
 
 SECT. IV. Division. 
 
 Theorem. 
 
 {? (? { + 1 
 
 To divide < " > by < S gives < S in the Quotient. 
 
 Which is only the Converfe of the laft Theoreqi, and therefore is 
 demonftrated therein. 
 
 Problem i. 
 
 To divide fimple, or compound, Quantities by a fimple Quan- 
 tity. See Exam, in the laft Sett. 
 
 Exam. 1. Exam. a. 
 ab x tax \bx-\-\x . , 
 
 a-hA^- - ^ -5^-3^+3 
 
 This is only rejecting thofe Quantities in the Dividend and 
 Divifor, that are alike, placing down the remaining Quantities of 
 the Dividend. 
 
 For to divide abhy b, the Quotient muft be a 
 
 To divide 5 ax 3 b x -f- 3 x by x, muft give 5 a 3 ^ -f- 3 
 per Corol. 1. and 2. Seel. 5. Chap. 1. 
 
 Cx) S ax{ s) 
 
 t*)+ 3*(+ 3 3 
 
 Again, <x) 3 5 x ( 3 > therefore, &c . See laft Scholium. 
 
 t*)+ 3*(+ 3 3 
 But if all the Quantities in the Dividend and Divifor are not 
 
 xb-\-xd-\-lm , _ IT" . , 
 
 alike, as J , ;hen the Quotient may fund thus; 
 
 x 
 
 Problem
 
 Se&. IV. Division. xiii 
 
 Problem 2. 
 To divide compound Quantities by compound Quantities. 
 
 Exam. 3. 
 
 yb + $d) zi ba+ 15 da l$bf 2$ <*/&* $/ 
 
 DiviforX3tf 21 ba-\- 15 da 
 
 o o 
 
 35 bf i$df brought down. 
 DiviforX 5/= 35 4/* 25^/ 
 
 Manner of Operation. 
 7 b in 21 a is = 3 a, which being X by the Divifor ; and fub- 
 trafted from z 1 ba\- 15 da> nothing remains. Then bringing 
 down the other two Members, becaufe there are two in the 
 Divifor, fay how often is 7 b contained in 35 bf ( $f) ; which 
 being multiplied and fubtracled as before, nothing remains. 
 
 Exam. 4. 
 
 a b d) a a bb 2ad-\-dd(a-{-b--d 
 The Divifor X by * a a ab ad 
 
 The Remainder is ab ad bb -\-dd; 
 
 The Divifor x by + b = ab bb bd 
 
 The Remainder is bd ad 4- dd; 
 
 The Divifor x by d times = bd ad+dd 
 
 ' ' >. 
 000 
 But it is the eafieft Way to place the Terms in the Dividends 
 fo as to make them correfpond to thofe in the Divifor ; thus the 
 3d Line may ftand ab bb ad-\- dd; and the 5th, a d 
 -f- bd-{- dd ; then the laft will fall right as you multiply. 
 
 Exam. 5. 
 
 a 20) a a -\- 8 a 560 {a + 28 
 a a 20 tf Divifor X a. 
 
 2.% a 560 
 Pivifor by 28= 28a 560 
 
 Eza.
 
 xiv An Introduction to Ghap. HJ, 
 
 Exam. 6. 
 
 a 34-5) a a 7 * 94 8 75 C* + 2 7-S 
 
 * 34. 5 Diviior X 
 
 27.5 a 948.7$ 
 Divifor X by 27.5 27.5 a 948.75 
 
 " . , i ,__. 
 
 o 
 But if, in dividing thus, there happens, after all the Terms are 
 brought down, to be a Remainder, it is tb be placed over a Line, 
 with the Divifor imder it. Thirs, iftf-}-8 560-f-^be 
 
 divided by a 20, the Quotient will be a -\- 28 -f- 
 
 a 20 
 
 I *- 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 
 
 SECT. I. Proportion. 
 
 Definition t. 
 
 TH E Relation of two Quantities one to another, as to Mag^ 
 nitude, may be conceived by confidering what Part, or 
 Parts, they are of each other ; and the Number of Times which 
 one contains the other is allied the Ratio ; thus ..the Ratio of 36 
 to 12 is 3, and that of 6 tb 3 is 2. 
 
 Definit._ 2. When two Ratios are the fame", the Terms that 
 compofe them are faid to be Geometrically proportional: Thus 
 f\ 1 2 
 
 = 3 ; and = 3. Then the Terms are 2, 6, 4, 12 ; and 
 
 2 4 
 
 are called Proportionals. 
 
 Defimt. 5. The Quantity compared is called the Antece- 
 dent, and that to which it is compared is called the Confequent : 
 Thus 2 and 4 are the Antecedents, 6 and 12 the Confequents. 
 
 Dekiiut. 4. When, of feveral Quantities, the Quotient of 
 
 the 1 ft and 2d is the fame with that of the 2d and 3d, they are 
 
 laid to be in continued Geometric Proportion, fignified by this 
 
 Sign -j- : Thus 2, 4, 8, 16, 32; and a, ax, axx, axxx. 
 
 ax .axx 
 
 For x ; and =r x. 
 
 a ax 
 
 Definit. 5. When, of feveral Quantities, the Quotient of 
 
 the 1 it and 2d is the fame with that of the 3d and 4th, and not 
 
 of the 2d and 3d, they are faid to be in difcontinued Geometric 
 
 Proportion ; Thus 2, 6, 4, 1 2 ; and a, ar ; e, e r. 
 
 SECT.
 
 Sea. IL 
 
 Proportion. 
 
 xv 
 
 Set. II. The Nature of Geometric Proportionals. 
 
 Theorem i. 
 
 WHE to the Number of Terms in continued Geometric Pro- 
 portion is even, the Produfts of the Extremes, and that 
 of every two Terms, equally diitant from them, are equal; 
 thus 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64; 'tis evident that 2 X 64 = 4 X 32.m 
 8 x 16 rr 128; but if the Number of Terms be odd, theft thofe 
 Produces are each equal to the middle Term x into itfelf ; thus 
 in 2, 4, 8, 16, 32; it is evident that 2 x 52 4x16 gq 8x 8 
 = 64. 
 
 CoROLLARV I. 
 
 If out of a Rank of continued Geometric Proportionals there 
 be taken any Number of equidiltant Terms, they will be alfo 
 proportional. Thus 
 
 a ae aee aeee aeeee aeeeee 
 
 a aee aeeee aeeeeee 1 Since each Term, divided by the 
 
 ae . aeee aeeeee, Sec. $ preceding, gives the fame -Quotient. 
 
 Theorem 2. 
 If 4 Quantities be Geometrically proportional,' the 1 P<6dut of 
 the Extremes is equal to that of the Means; thus 3 
 2, 6, 4, 12 difcontinu'd. 7 Here it is very evident that 
 2, 4,8, r 6 co nt in u 'd. J 2 x 12 6x4, and z*-r6--= 4 x 9 
 
 Corollary 2, 
 If 2 Produces be equal, the 4 Quantities, whence they were pro- 
 duced, will be proportional. 
 
 Theorem 3. 
 
 If in any two equal Prod utts, as in the laftCorollary, theFalors 
 of the one be made the I ft antecedent, and the 2d confequent ; 
 thofe of the other, the ift cor.fcquent and the '2d' antecedent, 
 then the Terms will be proportional ; thus 
 
 2x12 6x4 z A'b aB 
 A B a b 
 
 Then' 
 
 12 : 
 
 6 : : 
 
 4- : 
 
 2 
 
 A 
 B 
 
 :B 
 A : 
 
 : a 
 
 : b 
 
 1 
 
 
 6: 
 
 12 : i 
 
 2 : 
 
 4 
 
 
 4 : 
 
 2 : : 
 
 12 : 
 
 6 
 
 a . 
 
 b : 
 
 : A 
 
 B 
 
 
 2 : 
 
 4 ' 
 
 6: 
 
 12 
 
 b 
 
 a 
 
 ; B: 
 
 A 
 
 forAJ = B* 
 
 12 : 
 
 4 : : 
 
 6: 
 
 2 
 
 A 
 
 : a 
 
 : B 
 
 b 
 
 ) as before. 
 
 6: 
 
 2 : : 
 
 12 : 
 
 4 
 
 B 
 
 : b 
 
 : A 
 
 a 
 
 
 4 : 
 
 12 : 
 
 2 : 
 
 6 
 
 a 
 
 A 
 
 : b 
 
 B 
 
 
 2 : 
 
 6 :: 
 
 4 : 
 
 12 
 
 k 
 
 B : 
 
 ; a 
 
 A J 
 
 CoR-ObLARV.
 
 atVi dn Iktroduction to Chap. IV. 
 
 Corollary 3. 
 Hence any three of the above Quantities being given, the fourth 
 is eafily found ; for fuppofe b in the firft Rank is required, then 
 Ba 6x4 
 -j- = b z=. p4 == 2 per common Divifion. 
 
 A 1 2 
 
 Corollary 4. 
 In Ranks of fimilar Proportions, the Sums, or Differences, of 
 the correfponding Terms are proportional : 
 
 That is, if \ a -^'-- <-" ; 4:8:: 6:12 
 lx : xr :: z: zr ; 2 : 4 : : 3 : 6 
 
 Then* -f" * '- ar ~F xr ' ' e + z : er + zr * 4 4" 2 ' ** -f" 4 
 ::6-f*3:2+6. 
 
 Corollary 5. 
 In two Ranks of Proportionals, the Produces, or Quotients, of 
 the correfponding Terms are proportional. 
 
 That is, if i?i*%'?*!r J + :8 ; : 6:l i 
 
 I x : xs : : z : zs ; 3 : 4 : : 3 : 6 
 
 ,_,, f ax : arxs : : ex :.erzs ; 4X2:8X4::6X3:i2X6 
 
 " ' U .ar .. e .er 4 . 8 . . 6 . 12 
 
 /** .. t . ^, .. . ~ 
 
 v x x *xj * 4 3 6 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 
 Se&. I. Vuloar Fractions. 
 
 Definition i. 
 
 ANY whole Quantity maybe conceiv'd as divided into any 
 Number of equal Parts ; thus 1 may be conceiv'd to be 
 divided into four equal Parts, call'd Fourths, one of which is ex- 
 prefs'd thus, ^ j 2 of them thus, | ; and 3 of them thus, . 
 
 Corollary. 
 Hence a Fra&ion exprefles a Quotient, fignifying a Part, or 
 Parts, of the Whole, or Unit ; whereof the upper Figure, or 
 Number, is the Dividend, and the lower the Divifor : Thus ^ of 
 any Quantity is the Quotient of that Quantity by 4. And 4, fig- 
 nifies three fourth Parts of an Unit, or one fourth Part of three 
 Units. 
 
 Scholium i. 
 
 Th Number {$ta.Iii.^*.{SSSr. 
 
 SCHOLJUM
 
 Sfeft. I. Vulgar Fractions. xvii 
 
 Scholium 2. 
 If the \u \ Z T9ittr tnan 1 th* Denominator, 1 improper * 
 meratorbeJ tefst J ,an ^he Fradion is [proper; 
 
 C equal to J call d J improper * 
 
 Definition 2. 
 'Tis not only an Unit that is capable of being divided into any 
 Number of equal Parts, but alfo any one of thofe Parts may be 
 divided into others, &e. which laft are call'd compound Fractions, 
 or Fraftions of Fra&ions : Thus f of * of f is a compound 
 Fraction. 
 
 Definition 3. 
 A mixt Number is when there is a whole Number and a Frac- 
 tion join'd to it j thus 5 $, that is, 5 Units and $ of an Unit. 
 
 Lemua 1. 
 
 Any Fra&ion is transformed to an equivalent Fraction, of a 
 
 given Denomination, by multiplying its Numerator into the given 
 
 Denominator, and dividing the Product by its own Denominator j 
 
 for the Quotient thus arifing will be a new Numerator to the given 
 
 Denominator. Thus the Numerator of * reduced tp the Deno- 
 
 1 3 x 2 r t 
 
 minator 20, is equal to or 15 ; and confequently 
 
 4 
 
 H = i ; for 20 : 1 5 1:4: 3. 
 
 Lemma 2. 
 
 The Terms of a Fraftion being multiplied, or divided, by the 
 
 it x 2 
 
 iame Number, its Value is not altered thereby : Thus 
 
 4. x z 
 
 =. ; for 6 : 8 : : 3:4; therefore J rs * . And the Terms of 
 $ divided by 2 ^ as before. 
 
 CoROLLART. 
 
 Hence we have a Method of trying whether two Frattions are 
 equal ; for if the Terms are not proportional, the Fradions are 
 not equal. But if the Fradtions are equal, the Numerator of the 
 firft, multiplied into the Denominator of the other, is equal to 
 the Numerator of the fecond, multiplied into the Denominator of 
 the firft. 
 
 Lemma 3. 
 
 If the Numerator of a Fraflion be increafed whilft the Denomi- 
 nator continues the fame, the Value of the Fraction will be in- 
 creafed in the fame Proportion ; and vice versa. Again, if the 
 Denominator be increafed whilft the Numerator continues the 
 fime, the Value of the Fraction will be diminifhed in the fame 
 
 b Ratio ;
 
 An. I n t r o d u c t l o h to Chap. IV. 
 
 Ratio ; and vice versa. Thus; fh twice as much as f ; becaufe 
 2 is twice as much as i : But % is but half as much as 7 ; becaufe 
 the Divifor in the latter Fra&ion is twice as great as in the former. 
 
 Corollary. 
 
 Hence a Fraction may be. multiplied by a whole Number, 
 either by multiplying the Numerator by that Number, or elfe by- 
 dividing the Denominator by the fame, where fuch a Divifion rs 
 poflible : Thus | x 2 = -^ =: * j or, dividing the Denominator 
 by 2, the Fraction will be . 
 
 Lemma 4. 
 
 A Fraction is multiply'd by its Denominator, by taking away 
 that Denominator: Thus ^ ( 3J multiplied by 5, gives 
 15 ( 1 5 ) for the Product. 
 
 Definition 4. 
 The changing Fractions out of one Form, or Denomination, 
 into another {either for the more Eafe in working, or estimating 
 their Values) is call'd 
 
 Reduction of Fractions. 
 
 Problem I. 
 To reduce Fractions into their known Parts of Coin, Weighty 
 Meafure, Time, &e. 
 
 ., _ r 3 x 20. s. 
 
 ^ of a L. =. m z=z 1 5 x. for 4:3 : : 20 : 1 5 
 
 4 
 - _ 3 x \zd. , e 
 
 \ of a S. .- 9 d. for 4 : 3 : : 1 2 : o 
 
 3 
 2x112 
 i of a C. = -i rr 84 /. for 4 : 3 : : 112: 84. pet 
 
 Lemma 1. 
 
 Problem 2. 
 
 To abbreviate, or reduce Fractions to their lealt Terms. 
 This is done by finding the greateft Number that will divide 
 both the Numerator and Denominator without leaving a Re- 
 mainder : Thus, let the Fraction be f, and 1 2 will divide 
 both the Numerator and Denominator ; therefore f f^, per 
 Lemma 2. When the firft Figure to the Right, in the Terms of 
 a Fraction, is an even Number, the Fraction may be abbreviated 
 by a continual Divifion by 2 : Thus, -f * f ; 
 
 for -^16 -12 8 *-}; 3 1 i.6_ j" 4 r a . J.,- T pmmn *> 
 
 I tfC" rf axxx xx 
 
 Alfo - r' -,- ; and r- = ~T' 
 f rt ax b b 
 
 When
 
 $e&. j. Vulgar Fractions. xf* 
 
 When both Terms have Cyphers adjoining, cut off an equal 
 Number of Cyphers from both : Thus |g^ 4- per Lemma 2. 
 
 Problem 3. 
 To reduce an Integer to an improper Fraction. 
 Case I. When there is no Denominator afligned, let the given 
 Number be a Numerator, and Unit its Denominator : Thus, 
 
 ft & ~T" 
 
 2 = f I ~"5 -|-f r: i for dividing by Unit does 
 
 not diminim the Value. 
 
 Case 2. When there is a Denominator affign'd, multiply the 
 Integer by the affign'd Denominator, and the Product fhall be the 
 Numerator. Let 14 be the given Integer, and 9 the given Deno- 
 
 14X0 126 i+X-Q. 126 
 
 minator j then 14-- a ; for -^ 1 r= per 
 
 9 9 1x9 9' 
 
 x a I" re -4- z r 
 
 Lemma 2. Alfo * \ and e 4- z S3 
 
 a r . . ^ 
 
 Problem 4. 
 
 To reduce a mix'd Fraction into an improper one, multiply the 
 
 Integer by the Denominator of the Fraction, and take in the 
 
 Numerator, fubfcribing the fame Denominator ; thus 6 ^ = 
 
 6 X a. -4- * 27 , x a* rf- x , x 
 
 i-L_ i i a -j- = ; a -J- y ,-* : 
 
 4 4 a % r 
 
 etr f- r y x 
 
 ^~ 1 The Unit in the common Fraction, Exam. 1. 
 
 is confider*d as divided into 4 equal Parts ; therefore the. Integer 
 6 mull: be multiplied by 4, to produce 4ths ; to which 3 fourths 
 being added, the Sum will be alfe 4ths. 
 
 Problem 5. 
 
 To reduce an improper Fraction into an Integer, or mix'd 
 
 Number. Thus, 4 = 4; for 4:1 : : 8:2; per common 
 
 tvt a- *7 /ci * + * 1*. ar-\-ry x 
 
 Divifion. Again, *r =oiJ - a-\ ~ 
 
 * * z , * r 
 
 1 *" 
 
 r 
 
 Problem 6. 
 To reduce Fractions of different Denominators to their Equiva- 
 lents, which fhall have the fame Denominator. 
 
 Rule. 
 Multiply all the Denominators continually for a common De- 
 nominator, and each Numerator continually into the other's De- 
 nominators for new Numerators. 
 
 b 2 Thus,
 
 xx ^Introduction^ Chap. IV. 
 
 Thus, i, a, f, make ff , * , f f . 
 
 I, i X 4 X 7 3. 
 
 7 *-" a X4X7~^ 
 
 X 2 X 7 
 
 For ^ * ^xzXt"*^ } per Lemma 3 
 
 7 / X 
 
 4X2 
 
 And, , "! i make , , for the fame Reafon. 
 
 y a y a y a 
 
 S E C T. II. Addition W Subtraction 
 of Numeral and Algebraical Fractions. 
 
 IF the Denominators are unlike, the Fractions ntuft be re- 
 duced to ihe fame Denomination, by Problem 6. of the laft 
 Section : Then, by this 
 
 Rule, 
 The Sum, or Difference, of the Numerators, fet over the 
 common Denominator, {hall exprefs the Sum, or Difference, of 
 the given Fractions. 
 
 Let the Fractions be and A ; then + y ~ y an< * y % z= h 
 A 
 Alfo thefe Fractions , , , when added together, make 
 22 2 
 
 - ^ ; and - , , when added together, make 
 
 2 22 
 
 , or a ; and a, added to , that is, added to , makes 
 2 c 1 c 
 
 ac-^-b . bb _ bb4-aa t aa 
 
 -. Again, taken from leaves . Alfo. 
 
 c c c c 
 
 4* t- 1 ',,. 2 . to/x \zb & ,-j 
 
 , fubtracted from , gives , /*r Problem 6. of 
 
 the laft Seftion, and the above Rule. The fafeft way will be to 
 change the Sign of the Numerator of the Fraction to be fub- 
 tracted, and to place it after the other, and then to reduce them 
 
 T- n ^. 2 4-b , io/x 12 b 
 
 into one Fraction : Thus, *+'+ makes , as 
 
 3 S *5 
 
 before. 
 
 SECT.
 
 Sect. III. Vulgar Fractions.' xxi 
 
 SECT. III. Multiplication of Numeral and 
 Algebraical Fractions. | 
 
 TF the Numbers given are whole or mix'd, they mull be 
 brought into improper Fractions ; or if they are compound 
 Fractions, they mult be reduced to Jingle ones : But if they are 
 both proper or improper Fractions, then they may be multiplied 
 by this 
 
 Rule, 
 Multiply the Numerators together for a new Numerator ; and 
 the Denominators together for a new Denominator. 
 
 Examples. 
 Multipli- Multipli- Pro- Multip|i- Multipli- Pro- 
 ers. cand. dufts. . ers. cand. dudb. 
 
 f = 8 
 
 i- 
 
 = 4 i rn=t 
 
 1 1 ~ + 
 
 The Produft of any Quantity, multiplied by a proper Fraction, 
 is always lefs than that Quantity ; for in multiplying by a Unit, 
 the Product will be equal to the Multiplicand ; but a lefs Multi- 
 plier gives a lefs Product. Whence the Product of two proper 
 Fractions muft be lefs than either of them : Thus, 4 X \ rn A 
 z=. j. Again, making the Denominator three times greater, 
 makes the Fraction three times lefs ; per Lemma 2. Then, if 
 4, X 4, \, confequently \ X f = &=> i i therefore to deter- 
 mine the Product of \ X f , the Numerators muft be multiplied 
 together for a new Numerator, and the Denominators together 
 for a new Denominator ; and the fame Reafon will hold good in 
 all other Inftances. Again, X \ f j for ^ x 5 A + A ? which 
 is too much ; for it is not by c that we were to multiply 4, but 
 only by \ , which is but the third Part of 5 : We muft therefore 
 increafe the Denominator three times, that the Value of the 
 Fraction may be diminifh'd proportionably, per Lemma 2. to have 
 the true Product 4f of 4. X f. 
 
 ... ax b abx . bm Itn blmm 
 
 Alfo, ~- X- = ; and r.X 77 } 
 
 d c dc a-\-b a b aa bb 
 
 b a c -f- b d acd-\-bd 
 
 Jikewife a 4- ~ X d, or - ! x 
 ' c c 1 
 
 SECT.
 
 20U1 
 
 '^ Introduction fe Chap. IV. 
 
 Se<5t. IV. Division of Numeral and. Algebraical 
 Fractions. 
 
 w 
 
 HEN the Numbers given are prepar'd as in the laft 
 Section, they may be divided by this 
 
 Rule. 
 Change the Terms of the Divifor, and proceed as in Multipli- 
 cation of Fractions. 
 
 Divifor s. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 Dividend. 
 
 &=. 
 
 Quotients. 
 |= 8 
 
 XX 
 
 3* 
 
 Divifors. Dividend. Quotients. 
 
 a. x 
 
 6 I 
 
 The Quotient of any Quantity, divided by a proper Fraction, 
 is always greater than that Quantity ; for, in dividing by Unit, 
 the Quotient will be equal to the Dividend, but a lefs Divifor 
 gives a greater Quotient. Thus 4 , , f { $. Again, to divide i by 
 3, will be f ; and 7 by 3 niuft be A , and j by 3 mull be f, 
 (for - is twice -f, and f is twice ^) which is too little ; for it is 
 not by 3 that we fhould have divided f , but only by $, which is 
 the fourth Part of 3, or three Parts of an Unit ; confequently 
 we rauft multiply by 4, ^;- Lemma 1, to have the true Quo- 
 tient -f of f by ;|. Therefore to determine the Quotient f divided 
 by ,. change, the Terms qf the Divifor, and proceed as in Multi- 
 plication of Fractions. 
 
 Scholium. 
 
 A Fraction may be divided by a whole Namber, either by 
 dividing the Numerator by that whole Number, when poflible ; 
 or* elfe by multiplying the Denominator by the feme : Thus $. 
 divided by z = ,* $ . Alfo, 
 
 x \ d (ad a -\- b\a'rz-\- \ab-\- xzfaa-\- \ab-\- xz. 
 
 * ) 7 \ xc' " I J 5 \ '" 
 
 CHAP-
 
 Seft. L DECIMAL F?- act lqhs. xxiii 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 SECT. I. Decimal Fractions. 
 
 ANY Unit may be conceiv'd to be equally divided into 10 
 Parts, and each of thofe into i o more ; and fo on, by a 
 continual Decimal Subdivifion, the Unit may be fuppofed to be 
 divided into 10, ico, iooo, &c. equal Parts, call'd ioth, 
 100th, ioooth, &c. Parts of an Unit. And fince Integers in- 
 creafe from Unit towards the Left Hand, in a decuple Proportion, 
 fo that a Figure in any Place is ten times as much as the fame in 
 the next Place below it, and fetrt a tenth Part of what it fignifies 
 in the next Place above it ; therefore, as the ill, 2d, 3d, above 
 that of Units, is Tens, Hundreds, Thoufands, &c. fo the ift> 
 2d, 3d, C5V. Place below that of Unit, is Tenths, Hundredths, 
 Thoufandths, &e. decreafing in a fubdecuple Proportion, as is 
 evident from the following Tabic 
 
 Whole Numb. Unit. Decimal Parts, , m- 
 
 6 5 4 3 2 1. 2 3 4 5 6 7, &c. 
 Whence thofe Fractions, whofe Denominators are an Unit, 
 with a Cypher, or Cyphers, are called Decimal Fractions, and 
 may be written without their Denominators, diftinguinVd by a 
 Point prefix'd, and read like Integers, giving them the Names of 
 the laft Place to the Right Hand. 
 
 Thus. { l $ } f.g^s { f$g ... 
 
 Corollary. 
 
 } Cyphers before j ^j| J } their Value. 
 
 Hence it is that 1, 2, 3, djrV. Cyphers before a Decimal, ad* 
 yance it fo many Places forward, whereby it is made 10, 100, 
 
 iooo, Cifr. times lefs. 
 
 J 3 >fignines < 
 V5J I 
 
 tw J 3 fignines-{ 5 Hundredths, 
 ' 5 Thoufandths, 
 
 5 Tenths, 
 
 tind 
 
 ion 
 
 b'c. 
 
 t? ^ SECT.
 
 *xiv ^Introduction rt Chap. V, 
 
 SECT. II. Addition and Subtraction of 
 Decimal Fractions. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 PLACE every Figure under that of the like Name, and add, 
 or fubtraft, as if they were Integers. Thus, 
 to 34.25 from 16.5 
 
 add 3.026 take .725 
 
 Sum 37.276 Rem. 15.775 
 
 SECT. III. Multiplication of Decimal 
 Fractions. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 MULTIPLY the Factors as if all were Integers, and the 
 Decimal Places in the Product mull be equal to the Sum 
 of both thofe in the Factors j if they are not, prefix Cyphers to 
 fupply the Defeft. 
 
 Examples. 
 Multiply 3.52^ 
 
 fi y 43 ] 
 
 I For 3.52 = -fti and 4.3 = ** and 
 ' 1408 (*** x & = *&& or I2 ' x 3 6 - 
 
 Produd 1 5.1 36-* 
 
 Multiply -013") 
 
 By .005 (For .013 =3 T I^, and .005 =r , and 
 
 _ , ii 7" \JTVV * To^o fiS ToTcWc <"^ .OOO065. 
 
 Product .000065 J 
 
 'Scholium i. 
 When a Decimal, or. mix'd Number, is to be multiplied by 
 an Unit with Cyphers, 'tis but removing the Point, or Comma, 
 fo many Places towards the Right Hand, in the Multiplicand, as 
 there are Cyphers annexed to the Unit. 
 
 fio J f 2.537 
 
 Thus, .2537 multiplied by < 100 S. Product is < 25.37 
 
 (10003 C 253-7 
 
 Scholium
 
 SeA. III. Dec i ma l Fractions. xxv 
 
 Scholium 2. 
 When it happens, that the Places of Decimals run far in both 
 Factors, and confequently would make a very large Decimal in 
 the Product, the Work may be contracted thus : Set the Unit's 
 Place of the Multiplier directly under that Figure of the Decimal 
 Part of the Multiplicand, whofe Place you would preferve in the 
 Product ; then place all the other Figures of the Multiplier in a 
 contrary Order to the common Way : In multiplying, always be- 
 gin at the Figure of the Multiplicand, ,*vhich ftands over the 
 Figure with which you are a multiplying, fetting down the firft 
 Figure of each particular Product directly under one another. 
 But, withal. Care mail be taken to what Increafe would arife from 
 the multiplying of the two next Right-hand Figures of the Mul- 
 tiplicand, which mult be conftantly added to the Aril Figure in 
 every Product. 
 
 Example 1. 
 Suppofe it is requir'd to multiply 92.412031 by 47.2919c, 
 and to have only four Places of Decimals in the Product. Place 
 then as before directed, and they will Hand 
 
 thus- i 9 2 -7 12 3 I The Multiplicand as ufual. 
 I 59192.74 The Multiplier inverted. 
 
 36964812 
 
 6468842 
 
 184824 
 
 83171 
 
 924 
 
 832 
 
 _46 . 
 
 437-34S 
 Multiply 14.794 by 12.123 ; and let there be only two Places 
 of Decimals in the Product. Likewife multiply 257.356 by 
 76.48, fo as to have an intire Product of Integers. 
 
 Exam. 2. Exam. 3. 
 
 14.794 257.356 
 
 321.21 84.67 
 
 4794 
 
 2959 
 
 148 
 
 30 
 
 4 
 19682 
 
 1 79-3 $ The
 
 xxvi dn Introduction to Chap. V. 
 
 The Reafon of this Contraction is very obvious, from the 
 whole Operation wrought at large. From thefe Examples 'tis 
 jnanifeft how advantageous thefe compendious Contractions are to 
 jhorten the Work of thofe long Calculations, which occur in the 
 ieveral Branches of the Mathematics. 
 
 SECT. IV, Division of Decimal Fractions, 
 
 Rule. 
 
 DIVIDE as if all were Integers ; and the Decimal Places 
 of the Divifor and Quotient muft be equal to thofe in the 
 Dividend ; if they are not, prefix Cyphers to the Quotient to 
 fupply the Defeft. 
 
 For the Dividend is equal to the Produtt of the Divifor and 
 Quotient : But bpth Fattors contain as many Decimals as the 
 Produft does : Therefore what Decimal Places are in the Divi- 
 dend, more than in the Divifor, muft be fupplied in the Quotient. 
 
 Thus, .0325, divided by .25, gives .1 3 in the Quotient ; 
 
 fnr i -3 2 5 ToToo \ an( J i't \ r ?< n1oo 
 
 I '^5 Too J 
 
 Scholium i. 
 If the Divifor be greater, or has more Decimal Places, than the 
 Dividend ; then, by annexing Cyphers to the Dividend, the, 
 Quotient may be had to any Accuracy. Thus, 
 
 .25 j .07864.00 (-31456 
 
 3 6 
 114 
 140 
 15a 
 
 Corollary. 
 Hence, when there is a Remainder after Divifion, tho 1 neither 
 Dividend, or Divifor, contains any Decimal Parts ; 'tis but ad- 
 ding Cyphers to the Dividend, in order to place the Quotient to 
 any Exactnefs. 
 
 Scholium 2. 
 When a Decimal, or mix'd Number, is to be divided by a 
 Unit with Cyphers, 'tis but removing the Point in the Dividend, 
 5 of
 
 Seft. IV. Decimal Fractions. xxvii 
 
 fo many Places farther towards the Left Hand, as there are Cyphers 
 annexed to the Unit, adjoining Cyphers to the Dividend to fupply 
 Vacancy, if need be. Thus, 
 
 fio 1 J 253/ 
 
 253.7 divided by < 100 V the Quotient is > 2.537 
 
 t 1000 j 3 2 S37 
 
 Scholium 3. 
 If the Divifor confifts of many Places of Decimal Parts, the 
 Work may be very much contracted, and yet a jult Quotient ob- 
 tained by the following 
 
 Rule. 
 Having determin'd the Value of the Quotient Figures, proceed 
 in multiplying the Divifor with the firft Quotient Figure, as ufual; 
 but for every Figure after, in multiplying, omit, or prick off, 
 one in the Divifor ; ftill having a due Regard to the Increafe, 
 which would arife from the Figures, fo omitted. 
 
 Example. 
 
 Contracted. At large. 
 
 7.9863) 70.2300 (8.7938 7-9863) 70.2300 (8.7938 
 
 638904 638904 
 
 63396 63396*0 
 
 55904 55904! 
 
 7492 749 1I90 
 
 7187 7187(67 
 
 305 34| 2 3 
 
 239 239I589 
 
 66 64 j 64 10 
 
 63 63I8904. 
 
 3 ,'7>o6 
 
 Tho' much Labour is faved by this Method, yet it is not fafe 
 to ufe it, unlefs the Divifor confifts Qf feveral Places of Figures ; 
 becaufe no more Places in the Quotient can be relied on, than 
 there are Places in the Divifor, 
 
 If
 
 xxviH An Introduction to Chap. V. 
 
 If the Dividend contains a great many Decimal Places, there 
 is no Occafion for ufing more than a few of the firft, as appears 
 by this 
 
 Example. 
 3.1415292) 165.6995I001296 (52.743? 
 1570796J. 
 
 86199 1., 
 62831 I.. 
 
 23368 
 
 2 1 99 1 
 
 ... 
 
 1377 1 
 
 1256 | 
 
 121 
 
 94 
 
 ? / 
 
 ?7 
 2 5 
 
 
 2 1 
 
 SECT. V. Reduction of Decimal 
 Fractions, &V . 
 
 1, To reduce Vulgar Fractions into Decimals, 
 Rvljs. 
 
 TO the Numerator add as many Cyphers as you would have 
 Decimal Places ; then divide.it by the Denominator; and the 
 Quotient, if there be no Remainder, will be the Decimal equi- 
 valent to the Vulgar Fraction given. But, when there is a Re- 
 mainder, you may, by adding more Cyphers, proceed fo, as to 
 bring the Quotient nearly equal. 
 
 Thus, 
 
 3.00 _ 
 
 > = .75 j for 4 : 3 : : 100 : 75 
 
 4 
 
 2.000000 _ , . 
 
 = .285714, CSV. 
 
 7 
 
 *. T
 
 Sefc VI. Involution. xxlx 
 
 2. To reduce a Decimal to a Vulgar Fraction. 
 Rule. 
 
 Multiply the Numerator of the Decimal by the Denominator 
 of the Fraction. 
 
 Thus, 575 /. n /. 6 d ; for iooo : 575 : : 20j. : 11 s.^-i 
 and 1 o : 5 : : 1 2 d- : 6 d. 
 
 But the Decimal Parts of a Pound Sterling may be valu'd at 
 Sight by this 
 
 Rule. 
 
 The firft Place of Decimals doubled gives Shillings ; but if the 
 Figure in the fecond Place is, or exceeds 5, one more mult be 
 added to their Number. The fecond Figure, if under 5, or its 
 Excefs, if above 5, join'd with the third, are fo many Farthings ; 
 only one muft be abated for 25, and 2 for 50 Farthings; there 
 being 40 Overplus, as we allow 1000 Farthings to the Pound, 
 whereas there are but 960 ; therefore 1000 *- 40 as 25. 
 
 Thus, .575 /. 1 1 s. : 6 d. as above : Here 5 being doubled, 
 to which 1 s. being added for the 5 in the fecond Place, 1 1 /. 
 and 2 remaining, join'd with 5 in the third Place, being reckon'd 
 25 Farthings lets 1 . per the Rule. 
 
 - 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 
 Involution. 
 
 INVOLUTION only the raifwg of Powers from any- 
 given Root : Thus, a Quantity multiplied by itfelf is called 
 the Square, or fecond Power, of that Root, or Quantity ; this 
 Product, being multiplied by the given Quantity, is call'd the 
 Cube, or third Power ; and that Product, multiplied again by the 
 given Quantity, will be the fourth Power of that Quantity, and 
 io on to higher Powers. 
 
 Example. 
 a l r the Root, or fingle Power. 
 
 a X *i a a J \ a* the Square, or lecond Power. 
 
 aaXa aaa >or < } the Cube, or third Power. 
 aaaX.a~aaaa I la 4 the fourth Power. 
 a aaa X a aaaaa J C.*' the fifth Power. 
 
 The Figures, reprefenting the Number of Repetitions, are 
 call'd the Indexes of thefe Powers. 
 
 The Addition of Indexes will always anfwer to the Multiplica- 
 tion of Powers, provided they are Powers of the fame Quantity : 
 
 Thus,
 
 tec An Introduction to Chap. VL 
 
 Thus, aaXaaa aaaaa, or ** X a 1 -=^a s ; for 2 + 3 
 t=s 5 ; and * X a 3 =r a s vrV. 
 
 Requir'd the Cube of .* = * 
 
 * x 25 The Square. 
 
 5 
 
 *** 125 The Cube. 
 Involution of compound Quantities is perform'd in the fame 
 Manner, regard being had to their Signs. 
 
 Examples. 
 Requir'd the 3d Power of a -f- b. 
 Hoot -f" * Suppofe 204-4 
 
 a -\- b (S 20 -j- 4 
 
 aa -\* ab r^r 400 -j- 80 
 
 \-ab-\-bb = -f-80-f 16 
 
 Square aa-\- 2ab-\-bb rrr 400 -f- t6o-{- 16 
 
 a -j-^ ^ 20 -j- 4 
 
 J -j- zaab -\-bba = 8000 -j- 3200 -f- 320 
 
 -j-^-j". 2^^-}~^ 3 fe 4" 1 600 -f- 640 -f- 64 
 
 Cube a 3 -|- 3<2^+ 3W-f" 5 8000 -j- 4800 -f- 960 -f- 64 
 Since the Powers of the compound Quantity a-\-b may ferve 
 us as Rules for the immediate Pifcovery of any compound Quan- 
 tity, or Root, we mould make the following Obfervations very 
 familiar to ourfelves. 
 
 1. It is obfervable, that the firft Term 'a}) has Unit for its Co- 
 efficient, and contains no other Letter but a, raisM to the fame 
 Power as the compound Quantity a -f- b, viz. to the third. 
 
 2. The fecond Term ($aab) "has firft for its Co-efficient the 
 Number of the Degrees of the Power the compound Quantity is 
 rais'd to; fecondly, the Letter a is elevated to one Degree lefs 
 than in the foregoing Term ; thirdly, the Letter b continues in 
 the firft Power. 
 
 3. The third Term has for its Co-efficient the fame Number 
 the Root is rais'd to ; fecondly, the Letter a is rais'd to a Degree 
 lefs than in the foregoing Term ; thirdly, the Letter b is elevated 
 a Degree higher than in the foregoing Term. 
 
 4. The laft Term of each Power has always Unit for its Co- 
 efficient, and contains no other Letter but b, rais'd to the fame 
 Power as a, in the firft Term. 
 
 5. The
 
 Chap. VII. Evolution. xxA 
 
 5. The fecond Power has three Terms, the third Power four 
 Terms, and fo on : Not but there may be Cafes in which therff 
 are more than two different Letters, which may compofe a Square, 
 a Cube, &c. but, as they feldom happen, the Learner need not 
 be perplex'd with them. 
 
 6. The Terms of the fecond Power are, the Square of the iirft 
 a, two Produces of the firft a by the fecond b, and the Square of 
 the fecond Term given. 
 
 7. The Terms of the third Power are, the Cube of the firft a t 
 three Produces of the Square of the firft by the fecond b, three 
 Producb of the firft by the Square of the fecond, and the Cube 
 of the lecor.d ; and fo in others. 
 
 Thefe Properties may be perceiv'd at one fingle View, in the 
 actual and fucceffive Formation of thefe Powers. 
 
 Involution of Fractions is perform'd by involving the Nume- 
 rator into itielf for a new Numerator, and the Denominator into 
 itfelf for a new Denominator ; each fo often as the Power requires. 
 Thus, requir'd the Squares of the Fractions i and .25, or ,V 5 } 
 
 Firft, -2 * = ; and .2$ x .35 rr .062c, or ii- 
 4X4 16 1000. 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 Evolution. 
 
 EVOLUTION is the Extra&ing of Roots from any given 
 Power; that is, it is the Converfe to Involution. 
 The Extraction of the Square Root of fimple Algebraic Quanti- 
 ties is fo very eafy, that it needs not to be infilled on. Thus the 
 Square Root of a a is -f" or a ; the Square Root of gaa is 
 -f- or 3*7. When the Square Root of a Quantity cannot be 
 extracted, it is ufual to fignify it by this Mark ^/ : Thus, */ zact 
 fignihes the Square Root of 2 a a. When the Square Root of a 
 Quantity cannot be extracted, the Quantity may fometimes how- 
 ever be refolv'd into two Factors, whereof the one may be a 
 Square, and the other not ; and, whenever this is poflible, the 
 Root of the Square may be extracted, and the Radical Sign may 
 be prefix'd to the other Faftor : Thus, xz aa-=z/\.aaX'3 ) ; 
 therefore y' 12-7320X^3. It mult be obferv'd, that we 
 can never extract the 2d, 4th, 6th, 8th, &c. Root out of a nega- 
 tive Term, whofe Index for Exponent is an even Number, as for 
 Inftance, the Square Root of 9; for the Root of this is not 
 
 "f 3. "or ~ 3- 
 
 Lemma.
 
 xxxii An Introduction to Chap. VII. 
 
 Lemma. 
 Any Number (as a Root) being divided into Parts, at PIeafure 
 the Sum of the Products of thofe Parts, multiplied into each 
 other, will be equal to that Number multipliedin to itfelf. 
 
 Thus, 24 Root 
 24 
 
 = 20 + 4 a= a -f- e 
 20 -}- 4 4" e 
 
 96 
 
 480 
 
 80 -|- 16 aa-\- ae 
 400 -f-8o= -\- ae -\- ee 
 
 576 Square. 
 
 400-}- 160-f- t6 aa-\-2ae-\-ee 
 
 Again, 
 
 24 ~ 20 -\- 4. a -\- e 
 
 
 400 a a 
 80) 
 8of ~f* 
 
 16 =r *e 
 
 576 *a -}- Zae -f- ** 
 
 In extra&ing the Roots of Numbers, the firft- Thing to be done 
 is to fet Points over every 2d, 3d, or 4th, Utc. Figure, according 
 as the Root to be extracted is a Square, Cubic, or Biquadratic 
 one, Sffc. always obferving to begin at the Place of Units : As if 
 the Square Root of 2576.2357 be to be extracted; let it be 
 pointed thus, 2576.2357 ; if the Cube Root, thus, 2576.235700; 
 if the Biquadratic, thus, 2576.2357; now by means of thefe 
 Points we know how many Places of Figures there will be in the 
 Root, <viz. fo many Figures as there are Points : Thus, 6x6 
 36 ; and 12 x 12 144 ; here the Root 12 confifts of two 
 Places, viz, 1 o -}- 2, and the given Number 1 44 has accordingly 
 two Points. 
 
 Required the Square Root of 576 (20 a t found ; fee the 
 lad Lemma. 
 
 And 20 x 20 r= 400 a a 
 
 Confequently 176 zee ~\- ee 
 
 Then za trr 40) 176 (4 = e found by common Divifion. 
 
 For 2 a e 1 60 
 
 Therefore 16 = ee 
 
 Or
 
 Evolution.' xxxiii 
 
 Or by adding the Value of e thus found to za> the Work will 
 
 ** + ' = 4 + 4 44) 7 6 (4 = ' 
 
 176 rr 2 * -|" '* 
 
 Hence is derived the common Rule for extracting the Square 
 Root. Seek the greateft Root of the firft Period to the Left Hand, 
 which place in the Quotient, and the Square thereof under the 
 firft Period to the Left Hand, and fubtradt that Square out of the 
 faid Period : To the Remainder bring down the next Period of 
 Figures for a Dividend, and double the Root of the firft Square 
 for a Divifor * inquire how often it will go in that Dividend, fo 
 as when the Quotient is annex'd to the Divifor, and that increafed 
 Divifor being multiplied with the fame Quotient Figure, die Pro- 
 duct may be the greateft Number that can be taken out of that 
 Dividend ; which fubtrad from that Dividend, and to the Re- 
 mainder bring down the next Period of Figures for another new 
 Dividend ; then fee how often the laft increafed Divifor can go in 
 the new Dividend, (with the fame Caution as before) fo as that the 
 Quotient Figure being annexed to the Divifor, and that increafed 
 Divifor multiplied with the fame Quotient Figure, their Produces 
 may be the greateft Number that can be fubtrafted from the new 
 Dividend. And (o proceed on from Period to Period, that is, from 
 Point to Point, in the very fame Manner, till all is finilhed. 
 
 Example t. 
 
 104976 (324 Root. 
 9 the greateft Square in 10. 
 
 I Divifor 62) 149 
 
 124 62 X 2 
 
 2 Divifor 644) 2576 
 
 2576 = 644 X 4 
 
 If any thing remains, after the Extraction has been made, 
 throughout all the Points, fuch Numbers are call'd Surd Numbers, 
 and their Roots can never be truly found, but will become a con- 
 tinued Series ad infinitum : However, if there be Cyphers annex'd 
 to the Remainder, according as the prbpos'd Powers require, <viz. 
 by two's in the Square, three's in the Cube, CSV. the Root of 
 the Surd Number may be continued on to what Exattnefs we 
 pleafe. 
 
 t What
 
 $$k$? An Introduction to Chap. VII. 
 
 What is here done in, Who).e Numbers and Decimals, may, alfo 
 be done in Vulgar Fractions, if you firit change the given Fraction 
 into Decimals, and point them as, before directed. 
 
 Example 2. 
 
 aa-\-zae-\-ee {a -j- e Root required. 
 
 a a 
 
 Divifor za--\re) z-ae -\- e 
 
 la e -f- e e 3C 2 a-\- e X e 
 
 O 
 
 Required the Square Root of a a -f- 2ai < -\- b b. This being 
 "thq given Quantity, anfvvering to the Obfervations made in the 
 la ft Sedion, its 'Square Root may be extracted thus : 
 
 Extract the Square Root of the two pure Powers of the two 
 rent Letter.-, according to the laft Section, and the Root of 
 ;iiic "ivlii U2 is a-^-b; which involv'd' gives'/? a -J- zab 
 -\rbb\ 
 
 Required, the Square Root of a a zab -\- bb. This given 
 Quantity alfo anfwering the Obfervations made in the laft Sedion, 
 its Root will be a b ; which involv'd makes a a z a o -\- b b. 
 
 Required the Square Root of a a -f- ba -\- . The> two pure' 
 
 4 
 
 b b 
 
 Powers are a a and ; therefore, by the foregoing, the Square 
 
 4 
 
 n. c j 1 o t> r bb,.b c bbbb 
 
 Root of aa is a, and the Square Root of 1* ; ror-x- = ; 
 
 42 224 
 
 and a -}- involv'd gives the given' Quantity whofe Roof was 
 
 required. 
 
 Hence, when any one of the Quantities appears in a Fractional 
 Manner, the Square Root of both Numerator and Denominator 
 muft be extracted ; but, if we cannot extract the Square Root of 
 both Terms of the Fraction, we may conclude, we cannot extract 
 the Square Root of the given Quantity. Thus, if it be requir'd 
 
 to extract the Square Root of a a -\- 2 a b -f- ~, it will be found 
 
 a Surd Quantity, it being impoffible, to extract the Root of 5 ; 
 therefore prefix the Sign */ to the Quantity, and we fhall have 
 
 t * n 
 
 t/aa-\-zab-\- to exprefs the Root required. 
 
 Required the Root of a 4 -f- za z b -\- b x . The two pure 
 Powers, by the Obfervations, are a* and bb; and all Things 
 
 agreeing
 
 Se. I. Surd Qy antitie I. xxxv 
 
 agreeing as before, we conclude the Root of the given Quantity to 
 be a a ~f- b. Alfo the Root of y 4 zyy x -f- x x to be 
 yy x. 
 
 Required the Cube Root of a> + $aab -f- ^aab + P. 
 This Quantity anfwering the Obiervations in the lait Seftion, its 
 Root will be a -f- b, which involv'd makes the Quantity given. 
 
 Required" the Cube Rooi of 27 ? -f~ 54^* + 8*. Here 
 the Roots of the per feci; Cubes are 3 a and 2 b; but this involv'd 
 does not anfwer the given Quantity, neither does the given Quan- 
 tity anfwer the Obfervations ; therefore we conclude, that the 
 given Power is a Surd, and hath not fuch a Root as was required, 
 
 s, 
 
 and mull be exprefs'd thus,.. ^ 27 aaa -\- 54 a a -j- 8 bb b. 
 
 As to the Extraction of the Cube Root, in Numbers, it fhall 
 be fhewn further on. 
 
 1 
 
 CHAP. VIII. 
 
 Of S U R D QjJ A N T I T I E S. 
 
 WE have feen, in the laft Chapter, that every Quantity has 
 not a perfeel and determinate Root : We therefore proceed 
 now to fliew how thefe Quantities are to be managed, when they 
 occur in the Solution. of Problems. This, called the Dodtrine of 
 Surds, is of great Importance in the Mathematics; for which 
 Reafon the Learner ought to make the following Operations very 
 familiar to himfelf, and not be frightened at the Uncouthnefs of 
 them. 
 
 SECT. I. Addition of Surd Quantities." 
 
 Case i. 
 
 WHEN the Surd Quantities are alike, add the rational 
 Parts, or thofe which are Without the radical Sign, if 
 they are join'd to any, and to their Sum join the Surd. 
 
 Case' 2. 
 When the Surd Quantities are unlike, they are only to be 
 added by their Signs, and from thence will arife compound Surde. 
 
 c 2 Exam.
 
 xxxvi 
 
 ^Introduction"/* Chap. VIII. 
 
 Exam. i. Exam. 2. 
 
 7 x ^/ ab 
 
 t + * 
 
 5 x ^/ ab 
 \zx / ab 
 
 5 j s/ dm-\- g 
 y nj dm -j- z 
 
 6y ^/ dm -J- 
 
 1+2 
 
 Exam. 3. 
 
 y^*--}" ^/ bz 
 
 Exam 4. 
 m ^ da -f- \y 
 
 m \y X 
 
 n/ da -\" y -\- */ K 
 
 In the laft Example, the Letters under the radical Signs being 
 different, firfl put down m ^ da -\-y ; and becaufe the Quantity 
 m y/ z has the Sign }"", therefore after m t/ da-\-y put the 
 Sign -f- ; after which put the Quantity m ^/ z t and we have 
 
 m^ da -j-y -J- m ^ x for the Sum required. 
 Exam. 5. 
 
 ' + 2 3 
 
 SJ da y 
 
 zm / zm 
 
 5 ^/ da y zm ^z> 
 
 Exam. 6. 
 Zm 4/ bz-\-n 
 
 iy*J dzr-b 
 
 1 + 2 zm t/ bz-\-n-\-$y y' dz b 
 The Letters under the Radicals, in Exam. 5. being different, 
 put down 5 ^ da y ; and becaufe 2 m ^/ z m has the 
 Sign , therefore after 5 ^/ da y put the Sign , and 
 after that the Quantity 2 m *J % m, and you will have the Sum 
 required. 
 
 
 SECT.
 
 Scfb. II. Surd Quantities." xxxVu 
 
 SECT. II. Subtraction of Surd Quantities. 
 
 Case i. 
 
 WHEN the Surds are alike, fubtratt the rational Parts, if 
 there are any, and join the Surd to their Difference. 
 
 Case 2. 
 When the Surds are unlike, they are only to be fubtrafted by 
 their Signs, and from thence arife compound Surds. 
 
 Exam. 1. Exam. 2. 
 
 % 2 
 
 S/da 
 3</da 
 
 2 \/ da 
 
 21 pm t/ db r 
 \gp m / db r 
 
 2pm k/ db r 
 
 Exam. 3. 
 2 m */ dp 
 y 1/ * 
 
 Exam. 4. 
 
 syS a 
 
 2m ts /dpy A /z $y */ a -f- 3 -/ b 
 
 The rational Quantities in Exam. 2. are 21 pm, and ig pm, 
 
 whofe Difference is 2pm, to which joining the Surd ^ db r, 
 
 we have 2pm ^ db r, for the Remainder required. Alfo, in 
 Exam. 3. becaufe the Letters under the radical Signs are different, 
 put down 2 m ^/ dp, and after it y yf x, as in Subtraction of 
 whole rational Quantities. 
 
 
 3 
 
 Exam. 5. Exam. 6. 
 
 Sy^a $mj a 
 
 d J b J % */ p-\- q 
 
 1 
 
 5^ ^ a-\-d ^ b \ 5 / ,/ a-\- z ^ p ~\~ Q 
 
 The Letters under the radical Signs, in Exam. 5. being different, 
 put down zy^/ a; but, as the Quantity to be fubtracted 
 has , therefore the Remainder will be $y / a ~\r d y/ b. 
 
 c 3 
 
 8ECT.
 
 xxxviii An I n t r q d u c t i n to Chap. VIII. 
 
 Sj^CT. Jil. Multiplication^/ Surd 
 Quantities. 
 
 Case i. 
 
 WHEN the Quantities are pure Surds of the fame Kind, 
 multiply them together, and to their Product prefix the 
 radical Sign. 
 
 Case 2. 
 When there are rational Quantities join'd to the Surds, mul- 
 tiply the Rational jnto the Rational, and the Surd into the Surd, 
 and join the Prpdu&s together. . ' 
 
 Exam. 1. Exam. 2. 
 
 1X2 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 1/ ab 
 
 tf aab abp 
 
 ys/p x 
 3 >J a 
 
 5ymiJ p a %a 
 
 ' " ' ! 
 
 I X 2 
 
 I 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 Exam. 3. 
 
 5 \/y * 
 
 3 a ^/ 2 b 
 
 i$aj/ zby zbx 
 
 
 
 The Produtt of the rational Quantities, in Exam. z. is 3 j, 
 r.nd p x a pa, and Xxr az ; to which if we prefix 
 the radical Sign, we have t/ pa za ; and, joining it to $ym, 
 we have ^ym^/pa za, the Produtt requir'd. 
 
 SECT* IV. Division of Surd Quantities. 
 
 Case i. 
 
 WHEN Surd Quantities are of the fame Kind, and have no 
 rational Quantities join'd to them, rejeft all the Faftors in 
 the Dividend and Divifor, which are common to each, and pre- 
 fix the radical Sign to the Remainden 
 
 Case 2. 
 But if there are rational Quantities with the Surds, divide the 
 Rational by the Rational, and to the Quotient join the Quotient 
 of the Surds. 
 
 a. Exam.
 
 Seft. V. ' Surd Quantities. 
 Exam. i. Exam. 2. 
 
 XXXiX 
 
 ^ a m ~j- a p 
 x /a 
 
 1 
 
 yp</ zd~' r z. 
 
 y 4/ d -\~ m 
 
 :,xam. 4. 
 
 1 
 2 
 
 Exam. 3. 
 
 an >/ pz > pb anx </ fid pi 
 a y/ p a?: 1/ p 
 
 ft )/ z b , n ^/ d 
 
 In Exam. 1. the ift Cafe, am divided by a m, and ap 
 divided by a .- p, to which fingle Quotients prefix the radical 
 Sign, and we hare ^/ m~\-*p. In Example 2. the rational yp 
 being divided by p } the rational p, the Quotient is y ; and the 
 Surd 4/ zd ^tcm, divided by ^/ z, (as in the firft Example) 
 the Quotient is / d "~f- or; to which, if we prefix the rational 
 
 Quotient y, the Quotient required is y t/ d -\~m. In like man- 
 ner the Quotients in the 3d and 4th Examples are Found. 
 
 SECT. V. Involution of Surd Quantities. 
 
 Case i. 
 
 WHEN there are no rational Quantities join'd to the Surds, 
 fet the Quantities down without their radical Sign : Then 
 the given Root will be rais'd as high as is denoted by the Index of 
 the radical Sign. 
 
 Case 2. 
 When there are rational Quantities join'd with the Surds, in- 
 volve the rational Quantities as high as the Index of the Surd de- 
 notes ; multiply thefe involv'd Quantities into the Surd Quan- 
 tities, after the radical Sign is taken away. 
 
 Exam. 1. Exam. 2. Exam. 3. 
 
 1* 
 
 2 * ! -4-y 
 
 a y/ in -\-y \m*/z x -f- y 
 a am -f- a ay j mmz mmx m m . 
 
 C 4 
 
 The
 
 xl '^Introduction / Chap. IX. 
 
 The Square Root of x, extracted, is / x ; but as </ x is the 
 Root, and x is the Square from which that Root is extracted, 
 therefore t/ x X */ x muft produce x. Now y*X^*rr 
 t^ x x ; and as / x x fignifies the Square Root of x x, which is 
 x ; confequently to involve any Surd, that has no rational Quan- 
 tities join'd with it, is only to fet down the Quantities without the 
 radical Sign, as in Exam. I . 
 
 The rational Quantity, in Exam. 2. is a, which being fquar'd 
 and multiplied into the Members of the Surd, produces aam-\- aay. 
 Likewife the rational Quantity, in Exam. 3. is m, which being 
 involved, and that Square multiplied into the three Members of 
 the Surd, gives mmx mmx tnmy ; the radical Sign being 
 omitted by the Rule. 
 
 Case 3. 
 
 When there are rational Quantities join'd with the Surd Quan- 
 tities by the Signs j , or , they are involv'd as compound 
 Quantities are in Chap 6. and Sett. 1. and 3. of this Chapter, 
 Involve the following Roots to the fecond Power, or Square, 
 Exam. 1. Exam. 2. 
 
 Root x t/dn p ^yx Root 
 
 x Ij dn p \j yz, 
 
 xx xt/dn pp p*/yx 
 
 Xi/dn-\-dn p 1/ p x -| y x 
 
 Square xx zx^/dn-\-dn pp zp ^yx | yx Square. 
 
 In Exam. 1. the Square of x xx per Chap, 6. and z x 
 / dn == x y^ dn, per Cafe 2. Sect. 3. (for y/ d nz=z 
 1 t/ dn, and 2: x 1/ 0.) alfo, per the fame, */ dnXx~=. 
 x^/dn; lallly, </ dnX </ dn . dn, per Cafe 1. of this 
 Chapter. Then the Sum is xx zx nJ dn -f- dn ; for x*/ dn 
 added to z y' dn = 22 ^/ dn, per Cvi(e 1. Sett. I. Chap. 8, 
 and the reft are added as in Addition of Algebraic Quantities, 
 Exam. 2. is involvM in the fame Manner. 
 
 CHAP. IX. 
 
 S E C T. I. E <zjj at ions. 
 
 1 I 
 
 AN Equation, in Algebra, is the comparing of two e^ual 
 Things, or declaring that one Quantity, or Number, is 
 equal to another. Thus 112-7-5; or a "f" e z - ^ ne 
 
 Terms
 
 Seft. III. Equation. xli 
 
 Terms of an Equation arc the feveral Parts, Quantities, or Mem- 
 bers, of which every Equation is compoled, connected by the 
 Signs -f- ar d Thus, in the above Equation a -\- e x, ; the 
 Terms are a, e, z. ; where 'tis fuppofed that fome Number repre- 
 fented by z, is equal to the Sum of a and e. 
 
 Equations confift of Letters, or Quantities, fome known, and 
 others unknown ; thus * 12 { 9 27 ; here x appears un- 
 known ; but, by the following three Sections, any unknown Quan- 
 tity may be found equal to another Quantity or Number known, 
 and thereby a Queftion anfwer'd. 
 
 SECT. II. Reduction of an Eqjj ati on by 
 Addition and Subtraction. 
 
 THUS x 1 2 -j- 9 27 : Here * 27 -j- ' 2 930, 
 the Terms being tranfpos'd with a contrary Sign : For 
 Tranfpofition is a Name for adding to, or fubtradting equal Quan- 
 tities or Numbers, from each Side of an Equation. Thus 
 30 ( =r x ) 12 -\- 9 =r 27 ; and 30 12 {- 1 2 -j- 9 = 27 
 j 1 2 ; that is, 30 {- 9 = 27 j 1 2, having added 1 2 to each 
 Side of the Equation ; confequently to tranfpofe a Number, or 
 Quantity, which has the Sign , on the contrary Side, with the 
 Sign j , is to add that Quantity to both Sides of the Equation. 
 Again, x ( =r 30 ) -[- 9 39 ; and * -f- 9 9=39 9; that 
 is, x - 39 9 = 30, having fubtradted 9 from each Side of 
 the Equation ; confequently to tranfpofe a Quantity, or Number, 
 which has the Sign -f-, on the contrary Side, with the Sign , is 
 to fubtraft that Quantity from both Sides of the Equation. Again, 
 let y 4 12; then_y 12 -j- 4, by Proof of common Sub- 
 traction : And let x r-j- 8 =s 20 ; then * =. 20 8 ; by Corol. S. 
 Sett. 4. Chap. 1. 
 
 SECT. III. Re duct ion of an Eqjj at ion by 
 Mult 1 plication and Divi sion. 
 
 LET i. requir'd x. Here 5X2* 10*, and 
 3 5 
 3 x 30 90; then 5 x 2 x 3 X 30, by Corol. 10. Lem. 3. 
 Sett. I. Chap. 4. Again, in order to cpme at the Value of x in 
 this Equation io# 90, we mull divide by 10, and we have
 
 xlii ^Introduction to- Chap. IX. 
 
 jr*=*, by common Divifion, 10 * being the Dividend, and to 
 and x the Divifor and Quotient ; consequently, to divide 10 x by 
 10, gives x the Quotient; or to divide 10* by x, we have 10 in 
 the Quotient : Hence x 5 9 required. 
 
 2.X *7 X 
 
 Again, let ~ -{- 4 ^~ + 9' requir 'd x. Reduce each Side 
 . 3 I2 
 
 oF the Equation to a fingle Fraclion, by Prob. 4. Sett. 1 . Chap. 4. 
 
 and we have ! rr: ' ' ; confequently 24 x }- 
 
 3 I2 
 
 144 21* + 3 2 4> by Corol. to Lem. 3. Sett, r. Chap. 4. 
 Alfo fee the Corol. to Seel. 3. Chap. 1. And 24*= 21 x -f- 
 324 144, by the Rule in the laft Sett. And if we tranfpofe 
 21 x we have 24^ 21 x 324 144; that is, 3^180; 
 then x 'j 60 for the fame Reafbn above. 
 
 Again, let ~ ; requir'd a:. Here 2 x +3 
 8 2*-f-3 4*~5 . 
 
 multiplied by 57 1 14* } I71 ; and 4 x 5 multiplied by 
 
 45 m 1 80 at 225 ; then 114 a: + 171 = 180* 225, by 
 the foregoing Reafons. Tranfpofe 225, and we have 114* + 
 17 f -f- 2Z 5 i8o# ; and if we tranfpofe 114*, we have 
 171 -f- 225 180 a: 1 14 at; that is, 396 66a:, or 66a: 
 396 ; and, in order to come at x, we divide 66 x by 66, and 
 the Quotient is x x $-g 6, the Value requir'd. 
 
 SECT. IV. Reduction of an Equation by 
 Involut ion and Evolut ion. 
 
 XX 12 AT*- 4 
 
 jb 1 3= r-^ ; requir d at. Here xx 12 
 
 3 4 
 
 L 
 
 multiplied by 4 4 a; a; 48 j a; a: 4 multiplied by 3 =r 3 at x 
 12 ; then 4a:a; 48 =r 3 ata? 12 ; and tranfpofmg 48- 
 and j 3 at at, we have a; a: 36: Confequently a - 6 by ex- 
 tracting the Square Root, as in Chap. 7. 
 
 When there happens to be an Equation between like Surds, 
 take away the radical Sign, and they will become rational. 
 
 Let 1/ a J d ~\- c ; requir'd a. Then anzd ~\- c^er 
 Sett. 5. Chap. 8. jR> 
 
 But if one Side is a Surd, and the other rational, involve the 
 rational Quantity to the fame Power with the Index of the Surd. 
 
 Let s/ a -zz 6 ; requir'd a. Then a sc 36. 
 
 Scholium.
 
 Se&. V. E qjj a t i o n. xliii 
 
 ScHOLiUM. 
 
 In this Chapter, hitherto, I have only confider'd what is call'd a 
 Simple Equation, having only one Power of the unknown Quan- 
 tity : But thofe Equations containing one Quantity, wherein the 
 Square of the unknown Quantity is c'oncern'd, and alfo the fimple 
 Quantity itfelf; or, if in one Term, the Power of the unknown 
 Quantity is double its Power, or Height, m another i fuch Equa- 
 tions are call'd Quadratic. 
 
 SECT. V. Quadratic Equations. 
 
 There are three Forms of this Sort, 'viz. 
 
 I aa -\- zba d c~) 
 
 z aa zba dc\ Requir'd the Value of a. 
 3 zba-r- aa dc 3 
 
 By the Obfervations in Chap. 6. we find that the two firit are 
 imperfeft Squares, wanting b b to make them complete ; there- 
 fore, in thefe Cafes, the fourth Part of the Square of the Co- 
 efficient, or half the Co-efficient zb involv'd to the fecond Power, 
 and added to both Sides, will make the Squares complete. 
 
 TlllK \aa-\- zba + bb = dc -\-bb 
 lnus > laa zba + bb dc + bb 
 
 Hence, i a + b = /53f2 1 per Chap. }, 
 C a -r- b y dc ~~ bbi 
 
 And, \ a ~ ^ iUXj- ~ b \ per Tranfpofition. 
 I a </ dc bb -J- b J 
 
 As to the third Form, tf*. 2 ba a a dc, we muft change 
 all the Signs in the Equation : Thus aa ~ zba~ dc ; for 
 zba aa dc z=z o, then dc a a 2 ba, or, which is 
 the fame Thing, aa zba dc. And, by completing 
 the Square as above, we have a a '2 ba *-f- bb dc -f - bb, 
 or a a zba-~- bb bb dc. Hence a b^/bb dc, 
 
 and, by Tranfpofition, a */ bb dc : j b. 
 ^But thefe Equations have as many Values of a, the unknown 
 Quantity, as the Index of the higheit Power. Of the two Values, 
 or Roots of a, in the firft and fecond Forms of Quadratic Equa- 
 tions, one is [-, and the other ; but the laft does not come 
 out without a Miflake in the Operation ; therefore thefe two Forms 
 give the true Number requir'd. The third Form is ambiguous ; 
 
 that
 
 xiiv An Introduction to Chap. IX. 
 
 that is, it is doubtful in many Cafes, which of the two Values of 
 a will anfwer the Conditions of the Queftion, 
 
 Let a a -\- 2 b a = 560 ; and let b 4 : Requir'd the Value, 
 or Root, of the Equation of a. By completing the Square, as 
 above, we have a a -f- zba ~\- bb 560 ~f- b b ; then, by 
 
 Chap. 7. we have a j b = / 560 -\-6 b ; and, by tranfpofing 
 
 h y we have a S5 t/ 560 { b b : b rr 20 the Root, or Value, 
 requir'd. Now, let a z=. 20, and a a | z b a-=z. 560 be made 
 equal to nothing ; that is, a 20 rr o, and a a -4- % a 560 
 ; then /z { 8 a 560 divided by a 20 a -f- 28, 
 fee Exam. 5. Sett. 4. Chap. 2. But, as the Dividend and Divifor 
 are equal to nothing, it follows that the Quotient muft be nothing ; 
 that is, a -\- 28 =z o ; then a rr 28, the fecond Value re- 
 quir'd, which, with the Co-efficient, will form aa-\~2a 
 560 : For 28 x 28 784, and 28x8 224 ; 
 therefore their Sum is 560, by Sett. I. Chap. 2. 
 
 Let a a 7 a zz 248.75 ; requir'd the Value of a. By com- 
 pleting the Square, as before, we have a a *: 7 a { ** 
 
 948.75 + 4k.'- :r= 961 /zznf == / 961 r= 31 ; and a = 3 1 
 -j J -= 34.5. Now, by ordering the Terms, as in the laft 
 Cafe, we have a 27.5 the fecond Value of a. See Exam. 6. 
 Sett. 4. Chap. 2. 
 
 Let ee 45 e fi requir'd the Value of e. By com-, 
 pleting the Square, we have ee 45 e -f- ^ A - + - 1 p ; 
 and letting p 50, it will be e *J- r r */ * v l 500 ; and 
 tranfpofing -* 1 , it will be sr* 1 ^^ ~~+ lJ ' 5 ~ 25 
 the Value requir'd. And by ordering the Form and Value of e, 
 as before diretted, we lhall have e 20 the other Value of e in 
 this Quadratic ambiguous Equation; for both Values will anfwer 
 the Conditions of the given Equation ; yet but one of them, in 
 moil Cafes, will give a true Anfwer to a Queftion, as will be 
 jhevvn further on. 
 
 In Quadratic Equations we may obferve, that the Sum of both 
 the Roots, or Values, is equal to the Co- efficient of the loweft 
 Power of the unknown Quantity with a contrary Sign. Thus, 
 we found in Form the Firft, that the Values of a were -|- 20 and 
 28, the Sum of which is equal to 8 the Co-efficient of the 
 loweft unknown Power. Therefore, having one Value, we may 
 find the other without the Trouble of Diviiion. 
 
 Again, let a a ~j b a ma ^z d mpx ; requir'd a. Here 
 the loweft Power of the unknown Quantity has two Co-efficients, 
 
 b m, half whereof is - ; therefore, by completing th ft 
 
 Square,
 
 Seft. V. E qjj a t i o n. xhr 
 
 c v 1/ ^ \ bb thm -* mm . 
 
 Square, we have a a + ba ma -\- j 
 
 4 
 mpx-lr bb-zbm-Umm whofc RoQt fc + ' 
 
 2 
 
 '^ , bb 2.bm-~~mm r , 
 
 = i/ d mp x -\ ; confequently a == 
 
 l~ . bb 2 b m I m ot _ , , 
 
 / d mp x -\ 1 . But, by the 
 
 4 z 
 
 Method of Substitution, we may fave a great deal of Labour ; for 
 
 putting z b m the two Co-efficients of the lowell Power of 
 the unknown Quantity, the Work will ftand thus : a a } zazzz 
 d mpx, and compleating the Square we have a a ~\- za -j 
 
 =r d mp x -\ ; then, by extracting the Root of each 
 
 4 4 
 
 Side of the Equation, and tranfpofxng ~-\- , we have a zs. 
 
 ^ z 
 
 ^ d mpx | : . , 
 4 2 
 
 Again, let aa -\- ba bma bd bmx\ requir'd a. 
 Here let ~4, bm = 32, bd bmx =z 1920 : Now the 
 loweit Power of the unknown Quantity having here two Co- 
 efficients b and bm ; call zz= b bm for bm = a. 
 3 2 = 28), and by completing the Square we have a a z. a 
 
 H bd bmx-\ 1 confequently ai/bd- bmx4-~ 
 
 4 4 4 
 
 X. . ' . 
 
 : -J- 60, the Value requir'd. 
 
 Again, let x baa dp a xm dz. ; requir'd . Here let 
 * = 24, <// 15, and xm dz. = 9300. Divide by 
 Exam. 1. Seft. 5. Chap. t. every Term in the Equation by x b; 
 
 , xbaa dpa xm dz, 
 
 and we have ( aa) f^- - . p t r 
 
 x x b x. b 
 
 dp , . T.t xm dz. , rr 
 
 -, ; then aa ra -f- -- = ; therefore a n= 
 
 xb 4 xb ' 4 
 
 Jxnt dz. ' "rr r 
 
 V ~y *"T : + ~ = *o, the Value requir'd. 
 
 Scholium. 
 The Roots of an ambiguous Quadratic Equation se ee a, 
 
 r 1 1 t $ /, are cxpreiTed thus ; t ~ + J ~ pi 
 
 2 - v 4 
 
 that
 
 xlvi ^Introduction to Chap. X 
 
 that is, both the Signs being prefix'd to the Quantity under the 
 radical Sign; for that, being added t6-_ j gives one of the Values 
 
 of the unknown Quantity e ; but, fubtraeled from , gives the 
 other Value of e. Thus, let .1:2:45, and/>=r500, then . -f- 
 
 */ ~p 2Z -5 ~ir 2 -S = 2 5 = 'I and - V~P 
 20 = *, the other Value of the unknown Quantity. 
 - ........ 
 
 CHAP. X. 
 
 The Method of Refolving Qy e s t ions. 
 
 HA V I N G explain'd what is neceffary, in order to the Solu- 
 tion of Queltions, we come now to the Method by which 
 they are anfwer'd ; which is, expreffing the Conditions of the 
 Queftion propofed. by Numbers and Letters, Or tranflating the 
 Queftion into Algebra. 
 
 - * '-" *- ~ - - 
 
 SECT. I. Questions requiring only one unknown 
 Quantity to be found. 
 
 Question i. 
 
 A Gentleman being aflced how old he-was, Why, fays he, if you 
 take 1 5 from my Age, and then add 21 to the Remainder, 
 and lubtraft 7 from that Sum, and add 19 to what is then left, 
 the Sum will be 43. Requir'd the Age ? 
 
 Let* " the Gentleman's Age ; then, taking 15 from it, we 
 have a 15; to which adding 2 1 , we have a 1 5 -f- 2 1 ; from 
 which fubtracting 7, the Remainder is a - \j.~\- zr 7; to 
 which adding 19* the Sum isa 15 j 21 7 -\- 19 43 j 
 requir'd a ? By tranfpofing all the Numbers by Se&. 2. Chap. 9. 
 we have a ib 43 -f- J 5 21 "f" 7 l 9 that is, a 25, the 
 Gentleman's Age. 
 
 Question 2. 
 What Number is. that, which being multiplied by 10, and 
 that Product divided by 2, alfo 19 added to this Quotient, and 99 
 fubtrafted from that Sum, the Refult fhall be equal to the Num- 
 ber fought i 
 
 Let
 
 Sed. Ii. Refolding Qu estioks. xlvii 
 
 Let a zz~ the Number fought; then x 10 we have 10a, and 
 divided by z~\ve havr > Co which 19 being added, the Sum fs 
 
 2 
 
 IO a 
 
 2 
 
 10a 
 
 19, from which fubtra&iHg 99, the Remainder it. 
 
 j_ i^ 99 ; which being equal to , the Number fought by 
 
 10a 
 
 the Conditions of the Queftions, we have \- 19 99 a ; 
 
 requir'd a ? Here = a -\- 99 19, by Chap. 9. Seel. 2. 
 
 and 10 a = 2 -f- 198 38, by Chap. 9. Seft. 3. and by 
 
 tranfpofing za we have io 2 198 38; that is, 
 
 $a = 160 ; confequently, by Seel;. 3. Chap, 9. a -^ = 20 
 
 20 x 10 
 the Number fought; for -J *9 99 20, according 
 
 2 
 
 to the Circumftancea of the Queflion. 
 
 
 
 SECT. II. The Method of Revolving Questions, 
 wherein two unknown Quantities are concerned. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 FIND what the fame unknown Quantity is equal to in both 
 Equations (looking upon the other as known) ; then make 
 thefe Equations equal to one another, and proceed as in the laft 
 Se&ion. 
 
 Question 3. 
 
 What two Numbers are thofe whofe Sum is 262, and Differ- 
 ence 1 44 ? 
 
 Let a the greater Number, and e rr the leffer ; then vyc 
 have a (- e 262^ and a e -rr 144 by the Queition ; requir'd 
 e firft ? Here a 262 e by Corol. 2. Seft. 4. Chap. 1. Alfo 
 a z=z 1 44. J ^, by the Proof of common Subtra&iou : Conie- 
 quently, by Axiom 3. 114 ~\- e = 262 c; then, by tranf- 
 pofing e and j 144, we have 2 e =: z6z 144 ; and by 
 
 _ 262 144 
 
 Sect. 3. Chap. 9. e zz. 2 131 72 59 : Confe- 
 
 quently 262 59.= 203 = the greater Number, /*r Corol. 2. 
 Seel. 4. Chap. 1. Therefore 203 -\- 59 262, and 203 
 $g 144, according to the Conditions of the Queftion. 
 
 Inftead of finding e, firft we may find a. Thus, a -\- e rr 262, 
 and a e ~ 144 as before. Then t 262 a, and by tranf- 
 pofing
 
 xiviii An Introduction to Chap. X. 
 
 pofing e and -f- 144, we have a 144 e ; confequently, 
 by Axiom 3. 262 a a 144 : And, by tranfpofing a 
 and 144, we have 262 -f- 144 = za; therefore a 
 
 262 -4- 144 , *, XT , 
 
 ! 131 -f- 72 203* the greater Number; con- 
 fequently 262 203 59 rr e, the Ieffer Number. 
 
 Again, by adding together thefe two Equations a -\- e = 262, 
 and a * " 1 44, we have za 406 ; and, by dividing by 2, 
 we have a = 203, as before. Alfo, by fubtra&ing a 2144 
 from a | e 262, we have ze =r 118; and, by dividing by 
 2, the Quotient is e 59, as before. 
 
 Corollary*. 
 
 Hence the Sum and Difference of two Numbers is equal to 
 twice the greater Number ; that is, 2 a 262 p- 144 406. 
 And the Difference of the Sum and Difference of two Numbers is 
 equal to twice the Ieffer Number; that is, ze 262 144 
 zr 118. Confequently, by having the Sum and Difference of 
 two unknown Quantities, they become known by this Corol- 
 lary alfo. 
 
 Question 4. 
 
 Tw6 young Gentlemen, not agreeing about their Age, were 
 told by their Father, that if the Age of the eldeft was divided by 
 2, to which Quotient adding 4 times the Age of the youngeft, 
 and extracting the Square Root of this Sum, it would be 10 : But 
 if the Age of the eldeft was multiplied by 3, and added to the Age 
 of the youngeft multiplied by 5, the Sum would be 201. Re- 
 quir'd the Age of each Perfon ? 
 
 ,Let a z^ the Age of the elder, and e the Age of the 
 
 younger ; then < is the Age of the eldeft, divided by 2 ; to which 
 adding 4 times the Age of the youngeft, we have . -j- 4 e ; and, 
 
 2 
 
 by extracting the Square Root, we htve >/ -}- 4 rr 10, by the 
 
 firft Condition of the Queftion : And 3 a is the Age of the eldeft, 
 multiplied by 3 ; to which adding 5 e the Age of the youngeft, 
 multiplied by 5, we have 3 a -j- 5 e 201, by the fecond Con- 
 dition of the Queflion : Requir'd a, e? 
 
 By Sect. 4. Chap. 9. this Equation of the firft Condition of the 
 
 Queftion ^/~ . -{- \t r= 10 reduc'd gives -\- 4 e = 100 ; 
 
 that is, both Sides of the Equation being fquar'd : Then, by 
 
 tranfpofing
 
 Scdl. II. Refohing Qu estions. 
 
 xlix 
 
 8 e ; rcquir'd the Value of e. By 
 
 tranfpofing - 4 e, we have =100 4*, and, by multiply- 
 ing the Quotient into the Divifor, the Equation will be a 200 
 8 e. Again, by tranfpofing -j- 5 e , in the fecond Condition of 
 the Queftion 3 a -}- 5 e r 201, we have 3* =201 jr; 
 
 20 1 ~4~ c * 
 and, by Seft. 3. Chap. 9, a =z ! 2- j confequently, by the 
 
 _ . 201 -f- ce 
 
 Rule, ^- = 200 
 
 3 
 
 multiplying the Quotient by the Divifor, we have 201 -f- 5 e 
 600 24 * j and, by tranfpofing 24 e, and f- 201, the Equa- 
 tion will be 24* 5 e ~ 600 201, that is, ig^rr: 399 ; and, 
 by Sect. 3. Chap. 9. e *** 21 the Age of the youngeft Son. 
 
 rnU U 20I -f-5^ . 20l4-eX2l 
 
 Then, as above, a rr - ; that is, = ! 
 
 3 3 
 
 rn 
 
 =: 32 the Age of the eldeft Son. Now a/ - - -f- 4 * 21 r= 10 ; 
 
 and 3 x 32 -f- 5 X 21 = 201 ; confequently the Queftion is 
 fatisfied. 
 
 Having explain'd the Operations in the foregoing Queftions, to 
 fave the Trouble of ufing many Words, I fhall now fhew the 
 Method of Regiftering the different Steps taken, in order to come 
 at the unknown Quantity. 
 
 Question 5. 
 
 What two Numbers are thofe, that the greater being divided 
 by 5, and added to the leffer, the Sum may be 12 ; but the Pro- 
 duct of the two Numbers divided by 4 is 40 ? 
 
 Let a the greater, ani e =a the leffer Number. In the fol- 
 lowing Regifter, at the 3d Step, 1 e fignifies that in the ift 
 Step -j- e is tranfpofed, and makes the 3d Step. Alfo at the 5 th 
 Step, 3X5 fignifies that each Side of the Equation is multiplied 
 by 5. At the 7th Step, 4 . 6 fignifies that the 4th and 6th Steps 
 are compar'd together. And at the 1 ith Step, 10 fignifies that 
 the imperfect Square in the 10th Step is completed in the nth 
 Step. 
 
 Regifter 
 3 * 5 
 
 a _k- 
 
 J ~r e 
 
 a e 
 
 1 2 the firft Condition of the Queftion. 
 
 40 the fecond Condition of the Queftion.- 
 Query a, e ? 
 
 1 2 e ; by tranfpofing { e. 
 
 a Co 5 e, per Lem. 5. Seel. 1. Chap. 4. 
 
 d 2X4
 
 2X 4 
 
 5 
 
 S-T e 
 
 6 
 
 4. 6 
 
 7 
 
 7 X e 
 
 8 , 
 9-r5 
 
 10 D 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 
 1 1 LWz 
 
 12 
 
 I2-J-6 
 
 J 3 
 
 that is, 
 
 H 
 
 6 , 14 
 
 x 5 
 
 ^.- .Introduction /<? Chajp. VIL 
 
 ;~i 60, />?- the fame. 
 
 a , per Se&. 3. Chap. g. 
 e 
 
 ^^ = 60 5 e, per Axiom 3, and the R.ule. 
 
 160 60* 5 e e, per Lem. 5. Seft. 1. Chap. 4. 
 $ee 6o<?~ 160, per Sett. 5. Chap. 9. 
 *>* I2<?r= 32, per Exam. 1. Seft. 5. Chap. 1. 
 ee ize + 36= 36 32, / Seft. 5. Chap. 9. 
 y? 6r^ 36 32, />*r Chap. 7. 
 
 /--L V"* " ^ 1 ~ 7 tf<?r Scholium to 
 
 ^ = 6+^36 32 = 6T2 J- 
 
 either of 
 20 x 8 
 
 _ Sect. 5. Chap. 9. 
 * rr: 8 or 4 ; but if <? S3 8, then 
 
 a ax 20 j and if e r= 4, then rr 40 ; 
 
 e 
 
 20 
 which anfwers the Queftion ; for - 8 1 2 ; and 
 
 = 40 ; alfo - {- 4 1 2 j and 1 
 
 40. 
 
 SECT. III. the Method of Refolving Quest ions, 
 wherein three unknown Quantities are concerned. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 FIND the Value of one of the unknown Quantities in one of 
 the given Equations ; and, for that unknown Quantity, 
 fubftitute its Value in both the other Equations, which extermi- 
 nates that unknown Quantity ; and then the Queltion is reduc'd 
 to two unknown Quantities, and refolv'd as in the laft Section. 
 
 Question 6. 
 
 Three Gentlemen, A, B, C, difcourfing of their Guineas, 
 found that A's added to C's, the Sum was twice B's ; and A's 
 added to three times B's, from which Sum taking C's, the Re- 
 mainder was 1 3 : But if A's was added to the Produft of B's and 
 C's, the Sum was 34. Required the Number of Guineas each 
 had > 
 
 Let a A's, e B's, y C's, =13, d = 34. 
 
 1 j*
 
 $e&. III. Refohing Qu estions. 
 
 11 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 3 
 
 I y 
 
 4 
 
 2 . 4 
 
 5 
 
 3 4 
 
 6 
 
 5 con traded. 
 
 7 
 
 7- J r 2 y 
 
 8 
 
 8~5 
 
 9 
 
 6+j> 
 
 10 
 
 10-7-2 -f-j> 
 
 1 1 
 
 9 . ii 
 
 12 
 
 12 x 
 
 3 
 
 13 5jv 
 14 zb 
 
 '4 
 '5. 
 
 15-7-2 
 
 |6 
 
 16 
 
 !7 
 
 17 uv 
 
 18 
 
 X 
 
 18 
 
 2 
 
 '9 
 
 By 9 Step. 
 
 20 
 
 By 4 Step. 
 
 21 
 
 - + J = 2e the ift 7 condition of the 
 
 a -+- 3 * _y =r 6 the 2d 
 
 -f- ey d the 3d 
 
 1 v^unuuiur 
 f Question. 
 
 = 2 e y 
 
 zeyhl'yb 
 
 2 ey-\- ey~d 
 
 Here ze y in the 4th Step is put for a in 
 the 2d and 3d Steps j by which we have 
 two unknown Quantities, and two Equa- 
 tions. 
 
 t>e zy~b 
 
 5*rr-f zy 
 
 e = ^ per Seel. 3. Chap. 9. 
 
 d4- y 
 e = '. , per Seel. 3. Chap. g. 
 z-\-y 
 
 d-\- y b-i- 2 y 7 ^ e Q e fii n ^ s nm V re- 
 "~r > due'd to one unknown 
 
 ' " 5 } Quantity by Axiom 3. 
 
 5 d + Sy = 2b + $y 1- by -f 2_yj, ^- 
 
 Corol. to Lem. 3. Seft. 1. Chap. 4. 
 $dzb y -f- ^^y -f- zyy 
 zjy\-by?$4z,h 
 
 llZZl LizLlll f Exam. 1. 
 
 2 2 J Seel. 5. Chap. 1. 
 
 Here the firft Power, y, is multiplied into the 
 
 . . b 1 
 
 Co-efficient , for this Number x yzz 
 
 yy 
 
 byy 
 
 i and, to avoid much Trouble, let 
 
 51 
 
 x ; then we have 
 
 , , xx ed zb , xx 
 
 y y + *J "+ -7- = 2 1 , per 
 
 424 
 
 Seel. 5. Chap. 9. 
 . x / ^Td 2 b 
 
 y +1= S> 
 
 f -, per Chap. 7. 
 
 j=V 
 
 f f $d - zb 
 
 {= ~*"~ 2 -M == 5, B's Sum 
 
 ( = 2 < j ) 4, A's Sum. 
 
 XX X 
 
 : 6,C sSum. 
 4 
 
 SECT..
 
 lii 
 
 An Introduction to Chap. X. 
 
 SECT IV. The Method of refolving Questions, 
 wherein four unknown Quantities are concerned. 
 
 Rule. 
 
 FIND the Value of that unknown Quantity which is the leaft 
 involved, in one of the Equations, and for that unknown 
 Quantity fubftitute its Value in the other three Equations, which 
 reduces the Queftion to three unknown Quantities, and then it is 
 folved as in the la ft Section. 
 
 Question 7. 
 Four Men have each a Sum of Money, which being put all to- 
 gether, makes 250 /. And if to the firft Man's Money be added 
 8 /. it will be juft as much as the fecond Man's Money decreafed 
 by 8 /. and as much as 8 times the third Man's Money, and but 
 as much as one eighth Part of the fourth Man's Money. Requir'd 
 how much each Man had ? 
 
 Let a, e, y, u, reprefent the four Mens Money ; and b 8 : 
 
 Then, J. 
 
 2 b 
 I 1 S 
 
 3 5 
 
 7 + * 
 
 9X2 
 6 , 10 
 
 8 , 9 
 
 12 
 
 a -| e { y \- u -=z 250 z 
 a j- b e b the fecond 
 a -| b r= y b the third 
 
 the firft 
 
 a -f- b =. ~ the fourth Condition of the Que- 
 b 
 
 ftion. 
 
 a rr e zb 
 
 ze zb \- y | u = s 
 
 e byb 
 
 The Queftion is now reduced to three un- 
 known Quantities, by putting e z b, 
 the Value of a, inftead of a. 
 
 e yb \~ b. This muft be x 2, becaufe of 
 2 e in the 6th Step. 
 
 2= zyb -J- 2 b, per Axiom 2. 
 
 2 y k ~t" y ~t~ u s 
 
 The Queftion is now reduced 10 two un- 
 known Quantities, by putting the Value 
 of e . 
 
 12 -r- b
 
 Sett. V. Refohing Qu- estions. 
 
 m 
 
 12 -7- ^ 
 
 11 a 
 I 4 -j-2^ + l 
 
 3 1 '5 
 16 x 
 ij -\- b B u 
 
 lSJ r 
 
 *3 > l 9 
 
 9 , 20 
 5 , 21 
 
 '3 J 
 '5 
 
 16 
 
 <7 
 ifl 
 
 '9 
 
 20 
 21 
 
 22 
 
 ** 
 
 , per Chap. 4. Sett. 1 . Lem. 4. 
 
 zyb -\- y s u 
 
 1 ~~ u , per Se&ion 3. Chap. 9. 
 2 -f- 1 
 
 y = 
 
 , ' . The Queflion is now re- 
 zb + 1 bb ^ 
 
 duc'd to only one unknown Quantity. 
 zbu -\- u J ^ s per Corol. to 
 
 Lem. 3. Seft. 1. Chap. 4. 
 2^a -L _|_ b bu~ sb b 
 
 sib 
 * = T - ; 
 
 2 p J 
 It 
 
 ez=yb -}- b 
 a-=ze zb 
 
 -^-197: 10: 7,40736 
 
 = 3:1: 8,74056 
 
 32: 13 : 9,92592 
 
 == 16 : 13 : 9,92592 
 
 Confequently a -p * -p ^ -p " 249 : 19 : 1 1,99976 
 wanting .00024 of a Penny : The Decimal Parts being continu'd 
 on to more Places, would have brought it nearer the Truth. 
 
 Scholium. 
 
 The Circumftances of a Queflion may fometimes be fuch, as no 
 particular Rules can be prefcrib'd to exterminate the unknown 
 Quantities : This Part of the Art muft be obtain'd by a careful 
 minding, whether an unknown Quantity may be exterminated by 
 adding, fubtrafting, multiplying, or dividing the Equations, or 
 by any other Method, Co as the Equality mny be preferv'd. The 
 Learner may think this difcouraging ; but a little Attention will 
 help his Judgment in this Part of Algebra ; and when thefe feem- 
 ing Perplexities are once overcome, he will think himfelf very 
 well rewarded for his Pains. 
 
 SECT V . The Method of knowing if a |Qu est ion 
 admits but of one, or of feveral Anfwers. 
 
 AFTER a Queflion is tranflated into Algebra, 'tis proper to 
 confider, whether it be fubjeft to any Limitations, or not. 
 To which End we have thefe Rules. 
 
 I. If the Number of Quantities fought exceeds the Number of 
 Equations, the Queftion is capable of innumerable Anfwers. 
 
 2. But
 
 ft* 
 
 .^Introduction ta Chap. X. 
 
 2. But if the given Equations, independent one upon another, 
 are juft as many as the Quantities fought ; then the Queftion hath 
 generally but one certain and determinate Anfwer. 
 
 If the Quantities fought are lefs in Number than the given 
 Equations, the Queftion is not only limited, but often render'd 
 impoflible, by the Equations being propos'd inconfiftent one with 
 another. 
 
 Exam. i. Exam. 2. 
 
 Suppofe a -4- 
 
 "4- y 
 
 And 
 
 = *1 Query * + ' = ^ ? To find 
 =: 20 > ^~ ' ae 48 > , 
 
 i a, e, y P \ a and e. 
 
 Query 
 
 In Exam. 1. the unknown Quantity e being in both Equations, 
 we may fuppofe it under 20, for Example, 16 ; and then it will 
 be a 4~ 16 = 40, and y -j- 16 =r 20 ; from whence it will be 
 eafy to find a and y : But if e is fuppofed any other whole Number 
 under 20, then there v/ill be found different whole Numbers for 
 a and y ; and if we put e to Fractions, there may be found an 
 innumerable Set of Anfwers. In Exam. 2- there are three Equa- 
 tions, and but two unknown Quantities ; and thefe Equations 
 render the Cafe impoffible ; for the Sum of two Numbers cannot 
 be lefs than their Difference. 
 
 SECT. VI. The Solution of Qjj est ions pro- 
 ducing Adfeeted Equations higher than Quadratics., 
 by Approximation or Converging Series. 
 
 WHAT two Numbers are thofe whofe Sum is 50, and the 
 Quotient of the Square of the greater by the lefl'er, added 
 to the greater, and leffen'd by the Square of the letter, equal to 
 100 ? 
 
 Let a the greater, e the lefl'er Number, b 50, and 
 d .= 100. 
 
 -^r-c-b 
 
 1 e 
 
 3^2 
 
 2, 3 4 
 
 3 
 4 
 
 a b e 
 
 a a ~z bb 2 be j ee 
 
 bb zbe j e e . 
 
 1 -f- b e e e 
 
 The refpeclive Values a a and a are fubfti- 
 tutcd in the fecond Equation, by which 
 the unknown Quantity a is exteiminated, 
 
 ' 5 x e
 
 6 contra&ed. 
 y -4- be -+- et 
 
 Then, 
 9 & 3 
 9 x J 5 
 
 Therefore, 
 
 13 2079 
 
 4vr* -*7, 
 
 I S-7- I 4-55+J' 
 
 Seft. VI. Refohing Qv e s t i o n s. lv 
 
 4 2^f + <?^ + ^<* te eee de 
 
 By reducing the mix'd Number to an im- 
 proper Fraction, and multiplying the 
 whole Equation by the Diviibr e. 
 
 bh be cee dc, which in Numbers is 
 
 2500 eee -f- 150^. 
 
 To refolve this Equation,; fuppofe e 9 } 
 then 150 ez= 1350, and eee 729 ; 
 but 1 350 4- 729 ( 2079) is lefs than 
 2500. Put r == 9 ; and ^ = what 9 
 wants of the true Value of e. 
 
 r-\-y e the lefler Number. Query ^ ? 
 
 rrr-\- $rry + 3*7 J -\-yyy = eee 
 
 \$Or-\- 150J == 150? 
 
 Added together, gives 2500, by the 8th Step. 
 
 rrr+ ^rry-\- Z'-yy+yyy + I5 r -H 
 1 coy 2500. Rejecting the Powers 
 of y above yy, and putting the Equation 
 in Numbers, we have, when contracted, 
 
 2079 + 339-y + 2 7yy == 2 s 
 
 27yy+ 393.T = 4 21 
 
 j, j _j_.14.55_y 1 5. 5 9, an incomplete Square. 
 
 ^yyy-r-H-ssyi 
 
 Inftead of compleating the Square, as in Chap. 7, we have the 
 following Operation. 
 
 H-55) l SS9 z ( l =y 
 
 Divifor completed 
 
 '5-55J 15-55 
 
 .042 Remainder negle&ed. 
 
 Hence r-\-y e 10, which being involv'd to the third 
 Power __ 1000; and 10 x 150 = 1500; therefore we have 
 eee {- 150^ 2500 as at the 8th Step; confequently by the 
 Arft Step a 40. 
 
 The Reafon why there is a Remainder after the true Root is ob- 
 tain'd, is the arbitrary rejecting the Powers of y above yy, which 
 makes the Dividend 15592 too much by .042, the Remainder. 
 
 There are two Numbers whofc Difference is 5 ; and the Square 
 of the greater, added to the Difference of 3 times the Squire of 
 the lefler, and the Quotient of the greater by the lefler is 27 : 
 
 What are the Numbers ? Let 5 x, 
 and e the lefler Number. 
 
 27 d, a the greater, 
 Then
 
 Ivi 
 
 Then 
 
 An Introduction to Chap. X. 
 
 i ! * rr * *)_ , ^ . 
 
 \ a (By the Quefhon. 
 
 3 e -J- a a rr // 1 Query *, * /> 
 
 3> 
 
 5 x *, fcfc. 
 
 Then 
 
 7 3 
 8X2 
 
 8 
 9 
 
 7 & 2 
 
 IO 
 
 IO X IO 
 
 1 1 
 
 9 4-7 
 
 12 
 
 *3-T3 73 J 
 
 3 a rr * -j- <? 
 a a xx j 
 .r j ^ 
 
 3" 
 
 -j- .* a- -}- 2 x e -\- 
 
 d; 
 
 Here the refpe&ive Values of a and * 
 are fubftituted in the fecond Equation, 
 by which Means the unknown Quan- 
 tity a is exterminated. This Equation 
 reduc'd, and put into Numbers, we 
 have 
 zeee \oee {- e =r 5. To refolve this 
 Equation, fuppofe e 6 ; then 2 * <? e 
 
 io? [- * 78, which is too 
 much. Put r rr 6, and j> what 6 
 is too much. 
 
 r y * the lefler Number requir'd : 
 Query y ? 
 
 rrr 3 rr y -J- 3 rj>jr -~~ yyy rr *** 
 
 t 
 irrr 6rry-\-6 ryy z=.zeee i here_y is 
 
 rejected. 
 rr 2ry-\-yy ee 
 10 rr 20rj> -4- loyy m*t 
 2 rrr 6rry -\- 6 ryy 10 rr -f- zory 
 
 }yy 4~ r y == 5 tne Value of 
 2<?** io** -J * being fubftituted. 
 This laft Equation being put into Num- 
 bers, and contracted, and the Numbers 
 properly tranfpofed, &c. we have 
 
 373> -r- jy = 2.807 
 
 2 ' 8 7 rut. 
 
 _y = - * = 1 ; for by the 
 
 3-73 y 
 Operation 
 
 Incomplete Divifor 3.73) 2.807 (i.rrjr 
 ^rri 
 
 True Divifor 
 
 2.73 2.73 
 
 .077 Remainder negle&ed. 
 Hence t y = e rr 5 ; confequently a rr 10. Now -^ 
 75 rr 73 ; and 73 -j- 100 27, as is exprefs'd by the 
 Queftion ; therefore the Numbers are 10 and 5. 
 
 1 But
 
 Chap. XI. the Extraction cftheCvBZ, &c. Root, lvii 
 
 Bu: if the Number mould not be the true Root, make the 
 Number thus found =r; and put r -j y, or r - y, for the 
 true Root, as the Occafion requires ; and proceed, as before, to. 
 find the Value of y ; which fecond Operation will give the true 
 Root very near, and near enough for any common Cafe. The 
 Repetition of the Operation, whereby we approach nearer and 
 nearer to the true Root, is call'd approximation, or Converging 
 Series. 
 
 CHAP. XI. 
 
 The Extraction <?//^CubeRoot, by Approxima- 
 tion, or Converging Series. 
 
 REquir'd the Cube Root of aaa 9261. By Pointing the 
 given Number, as in Chap. 7. the Root will appear to con- 
 flit of two Places : Therefore fuppofe the Root to be 20 ; but this 
 Number involv'd to the third Power will be 8000, which being 
 lefs than 9261, the Cube Root of 9261 muft be more than 20. 
 Put r =z 20, and e for what 20 wants of the true Root, and b =z 
 9261. 
 
 Then I 
 
 4 rrr 
 
 5 -5-3' 
 By Step 6 
 
 8 
 
 = 926. = * } Q w 
 
 r -f- ema 
 
 aaa 
 
 rrr-\- qrre -f- ^ree-\-eee~ ~ aaa 
 rrr -f- ^rre-\- $ree -f- eee 79261 zzib. 
 Rejedt the Powers of e above ee, and 
 tranfpofe rrr', then, 
 $rre -f" Z ree ^ rrr 
 re -\- ee-rz D, by Subfli- 
 
 tution. 
 
 D 
 
 e = .. 
 
 r -} e 
 b rrr 
 
 Theorem. 
 1261 800 
 
 60 
 
 21.01 =D 
 
 Then the 7th Step in Numbers. 
 Add \ r ~ 2 > zl ' ot D (* =* 
 
 21 
 
 Divifor completed 21 .01 Remainder negle&ed. 
 Hence a ~ 21 the Cube Root requir'd. 
 
 Requir'd
 
 Iviii An Introductions Chap. XL 
 
 Requir'd the Cube Root of 14526.784. 
 
 By pointing the whole Number as before, the Root will be 
 found to confift of two Places of Integers ; and the iirft Period 
 being 1 4, the neareft Cube will be 2 ; and fupplying the other 
 Place of the Root with a Cypher, let 20 r, and e rr to what r 
 wants of the true Root, and b 14526.784. Then proceeding 
 
 D u.'n t rrr 
 
 as before we have e = - < ; out u 1= 101.78 ; 
 
 t~ r e 3 r 
 
 "therefore 1^2- == 4.44 = e l confequently r -\~ e = 24.44. 
 
 20 + e 
 But this Number cubed is r= 14598.344384 ; which being greater 
 than the given Number, the Root cannot be 24.44. To approach 
 jftill nearer to the true Root, make a fecond Operation, putting 
 r = 24.44, and ; what that r is too much ; then the Theorem 
 
 is e =: .04, by proceeding as at the 7th Step, in the 
 
 laft Queftion of the laft Seftion. Now r-r: 2441 which 
 being cubed gives 14526.784. 
 
 By the fame Method may the Root of any Power, how high 
 fQever, be extracted ; it being no more than to fuppofe a Number 
 to be the requir'd Root, and try, by involving it to the givea 
 Power, whether it be too great (r e) or too little (r -{- e ;) aud 
 proceed as before, to determine the Value of a. 
 
 As the Student will have Occafion, in the following Mathema- 
 tical Part, to make ufe of Logarithms, before I finifh'this Intro- 
 duction tp Algebra, I mail, in this Place, prefent him with a 
 fhort Account of the Nature of them. 
 
 The Meaning qf the Word Logarithms is properly a Number 
 of Ratios, or a Series of Numbers in Arithmetical Progreffion, fo 
 adapted to another Series of Numbers in Geometrical Progreffion, 
 as that each Term of the firft fhall be the Exponent of the Ratio 
 of its correfpondent Term to Unity in the fecond Series : And that 
 on this Principle ; for to every Addition, Subtraction, Multipli- 
 cation, or Divifion of the Logarithmic Numbers, there cor- 
 refponds a mutual Multiplication, Divifion, Involution, and E* 
 traftion of the refpeftive Terms in the Geometrical Series. Thus, 
 
 Arith. 0.1.2.3.4.5.6 . 7 . 8 . 9, sV. 
 Geom. 1 . 2 . 4 . 8 . 16. 32 . 64 . 128 . 256 .512, &c. 
 
 The Figure 2, in the firft Series, fhews the Ratios between it* 
 correfponding . Number 4 and 1, in the lower Series, are 2; the 
 Number 5, 7, 9, in the upper Series, fhew the Number of Ratios 
 between their correfponding Numbers 32, 128, 51,2, and 1 -or 
 Vrjty, in the lower Series, to bs refpeftively 5', 7, 9 ; or that 
 
 the
 
 Chap. XI. the Extraction of tbeCvBi., (sic. Root, lix 
 
 the Ratio is fo often repeated from Unity to thofe Numbers, and. 
 confequently fo often compounded in them ; or rather, that the 
 Ratio of 32 to i is compounded of 5 times the Ratio of 2 to 
 1, &c. 
 
 It is further manifeft, that the Produft of any two Terms in 
 the lower Rank, correfponds to the Sum of their refpe&ive Terms 
 in the upper Scries ; alfo if any two Numbers in the lower Series 
 be divided t u e one by the other, the Quotient thence arifing fliall 
 correfpond to the difference qf the rdpeftive Numbers, in the 
 upper Series. Thus, 
 
 Arith. r2+3=5;2+4=:6; 3+6= 9 
 Geom. J 4 X 8 = 32; 4 X 16 = 64; 8x64=512 
 Arith. I 5 3=2; 62=4; 9~~ $ = 6 
 Geon>. L32-J- 8 = 4; 64 -J- 4= 16 j 512 -j- 8 = 64 
 
 And univerfally, if four contiguous Numbers be taken in the 
 fecond Series, as the Produft of the Means is equal to the Produdt 
 of the Extremes, fp in the firft Series of the four correfponding 
 Numbers, the Sum of the Means is equal to the Sum of the 
 Extremes : Alfo the Square, Cube, cifc. of any Number, in the 
 lower Series, anfwers to double, triple, &c. the correfponding 
 Number, in the upper Series. Thus, 
 
 2 x 16 = 4 X 8 = 32; 8 X 64=16 X 32 = 512 
 1+ 4=2 + 3= 5*3+ 6= 4+ 5= 9 
 2X2=4; 4X 2= 8 ; o X 2 = o 
 4X4=16; 16x16 = 256; 1 X 1 = 1 
 
 1x3 = 3; 3 x 3 == 9 
 2X2x2 = 8; 8x8x8 = 512 
 
 It is entirely indifferent what Number is made the firft Term in 
 either Series ; for, in the firft Rank, the Terms are form'd by 
 equal Additions ; and, in the fecond, by equal Multiplication, be 
 the Ratio what it will ; therefore the firft Series will always be 
 the Logarithm of the latter. But, of all the infinite Kinds of 
 Logarithms, thofe only are adapted to common Ufe, whofe firft 
 Term is o, I, 2, 3, 4, &c. and Geometrical Series, 1, 10, 100, 
 IDOO, C5V. 
 
 For the Calculation of the Logarithms for the intermediate 
 Numbers between 1 and 10, 10 and 100, 100 and 1000, &c. 
 and alfo for the Rules which regard the Addition, Subtraction, 
 Multiplication, and Divifion of the Indices of Logarithms, I mull, 
 
 for
 
 Jx yf Introduction /c, &c. Chap. XI. 
 
 for want of Room, refer the Reader to thofe Authors, who have 
 purpofely treated this Subjecl. ; and particularly to the excellent 
 Tables of Mr. Sher^win, where, befides the Logarithms of all 
 natural Numbers, from i to i ooooo, he has alfo given the Loga- 
 rithms of Sines and Tangents, to every Degree and Minute of the 
 Quadrant. I mention Tables of Logarithms, Sines and Tan- 
 gents, becaufe the Student will have occafion for them, in the 
 following Introduction to the Mathematics ; and what Sines and 
 Tangents are, will be {hewn in a proper Place. 

 
 [ i 3 
 
 SYSTEM 
 
 O F 
 
 GEOGRAPHY. 
 
 PART I. 
 
 Mathematical Geograply. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 Geometrical Definitions and Problems. 
 
 Definition 1. 
 EOMETRY is that Science wherein we con- 
 fider the Properties of Bodies, as they confiit of 
 Length, Breadth, and Thicknefs. 
 
 ') 
 
 Definition i. 
 A Point is that in which we cbnfider neithet 
 Length, Breadth, nor Thicknefs. 
 
 Definition . 
 A right Line is a length without Breadth, being the neareft 
 Diitanct between two Points, or Places. 
 
 S Definition
 
 1 * 
 
 Geometrical P e f 
 
 INITIONS 
 
 Part L 
 
 Definition 4. 
 A curve Line, is that which lies bending between thofe Points 
 which limit its Length. There are various forts of thefe Curves, 
 of which thofc for our Purpofe {hall be defined in another Place. 
 
 Definition 5. 
 The Inclination of two right Lines, meeting in a Point, fo as 
 not to make one right Line, is called a plain Angle, which may- 
 be greater or letter. Thus, if we imagine the Lines xy, x z, hi 
 the following Scheme, to reprefent a Pair of Compaffes, 'tiseafy to 
 conceive, the further they are opened, the greater will be th 
 Angle. An Angle is ufually diftinguifhed by three Letters, of which 
 the middle expreffes the Angle ; thus yxz expreffes the Angle 
 made by the two- Lines xy, xz, meeting in the Point x. 
 
 Definition 6. 
 If we imagine the Line x z fattened by its End x, but yet fo as to 
 turn quite round, till z arrive at the 
 Point j, where it began, the Line xst 
 will defcribe a Figure called a Circle. 
 
 Definition 7* 
 The Point x is called the Centre of the 
 Circle, Line x z the Radius, ay the Dia- 
 meter, and n y r a the Periphery orCircum* 
 ference ; which is fuppofed to be divided 
 into 360 equal Parts called Degrees, and 
 
 each of thofc Degrees into 60 equal Parts called Minutes* and 
 each Minute into 60 equal Parts called Seconds. 
 
 Definition 8. 
 The Meafure of an Angle is the Arch of a Circle, defcribed 
 about the angular Point > thus, the Angle yxz, in the preceding 
 1 "Scheme, is meafured by the Arch zy, which (hews the Inclination 
 of the Lines x z, xy. 
 
 Definition 9. 
 When a right Line rx ftands upon another right Line ay, foas 
 to make equal Inclinations, or if the Arch ry be equal tor a, the 
 Line r x is faid to be perpendicular to the Line ay ; and the Angle 
 j x ra x r is called a right Angle, ox an Angle of 90 Degrees, and 
 the Space x rzy is called a Quadrant. 
 
 Definition 10. 
 
 An Angle axz, greater than 90 Degrees, is called an obtufe 
 Angle, and an Angle y x z, lefs than 90 Degrees, is called an 
 acute Angle. 
 
 DlFINiTiei*
 
 Chap. I. 
 
 and P r o i l e m s. 
 
 Definition 11. 
 A Triangle is a plain Surface bounded by three right Lines ; if 
 the three Sides are equal, or two Sides equal, or all the Sides in- 
 equal, the Triangle is called Equilateral, Ifcfceiw, or ScaJenous. 
 
 Problem I. 
 
 To defcribe an Equilateral Triangle on a given Line xy. 
 With the Diftanee xy, on the Point*, 
 defcribe the Arch r i ; ard with the fame ~^vdL-*77l 
 
 Opening qf the Compaffes, on the Point -M/yvs. 
 
 y, defcribe nrn; then join the Points ;r a, 
 y. 
 
 the thret 
 Tgether, bt 
 
 Problem II. 
 To defcnbe a Triangle, tuhofe three Sides Jhall be equal to th 
 right Lints gvugn, provided no Tivo of the. 7/, taken togett 
 lefs than the Third. 
 
 Let the given Lines be A B, C B, 
 and AC. 
 
 Upon the End of the Line A B, 
 with the Radius AC, defcribe 
 xy ; and upon the Point B, witil 
 the Radius C B, defc ibe r i : Join 
 the Points C, A, and C, B, and 
 the Thing is done. 
 
 Problem III. 
 To divide any Angle B A C into tivo equal Parts. 
 
 With any convenient Radius, 
 A B, on the Point A, defcribe the 
 Arch B C, with the fame Radius 
 on C, and B, defcribe xg, and r i ; 
 liten thro' the Interferon of thefe 
 Arche<, draw the Line A R, and 
 it will divide, the Angle as re- 
 quired. 
 
 B- i Problem
 
 * 
 
 Geometrical Definitions Part L 
 
 Problem IV. 
 To divide a right Line A B, into ttvo ejual Partt. 
 . From the Ends of A B, with any 
 Radius greater than half A B, de- 3^K,^ 
 
 fcribe the Arches xy, r i, nm, a z ; vl\ 
 
 then join the Interfeftiom H K, and ?' \~V 
 
 the Line AB wilLbe bife&ed. T ' 
 
 / 
 
 \/ 
 
 y 
 
 ~B 
 
 m 
 
 \ 
 
 Problem V. 
 
 To. retifea_ Perpsndicular n x on any ajjigned Point x in a right 
 Line A Bi 
 
 Make x z =r B x ; and with any 
 Radius B n on the Points B, z, de- 
 scribe the two fmall Arches, inter- 
 fering each other in n, afid'j'oin the 
 Points n, x, for the Perpendicular re- 
 quired. But if it were required -to 
 raifea Perpendicular BC on or near the 
 End of a right Line, it may be done 
 more conveniently thus ; with any 
 Radius Br at Pleafure, defer ibe a 
 Circle thro' B. Draw nur h, and 
 then the Perpendicular thro' h and B, 
 
 Problem VI. 
 
 To let fall a Perpendicur C x upon a given right Line A B, frovt 
 
 any ajjigned Point that is not in it, as from C. 
 
 With any convenient Radius on C 
 tdefcribe'*//; with the fame Radius on 
 the Points d,f, defcribe the two fmall 
 Arches, interfering in R, and join the 
 Points C, R. 
 
 PrOBLIM
 
 Chap. I. * ewd Proue m s. 
 
 Problem VII. 
 
 To ifurJce ax Angle A at the End of a given right Line A E, equal 
 to a given Angle C. 
 
 With any Radius C F, on the Point 
 C, defcribc FD; and with the fame 
 Radius on' the Point A defcribe/V;. 
 
 then make/// equal to F D, and draw _ 
 the Line A/; the Angle dAfy\il\^ 
 be equal to the_ Angle DCF. 
 
 F 
 
 A 
 
 Definition 12. 
 
 Parallel Lines are thofe, that when infinitely extended in the 
 fame Plane, will never meet ; or, when all the perpendicular Lines 
 between them are of equal Lengths. 
 
 Problem VIII. 
 To drav: a right Line E R parallel to a given right Line A B 
 thro'' a glveit Point x. 
 From any Point in the Line A B, 
 draw the Line D x, and at the 
 Point x, make the Angle*- An- 
 gle D, per laft Problem, and E x R 
 will be parallel ta the given Line 
 
 db. 
 
 Definition 13, 
 A Square is a Figure, whole Limits are four equal Sides, per* 
 pendiculer ro one another. 
 
 Problem IX. 
 To form a Square upon a given Line A E. 
 
 Make B C perpendicular,, and- 
 equal to A B ; and with the Ra- 
 dius A B, on the Points A and 
 
 C, defcribe the fmall Arches intcr- 
 fel ing in D ; then join the Points 
 
 D, A, and D, C, and the thing is 
 d.one... 
 
 $3 
 
 
 Dehni-
 
 6 Geometrical Definitions Part I. 
 
 Definition 14. 
 A Parallelogram is a Figure contained under four Sides, whereof 
 the two oppoiite a* parallel : When the Angles are all right ones, 
 it is called a Rectangle ct rectecgular Parallelogram, 
 
 Problem X. 
 To farm a Reclangle from any r<a*> unequal Lines given. 
 Let the given Lines be _ 
 
 AB, B C; upon B raife a Per- / ^ I - 
 
 pendicularrrB C ; with tfta Af ^ 
 Radius AB, on C defcribe X 
 b ; and with the Radius D 
 B C, on the Point A, defcribe 
 xy ; then joining the Points 
 D, A, andD, C, the Rect- 
 angle ADCB will be com- 
 pleted. 
 
 : 
 
 B 
 
 G 
 
 A F 
 
 DEFINITION !. 
 
 A Rhombus is a Figure that has four equal Sides, but no right 
 Angle. 
 
 Definition 16. 
 A Rhombfiides is afi oblique-angled Parallelogram, as D F G C 
 in the lafl Sheme. Thefe two Figures are defcribed as the two pre- 
 ceding, only inftead of raifwg Perpendiculars, the given Angles muft 
 be fet ok. 
 
 Problem XI. 
 
 To defcribe a Circle that aiill pafs tbro y any thret given ToinU x 
 A, B, C, not lying in a right Line. 
 
 Join the Points A , B j C, A ; then, 
 
 byProblem 4, bifed the Lines A B, 
 
 AC, by the Perpendiculars My, -* * i 
 
 an d the Point of Interferon O, will 
 
 be the Cen trerequired. 
 
 Corollaries. 
 
 1. Hence we may find the Centre 
 of any given Circle, by taking any 
 three Points in the Periphery. 
 
 2. Hence, having a Part of a Clfde, 
 we may complete the Circle. 
 
 Pr.osLE.* XII. 
 
 To cirtumfcribe a Circle about a Triangle A B C, fee the lafl Scheme. 
 
 This is performed in all refpefts like the laft, <0ix. by defcribing 
 j C: rcle- thro 1 the angular Poin A, B, C. This
 
 Chap. I. 
 
 and. P ro l e ms. 
 
 Problem XIII. 
 To divide any Line A B into any Kutr.ber of equal Part'. 
 
 Draw the Line 
 B C at Pleafure, 
 and make the An- 
 gle DABrrrto An- 
 gieCBAj and with 
 any Opening of the 
 Compafs let off 
 from B, as many 
 equal Parts upon 
 the Line B C, as 
 you intend todivide 
 the Line A B into, 
 fuppofe five : Then 
 from the Point A, 
 fet off the fcme 
 Number upon the 
 Line A D ; and 
 joining the Points of Divifion, the Line A B is divided into Five 
 equal Parts. 
 
 Problem XIV. 
 
 To defcribe a Square about any Circle, and to inferibe the largeji it 
 can contain. 
 
 Draw the Diameters AC, B D, per- 
 pendicular to each other, and EF, HG, 
 G E, H F, perpendicular to A C and 
 B D ; alfodraw B C, CD, D A, AB: 
 Then G E F H and A B C D are the 
 Squares required. 
 
 Definition 17. 
 A regular Polygon is a Figure that jj 
 has equal Sides, ftaoding at equal An- 
 gles, and has a particular Name from 
 
 the Number of Sides, as a 5 fided one is called a Pentagon, 6a 
 Hexagon, 7 a Heptagon, cifc. And a Figure that has many unequal 
 Sides, {landing at unequal Angles, is called an irregular Polygon. 
 
 Definition 18. 
 A right Line BO, perpendicular on the Extremity of a Diain; 
 ter A B, meeting with a right Line xO, drawn from the Centric 
 *, it called the Tangent of the Arch B ; ; and th? Line a- O i> 
 
 B 4 called
 
 Geometrical Definitions 
 
 Part L 
 
 s 
 
 O 
 
 called the Secant ; and the Perpendicular ie, let fall from the Point 
 of Interferon i, on the Radius x B, is called the right Sine of the 
 Arch B x ; the Part e B, of the Diame- 
 ter contained between the Sine ie, 
 and the Arch, is called the verfed 
 Sine ; and the Radius of a Circle is /'' G. 
 
 called the Sine total, becaufe it is the 
 greatelt Sine of the Circle. 
 
 Definition 
 
 Al * 
 
 
 -^B 
 
 19. 
 
 What an Arch wants of 90 De- \ 
 
 grees, is called its Complement ; what ' "'' 
 
 ft wants of 1 80, its Supplement. Thus the Arch, S i is the Com- 
 plement, and Ax the Supplement of Bx', 
 
 Definition 20. 
 The Sine i a. Tangent S r, and Secant xr, of an Arch's Com- 
 plement, is called the Co-Sine, Co-Tangent, or Co-Secant. An 
 Arch Bx, and its Supplement At, have the fame Sine, Tangent, 
 aiid Secant ; that is, ie, B O, and^-O. 
 
 Definition 21. 
 
 A Cylinder E B C F is a Figure made By 
 moving a Rectangle A DCB about one of 
 its Sides A D, till it return to the fame Place 
 where it began firit to move ; and that quie'- 
 fcent right Line A D,about which the Rectan- 
 gle is turned, is called the Axis of the Cylin- 
 der. 
 
 Definition 22. 
 
 A Cone A C D is a Solid bounded 
 byone circular Plane, (DbCk, called 
 its B.ife) and an infinite Number of 
 right Lines drawn from the Periphery '' 
 to a Point A above that Plane. The 
 Line A B joining the faid Point (at 
 the Top or Vertex) and the Centre - 
 of the Circle is called the Axis of the 
 Cone. If the Axis be. perpendicular 
 to the Bafe, then it is called a right 
 Cone ; but if not perpendicular, a 
 fcalene Cone. A right Cone is gene- 
 rated "by the Rotation of a right angled Triangle ABC, about cue 
 of its Sides A B, including the Right-angle. Definition
 
 Chap. 1. 
 
 and Problems, 
 
 
 
 Definition 23. 
 
 If a right Cone A C D be cut by a Plane a rev, (fee the laft 
 Scheme) that cuts both its Sides, but not parallel to its Bale, D C hi, 
 jhe Piane of that Sedtion, is called an ElHpiis. And any right Line^ 
 that divides the Ellipfis into two equal Parts, is called a Diameter, 
 whereof thelongeft (a e) is called the tranfverfe Axis, and the Ihorteft 
 (r 1) the conjugate Axis, interfering the Tranfverfe at right Angles, 
 in the Centre of the EllipCs. All right Lines within the Ellipfis, 
 that are parallel to any Diameter, are called Ordinates. 
 
 Problem XV. 
 
 To defcribe an Ellipfis, having its tranfverfe and conjugate Dia- 
 Diameters. given. 
 
 Draw N n at right Angle^ __.. N 
 
 to the middle of the Tranfverfe ...-"" 
 
 sTS; then fet off half the /'"' '">. B 
 
 conjugate Diameter from C to 
 
 N, and in N C produced, take '' I 
 
 \.v-TC; then take any \ r / 
 
 Point betweenC, x at Pleafure, \ ^ 
 
 fuppofe at G ; and from the ><> ^-" 
 
 Point G, fet off the Di- ;, 
 
 fiance IC x to T S, as at E, and 
 
 draw GEB making E BN C : And taking Points in the Line 
 C x, in this manner, we may draw as many Lines as we pleafe ;. 
 through whofe extreme Points, as at B, with an even Hand, the 
 Ellipfis may be defcribed. 
 
 Definition 24. 
 A Sphere or Globe is a folid Body, having all the Points in its 
 Surface equally dillant from a Point within, called the Centre. A 
 Globe is generated by the Rotation of a Semicircle about it* 
 Diameter. 
 
 Definition 25. 
 
 Reduction in Geometry, is a Converfion of one geometrical Fi- 
 gure into another, and yet to preferve the fame Magnitude. 
 
 Problem XVI. 
 To reduce a Rett angle A B D C to a Square. 
 
 Make BG-B D-f-D C; bifedl B G, .,-:/";:-...l 
 
 and defcribe the Semicircle GIB; raiie * A 
 
 I D perpendicular to B G, en the Point 
 
 D ; then I D is the Side of the Square u \ \ 
 
 T 
 
 IP* 
 
 1 
 J... 
 
 D 
 Problem 
 
 ~iG
 
 i o Geometrical Definitions Part L 
 
 Problem XVII. 
 
 To reduce a Square to a reiiangular Parolltlogram, <vohafe Length 
 
 or Breadth is given. 
 
 Let the Square be A BCD, -i 
 and DE the Breadth of the Pa- 
 rallelogram required. Make 
 D/-D E j draw B/; bifeft 
 By in i; produce C D, and 
 on the Point k draw i k per- 
 pendicular to B/, and inter- 
 feeling C H in i ; make i H 
 
 equal to/ i; then form the Parallelogram D E L H, required by 
 Problem X. 
 
 Problem XVUL 
 To reduce a Triangle to a Square. 
 
 Let die Triangle be ABC. Let fall 
 B d perpendicular to A C ; bifect B d in 
 *, and make A F=:A C-\-de ; then bi- 
 fect AF, and defcribe the Semicircle 
 A h F ; raife the Perpendicular C h on 
 the Point C ; then C h is the Side of 
 the Square C z, required. 
 
 Problem XIX. 
 
 To reduce any regular Polygon to a Square, fuppofe an ORagon. 
 
 Let the Octagon be / 
 
 crh d ; and from the 
 Centre thereof let fall 
 xz perpendicular to the 
 Side ee; make cf 
 xz, and dcto j the ' ,- 
 Perimeter, that is, c i / 
 -\-ir-\-rs-y-sk (and : 
 fo \ the Perimeier of rji... 
 any regular Polygon): 
 And on df defcribe a Semicircle ; then on the Point r raife the- 
 Perpendicular^ c, which is the Side of the Square required. 
 
 Problem XX. 
 To reduce a Circle to a Square nearly equal. 
 Let A B be the Diameter of the 
 given Circle, which Line A B 
 divide into 14 equal Parts, per 
 Problem XIII ; on the Point d, 
 which is 1 1 Parts from A, raife 
 
 j C ; then draw A C, the Si x A* 7 
 
 of tic Square neV, _ ^^
 
 Chap, I. 
 
 and P R <5 B L S M S. 
 
 II 
 
 Probiem XXI. 
 To reduce a Square ABED (o a Circle nearly equal. 
 
 Divide A B> the Side of the given 13 
 Square, into 14 equal Parts ; bifeCi 
 A B, and defcribe the Semicircle 
 A / B i on 11 of thofe Parts from A, 
 that is, the Point C, raife C* perpen- / 
 dicukr to A B ; draw the Line A i b> 
 which will be the Diameter of a 
 Circle, nearly equal to the given 
 Square. 
 
 Definition 26. 
 
 Addition in Geometry is the bringing of feveral Figures into 
 one, that fhali be equal to them all. 
 
 Problem XXII, 
 To add two Squares together. 
 Let the Sides of two Squares be A B, . 
 A C : Raife A B on the Point A per- A 
 pendicular to the Line C A ; then draw 1 
 fhe Line C B, which will be the Side 1* 
 of a Square, equal to the Sum of the 
 Squares of the other two given Lines. . 
 
 Problem XXIII. 
 To add feveral Squares together. 
 Let the Lines, 
 which reprefent the 
 Sides of four given 
 Squares be A B,C,D ; 
 defcribe the right / n 
 gle E G n at Plea- 
 sure i fet off A from 
 G to h, and B from 
 G to f'j then draw 
 hi. Set off hi frcm 
 G to /, and C from 
 
 G to i ; then draw m / t 
 
 kl. Set off k I from G to n, and D from G tow; then * a is the 
 Side of a Square equal to the four given ones. 
 
 Problim
 
 15 
 
 Geometrical . D j.pikitions 
 
 Part, r, 
 
 Problem XXIV. 
 To add two Circles together. 
 
 Let the Diameters of the Circles f^ 
 be A B," A C ; raife A B on the Point , 
 A perpendicular to the Line-CA^ ^ 
 then draw the Line C B, which will 
 be the Diameter of a Circle equal to 
 the two given Circles. In hke man- 
 ner may feveral Circles be added to- 
 gether, as the Squares were in the la# 
 Problem. 
 
 Problem XXV. 
 To add t<uio"P uraMelograms- together* 
 
 F:rft, .Reduce the two. given Parallelograms to two Square?, by 
 Problem XVI ; then the Sum of thefe Squares is found by Pro- 
 blem XXII. 
 
 Problem XXVI. 
 
 To add feveral Figures together, fupfofe a Square, a Parallelogram^ 
 and.(u. 'It tangle. 
 
 FIrff, Reduce the Triangle to a Square, by Problem XVIII. 
 and the Parallelogram to a Square, by Problem XVI. then, by 
 Problem XXIII. the Sum of all l;he three Squares may be found. 
 
 i 
 Definition 27. 
 
 Subtraction in Geometry, is the taking a letter Figure out of a 
 greater, and to give the Remainder in a rjiird. 
 
 .Problem XXVII. 
 To fuhtrad one right line from another. 
 
 Let the given Lines be AC, CB ; 
 wrth the Radius CB. defcribe a Cir- 
 cle ; and from the Ce n tre C-fet off 
 A C ; then ^11 A D= A C- C B 
 be the. DtSbrenb^ required? 
 
 lb 
 
 c- 
 A- 
 
 B 
 
 
 A- 
 
 D 
 
 } 
 
 v, 
 
 --. 
 
 ,....- 
 
 w 
 
 Jxn O 
 
 A 
 
 i 
 
 Problem
 
 Chap. I. And Problems." 
 
 Problem XXVIII. 
 To fubtraS one Square from another. 
 
 Let A B be the Side of the greater 
 Square, bifett A B, and defcribe the 
 Semicircle ACB; fet off the Side 
 B C, of the other given Square, from 
 B to C, and draw A C, which is the 
 Side of the Square required ; that is, 
 AB- BCT AC". 
 
 Problem XXIX. 
 To fubtrati one Circle from another. 
 
 Let A B be the Diameter of the 
 greater Circle ACBD ; fet off BC, the 
 Diameter of the lefier Circle, from B / >** 
 to C, and draw A C, which will be 
 the Diameter of a Circle, which is the 
 Difference of the given Circles. 
 
 n 
 
 -\c 
 
 D 
 
 Problem XXX. 
 
 To fubtraSl a Triangle from a Square. ] 
 
 Let A B C D be the Square, and 
 HSC the Triangle : Bifeft H S in Q^ -\ 
 and make RQT parallel to BC, and 
 H r perpendicular to BC ; then will 
 HCRrbc equal to HSC } which to 
 reduce to the Length BC, draw TC, 
 cutting H r in a ; and thro' a, draw 
 b a c parallel to BC; then will 
 A b c D be the Difference between 
 the Square and Triangle. 
 
 Definition 28. 
 
 Multiplication in (Geometry is nothing more than of two Lines 
 given to produce a Square or Rectangle. The two given Lines 
 may be formed into a Re&angic, or Square, by Problem IX. and X. 
 The Space bounded by the four Sides is called the Product, or Rect- 
 angle, of the Multiplication. 
 
 Definition 29. 
 
 Divifion by Geometry, is to determine how many times one 
 geometrical Figure u contained in another. 
 
 ' Problem
 
 r4 
 
 Geometrical Definitions Part. I 
 
 Problem XXXI. 
 To divide a Parallelogram by a Parallelogram. 
 
 To perform this, abdC the leflfer 
 muft be reduced to the Length or 
 Breadth B C of the greater ABDC, 
 by Problem XXX ; then as often as 
 DC contains r d, the Breadth of the 
 lefTer fo reduced, fo often the greater 
 ABDC contains the lefler Parallelo- 
 gram, abQd. 
 
 Problem XXXII. 
 To di-vidt a Square and Parallelogram by a Triangle end Hex' 
 
 agon. 
 
 In order to perform this, and all other Problems of this Nature, 
 the Divifor and Dividend muft be reduced both to one Length or 
 Breadth. Thus the Parallelogram muft be reduced to a Square, by- 
 Problem XVI. then the two Squares muft be added together, by- 
 Problem XXII. for a Dividend ; alfo the Hexagon muft be reduced 
 to a Square, by Problem XIX. and the Triangle to a Square, by 
 Problem XVIIL then the Sum of thefe Squares, found by Problem 
 XXII. will be the Divifor. Laftly, Let the Divifor be reduced 
 to the Length, or Breadth, of the Dividend, proceeding as in the laft 
 Problem. 
 
 PROBLIM XXXill. 
 Between two right Lines D C, C B, to find a mean Prefab 
 
 tiosal. 
 
 Draw any Line D at pleafure, 
 and take therein DE equal to the 
 Sum of the given Lines DC, CE; u 
 on D E, as a Diameter, defcribe the 
 Semicircle D x E ; raife C x perpen- 
 dicular to DE ; then C x will be the 
 mean Proportional required ; that is, 
 CxxCx-DCxCE. 
 
 Problem XXXIV. 
 
 Two right Lines being j. _ _ _ 
 
 given, to find a third in ' 
 
 proportion to them. 
 
 A- ~ 
 
 D 
 
 Make
 
 Chap. II. and P bl o b i e w s. 15 
 
 Make the Angle E A F at E 
 
 Pleafure. On the Point A, fet 
 off A D from A to D, and AC 
 from A to C ; make A Err AC, 
 and draw DC. From the Point 
 E draw E F parallel to D C ; 
 then A F is the third Proper- A C f 1 
 
 tional required ; that is, AD : 
 AC:: AC: A F. 
 
 Problem XXXV. 
 
 Three right Lines given, f A tMte -j ^ 
 
 to find a fourth in propor- < A < > Given. 
 
 tion to them. C A " "B y 
 
 At Pleafure make the Angle 
 DAE ; fet off A B, A C ; draw ~ 
 
 B C, and fet off A D ; then if we *}, 
 
 draw D E, parallel to B C, A E is / \ \ 
 
 the Line required ; that is, A B : 
 
 AC::AD:AE. Zl : ^ i- 
 
 A C p. 
 
 CHAP. II. 
 
 Geometrical Theorems. 
 
 Theorem I. 
 
 THE Angles made, by one right Line falling upon another 
 right Line, are either two right Angles, or two Angles equal 
 to two right Angles. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 Let the Lir.es be A B, DC, meet- 
 ing in the Point C ; upon C defenbe 
 the Semicircle ADB, which exactly 
 meafures "<, b and "<, t ; that is, 
 A D-j-D B - 1 8o. 
 
 CoROtLARlt:. 
 
 1. Hence, all the Angles, made at the fame Point C, on the 
 &me Side of a right Line A B, are equal to two right Angles. 
 
 2. If \6 90 ; then "^ t^ } but if ^ b be obtule, then 
 \e wall be acu;e
 
 i6 
 
 Geometrical Theorems. 
 
 PiartL 
 
 Theorem II. 
 
 The oppofite Angles made by two right Lines A B, D E, inter- 
 fering each other in C, are equal. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 For the Angles A x E and D e B, 
 contain what is wanting in the 
 Angle AzD, to make two right 
 Angles, per laft Theorem ; that is, 
 <D*B (-h^Az.D) r=^ 
 A*E (4-^AzD)-= 180* 
 
 Corollary. 
 Hence all the Angles, about any Point, are equal to four right 
 Angles, or 360 . 
 
 Theorem III: 
 The oppofite Angles, made by a right Line, interfering two or 
 more parallel Lines, are equal to one another. 
 
 . Demonstration. 
 Suppofe the two Lines A B, 
 H K, to be parallel, and the right 
 Line D G, to interfect them both 
 at a and r. Then, as L the. two 
 Parallels may be taken foe one 
 Line << e ^y; per the laft } 
 alfo ^ a =: \ f , and ^ x 
 "<^y , being oppofite ; therefore 
 
 confequently the obilufe Angles 
 are alfo equal, per Laft. 
 
 Theorem IV. 
 The oppofite Angles in any Parallelogram are equal. 
 Demonstration. 
 
 Let A B D C be the given Parallelo- J 1 r^B 
 
 gram ; draw CB. Then fince A B is 
 parallel to C D, ^ ABC = ^\ BCD, 
 and AC being parallel to BD, ^ ACB, 
 - ^ CBD, per. laft ; confequently ^ 
 ' ACD = ^ ABD. In like manner, ic 
 may be proved, that "<\ A ^ D. 
 
 gram 
 
 Corollary. 
 
 Hence a Triangle BDCis half its circumfcribing Parallelo- 
 ABCD, Theorem
 
 Chap. II. Geometrical Theorems. 
 
 17 
 
 Theorem V. 
 If any Side of a Triangle be produced, the external Angle Will 
 be equal to the' Sum of the two inward oppofue Angles. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 
 In the Triangle ABC, let A B be produced to x : 
 
 Thro' the Point z, \ ..- 
 
 draw D z parallel to 
 AC; then^ C* D 
 = \C, and ^ D z 
 x "<s A per Theor. 
 III. confequently "^ 
 
 Cz* = -^a 4- jf\ y \ 
 
 Theorem VI. 
 
 The three Angles of any plain Triangle are equa^ to two right 
 Angles, or 180 . 
 
 Demonstration. 
 Let the Side A B be pro- 
 duced to x ; upon the Point 
 B defcribe a Semicircle ; then 
 ^Z=^A-4-^C,/-laftj 
 
 but ^ Z -f- <, B 1 8o per /A I B\Z \ JC 
 
 Theor. I. confequently "\ A 
 
 Corollaries. 
 i. Hence, if one Angle of a plain Triangle be given, the Sum of 
 the other two Angles is alfo given ; for 1 8o the given Anglers 
 the other two. 
 
 2. Hence alfo in a plainTriangle, if one Anglerr^b , the other 
 two are 90 ; and if one be to the other two, that Angle zzz 
 90 . 
 
 3. Hence likewifc, when two Angles of any Triangle are giveri, 
 the other "^ is alfo given ; for 1 80 the given Angles r= ^ re- 
 quired. 
 
 4. Hence alfo, the two acuteAngles of a Right-angled Triangle 
 are 90 ; and if one be giveri, the other is alfo given ; for 90" 
 the given "^ leaves the other ^, 
 
 Tueo
 
 i8 
 
 Geometrical Theorems. 
 
 PartL 
 
 Thdrem VII. 
 
 If a Triangle A B C has two Sides A B, A C, equal to two Sides 
 ab, a c, of another Triangle abc ; and if \ A t,a; then 
 BC-i f) ^B=\^ ^ C ^ c, and the Triangle ABC 
 rr a b c. 
 
 Demonstration, 
 
 If we imagine theTriangle abc to be 
 placed upon ABC, fo that a b lie exact- 
 ly on its Equal A B ; then will a c fall 
 exactly on its Equal A C, becaufe 
 ^Ar: "^ a ; confequently "^ c will 
 fall on ^ C, "^ b upon ^ B ; there- 
 fore the whole Triangles will exaftly 
 agree, and be equal to each other in every 
 refpett. 
 
 Theorem VIII. 
 In any plain Triangle, equal Sides are oppofite to equal Angjes. 
 That is, if B C 3= C D, then ^Brz^D. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 Let C A bifedl the Angle C ; theit 
 C D being = C B, ^ B C A = ^ 
 D C A, and C A common to both the 
 Triangles, B C A, DC A ; the Angles 
 B, D, muft alfo be equal, per laft. 
 
 Corollaries, 
 i . Hence, the three Angles of every equilateral Triangle are 
 equal to one another. 
 
 2. Hence, if the Sides of two Triangles are equal, the Angles 
 oppofite to thofe equal Sides will be equal . 
 
 3. Hence, the greater Angle is fubtended by the greater Side. 
 
 Theorem IX. 
 
 An Angle at the Centre of any Circle is always double to the 
 Angle at the Periphery, when both ftand upon the fame Arch. 
 
 Demon-
 
 Chap. II. Ge9metrical Theorems, 
 
 *9 
 
 Demonstration 
 Suppofe "<, B C A at the Centre, 
 "<, B D A at the Periphery ; then 
 \ACB = "^ADB-|-\DB 
 C, per Theorem V. but D C = 
 C B, the oppofite Angles are there- 
 fore equal, per laft ; confequently 
 VCBrz^ADB. In like 
 Manner it may be proved, that 
 ^ACF- i^ADFj there- 
 fore ^BCF (= < S BCA + 
 ^ACF) = z\BDF (2 ^ 
 ADB + 2^ADFj. 
 
 Corollaries. 
 
 i . Hence, all the Angles at the Periphery, Handing on the fame 
 or equal Arches, are equal one to another. 
 
 2. Henc- alfo, the Meafure of an Angle at the Periphery is i- 
 the Arch it ftands upon ; for B A meafures ^ACB r: i. <^ 
 ADB. 
 
 Theorem X. 
 All Parallelograms, ACDB, aCT>b, that: {land upon the 
 fame Bafe CD, and between the fame Parallels, Cf, kbt are 
 equal to one another. 
 
 Demonstration; 
 Becaufe AB = CD=i, by 
 Suppofition ; therefore A C a rr B D A^ B & 
 
 b; and ABxC (=AC-B) 
 -=abT>x (BDb Bxa): Con- 
 fequently ABCD ( = A B* C~h 
 C*D)=a4DC ( el>Dx~i- 
 QxD). 
 
 COROLLAIY. 
 
 Hence Triangles, ( being half their circumfcribing Parallelo- 
 grams ) which itend upon the fame or equal Bafcs, and have the 
 lame Height, are equal to one another ; for if the Wholes be 
 equal, their Halves are alfo equal. 
 
 Thsorem XI. 
 
 In any Right-angled Triangle, the Square H H of the Hypo* 
 thenufe is equal to the Squares of the other two Sides, BB-f-CC. 
 
 C * 
 
 Dl.MOJf
 
 20 
 
 Geometrical Theorems. Part I, 
 
 Demonstration. 
 
 J, 
 
 ^iti\ 
 
 y\--.3& 
 
 \ \ c- 
 ( cc L 
 
 /JBB 
 
 "7 
 
 On the Side? of the 
 Right-angled Triangle 
 b c a, form the Squares, 
 and draw the dotted 
 Lines, as 1 " you fee in the 
 Figure ; and let m a be 
 perpendicular to d y. 
 Then K^fbc {^.fba 
 *-\-< K abc) '<^yba, 
 (=<^ybc-\-^*bc} 
 and the Side )bbc y 
 alfo ba^zfb; there- 
 fore y b a /* c per 
 The. VII. Confequent- 
 hyfbag(=2fbc = 
 2 y b a, per Corol. to 
 the hft Theor. ) 3= by 
 jn x. In like Manner 
 it may be proved, that xmdcmacih-, confequently by d c ( 
 bymx-\-xmdc) zzzf b ag-\~ ac ih. 
 
 COROLLART. 
 
 Hence, HH BB=:CC; and HH- CC = BB; alfo 
 BB-|-CC=r:HH: Therefore, the Roots of thefe Equations 
 give the Side required. 
 
 Theorem XII. 
 
 In any Right-angled Triangle ABC, a Perpendicular being let 
 fall from the Right Angle upoa the Hypothenufe B C, will divide 
 the Triangle into two Triangles, which will be both fimilar or 
 like to the firfh and to each other ; that is, their Angle* will be 
 refpe&ively equal. ) 
 
 Demonstration. 
 
 The Triangles BAP, 
 CAP, have each one Right 
 Angle; and ^ B, ^ C, 
 common with the Triangle 
 B A C j therefore, per Cor. 
 3. to Theor. V. the Angles 
 
 of the Triangles BAP, CAP, B PC 
 
 are refpe&ively equal to thofe of the Triangle B A Ci and COR : 
 ftqucntly refpeftively equal to each other. 
 
 0r, 
 
 A
 
 Chap. II. Geometrical Theorems. 21 
 
 Or, if a Right Line xx be drawn parallel to one of the Sides of 
 any Right-angled Triangle, the Triangles BAC, x A z, will be 
 ftiiylar or equiangular, per Theor. VLLL 
 
 Corollary. 
 Hence all the Angles of two Triangles may be equal, and their 
 oppofite Sides unequal : But if all the Sides of two Triangles are 
 equal, the Angles oppofite to thofe equal Sides will be equal, per 
 Cor. 2. to Theor. VII. 
 
 Theorem XIII. 
 
 If two Triangles ABC, a be, are fimilar, their like Sides will 
 be proportional. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 
 Let the Triangles A BC, abc, 
 be circumfcribed by two Circles ; 
 then fince ^B ACr's^f, per 
 Theor. III. the Arch B C contains 
 the fame Number of Degrees as the 
 Arch b c, confequently the Chord 
 B C is to the Chord b c, as the 
 Radius of the Circle ABC to' the 
 Radius of the Q\yz\tabc, that is 
 the greater the Radius, the greater 
 the Circle; and confequently the 
 greater the Chord of any particu- 
 lar Arch in proportion. Therefore, A B 
 :AC::ab:ac. A C : B C : : a c : be. 
 
 <B. 
 
 AB 
 
 Theorem XIV. 
 If the Diameter of a Circle be the Side of a Triangle, and the 
 Triangle be contained in a Semicircle, the Angle oppofite to the 
 Diameter is a Right Angle. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 Let A B be the Diameter, and 
 A B C the Triangle ; then ^ A C B 
 Hands upon the Arch ArB= 1 80 ; 
 but \AC B A rzzyo, per Cor. 2. 
 to Theor. IX. a \ 
 
 v. i y 
 
 K . n a 4< 
 
 C3 
 
 Theo-
 
 It 
 
 Geometrical Theorems. 
 
 Part I. 
 
 Theorem XV. 
 
 If two Right Lines interfeft each other in a Circle, tne Rect- 
 angle of the Parts of one is equal to the Re&angle of the Parts of 
 the other. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 
 i. If neither of the Lines xy, a e, 
 pafs thro' the Centre C : Join x a, 
 and ey ; then "^ x r a y r e, per 
 Theor. II. and "*\ a -^z^y, "*^x 
 ^.e, perQor. I . to Theor. IX. there- 
 fore, per Theor. XIII. ar : xr : : ry fll. 
 : r e ; confequently a r X r e x r X 
 
 2. If one of the Lines n m paffes 
 thro' the Centre C, and bifefts the 
 other Line ep ; then ~<^mpn r= 90, per laft Theor. and the 
 Triangles mp i, pni are fimilar, per Theor. XII. confequently, 
 per Theor. XIII. mi: ip : : ip '. ni ', therefore miy.ni ip 
 ( ei) Xip. 
 
 Theorem XVI. 
 
 If two Right Lines in a Circle, when continued, meet with- 
 out the Circle, the Rectangle of one whole Line and its Part 
 without the Circle will be "equal to the Reftangle of the other 
 whole Line, and it? Part out of the Circle. That is, A Z X C Z 
 = DZxBZ. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 
 Draw A B, CD; then will 
 the Triangles C Z D, BZA, 
 be fimilar j for "^ A r= ^ D, 
 per Cor. 1. |to Theor. IX. and 
 "^Z is common } alfo "^ABZ 
 = ^DCZ,/^ Cor. 3. to 
 Theor. VI. confequently, per 
 Theor. XIII. ,\Z ; B Z : : D Z 
 : C Z ; therefore A Z X C Z 
 BZxDZ. 
 
 Theorem XVII. 
 The oppofite Angles of a Trapezium, infcrib'd in a Circle, are 
 equal to two Right Angles. 
 
 Pemon--
 
 Chap. II. Geometrical Theorems. 
 
 23 
 
 Demonstration. 
 In the Trapezium A BCD, 5 
 <he Arch ACDzr-^B; and i 
 the A rch ABD-\C; there- 
 fore ^ B H- "^ C = 1 8a In 
 like Manner ^ A -f- ^ D = 
 180. 
 
 Theorem XVIII. 
 
 Triangles ( and consequently Parallelograms ) between the fame 
 ( or equidiflant ) Parallels, are one to another as their Bafes. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 Let the Bafes B C, CD, D E, 
 tx equal ; and A O parallel to 
 B E. Then, per Cor. to Theor. 
 X. BHCr=CHD=DHE 
 therefore CHE= 2DHE 
 C Ez D E ; B H E 3DHE 
 B E = 3 D E. Confequendy 
 BHE: DH;:BE:DE. 
 
 Theorem XIX. 
 The Chord of 60 Degrees is equal to the Radius of that Circle 
 whereof it is a Chord. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 
 Let A E B be the Arch, and 
 A B theChord of 6o, of the Circle 
 A B x D. Draw D B, C A j then 
 CBrrCA; therefore ^B ^ 
 A, per Theor. VIII. and ^D C A 
 = ^ B -f- <, A, per Theor. 
 VI. vik. i8o tf 60 =r 12a; 
 therefore ^ACBr: ^A = 
 *\ B ; confequendy ACr AS 
 = B C, per Theorem VIII. 
 
 Corollart. 
 
 Hence we fee the Reafon why 60" is taken from the Line of 
 Chords, on any Scale, for the Radius of a Circle fuued to that 
 Scale. C 4 Thto-
 
 H 
 
 Geometrical Theorems. 
 Theorem XX. 
 
 Fart I. 
 
 The Triangles formed by the Radius X Z, Sine Z Y, and Co- 
 fine X Y, of an Arch ; as alfo by the Radius X O, Tangent R O, 
 and Secant X R ; and laftly, by the Radius X E, Co-tangent E K, 
 and Co-fecant X N, of the fame Arch O Z, are all fimilar, and 
 confequently their Sides are proportional. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 Produce E N to I ; then ^INR = 
 ^XNE, per Theor. II. and ^ O X R 
 - I N R, per Theor. IH. Confequently 
 ^OXR^^XNE; ^O ^E 
 = 90; and ^ R ^NXE, per 
 Corol. 3. to Theor. VI. confequently the 
 "Triangles X R O, X N E, are fimilar. 
 Again, ^ O = ^ Y r= 90 , and ^ 
 Y X Z common ; therefore the Triangles 
 O X R, Y X Z, X E N, are fimilar j and 
 confequently their Sides are in proportion te OHe another, per 
 Theorem XIII. 
 
 Scholium. 
 This excellent Theorem exhibits the Rationale of all the Pro- 
 portions ufed in all the Operations of plain a?nd fpherical Trigo- 
 nometry. 
 
 Corollaries. 
 1. Hence, if the Hypothenufe XZ of any Right-angled Tri- 
 angle X Y Z be the Radius, the Sides X Y, Z Y, will be Sines ; 
 for Y Z is the Sine of the Arch Z O, and X Y A Z the Sine 
 of the Arch E Z. 
 
 ?. Hence alfo, if the Perpendicular X O of any Right-angled 
 Triangle X O R be made Radius, the Side X R will be the Secant, 
 and O R the Tangent of the Arch O Z. 
 
 3. If the Bafe X E of any Right-angled Triangle X E N be 
 made Radius, the Perpendicular E N will be a Tangent, and the 
 Hypothenufe X N a Secant of the Arch E Z. 
 
 4. The Radius C D and A 
 Sine D E pf an Arch being 
 given, the Co -fine CE-DF 
 is alfo given j for CD J 
 D E 2 = C E 2 , per Corollary 
 to Theorem XI. 
 
 5. The Radius C D, and 
 Sine D E, being given, the 
 Sine of half the Arch is alfo 
 given; for CD z -DE 2 rr 
 C E\ and C 3 C E = E B
 
 Chap. II. Geometrical Theorems. 25 
 
 the verfed Sine, and D E 2 -f- E B 2 = B D 2 , and Half of B D 
 is the Sine of the Arch DLrr^DLB, bitefted by C L. 
 
 6. The Radius C B, and Sine B M, of any Arch B L, being 
 given, the Sine of double that Arch is alfo given ; for C M is 
 found per Corollary to Thecr. XI. and ^E ^Mr: 90, 
 alfo "^ B common ; therefore, per Corol. 3. to Theorem V. the 
 Triangles C B*M, DEB, are iimilar : Confequently, per Theor. 
 XIII. CB:CM ::DB ( = 2 B M ) :DE the Sine of double 
 B L required. Alfo we have CB:2CM::BD: 2DE; that 
 is,CB:2CM::iBM:DE; therefore B M : D E : : C B 
 :CM. 
 
 Theorem XXI. 
 The Sines D K, F O, of two Arches, B D, F D, being 
 given, the Sine of the Sum, and of the Difference, are both 
 given likewife. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 The*fc being given C D and F O, 
 the Co-fine C O is found per Corol. 
 to Theor. XI. and the Triangles 
 CDK, COP, CHI, FOH, 
 F O M, are fimilar ; for C D K, 
 COP, CHI, are alike, per Cafe 
 2. of Theorem XII. anJ < 1,=: 
 ^O-^M-90'; alfo ^CHI 
 = ^FHJ), per Theor. II. and 
 ^0 = "^ F, per Corol. 3. to 
 Theorem VI. Confequently CHI, 
 FOH and F O M are fimilar : 
 Therefore CD:DK::CO:OP; 
 alfo C D : C K : : F O : F M ; but becaufe F O E O, there- 
 fore F M M C = O N : Confequently OP-|-FM = FI 
 the Sine of the Sum of the Arches, and O P F M =z E L the 
 Sine of theip'Differqnce. 
 
 Theorem XXII. 
 The Difference of the verfed Sines of two Arches drawn into 
 xRadius, isequal to the Redtangle under the Sine of half the Sum, 
 and Sine of half the Difference of thofe Arches. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 Let the given Arches be E B ( F OJ and B F ; E F ( B F 
 
 F Qj their Difference : Bifeft E F in D, then F Qj-f- F D 
 
 BE-f-DE = BD their half Sum ; and E D - F D their 
 half Difference ; IB LB I L ^ G E the Difference o; 
 their verfed Sines ; and F O rz E O the Sine of half their Differ- 
 ence.
 
 a(S 
 
 Geometrical Theorems. 
 
 FartL 
 
 rence. The Triangles CDK, T M O, are fimilar, per laft 
 Theorem, and G E being parallel to M O, the Triangles F M O, 
 FGE, are 
 fimilar, 
 perCzfe 2. 
 to Theor. 
 XII. con- 
 fequently 
 the Tri- 
 angles 
 CDK, 
 FEG, are 
 fimilar ; / _ 
 
 therefore J t C f P K li B 
 
 D K : G E : : ( C D : : E F : : ) C D : F E ; whence we have 
 DKx-'EF, that is, DKxFO ( = GExiCD) -ILx 
 >CD. 
 
 Theorem XXIIL 
 The verfed Sine of an Arch drawn into Radius, is equal to 
 the Square of the Sine of the faid Arch. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 The Triangles C b m, Q/ b, { in the laft Scheme ) are equi- 
 angular ; fcr^w "^ * =r go, and "^ b common to both ; 
 confequently, per Theorem XIII. e b : b Qj :bm:bc; therefore 
 e bX b e b Q_X b m ; and ebx\bcbmX\b 6 b m X 
 b m. But e b is the verfed Sine of the Arch b Q_, and is the 
 Sine of b I zsz 4 the Arch b Qj alfo 4 b c = Radius; therefore, 
 
 Theorem XXIV. 
 
 The Sines and Tangents of fmall Arches are nearly in the Ratio 
 of Equality. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 
 The Triangles AD E, ABC, 
 are fimilar, per Cafe z. to Theo. 
 XII. therefore, per Theor. XIII. 
 it will be A E : A C : : D E : 
 B C ; but as the Point E ap- 
 proaches to the Point C, the Dif- 
 ference E C will vanifh ; whence 
 T> E will become nearly equal to 
 B C ; and confequently the Sine, 
 Tangent and Arch will be nearly 
 in the Ratio of Equality. 
 
 Co
 
 Chap. II. Geometrical Theorems. 
 
 % 7 
 
 Corollary. 
 Hence the Arch is nearly equal to its Sine; and it will be, as 
 Arch is t Arch, fo is Sine to Sine. 
 
 Theorem XXV. 
 If there be three Arches, A B, AC, AD, which are to one 
 another as i. 2 and 3 ; the Square of the Subtenfe of the Mean is 
 equal to a Reftangle under the Subtenfe of the letter, and the 
 Sum of the Subtenfes of the leffer and greater. That is, A C X 
 ACr ABx AB-+AD- 
 
 Demonstration'. 
 
 Produce A D, and 
 make FC = CA; then 
 \CFD=\BACj 
 for^BAC = CAD 
 CFD, by Hypo- 
 thefis, and by Theorem 
 VIII. and 180 "\ 
 ADC-^FDC=^ 
 C B A, the Supplement 
 of <.ADC to 180; 
 therefore the Triangles ABC and C F D are equal, by Corol. 3. 
 to Theorem V. and by Theorem VII. Confequently, AFrrAB 
 -f- A D : But A B : A C : : A C : A F, and therefore A B x A F 
 = A C x A C. 
 
 Theorem XXVI. 
 
 If the equal Arches A B, B C, C D, D E, E F, &e. be 
 eiven, and the Subtenfes drawn, it will be A B : A C : : A C : 
 AB+AD::AD:AC+AE::AE:AD + AF. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 
 Produce A D, A E and ^ I "=;;.... H. 
 AF.andmakeDH^AB, 
 E I = A C, FK = AD; 
 the Triangles ABC, ACH, 
 A D I, A E K, are fimilar, 
 per the laft Theorem : Con- 
 fequently A B : A C : : A C : 
 AH (=rAB-f-AD) :: 
 AD:AI(=AC + AE) 
 ::AE:AK (-AD + 
 AF). 
 
 Corol-
 
 2$ Geometrical Theorems. Part I. 
 
 Corollary. 
 
 In Cor. 6. to Theor. XX. it was B D : 2 D E : : C B : 2 C JVT, 
 double the Co-fine of \ the Arch B D ; therefore ( in the laft 
 Scheme) Radius : 2 Cofine 4 Arch A B : : t A B : A C : : 4 A C 
 ^AB-l-UD^iAD^AC+UExiAEiUD 
 -4- k A F, he 
 
 Theorem XXVII. 
 
 In any Triangle, the Sides are proportional to the Sires of the 
 oppofite Angles. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 
 In the Triangle ABC, if a Side, 
 as A B, be bifecTed in e ; then 
 A e or B e will be the Sine of the 
 Angle A C B, per Corol. 2. to 
 Theorem IX. therefore the half 
 of A B is the Sine of ^ A C B : 
 The fame Way it may be pror'd, 
 that the half of the other Sides are 
 the Sines of the oppofite Angles : 
 Therefore it follows, that what 
 Proportion the Sides have to one another, the fame will the Sines 
 of the oppofite Angles ever have, as being half of thofe Sides. 
 
 Theorem XXVIII. 
 In any plain Triangle, as A B C, the Sum of the Sides, A B, 
 B C, is to the Difference of thefe Sides, as the Tangent of half 
 the Sum of the Angles at the Bafe, viz. A and C, is to theTan- 
 gent of half the Difference of thefe Angles. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 Produce A B, and make BH = BC, join H C, and from B, 
 draw the Perpendicular B E, through B draw B D parallel to A C, 
 and make H F = C D, and join B F, alfo make B I = B A, and 
 draw I G parallel to B D or AC: Then 'tis plain, that A H will 
 be the Sum, and H I the Difference of the Sides A B and B C ; 
 and fince B H = B C, 
 and B E perpendicular 
 to H C, therefore H E 
 = CEj and BD being 
 parallel to A C and I G, 
 andABrrBI, there- 
 fore CD or HF = 
 G D, and confequently 
 HGzrFD, and i H 
 G=iFDor ED.
 
 Chap, II. Geometrical Theorems. 29 
 
 Again, fince HB=BC, and B E perpendicular to H C, there- 
 fore ^ E B C = i <^ H B C ; but by Theorem V. the "^ H 
 
 BCr=^A-f-^C: consequently \EBC= ^ A 4~^ C 
 
 alfo fince HB = BC, and HF = CD, and^BHFr: ^ 
 BCD, it follows by Theorem IX. that ^\HBF-<DBCrr 
 ^ B C A, by Theorem III. and fince ^HBDzr^A by 
 Theorem III. and *<. H B F so ^ B C A, therefore F B D is 
 the Difference, and E B D half the Difference of the two Angles 
 A and BCA; fo making E B the Radius, 'tis plain* C is the 
 Tangent of half the Sum, and E D the Tangent of half the Dif- 
 ference of the two Angles at the Bafe : Now I G being parallel 
 to A C, the Triangles H I G and H A C will be equiangular by 
 Cafe 2. of Theorem XII. confequently per Theorem XIJI. A H 
 : I H : : C H : G H ; but the Wholes are as their Halves; there- 
 fore A H : I H : : C H : $ G H ; and fince \ C H E C, and 
 |GH = |FD^ED, therefore A K : I H : : E C : E D. 
 Now, A H is the Sum, and I H the Difference of the Sides ; alfo 
 E C is the Tangent of half the Sum, and E D thg -Tangent of 
 half the Difference of the two Angles at the Bafe ; confequently, 
 
 Theorem XXIX. 
 In any plain Triangle, as the Bafe is to the Sum of the other 
 two Sides, fo is the Difference of thofe Sides to the Difference of 
 the Segments of the Bafe. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 In the Triangle C B D, 
 the Bafe is C D, the Sum of 
 the other two Sides GDr 
 CB + BD, the Difference 
 of which is H D ; the Seg- 
 ments of the Bafe are C E, 
 E D, whofe Difference is 
 FDi then, fince D C X D F 
 = GDxDH,/ f r Theo- 
 rem XVI. therefore D C : 
 G D : : D H : D F. 
 
 Theorem XXX. 
 The Sum and Difference of two Quantities being given, the 
 Quantities therafelves arc thereby given. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 Let the two Quantities be reprefented by the Lines A B and 
 B C flaking one continued Line, whereof A B is the greater, and 
 
 BC
 
 3o Geometrical Theorems. Part I. 
 
 B C the lefler : Then A C S the 
 
 Sum, and ( by making AD = ^ 
 
 B C ) D B = x the Difference, ,."' JtS; 
 
 AE iS, EB \xi there- / ^......^ \ 
 
 fore by adding thefe Equations to- / r *> \ \ 
 gether we have AE--EB 
 
 I ! A R flip crrpafpr Oiian. >A -L* Ji< JD C 
 
 2 
 
 ~ AB the greater Quan- 
 
 
 \ 
 
 tity fought ; and by fubtra&ing one Equation from the other we 
 have A E E B - S ~* B C the lefler Quantity. In Words 
 
 2 
 
 thus : Half theSum, added to half theDifference, gives the greater 
 Quantity A E ; and half the Difference, deducted from half the 
 Sum, leaves the lefler Quantity B C. 
 
 Theorem XXXI. 
 
 The Angle RPf, made by the Circumference and Radius of a 
 Circle, is greater than any Re&ilinear acute Angle. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 Draw R perpendicular to Py, then "<, ( 90 ). is greater 
 than ^ z ; therefore R P is greater than p . 
 R; therefore the Point n is within the 
 Circle ; confequently "^ z is lefs than %, R 
 P <v. Whence the Angle made by the Cir- 
 cumference and Tangent is lefs than any 
 Reclilinear acuteAngle: Therefore noRight tj / \ t 
 
 Line can be drawn between the Tangent " : ^ 
 
 and Circumference, tho' an infinite Number of curved ones may. 
 
 Theorem XXXII. 
 
 The Angle of the Interferon of any two Circles is equal to the 
 Angle R P r made by the Radii, drawn from their Centres to the 
 Point of Interferon. 
 
 Demonstration* 
 
 Draw the Tangents P T, P /; 
 then ^fPfcC\/PT, per 
 laft Theorem ; and <$ t P T -f- 
 ^ TPr ^ RPr -f^ 
 TPr = 90 ; confequently "s, t 
 PT^^RPr; that i, the 
 Angle formed by two Circles in- 
 terfering each other is equal to 
 the Angle made by the Radii 
 drawn from their Centres to the Point P of Interfeftion.
 
 Chap. II. Geometrical Theorems. 
 
 3* 
 
 H E O R E M 
 
 XXXIII. 
 
 If a Cone be cut by a Plane parallel to the Plane of the circu- 
 lar Bafe, the Circumference of that Seftion will be a Circle. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 I et the Cone A F C E D be 
 cut by the Plane LHKI paral- 
 lel to the Plane of the Ba& F C 
 ED; the latter being a Circle, 
 the former is a Circle alfo : For 
 let AH CD I be any Plane 
 pafling through A, and theCentre 
 B, of the Circle F C E D; then 
 the Planes F C E D, LHKI, 
 being parallel, the Lines G K, 
 B E, and G I, B D, are paral- ft t 
 lei ; therefore the Triangles 
 AG K, ABE, and A G I, ABD C 
 
 are iimilar : Therefore G K : B E : : A G : A B : : GI : 8 D : Bat 
 B E is = B D, by Suppofition; therefore GI=GK. The 
 fame might be proved of an Infinity of Right Lines drawn from the 
 fame Point G to the Circumference I K H L ; and confequectly, 
 that Circumference is that of a Circle, having for its Centre the 
 Point G. 
 
 Theorem XXXIV. 
 If a Scalene Cone, AIMKN, be cut by a Plane thro* its 
 Axis, at Right Angles with its Bafe, fo as to make the Triangle 
 A I K ; and from this Triangle a {mailer be cut off, A E F, fmu- 
 lar to the former, but fubcontrarily pofited, (/'. e. (o that ""\. AEF 
 ^ A K I ) and the Cone be cut by a Plane according to the 
 Direction of E F, at Right Angles with the Plan* of the Triangle 
 A K I ; the Seftion formed in the Surface of the Cone, E H F G 
 will be the Circumference of a Circle. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 Thro' any afligned Point B of the Line E F, draw the Line C 1> 
 parallel to the Bafe K L, through which let a Plane pafs perpen- 
 dicular to the Triangle A K I, and parallel to the Plane of the 
 Bafe ; it will make the Seftion in the Surface of the Cane, D H 
 C G the Circumference of a ( irele by the laft. Theorem, cutting 
 the Circumference of the Plane of fubcontrary Pofition in the 
 Points H and G, and the Plane itfe lf in the Line HBG: Now 
 the Figure G C H D being a Circle B G* zr C B X B D per Cafe
 
 32 
 
 Geometrical T 
 
 2. of Theorem XV. B G 
 being perpendicular to G 
 D by the Conftru&ion : 
 And becaufe of the fimi- 
 lar Triangles EBC, 
 DBF, it will be EB : CB 
 : : B D : B F, and E B X 
 B P = C B x B D 
 B~G 2 : Therefore fince 
 this holds every-where, 
 the Seftion G E H F is a 
 Circle, 
 
 Theorem XXXV. 
 In an Ellipfis, the Reftangles under the Segments of the tranf- 
 verfe Diameter, are as the Squares of the Ordinates by which thofc 
 Segments are made. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 In the Cone V H Z, 
 let the Circles D b d, K 
 N k, be parallel to the 
 Cone's Bafe, and let 
 TSrbean Ellipfis, 
 whofe tranfverfe Diame- 
 ter is TS, and letNCr, 
 Bab, be any two 
 Ordinates : Then the 
 Triangles TCK, T*D, 
 S a d, SC/f, are fimi - 
 lar ; therefore S a : a d 
 :: SC:Ci*; and TC : 
 CK::T:D; there- 
 fore SaXCi ad X 
 SC, andTxCK = TCxD; hence we have S a X C i X 
 TxCK=^SCxTCxD: ButCKxC*= NC 2 , 
 and aDx ad=zba*> fer Cafe 2. bf Theorem XV_: Therefore 
 for C K X C k, and a D x a d, take NC a and b m* ; then we 
 iave SxT*xN* 2 t=TCXSCxJ 2 . Henee SaXTai 
 
 Va? ::TCxSC: NC 2 . 
 
 Theo-
 
 Chap. II. Geometrical Theorems. 
 
 33 
 
 Theorem XXXVI. 
 The nafcent or evanefcent Subtenfe of the Angle of Conta&, 
 in any Circle, is in the duplicate Ratio of the conterminous Arch. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 Let A DC be a Circle, the Right Line A B a Tangent in A, 
 and confequently the Angle of Contacl BAD: Then the evane- 
 fcent Subtenfe B D is as the Square of the Arch A D ; that is, 
 the Subtenfe B D is to another Subtenfe b d, in the fame Circum- 
 ftance, as the Square of the Arch A D to the Square of the Arch 
 A d : Draw the Diameter A C, which will be perpendicular to 
 A B ; alfo draw the Right Lines DA, </A,DC,VC; and draw 
 DE, de, parallel to ABj and let the Subtenfe B D be paral- 
 lel to A C. Now "ATF 2 = CA x A E, and A~d i 
 Ad* 
 
 Now 
 Ae: Wherefore 
 
 = C A x 
 
 (AE:A f ::) BD:i</. 
 
 / 
 
 A 
 
 d// 
 
 \. **v 
 
 
 
 ^^^ \ 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 AD 
 
 But fince the Arches A D, A d t 
 and their Subtenfes, in their -o D- 
 
 nafcent Condition, are equal, 
 confequently, in this Cafe, 
 BD : h d : : Arch A~D* : 
 Arch A d 1 . But if the Sub- 
 tenfe of the Angle of Contact /!.. 
 be not parallel to A C, the 
 fame will ftill hold, fince it is evident, that any two parallel 
 Lines drawn from the Points D, d, to the Line A B, will be to one 
 another as B D to b d. 
 
 Theorem XXXVII. 
 The Area of every Circle is equal to half the Reftangle of the 
 Radius into its Periphery. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 Conceive the Radius C A to be divided into an infinite Series of 
 equidiitant Points, as a, c, y, &c. and through thofe Points fup- 
 pofe the concentric or parallel Arches D 
 a b, c d y yf, fjc. to be defcribed : 
 Then they will be a Series of Arches 
 in Arithmetic Progrelfion, beginning 
 at the Point C, wherein the greatelt 
 Term is A B = L, and Number of 
 Terms isCAtrN: Eut $ N L S 
 the Sum of all the Series, or the 
 Area of the Seftor A C B, which 
 fuppofe to be of th Circle. Then 
 
 IA1
 
 34 
 
 8 ABxC A 
 
 Geometrical Theorems. Part I. 
 
 = 4 A B X C A the Area of the Circle, 
 
 It has been found, by many laborious Gentlemen, that if the 
 Diameter of a Circle be Unit or I, the Periphery is 3.1415926J 
 Cifc- but for our Purpofe 3.1416 may be fufficient enough. Let 
 D the Diameter, and P the Periphery of any given Circle : 
 Then 1 : 3.1416 : : D : Pj and 1 x P 3.1416 x D : Confe- 
 
 p 
 
 quently P being known, D is alfo found ; for 7 D. 
 
 ; 3.1416 
 
 Theorem XXXVIII. 
 
 Every Cone is the third Part of a Cylinder, having the fame 
 Bafe and Altitude. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 
 Every Right Cone may be confidered as ,"'" \T '*"".. 
 
 conftituted of an infinite Series of Circles, 
 whofe Diameters increafe in Arithmetical 
 Progreffion, beginning at the Vertex or 
 Point V, the Area of its Bafe B A being 
 the greateft Term, and the Meafure of its 
 perpendicular Height V C the Number of 
 all the Terms ; therefore the Area of the 
 Bafe B A x j V C Sum of all the Se- 
 ries, which is the Cone's Solidity. But 
 the Solid Content of every Cylinder is 
 B A x V C ; for every Cylinder may be 
 fuppofed to be conftituted of an infinite Series of equal Circles, 
 whereof the Bafe or End being one of the Terms, its Height D B 
 is the Number of all the Terms. 
 
 Theorem XXXIX. 
 
 Every Sphere is equal to Two-thirds of its circumlcribing 
 Cylinder. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 
 Let the Square A B C D, the 
 Triangle A C D, and the Qua- 
 drant A B G D, be fuppofed to 
 revolve about A D ; and there 
 will be generated a Cone by 
 A C D, a Cylinder by A B C D, 
 and an Hemifphere by A B G D, 
 all of the fame Height and Bafe. 
 Draw any Lines HE, I K, pa- 
 rallel to a B. Since H E . A G; 
 
 alfo AG 2 ' = G E 2 -j- A E 2 ; therefore HE 1 3= GE r + F E 2 
 
 and
 
 k 
 
 A 
 
 Chap. II. Geometrical Theorems.' ^B 
 
 and H E:= G E-f- F E ; confequently H E- G E 
 rr F E =: to the Ring defcrib'd by G H in its Revolution 
 round the Axis A D. In like manner it may be proved, that a 
 Circle defcribed on K m is equal to the Ring defcribed by I L : 
 Confequently the Solid generated by the Revolution of the Space 
 BGLDC, which is compos'd of all the Rings, is equal to the 
 Cone, which is -$ of the Cylinder, per laft ; therefore this Solid, 
 fubtra&ed from the Cylinder, will leave the Hemifphere equal 
 to 7 of the Cylinder. 
 
 Theorem XL. 
 
 The Superficies of every Sphere is equal to four times the Area 
 of its greateft Circle. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 
 Every Globe may be 
 confidered as conftituted of 
 an infinite Series of infi- 
 nitely thin conical Fru- 
 ftums, abaece, ecegdg, 
 Cifr. and the Superficies 
 thereof will be equal to 
 the convex Superficies of^ 
 all thofe Fruftums. Bifect 
 b c with the Perpendicular 
 r , join r C, and make 
 rv parallel to TC: Then 
 fince the Triangles r v r, 
 Car, may be confidered 
 as fimilar, it will be as r v 
 ( n c ) : r e :: rtt : C r, 
 and fo is the Periphery of the Circle whofe Radius is rn to the 
 Periphery T A S A : Therefore n c X Periphery TASA rex 
 Periphery of the Circle, whofe Radius is r , equal to half the 
 convex Superficies of the Fruftum abaece; confequently b c X 
 TASA will be the whole Convexity of that Fruftum. In the fame 
 manner it will appear, that the convex Superficies of the Fru- 
 ftums tcegdg y gdghfh, &c. will be c d X TASA; dfx 
 T A S A, &c. therefo re the Sum of al l thefe, or the Superficies 
 of the Hemifphere, is T b - ,- b c -\-c d, &c. xTASA = TC 
 xTASA=2CTASA, by Theorem XXXVII. Confe- 
 quently 4 C T A S A will be the Superficies of the whole 
 Sphere. 
 
 Corollary. 
 Hence it appears, that the convex Superficies of any Fruftum 
 is to the Superficies of the whole Sphere, as the Height of that 
 Fruftum to the Diameter of the Sphere. 
 
 D 2 CHAP.
 
 3& Plain Trigonometry. Part 2. 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 Plain TRIGONOMETRY. 
 
 HAVING in the Geometrical Part fully demonftrated the 
 Reafon of the whole Dottrine of Plain Trigonometry, I 
 fhould now proceed to the Solution of plain Triangles ; but it 
 will be very neceffary, in the firft Place, to exhibit fome Method 
 of finding the Sine, Tangent and Secant of any Arch, fince an 
 Angle is meafured by a Part of a Circle, and that Part of a Circle 
 mult be reduced to a Right Line, as nearly equal to it as may be 
 neceffary for our prefent Purpofe. Amongft the various Methods 
 of finding the Sine of any Arch, I have made choice of one de- 
 due'd from the Geometry in the laft Chapter, and which is, I pre- 
 fume, the plaineft for thofe unacquainted with thefe Studies. 
 
 SECTION I. 
 
 The ConftrnBion of Sines, Tangents and Secants. 
 
 By Theorem XIX. the Chord of 6o Radius, confequently 
 \ Radius is the Sine of 30 ; and therefore if Radius be fuppofed 
 to be divided into io,oo,ooo Parts, the Sine of 30 is 
 5,000,000. The Sine of the Arch of 30 being given, the Sine 
 of the Arch of 15 may be found, by Corol. 5. to Theorem XX. 
 and, by the &me, the Sine of 15 being given, the Sine of 7" 30' 
 is found; and this Sine being known, the Sine of 3 45' is known 
 alfo ; and proceeding thus to 12 Bifedlions, we have the Sine of 
 ah Arch of 52 " 44" 3"" 45 '" ", whole Co-fine is nearly equal 
 to Radius. Then, by Theor. XXIV. and its Corollary, 'tis evi- 
 dent that the Sine, Tangent, and their very fmall Arch, are near- 
 ly equal to one another; and therefore, as the fmall Arch of 52" 
 44" 3' " 45 "" is to an Arch of 1 , fo is the Sine of the Arch of 
 52" 44 " 3 ' ' 43"" to the Sine of an Arch of 1', which becomes 
 alfo known. The Sine of an Arch of one Minute being found, 
 the Co-fine or Sine of 89 59 is found by Corollary 4. to Theor. 
 XX. and by Corol. 6. to the fame Theorem, the Sine of an Arch 
 of 2 is found ; likewife the Co-fine is known as before. The 
 Sines and Co-fines of the Arches of 1' and 2 being found, the 
 Sines of all the other Minutes of a Quadrant, by Corol. to 
 Theor. XXVI. and Corol. 6. to Theor. XX. may be found : 
 Thus, in Theor. XXVI. let the Arches ABr:BC = CD, 
 &c. 2' j then iABrri, i A C 2', 4. A D 3 , fcfr. 
 and let the Co-fine of 1 , viz. 89 59 ~x; then the Proportion 
 will be R ; 2A-; : s,2 : s,i' ! s, 3 i thus the Sine of 3 is found. 
 
 Ali
 
 Chap. III. Plain Trigonometry. 37 
 
 Alio R : 2 x : : 8,3' : s,2' -f- 5,4.'; hence the Sine of 4' is found. 
 Again, R : 2 * : : 5,4' : s.3' -j- s,$ ; wherefore the Sine of 5' 
 is known. Alfo R : zx : : s,5' : s,f -f- s,6 ; which gives the 
 Sine of 6'. In like manner will all other Sines of the Quadrant 
 be found. 
 
 Having conftrutted a Canon or Table of natural Sines for every 
 Degree and Minute of the Quadrant, we may, by Theorem XX. 
 find the Tangents and Secants. And farther there is no Occafion 
 to proceed ; fince a Quadrant contains all the Sines, Tangents and 
 Secants that can be formed for any Arch of the Circle : For, as it 
 is evident, we cannot fpeak of the Sine of an Arch greater than 
 1 8o, fo 'tis as plain, that the Sine of any given Arch is alfo the 
 Sine of the Arch's Complement to 180 ; thus the Sine of 28 is 
 alfo the Sine of 152, by the Definition of a Sine. And hence 
 arife the Ambiguities attending the Solution of fome Cafes of Tri- 
 angles ; but more of this in its proper Place. As the Operations 
 by thefe Natural Numbers, or Sines, were very tedious, being 
 large Multiplications and Divifions, fo the Wit of Man was un- 
 doubtedly often employ'd, to find out fome other more eafy and 
 expeditious Methods of performing fo ufeful a Part of Mathema- 
 tical Learning : And at length the great Dejideratum appeared 
 in the Invention of Logarithms. By this Improvement in Trigo- 
 nometry, the tedious Operations of Multiplication and Divificn 
 are performed by Addition and Subtraction only of two Logarithms, 
 as we have (hewn in the Introduction. The Logarithms therefore 
 of the Numbers, or Natural Sines, Tangents and Secants, being 
 difpofed into Tables, are called Artificial Sines, Tangents and 
 Secants. 
 
 The Solution of the feveral Cafes of Triangles may be ob- 
 tain'd by feveral Methods ; but, I prefume, for a Learner, there 
 is none fo eafy and expeditious as that by the Logarithms of Sines, 
 Ufc. 
 
 Lemma. t 
 
 The Chord, Sine, Tangent, iffc, of any Arch in one Circle 
 ( See the tivo following Schemes) is to the Chord, Sine, Tangent, 
 l$c. of the lame Arch (that is of the fame Quantity of Degree?, 
 Minutes, &c.) in another Circle, juft as the Radius of the one is 
 to the Radius of the other ; for the greater the Radius, the 
 greater the Circle defcribed by that Radius, and confequently the 
 greater any particular Arch of that Circle, and fo the Sine, r\ 
 is alfo greater in proportion ; therefore, cfrV. 
 
 SECTION II. 
 
 The Solution of the Cafes of Right-angled f lain Triangles. 
 
 In the given Triangle A B C, y C A B, and n i the Sine of 
 D 3
 
 Plain Triconometry. 
 
 Part I. 
 
 : A C : : 
 
 38 
 
 C = Br } then it will be Br : AB::/r: AC 
 
 B i ( R) : B C, and fo for the other Proportions. 
 
 1 . Given A B, B, C, to fin.1 AC, B C ; then s,C : A B : : s,B 
 : A C ; and s,B : A C : : R : B C. 
 
 2. Given A C, B, C, X p- - .... 
 
 to find A B, B C ; then = " ... 
 
 s,B : A C : : s,C : A B ; "-..,, 
 
 and s,B : A C : : R : B C. ~. /> \ 
 
 3. Given B C, B, C, \fjF^% \J 
 
 r .y''i\ 
 
 to find A B, 
 
 AC; 
 
 then 
 
 R : B C : : 
 
 s,C : 
 
 AB; 
 
 and R : B C 
 
 ::s,B 
 
 : AC. 
 
 4. Given 
 
 AB, 
 
 AC, 
 
 to find B , B, C. Ana- 
 logiis caret. 
 
 5. Given A B, B C, to 
 find AC, B,C; thenBC 
 : R : : A C : : s,B ; and 
 R : B C : : s 3 B : A C. 
 
 6. Given AC, B C, to find A B, C, B ; then B C : R 
 : s,B ; and R : B C : : s,C : A B. 
 
 AC 
 
 The Reader may obferve, in the 4th, there is written, Analogiit 
 caret, /'. e. it wanteth Proportions ; therefore when two Sides are 
 given, and the Hypothenufe not one of them, we muft make one 
 of the Sides Radius in order to form the Proportions. For, by 
 Theor. XIII. the Sides and the Sines, &f c . of the oppofite Angles 
 of a Right-angled Triangle are in Proportion to one another ; 
 and tho' the Right Angle is always given, yet in this Cafe, as the 
 Hypothenufe is not given, there-can be no Analogy formed. 
 
 To folve the 4th Cafe, we may 
 make the Bafe Radius, and then 
 the Hypothenufe will be the Secant 
 of B,and thePerpendicular theTan- 
 gent ; then the Angles and Side 
 fought are found by thefe Analo- 
 gies, viz. A B : R : : AC : t B ; and 
 R : AB : : se,B : B C. That is, A B 
 : B r : : A C : / r the Tangent of 
 B, per Theor. XIII. And B r : 
 A B : : B/ (the Secant of B ) : 
 BC. 
 
 Radius 
 
 Tho' all the Cafes, except the 4th, are folv'd by Sines, yet 
 having the fame Data, and making either A B or AC Radius, 
 the Learner will fee the Harmony of all the various Ways of 
 
 working
 
 Chap. HI. Plain Trigonometry.' 39 
 
 working by Sines, Tangents and Secants ; the fame Conclufions 
 refulting equally from each particular Method. 
 
 Hence we fee, that in forming Proportions, in order to find the 
 fourth, we muft always compare oppofite Sides to oppofite .Angle?, 
 Therefore, when a Side is fought, we begin with an Angle for the 
 firft Number, its oppofite Side for the fecond, and the Angle oppo- 
 fite to the Side required will be in the third Place ; then, by this 
 Proportion, the Side is found. In like manner, when an Angle 
 is fought, we begin with a Side. 
 
 The young Student will find plain Trigonometry applied to the 
 Purpofes of Geography in the following Part of this Treatife : 
 Therefore I have here omitted the numerical Solutions of theCafes, 
 having only form'd the Proportions from the Theorems, which 
 will always be referred to, as we mail have Occafion for diem. 
 
 section nr. 
 
 The Solution of the Cafes of oblique-angled plain Triangles. 
 
 l per Theorem XXVII. 
 
 1 . Given A B, A , B, C, to find A C, C B ; then, 
 s,C : A B : : s,B : A C 
 s,B : A C : : s,A : B C 
 
 2. Given A C, B C, A, to 
 find A B, CB; then, BC : s,A. 
 : : A C : s,B; and 180 A 
 
 B =C. Again, s,B: A C 
 : : s,C : A B, as before. 
 
 3 . Given AC, BC, C, to find A, 
 B, AB; then AC-j-CB:AC 
 
 r n , A-f-B . A B . 
 
 C B:t, J :t,. , by 
 
 2 2 
 
 Theor. XXVIII. hence A and 
 B are known by Theor. XXX. 
 then s, \ : B C : : s,C : A B, as 
 before. 
 
 4. Given AB, AC, CB, to find A, B, C ; then A B : A C-f- 
 CB::AC-CB:AD-DB,^ Theor. XXIX. Hence the 
 Segments AD, D B, are known by Theor. XXX. and the Angles 
 A, B, C, are found by refolving the two Right-angled Trianctes 
 ADC, B DC. P 
 
 Hence, every oblique-angled Triangle may be folv'd, if there 
 be given the three Angles and one Side; two Sides, and an Angle 
 oppofite to one of them ; two Sides, and an Angle comprehended 
 between them ; laftly, all the three Sides. But you mult obferve, 
 that if one of the two Sides given, in the fecond C afe, be the 
 greateft Side, and the Angle oppofite to it be fought, the Angle 
 
 D 4 when.
 
 4 Of the Ufe of the Globe s. Part I. 
 
 when found will be ambiguous, that is, it will not be certain 
 whether it be obtufe or acute ; becaufe the Sine of an Arch, and 
 the Sine of that Arch's Complement to 1 8o is all one, as has 
 been fhewn j and therefore in Matters of Confequence, it will be 
 beft to delineate the Triangle, which ihall be (hewn hereafter. 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 
 Of the Ufe of the GLOB E S. 
 
 S the Globe or Sphere is the very Original and foundation 
 of all Spherical Trigonometry, and as a previous Know- 
 ledge of the Nature, Names and Ufes of the Circles of the Sphere 
 is absolutely necelTary, in order to projeft the Sphere on the 
 Plane of any of its Great Circles, I lhall in this Chapter prefent 
 the young Student with the Generation of thefe Circles, as^they 
 are conceived to exift in the Heavens, and alfo with the Ufe of 
 the Artificial Globes. 
 
 An Obferver plac'd upon the Earth, by extending his Sight 
 every way, thinks the World is bounded by a fpherical Superfi- 
 cies, and judges all remote Objects, whofe Diftances are unknown, 
 tho' really very unequally removed from one another, to be placed 
 as it were in the fame concave fpherical Superficies. Eut fince, by 
 reafon of the Earth's Annual Motion about the Sun, the Sun, 
 feen from the Earth, fecms to move forward daily towards the 
 more Eaftern Stars, and in this Mundane Space, its 
 Ecliptic. Path mark'd among the Fixt Stars is eaikd the 
 
 Ecliptic. 
 Having fettled the Ecliptic, it appears from Obfervation, that 
 the Planets make Excurfions, fometimes on this, fometimes on that 
 Side of the Ecliptic : But their greateft Excurhon is contained 
 within the Boundaries of 10 Degrees on each Side ; theAfixonomers 
 therefore have called that Space in which the Sun, 
 Zodiac. Moon and Planets appear to perform their Revolu- 
 tions, by the Name of the Zodiac, from the 
 Images of Animals, which the Fixt Stars in that Tract, are fup- 
 pofed to reprefent. The Number of thefe Images is twelve, and 
 the Names and Marks by which they are known and diflin- 
 guifhed, are, dries V , Taurus c5, Ganini IT, Cancer , Leo SI, 
 Virgo nj , Libra , Scorpio V\, Sagittarius $, Capricornus V? t 
 Jtjuarius S, Pi/as X. Every one of thefe Signs is divided into 
 
 3
 
 Chap. IV. Of the XJfe of the G l o b e s. 41 
 
 30 equal Parts. Tho' a Circle has no Beginning nor Ending, pro- 
 perly fpeaking, yet Aftronomers begin their Reckoning from the 
 hrfl Point of Y, which the Sun is feen in when the Days and 
 Nights are equal, and Spring begins to the Inhabitants of the 
 Northern Hemifphere : They reckon from Y to tf , II, and fo 
 on, returning to Aries ; this Order is faid to be in con/equtntia : 
 But the Phenomenon which is carried in the contrary Order, or 
 from fc5 to Y, or from Y to X, is &id to move contrary to the 
 Order of the Signs, or in antecedentia. 
 
 The Celejlial Equator interfefts the Ecliptic in Celejlial 
 the two Points in which the Sun is feen among the Equator. 
 Fixt Stars, when the Days and Nights are, every- 
 where, of an equal Length, and is that Circle which the Sun, in 
 its Diurnal Motion, appears on that Day to defcribe. But in 
 every other Cafe, the Sun in its Diurnal Motion feems to defcribe 
 Circles parallel to the Equator, among which thofe two are the 
 moll confiderable that are defcribed on the longeft and fhorteft 
 Days, when the Sun is moll remote from the Equa- 
 tor ; that is, when the Sun is feen in the very Begin- Tropics. 
 ning of the Signs of S and vy amongll the Fixt Stars, 
 which therefore are called the Tropics of Cancer and Capricorn, 
 becaufe the Sun returns from thence towards the Equator. There 
 are two other remarkable Circles alfo parallel to the 
 Equator, called the Polar Circles, at the Diilance PolarCircles. 
 of 2 3 2 Degrees from the North and South Poles of 
 the Equator, which are alfo called the Poles of the Poles. 
 World, becauie all the Heavenly Bodies feem to be 
 moved about them in the Space of 24 Hours. 
 
 Befides the Equator and the Ecliptic, in refpeft to which Aflro- 
 nomers have determined the Places of the Stars view'd from the 
 Earth, there is another call'd the Horizon, which 
 is the great Circle appearing to every one, Hand- Senfiblc 
 ing in an open Plain, and looking round about, to Horizon. 
 divide the vifible from the invifible Part of the 
 Heavens. This Circle is the moll remarkable of all others as to 
 Appearance, becaufe immediately taken Notice of and determined 
 by the Obferver, and therefore called the Senjible Horizon. But 
 becaufe the fpherical Superficies to which all Celellial Phaenomena 
 are referred, is fuppos'd to be concentric with the Earth, and not 
 the Eye, a Plane that panes thro' the Eye, and touches the Earth, 
 will not divide it into equal Parts ; but that which paffes thro' the 
 Earth's Centre parallel thereto ; which laft is there- 
 fore called the Rational Horizon, of the Obferver. Rational 
 Thefe two parallel Planes produced will mark out Horizon. 
 the fame Circle in the Superficies of that very 
 great Sphere wherein, the Fixt Stars are feen, becaufe the 
 
 Earth,
 
 '42 Of the Ufe of the Globe s. Part I. 
 
 Earth, compared to the Sphere of the Fixt Stars, is but like a Point. 
 From whence 'tis evident, that the Horizon, confider'd among the 
 Fixt Stars, is a great Circle in the Sphere, every way 
 Zenith. equidiftant from the Point, exaftly over the Head of 
 the Obferver, called the Zenith, and from the Point 
 Nadir. oppofite to it called the Nadir. All Circles pafling 
 thro' the Zenith and Nadir are called Vertical 
 Vertical Circles, and fomeiimes Azimuths; but all Circles 
 Circles. parallel to the Horizon, whether fuppos'd above or 
 below, towards the Zenith or Nadir, are called 
 Almicanters. Almicanters, or Parallels of Altitude. There are 
 two of theie Vertical Circles that are moft confider- 
 Meridian. able, the one palling thro' the Zenith and Poles of 
 the World, (directly North and South) called the 
 Prime Ver- Meridian ; and the other interfecting the Horizon in 
 tical. the Points of Eaft and Weft, called the Prime Ver- 
 
 tical. 
 Hour Circles. Befides the Meridian, there are eleven other 
 Circles to be conceiv'd, called Hour Circles, pafling 
 through the North and South Poles, or Poles of the Equator, and 
 thofe together with the Meridian divide the Equator into 24 equal 
 Parts. 
 
 The Tropics and Polar Circles divide the Globe 
 Zones. of the Earth into Five Zones ; of which, that is 
 called the Torrid, which is contain'd between both 
 Torrid Zone. Tropics, becaufe lying .diredtly under the Courfe of 
 the Sun, and receiving its direct and confequently 
 moft powerful Rays : The Inhabitants of this Zone 
 Amphifcians. are called Amphifcians, becaufe the Shadow of a 
 Perfon Handing upright moves as well towards the 
 Right as the Left Hand of him that obferves it, and becaufe the 
 Noon Shadow at certain different Times of the Year is projected 
 towards both the Poles. The Tract of Land included within the 
 two Polar Circles make two other Zones, both of 
 Frigid Zones, them Frigid, becaufe they receive only the oblique 
 and confequently the weakeft Rays of the Sun : The 
 Perifcians. Inhabitants of thefe Zones, in regard of the Sha- 
 dow, are called Perifcians, becaufe the Shadow ( the 
 Sun not fetting ) moves round them. Between the 
 Temperate Torrid, which is the Middle, and the two Frigid, 
 Zones. which are the Extreme Zones, lie two others called 
 the Temperate Zones, becaufe partaking of the Affe- 
 ctions of both the adjacent Extremes ; the Northern of which is 
 bounded by the Tropic of Cancer and the Arctic Polar Circle ; 
 and the Southern by the Tropic of Capricorn and t\\% Antarctic 
 Polar Circle : The Inhabitants of the Temperate Zones are called 
 
 Heterofcians>
 
 Chap. IV. Of the Ufe of the G lob e s. 43 
 
 Heterofcians, becaufe their Noon Shadow is thrown 
 
 only towards one Pole, <viz. the neareft, and carried Heterofcians. 
 
 about only towards one Quarter, as it is with us 
 
 who inhabit the Northern Temperate Zone, and fee our Shadows 
 
 turn about towards the Right Hand. 
 
 Again, fuch as live upon the Equator have their Days and 
 Nights always equal ; but to an Inhabitant without the Equator, 
 towards either Pole, the Days are fometimes longer than at others. 
 And this is the Reafon why Geographers divided the Earth by 
 Circles parallel to the Equator, diltant from one another fo much 
 as that the longeft Day is half an Hour longer in one Parallel 
 than in the other next Parallel : Thefe Divifions are 
 in Number 30, called Climates, <viz. 24 of Half- Climates. 
 Hours, and 6 of Days continued. The Climates 
 of Half-Hours are reckoned from the Equator to the Polar Circles 
 to the Number of '24 ; becaufe the longeft Day confuting of 12 
 Hours at the Equator, and of 24 Hours at the Polar Circles, the 
 Increafe is 12 Hours, which make 24 Half-Hours, and confe- 
 quently fo many Climates from the Equator to either Polar Circle. 
 The Climates of Days continued are reckoned from the Polar 
 Circles to the Poles, and are in Number 6, each containing an 
 Interval of a Month ; for the greateft Length of the Artifical 
 Day at the Polar Circle being 24 Hours, or a Natural Day, 
 and of 6 Months at the Poles, confequently there is in that 
 Space an. Increafe of 6 Months. The Ufe of the Climates is, 
 firft to mark the various Lengths of the Days at certain Inter- 
 vals ; fecondly, to determine thereby the Degree of Latitude at 
 fuch Intervals. 
 
 Tho' the Time by which the Breadth or Diftance 
 of the Climates, in the following Table, is regulated, Hcnv the 
 be equal, yet the Climates themfelves are very un- Climates 
 equal ; thole of Artificial Days are larger, the are drawn. 
 nearer they are to the Equator, and diminifh in Pro- 
 portion as they approach the Polar Circles : Thus the firft Climate 
 is above twice the Breadth of. the 7th, four times as broad as the 
 1 2th, and broader {han all. the remaining 12. The Amplitude 
 of the firft is 8^ 25 , of the 12th i 52', and of the 24th but 
 3 Minutes, 
 
 Clitnates.
 
 44 
 
 Of the Ufe of the Globe s. Part I. 
 
 Climates. 
 
 Longeft 
 Day. 
 
 Latitude. 
 
 Amplitude. 
 
 
 Ho. Min. 
 
 Deg. 
 
 M. 
 
 Deg. Min. 
 
 I 
 
 12 30 
 
 8 
 
 2 5 
 
 8 25 
 
 2 
 
 '3 
 
 16 
 
 2 5 
 
 8 
 
 3 
 
 13 30 
 
 2 3 
 
 30 
 
 7 2 5 
 
 4 
 
 14 
 
 3 
 
 20 
 
 6 30 
 
 5 
 
 H 3 
 
 36 
 
 28 
 
 6 8 
 
 6 
 
 *5 
 
 4* 
 
 22 
 
 4 5 2 
 
 7 
 
 5 3 
 
 45 
 
 29 
 
 4 7 
 
 S 
 
 16 
 
 49 
 
 1 
 
 3 3 1 
 
 9 
 
 16 30 
 
 5 1 
 
 58 
 
 3 7 
 
 10 
 
 17 
 
 54 
 
 27 
 
 2 49 
 
 ii 
 
 17 30 
 
 56 
 
 37 
 
 2 10 
 
 12 
 
 18 
 
 58 
 
 29 
 
 1 52 
 
 *3 
 
 18 30 
 
 59 
 
 58 
 
 1 29 
 
 + 
 
 *9 
 
 61 
 
 18 
 
 1 20 
 
 *5 
 
 19 30 
 
 62 
 
 25 
 
 1 7 
 
 16 
 
 20 
 
 63 
 
 22 
 
 57 
 
 17 
 
 20 30 
 
 64 
 
 6 
 
 44 
 
 18 
 
 21 
 
 64 
 
 49 
 
 43 
 
 J9 
 
 21 30 
 
 65 
 
 21 
 
 32 
 
 20 
 
 22 
 
 65 
 
 47 
 
 26 
 
 21 
 
 22 30 
 
 66 
 
 6 
 
 19 
 
 22 
 
 23 
 
 66 
 
 20 
 
 14 
 
 23 
 
 23 30 
 
 66 
 
 28 
 
 8 
 
 24 
 
 24 
 
 Months. 
 
 66 
 
 3* 
 
 3 
 
 25 
 
 1 
 
 67 
 
 30 
 
 59 
 
 26 
 
 2_, 
 
 b 9 
 
 30 
 
 2 
 
 27 
 
 3 
 
 73 
 
 20 
 
 3 5 
 
 28 
 
 4 
 
 78 
 
 20 
 
 5 
 
 29 
 
 5 
 
 84 
 
 
 
 5 4 
 
 3 
 
 6 
 
 90 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 The Latitude of a Place is an Arch of the Meri 
 dian, intercepted between the Equator and the Ze- 
 nith of that Place ; and is either North or South, 
 as the Place is diftant from the Equator towards the North or 
 South Pole. If we conceive a Circle drawn thro* any Place, 
 and parallel to the Equator, it is called a Parallel 
 of Latitude, and all Places that lie on the fame 
 Parallel are faid to have the fame Latitude. 
 
 The 
 
 latitude. 
 
 Parallel of 
 Latitude.
 
 Chap. IV. Of the Ufe of the Globe s. 45 
 
 The Longitude of a Place is its Diftance from Longitude. 
 the firft Meridian, meafured by an Arch of the 
 Equator, intercepted between the Meridian of the Place, and fome 
 known or fixed Meridian. Every Geographer is at Liberty 
 to make which he pleafes his firft Meridian from 
 whence to calculate the Longitudes of other Places. Firjl 
 Hence it is, that the Geographers of different Na- Meridian. 
 tions reckon their Longitudes from different Meri- 
 dians, commonly chuling the Meridian palling thro' the Metro- 
 polis of their own Country for their firft. It is undoubtedly the 
 bell Way to reckon Longitude both Eaftward and Weftward of 
 the firft Meridian to i8o : For reckoning all one Way, quite 
 round the Globe, tends to breed Confufion, making Places more 
 than 1 80 of Longitude, which is the greateft Diftance they are 
 capable of from the firft Meridian ; and making Places, to the 
 Weft of the firft Meridian, appear more remote, the nearer they 
 are ; and gives the fame City both the greateft and leaft Degree of 
 Longitude, fuppofing the firftMeridian to pafs thro' theMiddleof it. 
 
 From what has been faid of Latitude and Longitude it is eafy 
 to conceive, that a Traveller, directing his Courfe due Eaft and 
 Weft, alters not his Latitude, but his Longitude : If due North 
 or South, his Longitude is the fame, but his Latitude alters ; if 
 to any of the intermediate Points of the Horizon, he changes 
 both Longitude and Latitude. 
 
 The Inhabitants of the Earth being compared together, in re- 
 gard of the Meridians and Parallels, fome byGeographers are called 
 Periaci, being thofe who live in the fame Parallel of 
 Latitude, but in oppofite Meridians : Whence the Perinea. 
 Perioeci enjoy the fame Seafons of the Year, becaufe 
 the Sun after the fame Manner approaches to or recedes from the 
 Parallel of both Places : But they have alternate Changes of Noon 
 and Midnight, according as the Sun in its Diurnal Revolution 
 approaches to the Meridian of one or the other of them, unlefs 
 they live in the one of Frigid Zone, where they enjoy the Day 
 together. Again, other Inhabitants of the Earth 
 are called Antctci, being thofe who live in the Antetci. 
 Meridian, but in oppohte Parallels, fo that they 
 have the fame Noon, and the fame Midnigiit ; becaufe they have 
 the lame Longitude. But the Summer of the one is the other's 
 Winter, according as the Sun declines from the Equator to the 
 South or North Pole. And laftly, othen are called 
 Antipodes, becauk they live in oppofite Meridians Antipodes. 
 and Parallels, and walk with their Feet diametri- 
 cally oppofite to one another. Thefe have all things contrary ; the 
 one has Summer and long Days, or no Nights, at the fame time as 
 the other ha. Winter and fhort.Days, or perpetual Nights; 'ti* 
 
 Night
 
 46 . Of the Ufe of the G l o b e s. Part. I. 
 
 Night here when Day there, and Night there when Day 
 here. 
 
 Since, according to the Diverfity of Situation of Places upon 
 the Earth, the Horizon, and confequently the Face of the Hea- 
 vens, that is, the Sphere of the World, is different ; Aftronomers 
 confider this Diverfity three Ways, according to the three different 
 Kinds of Pofition of the Horizon to the Equator : For either the 
 Horizon of the Place is right to the Equator, cutting it at Right 
 Angles ; or it is oblique, or elfe does not cut it at all, but coin- 
 cides with it. Such as have the firft Pofition, are 
 Right Sphere, faid to have or inhabit a Right Sphere ; fuch as 
 Oblique, have the fecond, an Oblique Sphere ; and fuch as 
 Parallel, have the third, a Parallel Sphere. In a Right 
 Sphere, the Equator will pafs thro' the Zenith and 
 Nadir j and the Places having a Right Sphere are all thofe on the 
 Terreftrial Equator, for fuch only have the Zenith and Nadir in 
 the Celeftial Equator ; their Horizon paffes thro' the 
 Fig. I. Poles of the World, and every Point in the Heavens 
 will feem to afcend perpendicularly above the Hori- 
 zon, becaufe it defcribes a Circle parallel to the Equator, ( which 
 is perpendicular to the Horizon) in its apparent Diurnal Mo- 
 tion : And the Points that rife together, come to the Meridian alfo 
 together, and fet together ; becaufe the Poles about which the 
 Diurnal Motion is performed, by which the Stars feem to rife, 
 come to the Meridian, and fet, are as well in the Horizon as in 
 the Meridian of the Sphere. The Properties of this Sphere are, 
 that the Nights are always equal to the Days, and that every 
 Star in the Heavens is as long above as below the Horizon. 
 
 In an Oblique Sphere, where the Horizon H O 
 Fig. II. cuts the Equator E Q^at oblique Angles, one Pole, 
 P, of the Equator, or World, is above the Hori- 
 zon, and the other, S, below it ; the former therefore is al- 
 ways vifible, but the latter always invifible. The chief Pheno- 
 mena, to fuch as have an oblique Sphere, are, that the Sun, 
 and all the Stars, that decline towards the vifible Pole, continue 
 longer above the Horizon than below ; and on the contrary, 
 fuch as decline towards the invifible Pole, continue hid longer be- 
 low the Horizon than they appear above it ; and that if the 
 Declination be increafed, till the Diltance of the Star from the 
 vifible Pole is lefs than the Elevation of the Pole above the Ho- 
 rizon, the Star does not fet at all : Eut if its Diftance from the 
 invifible Pole be lefs, it will not afcend above the Horizon, that 
 is, it will not rife at all. 
 
 In a Parallel Sphere, the Horizon coincides with the Equator, 
 and the Zenith with the Pole of the World ; and therefore this 
 Pofition of the Sphere agrees only with the Inhabitants of the 
 two
 
 Chap. IV. Of the Ufe of the G l o b e s. 47 
 
 two Poles of the Earth ; and all the Celeftial Bodies 
 defcribing Circles parallel to the Equator by the Fig. III. 
 Diurnal Motion, will likewife defcri be -Circles paral- 
 lel to the Horizon : For which Reafon, there will be no Rifing or 
 Setting at all ( by the Diurnal Motion of the Earth ) in this 
 Sphere. The Phenomena of the Sun arifing from the Annual 
 Motion of the Earth, vifible in a Parallel Sphere, are, that the 
 Sun, during its declining from the Equator towards that Pole 
 which is in the Zenith of thefe Inhabitants, is always feen, and 
 makes the Day half a Year long ; as, on the contrary, 'tis half a 
 Year Night, while the Sun declines towards the other Side of the 
 Equator, and confequently leaves their Horizon ; and that the Be- 
 ginning of the Day and Night falls upon the Sun's Ingrefs into 
 the Equinoctial Pcints. 
 
 Again, thofe that live under the Equator have two Summers, and 
 two Winters, viz. their Summers at the time the Sun defcribes 
 the Equator, which is twice in his Revolution, and their Win- 
 ters when he is in the Tropics. 
 
 Tho' thefe Places are in the Middle of the Torrid Zone, yet 
 by Experience we are inform 'd, that the Heats are much Iefs under 
 the Equator than the Tropics ; nor can it be otherwife, fince the 
 Sun continues longer about them than the Equator. 
 
 Thofe that live at the Tropics have but one Summer and 
 Winter, the Sun palling over their Zenith but once in the Year ; 
 but the Inhabitants of the Torrid Zone have two Summers and 
 two Winters, the Sun paffing their Zenith twice, as he accedes or 
 recedes from the Equator. 
 
 Under the Poles, the Air is, in all Probability, lefs cold in 
 Summer than at the Polar Circles, becaufe the Sun continues 
 longer above their Horizon ; but then in Winter the Cold mult 
 be more intenie, becaufe the Sun remains a great while below 
 their Horizon : Neither are they in utter Darknefs all the Time 
 of the Sun's Abfence ; for the Twilight continuing till he is 18 
 Degrees below their Horizon, they are without the Twilight only 
 from the 2d of November till the 1 8th of January. 
 
 The Cardinal Points are, the North, South, Eajl, 
 and Weft Points of the Horizon. There are four Fig. IV. 
 other Points, lying exaclly between thefe, that have 
 Names made up of the Cardinal Points next them. Betwixt thefe 
 Eight are placed Eight more, having Names made up of the Names 
 of the Eight preceding ones, fo as that each of them is made up 
 of the two next it.. Between the Sixteen Points above-named, 
 there are Sixteen others, having compound Names, each from 
 o.e of the Eight firft, to which the Name of the Cardinal Point, 
 towards which it declines, is connected by a Praipofition : And 
 thus w have the Two-and-thirty Points of the Compafs. It muft 
 
 be
 
 48 Of the Ufe of the Globes. Part L 
 
 be obferved, that Lines drawn towards any of thefe Points, on 
 
 the Surface of the Earth, may, for a fmall Diitance, be looked 
 
 upon as Right ones ; but as the Surface of the Earth is fpherical, 
 
 none of them will be truly fo ; thofe drawn to the 
 
 Fig. V. Cardinal Points being Circles, and the reft Rhumbs 
 
 or Loxodrotnics, cutting all the Meridians at equal 
 
 Angles. 
 
 There is a remarkable Difference between the Azimuths, or 
 Vertical Circles, and the Rhumbs ; the firft fhew in what Part of 
 the Heavens any Phenomenon appears, and the latter exhibit the 
 Situation of Places on the Earth, in refpedt of each other, called 
 their Bearing. Again, the firft cut the Meridians at unequal, and 
 the latter at equal Angles. If we fuppofe the Wind to blow, 
 every-where, North-Eaft, or to make always an Angle of 45 
 Degrees with the Meridian, a VefTel driven by that Wind will 
 move in a Rhumb. However, a Ship might deer its Courfe ac- 
 cording to, or on the Plane of a Vertical Circle, in cafe there 
 was any Mark in the Heavens, or on the Earth, to guide the 
 Mariner in the Direction thereof ; but for want of fuch, he is 
 obliged to follow the Courfe of the Rhumb- Line pointed eut by 
 the Compafs. And hence it is, that Vertical Circles, which 
 would be far more commodious than Rhumb- Lines, are of no 
 Ufe in this Affair. 
 
 Now, the Nature of thefe Rhumbs is fuch, that, if produced, 
 they, at laft, after an infinite Number of Circulations, terminate 
 in the Poles , except thofe drawn to the Cardinal Points, which 
 are Circles. Hence it appears, that to travel'to the North-Eaft, 
 or any other Point, by the Direction of the Magnetical Needle, 
 would never bring us to that Place which we judge, by the Azi- 
 muths, to have that Bearing : Hence alfo, all the Rhumbs pro- 
 duc'd will be Spiral Lines, except the North and South Rhumb, 
 which is the Meridian, and the Equator, with its Parallels of Eaft 
 and Weft, thefe being Circles, as has been before obferved. 
 Therefore, if two Places are on the fame Parallel, they will 
 bear due Eaft and Weft from each other, that is, if A is due 
 Weft from B, then B bears directly due Eaft from A. 
 
 This famous Property of the Rhumb- Lines was, an Age or two 
 ago, a Wonder to Sailors ; for a Portuguefe Pilot, failing for fome 
 time Eaft ward to a Port that lay, as he judged by the Azimuths, 
 due Eaft from him, found that thereby he never came to it : 
 His Application to Konnius, a Mathematician of that Nation, for 
 a Reafon of fo ftrange a thing, gave the firft Rife to an Inquiry 
 of this Natnre. 
 
 Of
 
 Chap. IV. Of the Terreftrial Globe: 49 
 
 Of the Terrestrial GLOBE. 
 
 ON this Globe the feveral Parts of the Earth are exhibited 
 in their true Situations, Figures and Proportions, which 
 gives us an eafy and fpeedy Acquaintance with the Earth ; becaufe 
 hereby we have the true Reprefentation thereof fet before our 
 Eyes : So that a Terreftrial Globe may be ftyled the Earth in Mi- 
 niature, differing from it only in Size. Befides this Ufe, by it we 
 may explain feveral Phenomena relating to the Earth, its Inha- 
 bitants, the Seafons, 6rV. 
 
 N reprefents the North, and S the South Pole. Fig. V. 
 The Horizon contains feveral concentric Circles : 
 The outmoft is the 32 Winds ; next the Days of the Month, ac- 
 cording to the Julian Account ; then the Feftfvals, and Days of 
 the Week, within which are the Days of the Month according to 
 the Gregorian Kalendar j next which is the Sign and Degree the 
 Sun is in againft each Day throughout the Year ; and on the in- 
 nermoft Edge is the Amplitude Circle. Befides the general Meri- 
 dian, there are alfo other Meridians drawn thro' every Tenth or 
 Fifteenth Degree of the Equator, or Equinoctial Line, which is 
 divided into 360 equal Parts, or Degrees. The Parallels of La- 
 titude are drawn at equal Diftances from the Equator, and pafs 
 through every Tenth Degree of the General or Brazen Meridian. 
 There is alfo a thin Slip of Brafs called a Quadrant of Altitude, 
 that may be fattened to the Vertical Paint of the Brazen Meri- 
 dian, by' Help of a Screw ; its Limb is divided into 90 Degres, 
 reprefenting a fourth Part of the Equator. There is commonly 
 with the Globe the Mariners Compafs, in order to place the 
 Globe in any Direction we pleafe. 
 
 Problem L 
 
 To find the Latitude and Longitude of any Place. 
 
 Bring the Place to the Brazen Meridian ; then the Number of 
 Degrees on the Brazen Meridian, contain'd between the Equator 
 and the Place, is the Latitude required ; and the Degrees on the 
 Equator, contained between the Meridian paffing thro' Lunda* 
 and the Brazen Meridian, is the Longitude rcquir'd. 
 
 E Pro-
 
 50 ' Of the Terreftrial Globe. Part I. 
 
 Problem fl. 
 The Latitude and Longitude of a Place being known, to find the 
 Place on the Globe. 
 Find the Longitude on the Equator, and bring that Point to the 
 Brazen Meridian ; then reckon from the Equator on the Meridian 
 towards the North or South Pole, according as the given La- 
 titude is North or South, and dire&ly under the given Degree of 
 Latitude lies the Place required. 
 
 Problem III. 
 To reclify the Globe for the Latitude of any Place. 
 Elevate the Pole fo far above the Horizon as the Latitude con- 
 tains Degrees ; thus, for London, you muft raife the Pole N 5 1 
 30' above the Wooden Horizon : Then, while London Hands under 
 the Brazen Meridian, the true and real Situation of it is exactly 
 reprefented on the Globe with its proper Horizon ; for London is 
 by this means placed in the Zenith, or on the very Top of the 
 Globe, at 90 Diftance from the Wooden Horizon every way. 
 
 Problem IV. 
 The Day of the Month being given, to find the Sun's Place in the 
 Ecliptic. 
 Look into the Kalendar on the Wooden Horizon for the Month 
 and Day of the Month propofed, and oppofite you will find the 
 Sign and Degree thereof that the Sun is then in : Then in the 
 Ecliptic drawn on the Globe, look for that Sign and Degree of 
 it, and that will be the Place of the Sun required. 
 
 Problem V. 
 The Day of the Month being given, to find the Length thereof, in 
 any Latitude. 
 Reftify the Globe for the Latitude of the Place, by Prob. III. 
 and bring the Sun's Place, found by the lalt roblem, to the Bra- 
 zen Meridian, and fet the Hour-index to the upper 1 % or Noon ; 
 then turn the Globe Eaftward till the Sun's Place touch the Edge 
 of the Horizon, and obferve by the Index the Time of Sun-rifing ; 
 and if you bring the Sun's Place to the Weftern Semicircle of the 
 Horizon, the Hand will alfo point out the Time of Sun-fetting : 
 The Double of the Time of San-fetting is the Length of the 
 Day, and the Time of Sun-rifing doubled gives the Length of the 
 Night. 
 
 Pro-
 
 Chap. IV. Of ibe Terreftrial Globe* 51 
 
 Problem VI, 
 
 To find the Length of the longejl Day, in any given Latitude, fuf- 
 pofe London 5 1 5 Degrees. 
 Reftify the Globe for the Latitude, by Prob. III. and bring 
 the firft Degree of Cancer to the Meridian ; let the Index to 1 3 
 at Noon, and turn the Globe 1 11 the Sun's Place touch the Eaft- 
 ern Edge of the Horizon ; then the Hand will (hew the Time 
 when the Sun rifes on the 10th of June: By obferving the Hour- 
 hand, when the Sun's Place is brought down to the Weftern Edge 
 of the Horizon, we have the Time when he fets, and by that 
 means the Length of the Day. And for the (h rteft Day, bring 
 the firft Degree of Capricorn to the Meridian, and, turning the 
 Globe as before^ we (hall have the Length of the ihorteft Day, be- 
 ing the 1 1 th of December. 
 
 Problem VII. 
 The Day and Hour being given, in any Place, fuppofe London, to 
 
 find in tohdt Place the Sun is Vertical at the given Moment of 
 
 Time. 
 
 Bring the Sun's Place to the Meridian, and obferve the Degree 
 over it ; then bring the given Place ( London ) to the Meridian ; 
 (et the Index to the given Moment of Time, and turn the Globe 
 till the Index points to 12 ac Noon ; then the Place of the Earth, 
 which (tends under the obferv'd Degree, has the Sun at that Mo- 
 ment in the Zenith. 
 
 Problem VIII. 
 To find the Difference of the Time of the Day at any tvjo given 
 Places, and thereby the Difference of Longitude. 
 Bring one of the Places to the Meridian, and fet the Index to 
 1 2 at Noon ; then turn the Globe till the other Place comes to 
 the Meridian, and the Index will point out the Difference of 
 Time : And, by allowing 1 5 Degrees to every Hour, gives the 
 Difference of Longitude. 
 
 Problem IX. 
 
 The Hour being given in any Place, ( as at London ) to find what 
 
 Hour it is in any other Part of the World. 
 
 Bring the given Place ( London ) to the Meridian, and (et the 
 
 Index to the given Hour ; then bring the other Place alfo to the 
 
 Meridian, and the Hand (hews the Hour requir'J, 
 
 E 2 Pro-
 
 '52 Of the Terreftrial Globe; Part I. 
 
 Problem X. 
 To find all thofe Places on the Globe which have the fame Lati- 
 tude) and thofe that have the fame Hour of the Day, with any 
 given Place. 
 
 Bring the given Place to the Meridian, and obferve what 
 Places are exa&ly under the" graduated Edge of that Meridian ; 
 for the People in thofe Parts have the fame Hour, and their Place 
 has the fame Longitude : Then turn the Globe quite round, and all 
 thofe Places which pafs under the given Degree of Latitude upon 
 the Brazen Meridian, have the iame Latitude with the given Place. 
 
 Problem XI. 
 To find the Climate of any Place. 
 Find the Length of the longett Day in the given Place; 
 and then the Number of Hours it exceeds 12, being doubled, 
 gives the Climate ; but if the Climate in the Frigid Zones is re- 
 quired, we muft enter the Table of Climates, and oppofite to the 
 Latitude we have the Climate required. 
 
 Problem XII. 
 The Day and Hour being given, to find thofe Places on the Globe, 
 where the Sun then fifes, fets, alfo thofe Places vuhere it is 
 Noon-day, and thofe that are aclually enlightened, and thofe that 
 are in Darknefs, &c. 
 
 By Prob. VII. find, at the given Time, where the Sun is 
 Vertical, and bring that Place to the Brazen Meridian : Elevate 
 the Globe according to the Latitude of the faid Place, found by 
 Prob. III. The Sun, being at an immenfe Diftance, and Vertical 
 in this Pofition of the Globe, illuminates all that Hemifphere, 
 which'is above the Wooden Horizon. Obferve what Places are 
 in the Weftern Semicircle of the Horizon ; for there the Sun is 
 then rifmg ; and thofe Places in the Eaitern Semicircle of the Ho- 
 rizon have the Sun then fetting : All thofe Places exactly under 
 the Brazen Meridian have Noon-day, the Sun Handing directly 
 over their Meridian : And, laftly, all thofe Places upon the lower 
 Hemifphere, or below the Horizon, are deprived of the Sun at 
 that Time. 
 
 If the Poles of the World be continually elevated or deprefled, 
 fo as to bring the Sun's Place fucceffively to the Zenith, according 
 to his progreflive Motion in the Ecliptic ; we may, at one View, 
 by giving the Globe a flow Motion upon its Axis, obferve, with 
 Pleafure, in all Parts of the Earth, the general Alteration and 
 Return of the Seafons, the gradual Jqcreafe and Decreafe of every 
 
 Diurnal
 
 Chap. IV. Of the Terreftrial Globe. 53 
 
 Diurnal and Nottumal Parallel, the Progrefs and Pofition of any 
 Place as it travels Eaft, the Viciftkude of Light and Darknefs, 
 and the Length of Day and Night. 
 
 Problem XIII. 
 
 To find bow long the Sun Jhines without fetting, in any given 
 Place in the Frigid Zones. 
 
 Find how many Degrees the given Place is from the North 
 Pole, ( if the Place be in the Northern Frigid Zone ) by taking its 
 Latitude from go , and count the fame Number of Degrees upon 
 the Meridian, from the Equator Northward, making a Mark 
 where the Reckoning ends ; turn the Globe round, carefully ob- 
 ferving what two Degrees of the Ecliptic pafs exa&ly under the 
 Point mark'd in the Meridian. Then, right againil thofe Degrees 
 of the Ecliptic on the Wooden Horizon, find the Months and 
 Days of the Month correfponding ; which will fhew when the 
 longeft Day begins and ends, or how long the Sun fhines without 
 fetting. If the Beginning and Ending of the longeft Night be re- 
 quired, let the Complement of Latitude be reckoned from the Equa- 
 tor towards the South Pole ; and then the Work, in all other re- 
 fpecb, will be the fame as above. 
 
 Problem XIV. 
 To find the Antceci, Periceci, and Antipodes, of any given Place, 
 fuppofe London. 
 Bring London to the Meridian, then reckon 5 1 ~ Degrees on 
 the Meridian from the Equator Southward, and it fhews the 
 Place of the Antceci. Keep London under the Meridian, and fet 
 the Index to 12 at Noon j turn the Globe about till the Hand 
 points to 1 2 at Night ; and the Place that comes under the fame 
 Degree of the Meridian where London was, fhews where the Peri- 
 ceci dwell : The Globe fo Handing, count the fame Degree of 
 Latitude on the Meridian from the Equator Southward ; and thai; 
 will fhew who are the Antipodes to London. 
 
 Problem XV, 
 
 The Latitude of the Place, and the Sun's Place in the Ecliptic, 
 being known, to find the Beginning and End of Twilight. 
 When the Sun defcends below the Horizon, the /^tmofpherc 
 will be ftill illuminated, fo that for fome time the whole Heavens 
 will receive fome of his Light. But as the Sun goes ftill lower un- 
 der the Horizon, the lefs is the Air enlightened ; and, when he is 
 got as far as 18 Degrees below, he no longer illuminates our At- 
 mofphere. So likewife in the Morning, as foon as the Sun comes 
 within 18 Decrees of the Horizon, he begins again to enlighten 
 
 E 3 the
 
 54 'Of the Terreftrial Globe. Fart I. 
 
 the Atmofphere, and to diffufe his Light thro' the Heavens: Its 
 Brightnefs does ftill increafe, till the Sun rifes, and makes full Day. 
 This fmall Illumination of the Atmofphere, or the State of the 
 Heavens between Day and Night, is called the Twilight. We 
 - generally reckon that the Twilight begins, or ends, when in a 
 Morning the Stars of the Sixth Magnitude difappcar, or in the 
 Evening, when they firft appear j the Light before that Time ren- 
 dering them invifible. 
 
 Redify the Globe for the Latitude of the Place, by Prob. III. 
 and put the Hour-hand to 1 2 at Noon ; then take the Point of 
 the Ecliptic oppofijre to the Sun's Place, and turn the Globe Weft- 
 ward, as alfo the Quadrant of Altitude, ( which mull be fcrev/d 
 on the Zenith ) till the Point oppofite to the Sun's Place cut th.-: 
 Quadrant of Altitude in the 1 8th Degree above the Horizon : The 
 Index will then fhew the Time of Dawning in the Morning. But 
 if you take the Point oppofite to the Sun, and bring it to the 
 Eaftern Hemifphere, and turn it till it meets with the Quadrant 
 of Altitude in the 1 8th Degree, the Hand will ihevv the Hour 
 when Twilight ends in the Evening. 1 
 
 Problem. XVI. 
 The Day and Hour of a Lunar Eclipfe being known, to find all 
 thofe Places upon the Globe, in which the Eclipfe will be <vi- 
 fible. 
 
 Find, by Prob. VIJ. at what Place the Sun is Vertical at the 
 Time the Eclipfe is to happen ; then, by Prob. XIV. find the 
 Antipodes of thr.t Place, and re&ify the Globe to this Place ; then 
 the Antipodes will be in the Zenith or in the Pole of the Horizon : 
 Obferve what Places are in the upper Hemifphere of the Globe ; 
 for in thofe Places the Moon will be vifibly cclipfed. The Reafon 
 of re&ifying for the Antipodes is, becaufe the Moon mull be 
 oppofite to the Sun whenever fne is eclipfed. As a Lunar 
 Eclipfe continues fometimes lor a long Time together, it may be 
 feen in more Places than in one Hemifphere of the Earth : For by 
 the Moon's apparent Motion round the Earth, during the Time 
 of an Eclipfe, Ihe will fife in feyeral Places after the Eclipfe be- 
 gins. As to Solar Eclipfes there is no determining the Places where 
 they will be vifiblc, by the Globe; but recourfemuft be had toCal- 
 culations. 
 
 Problem XVII. 
 
 To find the Bearing of one Place from another, alfo their Angle of 
 
 Pofition. 
 
 J{ both Places lie in one Parallel,, their Bearing is eitker Eaft 
 
 ft Weft ; if on the fame Meridian, they lie North and South 
 
 from
 
 Chap. V. Of the Celeftial Glo He. 55 
 
 from each other ; but if any one of the Lines, (called Rhumb- 
 Lines ) drawn from the Points of the Compafs, pafs thro' both 
 Places, then their Bearing from one another is fhewn thereby. If 
 no Rhumb pafs thro' thofe Places, then that Rhumb, to which 
 they lie neareft, will beft lhew their Bearing. 
 
 In order to find the Angle of Pofition, bring one of the given 
 Places to the Brazen Meridian, and re&ify the Globe to the Lati- 
 tude of that Place ; then the Quadrant of Altitude being fixt to the 
 Zenith, and brought down to the other Place, the End of the Qua- 
 drant will cut the Horizon, and lhew the Degrees thereon inter- 
 cepted between the Meridian and Quadrant; which Angle is 
 called the Angle of Pofition. So, if we reclify the Globe for the 
 other Place, we may have, by the fame Method, its Angle of Po- 
 fition, which will be different from the former. 
 
 Problem XVIII. . 
 
 To find the Dijiance of two Places on the Globe. 
 
 If the two Places are either both on the Equator, or have the 
 fame Meridian, the Number of the Degrees of their Diftance be- 
 ing reduced to Miles, by allowing 70 Miles to a Degree, will 
 give the Diftance nearly; for thefe are great Circles. And if the 
 two Places are not both on the Equator, nor on the fame Meri- 
 dian, lay the Quadrant of Altitude from one to the other, and the 
 Degrees intercepted between the Places, being reduced, give the 
 Diitance : For the Quadrant reprefents an Arch of a great Circle, 
 which we conceive to be drawn thro' both Places and the Centre of 
 the Earth, and therefore the neareft Diftance between any two 
 Places on the Earth. The Diftance taken wth a Pair of Compaffes, 
 and applied to the Degrees on the Equator, and thofe Degrees re- 
 duced to Miles as before, will likewife fliew the Diftance. 
 
 O/z^CeustialGLOBE. 
 
 THE Celeftial Globe differs from the Terreftrial only in this; 
 inftead of the feveral Parts of the Earth, the Images of 
 the Stars and Conftellations are drawn on the Celeftial Globe. 
 The Circle drawn through the Point Cancer, and the two Poles, 
 reprefents the Solftitial Colure; and that Circle drawn through th 
 Pont Aries, and the two Poles, reprefents the Equinoctial Colure. 
 
 E4 Po<
 
 5 6 Of the Celeftial Globe. Part I. 
 
 Problem XIX. 
 
 To fjezv the true Reprefentation of the Face of the Heavens at any 
 given 'Time. 
 
 Reftify for the Latitude of the Place, by Prob. III. and, by 
 the Help of a Mariner's ( 'ompafs, let the Pole of the Globe point 
 towards the Pole of the World ; find the Sun's Place by Prob IV. 
 and bring it to the Meridian, and at the fame time fet the Index 
 to 1 2 at Noon, then turn the Globe about till the Index points to 
 the given Hour ; and the Globe, in this Pofition, will exaftly re- 
 prefent the Face of the Heavens at the given Time : From whence, 
 by turning the Globe quite round, it is eafy to fee what Stars at- 
 ways appear, or never defccnd below the Horizon, as alfo what 
 other Stars never appear. 
 
 Problem XX. 
 
 To find the Latitude and Longitude of any Star, alfo its Right 
 
 Afcenfon and Declination. 
 
 Having brought the firft Point of Cancer to the Brazen Meridian, 
 fix the Quadrant of Altitude over the proper Pole of the Ecliptic, 
 whether it be North or South, which, in this Pofition ot the 
 Globe, will be 23-2 Degrees under the Brazen Meridian, below 
 the North Pole, or, reckoning Southward on the Meridian, will 
 be 23 ^ Degrees fhort of the South Pole : Then turn the Quadrant 
 of Altitude over the given Star ; and the Arch of the Quadrant 
 intercepted between the Star and the Ecliptic will be the Latitude 
 requir'd ; and the Degrees cut on the Ecliptic by the Quadrant of 
 Altitude will be the Star's Longitude. 
 
 For a Star's Right Afcenfion and Declination, bring the Star to 
 the Meridian, and the Degrees of the Equator contain'd between 
 the Point Aries and the Brazen Meridian fhew the Right Afcen- 
 fion ; and the Degrees of the Meridian intercepted between the 
 Star and the Equator give the Declination. Hence, having the 
 Latitude and Longitude of a Star, it will be eafy to find the Star 
 on the Globe. 
 
 The Sun's Right Afcenfion, and Declination, for any given 
 Time, may be found according to the Method in this Problem ; 
 only obferve, that the Stars have the fame Right Afcenfion and 
 Declination all Days in the Year, and that the Sun changes both 
 every Hour. When we fay the Fixt Stars have no Alteration of 
 Place, we mean that that Alteration, cr the Preceffion of the 
 Equinox, is fo very fmall as not to require any Notice in this pre- 
 fent Affair. 
 
 Pro-
 
 Chap. IV. Of the Celeftial Globe. 57 
 
 Problem XXI. 
 
 The Latitude of the Place, and the Surfs Declination, and Altitude, 
 
 being given, to find the Hour of the Day. 
 
 Having rectified the .Globe for the Latitude, the Zenith, and 
 the Sun's Place ; turn the Globe, and the Quadrant of Altitude, 
 fo that the Sun's Place may cut the given Degree pf Altitude ; 
 then the Index will (hew the Time required. 
 
 Problem XXII. 
 
 Ihe Day of the Month, the Latitude of the Place, and Altitude of 
 
 a known Fixt Star, being given, to find the Time of Night. 
 
 Re&ify the Globe for the Latitude, Zenith, and Sun's Place : 
 Then turn the Globe, and Quadrant of Altitude, backward and 
 forward, till the Centre of the Star meets the Quadrant in the 
 Degree of Altitude given ; then the Index will point to the true 
 Hour of the Night, and the Place where the Quadrant cuts the 
 Horizon will ftiew the Azimuth of the Star at that Time. 
 
 Problem XXIII. 
 
 To find the Place of any Planet on the Globe ; and thereby to find 
 at what Hour any Planet (fuppofe Jupiter) will rife or fet, or 
 nvill be upon the Meridian any given Day of the Year. 
 
 Find out, by an Ephemeris, what Degree Jupiter is in that 
 Day of the Year : Stick on a little black Patch on that Place ; and, 
 elevating the Globe for the Latitude of the given Place, bring the 
 Sun's Place to the Meridian ; and, putting the Index to i z at Noon, 
 by turning the Globe properly about, we fhall have pointed out 
 the Time of rifing, fetting, and when that Planet will be on the 
 Meridian. 
 
 Problem XXIV. 
 The Latitude, and the Day of the Month, being given, to find the 
 
 Time when any known Star will be on the Meridian, and alfa 
 
 the Time of its Rifing and Setting. 
 
 Rectify the Globe for the Latitude of the given Place, and the 
 Sun's Place ; and by bringing the given Star to the Meridian, and 
 alfo to the Eaftern nnd Weftern Edge of the Horizon, the Index 
 will point to the Times required. 
 
 CHAP.
 
 58 Projection of the Sphere. Part I. 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 PROJECTION of the SPHERE. 
 
 SECTION I. 
 
 Orthographic Projectiok. 
 
 Definition. 
 
 TH E Orthographic Projection of the Sphere is the Art df 
 drawing ail the reft of the Circles upon the Plane of any- 
 one of its great ones, fo as they fhall appear upon it to the Eye at 
 an infinite Diftancej having the Axis of the Eye continu'd perpen- 
 dicular to the Plane of that great Circle, upon which theProjedion 
 is made, and palling thro' its Centre. 
 
 Axiom. 
 The Place of any vifible Point, upon the Plane of the Projec- 
 tion, is where a Right Line drawn thro' the Eye and that Point 
 interfefts the Plane. Let AB 
 be the Plane of the Projection, 
 fuppofed to be every way infi- 
 nitely continu'd ; the Eye in E 
 plac'd at any Diftance ; the Points 
 to be projected x, r. Draw the 
 Rays Ejpx, Erz ; 'tis evident the 
 Point x is by this means pro- 
 jected or feen in y, and the Point 
 r in z. 
 
 Scholium i. 
 This Axiom is the great Fundamental which all manner of 
 Projections are built upon ; and from which all the Rules for the 
 Projeftion of the Sphere in piano are primarily deduc'd, and into 
 which they are ultimately refolv'd. And it holds not only of 
 Points, but of all Lines, as they confift of Points ; and of all Sur- 
 faces, as they may be conceiv'd as confifting of Lines ; and of So- 
 lids too, as their Reprefentatives in the Plane of Projeftion are no 
 other than plain Surfaces, of fome Figure or other, which may 
 be refolv'd into Lines, and thofe into Points. 
 
 S C H 0>
 
 J )irect or Right SPHERE 
 Fiji 
 
 AuOblit 
 
 ^ k 4 * 
 
 % 
 
 --i, 
 ^ 
 
 A\1 
 
 
 
 Fif 4 XS3M.
 
 Chap. V. P r o j e c t i o n of the S p h e r e. 59 
 
 Scholium z. 
 The Plane of that great Circle of the Sphere, upon which the 
 other Circles are to be proje&ed, is to be conceived as a tranfparent 
 Medium, in order that the Rays Jfrom the Eye may pafs thro' it, 
 and mark out upon it the Places of thofe Circles, or Parts of 
 Circles, which are, with reipect to the Eye, beyond the Plane : 
 Alfo the Sphere or Globe is to befiippos'd as diverted of all Mat- 
 ter, but that of which its Circles coniiit, that the Places of both 
 thofe Circles and Parts of Circles wkich are beyond the Plane, 
 and thofe betwixt it and the Eye, may be view'd upon the Plane 
 of the Projection. 
 
 Theorem I. 
 The Rays by which the Eye at an infinite Diftance fees an Ob- 
 ject, differ infinitely little from parallel Rays. 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 A 
 
 Demonstration. 
 Suppofe any Object A B to be fe.ep 
 by the Eye firft in C, then after- 
 wards in D, the "\ ACB is greater 
 than "\ A D B ; confequently the 
 Angles CAB, C B A, are lefs than 
 the Angles DAB, DBA; where- 
 fore the Rays DA, DB, approach 
 nearer the Perpendiculars E A, F B, 
 than CA, CB. Suppofe the Eye 
 at D be remov'd at an infinite Dif- 
 tance, then will ^DAB differ in- 
 finitely little from a Right one ; 
 confequently the Rays DA, DB, will differ infinitely little from> 
 EA, FB, the two parallel Rays. 
 
 10 
 
 A \ 
 
 \ 
 
 B 
 
 Scholium. 
 By infinite Diflance in this Place is not meant ftrictly fuch, but 
 a Diftance fo very large as in which the Angles DBF and DAE 
 fhall be lefs than any afhgnable Angle, or in a State approximating 
 infinitely near to Evanefcency : So that Right Lines from the Ob- 
 ject through the Plane of Projection to the Eye are not itricily pa- 
 rallel, but approach infinitely nearto a Parallelifm betwixt them- 
 felves; fo as to make thefe Projections, to all Intent* and Purpofcs, 
 the fame as if they were actually and abfolutely parallel. 
 
 Corollary i. 
 Hence 'tis evident, that a Right Line, perpendicular to the 
 Orthographic Plane, is projected into a Point. 
 
 Co-
 
 o"o Projection of the Sphere. Part I. 
 
 Corollary 
 A Right Line parallel to the 
 Plane of Projection is projected 
 into an equal Right Line. Let 
 A B be the Plane, and the given 
 Right Line be C D. Then, per laft 
 Theorem, the Points C, D, will be 
 projected into the Points e, f, ia . 
 the Section of the Place A B. 
 
 Corollary 3. 
 A Right Line, oblique to the Plane, is projected into a fhorter 
 Right Line. See the lafi Scheme. Let x y be the given oblique 
 Right Line, and x e, y g, perpendicular to A B ; then 'tis plain, 
 fer the Axiom and Theorem, that the Points x, y, are projected, 
 into the Points e, g, and by Infpection the Line eg is Ihorter than 
 
 Corollary 4. 
 A Circle perpendicular to the 
 Plane of Projection is projected in- 
 to its Diameter. For the Points 0, 
 r, 0, p, &c. will be projected in- 
 to the Points x, x, x, x, ! tif c . and A( 
 fo the whole Curve will be project- 
 ed into the Line A B. 
 
 >*<Tr?Oo 
 
 Corollary 5. 
 Hence an Arch of a Circle, perpendicu- 
 lar to the Plane, is projected into the Sine 
 of that Arch ; for rb is projected into c d\ 
 but cd ba, which is the Sine of rb. 
 
 
 
 
 Corollary 6. 
 A Circle parallel to the Plane of Projection is projected into a 
 Circle equal to itblf. 
 
 Theorem II. 
 
 A Circle oblique to the Orthographic Plane of Projection is 
 
 projected into an Ellipfis. 
 
 
 De-
 
 Chap. V. Proje'ctiom/^Spher e.' 61 
 
 Demonstration. 
 Let the Circle 
 ad be be inclined 
 to the Plane of 
 Projection dg ef. 
 The Perpendicu- 
 lars ag, k /, are 
 parallel, per The- 
 orem I. Draw lb 
 parallel to a c, and 
 k b parallel to g c, 
 and fuppofe acb 
 at Right Angles 
 to e c d : Then 
 the Square of a e 
 is to the Red- 
 angle under e c d, 
 and the Square of 
 lb is to the 
 
 ^le under 
 e h d, per Theor. 
 
 Chapt. II. 
 fore n c : 
 Ulb:: dee 
 : d be. Bat A 
 <z eg and & lb k 
 are fimiW j therefore a c : g c:: lb: k h ; therefore n * f D jf c 
 ::Ulb:U bk. l^herefore dee: ( D a c ) :Ugc ::dhe 
 ( D lb) : k h; not in a Raf'o "of Equality, as in the Circle ; 
 becaufe the Square of g c is evidently lefs than the Square of a c, 
 and the Squ;.re of kb than the Square of lb. Therefore, per 
 Theorem XXXV. Chap. II. the Points and k are in an Ellipfis. 
 And fo for the reft. 
 
 Corollary I. 
 Hence an Ellipfis parallel to the Plane of Projection will be pro- 
 jected into an Ellipfis equal to itielf. 
 
 Corollary 2. 
 Hence alfo an Ellipfis inclined to the Plane of Projection will be 
 projected into an Ellipfis, except in one Cafe in which it will be 
 projected into a Circle ; for if the tranfverfe Dia:r.eter be fo much 
 ihortened by the Projection, that it be equal to the conjugate, then 
 will the Projection be a Circle. 
 
 Having
 
 62 Projection of /^SpBiftE. Part I. 
 
 Having demonftrated thofe Theorems which are requifite to the 
 Orthographic Proje&ioiv of the Sphere, it will be eafy to projeft 
 the Sphere orthographically upon any great Circle : But becauie 
 none of thefe Projections are of any great Ufe, excepting that 
 upon the Solftitial Colure, and being troublefome by reafbn of 
 the oblique Circles being projected into Ellipfes- ; Mathematicians 
 have confined themfelves to the moll fimple of thefe Kinds, <viz. 
 that upon the Plane of the Solftitial Colure, commonly call'd the 
 Planifphere orAnalemma; the admirable Ufe of which will be ful- 
 ly fhewn in the Conftruftion and Ufe of Maps. 
 
 Problem. 
 
 To projeil the Sphere orthographically upon the Plane of the Solfti- 
 tial Colure. 
 
 If we conceive the Eye at an infinite Diftance, projecting the 
 Circles of the Sphere upon the Plane of the Solftitial Colures re- 
 prefented by the Circle WENS, with the princi- 
 See the Fig. pal Ray drawn from it to theCentre of the Sphere per- 
 pendicular to that Plane ; 'tis evident, by Coroll. 6. 
 to Theorem i. that the Solftitial Colure will be a Circle : And the 
 Equator W E, Ecliptic xy> Equinottial Colure N S, alfo the Pa- 
 rallels of Latitude,the Tropics of Capricorn x VP, and Cancer y S, 
 and Polar Circles h k, n m, being all perpendicular to the Plane of 
 Projection W N E S, will be all projected into Right Lines equal 
 to their refpedtive Diameters, by Cor. 4. to Theor. I. Thofe re- 
 prefenting great Circles pafling thro' the Centre V of the Repre- 
 fentation ; and the Reprefentatives of all Parallels cutting the Pe- 
 riphery of the Projection in thofe Points, where the Parallels them- 
 felves cut the Solftitial Colure in the Sphere. As to Circles paral- 
 lel to the Plane of Projection, they may be projected and drawn by 
 Coroll. 6. to Theor. I. 
 
 The Sun feeming every 24 Hours to run round the Equator, or 
 one of its Parallels ; in one Hour therefore it mull run 1 5 De- 
 grees, in two 30, cifr. and the great Circle over which it ftands 
 at any Hour, which pafles thro' both Poles of the Equator, 
 is called an Hour-circle : And the Solftitial Colure being aflum'd 
 as the firft Meridian, or Meridian of the Place, it will be the 
 Hour-circle of 1 2 at Noon and 1 2 at Night. The Equinoftial 
 Colure being at Right Angles or perpendicular to it, and pafling 
 thro' the Poles of the Equator, as all Aftronomical Hour-circles 
 do, it will be the Hour-circle of Six in the Morning and Evening, 
 the Sun runing over a Quadrant of the Equator, or one of its Pa- 
 rallels, in fix Hours. 
 
 If
 
 Chap. V. P R o j 2 c t i o nt of the S p h e r e. 6$ 
 
 If we divide the Reprefentation of the Equator, which is at 
 Right Angles to the Plane of Projection, into its proper Degrees 
 by a Line of Sines, by Coroll. 5 . to Theor. I. fo that the Sine of 
 1 5 , 30 , 45 , &c. be fet from V both ways in. the Equator, de- 
 termining the Points thro' which the Hour-circles pafs, we may 
 draw the Meridians, or Hour-circles, ( being Ellipfes ) by Prob. 
 XV. Chap. I. That thefe inclin'd Circles are Ellipfes, has beea 
 prov'd in Theorem II. 
 
 SECTION II. 
 
 Stenographic Projection. 
 
 Definition. 
 
 TH E Stereographic Projection of the Sphere is the Art of 
 drawing all the reft of its Circles upon the Plane of any of 
 its great Circles, fo as they fhall appear upon it to an Eye at 
 the Surface of the Sphere, in one of the Poles of that great Circle: 
 In which Cafe the Axis of the Eye continu'd will be perpendicu- 
 lar to the Plane of that great Circle, upon which the Projection is 
 to be made, and pafs thro' its Centre. 
 
 Theorem I. 
 Every Circle directly oppofite to the Eye, or parallel to the 
 Plane of Projection, will be projected into a Circle. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 The Rays which are conceiv'd to be drawn, by the Axiom 
 ind Scholium I. of the laft Sedlion, from every Point of the 
 Circumference of the given Circle 
 K G I F to the Eye at A, form a 
 Cone, of which A is the Vertex, 
 and the Circle given the Bafe ; the 
 Plane of the Projection B D C E, 
 interpos'd betwixt the Eye and the 
 given Circle, forms the Cone 
 kgifk, whofe Bafe kgifis a 
 Circle, per Theor. XXXIII. Chap. 
 
 Corollary. 
 Hence a Circle parallel to the Plane of Projection will, in the 
 fartheft Hemisphere, be projected into a Circle lefs than itfelf ; 
 bat in the contiguous Hemifphcre, into a Circle greater than itfelf. 
 
 Theo-
 
 64 P R o j e c T i n of the S p h t r E. Part I* 
 
 Theorem It. 
 If a Circle be perpendicular to the Plane of Projection, the 
 fertheft Semicircle is projected into its Diameter, and the neareil 
 into an infinite Right Line. 
 
 Demonstration.' 
 The Arch d r is projected in- 
 to ds, the Arch er into ns, em 0" 
 into n a, and m x into x a } for 
 all the Points of which the Se- 
 micircle confifts are projected in- 
 to the Plane dx, per Ax. and 
 Schol. 1. of the laft Section. 
 But the Semicircle d y x above 
 the Plane of Projection can ne- 
 ver be all projected on the Plane; 
 becaufe op, in which the high- 
 eft Point y is feen, is parallel to the Diameter d x. 
 
 Theorem HI. 
 A great Circle, or any Part thereof, perpendicular to the Plane 
 of Projection, is projected into a Line of half Tangents. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 Let the Plane of the Projection te 
 a b, and the given Circle aeb d. De- 
 Icribe c h with the Radius c e ; then, per 
 laft, d f is projected into c g, which is 
 the Tangent of "n. c eg : But, per Th. 
 XL Chap. II. X ceg h<^dcf y 
 confequently cm -j df; therefore 
 c g is the Tangent of df, and c b is 
 the Tangent of i d b. 
 
 Theorem IV. 
 The Reprefentation of any Circle B C, placed oblique to the 
 Eye, will be a Circle in the Plane of Projection eg. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 
 If from the Eye at A wc conceive Rays drawn to every Point 
 
 of the given Circle B C, they will form a Scalene Cone, of 
 
 which A B C is the Section, thro' its Vertex and Centre of the 
 
 Bafe. The Arch DA CAj therefore, per Corol. 1. to 
 
 Theor.
 
 Chap. V. Projection*//^ Sphere. 6 : 
 
 Theorem IX. Chap. II. 
 
 t, A B C = \ACa-; 
 and ^ A is common to 
 both Triangles ; therefore 
 ABC and AC* are fi- 
 milar. Confequently the 
 Section C x, and c $, 
 which is parallel to it, will 
 be Circles, per Theorem 
 XXXIV. Chap. II. The 
 fame is alio demonftrable 
 of the leffer Circle / /. 
 
 Theorem V. 
 
 The Centre of any inclined great Circle E F lies in the Piaorfe* 
 ter of the Projection B C, called the Line of Meafures, and diilant 
 from the Centre P by the Tangent of Elevation E B above the 
 Plane. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 
 Suppofe the Eye at A, projecting the great Circle E F, upon 
 the Plane B C, in the Line H I, which bileftcd gives the Centre 
 O} from the Centre A defcribe 
 H P F. Then ^EAG = { 
 EPG, per Theor. IX. Chap. 
 II. but ^ E A G = A I P, per 
 Theor. XII. Chap. II. and ^ 
 AIPr=iPOA; therefore <. 
 EPG = ^POAj and ^ 
 EPB=<PAO;and there ; 
 fore the Arches E B, P D, are 
 equal. But the Line P O is the 
 Tangent of P D, and therefore 
 = the Tangent of E B, which is the ^ of Elevation above th 
 Plane. 
 
 Corollary r. 
 
 Hence the Tangent of the Angle of Elevation above the 
 Plane, taken from a Scale, and fet from the Centre of the Plane of 
 Projection, will give the Centra of the Circle to be drawn. 
 
 Corollary 2. 
 Since A O rr O H, and A O is the Secant of P D ; there- 
 fore the Secant of the Angle above the Plane being fet from H 
 likewifc gives O as before. 
 
 Scho-
 
 66 Projection a/" A&* Sphere. Part I, 
 
 Scholium. 
 On this Theorem depends almoft all the Practice of Stereo- 
 graphic Projection ; for hereby are defcrib'd the Meridians, Ecli- 
 ptic, CJftf. 
 
 Theorem VI. 
 
 The projected Pole e of any inclined great Circle E F is diflani 
 from the Centre of Projection by the Tangent of half the Angle 
 above the Plane of Projection. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 Let G n E B, (fee laft Scheme ) and draw A en; then c is 
 the projected Pole n ; for B G =: E n rz go ; but P c Tan- 
 gent of \ G, per Theor. III. 
 
 Theorem VII. 
 The Angle made by two Circles, on the Plane of Projection, ii 
 equal to the Angle made by their refpective Planes. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 Let X K D F ( See the Scheme to Theor. XVII. in the next Chap.) 
 be the Plane of Projection ; K M F A, M Z A E, the given Circles 
 interfering each other in the Point M ; A the Place of the Eye, 
 projecting the fpherical Angle F M E. Conceive a Tangent drawn 
 to M F from M, and parallel to INF; alfo a Tangent to M E, 
 fjom M parallel to I E L : Then if we conceive Rays drawn from 
 the Eye to every Point of the Triangle I L F, or I E N, they will 
 interfect the tranfparent Plane XKDF, and will form in it the 
 Triangle H P C or G B O, which muft be equiangular to I L F, 
 or I E N, from the Parallelifm of their refpective Sides. 
 
 Theorem VIII. 
 A great Circle D P F, that has not its Centre (O) in the Line of 
 Meafures N P C, will have it in a fecondary Line of Meafures 
 A C B, diftant from ( C) the Centre of the Circle A P B, by the 
 Tangent of the Angle W P D, to the Radius P C. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 Let P C be produced, meeting the other Interferon of the 
 Circles A P B, D P F, in H ; then, fince C H is = P C, it is 
 evident, that the Centre of the Circle D P F will fall fomewhere 
 in A C. But the Angle O P C is equal to the curvilineal Angle 
 WPD, per Theorem XXXII. Chap. II. Therefore OC (being 
 
 the
 
 Ckap. V. Projection*//^ Sphere. 67 
 
 the Tangent of O P C ) is nfl 
 
 equal to the Tangent of 
 WPD, which meafures the 
 Inclination of the Planes of 
 the Circles A P B, W P F H, 
 per laft Theorem. 
 
 Scholium. 
 This Theorem is the Foundation of all Dialing, by Proje&ioa 
 of Hour-circles or Meridians. 
 
 T h b o R b m IX. 
 The Centre i of a lefler Circle B b C, to be projected, whofe 
 Poles E, G, lie in the Plane of Projection, will be in the Line of 
 Meafures E c, diftant from the Centre of the Primitive F, by the 
 Secant of its Diftanee B G, from the neareft Pole G, and its Ra- 
 dius B i will be the Tangent of that Diftanee. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 H 
 
 Let the Eye be at 
 A, projecting BC into 
 b c, which bifected 
 gives i the Centre of 
 the Circle CBf: 
 Then, the Triangles 
 A H B and fHF 
 are fimilar, for "^ 
 r FH =^ABH, 
 and "^ H common ; 
 therefore ^HAB 
 = HfF: But "^ 
 HAB-JHFB, and <HcF = {biB; therefore ^HFB 
 = ^ b i B. Therefore the Triangle F B * is Right-angled at B ; 
 confequently B i is the Tangent of B G, the Diftance of the letter 
 Circle from its Pole, and F / its Secant. 
 
 F 2 
 
 The-
 
 68 Projectioko//^Sphere. Part I. 
 
 Theorem X. 
 A leffer Circle B C, whofe Poles x, r, lie not in the Plane of 
 Projection, is projected by laying off in the Line of Meafures, 
 from the Centre F, the Tangent of half the Diftance of each Extre- 
 mity of the Diameter from that Pole oppofite to the Eye, and 
 the Diftance of thefe two projected Extremities bife&ed will be the 
 Centre of the Circle in the Projection. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 Let E G be the Plane of Projection, 
 the lefler Circle to be proje^Ld B C, 
 which the Eye in A projects into b c ; 
 then F b is the Half-tangent of H B, 
 and F c the Half-tangent of H C, per 
 Theorem III. therefore b c bife&ed 
 gives the Centre of the given Circle in 
 the Projection. 
 
 Scholium. 
 By this Proportion all the Parallels of Latitude between the 
 Zenith of any Place, and that Point of the Horizon fartheft from 
 the elevated Pole, are projected. 
 
 Theorem XI. 
 If a leffer Circle to be projected fall entirely on one Side of the 
 Pole of Projection, its Diameter will be the Difference of the 
 ;Half-tangents of its greateft and Ieaft Diftance from the Pole df the 
 Primitive in the Line of Meafures. 
 
 Demonstration 
 Let EG be the primitive C ircle, or 
 Plane of Projection, the Points H, A, 
 the Poles thereof, and xy theDiameter 
 of the lefler Circle to be projected ; 
 the Eye at A projects *, y, into the p 
 Points , r. Then F is the Half- ** 
 tangent of the Arch H x, and F r 
 the Half-tangent of Hy, perTheor. 
 III. confequently r F r n r, 
 which bife&ed give the Radius. 
 
 PR:
 
 Chap. V. pR0JICTI8N//foSPHERE. 69 
 
 Problem I. 
 
 To draw a great Circle at Right Angles to another great Circle, 
 
 and to find the Pole of an oblique Circle. 
 
 1 . To draw a Circle per- 
 pendicular to the Plane of 
 Projection A B C D, draw 
 any Diameter B D through 
 the Centre F. 
 
 2. To draw a Right Circle 
 perpendicular to a Right 
 Circle A C, draw the Dia- 
 meter B D perpendicalar to 
 AC. 
 
 3. To draw an oblique 
 Circle perpendicular to a 
 
 Right Circle A C at a given Point, draw the oblique Circle DEB 
 thro' the Poles B, D. 
 
 4. To draw an oblique Circle perpendicular to an oblique Circje 
 DEB, firll find its Pole thus; draw D EG, and the Diameter 
 G F H, perpendicular to which dr*w IFK; draw D I, and*t 
 will interfeel the Diameter A C in L the Pole required : Now any- 
 how draw the Diameter R S ; then thro' the three Points R, L, S, 
 draw a Circle, and it will cut the oblique Circle D EB at Right 
 Angle*, in the Point d, and therefore is the oblique Circle re- 
 quired. 
 
 Corollary. 
 Henee any lefTer Circle may be drawn at Right Angles to any 
 given great Circle ; for 'tis but firft drawing a great Circle perpen- 
 dicular thereto, and drawing the letter Circle parallel to it. 
 
 Problem II. 
 To draw a great Circle E A G thro"" any two given Prints A, B 
 within the Plane of Projeilio* D 6 R Q 
 Draw the Diameter D R 
 thro' that Point A which is O 
 
 the fartheft diftant from the 
 Centre C ; draw O C at 
 Right Angles to D R, and 
 join AO. Raife OH per- 
 pendicular to A O, which will 
 inferfeft D R produe'd in H ; 
 then through the three Points 
 A, B, H, draw the Cirde 
 EAGH requir'd. For join 
 EG,anditwillbeECxCG 
 
 F x rrAC
 
 jo Projections//^ Sphere. Part I. 
 
 r:ACxCH,^r Theorem XV. Chap. II. but A C x C H = 
 OCq, per Theor. XII. Chap. II. therefore CExCG=OC f , 
 and confequently EG is a Diameter parting thro 1 C the Centre, 
 and E A G is a great Circle. 
 
 Problem III. 
 To divide the "Periphery of a Circle on the Plane of ProjeSlion. 
 
 The Periphery of a great Circle 
 is divided or meafured by a 
 Ruler laid on either Pole, and the 
 Divifions of the oppofite i Periphery 
 of the Primitive OBH. For, 
 fince B O equiv. M O equiv. C O 
 equiv. 90,^ therefore B D equiv. 
 M d. And the Circumference of a 
 Imall Circle may be divided by Lines 
 from the Pole to the Divifions in the 
 Periphery of a fmall Circle parallel 
 to the Plane of Projection, and defcrib'd at the Di fiance given 
 from the under Pole of that Plane : Or any projected Circumfe- 
 rence is divided by Lines from the Divifions of its produc'd * Pe- 
 riphery to either Pole. 
 
 Problem IV. 
 To draw a parallel Circle. 
 
 1. To draw a Circle parallel to the 
 Primitive, take the Tangent of half 
 the Parallel's Diftance from the Pole, 
 and therewith ( one Foot being placed 
 in the Centre E ) defcribe the parallel 
 jCircle F G H. 
 
 2. To draw a Circle parallel to a 
 Right Circle, crofs the Right Circle 
 BED with a Diameter A C at Right 
 Angles, which produce, and take the 
 Secant of C K the Parallel's Diftance 
 from the Pole C, and fet it off in the Diameter A C, from the 
 Centre E, and it gives the Centre required. 
 
 3. To
 
 Chap. V. P R o j e c t i o n of the S p h e r e. 71 
 
 3. To draw a Circle parallel b 
 
 to an oblique Circle DFB, fyp- 
 pofe at the Diitance of 46 50' 
 from the Pole ; firfl find G the 
 Pole of the given oblique Circle, 
 per Prob. I. then meafure E G on 
 the Half-tangent.% which let be 
 32 ' 30 : Then 46 J 30' 32 ' 
 30 14' co ; and 46 30 -j- 
 32 ' 30' 79 ' ; fet the Tan- 
 gent of half thisDifference from E 
 to m, and the Tangent of half the 
 Sum ( 79 ) from E to * ; then 
 m n bife&ed gives the Centre 0, by Theorem X. on which defcribe 
 with the Radius om the Parallel m R required. 
 
 Problem V. 
 
 to draw a great Circle through any given Point, making a given 
 
 Angle v.-ith the Primitive. 
 
 Let A B C D be the Primitive, or 
 Plane of Projection, E the Centre 
 thereof, I the Point given. Thro' 
 the Point I 'tis required to draw an 
 oblique Circle, fo that it may make J\ 
 an Angle of 36 at the primitive 
 Circle. With the Tangent of 36 
 and one Foot in the C entre E, de- 
 fcribe the Arch x. Then, with the 
 Secant of the Angle, and one Foot '' ; 
 
 in the given Point, make an Arch, and the Point of Irtterfe&ion 
 in the Arch x will be the Centre of the oblique Circle DIB, by 
 Theorem V. 
 
 Problem VI. 
 To project the Sphere jlereographically upon the Plane of, the 
 General Meridian. 
 
 1. On the Centre E defcribe the primitive Circle A B C D, 
 which is the Plane on which the Projection is to be made, an.i 
 crof, it with two perpendicular Diameters AC, BD; the firlt re- 
 presents the Equator, which, becaufe it is at Right Angles with 
 the Plane of Projections, is projected into a Right Line by Theor. 
 JI. The Diameter B D is the Axis of the, Sahcre, and B, D, the 
 Poles. 
 
 z. If the primitive Circle be made to reprefent the Solftitial 
 CqIwc, then BED ftull reprefent the Equinoctial Colure ; an4 
 
 9 i th*
 
 72 Projection of the Sphere. Part I. 
 
 the Right Line To E vy, cutting A C in an Angle of 23 f, 
 is the Projection of the Ecliptic ; for the Eye in this Cafe will 
 be in the Point on the Ecliptic 90 diltant from the Plane of 
 Projection, and therefore projects the Ecliptic, as being at Right 
 Angles to the Plane ABCD, into its Diameter by Theor II. 
 The Ecliptic is divided thus : Take the half Tangent of 30 \ 
 or one Sign, from a Line of Half-tangents, and fet it both 
 ways from the Centre, and it will cut the Northern Signs tf 
 and Jig, and the Southern Signs X and uT., by Theor. HI. Thus 
 the Half-tangent of 60 fhews the Signs H and Si, S and ; 
 and thus may each Sign be divided into its proper Degrees ; the 
 Points and vy, being 90 diftant from T and i in the Equi- 
 noctial Colure, are projected into the Primitive, 23 30' above A, 
 and below C. The Hour-circles, or intermediate Meridians, as 
 B 15 D, B 30 D, &c. are all drawn by Problem I. Cafe 3. and 
 Theor. V. that is, by fetting the Half-tangents of 15, 30", 45 11 , 
 fjfc . both ways from the Centre E on the Equator A C, which 
 gives the Points of Interferon of the Meridians on the Equator ; 
 the Secant-complement fet from thofe Points of Interfection, 
 or the Tangent-complement fet from the Centre E, upon the 
 Equator, extended when there is Occafion, will find the Centres 
 on which thefe Circles are to be defcrib'd, palling thro' the Inter- 
 ferons and the Poles B, D, by Corol. 1. and 2. to Theorem V. 
 The Parallels of Latitude, being perpendicular to the Plane, are all 
 drawn by Prob. IV. Cafe 2. and Theorem IX. that is, by fetting 
 off the half Tangents of io, 20 , 30% &c. from E the Centre, to- 
 wards either Pole B, and D : And thus we have the Interferons 
 of the Parallels of Latitude with the Equinoctial Colure : The 
 Secant's Complement fet from the Centre E on the Diameter B D 
 produced, or the Tangent's Complement, fet from the Interfec- 
 tions, will give the Centres of thofe Parallels on which they are 
 to be defcrib'd, palling thro' the Points of Interfection on the 
 Equinoctial Colure. 
 
 Among the Parallels, the dotted Lines reprefent the Tropics 
 and Polar Circles, on each Side of the Equator. Thus much, I 
 prefume, may be fully fufficient, to give the Reader a juft Notion 
 of the Projection of the Sphere, on any Meridian : and by well 
 underftanding the foregoing Theorems, any Part of the Projection 
 may be meafur'd. 
 
 By this Projection the whole Earth may be laid down, and thus 
 a general Map of the whole Globe is conllructed ; but becaufe the 
 projected Meridians are not equidiftant from each other, the Par* 
 of the Earth cannot be laid down in their true Proportions. 
 
 Pro-
 
 Chap. V. Projection of the S r h e r e. 73 
 
 Problem VII. 
 
 To projecl the Sphere on the Horizon of London, Latitude 5 i 30'. 
 
 Let W NES reprefent the Horizon, upon the Plane of which 
 the Sphere is to be reprefented, and conceive the Eye in the Na- 
 dir. Draw N S reprefenting the Meridian of London, or the 
 North and South Azimuth, and alio W E the prime Vertical, 
 or Eaft and Weft Azimuth, at Right Angles thereto. Thefe 
 Circles, being perpendicular to the Plane of Projection, will 
 be reprefented by thofe Right Lines by Thcor. II. And all other 
 Azimuths may be conceived to be drawn in like manner, as they 
 cut each other in the Poles of the Horizon Z, and are perpendicu- 
 lar alfo to the Plane thereof. The Equator being 51 30 diftant 
 from the Zenith Z, therefore the Half-tangent of 5i J 30 fct 
 from the Centre Z to IE, gives its Interferon with the Diameter 
 N S, by Theor. III. And tne Tangent of its Complement 3 8 30' 
 fet from Z the otherWay to f, gives the Centre f, ( by Corollary 
 ! . to Theorem V.) on which the Equinoctial W JE E is to be de- 
 fcrib'd with the Radius fJE. The Ecliptic is projected into two 
 Semicircles the Northern W S E, and the Southern into W YP E 
 by Theorem IV. and drawn thus: Set the Half-tangent of 28 2 , 
 its Diftance from the Zenith Southward, to the Point S, by 
 Theorem III. then fet the Tangent of its Complement, or the 
 Angle of Elevation 62 ' from Z on N S produced to k ; then with 
 the Radius k 2? defcribe W < E, by Corollary 1. to Theorem V. 
 In like manner, by having the Diftance ( 75 ' ) of the South Part 
 of the Ecliptic from the Zenith Z, the Semicircle W vy E may 
 be drawn on the Plane of the Projection. The Trppics and Pa- 
 rallels of Declination, being inclined to the Plane of Projection, 
 and parallel to the Equator, which, is here an oblique Circle, arc 
 all drawn by Problem IV. Cafe 3. by fetting off from the Centre 
 Z of the Primitive, in the Line of Meafures N S, 
 the Tangents f half their neareft and greateft Di- See the Fig. 
 fiances from {he Pole oppofue to that in which the 
 Eye is placed ; which, bifected, will give the Centres of thefe 
 Circles to be projected, and their Radii. If therefore the Tro- 
 pic of S is to be projected, its lead Diftanoe from the Zenith, 
 or Pole of the Horizon oppofite to that in which the Eye is plac'd, 
 is 28 ' ( the Equator being 5 i 30 diftant from the Zenith in the 
 Latitude of London, and the Tropic of S 23 30 lefs diftant 
 than the Equator) ; half therefore of that neareft Diftance is 14 '. 
 Its greateft Diftance is 105% (confifting of the Diftance of the 
 Zenith from the North Pole 38 '' 30 , and that of the Pole 
 from the Tropic of S, 66 J 30 ) half that Diftance 52 30 . The 
 Tangent therefore of 14 to the Radius of the Projection, fet off 
 from Z to S, and that of 52 30' from Z to x, give a& x a 
 
 pro-
 
 74 Projection of the Sphe**. Part I. 
 
 projected Diameter of the Tropic of S>, g its Centre, and 50 
 50 a Part of the Tropic itfelf ; which (hews the Time of the Sun's 
 Rifing and Setting, when he defcribes this Tropic, (on the 10th 
 of June ) and confequently the Length of the longeft Day in this 
 Latitude. 
 
 After the fame Manner may we project the Tropic of VP, <vi, 
 B Y? A ; whofe neareft Diftance from the Zenith is 75 , and its 
 greateft 152. But to iiluilrate this more fully, let the Right Line 
 PO repreient 
 the Axis of 
 the Earth, 
 andAZHN 
 the Solftitial 
 Colure, AH 
 the Horizon, 
 Z N the 
 prime Verti- 
 cal, ^ELthe 
 Equinoftial 5 
 and fuppofe 
 the Eye in 
 
 the Nadir N, or Pole of the Horizon A H, and Yf x the Tropic 
 of YP ; then this Diameter YP x will be projected into the Line 
 f, by the Axiom of Projection, and Scholium 1. following it; 
 vy into /, and x into F, and Z into C : But / C is the Tangent 
 of half Z Vf = .5 i 30' ~\~ 23 30 rr: 75 ; therefore the Tan- 
 gent of half 75 , fet from C tof, gives the Point of Interferon: 
 The other Part C F is the Tangent of half the projected Arch 
 Z H x 90 ( r=> Z H ) -j- 62 ( = I H 38 J 30 ' -f- L x- 
 23 30 ) = 152 . In like manner may we alfo project any Pa- 
 rallel to the Equator betwixt the two Tropics, or betwixt them 
 and either of the Poles. And if a Circle is to be projected, whofe 
 neareft and greateft Diftance from the Zenith arc both on one- 
 Side of it, for Inftance, the North Polar Circle ; theTangent alfo 
 of half its neareft and greateft Diftance from the Zenith, let from 
 that Side where the North Pple is found, will give its Diameter, 
 and that bife&ed, its Radius, by Theorem XI. 
 
 The Hour-circles, which pafs thro' the Poles of the World, 
 and interfect the Equinoctial ft Right Angles, are now to be 
 drawn. In order to this, we muft confider, that the Hour-circle 
 of Six 'Clock not only pafles thro' the Poles, but alfo interfcets 
 the Horizon in the Points of Eaft and Weft ; therefore an oblique 
 Circle, paffing thro' the Points W, P, E, will be the Hour of 
 Six : Therefore fet the Tangent of Latitude (which is the Com- 
 plement of the Pole's Diftance Z P 3 8 30 from the Zenith ) 
 5 1 J 30' from Z to G in the Diameter N S continu'd ; by Prob. I. 
 
 Cafe
 
 e
 
 Chap. V. Projection $//&* Sphere. 75 
 
 Cafe .3. and Theorem V. on G, with the Radius G P, defcribe 
 the Circle WPE, and this will be the Hour-circle over 
 which the Sun ftands at Six o'Clock. Let this Circle be now 
 look'd upon as a Primitive, or the Plane on which the other Hour- 
 circles are to be drawn or projeded, by Theor. VIII. confequent- 
 ly by fetting the Tangents of 15, 30, 45 , C5V. each way from 
 the Centre of the Hour-circle of Six, on its Diameter, at Right 
 Angles, to the firil Line of Meafures N C S, the Hour-circles 
 may be all defcrib'd, by taking each of the Points of Interferon 
 as a Centre, and drawing the required Circles thro' the Pole P. 
 
 Problem VIII. 
 
 To projec? the sphere on the Plane of the Ecliptic. 
 
 Draw W N E S to reprefent the Plane of the Ecliptic ; and WE, 
 S N, the Projection of two Circles of Longitude, by Theorem II. 
 The Equinoctial will here fall towards the South ; for 'tis the Nor- 
 thern Half of the Ecliptic that is elevated above the Equinoctial, 
 and confequectly the Southern Part of the Equinoctial, with regard 
 to the Pofition of the Sphere that is elevated above the Plane of 
 the Ecliptic : Wherefore as it is elevated but 23 30 , the Tan- 
 gent of half its Complement 66 30 fet from the 
 Centre C to M will give the Point of Inter- See the Tig. 
 fection, by Theor. III. and the Tangent of 23 
 30 fet Northward from C to e, will find the Centre e, on which 
 the Equator W M E is defcrib'd. The Pole of the World in this 
 Projection is elevated 6& 30' above the North Point N of the 
 Ecliptic; therefore the Tangent of half 23 30' fet from C to P, 
 will there (hew the Pole, by Theor. III. Now fmce the Hour- 
 line of Six paflfcs thro' the Poles, and alfo interfe&s the Ecliptic in 
 the two oppofite Points Y and :, therefore the Tangent of 66 
 30 ( the Complement of C P 23 30 ) fet from C on the Line 
 of Meafures N S produe'd, will give the Centre on which the 
 Circle W P E is defcribed, by Theor. V. If this Circle be now 
 confider'd as a Primitive, or the Plane on which the other Hour- 
 circles ajse to be projected, by Theor. VIII. then by fetting die 
 Tangents of 15% 30 \ ^^,&c. each Way from the Hoar-circle 
 of Six, on its Diameter at Right Angles to the firfl Line of Mea- 
 fures, the Hour-cireles may be all defcrib'd, as was fhewn in the 
 Horizontal Projection. 
 
 After the fame manner as the Equinoctial was defcrib'd, miy 
 we jprojett the Horizon of London WOE; for the Northern Part 
 of flie Horizon being elevated aboye the Southern Part of th 
 Ecliptic 62 , therefore the Tangent of half its Complement 28 , 
 
 beinj
 
 y6 Spherical Trigonometry. Part I. 
 
 being fet from C to O, will give the Point of Interferon ; and 
 theTangent of 6z, being fet. Northward from C in the Line S N 
 produced, will find the Centre on which W O E is defcribed. 
 
 The Tropics of 55 and Vf , the Polar Circles, and all other 
 Parallels of Declination, are to be drawn by'Prob. IV. Cafe 3. as 
 being all of them Parallels to the Equator, which is inclin'd to 
 the Plane of Projection. By the fame Problem may all the Al- 
 micanters be drawn. If you find the Pole of the Horizon, yon 
 may draw all the Azimuths in the fame manner as the Meridians 
 were defcribed. The Circles of Longitude will be here all Right 
 Lines, or Diameters pairing thro' the Centre of the Projeftion, by 
 Theor. II. and the Circles of Latitude will be all parallel to the 
 Primitive,, and concentric therewith, by Theor. I. 
 
 Thus much, I conceive, may be fufficient to give the Reader 
 a juft Notion of the whole Bufinefs of Stereographic Projections ; 
 and to enable him to project the Sphere upon the Plane of any 
 other great Circle, as well as thofe I have inftanc'd in. The Planes 
 I have chofen art moft commonly made ufe of, and will be moR 
 to our Purpofe, when we come to fhew the Ufe of Projections in 
 the Solution of Aftronomical and Geographical Problems, and the 
 Conftruftion and Ufe of Maps. 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 
 Spherical TRIGONOMETRY. 
 SECTION I. 
 
 THIS ufeful Branch of the Mathematics will be but a per- 
 plexing Recherch, without a perfect Knowledge of the 
 Dotrine of Projection. The Excellency and Extenfivenefs of 
 Spherical Trigonometry will richly reward the young Student for 
 any Pains it may coll him in acquiring an Acquaintance with it. 
 
 Definition i. ' 
 A fpherical Triangle is a Figure comprehended under the 
 Arches of three great Circles ; and the Determination of the 
 Sides and Angles of fuch a Triangle is the Bufinefs of Spherical 
 Trigonometry. 
 
 De-
 
 \
 
 Chap. VI. Spherical Trigonometry. 77 
 
 Er 
 
 ! 
 
 Definition 2. 
 A fpherical Angle is meafured by the Arch of a great Circle in- 
 tercepted between the two Arches which form the Angle, at 90 
 diftant from the angu- 
 lar Point. Thus "<, ^ 
 P B A is meafur'd by 
 A P ; and C P meafures 
 \CBP; B C mea- 
 fures ^BAC; B m 
 meafures "^ B Cm ; ^ 
 B P K is meafured by 
 E F. In this Scheme, 
 BADE mult be con- 
 fidered as the Plane of 
 Projeaion, and B P D, 
 FPL, oblique Circles, 
 making the ^ B P K. 
 by their Interfe&ion in 
 P. 
 
 THEOREM I. 
 
 Two fpherical Triangle s are l ual > if in eacn one Angle, and 
 the two Sides including it, be refpeaively equal, per Theor. VII, 
 Chap. II. 
 
 Theorem II. 
 
 Two fpherical Triangles, mutually equilateral, are alfo mu- 
 tually equiangular, per Corol. 2. to Theor. VIII. Chap. II. 
 
 Theorem III. 
 An Ifofceles fpherical Triangle has its two Angles at the Bafe 
 equal to one another, and vice ver/a, per Theor. VIII. Chap. II. 
 
 Theorem IV. 
 In any fpherical Triangle the greater Angle is fubtended by the 
 greater Side, per Corol. 3. to Theor. VIII. Chap. II. 
 
 Theorem V. 
 Two Sides of any fpherical Triangle taken together are greater 
 than the third ; for as a ftrait Line i the ihorteft Diftance be- 
 tween two Points on a Plane, fo is the Arch of a great Circle be- 
 tween two Points on the Surface of a Sphere. 
 
 Theorem VI. 
 The Side of a fpherical Triangle is lefs than a Semicircle ; for 
 all great Circles mutually cut each other into two equal Parts, and 
 
 this
 
 78 Spherical Trigonometry. Part I. 
 
 this Sedtion of their Planes is a Diameter of the Sphere ; confe- 
 quently the two Se&ions of their Peripheries are at a Semicircle 
 Diftance. 
 
 Theorem VII. 
 
 The Sum of the three Sides of a fpherical Triangle ii lefs than 
 a Circle. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 
 The two Sides BD -f- 
 D C are greater than B C, per 
 Theo. V. and adding on each 
 Side A B -{- A C, we fhall 
 have AB + AC-j-BD 
 + DC> AB-f AC 
 4-BC; but A B -|- A C 
 -j-BD + DC=a whole 
 Circle; therefore, cjfe. 
 
 Theorem VIII. 
 In any fpherical Triangle if the Sum of the Sides including an 
 Angle be > =r <, than a Semicircle, ths internal Angle at the 
 Bafe is accordingly > =. < than the outward oppofite Angle, and 
 confequently the Sum of the two internal Angles at the Bafe will 
 be > rr < than 2 Right Angles. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 IfDB+BAbe> 
 : < than D C, then B A 
 is > = < than B C ; 
 therefore "<^ C, or, which 
 is equal to it, "^ D, is > 
 r= < than B A C, and the 
 ^D-f ^DAB> = 
 < than ( ^ B A C -f-^ 
 DABrr) 2L's. 
 
 Theorem IX. 
 The Poles K, L, M, of the ' Sides of the fpherical Triangle 
 ABC, being join'd by great Circles, form a Triangle, L M K, 
 whofe Sides are equal to <. A, ^ C, ^ F B G, in the firft Tri- 
 angle; and the Angles M, L, LK H, are equal to the three Sides 
 of the Triangle ABC. 
 
 Di-
 
 Chap. VI. Spherical Trigonometry. 79 
 
 Demonstration. 
 Through the three 
 Poles K, L, M, draw 
 the great Circles PLE, 
 O L G, M K I : Be- 
 caufe M F, L G, are 
 Quadrants, we have 
 ML-j-LF LF 
 J-FG, that is, M L 
 -FG, which is the 
 Meafure of^FBG, 
 and K L = D E the 
 Meafure of "sA ; for 
 KL+LD = LD 
 -[-DE ^Quadrant ; 
 alfoMK = HI the 
 Meafure of ^ C ; for 
 KM-fKHnIH 
 4- K H = Qua- 
 drant. After the fame 
 
 Manner it is prov'd, that FHrrBC, OP-AB, DIrrAC, 
 that is, the Angles M, L, D K H, are equal to the Sides of the 
 Triangle ABC. 
 
 Corollary. 
 Hence equiangular fpherical Triangles are alfo equilateral ; for 
 their correfpondent Triangles are equilateral, and therefore equi- 
 angular alfo, and fo themfelves are likewife equilateral. 
 
 Theorem X. 
 The three Angles of a fpherical Triangle are lefs than fix Right 
 Angles. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 For the external and internal Angles together make only fix 
 Right Angles ; therefore the internal Angles mull be lefs than 
 fix Right Angles. 
 
 Theorem XL 
 Of feveral Arches of great Circles falling from the fame Point 
 A of the Surface of a Sphere on another Circle, the greateft is 
 that which pafles thro' the Pole of the faid Circle, and the next to 
 this is greater than that which is further off. 
 
 Di-
 
 8o Spherical Trigonometry. Part L 
 
 Demonstration. 
 
 Suppofe P the Pole of the 
 Circle C iv D, and <w the Pole 
 of D PC j then is AD (-AP 
 \- P D ) greater than A B, per 
 Theor. 5. greater than AE 
 greater thaa AC. 
 
 Theorem XII. 
 In a Right-angled fpherical Triangle the Legs containing the 
 t_ are of the fame AfFe&ion with theoppofite Angles; that is, if 
 the Legs be > <, than Quadrants, then alfo will the Angles 
 oppofite to them be > < than Right Angles. 
 
 Demonstration, 
 i. In the Triangle P D Q^ fince the Pole of the Circle C G Q_ 
 is P, if the Arch D Q^be a Quadrant, then ^DP Q = a Right 
 
 ing Qua- 
 13 and Q^ 
 
 ^ ; alfo DP, DQ, bein< 
 drants, the oppofite Angles 
 are Right Angles. 
 
 2. In the fpherical Triangle DAB, 
 the Leg A D being greater than a 
 Quadrant, the "^ A B D oppofite is 
 > than a Right "^, and the Leg 
 D B being lefs, the oppofite Angle 
 B A D is lefs than a Right "v. 
 
 3. In the Right-angled Triangle, 
 A D E, fince both the Legs A D, 
 D E, are greater than Quadrants, ^ A ED, ^DAE, are 
 both greater than Right ones. 
 
 Laftly, In the Right-angled Triangle EC A, both the Legs 
 EC, AC, being lefs than Quadrants, ^AEC, EAC, are 
 both lefs than Right ones. 
 
 Theorem XIII. 
 If the two Legs of a Right-angled fpherical Triangle be of the 
 lame Affection, ( and confequently the Angles } that is, if they are 
 both > or < than Quadrants, then will the Hypothenufe be lefs 
 than a Quadrant. Thus, in the fpherical Triangles A D E, E C A, 
 ( See the laji Scheme ) the Legs AD, D E, are both > , and the 
 Legs A C, C E, both < than Quadrants, and here the Hypothe- 
 nufe A E is < than a Quadrant. 
 
 Theo-
 
 Chap. VI. Spherical Trigonometry. $i 
 
 Theorem XIV. 
 If the two Legs of a Right-angled fpherical Triangle (or 
 Angles) be of different Affe&ion, the Hypothenufe will be > 
 than a Quadrant ; for in the Triangle AD B (See the laji Scbimi) 
 the Hypothenufe A B > A Q, which is a Quadrant. 
 
 Theorem XV. 
 If the Hypothenufe be greater than a Quadrant, then the 
 Legs of the Right Angle, and the Angles they fubtend, are of 
 different Affection ; but if leffer, of the fame Affection. This 
 Theorem, being the Converfe of the foregoing ones, is demon- 
 itrated in them. 
 
 Theorem XVI. 
 In any fpherical Triangle ABC, if the Angles at the Bafe BC, 
 be of the fame Affection, the Perpendicular A P falls within thq 
 Triangle ; but if of different Affection, without. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 
 i. If A P does not fall within the A. 
 
 Triangle AB C, let it fall without, as in 
 Fig. 2. then in the Triangle A B P, the 
 Side A P is of the fame Affection with 
 "^ B ; and likewife in the Triangle 
 A C P, the Side A P is of the feme Af- 
 fection with ^ A C P. Therefore, fc<5\ * C 
 fence ^ABC, ^ A C P, are of the ft 
 
 fame Affeclion, ^ ABC, ^ ACB *A 
 
 will be of different Affection. 
 
 2. If the Perpendicular does not fall S 'X> 
 
 without the Triangle, let it fall within, 
 as in Fig. \. then in the Triangles 
 A B P, * C P, ^ B and < C are of 
 the fame Affection wifh the Leg A P, ft 
 and therefore with one another. 
 
 Theorem XVII, 
 In Right-angled fpherical Triangles, if the feme acute Angle, 
 be at the Bafe, then the Sines of the Hypothenufes will be pro- 
 portional to the Sines of the perpendicular Arches. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 Let D F A K M be a Sphere, in * hich K M F A, Z A E M, 
 form the Right-angled Triangles A B C, A EF, whofe Hypotlr- 
 
 Q nai
 
 Trigonometry." Part I. 
 
 D 
 
 3 2 Spherical 
 
 nufes are A E, 
 
 A B j their 
 
 Perpendiculars 
 
 E F, B C, and 
 
 'theirBafesAF, 
 
 AC : Alfo I E 
 
 the Sine of 
 
 A E, G B the 
 
 Sine of A B, 
 
 EN the Sine 
 
 of E F, and 
 
 B O the Sine 
 
 of B C ; and 
 
 "^ A common 
 
 to both. Then 
 
 from the Pa- 
 
 rallelifm, and, 
 
 ofconfequence, 
 
 Proportion, of 
 
 their refpe&ive Sides, IE 
 
 : :^E N : B O. 
 
 Theorem XVIII. 
 The fame Things remaining, the Sines of the Bafes are propor- 
 tional to the Tangents of the Perpendiculars ; for ( At in the lafi 
 Scheme ) the Triangles I F L, H C P, are equiangular ; whence 
 I F : F L : : H C : P C ; or I F : H C : : F L : P C. 
 
 EN :: GB:BO, or I E : GB 
 
 Theorem XIX. 
 In any fpherical Triangle ABC, the Product of the Sines f 
 the Legs B C, B A, is to the Square of Radius, as I L or I A 
 L A the Difference of the verfed Sines of the Bafe C A, and the 
 Difference of the Legs AM, to G N the verfed Sine of ^.B. 
 
 Let a great Circle 
 O N be defcribed 
 ,from the Pole B ; 
 and let B G, B N. 
 be Quadrants, and 
 then G N is the Mea- 
 fure of ^ B ; alfo 
 defcribe from thePole 
 B a Icflbr Circle 
 CFM thro* C j the 
 Planes of thefc Circles 
 
 Demonstration.
 
 Chap. VI. Spherical Trigonometry. ftf 
 
 will be perpendicular to the Plane BON; and therefore Per- 
 pendiculars from Cand G to the Plane B N S,will fall in the Points 
 C and G. Draw C I perpendicular toAOf then will A I be 
 the verfed Sine of the Arch A C, and A L the verfed Sine of 
 the Arch AMrBM BA = B C B A, and we fhail 
 have FM: ON: : MC:GN j and becaufe the Triangles 
 A O E, D I C, D L M, are equiangular, we mall have A E : A O 
 : : I L : M C j wherefore it fhall be as AExFM:AOx 
 ON::ILxMH:MCxGN; that is, -. : I L : G N. 
 Now, ONxAO=RR; therefore AExFM:RR :: IL 
 :GN. 
 
 Theorem XX. 
 In any fpherical Triangle ABC, whofe Legs containing the 
 V B are B C , A B, and Bafe fubtending that Angle A C, if the 
 Arch AM = BC-AB; then fhall the Produd of the Sines 
 of B C, B A, be to the Square of the Radius, as the Produd un- 
 der the Sine of the Arch AC ~J- AM and the Sine of the Arch 
 
 2 
 
 AC .AM 
 
 t 2J1 to the Square of the Sine of i V B. Seethe laji Scb. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 A E X F M : R R : : I L : G N, per laft Theorem ; but I L 
 : G N : : * R X I L : h R x G N ; alfo fmce h R x I L Sine 
 AC-(-AM AC-AM Th xxn Ch ^ 
 
 2 2 r 
 
 fmce + R x G N rr Sq of Sine of \ B, per Th. XXIII. Ch. II. 
 
 therefore AEX FM : RR ::s, AC + AM x s A C - - M 
 
 2 a 
 
 : Sq of the Sine of B. 
 
 Theorem XXI. 
 In the fpherical Triangle ABC, Right-angled at A, as the 
 Sine of B is to the Co-fine of C, fo is Radius to the Co-line of 
 AB. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 
 From the Poles B, C, describe L G E, I N O ; alfo from G 
 
 defcribe I B L ; produce the Sides A B, B C, C A, to H, E, I, 
 
 L, H, O; then B F, BE, B K, BL, DA, DE, CI, CH, 
 
 C O, C N, A M, K B, G F, G I, L G, MO.GN, are Qua- 
 
 G 2 dranc^
 
 $4 Spherical Trigonometry. 
 
 Part I. 
 \1 
 
 H. 
 
 ..'- 
 
 *y 
 
 x. 
 
 drants,and theAngles 
 at E, A, K, F, L, I, 
 N,H,0, are Right; 
 therefore AD-DC 
 nHC-DQ 
 BF-CF rrrCI 
 -FC.CN-NB 
 
 LB-NB, AM 
 
 MB KB 
 MB. F E = L K 
 meafures V B, and 
 K G = D F the 
 Complement ; N O 
 = H I meafures 
 V C, and M N = 
 G H the Comple- 
 ment : Therefore 
 DE-DF=GF 
 
 DF, and MO NM = GN N M. Thefe Things 
 premis'd, in the Triangles BLK.BNM, Right-angled at L, N, 
 and having the fame acute V B, we have s,L K : s,M N : : s,B K 
 : s,B M, that is, s,B : c-s,C : : R : c-s,A B. 
 
 Corollaries. 
 i. c-s,AB: R : : c-s,C : s,B. 
 2. R : c-s,B A : : s,B : c-s,C. 
 
 
 R:c-s,AC 
 
 Theorem XXII. 
 s,C : c-s,B. ( See Scheme to Theor. XXI. ) 
 
 Demonstration. 
 
 In the Triangles CHI, D C F Right-angled at H ., I , d 
 having the fame acute Angle C, we have s,C H : s,D C . . s,H I 
 : s,D F ; that is, R : c-s,A C : r s,C : c-s,B. - 
 Corollaries. 
 
 i. s,C:c-s,B :: R : c-s,A C. 
 
 2. c-s,A C : R : : c-s,B : s,C. 
 
 %. Hence the Co-fines of B, 
 andD, attheBafe BD, are pro- 
 portional to the Sines of the verti- 
 cal Angles BCA, DCA; for, 
 bv this Theorem, we have c-s,B : 
 ?,BC A : : c-s,CA : R ; and alfo, for 
 the fame Reafons, we have c-,D : 
 s,D C A : : c-s,C A : R ; there- D 
 fere c-sB : s,B C A :: c-s,D : 
 f ,D C A. 
 
 4., Hence
 
 Chap. VI. Spherical Trigonometry. 5 
 
 4. Hence s,B C A : s,D C A : : c-s,B : c-s,D. 
 
 Theorem XXIII. 
 C-s,B A : R : : c-s,B C : c-s, A C. ( See Scheme to Theor. X5g. ) 
 
 Demonstration. 
 In the Triangles A M O, M B N, Right-angled at O, N, and 
 having the "^ M common, we have s,lVI B : s,M A : : s,N B : 
 ,A O ; that is, c-s,B A : R : : c-s,B C : c-s,A C. 
 
 Corollaries. 
 j. c-s,AC: R : : c-s.BC : c-s,B A. 
 
 2. R : c-s,A C i : c-s,B A : c-s,B C. 
 
 3. Hence the Co-fines of the Sides B C, D C, are in proportion 
 to the Co-fines of the Bafes B A, D A ; ( See laft Scheme ) M by 
 Cor. 1. we have c-s, A C : R : : c-s.B. C : : c-s,B A ; alfo c-s, A C 
 : R : : c-s,D C : c-s,D A ; therefore c-s,B C : c-s,B A : : c-s,D C 
 :os,DA. 
 
 4. c-s,B A : c-s,B C : : c-s,D A : c-s,D C. 
 
 Theorem XXIV. 
 t,B : t,AC : : R : s,B A. ( See Scheme to Theo. XXII. ) 
 
 Demonstration. 
 In the Triangles B F E, ABC, Right-angled at A, E, and 
 having the fame acute Angle B, we have t,E F : t,A C : : s,B E 
 ; s,B A ; that is, t,B : t,A C : : R : s,B A. 
 
 Corollaries. 
 
 1 . R : s,B A : : t,B : t,A C. 
 
 2. s,BA : R : : t,A C : t,B. 
 
 3. Hence the Sines of the Bafes B A, DA, are in reciprocal 
 Proportion to the Tangents of the Angles B, D, at the Bafe B D ; 
 ( See Scheme to Theor. XXII. ) for by the laft Corol. we have 
 s,B A : R : : t, A C : t,B ; and by the fame inverfely, R : s,D A 
 ; : t,D : t,A C ; therefore s,B A : s,D A : : t,D i t,B. 
 
 4. Hence t,D : t,B : : s,B A : s,D A. 
 
 5. Alfo s,DA : s,BA ; : t,B : t,D. 
 
 Theorem XXV. 
 ^AC : R : : t,BA : t,C. (See Scheme to Theor. XXI. ) 
 
 Demonstration. 
 In the Triangles CNO, ABC, Right-angled at A, O, and 
 having "^ C common, we have s,C A : s,C O : : t,B A : t,N O, 
 that is, s,A C : R : : t,B A : t,C. 
 
 G 3 Co-
 
 t6 Spherical Trigonometry." Part I, 
 
 Corollaries. 
 r. t,C : t,B A : : R : s,C A. 
 fl, R : s,CA :: t,C : t,B A. 
 
 Theorem XXVI. 
 t,BC : R : : t,A C : c-s,C. ( See Scheme to Theor. XXI, ) 
 
 Demonstration. 
 In the Triangles GIF, D H G, Right-angled at H, I, and 
 having the ^ G common, we have t,I F : s,G I : : t,D H : 
 s,G H ; that is, t,B C : R : : t,A C : c-s,C. 
 
 Corollaries . 
 i. R : t,BC : : c s,C : t,A C. 
 
 2. R : c-s,C : : c-t,AC : c-t.B C. 
 
 3. Hence the Tangents of the Sides B C, DC, (See Scheme to 
 Theo. XXII.) are in a reciprocal Proportion to the Co-fines of the 
 vertical Angles B C A, D C A ; for by this Theorem, we have 
 t,B C : R : : t, A C : c-s,B C A ; and by the fame we have R : 
 c-s,D C A : : t,D C : t,A C ; wherefore t,B C : c-s,D C A : ; 
 t,D C : c-s,B C A. 
 
 4. c-s,DCA : c-s,BC A : : t,B C : t,D C. 
 
 5. t,D C : t,BC : : c-s,BCA ; c-s,DCA. 
 
 Theorem XXVII. 
 C-s,B : R : : c-t,B C : c-t,A B. ( See Scheme to Theor. XXI. ) 
 
 Demonstration. 
 In the Triangles D E A, DFC, Right angled at E, F, and 
 having the fame acute Angle D, we have s,D F : s,D E : : t,C F 
 : t,.i; that is, c-s,B : R : : c-t,B C : c-t,A B. 
 
 Corollaries. 
 
 1. R : c-s,B : : c-t,A B : c-t,B C. 
 
 2. t,B C : R : : t,A B : c-s,B. 
 
 Theorem XXVUI. 
 s,B C : R : : s,A C : ,B. ( See Scheme to Theor. XXI. ) 
 
 Demonstration. 
 In the Triangles B F E, BCA, Right-angled at *E, A, and 
 kaving the fame acute Angle B, we have s,B C : s,B F : : s,C A 
 ; 5,FE; that is, s,B C : R : : s,A C : s,B. 
 
 Corollaries. 
 
 1. R : s,BC : : s.B : s,A C. 
 
 2. s,B : s,A C : : R : s,B C. 3, The 

 
 Chap. VI. Spherical Trigonometry. Zy 
 
 3. The Sines of the Sides B C, DC, are proportional to the 
 Sines of the oppofite Angles D, B; ( See Scheme to Corol. 3. of 
 Theorem XXII. ) for by this Theorem we have s,BC : R : : 
 s,A C : s,B j and by Inverfion we have R : s,D C : : s,D : 
 s,A C ; wherefore s,B C : s,D C : : s,D : s,B. 
 
 4. s,D : s,BC : : s,B : s,D C. 
 
 5. s,D C : s,B : : s,B C : s,D. 
 
 Theorem XXIX. 
 s,C : R : : s,B A : s,B C. ( See Scheme to Theor. XXI. ) 
 
 Demonstration. 
 In the Triangles N G L, K M G, Right-angled at K, L, and 
 having the fame acute Angle G, we have s,M G : s,G N : : 
 s,K M : s,L N 1 that is, s,C : R : : s,B A : s,B C. 
 
 Corollaries. 
 I. R : s,C : : s,B C : s,B A. 
 ;2. s,B C : R : : s,B A : s,C. 
 
 Theorem XXX. 
 R : c-s,B C : : t,C : c-t,B. ( See Scheme to Theor. XXI. ) 
 
 Demonstration. 
 In the Triangles H I C, D F C, Right-angled at I, F, and 
 having the fame acute Angle C, we have s,C I : s,C F : : t,H I 
 : t,D F ; that is, R : c-s,B C : : t,C : c-t,B. 
 
 Corollaries. 
 1. c-s,BC : R : : c-t,B : t,C. 
 Z. t,C ; c-t,B i : R : c-s,BC. 
 
 SECTION II. 
 
 *The Cafes of a Right-angled Spherical Triangle. 
 
 TH E Cafe of refolving a Triangle is the having jaft fo 
 many of its Parts given or known, as are fufficient for find- 
 ing thofe required. There are five Parts of a Right-angled fphe- 
 rical Triangle, that may be varied, viz. the Hypothenufe, the 
 Angle at the Bafe, the Angle at the Perpendicular, and the two Legs; 
 any two of which being given or known, with the Right /*ngle, 
 which is always given, the reft may be found by one of the ten 
 following Cafes, which are the Proportions in the foregoing The- 
 orems, and their Corollaries, exhibited at one View. The mbi- 
 guities of thefc Triangles are folv'd by Th. XIII. XIV. XV. and 
 
 G 4 XVI.
 
 8 8 Spherical Trigonometry. Part I. 
 
 XVI. By Ambiguities are meant the Doubts which occur of the 
 Affe&ion or Species of the Side or Angle found ; that is, whether 
 it be lefsor greater than a Right Angle, fince the Sine of an Archj 
 and its Supplement, are the fame. The only Cafes ambiguous are 
 the 3d and 6th, and thofe are fo in every Part j and to difpel all 
 Doubt, the beft way will be to delineate the Triangle by Spherical 
 Projection, already fhewn. 
 
 Case t. Given B, C; requir'd B C, A B, AC? {See the 
 Scheme to Theorem XXI. ) Then, 
 
 s,B : c-s,C 
 t,C : c-t,E 
 s,C : c-s,B 
 
 R : c-s,A B, per Theor. XXI. 
 
 R : c-s,B C, per Cor. 2. Theor. XXtf. 
 
 R : c-s,AC, per Cor. 1. Theor. XXII. 
 
 Case 2. Given B C, C; required B A, AC, B? Theq, 
 R : s,C : : s,B C : s,B A, per Cor, 1. Theor. XXIX. 
 R : t,B C : : c-s,C : t,A C, per Cor. 1 . Theor. XXVI. 
 R : c-s,B C : : t,C : c-t,B, per Theor. XXX. 
 
 Case 3. Given B A, C ; required BC, AC, B ? Then, 
 s,C : R : : s,B A : s,BC, per Theor. XXIX. 
 t>C : t,B A : : R : s v C A, .per Cor. 1. Theor. XXV. 
 c-s,B A : R : : c-s,C : s,B, per Cor. 1. Theor. XXI. 
 
 Case 4 Given C A, C ; required B C, B A, B ? Then, 
 R : c-s,C : : c-t,A C : c-t,B C, per Cor. 2. Theor. XXVI. 
 R : s,C A : : t,C : t,B A, per Cor. 2. Theor. XXV. 
 R : c-s,A C : : s,C : c-s,B, per Theor. XXII. 
 
 Case c. Given A B, AC; required BC, B, C? Then, 
 R : c-s,CA : : c-s^A B : c-s,B C, per Cor. 2. The. XXIII. 
 ,B A : R : : t,C A : t,B, per Cor. 2. Theor. XXIV* 
 s,C A :R:: t,BA : t,C, per Theor. XXV. 
 
 Case 6. Given A C, B ; required B C, B A, C? Then, 
 t.B : s,A C : : R : f,BC, per Cor. 2. Theor. XXV11I. 
 t,B : t,A C : : R : s,B A, per Cor. 2. Theor. XXIV. 
 t-s,CA : R : : c-s,B : s,C, per Cor. z. Theor. XXII. 
 
 Case 7. Given B A, B ; required B C, A C, C ? Then, 
 R : c-;;,B : : c-t,A B : c-t,B C, per Cor. 1 . Theor. XXVII. 
 R : s,BA : : r,B : t,AC, per Cor.i. Theor. XXIV. 
 R : c-s,B A : : s,B : c-s,C, per Lor. 2. Theor. XXI. 
 
 C^f. S. Given B C, A C; required A B, B, C ? Then, 
 c-;,A J ; R : : c-s,B C : c-s,A f ., per Cor. 1. 7'heor. XXIII. 
 
 s,BC
 
 Chap. VI. Spherical Trigonometry. 89 
 
 s,B C : R : : s,A C : s,B, per Theor. XXVIII. 
 t,B C : R : : t,A C : c-s,C, per Theor. XXVI. 
 
 Case 9. Given B C, B ; required A C, B A, C? Then, 
 c-s,B : R : : c-t,BC : c-t,AB, per Theor. XXVII. 
 R : s,BC : : s,B : s,A C, }er Cor. 1. Theor. XX\ JII. 
 c-s,B C : R : : c-t,B : t,C, per Cor. 1. Theor. XXX. 
 
 Case 10. Given BC, B A ; required A C, B, C ? Then, 
 c-s,BA : R : : c-s.BC : c-s, A C, per Theor. XXIII. 
 t,B C : R : : t,B A : c-s,B, per Cor. 2. Theor. XXVII. 
 s,B C : R : : s,B A : s,C, per Cor. 2. Theor. XXIX. 
 
 SECTION III. 
 
 Of the Cafes of oblique-angled fpherical Triangles. 
 
 An oblique fpherical Triangle may be reduced to two Right- 
 angled fpherical Triangles, by letting fall a Perpendicular, 
 which Perpendicular either dividesthe oblique Triangle propos'd 
 into two Right angled Triangles, or makes two Right-angled 
 Triangles, by adding a Right-angled Triangle to it, according as 
 it falls within or without the Triangle ; but in order to determine 
 whether the Perpendicular falls within or without the given Tri- 
 angle, (which is fometimes certain, and fometimes ambiguous or 
 doubtful) we mult confult Theorem XVI. Seel. I. (.hap. VI. An 
 oblique-angled Triangle being thus reduced or prepar'd, four of 
 the fix Cafes are foly'd by the Corollaries deduced from the Pro- 
 portions concern'd in the Solution of a Right-angled fpherical Tri- 
 angle, and the other two by Theor. IX. and XX. 
 
 As any Side of a Triangle may be made Bafe, and from any 
 Angle we may let fall a Perpendicular ; therefore it is that there 
 is luch Variety of Triangles produced, as is obiervuble in the 
 three following Schemes. 
 
 To the f i )CBD 3, xCB 2, *DB 1. ( C D 7 w- 
 
 Terpen- -{ 2 belong C B C D 1, ABC 2, ADC3. 1 D C 3* 
 diclar (3 JBDC 2, zBD 1, sCD 3. BC) a 
 
 The Numbers 1, 2, 3, annexed to the Triangles, fliew to what 
 Scheme they belong. To all thefe correfpondent Triangles the 
 lame Analogies do equally appertain ; and nothing but the Addi- 
 tion Or Subtraction of an Angle or Side found makes any Differ- 
 ence in the Operation. 
 
 The
 
 yo Spherical Trigonometry. Part I, 
 
 The Figures i, 2, 3, without the Braces, fhew the Perpendi- 
 cular forming the Triangle, to which the Proportions for folving 
 it belong ; and before thefe Figures are the Schemes wherein the 
 Perpendicular is to be found ; thus, the firft Analogies are form'd 
 by Perpendicular 2. in Scheme the firft, and the laft Proportions 
 of the firft Cafe are form'd by Perpendicular 1. in the third 
 Scheme. 
 
 Scheme II. 
 
 Case i. Given B C, B, C ; required D, D C, B D ? Then, 
 
 " Firft Scheme 2, 
 c-s,BC : R : : c-t,B : t,BC A, per Cor. I. Theor. XXX. 
 s,B C A : s,D C A : : c-s,B : c-s,D, per Cor. 4. Th. XXII. 
 
 Firft Scheme 2, 
 c-s,B C : R : : c-t,B : t,B C A, per Cor. 1. Theor. XXX. 
 c s,D C A : c-s,B C A : : t,BC:t,D C, per C. 4. Th. XXVI. 
 
 Third Scheme I , 
 c-s,B C : R : : c-t,C : t,C B x, per Cor. 1. Theor. XXX. 
 c-s,CB.* : c-s,.*B D : : t,BC : t,BD, per Cor. 4. Th. XXVI. 
 
 Case 2. Given B, D, B C ; required CD, B C D, B D ? Then, 
 5,D : s,BC : : s,B : s,C D, ^-Cor. 4. Theor. XXVIII. 
 
 Firft Scheme 2, 
 c-s,BC : R : : c-t,B : t,BC A, per Cor.' 1. Theor. XXX. 
 c-s,B : s,BCA : : c-s,D : s,DCA, per Cor. 3. Theor. XXII. 
 
 Firft Scheme 2, 
 c-s,B : R : : c-t,B C : c-t,B A, per Theorem XXVII. 
 t,D : t,B : : s,B A : s,DA, per Cor. 4. Theor. XXIV. 
 
 Case 3. Given BC, CD, B; required B D, C, D ? Then, 
 
 Firft Scheme 2, 
 c-s,B : R : : c-t,B C : c-t,B A, per Theor. XXVII. 
 c-s.BC: c-s,B A : : c-s,D C : c-s,D A, per Cor. 3. Th. XXIII. 
 
 Firft
 
 hap. VI. Spherical Trigonometry. 91 
 
 I 
 
 Firjl Scheme 2. 
 c-s.BC : R : : c-t,B : t,BCA, per Cor. I. Theor. XXX. 
 t,DC : t,BC : : c-s^CA : c-s,DCA, per C 5. Th. XXVI. 
 i,DC : s,B : : s,BC : s,D, per Cor. 5. Theor. XXVIII. 
 
 Case 4. Given BC, B D, C ; required CD, D, C ? Then, 
 Fir ft Scheme 2, 
 f c-s,B : R : : c-t,BC : C-t,B \\ per Theorem XXVII. 
 I c-f,B A : c-s,BC : : c-s,D A : c-s,DC, per Cor. 4. Th. XXIII. 
 
 Fir ft Scheme 2, 
 < c-s,B : R : : c-t,B C : -t,BA, ^Theorem XXVII. 
 I s,DA : s,BA : : t,B : t,D, per Cor. 5. Theor. XXIV. 
 Second Scheme 3, 
 c-s,B : R : : c-t,BD : c-t,B, per Theor. XXVII. 
 s,Cz : s,Bz : : t,B : t,C, per Cor. 5. Theor. XXIV. 
 
 Case 5. Given BC, BD, CD ; required C ? Then, 
 
 ,,BC*s,DC : RR : : s, BD + AM x S ,B D-AM , 
 
 2 2 
 
 Square of the Sine of \ C, per Theorem XX. 
 Note, AM BC CD. 
 
 Case 6. Given B, C, D ; required B D ? Then, per Theor. 
 IX. BD becomes known, by having all the Angles given: For 
 it is there demonftrated, that the Angles of the given Triangle 
 are feverally equal to the Sides of the Triangle form'd, by draw- 
 ing great Circles thro' the Poles of the Sides of the given Tri- 
 angle ; fave only that the Complement of the greateft given 
 Angle is equal to the greateft Side in the new Triangle. If we 
 call the Angles adjacent to the Side required the Legs, and the op- 
 pofite Angle the Bafe, then the Angles are found by the kft Cafe, 
 which Angles, thus found, will be refpeclively equal to the Sides 
 required of the given Triangle. 
 
 The practical Solution of the Cafes of Right and oblique-angled 
 fpherical Triangles will be fully (hewn, when we come to apply 
 Trigonometry to the Purpofes of Geography, If the young Stu- 
 dent has a Defire to confult other Methods of folving a Triangle, 
 he may meet with them in Mr. Martins Treatife of Trigono- 
 metry. 
 
 ASTRO-
 
 ft 
 
 ASTRONOMY. 
 
 Parti. 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 ASTRONOMY. 
 
 SECTION I. 
 
 Of the System of the World. 
 
 THE Sun is to be look'd upon as immoveable, and placed in 
 the Midft of that immenfe Space in which the Planets per- 
 form their Revolutions ; and there are fix opaque fpherical Bodies 
 that revolve about it, as their Centre, from Weft to Eaft, in the. 
 following Order : 
 
 Mercury neareft the Sun, completing its Revolution in about 
 three Months ; next to Mercury, Venus, in about feven Months 
 and an half; then the Earth, in a Year; Mars, in about two 
 Years ; Jupiter, in twelve ; and, laft of all, Saturn, which is 
 
 outer-
 
 Chap. VII. ASTRONOMY. 9S 
 
 outcrmoft, in thirty. The Proportions of their Diftances from 
 the Sun are nearly the fame as reprefented in the Scheme : That 
 is, fuppofing the Diftance of the Earth from the Sun to be divided 
 into ten equal Parts, of thefe the Diftance of Mercury will be 
 about four, of Venus feven, of Mars fifteen, of Jupiter fifty- two, 
 and that of Saturn ninety-five. 
 
 'Tis to be obferv'd, that all their Orbits are not in the fame 
 Plane, but varioufly inclin'd to one another ; fo that fuppofing the 
 Plane of the Earth's Orbit to coincide with the Plane of this 
 Scheme, one half of the Plane of any other Planet's Orbit will be 
 above, and the other half below it ; fo that the Planes interfedt 
 one another in a Line that paifes thro' the Sun. 
 
 Befides the above-mentioned Planets moving round theSun, there 
 are likewife Comets, and thefe move in very excentric Orbits, and 
 fhew themfelves only when they are in thofe Parts of their Orbits 
 that are neareft to us and the Sun : Some of them, like the Pla- 
 nets, move from Weft to Eaft, others from Eaft to Weft ; fome 
 again from North to South, and laftly others from South to 
 North. Their Orbits are various and different in Magnitude, Si- 
 tuation, and Inclination both to one another and to the Orbits of 
 the Planeu. Their Periods are not as yet fully known from Ob- 
 servation, nor indeed is it fully certain, that they all move in Lines 
 that return into themfelves. But all thefe Things, perhaps, will 
 be determined by proper Obfervations made in future Ages, 
 
 The reft of the Mundane Space is to be conceiv'd as divided 
 into Spaces juft like that we have been defcribing, each having 
 one of thofe Heavenly Bodies in its Centre which are called Fixt 
 Stars, performing the Office of a Sun to it, and having, it may be. 
 Planets and Comets of its own revolving about it. 
 
 Tho' the Periods of the Planets, and their Diftances from the 
 Sun, as here laid down, are not exaftly true, yet they are neareft 
 the Truth in round Numbers. Again, tho' the Paths they defcribe 
 are not perfect Circles, concentric to the Sun, and the Motion of 
 the fame Planet not perfectly equable ; yet the Difference is (a 
 fmall, that they need not at prefent be taken othervvife, till th# 
 fame are purpofely handled, in order to inquire into their Fhyfical 
 Caufes. 
 
 SECTION II. 
 
 Of the Phanomena that arife from the Situation of the Sun, 
 
 and Motion of the Earth. 
 
 Firfl, If the Obferver be fuppofed to be plac'd in the Sun, *ci* 
 evident the Earth will feem to him to move from Weft to halt 
 perpetually, as really it does. Then, fwee, befides the Earth, the 
 Obfeiver fees the Fixt Stars plac'd round him, as it were, iu a cr*- 
 
 CiVC
 
 94 
 
 ASTRONOMY. 
 
 Parti. 
 
 cave Sphere, that has the Eye for its Centre ; 'tis likewife evident, 
 that he will obferve the Earth moving, as it were, among the Fixt 
 Stars, and approaching nearer and nearer to the more Eaftern ones, 
 till in a Year's Time, having completed its Revolution, it returns 
 to the fame Place among them again. And becaufe (he Earth always 
 goes the fame Track over again, the Obferver will take efpecial 
 Notice of the Stars the Earth paffes over ; alfo the Plane of the 
 Earth's Orbit, and the Circle in the Sphere of the Fixt Stars made 
 by that Plane, called the Ecliptic j and this will be a great 
 Circle, becaufe it paffes thro' the Sun or Eye, which is the Centre 
 of that concave Sphere that terminates the Sight. But if for the 
 Advantage of making Obfervations, the Obferver imagines this 
 Ecliptic divided into 12 equal Parts, or Signs, calling them by the 
 Name of any neighbouring Conftellation, or Figure thofe Stars 
 feem to make ; then in 
 this Cafe, the Earth will 
 feem to move from y 
 to tf , and from thence 
 to H, and fo on, from 
 Eaft to Weft, through 
 all the Signs, till it re- 
 turns to T again. 
 
 Secondly, If we ima- 
 gine the Obferver to be 
 remov'd from the Sun 
 to the Earth, and the 
 Earth be at A, where 
 it is feen among the Fixt 
 Stars at Y ; the Sun, 
 when feen from the 
 Earth, will appear in 
 the oppofite Sign S& among the Fixt Stars. If the Earth be moved 
 from A thro' B to C in its Orbit, or, if look'd upon from the 
 Sun, from T thro' ^ to H, in confequtntia, or according to the 
 Order of the Signs, the Sun, to an Obferver on our Earth, that 
 thinks the Place he Hands upon immoveable, will appear to move 
 among the Fixt Stars, according to the Order of the Signs alfo, 
 from j thro' Til, to , &fc. in the fame Plane, during the fame 
 Time, and towards the fame Parts of the Heavens, as the Earth 
 feen from the Sun does, but in the oppofite Points of the Ecliptic. 
 
 Scholium. 
 The like Phenomena happen in refpeft of the Sun and any other 
 Planet, nay indeed the very fame, excepting that the Time of that 
 Planet's Revolution about the Sun, or the Sun's apparent Revolu- 
 tion about the Planet, when view'd from that Planet, is various, 
 
 according
 
 Ckap. VH. ASTRONOMY. 95 
 
 according to the different Period of each, mention'd before ; and 
 that the Plane of the Orbit of that Planet produced will meet 
 other Stars than thofe which the Plane of the Earth's Orbit does 
 when produced ; and confequently, that the Path of the Sun 
 among the Fixt Stars, feen from any other Planet, is different from 
 its Path when feen from the Earth, that is, from the Ecliptic. 
 
 SECTION III. 
 
 Of the Phenomena of the Planets feen from the Sun, arifmg 
 from their Motion in Orbits whofe Planes art inclined to 
 the Plane of the Ecliptic. 
 
 Since the Orbits of the Earth and Planets are fo fituated, as that 
 their Planes are inclin'd to each other, and interfett each other in 
 RightLines paffing thro' the Sun ; the Inclination of the Plane of the 
 Orbit of each to the Plane of the Ecliptic, or Earth's Orbit, is to 
 be taken into Confideration, in explaining the Phasnomena of the 
 Planets view'd from the Sun. For the Plane of the Ecliptic is 
 taken by Aftronomers as the Standard to which the Planes of the 
 other Orbits are judged to incline ; fince it is that in which the 
 Earth, the Habitation of the Aftronomer, moves round the Sun, 
 or in which the Sun feems to move round the Earth : And an 
 Obferver plac'd in any other Planet, would make the Plane of 
 that Placet's Orbit the Standard of all the reft, and confider 
 them as inclin'd to it. 
 
 The Right Line which panes thro' the Sun, and is the common 
 Settion of the Plane of the Orbit of a Planet, and the Plane of 
 the Ecliptic, is called the Line of Nodes of that Planet, and the 
 Points themfelves, wherein theOrbit of the Planet cuts the Ecliptic, 
 are called the Nodes. Thus, ^ 
 
 let T / be the Plane of 
 the Orbit of the Earth pro- 
 duced infinitely, NP the 
 Orbit of any Planet interfer- 
 ing the Plane of the former 
 Orbit or Ecliptic in N and n, 
 which are the Nodes of that 
 Plane ; fo as one Part N P * 
 of that Orbit be fuppofed 
 above the Plane of this 
 Scheme, and the other ftp N 
 below it ; the Right Line N n 
 joining the Nodes, being the 
 common Seftion of the Plane 
 of the Orbit of the Planet and the Plane of the Ecliptic, is the 
 Line of the Nodes. 'Ti$
 
 96 ASTRONOMY. Parti. 
 
 'Tis evident then, that if a Planet be feen from the Sun, when 
 it is in one of the Nodes, as N, it will appear to be in the Plane 
 of the Ecliptic : But when gone forwards as far as P, it will feem 
 to deviate from the Ecliptic. The Inclination of the Right Line () 
 P to the Ecliptic, and confequently of the Planet at P feen from 
 the Sun, called the Planet's Heliocentric Latitude, is meafured by 
 the Angle P E, where P E is fuppofed to be a Perpendicular let 
 fall from P to the Plane of the Ecliptic. This Heliocentric Lati- 
 tude continually increafes, till the Planet is got as far as L, its 
 Limit, or till the Angle NOP becomes 90 Degrees, where it is 
 equal to the Inclination of the Plane of the Planers Orbit to the 
 Plane of the Ecliptic. But during the Planet's Paflage from thence 
 to the other Node n, it is decreafing, till at laft it vanilhes at the 
 Node. The Planet having pafled the Node n, its Latitnde begins 
 again, changing its Name, becaufe it is towards the contrary Parts 
 of the Ecliptic, and grows bigger and bigger, till the Planet has 
 arriv'd at the other Limit /, from whence again it grows lefs and 
 lefs, till it vanilhes at the other Node N. 
 
 The Orbits are inclin'd to the Plane of the Ecliptic in the fol- 
 lowing manner : The Orbit of Saturn makes an Angle of 2 : De- 
 grees, of Jupiter 1 -, of Mars a little lefs than 2, of Venus fome- 
 thing above 3 j, and of Mercury almoft 7 Degrees. 
 
 SECTION IV. 
 
 Of the Phenomena arifing from the Motion of the Earthy 
 Venus and Mercury, when viewed from the Earth. 
 Since Venus and Mercury revolve about the Sun, in lelfer Orbits 
 than the Earth, as is fhewn in the Scheme, where T reprefents 
 the Earth, carried in its Orbit T from Weft and Eaft, and 
 A C E G the Orbit defcrib'd by Venus in a lefs Space of Time 
 the fame Way ; 'tis evident, that when Venus is in D E F x that 
 Part of its Orbit that is fartheft off the Earth, it will appear to us 
 on the Earth to move in confsquen- 
 tia, or according to the Order of 
 the Signs, and it is then faid to be ,.." 
 
 direft. When it is in G, moving /** x> 
 from thence to H, it will appear to / C m -' 
 move as fwift as the Sun, becaufe / 
 then its Motion tends directly : l f 
 towards the Earth, and does not I 
 feem to move at all, but as it alters \ V 
 its Longitude by the Motion of the \ 
 Earth, which is towards the Eaft : \ \ u 
 Venus now therefore moves flower '%. 
 than before, but is ftill direct. "'.., 
 
 When it is got beyond H in \\% 
 
 Motion 
 
 T 
 
 
 -... 
 
 , #> 
 
 A 
 
 *. 
 
 .."\ 
 
 
 Vo\ 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 & 
 
 
 ?>, 
 
 %/ 
 
 E 
 
 
 f 

 
 Chap. VII. ASTRONOMY. 97 
 
 Motion, thro* A to B, it partes between the Earth and the Sun, 
 becaufe it is nearer io us than the Sun, and moves fwifter than 
 the Earth ; and confequently it will feem to us to change its Place 
 among the Fixt Stars, and move in antecedentia, or contrary to 
 the Order of the Signs ; and then it is &iJ to be retrograde, tho* 
 really dirett ftill, if view'd from the Sun. Between dirett and 
 retrograde, for Inftance, about H, it will be ftationary, the Right 
 Lines that join the Earth and Venus, at the fame Moment, conti- 
 nuing for fome fenfible Time parallel. Thus likewife, after its 
 Retrogradation, before it becomes direct again, it will appear fta- 
 tionary a fecond time about B, and is ftationary in order to its be- 
 ing dirett, as it was before in order to its being retrograde at H. 
 In all this Affair, Regard is to be had to the Motion of the 
 Earth ; for Venus is dirett, ftationary, or retrograde, according as 
 it is pofited in fuch Parts of its Orbit as have the fame Relation 
 to the Earth in its Motion as the Points above-mentioned. From 
 what has been (aid, 'tis evident, that Venus, when retrograde, as 
 at A, is neareft to the Earth, and contrarywife, when dirett, as at 
 E, it is fartheft off. 
 
 And becaufe Venus moves round the Sun at a lefs Diftance than 
 the Earth, 'tis evident, that it will feem always to attend the Sun, 
 fometimes to go to the Weft of it, fometimes to the Eaft ; all 
 heavenly Bodies feeming to be at an equal Diftance from the Eye 
 of the Spectator. This Digreflion to the Eaftward or Weftward 
 f the Sun is called the Elongation, and is meafured by the Angle 
 contain'd under Right Lines drawn from the Eye to the Sun and 
 Venus, which is never greater than the Angle () T C or T G, 
 if the Lines TC or T G, when drawn, are Tangents to the Or- 
 toit A D E. Confequently the Elongation of Venus will never be 
 much above half a Quadrant from the Sun, as is evident from the 
 Semidiameters laid down in Sett. I. hereof: And when it has ar- 
 rived to its fartheft Elongation, it will return to the Sun, and pafs 
 as far beyond on the other Side, as if its Motion were ofcillatory. 
 
 Mercury has all the lame Phenomena ; but its Directions, Sta- 
 tions, and Retrogradations, happen oftener, becaufe it finifhes its 
 Courfe in a fhorter Time, and confequently overtakes the Earth 
 "oftener 'than Venus : And fince Mercur/s Orbit is lefs than that of 
 Venus, its greateft Elongation muft be alfo lefs, and it muft be a 
 nearer and more conftant Attendant of the Sun, being by Sett. I. 
 hereof never a whole Sign diftant from it, and confequently feldom 
 to be fcen by tic. 
 
 H SEC-
 
 9 8 ASTRONOMY, Parti. 
 
 SECTION V. 
 
 Of the Latitude of the Inferior Planets feen from the Earth. 
 
 Let T@t be the Earth's Orbit, whofe Plane is the fame with 
 that of the Ecliptic, and let N $ be theOrbit of an inferior Planet, 
 for Inftance, that of Venus, whofe Plane is inclined to that of the 
 Ecliptic ; and let the Interfectioa of the Planes, or Line of the 
 Nodes, be Nn. And when Venus is in $ , let the Earth be in T. 
 
 'Tis evident, that the Incli- 
 nation of the Right Lhre $ T 
 to the Plane of the Ecliptic, or 
 the Latitude of Venus in $, 
 feen from the Earth ( which is 
 therefore called the Geocentric 
 Latitude ) is meafured by the 
 /ingle $ TE, the Right Line 
 $ E being made perpendicular 
 to the Plane of the Ecliptic. If 
 Venus be fuppofed to continue in 
 9 , and the Earth to be at /, the 
 Geocentric Latitude of Venus 
 
 will be the Angle $ / E, lefs than TE, almoft in the Ratio of 
 T $ to / $ , tho' the Heliocentric Latitude of Venus be in both 
 Cafes the fame. 
 
 All that has been now faid is true of Mercury as well as of Ve- 
 nus ; confequently, all other Circumftances being alike, the Lati- 
 tude of the inferior Planets is greater when they are retrograde, 
 and neareft the Earth ; and lefs when direct, and fartheft off. 
 
 Moreover, if any inferior Planet be moft retrograde, or neareft 
 the Earth, and at the fame time in a Node, it will be found di- 
 reftly between the Obferver and the Sun : If it be at a confider- 
 able Diftance from the Node, it will pafs the Sun to the North- 
 ward or Southward. In like manner, if it be fartheft off the 
 Earth, and be alfo near, or in a Node, it will be cover'd by the 
 Sun ; if it be otherwife fituated, it will pafs on one Side of the 
 Sun. 
 
 SECTION VI. 
 
 Of the Phenomena ariftng from the inferior Planets being 
 opake fpherical Bodies enlightened by the Sun. 
 
 , Since all the Planets, as well as the Earth, are opake fpherical 
 Bodies, refle&ing the Rays of Light that fall upon them every 
 AVay, 'tis evident, that Half of each Phmet which is expofed or 
 
 turn'd
 
 Chap. VII. ASTRONOMY. 99 
 
 turn'd to the Sun, is enlightened 
 by it, while the other Half, which 
 is turn'd from the Sun, is in Dark- 
 nefs. And fmce that Half only which 
 is towards the Earth is feen by the 
 Obferver, if we confider which Face j 
 of Venus is enlighten'd in this or that j^j 
 Situation in refpecl of the Sun, toge? 
 ther with the Face that is vifible at 
 the Earth, in the Part T of its Or- 
 bit T 9 , it will be manifeft, that 
 when Venus is in A, that is, moft re- 
 trograde, and neareft to us, it is not 
 vifible at all, having its dark Face 
 
 turn'd to us : And if Venus were at the fame time in the Plan* 
 of the Ecliptic, that is, in one of its Nodes, it would appear like 
 a black Spot in the Sun, being fkuated directly between the Earth 
 and Sun, by the foregoing Section. 
 
 When Venus is got into the Situation B, that is, begins to be 
 dirett, if view'd from the Earth, then forne Part of the en- 
 lighten'd Half is turn'd towards theEarth, tho' the greater remain- 
 ing Part belongs to the obfcurc Half. And becaufe Venus is of a 
 fpherical Figure, and appears like a Plane, its enlighten'd Part 
 will appear horned, and thofc Horns turned towards the Weft, or 
 from the Sun. 
 
 When^lfj is atC, that is, at its greateft Elongation from theSun, 
 half the enlightened Part will be feen by us, and then it is faid to be 
 half full ; at D it is faid to be gibbous, above half the enlighten'd 
 Part being vifible ; and at E, where it is far theft off the Earth, and 
 moft direct, in its Motion, it appears full, all the enlightened Hemi- 
 fphere being turned toward us. 
 
 Venus will have the fame 
 Variety of Phafes in its Paf- 
 fage thro'F.G, and H, that is, 
 it will be gibbous at F, half- 
 full at G, and horned at H, 
 with its Horns turn'd from 
 the Sun ; that i6, in the pre- 
 fers Cafe, looking towards 
 the Eaft, exactly contrary to 
 what they were when it was 
 at B. 
 
 For better underftanding 
 Of this Matter, I frail here 
 delineate the feveral Phafe*, 
 as they appear to u, The 
 
 H a 
 
 (ams
 
 ioo ASTRONOMY. Part I. 
 
 fame Letters are here us'd that were in the laft Scheme, reprefenting 
 its Phafes when it was in that Part of its Orbit, marked by the 
 fame Letter. Thus, in this Scheme, at the Point A, it is drawn 
 all-obfcure, becaufe that is its Condition in refpecl: of the Earth at 
 T, when Venus is at A in the former Scheme. At B it is repre- 
 fer.ted horned, becaufe it appears fo, when it is at B, in the for- 
 mer Scheme, and look'd upon from the Earth at T j and fo on in 
 the other Cafes of C, D, &e. 
 
 The like Phenomena will appear in Mercury, Regard being had 
 to its Orbit and Revolution. 
 
 SEC T I O N VII. 
 
 Of the Phenomena arifing from the Motion of the^ Earthy 
 and of the fuperior Planets, Mars, Jupiter and Saturn. 
 
 Let M $ be the Orbit of 
 any one of the fuperior 
 Planets, for Inftance, that 
 of Mars, A C D G the 
 Orbit of the Earth nearer 
 to the Sun. 'Tis evident 
 firft, that this Planet will 
 hot always attend the Sun, 
 but fometimes be diametri- 
 cally oppofite to it : For 
 the Earth, finifhing its 
 Revolution fooner than 
 any one of the fuperior 
 "Planets, will fometimes be 
 exactly between the Sun 
 and that Planet ; thus, 
 when Mars is in M, the 
 
 Earth may be at H ; and f ' lo fpeak univerfally, the Angle at the 
 Earth, made by Lines drawn thence to the Sun and that Planet, 
 may be equal to any given one. 
 
 Let us fuppofe Mars to be in M, and the Earth at the famt 
 time to be in A ; Mars in this Cafe will appear ftationary, 
 in Torder to its being direct, becaufe the Right Lines that join 
 the Earth and Planet at that Moment, will continue parallel 
 for fome fenfible Time ; during theWhole of which, notwithftand- 
 ing, Mars will feem to go forwards, as ufual, if view'd from the 
 Sun. 
 
 Whiie the Earth moves along thro' B, C, D, E, F, to G, 
 Mars likewife wil feem to go forwards among the Fixt Stars, 
 upon a double Account j firft, becaufe it really doe* move about 
 
 the
 
 Chap. VII. ASTRONOMY. km 
 
 the Sun, in conftquentia ; and then again, becaufe the Earth in 
 the oppofite Semicircle is carried the fame Way, and about the 
 fame Centre : And confequently, Mars in this Cafe being moft 
 >emote from the Earth, and in Conjunction with the Sun. 
 view'd from the Earth, will feem to move fafter than ordinary 
 in conftquentia : But when the Earth is arrived to the Point G, in 
 refpedi of Mars at M, ( which fome time or other will happen, 
 tho' Mars be carried in the mean while about the Sun, namely, 
 when the Earth has almoft overtaken Mars) Mars will again be- 
 come ftationary, in order to its being retrograde, as it will be foon 
 after. For when the Earth in its Motion from G, thro' H to A, 
 has paffed Mars, and that Planet is feen in Oppofition to the Sun, 
 and biggeft, becaufe neareft the Earth, which is lower and fwifter, 
 Mars will appear to move in antecedentia from S thro' K to 
 P j whereas, in the mean while, view'd from the Sun, it feem'd to 
 move, as always before, in confequentia. 
 
 The like Phamomena will happen to Jupiter and Saturn, except- 
 ing that Saturn's Retrogradations are more frequent than Jupiter's, 
 and Jupiter's thanilfarj's ; becaufe the Earth oftener overtakes Sa- 
 turn than Jupiter, and Jupiter oftener than Mars, and pafles be- 
 tween them and the Sun. 
 
 SECTION VIII. 
 
 Of the Phanomena of the Latitude of the fuperior Planets 
 feen from the Earth. 
 
 Let the Earth's Orbit be T r ; 
 -that of any fuperior Planet, as 
 Mars, cf M, whofe Plane is in- 
 clin'd to that of the Ecliptic, and 
 cuts it in the Line of the Nodes 
 N () : Let the Situation of Mars 
 and the Earth to the Sun be fuch, 
 as that Mars being in <, the 
 Earth may be in T, almoft between 
 Mars and the Sun ; in which Cafe 
 
 Mars is neareft theEarth, and appears confequently biggeft,and moft 
 retrograde, as was ftiewn m the foregoing Seftion. Its Geocentric 
 Latitude will be meafured by the Angle $ T E, $ E -being fup- 
 pos d perpendicular to the Plane of the Ecliptic. But if, Mars 
 continuing in the iame Situation in its own Orbit, and confequent- 
 ly having the fame Heliocentric Latitude, and the Earth be lup- 
 pos'd in /, fo that the Sun may be between it and Mars ; in which 
 Cafe, by what has been faid, Mars will be farthert off, and confe- 
 quently appear leaft, and molt fwift in its- Motion ; its Geocentric 
 
 H 3 Lati-
 
 iefc ASTRONOMY. Part h 
 
 Latitude, meafured by the Angb (? /E, is lefs than the Angle 
 c? T E, in the Ratio of the Diftances of the Earth from Mars, 
 that is, of the Right Lines T <$ , t c?, nearly. Thus, in what- 
 ever Situation Mars and the Earth are placed, in refpett of thf 
 Sun, its Geocentric Latitude will vary, fo as, ceteris paribus, it 
 will be lefs as Mars is nearer to a Conjunction with the Sun, and 
 fwifteft in Motion, and greater, as it is nearer its Retrogradation 
 and Oppofition to the Sun. 
 
 From what has been laid it is evident, that none of the fuperior 
 Planets can ever be feen from the Earth to cover the Sun ; though 
 any of them may be cover'd by the Sun, when it is direct, and 
 pretty near a Node. 
 
 SECTION IX. 
 
 Of the Phenomena arijing from the fuperior Planets being 
 opake Bodies, and enlighten d by the Sun. 
 
 Saturn and Jupiter being opake Bodies, and at a very great Di- 
 ftance from the Sun, the greater Part of that Half of each Planet - 
 which is turn'd towards the Sun, that is, of the illuminated Half, 
 is likewife turn'd towards the Earth : For Jupiter's Diftance from 
 the Sun ( by Sect. I. ) is above five times, and Saturn's almoft 
 ten times greater than the Earth's Diftance from it, 
 
 In Mars indeed it is fomething different : For the Diftance of 
 Mars from the Sun. being but half as much more as the Earth's 
 Diftance from it, its enlighten'd Hemifphere, towards the Sun, is 
 not always, as to Senfe, turn'd towards 
 the Earth. Let T be the Earth's Place 
 in its Orbit T , 'tis evident that 
 Mars, being at A and B, in Conjun- 
 ction or Oppofition to the Sun, has the 
 fairte Face towards the Earth, as it has 
 towards the Sun, that is, its enlighten'd 
 one, and confequently appears full ; 
 but in the Situation of the Points D 
 or C, ( when the Angle C T or 
 D T is greateft ) neither is the 
 whole enlighten'd Face feen, nor is 
 that Face, that is feen, intirely illumi- 
 nated, but it appears gibbous, the Light being deficient a little to? 
 wards thofe Parts that are turn'd from the Sun. 
 
 Scholium. 
 As the Phenomena defo ibtd in thefe fix Iaft Sections follow 
 from the Order and Motion of the Earth and the primary Planets, 
 
 laid
 
 Chap. VII. ASTRONOMY. 105 
 
 laid down in Se&. I. fo, on the contrary, the Obfervations of 
 thefe Phenomena fufficiently confirm the annual Motion of the 
 Earth, or that the Motion which caufes the Succeflion of Summer 
 -nd Winter belongs to the Earth, and not to the Sun. 
 
 SECTION X. 
 
 Of the Order and Periods of the Secondary Planets, or Sa- 
 tellites, about their primary ones, and Dijiances from them. 
 
 Three of the Planets, <viz. the Earth, Jupiter, and Saturn, 
 have other lefler Planets which continually accompany them; thefe 
 are called fecondary Planets, Moons, or Satellites; for they conftant- 
 ly keep clofe to their refpeclive Primaries, and always attend upon 
 them in their Revolution round the Sun j and in the mean time 
 each of them performs his proper Revolution round its Primary. 
 The Earth has one Attendant, the Moon, completing its Courfe in 
 nearly 27 -7 Days, and diftant about 60 Semidiameters of the 
 Earth from it. 
 
 Jupiter has four Moons that attend him, the neareft of which 
 revolves about him in 1 ^ of a Day, at the Diftance of 5 - Semi- 
 diameters of Jupiter from his Centre ; the fecond revolves in 3 -^ 
 Days, at the Diftance of 9 Semidiameters ; the third in 7 ' Days, 
 at the Diftance of *4 ] Semidiameters ; the fourth and outermoft 
 revolves about Jupiter in the Space of 16 \ Days, being diftant 
 from his Centre 25 \ Semidiameters of Jupiter. 
 
 Saturn has five Attendants ; of which the innermoft revolves in 
 1 I of a Day, at the Diftance of 4^ Semidiameters of Saturn, 
 from the Centre of Saturn ; the fecond, in the Space of 2 ^ Days, 
 at the Diftance of 5 * Semidiameters of Saturn ; the third, in 4 -*- 
 Days almoft, at the Diftance of 8 Semidiameters ; the fourth in 
 almoft 16 Days, at the Diftance of 18 Semidiameters; the fifth, 
 and outermoft of all that has been difcovered, revolves about <SV 
 tum in 79 L Days, at the Diftance of 54 Semidiameters from the 
 Centre of Saturn. 
 
 Saturn is likewife encompafs'd with a thin Ring, that does not 
 touch the Body of this Planet at all, but is like an orbicular Arch, 
 built round about it : The Diameter of this Ring is more than 
 double of the Diameter of Saturn ; and from the various Por- 
 tions of it, in refpcft of the Sun illuminating it, it being opake 
 like a Planet, and in refpedl of the Eye of the Spectator, do arife 
 the various Phafes of the Anfte of Saturn, which have fo long 
 baffled the Attempts of Aftronomers with their various Shapes. 
 The Breadth of the Space between the Ring and the Body of Sa- 
 turn is equal to the Breadth of the Ring itfelf. For what Purpofe 
 this furprifing Ring was made we know not, and perhaps never 
 may, fincc wc find nothing in Nature like it. 
 
 H 4 S E e-
 
 io4 
 
 A S T R O N O M ^Y. 
 
 Parti. 
 
 SECTION XI. 
 
 Of the Phenomena of the Moon vieiv'd from the Earth, as 
 it is a Spherical Body illuminated by the Sun. 
 
 The Moon accompanies the Earth 
 T, in its Orbit R T, during its Re- 
 volution about the Sun, and moves 
 in its Orbit the fame Way as the 
 Earth does, from A thro' B, C, 
 iffc. The Plane of the Moon's 
 Orbit does not coincide, with the 
 Plane of the Ecliptic, but is iri- 
 clin'd to it by an Angle of about 
 tfve Degrees ; and the common In- 
 terferon of thefe Planes is the 
 Right Line Q y ; the Points Si, 
 1$, where the Orbit of the Moon 
 interfetts the Plane of the Ecliptic, 
 Tare called the Nodes of the Moon, 
 as was faid before, when we treated 
 of the primary Planets : So that 
 the Orbit of the Moon is to be 
 
 conceived as being half above and half below the Plane of th 
 Ecliptic, the former SI A y to the North, and the latter PK^ 
 towards the South, and oh that Account is reprefented in the 
 Scheme in the Figure of an Ellipfis. One of the Nodes, <via. 
 that where the Moon, having pafs'd the Ecliptic, is afcending into 
 the Northern Part, is called the Dragon's Head, and is mark'd 
 thus SI ; and the other the Dragon s Tail, mark'd thus y . The 
 Line of the Nodes does not always keep the fame Pofition, but 
 moves with an angular Motion, fo that the Nodes go backwards, 
 viae. SI thro' G, F, &c. and y thro' C, B, Zzfc. contrary to 
 the Order of the Signs, completing a Revolution in about 19 
 Years. From whence 'tis certain, that the Moon can never be 
 found in the Ecliptic above twice in its monthly Courfe, -viz. 
 when it is in the Node SI or <tf ; all the reft of the Time it is 
 wide of it } and the Latitude of the Moon's Deviation is mea- 
 fured by the Angle wherewith the Right Line, connecting the 
 Centres of the Moon and Earth, is inclin'd to the Plane of the Ecli- 
 ptic, agreeable to what was faid concerning the primary Planets 
 in Sedion V. and VIII. hereof. 
 
 Bendes, the Moon being an opake, rough, fpherical Body, re- 
 jecting the Sun's Rays falling upon it, 'tis evident, that Half of 
 it, being turn'd towards the Sun, is illuminated and bright, while 
 
 the
 
 Chap. VII. ASTRONOMY. 105 
 
 the other Half, that is turn'd from the Sun, continues obfcure 
 and dark. Now, only that Hemifphere of the Moon which is 
 towards the Earth can be feen by an "Inhabitant of the Earth; 
 viewing it: Confequently the Phafes of the Moon will be various, 
 according to the various Habitude of the enlighten'd Hemifphere 
 to that which is turn'd towards the Earth ; as was fhewn in the 
 like Cafe in Sett. VI. 
 
 If the Moon be at A in the Scheme, the Point juft oppofite to 
 the Sun, which we will fuppofe to be at S, and the Earth in T, 
 'tis evident, that the whole enlighten'd Face of the Moon is turn'd 
 towards the Earth ; this Phafis or Appearance of the Moon ii 
 Call'd the full Moon. If the Moon be removed to B, the Sun and 
 the Earth continuing as they were, Part of the bright or illumi- 
 nated Half will be turn'd from the Earth, and Part of the obfcure 
 or darken'd Half turn'd towards it ; hereupon the Moon will not 
 appear full, but gibbous, or a little deficient or obfcure on the 
 oppofite Part to the Sun. The Moon arriving to the Situation 
 C, where the Angle CT S is a Right one, and the Moon in one 
 of its Quadratures, half the Hemifphere which is turn'd to the 
 Earth is illuminated, and half dark ; on which Account it will 
 appear a Half-moon, and on the Decreafe. The Moon having 
 got farther, for Inftance, to D, but a little of its Face, that is 
 turn'd to the Earth, is enlighten'd, much the greater Part remain- 
 ing dark ; and confequently the enlighten'dPart will appear horned, 
 by reafon of theMoon's really fpherical, but apparently plainFigure; 
 and the Horns will appear turn'd away from the Sun, or in the pre- 
 fent Cafe turn'd towards the Weft. At length, when the Moon is 
 come to the Point K, or into Conjunction with the Sun, all the en- 
 lighten'd Half is turn'd from the Earth ;' and confequently the 
 Moon will be intirely dark, and become a new Moon ; becaufe it 
 will foon appear at F, and (hew its Horns ftill turn'd from the 
 Sun, and confequently now towards the Eaft. Afterwards being 
 upon the Increafe, it will appear a Half.moon at G, at the End 
 of the firft Quarter, as it did in C at the Beginning of the laft 
 Quarter; then gibbous at H, till it become full again at A. 
 For greater Evidence and Clearnefs of the Whole, we have drawn 
 the Appearance of the Moon, as feen by us, correfpondsng to every 
 diltinft Situation, and plac'd it juft behind it. 
 
 Tho' the Time of the Moon's Revolution about the Earth be 
 but 27 Days 7 * Hours, which is call'd a Periodic Month; yet 
 by a Month, or intire Lunation, is commonly underllood all that 
 Space of Time that is fpent from one new Moon till the next 
 following one, which is greater than the abovt -mention'd Periodic 
 Month ; becaufe during the Periodic Month, in which the Moon 
 departing from the Point K, where the new Moon now happens, 
 
 returns
 
 io6 
 
 ASTRONOMY. 
 
 Parti. 
 
 returns to it again, the Earth itfelf, together with the Moon its 
 Attendant, is carry 'd near an intireSign in conjequentiai fo that 
 the {aid Point of the Orbit of the Moon K is more towards 
 the Weft of the Sun; and confequently the Moon is not yet 
 arrived to a Conjunction with the Sun, but ftill wants two 
 Days and five Hours to it, that is, to finifh an entire Luna- 
 tion, and all the feveral Changes of its Appearances ; which 
 Space of Time is called a Synodic Month, and confifts of 29 Days 
 12 \ Hours. 
 
 A little before and after a new Moon, viz. when the Moon 
 is in D and F, the Rays of the Sun reflefted from the Earth, meet- 
 ing with the Moon, are the Caufe of that faint Light by which 
 the reft of the Moon's Disk, befides its Horns, is then rendered 
 vifible. But when the Moon is got out of the Way of the Refle- 
 xion of the Earth's Light, that faint Light vanifhes, being faUly 
 fuppos'd native. 
 
 SECTION XII. 
 
 Of the Eclipfe of the Moon. 
 
 A s the Earth is an opake Body, enlighten 'd by the Sun, it there- 
 fore cafts a Shadow towards thofe Parts which are turn'd from 
 the Sun ; and the Axi3 of this Shadow muft always be in the 
 Plane of 
 the Ecli- 
 ptic } fince 
 both Sun 
 and Earth 
 are always 
 there. If 
 at any 
 time the 
 
 Moon when full ftjould happen to be in the Plane of the Ecli- 
 ptic, or pretty near it, (which will be when the full Moon 
 happens in or near the Node ) 'tis evident the Moon will be 
 immers'd in the Shadow, and confequently deprived of the 
 Sun's Light, by which it mines ; that is, it will fufter an 
 Eclipfe, which will be total, or partial, according as the Whole, 
 or only a Part, of the Moon's Body enters the Shadow. 
 
 The Earth's Shadow terminates at laft in a Point, and does 
 not reach fo far as Mars: For Mars, tho' in the Plane of the 
 Ecliptic, and oppofite to the Sun, is not eclipfed ; which necefta- 
 rily would be, if it were immers'd in the Earth's Shadow. 'Tis 
 evident, at firft Sight, from this Scheme, that the Sun is bigger 
 than the Earth : For, if the lucid Body be juit as big as the 
 
 opakc
 
 Ghap. 
 
 >. VII. ASTRONOMY. J07 
 
 opake one, the Shadow will be equally thick and.cvlindrical; but 
 if the lucid Body be lets than the opake, the ShadbW indeed will 
 be conical, but growing bigger and bigger, and the farther off 
 it is from the opake Body, the thicker it is, and in both Cafes 
 will be extended infinitely. As the Sun is bigger than the Earth, 
 fo the Earth is bigger than the Moon ; becauie the Moon is fome- 
 times totally eclipfed, by entering into the Earth's Shadow : But 
 the Earth's Shadow is much fmaller where the Moon enters it, 
 than nearer to the Eafth, as is evident from what has been al- 
 ready fhewn. 
 
 Let the Circle V M reprefent 
 the trahfverfe Sedtion of the 
 Earth's Shadow, where it croffes 
 the Moon's Orbit. Let LyF 
 be the Orbit of the Moon, and 
 CE the Ecliptic. The dura- 
 tion of fome Eclipfes is found to 
 be fo long, (for Inltahce, hear four 
 Hours ) as to let the Moon go 
 theLength of three of itsDinmeters in the Shadow totally eclipfed. 
 This happens, when the Centre of the Moon paffes thro' the 
 Centre of the Earth's Shadow, or Circle V M : And fuch an 
 Eclipfe is called a Total and Central Eclipfe. 
 
 Sometimes the Moon is not arrivdd at, or has already paffed, the 
 Node, when it is entering the Earth's Shadow : Notwithftanding, 
 if at that time it be near a Node, it will be totally immers'd, and 
 confequently there will happen a. total, tho' not a central Eclipfe, 
 
 V 
 
 nor of fo long a Continuance : For 
 the Way of the Moon thro' the 
 Earth's Shadow is lefs than the 
 t)iameter of the Shadow, becaufe 
 it does not pafs thro' its Centre ; 
 and confequently, ceteris pari- 
 bus, will be pafs'd thro' fooner. 
 
 But if the Node be fo far off from the Sh:idow> as that only 
 Part of the Moon is immers'd, > it pa-fies in its Orbit near the 
 
 V 
 
 Shadow,
 
 io8 ASTRONOMY. Part t 
 
 Shadow, the Eclipfe will be a partial one, and is faid to be of fo 
 many Digits as there are twelfth Parts of the Moon's Diameter 
 darken'd, when the Eclipfe is greateft. For the Diameter of the 
 Moon ( like any other Integer ) is imagin'd to be divided into 
 twelve Parts or Digits, which is to be underftood likewife of any 
 other Phafis of an Eclipfe. In all thefe Cafes, in the Beginning 
 of an Eclipfe, the Moon enters the Weftern Part of the Shadow 
 with the Eaftern Part of her Limb ; and in the End of it me 
 leaves the Eaftern Part of the Shadow with the Weftern Part of 
 her Limb ; and all the intermediate Time is reckon'd into the 
 Eclipfe, but only fo much into the total Immerfion as parted while 
 the Moon was totally in Darknefs. The Eaftern Limb of the 
 Moon, in its Accefs to the Shadow, does not enter prefently into 
 the thickeft Darknefs, but grows darker and darker, as it ap- 
 proaches nearer to the Shadow ; and this arifes from the Penumbra 
 which always accompanies a Shadow which is made by a lucid 
 Body that is feen under a fenfible Angle : And this Penumbra is 
 diffufed all about the Shadow. Let be the Sun, E the Earth , 
 
 and let Right Lines be drawn juft as in the Scheme : All about 
 the Shadow TVMR, where Part of the Sun's Light can come, 
 a Penumbra V T P, M R N, is fpread, where fome Part of the 
 Sun's Light is flopped by the Earth : And this Penumbra is darker 
 towards TV, R M, which are the Extremities of the perfeft 
 Shade ; becaufe fewer Rays can arrive thither, the Portion of the 
 Sun ( from which they are emitted ) being fmaller ; but lefs qb- 
 fcure toward T P, R N, where more Rays can reach ; and be- 
 yond which Limit all the Rays of the Sun can reach without any 
 Hindrance at all, and enlighten according to the Degree of their 
 Vigour. 
 
 Some kind of Eclipfe or other of the Moon happens generally 
 twice a Year at leaft : For there bring two Nodes, in which'the 
 Moon's Orbit crofles the Ecliptic^ and they moving in antece'dentia, 
 by Sed. XI. hereof, and the Sun appearing to go thro' the Ecliptic 
 in confequentia, by Seftioi II. hereof, the Sun muft meet each of 
 thefe Nodes once every Year, and" canfe juently the Earth's Sha- 
 dow
 
 Chap. VII. ASTRONOMY. tarn 
 
 dow fall upon the Moon's Orb in the other Node : If therefore a 
 full Moon happens juft at that Time, the Moon mult neceflarily 
 be totally and centrally eclips'd, as was demonllrated above : And 
 tho' a full Moon does not happen juft as the Sun and Node meet, 
 yet the Diameter of the Earth's Shadow is fo great, that tho' the 
 full Moon is diftant above ten Days from the aforefaid Time, be- 
 fore or after it, and it can be diftant but fifteen Days, yet the 
 Moon will fcarce get clear of the Shadow. But if the above- 
 mention'd meeting of the Sun and Lunar Node happens on the 
 very Day of the new Moon, or a Day or two before or after, which 
 can happen but feldom, the Moon will be far enough off from 
 the Earth's Shadow in the next full Moon, whether preceding or 
 following, and fo will efcape an Eclipfe ; confequentjy there will 
 be no Eclipfe that Half-year. 
 
 SECTION XIII. 
 Of the Eclipfe of the Sim. 
 
 As the Moon, upon the Interpofition of the EartV, is deprivM 
 cf the Light of the Sun, and faid to be eclipfed ; fo, in like man- 
 ner, if the Earth mould be depriv'd of the Sun's Light, by the 
 Interpofition of the Moon, this Phenomenon ought to be called 
 an Eclipfe of the Earth. But the Spectator being on the Earth, 
 and allowing of no Lofs of Light or Eclipfe, nor Motion, nor any 
 thing that feems to argue an Imperfeftion in his Place of Abode,call?. 
 this Phenomenon an Eclipfe of the Sun, for the fame Reafon as 
 an Inhabitant of the Moon would fay the Sun was eclipfed, when 
 the Moon is really entering into the Earth's Shadow. "Tis evi- 
 dent, that an Eclipfe of the Sun will happen in every fuch new 
 Moon where Ihe is at or near one of the Nodes : For then the 
 Shadow of the Moon, lying betwixt the Sun and Earth, reache^ 
 
 the Earth, and caufes a total Eclipfe to the Inhabitants of the 
 Trad CD, that are immers'd in the thickeft Shade. But the 
 Moon's Shadow not being large enough to cover the whole Earth, 
 
 (he
 
 no ASTRONOMY. Parti. 
 
 the circular Traft BC, ED, which furrounds the former CD* 
 is covered with the Penumbra, and its Inhabitants fee only a par* 
 tial Eclipfe of the Sun ; which is greater towards C and D, be- 
 caufe a greater Portion of the Sun will be covered by the Moon ; 
 but lefs towards B and E, the Extremities of the Penumbra, where 
 the Defedl of Light is fcarce fenfible. At the fame time, in other 
 Places, as at E, F, the Bulk of the Earth is the Reafon why there 
 is no Eclipfe at all ; the Sun enlightening there without any 
 Hindrance or Impediment. All the preceding Account happens in 
 Nature juft as it has been related. But if we look upon the Sun 
 and Moon from the Earth, the Moon will feem to cover the Suh 
 more or hjfs, according as the Spectator is nearer or farther off 
 from the total Shadow : And becaufe the MoQn which covers the 
 Sun can't be feen, the Sun will appear to be darken'd in that Part 
 which the Moon covers, the reft only remaining lucid. 
 
 Sometimes a central Eelipfe happens not to be total ; but a 
 bright Ring feems to furround the Moon : The Reafon is ; at 
 that time the Moon's Shadow is fo fhort, that it cannot reach the 
 Earth, either becaufe the Moon is then fo far oft" from the Earth, 
 or becaufe the Sun's Rays., that graze along the extreme Parts of 
 the Moon, are more than ordinarily infle&ed, and fo fhorten the 
 Moon's Shadow. The Greatnefs of a Solar Eclipfe is to be efti.- 
 mated juft as in the Moon, by the Digits of the Sun's Diameter 
 that are darken'd by the Mpon at the Time giyen. 'Tis evident 
 likewife, that the Moon moving towards the Eaft, or from s 
 thro' Til to $, the Weftern Part A of the Earth will be in the 
 Shadow firft, which will pafs along the Earth's Disk, like a Spot, 
 thro' B, C, D, E, to F, where it leaves the Earth. But if the 
 Moon be look'd upon from the Earth, the Eaftefn Limb of the 
 Moon will firft cover the Weftern of the Sun, and the Weftern pf 
 the Moon will laft uncover the Eaftern Limb of the Sun : And the 
 greateft Darknefs that happens in a total Eclipfe is foon at an End, 
 fome Part of the Sun's Disk being prefently uncovered, almoft as 
 foon as the Whole was cover'd ; and that Part, tho' never fo little, 
 will mjghtily enlighten the Air. Tho' the Moon muft be in a 
 Node the very Moment of the New Moon, to caufe the biggeft 
 Eclipfe of the Sun that is poffible, and that the Shadow of the 
 Moon may go along the Middle of the Earth ; yet if fhe be not 
 far off from thence, the Shadow of the Mpon, or at leaft Part of 
 the Penumbra, will fall upon fome Traft of the Earth, being fo 
 big, and there caufe a total, or at leaft a partial Eclipfe : And in 
 this Senfe, there are more Eclipfes of the Sun than of the Moon. 
 But Eclipfes of the Sun, in any given Place, are much lefs frequent 
 than the Eclipfes of the Moon ; becaufe the Moon's Shadow is lefs 
 than the Earth's, and confequently it does not involve any given 
 Place upon the Earth, fo often as the Earth's Shadow docs fome 
 Part of the Moon. The
 
 Chap. VII. ASTRONOMY. izi 
 
 The fame Phenomena will appear in Jupiter and Saturn ; for 
 their Satellites or Moons will be eclipfed, by being immers'd m 
 the Shadow of their primary Planet ; and thofe Eclipfes of them 
 are obferv'd by us, juft as the Eclipfes of our Moon may be ob- 
 ferv'd from them. In like manner, a Satellite, coming between 
 the Sun and its primary Planet, cafts a Shadow upon the Primary, 
 which feems to move along the Disk of the primary Planet from 
 Eaft to Weft, like a Spot. But the Duration, Phafes, Periods, 
 ciff. of thefe Phaenomena are various, differing from the like 
 fcen by us, arifing from our Moon, according to the Diverfity of 
 the Shadows^ Motions, and Magnitudes, both of the primary and 
 fecondary Planet. 
 
 SECTION XIV. 
 
 Of the Phenomena arifing from the Diurnal Motion of the 
 Earth about its Axis, feen from the Earth. 
 
 The Earth revolves with an equable Motion from Weft to Eaft, 
 about an Axis, inclin'd to the Plane of the Ecliptic, in an Angle 
 of 66 i Degrees, in the Space of a natural Day. Since the 
 Earth is an opake Body, that fmall Part of its Surface, tho' fphe- 
 ricaL which comes at the fame time under the confin'd View of 
 the Spectator, will feem to be extended like a Plane : And the Eye, 
 taking a View of the Heavens all around itfelf, defines a concave 
 fpherical Superficies, concentric with the Earth, or rather with the 
 Eye , which the above-mentioned Plane of the Earth's Superficies, 
 becaufe drawn thro' the Centre, will divide into two equal Parts, 
 ene of which will be vifible, but the other, by reafon of the 
 Earth's Opacity, will lie conceaPd. 
 
 And as the Earth moves about its Axis, the Spectator, ftanding 
 upon it, together with the faid Plane he ftands upon, called his 
 Horizon, dividing the vifible from the invifible Hemifphere of the 
 Heavens, is carried round the fame Way, *vix. to the Eaft. 
 From hence it is, that Stars fituated towards the Eaft, being 
 at firft hid, become vifible, the Horizon, as it were, finking 
 below them ; and Stars fituated towards the Weft are co- 
 rered or hid, and become invifible, the Horizon being elevated 
 above them. And the former Stars therefore, to the Spectator, 
 who reckons the Place he ftands in to be immoveable, will appear 
 to afcend above the Horizon, or rife j and the latter to defcend 
 below the Horizon, or fet. 
 
 Since the Earth, and the Horizon of the Spectator fix'd to it, 
 continues to move always towards the fame Parts, and about the 
 feme Axis equally ; all Bodies, and all Appearances, that don*t 
 partajce of that Motion, ( that is, all fuch Things as are intire- 
 
 !/
 
 ii2 ASTRONOMY. Fartl- 
 
 ly feparate from the Earth) will feem to move in the like 
 Time uniformly, but towards the oppofite Parts, vix. from Eaft 
 to Weft, excepting fuch Things as the Earth's Axis produced will 
 jneet withal, which will appear at Reft : And every one of thefe 
 Objects, according to Senfe, will defcribe the Circumference of a 
 Circle, to vvhofe Plane the Axis of the Earth is perpendicular. 
 And becaufe all thefe Circles, together with the vifible Objefts 
 defcribing them, appear to be in the concave fpherical Superficies 
 of the Heavens concentric to the Earth, every vifible Objecl will 
 feem to defcribe a greater or lefler Circle, according to its greater 
 or lefferDiftance from the Points above-defcrib'd, that feem at Reft. 
 In fhort, the Celeftial Sphere will feem to be mov'd from Eaft to 
 Weft, in the Space of a Day, round the lame Axis about which 
 the Earth really moves in that Time from Weft to Eaft : And 
 thofe Points in which the Axis of the Earth produc'd meets with 
 its Superficies, will be the Poles of this Motion ; and that will be 
 the middle Circle betwixt the Poles, called the Equator, and con- 
 fequently the greateft. And univerfally any Circle on the Surface 
 of the Earth, defcribed by any Point of it, in the diurnal Motion 
 of the Earth, has a correfpondent Circle in the Celeftial Sphere, 
 made by the Interfe&ion of the Surface of the Celeftial Sphere 
 -with the Superficies of a Cone, whofe Bafe is the Circle mark'd 
 on the Earth, and Vertex the Centre of the Earth. The Axis of 
 -the World, and the above-mentioned Celeftial Circles, have always 
 the fame Situation among the Fixt Stars ; becaufe their primitive 
 Terreftrial ones, from whence they have their Original, ( as was 
 ihewn in the Chapter of Projection ) produc'd fo far, fall upon the 
 fame Stars, as to Senfe, in what Point foever of its Orbit the 
 Earth is placed. ' 
 
 SECTION XV. 
 
 Of the Changes of Day and Night, and their Variety in dif- 
 ferent Places , and different Seafons of the Tear. 
 
 Tho' every Place of the Earth is enlighten'd by all the Stars 
 above its Horizon, yet the Light of the Sun being fo vaftly fupe- 
 rior, its Duration above the Horizon alone makes Day, and its 
 Continuance below the Horizon Night : And becaufe the Sun is 
 intirely feparate and remote from the Earth, and fo does not 
 partake of its diurnal Motion, it will rife, and caufe Day j. 
 and being carried thro' the Midft of the Heavens, defcribing a 
 Circle to Appearance, having the Axis of the World nearly per- 
 pendicular to its Plane, will at laft fet again ; making the Night 
 to continue, till, by the apparent universal Revolution of all the 
 Celwlial Bodies, it comes up again above the Horizon. 
 
 Tt
 
 Chap. VII. ASTRONOMY. u 2 
 
 To explain the Variety of the Days and Nights, and the Sea- 
 fons of the Year thence arifing, imagine the Circle T < ^ XP to 
 reprefent the Orbit defcrib'd by the Earth, in aYear, about the Sun 
 
 plac'd in the Centre at S. The Circle in the Scheme is defignedly 
 made to appear in the Form of an Ellipfis, for the more com- 
 modious Delineation of the various Pofitions of the Earth. 
 
 In this Orbit, let the Earth A QJ5 E be fuppofed to be carried 
 from T, b, to H, t3V. revolving at the fame time about its own 
 Axis B A, always parallel to itfelf, towards the fame Parts, 
 or from Q, towards E. The Extremities of the Axis of the 
 Earth will be the Poles, A being the Southern Pole, and B the 
 Northern one ; E Q^ the Equator, whofe Plane is inclin'd to th 
 Plane of the Ecliptic by an Angle of 23 - Degrees, to. the 
 Complement to a Right Angle of 66 7 Degrees, by which the 
 Axis of the Earth ( perpendicular to the Plane of the Equator ) k 
 inclin'd to it. 
 
 As A QJJ E reprefents the Earth, fo it may be imagin'd to re- 
 prefent the Celeftial Sphere, concentric with the Earth, furround- 
 ing it as it were, and moving along with it; for this Sphere may 
 be defcrib'd at any Diftance : And the Place of the Sun, or any 
 Star, or Celeftial Point in the Sphere, will be where a Right 
 Line joining the Centre of the Earth and the faid Point meets 
 its Surface, for there the Eye plac'd in the Centre of the Earth 
 refers it. 
 
 Let the Earth be fuppos'd to be at , where a Right Line 
 S :, joining the Centres of the Sun and Earth, is perpendicular to 
 the Axis of the Earth A JB ; that is, when the Sun appears in the 
 Plane of the Earth's Equator produe'd, or where, being feen from 
 Xhe Earth, it appears in the Equinoftjal Circle, mark'd in the Ce- 
 
 I IclUal
 
 1 14 ASTRONOMY. Part I. 
 
 leftial Sphere ; and confequently declines neither to the North 
 Pole nor South, but feems, in its D^rnal Motion, to defcribe the 
 Equinoctial itfelf. 
 
 The Sun always feems to be in the Plane of the Ecliptic ; it will 
 therefore appear to be in the common Interferons of the Circles 
 of the Ecliptic and Equator defcrib'd in the Celeftial Sphere, vix. 
 in T. Now in this Situation, the Illumination of the Earth, 
 made by the Sun, reaches both the Poles A and Bj becaufe the 
 Boundary or Circle of Illumination is a great Circle on the Earth, 
 to whofe Plane the Right Line joining the Centre* of the Sun and 
 Earth is perpendicular ; and confequently half the Terreurial 
 Equator E Q, or any other Circle parallel to it, is illuminated by 
 the Sun, while the other Haj[f remains in Darknefs. And there- 
 fore every Place of the Earth, being carried round by the equable 
 Diurnal Motion, will be as long in Darknefs as it was in the 
 Light ; that is, the Day, all over the Earth, will then be equal to 
 the Night. From whence the Circle" that the Sun then defcribes 
 by its Diurnal Motion, lying between two Poles in a Celeftial 
 Sphere, is called the Equino&ial Circle. 
 
 The Earth moving a little forwarder towards TH. and $ in its 
 Annual Motion, has the Plane of its Equator EQ^no longer di- 
 rected towards the Sun, but fubfiding below it towards the South, 
 from whence the Sun feems to decline a little from the Celeftial 
 Equator towards the North Pole ; for the Earth being at Reft to 
 all Appearance, its Equator muft likewife be apparently at Reft ; 
 confequently theCeleftial Equator correfponding to it is moved only 
 by the apparent Diurnal Rotation : And therefore the Sun, which 
 changes its Situation to it, will feem to move ; and the Light of 
 the Sun, which before reach'd to both Poles, A and B, v, ill by de- 
 grees be fpread beyond B, and fall fhort of A. But when the 
 Earth arrives at Yf, and the Sun hereupon appears in , where 
 it will feem to have its greateft Declination Northwards, (equal to 
 the Inclination of the Ecliptic to the Equator) and will, after- 
 wards return towards the Ecliptic; the Circle in the Celeftial 
 Sphere parallel to the Equator, and reprefented by T C, to which 
 the Sun in its North Declination feems to have arriv'd, and to de- 
 fcribe by its Diurnal Motion at that Time, is called the Tropic of 
 Cancer, borrowing its Name from the Sign of the Ecliptic the 
 Sun is then in, by which Name likewife the correfpondent 
 Circle on the Earth is call'd. The Earth being in this Situation, 
 'tis evident, that the Rays of the Sun, enlightening half of it, 
 will reach to L, beyond the North Pole B, and flop fhort at F, 
 oh lis Side the South Pole A, fo as the Arch B L, or A F, is 
 he Arch ET, the Meafure of the Sun's greateft Decli- 
 nator., or of the I-nclination of the Ecliptic to the Equator. If 
 .,, as K.L, FG, be imagined to be drawn thro' Land F, 
 
 parallel
 
 Chap. VII. ASTRONOMY. 115 
 
 parallel to the Equator E Q^ they will be the Polar Circles, the 
 one the Arctic, and the other the Antarctic. Thefe Things being 
 fuppos'd, 'tis plain, that all the Trad of the Earth, which is in- 
 cluded within the Arctic Polar Circle K L, notwithftanding the 
 Diurnal Rotation, is all the while enlighten'd, and enjoys there- 
 fore a continual Day ; and on the contrary, that all that Space 
 within the Compafs of the Antarctic Circle FG has continual 
 Night or Darknefs covering it. 'Tis further evident, that the 
 greater Part of any Circle parallel to the Equator E Q, lying be- 
 tween it and the Arctic Circle K L, is enlighten'd ; the greater 
 Part of any one lying between the Equator and the Antarctic 
 Circle F G is in Darknefs ; and fo much the more as the Circle 
 is farther diftant from the Equator ; and one Half of the Equator 
 is always in Darknefs, and the other Half always enlighten'd. 
 And therefore in that Situation of the Earth wherein the Sun ap- 
 pears in 95, to the Inhabitants of the Northern Parts of the Earth 
 the Days are longeft, and Nights fhorteft, confequently it is Sum- 
 mer : But to the Inhabitants of the Southern Parts, the Days are 
 fhorteft, and Nights longeft, confequently 'tis Winter. And thefe 
 long Days are fo much the longer, and fhort Nights fo much the 
 fhorter, according as the Place is more diftant from the Equator : 
 But to fuch as live at the Equator, the Days and Nights are Hill 
 equal ; and confequently are fo all the Year long. 
 
 The Earth going forwards thro' ?, X, to T J during which 
 time the Sun feems to move thro' the Signs Op, Si and X, the 
 Sun returns towards the Equator, till at lalt at s the Sun appears 
 in the Equator of the Heavens, ( becaufe at that time the Plane of 
 the Earth's Equator produced does again pafs through the Sun ) 
 making the Days equal to the Nights all over the Earth. And now 
 again the Extremities of the Sun's Illumination reach to both 
 Poles ; fo that the Day under the Pole B, which has been all the 
 while enlighten'd, is equal to the Space of half a Year, ( the Time 
 the Earth has fpent fince its Departure from : ; and the Night 
 under the Southern Pole A as long. 
 
 The Earth moving ftill forwards thro' the Signs Y, tf , H, the 
 Sun will feem in the mean while to go thro' :, IH, and $ , and 
 to decline gradually from the Equator towards the South ; till, at 
 laft, the Earth being really in Gu, and the Sun appearing to be in 
 Vf, all the fame Appearances will happen to the Inhabitants 
 of the Southern Hcmifphere as happeli'd to the Inhabitants 
 of the Northern Hemifphere, when the Earth was at Vf ; and 
 what happen'd to the Southern Inhabitants before, will now 
 happen to the Northern : And while tiie Earth is carried thro' 
 , SI and ^, the Sun will feem to move thro' Yf, 3Z, and 
 K, to the Equator, and Y, completing the Year. And the 
 Sun will caufe the fame Phenomena of Day and Night, the for- 
 
 I 2 nicr
 
 u6 ASTRONOMY. Parti. 
 
 mer decreafing, the latter increafing, to the Inhabitants of the 
 Southern Hemifphere, as it did to the Inhabitants of the Northern 
 Hemifphere, while it went thro' the three oppofite Signs. 
 
 SECTION XVI. 
 
 TJie Figures of the Orbits of the Planets. 
 
 Having, in the preceding Sections of this Chapter, treated of 
 what was neceflary, in order to form a general Idea of the Things 
 there defcribed ; it was fufficient to confider the Path of every 
 Planet, as if it were the Periphery of a Circle, having the Sun 
 for a Centre. In this Cafe, a Spectator in the Centre of the Sun 
 would obferve the Earth, in its Annual Motion, fo to go round the 
 Sun, as always to defcribe equal Spaces in equal Times : And the 
 apparent Motion of the Sun in the Ecliptic being conftantly equal 
 to the Motion of the Earth feen from the Sun ; therefore a Spe- 
 ctator in the Centre of the Earth would obferve the Sun to defcribe 
 equal Spaces in equal Times. But we are affured by the Obferva- 
 tions of Aftronomers, that the Motion of the Earth in its Orbit 
 is not equable, but in fome Places it moves quicker, in other Places 
 it flackens its Pace ; in our Summer the Sun is obferv'd to go 
 with a flow Motion, in our Winter he moves fomewhat fafter ; on 
 which Account he is obferved to fpend near eight Days more 
 in the Northern Signs of the Ecliptic than in the Southern Signs j 
 fo that from the Time of the Sun's being in the Vernal Equinox, 
 till his coming into the Autumnal, there are 1 86 i Days ; in 
 which time, by his apparent Motion, he is feen to defcribe one 
 Half of the Ecliptic : But from theAutumnal to the Vernal Equi- 
 nox, there are only 1782 Days, in which Space of Time he 
 finifhes his apparent Courfe thro' the other Half of the Ecliptic, 
 and vifits all the Southern Conftellations. We are alfo affured by 
 the Obfervations of Aftronomers, that the apparent Diameter 
 of the Sun in Winter, when his Motion is quickeft, is greater than 
 the apparent Diameter in Summer, when his Motion is flowed ; 
 and the Difference is fo great, that when the Sun appears biggeft, 
 he is feen under an Angle of 32 Minutes 47 Seconds; but when 
 he appears leaft, he fubtends an Angle only of 3 i Minutes and 40 
 Seconds ; and therefore the Sun mult be farther from us in Sum- 
 mer than in Winter, and confequently he is not in the Centre of 
 the Earth's Orbit. In order to account for thefe Phenomena, let 
 ABC reprefent the Earth's Orbit, E the Centre, and the Centre 
 of the Sun not in E, but in S, T~ V the Starry Firmament. 
 Now, when the Earth is in A, the Sun will be obferved in T and 
 when the Earth comes to B, the Sun will be obferved in : And 
 again, the Earth being arriv'd at C, the Sun will appear in the 
 
 J'oins,
 
 Chap. VII. ASTRONOMY. 117 
 
 Point S2: ; (o that 
 while the Earth 
 defcribes the Arch 
 ABC, which is 
 greater than a 
 Semicircle, theSun 
 will appear to have 
 gone through but 
 one Half of the 
 Ecliptic ; and the 
 Sun will feera to 
 have perform'd his 
 Journey through 
 the other Half, 
 while the Earth is 
 defcribing the other 
 Portion of the Or- 
 bit ADC. Now, 
 fince the Arch 
 
 ABC is greater than the Arch ADC, it is eafy to conceive, 
 that the Sun mull take more Time to defcribe, by its apparent 
 Motion, the Half of the Ecliptic T~, than the other ~VP T. 
 Moreover, when the Earth is in B, it is farther diftant from the 
 Sun than when it is in D. A Spe&ator in E would fee the Earth 
 defcribe equal Angles {BEx DEz) in equal Times; but the 
 Eye in S would obferve the Motion of the Earth, in its annual 
 Motion, to be unequal ; and when at the greateft Diftance from 
 him at B it would appear to be floweft, when it comes neareft at 
 D, it would feem to move quiclceft. For the Arches B x and D z 
 being equal, they will lie defcribed in equal Times ; but the Angle 
 DSz being greater than the Angle BSx, the Motion in* the Space 
 D* will appear fwifter than in xB. This Inequality of Motion 
 is called by Aftronomers the Optical Inequality, becaufe it may 
 not be really in the Body moved, but occafion'd by the Pofition of 
 the Eye. 
 
 The Aftronomers, before Kepler, embrac'd this Hypothecs, as 
 rhe true Caufe of the Phenomena we have related ; but after thi,i 
 great Man had accurately obferv'd thefe Motions, and relying 
 upon the Obfervations of Tycbo Brake, he found that the true Fi- 
 gure of the Earth's Orbit was not the Periphery of a Circle, but 
 the Perimeter of an Ellipfis, having the Sun in one of its Foci ; 
 and that the true Caufe of the unequal Motion of the Earth in its 
 Orbit was from the Principle of Gravitation, acling in the Solar 
 Syftem: But of this in its proper Place. The Axis of the Ellipfis 
 A P is called the Line of the Apfides ; the Point A is called the 
 higher Apfis, and the Aphelion j the Point P is called the lower 
 
 I i Apfis,
 
 Ill 
 
 ASTRONOMY. 
 
 Parti. 
 
 BA 
 
 Apfis, and the Perihelion ; and 
 S C, the Diftance between S the 
 Sun in the Focus cmd the Centre 
 C, is called the Excentricity. If 
 from C there be erected, upon 
 A P, the Perpendicular C E, meet- 
 ing with the Orbit in E; and there 
 be drawn from the Focus the Line 
 S E, this Line is called the mean !B| 
 Diitance of the Planet from the 
 Sun, which is eqiu! to half the 
 Axis, it exceeding the fhorteft Di- 
 ftance by as much as the longeft 
 Diitance exceeds it. In the Planet- 
 ary Orpits, the Forms of the El- 
 lipfes da not differ much from 
 Circles ; and in the Orbit, of the Earth, the Excentricity S C 
 is only 17 fuch Parts as SE, the mean Diitance, confifts of 
 1000. ' ' 
 
 Since we are farther from the Sun in Summer, and nearer in 
 Winter, fome may ask, why it is warmer in Summer, and 
 colder in Winter ; for the nearer we approach the Fire, the war- 
 mer we find ourfelves. The Anfwer is : In Winter the Rays of 
 the Sun fall upon our Part of the Earth very obliquely, fo that 
 few Rays can come to a certain Portion of the Surface to heat it ; 
 and the Sun being near the Horizon all the Winter, his Beams pafs 
 thro' a much greater Quantity of Air, and are broken by the Re- 
 flexions on fo many Particles ; for which Reafon we can look upon 
 the Sun, when he is in the Horizon, without hurting our Eyes ; 
 but when he rifes higher, there is no enduring his Sight without 
 blinding us. Again, the longer any hard Body is expos'd to the 
 Fire, the hotter it grows : Now, in the Summer for fixteen Hours 
 we are continually in the Sun's Heat, and have only eight Hours 
 in the Night to cool : The contrary of which happens in the Win- 
 ter ; and therefore no Wonder, that there fhould be fo great a Dif- 
 ference of Heat and Cold in thefe two Seafons. 
 
 Since the Power of the Sun is greateft when his Rays fall upon 
 us mod directly, and when the Days are longeft, it would feem, 
 that the greateft Heat ought to be when the Sun enters the Tropic 
 of o ; for then the Sun comes neareft to our Zenith, and lies 
 longeft upon us : But Experience fhews us, that we have the 
 greateft Heat about the End of July, in the Dog-days, when the 
 Sun has pafl'ed th 1 Tropic, and is removed from it above a whole 
 Sign. That we may give the true Caufe of this Effeft, it is to be 
 obierved, that the Aft ion of the Sun, by which Bodies are 
 iieated, is not tranfient, as its Illumination is, but permanent : So 
 
 that
 
 Chap. VII. A SfRONOMY. 1 1 $ 
 
 that a Body which has been once heated by the Sun, retains its 
 Heat for fome time after the Sun is gone off it ; fo that the heat- 
 ing Particles which flcny from the Sun, and are abforbed by the 
 heated Body, do for a certain time remain within it, and do there- 
 in raife a Warmth or Heat ; but afterwards, when the Particles 
 fly off, or lofe their Force, the Body begins to cool : And there- 
 fore, if the heating Particles, which are conftantly received, be 
 more than they which fly away, or lofe their Force, the Heat of 
 the Body muft continually increafe. And this is our prefent Cafe. 
 After the Sun has entered the Tropic, the Number of Particles 
 which heat our Atmofphere and F^arth does conftantly increafe, 
 there entering more in the Day-time than what we lofe in the 
 Night-time, and therefore our Heat mull grow greater. Let us 
 fuppofe, for Example, that there are a hundred heating Particles 
 received in the Day- time in Sunfhine, and the Night being much 
 fhorter, there Ihould fly off only fifty of them, other fifty ftill re- 
 maining there to excite Heat : The next Day the Sun, acling with 
 almoft the fame Force, will impart another hundred Particle?, of 
 which no more than one Half will fly away in the Night ; fo that 
 on the Beginning of the third Day the Number of Particles excite- 
 ing Heat will be increafed by One hundred : And thus while there 
 are more Particles that excite Heat received in the Day-time than 
 what fly away in the Night, the Heat will conftantly grow 
 ftronger. But, then, as the Days decreafe, and the action of the 
 Sun becomes weaker, there will at laft be more Particles that fly 
 away in the Night-time than what we receive in the Day-time ; 
 by which means the Heat of a Body will grow every Day lets, and 
 the Earth and Air will by degrees cool. 
 
 SECTION XVII. 
 
 There is an uni<verfal Power of Gra-vity ailing in the foregoing 
 Syjiem, whereby the primary Planets are drawn off from their 
 rtSilineal Motion, and kept in their Orbits ; which Power or Force 
 does not tend towards the Earth, but towards the San. 
 
 Axioms or L a w s o/Motion. 
 
 Law I . 
 Every Body perfeveres in its State of Reft, or of uniform Mo- 
 tion, in a Right Line, unlefc it is compell'd to change that State by 
 Forces impiefled thereon. 
 
 Law 2. 
 The Alteration of Motion is always proportional to the 
 Force imprefled, and in the . fame Direction in which thru 
 Force is unprcflbd. The firft Law regards only iudi Motions a? 
 
 * 4 %je
 
 no ASTRONOMY. Parti. 
 
 are uniform, the fecond relates to accelerated and retarded Mo- 
 tions. 
 
 Law 3. 
 Action is always contrary and equal to Reaction ; or, the 
 Action of two Bodies upon each other is equal, and in contrary 
 Directions. Whatfoever draws, prefles or attracts, is at the fame 
 Inftant drawn, prefled or attracted with an equal Force. 
 
 Corollary. 
 A Body, by two Forces conjoin'd, will defcribe the Diagonal of 
 a Parallelogram, in the fame Time that it would defcribe the Sides 
 by thofe Forces apart. If a Body, in a given Time, by the Force 
 M imprefled apart in the Place A, would with an uniform Motion 
 be carried from A to B ; and, by the Force N imprefled apart in 
 the fame Place, would be carried from A to C : Complete the 
 Parallelogram A B C D, and, by both Forces acting together, it 
 will in the fame Time be carried in the Diagonal from A to D. 
 For, fince the Force N acts in the * 
 
 Direction of the Line A C, parallel -" fC ' '""/B 
 
 to B D, this Force, by the fecond / \ / 
 
 Law, will not at all alter the Velo- / \ ' 
 
 city generated by the other Force M, / \ / 
 
 by which the Bodv is carried towards : \ ; 
 
 the Line BD. The Body therefore C*--- "D 
 
 will arrive at the Line B D in the 
 
 fame Time, whether the Force N be imprefled or not ; and there- 
 fore, at the End of that Time, it will be found fomewhere in the 
 Line B D. By the fame Argument, at the End of the fame Time 
 it will be found femewhere in the Line C D ; therefore it will 
 be found in the Point D, where both Lines meet : But it will 
 move in a Right Line from A to D, by Law 1. 
 
 Lemma x. 
 If a Body be moved according to the Direction of any given 
 Right Line, A Z, and at the fame time be urged by a Centripetal 
 Force tending towards fome given immoveable Point, S, fituated 
 without the Line A Z ; the Line defcribed by the Body will be a 
 Curve, and concave towards S, lying all of it in the fame im- 
 moveable Plane, paffing thro' the Right Line A Z and the Point 
 S: And the Areas contained under any Portions of the Curve and 
 Right Lines drawn to the Centre S, are to one another, as the 
 Times wherein thofe Portions of the Curve were defcrib'd. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 Let the Time be imagined to be divided into equal Parts ; in the 
 Urfi f which Ic: the Body, by its Vis infita alone, defcribe the 
 
 Line
 
 Chap. VII. ASTRONOMY. 121 
 
 Line A B, a Part of A Z, along which it endeavours to move ; in 
 the fecond Part of Time it will defcribe the Line Br, equal to the 
 former A B, if nothing hinders it : For all Bodies once put into 
 Motion, and not meeting with any Impediment, will continue to 
 move uniformly in the fame Right Line they were firft moved 
 in, per Law I. But when the Body is arrived at the Point B, let 
 us fuppofe a Centripetal Force, tending to the Point S, to ad upon 
 it by a fingle Impulfe, fo that, had it been impell'd only by that 
 Impulfe, it would in the fecond Part of Time defcribe BG. Now, 
 if thro' e we draw the Line c C parallel to B G, and thro' C the 
 Line CG parallel to B e ; it is manifeft, that the Body acled upon 
 by both Impulfes at once will arrive, in the fecond Part of Tiir.e, 
 at the Point C, defcribing the Right Line B C, per Corol. Law 3. 
 'Tis certain likewife, that the Right Line BCJ is in the Plane of 
 the Parallelogram BGCf, both of whofe Sides B G and B c are 
 in the Plane of the Triangle A S B, that paffes thro' the Centre S 
 of the Centripetal Forces, rj rr 
 
 and the immoveable Right ..\ / , 
 
 Line A Z. Befides, the Tri- / >tt<\ a ' / 
 
 angles S C B, S c B, are / s \\ ( , / 
 
 equal, becaufe they are upon / y'' ^r--:& : C 
 
 the fame Bafe B S, and be- / .-'' v|r / 
 
 tween the fame Parallels S B, / y' ..-;****/ \/ 
 
 Ce; but SfB, SB A are /'..- '. v ;.'.'- :: *' "'.*&*"/& 
 
 equal, becaufe their Bafes /V'^a ^...***"*** '' ^ / 
 
 are equal, and Height the ^;;-*' / 
 
 fame : Confequently S B A V "" ^\ 
 
 = SCB. By the fame Me- 
 thod of Reasoning, if in the third Particle of Time a Body de- 
 fcribes any other Right Line, as CD, it may be prov'd that SC D 
 = SBC, and that the Right Line CD is in the fame Plane with 
 the Right Lines SB, B C ; that is, in the Plane drawn thro' the 
 Right Line A B and the Point S. And fo we may go on as long 
 as we pleafe, and the Area defcribed by Radii drawn to (S ) the 
 immoveable Centre of Force, will be equally increafed in equal 
 Times ; and, by compounding any Sums of Areas, thofe Sums 
 will be to one another, as the Times wherein they were defcribed, 
 and lie in the fame immoveable Plane. If we fuppofe the Num- 
 ber of the Triangles, SAB, SBC, S C D, to be augmented, 
 and their Breadth to be diminifhed, in infinitum, their Bales A B, 
 3 C, CD, will form a curve Line, concave towards the Centre 
 S, and lying in the fame Plane ; and the Centripetal Force, where- 
 by the Body is continually drawn off from the Tangent of that 
 Curve, which before afted as it were by Starts, and at equal In- 
 tervals of Time, now afts conftantly : And any Areas ihus de- 
 fcribed, S A B C S, S A B C D i; S, will be, a; before, proportion- 
 al to the Times of Defeription. i. E. O. Lt mnta
 
 122 ASTRONOMY. Parti. 
 
 Lemma 2. 
 A Body moving in a curve Line A B C D, defcribed upon a 
 Plane, and concave towards the fame Parts, and by a Radius drawn 
 to S, an immoveable Point fituated in the fame Plane towards the 
 Concavity of the Curve, defcribing Areas proportional to the 
 Times, is urg'd by a Centripetal Force tending to the Point S. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 Let the Curve be imagin'd to be divided into theParts A B, B C, 
 CD, &c. differing as little as can be from Right Lines, and fo as to 
 be defcribed in equal Particles of Time : Let the Centripetal Force 
 likewife be conceived to aft only in the Points B, C, D, &c. by 
 Starts, as in the laft Theorem. Let A B be produced to c, fo 
 that Br = AB; alfo B C to d, till C</ = BCj and fo on. 
 Then SAB^SBC, becaufe, by the Hypothefis, the Areas de- 
 fcrib'd are proportional to the Times; and S A B is rr S B c, be- 
 caufe AB-Br: Wherefore S B C =S B c ; and confequently 
 per Theor. X. Chap. II. C c 
 is parallel to S B. Moreover, 
 the Body mov'd along A B, in 
 the firft Particle of Time, by ..-^. 
 
 its Vis injita alone would de- ,,'.'*'' 
 
 fcribe B c in the fecond ; but ...;;' ^ -; 
 
 it really dees defcribe B C in x?'..<'- : -' '" 
 
 that fecond Particle of Time : ...^..''''' 
 
 "Wherefore the Force afting in Je~~*"' "l^, 
 the Point B, in ^Conjunftion <J 
 with the Vis injita to carry 
 the Body along B C, is direfted according to a Right Line 
 parallel to C c ; that is, according to the Right Line B S. 
 After the fame manner, the Force afting in the Point C, and in 
 Conjunftion with the Vis injita, ( by which alone the Body would 
 defcribe the Line Qd in the third Particle of Time) carrying 
 it in the fame Time along CD, is direfted according to a 
 Right Line parallel to d D, that is, according to C S : But the 
 Right Lines B S, C S, &c. tend towards the Point S. There- 
 fore the Centripetal Force, that draws the Body off from the 
 Tangent of the Curve, a6ts in Right Lines tending to the immove- 
 able Point S. Q.E. D. 
 
 Theorem. 
 The Forces whereby the primary Planets are drawn eff frcm 
 their Reftilincal Motions, and kept in their Orbits, do not tend 
 towards the Earth, but towards the Sun. 
 
 Di-
 
 Chap. VII. ASTRONOMY. 123 
 
 Demonstration. 
 Every Body that is moved in a curve Line is turnM off from 
 its Reclilineal Courfe, that it naturally affects, by fome Force or 
 other : And it is evident, that the Planets move in curve Lines, 
 becaufe their Orbits return into themfelves. Now this Force ex- 
 ercifed upon them does not tend towards the Earth, becaufe the 
 Orbits of two of them, vvz. Mercury and Venus, do not furround 
 the Earth, as is evident from Seel. IV. of this Chapter, and con- 
 fequently they are not concave in all their Parts towards the 
 Earth: Wherefore, by Lem. i. the Forces by which they are 
 kept in their Orbits do not tend to ir. Befide?, the primary Pla- 
 nets, in refpeel of the Earth, do fometimes go forwards from the 
 Weft towards the Eaft, fometimes backwards from the Eaft to- 
 wards the Weft, and fometimes ftand Hill : But the Times in which 
 thefe Motions are performed always flow uniformly ; and there- 
 fore the Areas defcribed by a Radius drawn to the Earth from any 
 Planet, are not proportional to the Times of Defcription. Con- 
 fequently, by Lemma 2. each Planet is urged and retained in its 
 Own Orbit, by a Force that does not tend towards the Earth. But, 
 from Scholium to Section VI. of this Chapter, 'tis certain, that 
 the Orbits of Mercury and Venus furround the Sun ; which is evi- 
 dent likewife concerning the Orbits of Mars, Jupiter and Saturn, 
 from Scholium to Seel. IX. And all the Planets, in refpeel of 
 the Sun, are always direct in their Motions, as is evident from 
 Seel. I. and that almoft uniformly, juft as the Time flows. 'Tis 
 true indeed, the Planets move a little fwifter in thofe Parts of their 
 Orbits that are neareft the Sun ; but this is a natural Confequence 
 of their being drawn towards the Sun. Therefore the Forces 
 whereby the Planets are rctain'd in their Orbits, tend towards the 
 Sun. 
 
 In Seel XVI. we have exhibited an Hypothefis, in order t ac- 
 count for the Phenomena therein related ; but, from what has 
 been flnce deliver'd, we may conceive, that Gravity, or the At- 
 traction of the Sun, is the true Caufe of thofe Appearances. For, 
 the Sun being in one of the Foci of the Earth's Orbit, when the 
 Earth is in its Perihelion at P, ( See Scheme z. Sccl. 16. ) the Sun 
 attracts it moft ftrongly, and therefore the Motion there and there- 
 abouts is greater than any-where elfe. Again, when the Earth is 
 in its Aphelion at A, it is then leaft affected by the Power of Gra- 
 vity, and confequently the Motion there and thereabouts is the 
 flowed of any Place in the Orbit: But when the Motion is fo un- 
 equal, the Arches, tho' defcribed in equal Times, mull needs be 
 unequal too. Tho* the Motion of a Planet in the Periphery of an 
 Ellipfis be not at aJ! equable, yet it is regulated by a certain im- 
 mutable
 
 i2 4 ASTRONOMY. Parti, 
 
 mutable Law from which it never deviates, which is, That a 
 Line drawn from the Centre of the Sun to the Centre of a Planet, 
 which is carried about with an angular Motion, does fo move, that 
 it defcribes or fweeps an Elliptical Area, always proportional to 
 the Time. Thus, let the Planet be in A, from whence in a cer- 
 tain Time let it go to B; the Space, or Area the Line S A de- 
 fcribe;, is the Triline A S B : When afterwards the Planet comes; 
 to P, and from the Centre of the Sun S there be drawn the Line 
 SD, fo that the Elliptical Space PSD may be equal to the Area 
 A SB; then, in that Cafe, the Planet will move thro' the Arch 
 PD in the fame Time that it did thro' the Arch A B, which 
 Arches mail be unequal, and nearly in a reciprocal Proportion to 
 their Distances from the Sun ; for, becaufe of the equal Areas, the 
 Arch PD mull be fo much in Proportion greater than the Arch 
 A B, as S A is greater than SP. 
 
 SECTION XVIII. 
 
 This Force, or Gravity, ij the fame which caufes all heavy 
 Bfdies to tend to the Centre of the Earth. 
 
 Lemma i. 
 Each of the fecondary Planets is urg'd by a Force compounded 
 of a Centripetal Force, tending to the Centre of its primary Pla- 
 net, about which it revolves, and of all the accelerating Force 
 with which that primary Planet is urged. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 Becaufe the Satellites of Jupiter and Saturn revolve equably in 
 circular Orbits, concentric with Jupiter and Saturn, they defcribe 
 Areas about thefe Centres refpecti vely proportional to the Times. 
 In like manner, if the Moon's Orbit differs from a Circle con- 
 centric with the Earth, the lefs the Moon appears, ( that is, the 
 farther it is from the Earth ) the flower it moves round the Earth ; 
 fo that (till the Area, that the Ra ius drawn to the Centre of the 
 Earth defcribes, is equably augmented : So that, univerfally, each 
 of the above-mentioned Satellites defcribes Areas, by a Radius 
 drawn to the Centre of its primary Planet, about that Centre, 
 proportional to the Times. If therefore the Syftem of any pri- 
 mary Planet, and its revolving Satellites, be fuppofed to be urged 
 along parallel Lines, by a Force equal and contrary to that, where- 
 by the primary Planet in that Point of its Orbit, where it then is, 
 is urged toward, the Sun, the primary Planet will no longer defcend 
 
 te-
 
 Chap. VII. ASTRONOMY. 125 
 
 towards the Sun ; and the fecondary Planet will continue to de- 
 fcribe the fame Areas about the primary one, as before, that is, 
 proportional to the Times ( For if Bodies move any how in re- 
 fpett of one another, and are urged by equal accelerating Forces 
 along parallel Lines, or, which is all one, if the Space in which 
 they perform their M tions be mov'd uniformly in a Right Line, 
 they will move all after the fame manner as they would do if thofe 
 Forces were abfent, or the Space were at Reft in which they are 
 included ). So that each Satellite, only urged by the Difference 
 of the Forces, will go on to defcribe Areas abot thf Centre of 
 its primary Planet, proportional to the Time. Therefore, by 
 Lemma 2. of the laft Section, the Difference of the Forces tends 
 to the primary Planet as a Centre. JBut before the whole Syftera 
 was urged along parallel Lines, by a Force equal and contrary to 
 that whereby the primary Planet is urged towards the Sun, 
 that is, in its natural State, each Satellite is urged by a Force 
 compounded of the Centripetal Force tending to the Centre of its 
 primary Planet, and of all the accelerative Force which that 
 primary Planet is urged by. Confequently, the forefaid Differ- 
 ence of the Forces is that whereby the Satellite is retain'd in its 
 Orbit aboHt the primary Planet, the remaining accelerative Force, 
 whereby the primary Planet is urged in any Point of its Orbit, 
 conferring nothing to this. But this Difference has been ihewn to 
 tend to the Centre ; therefore the Forces whereby the fecondary 
 Planets are retain'd in their Orbits about their primary ones, tend 
 towards the Centres of the faid primary ones refpedtively. ZKE.D. 
 
 Lemma z. 
 If a Body be projected according to the Direction of any 
 Right Line, and at the fame time urged by a Centripetal Force 
 tending to the Centre S, fo as, by a Motion compounded of both, it 
 defcribes the Curve AP^j and the Right Line PR be aTangent to 
 it, in the Point P ; and from the Point B, the neareft to P, a Line 
 B D be drawn perpendicular to the Right Line S P, and the Right 
 Line B R parallel to the fame Line SP; and if the like Con- 
 struction be made at any other Point p, of the Curve: The 
 Centripetal Force in P is to the Centripetal Force in p t as 
 
 S*'x^< . SPixBDi , n I . . . r . 
 
 " is to I ; or the Centripetal Force in P 
 
 is reciprocally as the Solid S ?.* * * D \.when the Figure PRBD 
 
 B R 
 
 fs indefinitely fmall. 
 
 Pi-
 
 126 ASTRONOMY. Parti. 
 
 , Demonstration. 
 
 Let the Force in P, that tends to the Centre S, be called V ; 
 and let the Time wherein the indefinitely fmall Arch P B is. run, 
 or in which a Body, by its Vis infita alone, would run the in- 
 definitely fmall Tangent P R, be called T. Let the Centripetal 
 Force a&ing in p be called <v ; and the Time that p b, or the 
 Tangent p r, is run in, called /. Take an Arch P z, run thro' 
 by the Eody in the fame Time with the Arch p b ; and draw z x 
 parallel to P S. Thefe Things being fuppofed, 'tis evident that the 
 Ratio of the Lineola B R to the Lineola b r, is compounded of the 
 Ratio of BR to z x, and of the Ratio of z x to b r : But by 
 Theorem XXXVL Chap. II. B R is to zx in the duplicate Ratio 
 of the Arch PB to the Arch P z ; and thefe Arches, fmce they 
 are indefinitely fmall, are as the Tri- 
 angles BSP, zSP, of the fame Al- 
 titude; that is, per Lemma 2. of 
 the laft Section, as the Times in 
 which they are defcribed by a Radius 
 drawn to S ; or by Conftruttion, as 
 the Times wherein the Arches P B, 
 f b are defcribed. Again, the Li- 
 neola z x is to the Lineola b r, as the 
 Caufes producing them ; that is, as 
 the Centripetal Force in P to the Centripetal Force in p. And 
 therefore the Ratio of the Lineola B R to the Lineola b r is com- 
 pounded of the duplicate Ratio of the Times wherein P B and/ b 
 are defcribed, and of the Ratio of the Centripetal Force in P to 
 
 dd T T V BR 
 
 the Centripetal Force in p ; that is, - = X _ j or - 
 
 r br tt v br 
 
 - And confequently Y ?,f*fl But, by Lem. 1 . 
 
 ttX<v ^ J <v brXTT 
 
 of the laft Section, T is to t, as the Area S B P to the Area S bp ; 
 or as its Double SPxBD to Spx bd the Double of the latter : 
 
 Therefore, inftead of the Ratio - ' , fubftituting its equal 
 
 TT 
 
 . , and then . 1 *- or V to v, as 
 
 BRxS^X^^toirxSP^xBDi; that is, ( dividing them 
 
 by B Rxbr ) as SjxJrf* toill!*^ . Therefore th. 
 
 br BR 
 
 Force in P tending towards S, is reciprocally as the nafcent or eva- 
 
 nefcent Solid S r qxBDq . $.E.D. 
 BR ^ , 
 
 . , Lemma
 
 Chap. VII. ASTRONOMY. 12 ; 
 
 Lemma 3. 
 
 The Motion of the fccondary Planets revolving about a primary 
 one is fuch, that the Squares of the periodic Times are in the 
 fame Ratio, as the Cubes of their Diftances from the Centre of 
 the primary one. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 This Lemma is abundantly evident from the Obfervations of 
 Aftronomers : And, by the Squares of the periodicTimes, we muft 
 underftand the Squares of Right Lines, or of Numbers having 
 the fame Ratio as the periodic Times. In this Senfe are the 
 Squares of Velocities, and the like, to be undcrftood. 
 
 Thus, in the Satellites of Jupiter, where the periodic Times of 
 the inmoft, fecond, third, and outmoft, are refpeftively 1 *, 3 -*, 
 7 *, and 167 Days, and their Diftances 5 *, 9, 14 j, and 25 Se- 
 midiameters of Jupiter, the Square of the periodic Time of the 
 inmoft, namely 3, is to 13, the Square of the periodic Time of 
 the fecond Satellite, as 170, the Cube of the Diftance of the 
 inmoft from the Centre of Jupiter, to 736, the Cube of the 
 Diftance of the fecond from thence. In like manner, 3 is to 51, 
 the Square of the periodic Time of the third Satellite, as 1 70 to 
 2890, the Cube of the Diftance of the third from the Centre of 
 Jupiter. And 3 is to 280, the Square of the periodic Time of 
 the outmoft Satellite, as 170 to 15800, the Cube of the Diftance 
 of the outmoft from Jupiter's Centre. And therefore, ex eequo, 
 the fame Ratio holds between any other two of them compared 
 together, as the fecond with the third or the laft, or the third 
 with the laft. This Ratio comes out more exaft, if the Diftances 
 and periodic Times are taken more accurately. 
 
 The fame Law will be found to hold in trie Satellites of Saturn ; 
 but the Moon being a folitary Satellite, this Lemma can't be ap- 
 plied to her. 
 
 Lemma 4. 
 The Forces whereby the fecondary Planets are retained in their 
 Orbits, are reciprocally as the Squares of their Diftances from 
 the Centre of their refpe&ive primary ones, to which thefe Forces 
 tend. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 For fince, by Lemma 3. the Motion of the Satellites re- 
 volving about Jupiter, and of thofe about Saturn, is fuch, 
 that the Squares of the periodic Times are in the fame Ratio 
 with the Cubes of their Diitances from the Centre of Ju- 
 piter and Saturn refpe&ively ; and fince, the Centripetal Forces 
 of Bodies revolving by this Law, are reciprocally as the 
 Squares of their Diftances from the Centre : 'tis evident, that 
 
 the
 
 i2g ASTRONOMY. Parti. 
 
 the Centripetal Forces, whereby the fecondary Planets are refpecV 
 ively urged towards "Jupiter and Saturn, are reciprocally as the 
 Squares of their Diftances from the Centre of their refpeclive pri- 
 mary Planet. 
 
 But this Force in any fecondary Planet is only one Part of the 
 whole Force whereby the Satellite is urged ; and the other Force 
 is the whole accelerating Force whereby the primary Planet is 
 urged ; as has been fhewn in Lemma i . 
 
 As for the Moon, becaufe it is alone, the Law of its Centripetal 
 Force,whereby it is urged towards the Earth, can't be deduced after 
 this manner. 
 
 Lemma 5. 
 
 The fecondary Planets move about the primary ones according 
 to this Law, That, befides the accelerating Force of the primary 
 ones, the Motion of each is compounded of one, along the 
 Tangent to the Orbit, and of another tending to the Centre 
 of the primary one, in which the accelerative Force is reciprocally 
 proportional to the Square of the Diftance from the Centre. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 Laying afide all the accelerating Force whereby a primary Pla- 
 net is urged, as was done in Lem. 1 . every fecondary Planet, by 
 Lem. 2. revolves about its primary one, in the Perimeter of an El- 
 lipfis, having a Focus in the Centre of the primary one, to which, 
 by Lem. I. the Centripetal Force, by which it is drawn off from 
 its Rectilineal Motion, tends ( For the Difformity of the Ellip/is, 
 arifing from the Motion of the Apfides, or from any thing elfe, is 
 fo fmall, that it may very well be neglected in this Place). And 
 therefore, by the laft Lemma, the Law of the Centripetal Force 
 tending to the Centre of the primary one is reciprocally pro- 
 portional to the Square of the Diftance from the Centre : For 
 by this Force only is a Body drawn off from a Rectilineal Mo- 
 tion in a Tangent, arifing from its Vis in(ita t and kept in an El- 
 liptic Orbit. But thefe two Motions, ( the one in the Tangent, 
 the other tending towards the Centre of the primary Planet, 
 and increafing as the Square of the Diftance of the Satellite 
 from it leffens ) being compounded, make the fecondary Planet 
 to defcribe an Elliptic Orbit. 
 
 Theorem. 
 The Force whereby the Moon tends to the Centre of the Earth 
 is the fame with the Force of Gravity, whereby all Bodies about 
 the Earth tend to the fame Centre. 
 
 Be
 
 Chap. VII. ASTRONOMY. 129 
 
 Demonstration. 
 Let R A E reprefent the Earth, T its Centre, V L the Orbit of 
 the Moon, L C a Part of it run over by the Moon in the Space of 
 a Minute. Becaufe the Moon finifhes its Courfe in 27 Days, 7 
 Hours, 43 Minutes, that i. c , in 39343 Minutes of Time ; there- 
 fore LC is 4- of the whole Periphery, or 33 Seconds of a 
 Degree. Now, the Circumference of the Earth, according to 
 Mr. Picart, is 123249600 Paris Feet ; confequently its Semidia- 
 meter T A is 196 15 800 Feet : Wherefore T L the Semidiameter 
 of the Moon's Orbit is 1 176948000 Feet, or 60 X T A, by Sec- 
 tion 10. and the verfed Sine L D, of the Arch LCr: 33 , and 
 B C, which is equal to it, is 15 T i Feet nearly. The Force there- 
 fore whereby the Moon tends towards the Centre of the Earth ( or 
 by which it is drawn off from its Rectilineal Motion along the 
 Tangent LB, and retain'd in its Orbit) is fuch, that it impels the 
 Moon towards the Centre of the Earth, about 15 T 4 Pari; 
 Feet in a Minute. By the preceding Lemmas this Force in- 
 creafes, as the Square of the Dillar.ce from the Centre of the 
 Earth leffens ; therefore at the Surface of the Earth, where the 
 Square of the Diftance from the 
 Centre is diminifhed 60 X 60 times, 
 it will be increafed 60 x 60 times ; and 
 therefore it would impel theMoon, pla- 
 ced at the Surface of the Earth, 60X 
 60 x 1 5 ^ Feet towards the Centre in a 
 Minute's time. But Gravity is that 
 Force which impels any Body placed 
 on the Surface of the Earth the Length 
 of 1 5 j Paris Feet towards theCentre, / ^\ 
 
 in the Space of a Second of Time, as -p ( I J t> 
 
 Mr. Huygens has determined by a very \j_S 
 
 accurate Experiment. Therefore the 
 fame Force of Gravity, in the Space 
 
 of a Minute, impels a Body 60X60X 15 T ' Feet towards the 
 Centre j becaufe the Spaces run thro' by a heavy Body in its Fall 
 are as the Squares of the Times. 
 
 Since therefore the Force whereby the Moon is kept in its own 
 Orbit, and the Force of Gravity, perform the like and equal 
 Things, and would produce the very fame Effects in the fame Cir- 
 cumstances, and tend towards the fame Point, (namely, the Centre of 
 the Earth) they are the fame Forces ; that is, the Force whereby the 
 Moon is drawn off from its natural Re&ilinear Motion.and kept in 
 its Orbit, is the fame Force with that we call Gravity. ^ E. D. 
 
 Since the Revolutions of the primary Planets about the Sun, 
 and the fecondary about Jupiter and Saturn, are Phenomena of 
 the fame kind with the Revolution of the Moon about the Earth ; 
 
 K and
 
 1 3 ASTRONOMY. Parti. 
 
 snd becaufe it has been demonftrated, that the Centripetal Forces 
 of the primary Planets are directed towards the Centre of the Sun, 
 and thofe of the fecondary Planets towards the Centres of Ju-piter 
 and Saturn, in the fame manner as the Centripetal Force of the 
 Moon is directed towards the Centre of the Earth ; and fince all 
 thefe Forces are reciprocally as the Squares of the Diftances from 
 the Centres^ in the fame manner as the Centripetal Force of the 
 Moon is as the Square of the Diftance from the Earth ; we con- 
 elude, that the Nature of all is the fame. Therefore there is an 
 univerfal Power of Gravity acting in the whole Syftem, and this 
 Force is the fame which caufes all heavy Bodies to tend to the 
 Centre of the Earth : And as the Centripetal Forces are recipro- 
 cally as the Squares of the Diftances from the Centres, it follows, 
 that, among the primary Planets, that neareft the Sun, and, among 
 the fecondary, that next the refpective primary one, moves 
 fafteft. 
 
 Tho' the Effect of this Power or Virtue is fo vifible, yet Na- 
 ture fcarce affords any Problem wherein the Caufe is more con- 
 cealed : It is by this fingle Principle that the Earth, and all the 
 Celeftial Bodies, are kept from Dilfolution, the leaft of their Par- 
 ticles not being fuffered to recede far from their Surfaces, without 
 being immediately brought down again, by virtue of their natu- 
 ral Tendency to each other j nor can the Globes of the Univerfe 
 otherwife be totally deftroyed, but by taking from them this Power 
 of keeping their Parts united. 
 
 That the attractive Virtue of the Sun is propagated on all Sides 
 to prodigious Diftances, and diffufed to every Part of the wide 
 Space that furrounds us, is evidently fhewn, by the Motion of the 
 Comets ; which, coming from Places immensely diftant from the 
 Sun, approach very near it, as the Centre to which they tend. 
 
 In Section XVI. we have exhibited an Hypothecs, in order to 
 account for the Phenomena therein related ; but, -from what has 
 ben fince delivered, we may conceive, that Gravity, or the At- 
 traction of the Sun, is the true Caufe of thofe Appearances. For* 
 the Sun being in one of the Foci of the Earth's Orbit, when the 
 Earth is in its Perihelion at B, (See Scheme 2. Seel. XVI. ) the Sun 
 attracts it more ftrongly, and therefore the Motion there and 
 thereabouts is greater than any-where elfe : Again, when the Earth 
 is in its Aphelion at A, it is then leaft affected by the Power of 
 Gravity, and confequently the Motion there and thereabouts is the 
 Iloweft of any Place in the Orbit : But when the Motion is 
 fo unequal, the Arches, defcribed in equal Times, muft needs be 
 unequal too. Tho 1 the Motion of a Planet in the Periphery of 
 an Ellfpfis be not at all equable, yet it is regulated by a certain im- 
 mutable Law, from which it never deviates ; which is. That a 
 Line drawn from the Centre of the Sun to the Centre of a Planet 
 
 carried
 
 Chap. VII. ASTRONOMY. 131 
 
 Carried about with an angular Motion, does fo move, that it 
 defcribes or fweeps an Elliptical Area, always proportional to 
 Time. Thus, let the Planet be in A, from whence in a certain 
 Time let it go to B ; the Space or Area the Line S A defcribes is 
 theTriline ASB : When afterward the Planet comes to P, and from 
 the Centre of the Sun S, there be drawn the Line S D, fo that the 
 Elliptical Space PSD may be equal to the Area ASB, then in 
 that Cafe the Planet will move thro' the Arch P D in the fame 
 Time that it did thro' the Arch A B, which Arches muft be un- 
 equal, and nearly in a reciprocal Proportion to their Diftances 
 from the Sun ; for becaufe of the equal Areas, the Arch PD muft 
 be fo much in proportion greater than the Arch A B, as S A b 
 greater than S P. 
 
 SECTION XVIII. 
 
 .The Motion nvhich caufes the SucceJJian of Day and Night, and 
 the apparent Rijing and Setting of the Moon and Stars in the Space 
 cf 24 Hours, belongs to the Earth, and not to the Heavens. 
 
 All Globes which have no diurnal Revolution about their own 
 Axis muft be perfect Spheres, or all the Parts of their Surfaces 
 muft, generally fpeaking, be at the fame Diftance from their 
 Centres *. 
 
 But the Confequence of a diurnal Revolution will be, that the 
 Parts will recede from the Axis of Motion, and endeavour to 
 afcend about the Equator ; and therefore if the Matter be 
 in a fluid State, by its Afcent towards that Region, it will in- 
 large the Diameter there, and, by its Defcent towards the Poles, 
 it will fhorteo the Axis of the Globe. Again, Gravity will be 
 lefs confldeTable at the Equator than at the Poles. 
 
 Now, that it is fo with regard to our Earth, we conclude from 
 Pendulum Clocks going fafter in the more Northern Climates, and" 
 flower at the Equator, as has been attefted by Dr. Halley, and 
 many others. 
 
 Bcfldes the Theory given us by that illuftrious Author, we may 
 fafely conclude, that the Earth revolves about its Axis, feeing the 
 Heavenly Bodies near us have this Motion, which, regularly pro- 
 duces a Succeflion of Day and Night, in the feveral Planets en- 
 lightened by the Sun. Then again, if we conflder the Vaftnefs of 
 the Syflem about us, and the Smallnefs of our Earth ; the im- 
 menfe Swiftnefs neceflary in the Whirling round of the whole 
 Frame of the Heavens in 24 Hours, and the Slownefs of the 
 Earth's diurnal Motion ; the prodigious Divcrfity of perplexM 
 
 Sr Ifaac Nitvtin'i Principia, p. Wj^ 33S. and f. 437, 438. 
 
 K 2 Motions
 
 i3 2 
 
 ASTRONOMY. 
 
 Part I. 
 
 Motions in the Sun, the Planets, the Comets, and the Fixt Stars 
 to be provided for in the other Cafe, with the eafy fun pie Mo- 
 tion of one Globe ; we may juftly conclude, that it is exceeding 
 probable, that the Motion belongs to the Earth, and not to the 
 Heavens. 
 
 There have been feveral Objections made againft this Motion of 
 the Earth ; the chief of which are, i . If the Earth be turn'd on 
 its own Axis, a Stone dropped from the Top of a high Tower 
 would not fall juft at the Foot of it. 2. A Bird flying to the 
 Eaft would be retarded, but forwarded in flying Weftward. 
 3. Buildings, by the quick Motion, would be thrown down, 
 and Men would become giddy. 4. A Cannon Ball fhot to the Eaft 
 would not reach fo far as when fhot to the Weft. 5. It is offer- 
 ing Violence to our Sight, and other Senfes, to affirm that the 
 Frame of the Heavens is at Reft, and that it is the Earth's Mo- 
 lion which caufes this apparent Revolution of the Celeftial Bodies ; 
 iince it is certain to every one who enjoys his Sight, that the 
 Earth appears at Reft in the Midft of the Univerfe, and that 
 all the Heavenly Orbs are moved round about it. 
 
 Let W E be the Line of Motion of a Ship from Weft to Eaft, 
 reprefenting the diurnal Motion of the Earth on its Axis from 
 Weft to Eaft ; M T the Mail, from the Foot of which, M, fup- 
 pofe a Body to be thrown perpendicularly to the Top T, in the 
 fame Time that the Ship moves from M to D. From the Con- 
 
 Fig. 
 
 1. 
 
 T B 
 
 .v w 
 
 / |\ 
 
 / I \ 
 I I 
 
 w- 
 
 F 
 
 Fig. 
 T B 
 
 F 
 
 f 
 
 U " 
 
 it'll*-** 'Him* T.tF 
 
 J3R 
 
 i *. ! 
 
 % 3- 
 T B F 
 
 f . ,...,4.^., 
 
 El 
 l\ 
 
 m"S ( 
 
 ,,, M , H , ""(a' , 'T' 
 
 \S \j\ 
 
 a3U 
 
 junftion of thefe, two Forces, M T the Proje&ion, and M D the 
 Ship's Motion, the Body will not be carried perpendicularly to the 
 Place T, but in the Diagonal Line M B, fo as to accompany the 
 Mad in its Motion from M T to B D, by Corol. to Law 3. 
 Then fuppofe the Body to fall from the Top of the Mali B to 
 the Foot D, in the fame Time the Ship moves from D to G ; 
 and it is plain, that, by the mutual afting of B D, the Centripetal 
 Force, and B F D G the Ship's Motion, the Body will fall in 
 the Diagonal Line BG, andalfo accompany the Maft in its Motion 
 from D to G ; fo that tho' it was really carried in the Lines M B, 
 B G,yct, to one in the Ship, it will feem to have moved only upwards 
 and downwards, parallel to the Line F G. Alfo ( in Fig. 2. ) let 
 
 MT
 
 Chap. VII. ASTRONOMY. i 33 
 
 M T be the fame Maft, and fuppofe a Projectile (o be caft Eaft- 
 ward from the Stern S to the Top of the Maft T, in the Time 
 the Ship moves alfo Eaftward from M to D ; then will its Mo- 
 tion upwards defcribe the Diagonal S B j where let it be obftru&ed 
 fo as to feem to fall perpendicularly to D, in the Time the Ship 
 moves from D to G ; then, as before, it will defcribe the Diago- 
 nal B G, tho' it feemed to move upwards only in the Line T S, and 
 downwards in T M or F G. So ( in Fig. 3. ) if a Body be pro- 
 jected Weftward from the Head of the Ship H to the Top of the 
 Maft T in the Time it moves Eaftward, H G M H, then will 
 its Motion upwards defcribe the perpendicular Line H B. And if 
 in the fame Time it feems to defcend to from B to H that the 
 Maft moves over H G G h =MH, its Motion downwards 
 will defcribe the Diagonal B G : So that, in this Cafe, it afcends 
 by a perpendicular Line, and falls by an inclining Line ; tho 1 it 
 feemed to afcend by the inclined Line b F, and to fall by the per- 
 pendicular Line F G. 
 
 If a Perfon fitting at the Head of the Ship mould throw a Ball 
 towards the Stern with the fame Velocity that the Ship goes for- 
 ward, that Ball would neither go forward nor backward ; and if 
 there were no Gravity, it would remain immoveable : But be 
 caufe Gravity acts upon it, it will really defcend in a perpendi- 
 cular Line, and a Spectator in a Ship at Anchor would obferve 
 it defcending in a Right Line. For the Force impreft upon it, 
 when it is thrown, will only deftroy the firft Force communi- 
 cated to it from the Ship, to which the projectile Force is con- 
 trary and equal. A Paflenger in the Ship thus in Motion will 
 obferve the Ball as really going to and hitting the Stern, impref- 
 fing on it a confiderable Blow ; but a Spectator without, who is 
 not in Motion, will fee that the Ball does not come upon the Stern, 
 and give it a Stroke, but that the Stern rufhes upon the Ball, and 
 acts upon it with all its Force. Hence, Bodies may appear tQ 
 have a Motion directly contrary to their real and abfolute Mo- 
 tion. Hence it is, that in a Ship, however fwiftly it may fail, 
 all our relative Motions, and the Motions of every thing in the 
 Ship, do all appear to be the fame that they would, were the Ship 
 at Reft. And it is obferveable, that Flies continue their Flight in- 
 differently towards all Parts, and are never driven together towards 
 the Side of the Cabin next the Prow, as if wearied with following 
 the fwift Motion of the Ship : Nor, by any Reafon of the Ship's 
 Motion, can a Perfon make a longer Leap toward the Poop than the 
 Prow; notwithstanding that whilft he is up in the Air, the Floor 
 under his Feet runs a contrary Way to the Leap. The Smoke of 
 Incenfe will hang like a Cloud, moving indifferently this Way or 
 that, without any Inclination to one Side more than another. A 
 Bottle of Water being hung up to empty itfelf, Drop by Drop, into 
 
 K 3 an-
 
 134 f Agronomical and Part I. 
 
 another Bottle placed underneath with a narrow Neck, the Drops 
 fhall fall all into the Bottle, and not one towards the Poop, tho' 
 the Ship fhall have run many Inches whilft the Drop was in the 
 Air. In fhort, it is univerfally true, that all Bodies in the Ship 
 preferve the fame Motions in regard of one another, whether the 
 Ship remains immoveable, or has a direct uniform Motion for- 
 ward. Thus we may conceive how falfly we may judge of theMo- 
 tion of the Celeftial Bodies, not considering that we may be infen- 
 fibly moved, and thereby caufe the SuccefSon of Day and Night. 
 
 CHAP. VIII. 
 
 Of Aftronomical and Geographical Problems. 
 
 Problem I. 
 To take the Altitude of the Sun, or of a Star, 
 
 TO obferve the Alti- 
 tude of any Hea- 
 venly Body, we ufe a 
 moveable Quadrant, EA D, 
 with fixed Sights, A, B, 
 and a Plumb-line, A C, 
 hanging from its Centre, 
 A. The Quadrant, being 
 placed in a vertical Plane, 
 mult be turn 'd ' upwards 
 and downwards, till the 
 Rays of the Sun paffing 
 through A fall upon B ; 
 and then the Plumb-line 
 will (hew the Arch E C, 
 which meafures the Alti- 
 tude :'. For, produce A C 
 to the Zenith Z, and let 
 AH be an Horizontal 
 Line ; then ^ZAHin 
 "<\ E A B being both 
 Right, and <;BAC=^ZAS, per Theor. II. Chap. II. 
 Therefore, by taking away equal Angles, there will remain ^ 
 EAC-^SAH; confequently Arch E C the Sun's Alti- 
 tude. But if the Height of a Star be to be obferved, inftead of 
 the Irradiation of the Sun's Beams, we muii look through both 
 
 Sights,
 
 Chap. VIII. Geographical Problems. 135 
 
 Sights, and when we can fee the Star, then the Thread will fhew 
 the .-vltitude required. 
 
 Problem II. 
 To determine the Plane of the Meridian of any Place. 
 
 Find, by Obfervation, two Planes of vertical Circles that a Ce- 
 leftial Body, which does not change its Declination, is upon, when 
 it is at the fame Altitude, before and after its greateft Elevation 
 above the Horizon ; the vertical Plane, bife&ing the Angle con- 
 tained between thefe two Planes, will be the Plane of the Meridian, 
 and produced to the Heavens will mark out the Meridian fought : 
 For fmce the Celeftial Body does not change its Declination, by its 
 diurnal Motion it will defcribe a Circle parallel to the Equator j 
 and the higheft Point thereof will be in the Meridian, and the 
 Points that are at equal Heights on either Side will be equidiftant 
 from the Meridian. Wherefore, on the contrary, that Circle 
 from which the vertical Circles, wherein the Celeftial Body was at 
 the fame Altitude, are equidiftant, is the Meridian. 
 
 As to common Pra&ice, th: following Way of folving the Pro- 
 blem may be accurate enough : Upon a Plane parallel to the Ho- 
 rizon, that is, one to which a Plumb-line is perpendicular ( fince the 
 Zenith and Nadir, upon which the Plumb-line falls, when produced, 
 are the Poles of the Hoiizon ) ere& a Perpendicular (the longer 
 the better) in the Centre of 
 feveral Circles ; and obferve 
 the Point P in a Circumfe- 
 rence upon which the Sha- 
 dow of the Top of the Per- 
 pendicular N C falls before 
 Noon ; and again, that 
 Point Q^of the fame Circle 
 upon which the Shadow 
 falls in the Afternoon, bi- 
 feft theArch Qj> in D, and 
 draw the Line A D C B, 
 which rs a Meridian Line, 
 becaufe its Direction fhews 
 the North and South Cardi- 
 nal Points : A Plane there- 
 fore ere&ed upon this Line 
 perpendicular to the Hori- 
 zontal Plane, is the Plane of the Meridian fought. The Reafon 
 of this Practice is very evident ; for the Sun's Altitude in the 
 Morning is equal to the Sun's Altitude in the Afternoon, when 
 the Shadow is of the fame Length : And at thofe two Moments it 
 is equally diftam from the Point of Noon, or the South. 
 
 K. 4 When
 
 136 Of Aflronomical and Part I. 
 
 When the Celeftial Body made ufe of in the Solution of this 
 Problem is the Sun, 'tis evident it mull be done when the Sun does 
 not feniibly change his Declination, that is, when he is in one of 
 the Solftices : Becaufe thefe Obfervations are to be made before and 
 after Noon, the Summer Solftice is to be preferred, fmce in the 
 Winter Solftice, by reafon of the Sun's Nearnefs to the Horizon, 
 the uncertain Refractions will render the Operation doubtful ; and, 
 befides, then the Sun afcends and defcends too obliquely, changing 
 its Vertical much more than its Altitude, which is inconvenient in 
 this Operation, where the Vertical Circle is to be determined by 
 the Altitude : Therefore when the Sun is in the Summer Solftice, 
 a Circle muft be drawn upon the Horizontal Plane, fo that the 
 Extremity of the Shadow of the Perpendicular or Gnomon may fall 
 upon it, when the Sun alters its Altitude pretty much, and his 
 Azimuths but little ; and therefore feveral concentric Circles are to 
 be drawn, and the moft convenient may be chofen. 
 
 It is very convenient to mark three or four Points of Shadow 
 in the Morning, and accordingly draw three or four concentric 
 Circles, left the Sun fhould not happen to fhine, or you fhould not 
 happen to attend juft at that Moment in the Afternoon, when the 
 Shadow touches that Circle on which you mark'd your firft Point 
 of Shadow in the Morning. 
 
 Theorem. 
 
 The Latitude of a Place is equal to the Elevation of the Pole 
 above the Horizon. 
 
 Demonstration. 
 
 Let a e b j be the Earth, T its 
 Centre, a and b the Poles, and e j Z 
 
 the Equator. Let any Place, as /, 
 be taken on the Surface, whofe Lati- 
 tude is le ; let H Z O N be the con- 
 centric Sphere : Then \BTEr: 
 
 ^ZTO, being Right ones, and Hh -j Q 
 
 alfo B O -{- B Z = E Z -f- B Z ; 
 confequently B O, the Elevation of 
 the Pole above the Horizon H O, is 
 equal to the Latitude E Z of the 
 Place /, that is, the Diftance from }$ 
 
 the Equator E Q^ 
 
 Problem III. 
 To fid the Elevation of the Pole above, the Horizon of any 
 
 Place. 
 
 The Pole being a mathematical Point, and noways to be per- 
 ceived by our Senfes, we cannot find its Elevation above the Hori- 
 zon 
 
 E 
 
 ft 
 
 
 A< 
 
 k 
 
 w
 
 Chap. VIII. Geographical Problems. 137 
 
 zon of a Place by the fame Method as we did that of the Sun or 
 
 Stars : And therefore we mull take another Method to folve this 
 
 Problem. Let the greateft and leaft Altitudes, O S and O s 3 of 
 
 any fixt Star, that never fets, be ob- 
 
 ferved, by a Quadrant fixed in the 
 
 Plane of the Meridian ( found by the 
 
 preceding Problem ) ; then P S or P s, 
 
 half the Difference ( S s ) of thefe 
 
 two Altitudes, ( corrected by their 
 
 proper Refractions ) is the Diftance 
 
 of the Star from the Pole : Therefore 
 
 this Diftance, P s or P S, added to the 
 
 leffer Altitude O s, or fubtra&ed from 
 
 the greater O S, gives O P the Height 
 
 pf the Pole. 
 
 The Place of the North Pole in the Heavens is eafily found, if 
 we firft learn to know thofe feven Stars called Charles's Wain t 
 four of which, in a Quadrangle, may reprefent a Cart or Waggon, 
 
 / 
 
 \l 
 
 C 
 
 S&- 
 
 6 
 
 Oct/ 
 
 
 b, r, c, d, the three others reprefenting the Horfes. The Stars 
 b and r are called the two Guards or Pointers; for they point 
 direftly in a ftrait Line to the North Pole;), which is immoveable, 
 while there is an apparent Revolution of the whole Heavens be- 
 fides : This Pole is now near 2 \ Degrees diftant from the Star S t 
 which is called the North Pole Star. The North Pole may be 
 found alfo by conceiving a Right Line drawn from a to the 
 Star S, which will alfo pafs through the Pole p, at 2 ^ Degrees 
 Diftance from the Pole Star S. 
 
 It may not, I prefume, be unacceptable to the Reader, to prefenr. 
 him, in this Place, with an Account of the Aberration of the Axis of, 
 the Earth ; by whichMotion, the Polar Star,that we mention'd above, 
 
 inftead
 
 i- 3 8. 
 
 Of Aftronomical and 
 
 Parti. 
 
 inilead of being 2 ^ Degrees diftant from the Pale, will, after 
 many Ages, be 8 30 to the South of the Zenith of London ; and 
 that the Axis of the Earth will then point to a Star of the third 
 Magnitude, in the Calf of the Left Leg of Hercules, which the 
 Earth will regard as its Celeftial Pole. 
 
 Let DCH reprefent a projected Part of the Earth's Orbit, C 
 the Centre, C E the Axis of the Ecliptic, C P the Axis of the 
 Earth produced : Draw EPA thro 1 the Poles E and P, which 
 will be perpendicular to the Ecliptic and Equator. The Arch P A 
 roeafures the Angle P C H, which is the Inclination of the Axis 
 of the Earth to the Plane of the Ecliptic, that is, 66 4- Degrees j 
 therefore "\ E CP =: 23 Degrees. From the Pole E defcribe 
 P F G, which will be parallel to the Ecliptic. The Axis of the 
 Earth always making the fame 
 Angle with the Axis of the Ecli- 
 ptic, will be always direfted to 
 fome Point in the Periphery PFG, 
 and the Pole of the World muft 
 ever be fomewhere plac'd in it : 
 So likewife, if the Axis of the 
 Earth was always parallel to it- 
 felf, as often as the Earth came 
 to the Point of its Orbit C, the 
 Pole of the Heavens would be 
 conilantly in the indivifible Point 
 P. But Aftronomers, by accu- 
 rate Obfervations of many Years, 
 have found, that the Axis of the 
 Earth has not exadlly kept this 
 
 Parallelifm, but conilantly changes its Place in the Periphery 
 PFG; and that the Axis which before pointed to P, after 72 
 Years, will point to Q^ which is one Degree from P towards the 
 "Weft {for in the Scheme E P A is conceived to reprefent the prime 
 Vertical ). And by this means, the Axis of the Earth, produced, 
 defcribes the Bafe of a Cone, whofe Vertex is the Centre of the 
 Earth. Now, after the Axis of the Earth comes into the Pofition 
 C Q, if there be drawn, thro' the Poles E, Q, the Circle E QJS 
 will be perpendicular, as before, to both the Ecliptic and Equator, 
 and will Hill reprefent the Solftitial Colure. The Motion of the 
 Pole being in the Circle PFG, which is parallel to the Ecliptic, 
 the Arches P Q^and A B will be fimilar ; fo that when P Q_is 
 equal to an Arch of one Degree, A B will alfo be an Arch of one 
 Degree. Since the Solftitial Points move thus from Eaft to Weft, 
 the Equinoctial Points, being 90" from them, muft likewife have 
 the fame Motion backwards, and alfo every Point of the Ecliptic 
 muft neceflarily move the fame Way : And the fixt Stars will feem 
 
 to
 
 Chap. VIII. Geographical Problems. 139 
 
 to have a Motion Eaftward, becaufe the Equinoctial Point has a 
 contrary Motion to the Welt ; fo that their Longitude from the 
 firil Point of T, reckon'd Ealtward, becomes greater. 
 ' Hence it is, that the twelve Signs in the Zodiac have changed 
 the Places they had, when observed by Aiironomers, about two 
 thoufand Years ago : For at that time the SJars called T were in 
 the Place where the Ecliptic aicending cuts the Equator ; but now 
 by Gbleivation it is found, that "f is moved towards S near 30 ,* 
 or a whole Sign ; and i'o every Sign is moved forward in the Ecli- 
 ptic, from the Weil towards the Eait, near 30 : So that X is now 
 where V was, 1$ in the Place of z, and JI where go was; and 
 is now where Vf was: And by this means, the Sun is got into the 
 Equinoxes in >{ and njj, and is arrived at the Solftices in H and 
 ; that is, when he is among thofe Stars. However, we call 
 thefe Equinoctial and Solflitial Points in the Heaven, and all the 
 Parts of" the Ecliptic, by the fame ancient Names ftill in Auto- 
 nomy, and mark them with the fame Characters, vix. T tS, U, 
 g> Si, &c. tho' the Conitellations themfelves are removed fo 
 much forward. 
 
 1 AH the Stars will perform their apparent Revolution in the 
 Space of 25920 Years j for 360 x 72 25920; after which 
 Time the Stars would again return to their former Situation. 
 
 Now the Arch EP meafures the Angle ECP 23 -r, and 
 P E j E G =r 47 ; but the Zenith of London is diftant from the 
 North "Pole 38 ' 30 ; confequently 47 38 30 ss 8 30' is 
 the Diftance which the prefent Polar Star will be to the South of 
 the Zenith of London after 1 2960 Years ; which is half the Period 
 of the Polar Revolution. 
 
 Problem IV. 
 The Sun's Place in the Ecliptic, and greatefl Declination, being 
 given; to Jind his Right Afcenjion, and prefent Declination. 
 
 The Sun's Place is given from an Ephemeris, or from Aftrono- 
 mical Tables ; and the greater! Declination, or theObliquity of the 
 Ecliptic, is found by Obfervatioh to be 23 29. Let HZ ON 
 reprefent the Solflitial Colure, P the North and S the South Pole, 
 E Q^the Equator, FBG the Ecliptic, and let C be the Sun's Place 
 Hi II 5 J 54- a "d through C let there be drawn the Meridian 
 PAS: Then in the Triangle ABC, Right-angled at A, there 
 will be given ^ A B C 23 29', the given Obliquity of the 
 Ecliptic, and BC 65 54' the Sun's Longitude from the firft 
 Point of Aries ; to find his Right Afcenfion BA, and his prefent 
 Peclination C A : Wherefore, by Cafe 9. Page 89. we have, 
 
 As
 
 140 
 
 Of Aftronomical and 
 
 Part I. 
 
 As the Co-fine of AB C = 23 39' 
 
 is to the Radius 
 fo is the Co-tangent of B C = 65 54' 
 
 9.96245 
 
 10.00000 
 
 9.65062 
 
 to the Co-tangent of Right Afcenfion B A = 64 9.688 1 7 
 
 And, as Radius 10.00000 
 
 is to the Sine of BC 65 54' 996039 
 
 to is the Sine of A B C =1 23 29' 9.60041 
 
 to the Sine of the Declination ACr 21 20' 9.56080 
 
 Problem V. 
 
 The Longitude and Latitude of a Star (fuppofe Capella ) being given, 
 
 to find its Right Afcenfion and Declination. 
 
 The Longitude and Latitude of a Star may be had from the 
 Catalogues which Aftronomers have made of them ; by which we 
 find the Longitude of Capella to be n 1 8 2' 30", and its Lati- 
 tude 22 51' 47" North. Thro' the Poles of the Equator and 
 Ecliptic, and a the given Place of the Star, (See the preceding 
 
 Scheme}
 
 Chap. VIII. Geographical Problems. 141 
 
 Scheme) draw the great Circles P a S, y a x ; and there will be 
 formed the oblique-angledTrianglej> P; in which are given P_y= 
 23 29', the Diftance of the Poles of the Ecliptic and Equator; 
 yaz=6j n 8 13" the Complement of Latitude, and ^Py ar- 
 il 57' 30' the Complement of the Star's Longitude ; to find Pa 
 its Complement of Declination, ar.d a P y its Right Afcenfion from 
 the firft Point of vy. Draw the great Circle Ba D perpendicular 
 to Z O ; then, by Cafe 9. p. 89. 
 
 As the Co-fine of Dy a r= 1 1 57' 30" 9.99047 
 
 is to Radius 10.00000 
 
 fo is the Co-tangent of y a 67 8' 1 3" 9.62495 
 
 to the Co-tangent of Dy 66 41' 9.63448 
 
 Therefore PD {DyPy) 43 12'; whence, by Corol. 
 4. Yheor. XXIII. Chap. VI. 
 As the Co-fine of Dy=i66 41' Co-ar. 0.40251 
 
 is to the Co-fine of ya 67 8' 13'' 9.58942 
 
 fo is the Co-fine of P D 43 12' 9.86271 
 
 to the Co-fine of Pa, or Sine of A a = 45 41' 9.85464 
 
 the Declination required. Alfo, by Cor. 5. Theor. XXIV. 
 As the Sine of P D = 43 12' Co-ar. 0.16459 
 
 is to the Sine of Dy 66 41' 9.96300 
 
 fo is the Tangent of Dy a -n 57' 30'' 9.32592 
 
 to the Tangent ofDPi552' 9.45 35 1 
 
 Whence 164 8' = ( 180 15 52' ) ^aPy; and confe- 
 quently 74 8 ^ B P A, the Right Afcenfion from the firft 
 Point of Aries required. 
 
 Problem VI. 
 
 The Latitude of the Place, and the Declination of the Sun or a 
 Star, being given ; to find its true Amplitude of Rijing and Set- 
 ting, and the Time of its Continuance above and belovj the Hori- 
 
 zon. 
 
 Let the Latitude of the Place be 5 1 30' North, and the given 
 Declination 20 34' North ; and, in the preceding Scheme, let p 
 be the Place of the Sun or Star in the Horizon H O, and through 
 / draw the Parallel of Declination n Cmrpv, and alfo the Meri- 
 dian P p S cutting the Equator E Q_in q. Then in the Triangle 
 B pq Right-angled at q, will be given the "^ qBp, (=OQ) =: 
 38 30', and p q f = Qv) 20 34'; to find B^ and Bq. 
 
 There-
 
 i 42 Of Aftronomicai and Part I. 
 
 Therefore, by Cafe 9. p. 89. 
 
 As the Sine of q Bp 38 30' 9,79415 
 
 is to the Sine of / q 2b 34' 9.54567 
 
 fo is Radius io.ocood 
 
 to the Sine of the Amplitude B^rrr 34 1 21' 9-75 r 5 2 
 
 Alfo, As Radius 10. cocoa 
 
 is to the Co-tangent of q B p 38 30' i 0.09940 
 
 fo is the Tangent of pq 20 J 34' 9.57428 
 
 to theSine of B^=T28 9' 9-67368 
 
 Which 2 8 9' reduced to Time is 1 Hour and 52 % Minntes, and 
 this fubtra&ed from, and added to, 6 Hours, gives 4 h. 7 m. 
 and 7 h. 52 f m. for the Time of half the Continuance below and 
 above the Horizon, or the Hours of Sun-rifing and Setting. But 
 if it be a Fixt Star,whofe Continuance above the Horizon we would 
 find, then out of every Hour (above found ) 10 Seconds muft be 
 deducted.becaufe the mean Solar exceeds the Sidereal Day by near- 
 ly four Minutes. 
 
 Problzm VII. 
 Tbe fame being, given as in the preceding Problem, to find the TttM 
 nvkea the Sun or Star nvill be due Eaji or Weft, and its Eleva- 
 tion above the Horizon at that Time. 
 
 Let PN be the Prime Vertical, and m the Place of the 
 San or Star when due Eaft or Weft ; and through m draw the 
 Meridian P mo S, cutting the Equator in <w , then in the Triangle 
 nv Bm, Right-angled at nv, there will be given the "\ m B a* 
 rr 51 30' the Latitude of the Place, and mnv r= 20 34' the 
 Sun's or Star's Declination > to find B iv and B m : Whence, by 
 Cafe 6. p. 88. 
 As Radius lo.coooo 
 
 is to the Co -tangent ofBu;r=5l 36' 9 90061 
 
 fo is the Tangent of m<w zo 34 9.57427 
 
 to the Sine of Bou= 1 7 22' 9.47488 
 
 Therefore 17 22' being equivalent to 1 h. 9I111. the Sun, it is 
 evident, will be due Eaft at 9 i Minutes paftSeven in the Morning, 
 and due Weft at 50 Minutes paft Four in the Afternoon : But if 
 it be a Star whofc Time of Eafting or Wefting is required, let the 
 Difference of Right Afcenfions of the Sun and Star (on the Day 
 propofed ) be added to or fubtracled from the Time above found, 
 and you will have your* Defire. But, to find the Altitude B m, 
 fay, oy Cafe 6. /. 88. Ai
 
 Chap. VIII. Geographical Problems. 143 
 
 As the Sine of nt Bow 5 i 30' 9.89354 
 
 is to the Sine of m w 20 34 9; 54567 
 
 fo is Radius jo. 00000 
 
 to the Sine of the required Altitude B m 26' 40' 9.65213 
 
 Problem VTIL 
 The fame Things being given, to find the Sun's Altitude and Azi- ' 
 tnuth at Six o'clock, or the Altitude and Azimuth of any He a' 
 <venly Body, iuhen in a Great Circle, pajfing thro'' the Poles of 
 the World, perpendicular to the Meridian. 
 
 Let ZrN (See the foregoing Scheme) be a great Circle palling 
 thro' G, the Centre of the Sun or Star, and cutting the Horizon 
 in e : Then in the Triangle B r e, Right-angled at e, will be given 
 <^rBe 51 30', and Br =. 20 J 34' j to find re and Br. 
 Therefore, by Cafe 9. p. 89. 
 As Radius 10.00000 
 
 is to the Sine of Br 20 34' 9.54567 
 
 fo is the Sine of r B e 5 1 ' 30' 9- 8 9354 
 
 to the Sine of the Altitude rf 15' 57' 9.4392! 
 
 And, as Radius 10.00000 
 
 is to the Co-fine of r B e 5 1 30' 9-794 1 5 
 
 fo is the Tangent of B r = 20 34' 9. 57427 
 
 to the Tangent of the Azimuth B> = 1 3 30' 9-36842 
 
 Problem IX. 
 The fame Things being fill gi'ven, to find the Altitude and Azi- 
 muth of the Sun or Star, at any gi'ven Time before or after its 
 coming to the Meridian. 
 
 Let the Latitude and Declination be as above, and the given 
 Time two Hours j and let P C S be a Meridian paffing through C 
 the Centre of the Sun or Star, and ZCTN an Azimuth Circle : 
 Then there will be formed the oblique Triangle P C Z ; in which 
 will be given ZP= 38 30' the Complement of Latitude, P C 
 69 26' the Complement of Declination, and ^CPZ = 30 ; 
 ihence to find Z C, and "^ P Z C. Therefore, if C F be fup- 
 pofed perpendicular to Z F, we fhall have, by Cafe 2. /. 88. 
 As Radius 10.00000 
 
 is to the Co-fine of C P Z 30 9 93753 
 
 fo is the Tangent of P C ~ 69 26' 1 0.425 7 z 
 
 to the Tangent of P F = 66 35' 10.36325 
 
 Then
 
 144 Of Aftronomical and Part I. 
 
 ThenZF ( = PF PZ) 28 5',, and, byCorol. 4. Theor- 
 XXIII. Chap. VI. 
 
 As the Co-fine of P F z=z 66 35' Co-ar. o 4007$ 
 
 is to the Co-fine of Z F r= 28 5' 9.94560 
 
 fo is the Co-fine of P C = 69 26' 9.54567 
 
 to Co-fine of Z C, or Sine of Altit. T C =r 5 1 15' 9.89202 
 Moreover, by Cor. 5. Theor. XXIV. 
 As the Sine of F Z = 28 5' Co-ar. 0.32720 
 
 is to the Sine of F P = 66 35' 9.96267 
 
 {6 is the Tangei.t of F P C 30 9.76144 
 
 to the Tangent of the Azimuth C Z F 48 23' 10 05 1 3 1 
 
 Problem X. 
 
 The Latitude of the Place, and the Surfs Declination and Altitude, 
 being given, to find the Sun's Azimuth, and the Hour of the Day. 
 
 Let the Declination be 20'34' North, the Altitude 51 35', 
 and the Latitude of the Place 51 30' North. In the oblique 
 Triangle P C Z there are given all the Sides ; that is, C Z 3 8 
 25' the Co-altitude, P Z 38 30' the Co-latitude, C P 69 
 26' the Co-declination ; to find the Angles P and Z. Since Z n 
 PC P Z 30 56', therefore, by Cafe 5. p. 91. 
 Sine of C P 69 26' Co-ar. 0.02860 
 
 Sine of P Z = 38 30' Co-ar. 0.20585 
 
 Sine of cZ + Z * 34 o 4 o' , 9.75496 \ a dd e d 
 
 Sine of CZ ~ Z * :=3*44' 8.81367 
 
 Square of the Sine of P 1 8.80308 
 
 Therefore Prrr 14 36' 9.40154 
 
 And P rz: 29 1 2' ; which, converted into Time, gives 1 Hour 
 56 Minutes and 48 Seconds ; and lb long was it from Noon when 
 the Obfervation was made. After the very fame manner the 
 Angle Z may be determined ; but if the Angle P ( found above ) 
 be ufed as a Term in the Proportion, then, by Cor. 3, to Theor. 
 XXVIII. Chap. VI. it will be, 
 
 As the Sine of ZC ^38 2^ Co-ar. 0.20664 
 
 to the Sine of P 29 1 i 9.68829 
 
 fo is the Sine of P C 69 26' 9.97 140 
 
 to the Sine of PZC= 132O41' 9.86633 
 
 = the Sun's Azimuth from the North at the Time of Obfervation. 
 
 Pro- 
 
 I
 
 Chap. VIII. Geographical Problems. 145 
 
 Problem XI. 
 Tht Altitude of a knmvn fixed Star, the Sun's Right Afcenfion, and 
 
 the Latitude of the Place y being given, ta find the Time of the 
 
 Night. 
 
 From the given Declination and Altitude, find the Angle at the 
 Pole C P Z in the very fame Manner as in the lail Problem ; which 
 Angle add to, or fubtract from, the Right Afcenfion of the Star, 
 according as it is obferved on the Wefte.m or Eaftern Side of the 
 Meridian, and you will have the Right Afcenfion of the Medium 
 Caeli ; from which if the Sun's Right Afcenfion be fubtra&ed, the 
 Remainder will be the Time, after Noon, when the Obfervation 
 was made. 
 
 Thus, let the Altitude of Aldebaran, whofe Right Afcenfion is 
 65 & 8', and Declination 15 55', be given 32 30' towards the Eaft 
 of the Meridian, and let the Sun's Right Afcenfion be 228 45', 
 and the Latitude of the Place 5 1 30' : Then the Angle C P Z will 
 be found 74 20', which fhould be taken from 65- 8'; but as 
 Subtraction cannot be here made, the Right Afcenfion 65* 8' mull 
 be firft increafed by the whole Circle,or 360 ( which is always to be 
 done in fuch Cafes) ; then taking 74" 20' from 425 8', (r= 360 
 J- 6c 8' ) we have 350 48' for the Right Afcenfion of the Me- 
 dium Caeli i from which the Sun's Right Afcenfion 2 2 8 45' being 
 fubtrafted, there remains 122 3' anfvvering to 8h. 8 m. 12 s. or 
 to 8 Minutes 1 2 Seconds pail Eight in the Afternoon. 
 
 Problem XII. 
 
 The Latitude of the Place, and the Suns Declination, being given, 
 to find the Time of Day-break in the Morning, and the End of 
 Tnuiligbt in the Evening. 
 
 Let the Latitude of the Place be 50 56' North, and the Sun's 
 Declination 1 o North ; and fuppofe L to be the Place of the Sun 
 in its Parallel of Declination r <v, when 1 8 below the Horizon, 
 at which Time Day is obferved to break, and Twilight to end. 
 Then, in the oblique Triangle Z P L, will be given all the Sides, 
 viz. ZP= 39 J 4', PL 80, and Z L = 108 ; to find the 
 Angle P : Put A == P L P Z = 40 56 ; then, by Cafe 5. 
 p. 91. 
 
 the Sine of ZPrr 39 24' Co-ar. 0.20050 
 
 the Sine of P L = 8o Co-ar. 0.00665 
 
 the Sine of ZL + A = 7 4 Q 28' 9 98384 V. 
 
 the Sine of : = 33 3 2 ' 974228 
 
 the Square of the Sine of j P 19.93327 
 
 There
 
 146 Of Aftronomical and Parti 
 
 Therefore \ P 67 47' ; and confequently P 135 34', which 
 reduced to Time gives 9 h. 2 m. for the End of Twilight in the 
 Evening ; and the Complement of this to 12 Hours 2 h. 58 m. 
 is the Time of Day-break in the Morning. 
 
 Problem XIII. 
 Having given the Latitude of the Place (51 30' North), the 
 Suns Declination ( zo 34' North), and the Horizontal Refrac- 
 tion (found by the Obfervations of Ajtronomers to be 33' '), to find 
 the apparent Time of the Sun's Rifing and Setting, and his appa- 
 rent Amplitude. 
 
 In the oblique-angled Triangle Z P L there are given ZP = 
 3s 3 30', P L = 69 26 , and Z L 90 33' ; to find the Angle 
 ZPL. Put A PL ZP= 30 56 ; then, 
 the Sine of P L 69 26' Co-ar. 0.02860 
 
 the Sine of P Z rrr 38 30' Co-ar. 0.20585 
 
 the Sine of Jit = 6o 44' 9.94069 
 
 2L A 
 
 the Sine of 29 48' 9.69633 
 
 the Square of the Sine of \ P 19.87147 
 
 therefore P =; 59 36' 9 93573 
 
 And P 1 1 9 12'; confequently L P O ( 1 8o P) =r 6o 48' 
 r= 4 h. 3 m. 1 2 s. the apparent Time of the Sun's Rifing : But, by 
 Prob. VI. the true Time of his Rifing was found to be 4h. 7 m. 
 24 s. differing from that found above by 4 Minutes and 1 2 Seconds; 
 whence it is manifeft, that the apparent exceeds the aftronomical 
 Day by near 8 Minutes and an Half. As to the apparent Ampli- 
 tude, it may be determined in the very fame Manner as the Angle 
 ZPL above ; for in the oblique Triangle Z P L are given all the 
 Sides to find the Angle LZP, whofe Complement B Z L is the 
 Amplitude required. Bnt if the Angle ZPL (already found) 
 be made ufe of as a Term of the Proportion; then, by Corol. 3. 
 Theor. XXVIII. 
 
 As the Sine of ZL- 90 33' Co-ar. 0.00002 
 
 is to the Sine of P =r 1 19 12' 9.94098 
 
 fo is the Sine of P L 69 26' 9.97140 
 
 to the Sine of L Z P r= 54 49' 9.91240 
 
 There-
 
 Chap. VIII. Geographical Problems. 147 
 
 Therefore BZL ( 90 LZP) =35 ir, the apparent 
 Amplitude, which differs from 34 2 1 ', the true Amplitude, found 
 in Prob. VI. by 50'. 
 
 Scholium. 
 
 The Difference between the true and apparent Rifirig and Setting 
 of the Sun and Moon is of great Confequence to Aitronomers in 
 the Bufmcfs of Eclipfes ; for, in computing how much of the Disks 
 of the Luminaries will appear obfeured at Rifing or Setting, Re- 
 gard mult be had to the apparent Time. Nor will it be of lefs 
 Importance for the Mariner to know what Difference there is be- 
 tween the true and apparent Amplitudes, feeing on this his gaining 
 the true Variation of the Compafs depends-; For which Reafon I 
 fhall here lay down a Proportion, whereby the Difference between 
 the true and apparent Amplitudes may, in any Cafe, be eafily 
 obtained : It is this, As the Co-fing of the true Amplitude is to 
 the Tangent of the Elevation of the Pole, fo is the given Horizon' 
 tal Refraclion to the required Difference between the true and appa- 
 rent Amplitudes : Which, if the Declination of the Sun and the 
 Latitude of the Place be of the fame Denomination, mult be 
 added to the true, in order to have the apparent Amplitude ; but 
 if of different Denominations, the contrary. The fame alfo holds 
 good in the Fixt Stars, and in all the Planets, except the Moon, 
 whofe Parallax is too confideiable to be neglected, being much 
 greater than the Refraction itfelf : However, if inftead of the Re- 
 fraction, the Difference between it and the Horizontal Parallax be 
 here made ufe of, the Refult will be the Difference required in 
 this Cafe. For an Illuftration of what has been above delivered, 
 let it be required to find the Difference of the true and apparent 
 Amplitudes of the Sun, in the Latitude of 5 1 30' N: when his 
 Declination is zo 34' N. Here the true Amplitude {by Prob. VI.) 
 is found to be 34 21' ; therefore it will be, 
 As the Co-fine of 34 21' Co-ar. 0.0832 
 
 is to the Tangent of 5 1 30' 10.0992}.- 
 
 fo is 33' (Log.) 1.5185 
 
 to the Difference fought 50' .25 (Log.) 1.701 1 
 
 Which comes ost nearly the fame with that found-above; but is 
 rather more exaft. 
 
 Problem XIV. 
 To find the Meafure of a Great Circle of the Earth. 
 It is found by Obfervation, that if a Spectator on any Part of 
 the Earth\ Surface was to take the Altitude of the Pole, and then 
 proceed directly North or South, meafuring his- Diftance all the 
 Way, till he has altered his. Latitude one Degree, lie would find- 
 he had meafured 69 } Miles nearly. The Length of a Degree was 
 
 L 2 thus
 
 148 Of Aftronomical and Part I 
 
 thus firft determined by Mr. Norwood, and confirmed afterwards by 
 the Experiments of Picart, Cajfini, and others : But by what we 
 have already faid about the Figure of the Earth, it appears there 
 is a fmall Difference between the Meafure of one Degree and that 
 of another, tho' too inconfiderable to be taken Notice of in the 
 prefent Cafe. Therefore, taking the Earth as a perfect Sphere, 
 we have i : 69 j m. : : 360* : 25020 Miles the Meafure of the 
 whole Periphery. - 
 
 Corollary. 
 
 P 
 
 Hence, if P 25020, then the Diameter (D) = . = 
 
 3.1416 
 
 7964, (per Th. XXXVII. Chap. II.) the Superficies =PD = 
 199259280 (perTh.XL. Chap. II. ) and the Solidity == P *? *! 
 264483484320 (per Theor. XXXIX. Chap. II.). 
 
 Problem XV. 
 The Difference of Longitudes of tivo Places on the Equator being 
 given, to find their Diftance in Englifh Miles. 
 
 Let the given Difference of Longitude ( in Degrees ) be multi- 
 ply'd by 69 7, and the Product will be the Diftance required. 
 
 Problem XVI. 
 
 Having given the Latitudes of tivo Places in the fame Meridian, 
 
 to find their Diftance in Englifti Miles. 
 
 This Problem admits of four Cafes. 
 
 1. If both Places B, C, be on the 
 fame Side of the Equator ( A E ), and 
 in the fame Quadrant ( A P ) of the 
 Meridian, the Difference of their Lati- 
 titudes multiply'd by 69^ will give 
 the required Diftance. 
 
 2. If the two Places be on the fame 
 Side of the Equator, but in different 
 Quadrants ( A P, P E ) of the Meri- 
 dian, let the Sum of the given Lati- 
 tudes, be fubtratted from 1 80 Degrees, 
 and the Remainder multiply'd by 69 \, and the Product will be 
 the Diftance. 
 
 3. If the two Places be on different Sides of the Equator, but in 
 adjacent Quadrants ( S A, P A ) of the Meridian, the Sum of 
 their Latitudes, multiply'd as above, will give their Diftance. 
 
 4. Laftly, if the propofed Places be in oppofite Quadrants (A P, 
 ES) of the Meridian, let the Difference of their Latitudes be 
 
 taken
 
 Chap. VIII. Geographical Problems. 149 
 
 taken from i So Degrees ; then the Remainder, reduced to Miles, 
 will be the Diftance fought. 
 
 Problem XVII. 
 Having given the Difference of Longitudes of any two Places in 
 
 the fame given Parallel of Latitude, to determine their Diftance 
 
 and Angle of Pojition. 
 
 Let EFP and AGP be two Meridians 
 pafiing thro' the propofed Places F andG, 
 and F G an Arch of a great Circle, 
 upon which let fall the Perpendicular 
 P. Q. bife&ing the Angle F P G, and 
 let the given Difference of Longitudes 
 ( F P G ) be 104 30', and the Latitude 
 (EForAG) 40 : Then in the Tri- 
 angle FPQ, Right-angled at Qj will 
 be given FP 50 , and the Angle 
 F P Q_= 52 15' ; to find QF and <, 
 P F Qj Wherefore, by Cafe 9. p. 89. 
 
 As Radius 10.00000 
 
 is to the Sine of \ DifF. of Long. F P Qrr 52 15' 9.89800 
 
 fo k the Sine of the Complem. of Lat. P F 50 9.88425 
 
 to the Sine of the required Diftance QF 37 17' 9.78225 
 Therefore FGr: 74 34' == 5 1 82 Miles. Again, 
 As Radius 
 
 is to the Co-fine of P F, or the Sine of Lat 
 fo is Tang, of j DifF. of Long. 
 
 to the Co-t. of the Angle of Pofition P F Q_ 50 18' 9. 7 89 J 7 
 Which is alfo equal to P G F, or the Pofition of F from G. 
 
 Problem XVIII. 
 Having given the Difference of Longitudes ( A E ) of tivo Places 
 
 (A, F L. one on the Equator ( A E ), and the other in any 
 
 given Latitude { E F ) ; to fnd their Diftance and Angles of Po~ 
 Jit ion ( See the Scheme to the preceding Problem). 
 
 Let the given Latitude E F be rr 5 1 30', and the Difference 
 of Longitudes AEr 50 34': Then, the Triangle A E F being 
 Right-angled at E, we have, by Cafe 5. p. S8. 
 As Radius io.oooqo 
 
 is to the Co-fioe of A E = 50 34' 9.80290 
 
 fo is the Co-fine of E F 5 1 -30' 9.7941 5 
 
 to the Co-fine of the required Diftance A F 66 s 42 959705 
 
 L 3 Again, 
 
 10 00000 
 
 9.S0807 
 
 io.iii 10
 
 Of Aftronorojc^l sad 
 
 150 
 
 Again, 
 As the Sine of E F = 5 1 30' 
 
 is to Radius 
 fo is the Tangent of AE =r 50* 
 
 34' 
 
 Parti. 
 
 9-89354 
 
 10.00000 
 10.08493 
 
 to the Tangent of A FE= 57 14' 10.19139 
 
 Which Angle ihews the Pofition of A from F : And in the very 
 fame Manner may the Angle E A F be determined, which, taken 
 from 90 ', leaves PAF~ the Angle of Pofition of F from A. 
 
 Problem XIX. 
 
 The Difference of Longitudes, avd the Latitudes, of any tevo Places 
 
 being given, to find their Difiance and jingles of Pofition. 
 
 Let the given Latitudes of the two 
 Places A and B be 55? 30', and 32" 20', 
 both North, and the Difference of Longi- 
 tudes APB = 72 ", and upon PB let fall 
 the Perpendicular A C. 
 
 Then, by Cafe 9. p. 89. we fliall have / 
 
 As Radius 
 
 Hi to the Co-fine' of P == 7 2 
 fo is the Tang, of A P ( r= 90 
 
 10.00000 
 
 , 948998 
 
 55 3) =34 30 9-837 '3 
 
 to the Tangent of PC == 12 9.327 1 1 
 
 But P B ( 90 32" 20' ) -=z 57 40' ,- therefore B C ( 57'' 
 40' 12 ) =. 45" 40', whence, by Cor. Theor. XXIII. 
 As the Co-fine ot"PC=i2" Co-ar. 0.00960 
 
 is to the Co-fine cf B C 45 " 40' 9,84437 
 
 fo rs the Co-fine of A P 34' 30 9.91599 
 
 to the Co-fine of the Diftance A B = 53 56' 9.76996 
 
 Moreover, by Corol. 5. Theor. XXIV. 
 
 As the Sine of BC ss 45 40' Co-ar. 0.14552 
 
 is to the Sine of PC 1 2 9.317.88 
 
 fo is the Tangent of P 72 10.48822 
 
 to the Tangent of Pofition P B A 41 49' 9.95162 
 
 After the very fame Manner the Pofition of B from A may be 
 
 determined, if from B a Perpendicular be firll ?et fall upon P A ; 
 
 But if A B ( above found ) be uikd as a Term in the Proportion, 
 
 then, by Cor. 3. Theor. XXVIII. 
 
 As
 
 Chap. VIII. Gedgraphical Problems. 151 
 
 As the Sine of A B = 53 .56' Co-ar. 0.09241 
 
 is to the Sine of P= 72 9.97821 
 
 foistheofSinePB=574o r 9.92683 
 
 to the Sine of P A B - 83 48' 9-99745 
 
 It may not be amifs to obferve,that if the propofed Places A and B 
 had been on different Sides of the Equator, the Operation would 
 have been the very fame ; only, in finding the Diftance P B of the 
 Southermoft Place from the North Pole, the Latitude, inftead of 
 being futyraded, muft have been added to 90 Degrees. 
 
 Problem XX. 
 TheDifiance, and Difference of Latitudes, of twoP laces, being giveti t 
 to find their Difference of Longitudes. 
 Let the Diftance of two Places A B (See the preceding Scheme) 
 be 53 56', and the given Latitudes 32 J 20' and 55 ' 30': Then 
 in the Triangle A P B there will be given all the Sides, viz. A B 
 = r 3 " 56', AP( = 9 o- 55 30') r=34 30', andPB ( 
 9_ 32 20') =57 40' J to find ^P: PutM( BP AP) 
 = 23 10' ; then, by Cafe 5. /. 91, 
 Sine of B P 5 7 40' Co-ar. 0.07 3 1 7 -) 
 
 Sine of APrr 34 30' Co-ar. 0.24687 J 
 
 Sine of AB + M = 38 33' 9.79463 I added 
 
 A B - M , . 1 
 
 Sine of = 15 23 9.42370 J 
 
 Sq. Sineof^P 19.53837 
 
 Therefore jP= 36 9.769 18 
 
 And confequently P = 72 , the Difference of Longitudes re- 
 quired. 
 
 Scholium-.. 
 
 Befides the foregoing Propofitions, it may not be improper to lay 
 down anotker Method for finding the Diftance of Places, which is 
 univerfal, having no Regard to the Variety of Cafes. Say, Js the 
 Square of the Radius is to the Reel angle of the Co-fines of the La- 
 titudes of the tiva Places, fo is the verfed Sine of the Difference of 
 Longitudes to a fourth Number ; to nxjhich fourth Number add 
 the verfid Sine of theDifference, or Sum of the Latitudes, according 
 as the Places are on the fame or on different Sides of the Equator, 
 and the Sum will be the verfed Sine of the Difiance required. 
 
 The Demonftration of this is eafiiy derived from Theor. XIX. 
 Chap. VI. for it is there proved, that, in any fpherical Triangle 
 ABC, it will be, as the Square of the Radius is to the Rectangle 
 of* the Sines of any two Sides B A, B C, fo is the verfed Sine of the 
 
 L 4 included
 
 15* Q/" Aftronomical and Part I. 
 
 included ^ B to the Difference of the verfed Sines of A C and B A 
 AC: Therefore, if B there be fuppofed to reprefent the North or 
 South Pole, it is evident that B A B C will exprefs the Difference 
 or Sum of the Latitudes, according as the Places A and C are on 
 the fame or on different Sides of the Equator ; whence the Solution 
 is manifeft. Example, let it be required to find the Diftance of 
 two Places on the fame Side of the Equator, whofe Latitudes are 
 55 30' and 32 20', and their Difference of Longitudes 72 : 
 Then, 
 As the Square of Radius 20.00000 
 
 is to I o-fine 55 3o' 975313 
 
 I Co-fine 3 2 20 9.92683, 
 
 fo is the verfed Sine of 7 2 3.83947 
 
 D 
 
 to 3307 fuchParts whereof the Radius contains 10000 3.51943 
 "Which added to 806, the natural verfed Sine of 23 io' the Dif- 
 ference of Latitudes, gives 41 1 3. for the natural verfed Sine of 53 
 55' the Diftance required. 
 
 Problem XXL 
 
 To find the convex Superficies of the Five Zones of the Earth. 
 
 In the Right-angled Triangle 
 A C D, where A C reprefents a 
 Part of the Earth's Axis, and A D 
 the Semidiameter of one of the 
 Tropics, there are given C D, and 
 the "<^D =23 29' ; from whence 
 AC and AD by Cafe 3. p. 38. 
 will be both given, which laft, it x[" 
 is evident, is equal to the Diftance, 
 C F, of the Plane of the Polar 
 Circle BFG from that of the 
 Equator ; therefore A F ( C F 
 CA)andPF(=CP C F ) 
 
 are alfo given. But as P S : P S x P E S Q_ ( the Superficies of 
 the whole Earth ) ::2AC:2ACxPESQ i the Superficies. 
 of the Torrid Zone : Again, PS: PSxPESQ^:: 2AF: 
 2 A F x PES Qj= the Superficies of the Temperate Zones ; 
 alfo, P S : P S x PE S Q% : 2 P F : 2 PF X P E S Q_r= 
 the Superficies of the Frigid Zones : All which is evident from 
 Theor. XL. Chap. II. But if the fame Things be required in 
 Numbers, they may be more readily had thus y 
 As Radius 10.00000 
 
 is to the Sine of 23 29' 9.60041 
 
 fo
 
 Chap. VIII. Geographical Problems. 
 
 r C 199259280, the Superficies of the whole 7 
 10 * % Earth, in Miles, found by Prob. XIV. J 
 
 8. 
 
 J 53 
 
 29942 
 
 to the Superficies of th Torrid Zone 
 And, 
 As Radius 
 
 is to the Co-fine of 23* 29' 
 fo is 199259280 
 
 79402000 7.89983 
 
 10.00000 
 9.96245 
 8.29942 
 
 to 182755000 8.26187 
 
 From which taking 79402000 (above found), we (hall have 
 103353000 for the Superficies of the Temperate Zones; and 
 if, from 199259280, there be taken 182755000, the Remainder 
 16504280 will be the Superficies of the Frigid Zones. 
 
 Problem XXII. 
 To determine the Extent of the Vifible Horizon. 
 
 Let P be the given Height of the Eye above the Surface (See 
 the laft Figure), and n B the Ray, which, touching the Surface at 
 B, terminates the Vifible Horizon : Then, by Theor. VI. Chap. 
 II. Stf X?n ri B * D ; confequently B == V$ n x P" the 
 Diftance required. 
 
 Problem XXIII. 
 To find the Diftance of the Moon font the Earth. 
 
 LetBEDF repre- 
 fent the Earth, .and M 
 the Moon in its Orbit, 
 feen from E ; then "^ 
 EMCr^MC/, will 
 be the apparent Semi- 
 diameter of the Earth 
 E C, feen at the Moon, 
 which Angle is called 
 the Parallax, being the 
 Difference of the true 
 and apparent Diftance 
 of the Moon from the 
 Zenith : This Angle is 
 greateft when fhe is in 
 her Perigasum, and her 
 
 Orbit moil excentric, / 
 
 at which Time, accord- 
 ing to Mr. Whijlon, ^M~ I * i 10" ; therefore in the Right- 
 angled Triangle CKM, there are given all the Angles, and the 
 
 Side
 
 Of Aftronomical and 
 
 154 
 
 Side C E, to find the Side E M, by Cafe 2. p. 38. 
 For, As the Sine of the Parallax M t=z 1" z 10 ' 
 
 is to one Semidiameter ECrri 
 fo is the Sine of C = 88* 57' 50" 
 
 Part I. 
 
 8.25742 
 0.00000 
 9.99993 
 
 to the Side E M = 5 5 . 2 7 Semidiameters 1-74251 
 
 the Diftance of the Moon from the Spectator on the Surface of 
 the Earth. And, by Cafe 2. p. 38. s,M : E C : : R:CM~ 
 55.29 Semidiameters, the Diftance from the Centre of the Earth. 
 
 Problem XXIV. 
 To find the Diftance of the Sun from the Earth. 
 
 Let E P z n reprefent the Earth, and Srmx the Sun. The Sun's 
 Horizontal Parallax, or the*^ S P / = "<\ P S E, according to Dr, 
 Halley and M.r.Flamftead, is about 10 Seconds ; and therefore in the 
 Right-angled Triangle P S E, there are given all the Angles, and 
 the Side P E, to find E S, by Cafe 2. p. 38. 
 For, As the Sine of the Sun's Parallax "^C S rr 10" 5.68556 
 
 is to one Semidiameter PErri 0.00000 
 
 fo is the Sine of S P E^rz: 89 59' 50" 9.99999 
 
 to the Diftance ES = 20627 
 
 Problem XXV. 
 To determine the Diftance of Venus from the 
 
 Let S be the Sun, T O the Orbit of the 
 Earth, and C V the Orbit of Venus ; and 
 let the greateft Elongation of Venus from 
 the Sun, found by the Obfervations of 
 Aftronomers to be 46- 23', be reprefented 
 by the Angle S T V : Then in the Tri- 
 angle S T V, Right-angled at V, are given 
 all the Angles and the Side S T ( found by 
 the laft Problem ) to find S V. Where- 
 fore (by Cafe 3. /. 38.) 
 
 4-3M43 
 
 Sm.
 
 Chap. VIII. Geographical Pros LfAis. 155 
 
 As Radius 10.00000 
 
 is to S T =. 1 0.00000 
 
 fo is the Sine of ST =146* 23' 985972 
 
 to the Diftance S V .72397 9.85972 
 
 In the fame Manner may the Diftance of the other inferior 
 Planet, Mercury, be determined. 
 
 Problem XXVI. 
 
 To determine the Dif.ance of Jupiter from the Sun, 
 
 Let S be the Sun, V R the Orbit 
 pf Jupiter, VP the Orbit of the 
 Earth, and S V V the greateft annual 
 Parallax of Jupiter ; which Angle, by 
 the Obfervations of Aftronomers, is 
 1 1 5 . Now the "v S V V is 90-' 
 (becaufe a Right Line drawn from 
 any other Point ( x ) of the Orbit 
 V P to V, will make a lefs Angle 
 with S than SyV): Therefore 
 in the Right-angled Triangle S V, 
 there are given all theAnglcs, and the 
 Side S V, to find the Diftance S i 
 then, by Cafe 2. p. 38. 
 As the Sine of S V rr 1 1 5' 9.28392 
 
 is to the Side SVrrl 0.00000 
 
 fo is Radios 1 o 00000 
 
 to the Diilance S 5.20096 0.71608 
 
 Hence the Diftance of Jupiter from the Sun is == 107200 times 
 the Earth's Radius. The Diftances of the other fuperior Planets 
 are determined in like manner. As to the Diftance of the Earth 
 from Jupiter, or any other Planet, we may conceive, by a bare 
 Contemplation of the Scheme, that it is variable ; but may, ne- 
 verthelefs, at any time be determined, by having the Difference of 
 Longitudes of the Sun and Jupiter given. For, let x be any Place 
 of the Earth in its Orbit, and V the correfponding Place of Jupi- 
 ter, and fuppofe the Right Lines S , x, and S x, to be drawn ; 
 then, in the Triangle S V x, will be given the Sides S x, S , 
 ( found above ) alfo the Angle S x the Difference of the 
 Longitudes ; whence x is found, by Cafe 2, p. 39. 
 
 Pro-
 
 156 Of Aftronomical and Part I* 
 
 Problem XXVII. 
 To determine the Magnitude of the Moon. 
 
 According to Obfervation, the greateft apparent Diameter (See 
 Scheme, Prob. XXIII. ) of the Moon, feen from the Earth at F, 
 is 33' 44" z= 2 "x M Fy ; therefore, in the Right-angled Triangle 
 F M^, there are given all the Angles, and the Side Fy ( by Prob. 
 XXIII. ) to find My * M the Moon's Semidiameter : Then, by 
 Cafe 1. V 38. 
 As the Sine of Mr: 8^ 43' 8" 9.99999 
 
 to the Side Fy rr 55.27 i. 74251 
 
 fo is the Sine of MF; 16' 52" 7.69065 
 
 to My = .2711 the Moon's Semidiameter 9.43 3 1 7 
 
 Put 2 My (xy)-Di then D x 3.1416 = ( P ) the Peri- 
 
 PD D ' 
 
 phery, P D the Superficies, and r rr the Magnitude. 
 
 .6 
 
 Corollary. 
 Since the Superficies of fpherical Bodies are as the Squares, and 
 the Magnitudes as the Cubes of their refpe&ive Semidiameters, 
 it is evident, that the Number .0735 anfwering to twice the Loga- 
 rithm of My (above found ) will be the whole Superficies of the 
 Moon, in Parts of the Earth's Superficies : Hence it appears, that 
 the Superfities of the Earth is to the Superficies of the Moon 
 nearly as 14 to 1. In like manner it will appear, that the Ma- 
 gnitude of the Earth is to the Magnitude of the Moon nearly as 
 50 to 1 : But the Moon being found, from Phyfical Principles,- to 
 be more denfe than the Earth, in the Ratio of 5 to 4, the Quan- 
 tity of Matter in the Earth is therefore to the Quantity of Mat- 
 ter in the Moon only as 40 to 1. 
 
 Problem XXVIII. 
 To determine the Magnitude of the Sun. 
 
 The apparent Diameter of- the Sun 2 ^ S E x (See Fig. t 
 Prob. XXIV.) is, according to Obfervation, 32' 44", when the 
 Earth is in its Perihelion ; therefore, in the Right-angled Triangle 
 S x E, are given all the Angles, and the Side S E (by Prob 
 XXIV. \ to find Sx Sr, by Cafe 1. / 38. 
 As the Sine of x 89* 43' 38" Co-ar. o.oooor 
 
 is to S E =. 20627 Semidiameters of the Earth 4.31443 
 
 fo is the Sine of E rz: 16' 22" 7 -6/777 
 
 to the Side S * rr 98.22 the Sun's 5 Diameter 1 .9922 1 
 
 From
 
 Chap. VIII. Geographical Problems. 157 
 
 From whence, by proceeding as above, it will appear, that the 
 Superficies of the Sun is to the Superficies of the Earth as 9648 
 to 1, and the Magnitude of the Sun to the Magnitude of the 
 Earth as 947620 to 1 ; but the Earth being four times as denfe as 
 tfie Sun, the Quantity of Matter in the Sun is to the Quantity of 
 Matter in the Earth as 23^905 to i. 
 
 Problem XXIX. 
 To determine the Magnitude of Jupiter. 
 
 ..,\....-,...t 
 
 The apparent Diameter of Jupiter, when he is neareft the 
 Earth, is 48 Seconds ; therefore, in the Right-angled Triangle 
 TV*, there are then given all the Angles, and the Side T V 
 ( = S V ST; to find x V =* % - Therefore, by Cafe 1. 
 
 As the Sine of x = 89 59' 36" Co-ar. 0.00000 
 
 is toT V = 86633 4-93768 
 
 fo is the Sine of T = 24" 6.065 8o 
 
 to the Side* V = to.08 1.00348 
 
 Whence the Magnitude may be found, as in Prob. XXVIII. And 
 in the fame Manner may the true Diameter and Magnitude of any 
 other Planet be determined : But befides this, there is another Me- 
 thod whereby the fame Things may be efFe&ed, which is as fol- 
 lows ; fay, As the Horizontal Parallax of the Sun, Moon or Star, 
 is to its apparent Diameter, fo is the true Diameter of the Earth 
 to the true Diameter required ; and as the Cube of the Horizontal 
 Parallax is to the Cube of the apparent Diameter, fo is the Magni- 
 tude of the Earth to the Magnitude required. 
 
 Problem XXX. 
 To determine the Length of the Earths Shadow. 
 
 Let rmx be the Sun (See Scheme, Prob. XXIV J, Pz the 
 Earth, P A the conical Shadow. Draw P i parallel to S E ; then 
 8r-S (PE) = r; therefore, by Thcor. XII. XIII. 
 
 Chap.
 
 158 Of AftrOffdmittl dnS P&t t 
 
 Chap. IT. ir : Pi (S E ) : : P E : E A = the Length of the- 
 conical Shadow required. The- fame Thing may be otherwife de- 
 termined : Thus, the ^ P A E ( -=z r P i = r P S S P i ) is the 
 Difference between the Sun's apparent Semidiameter and Horizon- 
 tal Parallax; therefore in the Right-angled Triangle P A E, are 
 given all the Angles and the Side Y E, whence A E may be found, 
 by Cafe 2. p. 38. 
 
 In the very fame Manner the Length of the Axis of the Shadow 
 of any other Planet may be determined, having its Diftance from 
 the Sun and Diameter given. 
 
 Problem XXXI. 
 
 To find the apparent Diameter of the Earth's Shadow at the 
 
 Diftance of the Mum's Centre. 
 
 Let T denote the Earth, 
 and m the Moon ; then ^ 
 tn T r is the apparent Semi- 
 diameter of the Shadow at 
 the Diftance of the Moon : 
 But ^ m T r is = T r a 
 r x T. Now ^Tra 
 is the Moon's Horizontal 
 Parallax (per Prob. XXIII. ), and rxT is the Difference betweerf 
 the Sun's apparent Semidiameter and Horizontal Parallax (pr 
 laft Prob. therefore the Angle m T r is given from thence. 
 
 Problem XXXII. 
 
 To find the true Diameter of the Earths Shadow at the Diftanti of 
 
 the Moon's Centre: 
 
 In the Right-angled Triangle T rm (See the preceding Scheme), 
 there is given the <^mT r (found by the laft Problem ), alfo the 
 Diftance Tm (found by Prob. XXHI. ); whence, by Cafe 1. 
 p. 38. rm will be given, the Double whereof, ry, is the true 
 Diameter required. 
 
 Problem XXXIII. 
 
 To determine the Diameter of the Moons Shadow at the Surface of 
 
 the Earth, in the Time of a Solar Eclipfe. 
 
 Let M be theMoon, and the"<,TMA the apparent Diftance of the 
 Sun and Moon from each other when the Axis t>f the Moon's Sha- 
 dow falls upon the Earth's Surface at R : Theu, in the oblique 
 Triangle T MR, there will be given RT, M T, and the Angle 
 TMR; whence R M is given, by Cafe 3. p. 39, therefore A M 
 being given, A R (= A'M RMV will ajfo be given : Eut as 
 
 AM
 
 Chap. VIII. Geographical Problems. 159 
 
 AM: AR ::EL 
 
 the Diameter of the 
 
 Moon : to H G the 
 
 Diameter of the 
 
 Moon's Shadow at 
 
 R, where the Eclipfe 
 
 is central and total. 
 
 Now it is eafy to fee, that this Diameter continually increases, as 
 
 R approaches towards F ; and confequently that at F, where the 
 
 Moon is vertical at the Time of the Eclipfe, it is greateft of all ; 
 
 and when the Moon is in her Perigzeum, and the Sun at his mean 
 
 Diftance from the EaTth, wiJl be found to come out 150 Miles 
 
 nearly. But were the Earth in its Aphelion, the Axis M A would 
 
 be longer, and confequently A R longer, and the Diameter of the 
 
 Moon's Shadow larger, at the Surface of the Earth, and in this 
 
 Cafe would be near 1 80 Miles. Since the Moon's Shadow is not 
 
 large enough to cover the whole Earth, the. circular Trail, about 
 
 the Cone of Shadow will be cover'd with the Penumbra, and the 
 
 Inhabitants fee only a partial Eclipfe of the Sun, which is greater 
 
 the nearer the conical Surface, but lefs the more remote the Place, 
 
 is ; and the Defect of Light is fcarce fenfible at the Diftance of 
 
 2450 Miles, on the Earth, from the Line joining the Centres of 
 
 the Moon and Earth, when the Earth is neareft the Sun, and the 
 
 Moon fartheft from the Earth. 
 
 Problem XXXIV. 
 
 To determine the Limits of an Eclipfe of the Mozn. 
 
 Let 1 S re- 
 prefent a Part 
 of the Earth's 
 Orbit, and 
 IM a Por- 
 tion of the 
 Moon's Orbit, 
 S the Centre 
 of the Earth's 
 Shadow at the 
 Diftance of 
 the Moon, Q, 
 
 the Node, and M the Place of the Moon, when the Shadow of 
 the Earth juft touches the Disk of the Moon ; then MS-ii I.4-. 
 M I ; alfo ^ M SI S ss the Inclination of the two Orbits, which. 
 Inclination, when the SunL diftant about 10 or 12 Degrees from 
 the Moon's Ncde ( neax which Diftance the Limits of Eclipfe*. 
 happen ), will be 5 16'. Now whea the SeuudumeteM S J, 1 M,
 
 160 Of Aftronomical and Part I. 
 
 are the greateft poffible, then is S Q the greateft Limit, beyond 
 which no Eclipfe can poffibly happen. In order to determine this 
 Limit, in the fpherical Triangle iiMS, Right-angled at M, there 
 are given the Angle SI, and the Side S M = i 3' 12" ; whence, 
 by Cafe 9. p.- 89. 
 
 As the Sine of SI 5 16' 8.96280 
 
 is to Radius 10.00000 
 
 fo is the Sine of S M i 3' 12" 8.26442 
 
 to the Sine of the greateft Limit SI S rr 1 1 33' 9.30162 
 In the very fame Manner it will be found, that the leaft Limit, 
 where S M is only 5 3', will be 9 40'. Hence 'tis apparent, firft, 
 that when the Oppofition of the Sun and Moon happens within 9 
 40' of the Node, the Moon muft fuiFer an Eclipfe j fecondly, if 
 the Oppofition falls between 9" 40' and n-33' from the Node, 
 the Moon may or may not be eclipfed ; laftly, when the Oppofi- 
 tion happens more than 1 1 33' diftant from the Node, there can- 
 not poffibly be any Eclipfe. 
 
 Problem XXXV. 
 To calculate the Angles of Incidence and Exit, of Total bumerfion 
 and Emerfion, and alfo the Motion of Half-duration, bath of the 
 whole Eclipfe, and of abfolute Darknefs, in a Lunar Eclipfe ' y 
 together with the Number of Digits eclipfed, and the Interval 
 between the true Oppofition and greateft Objuration. 
 
 MUtkllKtkt 
 
 ^ 
 
 Let P SI be a Part of the Path of the Earth's Shadow at the 
 Moon, SI M the Way of the Moon, S the Centre of the Earth's 
 Shadow at the Diftance of the Moon, I the Centre of the Moon 
 the Moment fhe enters the Earth's Shadow, F the Moon totally 
 immers'd in the Shadow, S L the leaft Diftance of the Centres of 
 the Earth's Shadow and the Moon, N S the Moon's Latitude from 
 the Ecliptic at the true Oppofition, O the Moon when fhe begins 
 to emerge out of the Shadow, and the. Moqa in her Exit intirely
 
 Chap. VIII. Geographical Problems.' 161 
 
 out of the Shadow: Now, by the Agronomical Tables, there 
 are given, the Semidiameters of the Shadow and the Moon, the 
 Latitude S N of the Moon at the Oppofition, and SflM the 
 Angle of the Moon's Way with the Ecliptic : Therefore in the 
 Triangle SNL, which, by reafon of its Smallnefs, may be confi- 
 dered as Rectilineal, and equiangular to S N <&, there are given all 
 the Angles, and the Hypothehufe S N, whence it will be as Ra- 
 dius : Sine of N S L ( S & L ) : : S N : L N, the Motion of the 
 Moon between the true Ecliptic Oppofition and the Middle of the 
 Eclipfe. Again, as Radius : Co-fine of N S L : : S N : S L, the 
 Diftance of the Centres of the Moon and Shadow at the Middle 
 of the Eclipfe. Moreover, as S I ( =r S* -}- I r) : Radius : : 
 S L : the Co-iine of I S L the Angle of Incidence or of the Angle 
 of Exit E S L. And, S F { Sxlr) : Radius : : S L i 
 the Co-fine of F S L the Angle of Immerfion rr O S L the Angle 
 of Emerfion. Again, R : the Sine of I S L : : S I : I L the 
 Motion of Half-duration of theEclipfe. Laftly, Radius : the Sine of 
 F S L : : F S : F L the Motion of Half-continuance of total Dark- 
 hefs. From theMotions thus found, theTimes in which they are per- 
 formed ( the Horary Motions of the Moon being aiways given in 
 the Tables ) are found thus : As the Horary Motion of the Moon 
 from the Sun in an Hour i the Time of one Hour : : the Motion 
 of Duration I L : the Time in Hours or Minutes of that Dura- 
 tion ; and : : F L : the Hours or Minutes of Half the total Dark- 
 nefs. But to find the Number of Digits eclipfed, take the Differ- 
 ence between S L ( found above ) and S I ; then fay, as the Moon's 
 whole Diameter is to 12 Digits, fo is that Difference to the Digit"; 
 eclipfed. 
 
 Problem XXXVI. 
 
 To find the Latitude of a Plr.ce hy toe Meridian Altitude of the 
 Sun or Fikt Star. 
 
 Befides that, in Problem III. there are other Methods of find- 
 ing the Latitude of a Place, by the Meridian Altitude, and De- 
 clination, of any Celeflial Body, 
 
 i. When the Object is between 
 the Equator and the Zenith of the 
 Place, let HZ ON reprefent the 
 Meridian, E Q. the Equator, K A 
 the Parallel of Declination, H O the 
 Horizon, P S the Axis, Z N the 
 prime Vertical, P the North and S 
 the South Pole, Z the Zenith, N the 
 Nadir, H the South and O theNorth 
 Point, E K the Sun or Star's Decli- 
 
 M natiorv.
 
 i6 ; 2 Of Aftronomical ' avJ Parti. 
 
 nation, Z E or O P the Latitude. Let H K be the Meridian Alti- 
 tude found by the Quadrant ; then HZ H K = Z K, and Z K 
 -j- E K = Z E O P the Latitude required. And if the Decli- 
 nation be South, the Latitude is alfo South. 
 
 2. When the Sun or Star is on the 
 contrary Side of the Equator to 
 the Place of Obfervation : Then H Z 
 -HK^ZK/andZK-EKzr 
 ZE OP the Latitude required. 
 And if the Declination be North, the 
 Latitude will be South ; fince, in this H 
 Cafe, the Objeft and Place are on 
 'contrary Sides of the Equator. 
 
 "* y. When the ?urt or Star is between 
 the Pince of Observation and the neareft 
 Pole : Then. OZ-OK-ZK, and 
 E X Z K-ZE the Latitude fought, 
 
 B_K. 
 
 4-When the Sun or Star" is between? 
 the Horizon and the elevated Pole : 
 Then EP-EK-PK the Com- 
 plement of the Declination of the 
 Body, and 0*4-*P = OP:rr ZE 
 the Latitude of the Place required. 
 Or, without knowing the Declination 
 of the Objett, we may find the Lati- 
 tude-of. the Place; for O X O* 
 xJi, and | *X (x?) + O x 
 =i O P = 2j E as before ; but then 
 the grcateft Meridian Altitude OK' 
 Qiufl be taken alfo,^ 
 
 5. When the greatefl and Ieaft Meridian Altitades of the 
 Heavenly Body are upwi different Sides of the Zenith : 1st H K
 
 Chap. VIII. Geographical Problems. i$j 
 
 be the greateft and O x the lead Me- 
 ridian Altitude ; then H Z O- H K 
 rGK the Supplement of the Alti- 
 tude HK, and OK O * = K at 
 r= 2 P x ; confequently x P j- x O 
 r= O P Z E the Latitude re- 
 quired. 
 
 If the Celeftial Body be in the 
 Zenith, then the Declination is the 
 Latitude of that Place: And if the 
 Object E has no Declination, then 
 HZ-HE Z E the Latitude 
 required; 
 
 The Latitudes of Places may be found by obferving the Alti- 
 tude of the Pole Star^ when it is either to the Eaft or Weft of the 
 Pole ; but when above the Pole, 2 ^ Degrees taken from its Alti- 
 tude, or when below the Pole, 2 Degrees added to the Altitude, 
 gives the Latitude of the Place. 
 
 Note, As theRefra&ion which the Stars are liable to, makes tlieir 
 Altitudes obferved near the Horizon very uncertain, fo fuch Fixt 
 Stars are always to be chofen as are neareft the Zenith or elevated 
 Pole. 
 
 Problem XXXVII. 
 To determine by Obfervation the Difference of Meridians^ or Longi- 
 tudes of any t-jjo Places oti the Surface of the Earth. 
 
 Tho' the Latitude, which is reckoned Northward and South- 
 ward, may be determined with great Certainty and Accuracy by 
 the Methods already propofed, yet the Longitude of a Place (which 
 is the Diftance of any two Places from each other Eaftward or 
 Weftward ) is very hard to be determined ; by reafon the Sun 
 and Stars always appear moving round from Eaft to Weft. If the 
 Way made good by a Ship towards ths Eaft and Weft could as 
 eafily be known as the Diftance towards the North and Souths or 
 could the diftrefted Mariner, in the Midft of the wide path- 
 lefs Ocean, tell what Parallel he is in, as well as diftinguifli what 
 Meridian he. is in, he would always know how to fteer his Courfe 
 towards his defired Port. For the Solution of this important 
 Problem various Ways have been attempted, fur a long time, by 
 many great and famous Men : Some of which Methods 1 fhall 
 here briefly enumerate. 
 
 t. Of the Method of finding the Longitude \ from theAppulfe of the 
 Moon to the Fixt Stars. 
 As there arc mnny Fixt Stars fituated wit! in the Limits of the. 
 Maon^Path, and as the Places of thelc Stars axe accurately found; 
 
 M t aiid
 
 164 Of Aftronomical and Part I, 
 
 and as their Immerfions and Emerfions, by reafon of the Smallnofs 
 of their apparent Diameters, are momentary, and to be defined by 
 the fame Points of Time almoit ; and as theMoon's Motion with re- 
 fpett to the Fixt Stars, which are immoveable, is to be reckon'd 
 greater every Day than it is with refpett to the Sun ; and laftly, as 
 the Diftance of the Fixt Stars is fo immenfe, that nothing of the 
 diurnal Parallax,which fo perplexes Aftronomical Computations, is to 
 be fufpetted in this Cafe : For thefe Rcafons, the Method of find- 
 ing the Terreftrial Longitude, rather by the Approach of the 
 Moon to the Fixt Stars, than by an Eclipfe of the Sun, is to be 
 efteemed much more fafe and exaft ; and excelling it upon this 
 Account in particular, that it affords an Opportunity of doing that 
 daily, which in the other Way can fcarce be done once a Year, if 
 fo often ; and cannot chufe but be molt acceptable to Sailors wan- 
 dering, without a Guide, in the vaft Ocean. 
 
 2. Of determining the Longitude, by the Maoris revolving about 
 
 Jupiter. 
 There are four Satellites which move about Jupiter as their 
 Centre, as was fhewn in Sett. 10. and fuffer Eclipfes in the fame 
 Manner as our Moon. The Eclipfes of the firft Satellite afford 
 the beft Opportunity of determining the Longitude of Places on 
 the Land, where Telefcopes of a convenient Length may be ufed ; 
 ftnce thirteen of thefe Eclipfes happen every twenty-three Days : 
 But at Sea this Method of finding the Longitude is liable to fo 
 many Inconveniencies in Ships, which are ever moving and totter- 
 ing, that Telefcopes cannot be ufed. The Moments of the Occup- 
 ation and Egrefs of thefe Satellites may be determined for any 
 Meridian j and as thefe Phaenomena happen almoft daily at certain 
 Moments of abfolute Time, which may be obferved in different 
 Parts of the Earth ; therefore, if we are provided with a Table of 
 thefe Immerfions and Emerfions, it will be an excellent Method of 
 determining the Longitudes of Places : For we have given, by the 
 Table, the Moment of Immerfion and Emerfion, accommodated 
 to the Place of the Table : and there being given at the fame 
 time, by Obfervation, in another Place, whether by Sea, ( if there 
 mould happen a very calm Water ) or in fome diftant Region, the 
 fame abfolute Moment of Time ; there will be given the Differ- 
 ence of Time, which being turn'd into Degrees and Minutes of 
 the Equator, fbews the Difference of the Meridians, or the Lon- 
 gitude of the Place. This is that celebrated Way of fearching out 
 the Longitude, which Aftronomers, and the French efpecially, 
 have fo often prr.&is'd, for reforming the Geographical Situation-' 
 of Places, to the great Improvement of Navigation and Geo- 
 graphy.
 
 Chap. VIII. Geographical Problems.' SB% 
 
 3. Of a Lunar Eciipfe, whereby Longitude may be determined. 
 
 By an Ephemeris we have given the Beginning, Middle and End 
 of any Lunar Eciipfe that may happen, determined for a Place 
 whofe Longitude is known : Therefore if the middle Moment of 
 an Eciipfe of this Sort happen, fuppofe at One o'Clock in the 
 Morning at London, and this middle Moment ( which in refpeft 
 of the abfolute Time is the fame every-where ) be obferved in a 
 diilant Part, at Two o'Clock in the Morning, there is given one 
 Hour's Difference of the refpe&ive Times in two Places of Obfer- 
 vation. Thefe two Places, therefore, are diftant from each other, 
 in Longitude, fo many Degrees as anfwer to one Hour, that is, 
 fifteen ; for the Sun performing his apparent Revolution about the 
 Earth in 24 Hours, and the Parallel he defcribes being conceived to 
 be divided into 360 Degrees, one Hour's Motion muft anfwer to 
 the 24th Part of 360 Degrees ; and the Place muft be Eaflward of 
 London, becaufe, as has been fhewn at large, the Sun comes to 
 that Place firft. 
 
 Thefe are the chief of the Methods, whereby Mathematicians 
 have endeavoured to folve this important Problem, that is, to 
 find the Difference of Time, or Longitude, in different Regions of 
 the Earth : But they have this Difadvantage, that they cannot be 
 put in Practice upon all Occafions j nor is it eafy to make Obfer 
 vations at Sea, becaufe of the Ship's Motion, before taken Notice 
 of; therefore it is, that a Piece of Clock-woi4c, going true 
 with the Sun, would render the Bufinefs more eafy and certain 
 for Seamen. For then they need only to obferve the Moment.of 
 Time when they left a Place whofe Longitude is known, ana fet 
 the Clock to that Time, which would ftill fhew the Hour of that 
 Place, in what Part foever of the Ocean they fail to; and finding 
 the Hour of the Place they are in by Obfervv.iicn, they have 
 given, as before, the Longitude of the Place they are in. But 
 the Misfortune i?, thefe Clocks, how perfeft foever they may be 
 made, fhew the Hours in Places of different Latitudes, different 
 from thofe of the Place they were made for ; pecafioned by the 
 Earth's being an oblate Spheroid, as we have fhewn, or higher in 
 the Equatorial and lower in the Polar Regions j the Confequence 
 of which i?, that different Diftances from the Earth's Centre caufe 
 different Vibrations of a Pendulum, that is, Gravity is lefs confi- 
 derable in Countries approaching the Equator than in Places near 
 either Pole. And hence proceeds that Retardation of the Motion 
 of a Pendulum, fo often obferved towards the Equator : Not but 
 the Retardation may, in a great meafure, be owing to Lxpanfion, 
 iu^] the different Denfity of the Atmofphere. 
 
 M 3 Pp.-
 
 $66 Qf Aftfonoihical and Part J. 
 
 PaobCem XXXVIII. 
 
 To reprefent the Earth on the Plane of the General Meridian (the 
 Eye being 90 from the primitive, okfer'ving the obverfe hetni- 
 jphere). 
 
 A Map is the Refemblance cf the Earth on a plain Superficies; 
 on which Account it falls veryfhort of the Globe, becaufe it can 
 never exhibit the true "Dimenfions of a fpherical Body, nor the 
 Figure, Di fiance, Fofition and Proportion of Places fituated upon 
 it, with the fame Accuracy as Globes. However, Maps have 
 this Advantage of Globes, that we are not obliged to reprefeht 
 'the whole Earth, as we are on a Globe, but only as much as we 
 think fit, from a Quarter of the World to a Kingdom, Province, 
 Or Dilhift of the fmalieft Dimenfion ; then they are abundantly 
 more particular, and give a more complete View of Places, and, 
 if too great a Part of the Earth be not exhibited, the Reprefentation 
 will not fall very fhortof the Globe for Exaclnefs. 
 
 The Lineaments of the Projection, according ro this Problem, 
 being drawn, by the Rules demenftrated in Chap. V. places may 
 be inferted by the Help of a Table of Latitude and Longitude, or 
 all things may be readily transferred upon the Plane of the Repre- 
 fentation from a correal Map : For, by having the Latitude and 
 Longitude of any Place, the Point of Interfettion of the Meridian 
 and Parallel of Latitude will be the true Situation of that Place, 
 which being found in the Map, may be marked, and the Name, 
 whether Town, Cape, Ifland, &c. wrote down. This Projection 
 vary agreeahly exhibits the Hemifphere intercepted between the 
 two Poles, wherein are reprefented Europe, Afia and Africa: But 
 jndeed this Reprefentation has this Defect, that the Degrees of the 
 'Equator are unequal ; alfo the Spaces between the Meridians and 
 Parallejs increafe, the nearer thefe Circles are to the primitive 
 Circle or General Meridian, and Equator, in a much greater Por- 
 portion than they ought to. do. If we would project 3 Map of 
 any Quarter or Portion of the Earth, which will be lefs than a 
 Hemifphere, the Projection milil be made proportionable to the 
 'Extent' of the Map we defjgn to draw, and then cut out fo much 
 thereof as is determined by the greateft Degree of Latitude and 
 Longitude of the Portion of the Earth to be reprefented. From 
 what has been fa;d we may conceive, that the true Diftance of 
 Places on a general Map is not to be found, by ufing the Com- 
 
 ?afres, as was taught' in Chap. IV. but in Maps, exhibiting 
 ^ rovinces, or Diltridts of a large Scale,, the Diftance of Placed 
 4t obtained by this Method, accurately enough. But the 
 Latitudes and Longitudes of Places are as < xncily fhewn by the 
 lion ef this Prcbkm, as they are on the Globe. 
 
 Pfo-
 
 Chap. VIII. Geographical Problems." 7 
 
 Problem XXXJX. 
 
 To proiec? the Earth on the Plane of the Horizon, (the Eye being-in 
 I the Nadir). 
 
 There is greater Variety in this, than in any other Proje&ion. 
 The Place where we are is the Centre, from which the Defign f 
 this Reprefentation is to exhibit the Diftance and Situation of a|l 
 other Places. The Lineaments of this Projection being drawn, 
 by Prob. VIL Chap. V. a much greater Part of the Surface of 
 the Earth may be reprefented in this Projection than any other, 
 that is, fuppofing London to be the Centre ; for Europe, Africa, 
 and Afia, excepting a Part of China, are entirely exhibited ; all 
 North America, and the beil Half of South America, are likewife 
 taken in on the Plane of this Reprefentation, by inferting the 
 Places according to their Latitudes and Longitudes. The Angle 
 of Pofition, and Diftances of Places from London are, in this Pro- 
 jection, found without much Trouble ; for a central Ruler, gra- 
 duated with the fame Parts into which the Radius of the Horizon 
 is divided, being moved about the Centre of the Plane of the Pri- 
 mitive, to any Place, mews their Diftance ; and the Degree, c/i 
 the graduated Periphery of the Plane of the Projection, cut by the 
 Ruler, gives the Angle of Pofition. But if we would not c 
 the Projection to an Hemifphere, we may bring London ( on the 
 Globe ) to the Brazen Meridian, and elevate the Pole according 
 to its Latitude : Then let the Quadrant of Altitude be fixt in the 
 Zenith, and applied to every Place whofe Situation we would repre- 
 fer.t, and obferve the Angles of Pofition from London, and ; 
 fame time how many Degrees of the Quadrant lie betwee-. 
 don and the Places ; for thofe Degrees fhew the Diftances from the 
 Centre of the Projection. At each Application of the Quadrat. 
 of Altitude, we may find the Diftance of many Places, and ; ' 
 Places lying under the Edge of the QuadraDt have the fame Por- 
 tion. If we would have the Latitudes and Longitudes alfo, they 
 may be inferted as before. The Diftances and Pofitiqns of Place*, 
 thus obferved, may be transferred into a Map, by fixing one En^l 
 of the central Ruler, (divided into the fame equal Parts with the 
 Radius of the primitive Circle or Horizon ) in the Point / 
 that it may move about in the Horizon, according to the .'. 
 of Pofition of the Places to be laid down, and by making IVLnk.- 
 clofe to the Edge of the Scale, at the Degree; and Miiiu'. 
 which tie Places are diftanc from London.. 
 
 M 4 I'ro-
 
 i6l ' 0/ Aftronomical and Parti. 
 
 Problem XL. 
 
 Ttf refrefent the Earth on the Plane of the Equator (the Eye helng 
 
 in the Axis looking upon the oh-verfe Hemifphert ) . 
 
 The Lineaments of a Map of this Nature are drawn by Prob. 
 I. II. III. IV. and V. of Chap. V. Afia and Europe are beft repre- 
 fented by this Projection ; the Frigid Zones, Tartary, or North 
 America feparately. But if we would have Maps of the Earth, 
 according to the various Projections, for the Curiofity of feeing 
 the different Figures they make, we may draw the Earth in two 
 Hemifpheres, as well by this as the Meridional Projection. The 
 Latitude and Longitude of a Place may, readily, be found on this 
 Equatorial Projection, and as exactly as on a Globe : But the 
 jnutual Pofition and Diftance of Places cannoc always be known in 
 this Reprefentation, which is alfo attended with this other Incon- 
 venience, that Countries are not herein exhibited according to their 
 refpeCtive Magnitudes, thofe near the Equator taking up more 
 Room than proportionably they fhould. 
 
 Thefe are the general Projections of the Maps, now in Ufe ; 
 whereof the Meridional Reprefentation is the moft common j but 
 the Quarters, or any large Portions of the Earth, are exhibited, 
 fome by Prob. XXXVIII. as thofe of San/on, others by the 
 XXXIXth and laft Problem, as thofe of de Vljle. 
 
 Mr. Wright, confidering that all circular Projections of the 
 Sphere were unfit for Sea Ufes, becaufe the exact Pofition and 
 Diftances cannot be found without fome Trouble, invented an- 
 other Kind of Projection, in which all the Meridians and Parallels 
 are reprefented by parallel Right Lines, the Meridians being 
 drawn at equal Diftances from each other, and the Parallels fo as 
 to have their Diftances increafe in the fame Proportion as their 
 Diameters in going from the Equator decreafe. In this Projection 
 ( commonly called MercatoSs Chart ) the Bearing of Places is 
 truly exhibited, which is of excellent Ufe in Navigation; but 
 tho' it is moft ufeful in this refpeCt, it has this great Difadvan- 
 tage, that it diftorts the Figure and Magnitude of Countries 
 more than any other Projection. 
 
 There is a Map, commonly called the Plain or Right-lined 
 Chart : As this Reprefentation is of all others moft eafy, fo it is 
 the moft erroneous ; having fprung from the Notion the Antients 
 had of the Earth, which they imagined to be a large circular 
 Plain, like a round Table, extended ad infinitum, pafling thro' the 
 Heavens themfelves. Any Part, within twenty Degrees on either 
 Side of the Equator, may be exhibited near enough by this 
 Method. '" 
 
 But
 
 Chap. VIII. Geographical Problems." 169 
 
 But the Projection commonly ufed by Geographers, in the Re- 
 prefentation of particular Places is this : Ptolemy, to remedy in 
 fome meafure the Inconveniencies of the Plain Chart, invented a 
 Method of drawing Maps, which expreffes the Inclination of the 
 Meridians ( by Right Lines ) towards the Poles, and confequently 
 is more agreeable to Truth than the laft. But the greater the 
 Projection of this Nature is, the more erroneous ; however, a 
 particular Map, drawn by this Method, may be exaft enough. 
 
 It wpuld, I think, be needlefs to infert here the Marks be- 
 longing to Aftronomical, Natural, Civil, and Ecclefiaftical Geo- 
 graphy ; for they are ufually, in good Maps, explained in fome 
 void Space thereof. 
 
 If the young Student has regularly proceeded thus far, he will, 
 I prefume, jultly conclude, that, in order clearly and fully to 
 underftand a Defcription of the Earth, according to all its vari- 
 ous Properties and Celeftial Appearances, an Introduction to the 
 Mathematics very properly precedes it. There are indeed 
 many Things in the foregoing Pages, that, feemingly, have no 
 immediate Connection with the Subject of Geography ; but then 
 it may be confidered, that they ferve to a further Acquaintance 
 with the noble Science of Aftronomy, and that what Improve- 
 ments Geography may receive is chiefly expe&ed from the 
 Aftronomer. 
 
 A SYSTEM
 
 [ *7 ] 
 
 A 
 
 S Y STEM 
 
 
 O F 
 
 GEOGRAPHY- 
 
 part u. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 Of the Creation of the Terraqueous Globe. 
 
 , N a Chaos, the true Change that would follow 
 from mechanical Principles, and natural Caufes, is, 
 that, if all were fluid, the heavieft and folideft 
 Bodies would fubfide, and fall to the Centre, every 
 one taking Place according to its fpecific Gravity : 
 Hence the lighter Bodies would always be forced 
 uppermoft : The Earth therefore, being heavier 
 than Water, mull of Neceflity place itfelf nigh the Centre, and 
 Jeave the Water to cover the Face of the whole Orb : Confequently 
 the Surface of the Earth could never be inhabited by Mankind. 
 Hence, the original Formation of the Terraqueous Globe was the 
 Refult of the Almighty Fiat, and not of the neceflary and eflen- 
 tial Laws of Motion and Gravitation. 
 
 We may well wonder at the wild and extravagant Fancy of fome 
 who imagine, that unthinking Matter could of itfelf, without 
 fome fupreme and intelligent Director, fall into a regular and 
 beautiful Structure, fucb. as the primitive Earth was, when it came 
 
 out
 
 Chap. I. Of the Creation, &c. 171 
 
 out of the Hands of its Almighty .Creator ; the Parts whereof be- 
 ing fo extremely well adapted to the various Ufes of the Inhabit- 
 ants, evidently" fhew, they had been the Refult of Wifdom and 
 Contrivance. 
 
 And as the Earth was not formed by mechanical Principles., and 
 natural Caufes, fo neither did it exilt an habitable Earth ab eeterno, 
 but is perifhable, and in time will be laid under Water. For 
 Winds, Rains, and Storms would, in Tract of Time, level all the 
 Mountains, or rather lay them under Water ; for whatfoever 
 moulders, or is wafh'd away from them, is carried down into the 
 lower Ground?, and into the Sea, and nothing is ever brought back 
 again by any Circulation ; their Lofies are not repaired, nor any 
 proportionabieRecruits made from any other Part of Nature: So as 
 the higher Parts of the Earth being continually fpending, and the 
 lower continually gaining, they mull of Neceflity, at length, come 
 to an Equality ; and the -Waters that lie in the lower Parts, and in 
 the Chanels and Valleys, being filled up with Earth, would be 
 thruft out and rife evcry-where ; fo that the Earth would in time 
 be all under Water, and confequently uninhabitable by Mankind. 
 Indeed the Air and little Drops of Rain would deface the ftrongefl' 
 and proudeft of the Mountains, and beat down the Rocks into the 
 Sea, and the Hills into the Valleys ; perhaps not in Ten thoufand 
 Years ; but take Twenty, take a Million, for 'tis all one, we may 
 take the one as eafily as the other out of Eternity, and they make 
 equally this Confequence, that in time the Face of the whole 
 Earth would be deftroyed by natural Caufes. 
 
 Then, as to the Vegetable and Animal World, there is, fays 
 the excellent Dr. Burnet, more of Thought and Contrivance, more 
 of exquifite Invention, and fit Difpoution of Parts, than is in all 
 the Temples, Palaces, Ships, Theatres, or any other Pieces of 
 Architecture the World ever yet faw ; and not Architecture only, 
 but all other Mechanifin whatfoever, Engines, Ciock-work, or 
 any other, is not comparable to the Body of a living Creature. 
 Seeing then we acknowledge thefe artificial Works, wherefoever 
 we meet with them, to be the Effects of Wit, L nderftanding and 
 Reafon ; is it not manifeft Partiality, or Stupidity rather, to deny 
 the Works of God, which excel thefe in nil Degrees, to proceed 
 from an intelligent Principle ? Let them take- ar;y Piece of humart 
 Art, or any Machine framed by the Wit of Man, and compare it 
 with the Body of an Animal, either for Divcrfity or Multiplicity 
 of Parts, or juft Connection and Dependence of one Thing upon 
 another, or fit Subjferviency to the Erids propos'd of Life, Motion, 
 Ufe, and Ornament to the Creature ; And if, in all thefe refpects, 
 they find it fuperior to any Work" of human Production, why 
 Id it be thought to proceed frcm inferior and fenielefs Caufes ? 
 
 Ought
 
 I 
 
 172 Of Subtendinous Caverns, tec. Part II. 
 
 Ought we not in this, as well as in other refpe&s, to proportion 
 the Caufes to the Efifetts, and to fpeak Truth, and bring an honeffi 
 VerdicT: for God as well as for Art ? 
 
 CHAP. II. 
 
 Of the Subterraneous Caverns, Subterraneous 
 JVaters, Subterraneous Tafjages, Mountains, 
 Rocks, Plains, Valleys 5 with an Hypothecs 
 concerning their Caufes. 
 
 TH E Globe of the Earth is divided into Sea and Land, with- 
 out any feeming Regularity in the Portions either of the 
 one or of the other. In the Sea are Iflands fcattered up and down, 
 great Rocks Hand reared up in the Waters, the Promontories and 
 Capes fhoot into the Sea, and Bays and Creeks on the other hand 
 run as much into the Land, and thefe alfo without any apparent 
 Order or Uniformity : Then, on the Land, are feen many ghaftly 
 Caverns, gaping Orifices, and dreadful fubterraneous PafTages. 
 
 Thefe have been generally thought the EfFedls of fome great 
 Event, fome terrible Change in Nature, fuch as that fatal Inunda- 
 tion in the Days of Noah, that overfpread the Face of the whole 
 Earth, and in fuch Excef?, that the Floods over-reached the Tops 
 of the higheft Mountains, the Rains defcending after an unufual 
 Manner, and the Fountains of the great Deep being broke open, 
 fo as a general Deitruftion and Devaftation was brought upon the 
 whole Earth, and its Inhabitants. I fhall inquire whether, by 
 making fome additional Circumftances to this Event, the Irregu- 
 larities obfervable in the Frame of the Earth, outward and inward, 
 may not be the immediate Confequences of this difmal Tranf- 
 aclion, which, the facred Pages inform us, was brought to pafs by 
 the immediate Hand of God. But fome Gentlemen have under- 
 taken to explain this general Devaflation by natural Means only, 
 tho' they muft, undoubtedly, have been perfuaded, that many 
 Parts of their ownTheories were built upon very precarious Found- 
 ations, and that, at Ieaft, a Part of this Event was above Philo- 
 fophy, and eftettcd by a fupernatural Power. For, in our Inquiry 
 into Things of this Nature, Reafon may be our Guide; and when 
 that falls fhort, we may receive further Afliftance from the Scri- 
 pture ; both thefe are of divineOriginal, God is theAuthor of both; 
 he that indited the facred Pages, made and gave us our Faculties : 
 And the fupernatural Parts of this Event, wrought by him who has 
 
 the
 
 Chap. II. Of Subterraneous Caverns , &c7 172 
 
 the Power to change the Courfe of Nature, may be the fitter to 
 procure Belief, as they are beyond the Reach of Philofophy, and 
 come fo well attefted to us in Holy Writ. 
 
 If thefe Gentlemen had entertained but little Regard for the 
 Scripture, yet they might eafily conclude, that there have been 
 ltrange Diforders and Confufions in Nature ; and as their Re- 
 fearches into the Caufes of them were attended with fo many dif- 
 tratting and infuperable Difficulties, when Reafon and Philofophy 
 had gone to the End of the Tether, they ought to have brought 
 an honeft Verdidt for the divine Hiflorian, that fome Parts of this 
 Deftru&ion were effected by the Hand of God ; and thereby the 
 Authority due to the Scripture might have been preferved by their 
 Readers. The Enemy to Revelation judges the Univerfal Deluge 
 impoflible, and no wonder then that he aflerts, that fuch a Deluge 
 is altogether inceedible, and that there never was nor could be any 
 fuch Event. But the Theorifts, to prove him miflaken, undertake 
 to fhew it poffible, by fecond Caufes, and pretend to folve all the 
 Parts of the Phenomena ; and thereupon they ground a frefh Ob- 
 jection to the Truth and Authority of Mofes^s Writings. 
 
 Before I proceed on my intended Inquiry, I (hall prefent the 
 Reader with a fhort View of the Hypothefes of two of the moft 
 celebrated Writers on this Subject ; and (hall fubjoin an Aniwer 
 ( chiefly from the Examinations of Dr. Kdl) to a fundamental Part 
 of each of their Schemes : To which I fhall add a fhort View cf 
 the Account of the Deluge by Dr. Woodward. 
 
 
 SECT. I. 
 
 Of Dr. Burnet'j Theoryi 
 
 This Celebrated Author, after he had framed the Antediluvian 
 Earth, as he imagines, by the fole Help of natural and mechani- 
 cal Caufes, afferts, that the Axis was perpendicular to the Plane 
 of the Ecliptic, and confequently the beft Pofition it could have : 
 The Confequences, he fays, would be a perpetual Spring, which 
 was then all the World over, all the Parts of the Year being of 
 one and the fame Tenor, Face and Temper : Then, fays he, there 
 Was no Winter nor Summer, Seed-time nor Harvelt, but a conti- 
 nual Temperature of the Air, and Verdure of the Earth. Then 
 the Surface of the Antediluvian Globe was fmooth, regular, and 
 uniform, without Mountains, and without a Sea. 
 
 As to the Axis being perpendicular to the Plane of the Ecliptic, 
 this is fo far from being the bed Pofition.that it is one of the worlt it 
 could have ; and that therefore the Axis was never in this Direction, 
 if we f.ippofe, that the gracious Parent of us all placed the Earth, 
 hi the Bi-ginnin, in fuch ?. Pcfitioc as was meft advantageous to its 
 
 needy
 
 174 0/ Subterraneous Caverns , Sec. Part II. 
 
 needy Inhabitants. But the prefent Inclination of the Axis is far 
 the belt ; for, from the Demonstrations of Dr. Halley and Dr. Keilj 
 Places beyond 45 of Latitude have more of the Sun's Heat 
 throughout the Year, and from 45 to the Equator lefs Heat, by 
 the prefent Inclination, than if the Sun always moved in the Equa- 
 tor. Again, the greateil Part of the Temperate Zones, in a per- 
 pendicular Pofition, would not have had a fufficient Quantity of 
 Heat to ripen the Productions of the Earth j for we are very fen- 
 fible, here in England, that the Heat we have in Summer is but 
 juft great enough to bring our Corn to Perfection : And therefore 
 if the Heat we have in Summer were no greater than what we 
 have about the 10th of March or nth of September, the Ground 
 would not be able to fupply us with NecefTaries. 
 
 The Doctor afferts, there were neither Mountains nor Seas in 
 the Antediluvian Earth : But the Anfwer is, that there was a pro- 
 portional Surface of the Ocean to afford a proper Supply of thofe 
 Vapours defign'd for the Ufe of the Earth ; for if there were 
 but half the prefent Surface of the Seas, ( the Whole whereof is 
 judged nearly equal to the whole dry Land at prefent) then there 
 were not Vapours enough, by about Two-thirds, and confequently 
 not Springs or Rivers fufficient to fupply the Wants of the Ante- 
 diluvians. Again, without Mountains the Inhabitants of the pri- 
 mitive Earth would have had no Rivers, no frefh Currents of 
 Waters; and furely they would want one of the principal Comforts 
 of a needy Life : For the Vapours are raifed copioufly in the Sea, 
 and by the Winds carried over the Land to the Mountains, where 
 they are condenfed, and running down, the Sides of thefe Moun- 
 tains, and, uniting, form little Rivulets or Brooks ; many of thefe 
 again meeting in one common Valley, and gaining the plain 
 Ground, being grown lefs rapid, become a River. Thus much in 
 general for the Surface of the Doctor's primitive Earth to the 
 Time of the Deluge. In order to account for which, he fays, that 
 the Height of the Sun, acting continually upon the Earth,, did, 
 in the Space of fome Hundreds of Years, reduce it to a confider- 
 able Degree of Drynefs, making great Cracks in the Earth, in 
 certain Farts ; and did alfo much rarefy and exhale the Waters in 
 the Bowels of the Earth, which, he fays, were fhut up at the 
 Creation of the World, by the Subfidence of the Materials and 
 Ingredients of all Bodies, mingled in Confuhon one with another* 
 without any Order of higher or lower, heavier or lighter, folid or 
 
 volatile. Let a reprefent the Central Solid, b the 
 See Fig. I. Great Abyfs, c the Cruft fultained by its Manner of 
 
 Connruclion. This is the inward Frame of the pri- 
 ze Y:,:r:h according to this Gentleman's Account. Fie ys< 
 that cor.tidering the Structure; of it, the exterior Crult c, and the 
 .: under i: b, may be fitly compared to an ^Eolipi'c or hollow 
 
 Sphef*
 
 ayei*j4
 
 Chap. II. Of Subterraneous Caverns, &c. 1 73 
 
 Sphere with Water in it, which the Heat of the Fire rarefies, and 
 tarns into- Vapour or Wind ; the Sun here is the Fire, and the ex- 
 terior Earth c the Shell of the JEolipile, and the Abyfs b the Wa- 
 ter within it. As foon then as the Heat of the Sun had reached 
 the Waters in the Abyfs, it began to rarefy them, and raife them 
 into Vapours ; by which Rarefaction, they requir'd more Room 
 than they had before, and, finding themfelves pent in by the Cruft 
 c, they preffed withViolence againit the Arch c, to make it yield, 
 and give way to their Dilatation. And by this means the Earth 
 was broken, and the Frame of it torn in Pieces as by an Earth- 
 quake ; and thofe great Portions or Fragments into which it was 
 divided, fell down into the Abyfs, fome in one Pofture, and fomc 
 in another, and was the Caufe of a general Deluge. 
 
 Now, it is certain, that when the Heat of the Sun is moft in- 
 tenfe upon the Surface, it would be alfo moll intenfe within the 
 Cruft : But in Vaults and Caves there is no fenfible Alteration of 
 Heat in Summer and Winter, even tho' they have a Communica- 
 tion with the open Air ; and in the deep Pits of the Royal Obfer- 
 vatory in Paris, it is found, by frequent Experience, that a Ther- 
 mometer placed there, in the coldeft Day in Winter, does not fen- 
 fibly vary from what it was in the greateft Heat in Summer. Since 
 then the Heat of the Sun does not penetrate the Earth, fo as to be 
 fenfible even for the fmall Space that we are able to dig through, 
 how can we imagine it poflible, that it fhould ever reach theAbyfs, 
 through the whole exterior Cruft c, fo as to be able to heat the 
 Water, and raife it into Vapour ? 
 
 But the Dodlor fays, there was a continual Summer in the Ante- 
 diluvian Earth ; and therefore if the Heat of the Sun made a Crack 
 in theEarth in one Year, there being noWinter or Rains to repair the 
 Chaps that were made in theCruft,thisCrack would continually grow 
 deeper, till at laft it would reach the Surface of the Abyfs. For 
 the mathematical Anfwer to this Argument, for Brevity's fake, I 
 muft refer my Reader to Dr. KeiTs Examination of the Theory, 
 p, 1 zi. But without that Trouble, it may be anfwered thus : We 
 have feen, that of Necefiity there muft have been Rains ; and Ex- 
 perience teaches us, that in the Torrid Zones, when the Sun is 
 vertical to any Place, there falls Inch a Quantity of Rain, as cooh 
 the Air and Ground, making thereby the Heat of the Sun very 
 tolerable ; therefore the Dodlor's Chaps and Cracks might have 
 been repaired, and thereby prevented the Sun from penetrating 
 quite through the thick Arch. Again, there are Places in the 
 Earth that lie near the Equator, where there is little Variety of 
 Seafons, and where the Heat of the Sun beats very ftrongly upon 
 thrni throughout the whole Year ; and yet there are none of theie 
 great Cracks ind Chaps, tho' the Aftion of the Sun has been above 
 tferice u long upon them as upon the Antediluvian World. Con- 
 
 fequently
 
 176 Of Subterraneous Caverns, Sec. Part It 
 
 fequently the Frame of the Earth could not have been broken, nor 
 any Deluge happened, according to the Doctor's Philofophy. 
 However, to do Juftice to the Memory of this Gentleman, it 
 muft be allowed, that no Book ever abounded with more beauti- 
 ful Scenes and furprifing Images of Nature : His lofty Style, the* 
 noble and elegant Defcriptions he gives through the Whole, fuffici- 
 ently reward and entertain the Reader for his Time and Money. 
 
 SECT. II. 
 
 Of Mr. Whiftori's Theory. 
 
 Mr. Whifton afferts, that the primitive Earth was founded or 
 fituated on the Surface of the Waters, or of a deep and vaft fub- 
 terraneous Fluid (See the laft Scheme) ; that the Seas and Rivers, 
 dry Land and Mountains, were, in a great meafure, the fame as at 
 prefent, and in the fame Places generally as they ftill are 5 that the 
 Inhabitants were vaflly more numerous than at this Time. This 
 was his State of the Earth before the Deluge ; at which Time he, 
 by convincing Arguments, makes it appear, that a Comet came 
 very near and pafled by the Earth : When it was below the Moon, 
 he fuppofes that it would raife a vaft and ftrong Tide, both on the 
 Seas that were on the Surface, and in the Abyfs which was under 
 the Cruft in the laft Scheme, in the fame Manner as the Moon 
 does at prefent in the Ocean ; that this Tide would begin to rife 
 and increafe all the Time of the Approach of the Comet, and 
 would be at its greateft Height when the Comet was at its leaft Di- 
 llance from the Earth. By this Tide, and the Attraction of the 
 Comet, he fuppofes that the Abyfs would put on the Figure of 
 an Oval, whofe Surface being much larger than the former fpheri- 
 cal one, the exterior Cruft of the Earth, which lay upon it, muft 
 conform itfelf to the fame Figure; which it could not do as long a* 
 it remained folid and conjoined, and therefore it muft of Neceflity, 
 by the violent Force of the Tide, be ftretched and broken, and 
 have innumerable Fiffures made quite through it. After this he 
 fuppofes, that the Comet, in its Defcent towards the Sun, pafling 
 clofe by the Earth, involved it in its Atmofphere and Tail for a 
 conftderable Time, and left prodigious Quantities of condenfed and 
 expandedVapours on its Surface, a great Part of which, being very 
 much rarefy'd after their primary Fall, would be immediately 
 drawn up into the Air again, and afterwards defcend in violent and 
 outrageous Rains upon the Earth, and would be the Caufe of the 
 Forty Days Rain mentioned in Scripture. The other great Rain, 
 which, together with the former, lafted an Hundred and Fifty- 
 Days, was occafioned by the Earth's being involved a fecond time 
 Comet's TaiJ, from which, and from its Atmofphere, he de- 
 rives
 
 Chap. II. Of Subterraneous Caverns ; &t.' 177 
 
 rives one Half of the Water which ferved for the Deluge. The 
 other Half was deduced from the fubterraneous Abyfs, the Fluid 
 whereof being forced upon the Surface of the Earth, by the vaft 
 and prodigious Preflure of the incumbent Water derived from the 
 Comet's Atmofphere and Tail, which he fuppofes would prefs 
 downwards with a mighty Force, and endeavour to fink the out- 
 ward Cruft of the Earth into the Abyfs ; by which vaft Quantities 
 of the fubterraneous Fluid would be forced and raifed upon the 
 Surface of the Earth, through the Cracks and Fiflures, that were 
 made in the Cruft by the Violence of the Tide in the Abyfs. 
 
 By thefe Methods Mr. Whifion fuppofes there was Water enough 
 brought on the Surface to cover the Face of the whole Earth, 
 to the perpendicular Height of above three Miles, that is, above 
 the Tops of the higheft Mountains. ut he further fuppofesj that 
 neither the Water which was derived from the Comet; nor that 
 which was forced up from the Bowels of the Earth, was pure ele- 
 mentary Water, but rather a thick and muddy Fluid, heavier than 
 Water, which funk to the Bottom, and covered the Surface of the 
 Earth for the Depth of 1 66 Feet. After having formed the De- 
 luge, his next great Work is to remove thefe Waters which were 
 brought upon the Earth j and this, he fays, was performed by a 
 Wind, which dried up fome, and forced the reft through the Cracks 
 and Fiflures of the Earth, into the Abyfs, from whence a greaS 
 Part of them had been before derived. 
 
 Thefe are the Suppofitions by which this ingenious Author pra- 
 pofes to himfelf to account for all the Phenomena of the Deluge. 
 But tho' it fhould be allowed, that fome of the foregoing Particu- 
 lars are truly philofophical, yet his Method of difpofing of fuch a 
 vaft Colle&ion of Waters again is very unfatisfa&ory, for the fol- 
 lowing Reafons : Firft, it is certain, that, during the 150 Days 
 the Waters of the Deluge were rifing to their Height, the Pores 
 and Interftices of the dry Earth were fufficiently faturated, 
 but to ,what Depth is very uncertain ; however, the Wa- 
 ters of the Flood could not fink very low, becaufe of the frequent 
 Interpofitions of tough Clay, common Stone, Mould, Whin-ftone> 
 Coal, metalline Ores, and the like. Then, whatever Cracks or 
 Fiflures there were, through which the Abyfs and the Waters of 
 the Surface had a Communication, thefe muft neceflarily have been 
 filled before the Flood began to prevail on the Surface of the Earth. 
 Then there was on the Earth, on the 150th Day, a Collection of 
 Water equal to a Cylinder whofe Bafe is the Superficies of the 
 Earth, and Height three Miles ; which, according to the common 
 Computation of Theorifts, is more by 32 times than we have at 
 prefent. But Mr. Whifion allows, that only a very inconfiderable 
 Part of this vaft Body of Water was carried off by Winds ; there- 
 fore the Method he offers for difpofing of the Waters of the De- 
 
 N luge
 
 178 Of Subterraneous Caverns, Sec. Part II . 
 
 luge, when they had dbne their Bufinefs, is very unfatisfaclory : 
 Confequently, all the Parts of the Phenomena are not demonftra- 
 tively folved by the Philofophy of this Theory. 
 
 We cannot but acknowledge, that this Gentleman has made 
 greater Difcoveries, and proceeded on more philofophical Prin- 
 ciples, than all the Theorifts before him have done. It muft alfo 
 raife Admiration in us, when we confider the ftrange Co-incidents 
 by which he makes it appear, that a Comet, on the Day the De- 
 luge began, paffed by the Earth. 
 
 SECT. III. 
 
 Of the Account of the Deluge by Dr. Woodward. 
 
 Dr. Woodward fays, that at the Time of the Deluge, 1. The 
 Water of the Ocean was brought upon the Earth, that it was im- 
 mediately fucceeded by the Waters of the Abyfs, which were like- 
 wife drawn out on the Face of the Globe. 2. The Particles of 
 fitone, Marble, and all other folid Foffils, in ftiort all Bodies what- 
 foever that were on the Earth, or that conftituted the Mafs of it, 
 the whole Terreftrial Globe was diflblv'd, and aftumed up pro- 
 mifcuoufly into the Water, and fuftained in it, in fuch a Manner, 
 that the Water and Bodies together made up one common confufed 
 Mafs. 3. The Mafs, thus born up into the Waters, was again 
 precipitated, and fubfided towards the Bottom ; and this Subfidence 
 happened generally according to the Laws of Gravity, as near as 
 could poflibly be expected in fo great a Confufion : But the Terre- 
 ftrial Matter that firft fubfided did not defcend down quite to the 
 Centre, but flopped at a Diftance from it, and formed an arched 
 Expanfum, or rather a Sphere, around it, which is now the loweft 
 Stratum and Boundary of that vaft Conceptacle of Water. 4. The 
 Strata of Marble, and of all other folid Matter, attained their So- 
 lidity, as foon as the Sand, or other Matter, whereof they con- 
 fifted, was arrived at the Bottom, and well fettled there. 5. This 
 very various Mifcellany of Bodies being determined to Subfidence 
 in this Order, merely by their different fpecific Gravities, all thofe 
 which had the fame Degree of Gravity fubfided at the fame Time, 
 fell into and compofed the fame Stratum ; fo that thofe Shells, and 
 other Bodies, that were of the fame fpecific Gravity with Sand, 
 funk down together with it, and fo became inclofed in the Strata 
 of Stone which that Sand formed or conftituted : Thofe which 
 were lighter, and but of the fame fpecific Gravity with Chalk, in 
 fuch Places of the Mafs where any Chalk was, fell to the Bottom, 
 at the fame time that the chalky Particles did, and fo were in- 
 tomb'd in the Strata of Chalk: And in like manner, all the reft, 
 that accordingly we rev find in the Sand-ftone of all Countries. 
 
 -6. The
 
 Chap. II. Of Subterraneous Caverns^ Sec. 1 79 
 
 6. The Strata thus formed, whether of Stone, f*?c. lying thus on 
 each other, were originally parallel and plain, even and regular* 
 and the Surface of the Earth was likewife even and fpherical ; and 
 the whole Mafs of Water lay then above them all, and conflituted 
 a fluid Sphere environing the Whole. 7. After fome time the 
 Strata were broken on all Sides of the Globe, they were diflocated, 
 their Situation varied, being elevated in fome Places, and deprefs'd 
 in others ; and all the Irregularities and Inequalities of the Terre- 
 flrial Globe were caufed by this Means. 8. Upon the Diflocatioh 
 of the Strata, and the Elevation of fome and the Depreffion of 
 others of them, which followed after that Difruption, towards the 
 latter End of the Deluge, this Mafs of Water fell back again intd 
 the deprefled and lower Parts of the Earth, into Lakes and other 
 Cavities, into the Alveus of the Ocean, and through the Fiffures, 
 into the Abyfs, which it filled till it came to an Equilibrium with 
 the Ocean. 
 
 Here, indeed, as the Doctor fays, we fee a mighty Change, and 
 that attended with Accounts very ftrange and amazing ; a Revolu- 
 tion fo exceeding great and violent, that the very Reprefentation i$ 
 enough to ftartle and fhock the Reader. The Alterations here de- 
 fcribed appear to be all of them above and contrary to the Laws of 
 Nature, and confequently exclude the Philofophy of Second Caules. 
 Notwithstanding they appear fuch, the Dottor promifed to demon- 
 strate ( in a future Treatife, which has not yet appeared } what 
 brought the Waters of the Abyfs on the Surface of the Globe 5 
 what fucceeded in their Room ; what diflblved the Fofiils, &c. 
 What fpared, at that Time, the Animal and Vegetable Subftances ; 
 what flopped the precipitated Matter in the Decent, fo that it did 
 hot fill up the Cavity of the great Abyfs ; by what Means the 
 Strata attained their Solidity, as foon as the Matter Whereof they 
 confifted arrived at the Bottom j what effected the Difruption of the 
 Strata. All thefe Phenomena this Gentleman promifed to account 
 for ; but has only given us the Philofophy why the Strata 
 ranged themfelves in the prcfent Order, viz.. the different Matter 
 whereof they oonfift : But even in this the Doctor's Rule was not 
 obferved. Indeed the Strata near the Surface of the Earth look like 
 a Sediment, where fomething of the Laws of Gravity are obferved; 
 but they will not anfwer the Doftor's Theory fo far down, if any 
 Credit is to be given to Varenius, who fays, that the Strata are not 
 placed according to their different Gravities ; but after the Inter- 
 pofition of both lighter and heavier ones, the fame Strata are re- 
 peated, and the Order is fometimes retrograde. Dr. Leigh alfo, 
 in his Natural Hiftory oSLancafhirc, afferts, that the Strata do not 
 lie according to the Laws of Gravitation. But more of this 
 hereafter. 
 
 N i SECT.
 
 1 80 Of Subterraneous Caverns^ &c. Part IL 
 
 , SECT. IV. 
 
 Having thus briefly exhibited a View of thefe Schemes, I fhall 
 how proceed on my intended Inquiry, namely, whether the Irre- 
 gularities obfervable in the outward and inward Frame of the 
 Earth may not be the immediate Conferences of the univerfal 
 Deluge. And here I freely acknowledge, that many of the Ex- 
 pfeffions in this Section are taken from Dr. Burnet, it being almoft 
 impoffible to convey one's Thoughts in Language more beautiful 
 than that of this molt eloquent Theorift. 
 
 Mofes tells us, that the Fountains of the great Deep were broke 
 open : Here 'tis plain, that by the great Deep we cannot underftand 
 the Sea, or Ocean, under the Form neceflary for the Exhalation 
 of Vapours, fufficient to fupply the Land ; for, to break open a 
 Fountain, is to break open the Ground that covers it, and no 
 Ground covers the Seas or Oceans. Again, as to the Expreffion. 
 of Mofes concerning this Abyfs, if he had meant the Sea by it, 
 and that the Deluge was effected by its Difruption, he would un- 
 doubtedly have faid fo: But there is no Mention of the Sea in all 
 the Hiftory of the Flood. Mofes had made ufe of a Word in Gen. 
 i. 10. that was common, and known to fignify the open Sea ; and 
 if he had intended the fame thing here, he furely would have 
 ufe4 the fame Word, and the fame Term. 
 
 Hence, then, Mofes's Abyfs was fubterraneous, vaft and capaci- 
 ous, and fo difpofed as to be capable of a Difruption, that would 
 bring a Deluge upon the Earth ; not a Deluge that was topical 
 only, or overflowed fome particular Country, but a Deluge that 
 overfpread the Face of the whole Earth, from Pole to Pole, and 
 from Eaft to Weft, and that covered the Tops of the proudeft, 
 Mountains under the whole Heavens; fo that a general Deftruc- 
 tion was brought upon the Earth, and all Things in it, Mankind, 
 and all other living Creatures, excepting Noah, and thofe with 
 him, who, by a fpecial Providence of God, were preferved in a 
 certain Ark or Ship. 
 
 Let A reprefent the folid Frame of the Earth, fuf- 
 SeeFig. III. tained by its Manner of Conftruftion, B the great 
 Abyfs : Then to this may be referred that magnifi- 
 cent Challenge of God Almighty made to holy Job, xxxviii. 4, 5, 
 &c. Where 'waft thou when 1 laid the Foundations of the Earth ? 
 declare, if thou hajWtidctjlandhig. Who laid the Meafures there- 
 'cf, if thou knowejl ? or who hath f retched the Line upon it ? 
 Whereupon are the Foundations thereof faftened? or who laid the 
 Comer-ftone thereof? When the Morning Stars fang together, and 
 all the Sons of God Jhouted for Joy. Again, the Formation of the 
 primitive Earth being a wonderful Piece of Architecture, when it 
 
 was
 
 3Z.2 
 
 'Paaet8o.
 
 Chap. II. Of Subterraneous Caverns^ &c. 1 8 1 
 
 was fpoken of in Scripture, it was ufhered in withPraifeandAdmira- 
 tion : GivePraife to him who alone dothWonders, Pf. cxxxvi. 4, 5, 6. 
 to him that made the Heavens., to him that ftretched out the Earth 
 above the Waters. Again, that Paflage in Prov. viii. 27. fliews 
 the Difpofition of the Waters in the Antediluvian Earth: When 
 the Lord prepared the Heavens, I <was there ; when he fet a Com-' 
 pafs ( Circle, or Orb ) on the Face of the Deep. 
 
 When the appointed Time was come, that God had defigned 
 for the Punifhment of a finful World, the fame Day that Noah 
 and his Family entered the Ark, the Fountains of the great Deep 
 being, on the fame Day, broke open, by the Almighty Fiat, the 
 Waters of the Abyfs guftring out thro' the Fiffures, the Fluid be- 
 ing in this dreadful Motion, would, by their Fall, caufe violent 
 Shocks on the outward Frame of the Earth, deftroying all before 
 them, gliding and falling off any way as Gravity and the Air prefs 
 them, caufmg partial Deluges, and carrying Havock and Devafta- 
 tion with them, and increafing the Surfaces of the Rivers, and of 
 the Seas and Oceans ; thereby the Vapours would be more copi- 
 oufly exhaled and condenfed, and great Rains would immediately 
 defcend, which, together with the dreadful IfTues of the great 
 Deep, would diffufe themfelves every Way, and thereupon all the 
 Valleys, and Plains, and lower Parts of the whole Earth, would, 
 after Forty Days, be filled. In this manner the Waters would 
 exceedingly prevail upon the Face of the whole Earth, and, at 
 length, over-reach the Tops of the higheft Mountains that were 
 under the whole Heavens. 
 
 We may eafily conceive, that the amazing Agitation and Fluc- 
 tuation of the vaft Waves, rolling for Five Months together, on 
 the outward Frame of the Earth, thus torn by the breaking up of ' 
 the Fountains, mud make ftrange Havock and Devaluation, level- 
 ing vaft Mountains, and raifing others. Then again, the boiile- 
 rous Winds adding ftrange Commotions to the Diforder in Nature, 
 would greatly increafe the Wrecking of the miferable Earth, thus 
 wrapt up in this terrible Element. The Earth, thus torn and 
 mangled, being no longer able to bear up againft the amazing Con- 
 fufion on its outward Frame, and the Weight of fuch a great 
 Mafs of Water drawn from its own Bowels, funk under it ; and 
 the Parts about the Cracks and Fiffures, defcending firft towards 
 the Centre, would be inftantly followed by the larger Portions, 
 that would tend or gravitate to each other ; and when the Motiont 
 came on a fudden to be obftrufted, in the central Regions, fuch a 
 Concuflion would arife as would make Thoufands of letter Frag- 
 ments, of all Shapes and Magnitudes, and in all Poftures and 
 Forms ; which leffer Fragments would be found near the Borders 
 of the greater. 
 
 N 3 Befide-
 
 1 8i Of Subterraneous Caverns, Sec. Part II. 
 
 Befides this violent Shock, and Diflocation of the leffer Frag- 
 ments, the larger Portions muft have been ftrangely mangled and 
 <Uiftorted, great Cracks, and frightfulChafms, would be made in the 
 Strata by the terribly Shock, and the different Moulds too muft 
 have given way in this univerfalDiforder ; and, where the Bafes of 
 their Columns met with any of the broken Rocks, they would 
 form themfelves into pyramidal Figures. 
 
 There would be, every now-and then, daring this direful Scene* 
 fome fecondary Ruins, or fome Parts of the great Ruin that were 
 not well fettled, broke again, and thence would arife new Commo- 
 tions ; and it mult be fome Time before the great Fragments, and 
 their leffer Dependencies, would be fo adjufted and fitted, as to 
 reft in a firm and immoveable Pofture ; for the Props and Stays 
 whereby they lean'd or gravitated one upon another, muft have 
 often failed, either by the incumbent Weight, or the violent Im- 
 pulfes of the Waves againft them. The Centre of Magnitude be- 
 ing thus often changed, during the laft Hundred and Fifty Days, 
 the Diforder was renewed and continued by partial Deluges, which 
 are the Confequences of fuch a Change of the Earth's Centre, or 
 Depreffion of the Parts ; and thefe partial Deluges would feem to 
 Noah as the Continuation of the univerfal Flood, which had fwept 
 away the whole Race of Mankind, and all the living Subftances 
 from off the Face of the whole Earth. 
 
 Thus all Nature would be changed j and this fatal Diffolution 
 would have this great and vifible Effect, that when the Agitation of 
 the Waves was affwaged, and the Ruins pretty well fettled, the 
 Waters by Degrees would retire into all the Vacuities and Bottoms, 
 leaving behind them an incredible Sediment on the Surface of the 
 Ruins ; and when the higheft Parts thereof appeared, we might 
 fee the Globe divided into Sea and Land : The Land would confift 
 of Plains, Valleys, and mountainous Heaps, according as the Parts 
 of the Ruins were placed and difpofed ; the Superficies of the 
 Plains would run gradually Hoping down to the Sea Shores, and 
 the Mountains would ftand on the higher Parts of the Continent ; 
 the Rocks and Iflands, and leffer Fragments of the Globe, com- 
 pafs'd round by Water, the middle Part of the Iflands would be 
 lfo more elevated than the reft of them, from which there would 
 lie a Defcent down to the Sea, which is a Confequence of the Sub- 
 fidence of the different Moulds, and the Retiring of the Waves. 
 
 Then as to fubterraneous Waters, and fubicrraneous Caverns, 
 and Hollowneffes, and gaping Orifices, thefe would neceffarily fol- 
 low ; for the Parts would fall hollow, in many Places, in this as in 
 all other Ruins, and the Waters would flow into all thofe hollow 
 Places and Cavities and would alfo'fink and infinuate into many 
 Places of the folid Earth : And thefe fubterraneous Vaults and 
 Holes, whether dry, or full of Water^would be more or lefs in all 
 
 Places
 
 Chap. II. Of Subterraneous Caverns, &c. 183 
 
 Places where the Parts fell ; yet they would be found efpecially 
 about the Roots of mountainous Heaps, and the higher Parts of 
 the Earth ; for there the Sides bearing up one againft the other, 
 they would not lie fo dofe at the Bottoms, but many ghaftly Va- 
 cuities would be interpofed. 
 
 Let us now enquire whether we can find any evident Signs, any 
 Footfteps of this great Change in Nature, any convincing Marks 
 of this fatal Deftruction, and which may favour our Hypothecs of 
 this Event. 
 
 Earthquakes are too evident Demonflrations, that there are in 
 the very Bowels of the Earth ftrange Vacuities ; for if the inward 
 farts of the Globe were found and compact, there could be no fuch 
 thing in Nature. They are commonly accompanied with a heavy 
 dead Sound, like a dull Thunder, that arifeth from the Vapours 
 that are driving in the Womb of Nature, when her Throes are 
 coming upon her. It is no Wonder that different Parts of the 
 Earth are torn, there being Quantities of Exhalations, and Maga- 
 zines of combuftible Matter, treafured up within thefe dreadful 
 holIowPaflages, that are capable of Rarefaction and Inflammation ; 
 and, when the Vapours come to be ftreightened, they flrive every 
 way to fet themfelves at Liberty, and often break their Prifons, or 
 the Cover of the Earth, that keeps them in, which Earth upon 
 that Difruption falls into the fubterraneous Caverns. 
 
 That thefe Caverns, where the Vapours lie, are very large and 
 capacious, we are taught by fad Experience ; for whole Cities, 
 Countries, and Iflands, have been fwallowed up into them > the Pil- 
 lars and Props they flood upon being fhatter'd, they have funk and 
 fallen in, as a Houfe blown up. Witnefs thofe aftonifhing Ra- 
 vages made in Peru, the laft Century, that reach'd feme Hundreds 
 of Miles along the Shore, and many Miles in the Land, levelling 
 vaft Mountains, all along as it went, threw down the Cities, 
 t urn'd the Rivers out of their Chanels, and made univerfal Ha- 
 vock and Confufion ; and all this in fome few Minutes Time. 
 Witnefs alfo that manifeft Heaving- up of the outward Frame of 
 the Earth in many Places of England in 1692. which was imme- 
 diately followed with an Agitation to and fro, without tearing any 
 Part of the outward Frame of the Globe : This Earthquake, being 
 felt the fame time in many foreign Parts, evidently fhews us, that 
 the Train lay beneath the Sea, and argues amazing Vacuities under 
 it. 
 
 If we could go down into the Bowels of the Earth, fee all the 
 dark Chambers and Apartments there, how many ftrange fubter- 
 raneous Paflages, Holes and Caverns, fome filled with Smoak and 
 Fire, fome with Water, and fome withVapour, and mouldy Air, 
 how it lies gaping and torn in the Parts of it, how many little 
 Brooks run murmuring through the dark Grottoes; we lhould, T 
 
 N 4 preiume,
 
 1 84 Of Subterraneous Caverns, &c. Part IL 
 
 prefume, have good Grounds to conclude, that this Difpofition 
 of the inward Parts of the Earth hath fomething unnatural in it, 
 and manifeftly fhews us the Footfteps of fome kind of Ruin ana 
 Diffolution. 
 
 The vaft and prodigious Cavity, which we call the Chanel of 
 the Ocean, runs quite round the Globe, reaches, for aught we 
 know, from Pole to Pole, and is in many Places unfearchably 
 deep ; and, from the Teftimony of Mariners, we may conclude, 
 that there are in it Mountains and Valleys, Pocks and Ridges of 
 Rocks, and all the common Irregularities we fee upon the Land ; 
 alfo Caves and hollow Paffages running into the very Rowels of , the 
 Earth, by which the Seas communicate one with another, and 
 with fubterraneous Waters. Thofe great Eddies, and infamous 
 Syrtes, and Whirlpools that are in fome Seas, that fuck into them, 
 and overwhelm whatever comes within their Reach, fhew that 
 there is fomething below, that fucks from them in proportion, and 
 drinks up the Sea, as the Sea drinks up the Rivers. 
 
 When we prefent this ftrange Gulf to our Imagination, emptied 
 of all its Waters, naked and gaping at the Sun, ftretching its Jaws 
 from one End of the Earth to another, with what Amazement 
 fhould we fee it under us like a wide bottomlefs Pit ! fo deep and 
 vaft, fo broken and confufed, fo every way deform'd ! This would 
 make us wonder from what Caufes it could be thus torn in the 
 Parts of it, and why Rocks are placed in fome Parts of the Sea, 
 that makes the poor wreck'd Mariner expoftulate bitterly withNa- 
 ture, who it was that plac'd that Rock there, and for what Pur- 
 pofe ! Was there not, fays he, Room enough upon the Land, or 
 the Shore, to lay up Rocks, but they muft be thrown in the 
 Middle of the Se3, as it were in fpite to Navigation ? The belt 
 Apology that we can make in this Cafe, may be to confefs, that 
 the whole Sea Chanel is but a Ruin, and in a Ruin Things tumble 
 uncertainly, and commonly lie in Confufion. 
 
 Then what can be more the Figure and Mien of a Ruin, than 
 Crags and Rocks, whether upon the Sea-fhore, or upon the Sides 
 of Mountains ? Befides, thePofture of thefe Rock, which is often 
 leaning, or recumbent, or proftrate, fhews to the Eye, that they 
 have had fome kind of Dislocation from their original Site. And 
 it may be obferved in the Tracts and Regions of the Earth, where 
 we think the Ground is folid and firm, as upon Heaths and 
 Downs, it often betrays its Hollo wnefs, by founding under the 
 Horfes Feet, and the Chariot-wheels that pafs over it ; the greateft 
 Part of theoutwardFrnme of theEarth Handing upon broken Arches 
 andVauIts. In ftiort, tho' the Earth be regular enough to the Eye in 
 fmgleTracts and fingle Regions, yet, if we confider the whole Face 
 of it, we cannot pronounce it that beautiful Earth we might expect, 
 as when it .came fiefti out of the Hands of its Creator : Then 
 
 indeed
 
 Chap. II. Of Subterraneous Cavern s, Sec. 185 
 
 'ndeed we might have feen it without Scar or Wrinkle, adorn 'd 
 with regular fruitful Mountains, and delightful Plains andValleys, 
 Springs and Rivers, regularly difpers'd throughout the whole Sur- 
 face, for the Support of its needy Inhabitants. But the Cafe is 
 now alter'd : We fee many Trafts and Regions of the Globe, un- 
 inhabitable by Mankind, for the Want of Mountains to condenfe 
 the Vapours, and thereby form Springs and Rivers. 
 
 Then what fhall we fay to that furprifing Confufion and Mix- 
 ture of Subftances, in the very Bowels of the Earth ; Mafles of 
 petrified Wood, Bricks, wrought Metals and Rufhes, all in one 
 undiftinguifhed Heap ; Beds of Sea-fhells, Trees, and marine Bo- 
 dies, buried under great Ruins ; and thefe not in particular Places, 
 but throughout the whole Earth ; not only in the lower Grounds, 
 and Hillocks near the Sea, but in the higheft Mountains, far di- 
 ilant from any Sea ? We may then, I prefume, juftly conclude, 
 ;hat thefe unnatural Mixtures of Bodies could not fall into thefe 
 feveral Situations, but by fome fuch Manner of DifTolution . 
 as has been before affigned. Earthquakes indeed do produce the 
 like Effefts, making Havock upon the Face of the Earth, and 
 turning Things upfide down j thefe Caufes continue ftill 
 to aft in Nature. But we do not read, that there have been 
 fuch frequent and univerfal Repetitions of thefe difmal Events, to 
 infer that they have thus turn'd the Earth, as it were, infide out ; 
 and Things of this Nature, being both ftrange and fenfible, excite 
 Admiration, and great Attention, when they come to pafs ; and 
 would certainly have been remember'd or tranfmitted down, in 
 fome way or other, if they had ever happened fmce the Deluge, 
 in fuch a manner as to produce thefe univerfal Effefts. For either 
 Fame hath related, or Hiftory hath recorded, the Foundations of 
 Cities and Monarchies, the Appearance of Comets, Eclipfes, and 
 any thing that looks Prodigy-like ; and furely thefe univerfal 
 Earthquakes would have found a Place in Hiftory, when or where 
 they had happened. 
 
 And as Earthquakes could not have been the fole Caufe of thefe 
 Confufions in the interior Part of the Earth, fo neither was it the 
 univerfal Deluge that could efFeft thefe Mixtures of Bodies there, 
 if it be denied, that the Frame of the Earth was diflocated in fome 
 fuch Manner as I have defcribed. 
 
 For tho' the Strata near the Surface, in many Parts of the 
 Earth, look like a Sediment, where fomething of the Laws of 
 Gravity are obferved ; yet if we dig deep into the Earth, we 
 find that thefe Strata are not always placed exaftly according to 
 their different fpecific Gravities. For, befides what we find in 
 Varenius, p. 46. upon the Authority of Dr. Leigh, in his Natural 
 Hiftory of Lancajbire, the Strata are placed in this Order ; firft a 
 Bed of MarJ, then Free-ftone, next Iron-ftone, then Coal or 
 
 Kennel-
 
 1 86 Divijion of the Habitable %arth, Sec. Part II. 
 
 Kennel-mine, afterwards fome other Strata, and again Coal, &c. 
 And it hath been found, that the fame Strata, after the Interpofi- 
 tion of both lighter and heavier ones, are repeated, and fometimes 
 the Order is retrograde. 
 
 Thus you have a fhort Account how we may conceive the Dif- 
 folution of the Antediluvian World, and the Rife of the prefent 
 out of its Ruins. Nor are there any HollownefTes, Rocks and* 
 Mountains, Precipices and dreadful gaping Orifices, fubterraneous 
 Caverns, fubterraneous Paffages, fubterraneous Waters, or, in fhort, 
 any Irregularities obfervable in the prefent Form of the Earth out- 
 ward ana inward, whereof this Hypothefis doth not give a ready, 
 fair, and intelligible Account. But whether thefe EfFefts are feen 
 in the Caufes affign'd, or the Caufes in the Effefts,, every one hath 
 an undqubted Right to judge as he thinks proper. 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 The T>ivifion of the Habitable Earth, the 
 Jqnare Miles of each <r Divifwn andSubdivifion, 
 Capital Cities, with the 'Diftance and Bear- 
 ing of each from London, alfo the Time of 
 each Country compared with that of England. 
 
 TH E Terraqueous Globe is divided into, 
 
 I. Europe 2,749,349 1 
 
 II. AJia 10,257,487 
 
 III. Africa 8,506,208 
 
 IV. America 9,153,762 
 
 Habitable Earth 30,666,806 
 
 Seas, and unknown Parts ^17,843,821 
 
 l SquareMiles,6o 
 / Miles inLength, 
 to a Degree. 
 
 Superficies of the whole Globe 148,5 10,637/ ' 
 
 Divifioa
 
 Chap. III. Divi/ton of the Habitable Earth, Sec. 187 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 Diftance 
 
 Difference 
 
 Pivifion and Sub- 
 
 Square 
 
 CapitalCities. 
 
 and Bear- 
 
 of Time 
 
 division. 
 
 Miles. 
 
 
 ing from 
 London. 
 
 froTiiLond. 
 
 I. EUROPE. 
 
 
 
 
 *H.M. 
 
 1. Spain 
 
 150,243 
 
 Madrid 
 
 690 S 
 
 16W 
 
 2. Portugal 
 
 27,851 
 
 Lisbon 
 
 840 SW 
 
 38 W 
 
 3. France 
 
 138,837 
 
 Paris 
 
 203 SE 
 
 9E 
 
 4. Italy 
 
 75>57 6 
 
 Rome 
 
 780SE 
 
 52 E 
 
 5. Germany 
 
 181,631 
 
 Vienna 
 
 650 E 
 
 1 5 E 
 
 6. Holland 
 
 9-54 
 
 Amfterdam 
 
 132E 
 
 18E 
 
 7. Denmark 
 
 163,001 
 
 Copenhagen 
 
 480 NE 
 
 50E 
 
 8. Sweden 
 
 228,715 
 
 Stockholm 
 
 720 NE 
 
 1 xoE 
 
 9. RuJJla 
 
 1,103,485 
 
 Petersburg 
 
 1080 NE 
 
 2 2E 
 
 10. Poland 
 
 226,414 
 
 Warfaiu 
 
 766 E 
 
 1 23 E 
 
 1 1. Turkey inEur. 
 
 212,240 
 
 Confiantinoplt 
 
 1300SE 
 
 1 56 E 
 
 12. BritiJkMLes 
 
 105,634 
 
 London 
 
 Firft Meridian. 
 
 TI. ASIA. 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 . Turkey in Ajta 
 
 510,717 
 
 Bur/a 
 
 1396SE 
 
 1 58E 
 
 2. Arabia 
 
 700,000 
 
 Mecca 
 
 2640 SE 
 
 
 ^.Perfia 
 
 800,000 
 
 Ifpahan 
 
 2550E 
 
 3 21 E 
 
 4. India 
 
 1,857,500 
 
 Agra 
 
 3780 E 
 
 5 i5fi 
 
 5. China 
 
 1,105,000 
 
 Pekin 
 
 4380NE 
 
 7 24 E 
 
 6. Afiatic Ifles 
 
 811,980 
 
 
 
 
 7. Tartary 
 
 
 
 
 
 I. Chine fe 
 
 644,000 
 
 Chinyan 
 
 44 So NE 
 
 8 4E 
 
 2. Independent 
 
 778,290 
 
 Samarchand 
 
 2800 E 
 
 4 26 E 
 
 3. Mufcowite 
 
 3,050,000 
 
 Tobolsky 
 
 2412NE 
 
 4 10E 
 
 JII. AFRICA. 
 
 
 
 
 
 I . #/ 
 
 140,700 
 
 Grand Cairo 
 
 1920 SE 
 
 2 10 E 
 
 2. Bare a 
 
 66,400 
 
 Tolemeta 
 
 1440SE 1 1 26 E 
 3580 SE |2 36 E 
 
 3. ^r 
 
 30,000 
 
 Erquiko 
 
 4. FezScMorocco 
 
 1 1 8, 800 
 
 Fez, ScMoroeco 
 
 *) 1080S 
 \ 1290 S 
 
 021 iw 
 
 30 j 
 
 5 . 7rf/ft-/ and fo- 
 
 100,600 
 
 Tafiet and Se- 
 
 5 1376S 
 
 J 1240 S 
 
 3lw 
 18J 
 
 gelmejfe 
 
 
 gelmeffe 
 
 6. Algier 
 
 143,600 
 
 Algier 
 
 920 s 
 
 13E 
 
 7. TaK/V 
 
 54,400 
 
 Tunis 
 
 990 SE 
 
 39 E 
 
 A Degree of Longitude being 4 Minute* in Timr, therefore by having the 
 Longitude we have the Time. A Watch that is fet to Time at Ltndon would he 
 16 Minute* too faft at Madrid, as it lies to the Weft of the Meridian of London : 
 And Vienna being t6 Degrees and 20 Minutes to the Kaft of the Meridian of 
 Londtn, conrequently a Watcfc let at Ltndm would be 1 Hour and 5 Minutes too 
 flow at Vnnna, 
 
 Divifion
 
 188 Divifion of the Habitable Earth, &c. Part II. 
 
 Divifion and Sub- 
 division. 
 
 8. Tripoli 
 
 9. Biledulgtrid 
 
 10. Zaara 
 
 1 1 . Negroland 
 
 1 2. Guinea 
 
 13. Loanga 
 
 1 4. Congo 
 
 1 5 . Angola 
 
 16. Benguela 
 
 1 7. Mataman 
 
 1 8. Monomotapa 
 ig. Monoemugi 
 
 20. Coffers 
 
 21. Saffala 
 
 22. Zanguebar 
 
 23. Avian 
 
 24. AbiJJina 
 
 25. Nubia 
 
 26. De&r. of B area 
 
 27. Ethiopia 
 
 28. ^r/falfles 
 IV. AMERICA 
 
 1. Britijh Empire 
 
 1. Carolina 
 
 2. Virginia 
 
 3. Maryland 
 
 4. Penfylnjania 
 
 5 . Air W jferfey 
 6. iVVw ?Vi 
 
 j.NewEngl. } 
 & Scotland J 
 8. Ifles 
 2.fyawj/Empire 
 
 1 . O/df Mexico 
 
 2. New Mexico 
 
 3. Florida 
 
 4. Terra Firma 
 
 5. /V/- 
 
 6. CA/// 
 
 7. Paragua 
 
 Square 
 
 Miles. 
 
 75,000 
 
 485,000 
 
 739,200 
 
 1,026,000 
 
 510,000 
 
 49,400 
 172,800 
 
 38,400 
 
 64,000 
 144,000 
 222,500 
 310,000 
 200,340 
 
 27,500 
 275,000 
 234,000 
 378,000 
 264,000 
 1 84,900 
 1,200,000 
 181,668 
 
 CapitalCities 
 
 Tripoli 
 Dara 
 
 Tegaffa 
 
 Madinga 
 
 Benin 
 
 Loango 
 
 St. Salvador 
 
 Mocbima 
 
 Benguela 
 
 Monomotapa 
 
 Chicoua 
 
 C. G0</ #0^ 
 
 Saffala 
 
 Mozambique 
 
 Brava 
 
 C ax utno 
 
 Dane a la 
 
 Angela 
 
 57,500 Charles Town 
 20,750 JamesTo<wn 
 12,260 Baltimore 
 12,500 Philadelphia 
 10,000 Elizabeth Jo 
 8, 1 00 A^xu 2V/& 
 Bofton 
 Annapolis 
 King/Ion 
 
 115,000 
 42,972 
 
 571,240 Mexico 
 300,000 Sanila Fe 
 
 1 1 8,000 
 828,000 
 
 <S7. Augujline 
 Cartbagena 
 
 970,000; Z.>>Btf 
 
 206, coo i <$/. y^* 
 
 . I 5 o ,000 | Affumption 
 
 Diftance 
 and Bear- 
 ing from 
 London. 
 
 1260SE 
 1565 S 
 1840S 
 2500 S 
 2700 s 
 3300 s 
 3480 s 
 
 3750 
 
 3900 s 
 
 4500 s 
 4260 s 
 5200S 
 4600 SE 
 4440 SE 
 3702 SE 
 
 241 8 SE 
 1680SE 
 
 3450 W 
 3210 w 
 3000 w 
 3100 w 
 3040 w 
 3000 w 
 2790 w 
 2580 w 
 4080 w 
 
 4800 NW 
 4320 NW 
 3690 W 
 4320 W 
 5700 SW 
 7200 SW 
 5460 SW 
 
 Difference 
 of Time 
 from Lond, 
 
 H.M. 
 o 56 E 
 o 36 W 
 24 W 
 38 W 
 20 E 
 43 E 
 oE 
 58E 
 58E 
 
 18E 
 
 44 E 
 4E 
 17E 
 38 E 
 40 E 
 
 13E 
 
 33 E 
 
 5 35 W 
 5 2 W 
 4 45 w 
 
 4 55 W 
 
 4 50 W 
 
 53 W 
 
 40 W 
 
 24 W 
 
 6 W 
 
 54 W 
 
 17 W 
 
 25 W 
 
 6 W 
 
 4 W 
 
 6 W 
 
 52 W 
 
 Divifion
 
 Chap IV. Prtfent State of SPAIN. 
 
 189 
 
 
 
 
 Diftance 
 
 Difference 
 
 Divifion and Sub- 
 
 Square 
 
 CapitalCities. 
 
 and Bear- 
 
 of Time 
 
 diviiion. 
 
 Miles. 
 
 
 ing from 
 
 from Land. 
 
 
 
 
 London. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 H.M. 
 
 8. Land of 
 
 
 
 
 
 Amazons 
 
 993,600 
 
 Unknown 
 
 
 
 9. Magellanica 
 
 325,000 
 
 Unknown 
 
 
 
 IO. California 
 
 240,000 
 
 Unknown 
 
 
 
 1 1 . Ifles 
 
 143,196 
 
 Ha-vanna 
 
 
 526W 
 
 3. French Empire 
 
 
 
 
 
 I. Louifiana 
 
 5 1 6,000 
 
 Fort Louis 
 
 4080 NW 6 
 
 2. Canada and 
 
 
 
 
 
 New France 
 
 1,059,100 
 
 Quebec 
 
 
 456W 
 
 3. French Ides 
 
 21,521 
 
 
 
 
 4.. Dutch Domin. 
 
 
 
 
 
 I. Curajfonu 
 
 34 2 
 
 
 
 
 2. Bonair 
 
 168 
 
 
 
 
 5. Portuguef eDo- 
 
 
 
 
 
 minions are 
 
 
 
 
 
 Brafil 
 
 940,000 
 
 St. Salvador 
 
 4260 SW 
 
 2 42 W 
 
 6. Ter de Labor- 
 
 318,750 
 
 Unknown 
 
 
 
 ador 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 
 The prefent State of SPAIN. 
 
 Boundaries ] O P A IN (formerly Iberia and Hefperia) is bounded 
 on the North by the Bay of Bijcay, on the 
 South by the Streights of Gibraltar, on the Eaft by the Mediter- 
 rantan, and on the Weft by Portugal and the Atlantic Ocean. 
 
 Situation] This Country extends from 36 to 44 Degrees 
 North Latitude, and from 3 Eaft to 10 Deg. Weft Longitude. 
 Length of Spain 6io, and Breadth 470. 
 
 Divifion
 
 igd 
 
 Prefent State of SPAIN. Part ft 
 
 Diviiion and Sab- 
 diviiion. 
 
 I Square Miles, ancient 
 Appellations, &e. 
 
 SPAIN 
 j.NwCastii.i 
 
 it Algeria 
 
 %. Sierra 
 
 3. La Mancba 
 
 1 Biscay 
 i. Bifcay Proper 
 
 d \S9tptljt9a 
 
 3. Alava 
 
 3. ASTHKIA 
 
 j.AjluriadeOvi- 
 cdo 
 
 2. Anuria it 
 
 Santiliana 
 
 4. Gallicfa 
 
 1. Compendia 
 
 2. Monionnedo 
 
 3. Lugo 
 
 4. Ortnfe 
 
 Chief Towns in 
 each Diviiion. 
 
 148,218 
 27,840 
 
 New Caflile ( Part of 
 Tarraconenfis ; and an 
 ciently the Country of 
 the Carpet ani, Oretani 
 and VacceiJ is one of 
 the largeft and fruitful- 
 eft Provinces of Spain ; 
 but is hotter in Sum- 
 mer, amd colder in 
 Winter, than the Ma- 
 ritime Provinces, 
 Length 220 
 Breadth 180 
 4760 
 Bifcay (anciently Can- 
 tabria) is a very moun- 
 tainous Country ; but 
 produces Corn enough 
 for the Subfiftence of 
 the Bifcaynert, who 
 are brisk and lively, 
 civil and obliging, open 
 and free in their Con- 
 rerfttion. They have 
 a Language of their 
 own, called iheBaJkiJb. 
 
 Length 140 
 
 Breadth 55 
 4600 
 
 Length 144 
 
 Breadth 55 
 
 AJiuria (Part of Tr- 
 raconenjis) K a very 
 mountainous Country 
 
 J 
 
 Madrid, olim J 
 MantuaCarpe- c 
 tanorum # 
 
 The Pari* 
 The Efcurial 
 Aleala de Henaret 
 Guadalajara 
 Bribuega 
 Siquenza 
 Toleda 
 Aranjutts 
 Talavera de la 
 
 Rayna> 
 Cuenca 
 
 Ci-vidad Real 
 Calatrava 
 Almagro 
 
 BilBoa 
 
 Porto Galettt 
 
 Cajtrt 
 
 Laredo 
 
 St. Antonio 
 
 St. Andtr* 
 
 Orduna 
 
 Durango 
 
 Tolofa 
 
 Placentia 
 
 Orio 
 
 St. Sebajlian 
 
 Fontarabia 
 
 Vittoria 
 
 Solvalierra 
 
 Trtvigno 
 
 O-vieda 
 
 Avtlet 
 Villa Plciofi 
 Santiliana 
 St. Vitxentt. 
 
 I20DO 
 
 GaiUcia (Part of 3"*r- 
 Tacontnjii ) produces 
 almoft Plenty of every 
 thing. The Air along" 1 
 the Coaft is generally 
 moift, but temperate. 
 
 Length 165 
 
 Breadth 120 
 
 Compojlella, or 
 St. $4g 
 
 Ctmpeflella 
 MsnJanr.tdo 
 Lvgo 
 Orer.ft 
 Tuy 
 
 Diftance and Bearing 
 of each Town from 
 the Capital of the 
 Diviiion, &c 
 
 540 S W of Paris 
 
 250 NE of Lisbon 
 
 jzo W of Rome 
 
 930 SW of Vienna 
 
 790 SW of Amfterd. 
 
 7 NWv 
 
 2oNW\ 
 
 15 NE 
 
 30 NE 
 
 40 NE 
 
 75 NE 
 
 35S 
 
 28 SE 
 
 or f 
 
 ofMadriJ 
 
 56 SW 
 
 75 SE 
 
 90S 
 
 83S J 
 
 95 S ' 
 
 184 N of Madrid 
 
 520 S of London 
 
 6N -^ 
 
 15 NW 
 
 30 W 
 
 50 W 
 
 56 W 
 
 24 SW 
 
 i S E 
 
 53 * 
 38 E 
 
 54 E 
 58 E 
 65 E 
 30 SE 
 43 SE 
 150 W 
 30 S 
 
 205 NvV of Madrid 
 23 N 
 22 NE 
 68 
 S 8 E 
 
 b 
 
 Bilbea 
 
 1 
 
 ofOiiedt 
 
 j 1 8 W of OvieJo 
 270 NW of Madrid 
 
 66 NE 
 60 E 
 48 SE 
 47 S 
 
 oiComtt- 
 ftelis 
 
 DitifisA
 
 Chap. IV. Prefent State of S PAIN. 
 
 Divifion and Sub- 
 division. 
 
 5. Andalusia 
 1. Seville 
 
 2. Ctriou* 
 
 %. GHANADA 
 
 Square Miles, ancient 
 Appellation* &c. 
 
 Chief Towns in 
 each Divifion. 
 
 7 Mcrcia 
 
 1. Mure 10 Prof, 
 a. Lorca 
 
 2, Cartbagena 
 t. Vauhcia 
 
 i6?oo 
 
 Length 175 
 
 Breadth 135 
 Andalufia (Part of an- 
 cient Bcetica) is blefi 
 with a pure ferene Hea- 
 ven, a healthful Air, 
 and a Soil anfwerable 
 to the molt luxuriant 
 Wifhes, abounding in 
 Corn, Wine, Oil, &c. 
 They have large Herds 
 of great and fmall 
 Cattle, and the moft 
 beautiful Breed of Hor- 
 fes in Europe ; and no 
 Country was more fa- 
 mous for its richMine- 
 rals, till America was 
 found out. 
 
 8100 
 
 Length 200 
 
 Breadth 45 
 Granada (Parr of an 
 cient Baetita) is very 
 rugged and uneven, and 
 theMountains general 
 ly covered with Snow. 
 However, it affords 
 evwy thing that can 
 tender Life agreeable. 
 
 $600 
 Length 87 
 Breadth 65 
 Mure 1 a is Part of an 
 cient 'farruecni/is. 
 6800 
 Length 180 
 Breadth 75 
 
 tgt 
 
 Diftance and Bearing 
 of each Town frora 
 the Capital of ths 
 Divifion, & c ' 
 
 Other noted 
 Towns are, 
 Caruna, or the 
 
 Grain 
 Bctancot 
 Ferrol 
 Vigo 
 Bayona 
 Pcnte Vcdra 
 Seville 
 
 Medina-Sidonia 
 OJfuna 
 Ecya 
 Carmontt 
 Marcbcnd 
 St. Lucar Arcot 
 Port St. Mary 
 Cadiz. 
 Rota 
 
 St. Lucar la major 
 Cent de Guadi- 
 
 ana 
 Aymonte 
 Luccna 
 CordouS 
 Cacorla 
 Vieda 
 Baesa 
 Jaen 
 
 Alcala Real 
 Anduxar 
 Granada 
 Guadix 
 Baca 
 Loya 
 
 Anteguer* 
 Malaga 
 Cartama 
 Munda 
 Ronda 
 
 Velex. Malaga 
 Albama 
 yllmunecar 
 Soltbregua 
 Almena 
 
 Murcia 1 
 
 Lorca 
 
 Altnacaron 
 Cartbagtn* 
 
 Vatinci* 3 
 
 of Madr. 
 
 i of IMA 
 
 100 W 
 57 W 
 72 NE 
 82 E ~ 
 65 E 1 
 
 47 E ? of Cordon* 
 37SE I 
 
 28 E * 
 
 180 S of Madrid 
 
 32 E 
 
 44 NE 
 
 24 W 
 
 50 sw 
 
 65 SW 
 
 70 sw 
 85 sw 
 II2SWI 
 
 48 sw 
 
 66 SE 
 32s 
 
 68 SE 
 
 130 NE of Graitadd 
 
 198 SE of Madrid 
 
 37 SW } 
 
 35 SW * of Marti a 
 
 23 S J 
 
 e6 NE of Murcia 
 
 180 SE of Madrid 
 
 iofGransd. 
 
 Divifioa.
 
 192 
 
 Prefent State of SPAIN: Part II; 
 
 Divifion and Sub- 
 divifion. 
 
 Square Miles, ancient 
 Appellations, &c. 
 
 9. Catalonia 
 j . Barcelona 
 1. Tertofa 
 
 3. Montblanc 
 
 4. Tarragona 
 
 5. Gironnt 
 
 6. Compredon 
 
 7. Puicerda 
 
 8. Balaguer 
 
 9. Lend it 
 10. Agrawnt 
 j 1 . Tarrega 
 
 12. Cervera 
 
 13. Maurefa 
 
 14. J^ 
 
 15. Villa Franca 
 
 10. ArrAgon 
 
 1. Saragafla 
 
 2. Tarrazona 
 2-Huejca 
 
 4. JaccZ; 
 
 5. Balbaftro 
 
 6. Tercel 
 
 7. Albarraxin 
 
 8. Pa i tot iW- 
 
 peluna 
 ii. NavArre 
 I. Parr.ptluna 
 1. Ejiel'.a 
 
 3. Har.g-.ejj 
 
 4. 6/fVa 
 
 5. Ta^-/tf 
 J20ldCa,jtili 
 
 1. Bur got 
 
 2. Vallaidid 
 
 3. Seg.iia 
 
 4. 6V^i r/:.S* 
 
 5.- Avila 
 
 6. O/wj 
 
 7. C a la tor r a 
 
 5. 5sr:a 
 13. Leo^ 
 
 t. North 
 
 Valencia (formeiljTar- 
 raconenfisj is one of 
 the moft agreeablePro- 
 vinces inSpain. It en- 
 joys almbft a perpetual 
 Spring. 
 
 9009 
 
 Length 171 
 
 Breadth no 
 Catalonia ( Part of 
 Tarraconenfit ) enjoys 
 a pure and temperate 
 Air. The People are 
 brave, hardy and vigo- 
 rous. They have a 
 Language of their own, 
 called the ancient Li- 
 mejin. 
 
 13818 
 
 Length 190 
 
 Breadth 105 
 Arragon ( formerly a 
 Part of Tarracor.enfii) 
 is generally a mountai- 
 nous, rocky, barren 
 Country ; but inter- 
 mixt with fome fruit- 
 ful Mountains. 
 3000 
 
 Length 92 
 
 Breadth 45 
 Part of the ancient 
 Tarraconenjis. A very 
 mountainous Province. 
 144-0 
 
 Length 193 
 
 Breadth 140 
 Old Caftile (formerly 
 Part of Tarraconenjis) 
 is a very mountainous 
 Province. 
 
 IT20O 
 
 Length 176 
 Breadth 96 
 
 Chief Towns in 
 each Divifion. 
 
 Morella 
 
 St. Matbeo 
 
 Villa Real 
 
 Segorba 
 
 Gandia 
 
 Xativa 
 
 Denia 
 
 Alicante 
 
 Orguella 
 
 Barcelona 5 
 
 Ttrtofa . 
 
 Montblanc 
 
 Tarragona 
 
 Gironne 
 
 Compredon 
 
 Puicerda 
 
 Balaguer 
 
 Lerida 
 
 Agramont 
 
 Tarrega 
 
 Cer-vera 
 
 Maurefa 
 
 Vtcb 
 
 Villa Franca 
 
 Saragojfa k 
 
 Tarraxona 
 
 Huejca 
 
 Jacca 
 
 Balbaftro 
 
 Ter-vcl 
 
 Albarraxin 
 
 Pampeluna 
 
 Pampeluna 5 
 
 Eftella 
 Sanguefa 
 Olita 
 Tudtla 
 
 Burgos \ 
 
 Vallado'.id 
 
 Segovia 
 
 Seguenxa 
 
 A-vila 
 
 Ofmd 
 
 Calabortd 
 
 Soria 
 
 LeTn \ 
 
 of Valenc. 
 
 Diflance and Bearing 
 of each Town from 
 the Capital of the 
 Divifion, &c. 
 
 74 N 
 54 NE 
 29 NE 
 29NW 
 
 27 S 
 
 28 s 
 32 NE 
 
 57 S 
 78 S 
 
 168NH of Valencia 
 290 E of Madrid 
 90 SW 
 50 W 
 
 47 SW 
 38 NE 
 50 N 
 74NW 
 
 75 W 
 89 W 
 
 48 W 
 
 58 W 
 5z\V 
 25 NW 
 27 N 
 18 W , 
 
 147 W*6f Barcel. 
 i62NEof Madrid 
 50NW 
 
 of Sarag- 
 
 of Barce- 
 lona 
 
 84 N of Saragtfa 
 
 300 NE of Madrid 
 
 20SW7 
 
 18 S f of Pam- 
 
 25 S f peluna 
 
 53 S J 
 
 115 N of Madrid 
 126 SW of Pampel. 
 
 54 SW 
 87 S 
 83 S 
 
 110SW >cf\Bi; 
 
 55 S 
 95 
 75SE 
 9 s N W of Burgos 
 lf^liVr of MadrV 
 
 Divifioa 

 
 Chap. IV. Prefent State of SPAIN. 
 
 Divifion and Sub- 
 division. 
 
 2. Scutb. 
 
 14. EsTREMA- 
 DURA 
 
 15. Islandj 
 1. M 
 
 1. Minorca 
 3. Tvita 
 
 Square Miles, ancient 
 Appellations, c5V. 
 
 Chief Towns in 
 each Divifion. 
 
 This Province was 
 Part of the ancient 
 Tarracencnjis. 
 
 12600 
 
 Length 180 
 
 Breadth 123 
 Part of ancient Lujl- 
 tanid. Elieemed the 
 molt fruitful Part of 
 Sfain. 
 
 1409 
 520 
 625 
 
 Aflorga 
 
 Placencia 
 
 Toro 
 
 Z amor a 
 
 Salamanca 
 
 Alva 
 
 Rodrigo 
 
 Plazencia 
 
 Coria 
 
 Alcantara 
 
 Truxillo 
 
 Merida 
 Badajoi 
 Eilertna 
 
 Majorca 
 
 Cittadella 
 
 f-vica 
 
 193 
 
 DJltance and Bearing 
 of each Town from 
 the Capital of the 
 Divifion, (3c. 
 
 of Leon 
 
 180 S of Leon 
 
 88 SW of Madrid 
 
 37W ^ 
 
 56 SW I 
 
 38 S ( ofP/J- 
 
 65 S tzencia 
 
 95SW\ 
 
 94S J 
 
 140 E 
 19b E 
 80 E 
 
 . oiValcnci* 
 
 Climate.] The Air of Spain is generally pure and dry, hot, 
 but exceeding healthful. The Winter is fo moderate in the Val- 
 leys, that they have very little Occafion for Fires nine Months of 
 the Year : On the contrary, it muft be confefs'd, that during the 
 Months of June, July, and Auguft, the Heats are infupportable to 
 Foreigners, efpecially in the Heart of the Country, and towards 
 the South. The Face of the Country is rough and uneven, encum- 
 bered with Abundance of high Mountains, whofe Tops feem to 
 touch the Clouds. The Soil is naturally fertile, but for the moil 
 part wholly neglefted, and that by reafon of the deteftable Lazi- 
 nefs, or rather Pride, of its Inhabitants : But this Defect of Corn, 
 and other Grain, is fufficiently fupplied by various Sorts of excel- 
 lent Fruits and Wines, which, with little Art and Labour, are here 
 produced in great Plenty. The longeft Day, in the Northmoft 
 Part of this Kingdom, is about 1 5 Hours, and, in the moft 
 Southern, 147; therefore thisCountry lies in the 5 th, 6th and 7th 
 Northern Climates. 
 
 Government.] The King of Spain is as abfolute a Monarch 
 as any one or/the Face of the Earth ; his Crown is hereditary, and 
 defcends to Females ; his Word is a Law, and he can difpofe of 
 every thing according to his Pleafure, without taking the- Advice 
 of any Man, or any Body of Men whatever. But, notwithstand- 
 ing the Kings of Spain arc abfolute Monarchs, their Moderation 
 
 O CM
 
 194 Prefent State of SP4IN. Pan II. 
 
 can never be fufficiently applauded, having for many Ages taken 
 the Advice of thofe who are verfed in the Laws of their Province, 
 in every thing that regards their Civil Government, Forces, or 
 Revenues ; and, for that End, have appointed feyeral Councils or 
 Tribunals, for the Difpatch of the refpective Branches of Bufinefs, 
 of which fome are fovereign Courts, and others fujbaltern : I fhall 
 only mention two of the firft Order, i . The Cabinet Council 
 confifts of the principal Secretary of State, and five or fix more of 
 the King's Nomination, who determine all Affairs of Government 
 both at Home and Abroad. 2. The Privy Council confifts of a 
 great Number, and Things of the fame Nature are herein debated ; 
 ,but the Refolutions are taken in the Cabinet. 'Tis faid, after Af- 
 fairs have undergone the Deliberations of both Councils, the King, 
 with the Secretary alone, takes fuch Meafures as he thinks 
 proper. 
 
 Trade.]. The Spanijh Wool is fent Abroad unwrought, and 
 they import the Manufactures made of it from England, France, 
 Italy, or Holland. Indeed they make fome Cloth ajt Sego-via ; and, 
 at Toledo and Granada, they weave Taffatas, Damasks and Vel- 
 vets, but none of the beft. The Flotas and Galeons, they fend 
 to America, are loaden with the Merchandizes of England, France, 
 Holland, and Genoa ; the Spaniards being generally no more than 
 Factors and Agents, and accordingly mod of the Plate brought 
 from the Sfamjb Wejl Indies, in Return, is exported again, and 
 diltributed to Foreigners. Spain takes from us Broad-cloth, Drug- 
 gets, Bays, Stuffs of divers Kinds, Leather, Tin, Lead, Fifh, 
 Corn, cifr. England takes from them Wine, Oil, Fruit of di- 
 vers Kinds, Wool, Indigo, Cochineal, and other Dyeing Wares. 
 The Bulk of the Commodities we take from them is the Produce 
 of their own Country, viz. Wine, Oil, and all Sorts of Fruits ; 
 q that the Spaniards pay for our Woolen Goods, and other Pro- 
 duces, at a very eafy Rate. And were it not for the great Con- 
 fumption of SpaniJI? Wines, Fruits, and Oils, in England, their 
 Sales of thofe Commodities would amount but to a Trifle ; having 
 no Nation, for their Cuftomers, befides England and Holland, and 
 a very fmall Matter to Flanders, Hamburg, and the Baltic. 'Tis 
 fuppofed we take off, at leaft, Two-thirds of the Whole ; fo that 
 tho' we are obliged to the Spaniards for their Cuftom for our Ma- 
 nufactures, they are no lefs obliged to us for taking off their Pro- 
 duels. Formerly we received a great Balance from them in Bul- 
 lion ; but finqe the French have introduced their Woolen Goods, 
 and Fafhions, it is prefumed th Balance is but very fmall in our 
 Favour. 
 
 Re-
 
 Chap IV. Prefent State of SPAIN. 195 
 
 Revenues] The King's Revenues arife chiefly from fheCu- 
 ftoms and Duties laid on all Goods, imported and exported ; from 
 Commodities carried from one Province of Spain to another ; from 
 the Rents of all the Houfes in Madrid, the firft Floor whereof 
 belongs to the King ; from a Duty on all Eatables ; from the Duty 
 the Pope allows this Monarch to raife upon thofe who eat Butter, 
 Cheefe, Milk, or Eggs, in Lent ; from the Fifth which the King 
 has of all Gold and Silver, dug out cf the Mines in America ; 
 alfo of Copper, Lead, Iron, Quick-filver, Pearls, Musk, Amber, 
 Emeralds, and other precious Stone?; from the Indulto, or Duty, 
 paid to the Crown, for all Treafure and Merchandize imported 
 from America, &c. All which, it is prefumed, does not amount 
 to much more than 5,000,000 /. Sterling, when the Multitude of 
 Salaries, and Perquifites, &c . are deducted. 
 
 Forces.] It is faid, the SpaniJIy Troops amount to about 
 70,000, in Time of Peace, which is a Force fufficient to repulfe 
 any Enemy, that (hall attempt to invade them; even France itielf, 
 if unaffifted by the Maritime Powers. For there is no Kingdom 
 on the Continent better defended by Nature than Spain, being fur- 
 rounded on three Sides by the Sea ; and on the fourth, towards 
 France, the Pyrenean Mountains (accefiible but in very few Places, 
 and thofe very ftreight and difficult) feparate it from the reft of Eu- 
 rope. The King of Spain, 'tis faid, can fit out about 40 Men of 
 War of the Line, with Frigates and Galleys ; but not with native 
 Spaniards that are Sailors : For, except the Fleets which fail to 
 America, which do not amount to more than 50 Ships in a Year, 
 and the Bifcaynen, who carry on a little Trade to the Coaft of 
 France in their own Bottoms, all the Wines, Fruits, and other 
 Produce of Spain, are carriedAbroad in foreign Ships ; which occa- 
 fions their Navigation to be fo inconfiderable, that 'tis impoflible 
 they fhould ever be able, completely, to man any thing near the 
 above Number of Ships. 
 
 Character.] The Spaniards, in general, are Men of a 
 piercing Wit, and elevated Genius, but very little improved by 
 Study or Converfation, for want of Schools and Aeademies, 
 where the Sciences are taught in the modern Way : For thofe 
 who ftudy apply themfelves chiefly to the ancient Philofophy, or 
 School Divinity, and are fuch Slaves to thofe Syitems, that they 
 will not admit of any other. They are admir'd for their Secrecy, 
 Conftancy, and Patience in Adverfity ; are faid to be flow in deter- 
 mining, but ufually conclude judicioufly at laft ; to be generous, 
 magnificent, liberal, delicate in the Point of Honour, fincere 
 Friends, agreeable Companions, grave in Difcourfe, to Lying 
 
 O z greac
 
 196 Prefent Slate of SPAIN. Part II. 
 
 great Enemies, and extremely temperate in Eating and Drinking ; 
 obedient and faithful to their Monarch, whom they never men- 
 tion but with the utmoft Reverence ; in Offices of Piety very 
 devout, and very hofpitable to Strangers. The Negligence of 
 the Spaniards in applying themfelves to Husbandry is to be imputed 
 to their Pride, Or rather the Cuftom of the Country, where a 
 Man is looked upon with the utmolt Contempt that fubmits to this 
 vile Employment, as they call it. Their pretended Quality will 
 not fuffer them to plough their Lands, or plant their Vineyards. 
 There is not a Peafant amongit them without a Roll of his Pedi- 
 gree ; every one can mew, that he is defcended in a Right Line 
 from the old Gothic Chriftians, who affifted their King Pelagius 
 in expelling the Infidel Moors ; and, big with this pretended Ho- 
 nour, their Lands mull lie uncultivated, did not Foreigners plant 
 and fow them for the whimfical Proprietors. A Peafant fhall be 
 feen, fitting before his Gate, or on a Bulk in the Street, in a tat- 
 ter'd Cloak, and his Arms acrofs, or perhaps playing upon a 
 wretched Guittar in Summer, while Foreigners are reaping his- 
 Corn, or gathering in the Vintage, and generally go away with 
 the beft Part for their Pains ; but this is to be underitood chiefly 
 of the Midland Provinces. No People, furely, fuftain their Po- 
 verty with fuch an Air of Gravity and Satisfaction as they do : 
 The very Beggars of both Sexes rather demand than ask an Alms, 
 alleging their Quality ; and mufl be difmified with a Compliment, 
 if you give them no Money, and then they go away contentedly. 
 
 Philip III. in order to break his Subjects of this unaccountable 
 Humour of ftarving in the midft of Plenty, (or at lead on Lands 
 that might be rendered extremely fruitful, by a moderate Indultry) 
 publifhed an Edift, that every Owner of Lands mould be deem'd 
 a Gentleman, and have the Title of an Efquire, who apply'd him- 
 felf to Husbandry. To the Pride of the Spaniards we may add 
 their other Vices, as Jealoufy, Revenge, and being ihamefully 
 given up to bad Women. The bad Oeconomy of the Nobility 
 and Gentry is fcarce credible, and reduces them to a neceffitous 
 Condition, even while they make a glittering Appearance: Yet 
 when they are prefs'd for Money by their Tradefmen, they are 
 Men of fuch Honour, that they make no Difficulty in affigning 
 Part of their F.ftates for the Payment of their Debts. As to the 
 Perfons of the Spaniards, they are generally tall and well-made, 
 bat few of them corpulent; are of fwarthy Complexions, their 
 Hair black, their Features juft, with brisk fparkling Eyes. The 
 Complexion of the Ladies is bad, their Features delicate, but their 
 Vifage is thin ; they have black and fhining Hair, fparkling Eyes ; 
 fcor do they want a good Share of Wit : They are, for the moft 
 part, generous, charitable, and modeft ; and are of a low Stature. 
 
 RV
 
 Chap. IV. Prefent State of SPAIN. 197 
 
 Religion. ] The Reman CatholJck being the Religion of 
 Spain, no other Denomination of ChriiHans are tolerated. As the 
 Spaniards arc exceedingly devoted to their Clergy, they are led by 
 them into the grofleit Superttition and Bigotry. If a Foreigner, 
 of any other Perfuafion, cannot wave his Zeal for his darling No- 
 tions of Religion, but, on the contrary, refledts on any Part of 
 their Superftirion, he runs an extreme Hazard of being delivered 
 over to the Inquifition, where he may expect, to meet with the 
 feverell Kind of Perfecution under Heaven. The Chriftian Reli- 
 gion was planted in this Kingdom in the Time of the Apoftlcs 
 themfelves, and the Gofpel met with fuch furprifing Succefs, 
 that the whole Nation was foon converted to the Doctrine of the 
 blefled Jefus. 
 
 Customs. ] In PaJJion-nxeek the Spaniards pra&ife great Au- 
 fterities ; fome will procure themfelves to be fattened to a Crofs, 
 in their Shirts, with their Arms extended, in Imitation of our Sa- 
 viour, uttering the moft difmal Groans and Lamentations ; others 
 will walk bare-footed, over Rocks and Mountains, to fome diftant 
 Shrine, to perform their Devotions. The moft confiderable of 
 the folemn Proceflions among the Spaniards is that on Good Friday, 
 which, for its Singularity, the Reader will permit me to mention 
 in this Place: The Religious Orders attend, with the Members 
 of the Inquifition, Councils and Companies of Tradefmen, in 
 their refpective Cities ; and even the King himfelf fometimes, at- 
 tended by all his Court, with Wax Torches in their Hands. The 
 Nobility and Perfons of Diltinttion are followed by their Servants 
 with lighted Flambeaux. Every thing has a mournful Air. The 
 King's Guards have their Arms and Drums covered with Black, 
 and beat a Dead March, as at the Funeral of fome great General ; 
 the Trumpets and other mufical Inftruments found difmally, and 
 all the Colours and Crofles are cover'd with Black Crape ; Ma- 
 chines and Pageants are eretted, whereon all the Parts of our Sa- 
 viour's Paffion are reprefented. True Penitents in thefe Proceffions. 
 la(h and cut themfelves unmercifully, hoping to take Heaven by 
 this holy Violence on themfelves. There are other Penitents who 
 drag heavy Croffes after them, and perform other grievous Penan- 
 ces ; and of thefe are People of Quality mask'd, fome of whom, 
 it is faid, have loft their Lives by ovcr-a&ing their Parts. At 
 thefe Proceffions, in the City of Seville, it is not uncommon to 
 fee 5 or 600 Penitents, who have the Reputation of chaftizing 
 themfelves more roughly than thofe of Madrid: Other Towns 
 alfo endeavour to imitate thefe great Cities. 
 
 At this Solemnity all the Ladies appear at their Windows and 
 Balconies, drefled as on their Wedding-day, and leaning on rich 
 
 O 3 and
 
 198 Prefent State of SPAIN. Part II. 
 
 and fumptuous Carpets. It may indeed be allowed, that fome of 
 the Penitents or Self-fcourgers affift at this devout Exercife from' a 
 true Spirit of Piety; but then great Numbers of them do it only 
 to pleafe their Miftreifes, which is a new Species of Gallantry 
 unknown to other Nations. Thefe Self-fcourgers whip themfelves 
 in Cadence, with a Scourge made of Whip-cord, at the End of 
 which are fmall round Pieces of Wax, ftuck full of pointed Bits 
 of Glafs. He who fcourges himfelf with the greater! Dexterity 
 and Courage, is looked upon as the bravelt Man ; and fuch as do 
 otherwife are hooted by the Women, who are fo us'd to this 
 cruel and bloody Spectacle, that they cannot forbear breaking 
 out into injurious Exprefiions againit thofe who do not whip them- 
 felves as feverely as they would have them. Whenever they ob- 
 ferve a fine Woman, they are fo dextrous at Scourging, that they 
 fliall make the Blood fpirt juft upon them ; and the Ladies who 
 are thus diftinguifhed, never fail to thank their Gallants for the 
 Honour. But they carry the Chaftifement much farther, when 
 they are got before their Miftrefies Houfes ; for then they lay on 
 with fo much Violence and Fury, that they almoft. tear the Flefh 
 from their Backs and Shoulders ; and the Lady, who fees this from 
 her Balcony, and knows that all this is done for her Sake, is 
 highly pleas'd with it, and is fure never to forget the Favour. 
 Whether thefe Penitents or Self-fcourgers whip themfelves from 
 a Spirit of Penance, or mere Gallantry, 'tis certain, that thefe 
 Mortifications are the Death of a great many of them every 
 Year *. 
 
 But on Feftivals the Scene is very different ; for then they ex- 
 pofe the richeft Shrines, and all the Treafures of their Churches, 
 to public View ; the People are adorn'd with all their Jewels ; 
 and in the hotteft Weather, when the Sun fhines out in its full 
 Lufbre, they carry lighted Torches in their Hands, which, with 
 the Sun-beams over their Heads, almoft melt the fuperftitious 
 Crowd. The Ladies, on thefe Feftivals, appear alfo without their 
 Veils ; and being feated in their Balconies, and covered with Dia- 
 monds, and other precious Jewels, from Head to Foot, make a 
 very dazzling .Appearance. Thefe Feftivals ufually conclude with 
 a religious Play, wretchedly afted, containing a Reprefentation of 
 the Life and Actions of fome Saint, taken from their Legends, 
 wherein they ufe even the bleffed Je/us with great Freedom, and, 
 to any other but a Spaniard, feems calculated rather to ridicule 
 than promote Chriflianity. 
 
 Serenading feems to be a Diverfion almoft peculiar to this 
 People. Not a young Fellow fcarce, when the Love-fit is upon 
 
 * Extra&ed from the Fifth Volume of the Delights and Curi'ifities of Spain 
 and Portugal, written by Don Juan Ahdrez Ac Colmtnar. 
 
 him,
 
 Chap. IV. Prefent St 'ate of SPAIN. 
 
 him, but fpends the bed Part of the Night in fuch Amufements, 
 tho' they had little more Knowledge of the Lady, than Dosi 
 ^uixot had of the celebrated Dulcinea. Their Voices are femt- 
 timcs berter than their Instruments ; for the lait, to a toleraLIeEar, 
 are mocking. 
 
 The tspnifiards are inchanted with their Bull-fea'fts : However 
 thefe Entertainments are not exhibited fo frequently as formerly. 
 This I am going to defcribe, being appointed" on account of the 
 late King's Marriage, Lifted longer, and was more fplendid 
 ulual. X he great Square in Madrid was cover'd with Sand, and, 
 furrounded with a lcrong Barricade fix Feet high The King's 
 Balcony was placed in the Middle of one of the Sides of the 
 Square ; oppofite to which were featcd the foreign Embaffadors, 
 and on the Right of the King were placed the feveral Councils, 
 and Lords of the Inquiliiijn, ail diitinguifned by their refpettive 
 Arms embroider"d on Crimfon Veivet. Then, in their Order, 
 were fcated the Grandees, Judges, Gentry, and the City Com- 
 panies. Nor were the Ladies excluded this grand Diveriicn, but 
 appeared in the greateft Luftre. The King being come into tne 
 Square, the Company took their Seats according to their Order $ 
 the Square was water 'd, and the Guards were drawn up, Every 
 thing being ready, fix Cavaliers (drefs'd in Black,* embroider'd 
 with Gold and Silver, with Diamond Hat bands, and Scarfs of 
 different Colours, mounted on fine Horfes fet off with the richtfc 
 Furniture, attended each of them by forty Footmen richly clad, 
 alfo twelve led Horfes, and as many Mules, cover'd with Velvet, 
 and embroider 'd with their refpe&ive Arms) were conducted by 
 the City Officers over the Square ; and, approaching his Majefly's 
 Balcony, the Cavaliers, with a profound Reverence, begg'd Leave 
 to engage the Bulls ; which being granted, with a thoufand Wifhes 
 for their Succefs, the Trumpets founded, and the Multitude cry'd 
 out, God blefs the valir.nt Knights .' The Cavaliers fepa rated, and 
 having faluted the Lndies of their Acquaintance, fent away their 
 Train. At the fame time enter'd feveral robuft Fellows, from all 
 Parts of the Kingdom, in order to fight the Bulls on Foot. 
 
 The City Officers, having received the Keys of the Bull-ftables 
 of his Majeily, open'd a Door, and then made their Ffcape as fail 
 as their Horfes would carry them. The Bull no fooner perceived 
 the Light, but he came out fnuffing up the Air, and, flaring about 
 him, ftamp'd upon the Ground as in Defiance of his Enemies. The 
 Fellows on Foot engaged him firlr. with their Darts, which, flick- 
 ing in his hlefh, made him rage and flamp, threatening Deduc- 
 tion to every thing in his Way ; hereupon one of the Knights 
 approaching him with his Lance, the Beaft run at him with the 
 utmoft Fury ; but being dextroufly avoided by the Cavalier, who 
 gave hiin a Wound wish his Lance, which being broken, one of 
 
 O 4 his
 
 200 Prefent. State of SPAIN, Part IL 
 
 his Footmen fupply'd him with another, with which he attack'd 
 the Bull again in the farajfoManner; which fo increas'd the<Brute's 
 Fury, that the Knight was in great Danger, but was timely re- 
 fcu'd by his Attendance. It js almoft incredible with what Dexte- 
 rity the Combatant manag'd his Horfe and Arms, keeping with- 
 in a Foot of the Side of the Beaft almoft an Hour together, for 
 the Advantage of linking him, and throwing his Darts, without 
 being touched. Then the Fellows on Foot attack'd the Bull 
 fmgly, holding a two-edged Sword in one Hand, and a Cloak in 
 the other ; and, before they had killed him, he received a great 
 Number of Darts, befides many Cuts and Gafhes in his Flefh. 
 After which the dead Beaft was carried out of the Barrier, with 
 the loud Acclamations of the Multitude, as if fome fignal Victory 
 had been obtained. Another Hero advanc'd to a Bull in his full 
 Rage, and ftre:k him with that Force between his Horns, that he 
 fell down dead that Moment : This being an extraordinary Cafe, 
 the Vivas and Hu.:zas of the People were as extraordiuary. An- 
 other Bull run witr. fuch Fury at Count Coning/mark, who was 
 one of the Combatants, that he wounded him terribly, and let 
 out his Horfe's Guts ; notwithftanding which, the Count, fup- 
 ported by one of his Fcotmen, attack'd the furious Creature on 
 Foot, with his Sword only, and gave him a terrible Wound in the 
 Head ; whereupon, turning about to the Lady of his Affedb'ons, 
 he kifs'd his Sword, and was carried off half-dead with the Lofs 
 of Blood. The Law of Duelling, as they call it; binds a Cavalier 
 upon his Honour, when the Beaft has wounded his Horfe, thrown 
 off his Hat, or forc'd his Lance from him, to give him a Wound 
 in Return, or die in the Attempt ; andif the Horfe is quite dif- 
 abled, or daunted at the Bull, the Combacant mult light, and en- 
 gage on Foot. Another Combatant leapt from his Horfe on the 
 Back of the Bull he was engaged with, and continued there above 
 a Quarter of an Hour, and in the End broke off one of his Horns. 
 At this Feaft there were more than twenty Bulls let out to fight 
 in the Manner above defcribed ; but it prov'd fatal to three of the 
 Cavaliers, one whereof was tofs'd up in the Air by a Bull, and 
 fo bruis'd by the Fall, that he expired upon the Spot ; two others 
 were mortally, and feveral much wounded ; alfo four Horfes kill'dj 
 and others fpoiPd : Yet, they fay, this is nothing to the Mifchief 
 which has happened on thefe Occafions. 
 
 Diet.] As to the Diet of the Spaniards, Perfons of Diftin- 
 &ion ufually make a light and fparing Meal ; perhaps a Pheafant, 
 a Pair of Pigeons, an Ollia, or a Ragou, highly feafon'd with 
 Garlick and Pepper ; and, after all, a Deffert of delicious Fruits. 
 The common People live chiefly upon Bread, Wine, fome Fifh, 
 Peas, Beans, or other Pulfe ; Roots, Herbs, and Fruits. Flefh
 
 Chap. V. Prefent State of PORTUGAL. 201 
 
 is not very plentiful in their Houfes, any more than in their Cooks 
 Shop*, where you meet with Peas, Eeans, Leeks, Onions, Gar- 
 lick, and a little Meat. 
 
 Curiosities.] There are in Terragona, in Catatonia, feve- 
 ral Monuments of its former Grandeur, particularly an ancient 
 Circus. 2. In the City of Granada is a large fumptuous Palace 
 of the Moorijb Kings, faid to contain Lodgings and Accommoda- 
 tions for near Forty thoufand People ; the Walls whereof are lin'd 
 with Jafper, Porphyry, and other beautiful Marbles, which form 
 a Sort of Mofaic Work, with Abundance of Infcriptions in Ara- 
 bian Characters. 3. When the Phoenicians firft poffefled themfelves 
 of the Ifland of Leon, they, near Cadiz, erefted a Temple to 
 Hercules, Part whereof is laid to be yet remaining. 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 The prefint State ^Portugal. 
 
 Boundaries.] DO RTUGA L ( formerly a Part of Lujitania) 
 is bounded on the Eaft by Leon and Spanijh 
 Ejfremadura, on the Weft by the Atlantic Ocean, on the North by 
 Galticia, and on the South by Andalujia. 
 
 Situation. ] This Country is fituated between the 37 and 42 
 Degrees of North Latitude, and betwixt the 7 and 10 Degrees of 
 Weft Longitude from the Meridian of London. Length 324, 
 Breadth 133. 
 
 Divifion. 
 
 PORTUGAL 
 
 1. Part ofEsTRE MA- 
 
 DURA 
 
 2. BEIRA 
 
 3. Entre Minhq 
 
 DUERO 
 
 4.Tralos Montes 
 
 5. Alentejo 
 t>. Alcarva 
 
 Square 
 
 Chief 
 
 Miles 
 
 Towns. 
 
 6700 
 
 Lisbon 
 
 5940 
 
 Coimbra 
 
 2964 
 
 Braga 
 Porto 
 
 3850 
 
 Miranda 
 
 6645 
 1752 
 
 Braganza 
 
 Eaiora 
 
 Tavira 
 
 Diftance and Bearing. 
 
 240 W of Madrid 
 94 N -> 
 
 ) of Lisbon 
 
 Cli-
 
 202 Prefent State -of PORTUGAL. Part II. 
 
 Climate.] The Fact of this Country is very rough, and 
 the Mountains are fome of the moft barren in that Part of 
 the Continent ; however, towards the Bottoms of them, they 
 are well planted with Vines, which yield excellent Wines. Portu- 
 gal produces Abundar.ce of Olives, Oranges, Lemons, Citrons, 
 Almonds, Chefnuts, Figs, Raifms, Pomegranates, and other 
 Fruits common to us ; but they are not reckoned fo good as thofe 
 in the Southern Provinces of Spain. The Oil is not efleem'd very 
 good, nor are their four Oranges fo good as thofe we have from 
 Seville. Their Mulberry Plantations feed Abundance of Silk- 
 worms. This Country does not produce Wheat and Barley enough 
 for the Natives ; neither do the.^jftures feed Cattle fufficient for 
 the Subfiltence of three Parts of them. The Air of Portugal is 
 pure and wholfome ; its Inhabitants live to a great Age, and are 
 not fo fubjedf. to Infirmities as other Countries. The Heat is 
 moderated by the cool Breezes from the Sea, and frequent Wefterly 
 Winds. 
 
 Government.] This Kingdom, after feveral furprifing 
 Turns of Fortune, was feized upon in the Year 1580 by Philip II. 
 King of Spain, and it continued a Spanifb Province till 1640. The 
 Spaniards having been weaken'd by a long War with France, and 
 the Revolt of the Catalonians, the Portuguefe had a fair Opportu- 
 nity of delivering their Country from an intolerable foreign Yoke ; 
 and as the Duke of Braganxa was the next in Blood to their for- 
 mer Princes, they made him an Offer of the Crown, of which he 
 did not feem very ambitious : But while he was meditating, on 
 one Side, the Hazard of the Enterprize, and, on the other, the 
 Glory that might accrue to his Country and Family, if he mould 
 fucceed, the Court of Spain had fome Intelligence of the 
 Defign, and King Philip fummoned the Duke, and the reft of 
 the Portuguefe Nobility, to attend him in the Catalonian War. 
 The Duke forefaw the Snare, and, in order to excufe himfelf, al- 
 leged, that, as his Coffers were very low, he was not in a Condi- 
 tion to bear the Expence a Man of his Quality muff, neceffarily be 
 at in the Field. The Court of Madrid hereupon ordered him a 
 Remittance of Twenty thoufand Pilfoles, with a fair Promife of 
 more. Things being brought to a Crifis, the Duke confulted his 
 Lady, who, it is faid, gave him this Anfwer : Sir, If you refolve 
 to go to Spain, you run the Hazard of your Life ; you do the fame 
 tn attempting the Crokvrt of Portugal ; but then it is better to die a 
 King than a Duke. This Speech, it feems, determined his Choice. 
 The whole Kingdorri of Portugal, and all the foreign Settlements, 
 acknowledged him for their Sovereign. This furprifing Revolu- 
 tion was effe&ed Without having coft the Lives of above three o* 
 
 four
 
 Chap. V. Prefent State of PORTUGAL. 203 
 
 four Perfons, tho' much Blood was fhed to maintain it afterwards. 
 It is very extraordinary, that this Defign fhould be communicated 
 to above Two hundred Perfons, and a whole Year taken up in 
 the Preparations for its Execution, and yet not difcoverd to the 
 Court of Spain till it was too late. The Lofs of the Loiv Coun- 
 tries, and many other Misfortunes, with the Afliilance the King 
 of England fent the Portuguefe, induced the Spaniards to make a 
 Peace with Portugal, and renounce all their Pretenfions to that 
 Crown. The King of Portugal is an abfolute Monarch, and his 
 Crown hereditary. The Civil Government of Portugal and Spain 
 have a great Refemblance ; for the Portuguefe endeavour to imitate 
 their Neighbours in all public Affairs. 
 
 Trade.] The Portuguefe import from Afia Silks, Muflins, 
 Calicoes, Tea, Gold Dull, and fuch other Goods as our Eafi India 
 Company import hither : And from Africa they import chiefly 
 Gold, Slaves, and Elephants Teeth. But the moft extenfive and 
 richeft of all their Settlements are thofe of Brazil in America; 
 from whence, in fome Years, they import upwards of Two Mil- 
 lions Sterling in Gold and Silver, beiides vaft Quantities of Sugar, 
 Tobacco, SnufF; Brazil and other Dyeing Woods, Hides, Cotton, 
 Indico. Fuftich, Tallow, Train-oil, Parrots, Rum, and many 
 other lefTer Articles. 'Tis faid, that the Portuguefe tranfport near 
 25,000 Slaves annually from the Coaft of Africa to Brazil, 
 which may, one Year with another, be worth about Sixteen Pounds 
 Sterling in Brazil. Portugal takes from us Broad-cloth, Drug- 
 gets, Bays, Long ells, Calimancoes, &c. Tin, Lead, Leather, 
 Eilh, Corn, C3V. Part whereof is ufed in Portugal, and the reft 
 fent to Brazil. England takes from them great Quantities of 
 Wine, Oil, Salt, Fruits ; by which means their fpare Lands, 
 fince they have the fupplying us with Wine, are greatly improved : 
 And tho 1 we may allow a confiderable Balance to be brought us, 
 yet it is not fo great as fome imagine. The Dutch alfo furnifh 
 them with Woolen Goods, &c. and all manner of Naval Stores ; 
 but the lait they import from the Northern Parts of Europe. The 
 Portuguefe trade pretty much alfo with France in Woolen Goods, 
 &fr. but the Englifh have the greateft Share of Trade in this 
 Country, as appears by the fuperior Number of our Ships reforting 
 to Lisbon. For, one Year with another, there may be allowed to 
 fail from Great Britain and Ireland near 260 Ships, which is 
 more than treble the Number of any other Nation. The French 
 and Dutch, each of them, one Year with another, may be allow'd 
 to fend about 80 Ships to this Port ; Hamburgh about 1 1 ; Den- 
 mark 6 ; Sweden 2 ; and fome Years Spain fends near 3oVefleIs. 
 
 The Portuguefe Trade was at the highclt Pitch about the Begin- 
 ning of the Fifteenth Century, when their Fleets were conducted 
 
 round
 
 2 04 Prefent State of PORTUGAL. Part II. 
 
 round the Cape of Good Hope to India, by the celebrated Vafco 
 de Gama, whereby they became almoll fole Matters of the Trade 
 between India and Europe, which before was carried on by way of 
 Egypt ', whither the Riches of India being brought, the Venetians, 
 Genoeje, and other maritime States in the Mediterranean, diftri- 
 buted them to the feveral Kingdoms of Europe. Bat as the Begin- 
 ning of the Portuguefe Trade with India will be treated of in an- 
 other Place, I mail only obferve here, that in making this Voyage 
 they carnally difcovered Brazil in America, and feveral rich Coun- 
 tries on the Coalt of Africa ; from all which there flow'd in vaft 
 Treafures to the Portuguefe. But Philip II. King of Spain having, 
 in the Year 1580. made the Kingdom of Portugal* Spanijb Pro- 
 vince, the Portuguefe became very great Sufferers by it ; for as 
 Philip was at tins Time endeavouring to reduce the Netherlands, 
 lie thought nothing would contribute to it more than the prohibit- 
 ing them to trade with the Portuguefe ; the Dutch then employing 
 a great Number of Ships, in tranfporting the native Commodities 
 of Portugal, as well as the Produce of their new Discoveries, to 
 the Northern Parts of Europe. But this Projecl: had a very differ- 
 ent Effeft ; for the Dutch, being excluded trading with Portugal, 
 as well as with Spain, from whence they us'd to fetch Spices, and 
 other valuable Merchandize, the Produces of Afia and America, 
 fitted out itrong Fleets, and followed the Spaniards and Portuguefe 
 in the Road they had ftruck out to the Eajl and Weft Indies, and 
 not only brought to Europe the fame rich Goods thefe Nations 
 had for many Years monopolized, but drove the Portuguefe from 
 their bell Settlements in India, and other Countries in Afia, as well 
 as from thofe they had in Brazil, and on the Coafl of Africa. 
 
 Revenues.] The King of Portugal's Revenues arife chiefly 
 from the Duty on Goods exported and imported : Foreign Mer- 
 chandizes pay upwards of Twenty per Cent. Filh taken near their 
 own Coaft, and in their own Rivers, Forty-feven per Cent. The 
 Duty on SnufF alone amounts to near ! 4000 /. one Year with 
 another : A confiderable Revenue arifes from the Orders of Knight- 
 hood : Money arifes by feveral Bulls from the Holy See. The 
 whole clear Revenue, upon a moderate Computation, is about 
 1,200,000 I. Sterling. 
 
 Forces. ] The Forces of the King of Portugal, according to 
 the beft Account, do not amount to 20,000 ; nor can they well be 
 thought to man and pay 30 Men of War of the Line. If they 
 have thi> Number of Ships, a Squadron of Englifj, or Dutch, of 
 half the Number, would not be afraid to engage them. They 
 ferve chiefly for Convoys to their Brafil Fleets, and are very 
 
 often
 
 Chap. V. Prefent State of PORTUGAL. 205 
 
 often ufed as Merchant-fhips to import Goods or Treafure from 
 their foreign Settlements. 
 
 Character. ] The Portuguefe, in general, are Men of a good 
 Genius, but not much improv'd by Study. The Nobility and 
 Gentry are magnificent, liberal, temperate in Eating and Drink- 
 ing ; hofpitable, relieving People in Diftrefs of every Nation and 
 Religion without Exception : And the better to extend their Bene- 
 volence to Mankind, there is a Society in Lisbon, compos'd of the 
 King, Princes of the Elood, and Perfons of the higheft Diftinction, 
 who make the Cafe of the poor Widow and Orphan their own, 
 and, at their Hands, the poor virtuous Virgin receives a Subsid- 
 ence and Portion : In fhort, they fuffer none to want, but fuch as 
 are abandon'd to Vice ; and even they, when afflicted with grievous 
 Difeafes, or the like, find Relief from this merciful Society. The 
 Nobility, by their bad Oeconomy, are often prefs'd for Money by 
 their Tradesmen ; but they, like the Spaniards, are Men of that 
 Honour, that they will aflign over a Part of their Income for the 
 Payment of their Debts. They are laid to be a little treacherous 
 to each other, revengeful, and fomething more cruel in their Na- 
 tures than the Spaniards. The Trading Part of the Nation, in 
 general, have the unhappy Character of being a griping, treache- 
 rous People, exceeding crafty in their Dealing. The Rabble, for 
 the moft part, are reported to be very much given to Thieving. 
 Emmanuel de Farca, one of their own Writers, in defcribing his 
 Countrymen, fays, " The Nobility think themfelves Gods, and 
 " require a Sort of Adoration ; the Gentry afpire to equal them, 
 " and the common People difdain to be thought inferior to either." 
 But this deteftable Pride is not peculiar to the Portuguefe ; for the 
 Spaniards of Quality, as well as the Nobility of Portugal, fcarce 
 ever fuffer their Servants to approach them but on the Knee. 
 
 Relicion. ] The Tenets, grofleft Errors and Corruptions of 
 the Church of Rome are embraced by the Portuguefe, who, like 
 the Spaniards, are exceedingly devoted to the Clergy. The Jews 
 are tolerated here, and feveral Strangers allowed the public Exer- 
 cife of their Religion, particularly the Englifb Factory at Lisbon. 
 The Gofpel of the blefled Jefus was receiv'd in this Country 
 much about the fame time with Spain. 
 
 Customs. ] The Cuiloms are in a manner the fame with thole 
 in Spain. 
 
 Curiosities. ] In a Lake on the Top of the Hill Stella in 
 Portugal are found Pieces of Ships, tho' it be diftant from the Sea 
 
 more
 
 206 
 
 Prefent State of FRANCE. Part II. 
 
 more than twelve Leagues. Near to Roja there is a Lake remark- 
 able for its rumbling Noife, which is commonly heard before a 
 Storm, and that at tkerDiilance of fifteen or fixteen Miles. About 
 eight Leagues from Coimbra is a Fountain,, which fwallows up, or 
 draws in, whatfoever Thing only touches the Surface of its Wa- 
 ters , an Experiment of which is often made with the Trunks of 
 Tree* 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 
 The Prefent State of France. 
 
 Boundaries.] JORANCE (formerly Gallia, whofe ancient 
 Inhabitants were the Gauls, otherwife the 
 Celttf ) is bounded by the Britife Chanel and the Netherlands 
 towards the North ; by Germany, Switzerland, Savoy, and Italy, 
 on the Eaft ; by the Mediterranean, and Spain , on the South ; 
 and by the Atlantic, or Weftern Ocean, on the Weft. 
 
 Situation. ] This Country is fituated between the ^i& and 
 51ft Degree of North Latitude, and between the 7th Degree Eaft 
 and 4th Degree odd Minutes Weft Longitude. The Length oi France 
 is 550, and Breadth 488 Miles. 
 
 Divifion and Sub- 
 divifion. 
 
 SquareMiles, 
 
 Length, 
 Breadth, Si- 
 
 
 tuation, &c . 
 
 FRANCE 
 
 
 1. Ifle of France 
 
 5200 
 
 
 Olim Part of 
 
 i.Ifleof Fr. prop. 
 
 the Province 
 
 2. Brie 
 
 oi Belgica Se- 
 cunda, and 
 
 3. Gajlenois 
 
 4. Hurepoix 
 
 5. Mantois 
 
 Lugdunenjis 
 Quarta 
 Length 100 
 
 6. Vexin Francois 
 
 Breadth 58 
 
 7. Beaumaijis 
 Z.Falois 
 
 
 9. Soijfonnois 
 IO. Laonnois 
 
 
 2. PlCARDY 
 
 3 6 5 
 
 ChiefTowns 
 in each grand 
 Subdivifion. 
 
 Paris olim 
 Lutetia 
 
 Meaux 
 
 Montargis 
 
 Melun 
 
 Mante 
 
 Point Oyje 
 
 Beauvais 
 
 Senlis 
 
 Soijfons 
 
 Laon 
 
 Amiens 
 
 The Diftance and 
 Bearing of eachTown 
 from the Capital of 
 the grand Divifion. 
 
 1 200N Wof Con/lant. 
 240 SW of Amfterd. 
 560 N oi Madrid 
 540 W of Vienna 
 580 N Wof Rome 
 23 E 
 
 54 S 
 2$SE 
 
 27 W 
 
 16NW > oi Paris 
 38N 
 
 28 N 
 
 55 NE 
 73 NE- 
 
 N of Paris 
 
 Divifion 
 
 s
 
 Chap. VI. Prefint State of F KA NCE. 
 
 Divifion and Sub- 
 divifion. 
 
 1 . Pais Reconquis 
 
 2. Bou lotto is 
 
 3. Potttkieu 
 
 4. Vinteu 
 
 5. Amienois 
 
 6. Santerre 
 
 7. Vermandois 
 8- Tierrafcbe 
 
 3. Normandy 
 
 1. Upper 
 1 . Caux 
 z. Rouen 
 
 3. (iifs?s 
 
 4. Eureux 
 
 2. Lower 
 
 1. Coutance 
 
 2. C<w 
 
 3. Alencon 
 
 4. Champagne 
 
 1 . Champagne prop 
 
 2. The Remois 
 
 3. The Pert bo is 
 
 4. Rhetelois 
 
 5. The Village 
 
 6. Bajfigney 
 
 7 . The Senonois 
 8.The Brie Cham- 
 
 panaife 
 
 5. BRETAGKt 
 
 1. Re tines 
 
 2. Ak/J 
 
 3. V amies 
 
 4. SZjfimptr 
 
 5. /*< 
 
 6. Triguer 
 
 7. 5/. 2?/7f 
 
 8. S/. Afe/# 
 
 9. Pa/ 
 
 6. Orleanois 
 
 1 . Orleanoif proper 
 
 2. Beaucc 
 
 Square Miles, 
 Length, Breadth, 
 Situation, (iff. 
 
 Length 120 
 Breadth 87 
 
 Part of Belgica 
 
 Secunda. 
 
 8200 
 Length 155 
 Breadth 85 
 This Province 
 made up the 
 V'hole Lugdunen- 
 Jis of the Romans. 
 
 10,000 
 Length 140 
 Breadth 1 1 o 
 This Province 
 was formerly the 
 Seat of the Rbs- 
 mi, Co often mcn- 
 tion'd by Cafar. 
 Part of Belgica 
 Secunda. 
 9100 
 Length 170 
 Breadth 105 
 Qlim Armorica, 
 or Britannia mi' 
 
 22,950 
 Length 230 
 Breadth 180 
 
 Chief Towns 
 in each grand 
 Subdiv 
 
 Calais 
 
 Boulogne 
 
 Abbeville 
 
 St. Vatery 
 
 Amiens 
 
 Perrone 
 
 St. Quint in 
 
 Guije 
 
 Rouen 
 
 Caudebec 
 Rouen 
 Gifors 
 Eureux 
 
 Coutance 
 
 Caen 
 
 Alencon 
 
 Rheims 
 
 Troyes 
 
 Rheims 
 
 Vitry Franc. 
 
 Rbetel 
 
 Joinville 
 
 Langres 
 
 Sens 
 
 Meaux 
 
 > Rennes 
 
 Nants 
 
 Vannes 
 
 Quitnper 
 
 Brejl 
 
 Triguer 
 
 St. Bricu 
 
 St. Mala 
 
 Dot 
 
 > Orleans 
 Cbartrts 
 
 207 
 
 The Diitance and 
 Bearing of each/Town 
 from the Capital of 
 the grand Divifion. 
 
 64N >, 
 
 55NW- 
 22NW 
 
 K < of Amiens 
 
 I 
 23 E 
 
 35 E 
 
 47 E J 
 
 60 NW of Paris 
 
 t8W 
 
 38 SE 
 26 S 
 
 of Rot, 
 
 iojSW 
 
 65 SW 
 
 68 SW 
 
 74 NE of Paris 
 
 6c S 
 
 of Rheims 
 
 160 SWof Paris 
 
 48 S -\ 
 44 sw 
 
 l 7 1 7 NWJ 0[Rewie; 
 
 54NW 
 
 38NW 
 31N 
 
 58 S of Paris 
 
 37 N of Orleans 
 
 Hivifion
 
 208 
 
 Prefent State of FRANCE. Part II. 
 
 Divifion and Sub- 
 diviiion. 
 
 3. Percbe 
 
 4. Vendomois 
 
 5. Maine 
 
 6. Poitou 
 
 7. Angoumois 
 
 8. Aunts 
 g. Nivernois 
 
 10. Berry 
 
 1 1 . Gaftinois 
 
 12. Blaifois 
 
 13. Touraine 
 
 14. Anjou 
 7. Burgogne 
 
 1 . Dijonois 
 
 2. Auxois 
 
 3. Auxerrois 
 
 4. Autunois 
 
 5. Chalonois 
 
 6. Cbarollois 
 
 7. Maf cannot s 
 
 8. I* /7^2f 
 
 9. #gvy> 
 JO. Dombes 
 
 8. Lyonnois 
 
 1 . Lyonnois proper 
 
 2. Beaujolois 
 
 3. For ex 
 
 4. Bourbonnois 
 
 ^.Awvergne 
 
 6. Marcbe 
 
 9. Guienne and 
 Gascoigne 
 
 I. Guienne 
 
 1 . Guienne proper 
 
 2. Baza do is 
 
 3. Agenois 
 
 4. ^rav? 
 
 5. Rcniergne 
 
 6. Limojin 
 
 7. Perigord 
 
 Square Miles, 
 Length, Breadth, 
 Situation, ffr. 
 
 Part of Lugdu- 
 nenjis Tertia and 
 Quarta, with 
 fome of ^f/- 
 taine. 
 
 6700 
 Length 150 
 Breadth 86 
 
 IPart of Lugdu- 
 ntnfts Prima. 
 
 Chief Towns J The Diftance and 
 in each grand ' Bearing of eachTown 
 
 Subdivision. 
 
 12500 
 Length 175 
 Breadth 130 
 
 Part of ancient 
 
 Aquitaine and 
 
 Lugdunenjis 
 
 Prima. 
 
 12800 
 Length 216 
 Breadth 120 
 
 Nogent 
 
 Vendome 
 
 Mans ' 
 
 Poicliers 
 
 Angoulefme 
 
 Rocbelle 
 
 Nevers 
 
 Bourges 
 
 Montargis 
 
 Blois 
 
 Tours 
 
 Angiers 
 
 > Dijon 
 
 Semur 
 
 Auxerre 
 
 Autun 
 
 Chalon 
 
 Cbarolles 
 
 Ma/con 
 
 Bourg ' 
 
 Belley 
 
 Trevoux 
 
 $ Lyons 
 
 Beaujeu 
 
 Feurs 
 
 Moulins 
 C Clermont 
 I St. Flour 
 
 Gueret 
 
 > Bourdtaux 
 
 Bazas 
 
 Agen 
 
 Cabors 
 
 Rhodes 
 
 Limoges 
 
 Perigutux 
 
 from the Capital of 
 the grand Divifion. 
 
 50 NW. 
 36 W 
 
 75 W 
 44 SW 
 150SW 
 162SW 
 77 SE 
 52 SE 
 31 E 
 30 SW 
 58SW 
 103SW 
 
 of Orleans 
 
 1 of Dijon 
 
 143 SE of Paris 
 
 35 W 
 66NW 
 45 SW 
 32 S 
 64 SW 
 56 s 
 60S 
 
 88 SE 
 
 75 S 
 ( 87 S of Dijon 
 I 204 SE of Paris 
 
 22 NW 
 
 25 W 
 
 78 NW. er 
 
 68 W 
 
 tooSW. 
 
 264 SE of Paris 
 
 of Bour+ 
 deaux 
 
 Divifion
 
 Chap. VI. Prefint State of FRA NCE. 
 
 Divifion and Sub- 
 divifion. 
 
 8. Xaintonge 
 2. Gafcoigne 
 
 1 . Gafcoigne prop 
 
 2. Confer cms 
 
 3. Cominges 
 
 4. Armagnac 
 
 5. Riviere 
 
 6. Aftarac 
 
 7. Gc.ure 
 
 8. Lomagne 
 
 9. Condorr.ois 
 I o. Chaloffe 
 
 1 1 . Landes 
 
 I z.Terr a de Labour d 
 
 13. Navarre 
 
 14 
 
 5 
 
 16 
 
 10 
 I. 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 i 
 
 7 
 I 
 
 9 
 
 
 1 
 2 
 
 3 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 20 
 21 
 .22 
 
 Soule 
 
 Beame 
 
 Bigorre 
 
 Languedoc 
 
 Touloufe 
 
 Pt. of Mmtauban 
 
 Alby 
 
 Caflres 
 
 ha Vaur 
 
 Rieux 
 
 St. Papoul . 
 
 Mirepoix 
 
 Pt. of Cominges 
 
 Alet 
 . Carcaffone 
 
 Narbonne 
 , St. Pons 
 
 Beziers 
 
 Lodeve 
 
 Agde 
 
 Montpelier 
 
 Nif/nes 
 
 Ufez 
 
 Vi<viert 
 
 Alois 
 
 Mende 
 
 Square Miles, 
 Length, Breadth, 
 Situation, ISc, 
 
 Chief Towns 
 in each grand 
 
 Subdiviiion. 
 
 8800 
 Length 125 
 Breadth 90 
 
 Guienne and Gaf- 
 coigne, anciently 
 Part of Aqu'ti- 
 nia, is thelargeft 
 Government of 
 France. 
 
 l 3* l 7S 
 Length 200 
 Breadth 1 1 5 
 In the Roman Di- 
 vifion of Gaul, 
 Languedoc went 
 by the Name of 
 Gallia Narbo- 
 nenfis. The Air 
 is extremely 
 healthful, and 
 reckon'd an in 
 fallible Cure for 
 a Confumption 
 
 10$ 
 
 The Diftance and 
 Bearing of eachTown 
 from the Capital of 
 the grand Divifion. 
 
 Seintes 
 
 Ayre 
 
 St. Lizier 
 St. Bertrand 
 
 Augb 
 
 Myrande 
 
 Verdun 
 
 Vic 
 
 Condom 
 
 St. Sever 
 
 Dax 
 
 Bayonne 
 
 St. John Pied 
 
 de Port 
 Maulleons 
 Pau 
 Tarhe 
 
 > Touloufe 
 
 CaflleSaraftn 
 Alby 
 Caflrcs 
 La Vaur 
 Rieux 
 St. Papoul 
 Mirepoix 
 St. Licer 
 Alet 
 
 Carcaffone 
 Narbonne 
 St. Pons 
 Bezitrs 
 Lodeve 
 Agde 
 
 Montpeiier 
 Nifmcs 
 Ufa 
 Vivien 
 Alah 
 Mende 
 P 
 
 deaux 
 
 57N 
 
 63 s 
 II8SE 
 
 imSE 
 78 SE 
 
 84 SE 
 88 SE 
 66 SE 
 58 SE 
 60S 
 61 S 
 84 S 
 
 98 S 
 94 S 
 88S y 
 
 94 S 
 
 \ 102 SE f Bcurd. 
 \ 3 I o S of Paris 
 
 23 NVv\ 
 
 32 NE 
 
 33 E 
 16 E 
 23 S 
 30 SE 
 30 SE 
 35 SW 
 48 SE 
 48 SE 
 7 o E 
 
 55 
 80 E 
 
 83 E 
 
 95 E 
 
 120 E 
 142 E 
 148 E 
 165NE 
 130 E 
 1 e M e 
 
 Divifxr. 
 
 ^ of Toulon h
 
 210 
 
 Divifion and Sub- 
 divifton. 
 
 Prefent State of FRANCE. 
 
 Part II. 
 
 23. Put 
 
 II. Dauphine' 
 
 1 . Grajivaudan 
 
 2. Brianconois 
 
 3. Ambrunois 
 
 4. Gapencois 
 
 5. Royanez 
 
 6. Baroniez 
 
 7. Viennois 
 
 8. Valentinois 
 
 9. D/m'j 
 
 10. Tricaftra 
 
 1 1 . Orange 
 
 12. Provence 
 1. >#* 
 2.i?zVz 
 
 3. &w 
 
 4. D:W 
 
 5 . Aries 
 
 6. Marfeilles 
 
 7. Toulon 
 
 8. ivv/aj 
 
 9. Grajfe 
 
 10. ^VC 
 
 j 1 . Glandefves 
 
 12. Sifteron 
 
 1 3. /fy/ 
 
 14. Venafcin 
 
 15. Barcelonettc 
 
 1 6. Iflands 
 
 1 . 5/. Margaret 
 2 Honorat 
 3. The Hieres 
 
 1 . Porquerolle 
 
 2. Porter os 
 
 3. Levant 
 13. Tranche 
 
 Comte' 
 j. Bezsincon 
 
 Square Miles, l Chief Towns 
 Length,Breadth, in each grand 
 
 Situation, ffc. 
 
 5820 
 OlimfaxtofNar- 
 bonenjis, when 
 firft conquer'd 
 by the Romans. 
 Length 107 
 Breadth 90 
 
 Subdivifion. 
 
 6800 
 Olim Provincia, 
 and by Auguflus 
 called Gallia 
 Narbonenjis Se- 
 cunda. 
 
 Length 95 
 Breadth 92 
 It is faid, from 
 hence are ex- 
 ported annually 
 6000 Bales of 
 Cloth; Serges, 
 and other Wool- 
 enManufaftures, 
 to Italy, Sec 
 
 4000 
 Length 100 
 Breadth 60 
 
 > Grenoble 
 
 Briancon 
 
 Ambrun 
 
 Gap 
 
 Pont de Roy- 
 
 ance 
 
 *> . 
 
 J^UIS 
 
 Vienne 
 
 Valence 
 
 Die 
 
 St. Paul 3 
 
 Chateaux 
 Orange 
 
 \Aix 
 
 Riez 
 
 Senez 
 
 Digne 
 
 Aries 
 
 Marfeilles 
 
 Toulon 
 
 Frejus 
 
 Grajfe 
 
 Vence 
 
 Entrevaux 
 
 Sifteron 
 
 Apt 
 
 A-vignon 
 
 Barcelonette 
 
 Lerus 
 Lerina 
 
 Porten 
 
 Pomponiana 
 
 Hypcea 
 
 > Bezancon 
 
 The Diflance and 
 Bearing of eachTown 
 from the Capital of 
 the grand Divifion. 
 
 1 40 NE of Touloufe 
 ( 250 SE of Paris 
 I 20 5 NE of Touloufe 
 
 43 SE 
 46 SE 
 42 S 
 
 15 w 
 
 5 2 S of Gre- 
 ta N W ( noble 
 joSW 
 
 24SVV 
 55 SW 
 
 70 SW 
 ( 98 S of Grenoble 
 I 337 SE of Paris 
 25 NEn 
 
 45 NE * 
 
 46 NE 
 28 W 
 15S 
 35 SE 
 54E 
 65 E 
 70 E 
 63 NE 
 
 44 NE 
 23N 
 32 NW 
 
 75 NEy 
 
 \ of Ah 
 
 10 SE 
 
 12 SE 
 
 15 SE 
 
 20 SE 
 22 SE 
 
 l of Graft e 
 
 of Toulon 
 
 H 
 
 36 E of Dijon 
 O SE of Paris 
 
 Diviikn
 
 Chap VI. 
 
 Divifion and Sub- 
 divifion. 
 
 Prefint State of FRANCE. 1 i i 
 
 Chief Towns! The Diflance and 
 
 2. Dole 
 
 3. Amont 
 
 4. Aval 
 
 I 4. L.ORRAIN 
 
 1 . Lorrair. proper 
 I. Nancy 
 
 1. Mirecourt 
 
 3. Vaudrevange 
 
 4. Hatton-cbajl. 
 5;. B lament 
 
 6. Vaudemont 
 
 7. S arbour g 
 
 8. Tout 
 
 9. Salme 
 
 10. Verdun, &c. 
 
 2. Bar 
 l.Bar 
 
 2. St. Michael 
 
 3. Clermont 
 
 4. Longroy 
 
 5. Pont'a.MuJfon 
 
 6. Stenay 
 75. Alsatia 
 
 1 shower Alfatia 
 
 Square Miles, 
 Length,Breadth, 
 Situation, &V. 
 
 Comit. Bitrgun- 
 dite. 
 
 2500 
 Lorrain was an- 
 ciently reckon'd 
 Part of Belgium ; 
 and the firit In- 
 habitants we 
 have any Ac- 
 count of were 
 theMedionatrici. 
 It is much en- 
 cumbered with 
 Mountains. 
 
 in each grand 
 Subdivision. 
 
 z. Upper Alfatia 
 
 Netherlands to 
 
 France 
 id. Rousiu.on 
 
 2250 
 Length 95 
 Breadth 30 
 
 Alfatia is the 
 Country of the 
 ancient Tribones. 
 
 17. Artois 
 
 1400 
 Part of Tarra- 
 conenjis. 
 
 Part of Belgica 
 Secunda 
 
 Dole 
 Gray 
 Salins 
 
 I Metx 
 
 Nancy 
 
 Mirecourt 
 
 Vaudrevange 
 
 Hatton-cbaJT- 
 
 Blamont (eau 
 
 Vaudemont 
 
 Sarbourg 
 
 foul 
 
 Salme 
 
 Verdun 
 
 < Bar-le-duc 
 
 St. Michael 
 Clermont 
 Longroy 
 Pont-a-MuJf. 
 Stenay 
 C Stratsburg 
 
 < olim Arg- 
 (_ en tor at urn. 
 
 Zaber?t 
 Haguenau 
 Fort Lewis 
 Wiffemburg 
 Landau 
 Colmar 
 Nenu Brifac 
 Mul ban fen 
 
 Perpignan 
 
 Arras 
 P z 
 
 Bearing of eachTown 
 from the Capital of 
 the grand Divifion. 
 
 ?of 
 
 Bexan- 
 
 20W 
 
 20 NW, 
 18 S J { " 
 
 ( 1 1 8 N of Bezanc. 
 I 145 W of Paris 
 
 3oS ^ 
 50 S 
 30 NE 
 44 SW 
 44 SE 
 42 S 
 
 34 E 
 
 34 S 
 60 SE 
 30 W 
 
 46 SW 
 
 35 SW 
 38 W 
 30 NW 
 
 21 S 
 
 S of MetK 
 
 37 NW- 
 
 J 
 
 1 75 SE of Metx. 
 y 205 E of Paris 
 
 i 2 NW N 
 .2N 
 17 NE 
 
 388 S of Parts 
 82 SE of Totileufe 
 
 90 N of Paris 
 27 N of Amiens 
 
 Divifion
 
 212 
 
 Divifion and Sub- 
 divifion 
 
 Prefent State of FRANCE. 
 
 Square Miles, Chief Towns 
 Length, Breadth, in each grand 
 Situation, &c. Subdiviiion 
 
 iS. Hainault 
 
 19. Cambresls 
 
 20. luxemburg 
 
 21. Flanders 
 
 800 
 Part of Belgica 
 Secunda . 
 
 ICO 
 Part of Belgica 
 Secunda. 
 
 2gz 
 Part of Germa- 
 nia Secunda and 
 Belgica Secunda. 
 
 760 
 Part of Belgica 
 Secunda. 
 
 Valencienne 
 Cambray 
 
 Thion'ville 
 
 Lip 
 
 Part I!. 
 
 The Diftance and 
 Bearing of eachTowa 
 from the Capital of 
 the grand Divifion. 
 
 104 NEof Paris 
 28 E of Anas 
 
 go N of Paris 
 18 E of Arras 
 
 I 44 NE of Paris 
 17 N of Metx 
 
 ill N of Paris 
 23 N of Valencien. 
 
 Climate.] The Air of this Country, in general, is very tem- 
 perate, pleafant, and healthful ; the Soil extremely fruitful, par- 
 ticularly in Corn, Wine, and Fruits. The longeft Day in the 
 Northmoft Part of this Kingdom is about 16 \ Hours, and in the 
 moll Southern Parts 1 5 Hours ; therefore this Country lies in the 
 6, 7, 8 and 9th Northern Climates. 
 
 Government.] As to the Form of Government of France, 
 the legiflative, as well as the executive Power, is veiled folely in 
 the King : His Edicls are of the Force of Adts of Parliament with 
 us, and he appoints the Judges and Officers who are to put them 
 in Execution. But, anciently, there were very potent Dukes, 
 Earls, and Lords, in France, who exercifed great Authority, and 
 ufed to pay no farther Obedience to the King than was confident 
 with their own Interell ; but, by the Policy of fome great Mini- 
 fters of State, the Power of the Nobility was fo ftrangely im- 
 . paired, that now they appear as fo many Cyphers in the Nation. 
 The Three Ellates formerly were in great Veneration, having 
 mighty Privileges, whereby the King's Power was much limited ; 
 but thefe Affemblies are entirely laid afide, having never been 
 convened fince the Year 16 14. As to the Parliament of France, 
 it has been taught of late only to intermeddle with Judicial Bufi- 
 x\c&, and fome other Concern?, which the King, now-and-then, is 
 p leafed to leave to its Decifion. The Crown of France is heredi- 
 tary ; but all Females are excluded by the Salique Law. 
 
 Trade]
 
 Chap. VI. Prefent State of FRANCE. 2 r 3 
 
 Trade. ] The Care and Thought which the French Minifters 
 have employ 'd for promoting their ownManufaduries, and turning 
 every Article of their Commerce to the National Advantage, is 
 very remarkable ; for they have even fent skilful and able Men 
 into the principal trading Countries, to infpecl their Management, 
 and pry into the Secrets of their Trade ; being now entirely con- 
 vinced, that Commerce is of fo great Importance, that very few 
 Things in Goverment deferve more Attention than this Article. 
 This Kingdom, in general, not only produces fufficiently for its 
 Inhabitants, but alfo plentifully exports into foreign 
 Parts. England takes from France Wine, Brandy, Trad* ivitb 
 Linnen, fine Lace, fine Cambricks, and Cambrick England. 
 Lawns, to a prodigious Value, Brocades, Velvets, 
 and many other rich Silk Manufactures, which are either run upon 
 us, or come by Way of Holland. France takes from England 
 large Quantities of Tobacco, Horn-plates, Tin, fome Lead, Ibme 
 Flannels, and Corn in Time of Scarcity. The French King hav- 
 ing placed his Grandfon upon the Throne of Spain, upon the 
 Death of Charles II. the Wearing of French Manufactures was 
 foon introduced into Spain, which before ufed to be fupply'd from 
 England. The French have, of late Years, laid down fome of 
 their beft Lands for Pafturage, to mend the Growth of their 
 Wool, which will not fcrve to make their Manufacture*, without 
 a Mixture of ours and Spanijb. This Nation bids fair to become 
 the richeft in Europe; for they have modeled every thing fo well, 
 that they fend their Silk and Linnen Manufactures moitly of their 
 ownProducl, and have the Returns again in Silver and 
 Gold. The Commodities exported out of France in- Trade -aith 
 to other foreign Parts, are chiefly Wine, Brandy, ether Coun- 
 Vinegar, Salt, innumerable Sorts of Silks, and tries. 
 Woolen Goods ; alio Hemp, Canvas, Linnen, Paper, 
 Glafs, Saffron, Almond:., Olives, Capers, Prunelloes, Chefnuts, 
 Soap, and the like. 
 
 Revenues.] The Taxes ufually levied in France are, the 
 Taille, or Land-tax, the Taillon, the Subfiflence-money, the 
 Aides, and the Gabtlks. As to the Manner of" levying the Land- 
 iax, after the King has determined what Sum he will rake, an 
 Order is iffued to every Generality, afcertaining what Part of it 
 fhall be levied in each Election. The Taillon was eftablifhed for 
 augmenting the Soldiers IV. y. The Subfiftence is a Tax which was 
 firlt levied by Lewis XIV. for the Subfiftence of his vuft Armies 
 in their Winter Quarters. By the Aides are underilood all Duties 
 and Cuitom* on Goods and Merchandizes, except Salt. The Ga~ 
 Llles arc Taxes ariii\v fVom Salt. The other Taxes a!e t the Poll- 
 
 P 3 tux j
 
 214 Prefent State of FRANCE. Part II. 
 
 tax ; the Tenths of all the Eltates of the Kingdom ; the Fiftieth 
 Penny, or the Fiftieth Part of the Produce of the Earth ; the 
 Tenths and Free Gifts of the Clergy. From thefe, and the Re- 
 venues arifing from the Crown Lands, Fines, cirV. and from the 
 high Duties impofed on all Provilions brought into Paris, arife 
 Fifteen Millions Sterling, and upwards, annually, to the Govern- 
 ment. I cannot forbear mentioning thofe violent Methods fome- 
 times prattifed by the French Court, in order to raife Money, to 
 fupport her Projects and vaft Armies ; which are, raifing theValue 
 of the Coin, and compelling the People to take Paper for their 
 Money, and then compounding with them to take Half, or per- 
 haps a Quarter, of their refpective Debts, when they come to be 
 paid : And it is fuppofed, that the King makes as much by thefe 
 oppreflive Methods as the above annual Revenues. 
 
 Forces. ] The Armies of France were never fo numerous as 
 in the Reign of Lewis XIV. In the War which 
 LandForces. preceded the Peace of Utrecht, they amounted to 
 near 400,000 Men ; ana, 'tis faid, they are not 
 much lefs at prefent, when th 1 Regiments are com- 
 RoyalNavj. pleted. The Royal Navy conhfied, in the laft War, 
 of 26 Firft Rates, 30 Second Rates, 46 Third Rate;, 
 12 Fourth Rates, 27 light Frigates, 5 Bomb-gal- 
 liots, 22 Fire-fhips, befides Tenders, cifc. The Gal- 
 Galleys. leys of France amount to about 40 ; the two largeft 
 
 whereof have each 300 Men, and the reft 200 Men 
 each : But befides the Crew, each Galley has a 
 Company of Foot confiding of 60 Men. The 
 Militia. Guards of the Coaft, a Part of the Militia, were 
 
 inftituted to prevent a Defcent from a foreign Ene- 
 my : Thefe enjoy many more Privileges than the ordinary Militia 
 of France, on account of their being always in Readineis. 
 
 Character.] The French pretend to have always a great 
 Veneration for their King, and, as long as he is able to maintain 
 his Authority, are ready to facrifice Life and Fortune for his 
 Glory. They have a Genius fit to undertake any thing, whether 
 it be in Learning, Trade, or Manufactures, efpecially thofe Things 
 which depend more on Ingenuity and Dexterity, than hard 
 Labour. They are generally allow'd to be very civil, fprightly, 
 and active ; bleffed with a clear Conception, and ready Expreffion ; 
 extremely complaifant and obliging to Foreigners, pledfing in 
 Difcourfe, of a graceful and winning Deportment. But they are 
 alfo allow'd to be Matters of Diffimulatio, exceffively vain and 
 talkative, exceedingly given to obfequious Flattery, familiar 
 %tA acquainted at firft Sight, impatient in Adverfity, univerf- 
 
 allv
 
 Chap. VI. Prtfint Slate of FRANCE. lis 
 
 ally litigious. This Nation has of late advanc'd the Republic of 
 Letters to a very confiderable Height ; and has produced feveral 
 Authors, (and even fome of the Fair Sex ) who are now famous 
 through all the Learned World for their fingular Parts. The 
 French are feldom troubled with Jealoufy ; for they aliow the Fe- 
 male Sex all imaginable innocent Freedoms ; it being fometimes 
 difficult, by the Lady's Behaviour in Company, to diftinguifh 
 which is the Husband, and which is the Stranger. 
 As to their military Virtues, it muft be acknowledg'd, Military 
 that they have brought theArt of War to great Per- Virtues. 
 feftion ; there are no People who attack or defend a 
 Place better than they do, or are better vers'd in Fortification : 
 Their Horfe, in general, were defervedly efteemed as good as any 
 Troops iriEurope, till the Battle of HockJIet, when they were mifer- 
 ably broken : TheirFoot are alfo exceedingly well difciplin'd, but are 
 liable to be borne down by the Dutch and Germans, who are much 
 larger Men. The Parijians, both Men and Women, indeed, are 
 of late ftrangely alter'd in their Conftitutions and Habit of Body ; 
 from lean and flender, they are become fat and corpulent, which 
 is fuppofcd to proceed from their living more freely than formerly. 
 A French Gentleman feems alfo naturally cut out for a Courtier 
 or an Officer ; and if he happens to be of a melancholy Difpofition, 
 or a Man of Letters, here are always Convents, and numerous Pre- 
 ferments to be met with in the Church. 
 
 Religion. ] The eftablifhed Religion in France is that of the 
 Roman Catholic ; but the Gallican Church pretends to enjoy greater 
 Liberties and Privileges, and to be lefs fubjett to the See of Rome, 
 than any other Chriftian State of that Communion. The Nation 
 is divided into two great Parties, one of them zealous in defend- 
 ing the Rights of the Gallican Church againft the Encroachments 
 of Rome, and the other no lefs zealous in afferting the Pope's Su- 
 premacy. Of the latter Party are the Je/uits, who, at this Day, 
 feem to have the greateft Influence, and to whofe indefatigable In- 
 dustry we may afcribe the receiving of the Conftitution Unigenitus 
 after fo long and warm a Struggle, and after a vaft Number of 
 innocent People had been ruin'd for purfuing the Dictates of their 
 Confciences. This Conftitution Unigenitus was fo called from the 
 Pope's Decree in 171 1, which begins, Unigenitus Dei Filius : It 
 was made againft a Book of Father ^ucfncfs, intitled, The New 
 Teflament in French, ivith moral Refieclions on each Verfe, printed 
 at Paris 1694. Out of this Book were extracted 101 Paflages, or 
 Propofitions, as the Subjeft of the Pope's Cenfure ; of which I fhall 
 only mention the 80th, which fays, that the Reading of the holy 
 Scriptures is to be allovsed to all Men. The Proteftants ( common- 
 ly called Huguenots ) were formerly allow'd the public Profeffion 
 
 P 4 of
 
 2 1 6 Prefent State of FRANCE. Part II. 
 
 of their Religion, by feveral Edi&s granted by the French Kings : 
 But the Repeal of thefe rcfpedtive Edi&s occafioned Civil Wars ; 
 and, atlaft, Letvis XIV. ordered all their Churches to be deftroyed, 
 and violently perfecuted the Proteftantsj which forced great Num- 
 bers to leave the Kingdom, and feek for Shelter in foreign Parts. 
 However, fome Jews are tolerated at Metz, in Alfatia, at Bay- 
 o:vie, and even at Avignon, which belongs to the Pope. 
 
 Customs.] The ufual Diverfions of the French are, either 
 Plays, Gaming, Walking, or Taking the Air in Coaches. Their 
 Opera's in Paris are extremely fine, the Mufic admirable, the 
 Stage large and magnificent, theScenes well-fuited, and chang'd al- 
 moit imperceptibly, theDancing exquifite, and the Cloatheing rich, 
 proper, and with great Variety ; many of the Nobility frequent 
 them every Day, and fing them, all frequently joining their 
 Voices with the Aftors. They take the Air in the Courfe, which 
 confifts of three pleafant Walks of Trees, along the Bank of the 
 River Seine, inclosM at each End with magnificent 
 Diver/tons. Gates. The Coaches may, fometimes, amount, in 
 the whole, to Six or Seven hundred. About the 
 Evening moil of the Coaches return to the Gate of the Tuilleries, 
 where the Company light, and walk in the delightful Gardens of 
 that Palace ; nor can there be a more beautiful Scene than the 
 Middle-walk of the Tuilleries, when filled with fuch good Com- 
 pany. The French do not eat that Quantity of Flefh 
 Diet. that we do, nor do they often drefs it in the fame 
 
 Manner : Soops, Fricafiees, Ragouts, and Hafhes, 
 difffuis'd with Onions, Herbs and Spices, are preferred before 
 whole Joints boil'd or roaftcd. They hang up their Meat alfo be- 
 fore it is drefs 'd, till it is fo very tender, that an Engliflwian 
 would think it fit for the Dunghil. But if the French eat lefs 
 Meat than we do, they are perfect Devourers of Bread, which is 
 generally exceeding light and good. They have alfo great Variety 
 of Wines, which are their ordinary Drink, and are fuppofed to 
 contribute to that Sprightlinefs and Vivacity fo remarkable in the 
 French. Cyder is pretty much drank in the Northern Parts of 
 France, which yield little or no Wine. This Nation 
 Drefs. is much more extravagant in their Drefs than in 
 Eating and Drinking. An Italian Painter, being de- 
 fined to draw a Frenchman, reprefented him with a Pair of Sheers 
 and a Piece of Cloth, intimating, that he was ever cutting out 
 fomething new. Tins Levity in Drefs is defpis'd by their neareit 
 Neighbours the Italians, Dutch, and Spaniards, who fcldom alter 
 the r-uihioucf their Cloath.-. 
 
 Cu-
 
 Chap. VII. Prefent State of FRANCE. 1 1 7 
 
 Curiosities.] The chief Curiofities of iv/r^r* are, 
 1 . Triumphal Arches, particularly that in the City of Triumphal 
 Rheims: There are alfo theRuins of feveral others near Arches. 
 Autun in Burgundy ; one at Saintes in Guienne ; an- 
 other almoft intire in the City of Orange, ere&ed by Caius Ma- 
 rius, and Luclatius Catulus, upon the Victory obtained over the 
 Cimbri and TeUtones ; where are likewife the Ruins of a Roman 
 Circus : To thefe we may add that ftately Bridge near Nifmes, con- 
 filling of Three Stones of Arches, one above another, the lail of 
 which was an Aqueduct. 2. Amphitheatres, as 
 the Ruins of a ftately one at Chalons in Burgundy, Amphi- 
 another at Perigueux in Guienne, another at 'Thou- theatres, 
 loufe in Languedoc, another at Aries in Provence 
 another at Vienne in Dauphine ; but the chief of all is that 
 at Nifmes, of an extraordinary Bignefs, and as yet adorn'd with 
 feveral Pillars, and divers Roman Eagles, as alfo the Fables of 
 Romulus and Remus fucking the She-wolf. 3. The 
 Remains of fome Heathen Temples ; particularly Heathen 
 thofe of Templum Jani (now called the Jenetoye) at Temples. 
 Autun in Burgundy, thofe of the Goddcfs Venus at 
 Perigueux in Guienne, and that of Diana near Nifmes 
 in Languedoc. 4. Remarkable Pillars, particularly Ancient 
 thofe ancient Columns and Pyramids near Autun in Pyramids. 
 Burgundy ; but more efpecially is that famous Roman 
 Obelisk of Oriental Granate at Aries in Provence, which is moll 
 admir'd by the Curious, being Fifty-two Foot high, Seven Foot 
 Diameter at the Bafe, and yet all but One Stone. Among the 
 Monuments of Antiquity, we may mention the large Paffage cut 
 thro' the Middle of a Rock about Two Leagues from Briancon in 
 Dauphine, which, being a Ihipendous Piece of Work, gives Occa- 
 iion to various Conjectures, fome imputing it to Julius Cajmr, and 
 Others rather to Hannibal. To thefe we may add that large and 
 round Buckler,, of mafly Silver, fifli'd out cf the Rhone, near. 
 Avignon, 1665. being 20 Inches in Diameter, and weighing 21 
 Pounds : 'Tis 1 900 Years old and upwards, and is charged witluVr/;>?0 
 Africanus, half-mantled, and Roman Officers attending, with the 
 Spaniards fupplicating for a fair Virgin ; the fame being confe- 
 crated to that virtuous General, upon his rcllorir.g a beautiful 
 Captive to Allucius Prince of Celtiberia, who had 
 efpoufed her. 5. Waters of remarkable Qualities ; Water; if 
 particularly thofe near cT Acque in Gafcoignc, fo re- remarkuUe 
 putcd of old for Bathing, that from them the whole Qualities. 
 Province of Aquitaine did derive its Name. As alio 
 the Mineral Waters of Bourbon, much reforted to even in the 
 Time of the Romans ; together with the famous Fountain ne.'.r to 
 Gr^nokle, which appear* as if covered with Flaxaejj and boils p 
 
 in
 
 2 j 8 Prefint State of IT ALT. Part II 
 
 in great Bubbles, and yet is never hurt ; likewife another near 
 the City of Mans, which makes Silver look exact- 
 JRemarkable \y like Gold. 6. Obfervable Mountains, particular- 
 Mountains. \y thofe near Rhode in Guienne, called the Mountains 
 of Can/acy which burn whenever it rains. 7. Hide- 
 Sitbterrane- ous fubterraneous Paffages, as that in the Foreft of 
 cus Pa/- St. Aubin du Cormier in Bretagne, through which 
 fages, flows a mighty Torrent of Water ; and another 
 
 near Niont in Dauphine, from which proceeds a vio- 
 lent Wind. 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 
 The prefent State of ITALY. 
 
 Boundaries.] ITALY (anciently Hefperia, Saturnia, Au/onia, 
 Oenotria, Latium, and Janicula) is bounded 
 by the Alps, which feparate it from Trance, Switzerland, and 
 Germany, towards the North and North-weft ; by the Gulph of 
 Venice, or the Adriatic Sea, towards the Eaft ; by the Ionian Sea, 
 and Streights of Meffina, towards the South ; and by the Tu/cau 
 or Tyrrhenian Sea towards the Weft. 
 
 Situation.] This Country extends from 3 8 20' to 46 5' 
 North Latitude ; and from the 7 to 1 9 of Eaft Longitude. The 
 Length is 690, and Breadth 345 Miles. 
 
 DivifionandSub 
 divifion. 
 
 i.UfperItaly 
 1. Savoy 
 
 Chabalais 
 Genevois 
 Savoy prop. 
 Aoujie 
 Faucigny 
 
 6. Tarentai/e 
 
 7. Morienne 
 
 8. Bugey 
 
 Square Miles, 
 
 Chief 
 
 &e. 
 
 Towns. 
 
 3572 
 
 Cbtmbery 
 
 Length 87 
 
 Thonon 
 
 Breadth 60 
 
 Annecy 
 
 Part of old Gal- 
 
 Chambery 
 
 lia Narbonenjis. 
 
 Aoujie 
 
 
 Bonneville . 
 
 The four firft 
 
 Monfiier j 
 
 Divifions of Italy 
 
 St. John de 
 
 belong to the 
 
 Moriena 
 
 KingofSardinia. 
 
 
 Diftance and Bearing 
 of Towns. 
 
 34 NE of Grenoble 
 54NE 
 
 28 N 
 
 60 E 
 
 40 NE 
 
 30 SE 
 
 of Cham- 
 berry 
 
 Divifioft
 
 Chap. VII. Prefent State of IT ALT. 
 
 Divifion and Sub- i Square Miles, 
 divifion. &c. 
 
 2. Piedmont 
 
 1 . Turin 
 
 2. Saviglian \ 
 
 3. Coni 
 
 4. Mondovi 
 <j. Chierafque 
 6. Chierri, &C 
 
 3.M0NTFERAT 
 
 1. Cafal 
 
 2. Acqui 
 
 3. Trino 
 
 4. Alba 
 
 r. Vigevanefe 
 
 6. Alexandria 
 
 7. Laumcliana 
 
 Chief 
 
 Towns. 
 
 21<j 
 
 IDiftance and Bearing 
 of Towns. 
 
 4. Nice 
 
 1 . Tende 
 
 2. Boglio 
 
 3. Oneglia 
 Add the Ifland 
 of Sardinia * | 
 
 6619 
 
 Length 140 
 
 Breadth 98 
 
 Part of old Nar- 
 
 bonenfis Liguria. 
 
 55 
 Length 40 
 
 Breadth 22 
 Moll Part of Li- 
 guria, which was 
 calPd Cifapen- 
 nina. 
 
 Revenues of the 
 King of Sardinia 
 about 500,000/. 
 keeps a good 
 Body cf Troops 
 inTime of Peace, 
 and can raife up- 
 wards of 30,000 
 good Soldiers. 
 232 
 
 Saviglian 
 Coni 
 Mondovi 
 Chierafqu, 
 Chier. &c 
 
 1 Cafal 
 
 Acqui 
 
 Trino 
 
 Alba 
 
 Vigevano 
 
 Alexandr. 
 
 Valencia 
 
 Part of Narbo- 
 
 nenjis Sc Liguria. 
 
 6600 
 
 Nice 
 
 Tende 
 
 Boglio 
 
 Oneglia 
 \ Cagli- 
 5 ari 
 
 (85 SE of Chamber. 
 \ 322 SE of Paris 
 18S *\ 
 
 28 S 
 32 SE 
 24 S 
 10E 
 
 44E 
 
 55 E 
 36 E 
 23 SE 
 78 E 
 60 E 
 62 E 
 
 L 
 
 Turi 
 
 66 S 
 
 44 S 
 
 52 sw 
 
 68 E 
 
 } 
 
 of Turin 
 
 250 S of Nice 
 
 * Sardinia, olim Ichnufa and Sandaliotis, (belonging to the Duke 
 of Savoy ) one of the largejl IJlands of the Mediterranean Sea, is 
 I 7 ! Miles from North to South, and 96 from Eajl to Weft. There 
 are 44 little IJlands dependent on it, of which S. Antioco, S. Pietro, 
 Travolara, and Afinara, are the chief', many of the others are 
 uninhabited. Sardinia nvas given to the Duke of Savoy, and the 
 Title of King, in lieu of Sicily, tvhich nvas given him by the 
 Treaties of Utrecht and Baden, and taken from him in 1 7 1 8. The 
 Soil of this Ifland is fruitful, nvhen it is manured ; the Air in. 
 Summer is hot and fultry, and reckoned very unhealthful. There 
 are but fenv Towns of any Note, and but thinly peopled ; and the 
 Natives are an unpolijhed Generation. The Fact of this If and is 
 wry rough. Divifion
 
 220 
 
 Division and Sub- 
 divifion. 
 
 Prefent State of ITALT. Part II. 
 
 South 
 North 
 
 5. Genoa, Rep. 
 
 1. E aft em 
 
 1. Rapalh 
 
 2. Brugnetto 
 
 3 . Spezza 
 
 4. Sarzano 
 
 2 . Wejtern 
 
 1. Ventimiglia 
 
 2. Albenga 
 
 3. Noli 
 
 4. Savona 
 
 6. Milan, Dutch. 
 
 1 . Pa<vefan, 
 
 2. Lode fan 
 
 3. Cremonefe 
 
 4. Tortonefe 
 
 5. Bobbio 
 
 6. No-vari/e 
 
 7. Mi lane fe prop. 
 
 9. Anghiera 
 
 7. Mantua, Dut 
 
 1 . Mantua prop. 
 
 2. Sabionctta 
 
 3. Cznaflalla 
 
 4. Bozzolo 
 
 5. Caf.iglion 
 
 Square Miles, 
 fcfr. 
 
 S*^ 
 
 ChiefTowns. 
 
 2400 
 Length 160 
 Breadth 25 
 A great Part of 
 ancient Liguria 
 Government 
 committed to the 
 Doge or Duke, 
 chofen every two 
 Years, but lodg*d 
 intheSenate. Re- 
 venues 200,000/. 
 20,000 Forces. 
 Navy 6 Gallies. 
 
 543 1 
 Length 155 
 Breadth 70 
 The greateftPart 
 of Gallia Tranf- 
 padana,a.nd fome 
 of Liguria. The 
 Government is 
 lodg'd in the Se- 
 nate, fubjett to 
 the Controul of 
 the Emperor. 
 Revenues about 
 300,000 /.The 
 Forces that can 
 be raifed are 
 near 30,000. 
 700 
 Length 47 
 Breadth 27 
 Part of ancient 
 Cenomani. Go- 
 vernment under 
 the Emperor. 
 Revenues about 
 80,000 /. 
 
 < Genoa 
 
 Rapallo 
 Brugnetto 
 Spezza 
 Sarzano 
 
 Ventimiglia 
 Albenga 
 Noli 
 Savona 
 
 Milan 
 
 Pavia 
 
 Lodi 
 
 Cremona 
 
 Tortoon 
 
 Bobbio 
 
 Novara 
 
 Milan 
 
 Como 
 
 Anghiera 
 
 \ Mantua 
 
 Sabionetta 
 Guajlalla 
 Bozzolo 
 Cajlillan de 
 Silver 
 
 Diftance and Bearing 
 of Towns. 
 
 168 S of Nice 
 98 SE of Turin 
 
 u E 
 
 32 SE 
 45 SE 
 50 SE 
 
 ) of Genoa 
 
 100SW 
 55 SW 
 36 W 
 30 W J 
 
 95 E of Turin 
 17SE 
 
 of Milan 
 
 20 N 
 
 36 NW. 
 
 65 E of Milan 
 
 12 S 
 15S 
 12 SW \oiMantua 
 
 20 NW 
 
 ! 
 
 Divifion
 
 Chap. VII. 
 
 Divifion and Sub- 
 divifion. 
 
 Prefent State of ITALY. 
 
 8. MoDENA, Dut. 
 
 1 . Modena 
 
 2. Regio 
 
 3. Mirandola 
 
 4. Corregio 
 
 5. Carpi 
 
 6. Trignano 
 
 ). Parma 
 
 1. Parma 
 
 2. Plaifance 
 
 3. Bujfeto 
 
 4. Val di Taro 
 
 10. Venice 
 
 I . Terra Firma 
 
 1. Dogada 
 
 2. Padouano 
 
 3. Polejino de 
 Rovigo 
 
 4. Veronefe 
 
 5 . Brejcian 
 
 6. Bergamafco 
 
 7. Cremafco 
 
 8. Vi cent in 
 
 9. Trevifana 
 lo. Feltrino 
 
 I I . Belluncfc 
 
 1 2. Cadorino 
 
 13. Part of /WW/ 
 
 Square Miles, 
 fcSV. 
 
 221 
 
 ChicfTowns. Diftance and Bearing 
 of Towns. 
 
 . 1680 
 Length 65 
 Breadth 39 
 Part of ancient 
 Gallia Cifpadan. 
 TheRevenues of 
 this Duke, who 
 is abfolute, 
 amount to near 
 1 00,000 /. 
 1225 
 Length 48 
 Breadth 37 
 Part of old Gal- 
 lia Cifpadana. 
 Belongs to the 
 Emperor. Re- 
 venues near 
 1 00,000 /. 
 8434 
 Length 175 
 Breadth 95 
 Containing an- 
 cient Venetia, 
 Carnia, I/lria, 
 and Part of the 
 Cenotnani. 
 
 The Venetian 
 Government is 
 lodged in the 
 Nobility : but 
 conditionally 
 committed to 
 the Doge, who 
 keeps this Poll 
 for Life. 
 
 Revenues are 
 1,200,000 /. 
 Forces 24,000. 
 Navy, 30 Men 
 of War, and 
 loo Gallics. 
 
 { 
 
 Modena 
 
 Regio 
 
 Mirandola 
 
 Corregio 
 
 Carpi 
 
 Trignano 
 
 < Parma 
 
 Plaifance 
 Bufeto 
 Val di Taro 
 
 > Venice 
 Padua 
 
 Rovigo 
 : Verona 
 I Brefcia 
 \ Bergamo 
 j Crema 
 
 Vicenza 
 
 Tre<vifa 
 
 Feltri 
 
 Belluno 
 
 Picve de Ca- 
 dore 
 
 Vdtne 
 
 65 S of Mantua 
 
 1 5 NW-) 
 
 20 N / 
 
 10 N 
 
 20 S 
 
 
 30 W of Modena 
 
 2,-NW 
 
 i 
 
 15 NW J. of />*,-& 
 18S j 
 
 C 75 E of Mantua 
 < 460 SE of Paris 
 t 000 SE of London 
 25W ^ 
 
 34 SV7 
 65 W 
 102W 
 123 w 
 110VV ( 
 44 W / 
 I7NW 
 41 NW 
 41 N 
 
 of Venice 
 
 56 N 
 
 5 z~N 
 
 Divifion
 
 223 
 
 Divifion and 
 
 divifion. 
 
 Sub- 
 
 14. f ljlria 
 
 2. % Dalmatia 
 
 1. Continent 
 
 2. Iflands 
 
 3. Levant 
 
 1 . Corfu 
 
 2. St. Maura 
 
 3. Cephalonia 
 
 4. Zante*,8cc. 
 
 2. Middle Italy 
 I.Tuscan r 
 
 1 . The Florentine 
 
 2. The Pi/an 
 
 3. Si en no is 
 
 Prefent State of IT ALT. 
 
 Square Miles,' Chief Towns. 
 1245 
 
 2. Lucca, Rep. 
 
 1400 
 j 364 
 
 194 
 
 428 
 120 
 
 6696 
 
 Part of Etruria, 
 
 Length 1 1 5 
 
 Breadth 94 
 
 SubjecY to its 
 
 own Duke. 
 
 Revenues arc 
 500,000 /. 
 Forces, fmall. 
 Navy,i2Gallies 
 286 
 To Spain. 
 
 Capo d'Iftria 
 
 > Zara 
 
 Corfu 
 St. Maura 
 Cepba Ionia 
 Zante 
 
 > Florence 
 
 Pifa 
 Sienna 
 
 Lucca 
 
 Part II. 
 
 Diftance and Bearing 
 of Towns. 
 
 60 E 1 
 190SE f of 
 
 Venice 
 
 \ 
 
 On the Coaft of 
 Rumelia 
 
 60 SE of Modena 
 
 35 W 
 
 U s 
 
 of Florence 
 
 loNof?;> 
 
 4/ Iftria is frequently defcrihed among the Venetian Provinces, hut, as it 
 lies on the Eaflern Side of the Adriatic Sea, it feems more properly to be- 
 long to Germany. It is a woody mountainous Country, and chiefly valu- 
 able to the Venetians on account of the Stone, Salt, and Timber, which, 
 they bring from thence. Its Length is about Sixty, and Breadth Fifty, 
 Miles, and the Soil neither very fruitful nor healthful. 
 
 \ Tho % Dalmatia is not in Italy, yet I have fubjoined it to the Venetian 
 Dominions, that their Territories may be feen at one View. The Continent 
 cf Dalmatia Jlretches along the Coafl of the Adriatic Sea, near 1 40 Miles 
 in Length, and 20 in Breadth. . ' 
 
 * Zante, about 24 Miles in Length, and I 2 in Breadth, is confiderable 
 for the little Grapes called Currants, or Corinths, from their being firjl 
 cultivated about the City of Corinth, where there are now fcarce any : 
 Europe being fupplied with this kind of Fruit from hence, this Ifland, by 
 that means, carries on a very great Trade. The Inhabitants of Cephalo- 
 nia and Zme are Greeks, but the Venetians have introduced the Roman 
 Catholic Religion. 
 
 Divifion
 
 Chap. Vn. 
 
 Divificm and 
 divifion. 
 
 Sub- 
 
 3.D*LLlpRESIDII 
 4. PlOMBINO 
 
 5.S.MARixo,Rcp. 
 b. Pope's Domin. 
 
 1 . Campania 
 
 2. St. Peter's Pa- 
 
 trim. 
 
 1 . Caftro 
 
 2. Orvieto 
 
 3. Ronciglione 
 
 3. Sabina 
 
 4. Spoletto 
 
 1 . Perugia 
 
 2. Caftello 
 
 5. Ancona 
 
 6. Urbino 
 
 7. Romania 
 
 1 . Roman iaproip. 
 
 2. Ferrara 
 
 3. Bolognefe 
 
 3. Lower Italy 
 1. Naples 
 I .Terra di La<voro 
 
 1. La<voro prop. 
 
 2. Principato 
 Citerior 
 
 3. Principato 
 Ulterior 
 
 2. Abruzzo 
 
 1. Abruzzo Ci- 
 terior 
 
 2. Abruzzo Ul- 
 terior 
 
 3 . M?///fc 
 
 3. Apuglia 
 
 1. Apuglia Capi- 
 tinata 
 
 2 . Terra deBarri 
 
 3. Terra di 
 
 Otranto 
 
 4. Calabria 
 
 Present State of It ALT. 
 
 ChiefTowns. 
 
 Square Mile 
 
 300 
 To Spain. 
 100 To fya//. 
 8 
 
 14868 
 Containing an 
 dent Umbria,Pi 
 cenum, Sabinttm, 
 molt of Latium, 
 and Part of Gal- 
 lia Cifpadana 
 and Etruria. 
 Government as 
 abfolute as any 
 in Europe. The 
 Revenues of his 
 Holinefs are very 
 coniiderable. 
 Forces, fcarce 
 worth Notice. 
 Navy, about 20 
 G allies. 
 
 22,000 
 Length 275 
 Ereadth 200 
 Containing an- 
 cient Samnium, 
 Campania, Apu- 
 lia, Lucania, 
 Brutium, with a 
 little of Latium. 
 Naples and Sicily 
 were both given 
 to Don Carlos, 
 with the Title 
 of King, in the 
 Year 1736.. 
 His Revenues, 
 1 ,000,000 /. 
 Forces, about 
 20,000/. Navy, 
 about 20 fmall 
 Men of War. 
 
 22S 
 
 Diftance and Bearing 
 of Towns. 
 
 Orbitella 
 
 Piombino 
 S. Marino 
 C Rome,o\im 
 \ Roma 
 
 Viterbo 
 
 Caftro 
 
 Or-vieto 
 
 Ronciglions 
 
 Magliano 
 
 Spoletto 
 
 Perugia 
 
 Caftiglione 
 
 Ancona 
 
 Urbino 
 
 Ravenna 
 
 Ferrara 
 Bologna 
 
 C Naples 
 
 Salerno 
 
 Benevento 
 
 C Civita di 
 I Cbieti 
 
 Aquila 
 Ijernia 
 
 \ Man/ 'redo - 
 i nia 
 
 Barri 
 
 Otranto 
 Cofoiza 
 
 75 S *of Pi/a 
 
 37 NW of OrbitelU 
 60 E of Florence 
 f 118 S of Florence 
 < 600 SE of Paris 
 I 720 E of Madrid 
 25 N v 
 44NW* 
 40 N 
 18N 
 25 NE 
 60 NE 
 72 N 
 36 N 
 135NE 
 115 N 
 157 N 
 
 185 N , 
 164 N^ 
 
 102 SEof Rome 
 $70 SE of Lmdm 
 
 \ of Rome 
 
 17 SE "\ 
 
 30 NE 
 
 80 N 
 
 80 N 
 42 N 
 
 J of Naples 
 
 75 E 
 124 E 
 
 '94 E 
 1 20 SEy 
 
 Divifion
 
 iDivifion and 
 divifion. 
 
 1. Bafilicate 
 
 2. Calabria Ci- 
 
 terior 
 
 3. CalabriaZl- 
 
 terior 
 -2. Sicily* 
 
 1. Demena 
 
 2. Mazara 
 
 3. Noto 
 
 3. Corsica 
 
 4. Malta + 
 
 Prefent State of IT ALT. 
 
 Square Miles, 
 
 1 e*. 
 
 ChiefTowns 
 
 
 Cirenza 
 
 9400 
 
 Length 180 
 
 Breadth 92 
 
 Old Trinacria. 
 
 Rhegio 
 
 Palmero 
 
 MeJJina 
 
 Palmero 
 
 Noto 
 
 2520 
 
 Baftia 
 Malta 
 
 Part II. 
 
 Diitance and Bearing 
 of Towns. 
 
 80 E of Naples 
 
 160 S } . , 
 
 i 9 oSW} ofA ^' 
 127 JS 1 
 
 >of Palmero 
 II8SE ) 
 120 S of Genoa 
 60 S of A"ofo in oVriVy 
 
 Climate.] The Air of this Country is generally pure, temperate, 
 and healthful, except in the Campania about Rome, where it is very 
 unhealthful from June to September ; and upon the Apennine Mountains it 
 is exceeding cold ; on the South Side of them, efpecially the South of 
 Naples, the Heats are troublefome ; the North Side of them is more 
 healthful, as well as cooler, than the Provinces on the South ; but here 
 alfo are fome unhealthful Spots. The Soil of Italy in general is very 
 fertile, yielding in great Abundance the choiceft of Corn, Wines, and 
 Fruits. Its Woods are well ftor'd with the belt, of wild and tame Beafts. 
 The longeft Day in the molt Northern Part of this Country is 15 4. 
 Hours, and in the moft Southern 14 \ Hours, therefore this Country 
 lies in the 5, 6, and 7th Northern Climates. 
 
 Government.] There being fo many different Sovereigns in this 
 Country, I have placed the Governments of each in the foregoing 
 Table. 
 
 * Sicily lies in a 'very ivarm Climate, but healthful Air, being refrejh'd 
 nuitb cool Breezes from the Seas and Mountains. There is not a Country 
 in Europe vchofe Hills and Plains are more fruitful than thofe of this IJland, 
 which has now the fame Sovereign nvith Naples. 
 
 % Malta (fubjecl to its (nun Grand Mafter) is a fmall If and, about 20 
 Miles in Length, and I o in Breadth, nearly of an oval Figure ; and of a 
 ivhite /oft Rod, covered ivith a Foot of Earth, or thereabouts. The Air is 
 generally clear and healthful, but excejjive hot, nvhen it is not reftc/h^d 
 with cool Breezes from the Sea ; the Soil fruitful enough. The Jjland is 
 flock 1 d tuith loofe Women from Greece, tvho refort hither to accommodate 
 the unmarried Knights, and others who dcfpij'e a conjugal Lije. Their 
 language is. a barbarous Arabic. 
 
 Trade.]
 
 Chap. VII. Prefent State of ITALT. aj 
 
 Trade ] Italy takes from England Broad-cloth, Long-ells, Bays, 
 Druggets, Calimancoes, and divers other Stuffs ; Tin, Lead ; 
 great Quantities f Fifh, as Pilchards, Herrings, 
 Salmon, Newfoundland Cod, C5c. Pepper, and Trade with 
 other Eajl India Goods. The Commodities Eng- England. 
 land takes from them, are Raw, Thrown and 
 Wrought Silk, Wine, Oil, Soap, Olives, fome Dyers Ware, An- 
 chovies, Marble, is'c. FormerJy we received a confiderable Ba- 
 lance from them ; but the French now fupplying them with very- 
 great Quantities of Woolen Manufactures, and alfo having got 
 Part of the Newfoundland Trade, and as we import great 
 Quantities of Thrown and Raw Silk from thence, to carry on our 
 Manufactures, it is thought the Balance now 
 againft us is confiderable. The Commodities ex- Trade ivitb 
 ported out of Italy, into other Foreign Parts, are other Coun- 
 chiefly Corn, Wine, Rice ; Silks, Velvets, Taf- tries. 
 faties, Grograms, Fuftians, their own Manu- 
 factures j Gold Wire, Alum, Armour, Glaffes, &c. 
 
 Revenues and Forces.] See the foregoing 'I able. 
 
 Ch\racter.] The Italians excel in a complaifant, obliging 
 Behaviour to each other, and Affability to Foreigners, obferving 
 a Medium between the Levity of the French, and the ftarch'd 
 Gravity of the Spaniards, and are by far the fobereft People that 
 are to be found in the Chriltian World, though they abound in 
 Plenty of the choiceft Wines ; nor is there any thing like Luxury 
 to be feen at the Tables of the Great. They are generally Men 
 of Wit, and have a Genius for Arts and Sciences ; nor do they 
 want Application. Mufic, Poetry, Painting, Sculpture, and 
 Architecture, are their favourite Studies ; there are no People on 
 the Face of the Earth that have brought them to greater Perfec- 
 tion. They are charged with being too much addicled to Pleafure 
 and Idlenefs ; infincere and perfidious ; fuch Matters in the Art of 
 Diffimulation, that they can conceal their Refentment till they 
 meet with a favourable Opportunity to revenge themfelves, and 
 then they never fail to ftrike home: But we may be afl'ur'd, that 
 there are as many Men of Honour and Probity in Italy, in pro- 
 portion to the Extent of the Country, as in any other Part of the 
 World ; and muft not believe, that Murders and Affaffinations are 
 fo frequent here as fome Authors pretend. ' Tis true, indeed, they 
 are of an amorous Difpofition, and too jealous of the Fair Sex ; 
 and fome have pufh'd their Refentment beyond the ordinary 
 Bounds, when they have imagin'd themfelves abufed ; but thefe 
 Inftance* are not common. They are fententioui in their Write- 
 
 Q, ings
 
 226 Prefent State of It ALT. Part II. 
 
 ings, and much delighted with Thoughts and Expreffions out of 
 the common Road. The loweft of the People are iirangely taken 
 with founding Words, and lofty Phrafes, even above their Capa- 
 city. As to their Perfons, they are of an agreeable Stature, well 
 proportion'*.!, and their Features very engaging. 
 
 Religion.] The Italians are zealous Profefibrs of the Do- 
 ftrine ofche Church of Rome. The Je-ivs are here tolerated in the 
 public Exercife of their Religion. The Natives, either out of 
 Fear of the dreadful Inquifition, or in Reverence to the Pope, or 
 by being induilrioufly kept in Ignorance of the Proteilant Do- 
 ctrine, entertain monftrous Notions of all the Diffenters from the 
 Roman Church. 
 
 As this Country is the Seat of the pretended infallible Plead of 
 the Church, it will not, I prefume, be unacceptable to the Reader, 
 if I here prefent him with the Original, Eftabliihment, and Pro- 
 ceedings, >of the Inquifition. 
 
 The Church, after the Divifion of the Empire into the Eaftern 
 and Weftern, had long enjoyed an uninterrupted Calm in the 
 Weftern Parts of the World j for very few Seels had fprung up, 
 and fuch as did no fooner peep'd abroad, but they either funk of 
 themfelves, or were crum'd by the Vigilance of the fovereign 
 Princes and the Prelates. The Harmony that always fubftited be- 
 tween the Priefthood and the Empire did not a little contribute to 
 the maintaining of the Roman Religion. But this Union being 
 once diffolv'd by the furious Difputes which arofe about the Middle 
 of the Eleventh Century, between the Emperors and the Popes, 
 both Parties carrying Things to the utmoft Length for upwards of 
 fifty Years, a Door was by that means open'd to all Kinds of 
 Schifms : For, as the Popes had a great Number of Adherents, 
 who ftretch'd the Authority of the Church beyond its due Limits ; 
 fo, on the other Side, the Emperors had their Partizans, who 
 weaken'd it as much as poffible. This it was that occafioned the 
 ftarting up o new Doctrines, which afterwards gave Rife to the 
 Eftabliihment of the Inquifition. 
 
 The Enemies to the Church of Rome were fo numerous, and 
 the Support which molt Princes gave them clandeftinely, fwelled 
 their Authority to that Height, that fhe was often reduced to the 
 Neceflity of winking at them, for want of Means fufficient to 
 crufh them. The Popes did all that lay in their Power to root 
 them out ; and for that Purpofe they left no Stone untum'd, but 
 inftigated all thofe who were immediately fubordinate to them, and 
 Were continually writing to Princes, exhorting them to do their 
 utmoft to extirpate the Enemies of the Church. But whether it 
 were that Princes were not willing to deftroy a Multitude of 
 People, or that Policy made them of Opinion, that the tolerating 
 
 them
 
 Chap. VII. Prefent State of 1 TALT. 227 
 
 them would be advantageous to the State, it is certain, that they 
 were not very zealous in retraining th^m. By this means the 
 Enemies to the Roman Church grew fo formidable, as to find 
 themfelves able to make Head againit the Popes themfelves. The 
 Followers of Arnold of Brefcia, who were of this Number, re- 
 duced them to the greateit Streights : They forced them more 
 than once to leave Rome, and to feek an Afylum elfewhere, in or- 
 der to fhelter themfelves from their Fury. The l^audois and 
 Albigenfes, their Succeffors, were equal Enemies to the Authority 
 of the Church, and as vigorous in attacking it: The Church of 
 Rome, therefore, thought proper to employ more violent Methods 
 than had hitherto been made ufe of againit them. SFhefe Methods 
 refulted at kit to the publishing a Crufode againit'them ; an Ex- 
 pedient which the Popes had formerly, on other Occafions, em- 
 ploy'd with fo much Succefs. Pope Innocent III. a 
 Man of a bold and enterprifing Temper, and fuc- IJ 99 
 
 cefsful in all his Attempts, refolv'd to try what this 
 would do. However, he, at the fame time, thought proper to 
 apply Lenitives, and to fee whether Preaching and Difputation 
 would not prove effectual in converting them : But as thefe Me- 
 thods did not meet with a Succefs aniwerable to their Zeal, and 
 the chief of the Pope's Miffionaries having been maffacred near 
 Tou/oufe, the Holy Father refolved to employ temporal Weapons 
 againit them ; and having himfelf been a Lawyer, he, by a Quirk 
 of Law, made thefe Proteftants be confidered as Mahometans, be- 
 cauie they had this in common with them, i-:z. were equally 
 Enemies of the Church. 
 
 Upon this Foundation the Pope granted Indulgences, which 
 were publifhed in thi; Senfe ; That all who, either by their 
 Credit or Money, mould contribute to the Extirpation of Here- 
 tics, fhould obtain them as fully as though they themfelves 
 fought againit them. Upon which an Army of 300,000 Men, 
 choien Soldiers, was foon raifed. Tho' this vail Army had cut to 
 Pieces all the Inhabitants, Men, Women, and Children, that were 
 in the City of Bexiers, where the Albigenfes had ftrongly entrench'd 
 themfelves ; yet this dreadful Havock did not hinder the Count of 
 Btzirrj, who enjoyed the lame Sovereignty over Carcajfone, from 
 withdrawing into this latter City, which he defended to the laft 
 Extremity. He himfelf was a Roman Catholick ; but whether it 
 were tnxit he cct'ld not bear to fee his Subject, whom he thought 
 it hi* Duty to protect ;:nd defend, cut to Pieces in this Manner, 
 under a Pretence of Religion, or that he could not perfuade him- 
 felf, that Religion was the only Motive for raifing this bloody 
 War, he detcrmin'd to oppofe the At tempts of the Pope, nrd '.:efend 
 the City of Carcaffoni ; firmly refolv'd either to five it, or bury 
 .himfelf under its Ruins. In this Place he was hemm'd in by the 
 
 Q.2 Enemy,
 
 228 Prefent State of It ALT. Part II. 
 
 Enemy, whole prodigious Numbers did not in the leaft terrify the 
 undaunted Count of Beziers : He publifhed a Manifefto, in which 
 he declared he had no other Intention than to perfevere to the laft 
 Gafp in the Profelhon of the Catholic Faith ; and that this, how- 
 ever, mould not hinder him from protecting his Subjects, of what 
 Profefhon ibever j and that becaufe he thought himfelf oblig'd to 
 it from the Law of Nature, which of all others ought to be pre- 
 ferv'd moil inviolably, and by the mutual Promife he and they 
 had made not to abandon each other. The Enemy made no man- 
 ner of Anfwer to this Manifefto ; fo that a vigorous Attack was 
 immediately prepared on one Side, and, on the other, a fixt Reso- 
 lution was taken, to hold out to the laft Extremity. 
 
 The City of Careajfone was then divided into two Parts ; the 
 firft, which was call'd the City, ftood on a Hill that was ftrongly 
 fortified ; the other was call'd the Borough, and was built at fome 
 Diltance, which, being weak, was eafily taken ; when, as before 
 in the City of Beziers, all the Inhabitants were put to Fire and 
 Sword, and no Diftinction made of Age, Sex, or Quality. This 
 cruel Treatment was fo.far from intimidating thofe who fought in 
 the upper Town, with the Count of Beziers, as they flattered 
 themfclves it would, that it ferv'd rather to confirm them in the 
 Refolution they had taken of felling their Lives at the deareft 
 Rate. 
 
 While Matters were thus carrying on, the King of Arragon 
 arriv'd at the Enemy's Camp, and immediately interceded for the 
 Count of Beziers ; but all he could obtain from the Pope's Legate, 
 who in Reality was the chief Commander in this Enterprize, was, 
 that the Count himfelf, with nine Aflbciates, ftiould have free 
 Liberty to retire wherefoever he ftiould think proper ; but that all 
 the Inhabitants ftiould furrender at Difcretion, ftiould come ftark- 
 naked out of the City, and in that Condition fubmit themfelves 
 to the Legate's Mercy. But the Count of Beziers reje&ed^the 
 Offer with the utmoft Deteftation, and refolv'd to fuffer the worft 
 that might happen. The Inhabitants, following his Example, 
 fought like Co many Defperadoes, and a great Number of the 
 Enemy loft their Lives under the Walls of Carcajfone. At length 
 the Legate, defpairing to carry by Force a Place defended by fo 
 brave a Man, and feconded by the Inhabitants of equal Intrepidity 
 with himfelf, refolved to make himfelf Mafter of it, tho' by the 
 moft infamous Methods ; and, imagining he might flop at nothing, 
 provided he only came off victorious, he difpatch'd a Gentleman 
 to the Count, who prevail'd upon him to come out of the City, 
 fwearing the moft horrid Oaths, that they would not hurt a Hair 
 of his Head, and making the moft fpecious Promifes, that the Le- 
 gate would enter into Articles with him, with the utmoft Since- 
 rity ;
 
 Chap. VII. Prefent State of ITALY. 229 
 
 rity ; but no fooner was he come before him, than he was feized, 
 and made Prifoner of War. 
 
 The Inhabitants of CarcaJJbne, in the deepeft Affliction for the 
 Imprifonment of their Count, loft the Courage they had difplay'd 
 all the Time he had continued at their Head, and which perhaps 
 would at laft have fav'd them. But now they thought only of 
 fecuring themfelves by Flight, in which they were favoured by a 
 fubterraneous Paflage, which extended to three Leagues Diftance 
 from the Camp. The brave Count of Beziers, fome time after 
 died, in Prifon, of Grief, or fome other Calamity. 
 
 The King of Arragon, who hitherto had endeavoured to medi- 
 ate a Peace between both Parties, declar'd in favour of the Prote- 
 ftants, at a Time when it was lealt expedted ; which Proceeding 
 happily reftor'd the Affairs of the Albigenfes ; fo that in a little 
 Time they brought anArmy of i oo,oooMen into the Field, which 
 was now much fuperior to the Enemy ; fcr many of them, who 
 had made a Vow to ferve only fuch a Time, withdrew at the Ex- 
 piration of it. Count de Mountfort, a brave Man. now General of 
 the Church, was noways terrified by the Multitude of the Prote- 
 itants, but accepted of the Battle that was prefented him. Both 
 Sides fought with all the Animofity with which Religion united to 
 Intereit is ufed to infpire two oppofite Parties ; but the King of 
 Arragon having loft his Life in the Heat of the Engagement, the 
 Albigenfes were feiz'd with Fear, which threw them into a Difor- 
 der, and a Defeat followed ; for Count de Mountfort, taking Ad- 
 vantage of their Surprize, fell upon them on all Sides with fo 
 much Vigour, that he put them to Flight, after having kill'd 
 20,000 of them upon the Spot. The Albigenfes being routed, 
 Count de Mountfort advanced towards Touloufe, with an Army of 
 100,000 Men, and befieged it. And now the Fate of War was 
 chang'd ; for Count de Mountfort, after having receiv'd a Wound 
 in his Thigh with a Sword, was killed by a Shot from a Crofs- 
 bow difcharged from the Rampart, and all his Army routed. 
 The Death of this Nobleman had like to have entirely ruin'd the 
 Affairs of the Roman Catholics ; for the Proteftants foon recovered 
 all they had been difpoffefted of, and for fome time preferved all 
 thofe feveral Advantages, when the Death of Raymond Count of 
 Tbouloufe ( who commanded this City when beiieged ) again 
 changed the Face of Things. For his Son, having fucceeded him, 
 and continuing the War with a Force inferior to that of the 
 Enemy, met with a continual Series of ill Succefs ; and the Counts 
 of Foix, and of Cominges, his Confederates, finding themfelves 
 unable to oppofe the Power of fb many Enemies as were conti- 
 nually attacking them on all Sides, furrender'd upon the belt Terms 
 the Enemy would grant them. Thus ended the War of the Albi- 
 
 Q.3 /!
 
 230 Pre/em Stale of ITALY. Part II. 
 
 genfes, after- it had coil more Blood and Treafure than would 
 have been employed in conquering an Empire. 
 
 To this War fucceeded the Inquifition, which completed the 
 Ruin of the furviving Protel'tants. For the Pope, confidering, that 
 how much foever the Power of the Albigenfes might be weakened 
 by open Force, yet great Numbers of them would ilill furvive, 
 who would ftill perfift in the fame Opinions, and profefs the fame 
 Do&rine in private, thought it neceffary, in order to put a Stop 
 to this and every kind of Herefy, to eftablifh a ftanding Remedy, 
 viz. a Tribunal compos'd of Perfons, whofefole Bufmefs mould be 
 the detecting and punifhing of Heretics. To effect this, it wasabfo- 
 lutely neceflary,that thefePerfons fhould be wholly dependent on the 
 Court of Rome ; that they mould not be diftra&ed by other Bufi- 
 nefs, or taken off by other Avocations ; that they mould be bound 
 by no manner of Ties of Relation,, to the end that they might 
 not have the leaft Regard or Confideration for any Perfon what- 
 ever ; and of a Breaft uninform'd with Pity and Compaflion, for- 
 afmuch as they were intended to compofe the mod fevere and rigo- 
 rous Tribunal that had ever been eftablifh 'd. The" Pope's Council 
 forefaw three Obflacles, which it would be no eafy Matter to fur- 
 mount : The firft was, that all Bifhops would not fail to oppofe 
 the Ere&ion of the Inqaifition, fince that could not be effected 
 without leffening their Power of taking Cognizance of heretical 
 Matters, which they claim'd as their Right, and of which they 
 had always been in Poffeffion. Then, as the See of Rome owed the 
 greateftPart of its Credit and Authority to Bifhops, they having 
 known how to exert it on all proper Occafions, that they had 
 given up Part of their own Authority for its fake, it was of the 
 higheft Importance to the Holy See, to continue in the ftritteft 
 Union with the reft of the Bifhops ; confequently, that the 
 wounding them in fo tender a Parr, would prove fatal to the Pon- 
 tificate. The fecond Obftacle, which was full as ftrong, and 
 equally difficult to farmount, was, that it would be impoffible to 
 eftablifh the Inquifition in the Manner projected, without deprive- 
 ing, at the fame time, the Lay Judges, of the Power they had 
 always enjoyed of profecuting Heretics : Hence it was eafy to con- 
 clude, that they would oppofe, with no lefs Vigour than the Bi- 
 fhops, the fetting up of a Tribunal, which muft inevitably ruin a 
 Part of their Jurifdiction. The third Obftacle was to find out fome 
 Method for defraying the feveral Ex'pences of the Inquifition, fuch 
 as, the Salaries of the Inquifitors, the Wages of the inferior Offi- 
 cers, cifV. for which it was abfolutely neceffary to make a proper 
 Fund. 
 
 Thefe Obflacles, which at firft Sight appeared infurmountaWe, 
 would have made them quite lay afide the Defjgn of erecting the 
 projected Tribunal, at leaft upon the Foot it was then intended to 
 
 have
 
 Chap. VII. Prefent State of ITALY. 23 1 
 
 have been fct up, had not the Pope, who was not eafily prevailed 
 with to Jay afide any Defign he had occe taken in hand, and who 
 was paffior.ately denrous of establishing it, hit upon two Expedi- 
 ents, which removed, at leaft in outward Appearance, the two 
 firlt Difficulties that had been Parted. 
 
 The nrit of thefe Expedients was, to declare, that the Bifhops 
 mould, jointly with the Inquifitors, be Judges over Heretics; 
 that nothing mould be undertaken without their Privity, and that 
 they mould alfiil at theie Trials as often as they mould thiuk 
 proper ; taking care, at the fame time, fo to manage Matters 
 afterwards, by Expedients, which Time never fails to furnifh, 
 that the chief Authority might be entirely lodged in the Inqui- 
 fitors, and that the Shadow of it only mould be left to the Bifhops, 
 who were :o reft Satisfied with the bare Name of Judges. Whence 
 it would come to pafs, that the Biiheps, molt of whom were 
 more concerned for the Honour than the Duties of their Function, 
 would either reft fatisfied with whatever Share Should be indulg'd 
 them, or perceiving that the fmalleft Part of a Jurisdiction uas 
 allowed, the Whole of which juftly belonged to him, they would 
 at laft refign it entirely to the Inquifitors, who by that means 
 would be left at Liberty to act in the moil arbitrary Manner, and 
 be wholly dependent on the Court of Rome. 
 
 That as to the fecond Obstacle, 'viz. the feveral Princes and 
 Magistrates to whom they were fubordinate, they might fo much 
 the more eafily be prevailed with not to oppofe the Defign of the 
 Pope, as he then enjoy'd an almoft abfolute Authority in all Italy ; 
 that it was neceflary, tho' they employ'd the moll vile Methods, 
 to make their Advantage of fo happy a Train of Circumftances, 
 which, if let flip, might poffibly be never recovered. However, 
 that fmce to build this Efiablifhment on a folid Foundation, the 
 prevailing on them not to oppofe it would not fufficiently fcrve 
 their Purpofe, but that their Confent v/ould be neceflary, it would 
 confequently be proper to fatisfy them, in outward Appearance, in 
 the fame Manner as the Bifhops. In purfance of this, they 
 fhould leave to Magistrates the Power of difpofmg of the lower 
 Employments of the Inquifition, which mould not be allowed to 
 make ufe of any but thofe whom they fhould appoint : That 
 they fhould have Liberty to appoint an Affiftant to the Inquifuor, 
 in their Visitations of all Places within the Jurisdiction of the 
 Civil Magiftrate ; and that a third Part of the confifcated Eftates 
 of all who had been condemn^, might be apply'd to public Ufes. 
 Laftly, that according as they fhould meet with greater or lefs 
 Oppofuion, with more or lefs Difficulties, they might give up or 
 refufe feveral other Points of little Confequence, by which the 
 Magistrate would feem to fhare the Authority of the Inquifition, 
 but at the fame time would be no more than the mere Executioners 
 of it* Qrder. Q^4 Theie
 
 232 Prefent State of IT ALT. Part II. 
 
 Thefe Difficulties being got over, the third Obftacle was fo 
 much the ftronger, as Intereft was the Object of it; and this was, 
 to find out fome Method for raifing a large Fund to enable the 
 Inquifitors to fubfift with Honour. Several Methods were pro- 
 pofed on this Head ; but at laft it was refolved, that the Corpo- 
 rations in the feveral Places mould be prevailed with to furnifh 
 Sums for this Purpofe ; and that, in order to engage them to come 
 more readily into it, they mould be allowed to difpofe of Part of 
 the Moneys aiifing from Fines and Confifcations. 
 
 Matters being thus fettled, they difpatched crafty Perfons, of 
 undoubted Fidelity, into the feveral Provinces of Italy then fubjedt 
 to the Pope j whofe Bufinefs was, if poffible, to engage their Fa- 
 vour for the new Eftablifhment they intended to be let up in them. 
 As the dire Effedb that would reiult from it had not been yet 
 felt, or fo much as forefeen, it was received with very little Diffi- 
 culty. Upon which the Pope directed a Bull to the feveral Magi- 
 ilrates, Heads of Colleges, &c. and to the Corporations of thole 
 Cities where the Inquifition had been eftablifh'd. This Bull con- 
 tained Thirty-one Chapters, which were as fo many Statutes for 
 the fettling of this Holy Office. To thefe thePove added two very 
 exprefs Orders : The firft, That the Statutes mould immediately 
 be regiftered in all the public Offices, where the Rolls are kept, 
 notwithstanding any Oppofition to the contrary, referving to him- 
 felf only the Power of judging of the Validity of thofe Oppofi- 
 tions. The fecond impowered the Inquifitors to fufpend all fuch 
 Places from having Divine Service performed in them, and to ex- 
 communicate all Perfons who fliould refufe to obey thefe Sta- 
 tutes. 
 
 Neverthelefs, what Authority foever the Pope might enjoy in 
 thefe Province:, yet the Bull above-mentioned was lo much op- 
 pos'd, both in his Life-time, and after his Death, that Alexander 
 IV. his Succefibr, was obliged to revive it feven Years after, but 
 not without feveral Reftri&ions, which would never go down in 
 the Beginning. And yet, neither the Lenities, or Cenfures, 
 which the Inquifition was impowered to thunder out againft all 
 Offenders, or thofe who mould oppofe it, could prevent its meet- 
 ing with frefh Oppofition. The Popes, his SuccefTors, fet every 
 Engine at Work to get them received j but the Oppofition ftill 
 continuing, they were at laft obliged to moderate feveral Particu- 
 lars. Thofe Oppofitions were grounded on the exceffive Severity 
 of the Inquifitors, which was fo much the more grievous, as 
 People had never been accuftomed to it. Complaint was likewife 
 made of the uncommon Rigour they (hew'd, in levying the feveral 
 Revenues which had been affigned them ; and they were even 
 accufed of having extorted feveral Sums of Money under this 
 Pretence ; infomuch that the Public was refolved to bear thefe Im- 
 
 pofitions
 
 Chap. VII. Prefent State of HALT. 233 
 
 pofitions no longer. Thefe Complaints were feconded by a Decla- 
 ration from the feveral Cities and Corporations, by which they 
 protelted in exprefs Terms, that they would no longer furnifh the 
 Sums required for the Support of the Inquifition, its Officers, 
 &c. without which it would be impoifible for that Tribunal to 
 fubfift. Indeed the Ground of the Protefl was, as they declared, 
 their Inability to pay fuch large Exactions, neceffary to fupport 
 the Pomp of the Inquifition. 
 
 But whether it were that thefe Oppofitions, and the Complaints 
 on which they were grounded, were thought jult, or that there 
 was no other Method left to fupport the inquifition, which the 
 Popes confidered as their Mailer-piece, it was refolved, they fhould 
 forego fome Things, the better to accuftom the People, by infen- 
 fible Degrees, to the new Burden they were going to lay upon 
 their Shoulders. It was therefore declared, that in all Places 
 where the Inquifition mould hereafter be receiv'd, as well as thofe 
 which had already admitted it, the Inhabitants mould not be 
 obliged to furnifli the Sums neceffary for the Support of the Inqui- 
 fition, but that it ftiould be maintained by other Methods than 
 that at the public Expence ; and that, by this means, the Com- 
 plaints which were made againft the pretended Extortions of the 
 Inquifltors would immediately ceafe. And as to the Complaints 
 of the exceffive Rigour the Inquifltors ufed in the Difcharge of 
 their Office, a Remedy was applied thereto, by allowing Bilhops, 
 in the Profecution of the Inquifition, a little more Power than had 
 been before indulged them. The Court of Rome drew two confi- 
 derable Advantages from their Condefcenfion on this Occafion : 
 The Firfl was, that as the Inquifltors depended no longer on the 
 People for their Subfiftence, they confequently would be more at- 
 tached to the Papal Intereft, and alienated from any other. The 
 Second, which was of no lefs Confequence, was, that the Inquifi- 
 tion was by this means receiv'd without Oppofition in Lombardy, 
 Romania, Marca Anconitana, Tufcany, the States of Genoa., and 
 in all Parts of Italy ; the Kingdom of Naples, and the Republic of 
 Venice, excepted. 
 
 Don Peter of Toledo, Viceroy of Naples for the 
 Emperor Charles V. attempted to fettle the Inquifi- '544- 
 
 tion in the Kingdom of Naples. But the People 
 mutiny'd for feveral Days ; great Numbers of the Spaniards were 
 kill'd, and they would in all Probability have been driven out of 
 this rich Kingdom, had they not fecur'd themfelves in the Cailles, 
 and held out with Vigour againft the Inhabitants, who did all 
 that lay in their Power to force them out. The Mutineers were 
 even refolv'd to throw themfelves into the Hands of the French ; 
 and for that Purpofe difpatch'd an Exprefs, to du Mortier, the Em- 
 baflador of Francis I. at Rome, deflring him to fend them a bold 
 
 Man
 
 234 Prefent State of ITAL T. Part II. 
 
 Man to head them : Neverthelefs he let flip the Opportunity. 
 Since that Time the Fear of a frefh Infurrection, and the repeated 
 Oppositions of the Court of Rome, have prevented the Re-eilablilh- 
 ment of the Inquifition in Naples. 
 
 After the Inquifition had been eftablifhed in Italy, the Court of 
 Rome, who were defirous of introducing it into all the States of 
 Chriftendom, attempted to eftablifh it in Germany, but the excef- 
 five Rigour of that Tribunal not fuiting the generous Temper of 
 the Germans, they oppos'd it with fo much Bravery, that the Pope 
 was obliged to lay afide his Defign. However, the Court of 
 Rome were perfuaded, that Time, and the Artifice which might 
 be ufed, would at laft give Succefs to their Endeavours. But 
 Time only taught them, that the Germans would never fubmit to 
 fuch a Yoke ; and of this they had the ftrongeft Proof, by the 
 Inquifition's being banifti'd out of feveral Cities, where the utmoft 
 Pains had been taken to fet it up, notwithllanding that the Inqui- 
 fitors had treated the Inhabitants with much greater Lenity than 
 . they had ever exercifed before in any other Place. 
 
 Having therefore loft all Hopes of eftablifhing it in Germany, 
 they attempted to fettle it in France, and Succeeded therein in 
 Part ; for it was receiv'd in Languedoc, and fome of the neigh- 
 bouring Provinces, upon account of the Vaudois and the Albi- 
 genfes, whom they imagin'd this Tribunal only could extirpate. 
 But they likewife found, that the French would no more fubmit 
 to the Yoke than the Germans had done. Accordingly the In- 
 quifition was banilhed out of fome Cities by popular Infurrec- 
 tions, and the Inquifitors left feveral others for want of Employ- 
 ment ; or rather becaufe they, fo far from meeting with Refpeft, 
 which they were fo vaftly fond of, were, on the contrary, univer- 
 fally hated and abhorred, and juftly fuppofed it would be impof- 
 fibie for them ever to overcome the Averfion of thofe People. 
 
 The Inquifition, being banifhed France, recovered more in Spain 
 than it had loft in that Kingdom : The Kings of Arragon receiv'd 
 it, and eftablilhed it in the feveral Dominions fubject. to that 
 Crown. This Example, contrary to the Pope's Expedition, was 
 not followed. Attempts were made to get it receiv'd in the other 
 States of this Weftern Part of Europe, but to no Purpofe. It was 
 oppofed in all Places with a Refolution which was leaft expe&ed. 
 But it did not long preferve its Authority in Arragon ; but became, 
 as in France, the Object of Contempt and Averfion of the Gran- 
 dees and People ; and, in all Probability, would foon have been 
 driven out of that Kingdom with as much Ignominy, had not 
 Ferdinand of Arragon, and Ifabella of Caftile, who had united 
 almoft all the States of Spain under one Monarchy, reftor'd 
 it to its priftine Authority in Arragon, and afterwards in all the 
 States of Spain, under one Monarchy, Portugal excepted. Thus, 
 
 properly
 
 Chap. VII. Prefent State of IT ALT. 235 
 
 properly fpeaking, Spain was not wholly fubjecl to the Inquifition 
 till about 1484. For, after this Union of the States, thefe 
 Princes refolved upon the Conqueli of the Kingdom of Granada, 
 and to oblige the Moors, who had fo often made Spain tremble, and 
 had conquered the greateft Part of it, to return back into Africa. 
 This Defign met with Succefs : The Moors were fubdued, were 
 difpoflefs'd of every thing they held in Spain, and the greateft 
 Part of them were at lait forc'd back into Africa. What detain'd 
 the reft was, either the Marriages they had contracted, the va- 
 rious Settlements they had in Spain, their Trade, or, laftly, the 
 landed Eftates they pofTefled therein. Thefe unhappy People, 
 amongft whom were great Numbers of Jenvs, being obliged to 
 receive whatever Laws the Conqueror fhould fubjedt them to, (and 
 the Spaniards being unwilling to depopulate the Dominions they 
 had conquered) confented to turn Chriftians, though the greateft 
 Part of them itill adhered in Reality to the Religion of their Fore- 
 fathers, whenever they judg'd they might do it with Impunity. 
 John de Torquemada, a Dominican, ConfefTor to the Queen, fore- 
 ieeing how prejudicial this Hypocrify would at length prove to 
 Religion, took Occafion from thence to folicit the Queen to per- 
 fecute the Heretics and Infidels. He reprefented to her, that fhe 
 was as much engaged to it from the Motives of Policy as thofe of 
 Confcience ; that fo long as the Moors and feivs fhould adhere to 
 their old Religion, they would preferve a fecret Inclination for their 
 former Sovereign ; and that this Inclination would at laft be fol- 
 lowed by their Correfpondence with foreign Powers, and interline 
 Confpiracies, and finally break out into open Infurre&ions, which 
 would not fail to be fupported by the Moors of Africa ; that the 
 Means of making them irreconcilable would be to oblige them 
 to change their Religion in good earneft ; that a9 there was 
 no Room to hope they would ever do it from their own Impulfe, 
 fo, on the other Side, it would not be doubted but violent Methods 
 would be neceffary ; that this indeed would leffen the Number of 
 her Subjects, but that it were better to have a few attach 'd to 
 her Religion and Government, than a great many whofe Fidelity 
 might be fufpected ; that the Union between the Church and State 
 was fo great, that whoever was wanting in Affection for one, muft 
 certainly have as littleValue for the other. Thefe Reafons having 
 made an Impreffion on the Queen's Mind, he remonftrated to her, 
 that the belt Means of giving Succefs to what he propos'd, was, 
 to caufe the Inquifition to be receiv'd in all the States that were 
 fubjeft to the Crowns of Arragon and C affile ; that this Method 
 was indeed flower than an open War, but then it wa3 fafer ; that 
 it would be a perpetual Remedy to an Evil, which, in all Proba- 
 bility, would not be brought to a Period very foon : Laftly, that 
 the molt glorious Cixcumltance of her Reign would be, that fhe 
 
 had
 
 236 Prefent State of ITALT. Part II. 
 
 had not only done her utmoft Endeavours, during her Life-time, 
 for the Support of the true Religion, but had alfo left behind her 
 the moil infallible Methods of preferving it in its utmoft Purity, 
 as long as the Monarchy fhould endure. 
 
 The Queen, won by thefe Reafons, promis'd her Confeflbr, 
 that fhe would do all that lay in her Power to perfuade the King 
 to eftablifh the Inquifition in all his Dominions ; and, indeed, his 
 Reafons wrought as much upon the Xing as they had done upon 
 the Queen ; infomuch that they jointly obtained Bulls from Pope 
 Sixtus IV. in 1483. for the fetting up of the Inquifition in the 
 Kingdoms of Arragon and Valencia, and the Earldom of Catalonia. 
 It was afterwards erected in Cafiile, and in all the Dominions of 
 Ferdinand and 1/abella. This crafty Prieft had done too much 
 Service in this Affair, not to be rewarded for it ; accordingly the 
 Pope created him Cardinal, and their Catholic Majefties appointed 
 him Inquifitor General j which is fo eminent a Dignity, that if one 
 of the King's Sons was to be a Clergyman, he would not think it 
 beneath him to fill that Place : And, indeed, this Power is fo ab- 
 folute and unlimited, that his Catholic Majefty cannot boaft of 
 having one Subject in his Dominions who is exempt from it. Tor- 
 quemada fully anlwered the Opinion the People had of him, viz. 
 that there was not a Man in all Spain fitter for that important Em- 
 ployment ; fince that, during his 14 Years Adminiftration in the 
 Inquifition, he had profecuted upwards of 100,000 Perfons, of 
 whom 6000 had been condemn'd to the Flames. 
 
 The Inquifition was introduced in Portugal, 
 1557. under the Reign of John III. before 1557. by a 
 certain Monk, who, as 'tis pretended, having pro- 
 cur'd a Bull, or fictitious Brief, manag'd Matters fo well, that 
 he fucceeded in the Defign he had form'd of eftablifhing the 
 formidable Tribunal of the Holy Office in that Kingdom. 
 However, his Fraud was at laft detected ; and it is univerfally 
 agreed, that he was condemn'd to the Gallies for Life upon that 
 Account. But this did not hinder the Inquifitors from carrying on 
 their Proceedings : However, as their Maxims, and their inflexible 
 Severity towards thofe unhappy People called Chriftianos novos, or 
 New Chriftians, ftruck the candid Part of Mankind with Horror, 
 there were found fome Minifters at Court, who had fo much Pro- 
 bity and Humanity, as to reprefent to their Sovereign the great 
 Prejudice which accrued to his Subjects from this unprecedented 
 Tribunal, and its frequent and bloody Executions. The King, 
 after having juftly reflected on thefe Remonftrances, procur'd pri- 
 vately a Brief from Rome, by which his Holinefs granted a gene- 
 ral Pardon to all Perfons accufed of Judai/m, with Orders to the 
 Inquifitors to fet open their Prifons, and to difmifs all fuch as 
 fhould be confin'd in them, without the leaft Exception. The 
 
 Officers
 
 Chap. VII. Prefent State of I TAL Y. 237 
 
 Officers of the Inquifition were obliged to fubmit to this Com- 
 mand : However, they foon found a Pretext to let their Engines 
 at Work again, by which means the Prifons of the Inquifition 
 were as much crouded as they had been before the Injunction. 
 
 The Duke of Braganza, being raifed to theThrone 
 of Portugal, by the Name of John IV. would un- 1648. 
 
 doubtedly have abolifh'd the Inquifition in his Do- 
 minions, had he either enjoyed a longer, or more peaceable, Reign. 
 This judicious Prince was thoroughly fenfible of the Abufes which 
 were committed under the Shadow of the inviolable Secrecy that 
 is obferv'd in the Holy Office : Befides, he knew that the Inquifi- 
 tors were bias'd by Pride and Avarice, inftead of following the 
 Dictates of Piety and Juftice ; and knowing that, of the number- 
 lefs Confifcations which were made by the Inquifition, but a very 
 trifling Share came into his Treafure, the reft being all diftri- 
 buted among the Officers of the Inquifition, he ordered, that the 
 Goods and Chattels of thofe who fhould be taken up fhould not be 
 confifcated for the future. This Declaration aftonifhed and alarm'd 
 the Inquifitors, as it took from them the molt confiderable Advan- 
 tages of their Employments : This made them have Recourfe to 
 every Expedient, in order to fet Things upon their former Foot- 
 ing ; and they play'd their Cards fo well, that they at laft obtain'd 
 a Brief from the Pope, unknown to the King, by which his Holi- 
 nefs ordain'd, that all Confifcations fhould be made to the Benefit 
 of the Inquifition, in the fame Manner as before the King's Decla- 
 ration was publifhed, upon Pain of Excommunication to be in- 
 curred by all thofe as fhould oppofe the Execution of this Brief. 
 
 The Inquifitors, having prevail'd thus far, waited in aBody upon 
 the King ; when one of them, in the Name of all the reft, be- 
 fought him to give them Leave to read his Holinefs's Brief before 
 his Majefty, and in the Prefence of his whole Court. The King, 
 having liften'd to them with great Attention, immediately inquir'd, 
 Who was to have theBenefit that would arife from the feveral Con- 
 fifcations ? The Anfwer was, Himfelf. Since it is fo, replied the 
 King, and that there is no Room to doubt but I may difpofe of 
 my own, in what Manner I fhall judge proper, as a Teftimony of 
 my Obedience to the Pope's Orders, and the great Refpett I have 
 for his Commands, I confent that you confifcate the Goods and 
 Chattels of thofe who fhall be feiz'd by Order of your Tribunal ; 
 provided, however, that an exaft Inventory be taken of fuch 
 Seizures : But I declare from this Inftant, that I freely beftow all 
 fuch confifcated Effeds on the Perfons fo feiz'd, and their Families ; 
 and my Will and Pleafure is, that they fhall be reftored to them, 
 or their Heirs, with the utmoft Fidelity and Care, to what Pu- 
 nifhment foever you may condemn them. Tho' the Inquifitors 
 were enraged at this Order, they nevcrthelefs were oblig'd to fub- 
 mit
 
 238 Prefent State of HALT. Part II. 
 
 mit to it ; and fo long as Don Jolm reign'd, all Goods and Chat- 
 tels confifcated were either reilor'd to the Perfons to whom they 
 belong'd, or their lawful Heirs. But no fooner was the King 
 dead, than the Heads of the Inquifuion reprefented to the Queen 
 his Widow, that as the late King, her Conibrt, had afted in direct 
 Oppofition to the Pope's Orders, he had thereby incurred the 
 Sentence of Excommunication, with which all luch were threatened 
 in the Pope's Brief, who Ihould oppofe the Execution of it. This 
 Princefs, who was not of that Heady Refolution as the King her 
 Confort, was fo weak as to confent, that the Inquifitors, cloathed 
 in their Sacerdotal Veftments, mould perform the Ceremony of 
 abfolving the dead Body of the King from the pretended Excom- 
 munication, and that too in the Prefence of Don Jlphonfo, and 
 Don Pedro, her Sons. The Reader will eafily fuppofe, that what- 
 ever was done by the Inquifitors, with regard to the Abfolution of 
 the King's Body, was but a mere Trick, to frighten the Grandees 
 of the Kingdom, and the common People, and to fupport the 
 Authority of the Holy Office, with all its Train of Terrors : For 
 Don Jobu had paid the utmoft Submifuon to the Pope's Briefs ; 
 and the generous Refolution he had taken, while it was read, to 
 remit to his Subjects all fuch of their Goods and Chattels as fhould 
 be coBfifcated to his Ufe, as he had really given Orders, fo far 
 from deferving fo ignominious a Punifliment as was. inflicted on 
 him after his Death, ought rather to have procur'd him the ever- 
 lafting Thanks of all his Subjects, and have made the Cruelty of 
 the Inquifition odious to the whole World. But the Inquifitors, 
 enccurag'd by the Impunity they had met with on this Occafipn, 
 continued to exercife their Rigours, or rather Cruelties, under the 
 Reign of Don Alpho7ifo. 
 
 The Cruelty and Rigour of the Inquifition, from time to time, 
 prompted feveral of the prime Nobility, as well as many Perfons 
 of the greateu Virtue about the Court, who were greatly con- 
 cerned to fee their Fellow-creatures perfecuted and tormented in fo 
 dreadful a Manner, to make their moft humble Remoniirance to 
 Don Pedro upon that Account- Among the Number of thele 
 were feveral Bifhops and eminent Divines, and Religious of dif- 
 ferent Orders. All thefe reprefented to the King, the irreparable 
 Injury which the Inquifitors did to his Subjects ; and told him, 
 that it would inevitably be followed with the utter Ruin of the 
 Kingdom. The King was fo ftruck with the Reafons they gave, 
 that he commanded his Embafiador at Rome to folicit a Brief at 
 that Court, by which the Sufferers fhould have Leave granted 
 them to lay before his Holinefs the Reafons they had to complain 
 of the Proceedings of the Inquifition. This Brief being granted, 
 and Notice thereof being given to the feveral Inquifitions in Portu- 
 gal the Executions of that Tribunal were fufpended, and the Suf- 
 ferers
 
 Chap. VII. Prefint State of ITJLT. 239 
 
 ferers had Leave to appoint CounciJ to plead in their Name, both 
 in Rome and in Portugal. Accordingly, their Council drew up 
 feveral Petitions and Memorials, which they prefented to hh Ho- 
 linefs, praying that the Papers of fome ancient Profecutions of 
 Perfons who had been condemn'd to the Flames by the ln- 
 quifition, mould be fcnt to Rome, particularly fuch as were put 
 to Death by the Name of negative Convicls ; in order that, his 
 Holinefs being, by the Peruial of thefe Inltruments, fully con- 
 vinced of the juftice of their Complaints, he might therefore ap- 
 ply fuitable Remedies. 
 
 His Holinefs liften'd attentively to their Grievances, and was 
 greatly afflicted upon that Account ; whereupon he immediately 
 gave Orders for difpatching a Brief, by which he commanded the 
 Inquificors to fend him immediately the Originals of four ancient 
 Profecutions. The chief Inquifiror plainly iaw, that in cafe they 
 fhould be forc'd to fend this Brief, they would inevitably be ex- 
 pos'd to the greateft Dangers j fince, in cafe it fhould work its 
 Efftcl, their Authority would either be loll, or atleaft confiderably 
 impair'd. In this Dilemma, they at laft, however, took the Re- 
 foiution to obey the Pope's Orders : Upon which his Holinefs, by 
 a new Brief, fufpended the Inquifitor General from his Employ- 
 ment, and excommunicated the reft. He bkewife commanded 
 them to give up the Keys of the feveral Prifons of the Jnquifition 
 into the Hands of the Ordinaries ; but this they refus'd. How- 
 ever, the Pope abfolv'd them, upon their making him flight Satif- 
 faclion ; and tho' fbme Regulations were made, in order to foften 
 the Rigours of this Tribunal, Matters have neverthelefs always 
 continued upon the fame Foot. Whatever is here advanc'd, is 
 more than juftified by a Brief of Pope Innocent XI. dated Auguft 
 22. 1682. 
 
 Great Britain and the Low Countries were now the only Places 
 where the Court of Rome had not attempted to introduce the ln- 
 quifition. As for the former, the Temper of its Inhabitants, ftiU 
 more abhorrent of all violent Remedies, and more inclin'd to In- 
 furreclions than either the Germans, French, Spaniards, or Ita- 
 lians, appear'd fo oppofite to the Inquihtion, that the Holy See 
 thought all Endeavours for that Purpofe would prove inefkciual ; 
 and even tho' the Pope, who had more Authority here than in the 
 reft of the States in Chriftendom, fhould have Intereft fufhcient t 
 get it receiv'd in this Kingdom, it yet would be iinpofuble for it 
 to maintain itfelf long therein : All Thoughts of attempting it 
 were therefore laid afide, but with the more Reluctance, a& the 
 Englffl were look'd on as a People who love to deliver their 
 Thoughts freely and openly, and the moil uicd to dogmatize, and 
 fo had the greater Occaiion for fuch an Eitablifhmcnt. 
 
 As
 
 240 Prefent State of IT ALT. Part II. 
 
 As to the Netherlands, the Conformity of the Temper of the 
 Inhabitants with thofe of the Germans and French, between whom 
 they are fituated, having given Occafion to conclude, that either it 
 would be impoffible to eftablifh the Inquifition among them, or 
 that it would never be long fupported therein, was the Cauie, that 
 no Attempts were made for that Purpofe, or that they did not 
 carry it to any great Lengths. But after the Rife of the Lutheran 
 Do&rine, a great Number of Proteftants having fettled in thofe 
 fpacious Provinces, under Pretence of carrying on their Trade, the 
 Emperor Charles V. who was not loved by them, and who per- 
 haps hated them in his Turn, or at leaft was afraid of them, was 
 apprehenfive left they mould at laft get the upper Hand in the 
 hereditary Countries. This Apprehenfion, added to the Negligence 
 of the Magiftrates, who had been oblig'd to flacken their Profe- 
 cutions, becaufe of the great Number of Proteftants that had 
 fhelter'd themfelves in thofe Provinces, occafioned 
 1550. his publifhing an Edift, by which the Inquifition was 
 ordered to be eftabliftied in all the Lohv Countries, in 
 the fame Manner as in Spain. 
 
 This EdicT: was promulgated ; but Mary, Queen of Hungary, 
 Sifter to the Emperor, and Governefs of thofe Provinces, remon- 
 ftrated to him, that in cafe the Edift ftiould be put in Execu- 
 tion, all the foreign Merchants, and great Numbers of the Na- 
 tives of the Country, would immediately abandon it, in order to 
 feek for Liberty of Confcience elfewhere ; and their Trade, which 
 at that Time was the moft flourifhing of any in Europe, would in- 
 fallibly be ruin'd : This prevail'd with the Emperor to publifh 
 two Declarations, by which all Foreigners were exempted from 
 the Jurifdiclion of the Inquifition, and the Severity of its Profecu- 
 tions very much mitigated with refpeft to the Natives of the 
 Country. However, notwithstanding the Emperor's EdicT: was 
 publifhed with thefe Reftri&ions, it yet was not put in Execution J 
 whether it were that this Monarch, who was not always for hav- 
 ing thofe Things carried on, which he feem'd, in outward Appear- 
 ance, to promote, was not urgent to have it put in Execution ; 
 or that the People, the Bifhops, and Magiftrates, whofe Intereft 
 being chiefly concerned therein, did therefore forefee the Confe- 
 quences that would refult from it, better than any other Perfon, 
 and who moreover were very fenfible, that the Emperor was not 
 able to force them to this Yoke againft their Wills, fecretly op- 
 pofed it. Be this as it will, the Inquifition was not eftabliftied in 
 the Lonu Countries during the Reign of Charles V. 
 
 After the Death of this Emperor, which happened in 1599. 
 
 Philip II. his Son, who was now Sovereign of the Netherlands, 
 
 attempted all Methods poflible to fet up as rigorous an Inquifition 
 
 therein as that of Spain. The States at firft oppofed it by the 
 
 4 ftrongeft
 
 Chap. VII. Prefent Statt of It ALT. 24I 
 
 ftrongeft, as well as the moft refpeclful, Remonftrances : But 
 Philip II. refolving to be obey'd, had not the leaft Regard to 
 them ; upon which the People, who could not bear to be forc'd in 
 an Article of fo extenfive and delicate a Nature as that of Reli- 
 gion, broke out into an open Infurreftion. This Infurrettion in. 
 the Lovo Countries gave Occafion to the Rife and Eftablifhment 
 of the Commonwealth of Holland. No Infurre&ion ever lafted 
 longer, or was carried on with greater Obftinacy ; for the War 
 continued upwards of threefcore Years, with unparalleled Ani- 
 mofityj but various Succefs. The King of Spain had frequent Op- 
 portunities of eftablifliing a greater Authority in thbfe Countries 
 than any of his Predeceflbrs had ever enjoyed ; and, ofl the other 
 Side, the Flemings were in open Rebellion, and frequently on the 
 Point either of changing their Mafter, or of wholly recovering 
 their Liberty, by fetting up a popular Government almoft after 
 the Model of that of ancient Rome. At length both Parties grew 
 weary of the War, which had been carried on for fo many Years, 
 coft fo much Blood, and had fo much weaken'd and drain'd them 
 of fo many Sums; and thereupon a Peace was concluded ; but it 
 coft the King of Spain the moft valuable Part of the Low Countries, 
 that is, that Part of it which now forms the Commonwealth of 
 the Seven United Provinces ; and he found himfelf oblig'd to ac- 
 knowledge it a free independent State : Nor would he have pre- 
 ferv'd the reft, had he not ratified and inlarged the Privileges of 
 the Provinces ; one of which was, That, for the future, no men- 
 tion Ihould be made of ever eftablifliing the Inquifition therein ; 
 and that all heretical Caufes fhould be judg'd by the ancient Laws, 
 and in the ufual Forms. Thus ended the long War which had 
 been carry'd on in the Netherlands, whereof the Inquifition waa 
 either the real or pretended Caufe. It has not made any Progrefs 
 fince that Time. Such Places as had receiv'd it are ftill fubjedt to 
 it, and thofe where it had been refufed have been fo happy as to 
 keep it out ; inbmuch that it is now confin'd to Italy, and the 
 Dominions fubjeft to Spain and Portugal. 
 
 The Court of Rome, who has always a watchful Eye over 
 its Intereft, endeavour'd to get the Inquifition eftablifhed at Vc 
 nice : But the Venetians, who are as fenfible as any People in the 
 World of their true Intereft, and fo judicioufly forefee the Confe- 
 rences of Things, could never be prevailed with to confent to it i 
 Innocent, Alexander, Urban, Clement, and the Seven Popes their 
 Succeffors, fet every Engine at Work to compafs their Defign j 
 but to no Purpofe. The Inquifition did itfelf contribute to the 
 obftinate Refiftance it met with* when attempted to be fet up in 
 Venice ; all Places rang with the Diforders and Tumults ccca- 
 fion'd by the Sermons, as well as the Fury, and imprudentConduct, 
 of the Inquifitors. For thefe Mock-zealots would, upon the firft 
 
 R Whim
 
 242 Prefent State of ITALY. Part II. 
 
 Whim that came into their Heads, publifh Crufades againft the 
 Enemies to the Romijh Do&rine ; and thefe new-made Crufades, 
 inftead of being ferviceable to Religion, infpired the People with 
 nothing but revenging themfelves upon their Enemies. 
 
 Milan and Parma had like to have been ruin'd by the Tumults 
 that had been rais'd on thefe Occafions, and all Italy cry'd aloud 
 againft the Inquifition and its Officers. The Senate of Venice 
 took Advantage of thefe Diforders, by making it a Handle to ju- 
 ftify their having always refus'd to fuffer the Inquifition, to be 
 erected in the Territories of Venice. However, all thefe fruitlefs 
 Attempts could not prevail with the Popes to defift from their De- 
 fign ; and Nicolas IV. at laft obtain'd what his 
 1287. Predeceftbrs had fo long folicited in vain. The Se- 
 nate, in Compliance with the Requeft of his Holinefs, 
 refolv'd to receive the Inquifition ; but then it was with all the 
 Precautions necehary for preventing the Scandal and Diforder it 
 had occafioned, in almoft all Parts where it had been hitherto re- 
 ceived. It was therefore agreed, that no Officers, but thofe of the 
 Republic, mould be fuffer'd to execute the Profecutions of the In- 
 quifition ; that, in order to prevent all Burdens and Impofitions, 
 the Revenues neceffary for the Maintenance of that Tribunal mould 
 not be mis'd by its Officers ; and that the Republic mould affign 
 a Fund for that Purpofe, and fhould nominate a Perfon to receive 
 the Moneys arifmg therefrom ; that it fhould pay the Salaries of 
 the Inquifitors, and their Officer's, and defray all the necelTary Ex- 
 jiences ; and that all Fines, Cottfifcations, and all Profits arifmg 
 from the Condemnation of Heretics, fhould be put into the Hands 
 of the Inquifitors, for which it fhould be accountable to the Senate, 
 to be employ'd by them as they fhould judge proper. 
 
 The Senate having thus refolv'd to receive the Inquifition, ah 
 Inurument was immediately drawn up for that Purpofe, in the 
 moft authentic Manner, and fent to the Pbpe : And altho' his Ho- 
 linefs was not pleafed with the Reftrittions made by the Senate, 
 and would have been glad the Inquifition had been received at Ve- 
 nice without the leaft Limitation, he neverthelefs thought fit to 
 agree with this Inftrument ; and, accordingly, confirm'd it by a 
 Lull. Although the Inquifition at Venice was reftrain'd pretty 
 much in its Authority, neverthelefs the Court of Rome thought 
 they had done great Matters, in having procur'd its Eftablifhmeht 
 there, particularly, as they flattered themfelves, that they fhould 
 at lait force the Venetians to acquiefce in all Things, and to fuffer 
 the Inquifition to reign as defpotic there as in the other States of 
 Italy. However, their Hopes were afterwards blafted ; for the 
 Senate, who probably were perfuaded, they had been too conde- 
 fcending, in receiving the Inquifition, though upon their own 
 . Terms, were firmly refolved riot to fuffer the leaft innovation, 
 
 and
 
 Chap. VII. Pxefent State of IT ALT. 243 
 
 and to keep Things on the fame Foot in which they had been firft 
 eilablihYd. So that, far from giving their Confent to the repeal- 
 ing of any of their old Statutes, they have enacted new ones from 
 time to time ; all which, together, compofed the Thirty-nine 
 famous Chapters, or Statutes, by which the Inquifition, in all the 
 Venetian Territories, is govern'd to this Day. 
 
 The Inquifition of Rcme is compos'd of Cardinals, who fit as 
 Judges, and of Confulters, moil of whom are Dodtors of the Ca- 
 non Law, and Regulars, or Monks ; thefe are lb many Counsel- 
 lors, whofe Bufinefs it is to examine the Books, Tenets, Opinions, 
 and Actions, of all Perfons impeach'd to the Tribunal of the In- 
 quifition. It is from their Opinions, that the Cardinal Inquifitora 
 form their Sentences and Decrees. There are, beiides, two Secre 
 taries, and a kind of Attorney General, who are the only Perions 
 known to thofe who are impeached. There are a prodigious Num- 
 ber of inferior Officers ; becaufe, as all the Officers of the Inqui- 
 fition have very great Privileges, and can be judg'd by that Tribu- 
 nal only, they, by that means, fecure themfelves from the ordi- 
 nary Forms of Juilice, which are very fevere. 
 
 The Inquifition is impowered to judge, i. Heretics. 2. Thofe 
 who have^iven any Suspicion of Herefy. 3. The Promoters, or 
 thofe who protect or favour them, in any Manner whatfoever. 
 4. Thofe who refill the Officers of the Inquifition, and interfere 
 with the Jurifdi&ion thereof, in any Manner whatfoever. 
 
 As to what relates to Heretics, all are by the Inquifition compre- 
 hended under that Name, who have either fpoken, written, taught, 
 or preached any thing contrary to the Scripture, the Apoitles 
 Creed, the Articles of Faith, and the Traditions of the Church : 
 Thofe who have alfo abjur'd the Chriflian Faith; or thofe who 
 commend the Culloms and Ceremonies ufed in other Religions ; 
 or maintain, that a Man may be faved in any Religion, provided 
 he profefles it with a pure and fincere Heart. They likewife 
 comprehend under the Title of Heretics, all who djfapprove any 
 Ceremony, Ufage, or Cuilom, received in the Universal Church, 
 and even in thofe particular Churches where the Inquifition is re- 
 ceived. And they alfo include among thefe, thofe who declare, 
 that the Pope has no Power over temporal Princes ; as alfo thofe 
 who declare any thing in Oppofition to the Decifions made by the 
 Pope, on any Subject whatever. 
 
 The Suspicion of Herefy is ftill of greater Extent ; for if a Man, 
 happens only to advance any Propoiition that offends thofe who 
 hear him, or even forbears to impeach thofe who advance any fuch, 
 he is furc to be obnoxious to this Tribunal. To receive a Heretic 
 ipto one's Frkndlhip, to entertain him in one's Houfe, to make 
 him a Prefcut, or even to pay him a Vifit ; and, above all, to 
 prevent his being ijnprifon'd in the Inquifition, or afiilt his Efcapo 
 
 R 2 from
 
 244 Pre/em State of ITJLT. Part it 
 
 from thence, tho 1 grounded on the ftrongeft Motives of Friendfhip, 
 Duty* Gratitude, or Pity, is to incur the Guilt of Herefy. And 
 to fuch Lengths is this Matter carried in the Inquifition, that a 
 Perfon is oblig'd to impeach Brother, Father, Husband, or Wife, 
 when fufpecled of Herefy. Under this Name are comprehended 
 all thofe who fpeak to fuch as are imprifoned in the Inquifition 
 without Leave ; or who write to them, either to advife them in 
 any Matter, or merely to comfort them in their Misfortunes. As 
 one of the chief Maxims of the Inquifition is to ftrike Terror into 
 all, and to make itfelf dreaded by all who are fubjedt to it, it 
 punifhes with greater Severity fuch as offend its Agents or Officers 
 in any Manner foever : And, in this Cafe, nothing is looked upon 
 as a flight Offence, but every Crime is confider'd as capital ; nor 
 can Birth, Character, Employment, Rank, or Dignity, fecure 
 any Perfon from its Violence ; and the leaft Threat againfl. the 
 moll inferior Officer of the Inquifition, its Informers, or Witnefles, 
 would be punifhed with the utmoft Rigour and Severity. 
 
 Thefe are the chief Cafes fubject to the Inquifition, and which 
 come generally under its Cognizance by four different Methods : 
 Either by public Report, by which a Perfon is accufed ; or by the 
 Deposition of thofe Witnefles by whom he is impeach'd ; or by 
 the Difcovery of the Spies of the Inquifition, who are fpread up 
 and down in all Places; or, laftly, by the Depofitions of the Cri- 
 minals themfelves, who, for Fear others fhould inform againfl: 
 them, and, in Hopes of meeting with lefs fevere Treatmeat, fome- 
 times impeach themfelves of Things of which they know they 
 might be convicted. 
 
 When the Inquifitors have difcovered a Criminal by one of th 
 four Ivitthods above mentioned, or even on a bare Sufpicion, which 
 often is very flight, he is thrice fummoned to appear; after which, 
 in cafe he does not come forth, he is excommunicated, or fined 
 provifionally in large Sams, which, however, does not exempt 
 him from a more fevere Punifhment, if he be catch'd again. The 
 fiirefl: Method is to obey the firft Summons ; for the longer this is 
 delay'J, the greater Guilt is incurred ; nay, though a Perfon 
 were really innocent, yet a Refufal to obey the Orders of the In- 
 quifition is itfelf a Crime : All Delays and Put-offs, on this Oc- 
 cafion, only heighten the Prejudice which may be entertain'd 
 againft a Perfon impeach'd ; and they take it for granted, they have 
 Proof fufficient againfl; him, and that he is diffident of the Merits 
 of his Caufe, from the firft Moment he discovers the leaft Reluct- 
 ance to appear before his Judges. When this is the Cafe of a Per- 
 fon accus'd, he has no other Way left to fecure himfelf, than by 
 a voluntary and perpetual Banifhment. Nothing is forgot in this 
 Tribunal ; no Crime is wiped away by Time, nor do they allow 
 ef anv fuch Thing as Prcfcriptin, 
 
 It
 
 Chap. VII. Prefent State of 1 TJLT. I45 
 
 It is yet no eafy Matter to fucceed in this violent Extreme, and 
 it is almoft impoflible to efcape the Search of the Inquifitors ; for 
 no fooner has an impeached Perfon made his Efcape, but all the 
 Inquifitions have fpeedy Notice of it : They purfue him every- 
 where, and feldom fail to catch him again. The fame is obferv'd 
 with regard to thofe who break out of the Prifon of the Inquifi- 
 tion ; if they are catch'd again, they are utterly undone, and the 
 moft gentle Punifhment they are to expett is Imprifonment for 
 Life. It often happens, that the Inquifitors, either when they 
 have fufficient Witneffes, or that the Crime, of which the Perfon 
 impeach'd is accufed, is of an enormous Nature; or when they are 
 afraid of his efcaping from them, and not flaying till they fummon 
 him in Form ; in thefe Cafes they fliall give Orders immediately 
 for his being arretted, whenever they can meet with him. A Per- 
 fon impeached has no Afylum, nor Privilege, nor can fufpend the 
 Profecution one fingle Moment, or mitigate the Rigour of it. 
 
 It is furprifing to confider the forlorn Condition of a Perfon 
 who is thus unhappy: He is feized in the Midft of his Friends, 
 and in the very Bofom of his dear Family ; a Father Handing by 
 his Son's Side, a Son in the Company of his Father, and an affe- 
 ctionate Wife in that of her Husband, without any one's daring 
 to make the leaft Refiftance, or even to flop a Minute, to fettle an 
 Affair, tho' of the utmoft Confequence, or to fpeak one fingle 
 Word in favour of the Perfon impeached. But when the Inquifi- 
 tion have once got him into their Hands, he is treated in a flill 
 more rigorous Manner. In this Cafe no one is allow'd either to 
 vifit him, to give him Advice, to write to, or folicit for him, or 
 even to attempt to prove bis Innccence. In an Inftant the wretched 
 Creature is cut off from all Correfpondence, finds himfelf friend- 
 lefs, without Kindred, Advice, Support, or even the leaft Confo- 
 lation ; abandon'd to his Judges, and to himfelf, and frequently 
 to his greateft Enemies, without being able to tell what will become 
 of him. Even Innocence itfelf, in thefe Cafes, is a very weak 
 Support, fince nothing is eafier than to ruin an innocent Perfon. 
 
 No fooner have the Inquifitors got a Perfon into their Clutches, 
 than they fearch him very ftriftly, in order, if poffiblc, to find 
 fomething about him that may be of Ufe to convift him ; or for 
 any Inftrument, with which he may kill himfelf, in order to efcape 
 the Tortures of the Inquifition. We have Inftances of Perfons 
 who have laid violent Hands upon themfelves on thefe Occnfions, 
 and a great many, who were imprifoned in the Inquifition, have 
 been driven to Defpair, as to dafh out their Brains againft the 
 Walls, when they had no other Way left to dettroy themfelves. 
 But to return : The Inquifitor, accompanied by his Officers, goes 
 to the Houfe of the Accufed, where a very exatt Inventory is 
 
 R 3 taken
 
 246 Prefent State of IT ALT. Part H. 
 
 taken of his Effects. No Perfon dares to oppofc them therein, or 
 conceal the leaft Trifle. 
 
 Things being carried on thus far, the Profecution immediately 
 begins, but is carried on very flowly ; for a Criminal is frequently 
 imprifoned for feveral Months, and not one Word is mentioned 
 about carrying him to Audience. Thefe Prifons are dreadful, and 
 nothing can be more capable to ftrike a Prisoner with Terror, and 
 difpofe him for appearing before the moll dreadful Tribunal in 
 this World, than the difmal Dungeons into which thefe unhappy 
 Wretches are immediately thrown. Thefe Dungeons are under 
 Ground, and ftink wretchedly ; they are fituated in Places far re- 
 mote from all human Communication ; the Way to them is by a 
 great many Turnings and Windings, for Fear left the Cries and 
 Complaints of the miserable Tenants of thole Places lhould be 
 heard, and move any Perfon with Compaflion. Day-light is for 
 ever fhut out from thefe gloomy Habitations, to hinder thofe who 
 imprifon'd therein from Reading, or any Employment but the 
 Reflection of their Puniftiment, and the fad Thoughts of the Evils 
 which are prepared for them. In this difmal Dungeon, they are 
 not allowed either to fee, or fpeak to, any Perfon. And, in 
 cafe the Proximity of one Dungeon with another fliould give the 
 Prifoners an Opportunity of converfing with each other, they are 
 abfolutely forbid to attempt it ; and, if they happen to be over- 
 heard, either fpeaking to one another, or to themfelves, the Offi- 
 cers immediately rulh in upon them, and whip them with the ut- 
 moft Severity. We are told, that thefe unhappy Wretche?, not 
 daring to converfe with one another from their feveral Dungeons, 
 have invented a Method of fpeaking with their Fingers, by itrike- 
 ing a certain Number of Times upon the Wall, according to the 
 numerical Order of the Letter which they would exprels in the 
 Alphabet. As for Inftance, fuppofe they have a Mind to exprefs 
 the Word Bread; as the nrft Letter thereof is the fecond in the 
 Alphabet, they ftrike two Blows on the Wall ; and in the fame 
 Manner for the reft. This gives them fome Employment j for 
 Converfation muft neceflarily be carried on but very flowly by fuch 
 Methods, and a confiderable Time is taken up in expreffmg only a 
 few Sentences. 'Tis certain, that were it in the Power of the 
 Jailors to deprive them even of this fadConfolation, they would not 
 fail to do it. 
 
 After the poor Wretch has fpent feveral Days, and fometimes 
 Months, in this Manner, without fo much as knowing either the 
 Crime of which he is accufed, or the Witneffes who have depos'd 
 fgainft him, the Jailor is ordered to acquaint him, that he may 
 defire to be admitted to Audience ; but this he feems to do from his 
 own proper Impulfe, and out of Companion, and not by Order of 
 the Judges ; for 'tis a fixt Rule in this Tribunal, tnat the Prifoner 
 
 muft
 
 
 Chap. VII. Prefent State of It ALT. C47 
 
 mull always petition for every thing. The firft Time the Prifoncf 
 appears before the Judges, they ask him, juft as though they did 
 not know him, or had the leaft Information of his Crime, 
 Who he is ? or, What he wants ? and, If he has any thing to 
 fay ? Altho* all the Houfes of the Inquifition are very magnifi- 
 cent, and that no Coft is fpar'd, either for Marble, or rich Orna- 
 ments of Archite&ure, yet the Prifoners fee none of thefe, and 
 every Object they behold ftrikes them with Terror. The feveral 
 Places where they appear have an Air of dreadful Gloom ; and 
 the Inquifitors, and their Officers, put on fo fevere a Countenance, 
 as doe6 not leave the Prifoner the leaft Hopes of moving his Judges 
 to Companion. 
 
 Hitherto he is not fufFc'd to know the Crime of which he is 
 accufed, nor the Pe/fons who have fworn againft him. They, as 
 yet, are only endeavouring, by a thoufand Stratagems, and artful 
 Windings, to get fomething out of him, that may feeming'y au- 
 thorize them to pronounce his Condemnation. This Snare is laid 
 with prodigious Cunning, and can hardly be efcap'd ; for, as, on 
 the one Side, People are arretted on vain and idle Reports, or on 
 Proofs infufncient to condemn them, 'tis certain that the Judges 
 would be very much puzzled, if the Priibners did not, by their 
 own Words, pronounce their Condemnation. If the Prifoner is 
 too cunning to fall into their Snares, or innccent of the Crimes 
 laid to his charge, or pleads Not Guilty, he is remanded back to 
 his difmal Dungeon. At laft, after having carried the unhappy 
 Wretch, for feveral Months together, from Jail to Audience, 
 and from Audience to Jail, tho' his Crimes are not proved, he is 
 condemn'd to the Torture : Of this there are three Kinds, ail of 
 which are extremely fevere and cruel ; the Firlt is that of the 
 Rope, the Second that of Water, and the Third that of Fire. 
 
 When, therefore, the Prifoner is condemn'd to the Torture, he 
 is carried to the Place appointed for that Purpofe, which is called 
 The Place of Torment i. This is a fubterraneous Cavern, to which 
 one goes down by numberlefs Multitudes of Turnings and Wind- 
 ings, in order to prevent the dreadful Cries of thofe miferable 
 Wretches from being heard. In this Place there are Seats for the 
 Inquifitors, who are always prefent on this Occaiionj <md it has 
 no other Light than that of two Torches, which burn but faintly, 
 yet ftrong enough to let the Prifoner fee the Inftruments with which. 
 he is to be tortur'd, and one, two, or more Executioners, who 
 come in cloathcd, from Top to Toe, in black Canvas, with lojag 
 black Hoods on their Heads, that cover their Faces, only 
 Peep-holes for their Eyes, as if the Devils themfelves were to be 
 theTormentors. Immediately the Prifoner is feiz'd by one of thefo 
 Spectres, who ftrips him almoft ftark naked. The Inquifitors, 
 before he is put to the Torture, ftrongly exhort him to confcfc the 
 
 R 4 Crime
 
 24$ Prefent State of IT ALT. Part II, 
 
 Crime whereof he is accufed. But if this proves ineffectual, and 
 he perfifts in protefting his Innocence, he is put to the Torture to 
 which he is condemn'd : If it be that of the Rope, the Prifoner 
 has his Hands bound behind him with a Cord ; after which he is 
 rais'd from the Ground to the Top of the Ceiling, by means of 
 a Pulley ; when, letting him hang for fome Time in this Manner, 
 they let him fall within half a Foot of the Ground, but with fuch 
 fudden Jirks, as put all his Limbs out of Joint. If themiferable 
 Creature endures the Rack without confeffing what they would 
 have, which few or none, tho' never fo innocent, are able to do ; 
 as foon as an Hour-glafs has quite run out, he is taken down, and 
 a Surgeon, who is then ready, puts his Bones in Joint. But if 
 this Kind of Torture does not prevail, they then have Recourfe 
 to that of Water, which is done in this Manner : They force the 
 Prifoner to fwallow down a great Quantity of Water ; after which 
 he is laid along a Form or Bench that has a Cavity in it, which 
 fhuts up, and iqueezes, atPleafure. A Stick, or Piece of Wood, 
 runs crofs this Bench, which keeps the Prifoner's Body fufpended, 
 as it were, and puts him to incredible Pain. But the molt rigo- 
 rous Torture is that of Fire : For a great Fire being lighted, the 
 Soles of the Prifoner's Feet are rubbed with Bacon, or fome other 
 unctuous or combuftible Subftance ; which being done, he is laid 
 on the Ground, with his Feet turn'd towards the Fire, and held 
 clown in that Pofture, till fuch time as he has confefs'd all the In- 
 quifitors defire to know. Thefe two laft Kinds of Torture con- 
 tinue, as the firft, for the Space of an Hour, and fometimes more, 
 and are fo violent, that the Sufferer is often reduc'd to almoft the 
 laft Gafp: On which Occafion the Phyfician of the Inquifition is 
 confulted, whether it will be poflible for the poor Wretch to bear 
 up any longer under thefe Torments. And in cafe the Violence 
 of thefe Tortures cannot extort, any Confeffion, the only Conib- 
 lation the Prifoner has is to be carried back to his horrible Dun- 
 geon, where he is {eft a Prey to his Defpair, and all the glcomy 
 Reflections that may arife from the Pain which the Torments may 
 have left behind them. 
 
 In this Cafe the Inquifitors again have Recourfe to Artifices and 
 Snares ; for they permit feveral Fellows, fuborn'd for this Purpofe, 
 to be with them, who, under Pretence of comforting and nflifting 
 him, and telling him, that they are Prifoners and Criminals as 
 well as himfelf, exclaim againft the Inquifition, affirming it to be 
 the greateft Scourge that ever God permitted to afflict Mankind! 
 with' j and, by this means, r.hefe Fellows draw him into the Snare, 
 which is fo much the more unavoidable, as it is very difficult for a 
 Perfon in Diftrefs to guard againft pretended Friendfhip or Com- 
 paffion, when mask'd with the Appearance of Sincerity. The In- 
 cjuifitors themfelves fecond thefe inhrman Artifices to the utmoir. 
 
 of
 
 Chap. VII. Prefent State of ITALT. 249 
 
 of their Power, by adminiflring ConfoJation to the unhappy Pri- 
 foner, and pretending to be touch'd with his Misfortunes j that 
 they do not intend his Ruin, but Converfion ; and that the fmalleft 
 Confeffion to them, in private, which they promiie never to re- 
 veal, would fecure him from any more Torture, and reflore him 
 to his Liberty. 
 
 In fhort, if a Prifoner flands convidted, either by the Sentence 
 of the Inquifitors, by the Depofitions made againft him, or by his 
 own Confeffion, he is condemned, pursuant to the Heinoufnefs of 
 the Guilt, either to Death, to perpetual Imprifonment, to the 
 Gallies, or the like Punilhment. The Execution is fometimes 
 fufpended a Year, and more, after Sentence of Condemnation has 
 pafs'd j and the Reafon of this Cruelty is, that, by putting to 
 Death a great Number of Criminals at the fame time, the Exe- 
 cution may be the more dreadful, and confequently a greater Ex- 
 ample : For the Sight of fo many Criminals, condemn'd, in this 
 Manner, to die, without any Regard to Age, Sex, or Quality, is 
 thought to confirm the People in the Roman Catholic Religion. 
 
 When a competent Number of Prifoners are convidted of He- 
 refy, &c a Day is fix'd by the chief Inquifitor, for an Execution, 
 which is called by them an Aft of Faith ; for, in this Ceremony, 
 they pretend the mod illuftrious and public Proofs of a religious 
 Zeal are given. As the Ceremonies pr.idtis'd on thefe Occafions 
 are pretty near the fame in all Places, I fhall, therefore, relate 
 only thofe of the AS of Faitb, or Execution of the Inquifition, 
 taken from a Narrative publifhed, at Madrid, the 30th of May 
 1680. and executed the 29th of June of the faid Year. 
 
 A Month before the Execution, the Officers of the Inquifition, 
 preceded by their Standard, rode, with great Solemnity, from the 
 Palace of the Holy Office, or Inquifition, to the large Square at 
 Madrid, where, in the Prefence of a numberlefs Multitude of 
 People therein afitmbled, they proclaim'd, by Sound of Trumpets 
 and Kettle-drums, that, on that Day Month, an AS of Faitb, or 
 Execution of the Inquifition, would be exhibited. 
 
 A Scaffold, fifty Feet in Length, was erected in the Square, 
 which was raifed to the fame Height with the Balcony made for 
 the King to fit in. At the End, and along the whole Breadth of 
 this Scaffold, at the Right of the King's Balcony, an Amphitheatre 
 was raiVd, 10 which they afcended by twenty-five or thirty Steps ; 
 and this was appointed for the Council of the Inquifition, and the 
 other Co :nci!s of Spain. Above thefe Steps, and under a Canopy, 
 theGrand Inquifitor's Roftrum was plac'd, that he was raifed much 
 higher than the King's Ealcony. At the Left of the Scaffold and 
 Balcony, a fecond Amphitheatre was eredted of the fame Extent 
 with the former, for the wretched Criminals to fland in. 
 
 A Month
 
 250 Prefent State of IT ALT. Part II. 
 
 A Month after Proclamation had been made of theJcl of Faith, 
 the Ceremony open'd with a Proceffion, which proceeded from St- 
 Mary's Church, in the following Order : The March was pre- 
 ceded by an Hundred Coal Merchants, all arm'd with Pikes and 
 Muskets ; thefe People furnifhing the Wood with which the Cri- 
 minals are burnt. They were follow'd by Dominicans, before 
 whom a white Crofs was carried. Then came the Duke of Me- 
 dina-Celi, carrying the Standard of the Inquifition. Afterwards 
 was brought forwards a green Crofs, cover'd with black Crape ; 
 which was followed by feveral Grandees, and other Perfons of 
 Quality, who were Familiars of the Inquifition. The March 
 was clos'd by Fifty Guards belonging to the Inquifition, clothed 
 with black and white Garments, and commanded by the Marquis 
 of Pouar, hereditary Prote&or of the Inquifition. The Procef- 
 fion, having marched in this Order before the Palace, proceeded 
 afterwards to the Square, where the Standard and the Green Crofs 
 were plac'd on the Scaffold, where none but the Dominicans ftay'd, 
 the reft being retir'd. Thefe Friers fpent Part of the Night in 
 finging of Pfalms, and feveral MafTes were celebrated on the 
 Altar from Day-break to Six in the Morning. An Hour after, 
 the King and Queen of Spain, the Queen Mother, and all the 
 Ladies of Quality, appeared in the Balconies. At Eight o'Clock 
 the Proceffion began, in like Manner as the Day before, with the 
 Company of Coal Merchants, who plac'd themfelves on the Left 
 of the Kirtg's Balcony, his Guards ftanding on his Right ( the 
 reft of the Balconies and Scaffolds being fill'd by the Embaffadors, 
 the Nobility and Gentry). Afterwards came thirty Men, carry- 
 ing Images made in Pafte-board, as big as the Life : Some of thefe 
 reprefented thofe who were dead in Prifon, whofe Bones were alfo 
 brought in Trunks, with Flames painted round them ; and the 
 reft of the Figures reprefented thofe, who, having efcap'd the 
 Hands of the Inquifition, were outlawed. Thefe Figures were 
 plac'd at one End of the Amphitheatre. 
 
 After thefe, there came twelve Men and Women, with Ropes 
 about their Necks, and Torches in their Hands, with Pafte-bcard 
 Caps, three Feet high, on which their Crimes were written, or 
 reprefented, in different Manners. Thefe were followed by fifty 
 others, having Torches alfo in their Hands, and clothed with a 
 yellow San-benito, or Great Coat without Sleeves, with a large St. 
 Andrew's Crofs, of a red Colour, before and behind. Thefe were 
 Criminals, who (this being the firft Time of their Imprifonment) 
 had repented of their Crimes-; thefe are ufually condemn'd either 
 to fome Years Imprifonment, or to wear the San-benito, which is 
 looked upon to be the greateft Difgrace that can happen to a Fa- 
 mily. Each of the Criminals of the two Orders were led by two 
 Familiars of the Inquifuiap. Next came twenty more Criminals, 
 
 of
 
 Chap. VII. Prefent State of It ALT. 251 
 
 of both Sexes, who had relapfed thrice into their former Errors, 
 and were condemn'd to the Flames. Thofe who had given fome 
 Tokens of Repentance, were to be ftrangled before they were 
 burnt } but the reft, for having perfifted obftinately in their Errors, 
 were to be burnt alive. Thefe wore Linnen San-benitos, having 
 Devils and Flames painted on them, and Caps after the fame Man- 
 ner : Five or fix among them, who were more obftinate than the 
 reft, were gagged, to prevent their uttering any blafphemous Te- 
 nets. Such as were condemn'd to die were furrounded, befides the 
 two Familiars, with four or five Monks, who were preparing them 
 for Death as they went along. 
 
 Thefe Criminals pafs'd, in the O/der above-mentioned, under 
 the King's Balcony ; and after having walk'd round the Scaffold, 
 were plac'd in the Amphitheatre that flood to the Left, and each 
 of them furrounded with the Familiars and Monks who had at- 
 tended them. Some of the Grandees, who were Familiars, feated 
 themfelves on two Benches, which had been prepared for them at 
 the lowed Part of the other Amphitheatre. The Officers of the 
 fupreme Councils of the Inquifition, the Inquifitors, the Officers 
 of all the other Councils, and feveral other Perfons of Diftin&ion, 
 both Secular and Regular, all of them on Horfeback, with great 
 Solemnity, arrived afterwards, and placed themfelves on the Am- 
 phitheatre, towards the Right-hand, on both Sides the Roftrum 
 in which the Grand Inquifitor was to feat himfelf ; He himfelf 
 came laft of all, in a purple Habit, accompanied by the Prefident 
 of the Council of Cajlile, when, being feated in ius Place, the 
 Prefident withdrew. 
 
 Then they began to celebrate M?fs, in the Midft of which the 
 Prieft who officiated went down from the Altar, and felted him- 
 felf in a Chair which had been plac'd for him. The Grand In- 
 quifitor came down from his Seat, and they having put on his 
 Cope, and fet the Mitre on his Head, after having faluted the 
 Altar, he advanced towards the King's Balcony : He there went 
 up the Steps that were at the End of the Amphitheatre, together 
 with certain Officers of the Inquifition, who carried thither their 
 Crofs, the Gofpels, and a Book containing the Oath by which 
 the Kings of Spain oblige themfelves to protect the Catholic Faith, 
 to extirpate Ilerefy, and to fupport all the Profecutions of the In- 
 quifition to the utmoft of their Power. Then the King of Spain, 
 /landing up, and bare-headed, having on one Side of him a Gran- 
 dee of Spain, holding the Royal Sword, with the Point upward, 
 fwore to obferve the Oath, which a Counfellor of the Royal 
 Council and that of the Inquifition had juft read before. He con- 
 tinued in this Pofture till fuch Time as the Grand Inquifitor was 
 rcturn'd back to his Seat. About Twelve o'CIock they began to 
 read the Sentences of the condemned Criminals. That of the Cri- 
 minals
 
 252 Prefent State of IT ALT. Part II. 
 
 minals who died in Prifon, or were outlawed, was firft read. Their 
 Figures in Pafteboard were carried up into a little Scaffold, and put 
 into fmall Cages made for the Purpofe. Then they went on to 
 read the Sentences to each Criminal, who, thereupon, were put 
 into the faid Cages, one by one, in order for all Men to know 
 them. The whole Ceremony lafted till Nine at Night ; and when 
 they had finifh'd the Celebration of the Mafs, the King withdrew; 
 and the Criminals, who had been condemn'd to be burnt, were de- 
 livered over to the Secular Arm, and, being mounted upon Affes, 
 were carried thro' the Gate called Fgncaral, and, at Midnight, 
 near this Place, were all executed. 
 
 There cannot be any thing more lamentable, than to fee the 
 Wretches roafting to Death, and, in the utmoft Agonies, as long 
 as they are able, crying out, Mifericordia, por Amor de Dios f 
 Mercy, for the Lo<ve of God! Yet it is beheld by the Natives, of 
 both Sexes, with fuch Tranfports of Joy, as are not, on any other 
 Occafions, to be met with. We may, however, reft affur'd, that 
 this inhuman Joy is not the Effect of Cruelty in thefe Peoples 
 Natures, but the Spirit of their Religion ; for Thieves, Murder- 
 ers, &c. are no-where more tenderly lamented than in Spain. 
 
 The Inquifition being a Subject of fo particular a Nature, it is 
 very difficult for any one, in writing upon it, or in making Abf- 
 tratts, to diveft himfelf of that Partiality fo common to Perfons 
 of different Sentiments, iu fo delicate a Point as that of Religion. 
 That the Reader may not think what has been delivered to be the 
 Effect of Prejudice, I refer him to M. de Vayrai, in his Prefent 
 State of Spain, Book IV. who has attempted to give us the Pro- 
 ceedings of the Inquifition, and even to juftify them. 
 
 Curiosities.] The Curiofnies of this Country are chiefly 
 thefe following. In Rome are Amphitheatres, particularly that 
 begun by Vefpafian, and finifh'd by Domitian : Triumphal Arches, 
 as that of Conjiantine the Great, erected to him in Memory of 
 his Victory obtain'd over the Tyrant Maxentius, with this Infcri- 
 ption, Liberatori Urbis, Fundatori Pacts ; that erected to T. Vefpa- 
 Jian, upon his taking the City, and fpoiling the Temple, of Je- 
 rufalem ; add the Triumphal Bridge, whofe Ruins are ftill vifible 
 near Port Angela, fo much reputed formerly, that, by a Decree 
 of the Senate, none of the meaner People were fuffered to tread 
 upon the fame : Baths of Antoninus Pius, which were of prodi- 
 gious Bignefs ; thofe of Alexander Severus, the magnificent Ruin* 
 whereof are near the Church of St. Eujlachio : The Pillar erected 
 by M. Aureliut Antoninus the Emperor, in Honour of his Father 
 Antoninus Pius, being as yet 175 Foot high; another Pillar 
 in Honour of Trajan ; another in Honour of Julius, upon his 
 Naval Victory over the Carthaginians ; to thefe add the two Obe- 
 lisks
 
 Chap. VIII. Prefent State of GERMANY. 253 
 
 lisks fonnerly belonging to the famous Circus Maximus, begun by 
 Tarquinius Prifcus, augmented by J. Cte/ar and Aigujlus, and 
 adorn'd by Trajan and Heliogabalus ; add the three Pillars of ad- 
 mirable Stru&ure, which formerly belong'd to the Temple of Ju- 
 fiter Stator, built by Romulus, upon his Viclory over the Sabines : 
 The Ruins of Templum Pads, built by Titus Vefpajian, adorn'd 
 with fome of the Spoils of the Temple of Jerufalem: Laftly, 
 the very Plate of Brafs, on which the Laws of the Ten Tables 
 were written, is ftill to be feen in the CapitoL In the Kingdom 
 of Naples are the Remains of a fair Amphitheatre, and Cicero's 
 Academy, near Puzzuoh ; alfo, between this Place and Baia-, are 
 the Arches and Ruins of that prodigious Bridge, being three 
 Miles long, built by Caligula. The Ruins of Nero's Palace, with 
 the Tomb of Agrippina his Mother, nigh Prifcina. The obfcure 
 Tomb of P. Virgilius Maro, in the Gardens of S. Severino, near 
 the Entrance of the Grotte of Paujilipus, near Naples j which 
 Grotte is a large Cart-way, about a Mile long, cut under Ground 
 quite thro' a Mountain. To thefe we may add that Prodigy of 
 Nature, the terrible Volcano Ve/wuius, about 7 Miles from the 
 City of Naples. The very Stone upon which Julius Cafar flood, 
 when he made an Oration to his Men, perfuading them to pafs 
 the Rubicon, and advance ftrait to Rome, is to be feen at Rimini. 
 Amongft the famous Roman Caufeways, we may reckon that of 
 Flaminius, reaching from Rome to Rimini, being Five Days Jour- 
 ney, which employ 'd the Soldiers during the Time of Peace. 
 
 CHAP. VIII. 
 
 the prefent State of GERMAN Y. 
 
 Boundaries.] "fc^ODERN GERMANY \% bounded on 
 iVX the North by the Baltic Sea, Denmark, 
 and the German Ocean ; on the Eaft by Poland and Hungary ; on 
 the South by the Gulph of Venice, and the Alps, which divide it 
 from Italy ; and on the Weft by France, and the Lon.u Countries. 
 In thefe Bounds are contain'd a Part of old Germany, Part of 
 Gaul, Illyricum, with fome of old Italy ; 'to which I (hall add the 
 Emperor's hereditary Dominions. 
 
 Situation.] This Empire is fituated between 45 and 55 
 Dcg. North Latitude, and 2 and zc Degrees Eaft Longitude. The 
 Length whereof is about 900, and the Breadth 580 Miles. 
 
 Divifion
 
 254 
 
 Divifion and Subdivifion, 
 
 Prefent State of GERMANT. 
 
 Part II. 
 
 15 
 
 O T- 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 
 5 *-> *s 
 **- /f 1 i~ 
 
 2 
 
 i s 
 
 ^3 ^ -X 
 
 . o 
 
 SO,*? ^ 
 
 .5^5 
 
 GERMJAT 
 
 i.Circl.ofAusTR. 
 I. Low. Aujlrla 7 
 2.U$p.AuJ?ria J 
 I 3 . Stiria 
 1 4. Carniola 
 Carintbia 
 Brixen 
 7. 7n?/z/ 
 S. TV;-*/ 
 
 9. Moravia 
 
 10. Silejia 
 
 1 . Lower 
 
 2. Upper 
 
 1 1 . Bohemia 
 
 I: 
 
 Square 
 Miles. 
 
 146288 
 7160 
 5000 
 
 4S7 6 
 
 3000 
 
 1300 
 2100 
 3900 
 
 5424 
 10250 
 
 1 2060 
 
 12. In Swabia 
 
 1 . Burgonu 
 
 2. Forelt Towns 
 
 3. Brifgtmi 
 
 4. Hohenburg. 
 
 5. Nellenburg 
 
 6. Conjlance 
 
 3. Hungary 
 
 1. L T pper 
 
 2. Lower 
 
 a 2 .2 
 
 14. Tranfyhania 
 Old >*<:/ Mediterranea. 
 
 Chief Towns 
 in each 
 Divifion. 
 
 650 
 4S0 
 380 
 
 37 
 
 230 
 
 60 
 
 36060 
 
 f Vienna, ol. 
 J Vindomina 
 1 and 
 
 (. Finds bona. 
 Lintz 
 Gratz 
 Laubacb 
 Clagenfurt 
 Brixen 
 Trent 
 Infpruck 
 
 Olmutz 
 
 > BreJIau 
 
 Troppau 
 C Prague 
 \Egra 
 
 Burgonv 
 
 Rhinejield 
 
 BrifacOld 
 
 Hohenburg 
 
 Nellenburg 
 
 Conjlance 
 
 i Freiburg 
 Buda 
 
 1 4400 Hermanjlat 
 
 Diftance and Bearing 
 of Towns. 
 
 ("540E of Paris 
 ) 7ooNWof Conjl. 
 1 i8oSWofCr^w 
 (. 480 SE ofAmflerd. 
 
 ItY } i Vie 
 70 SW of Gratz 
 40 NW of Laubacb 
 IO I W of Clagenfurt 
 45 SW I f . 
 
 30NWJ *'* 
 
 67 N of Vienna 
 
 90 N of Olmutz 
 
 72 S of BreJIau 
 1 30 N W of Vienna 
 77 E of Prague 
 
 5 3 NW of Munich 
 I 23 SW of Burgoxu 
 28 N of Minefield 
 48 E of 5>f 
 15 SE of Hohenburg 
 1 8 S qf Nellenburg 
 
 48 E of Vienna 
 79 SE of Preslurg 
 
 205 E of 2W# 
 
 Divifion 
 
 2 '
 
 Chap.VIlI. Prefint State of GERMANT. 
 
 Divifion and Subdivifion, 
 
 *55 
 
 1 5 . Sclavonic and 
 Ratxia 
 Part of old Pannonia and 
 Noricum. 
 
 1 d.Groatia (Part) 
 Part of Liburniu of old 
 Dalmatiu. 
 
 1 7. Morlacbia 
 Part of old Liburnia. 
 
 1 8. for*//* (Part) 
 Part of old Meefia. 
 
 ig.PValachia{?t.) 
 Part of old *<7a or Get a. 
 
 20. Ta/nefwar 
 Part of old Mafia. 
 
 2i.IntheNetber- 
 lands 
 8.8-g l.r/W(Pt.) 
 ^0 5 a. Flanders (Pt.) 
 geq S j.L#mJ. (Pt.) 
 O^-o .Hainaulll?t.) 
 -g ^ ca 5. Alamur 
 
 ^1| 6.Zi*hrf(Pt.) 
 
 - 2-^ -j. Mechlin 
 ^ ^ 8. Antwerp 
 12. In Italy 
 
 1 . Milan 
 
 Pt. of Gallia Tranfpadana. 
 
 2. Mantua 
 Part of old Cenomani. 
 
 3. Mirandtla 
 Part of Gallia Cifpadana. 
 
 4. ^7r/ (Part) 
 2. Cir.of Bavaria 
 
 .<fjjj I. Bavaria prop. 
 "^ 2. Sattxburg 
 
 2 4 4. Burgteltgaden . 
 
 's: ""S ' Freifinven 
 
 fc< *; O. Katisbon 
 
 7,Srit%ba(b 
 
 Square 
 
 Chief Towns 
 
 Diilance and Bearing 
 
 Miles. 
 
 in each 
 Divifion. 
 
 of Towns. 
 
 1 0000 
 
 Pofega 
 
 130 S of Buda 
 
 1925 
 
 Carolftmt 
 
 ! 1 7 E of Pofega 
 
 2850 
 
 Zeng 
 
 35 S of Cardjladt 
 
 3640 
 
 Belgrade 
 
 1 20 E of 'Pofega 
 
 2300 
 
 \pedt 
 
 
 3850 
 
 Tame/war 
 
 ! 
 
 60 NE of Belgrade 
 
 1892 
 
 Bruffclt 
 
 500 NW of Vienna 
 
 1905 
 
 Ghent 
 
 28 NW 
 
 2408 
 
 Luxembourg 
 
 90 SE } 
 
 640 
 
 Mons 
 
 29 S 1 
 
 425 
 
 Namur 
 
 28 SE >of Brujfels 
 
 3 12 
 
 Limburg 
 
 60 E 1 
 
 3 
 
 Mechlin 
 
 15 N J 
 
 10 
 
 Antwerp 
 
 27 N J 
 
 543 1 
 
 Milan 
 
 73 SW of Trent 
 
 700 
 
 Mantua 
 
 65 W of Milan 
 
 1 
 120 
 
 Mirandola 
 
 21 SE of Mantua 
 
 
 jfeunte 
 
 ' 
 
 450 
 
 St. Viet or: Fi- 
 
 43 SW of Caroljladt 
 
 12279 
 
 
 
 8500 
 
 Munich 
 
 198 W of Vienna 
 
 2540 
 
 Saltzbarg 
 
 69 E -J 
 
 240 
 
 Pajfau 
 
 88 NE / 
 
 208 
 
 Burgtehgad. 
 Freifengen 
 
 tvt ? of Munich 
 
 240 
 
 20 N f 
 
 416 
 
 Ratisbtn 
 
 60 N 1 
 
 >35 
 
 I ultzUch 
 
 88 N J 
 
 
 
 
 Divifion
 
 256 
 
 Prefent State of GERMANY. Part II. 
 
 Diviilon and Subdivifion, 
 
 o <: 
 
 u 
 
 p- 
 
 3-S 
 
 3 3 
 
 u 
 
 13 
 h 
 
 3. Circle of Swabia 
 
 1. Wirtenburg 
 
 2. Mont belt Art 
 
 3. Baden- Dur/acb 
 
 4. Eberftein 
 
 5. Baden-Baden 
 
 6. Furjienbilrg 
 
 7. Conftance 
 
 8. Hohenzollern 
 
 9. Gravenec 
 
 10. Hobenrecbburg 
 
 1 1 . j 
 
 1 2. Montfort 
 
 1 3 . Koningfeck 
 
 14. Waldburg 
 
 15. Mindelheim 
 
 16. Augsburg 
 
 17. Z7/ 
 
 iS.Oeting 1 
 
 19. Elvangen j 
 
 4. Circle of Fran- 
 
 CONiA 
 
 1 . Aichjlat 
 
 2. Bamberg 
 
 3 . Wurtzburg 
 
 4. Anfpach 
 
 5. Cullenbacb 1 
 
 6. Bareitb ) 
 
 7. Erpacb 
 %.Wertheim 
 
 9. Teutonic Order 
 
 10. Cajlel 
 
 1 1 . Scbartzenburg 
 
 1 2 . Henneburg 
 
 13. Coburg 
 
 14. Holacb 
 
 I 5. LciKtnJlein 
 
 1 6. Limpburg 
 
 17. Kuremburg 
 
 Square 
 
 Miles. 
 
 7654 
 
 3044 
 
 320 
 
 330 
 
 160 
 
 788 
 
 170 
 
 150 
 
 3 
 
 85 
 
 24 
 
 24 
 
 108 
 
 33 
 
 2Tl6 
 
 765 
 
 280 
 
 580 
 
 8512 
 
 5*3 
 
 1700 
 
 1645 
 1000 
 
 1088 
 
 230 
 280 
 
 56 
 126 
 
 96 
 320 
 406 
 220 
 
 7 2 
 120 
 
 640 
 
 Chief Towns iDiftance and Bearing 
 in each of Towns. 
 
 Divifion. 
 
 Stugart 
 
 Montbeliart 
 
 Dnrlacb 
 
 Eberftein 
 
 Baden 
 
 Futftenburg 
 
 Mersburg 
 
 Zollern 
 
 Grawenec 
 
 Rechburg 
 
 Ems 
 
 Montfort 
 
 Koningfeck 
 
 Waldburg 
 
 Mindelheim 
 
 Augsburg 
 
 Ulm 
 
 Oeting 
 
 Elvang 
 
 Aichjlat 
 
 Bambe g 
 
 Wurtzburg 
 
 Anfpacb 
 
 Cullenbacb 
 
 Bareitb 
 
 Erpacb 
 
 Wertheim 
 
 Margentheim 
 
 Caftel 
 
 Scbartzcnb. 
 
 Henneburg 
 
 Coburg 
 
 Ingelfing 
 
 Le T wenfteinC. 
 
 Limpburg Ca. 
 
 Nuremburg 
 
 of Stugart 
 
 315 W of Vienna 
 
 110SW 
 
 4oNW N 
 
 33 W 
 
 40 W 
 
 49 S 
 60S 
 28 S 
 22 SE 
 30 E 
 89 S 
 90S 
 
 50 SE 
 60 SE 
 108 SE 
 108E 
 45 SE 
 95NEJ 
 48 NE 
 
 90 S of Stugart 
 
 70 N of Aichftat 
 
 225 W of Vienna. 
 
 35 SE 
 70 NE 
 75 NE 
 35 W 
 
 20 W 
 
 21 s 
 20 E 
 
 22 E 
 
 50 N 
 58 NE 
 30 S 
 45 S 
 45 S 
 
 51 SE 
 
 
 of Hurtz* 
 burg 
 
 J 
 
 Divifion
 
 Chap. VIII. Prefent State of GERMANY. 
 
 Diviiion and Subdiviiion, 
 
 
 c^ 
 
 5.CircleoftheUpPER 
 Rhine 
 
 1. Frankfort 
 
 2. Spires 
 
 3. Worms 
 
 4. Fuld 
 
 5. Zzveibruck 
 
 6. Najfau. 
 
 7. Hanaiv 
 
 8. Budingen 
 
 9. Friedburg 
 
 10. Heffe-Caffel 
 
 1 1 . Htjfe-Darmjladt 
 
 12. Hejfe- Rbinefield 
 
 13. Waldeck 
 
 6.Cir. of the Lower 
 Rhine 
 
 1 . Palatinate 
 
 2. Juliers 
 
 3. Bergue 
 
 4. Nevuburg, in .&*- 
 
 5. Mentz. 
 1 . Z.or and 7 
 
 Afchaffenburg J 
 Z.Rbeineck 
 
 3. >;/W 
 
 4. />-/</ 
 w I 6. Treves 
 
 "3^o -j. Cologn 
 (j cq I . Wejlphalia 
 2 2. Rec^klingbufen 
 
 3. Munjter 
 
 4. Paderborn 
 
 5. Hilderjheim 
 
 7. Circle of Upper 
 Saxony 
 
 
 
 Sq uare 
 
 Chief Towns 
 
 Miles. 
 
 in each 
 
 
 Diviiion. 
 
 8154 
 120 
 
 Frankfort 
 
 2 45 
 *54 
 
 Spires 
 Worms 
 
 621 
 
 Fuld 
 
 700 
 
 1170 
 
 43 2 
 
 Deuxponts 
 
 Najfavj 
 
 Hanavu 
 
 160 
 108 
 
 Budingen 
 Friedburg 
 
 3500 
 
 39 6 
 180 
 368 
 
 Caffel 
 Darmjiadt 
 Rbinefeld 
 Waldeck 
 
 16755 
 2618 
 
 Heidelburg 
 
 1300 
 
 Juliers 
 
 720 
 
 Dujfeldorp 
 
 450 
 445 
 960 
 105 
 
 Ne-ivburg 
 
 Mentx 
 
 Lobr 
 
 Afchaffenbur. 
 
 Reineck 
 
 .56 
 
 378 
 1765 
 
 520 
 1444 
 
 192 
 
 Erfurt 
 
 Duderjlat 
 
 Treves 
 
 Cologn 
 
 Bonn 
 
 Arensburg 
 
 3600 
 800 
 
 Munfler 
 Paderborn 
 
 1302 
 
 Hilderfieim 
 
 34295 
 
 
 HI 
 
 Diftance and Bearing 
 of each Town from 
 the Capital of the 
 Divifion. 
 
 350 Eof Vienna. 
 
 50S 
 
 33 S 
 
 50 NE 
 
 64 SW 
 
 40 NW 
 
 15 E I of Frank* 
 
 18 NE ) fort 
 
 16N 
 
 80 N 
 
 15S 
 
 40 W 
 
 66 N 
 
 3 1 o W of Vienna 
 135 NW of HeidelL 
 20 NE of Juliers 
 
 I 
 
 ofHeidelb. 
 
 of Mentz 
 
 110E 
 
 48 NW 
 
 63 E 
 
 40 E 
 
 72 E 
 
 138NE 
 
 114NE 
 
 60 W 
 
 60 N of Treves 
 
 1 1 N of Cologn 
 
 15 SW of Bonn 
 
 70 N of Cologn 
 
 50 E of Munjhr 
 
 63 NE of Paderborn 
 
 Diviiion
 
 i 5 8 
 Divifion 
 
 Prefent State of GERMANY. Part II. 
 
 and Subdivifion, 
 
 i.Mifnia 
 
 2 2. Saxony 
 
 rt 3. Liifatia 
 
 "H . 4. Vo it land 
 
 1 " 5- Mersburg 
 
 ^ ^ 6. ^/W/ 
 
 -|^ -J. Altenburg 
 
 s "o 8. Naumburg 
 
 ^3^ 9'Tburingia 
 
 o IO. Brandenburg 
 
 *g II. Pomerania 
 
 *j 12. Halberjlat 
 
 13. Magdeburg 
 
 8. Circle of Lower 
 Saxon r. 
 
 1. Holftein 
 
 2. Dilmarcb 
 
 3 . Wagria 
 
 4. Mecklenburg 
 
 5. Bremen 
 
 6. Brunfwick 
 . Wolfenbuttle 
 . Weringcnroda 
 
 Co ^ 
 
 s 
 .p 
 
 i 
 
 52 
 u, o 
 
 O i*. 
 
 *, o 
 
 1 
 
 9. Circle of West 
 
 PHAMA 
 
 1. liege 
 
 2. Ofnaburg to C0 
 
 3. Lorby 
 
 4. Embden 
 
 5. Benthem 
 
 6. Tecklenburg 
 
 7. Stenfort 
 
 8. #/>* and Ritberg 
 
 9. Scbauenburg 
 
 10. i?W* 
 
 Square 
 
 Chief Towns 
 
 Miles. 
 
 in each 
 
 
 Divifion. 
 
 2177 
 
 Drefden 
 
 1600 
 
 Wittenburg 
 
 3744 
 
 Gorlitx 
 
 696 
 
 Plaiven 
 
 336 
 
 Mersburg 
 
 966 
 
 Deffau 
 
 240 
 
 Altenburg 
 
 210 
 
 haumburg 
 
 3620 
 
 Erfurt 
 
 10910 
 
 Berlin 
 
 7811 
 
 Camin 
 
 450 
 
 Halberjlat 
 
 '535 
 
 Magdeburg 
 
 7172 
 
 
 
 Keil 
 
 1850 
 
 Meldorp 
 
 
 Ploen 
 
 4400 
 
 Snverin 
 
 66 
 
 Ritzenbutel 
 
 
 Brunfwick 
 
 721 
 
 Wolfenbuttle 
 
 '35 
 
 Blackenburg 
 
 5294 
 
 
 1942 
 
 Liege 
 
 870 
 
 Ofnaburg 
 
 64 
 
 Corvey 
 
 720 
 
 Aurick 
 
 418 
 
 Benthem 
 
 144 
 
 Tecklenburg 
 
 114 
 
 Stenfort 
 
 520 
 
 Lipfe 
 
 430 
 
 
 72 
 
 Rheda 
 
 Diflance and Bearing 
 of each Town from 
 the Capital of the 
 Divifion. 
 
 190 NW of Vienna 
 50 N of Drefden 
 55 E of Wittenburg 
 62 SW { fn c 
 65 W ^fDre/dett 
 
 17 W of Wittenburg 
 33 SE of Mersburg 
 33 NW of Altenburg 
 40 W of Aaumburg 
 50 NE of Wittenburg 
 98 NE of Berlin 
 50 NW of Merjburg 
 38 NE Of Halberftat 
 
 1 70 NW ofMagdeb. 
 
 58 SE of Ploen 
 30 SW of Meldorp 
 54 W of Magdeburg 
 6 S of Brunfwick 
 40 SE of Wolfenbut. 
 
 30 SW of fullers 
 
 33 NE of Munjitr 
 
 70 SE ) 
 
 80 N C of Ofnabu. 
 
 33 W J 
 
 22 E of Benthem 
 
 1 3 S W of Tecklenbu. 
 
 30 SE of Munfter 
 
 28 E of Muxfter 
 
 Divifion
 
 Chap. VIII. Prefent State of GERMJlSfr. 
 
 *59 
 
 Divifion and Subdivifion, 
 
 ate. 
 
 Dominions of the King of 
 
 Prussia 
 
 In Upper Saxony 
 
 1. Brandenburg 
 
 2. Silejia 
 
 3. Pomerania 
 
 4. Magdeburg 
 
 5. Halberjlat 
 
 In Wefipbalia 
 
 6. Minden 
 
 7. Ravensburg 
 
 8. Lingen 
 
 9. Cle-ves 
 
 10. Meurs 
 
 1 1 . Mari 
 
 In the Netherlands 
 
 12. Gelder 
 
 In Switzerland 
 
 1 3. Neufchatel 
 In Poland 
 
 14. /Va^Ftf 
 
 Part of old Germany, and 
 fome of the JE/tai. 
 
 Switzerland, &V. 
 This Commonwealth con- 
 tains old Helvetia, Part 
 of Rbeetia, Gallia Nar- 
 bonenfis and Tranfpadana. 
 
 1. Well Cantons, compre- 
 
 hending 
 X.Bafil 
 
 2. Solothum 
 
 3. 5fr 
 
 4. Fribnrg 
 
 2. Middle, containing 
 
 1 . Schafhauft 
 
 2. Zurich 
 3-Zug 
 
 4. Lucern 
 
 5. tamfat 
 
 Square 
 Miles. 
 
 45021 
 
 1 09 10 
 
 10800 
 
 7811 
 
 x 535 
 
 45 
 
 595 
 5 2 5 
 120 
 
 630 
 
 35 
 980 
 
 360 
 
 320 
 
 995 
 
 13084 
 
 240 
 
 2 53 
 2346 
 
 370 
 
 140 
 728 
 1 12 
 460 
 250 
 
 Chief Towns ', Diltance and Bearing 
 each of each Town from 
 
 Divifion. 
 
 Berlin 
 
 Brejlanu 
 
 CamJn 
 
 Magdeburg 
 
 Halberftat 
 
 Minden 
 
 Ravensburg 
 
 Lingen 
 
 Cleves 
 
 Meurs 
 
 Ham 
 
 Gelders 
 
 Neufchatel 
 
 Ktningsburg 
 
 Bafil 
 Solothurn 
 Bern 
 Friburg 
 
 Sbafbaufe 
 Zurich 
 Zug 
 Lucern 
 Savitz 
 S 2 
 
 the Capital 
 Divifion. 
 
 of the 
 
 270 Nof Vienna 
 180 SE. 
 96 NE ^ 
 70 SW 
 105SW 
 
 190 
 
 215 
 
 w 
 
 w 
 252 w 
 
 302 w 
 293 w 
 250 w 
 
 ) of Berlin 
 
 302 W 
 424SW 
 283NE/' 
 
 560W of Vienna 
 23 S 
 39 S 
 
 50 SW 
 
 47 E 
 45 SE 
 50 SE 
 
 48 SE 
 62 SE 
 
 of Bafi 
 
 Divifion
 
 i6o 
 
 Prefent State of GERMANT. 
 
 Part II. 
 
 Divifion and Subdivifion, 
 
 6v. 
 
 6. Undernuald 
 
 7. Uri 
 
 3. Eaft, comprehending 
 1 . dpenzel 
 1. Glaris 
 Subjects of iheS-ivitzers. 
 Baden 
 Bremgarten 
 Mellhigen 
 Rbintal 
 Furgoiu 
 , Lugano 
 Lucarno 
 
 8. Mendris 
 
 9. Magia 
 Confederates of the S-witz. 
 
 1. Grifons 
 
 2. Tockenburg 
 
 3. /7* 
 
 4. ^^0/ St. Gall 
 
 5. Valais 
 
 6. Geneva 
 
 7. Neufcbatel 
 Subjects of the Grifons 
 
 1. Valteline 
 
 2. Cbiavanna 
 
 3. Bormio 
 
 Square 
 Miles. 
 
 270 
 612 
 
 270 
 257 
 
 216 
 
 40 
 119 
 
 85P 
 
 2270 
 168 
 270 
 
 144 
 
 1287 
 
 60 
 
 320 
 
 360 
 200 
 272 
 
 Chief Towns I Diftance and Bearing 
 
 in each 
 Divifion. 
 
 Santz 
 Altorf 
 
 Apenzel 
 Glaris 
 
 Baden 
 
 Bremgarten 
 
 Mellingen 
 
 Rbeineck 
 
 Froivanfield 
 
 Lugano 
 
 Lucarno 
 
 Mendris 
 
 Magia 
 
 Coire 
 
 Liecbtenfteg 
 
 Delfperg 
 
 St.Gafl 
 
 Sioir 
 
 Geneva 
 
 Neufcbatel 
 
 Sondrh 
 
 Cbiavanna 
 
 Bormio 
 
 of each Town from 
 the Capital of the 
 Divifion. 
 
 67 SE ^ 
 
 85 SE 
 78 SE 
 
 33 
 3* 
 33 
 9 1 
 60 
 125 
 
 E 
 SE 
 SE 
 SE 
 E 
 SE 
 
 119 S 
 
 138 SE Yof Bafil. 
 
 112 SE / 
 
 98 SE 
 72 SE 
 17'SW 
 78 SE 
 83 S 
 100SW 
 45SW 
 
 132SE 
 i 2 1 SE 
 140 SEX 
 
 Climate. ] The Soil of the Netherlands is, in general, lb fertile, 
 in Grain, Roots, and many Sorts of Fruits, that 'tis hardly to be, 
 parallel'd by any Spot of Ground in the fame Climate. The Air is 
 generally reckoned indifferently healthful ; yet the Moiftnefs of the Soil 
 frequently occasions thick Fogs in Winter, which would prove very pre- 
 judicial to the Inhabitants, did not the dry Eaflerly Winds, from the 
 main Continent, purify the Air, and occafion hard Frofts for feveral 
 Months. Towards the North of Germany it is very cold in Winter, 
 fcut in the Southmoft Provinces the Air is very temperate ; and the Soil 
 of Cennany, in general, is very fertile ; there being very few Spots to 
 be met with, of any large Extent, which do not produce fomething or 
 another for the Sufienance of Mankind : It abounds alfo in all Sorts of 
 Minerals, efpecially in Mines of Silver, Copper, Tin, Lead, Iron, and 
 
 Mercury
 
 Chap. VIII, Prefent State of GERMANT. 261 
 
 Mercury. The Air of Hungary is, by many, reckon'd very unhealth- 
 ful ; which is chiefly occafioned from the great Quantity of moorifh 
 Ground, and the many Lakes, with which this Country abounds. 
 However, the Soil, in general, is very fruitful in Corn, and vari- 
 ous Sorts of pleafant Fruits, and alfo affords excellent Pafturage. 
 Hungary produces valuable Mines of Copper, Iron, Quickfilver, 
 Antimony, and Salt. The longell Day, in the Northmoft Part 
 of the German Dominions, is about 1 7 Hours ; the longeft Day, 
 in the molt Southern Parts, is about 15 Hours and a Half: There- 
 fore this Empire lies in the 7th, 8th, 9th, and 10th Northern 
 Climates. 
 
 Government.] The Power of the German Emperors hath 
 not been at all Times the fame : For Cbarlemain, who laid the 
 Foundation of this Empire, enjoy 'd great Part of Germany, Hun- 
 gary, France, and Italy, of which he was abfolute Monarch, and 
 took the Liberty of difpofing his Dominions to his Succeflbr at his 
 Death, as many fucceeding Emperors did afterwards. But the 
 many exorbitant Grants to the Governors of the feveral Provinces, 
 whom the Emperors inverted with Sovereign Power, making 
 them hereditary in their refpe&ive Governments, much abridged 
 the Authority of the Emperors : Whereupon thefe great Officers 
 foon aflum'd an Independency, and even a Power of electing their 
 Sovereign, under fuch Reitriclions as may tend to fecure the Li- 
 berties of the Empire. The next Perfon to the Emperor was the 
 King of the Romans, who had little Authority but what he de- 
 rived from the Emperor : In the Emperor's Abfence, indeed, he 
 ufually took upon him the Adminiltration of the Government ; 
 and, after the Emperor's Death, fucceeded, without any further 
 Election. The firlt Occafion of electing a King of the Romans 
 proceeded from a Contrivance of fome Emperors, to fecure the Im- 
 perial Crown to their own Families ; they, making ufe of their 
 Authority while they were in Pofleflion of the Throne, eafily in- 
 fluenced the Electors to chufe a Son, a Brother, or a Relation, to 
 be crown'd King of Hungary, afterwards King of Bohemia, and 
 then King of the Romans. By this Cuftom the Empire feem'd to 
 be intail'd on the Males of the Auftrian Family, it having been 
 much the fame thing to elcc~l a King of the Romans as to chufe an 
 Emperor. But Leopold, the late Emperor's Father, form'd a De- 
 fign to fettle the Succeflion in the Female Line, on the Failure of 
 a Male Iftuej which Scheme, about forty Years ago, was com- 
 municated to the Diets of the Empire, where it receiv'd all the 
 Validity they could give it, and was called the 
 Pragmatic Sanelion. Leopold, dying in 1705, left Pragmatic 
 two Sons, jfofepb fucceeding his Father Leopold, in Sanclion. 
 1705, and dying, in 171 1, without Male Iflue, 
 
 S 3 leaving
 
 262 Prefent State of GERMANY, Part II, 
 
 leaving two Daughters, was fucceeded by his Brother Charles VI. 
 the late Emperor, who, in 1 7 1 8, had the Pragmatick Sanation 
 drawn up a-new in favour or his Pofierity, whether Male or Fe- 
 male j which Settlement was agreed to by the Hereditary Domi- 
 nions, and fworn to by the States and Magiltrates ; and, in a ge- 
 neral Diet of the Empire, in 1726, it was declared a public Law. 
 Spain guaranteed this Settlement; and, in 1726, Mufcovy vir- 
 tually did the fame: In 1731 Great Britain guaranteed it ; and, 
 in J 73 2, the Dutch, as well as Denmark, Siveden, and PruJJia, 
 became fpecial Guarantees of it. France, at laft, in 1738, became 
 one of the Guarantees, upon Ceflion of the Dutchies of Lorrain and 
 Barr, to King Stanijlaus for Life, and to France for ever : In 
 Confideration of this Ceflion, Charles Duke of Lorrain was made 
 Grand Duke of Tufcany, upon the Death of John de Medicis, the 
 laft Male of that ancient Family. The late Emperor, Charles 
 VI. the laft Male Heir of the Houfe of Auftria, died OBob. 9th 
 1740; and his eldeft Daughter, Maria There fa, born May 13 th 
 1717. and married to the prefent Grand Duke of Tufcany, fuc- 
 ceeded to all the Hereditary Dominions of the Houfe of Auftria, 
 by virtue of the Pragmatic Sanction. Maria Jofepha, born 
 1699, and eldeft Daughter to the Emperor Jofeph, married Frede- 
 ric Auguftus Eleftor of Saxony ; and Anna Therefa Jofepha, the 
 youngeft Daughter to Jofeph, born 1701, married Charles Albert 
 Cajetan Eleftor of Bavaria. The Princes who oppofed the Prag- 
 matic Sanction, when it pafs'd the Diet, were, the Elector of Saxony, 
 the Eleftor of Bavaria, the Eledtor Palatine, and the Bifhop of 
 Freyjingen and Ratisbon. But the Elector of Saxony comply 'd, upon 
 the late Emperor's procuring him to be elefted King of Poland. 
 Notwith (landing the above-mentioned Powers were Guarantees to 
 this Settlement, no fooner was the Emperor dead, than the King of 
 FruJJia unexpectedly invaded Sikfia, at the Head of 30,000 Men ; 
 and, after feveral Skirmilhes, and a bloody Engagement, with the 
 Auftrians, receiv'd the Homage of the States oiSilefia, from about 
 400 of their Deputies, at Breflavj the Capital l After this Battle a 
 Peace was concluded between their Hungarian and PruJJian Maje- 
 ilies. The King of France, in June 1741, fent 38,000 Men into the 
 Empire, to fupport the Pretenfions of the Duke of Bavaria, who 
 had publifhed a Declaration, aflerting his Rights to all the late 
 Emperor's Poffeflions : To this Alliance between France and Ba- 
 *varia acceded the Eleftor of Cologn, the Duke of Bavaria's 
 Brother, and the King of Poland. The King of Spain likewife 
 form'd a Claim to all the Auftrian Eftates, and the Ele&oral Vote 
 for the Kingdom of Bohemia, and fome time fince invaded the 
 Auftrian Dominions in Italy. On Jan. 13th 1 741 -2 the Duke 
 of Bavaria was ele&ed King of the Romans, and Emperor of 
 Germany) andcrown'd with the ufual Formalities the 2 lit: But as 
 
 the
 
 Chap. VIII. Prefent State of GERMANT. 263 
 
 the Election was made while Hoftilities fubfifted in the Empire, 
 and was, at the fame time, over-aw'd by a foreign Force, and as 
 the Electoral Vote of Bohemia was fufpended, this Election was 
 illegal and null, by the Nature of that Government. But to re* 
 turn : The principal Members of the Empire, after the King of 
 theRomans, are the Nine Electors, of whom the Three firft are Ec- 
 clefiaftical, viz. the Electors of Mentz, Triers, and Cologn ; the 
 King of Bohemia, the Duke of Bavaria, the Duke of Saxony, 
 the Marquis of Brandenburg ( King of PruJJia), the Prince Pa- 
 latine of the Rhine, and the Duke of Brunfvoick ( King of Eng- 
 land). Every Elector is Sovereign in his Dominions; they can 
 make Laws, eftablifh Courts of Juftice, coin Money, levy Taxes, 
 make Alliances among themfelves, and alfo with foreign States, 
 provided they do not tend to the Prejudice of the Empire, raife 
 Fortifications, and make Peace or War, under fome Reftridtions. 
 Befides thefe Electors, there are many other Princes who exercife 
 a Sovereign Power over thofe in their ownDominions. 
 The General Diet, or Affembly of the Empire, Diet. 
 confifts of the Electors, Ecclefiaftical Princes, Secu- 
 lar Princes, the Reprefentatives, or Deputies, of the Imperial or 
 Free Cities, which are a kind of little Commonwealths : This 
 great Body comprehends above 300 different Sovereignties, which 
 are the Subdivifions of the Nine Circles already men- 
 tioned. The Authority of the Emperor over the Emperor's 
 States, conlifts, 1. In prefiding at the Imperial Preroga- 
 Diets, and in having a Negative Voice therein. 2. In fives. 
 that all the Princes and States of Germany are oblig'd 
 to do him Homage, and fwear Fidelity to him. 3. That he, or 
 his Generals, have a Right to command the Forces of all the 
 Princes of the Empire, when united together. 4. That he re- 
 ceives a kind of Tribute from all the Princes and States of the 
 Empire, called the Roman Months. 5. That he can enfranchife 
 Cities, inftitute Univerfities, and the like ; and is the Fountain of 
 Honour in his Dominions. But his Imperial Majelly has not the 
 Power of making War or Peace, or of levying Taxes, without 
 the Confent of the Electors, and other Princes of the Empire ; 
 neither can he make Laws, or fufpend them, without Confent of 
 the Diet, or Affembly of the States. However, the Hereditary 
 Dominions of this Monarch are fo much inlarg'd, and he has fuch 
 a Number of profitable Ports, and Honours, at his Difpofal, that 
 the Princes of the Empire feldom oppofe any thing which his Im- 
 perial Majefty propofes. The chief Courts,for hearing and determin- 
 ing the great Caufes of the Empire, are, 1 . The Im- 
 perial Chamber. 2. The Julie Council, fo called Courts. 
 becaufe it follows the Emperor's Court, Aula. They 
 have both an univerfal Jurifdidtion, and without Appeal, over all 
 
 S 4 , the
 
 264. ' Prefent State of GERMANY. Part II. 
 
 the Subjeb of the Empire ; but are preventive of each other, it 
 
 being not allowed to remove any Caufe from the one 
 
 Government to the other. Each of the Thirteen Cantons of the 
 
 of the Sivitzers forms a Republic apart ; but all are 
 
 Svvitzers. leagued together, and conftitute what is called the 
 
 Commonwealth of the SiviJ/es, or the Helvetic Body, 
 
 from their ancient Name, Hehetii. The Government, in fame 
 
 of the Cantons, is Ariftocratical, and, in others, Democratical : 
 
 The Seven Ariftocratical Cantons are thofe of Zurich, Bern, Lu- 
 
 cern, Bajtl, Frihurg, Soleure, and Schafbaufen ; the other Six are 
 
 Democratical. 
 
 Trade.] If the Germans would apply themfelves to their 
 Manufactures, the Commodities exported out of Germany would 
 much furpafs the Imports, and thereby much Riches would flow 
 in upon them ; efpecially fince a confiderable Quantity of Silver 
 is digg'd out of their Mines. Germany takes from England Broad- 
 cloth, Druggets, Long-ells, Serges, Stuffs, Tobacco, Sugar, Gin- 
 ger, Tin, Lead, Eaft-India Goods, and many other Commo- 
 dities. Our Imports are prodigious Quantities of Linnen, Linnen 
 Yarn, Kidrfkins, Tin Plates, and a great many other Commo- 
 dities, The Balance is very near as much againft us, in this Trade, 
 as in that of France. England exports to Flanders a 
 Flanders. few Flannels, a very ,few Stuffs, Sugar, Tobacco, 
 Tin, and Lead. Our Imports are Fine Lace, Cam- 
 bricks, and Cambrick Lawns, Whited Linnens, Threads, Tapes, 
 Incles, and divers other Commodities, to a very great Value. The 
 Balance is very much againft us, being, 'tis faid, near 250,000 /. 
 As to the Foreign Trade of Hungary, it is not very 
 Hungary. confiderable ; the Exportation of their Wines and 
 Cattle feem to be the belt Branches of it. That 
 their Trade is not more extenfive, may be afcrib'd to their being 
 an Inland Country at a Diftance from the Sea ; but what is the 
 greateft Difcouragement to their Trade, is, that Hungary is look'd 
 upon only as a Province ; and 'tis faid, the Imperial Miniftry, far 
 from confulting the Good of the Country, only wreck and im- 
 poverilh the People, to increafe their Mailer's Revenue, and fill 
 their own Pockets ; while they flop the Mouths of the moft po- 
 pular Hungarian Lords with Penfions and Places. The 
 Switzer- Siuitzers export fcarce any Merchandize to foreign 
 land. Countries, except Horfes, Black Cattle, Butter, and 
 
 Cheefe : The French take off great Numbers of their; 
 Horfes, in Time of War, for remounting their Cavalry. Zurich 
 is confiderable for a Manufacture of Crape, which they export in 
 great Quantities. As to the Importations of the Snvitzers, having 
 pejther Wine nor Corn fufficient, of their own Growth, to fupply 
 
 their
 
 Chap. VIII. Prefint State of GERMANT. 265 
 
 their NecefEties, they are fupply'd chiefly from Sivabia, and the 
 Milanefe. Their Importations much exceeding the Exports, the 
 Balance of Trade has been againft them ; but their Governors, 
 to prevent the Confumption of foreign Goods as much as pofGble, 
 have endeavour'd to retrench all Superfluities, efpecially in Cloath- 
 ing and Furniture. 
 
 Revenues and Forces. ] As to the Forces which the feveral 
 Princes and Dominions of the Empire are, by their Revenues, or 
 Taxes, able to maintain, they are computed to amount to upwards 
 of 400,000 Men, whereof near 260,000 are ufually kept in Pay 
 in Time of Peace. As neither the Product, or 
 Trade, of Switzerland, are confiderable, the public 0/"Switzer- 
 Revenues are not large : But, as they are very frtfgal, land, 
 they lay up fomething every Year; which, in a 
 long Trad of Time, furnifhes them with a cctafiderable Treafure. 
 Standing Forces have ever been thought inconfiftent with the 
 Welfare of thefe Republics, fmce their firft Inftitution ; but there 
 is no-where, in Europe, a better regulated Militia : With thefe 
 they have, from time to time, maintain'd their Liberties againft 
 all theAttempts of the Houfe of Juftria, and France ; and, during 
 the longWars they had with thofe Powers, were efteemed excellent 
 Soldiers, tho' they never kept the Field the Year .round ; but, when 
 theCampaign was ended, us'd to return to their refpettiveDwellings. 
 The Number of Forces thefe Republics can raife, upon Occafion, 
 may, by taking the Medium of two Calculations, amount to near 
 200,000 Men, regimented Troops. The Addition 
 of Silejia to the King of PruJ/ia's Dominions, is a O/Truflia. 
 very confiderable Acquifition ; and this Prince may 
 now maintain upwards of 50,000 Men ; for it has been calculated, 
 that, before this Conqueit, he could maintain 40,000 Men and 
 npwards. 
 
 Character. ] The Germans are generally allowed to be en- 
 dow'd with fome very commendable Virtues, particularly, Honefty, 
 Fairnefs in their Dealings, and Hofpitality, which the ancient as 
 well as the modern Germans are allow'd to have : Julius Carfar 
 informs us, that, in his Days, their Houfes were open to all Tra- 
 vellers ; and look'd upon it as a Piece of Injuftice to affront a 
 Stranger. They are allow'd to be excellent Mechanics and Chy- 
 mifts ; nor do their Scholars come behind the Mechanics in their 
 unwearied Application to their Studies. They are, indeed, by the 
 French, charged with being dull ; but if Nature has been bounti- 
 ful to the French, in giving them a happy Conception, the Want 
 pf this in the Germans is made up to them in a good Judgment. 
 
 As
 
 %66 Prefent State of GERMANT. Part II. 
 
 As to the Honefty and Integrity of the Switzers, for 
 Switzers. which they have been fo generally applauded, late 
 
 Writers allure us, they do not altogether defervc 
 fuch a Character at prefent j but, however, are yet brave in Arms, 
 
 and faithful to their Engagements, as Mercenaries, 
 Hungarians, or Allies. The Hungarians are a brave, warlike 
 
 People, wife, and politic ; and zealous Aflerters of 
 the Chriftian Faith. 
 
 Religion. ] The Laws of the Empire give free Toleration 
 to the public Exercife of the Popifh, Cah'inijl, and Lutheran 
 Profeffions. It is generally allow'd, that the Chriftian Religion 
 was firft introduced in Germany in the Second Century ; and then 
 only in thofe Parts of it which were fubjecl to the Romans. Under 
 the Reign of Charles V. the Face of Affairs in Germany was re* 
 markably changed : For the Pope had given Leave to fell Indul- 
 gences here in fo fcandalous a Manner, that the wifer Sort began 
 
 to be afham'd of it. Whereupon Martin Luther t 
 15 17. Doctor of Divinity, and ProfefTor in the Univerfity 
 
 of Wittenburg, held public Difputations againft fuch 
 Practices ; who being oppos'd by increafing Numbers, all the 
 neighbouring Countries were alarm'd at it. Luther, examining 
 the Pope's Authority, and having laid open feme Errors and 
 Abufes which were crept in among them, and being fupported 
 by the Elector of Saxony, and other Princes of the Empire, gain'd 
 over many other Provinces, and moll of the Imperial Cities ; and 
 thefe drew up a Proteftation, containing the Points wherein they 
 differ'd from the Church of Rome, and prefented it to the Imperial 
 Chamber ; whereupon they were called Protejlants. The Empe- 
 ror Charles V. endeavour'd to reduce the Proteftants by Force ; 
 but, after a long War, with various Succefs, he was content 
 to grant them a Toleration, in the Year 1552. About the 
 Year 1519, Zuinglius, a Canon of the Church of Zurich, in 
 Switzerland, began alfo to oppofe the Church of Rome, declaring 
 againft the Mafs, Images, the Invocation of Saints, &V. and 
 made fuch Progrefs, that the Mafs was abolifhed in the Year 
 1526, by the Senate at Zurich, as it was, about two Years after, 
 at Bern. But the Difference between thefe two Reformers, in 
 relation to the Lord's Supper, was a great Hindrance to the Pro- 
 grefs of the Reformation. Luther and Zuinglius met, to try if 
 they could reconcile their Dodlrines ; but to no Purpofe : The 
 Breach grew wider between them, and their refpedlive Difciples 
 afterwards became mortal Enemies to one another. The famous 
 Calvin fucceeded Zuinglius at Zurich ; adding feveral new Opini- 
 ons to the Doflrines preach'd by his PredecefTor, fuch as Predefti- 
 nation, Free-will, and Final Perfeverance, which made the two
 
 Chap. VIII. Prefent State of GERMANT. 267 
 
 Sects irreconcilable : And it was obferv'd, that Calvin's Doctrines 
 fprcad farther and fatter than thofe of Luther ; efpecially in France, 
 Scotland, the Net her lands, and fome Parts of Germany : While 
 the Kingdoms of Denmark, Sweden, and the other Parts of Ger- 
 many, adhered to Luther's Doctrine. The Doctrine 
 of Calvin now bears a great Sway in Prujjia, and Religion in 
 fome other Territories belonging to the Elector of Pruffia. 
 Brandenburg. However, the greateft Part of the 
 Empire {till adhere to the Popifh Religion. The In Hun- 
 prevailing Religion in Hungary is that of the Church gary. 
 of Rome ; next to it js the Doctrine of Luther and 
 Calvin ; and befides thefe are moil Sorts and Sects of Chriitians, 
 as alfo many Jews and Mahometans. Hungary receiv'd the bleffed 
 Gofpel about the Eleventh Century. 
 
 Customs.] Hunting the wild Boar, or Deer, is the Sport 
 molt generally follow'd in Germany by the Quality ; but there is 
 no very hard Riding in the Cafe ; for the Beait, being found fome 
 time before, is furrounded by a large Company, who, with their 
 Guns, Lances, and Dogs, difpatch the Creature as foon as they 
 can, without fufFering him to run for his Life : Sometimes, in- 
 deed, a wild Boar will break through the Crowd, and 'tis well if 
 he do not wound either Man or Horfe with his Tufks. They alfo 
 divert themfelves, in Winter, in riding through the Streets, on 
 the Snow, in Sledges, which are drawn by Horfes, richly ac- 
 coutred, and adorn'd with Bells and Feathers. There is no Na- 
 tion more in Love with Travelling than the Germans ; but this 
 Paffion frequently ruins their Eftates, and impoverifhes their 
 Country ; for a German Nobleman will not be feen in a foreign 
 Court, without an Equipage fuitable to his Quality, and often be- 
 yond it. In their Houfes Fire is feldom feen, except in the 
 Kitchen ; but their Rooms are heated by a Stove, or Oven, to any 
 Degree they defire. In the Winter, they lay one Feather-bed over, 
 and another under them. As to their Food, it is the fame as 
 with us ; but they have one Dim, which I fuppofe not very com- 
 mon with us, and that is Snails ; there being fcarce a Nobleman's 
 Garden but has a Snail-houfe in it. Their Wine and Beer they 
 have upon very reafonable Terms ; for they have not only Rhe- 
 nijh, and other Wines of their own Growth, but Hungary, France, 
 and Italy, lie contiguous to them, where the belt Wines are pro- 
 duced. 
 
 Curiosities. ] The chief of the Curiofities are, 1. A Spring, 
 near Paderbom, in Me/tphalia, which has Three Streams, different 
 from one another in Colour, Tafte, and Quality. 2. A Lake in 
 Qarniola, obfervable for its many fubtcrraneous Caverns and Paf- 
 
 fages.
 
 26$ 
 
 Prefent State of the United Provinces. Part II. 
 
 fages. 3, A Cave near Blackenburg, in Lower Saxony, of which none 
 have yet, after many Attempts, found the End. 4. Thofe Rocks near 
 Blackenburg, which naturally reprefent two Monks, in their proper Ha- 
 bits, and as exattly as if defign'd for fuch ; alfo, near this Place, are 
 dug up feveral Stones, naturally reprefenting divers Animals, and fome- 
 times the Refemblance of a Man. Add to thefe, thofe Stones found about 
 Vienna, having the lively Impreffions of Trees, and Leaves of Trees, upon 
 them. There are, in feveral Parts of Hungary, Waters that corrode to 
 fuch a Degree, that they will confume a Horfe-lhoe in twenty-four 
 Hours. 
 
 CHAP. IX. 
 
 The prefent State of the United Provinces. 
 
 Boundaries.] TTHE UNITED PROVINCES, or HOLLAND, 
 1 ( formerly Batavia, or Part of Belgium) are 
 bounded by the German Ocean on the Weft and North, by the Circle of 
 Wefiphalia on the Eaft, and by Flanders on the South. 
 
 Situation.] This Country is fituated between 51 35' and 53* 
 40' North Latitude, and between 3 20 and 6 30 Eaft Longitude. 
 
 Divifion, &c. 
 
 Square Miles, 
 fcrV, 
 
 HOLLAND 
 1 . Holland proper 
 It is generally 
 agreed, that all the 
 South Part of this! 
 Province, as far as 
 Leyden, together 
 with Part of Guel- 
 derland, was the 
 Seat of the ancient 
 and famous Nation 
 of the Bat avians, 
 fo often menfion'd 
 by Tacitus, and 
 other ancient Wri- 
 ters. 
 
 ChiefTowns.; Diftance and Bearing. 
 
 7546 
 
 1800 
 Length 84 
 Breadth 52 
 
 Amjlerdam ftands 
 upon vaft Piles 
 of Timber, drove 
 into the Earth at 
 a great Expence, 
 the Place where 
 this City ftands 
 being a perfeft 
 Bog. 
 
 f Amjlerdam 
 
 < Amjleloda- 
 
 (_ mum 
 
 Rotterdam 
 
 Hague 
 
 Leyden 
 
 Del/ 
 
 Harlem 
 
 Dort 
 
 Hoorn 
 
 Enckbuyfen 
 
 Medenblick 
 
 Alemaer 
 
 Sardam 
 
 f 48oNWofJW 
 < 240 N of Paris 
 I MoSW of Copeab. 
 30 S 
 
 ofAmJterd, 
 
 Divifion,
 
 Chap. IX. Prefent State of the United Provinces. 269 
 
 DiviHon, &c 
 
 2. Zealand, the Seat of 
 the old Toxandri 
 
 3. Utrecht , Part of old 
 Bata<via andFriefland 
 
 4. Ovenffel, the Seat 
 of the old Salii and 
 Tubantes 
 
 5. Fricjland, Part of 
 ancient Friejland 
 
 6. Groeningen, Part of 
 old Friejland 
 
 7. Guelderland, the Seat 
 of the old Ufipetes, 
 with fome ofBatavia 
 and Menapia 
 
 Square j Chief Towns. Diltance and Bearing. 
 Miles. 
 
 303 
 
 450 
 
 1900 
 
 810 
 
 540 
 
 1630 
 A gra- 
 velly 
 Soil. 
 
 Middelburg 
 
 Fhtjhing 
 
 Itrecbt 
 
 Amersfort 
 
 Deventer 
 
 Campen 
 
 Leteivarden 
 
 Doccum 
 
 Groeningen 
 
 Dam 
 
 Nimeguen 
 
 Zutphen 
 
 Gro/1 
 
 70 S W of Am ft er dam 
 4 S of Middelburg 
 20 SE of Amfterdam 
 8 E of Utrecht 
 
 45 E of Amfterdam 
 20 N of D event er 
 
 60 NE of Amfterdam 
 1 5 NE of Lewzvarden 
 78 NE of Amfterdam 
 1 2 NE of Groeningen 
 
 46 SE of Amfterdam 
 32NE ) f ... 
 
 33NE J ofi W- 
 
 Climate. ] The Air of this Country would be all Fog and Miff, 
 if it was not purify'd by the Sharpnefs of their Frofts, which never 
 fail to vifit them, with every Eaft Wind, for about Four Months in 
 the Year, and are much feverer than with us, tho 1 there is fcarcc 
 any Difference in the Latitude : For the Wind comes to them over 
 a long Tradt of frozen Continent ; but is moiflen'd by the Vapours, 
 or foften'd by the Warmth of the Sea's Motion, before it reaches us. 
 This Country lies very low ; and tho' the Soil is naturally wet, yet 
 the induftrious Inhabitants do fo drain it by vaft Multitudes of artifi- 
 cial Canals, that the Ground is made very fit for excellent Pafluragc 
 and Tillage. They employ the greatell Part of their Land in graz- 
 ing of vail Herds of Kine. The natural Produces of Holland are, 
 chiefly, Butter and Cheefe. The longeft Day, in the Northmoft 
 Parts, is 16 \ Hours : The longeft Day, in the mofl Southern Part, 
 is about 167 Hours: Therefore Holland lies in the 9th and 10th 
 North Climates. 
 
 Government.] The United Provinces are a Confederacy of 
 many independent States ; for not only every Province is fovereign, 
 and independent of any other Power, but there are, in every Province, 
 feveral Republics, independent of each other, and which are not bound 
 by the Decrees, or Afts, of the States of the Province, till fuch 
 Decrees are ratify'd by each particular City, or Republic, which 
 fends Deputies, or Rcprefcntatives, to the Provincial Ailembly. But 
 all thefe, join'd together, make up one Republic, the molt confider- 
 able in the World ; which Republic is govern'd by the Aflembly of 
 the States General, confifting of Seven Voice 5 , each Province having 
 
 One.
 
 lyo Pre/em Stale of the United Provinces. Part 1L 
 
 One. As thefe States General can neither make War or Peace, 
 enter into new Alliances, or raife Money, without the Confent 
 of every Province ; fo neither can the States Provincial determine 
 thefe Things without the Confent of every Republic, or City, 
 which, by the Conftitution of the Province, hath a Voice in the 
 AfTembly : Which lhew6, that thefe Provinces and Cities are not 
 united by fo ftrong a Tye, as thofe who are govern 'd by one Sove- 
 reign, except fo far as Neceflity obliges them to keep together. 
 The Original of this mighty State is fhewn, under the Head of 
 Religion, in treating of the prefent State of Italy. This Com- 
 monwealth grew to that Grandeur in the Space of Fifty Years, as 
 to rival the molt formidable Powers in Europe ; and to difpute the 
 Dominion of the Sea even with Britain, which rais'd them from 
 Obfcurity. The Reader will, I prefume, pardon the Digreffion, 
 if I give him a fhort Account of the bloody Contefts between Eng- 
 land and Holland. In 1652 it was propos'd in the Parliament of 
 England, to endeavour to prevent the mighty Growth of the 
 Dutch ; and to demand Satisfaction of them in relation to divers 
 Incroachments on the Englijb. The Parliament, receiving no Sa- 
 tisfaction, by way of Reprifal, declar'd, that no Commodicies 
 fhould be brought into England, but in Englijb Ships ; which Pro- 
 hibition afFefted Holland more than any other Country, becaufe, at 
 that Time, the Dutch Ships were the common Carriers of Europe; 
 and, befides this, the Englijb Privateers began to fall, every-where, 
 upon the Dutch Merchant-fhips. The Hollanders, at lafl, refolv'd 
 to try, firft, whether the Bufmefs might be compounded by fair 
 Means ; and, if that did not fucceed, to begin the War in good 
 earnefl. The Dutch Admiral, Tromp, in the mean time, was or- 
 der'd out with 42 Men of War : The Englijb Parliament, never 
 imagining that the Dutch durft enter into a War with them, fitted 
 out only the ufual Squadron for the Guard of the Coaft. The 
 Dutch Fleet, coming into Dover Road, met with 
 1652. Admiral Blake, and a Squadron of 26 Men of War 
 
 The Firji there under his Command, who, perceiving the Dutch 
 Sea-Jight. did not flrike fail, as ufual, gave them Three Guns ; 
 whereupon Tromp hung out a Red Flag, and bore 
 down direftly to the Englijb Admiral, giving him a Broad-fide, 
 which being return'd, an obftinate Fight began, that lafted till 
 Night parted them. Blake did not think proper to renew the En- 
 gagement the Day following, but retir'd, in order to refit and 
 reinforce his Squadron. The Englijb had a great many Men killed 
 and wounded : However, the Battle ended with equal Lofs on both 
 Sides. The Hollanders fent an Embafiy to affure the Parliament, 
 that the Engagement between the Two Fleets was without their 
 Knowledge : Both Sides, however, made great Preparations for 
 War ; and the Englijb order'd Blake to fail Northward, and attack 
 
 their
 
 Chap. IX. Prefcnt State of the United Provinces. 271 
 
 their Fifhing-bufhes, guarded by Twelve Sail of Men of War, 
 moft of which he took : And Sir George AJcough, being fent, with 
 another Squadron of Thirty Sail of Men of War, to the South- 
 ward, meeting with a Fleet of Dutch Merchant-men, took or de- 
 firoy'd moft of them ; and, afterwards, Handing Weft ward, fell 
 in with a Fleet of Sixty of the Enemy's Men of War, and Thirty 
 Merchant-men, near Plymouth, with whom he maintain'd a Fight 
 till Night parted them ; but, being damag'd in his Rigging, he 
 could not come up with them the next Day. The Dutch, after 
 this Engagement, chofe generally to fail North about, rather than 
 run the Hazard of being taken by the Engli/b in the Channel ; 
 but, with all their Precaution, they loft Six Eaji-India Ships, 
 valued at Four Millions of Livres, Thirty-five more of their Por- 
 tugal Fleet, and many other Veflels. The Dutch grand Fleet, 
 appearing on the Coaft of Kent, were attackM by Blake, on the 
 28th of OcJob. in which Engagement the Rear- Admiral of the 
 States was boarded and taken, Two more of their Men of War 
 funk, and a Fourth blown up ; whereupon the Dutch thought fit 
 to retire, and were purfued to their own Coaft. In the mean time, 
 a Squadron of Englijh Men of War, in the Mediterranean, were 
 attack'd by Sixteen Dutch, and fore'd to retreat into the Port of 
 Leghorn, for Prote&ion, having loft one Ship. In this War the 
 Swedes declar'd for the Englijh, and the Danes for the United Pro- 
 vinces. Van Tromp put to Sea with Eighty Men of War, ( Twenty 
 whereof belong'd to the Danes) and, meeting with Blake, in the 
 Downs, with near Fifty Sail, a bloody Engagement enfu'd on the 
 29th of Kovemb. 1652. but the Englijh were compell'd to retire, 
 with the Lofs of Two Ships taken, Three funk, and One burnt ; 
 and, of the Dutch, only One of the Flag-fhips was blown up. 
 After which, Tromp, in Contempt of the Naval Power of Eng~ 
 land, rode with a Broom at his Top-maft Head, intimating, that 
 he could fweep the Sea of them. But this Triumph was fhort- 
 liv'd : For the 1 8th of February following, the Englijh grand 
 Fleet, commanded by Blake, Dean, and Monk, confifting of Eighty 
 Sail, lying extended crofs the Channel, over-againft Portland, to 
 wait for Tromp, who was convoying home 300 Sail of Merchant- 
 fhips, with Seventy-fix Men of War ; the Englijh Scouts difcover'd 
 the Dutch Fleet by Break of Day ; whereupon another bloody 
 Battle was fought, which lafted Three Days. Van Tromp, on 
 the Third, interpofing between the Englijh Fleet and his Mexchant- 
 fhips, maintain'd a Running Fight, till he recover'd the Coaft of 
 Holland; having loft, in the Engagement, Eleven Men of War, 
 and Thirty Merchant-fhips : The Lofs of the EngliJJ? is faid to be 
 only One Ship. Thefe Two mighty Fleets met again, on the 2d 
 of June 1653. between Dover and Calais, when the Englijh con- 
 filled of 100 Sail, commanded by Monk and Dean, who were 
 
 both
 
 272 Prefent State of the United Provinces. Part II. 
 
 both on board one Ship : The Dutch Fleet confifted of upwards 
 of 100 Sail, 'tis faid, and were commanded by Tromp, De Mitt, 
 De Ruyter, and the two E<vertfons. It was about Noon when the 
 Engagement began, and, at the firft Broad-fide, Admiral Dean was 
 Ihot in two by a Canon-ball, as he ftood by Monk ; who, without 
 being difcouraged, cover'd the Body with his Cloak, and then 
 maintain'd the Fight with great Bravery ; and, before Evening, 
 the Dutch bore away before the Wind. The next Morning, there 
 being but little Wind, the Englijh could not come up with the Hot- 
 landers before Noon ; when the Fight began afrefh, and the Dutch 
 were put into the utmoft Ccaifufion : Tromp fent his Boat aboard 
 fome Ships, and fir'd at others, to oblige them to come into the 
 Line, but all to no Purpofe ; he found himfelf oblig'd to retreat 
 to their own Flats, where there was no following them. In this 
 Engagement Eleven Dutch Ships were taken, Six funk, and Two 
 blown up; with very little Lofs, 'tis faid, on the Englijh Side. 
 The States, notwithstanding this Defeat, fitted out a Fleet of 
 125 Sail, within little more than a Month, commanded by the 
 gallant VanTromp ; who, meeting the Englijh Fleet upon the Coaft 
 of Holland, commanded by brave Monk, another famous Battle en- 
 fued on the 29th oijuly, wherein Monk order'd his Captains, nei- 
 ther to give or take Quarter, which made this Engagement more 
 bloody than any of the former. The celebrated Van Tromp was 
 lhot with a Mufket-bullet, as he ftood on the Quarter-deck, with 
 his Sword drawn, encouraging his Men ; and Twenty-feven Dutch 
 Men of War were funk and burnt. De Witt, taking upon him 
 the Command after Tromp' % Death, and having maintain'd the 
 Fight till Evening, retir'd, with the Remains of the grand Fleet, 
 into their Harbours. The Englijh had Abundance of Men killed 
 and wounded in this obftinate Engagement, but loft only One Ship, 
 and Two or Three more difabled. The Dutch, upon this Defeat, 
 and having loft near 700 Sail of Merchant-fhips during the War, 
 fent Orders to their Plenipotentiaries, who were already treating 
 with Oliver Cromivell at London, to haften the Conclulion of the 
 Peace, which was very glorious and advantageous on the Ufurper's 
 Side. Holland had been a few Years at Peace, till 1665, when a 
 bloody War broke out again between them and the Englijh: 
 France blew up the Coals, being defirous to fee thefe two mighty 
 States weaken one another's Power. The grand Fleet of England, 
 being affembled to the Number of 108 Men of War, and 14 
 Fire-lhips, was divided into Three Squadrons : The Red, com- 
 manded by the Duke of York in Perfon, aflifted by the Admirals 
 Penn and Lanvjon ; the White, by Prince Rupert, affifted by Minns 
 and San/on ; and the Blue, by the Earl of Sandwich, under whom 
 were Cut tins and AJcough ; ftood over to the Coalts of Holland, to 
 prevent the joining of the Amfterdam Squadron with that cf Zea- 
 land.
 
 ChaalX. Prefent State of the United Provinces. 2j$ 
 
 land. But the Dutch not appearing, the Englijb Fleet, after taking 
 many rich Merchant-fhips, return'd to their own Coaft ; which 
 gave the Dutch an Opportunity of uniting their Squadrons, amount- 
 ing, in the Whole, to 103 Men of War, and Eleven Fire-fhipsj 
 commanded by Admiral Oprdam, and, under him, by Cortenaer, 
 old Evert/on, and Cornelius Van Tromp, Son of the famous Van 
 Tromp. On the 1 ft of June the Dutch Fleet flood over to the 
 Coaft of England, and on the 2d thefe two great Naval Powers 
 fac'd each other; and, on the 3d of June 1665. about Four 
 o'Clock in the Morning, the Battle began between the Squadron 
 commanded by the Duke of York, and that commanded by Admi- 
 ral Opdam ; wherein the Duke plied Opdam fo warmly, and fo 
 clofe, that, according to the Englijb Account, he beat his own 
 Fire upon him, which taking the Powder-room, that great Ship, 
 with all the Men, was blown up into the Air. But the Dutch 
 fay, this Accident is to be imputed to the Treachery of an Englijb 
 Gunner on board the Dutch Admiral : However, it is very cer- 
 tain, that, after an obflinate Difpute with the Englijb Admiral, 
 Opdam was blown up with his dwn Powder ; foon after which, Vic- 
 tory declar'd on the Side of the Englijb : For, at the fame time, 
 Three Dutch Ships, which feconded their Admiral, being fallen 
 foul of one another, and entangled with their Mafts and Riggingj 
 were all burnt at once by an Englijb Fire-fhip. After the Death 
 of Opdam, Vice- Admiral Cortenaer hoifted the Admiral's Flag, 
 being clofely engaged with Prince Rupert ; but this Gentleman be- 
 ing kill'd, and his Son foon after, the Lieutenant, defpairing of 
 Succefs, fled with all the Sail he could make, with the Admiral's 
 Flag at the Top-maft Head, which, the Dutch fay, was the Oc- 
 cafiop of their Defeat, the reft of the Fleet fleering after him. 
 Vice- Admiral E<vertfon alfo made the bell of his Way, leaving his 
 Squadron to fhifc as they could ; and only young 'Tromp, with 
 Twelve Men of War, retir'd with any Order to the Texel. Of 
 the Dutch, Eighteen capital Men of War were taken, and Fourteen 
 funk or burnt, and 8000 of their Men kill'd or taken Prifon- 
 crs. The Englijb confefs they loft One Ship, and about 1000 
 Men, befides feveral Perfons of Diftinftion. On the 5 th of July 
 following, the grand Fleet of England put to Sea again, and vi- 
 fited the Coaft of Holland, but return'd without meeting the Ene- 
 my ; and a Detachment from the Fleet, about the fame .time, 
 attack'd a Fleet of India-men, and other Merchant-fhips, under 
 the Convoy of fome Dutch Men of War, in the Port of Berghen 
 in Norway ; but had not the Succefs they propos'd, the Dutch 
 being protected by the Danijb Governor. * However, in their Way 
 home, they had the good Fortune to take Eight Dutch Men of 
 War, Two India-men valued at a Million Sterling, and Twenty 
 other Merchant-fhips. And, a few Days after, the Englijb Fleet 
 
 T fell
 
 274 PrefaU State of the. United Provinces. Part II. 
 
 fell in with Eighteen Sail more. of Hollanders, of whom they took 
 the greateft Part, and, amongft them, Four Men of War. The 
 French, as well as the Danes, having made themfelves Parties in 
 the War, fent confiderable Reinforcements to the Hollanders 
 againft England, which was, at .this Time, in a manner depopu- 
 lated by the moil terrible Plague that has been known in this Part 
 of the World : However, the EngUJb refclv'd to continue theWar. 
 The grand Fleet of England being commanded, in the Year 1666. 
 by Prince Rupert and General Monk, who, in order to prevent a . 
 Conjunction of the Dutch and French Fleets, had divided their 
 Forces, Prir.ce Rupert failing towards the Coaft of France, while 
 Monk attended the Motions of the Dutch j on the ill of June 
 1666. the Dutch Fleet, amounting to Ninety Sail and upwards, , 
 were difcover'd lying at Anchor near Newport. Monk, who had 
 then Fifty Sail under his Command, bore down upon them, and 
 there follow'd a moll defperate Battle, which lafled Three Days ; 
 and had not Prince Rupert, with his Squadron, then come to 
 Monk's Affiftance, great Part of the Englijh Fleet had been loft ; 
 for the old General feem'd determin'd not to retire, as long as his 
 Ship would fwim, notwithftanding the Inequality of Numbers. 
 Upon the Prince's joining this brave Man, the Fight was renew'd 
 the Fourth Day, when the Dutch thought fit to retire to their 
 Coaits ; and the Englifo return'd to. their Harbours, being in no 
 Condition to purfue the Enemy. Both Sides, however, made Re- 
 joicings for the Victory, tho' both had fufficient Caufe to mourn ; 
 for the Dutch loft Fifteen Men of War, and the Englijh Ten, and 
 moft of the Ships in both Fleets were miferably (hatter'd. Before^ 
 the End of "July, thefe Two mighty Fleets met again to contcft 
 the Empire of the Ocean, being about 100 Sail of a Side; when 
 the Englijh obtain'd an uncontefted Victory, deftroying Twenty 
 Dutch Men of War, and, purfuing them to their Coaft, burnt 150 
 Merchant-fhips in their Harbours, with the Town of Bandarjs in 
 the Ifle of Schelling. The Dutch t however, put to Sea again the 
 latter End of -dugnjl, and endeavour'd to join the French Squadron ; 
 but Prince Rupert, who commanded the Englijb, difcovering them , 
 in Bologn Road, they were fbre'd to hawl their Ships clofe to the 
 Shore, to avoid another Enggagement : However, if a Storm had 
 not happen'd, which oblig'd the Prince to ftand off to Sea, they 
 had moft of them been burnt or funk ; but, by this lucky Acci- 
 dent, they efcap'd to their own Coafts. The French, making fome 
 Attempt to join them, had a Ship of 1000 Tons taken by the 
 Engli/6 ; whereupon the French Admirals alfo thought fit to retire 
 to their Harbours. But, to the greateft Confolation of the Dutch, 
 and their Allies, on the 2d of September, the greateft Part of the 
 City of London was burnt to the Ground : Under which Calamity, 
 with the Plague that preceded, and the formidable Alliance of the. 
 
 Dutch,
 
 Chap. IX. Prefent State of the United Provinces. 275 
 
 Dutch, French, and Danes, againft Britain, it is amazing how th$ 
 Nation was able, fo bravely and fuccefsfully, to defend itfelf. 
 The Dutch, finding little to be got by the War but Blows, and 
 judging, that the Engli/h, under fuch a Load of Calamities, would 
 not be backward to liften to a Peace, fent over to propofe an Ac- 
 commodation ; the Preliminaries whereof being fettled at Brcda % 
 the EngUJh look'd upon the War to be at an End, and neglected 
 to equip out their grand Fleet, as they had done the preceding 
 Year ; by which Negleft, or Piece of good Husbandry, the Dutch\ 
 t embracing the Opportunity, fent Seventy Men of War into the; 
 Mouth of the Thames, and made themfelves Maflers of the 
 Fort of Sheemefs. They afterwards detached a Squadron, which, 
 fail'd up the Medinay as high as Chatham, and burst Three or 
 Four Firft and Second-rate Men of War, which lay there un- 
 r 'gg'd, and brought off the Hull of the Royal Charles ; all which 
 they perform'd with the Lofs only of Two or Three of their Men 
 of War, which were run on Ground, and fet Fire to by them- 
 felves ; after which they fell down the River. This bold Attempt: 
 put the City of London in the utmoft Confternation, expediting a 
 Vifit of the like Nature ; whereupon Fourteen or Fifteen Ships 
 were funk in the River^ and feveral Batteries were rais'd upon the 
 Banks, to prevent their failing up : But the Dutch x thinking they 
 had ventur'd far enough, contented themfelves with the Succeis 
 they had met with, and foon after flood out to Sea again, failing 
 to Port/mouth, Plymouth, and other Ports, in Hopes of deftroying 
 more of the Royal Navy ; but, thefe Places having been taken 
 more care of than Chatham, they were prevented doing further 
 Mifchief: Whereupon they return 'd to the Thames Mouth, where 
 Sir Ed-ward Spragg, with a Squadron of EngUJh Men of War t 
 difputing their Paflage, they put to Sea a Second time, and in- 
 filled the EngUJh Coaft, till they could no longer diffemble their. 
 Knowledge of the Peace being concluded at Breda, and then rc- 
 turn'd to their own Coaft. By this Treaty, among other Things 
 the Dutch acknowledg'd the Right of the Flag to belong to the. 
 EngUJh. In the Year 1672. a prodigious Storm fell upon Hclt 
 which at firft threaten'd its Ruin ; France attacking it by Lapd, 
 and England by Sea. The Dutch, 'tis faid, drew upon themfelyea 
 the Indignation of thefe Two mighty King?, by filming fo felf- 
 fufficient, as to defpife and laugh at the reft of the Powers ci 
 ropt. It was furprifing to fee how the French, in a few , 
 time, took the Provinces of Guelderland, OverxJJel, and Ut> 
 In the mean time, De Kuyter, the Du'ch Admiral, havin 
 fembled a Fleet of Men of War, confiifing of 100 Sail auq up- 
 wards, and having the Advantage of 
 united Fleets of Engl 
 pf Suffolk -, but 'was fo 'warmly re 
 
 T 2 Slaughter
 
 zy6 Prefent State of the United Provinces. Part II. 
 
 Slaughter on both Sides, he was obliged to retire, being purfu'd 
 by the Duke of York to the Coaft of Holland. This Train of 
 Misfortunes putting the Dutch in the utmoft Confufion, they ap- 
 ply 'd to King Charles for a Peace, who, becoming very jealous 
 of France, fent a folemn Embafly to his Ally the French King, 
 to fee how he flood inclin'd, and to affure the States, by the way, 
 that he never intended their Ruin, but to bring them to better 
 Terms. The War, however, was dill carried on by Sea and 
 Land, and Three Battles more were fought between the Englijh 
 and Dutch at Sea, the following Year, wherein the Dutch behav'd 
 themfelves bravely ; but the Englijh, it feems, had the Advantage 
 in them all ; yet the Victories were not fo complete, as the French 
 Squadron did not do their Duty. In the Firft of thefe Three En- 
 gagements, the Earl of Sandwich, with iooo Men, was blown up 
 in the Royal James ; and, in the laft, Admiral Spragg. The 
 Dutch alfo loft Admiral Van Ghent, and fome other Officers of 
 Note. The latter End of the Year 1673. a fep^ate Peace was, 
 by the Mediation of the King of Spain, concluded between Hol- 
 land and England ; which contributed to the Prefervation of the 
 United Provinces ; for the French King, finding he fhould not be 
 able to maintain the Conquefts he had. made, after having extorted 
 large Sums from all the Places he had pofTeffed himfelf of, retreated 
 with his Army out of the Dutch Territories j whereupon the 
 Three Provinces, which had been for fome time difmember'd frcm 
 the reft, were, upon their earneft Application, united to the Body, 
 and their Deputies admitted again into the AfTembly of the States 
 General. The War ftill continued between the Dutch, the Ger- 
 mans, Danes, and Spaniards, on one Side ; and France and Sweden 
 on the other. The Dutch fitted out a ftrong Squadron, under 
 De Ruyter, to attack Martinico, and other French Settlements in 
 the Weft Indies ; while Van Tromp was order'd to harrafs the Coafls 
 of France : But they were unfuccefsful in both thefe Attempts, 
 returning home without attempting any thing. At laft, their 
 Fear, that, through long War, their Liberties might be endan- 
 gered, influene'd them to make a feparate Peace with France. 
 
 Trade.] There is not a Nation under the Sun,where the People 
 apply themfelves with moreDiligence to all manner of mechanic Arts, 
 than the Inhabitants of this Country. The Manufactures formerly 
 peculiar to other Countries are here almoft brought to Perfection j 
 not fo much by the Ingenuity of the Dutch, but, in Imitation of 
 ancient Rome, this once diflrefs'd People invited all others, in the 
 like fhatter'd Condition, to join them, and fet up the fame Em- 
 ployment as they carried on in their refpective Countries. In 
 Harlem they make the fineft Linnen, and give it fo pure a White, 
 that they brinj it from all the reft of the Provinces, and even 
 
 from
 
 Chap. IX. Prefent State of the United Provinces, %fj 
 
 rom Germany, and other foreign Countries, to bleach it here : At 
 this Place are alfo manufactured Fine Silks, Gauzes, Coarfe 
 Flower'd Velvets, Gold and Silver Brocades, and other rich Stuffs. 
 Their Woolen Manufactures flourifh moil at Leyden, where they 
 make Broad and Narrow Cloths, Serges and Camblets ; but ftill 
 inferior to thofe of Britain, or they would not purchafe our 
 Woolen Manufactures to export to other Nations. Their Wool 
 they have from Spain, Germany, and Turkey * Nor are the Silk 
 Manufactures of Holland fo good as thofe of France or Italy ; but 
 being cheaper, they go off better. As to the Navigation of this 
 mighty State, it is frequently faid, that the Number of large 
 Ships, and Veffels of Burden, is nearly equal to that of England; 
 for, to the Baltic, it is computed, the Dutch employ a Thoufand 
 more Ships than the Englijh ; but this is balanc'd by the Number 
 of Ships we fend to our Plantations in America, where the Hol- 
 landers have little or no Trade j but, however, in every other 
 Country almoft, whither the Englijh and Dutch trade, more of 
 our Ships are found than of the United Provinces : And, upon a 
 late Computation, the Quantity of Shipping belonging to the 
 Englijh, amounts to 930,000 Tons ; and to the Dutch, 900,000 
 Tons. The Trade of the United Provinces with the Britijh Ifles 
 is very great : From England, particularly, they import Broad- 
 cloth, Druggets, Long-ells, Stuffs of many Sorts, Leather, Corn, 
 Coals, and fomething of almoft every thing that this Kingdom 
 produces ; befides all Sorts of India and Turkey re-exported Goods, 
 Sugars, Tobacco, Rice, Ginger, Pitch and Tar, and fundry other 
 Commodities of the Produce of our American Plantations. Eng- 
 land takes from Holland great Quantities of Fine Hollands, Lin- 
 nen, Threads, Tapes, Incles, Whale-fins, Brafs Battery, Madder, 
 Argol, Lint-feed, &c. The Trade is faid to be confiderably to 
 the Advantage of the Subjefts of England. The Dutch manage a 
 prodigious Trade in moft of the known Parts of the World ; and 
 fo induftrious are they, and fo numerous, that Holland may very 
 properly be compar'd to a large Bee-hive ; the Multitude of Ships, 
 daily going out and in, livelily reprefent the Swarm of Bees, and 
 the Hive is juftly reckon'd the Warehoufe of the richeft and beft 
 Commodities of all Nations. 
 
 Revenues. ] The Subjects of the United Provinces are liable 
 to a great Variety of Charges and Impofnions. The Council of 
 State draw up, every Winter, an Kllimate of the Expences of the 
 enfuing Year, which ufually amount to near 3,600,000 Sterling 
 in Time of Peace. This Sum is rais'd by an almoft general Ex- 
 cife, and Cuftoms, the chief of which are, 1. A Duty upon Salt ; 
 2. upon Beer ; 3. upon Victuallers ; 4. upon Candles ; 5. upon 
 Turf for Firing, and Coals from England; 6. upon Englifb Cloth, 
 
 T 3 the
 
 278 Prefent State of the .United Provinces. Part II. 
 
 the Third Part of the Value ; 7. upon Wheat, Rye and Barley ; 
 8. upon all Cattle, Sheep and Hogs that are kill'd, a Seventh Part 
 of the Price ; tj. for every horned Bead, above three Years old, 
 Three-pence per Month ; 10. upon all Farms and Lands, One 
 Pound in Sixteen; 11. upon Soap, Eleven Shillings the Barrel; 
 1 2. upon Houfes, the Eighth-part of the Rent. In Ihort, there is 
 not that Thing fcarce in the whole Country but fome Duty or 
 other is laid upon it. Their extraordinary Taxes, in Time of 
 War, are, 1. Poll-money, which is ufually Twenty-pence per 
 Head : 2. Chimney-money, Twenty -pence every Hearth : Or, 
 3. Land-tax, beingTen Shillings for every Hundred Pounds per Ann. 
 The conftant Charges, or Taxes, laid upon them, to defend their 
 Country againft the Seas and Floods, amount to Sixty Pounds 
 Sterling for every Rod of Sea-dyke ; and, againft the Rivers alfo, 
 the Charge of maintaining the Banks is very great: But the 
 greateft Charge of all is the Draining the Country, when it is 
 overflowed, and their Dykes broken through, as they frequently 
 are. 
 
 Forces. ] The Land Forces confift of 25,000 Men> compos'd 
 of Sivitzers, Scots, and other Foreigners, as well as national 
 Troops. To the Standing Forces we may add the Troops they 
 are obliged to keep in the Barrier Towns of the Auflrian Nether- 
 lands. By Treaty, his Imperial Majelty and the States General 
 maintain in the faid Netherlands a Body of 25,000 or 30,000 
 Men, whereof his Imperial Majefty to have Three fifths, and the 
 DutchT wo. The Forces thus maintain'd in the BarrierTowns are 
 paid by the Revenues of the Aujirian Netherlands. As to their 
 Naval Force, there are feldom lefs than Fifty Men of War in 
 Commiflion,either employ 'd in Convoys to protect their Merchants 
 and Fiftieries, or which lie ready equipp'd in their Harbours for 
 any Service the State may have Occafion to make ufe of them in ; 
 and there are feldom lefs than Fifty or Sixty Sail more unrigg'dl 
 I fhall not pretend to guefs what Forces the United 'Provinces are 
 able to maintain ; but, from the foregoing Piece of Hiitory, their 
 extenfive Commerce, Riches, and Number of People, we may, \ 
 prefume, conclude, that there are not many Kingdoms in Europe 
 able to equip out larger Fleets, or more numerous Armies, than 
 the States General, 
 
 Character.] The Boors, or Hufbnndmen, are induftrious, 
 but flow of Underftanding ; not to be dealt with by hafty Words, 
 but eafily manag'd by foft and fair Expreflions, and yielding to 
 plain Reafon, if they have Time to underftand it. The Seamen 
 are a plain, but much rougher People, furly and ill-natur'd ; they 
 icldom ufe more Words than are neceflary about their Bufinefs. 
 
 As
 
 Chap. IX. Prefent State of the United Provinces. -279 
 
 As to the Trading People in great Towns, they are reckon'd plain, 
 honelt Dealers, punctual in every refpect, pondering and ordering 
 a Thing very well before they begin it. The Gentry, or Nobi- 
 lity, are an honeft, good-humour'd Sort of Men, and ufually ac- 
 quit themfelves with Honour in the Service of their Country. 
 Their Frugality enables them to bear the heavy Taxes laid on 
 them ; and the Order in calling up their Expences is fo juft, that 
 no one undertakes any thing he is not prepared for, or lives to 
 the Height of his Income ; however, that is their Maxim. They 
 are, in general, charg'd with being much given to Drinking; but 
 the Climate perhaps, may plead fome Excufe for this Cultom. 
 
 Religion. ] The Calvinijis, who -are the eftablifh'd Churcn, 
 are govern'd by a Presbytery, among whom there is almoft a per- 
 fect Equality, except that the Seniors, or thofe made Choice of to 
 prefide amongft them, have fome Preference in their Aflemblies. 
 The Miniilers receive their Stipend^which are ufually about \i ) ol. 
 per Annum , from the Magiltrates of the City, or Place, where 
 their Cure lies. The Dutch Churches are feldom without Organs, 
 efpecially in their Cities and great Towns. No Country in Eu- 
 rope can boaft of more Religions than this State ; for here all Sects 
 and Parties, in the open ProfeHion of their refpedlivt. Tenets, are 
 tolerated for Trading fake ; and yet 'tis faid that no Part of 
 Chriilenacm is lefs religious. 
 
 Customs.] Their ufual Way of Travelling is in Trecht- 
 fchutes, or covei'd Boats, drawn by a Horfe, at the Rate of Three 
 Miles an Hour, for which the Fare does not exceed a Pennv a 
 Mile, and you have the Conveniency of carrying a Portmanteau 
 or Provifions, fo that you need not be at any Expence at a Public 
 Houfe by the Way. A Perfon is not in the leait expo^'d to the 
 Weather in thefe Veffels, and can fcarce feel any Motion ; and a 
 Paffenger may read, or divert himfelf, upon his Journey as he 
 thinks proper ; and there is fcarce a Town but one may go this 
 Way every Day, and, if it be a confiderable Place, ahnoft every 
 Hour, at the Ringing of a Bell ; but they will not (lay a Minute 
 afterwards for a Paffenger, tho' they fee him coming. The Na- 
 tives are very dextrous at Skating 5 and, when the Rivers and 
 Dykes are frozen up, both Men and Women fkate from Place to 
 Place, upon their Buhnefs : It is incredible how fwiftfome of them 
 move in their Skates ; no Running-horfe, 'tis faid, can keep Pace 
 with them. When the Snow is upon the Ground, and frozen 
 over, young Gentlemen and Ladies appear abroad in the moll 
 magnificent Sledges ; each Sledge is drawn by a Horfc, dcckM 
 with rich and glittering Harncfs ; in thde they run Races upon 
 th frozA Snow : Great Numbers- of thefe being feen in the Streets 
 
 T 4 together,
 
 280 Prefent State of the United Provinces. Part II. 
 
 together, efpecially at Amflerdam, make a very beautiful Shew. 
 There are little Machines of this Kind, in which they put their 
 Children, pufh'd along by their Fathers, as People of Fafhion are 
 by their Men or Maid Servants in Skates. Here are Mufic-houfes, 
 which pay a Tax to the States for a Licence to entertain as many 
 common Women as they pleafe, and the Girls pay each of them 
 another Tax every time they are admitted into thefe Venereal 
 Schools. The States give this Reafon for encouraging thefe vile 
 Houfes, That confidenng the Number of Sailors that refort to 
 their principal Cities, who, returning from long Voyages, would 
 be very rude with the modeft Part of the Fair Sex, of two 
 Evils they therefore chufe the leaft. To thefe vile Houfes the 
 People refort openly, without Fear or Shame ; and when a fuffi- 
 cient Company is got together, an Entertainment confuting of fe- 
 veral nice Difhes, and the beft of Wine, is ferv'd up ; and after 
 they have eat and drank plentifully in a public Room, the Dimes 
 are remov'd, and a Ball, or Entertainment of Mufic and Dancing, 
 fucceeds. Of thefe Houfes there are of all Degrees, fome for the 
 better Sort, and fome for the Vulgar, who refort to the one or the 
 other as they are able to bear the Expence. Neatnefs in their 
 Houfes is perhaps peculiar to thefe People : Sir William Temple re- 
 lates, that, being at the Houfe of one of the chief Burgomafters 
 of Amjlerdam, while he was Embaflador in Holland, and having 
 fome Talk about the extravagant Neatnefs of the Dutch Ladies, 
 he was told, that one of their Magiftrates going to pay a Vifit to 
 a Gentlewoman, a ftrong North Holland Lafs happening to open 
 the Door, as he was about to enter, the Wench, obferving his 
 Shoes were not very clean, took him by both Arms, threw him 
 on her Back, and, carrying him crofs two Rooms, fet him down at 
 the Bottom of the Stairs ; and, putting him on a Pair of Slippers, 
 without fpeaking a Word to him before, Now, fays (he, you may 
 go up to my Miftrefs, who is in her Chamber. The Dutch are 
 allowed all Sorts of Recreations on a Sunday, as on other Days ; 
 and to buy and fell by Retail. Before the Celebration of any 
 Marriage, there is a folemn Contract made before the Parties, in 
 the Prefence of their Friends, whereby their Choice is fo far deter - 
 min'd, that there is no receding from it ; which they look upon to 
 be the Marriage itfelf ; for many of them make very little Scruple, 
 'tis faid, of living together in the moft intimate Familiarity before 
 the Contract is folemnized at Church. 
 
 Curiosities.] The remarkable Stone Quarry near Maeft- 
 richt, which looks like a vaft fubterraneous Palace, it reaching 
 under a large Hill, fupported by fome Thoufands of fquare Pil- 
 lars, ( the greateft Part of them Twenty Feet high ) between 
 which are fpacious Walks, and many private Retirements. The 
 
 Firft
 
 Chap . X. Prefent State of DENMARK. 2 8 1 
 
 Firft Book that ever was printed, a Copy of Tullfs Offices, is to 
 be feen at Harlem. In the Burg in Ley den are to be feen Two 
 fubterranean Raman Lamps, with divers Roman and Egyptian 
 Urns of great Antiquity : Alfo Two Egyptian Mummies, being 
 the Bodies of Two Princes of great Antiquity; and a wooden Ef- 
 figy of the celebrated Egyptian God Qfiris, now almoft confumed 
 with Age ; and another of Brafs, with Three Egyptian Idols of 
 Stone, and feveral other Antiquities. 
 
 CHAP. X. 
 
 The Prefent State of the Dominions of 
 Denmark. 
 
 Boundaries.] T\ENMAR K ( formerly Cimbrica Cberfonefut, 
 a Part of ancient Scandinavia) is bounded 
 on the Eaft by the Baltic Sea, on the Weft and North by the Ger- 
 man Ocean, and on the South by the Duchy of Holftein in Ger- 
 many. Norway ( a Part of old Scandinavia, and once a diftinft 
 Kingdom ) is bounded by the Ocean towards the North and Weft, 
 by Sweden and Swedijh Lapland towards the Eaft, and by the Sea 
 call'd the Categate towards the South ; and is a long narrow 
 Country, inclos'd by the Ocean on one Side, and thofe high barren 
 Mountains called Dofrine Hills, cover'd with Snow, which divide 
 it from Sweden, on the other. 
 
 There are a great Number of Iflands on the Coaft of Norway ; 
 and others belonging to that Kingdom, at a Diftance from it ; 
 the moft confiderable of which is Iceland, the Northern Part of 
 which lies under the Arftic Circle. Its Mountains are always co- 
 ver'd with Snow. 
 
 Situation. ] Denmark extends from 547 Deg. to 57^ North 
 Latitude, and from 8 to 1 3 Eaft Longitude. Norway and Lapland 
 are fituated between 71 7 and 57^ Deg. North Latitude. The 
 Length 1035, and Breadth 170 Miles. Iceland is fituated between 
 63 7 and 66 North Latitude, and between 14 and 25 Degree* 
 Weft Longitude: Length 435, and Breadth 185 Miles. 
 
 Divifion
 
 82 
 
 Divifion and Sub- 
 divifion. 
 
 Prefent State of DENMARK Part II. 
 
 Square Miles. 
 
 i.DENMARK 
 
 1. Zealand, I. 
 
 2. Jutland 
 
 3. Sle/iuick 
 
 4. Funen, I. 
 
 5. Falfter and } 
 
 6. Laland 3 
 7. Fermeren, I. 
 
 8. ^Ww, I. 
 
 9. A/oa, I. 
 
 10. Bornbolm, I. 
 
 2. In Weftphalia is 
 Oldenburg 
 
 3. In Low Stf-yawy is 
 Stromar 
 
 4. Norway 
 
 1. Bergen 
 
 2. Babus 
 
 3- Agger buys 
 4. Drontbem 
 
 5. Wardhus 
 
 6. Iceland, I. 
 
 14418 
 
 9?5* 
 
 9600 
 
 2115 
 
 768 
 
 220 
 
 50 
 
 54 
 
 39 
 160 
 
 1260 
 
 1000 
 
 71400 
 
 Length 750 
 
 Breadth 170 
 
 28400 
 46000 
 
 Chief Towns. 
 
 "J Copenba- 
 Igen, olim 
 (Haunt a 
 
 Wiburg 
 
 Slepwick 
 
 Odenjee 
 
 Nikoping 
 
 Naxkanv 
 
 Borge 
 
 Sonderborge 
 
 Srege 
 
 Rottomby 
 
 Oldenburg 
 
 Gluckjlat 
 y Bergen 
 Babus 
 
 Drontbem 
 Wdrdbus 
 Skalholt 
 
 Diftance and Bearing 
 of each Town from 
 the Capital of the 
 Divifion. 
 
 270 SW ofStoctb. 
 NEof Amjier. 
 N of Vienna 
 W of Mofcoiv 
 
 iijNW^ 
 
 114SW 
 
 73 W 
 44 SW 
 53SW 
 73 SW 
 94 SW 
 30 S 
 
 75* 
 
 220 SW 
 
 of Copen- 
 hagen 
 
 152SW 
 
 345 NWj 
 
 215 SET 
 
 1 14SE of Bergen 
 
 273 N ) 
 
 1000N loiCopen- 
 
 1050NWJ hagen. 
 
 Climate. ] The North Part of Denmark \s laid to be very cold, 
 and not very wholfome, efpecially near Copenhagen, 
 Denmark. which is fuppofed to proceed from its low Situation, and 
 frequent Fogs. There is fcarce any Medium between 
 extreme Cold and Heat ; for the Spring and Autumn are of a very 
 fhort Duration, and the Productions of the Earth are accordingly 
 very fpeedy in their Growth. The Air, in the Southern Part, in 
 general, is allowed to be good, and the Country pieafant enough. 
 Denmark produces good Corn, and feveral Parts abound in Cattle, 
 Hogs, and Horfes. The longeft Day, in the Northmoft Part, is about 
 i# Hours, and, in the Southmoft about 17 : Therefore this Country 
 lies in the 10th, nth and 12th Northern Climates. The 
 Norway, Air of Norway and Lapland is fo extremely cold, 
 and efpecially towards the North, that it is but thinly inha- 
 
 Lapland. bited. The Face of the Country is very much incum- 
 bered with Mountains, and formidable Rocks, which 
 
 produce
 
 Chap. X. ' Prefint State of DENMARK. 2S3 
 
 produce fcarce any Food for Man or Beaft, and are almoft conti- 
 nually cover 'd with Snow. The longeftDay, in the moll North- 
 ern Parts, is about Three Months, and, in the moll Southern, 
 about 18 Hours ; therefore this Country lies in the 12th to the 
 27th North Climates, nearly. Iceland is almoft as 
 barren as Xor-way 5 Corn will fcarce grow in it, but it Iceland. 
 fcems to abound more in Cattle. The Natives com- 
 monly live to a great Age. The longeft Day, in the moil North- 
 ern P^rr, is 24 Hoars, and, in the molt Southern, 20 Hours ; there- 
 fore this IiLnd lies in the 16th to the 24th North Climates. The 
 greateft Meridian Altitude of the Sun, in the moft Northern Part* 
 of Lapland, belonging to Norway, is about 40 y 
 Deg. ( the Meridian Height, and nearly the fame * See 
 Heat * with us about the 14th of March) and the p. 118. 
 greateft Meridian Altitude, in the Northmoft Parts Part I. 
 of Iceland, is about 46 Deg. which is the Meridian 
 Height with us about the 30th of March. 
 
 Government.] Tho' the King of Denmark is an abfolute 
 Prince, he is pleated, however, to aft by .Laws and Rules of his 
 own and his Anceftors framing, which he takes the Liberty of re- 
 pealing and altering, as he thinks fit. The Commonality, in the 
 Year 1660. being wearied out with the Opprcffions of the Nobi- 
 lity, cauled fuch a Change in the State, that, in Four Days time, 
 from an Ariftocracy, it became as abfolute a Monarchy as could 
 be found in the World. The People, inftead of enjoying the Pri- 
 vileges and Advantages they promis'd themfelves, had little more 
 than the wretched Comfort of feeing their former Oppreffors in as 
 miftrable a Condition as themfelves. The whole Body of the Da- 
 nijh Laws is contain'd in a very moderate Volume in Shtarto, 
 ten in their own Language fo plain and intelligibly, that it 
 fcarce needs a Comment. The Dane: have Three feveral Courts 
 for the Adminiftration of Civil and Criminal Affairs : From thefe 
 there lies an Appeal to the General Court of the Province, and 
 from thence to the High Court corapos'd of the prime Nobility, 
 where the King fometimes fits in Perfon. Befides thefe, are the 
 Courts of Admiralty, and Rent Chambers. The King has the 
 Marnage of all Heirs and Heirefies, and is the Guardian of all 
 Noble Orphans. None can fell or alien their Lands without this 
 Monarch's Leave, he being intitled to a third Part of the Pur- 
 chafe-money upon every Sale. When any Perfon calumniates the 
 Government, or the Adminiftration, his Goods are confifcated ; 
 but if the Difcourfe tend to a Sedition, the Offender is punilhed 
 with Death. The Danijh Laws are very generous in refpeft 
 to Shipwrecks, whether upon account of the Relief they give 
 thole unhappy Wretches, or the Sincerity anJ Exacmefs with 
 
 which
 
 284 Prefent State of DENMARK. Part II. 
 
 which they preferve the Goods they can fave for the Owners. 
 When thofe Ships which guard the Coaft difcover any Ship in Di- 
 ftrefs, they are required by the Law to fave what Effe&s they 
 can, for which they have but a very moderate Reward, and the 
 Matter of the Ship may either reimbark his Cargo, or fell it 
 there, as he pleafes. If a Ship, or Goods, be driven on the 
 Coaft, and nobody appears to claim them, the King's Officer, or 
 the Lord of the Manor, takes care to preferve them, or, if they 
 are perifhable Goods, to fell them to the beft Advantage, and to 
 reftore the Money to the Owners ; but if they are not own'd 
 within a Year and a Day, they become the Property of the King, 
 or the Lord of the Soil : And if any of the Danijb Subjects con- 
 ceal or embezzle any wrecked Goods which they find on their 
 Coaft, or floating on the<Sea, or faved out of a Ship in Diftrefs, 
 they are punilhed as Felons. Blafphemers of God and Religion 
 are fentenced, firft, to have their Tongues cut out, and afterwards 
 to lofe their Heads ; and if a Prieft is guilty of the like, or any 
 ether notorious Vice, he is put to Death with the utmoft Tor- 
 ment. Norway, being incorporated with Denmark in 1387. is 
 govern'd by a Viceroy, and particular Governors in Places of 
 greateft Importance. Iceland, being fubjeft to the Danijh Crown, 
 is govern'd by a particular Viceroy, fent thither by the King of 
 Denmark. 
 
 Trade.] England takes from Denmark and Norway vaft 
 Quantities of Deal-boards, Timber, Spars, and Iron. England 
 exports to thefe Countries Guineas, Crown-pieces, Bullion, a little 
 Tobacco, and a few coarfe Woolens of fmall Value. We pav 
 them a very great Balance, and their rebuilding great Ships of 
 Burden, deftroy'd in the War between them and Sweden, will 
 again eftablilh them in the Navigation and Freight of their Tim- 
 ber, and will greatly increafe the Balance againlt us. But, for the 
 above Commodities, befides Pitch, Tar, Stock-fifh, and Oil, they 
 receive of other Nations Wines, Brandy, &e. with little or no 
 ready Money. It is computed, that there is not an Hundredth Part 
 of ready Cafh in Denmark as there is in England. Their Over- 
 balance of Trade carries off a great deal ; for they confume more 
 foreign Commodities than their Produces countervail. The Danes 
 have no Manufactures, except that of Iron, which is not very con- 
 fiderable. Black Cattle are exported lean from Jutland to Hol- 
 land, where they grow fat in a fhort time ; of which the Dutch 
 make a considerable Profit. 
 
 Revenues.] The whole Revenues of the King of Denmark 
 amount to about 500,000 /. Sterl. upon the beft Calculations ; 
 which, in that Part of the World, will go near as far as Three 
 
 timci
 
 Chap. X. Prefent State of DENMARK. 285 
 
 times that Sum with us, confiJering the Chcapnefs of Provifions 
 and Labour in thefe Countries. 
 
 Forces. ] It is computed, that Denmark and Oldenburg main- 
 tain 5450 Horfe, 1500 Dragoons, and 17,000 Foot: Norvsey 
 maintains 1256 Horle and Dragoons, and 14,300 Foot : Making, 
 in all, a Body of 39,506 Men. The Danes compute they can 
 rig out near Forty Sail of Men of War, at a very fliort Warn- 
 ing. 
 
 Character.] The Danes 2re the Remains of 
 an illuftrious Nation, which, in former Times, Danes, 
 made a great Figure in the World, difpers'd its Co- 
 lonies into many Places, and, at feveral times, conquer'd the 
 greateft Part of Europe by its Arms ; to fay nothing of the an- 
 cient Cimbri and Teutones, who came originally from Denmark, 
 and made the reft of the World tremble. But the Defcendants of 
 thefe mighty Conquerors are now under Oppreffion, having been 
 for fome time fubjett to arbitrary Princes, who, by an ill Ufe of 
 their Power, have effectually made Slaves of them. The Natives, 
 however, are laborious, and content with a little, multiplying 
 fo faft, that, if the Government were fo gentle as to engage the 
 Subjects to ftay in the Kingdom, they might ftill become a power- 
 ful People. They have the unhappy Character of being given to 
 exceffive Drinking, the Rabble to Cheating ; and the Nobility and 
 Gentry are faid to be proud, and fufpicious that others have a De- 
 fign upon them. They are, however, by many Writers, allow'd 
 to be ftill a brave, ingenious People ; are tall and ftrong-limb'd : 
 The Women are handfome enough, but their Mien is not to be 
 admir'd. The Crimes of High Treafon, Houfe-breaking, Rob- 
 bing, feditious Difcourfes and Practices, the Danes are feldom 
 guilty of: But then the Severity exercis'd in thefe Cafes, is fup- 
 pos'd to be theReafon that there are but few Offend- 
 ers. TheNor*wegians are allowed to be but an igno- Norwe- 
 rant Sort of People ; a People, however, that are gians. 
 very hardy and laborious, exceeding juft in their 
 Dealing, and obliging to Strangers : They who can afford it do 
 not come behind the Danes in the Point of excefllve Drinking. 
 The Laplanders are a very innocent and fuperftitious 
 People, fcarce guilty of any of the Vices of their Lapland 
 politer Neighbours ; and fo far 2re they from thiev- ers'. 
 kig from one another, that, if any of them find a 
 ilray Rain-deer, they don't fail to fend it home to the Owner, tho' 
 they might keep it without being difcover'd. The 
 Icelanders are rcckon'd a very ignorant and fuper- Icelanders, 
 flitious People, and value themfelves much for their 
 great Strength. Re-
 
 286 Prefent State- of DENMARK. Part II. 
 
 Religion.] Lutheranifm is the eftablifiYd Religion in Dettr 
 mark, and no other Denomination of Chriftians are tolerated. 
 The People are not allow'd to talk or exprefs themfelves with any 
 Freedom on the Points of Religion in Difpute, or to abfent them- 
 felves from the Church upon any Pretence whatever. This King- 
 dom, among the other Northern Nations, threw off the Errors 
 and Practices of the Roman Church, and embraced the Do&rine of 
 Luther, which was allow'd by Frederic I. The Danijb Clergy 
 ftill retain the Practice of Confeffion, which all Perfons are 
 oblig'd to before they participate of the bleffed Sacrament of the 
 Lord's Supper ; they likewife retain Crucifixes, and feveral Cere- 
 monies of the Roman Church. The Gofpel was received in this 
 Country about the Year 1039. anc ^ tne Lutheran Do&rine about 
 1539. The eitablifhed Religion in Norway is the 
 In Nor- fame as in Denmark, only that, on the Borders of 
 way. Lapland, they differ but very little from mere Hea- 
 
 Iit Iceland. thens. The Inhabitants of Iceland, who own Allegi- 
 ance to the Danijb Crown, are generally the fame in 
 Religion with the Danes ; but the uncivilized Natives, who com- 
 monly abfcond in Dens and Caves, ftill adhere to their ancient 
 Idolatry. Ahb in Wardhuys, or Norwegian Lapland, 
 ///Lap'and. the Natives are generally Pagans ftill, tho' they are 
 ufually denominated Chriftians ; and, by the Inno- 
 cence of their Lives, perhaps deferve to be ranked in the Firft- 
 Clafs, but feem to have very confufed Notions of its Do&rines. 
 
 Customs. ] The Danes in their Funerals are exceeding magni- 
 ficent; and it is not uncommon to depofit a Corpfe in a Vault, in 
 or near the Church, many Months together, in order 
 Of the to make Preparations to folemnize the Burial with 
 
 Danes. the greater Pomp. The poor People, indeed, are 
 
 buried with lefs Ceremony ; but even they are at- 
 tended to their Graves by a Set of Mourners, hired by every Parifh 
 for that Purpofe. Holidays are obferved as ftrictly as Sundays ; 
 and, in the Time of Divine Service, the Gates of Copenhagen are 
 fhut. It is cuftomary with the Danes to be contracted feveral 
 Months and Years, and live in the molt intimate Familiarity, be- 
 fore the Marriage is folemnized at Church ; but then thefe Con- 
 tracts are very folemn, before Friends. 
 
 A Laplander, when he intends to marry, looks 
 Of the out for a Maid well ftock'd with Rain-deer ; for it is 
 
 Laplanders. theCuftom in Lapland, for Parents to give their Chil- 
 dren, as foon as they are born, fome Rain-deer, 
 which, for ever after, with all their Increafe, belong to the Chil- 
 dren. The more Rain-deer a Maid has, the fooner fhe may ex- 
 
 peft.
 
 Chap. X. Prefent State of* DENMARK. 2,87, 
 
 pet a Husband j for Laplanders do not regard Beauty, or fuch 
 (Qualifications as are valuable to others. It is natural for fuch as- 
 live in barren Countries, to be moft folicitous for their Subfift- 
 ence, which becaufe the Rain-deer chiefly afford them, they look 
 upon them as their greateft Riches, which may belt fecure them 
 agairit Wants. The poorer Sort are content to marry a Man's 
 Daughter, who lives in a convenient Place for Hunting and Fifhi- 
 ing. After a Laplander has pitch'd upon one he intends to marry, 
 he, in Company with two or three Friends, undertakes a Journey 
 to her Father. Being come to the Hut, they are all invited in, 
 except the Suitor, wio flays for fome time without, and paffes 
 away his Time in fomc; trifling Employment or other, perhaps in 
 cleaving of Wood, till at laft he alfo is invited in ; for, without 
 an exprefs Invitation, it is looked upon as a great Piece of Rude- 
 nefs for him to come in. After they have fortified tbemfelves with 
 a Dram, the Spokefman begins to declare his Suit, defiring the 
 Maid's Father to bellow his Daughter in Marriage upon the young . 
 Man ; and, if the Father confents, that the young Man may pay 
 his Refpects to the Virgin, he goes directly out of the Hut to his 
 Sledge, and puts on his belt Apparel ; after which they falute 
 with a Kifs, and not only prefs their Lips, but likewife their 
 Nofes, together, otherwife it would not pafs for a true Salute. 
 After this, he makes her a Prefent of a Rain-deer's Torigue, and 
 the like, which fhe refufes to accept in the Prefence of others ; but, 
 being fecretly call'd afide, without the Hut, if fhe accepts of the 
 Prefent, the Suiter begs the Favour of her to let him fleep near 
 her in the Hut, which if fhe grants, the Marriage is as good as 
 concluded; but if fhe refufes, fhe throws the Prefents at his Feet. 
 The Lapland Children grow very flow, which may be attributed 
 partly to the Coldnefs of the Climate, and partly to their Want 
 of nourifning Diet : But, as the Boys grow, their Parents care- 
 fully inftrutt them in handling the Bow, and will not permit 
 them to eat before they have hit a certain Mark, tho' they have 
 been but never fo little exercis'd in Shooting. The Laplanders are 
 faid to be fo expert in this Exercife, that they will hit a Circle, 
 the Bignefs of a Farthing, at fuch a Diflance, as that they, can 
 but juft fee it. 
 
 Thefe People, notwith Handing they undergo a great deal of 
 Hardfhip, enjoy a great Share of Health ; they fcarce know whar 
 Sicknefs is, not fo much as thole epidemical Diilemp'ers which 
 fometimes afflift other Nations. When they die, 'tis faid, they 
 are put into a Coffin, wherein are alfo laid a Hatchet, Flint and 
 Steel; ihat fince they are to wander thro' dark Plr.ces, they will 
 want Light, in which they may be affifteJ by the : Flint and Steel ; 
 and to open thcmfelves the Way to Heaven, they will Hand in 
 need of a Hatchet: Eut this is the Practice of thofe only. who 
 
 have
 
 288 Ptefini State of DENMARK. Part II. 
 
 have very grofs Notions of the Chriflian Profeffion, or rather the 
 Remains of their ancient Superflition. For it was the Opinion 
 of the ancient Pagans, that the Way leading to the Manfions of 
 the Bleffed was dark, which might take the more with the Lap- 
 landers, who are involved in long Darknefs, in this Northern Cli- 
 mate. The Laplanders make ufe of Bows, in Hunting, of about 
 three Yards long, two Inches broad, and one thick, made of two 
 Pieces of Wood join'd within one another ; and within the Piece 
 of Birch, they put a Slip of Pine-wood, which, by reafon of its 
 refinous Subflance, is flexible, and confequently the moil proper 
 for drawing together, and fending forth the Arrows. They make 
 ufe alfo of Skates in Hunting, one of which exceeds the Length 
 of the Perfon that wears it by one Foot, and the other is one Foot 
 morter, both turn'd upwards before, and fomewhat broader than 
 the Soles of the Feet r They fallen thefe Skates to their Feet with 
 a With, run thro' on both Sides, but not thro 1 the Bottom, which 
 would hinder their Sliding, or wear foon out by continual Ufing ; 
 this comes directly over the Midft of the Feet ; and One-half of 
 the Skate is before, and the other behind. They ufe a Staff in 
 Sliding, at the End of which is a round Piece of Wood, which is 
 to force themfelves over the frozen Snow. Thofe that are Mailers 
 of Skating are fcarce ever tired, tho' they travel never fo far : 
 They will purfue the Chace, over the flippery frozen Snow, with 
 that incredible Swiftnefs, that they outrun the wild Rain-deer and 
 Wolves ; and, by various twilling of their Bodies, and Windings 
 and Turnings in their Way, they afcend the higheft Mountains, 
 and likewife defcend from the Top of thefe fleep Mountains down 
 to the Bottom, without any Danger of Falling. This feems next 
 to an Impoffibility ; but I find it aflerted by Rbeen t and quoted by 
 Schejfer. The Laplanders travel in Sledges during the Winter 
 Seafon ; he who fits in it governs the Rain-deer with a fingle Hal- 
 ter, which does not pafs through the Mouth, but is only faften'd 
 to the Head and Horns ; this he holds in his Right-hand, with a 
 Stick at the End, and throws it fometimes on the Right, and 
 fometimes on the Left-Side of the Rain-deer, which turns to that 
 Side where the Rope or Halter twitches. The Sledge, being of a 
 femicircular Figure at the Bottom, is continually inclining to one 
 Side or other, fo that it wants a conftant Balance, which mull be 
 done, partly by the Body, and partly by the Help of the Hand of 
 him who fits in it, for fear it fhould overthrow in the fwift 
 Courfe. 
 
 Curiosities. ] In the Mufeum Regium at Copenhagen art 
 many Curiofities, the chief whereof are, i. A well-polilhed 
 Table of Marble, in which is a natural Reprefentation of a Cru- 
 cifix. 2. Several other large Marble Tables, curioufly adorn'd with 
 
 inlaid
 
 Chap. XI. Prefent State of SWEDEN. 289 
 
 inlaid precious Stones, naturally reprefenting Birds of 
 divers Sorts. 3. A Cabinet of Ivory and Ebony, In Den- 
 very beautiful, and admirably well contriv'd within, mark, 
 being the Work of a Dani/h Mechanic ftone-blind. 
 4. A Drinking-veflel of Gold, in form of a Sounding horn, found 
 in the Diocefe oi Ripen, Anno 1639, Wt. 102 4 Oz. is in Length 
 2 Feet 9 Inches, and contains Two Englifh Pints and half: This 
 Veflel has, in Rais'd-work on its Outfide, fuch a Number of 
 Animals, with Men in ftrange Poftures, and divers hieroglyphic 
 Figures, as ftiew it to have been ufed by the Pagans in their Reli- 
 gious Ceremonies. There is yet to be feen, near Slefwick, the 
 Remains of that famous Wall and Trench, made above 900 Years 
 ago, to hinder the Incurfions of the Saxons. Near 
 to Dronthem is a Lake, whofe Waters never freeze, In Norway, 
 notwithstanding the exceffive Cold in that Climate. 
 Upon the Coalt of Norway, Lat. 68. is a dreadful Whirlpool, 
 commonly called Maelftroon, and, by Mariners, the Navel of the 
 Sea, which proves fatal to Ships that approach too near at Flood ; 
 for then the Sea, upwards of Two Leagues round, makes fuch a 
 terrible Vortex, that the Force and Indraught of the Water, to- 
 gether with the Noife and Tumbling of the Waves upon one 
 another, is rather to be admir'd than exprefs'd : But, during the 
 Ebb, it throws out the Sea with fuch Violence, that the heaviefl 
 Bodies, then caft into it, cannot fink, but are toffed back again 
 by the impetuous Stream, which ruftieth out with incredible 
 Force ; and, during that Time, are Abundance of Fifties caught 
 by Fiftiermen, who watch the Opportunity ; for being forc'd up 
 to the Surface of the Water, they cannot well dive again, fo vio- 
 lent is the rifing Current. In Iceland are many hot 
 and fcalding Fountains, with Hecla a dreadful Vol- In Iceland, 
 cano. Towards the Middle of this Iftand is a Lake, 
 which commonly fends up fuch a peftilentious Vapour, as frequent- 
 ly kills Birds that endeavour to fly over it. 
 
 CHAP. XI. 
 
 The prefent State of the SWEDEN. 
 
 Boundaries.] '"T^HE Kingdom of SWEDEN (anciently the 
 A Eaftern Part of Scandinavia, with iome of 
 Sarmatia Europea) lies on the Ealt of Norway, Weft of Mu/covy, 
 North of Poland and Germany, and South of Wardbus or Nor- 
 wegian Lapland. 
 
 U SlTUA-
 
 2 9 C> 
 
 Prefent State of SWEDJEN. Part II. 
 
 Situation. ] This Country is fituated between 55 4 and 697 Degr. 
 North Latitude, and the Length thereof is 850 Miles. 
 
 Divifion and Sub- 
 divifion. 
 
 SWEDEN 
 
 1. Sweden prop. 
 
 1 . Sudermania 
 
 2. Nericia 
 
 3 . We/mania 
 
 4. Uplandia 
 
 5. Geftricia 
 
 6. Dalcarlia 
 *]. Helfingia 
 
 8. Medelpadia 
 
 9. Jemptia 
 
 I o. Angermania 
 2. Gothland 
 
 1 . Vermelandia 
 
 2. Da I Ha 
 ^.Weflrogoth 
 
 OJlrogotbia 
 
 Smalandia 
 
 Hatland 
 
 Blaking 
 
 Sconen 
 
 Lapland in 
 
 Snveden 
 Tornia Lapmark 
 Kimi Lapmark 
 hula Lapmark 
 Pitba Lapmark 
 Uma Lafmark 
 
 4. Finland 
 
 1. Cajania 
 
 2. Savolaxia 
 
 3. TSylandia 
 
 4. Tavajlia 
 
 5. Finland proper 
 
 5. Iflands, chief are 
 1. Gothland" 
 
 Square Miles, 
 fiV. 
 
 Chief Towns Diftance and Bearing 
 in each of each Town from 
 Divifion. the Capital of the 
 Divifion. 
 
 47900 
 Length 342 
 Breadth 194 
 This Divifion 
 ( formerly the 
 Seat of the Sui- 
 ones) is cor.fider- 
 able on account 
 of the Mines of 
 Copper, Alum, 
 and Vitriol, with 
 which it abounds. 
 28935 
 Gothland ( for- 
 merly the Seat 
 of the Scant, and 
 the Goths) ab- 
 ounds in Cattle, 
 and Mines of 
 Copper, Lead, 
 and Iron. 
 76000 
 Lapland ( the 
 Seat of the old 
 Lappiones) ihel- 
 ters Abundance 
 of wild Beafts. 
 
 73000 
 The Seat of the 
 old Finni and 
 OJ1L 
 
 1000 
 
 "i Stockholm 
 V olim 
 3 Holmia 
 Nicoping 
 Orebro 
 Aro/en 
 Up/a/ 
 Genial 
 Hedemore 
 Had/wickav. 
 Lidk 
 Refundt 
 Hemo/and 
 
 \ Carolftadt 
 
 Daleburg 
 
 Gottenbwg 
 . Korkoping 
 
 Calmar 
 , Helw/adt 
 
 Cbriftianfta. 
 
 Lunden 
 
 I 
 
 Tornia 
 
 Kimi 
 Lula 
 Pitba 
 
 Uma 1 
 
 Cajaneburg 
 
 No/kinpa 
 
 Borgo 
 
 Ta<vaJIus 
 
 Aba 
 
 ffifiy 
 
 \ 
 
 820 NE of Paris 
 
 740 W of Mo/conv 
 2 7 o N E of Copenb . 
 
 of Stock- 
 holm 
 
 52 SE 
 70 W 
 
 45 W 
 
 27 NW 
 67 NW 
 73 NW 
 140N 
 180N 
 202 N 
 i 75 N 
 
 130 W 
 
 150W 
 205SW 
 85 sw 
 : 162 s 
 '2I8SW 
 226 s J 
 
 25.8 s 
 
 398 N of Stockholm 
 
 12 E 
 
 42 SW 
 80 SW 
 
 I58SW, 
 
 4I0NE. 
 '286NE 
 
 105 E 
 218NE 
 
 135NE 
 
 Tomia 
 
 of Stock- 
 holm 
 
 Diviiion
 
 Chap. S3. ' Prefent State of SWEDEN. 291. 
 
 Divifion and Sub- 
 
 Square 
 
 Chief Towns 
 
 Diftance and Bearing 
 
 divifion. 
 
 Miles. 
 
 in each 
 
 of each Town from 
 
 
 
 Divifion. 
 
 the Capital of the 
 Divifion. 
 
 2. eland 
 
 $60 
 
 Barkbolm 
 
 *53S I 
 
 6. German Domin. 
 
 
 
 / of Stock* 
 
 1 . Vomerania 
 
 960 
 
 Stralfnnd 
 
 335SWT holm 
 
 2. St'gen 
 
 360 
 
 Bergen 
 
 33iS J 
 
 Climate.] The Air of this Country is very cold j butj if 
 not too near Lakes or Marfhes, fo pure and wholfome to breathe 
 in, that many of the Inhabitants live to a great Age. During 
 the Winter, which in moft Parts continues Seven Months, and to- 
 wards the North, the whole Country is cover'd with Snow a Yard 
 or two thick, and the Lakes, Seas, and Rivers, are all frozen up. 
 The Air, in the Northern Parts, is fo exceeding fliarp, it is faid, 
 that Water fprinkled with one's Hand will freeze before it comes 
 to the Ground ; and 'tis no uncommon thing, to find People who 
 have loft their Nofes or Fingers by the extreme Cold j but the 
 Snow is no fooner melted than we fee, on a fudden, Part of the 
 Earth cover'd with green Herbs and Flowers. The Soil is not 
 very fertile in Corn ; but that Difadvantage is recompens'd with 
 pretty good Pafturage. There are, indeed, a Multitude of ftony 
 barren Mountains difpers'd over the Face of the whole Country, 
 which give it but a difagreeable Afpecl ; and, from thefe, fall in- 
 numerable Rivers, or rather Torrents, and not many of them, 
 navigable, on account of the Rocks and Catarafts, which obftrutt 
 their Paffage ; they form, however, feveral confiderable Lakes. 
 The longeft Day, in the Northmoft Parts, is Two Months ; and, 
 in the moft Southern, about 17 Hours; therefore this Country 
 lies in the 10th to the 26th North Climates. The greateft Meri- 
 dian Altitude of the Sun, in the Northmoft Part of this Country, 
 is about 42 Deg the Meridian Height, and nearly the fame Heat 
 with us, about the 21ft of March. 
 
 Government. ] This Kingdom is very ancient, and was for- 
 merly elective ; but, after various Turns of Fortune, became he- 
 reditary under the Reign of Guftavus I. But it appears at prefent, 
 that the Stvedifo Nobility and Gentry have, of late, not only fully 
 recover'd their ancient Liberties, but the States have inverted 
 themfelves with fovereign Power, and made their King entirely 
 dependent on them ; and Sweden may now be look'd upon rather 
 as an Ariftocracy than a Monarchy. The Peaftnts, or Commons, 
 feem to have the leaft Share in the Government ; for they are npt 
 fufFer'd to depute any of their Members to affift in the Secret Com- 
 
 U 2 mittee,
 
 Q.92 Prefent State of SWEDEN. Part II, 
 
 mittee, in which all Affairs of Moment are tranfa&ed. But this 
 is look'd upon as a very great Grievance, and the Commons have 
 prefented Memorials to the other Houfes to complain of it ; for 
 which Prefumption feveral of their Members were imprifon'd, and 
 punifh'd, in the Year 1723. and they were compell'd by Force to 
 drop their Claim : So that, with all their boalled Liberty, the 
 Commons feem to be not much better by the Change of Govern' 
 merit. The different Orders of this Realm are, Princes of the 
 Blood, Nobility, Clergy, Soldiery, Merchantry, and Commonalty. 
 Thefe, by their Reprefentatives, being aflembled in Parliament, 
 make four different Houfes ; */**. 1. That of the Nobility. 2. That 
 of the Clergy. 3. That of the Burgefies : And, lailly, That of 
 the Houfe of Commons, or Peafants. The Punifhment of Theft 
 is perpetual Slavery : The Criminal is condemn'd to labour all his 
 Life in the Service of the Crown, in carrying Wood and Stone for 
 the Repair of the Fortifications, or other Kinds of Drudgeries. 
 Dueling, where one of the Parties is killed, is punifhed with the 
 Death of the Survivor; and, if neither of them fall, they both 
 fuffer two Years Imprifonment, and are to live all the Time upon 
 Bread and Water, and pay a large Fine beiides. For capital 
 Crimes, fuch as Murder, double Adultery, Burning of Houfes, the 
 Criminal is puniftied with Death. Where a Gentleman, or Noble- 
 man, commits a capital Crime, he is (hot to Death. By the Laws 
 of Sweden, the Father's Eftate, whether hereditary or acquir'd, 
 is divided among his Children, every Son having an equal Share in 
 it, and a Daughter half as much as a Son. 
 
 Trade.] The principal Part of the Swedijh Manufacture* 
 confifts in what they make of Copper and Iron. The Exports 
 from Sweden, befides their Hard-ware, are Pitch, Tar, Malls, 
 Deals, and wooden Ware ; and they have endeavoured to fet up 
 the Silk and Woolen Manufactures j in the latter of which they 
 have in fome meafure fucceeded. For the making of Cloth in this 
 Country being of late Years encouraged by the Government, 
 and Workmen from Germany, Scotland, and even from England, 
 invited over, proves a great Hindrance to the Sale of the Englijh 
 Cloth, which is now charged with fuch Duties there, that it is 
 fcarce worth the while to fend any thither. Sweden takes from 
 England Gold, Silver, and but fmall Quantities of our Manufac- 
 tures and Produdts. England takes from Sweden near Two-thirds 
 of the Iron wrought up or confum'd in the Kingdom ; Copper, 
 Boards, Planks, cifc. The Balance they drew from us amounted, 
 before the late War with Denmark, to between 2 and 300,000 /. 
 yearly, befides the Freight of their own Produft, which we paid 
 them for likewife. 
 
 Revk-
 
 Chap. XI. Prefent State of SWEDEN. 293 
 
 Revenue?.] The public Revenues of Sweden arife, either 
 out of the Demefne Lands of the Crown, or from the Cuftoms, 
 the Coin, Copper and Silver Mines, Tythes, Poll-money, Fines, 
 Stamp'd Paper, and other Duties on Proceedings at Law ; all 
 which are computed to amount to a Million Sterling, whereof the 
 Curtoms produce about a Fourth-part, and the Demefne Lands ;i 
 Third. The Poll-tax was levied only upon the Peafants ; every 
 one of whom, above Sixteen Years of Age, and under Sixty, was 
 to pay Twelve-pence a Year ; but, in the Diitrefs the Kingdom of 
 Sweden was reduced to in the Wars of Charles XII. no Means 
 were left unattempted, for raifing Money : But the greateft Piece 
 of Oppreflion act-ally put into Practice, in the laft Reign, was, 
 compelling the People to bring in all their Silver, and exchange it 
 with the Government for Copper Coin of very little intrinfic 
 Worth, which the Government put what Value they pleas'd upon ; 
 and thus a Piece of Copper, not worth a Halfpenny, was to pafs 
 in Payment for Haifa Crown or more. 
 
 Forces. ] Before the laft Reign, and the Lofs of Livonia and 
 Bremen, the Forces of Sweden were computed to 60,000, which 
 were maintained chiefly by the Boors or Farmers : The Guards 
 only were paid by the King. But the late King of Sweden, 
 Charles XII. rais'd more than twice the above Number of Forces. 
 As to the Royal Navy of Sweden, ic is faid to be inferior to that 
 of Denmark, which, as I have faid, amounts to near 40 Men ofWar. 
 
 Character.] The Swedes have a fort of Gravity, not un- 
 becoming, when it is temper'd by a Correfpondence with other 
 Nations. They have a natural Itch to make a great Appearance, 
 by which many of them ruin their Families. They are very well 
 vers'd in the Arts of Diffimulation, and extremely jealous and 
 diftruflful. They, in general, have a good Opinion of themfelves, 
 and of all that relates to them, and are very apt to contemn 
 others. They are inclin'd enough to learn the Firft Elements of 
 any Art or Science, but few of them have the Patience to found 
 Things to the Bottom, and perfeft themfelves in the Arts and 
 Sciences. As they have but little Inclination to mechanic Trades, 
 and even flight them, it is obferv'd, that they are but ill qualified 
 for Manufactures, efpecially fuch as require Ingenuity and Induftry. 
 The Gentry are much given to Hofpitality, very affable and civil 
 to Strangers. The Nobility, who apply themfelves chiefly to a 
 military Life, are famous tor their Courage, and bearing Hard- 
 fhips. The common Soldiers endure Cold, Hunger, and hard 
 Marches, to Admiration, and are rather valuable upon account of 
 fheir Courage and Obedience, than for learning their Duty readi- 
 
 U 3 Iy.
 
 294 Prefent State of SWE DEN. Part II, 
 
 ly. As to their Perfons, they are of a good Stature, and robuft 
 Conftitutions, qualified by iSiature and Education for enduring 
 Hardihips and Fatigues. The Women are of a juft Proportion, 
 and have tolerable Features, and thofe who are above the Vulgar 
 are generally fair. And of the whole Nation, in general, it may 
 be faid, that they are a People, very religious, constant Frequent- 
 ers of the Church, and grave even to Formality. 
 
 Reucion. ] The Englljb affume the Honour of planting the 
 Gofpel among the Swedes, in the Beginning of the Ninth Cen- 
 tury. The Reformation was begun in Sweden in the Reign of 
 Gujia-vus Erkkfon, at the Beginning of the Sixteenth Century, 
 who promoted it, as well upon politic as religious Views. The 
 Clergy, in general, were his Enemies, and exceeding rich, which 
 were two very ftrong Inducements to feize their Lxuuls, and unite 
 them to the Crown ; and this he accomplifh'd in his Reign, leav- 
 ing the Clergy but a flender Maintenance. Lutheranifm prevails 
 here ; nor will they fufFer any other Denomination of Chriitians, 
 whether Natives or Foreigners : They have a mighty Zeal for 
 their own Way, but very uncharitable to thofe of another Profef- 
 fion, even to. thofe of the Church of England, who approach 
 neareft to them. So jealous are the Swedes of their Ecclefiaftical 
 Conflitution, that they have enacted, that if any Subject of that 
 Kingdom mail change his Religion, he (hall be baniihed, and for- 
 feit his Right of Inheritance, both for himfelf and his Defend- 
 ants. 
 
 Customs.] People of Condition, of either Sex, are feldom 
 married before Thirty, becaufe their Parents, perhaps, cannot 
 afford to make Settlements fuitable to their Quality in this poor 
 Country, where they live, notwithftanding, to the Height of their 
 Income, Among the common People, it feems, the Wife hath 
 much the worft of it, being put to all the Drudgeries both within 
 and without Doors, and looks upon herfelf to be rather in the 
 Condition of a Servant, than a Companion, to her Hufband ; and 
 cor.fequently there is very little Wrangling and Difputing between 
 them. The Swedes make pompous and expenfive Funerals ;but 
 their Feaiting and Entertainments, at thefe Times, exceed all 
 Bounds : And that they may have the more Time to provide every 
 Thing they imagine neceffary, to exprefs their Refpect to their 
 deceafed Friends, or publifh their own Indifcretion, it is not un- 
 ufual to convey the Corps to fpme Vault in or near the Church, 
 where they lie feveral Months, and fometimes Years, rather than 
 difgrace their Family by an ordinary Funeral: But this was rather 
 the Practice of the lait Age than the prefent, the Swedes being 
 much xeduc'd by the heavy Taxes laid upon than in the late 
 
 Reigns,
 
 Chap. XII. Prefent State of MOSCOVT. 295 
 
 Reigns, and the Refumption of great Part of their Eftates by the 
 Crown on one Pretence or other. Their Sports and Exercifes are, 
 running Races in Sledges, and failing in Yachts upon the Ice; in 
 which they will turn and alter their Courfe, failing with incredible 
 Swiftnefs, much beyond any Vefiel in the Water, and with much 
 lefs Danger of overfetting. As to the Diet of People of Diftin- 
 ftion, it is much the fame with our own, except that every one of 
 the Gueits, at an Entertainment, is obliged to fwallow down a 
 great Quantity of Itrong Liquors. The poor People in Finland, 
 and the Northern Part of Sweden, live upon Bread made of the 
 inward Bark of the Pine-tree, with Roots, Salt-fifh, and dried 
 Fleflr, as the Laplanders do ; and have but little ftrong Liquor to 
 comfort their Hearts with in that cold Climate. 
 
 Curiosities. ] A few Leagues from Gottenburg is a dreadful 
 Cataract, with a considerable Current, which runs a long Way 
 out of the Country, and, coming at laft to a hideous Precipice, 
 rufheth down from thence into a low Pit, with a mighty Force, 
 and terrible Noife ; and as the Natives ufually bring down their 
 Floats of Timber by that Current, fuch is the Height of the Pre 
 cipice above-mentioned, and fo deep is the Pit into which the 
 Water falls, that large Mafts,when hurried down by the impetuous 
 Stream from that Precipice into the Pit, do frequently dive fo far 
 under Water, that they fometimes continue near an Hour before 
 they rife up to the Surface thereof: Many Attempts have been 
 made to found this Pit, with a Line of many Hundred Fathoms 
 long, but they could never reach the Bottom. Towards the South- 
 ern Part of Gothland is a remarkable flimy Lake, which tinges 
 fuch Things as are put into it. 
 
 CHAP. XII. 
 
 The prefent State of the Dominions of Moscovv, 
 or Russia in Europe. 
 
 Boundaries. ] A/[OS CO ^(formerly the greateft. Part of an- 
 cient Sarmatia Europara, and a great Part of 
 Sarmatia AJiatica) is on the Eaft of Sweden and Poland, and on the 
 Weil ofTartary in Afia ; to the South of the Northern Ocean, and 
 on the North of Little Tartary, Georgia, and the Cafpian Sea. 
 
 Situation. ] This Country is fituated between 71 \ and 46 i 
 Deg. North Latitude, and between 20 and 65 Deg. Eaft Longitude. 
 Length whereof is 1530, and Breadth 1050 Miles. 
 
 U 4 Divifioft
 
 196 
 
 Prefent State cj MOSCO VT. Part II. 
 
 Divifion and Sub- 
 division. 
 
 MOSCOVr, or 
 RUSSIA 
 
 1 . Mofccuy proper 
 
 2. Samoieda 
 
 3. Mejfeen 
 
 4. Dnxjina 
 
 5 . Syrianes 
 
 6. Permia 
 
 7. Reubenenska 
 
 8. Lapland in Mofc. 
 I . Meurmanskoy 
 2. Belamoreskoy 
 3. Treskoy 
 
 9. Finland in Mo/f. 
 
 1 . Carelia 
 
 2. Kexholm 
 
 10. Ingria 
 1 1. Livonia 
 
 I z.GreatXovogorod 
 I 2. Belozero 
 
 1 4. Wologda 
 
 1 5. Jerijlavj 
 
 16. Tiueer 
 
 1 7. Smolensko 
 
 1 8. N//* Kovogorod 
 
 1 9. Cafan 
 
 20. Bulgar 
 
 21. Rezan 
 
 22. Belgorod 
 
 23. Dc Cojfacks 
 
 24. -SV<?/} 
 
 25. Zemigof 
 
 26. Ukraine 
 
 Square Miles, 
 
 Chief Towns 
 in the Divi- 
 fions. 
 
 1031550 
 Since the late 
 Czar, the Trade 
 at Archangel is 
 much lefs than 
 it was, being 
 carried on chief- 
 ly at Petersburg. 
 
 72000 
 Anciently J?/- 
 armia. 
 
 41310 
 
 Part of the Seat 
 of the F// and 
 OJii. 
 
 9100 
 21525 
 The Finlandijb 
 Language hath 
 no Refemblance 
 to any other 
 whatever ; but 
 yields to none, 
 'tis faid, in Rich- 
 nefs of Words, 
 or Propriety of 
 Phrafes. 
 
 72900 
 57000 
 
 45000 
 
 / Mofcoiv, 
 C Mofcovia 
 
 Sobskaia 
 
 Mejfeen 
 
 Archangel 
 
 Oujizoh 
 
 P ermia'Veliki 
 
 Ufgorodifchna 
 
 Kola 
 Kandalax 
 
 IVarfega 
 
 Wyburg 
 Kexholm 
 
 Peterjburg 
 
 Riga 
 
 Pernaw 
 
 Narva 
 
 Revel 
 
 Kovogorod 
 
 Belozero 
 
 Wologda 
 
 Jertjlavj 
 
 Tiveer 
 
 Smolcnjko 
 
 Nifna 
 
 Cafan 
 
 Bulgar 
 
 Rezankoy 
 
 Woronets 
 
 Donetzkoy 
 
 Seefsk 
 
 Zemigof 
 
 Kief 
 
 Diflance and Bearing 
 of each Town from 
 the Capital, cif<r. 
 
 f 740 E of Stockholm 
 < 92oEof Copenhag. 
 720 NE oiWarj. 
 
 960 NE^ 
 630N 
 520N 
 490 NE 
 480 E 
 390 N 
 
 780 N 
 750 N 
 380 N 
 
 480 NW 
 
 430 NW 
 
 380 NW 
 490 W J 
 
 80 N 
 
 ) offiofa 
 
 I 
 
 180NE J>of Riga 
 
 130N s 
 
 250 NW\ 
 285 NW ' 
 235 NE 
 134 NE 
 90 N 
 110W 
 215 E 
 
 335 E 
 
 440 E 
 
 90 SE 
 205 S 
 350 SE 
 215 SW 
 320 SW 
 420 SW^ 
 
 \ ofMo/c 
 
 CO-TV 
 
 Climate.] The Air of this Country muft be very different, it be- 
 ing of a vaft Extent : Towards the North, ( as in Stvedifi Lapland, and 
 the Northern Part of Sweden) the Air is fo exceeding fharp, that the 
 Natives fometimes lofe their Nofes or Fingers ; however, in many of the 
 
 Northern
 
 Chap. XII. Prefent State of MOSCOVT. 297 
 
 Northern Parts, it is fo wholfome to breathe in, that the Inhabi- 
 tants live to a very great Age. The moil Northern Provinces are 
 yery barren, producing very few of the NeceiTaries of Life. Dur- 
 ing the Winter, which in moft of the Southern Provinces continues 
 Seven Months, and towards the Northern Nine, the whole 
 Country is cover'd with Snow ; which fupplies the Place of 
 Manure, rendering the Soil fo fruitful in the Middle and Southern 
 Parts, that the Snow is no fooner melted, than, on a fudden, the 
 Earth is cover'd with green Herbs and Flowers, and the Corn is 
 ready for reaping about Two Months after it is fown. Travellers 
 relate that, in the Heart of Mufcwy, the Summer Heats are al- 
 moil as troublefome as the Winter's Cold ; that, in the Summer- 
 time, the Sun, raifmg the Vapours in the Lakes, and marfliy 
 Grounds, about Peter/burg in Lat. 60. occafions Tempefts of 
 Thunder and Lightning almoft every Day, and that the Heat is 
 then as troublefome as the fevere Cold in Winter. Mofcovy, in 
 general, lying upon a Flat, and being extremely well water'd 
 with Lakes and Rivers, is a very fruitful Country : And, as the 
 late Czar has render'd the Communication of one Part of the Em- 
 pire "With another extremely eafy, by laying out new Roads, or 
 repairing old ones, and cutting navigable Canals where-ever he 
 found it neceflary ; the Northern Provinces, which produce neither 
 Corn or other NccefTaries, which are fo plentiful in the Middle 
 and Southern Parts, are now tolerably well fupplied with both. 
 As to the Mufcovite Laplanders and Samoieds, indeed, who have 
 little Commerce with the reft of Mufcovy, they neither plow, fow, 
 nor plant, there being not Warmth enough to ripen Grain or 
 Fruits ; or, which amounts to the fame thing, if there was a fuf- 
 fkient Heat, the Soil is too barren to produce any, for nothing 
 can be brought forth. The longeft Day, in the moft Northern 
 Part of this Country, is about Two Months, and the greateft Me- 
 ridian Altitude of the Sun about 42 Deg. ( the Height with us 
 about the 21ft of March) ; and, in the moft Southern, the longeft 
 Day is about 16 Hours ; therefore this Country lies in the 8th 
 to the 26th North Climates. 
 
 Government.] The Crown of Mofcovy is hereditary, and 
 the Government truly defpotical : The Lives and Eftates of the 
 Subjects are wholly at the Difpofal of the Sovereign. This un- 
 bounded Authority, fo far from being difagreeable to the Natives, 
 feems to go very well down with them : For their Monarchs, from 
 time to time, have induftrioufly endeavour'd to banifti out of their 
 Dominions the liberal Arts and Sciences, and forbid the ftudying 
 of them under the fevcrcft Penalties ; and thus keeping the People 
 in the grofleft Ignorance, have, in order to make Slaves of them, 
 pretended to a kind of Omnifcience ; and have fo far fucceeded, 
 
 that
 
 9$ Prefent State of MO S GOVT. Part II. 
 
 that the greatcft Part of the Natives really believe their Sovereign 
 to be fomething more than mortal, and, as fuch, pay him all 
 blind Submiffion. But the late Czar cndeavour'd to rettify 
 that grofs Abufe, and look'd upon his People not as Slaves, but 
 as Subjects ; and alfo encourag'd the Nobility and Gentry to apply 
 themfelves to all Kinds of Learning, particularly the Mathema- 
 tics, and the Hiftories, Laws and Cufto'ms of foreign Nations. 
 This Prince, obferving how mean a Figure his Country made, oc- 
 cafioned by that profound Ignorance which reign 'd in his Domini- 
 ons, about the Year 1698. vifited England, Holland, and Ger- 
 many, in order to be acquainted with the Cuitoms of otlier Na- 
 tions, and obferve the Improvements which were made in Arts 
 and Sciences : And when the Czar left England, he obtain'd Leave 
 of King William to take fpme young Mathematicians out of 
 Chrift's Hofpkal, together with fome Men of Skill, to inftruft 
 his People in that Science, and particularly in Navigation, Ship- 
 building, and Engineering. This great Monarch pafs'd an Edift, 
 that whoever did not learn to read and write, and get a tolerable 
 Knowledge of Latin, or fome other foreign Language, fhould 
 be difabled to inherit his Father's Eitate, if it exceeded 500 
 Rubles ( fomething better than 200 /. Sterling) per Jinn, and 
 that no Perfon mould be admitted into Orders who did not 
 underftand Latin. He let up Printing-houfes alfo, and, having 
 procur'd feveral valuable Books to be tranflated out of foreign 
 Languages, difperfed them through his Dominions. Out of the 
 Schools which this Monarch eredled he chofe the moft ingenious 
 young Men, and fent them into foreign Countries, the better to 
 qualify them for the Service of his Navy, Zsc. Thefe, and a 
 Multitude of other Improvements, have been encouraged by this 
 great Prince, and alfo fince ; fo that the Mofeovites, in another 
 Age, poffibly, may vie wich the politeft Nations in Europe. 
 
 As to the Laws of Mofarvy, there are no other than their an- 
 cient Cuftoms, which the late Czar collefted into a Body ; but it 
 feems they are of very little Ufe to the common People, who are 
 yet Slaves to their refpedlive Lords, and have no Properties but 
 what they may be diverted of by them, except Merchants, whofe 
 Fortunes, however, the Government can command. The Punilh- 
 ment for criminal Offences feems to be arbitrary ; the Judge, or 
 Governor, may inflicl corporal Punifhments, put the Offender to 
 Death, or imprifon him, as he fees fit, there being no Appeal 
 from his Sentence ; which fhews, that whatever Laws they may 
 have, the Grandees adt as arbitrarily as if they had none, and the 
 Sovereign deals with them in the very fame Manner as they do by 
 their Inferiors. The late Czar, indeed, gave Permiffion to any 
 of his Subjects to petition him directly againft the Oppreflions and 
 Injufiice of his Officers and M2giilrates ; but, then, if the Sug- 
 
 geftions
 
 Chap. XII. Prefent State of MOSCOVT, 299 
 
 geflions in the Petition were held groundless or frivolous, the Peti- 
 tioner was to fuffer Death ; as the Judge was on the other Side, 
 if they were found to be true. But the Hazard being fo very 
 great, there have fcarce any been found bold enough to petition - ? 
 they chufe rather to acquiefce under an unjufl Sen- 
 tence. The common Punifhment is called the Ba- Punijfr- 
 taogs, where the Offender is laid flat on his Face, ?nent. 
 with his Back bare, and his Legs and Arms extend- 
 ed, \\ hile two Perfons whip his Back with fmall Sticks the Thick- 
 nefs of one's little Finger, one of them fitting on his Feet, and the 
 other at his Head, who continue to beat him, till the Perfon who 
 directs the Punifhment bids them hold their Hands. The greateft 
 Men, as well as the meaneft Slaves, fuffer this Punifhment, which 
 is fometimes inflicted with that Severity, that the Perfon dies un- 
 der it ; and yet the Power of infficling it is lodg'd in every Perfon 
 who hath Power over another, as in Noblemen, Gentlemen, Of- 
 ficers, Mailers, l$c who, on any real or pretended Fault, with- 
 out any Trial, arbitrarily exercife this Difcipline on thofe under 
 their Power ; and the Perfon punifh'd is oblig'd to own himfelf in 
 a Fault, or be tormented till he does. He muff, alfo fall down 
 before his Lord or Matter, with his Face to the Ground, and 
 thank him for being fo. merciful to inflict no more Stripes on him. 
 It is not an uncommon thing for the inferior Judges and Magi- 
 llrates to undergo this Punifhment, and yet be continued in their 
 Polls : For it is not the Cuitom of Mofcoxy to turn their Officers 
 out of Bufmefs for little knavifh Practices, but to inflict corporal 
 Punifhment on them, or put them in fome inferior Employment. 
 Robbers and Murderers are fometimes hung upon Iron Hooks by 
 the Ribs ; the Dread of which ( as it feems to be a modern Piece 
 of Cruelty) flrikes a great Terror into People, and may be a 
 Means to lefTen the Number of the Ruffians in this Country. 
 They have a Method of forcing a Perfon to difcover his Accom- 
 plices, or extorting a Confeffion frcm him, which, for its Cruelty, 
 comes almofl up to the Dilcipline of the lnquifition. The Offend- 
 er's Hands are tied together behind his Body, and then he is drawn 
 up with a Pully , a great Weight being at the fame time hung at 
 his Feet, and being thus hoifled up, his Shoulder-bones are djflo- 
 cated, and his Arms come right over his Head. While he is 
 hanging in this Poflure, the Executioner is ordered to give him a 
 certain Number of Strokes with a Whip, which is ufually exer- 
 cifed very leifurely, while a Clerk of the Court examines him as 
 to his Guilt, the Number of his Accomplices, &c. after which 
 he is taken down, his Bones fet, and he is remanded to Prifon. 
 But if he be charg'd with Trcafon, or fome other capital Crime, 
 after the Offender is taken down, he is tied to a long Pole, as upon 
 a Spit, and his raw Back held to the Fire, till the Examiners have 
 extorted fuch a Confeffion from him as they think fufficient. 
 
 Trade.
 
 3o Trefent State of MO S CO VT. Part II. 
 
 Trade.] Before the Reign of Edward VI. Ruffia, having 
 no Communication with any other than the White Sea, and the 
 Frozen Ocean, at that Time unfrequented, and indeed perfectly 
 unknown to any other Nation, had then but a very (lender Share 
 of foreign Trade. Their Furs, and other Merchandize, came to 
 us thro' Livonia, which was under another Sovereign, and often 
 at War with Ruffia ; and the Courfe of what Trade they had was 
 often interrupted by that Means. But the Englijh difcovering the 
 White Sea, a Trade was carried on at Archangel, which they en- 
 joyed near Twenty-five or Thirty Years, without Interruption, 
 when the Dutch began to put in for a Share of it. Mofcovy takes 
 from England fome coarfe Cloth, Long-ells, Worfted Stuffs, Tin, 
 Lead, Tobacco, and a few other Commodities. England imports 
 from Mofcovy Hemp, Flax, Linnen Cloth, Linnen Yarn, Ruffia 
 Leather, Tallow, Furs, Iron, Pot-afh, &c. to an immenfe Value. 
 Having no other Market to go to for Hemp, where any great 
 Quantities may be had, they are paid their own Price for what 
 we take of them. As to the Manufactures lately fet up. they do 
 not yet turn to any great Account. They are fupplied with Cloth 
 from PruJJia and England, but chiefly from the latter, which is 
 by the Mofccviies acknowledged to be the beft ; yet they, for 
 Reafons beft known to themfelves, lay out their Money in Pruffia. 
 They make their own Gun-powder out of the Brimftone and 
 Saltpetre the Country produces, and may probably export great 
 Quantities of it in time, there being abundantly more than fuf- 
 ficient for their own Ufe. And, as Labour is very cheap, and 
 they have Plenty of Iron and Steel, it is fuppofed they may be in 
 a Capacity fhortly to furnifh Foreigners with Fire-arms. Though 
 Ruffia may have many Advantages of her Neighbours in point of 
 Trade, yet this Country labours under great Discouragements in 
 this Article. For the Government monopolize the principal 
 Commodities of the Growth of the Country, buying up large 
 Quantities of them, and then, fetting an extravagant Value upon 
 them, prohibit the Subjects to fell any of the fame kind of Goods 
 to Foreigners, till the Czarina's are difpofed of. Again, when 
 any foreign Merchants arrive, the Government will not fuffer a 
 Subject to purchafe their Merchandizes, till the Czarina is firft 
 ferv'd. But fhould it ever enter into the Heart of their Monarch 
 to enfranchife the People, and fecure to them the Products of their 
 Induftry, which the late Czar was about to do, no Nation in Eu- 
 rope, probably, would make a betterFigure ; confidering how long 
 the Englijb and Dutch have furnifhed the Ruffians with Ship- 
 builders, inftructed them in the Arts of War, Navigation, and 
 other Sciences, and render'd them fo expert and formidable, that 
 nothing but their own Mifmanagement can prevent their engrof- 
 fing mod of the Trade of the World. 
 
 Rbve-
 
 Chap. XII. Prefent State of M0SCQV2\ 301 
 
 Revenues.] Notwithstanding the great Expences the Czar 
 was put to in raifing and maintaining his Fleets, and vaft Armies, 
 in the laft Wars, and carrying on fo many great Buildings and 
 Fortifications, yet he had contra&ed no Debts, but always found 
 frefh Supplies in his Dominions, to fupport every Enterprize he 
 went upon. The fixt Revenues may amount to Two Millions 
 Sterl. The variable Taxes which are laid upon the Subjects may 
 amount to what the Monarch thinks proper, or what he may 
 have Occafion for ; and thefe variable Revenues are chiefly rais'd 
 upon Houfes, Coinage, and ftrong Liquors. 
 
 Forces.] The Mofcovites have very near 120,000 regular 
 Troops, exercis'd and difciplin'd after the modern Way, com- 
 manded either by Officers which have been invited into their Ser- 
 vice from Abroad, or fuch as have been taken out of the Nurfery of 
 the Guards, wherein the Czar, to induce others to imitate him, 
 ferv'd himfelf, firit as a Drummer, then Corporal, and afterwards 
 Serjeant, till he gradually rofe to be Captain, appearing at certain 
 Times at their Head, and exercifing them himfelf. The Ruj/ians 
 imagin'd, that he did this only for his Diverfion, and the ancient 
 Troops of the Kingdom feem'd delighted with the Performance 
 of their Exerciles : Whereupon this little Company ( which con- 
 fided only of Fifty Men ) grew into feveral Regiments, and be- 
 came a Match for the ancient Troops, which was not taken no- 
 tice of by them till it was uo late. Before this the Land Forces 
 amounted to about 40,000 undifciplin'd Men, compos'd of the in- 
 ferior Gentry, or defcended from younger Branches of great 
 Families ; and thefe Troops having been concerned in fome In- 
 furreftions againft the late Czar, he fent them upon the moft de- 
 fperate Services in the late War, whereby they were moft of them 
 cut off, and the other were inroll'd among the foreign and new- 
 difciplin'd Troops introduc'd by that Monarch. The Troops, at 
 prefent, are thought not to be inferior to thofe of any Nation 
 whatever. There is no Power in Europe which does and can main- 
 tain fo great a Force with fo little Charge, as may be gathered 
 from the. Farmers being obliged to fupply the Army with Provi- 
 fions, and alfo to furnifh Men, either to recruit the old Troops, or 
 raife new ones. Before the laft Reign the Mo/covites 
 had fcarce a Ship of their own, or a Man amongft Navy. 
 them that knew any thing of Navigation ; but the 
 late Czar obferving, how abfolutcly neceflary a Fleet was in his 
 Wars with Turkey and Sweden, and that other Nations ufually 
 made a Figure, and increas'd in Wealth, in proportion to their 
 Number of Shipping, built a Fleet, at Verontfa confifting of 
 Forty or Fifty Men of War, befides GalUei, which were dehgn'd 
 
 for
 
 302 Pre/em State of MO SCO VT. Part 1L 
 
 for the Black Sea, after the taking of Afoph ; and he was at a vaft 
 Expence of Men and Money in fortifying the Harbour of Tagan- 
 rock, near the Mouth of the Don, for their Reception ; but upon 
 his being oblig'd to furrender Afopb to the Turks, this Fleet be- 
 came of no Service, but lay and rotted in the River. This, how- 
 ever, did not difcourage that enterprising Monarch ; but, having 
 fortified the Ifland of Cronjlot, in the Gulph of Finland, which 
 open'd him a Communication with the Baltic, he proceeded, with 
 unwearied Diligence, to build another Royal Navy, in which he 
 had fuch Succefs, that he was able to engage the Svjcdijb Fleet, 
 and gave them feveral Defeats during his Reign. And, at prefent, 
 the Mofconjites can fit out above Fifty, Men of War of the Line, 
 in the Baltic, betides Frigates, and feveral Hundreds of Gallies ; 
 and fome of their Men of War are 90 Gun Ships, as good as 
 can be built, and fupplied with all manner of Necefliiries ; and 
 Hands they do not want, but good Sailors. 
 
 Character. ] The Mofconjites are of a good Stature, and 
 generally inclin'd to be corpulent ; at leaft, this is what they \ery 
 much endeavour after, and admire. Their Features and Comple- 
 xions are tolerably good ; and they are commonly blefled with a 
 hale and vigorous Conftitution. They, till the laft Reign, valued 
 themfelves much upon their long Reards, which the late Czar 
 compelPd them to part with, fometimes by laying a greatTax upon 
 them, and at other times by ordering thofe he found with Beards 
 on to have them pulPd up by the Roots, or (hav'd with a blunt 
 Razor, which drew the Skin after it. The Temper of the Ruf- 
 fians is not much admir'd : They are held indeed ' to have good 
 Parts, and capable of imitating any thing they fee done ; but are 
 very deceitful, and intolerably proud and llothful, and can hardly 
 be brought to learn any Art or Science without the Difcipline of 
 the Whip. They are very felf-interefted ; and, 'tis faid, the Ge- 
 nerality of the People value themfelves on over-reaching one an- 
 other ; for the Terms Honeft Man and a Fool are, with them, of 
 the fame Import. They are very much given to exceflive Drink- 
 ing ; and even the Priefts are faid to be fhamefully abandon'd to 
 this deteftable Vice ; and the Women of Quality are fo little 
 afham'd of drinking to Excefs, that they will thank their Friends 
 for the Favour done them in making them very drunk. 
 
 Religion. ] The Religion of Mofcovy is that of the Doctrine 
 of the Greek Church. Chriftianity was firft introduced among 
 them about the Year 989. though, according to their Tradition, 
 St. Andrew firft planted the Gofpel in this Country. But how- 
 ever that be, it is agreed, that Paganifm had again overfpread the 
 Face of the Empire, and that Chriftianity did not revive till about 
 
 the
 
 Chap. XII. Prefint State of MOSCOVT. 303 
 
 the Tenth Century. They had their Patriarch till the laft Reign, 
 who was veiled almoft with Sovereign Power ; but the late Czar 
 feiz'd his Revenues, and entirely fupprefs'd the Office. The Mof- 
 coxites render Divine Worfhip to the Virgin Mary, and other 
 Saints, and alfo to Croffes : They ufe Confeffion to the Priefts, 
 and have a great many ridiculous Ceremonies of their own ; but 
 they neither adore the Sacrament, nor believe the ftrange Doctrine 
 of Tranfubilantiation. The prefent Government allow Liberty 
 of Confcience to all Denominations of Chriftians ; and will admit 
 Foreigners to their Religious Worfhip. and to be buried in their 
 Church-yards ; which are Favours they would have made fome 
 Difficulty in granting, before the Reformations made by the late 
 Czar. 
 
 Customs.] When any Perfon makes a Vifit, on entring his 
 Friend's Houie, he firft looks about for the Saint, and, having 
 difcover'd it, makes a low Reverence towards the Place, and, if 
 his Devotion be very warm, falls on his Face to the Ground be- 
 fore it, eroding himfelf, and faying, Lord, have Mercy upon me ; 
 after which he turns about, and falutes the Mailer of the Family, 
 and the reft of the Company ; and the Lady prefents him with a 
 Dram, and fuffers him to kifs her Cheek ; after which it was 
 cuftomary for her to withdraw, and appear no more during the 
 Entertainment : But the late Czar introduced the Cuftom of Ladies 
 converfing more familiarly with the Gentlemen, by which he en- 
 tirely won the Hearts of the Ruffian Dames. On Palm-Sunday 
 there is a grand Proceflion of the Clergy through the capital 
 City, when the Patriarch ( before the late Czar fupprefs'd his Of- 
 fice ) ufed to ride at the Head of them, and in his Right-hand he 
 held a gilded Crofs, with which he bleffed the People ; the Czar 
 himfelf marching on Foot before him, holding the Reins of his 
 Bridle in one Hand, and a Palm-branch in the other. The Me/co- 
 vites, in Winter, travel in Sledges almoft of the Shape of a little 
 cover'd Boat, and are fo clofely (hut up, that the leaft Air cannot 
 enter them : On each Side is a little Window, and a Shelf to lay 
 Provifions or other NecefTaries upon, and over the Head is fix'd a 
 Lantern with Wax Candles ; the lower Part of the Sledge is fur- 
 nifhed with- Bedding, fn which the Traveller wraps' himfelf ; and 
 at his Feet there is a Stove. In this Vehicle a Man is carried 
 fwiftly, Night and Day ; there being no Inns to bait at in many 
 Parts of the Country : But, upon the great Roads, the late Czar 
 caus'd Houfes of Entertainment to be fet up, at every Fifteen or 
 Twenty Miles Difiance, where Poll-horfes are always ready; which 
 renders the Communication between Mofconv, Peterjburg, and 
 Arcbangej, extremely eafy. The Men lately wore on their Heads 
 a Cap in form of a Sugar-loaf, turn'd up with Furs, a Veil, and 
 
 a looic
 
 304 Prefent State of MO SCO VT. Part II; 
 
 a loofe Robe over it down to their Heels, and Boots on their 
 Legs ; but the late Czar, looking upon our Drefs as more com- 
 modious, when he return'd from his Travels, oblig'd his Subjetts 
 to conform themfelves to it ; which fome of the Ruffians making a 
 Difficulty to comply with, he plac'd Guards at the Gates of their 
 Cities, who cut the Cloaths of all that pafs'd by as fhort as their 
 Knees, and, inilead of their Fur Caps, they now wear Hats like 
 other Europeans. The Women, whofe Drefs did not differ much 
 from that of the Mens, except in the ordering their Hair, at pre- 
 lent follow the German or French Mode. Before the Company fits 
 down at an Entertainment, the Miftrefs of the Houfe, of what 
 Quality foever, always prefents every one of the Guefts with a 
 Cup of Brandy, on a Plate, with her own Hands ; and, during 
 the Meal, Healths go round very freely, in large Cups ; and, in 
 about two or three Hours time, drink themfelves afleep j and, 
 after a fhort Repofe, begin to drink afrefh. Mr. Whitwortb, 
 Queen Anne's EmbafTador in Ruffia, relates, that, at an Entertain- 
 ment he was invited to in that Country, he was oblig'd, after he 
 had drank down a Dozen Bumpers of Hungary Wine at Dinner, to 
 take off", in his Turn, a full Quart of Brandy at two Draughts ; 
 but he made fuch effectual Reprefentations againft this Force put 
 upon him and his People to the Prime Minifter at that Court, 
 that they were afterwards allow'd their Liberty. 
 
 Curiosities. ] The ftrange Sort of Melon, found in the 
 Southern Parts of this Country, may be reckon'd as one of the 
 chief Rarities : It refembles a Lamb, and its Heat confumes all 
 the Herbs within its Reach ; as the Fruit ripen, the Stalk decays, 
 and is covered with a Subftance exactly like Wool, fhort and curl- 
 ing ; the Skin being drefs'd as Tanners ufually do the flefhy Side 
 of Lamb-fkins without taking off the Wool, no Perfon can diftin- 
 guifh between the Skin of this Vegetable ( if we may allow it to 
 be fuch ) and that of a common Lamb. The Mofcovites ufe the 
 Skin of this Thing, inftead of Furs, for lining of their Vefts. 
 The ftately Church, in the City of Mo/coiju, call the Jerufa/em, 
 feem'd to John Bajilides I. then Czar, fuch an extraordinary Pile 
 of Building, that he ordered the Eyes of the Architect to be put 
 out, that he might never contrive or behold its Fellow. 
 
 CHAP.
 
 Chap. XIII. Prefent State of POL AND. 
 
 305 
 
 CHAP. XIII. 
 
 The prefent State of POLAND. 
 
 Boundaries.] pOLAND ( known .in the Time of the Romans by the 
 Name of Sarmatia Eurapaa) is bounded on the Eaft 
 by Mofctwy and Letter Tartary, on the Weft by Germany, on the North 
 by the Baltic Sea, Livonia, and Mofcovy, and on the South by Waluchia, 
 Tranfylvania, and Hungary. 
 
 Situation. ] This Kingdom is fituated between 46 7 and 57 -^ Deg. 
 North Latitude, and between 15 and 33 Deg. Eaft Longitude. The 
 Length whereof 780 Miles, and Breadth 540 Miles. 
 
 Divifion and Sub- 
 divi'fion. 
 
 POLAND 
 
 1. Pot and proper 
 
 1 . Leffer Poland 
 
 I .Pal. oiCraconu 
 
 2. P. of Sendomir 
 3 Pal. of Lublin 
 
 2. Greater Poland 
 I. P. of Pofnania 
 z.?a\<u.of Kalijb 
 
 3. Pal. oiSiradia 
 4-Palat. of Rava 
 
 5 . P. of Lanfchet 
 
 6. Pala. of Br ejly 
 ~. V. of IncnvlocZ 
 
 2. Lithuania 
 
 1 . Palat. of Wilna 
 
 2. Pal. of Brajlaiu 
 
 3. Pal. of Polocsko 
 ^.^.ofWhittpJk 
 
 5. Palatin.of Troki 
 
 6. Palat. of Af/'*// 
 
 7. Pal. of MciJIaiv 
 
 Square Miles, 
 
 I&300 
 
 Part of ancient 
 
 Ger mania. 
 Length 230 
 Breadth 130 
 19200 
 
 Part of ancient 
 
 Germania. 
 Length 208 
 Breadth 180 
 
 64800 
 Length 330 
 Breadth 310 
 This Dukedom 
 ( Part of the old 
 Venedi) is inde- 
 pendent, but 
 united to Poland. 
 
 Chief Towns' DiftancS and Bearing 
 in each of each Town from 
 Divifidn. the Capital of each 
 grand Divifion. 
 
 iVracoyj, 
 Cracovia, 
 fuppof. the 
 Carodunum 
 of Ptolemy 
 Sendomir 
 Lublin 
 
 Pofnan 
 
 Kdlijb 
 
 Siradia 
 
 Rwva 
 
 La'ncicia 
 
 Uladijlatv 
 
 Crufwick 
 
 Wilna 
 Brajlarjti 
 Polccz 
 Wbiiepjka 
 Troki 
 Minjkl 
 MciJIarj 
 X 
 
 !l 80 NE of Vienna 
 640 E of Paris 
 8ioSWofMo/w 
 400 SE of Copenb. 
 540 S of Stockhohn 
 78NE ^ 
 H8NE 
 
 174 NW 
 132 NW 
 
 1 1 2 NW 
 
 112 N 
 
 136N 
 170 N 
 94 N 
 
 ^ofCracony 
 
 of Wilna 
 
 DivifiAa
 
 306 Prefent State of POLAND. 
 
 Divifion and Sub- Square Miles, 
 
 Part II. 
 
 divifion, 
 
 8 .P '.ofNovogrodeck 
 
 3. Prussia Regal 
 
 1 . P. of Pomerelia 
 
 2. Pal. of Culm 
 
 3. Palatinate of 
 Marienburg 
 
 4. Samogitia 
 This Province is a 
 
 very marfhy Soil, 
 and its Inhabit- 
 ants very dull 
 and ft upid. 
 
 5. Courland 
 
 1 . Eaftern 
 
 2. Weftern 
 
 6. Warsovia 
 
 1 . Warfowa prop. 
 
 2. Plockjko 
 
 3. Pal. of" Polachia 
 7.P0LESIA 
 
 This Province is a 
 very marfhy Soil, 
 and abounds with 
 Forelts and Ri- 
 vers. 
 
 8. Red Russia 
 
 1. Pal. of Lemberg 
 
 2. Pal. of Be/z 
 3 .?a.\.ofCbelm 
 
 9. PoDOLIA 
 
 i . Weftern 
 2. Eaftern 
 10. Volhinia 
 
 1. Weftern 
 
 2. Eaftern 
 
 &c. 
 
 Chief Towns 
 
 in each 
 
 Divifion. 
 
 6400 
 Part of old Ger- 
 mccnia and jE- 
 faei. 
 
 8000 
 The Seat of the 
 old Ombrones, 
 and Part of JE- 
 fai. 
 
 4414 
 The Seat of the 
 old Sciri, and 
 Part of JEfati. 
 
 12400 
 Part of the an- 
 cient Venedi. 
 
 14000 
 The Seat of the 
 old Carpint, arid 
 of the Venedi. 
 
 25200 
 Part of the old 
 Peuceni. 
 
 29000 
 Part of the old 
 Bajlatnee. 
 
 25000 
 Part of ancient 
 Bajiamar. 
 
 Novogrodeck 
 
 Dantzick 
 Culm 
 
 Marienburg 
 Rofienie 
 
 Midnick 
 Birza 
 
 Diftance and Bearing 
 of each Town from 
 the Capital of each 
 grand Divifion. 
 
 73 S of Wilna 
 
 255 N of Cracow 
 
 5^ 1 of Dantzic 
 20 SE y 
 
 360 NE of Cracow 
 
 > Mittaw 
 Goldingen 
 
 s Warfaw 
 
 Plockjko 
 
 Bielk 
 
 Brefiici 
 
 Koden 
 
 KaminitC 
 
 Motol 
 
 Kozan 
 
 Lemberg 
 
 Belz 
 
 Cbelm 
 
 S- Caminieck 
 
 Braclaw 
 
 Luc ko 
 
 Kotelina 
 
 20 NW 
 
 70 NE 
 
 1 of Pofu 
 
 heme 
 
 415 NE of Cracow 
 56 W of Mit taw 
 
 148 N of Cracow 
 
 48NW) tar , 
 io8NEj of * r/ 
 198 NE of Cracow 
 ,;S 
 
 \i& 
 
 108 E 
 
 r 
 
 147 E of Cracow 
 4^ I of Lemberg 
 
 270 SE of Cracow 
 103 E of Caminieck 
 2 1 3 F. of Cracow 
 140 E of Lucio 
 
 Climate. J The Air of this Country is, in general, temperate and 
 healthful, but exceflive cold towards the North ; and as it lies almoft ih 
 the Middle of a large Continent, at a Diftance from the Sea in moft Parts, 
 the Weather is more fcrcne and fettled, both in Winter and Summer, 
 
 than
 
 Chap. XIII. Prefent Slate of POLAND. 307 
 
 than in thofe Countries which border on the Ocean. The Face of 
 this Kingdom is, in general, level, and well watered with Lakes 
 and Rivera : The Soil is exceeding fertile, and affords more Corn 
 than any Country in Europe, particularly Rye and Wheat. There 
 are alfo Meadows and Pafture-grounds in Poland. The longeft 
 Day, in the moll Northern Parts of the Kingdom, is about \j 
 Hours ; and the longeit Day, in the Souchmoft, i 5 j Hours ; 
 this Country lies in the 7th, 8th, 9th, 10th and nth Northern 
 Climates. 
 
 Government. ] The legislative Authority feeras to be lodg'd 
 in the King, the Senate, and the Deputies or Reprefentatives of 
 the Nobility and Gentry. This Monarch lives in great Splendo* ; 
 but, if we confider his Power, which is circumfcrib'd within very 
 narrow Bounds, he is in Effect no more than the chief Regent in 
 a free Commonwealth. This Kitig is always chofen by a free 
 Election, where every Nobleman there prefent has his Vote ; and 
 tho' the Poles have been always inclin'd to keep to the Royal 
 Race, yet have they never been for declaring a Succeffor during 
 the Life of the King. Upon a Demife of the Crown, the Regal 
 Authority devolves upon the Primate of the Kingdom, the Arch- 
 biihop of G/iefna, till a Succeffor is chofen : This Prelate iffues 
 out circular Letters to every Palatinate, to acquaint them with 
 the Vacancy of the Throne, and fummons a general Affembly of 
 the Nobility to meet at Warfamo, for the Election of a new King 
 at the Time therein prefix'd. The Nobility affemble, on this 
 Occafion, in a large Plain, half a League from Warfa<w y where 
 a boarded Room is eredted for the Senators, the reft of the Nobi- 
 lity fitting on Horfeback in the open Field. Before the Election, 
 the Senators, and moil of the Nobility, go in Proccffion to the 
 great Church at Harfaiv, to implore the Direction of Heaven in 
 their Choice ; after which they return to the Place above-men- 
 tioned. The Nobility and Gentry have the Power of putting fucli 
 new Conditions and Limitations on the Prince to be elecled as they 
 fee fit : And they muft be unanimous in the Choice of a King ; 
 for, if one fingle Gentleman oppofes the relt, and protelts againft 
 the Election, it is void. It very feldom happens, indeed, that 
 any Party of Men amongft them venture to oppofe the Majority, 
 unlefs they are fure of being very well fupported and feconded ; 
 for the Majority make no Scruple of drawing their Sabres, and 
 cutting thofe in Pieces who oppofe their Choice ; or, if the Parties 
 are pretty near equal, they fight it out, till one is obliged to yield 
 and fubmit to the other, and fo a general Confent is fore'd at laft. 
 All Preliminaries being fettled, the Senators and Nobility range 
 themfelves in Order under their refpettive Palatines, the Primate 
 only keeping his Scat ; and the firlt Senator of every Palatinate 
 
 X 2 tukc
 
 308 Prefent State of POL AN A Part 1L 
 
 takes their Votes, which are written on a Roll, and tranfmitted to 
 the Marfhal of the Nobility. The Election being over, the new 
 King figns the Patta Conventa, whereby he is not to make the 
 Crown hereditary, nor make War or Peace, levy Soldiers, &c. 
 without the Confent of the Diet. By the Laws of Poland the 
 Father's Eftate is equally divided among his Children ; but here, 
 as in moft Popifh Countries, the younger Children are encouraged 
 by their Parents to go into a Monaftery, to prevent the Eftate from 
 dwindling away to nothing, Where the Iffue is numerous. 
 
 Trade.] The Hollanders load feveral hundred Veflels every 
 Year with Wheat and Rye, to tranfport to their own or other 
 Countries. If there happen to be a Scarcity in any other Part of 
 Europe, they feldom fail of being fupplied here. Great Numbers 
 of Black Cattle are fatted, and fent into Germany. Their other 
 Exports are, Barley, Oats, Pulfe, Sheep, Hogs, Hemp, Flax, 
 Linnen, Hops, Hides, Tallow, Leather, Furs brought out of 
 Mofcovy, and drefs'd here, Polijh Furs, Honey, Wax, Amber, 
 Pot-afhes, Pitch, Mails, Planks, Salt, Beer, Vitriol, Nitre, Lead, 
 Iron, Copper, Glafs, Pit-coal, Earthen Ware, and, laftly, Wool 
 in great Plenty, and tolerably good. Their Imports confift in 
 Cloth, Silk, Tapeftries, Jewels, Gold and Silver, Wines, Spices, 
 Salt Fifh, Fruit, and Tin. Notwithftanding their Exports are fo 
 large and valuable, the Imports far exceed them, and the Balance 
 of Trade is vaftly againft them. 
 
 Revenues. ] The King's ftated Revenue rs about 140,000 / 
 per Annum, which, with his paternal Eftate, and the Money he 
 jaifes by conferring Offices, enable him to keep a very fplendid 
 Court ; for he has no Civil Lift, or Forces to pay, thefe being 
 provided for by the Republic; and they impofeTaxes for that Pur- 
 pofei as the Exigencies of Affairs require. 
 
 Forces. ] If the Poles will ftretch a little their Purfes, they 
 are able enough to raife fufficient Sums for the maintaining of 
 a great Army. But the Clergy and Nobility are quickly weary 
 of paying Taxes for this Purpofe, except in Cafes of the highelt 
 Necefllty. And this is the Reafon why the King of Poland can- 
 not carry on a War long with Vigour ; befides, that when the 
 Nobles are fummmoned to appear in Arms, they come flowly into 
 the Field, and are not eafily kept under Difcipline. It is faid, 
 that the Poles can bring into the Field near 250,000 Men, com- 
 pos'd chiefly of the Gentry. 
 
 Character. ] ft is to be confider'd, concerning the Polijh Na- 
 tion, that whofoever is not a Nobleman, is efteem'd a Boor: L'or the 
 
 Inhabitants
 
 Chap. XIII. Prefent State of POLAND. 309 
 
 Inhabitants of the Cities are very little regarded, and the Tradef- 
 men are moftly Foreigners ; but the Boors are look'd upon and 
 us'd no better than Slaves, being alfo very raw and barbarous both 
 in their Life and Converfation : Wherefore, when we talk of the 
 Poles, thereby ought only to be underftood the Nobility and 
 Gentry, who are commonly downright and honeft, very feldom 
 given to the Art of Diffembling ; they are of a very generous 
 Spirit, and expeft a great deal of Refpeft ; and if you give them 
 as much as they pretend to, they are no lefs courteous, and never 
 fail to make a fuitable Return ; and their Behaviour and Words 
 are full of Pomp and Ceremony. They are very liberal, or rather 
 profufe, and not given to be parfimonious, tho' they mould want 
 the next Day. This Nation alfo is very fierce and extravagant, 
 much inclin'd to an uncontroul'd Liberty, or rather Licentioufnefs 
 and Petulancy : Wherefore Plots and Confpiracies againft their 
 Kings are frequent among them, whofe Aftions they canvas with 
 a great deal of Freedom, being always jealous of the leaft Point 
 of their Liberty. They do not want Courage, but are more fit 
 to aft with a fudden Heat, than to endure long the Fatigues of 
 War. As to their Perfons, they are generally Men of handfome, 
 tall and well-proportioned Bodies, of a good and durable Comple* 
 xion, and of ftrong and vigorous Conftitution. 
 
 Religion. ] The eftablifh'd Religion in Poland is that of the 
 Roman Catholic ; and few People pofhbly are more zealous or bi- 
 gotted in their Way j which may perhaps arife from that conftant 
 Oppofition, and the Provocations they meet with from the Luthe- 
 rans and Calvinifls among them, and in their Neighbourhood. 
 In PruJJia, and in C our land, particularly, the Majority of the In- 
 habitants are Lutherans ; but the reft of Poland being an Over- 
 match for Prujfia, they have been frequently tempted to encroach 
 upon the poor Lutherans. Socinianifm feems to have made a great 
 Progrefs in this Kingdom during the laft Century, and there have 
 been Afts of State in feveral Reigns, particularly in the laft, for 
 the Extirpation of all People of that Perfuafion ; notwithftanding 
 which, they tolerate even Mahometijm itfelf, there not being lefs 
 than 30,000 Tartars in Lithuania, who are allow'd the Exercife 
 of that Religion. The Armenians; and others of the Greek 
 Church alfo, on the Frontiers of sMo/ccvy, and in Podolia, have 
 their Bifhops, Abbots, and Priefts, of their Perfuafion, and the 
 free Exercife of their Religion. And there are few Countries bet- 
 ter ftock'd with Jeivs ; fome have computed, that there arc not 
 lefs than a Million of that People difpers'd in Poland, where they 
 meet with great Indulgence from the Government. The Chri- 
 ftlan Faith was planted in the various Parts of Poland at feveral 
 Times, and' by feveral Perfons ; it being eftablifhed in Poland 
 
 X 3 properly
 
 310 Prefent State of POLAND. : Part II. 
 
 properly fo called Anno 9O5. in Lithuania Anno 1386. The Re- 
 formation of Religion began in this Country Anno 1535. but did 
 not meet with due Encouragement. 
 
 Customs. ] At an Entertainment the Poles lay neither Knives, 
 Forks nor Spoons, but every Perfon brings them with him ; and 
 they are no lboner fet down to Table, but all the Gates are fhut 
 up, and not open'd till the Company go away ; and the Plate is 
 taken Account of; for their Footmen are exceeding light-finger'd. 
 'Tis faid to be no uncommon Thipg to fee a Gentleman, at one 
 of thefe Feafts, give his Servant Part of his Meat, which he eats 
 as he Hands behind him, and to let him drink out of the fame 
 Cup with him. And tho' there is ufually great Plenty of Provi- 
 fions ferv'd up, and mech left after the Entertainment is ended, 
 yet very little is return'd to the Family, but the Gentlemens Ser- 
 vants fcize what is left ; and they have a Napkin on Purpofe, to 
 carry off the Sweet-meats for their Ladies. After Dinner Bum- 
 pers are freely taken off, as in Mofcovy ; nor will they eafily ex- 
 cufe any Perfon from pledging them. The ufual Way of Travel- 
 ing is on Horfeback ; a Pclijh Gentleman will fcarce walk a Stone's 
 Throw in a Town, without his Horfe and Equipage. There are 
 very few Inns upon the Roads ; but, in cafe of Neceflity, or 
 where there are but poor Accommodations, the Poles are fo ex- 
 tremely hospitable, that, upon applying to the Lord of any Vil- 
 lage, he will fupply the Traveller with Refrefhment gratis. 
 Their E*ercifes are Hunting, and Feats of Horfemanihip, on 
 which they value themfelves much. Leaping, Vaulting, and' 
 Jumping, are alfo much ufed here ; and Dancing is a favourite 
 Diverfion. As to their Drefs, they wear a Veil, which reaches 
 down to the Middle of the Leg, and a kind of Gown over it, 
 lin'd with Furs, and girded with a Sam. They wear a Fur-cap 
 upon their Heads ; their Ereeches are wide, and make but one 
 Piece with their Stockings ; inflead of Shoes they wear Turky, 
 Leather Boots, both at Home and Abroad. The Habit of the 
 Polijb Women comes very near that of the Mens ; except that, of 
 late Years, People of Quality feem to affect the French and Ger- 
 man Mode. The Peafanjs ufually wear a Sheep-fkin, with the 
 Wool on, in Winter j and, in the Summer, a very thick coarfe 
 Cloth. 
 
 Curiosities. ] In the moll Southern Parts of Poland are 
 divers Mountains, out of which is dug Salt in large Maffes, as 
 Stones out of a Quarry ; and out of others they dig natural 
 Earthen Cups, which, being exposed for fome time in the open Air, 
 become as tard as Stone. In the Defarts of Podolia is a Lake, 
 whofe Waters condenfe into Salt, by the Heat of the Sun only. 
 
 Near
 
 Chap. XIV. Prefent State of tURKT. 3 1 1 
 
 Near Culm is a Fountain, that conftantly fends forth a mighty fulphure- 
 ous Steam, and yet its Waters are never hot. 
 
 CHAP. XIV. 
 
 The prefent State of T u r k y in Europe. 
 
 Boundaries.] r | V HIS Part of Europe is bounded by Poland, Ger- 
 JL many, the Euxine, Archipelago, and Gulf of Ve~ 
 nice; comprehending the Roman Diocefes of Macedonia or Greece, Dacia, 
 Thrace, and moll of lllyricum; with fome little Part of the old Sarmatia. 
 Anciently fome Part of the Macedonian Empire, afterwards all under the 
 Romans, then a great Part of it was over-run by the Goths, Sclaves, 
 Huns, and Bulgarians ; about the Year 1450. the Turks in their Turn 
 drove out the Weftern Emperors. 
 
 Situation.] It extends from the 35th to the 49th Deg. North 
 Latitude; and from the 14th and 31ft Beg. Eaft Longitude. 
 
 Divifion, &c. 
 
 TVRKT in Europe 
 
 1. Romania 
 This Province was 
 anciently divided 
 into 20 feveral 
 Nations, accord- 
 ing to Pliny, and 
 were afterwards 
 made tributary 
 to the Macedo- 
 nians. It was 
 conquer'd by the 
 Romans, and pof- 
 fefs'd by the 
 Eaftern Empe- 
 rors.and after fell 
 under the Do- 
 minion of the 
 Turks about 300 
 Years fmce. 
 
 Square Miles, 
 
 ChiefTowns. 
 
 21200 
 
 The greateftPart 
 of old Thrace. 
 Sejlos is famous 
 for the Bridge 
 of Boats which 
 Xerxes laid over 
 the Hellefpont 
 here. 
 
 Diflance and Bearing 
 from the Capital of 
 each grand Divifion. 
 
 "1 Confianti- 
 [nople olim 
 C Byzan- 
 
 J titan 
 
 Adrianople 
 
 Trajanople 
 
 Philippopoli 
 
 Gallipoli 
 
 Sejlos 
 
 Rodojlo 
 
 P 700 SE of Vienna 
 \ 740 E of Rome 
 J I 200 SE of Paris 
 (_ 680 SE of Cracow 
 135 NW 
 
 130 W 
 200 N W 
 80 SW 
 115 SW 
 69 SW 
 
 of Con- 
 stanti- 
 nople 
 
 Divifion,
 
 312 
 
 Divifion, &c. 
 
 Trefent State of TURKT. Part I J. 
 
 2. Bulgaria 
 This Province is 
 
 generally moun- 
 tainous; but the 
 Vallies are fruit- 
 ful, feeding Plen- 
 ty of Oxen and 
 Sheep : Is pretty 
 much infefted 
 with Robbers. 
 
 3. Bessarabia 
 This Province was 
 
 the ancient Seat 
 of the Befit, in 
 the Time of 
 Ptolemy, who, 
 being driven out 
 by the Bulga- 
 rians, tettied 
 themfelves, 'tis 
 faid, in Bo/nia. 
 
 4. Moldavia 
 This Province is 
 
 tributary to the 
 Turks, but go- 
 vem'dby its own 
 Prince. | 
 
 5. WaLACHIA 
 
 This Province is 
 alfo govern'd by 
 its own Prince, 
 but tributary to 
 the Turks. 
 6. Servia 
 
 The Tribali, of 
 this Province, 
 had the Honour 
 to defeat Philip 
 of Mace don, in 
 his Return from 
 pn Expedition in- 
 to Sarmatia. 
 
 Square Miles, 
 
 Bulgaria ( con- 
 taining the old 
 Masjta Inferior, 
 the Roman Scy- 
 thia, and fome 
 of Thrace) with 
 Bejfarabia, con- 
 contains about ' 
 
 25000 Sq. Mil. 
 
 This Province 
 contains Part of 
 old Dacia Alpe- 
 firis oxGet<e, and 
 a little Of S ar- 
 maria. 
 
 26000 
 Part of the old 
 Dacia Alpsjiris 
 or Gette. 
 
 105000 
 Part of old Da- 
 cia or Get<$. 
 
 22570 
 Servia contains 
 old Mcefia Supe- 
 rior, Dardania, 
 and Part of old 
 Dalmatia. 
 
 ChiefTowns, 
 
 Sophia 
 
 Silijlria 
 
 Nicopolis 
 
 Vidjin 
 
 Varna 
 
 Mefembria 
 
 Bender 
 Biellogrod 
 Kilia 
 Kovaja . 
 
 7**9 
 
 Soczoiva 
 Targorod 
 Niemeez 
 
 Targovijbo 
 
 Buchareji 
 
 Brajkouu 
 
 Nifa 
 
 Giufiandil 
 Scopia ' 
 Ibar 
 
 Di (lance and Bearing 
 from the Capital of 
 each grand Divifion. 
 
 240 NW oiConJlant. 
 
 69 NE 
 
 60 NE 
 
 95 N ^of Sophia 
 
 225 NE 
 
 180 E 
 
 275 NE of Con ft ant, 
 102 SEV 
 105 SEi of Bender 
 93SS. J 
 
 390 N of Conftaniin. 
 
 45 SW 1 
 
 60 SW \ of Jazy 
 
 60 W S 
 
 288 NW of Conftant. 
 
 3 30 N of Conftantin. 
 
 *oe r 
 
 "65 S S. of Nifa 
 40 SW J 
 
 Divifion,
 
 Chap. XIV. 
 Divifion, cjfr. 
 
 J 
 
 Prefent State of tURKT. 313 
 
 Square Miles, I ChiefTowns. j Diftance and Bearing 
 sV . j from the Capital of 
 
 each grand Divifion. 
 
 7. Croatia 
 This Province, for 
 the molt part, is 
 cold and moun- 
 tainous ; but yet 
 fruitful enough. 
 
 S. Bosnia 
 The Air is fliarp, 
 but the Soil pro- 
 duces Corn, and 
 fome Mines of 
 Gold and Silver. 
 
 9. Dalmatia 
 
 At the Declenfion 
 of the Eaftern 
 Empire, the Sc ta- 
 xi made it Part 
 oftheirKingdom. 
 
 10. Budziack 
 Tartary 
 
 $ubje& to the 
 'Turk,. 
 
 11. Little Tar- 
 
 tary 
 Subject to the 
 Turks. 
 
 12. Crim Tar- 
 
 tary 
 Tributary to the 
 Turks ; one of 
 the moft popu- 
 lous Provinces in 
 Europe. 
 
 13. Ragusa, Rep. 
 Tributary to the 
 
 Turks. 
 
 14. Macedonia 
 .Formerly famous 
 
 for its Mines of 
 Gold and Silver. 
 
 15. Albania 
 
 Croatia was an- 
 ciently called z- 
 burnia, then a 
 Part of Datma~ 
 
 tia. 
 
 8640 
 Anciently Part 
 of Pannonia* 
 
 4560 
 The ancient In- 
 habitants were 
 call'd Dalmata 
 by the Romans. 
 
 12000 
 The Roman Sey- 
 thia. 
 
 18000 
 The Scythia of 
 the Romans. 
 
 8200 
 Taurica Cherfo 
 nefus ; Part of 
 old Sarmatia. 
 
 Part of old Dal- 
 matia. 
 
 18980 
 Part of old Ma- 
 cedonia, with a 
 little of Thef- 
 faly. 
 
 6 375 
 
 Whihitz. 
 
 Zeng 
 
 Carl/tat 
 
 Seraio 
 
 Bagnaluck 
 
 Tina 
 
 Narem:* 
 
 Mo/tar 
 
 Trebigna 
 
 Ozaioxu 
 
 Zerna 
 
 Wixaradna 
 
 Precop 
 
 J/tam 
 
 Zernaja 
 
 Bakzifarai 
 
 Kafa 
 
 Koflof 
 
 Korjibas 
 
 Belbeg 
 
 Ragufa 
 
 Theffalonica 
 
 Contejfa 
 
 Afera 
 
 Scodt 
 
 ru 
 
 620 NW of Conftant. 
 6oNVv} of ^'^ 
 
 5i8NWofC<?//*r. 
 50 SWJ f c . 
 
 500 W of Conftatit. 
 
 CT? t ofNarenza 
 40 SE J 
 
 290 NE of Conftant. 
 6oN E } of0 *^ w 
 38oNEof Conftant. 
 
 370 NE of Conftant. 
 70 SE 
 
 40 W I of Bakzi- 
 80 E \ farai 
 42 S 
 
 Sot 
 
 \ 
 } 
 
 255 w 
 62 E I 
 25NWJ 
 
 ofConftan- 
 tinople 
 
 of Theffa- 
 lonica 
 
 406 W of Confiant. 
 Divifiqn,
 
 3*4 
 
 Divifion, &c. 
 
 Preftnt State cJTURKT. Part II. 
 
 ChiefTowns. Di fiance and Bearing 
 
 The Soil produces 
 good Wine, Flax 
 and Cotton, and 
 Salt dug out of 
 the Mountains. 
 j6. Epirus 
 
 The Soil is ex- 
 tremely good. 
 
 17. Thessalt 
 
 It enjoys a fruit- 
 ful Soil, health- 
 ful Air, and pro- 
 duces delicious 
 Fruits. 
 
 18. Achaia 
 This Country is 
 
 the moft consi- 
 derable Part of 
 Greece, upon ac- 
 count of the ma- 
 ny famous Cities. 
 
 rg. Morea 
 
 The Soil produces 
 Plenty of Corn, 
 Wine, Oil, and 
 molt delicious 
 Fruits. The Na- 
 tives are efleem'd 
 ingenious and 
 warlike, imitat- 
 ing their Ance- 
 ftors, who main- 
 tain'd a War a- 
 gainft the Athe- 
 nians for 27 
 Years ; which is 
 the Subject of the 
 excellent Hifto- 
 ries of Tbucydides 
 and Xenophov.. 
 
 20. Iflands 
 1 . Candia 
 
 Square Miles, 
 
 Containing the 
 reft of ancient 
 Macedonia, and 
 the Roman-Pra- 
 valitana. 
 
 ^ ^955 
 
 The ancient 
 Epirus. 
 
 The greateftPart 
 of ancient fbef- 
 falia. 
 
 3420 
 Containing old 
 jEtolia and A- 
 carnania, Phocis, 
 Doris, Locris, 
 Baeotia, Attica, 
 and Megaris. 
 
 7220' 
 Anciently called 
 Peloponnefus, and 
 containing old 
 Achaia propria, 
 Syconia, Corin- 
 thia, Argolis, 
 Arcadia, and 
 Laconia. 
 
 The Six Is ft Pro- 
 vinces anciently 
 made up that 
 famous Country 
 of Greece. 
 
 Fiorina 
 Locrida 
 Durazzo 
 Dulcigna 
 
 Larta 
 Butrinta 
 Chimera 
 Lariffa 
 Far/a 
 Tricala . 
 Janna 
 Demetrias 
 Pegafa 
 Athens 
 Lepfina 
 Megara 
 Caftri 
 Marathon 
 Lepanto 
 Li'vadia 
 Mififtra 
 Napoli de Ro- 
 mania 
 Argos 
 Corinth 
 Malvafia 
 Zarnata 
 Colochina 
 Corone 
 San/arina 
 Arcadia 
 Patras 
 
 from the Capital of 
 each grand Divifion. 
 
 120SE 
 120SE 
 50 S 
 22SW J 
 
 I 
 
 of Scodra 
 
 365 S W of Conftant: 
 75NW7 
 
 300 SW of Conftant, 
 
 50 W / 
 
 60 SW Kof Lariffa 
 
 50E V 
 
 40 E J 
 
 295 SW of Conftant. 
 
 16NW' 
 
 25 W 
 
 40 NE ' 
 110W 
 
 75 W 
 
 380 SW of Conftant. 
 
 N 
 
 40 N 
 30 N 
 60 N 
 40 E 
 30 SW 
 15 SW 
 55 W 
 65 w 
 65 w 
 9oNWy 
 
 of Mififtra, 
 
 Candia ohm 1 50 SE of Mififtra 
 Matiwr. Divifion,
 
 Chap. XIV. Prefent State of tURKT. 
 
 Divifian, &c. 
 
 The Soil is very- 
 fertile, producing 
 Abundance of 
 Corn, Wine, Oil, 
 and moft Sorts 
 of excellent 
 Fruits. 
 
 2. Lemnos 
 
 3 . Negropont 7 
 olim Euba-x ) 
 
 Other Ifles 
 
 Square 
 Miles, fje. 
 
 The fa 
 mou Crete 
 of the An 
 dents. 
 
 220 
 
 I3OO 
 
 80O 
 
 Chief 
 Towns. 
 
 3'5 
 
 Diftance andBearing 
 from the Capital of 
 each grand Divifion. 
 
 Spina Longa 35 E j 
 
 Canta 
 Retimo 
 
 IOO W 
 
 50 W 
 
 of Candi*. 
 
 Ca/iro 
 
 Negropont 
 
 130SW) 
 
 30 N l of *** 
 
 Climate. ] The Air of Romania, in general, is very whol- 
 fome, and the Soil affords great Quantity of Corn and Fruits, and 
 feveral of its Mountains produce fome Mines of Silver, Lead, and 
 Alum. The Mountains in Bulgaria and Beffarabia are very 
 barren, and the Face of the Country not very pleafant. Moldavia 
 is more temperate and fruitful, but the greateft Part of it lies un- 
 cultivated. Greece, in general, enjoys a pure and temperate Air, 
 and very healthful. Little, Crint and Budziack Tartary are, in 
 many Places, encumber'd with barren Mountains, and undrainable 
 Marines ; however, other Places abound with Grain and Fruits : 
 The Air is of a very temperate Nature, but yet unhealthful to 
 breathe in. Candia is blefs'd with a rich and fertile Soil, and the 
 Air reckon'd healthful ; but the South Winds, being very boifte- 
 rous, are very troublefome to the Inhabitants. The longeft Day, 
 in the Northmoft Part of Turky in Europe, is near 16 Hours ; the 
 longeft Day, in the moft Southern, is 1 4. i Hours : Therefore this 
 Country lies in the 5th, 6th, 7th and 8th Northern Climates. 
 
 Government.] The Turhjb Emperors are reftrain'd by no 
 Laws or Compacts, their Power is unlimited, and they look upon 
 the Country as well as the People to be their Property, and ever/ 
 Man's Life and Fortune in the Empire to be at their Difpofai. 
 If any Viceroy, or BafTa, is charged, or but fufpe&ed, of Difloy- 
 alty or Mifcondufl, there feldom needs any further Corividlion, it 
 is fo much the Intereft of the Sovereign to ruin him, all his For- 
 tune devolving on the Crown : He is feldom acquainted with the 
 Nature of the Offence, or the Names of his Accufers ; but, with- 
 out giving him the leaft Opportunity of making a Defence, a Ca- 
 pigi is difpatched, with an Imperial Decree, to take off the unhap- 
 py Sana's Head. The Bafla receives it with the hjgheft Refpeft, 
 
 putting
 
 5 1 6 Prefent State of TURKT. ' Par t II. 
 
 putting it to his Head, and, after he has read it, fays, The Will of 
 God and 'the Emperor be done, or fome fuch Expreflion, teftifying 
 his entire Refignation to the Divine Will, and that of their Prince. 
 Then he takes the Silken Cord, which the Capigi has ready in his 
 Bofom ; and having tied it about his own Neck, and faid a fhort 
 Prayer, the Capigi's Servants throw him on the Floor, and, draw- 
 ing the Cord ftrait, foon difpatch him ; after which his Head is 
 cut off, and carried to Court, and fhewn the Sultan. The ufual 
 Punifhment appropriated to Crimes are as follow ; <vix. A Mur- 
 derer is beheaded ; a Thief ftrangled ; an Apoftate burnt ; a Trai- 
 tor is dragg'd at a Horfe's Tail, and afterwards impaled ; and, if 
 any one maims or wounds another, the like Punifhment is inflicled 
 on the Offender, an Eye for an Eye, a Limb for a Limb, accord- 
 ing to the" Jewijfc Law. For Perjury they are fet upon an Afs, 
 with their Faces towards the Tail, which the Criminal holds in 
 kis Hand, and thus they are led through the City, - and afterwards 
 burnt in the Cheek. In general their Laws are equitable enough, 
 if they were duly executed ; but there is no Place in the World, 
 where Juftice is more frequently bought and fold ; and tho' Bri- 
 bery be fo often pra&ifed, there is no Place where it is more fe- 
 verely ponifbed, if the Sultan happens to be an active Prince, and 
 concerns himfelf to inquire into the Conduct of his Officers. If a 
 Judge be found guilty of Extortion, it is faid, he is doomed to be 
 pounded in a Mortar, without Mercy. And, probably, the fpeedy 
 Juftice and exemplary Severity againft little Frauds, keeps the 
 common People in Awe, and occafions fewer Thefts and Robbe- 
 ries in Turky than with us. There is nothing the Turks apprehend 
 contributes more to the Peace and Security of the Empire, than 
 their deftroying all Appearance of a Nobility and great Families 
 among them, and fuffering no Succeffion to Eftates or Offices. 
 Their BafTas and Governors are all taken out of the Seraglio, per- 
 fectly ignorant of what Blood or Family they are of, and have no 
 powerful Relations or Dependents to fupport them, if they fhould 
 entertain any afpiring Thoughts. As I have mentioned the Se- 
 raglio, I fhall give the Reader a fhort Account of it 
 Seraglio. here. The Grand Seignior's Seraglio, at Con/tanti- 
 nopky is rather a Collection of Palaces and Apartments, 
 added to one another, than one fingle Palace. The Number that 
 inhabit this Palace muft be very large ; for, 'tis faid, that annual- 
 ly there are fpent here no lefs than 30,000 Oxen, 20,000 Calves, 
 60,000 Sheep, 16,000 Lambs, 10,000 Kids, 100,000 Turkeys 
 and Geefe, 1 00,000 Pigeons, and 200,000 Fowls and Chickens ; 
 befides Wild-fowl and Fifh, of the laft of which they fpend at leaft 
 130,000 Turbats. The young Lads who are educated in the Se- 
 raglio, and defign'd for Employments in the Government, are 
 Children of Chriflian Parents taken in War, or Prefents of the 
 
 Vice-
 
 Chap. XIV. Prefent State of TURKT. 3 1 7 
 
 Viceroys and Governors from Georgia, Circajfia, and remote 
 Parts of the Empire ; the moft beautiful, well-fhap'd, fprightly 
 Children that can be met with. They are inftrufted in the Rites 
 of the Mahometan Religion, and to fpeak and write the Turkijh, 
 Perjian and Arabic Languages j and when they are fit for manly 
 Exercifes, they are taught, among other Things, to fhoot their 
 Arrows on Horfeback, in a full Career, backwards, forwards, 
 fideways, and almoft in any Pofture. When they have made it 
 tolerable Proficiency, they are advanced to Places as they fall ; 
 but few are preferred out of the Seraglio till they are arrived ac 
 the Age of Forty, or thereabouts, when their Judgment is look r d 
 upon to be mature, and the Heat of Youth pretty well allay'd. 
 The Mutes and Dwarfs make up another Part of the Grand 
 Seignior's Court. The Mutes, who are born deaf, and confequent- 
 ly dumb, are about Forty in Number ; thefe teach the Pages how 
 to difcourfe by Signs, and maintain a Converfation without the 
 Ufe of Words : Eight or nine of the favourite Mutes continual- 
 ly attend on the Grand Seignior. With thefe, and the Dwarfs,' 
 who are a kind of Buffoons, this Prince frequently diverts him- 
 felf. The Ladies of the Seraglio are a Collection of young beau- 
 tiful Virgins, taken captive in the Wars, or fold into Turky ; 
 moft of them born of Chriftian Parents. At their firft Admiffion 
 they are committed to the Charge of an old Governante, and 
 taught Mufic, Dancing, and other Accompliflimehts, and furnifh'd 
 with rich Cloaths and Jewels, to render them as agreeable to their 
 Monarch as poifible. Several of them frequently play and dance 
 before him, while others entertain him with their Converfation. 
 When he makes Choice of any one, fhe is conducted to his Em- 
 braces with Songs and Mufic, as a Matter of no fmall Triumph, 
 to be diftinguifh'd for her fuperior Charms among fuch a Croud 
 of Beauties. This Monarch never marries, or contracts himfelf 
 to any Woman ; nor are his Concubines ever the Daughters of his 
 Mahometan Subjects. Thefe Ladies are fcarce ever fuffer'd to go 
 Abroad, except when the Grand Seignior removes from one Place 
 to another. When they travel by Water, they are convey 'd to the 
 Boats, which are inclos'd on all Sides with narrow Lattices, by a 
 Troop of black Eunuchs ; and when they go by Land, they are 
 put into clofe Chariots, and Signals are made at certain Diftances 
 to give Notice that none approach the Road they march. *Tis 
 faid, there arc no lefs than io,coo Gardeners about the Gardens 
 of the Seraglio. The great Officers of State, who are generally 
 of the Number of thefe Royal Slaves, and receive their Education 
 in the Seraglio, make up another Part of the Grand Seignior's 
 Court: At the Head of thefe is the Grand Vizier, on whom the 
 Emperor in a manner devolves his Authority, leaving the Admini- 
 firation of Affairs intirely in his Hands. This Statefman is look*d 
 
 upon
 
 3 1 8 Prefent State of TUR KT. Part II. 
 
 upon to be much more fecure in Time of War than in Peace, 
 especially if he meets with but tolerable Succefs ; for the Troops 
 feldom lie idle long but they mutiny, and perhaps demand the 
 Heads of thofe whom they imagine their Enemies : And we find 
 thefe Sultans ready to give up any Minifter, and even every Fa- 
 vourite they have, rather than run any Hazard on their Account. 
 Adultery, on the Wife's Part, is a Capital Crime, if the Hufband 
 will proceed againft her with the Rigor the Law allows ; and the 
 Man who is taken in this Crime with another's Wife may, on the 
 Spot, be killed by the injur'd Hulband. 
 
 Trade.] In Conftantinople they have a public Market, daily 
 held, for the Sale of Chriftian Slaves of both Sexes : Here Men 
 purchafe Concubines, or Servants, as they do Cattle in other 
 Countries. The Male Slaves Hand in the Middle of a Square ; 
 but the Women are kept in little Rooms adjoining to it, whither 
 Chapmen go to cheapen and examine them. Thofe who are di- 
 ftinguifhed for their Beauty, or other Accomplishments, and like 
 to become the MiftrefTes of People of Condition, the Merchants 
 keep up carefully in their own Houfes, where they are taught to 
 fmg and dance, and all other Qualifications that may render them 
 defirable. A great many Turkijb Ships daily fail through the 
 Bofphorus, freighted with poor Chriftian Captives, of both Sexes, 
 to fupply this Market. It is computed, that at leaft 20,000 Chri- 
 ftian Slaves are imported annually by the Way of the Black Sea 
 from Tartary. This Trade is a great Addition to the Grand 
 Seignior's Subje&s. The Dominions of this Monarch are very 
 happily fituated for the Centre of the Trade of all Nations ; for, 
 by the Gulf of Perjia, and the Red Sea, the Turks have a better 
 Opportunity of exporting the Produces and Manufactures of his 
 Weftern Dominions, and of importing all the rich Merchandizes 
 of China and India, than any Nation in Europe. And as to the 
 Trade of the Mediterranean, nothing could prevent the Sultan 
 from being Sovereign of this Sea, if he had a Fleet anfwerable to 
 what might be expected from a Prince, who hath all manner of 
 Timber, and Naval Stores, in his own Territories, fufficient to 
 equip the largeft Fleets, and Millions of People whofe Perfons and 
 Fortunes are intirely at his Difpofal. Befides the Trade carried 
 on by Sea in Turky, great Quantities of rich Merchandizes are 
 daily trapfported to and from Perjia, Arabia, and Tartary, by 
 Caravans of Camels and Mules ; but this, as well as other Trade, 
 is managed chiefly by the Armenian Chriftians or Jews. England 
 fenas to Tu?ky Cloth, StufFs, Perpetaanas, Haberdafhers Wares, 
 Coney- fkins, Clock-work, Tin, Lead, and fome Iron ; and the 
 Englijh Merchants frequently buy up Trench and Lisbon Sugars, 
 and tranfport thither, as well as Bullion from Cadiz.', all carried 
 
 in
 
 Chap. XIV. Prept State of TURKT. 319 
 
 in our own Bottoms ; for the Tur&s fend no Ships into the 
 Ocean, or to any Nation of different Faith. England imports 
 from Turky Raw Silk of the Product of Perjia, Carpets, Goats- 
 hair, Mohair, Yarn, Goats-wool, Cotton-wool, Cotton-yarn, 
 Dimitties, Burdets, Shagrin-fkins, Cordovants Blue, Red, aud 
 Yellow ; Coffee, the Product of Arabia only ; Rhubarb, the 
 Produft of Eaftern Tartary ; Turpentine, Storax, Gum Seneca, 
 Gum Tragant, Gum Arabic, Opium, Origanum, Galls, Maftich, 
 Wormfeed, Sena, Zedoary, Emery Stones, Terra Lemma or 
 Sigillata, China-root, Pomegranate Peels, Spunges, Piftachio 
 Nuts, Dates, Almonds, Wine, Oil, Figs, Raifms, Mother of 
 Pearl, Vifney Vilinia for Dying, Sal Ammoniac, Alum, Botargo, 
 Roman Vitriol, Box-wood, Bees-wax, and Saffron. 
 
 Revenues. ] The Revenues of the Grand Seignior arife by 
 the Cufloms, the Produce of the Demefne Lands, and a kind of 
 Capitation-tax impofed on every Subject in the Empire, who is not 
 of the Mahometan Religion. Another Branch of them arifes by 
 the annual Tribute paid by the Crim Tartar, the Princes of Mol- 
 davia and Walacbia, and the little Republic of Ragufa, and Part 
 of Mingrelia ; and Half a Million of Money out of a Million 
 and a Half, which is levied annually in the Kingdom of Egypt, 
 comes into the Royal Treafure, the reft being laid out in paying 
 the Officers and Forces of that Province. But all thefe are a 
 Trifle, in Comparifon of the vaft Sums which the Sultan conti- 
 nually extorts from the Viceroys, and great Officers of State, and 
 pafs under the Name of Prefents. He is Heir alfo to ajl his Offi- 
 cers and Miftreffes, who, when they have plunder'd whole Pro- 
 vinces and Kingdoms, are forced, when they die, to leave all to 
 their Sovereign. If this Monarch has a prefTing Occafion for 
 Money, fuch as a long War with the Chriitians, then the great 
 Mofques, which are exceeding rich, afford another noble Supply ; 
 for even this facred Treafure may be employ'd in Defence of their 
 Superftition. Another very confiderable Part of the Grand Seigni- 
 or's Revenues are the Rents arifing from the Lands of the Zaims 
 and Timariots, which alone are found fufHcient to maintain 1 00,000 
 effective Men. But, to calculate exactly what Sums come into the 
 Sultan's Treafure annually, is fcarce practicable. As the Govern- 
 ment is arbitrary, the Court can, in Cafes of Neceffity, command 
 the Purfes of every Subject ; and it is not uncommon, when the 
 Treafure is low, to borrow of the great Officers, who are known 
 to abound in Wealth ; but it is fcarce ever return'd again, in 
 which they acquiefce without murmuring, left their Mafter fhould 
 proceed to demand the Whole, and perhaps their Heads with it. 
 
 Forces. ]
 
 320 Prefent State of TURKT, Part II. 
 
 Forces. ] The Militia of the Turkijb Empire is of two Sorts ; 
 the firft have certain Lands appointed for their Maintenance, and 
 the other are paid out of the Treafury. Thofe that have certain 
 Lands amount to about 268,451 Troopers, effective Men. Befides 
 thefe, there are alfo certain auxiliary Forces raifed by the tributary 
 Countries of this Empire ; as the Tartars, Wixlacbians, Molda- 
 vians, &c. who are commanded by their refpe&ive Princes. The 
 Kan of the Crim Tartars is obliged to furnilh 1 00,000 Men, and 
 to ferve in Perfon, when the Grand Seignior takes the Field ; and 
 the Princes of Moldavia and Walachia attend with about 6000 or 
 7000 Men each. In every War, befides the above Forces, there 
 are great Numbers of Voluntiers, who live at their own Charge, 
 in Expectation of fucceeding the Zaims and Timariots. Thefe 
 Adventurers do not only promife themfelves an Eftate if they fur- 
 vive, but are taught, that if they die in a War againft the Chri- 
 ftians, they mall go immediately to Paradife. Thole Forces which 
 receive their Pay from the Treafury are called the Spahis and Ja- 
 nizaries : The Spahia are in Number about 1 2,000. The Jani- 
 zaries are efteem'd the belt Soldiers in the Turki/h Armies, and on 
 them they principally depend in an Engagement ; thefe amount to 
 about 25,000 Men, who are quarter'd in and about Conftanti- 
 nople : They frequently grow mutinous, and have proceeded fo far 
 fometimes as to depofe the Sultan. Befides the Janizaries of Con- 
 ftantinople, every Province of the Empire is fill'd with Foot Sol- 
 diers, who bear that Name, but thefe are not inrolPd with the 
 others. There is another Sort of Infantry, who ferve chiefly for 
 Pioneers, to blunt the Swords of an Enemy, or fill up a Ditch at 
 an Attack, and are generally detach'd before the Army, to ravage 
 and plunder the Enemy's Country ; and, if they behave well, are 
 fometimes admitted into the Body of Janizaries. The Deftruclion 
 of fo many great Minifters, and even Emperors, by the Seditions 
 of the Janizaries, hath made the Turki/h Court take all Occafions 
 of late Years to diminifli their Power : They have expos'd them 
 therefore upon every trifling Service, and cut off the Flower of 
 that Body of Troops, introducing quite another Sort, which have 
 not thofe Privileges the former Janizaries enjoy'd. The old Jani- 
 zaries held all together as one Man, which made it very dangerous 
 giving them any Offence, or calling them to an Account on any 
 Occafion whatever. But then the modern Janizaries are no longer 
 the Defence and Glory of the Ottoman Empire ; there is no de- 
 pending on them in an Engagement with the Chriflians. Till late- 
 ly, Seven Years Exercife was fcarce thought furficierit to qualify 
 them for this Body of Forces j but now thefe Troops are filled up 
 with Servants, and any idle Fellows ; infomuCh that the Govern- 
 ment ha$ not much to fear from them. The Naval Forces of 
 
 Turky
 
 Chap. XIV. Prefer.t State of TUR KT. 321 
 
 Turky are not very formidable, confidering the large Extent of 
 hat Empire, and the many fine Sea-ports they are Matters of. 
 Their grand Fleet fcarce ever confifts of more than Thirty Men of 
 War, befules Gallies, which amount fometimes to ioo; thofe of 
 Conftantinople are very large, finely gilded and carved, and make 
 a glorious Appearance. 
 
 Character.. ] The Turks are generally perfonable Men, their 
 Women beautiful, and of an eafy and agreeable Shape, which is 
 not at all to be wonder'd, fince moft of the Beauties of Georgia, 
 Circajjia, and other Places, being tranfported hither, are purchas'd 
 in the Markets. The Turks are faid to be Perfons of Integrity in 
 their Dealings, Uriel Obfervers of their Word, very civil to Stran- 
 gers, and extraordinary charitable. They are commended for 
 paying a profound Refpect to every thing that is facred, and the 
 Arid Obfervance of the Hours of Prayer, and the Devotion with 
 which they offer them up. The Frugality and Temperance of 
 the Turks are frequently mention'd by Travellers for our Imita- 
 tion ; but, tho' the Fear of the Punifliment inflicted on thofe who 
 are diforder'd with Liquor, may keep many of them from drink- 
 ing, yet others take their Glafs, privately in the Night, to a very 
 great Excefs. The Pride of thefe People is very extraordinary ; 
 for they defpife and contemn all People but their own, efpecially 
 thofe of a different Religion : Themfelves alone they efteem wife, 
 valiant, and holy ; the reft of the World they look upon to be Re- 
 probates, and not intitled to the good Things of this Life or an- 
 other. Their Quarrels feldom proceed to Blows, and Duelling is 
 not known among them ; but no People exceed them in Billingf- 
 gate Language, and complicated Curfes. The Greek Chriltians 
 in general are very much inclin'd to over-reach in their Dealings : 
 Strangers meet with much more Candor from the Turks, and, if 
 one Turk feems in the leaft to difcredit another's Words or Promife, 
 he is fhock'd with this Reply, / hope you don't take me for a Chri- 
 jiian: Such a Blot have thefe imprudent Profeffors of Chriftianity 
 call upon our moft holy Religion, in the Eyes of its numerous 
 and moft implacable Adverfaries. The Tartars, tributary to the 
 Grand Seignior, are generally Men of vigorous and robuft Bodies* 
 and are reputed to be very juft in their Dealings with one another, 
 but far otherwife with Strangers. 
 
 Religion.] The eftablifh'd Religion of Turky in Europe is 
 that of the Mahometan, fo called from Mahomet the Author of it. 
 He was born in the City of Mecca in Arabia, about the Year 
 571. and continued, till he was Twenty- five, /cars old, to trade 
 as a Fador to his Uncle, who was a confiderable Merchant : About 
 :hh Age he was invited into the Service of a rich Widow, for 
 
 Y whom
 
 322 Prefent State cf TURKT. Part II. 
 
 whom he traded about three Years to Damafcus, and other Places ; 
 and, in the Twenty-eighth Year of his Age, gain'd the Affettions 
 of his Miftrefs, and marry'd her, by which Match Mahomet be- 
 came one of the richelt Merchants in Mecca. By his trading to 
 Egypt, Palejiine, and Syria, he became acquainted both with Chri- 
 jiians and Jews ; and, taking notice of the Divifions and Ani- 
 mofities among the feveral Setts of Chriflians in the Eaft at that 
 Time, he concluded it Would be no difficult Matter to fet up a new 
 Religion, or, rather, as he pretended, to revive the primitive Way 
 of Worfhip and Purity praclifed among the Patriarchs. He did 
 not propofe the abolilhing of any Religion abfolutely, but to col- 
 lect from Jews, Christians, and Pagans, what he thought moft 
 fuitable to his Defign, and to rejedl the reft. He did not deny the 
 Million of Mofes, or our bleffed Saviour, or the Divine Authority 
 of the Old and New Teftament in general ; but charged both the 
 Jews and Chrifiians with corrupting thefacred Writings, declare- 
 ing himfelf a Prophet fent from God to purge them from the Er- 
 rors and Innovations which were crept into them. In the Eighth 
 Year of Mahomet's pretended Office of God's Embaflador, his 
 Party was obferv'd to be fo confiderable, that the Government of 
 Mecca prohibited all People to join him, or have any Correfpond- 
 ence with him ; and a Defign was actually laid to have furpris'd 
 and cut him off; but he, receiving timely Intelligence of it, fled 
 from thence with fome of his Followers, and came fafe to Medina, 
 notwithstanding feveral Parties were fent out to intercept him. 
 He was received with loud Acclamations by the Party that had 
 invited him thither. Having, by his artful Addrefs, made him- 
 felf Matter of the City of Medina, and having a good Body of 
 Troops under his Command, he began to pull off the Mafk ; and, 
 inftead of uiing Arguments to convince the People of his divine 
 Miffion, he made it a Capital Crime for any Man to difpute the 
 Truth of his Doclrine ; commanding all his Difciples to arm them- 
 felves, and fight for it, rather than difpute about it ; and that they 
 Should fpare no Man who did not embrace it, or fubmit to pay him 
 Tribute for being indulged in their Infidelity. His firft Enter- 
 prizes look'd more like fo many Robberies than warlike Expedi- 
 tions ; for he attack'd only fome Caravans of Merchants, who 
 traded between Mecca and Syria, in which Engagements too he 
 was fometimes defeated, tho' at other times he carried off a confi- 
 derable Booty, furprifing them at Difadvantages ; however, by 
 this means, he mightily enrich'd his warlike Difciples, and brought 
 over Abundance of thievifh Arabs to his Party, in Expe&ation of 
 glorious Plunder under fo fan&ified a Leader, who called the moft 
 notorious Robberies the fighting the Caufe of God. In the Year 
 624. Mahomet made War upon fome Tribes of the Arabs, which 
 were of the Jswijb Religion ; and, having defeated them, and 
 5 made
 
 Chap. XIV. Prefent State of TUR KT. 3 23 
 
 made many of them Prisoners, fold them for Slaves, and divided 
 their Effects among his Followr ; but was himfelf defeated near 
 Medina, by Abu Sophian who commanded the Forces of Mecca, 
 and was red iced again ro a very low Ebb. But when the People 
 began to make his ill Succefs an Argument, that he was no Pro- 
 phet, and fome were ready to mutiny on account of their Friends 
 and Relations who were loft in that Battle, to filence the firft, he 
 told them, that this Defeat was owing to the Sins of fome of his 
 Army, and for this Reafon God permitted him to be beaten ; and 
 to the reft, who were concerned for their Relations, he told them, 
 that their Fate was inevitable, and if they had remained at Home 
 in their Houfes, they muft have died when they did, the Period 
 of every Man's Life being predeftinated and determin'd by God, 
 beyond which Time it could not be prolong'd ; but, however, as 
 they died fighting for the Faith, they had obtain'd the Crown of 
 Martyrdom, and were now alive with God in Paradife, in a State 
 of everlafting Blifs, which was infinitely to be preferred before 
 this Life, and all the Satisfactions the World afforded : And 
 thefe Doctrines, he found, fo ftrengthen'd the Courage and Refo- 
 lution of his Difciples, that he did not fail to inculcate them ever 
 afterwards. The next Year his Generals obtain'd a Viftory over 
 another Tribe of Jcwijb Arabs, and put them every Man to the 
 Sword ; but his Officers, in one of thefe Expeditions, being heated 
 with Liquor, and deeply engaged in Play, fell out among them- 
 felves, and had very near ruin'd his Affairs ; and therefore, for 
 preventing the like Mifchief, it is faid, he prohibited the Ufe of 
 Wine, and all Games of Chance, for the future. The Natives 
 of the City of Mecca were ftill refolv'd to ruin Mahomet, forefee- 
 ing, that if they did not fubdue him, he would infallibly, fooner or 
 later, reduce them ; they therefore enter'd into a Confederacy 
 with fom* Jewijh Arabs, and having afTembled an Army of 
 10,000 Men, advanc'd in Search of Mahomet ; but he, not finding 
 himfelf in a Condition to give them Battle, thought fit to entrench, 
 and was in a manner belieged by them in his Camp ; but, while 
 the Armies lay fo near each other, he found Means to corrupt fome 
 of the Enemy's Officers, who advis'd the Retreat of their Army ; 
 and by this Means he efcaped out of their Hands j and, having 
 increased his Forces, refolv'd to return the Vifit to his Friends at 
 Mecca ; and a Battle was fought between them at Judda, in 
 which no great Advantage being obtain'd on either Side, a Truce 
 was concluded, whereby it was agreed, that all who were Friends 
 to Mahomet in Mecca fhould have the Liberty of joining him, and 
 thofe in his Army, who dtiir'd it. migh't rfctUre to their Houfes at 
 Mecca; and that Mahomet, or a: !V ..crent: : , might have 
 
 Liberty to come in; ithout Arm?, and remain there for 
 
 three Days. Mahomet, at his Return to Medina, looking upon 
 
 V 2 W#
 
 324 Prefent State of VURKT. Part II. 
 
 his Authority to be pretty well eftablilh'd, caus'd his Army to pro- 
 claim him King under a Tree near that City, in the Year 627. 
 He retain'd, however, the Office of chief Prieft of his Religion, 
 and tranfmitted both the Regal and Prieftly Functions to his Sue* 
 ceflbrs for upwards of Three hundred Years. Mahomet, having 
 now an Army of Ten thoufand Men under his Command, march'd 
 again towards Mecca, and furpris'd the City, pretending that the 
 Inhabitants had broken the Truce he had made with them ; and, 
 having cut off thofe who molt zealoufly oppos'd him, the reft were 
 content to fubmit to his Government and Religion. This Succefs 
 and Alteration of Religion united the Pagan Tribes of the Ara- 
 bians againft him, and, affembling their Forces, they gave him 
 Battle, and drove him under the Walls oiMecca ; but, in a fecond 
 Battle, he defeated them, and compelled them to embrace his Re- 
 ligion ; and did not only reduce molt Part of Arabia under his 
 Power, but fome Towns of Syria then under the Dominion of the 
 Greek Emperor. Shortly after he died, being juft Sixty-three 
 Years old. During his pretended Apoftlelhip, he laid the Founda- 
 tion of the greateft Revolution that ever happened in the World ; 
 for, within the Compafs of Fourfcore Years, his Sccceflbrs ex- 
 tended their Dominion over more Kingdoms than the Romans did 
 in Eight hundred ; and tho' it continued not in its Grandeur above 
 Three hundred Years, yet out of it have rifen feveral other King- 
 doms and Empires, fome of them the molt potent now in the 
 World, as thofe of the Grand Seignior, Perjia, and India. 
 
 Mahomet, in order to impofe upon the Chriftians, pretended to 
 be the Comforter promis'd in the Gofpel ; and, in order to draw 
 over the Jews to his Party, introduc'd a great Part of their Sy- 
 ftem into his pretended Reformation. As the Religion of the 
 Jews was abolifh'd by the Coming of our Lord Jefus Chrift, fo 
 the Chriftian Religion could fubfift no longer, becaufe Mahomet, 
 2s they fay, is the laft and molt excellent of all the Prophets, 
 whom God Almighty propos'd to fend to Mankind. Mahomet de- 
 clared, that God fent him, during the Twenty-three Years of his 
 Million, by the Angel Gabriel, a large Parcel of loofe Papers in 
 Writing, out of which he compos'd the Book intituled The Alco- 
 ran, which is fubftituted in the Room of the Sacred Scriptures, 
 and contains the fundamental Tenets of their Religion. It is evi- 
 dent, that thofe who compofed this Book muft have had a tolerable 
 Knowledge both of the Jewifh and Chriftian Religion, from 
 whence the greateft Part of" it was apparently taken. Such as in- 
 troduce a new Religion ought to produce fome Miracles, in order 
 to give a Sanation to the Doctrines they would advance ; but Ma- 
 homet acknowledges he wrought none, and yet many of his Fol- 
 lowers afcribe feveral to him. Their greateft Doctors, indeed, 
 do not infill upon them, but fay, that his compofing the Alcoran
 
 Chap. XIV. Prefent State of ?U R KY. 325 
 
 is inftead of a thoufand Miracles, it being (o eloquent a Boole, 
 and containing fuch excellent Doctrine, and being altogether im- 
 poffible, without fupernatural Afiiitance, that any Mortal fhould 
 compofe the like ; therefore, fay they, it is a Demon (Iration of 
 his divine Miffion. The chief Article of the Alcoran is grounded 
 on the Unity of the Godhead. The fecond fundamental Ar- 
 ticle of their Religion is, that Mahomet is God's great Prophet. 
 They difcourfe admirably well of God, and his divine Attributes ; 
 and take particular Care not to afcribe any thing to him, that 
 looks like Weaknefs or Imperfection. They acknowledge the 
 Exiftence of Angels, who execute the Commandments of the Al- 
 mighty. They believe the general Refurreclion of the Dead ; 
 and that there will arife an Anti-Mahomet ; that Jefus Chriit, 
 whom they allow to have been miraculoufly born of a Virgin, 
 will defcend from Heaven to deftroy him, and reitcre the Maho- 
 metan Religion. They hold the Doftrine of Fate, yet allow of 
 future Rewards and Punifliments ; and that God Almighty will 
 perfonally make every Man render an Account of his Actions ; 
 and that they mail be weighed in a Pair of Scales ; and all thofe, 
 whofe good Actions outweigh their evil ones, (hall go inftantly 
 into Paradife ; but on the contrary, thofe whofe evil A&ions out- 
 weigh their good ones, fhall go into Kell. Their Paradife is a 
 Place of all manner of fenfual Pleafure, which true Muffulmans, 
 or Believers, are to partake of. But thofe who are doomed to the 
 Punifhments of Hell, Mahomet allures us, will be tormented with 
 unquenchable Fire, and boiling Water ; and, being burnt and re- 
 duced to Afhes, God Almighty will create them anew, that their 
 Torments may endure to Eternity They admit of Circumcifion, 
 which they reckon neceflary to Salvation. They fill, pray, and 
 give Alms ; and in thefe, perhaps, do not come far fhort of 
 Chriflians in general. 
 
 Customs.] The ufual Salutation among the Turks i>, a little 
 Inclination of the Head, and clapping the right Hand to the 
 Bread : But when they falute a Perfon of Diltinftion, they ftoop 
 fo low, as to take up the Hem of his Veil, and kifs. They 
 ufually fit in an open Hall upon a Sopha, which is a Bench 
 about five Foot broad, and a Foot and an half high, covered with 
 Carpets and Cufhicns to lean on. Here they fpread a Piece cf 
 Leather when they eat, and fet little wooden Tables about half a 
 Foot high, fometimes, upon which they place their Provifions. 
 They have no Beds, but the Floor, or the Sopha, which ferves 
 them to lie upon, as well as to eat on. Their manly Kxcrcifes 
 are mooting at a Mark with Fire-arms, or Bows and Arrows, 
 on Horfeback, in every Pofture almolt ; and they are taught to 
 dart a little Staff, with which they attack and purfue one another 
 
 Y 3 n
 
 $16 Prefent State of fURKT. Part II. 
 
 on Horfeback, and fonutimes give and receive dangerous Bruifes. 
 The Roads and Caravanferas for Entertainment of Travellers are 
 kept in Repair in Turkey, by the Contributions and Labours of 
 private People, who look upon it to be a Work of Charity, and 
 highly acceptable to Heaven, to provide for the Neceffities of 
 the weary'd Traveller : Even thofe who live by their Labour, and 
 have nothing elfe to contribute, will fpend Part of their Time 
 gratis in thefe Employments. Marriage in Turky is of two 
 Kinds, the one for Life, if there be no juil Caufe of Divorce, 
 and the other temporary, and upon fuch Conditions as the Partie* 
 can agree on. As to Concubinage, or their Commerce with their 
 Female Slaves, that they breed up or purchafe, and with whom 
 no Contracts are made, thefe are not reckon'd among the Number 
 of Wives. Of the firft Sort of Wives, the Turks feldom take 
 more than one, though they are aliow'd four, unlefs upon the 
 Account of advancing themfelves by fuch Matches j for, as thefe 
 Wives are all equal, it feems almoft impoffible to avoid a perpe- 
 tual Contention, where there are feveral of them in one Houfe. 
 But a Turk ufually takes one of thefe to be Miflrefs of the Fa- 
 mily ; and, if their Fancy for Variety induces them to take more 
 Females to their Bed, they purchafe fome beautiful Slaves in the 
 Market, if there be none they like among their own. Thefe 
 Concubines are far from attempting to rival their Miftrefs, 
 though they fhare with her in their Matter's Bed ; but pay her 
 the greateft Refpeft, and wait upon her with uncommon Dili- 
 gence : By a Sign, or a Nod, imperceptible to Strangers, every 
 thing is tranfadted in a Family without Noife and Contradiftion. 
 But if infuperable Averfions, and intolerable Jars, fometimes hap- 
 pen, the Turks apply the common Remedy of a Divorce. As to 
 the fecond Sort of Wives, thofe they contraft with for a Time : 
 This is ufually done, where a Merchant or Traveller has Occafion 
 to refide in fome Place at a great Diftance from home : In this 
 Cafe, the Terms are agreed on before a Magiflrate, and the Wo- 
 man is taken to his Bed with very little Ceremony, and difmifTed 
 with lefs. Travellers acquaint us, that, when a Turk is at the 
 Point of Death, his Friends afTemble about him, exhorting him 
 to a chearful Submiflion to the Divine Will, againft which they 
 allow it impious to murmur or repine. When he is dead, the 
 Relations and Friends, in great Pomp, follow the Bier, on which 
 the Corps is laid without a Coffin, and, being come to the Bury- 
 ing-place, it is depofited in the Grave, which is fo contrived, 
 that the Body may fit upright to undergo the Examination of the 
 Angels, who are fuppofed to refort to the Grave, and inquire 
 into the Faith, and good Actions, of the Deceafed, as foon as the 
 Company is withdrawn. The Relations, efpecially the Women, 
 come to the Grave afterwards at certain Times to pray for the 
 
 Dead,
 
 Chap. XV. Prefent State of the Britifli IQes. 327 
 
 Dead, and leave Proviftons there, which the Poor eat up, hoping 
 that Heaven will be induced by thofe charitable Offerings to be 
 propitious to the Soul of their dear departed Friend. 
 
 Curiosities.] At Caftri (in Greece) are fome Infcriptions, 
 which fhew it to have been the antient Delphi, fo famous all the 
 World over for the Oracle of Apollo. In Livadia or Achaia, is 
 a hideous Cavern in a Hill, which was very famous of old for 
 the Oracles of Irophonius. On the ljlhmus of Corinth, are fome 
 Remains of that Wall built by the Laccdamonians from one Sea 
 to the other for the fecuring the Peninfula from the Incurfions 
 of the Enemy. Through moft Parts of Greece are ftill ex- 
 tant the Ruins of many Heathen Temples, particularly that of 
 the Goddefs Ceres at Eleujis, about twenty Miles from Athens, 
 a Part of whofe Statue is Hill to be feen But the chief Rari- 
 ties of Greece may be reckon'd thofe various Monuments of An- 
 tiquity to be feen at Athens : The chief of which are, i. The 
 Temple of Minerva, ftill one of the moft beautiful Pieces of An- 
 tiquity that is extant this Day in the World. 2. The Stadium 
 or Place where the Citizens us'd to run Races, encounter wild 
 Beafts, and celebrate the famous Games, call'd Panathenea. 
 3. The Ruins of many famous Temples, efpechlly that of Au- 
 gujius, whofe Front is ftill intire; alfo thofe of Ihefeus, Hercules, 
 Jupiter Olympius, Cajlor and Pollux, &x. 
 
 CHAP. XV. 
 
 The Prefent State of the B r i t i s h Isles. 
 
 The British Isles contain " 104,701"* 
 
 1. Great-Britain contains 77,244/ q 
 
 1 . South-Britain or Engkind contains 49,450 > i^-i' 
 
 2. Portly-Britain or Scotland contains 27,794 I 
 
 2. Ireland contains 27,4573 
 
 y 4 SECT,
 
 328 Prefent State of the Britifli Ifles. Part II. 
 
 SECT. I. 
 
 Of South-Britain or England. 
 
 THIS Ifland was formerly divided into a great 
 many petty States, each of them govern'd by 
 State of its own King, and very little known to the Greeks 
 England. and Romans, till Julius Cafars Time, who, after he 
 
 had conquer'd the greateft Part of France, undertook 
 an Expedition into Britain. But he enter'd not far into the Coun- 
 try, and, after fome Skirmifhes with the Inhabitants, return'd 
 again without leaving a Garifon, or exacting any Contributions. 
 After this, Britain was not attack'd again by the Romans, till 
 under the Reign of the Emperor Claudius, who bent his Arms 
 
 againft it in good earneft, and, the Inhabitants being 
 The Ro- divided amongft themfelves, he, without great Dif- 
 mans con- ficulty, conquer^ Part of it. At which Time, 
 quer Eng- Britain was made a Roman Province, a conftant 
 land. Army being maintain^ here by the Romans, who 
 
 by degrees conquer'd one Part after another, tho* 
 not without receiving fome Defeats. At laft, under the Reign 
 of Domitian, Julius Agricola march'd with his victorious Army 
 thro' the whole Ifland, and gave a fignal Overthrow to the Ca- 
 l edonians, who are now call'd the Scots, and fubdu'd them ; tho' 
 the Romans could never intirely conquer the Northmoft Parts of 
 
 Britain: Wherefore afterwards the Emperors Adrian 
 Pi(Els and Severus, by building a Wall crofs the Ifland from 
 
 Wall. Sea to Sea, divided thefe Places from the Roman 
 
 Province, hoping thereby to flop the Incurfions of 
 the Inhabitants. But the Romans never came into Ireland. 
 After the Britains had been 400 Years under Subje&ion to the 
 Romans, the Northern Nations at that Time over-running the 
 Weftern Parts of the Roman Empire, the Romans left this Ifland 
 voluntarily, being oblig'd to recal their Legions in Britain, ac- 
 companied with fome Numbers of the BritiJI? Natives, to make 
 Head againft their Enemies upon the Continent. Britain being 
 thus without an Army, and withal mightily exhaufted in its 
 Strength, the Picls and Scots made an Inroad into the more plen- 
 tiful Provinces, deilroying all before them. The Britains, to 
 make the better Kead againft them, had chofen Vortigern for 
 their King ; but he, perceiving himfelf to be no ways able to refill 
 their Power, and Affiftance being denied him from the Romans, 
 Qj}Vd in the Angles. Thefe Angles, or Saxons, under their 
 
 Leaders
 
 Chap. XV. Prefent State of the Britifh Ifles. 329 
 
 Leaders Hengifi and Horfa, coming with an Army 
 to the Affiftance of the Britain*, beat out the Scots : The Saxons 
 But, being mightily taken with the Fruitfulnefs of or Angles 
 the Country, refolv'd to fubdue it, and to lay the come into 
 Yoke upon the Britains, who had call'd them in to Britain, 
 deliver them from it. As foon as the Britains per- 
 ceiv'd what their Intention was, they endeavour'd to drive them 
 out of the Ifland : But the Angles, or Saxons, calling in a great 
 many Thoufands of their Countrymen to their Afiiftarice, con- 
 quer'd all Britain, except the Province of Wales, which, being 
 very mountainous, they were not able to fubdue. Cadivalladar 
 was the laft King of the antient Britijh Race, who, perceiving 
 that he was by no means able longer to refill the Power of the 
 Saxons, retir'd to Rome into a Convent. 'Twas then that Bri- 
 tain receiVd t' e Name oT Anglia, or England, from the Angles. 
 Thefe Saxons ereded Seven Kingdoms, which, how- 
 ever, had not their Beginning all at one Time, but The Saxon 
 according as they had taken one Part after another Heptarchy. 
 from the Inhabitants. At laft, they fell together by 
 the Ears among themfelves, till, one having fwallowed up an- 
 other, all were united into one Kingdom. Egbert King of the 
 Weft Saxons having either fubdu'd the reft, or fore'd 
 their Kings to acknowledge him for their Supreme 80 1. 
 Head, he and his Succeflbrs were thenceforward Egbert 
 cail'd Kings of England. Under his Reign the jirjl Kin* 
 Danes firtl enter 'd England, as they continu'd to do ofEug- 
 under the following Kings, tho', in the Beginning, land, 
 they were feveral times bravely repuls'd : Neverthe- InS^^.tbe 
 left, they got footing at laft, in the Northern Parts Dar.es_/f/y? 
 of England, where they liv'd for a-while pretty came into 
 quietly, under the Protection of the Kings of Eng- England. 
 land. But in the Time of King Etbelrcd II. who 
 began hii Reign in 979. the Danes made Inroads into the Southern 
 Parts of England, fore'd the Englifo to pay them great Sums of 
 Money, and committed ftrange Outrages. And tho' the Englijh 
 confpir'd againft the Danes, and cut them all off, yet the Danijb 
 King invaded England the next Year, and made prodigious Ha- 
 vock among the Er.glijb ; and Ethelred was oblig'd to leave his 
 defolate Kingdom, and retire into Normandy, from whence he 
 return'd, and fore'd Canute, the Danifb King, to retire out of 
 England into Denmark; but he return'd quickly with a much 
 greater Force, and Ethelred, making all imaginable Preparations 
 againft him, died in the Year 1016. when his Son Edmund, 
 furnam'd lronfide, defended himfelf with great Bravery againft 
 the Danes. At lalt, it was agreed, that both Kings (hould 
 make an End of the War by a Duel, in which, tho' Edmund, 
 
 'tis
 
 33<> Prefent State of the Britifti Ifles. Part II. 
 
 'tis faid, had the Advantage of giving Canute a dangerous Wound, 
 yet he was perfuaded to finifli the Combat by dividing the 
 Kingdom with the Danes ; and was afterwards, as he retir'd 
 privately to eafe Nature, treacheroufly murder'd. After the 
 
 Death of Edmund, Canute, King of Denmark, was 
 Canute crown'd King of England : Having difpatch'd all that 
 
 the Dane, were left of the Royal Race, he, to ingratiate him- 
 King of felf with the People, married Emma, the Widow of 
 England. King Ethelred, fent moft of the Danes home, and 
 1017. reign'd with great Applaufe. He died in the Year 
 
 1036. and was fucceeded by his Son Harold, who 
 Harold. was, in Allufion to his Nimblenefs, call'd Harefoot : 
 
 He did nothing worth mentioning, but that he 
 caus'd his Step-Mother Emma, and her Sons, to be miferably 
 murder'd. He died in the Year 1039. leaving no Children be- 
 hind him. After his Death, the great Men of the 
 Canute II. Kingdom brought in his Brother Canute II. or Har- 
 
 dicanute, King of Denmark, who was famous for no- 
 thing but his greedy Appetite, the Danes, after his Death, 
 growing fo defpicable to the Englijh, that the Danijh Government 
 expir'd, after they had ravag'd England for the Space of 240 
 Years, tho' they pofiefs'd the Throne but 26 Years. After the 
 Death of Canute II. Edward, furnam'd the Confejfar, Son of 
 King Ethelred and Emma, was call'd in to be King of England, 
 and was crown'd in 1042. and died in 1066. He intended to 
 have left the Kingdom to his Coufin Edgar, but, he being very 
 
 young, Harald, who had the Tuition of Edgar, put 
 William the Crown upon his own Head. But when William 
 Duke of Duke of Normandy heard, that Harald had made 
 Norman- himfelf King, he refolv'd to demand the Crown of 
 dy enters, England, as belonging to him, by virtue of the laft 
 and con- Will of King Edward, who, he pretended, had left 
 quers Eng- the fame to him, as an Acknowledgment for the 
 land. great Favours he had receiv'd from his Father Ro- 
 
 1066. bert, when Ed-ward took San&uary in Normandy. 
 
 However, William landed without Oppofition with 
 a great Army, compos'd of Normans, French, and Netherlander.', 
 whilft the Fleet of Harald was fail'd to the Northern Coaft of 
 England, to oppofe the King of Norway, who had enter'd Eng- 
 land on that Side, and was defeated by Harald', but by this 
 Means he gave William an Opportunity to enter the Kingdom. 
 Both Armies met, and a Battle was fought with great Obitinacy 
 near Haftings in Sujex, where Harald being mortally wounded, 
 the Crown remained to William. The Englijh were at firfl; pretty 
 Veil fatisfied with his Government; partly, becaufe he left every 
 -one in PcfTefTion of what was his own, and gave only the vacant 
 
 Luicb
 
 Chap. XV. Pnfent State of the Britifli IIlcs. 33 1 
 
 Lands to his Normans, and partly, upon the Account of his being 
 related to the former Kings of England. He was, however, very 
 ftrenuous in {ecuring himfelf, commanding all the Arms to be 
 taken from the People ; and, to prevent nocturnal AfTemblies and 
 Commotions, he order'd, .That, after the Bell had rung at Eight 
 in the Evening, no Fire nor Candle Ihould be feen in their 
 Houfes : Befides this, he built feveral Forts in the moft commo- 
 dious Places. Notwithstanding all thefe wife Precautions, he 
 met with many Troubles. For Edgar, with fome of the Nobi- 
 lity, retir'd into Scotland; and, afliiled by the Danijh Pirate;;, cen- 
 tinually ravag'd the Northern Parts of England, burning the 
 City of York itfelf, wherein all the Normans were put to the 
 Sword ; tho' indeed William expell'd them afterwards. His 
 Son Robert alfo endeavour'd to take Normandy from him, agayift 
 whom his Father led a great Army out of England ; and the fa- 
 ther and Son encountering one another in the Battle, the firft was 
 difmouted by the latter, who, difcovering him to be his Father 
 by his Voice, immediately dismounted, embrae'd, and begg'd 
 Pardon, and was reconcil'd to his Father. William, at laft, per- 
 ceiving that his new conquer'd People would not be govern'd al- 
 together by Mildnefs, and that they were plotting Year after Year 
 to dethrone him, he then alter'd his Conduct ; for he depriv'd, 
 as far as he could, the Englijh Nation of its Privileges, abolifh'd 
 its Laws, and eftablifh'd thofe of Normandy in their Room ; feiz'd 
 upon the Treafures belonging to the Monafteries, under Pretence, 
 that fome of his rebellious Subjeds had concealed their molt valua- 
 ble Effects there ; he alfo depriv'd the Englijb of all the Places 
 of Truft and Profit, impos'd heavy Taxes, and appropriated to 
 himfelf a great Part of the Lands of England, which he gave to 
 others, relerving to himfelf out of them a yearly Revenue: In 
 fhort, he govern'd England like a conquer'd Country ; infomuch 
 that no Sovereign ever reign 'd with more defpotic Sway. Having 
 mention'd the Saxon Heptarchy, I fhall here infert the Names of 
 the Kingdoms, with their Extent, Jurifdi&ion, and Duration.
 
 332 Prefent State of the Britifh Ifles. Part II. 
 
 The SAXON HEPTARCHY. 
 
 i. The Kingdom of Kent con- 7 D ? e 8 an in 455- and d ung the 
 tain'd the County of Kent, f Re, S ns of 7 Kings, lafted till 
 
 ) 827. 
 2. The Kingdom of the South") ' _. 
 
 Saxons. / Thls Kingdom began in 488. 
 
 1 5^*-. f and > u d er 5 Kings, lafted till 
 
 2 $rr<y. J 601. 
 
 3. The Kingdom of the E a s't-A n g l e s. 
 
 1 Norfolk. -) 
 
 2 &^tf. / The Kingdom of the Eajl- 
 
 3 Cambndgejblre, with the f ^ /<f s ^S 3 " in 575- and laft- 
 Ifle of Ely. J ed under '5 Kings, till 928. 
 
 4. The Kingdom of the West-Saxons. 
 
 1 Cornwall. 
 
 2 Devon/hire. 
 
 3 Dorfetjkire. I The Kingdom of the Weji- 
 
 4 Somerfetjhire. \ Saxons began in 519. and lafted 
 
 5 Wiltjbire. 1 561 Years under iq Kines.' 
 
 6 Hampjbire. I * 6 
 
 7 Barkjbire. ~ 
 
 5. The Kingdom of Northumberland. 
 
 1 Laneajbire. v 
 
 2 York/hire. \ 
 
 3 Durham. 
 
 4 Cumberland. I This Kingdom began in 547. 
 
 5 Weftmorland ) and Med under 23 Kings tiU 
 
 6 Northumberland. \ the Year 9 26 - 
 
 7 Scotland to the />j/ of I 
 Edinburgh. ) 
 
 6. The Kingdom of the East-Saxons. 
 
 1 EJfex. -\ This Kingdom began in 527. 
 
 2 Middle/ex. J. an d lafted under 14 Kings till 
 
 3 Part of Hertford/hire. ) 808. 
 
 7. The
 
 Chap. XV. Prefent State of the Britifh Ifles. 33$, 
 
 The Kingdom of Mercia. 
 1 
 
 This Kingdom of Mercia be- 
 >gan in 522. and lafted under 20 
 Kings till the Year 724. 
 
 1 Gloctfterjhire. 
 
 2 Herefordjblre. 
 
 3 Worcefterjhire. 
 
 4 Warwickjbire 
 
 5 Leictjierjbire. 
 
 6 Rutland/hire. 
 
 7 Northampton/hire. 
 
 8 Lincolnjhire. 
 
 q Huntingdon/hire^ 
 
 10 Bedfordjhire. 
 
 1 1 Buckingham/hire. 
 I 2 Oxford/hire. 
 
 13 Stafford/hire. 
 
 14 Derbyjbire. 
 I 5 Sbrofjhire. 
 
 1 6 Nottingham/hire. 
 
 17 Chefler. 
 
 18 The other Part of ffrrf- 
 ford/hire. 
 
 Boundaries.] England (formerly Anglia, alfo Part of J?r/- 
 tanr.ia) is bounded by Sohuay Firth, the Cheviot Hills, and the 
 River Tweed, which divide it from Scot/and, on the North ; by 
 the German Ocean, which feparates it from the Z-otu Countries 
 and Germany, on the Eaft ; by the Englijh Chanel, which di- 
 vides it from France, on the South ; and by St. Georgeh Chanel, 
 which feparates it from Ireland, on the Weft, 
 
 Situation.] England is fituated between 49 Deg. 55 M. 
 and 55 Deg. 55 M. North Latitude. As to the Longitude, it 
 feems unneceftary to mention it, our Geographers having nVd 
 the firit Meridian at the City of London, the Metropolis of the 
 Kingdom. The Length of England, from the Lizard to the Town; 
 of Berwick, is 380 Miles ; and in Breadth, from the moft Eafterly 
 Part of Kenty to the Land's End in Cornwall, about 300 Miles, 
 
 Modern
 
 334 
 
 Modern Divifion ; alfo the an- 
 tient Inhabitants, in the Time 
 of the Romans. 
 
 Prefent State of the Britifh Ifles. 
 
 Square Chief 
 
 Miles. Towns 
 
 Part II. 
 
 ENGLAND. 
 
 Trino- 
 Mantes. 
 
 i 
 
 1 "Middle/ex 
 
 2 Effex 
 
 3 Korthumberlandi 1 
 Ottadini \ 
 
 4 Cumberland 
 
 5 Durham 
 
 6 Weftmorland 
 
 7 Lancajhire 
 
 8 Torkjbire 
 
 9 Lincolnjhire 
 
 10 Rutland/hire 
 
 1 1 Northamptonjhire 
 
 1 2 Leicefierjhire 
 
 13 Nottingham/hire 
 
 14 Derby/aire 
 
 1 5 Chejbire 
 
 16 Shropjbire 
 I 7 Stafford/hire 
 
 18 Wqrcejierfinre 
 
 19 War'voickjhire 
 Dobu- C 2 Gloucejierjbire 
 ni. \ 21 Oxfordjhire 
 Cat- f-22 Buckinghamjbire 
 tieu' K 23 Bedford/hire 
 chlani. t 24 Hertford/hire 
 
 25 Huntingdon/hire 
 
 26 Cainbridgejhire 
 
 27 Norfolk 
 
 28 Suffolk 
 
 29 Kent 1 Cant turn 
 
 Cori- 
 tani. 
 
 Cora- 
 <vii. 
 
 i! 
 
 Iceni. 
 
 fi 
 
 *V*\* 
 
 31 S^jr 
 
 32 Berk/hire; 
 Atrebates 
 
 f 3 3 Hampjhire 
 Belga? < 34 Wiltjhire 
 
 35 Somerfetjbire 
 
 290 
 1540 
 
 1702 
 
 1292 
 
 758 
 
 6 33 
 1429 
 
 4684 
 
 2162 
 
 136 
 
 683 
 
 695 
 
 694 
 
 845 
 
 894 
 
 1 106 
 
 1006 
 
 671 
 
 832 
 
 994 
 
 663 
 
 548 
 
 323 
 
 560 
 
 306 
 
 708 
 
 1426 
 
 1236 
 
 1550 
 
 735 
 
 1416 
 
 654 
 
 1481 
 1088 
 
 '335 i 
 
 London, 
 <?/// Londi- 
 num, alfo ^a- 
 gufla. 
 Colchefter 
 
 Nenucajile 
 
 Carlijle 
 
 Durham 
 
 Appleby 
 
 Lancajler 
 
 York 
 
 Lincoln 
 
 Oakham 
 
 Northampton 
 
 Leicejler 
 
 Nottingham 
 
 Derby 
 
 Chejler 
 
 Shrewujbury 
 
 Stafford 
 
 Worcefter 
 
 Warwick 
 
 Gloucejler 
 
 Oxford 
 
 Buckingham 
 
 Bedford 
 
 Hertford 
 
 Huntingdon 
 
 Cambridge 
 
 Norivicb 
 
 Ipfnuich 
 
 Canterbury 
 
 Guilford 
 
 Chicejler 
 
 Reading 
 
 Winchefler 
 
 Salifbury 
 
 'Taunton 
 
 Diftance 
 
 and Bear- 
 ing from 
 London. 
 
 43 NE 
 
 202 N 
 
 235 N 
 200 N 
 197 N 
 187 NW 
 150 N 
 103 N 
 74 N 
 
 54 N 
 
 78 NW 
 
 96 N 
 
 98 NW 
 140 NW 
 124NW 
 103 NW 
 
 87 NW 
 
 71 NW 
 
 81 W 
 
 47 NW 
 
 44 NW 
 40 N 
 20 N 
 
 48 N 
 
 44 N 
 90 NE 
 60 NE 
 43 E 
 25 SW 
 52 SW 
 
 32 E 
 
 54 SW 
 70 SW 
 120 W 
 
 Modern
 
 Chap. XV. Prefent State of the Britifh Ifles. 
 
 Modern Divifion ; alfo the an- J Square Chief 
 
 tient Inhabitants, in the Time Miles. Towns. 
 of the Romans. 
 
 36 Dorfetjhire ; ) 
 Durotriges \ 
 Dan- C 37 Devon/hire 
 minii. ^38 Cornwall 
 
 39 Monmouthjhire 
 
 40 Hereford/hire 
 
 WALES. 
 
 41 Radnor/hire 
 
 42 Brecknock/hire 
 
 43 Glamorganshire 
 
 44 Carmarthen/hire 
 
 45 Pembroke/hire 
 
 46 Cardigan/hire 
 
 47 Merioneth/hire 
 
 48 Carnarvanjhire 
 
 49 * Anglefey Ifle 
 
 50 Denbigh/hire 
 5 I Flintjhire 
 52 Montgomery/hire 
 
 Other Iflands are, 
 f 1 The Ifle of Mao 
 $ 2 Ifle of /F/f/ 
 
 3 >r/^ 
 
 4 Guernfey 
 
 5 Alderney 
 
 6 Sari. 
 
 Di- 
 
 meta. 
 
 Ordo 
 
 I 
 
 959 
 
 2385 
 
 1 192 
 
 422 
 
 820 
 
 385 
 770 
 670 
 869 
 520 
 646 
 620 
 
 459 
 
 248 
 
 509 
 198 
 695 
 
 160 
 150 
 
 43 
 5 
 7 
 l\ 
 
 Dorchefier 
 
 Exeter 
 Lancejlon 
 Monmouth 
 Hereford 
 
 Radnor 
 
 Brecknock 
 
 Cardiff 
 
 Carmarthen 
 
 Pembroke 
 
 Cardigan 
 
 Harlech 
 
 Camarvau 
 
 Beaumaris 
 
 Denbigh 
 
 Flint 
 
 Montgomery 
 
 Cajile Town 
 Newport 
 St. Hilary 
 St. Peters 
 
 Diltance 
 
 and Bear- 
 ing from 
 
 London. 
 
 00 SW 
 38 W 
 
 72 w 
 00 w 
 00 w 
 
 13 w 
 23 w 
 26 w 
 75 W 
 
 95 W 
 62 w 
 
 60 NW 
 200 NW 
 84 NW 
 60 NW 
 48 NW 
 22 NW 
 
 210 NW 
 72 SW 
 152 SW 
 145 SW 
 128 SW 
 141 SW 
 
 335 
 
 Meafur'd 
 Miles. 
 
 123 
 
 172 
 214 
 127 
 130 
 
 * 
 
 160 
 
 163 
 228 
 254 
 214 
 210 
 258 
 241 
 209 
 194 
 158 
 
 * This JJland (the celebrated Mona of the Romans, and antient Seat 
 of the Druids) was firjl attempted by Suetonius Paulinus, but conquered by 
 Julius Agricola, as we learn at large from Tacitus. 
 
 f This JJland, (caltd Mcr.abia by Pliny, and by Caefar Wis alfo caltd 
 Mona) together with the Advowfon of the Bijbcprick, belongs to the Earls 
 of Derby, who have all kind of civil P>?-jje> and Jurifdittion over the In- 
 habitants, but under the Fief of the Crown of England. 
 
 $ By the Romans Vcfta, ^'ecli 1 , or Vettefo. It was once honoured (as 
 the IJIe of Man) with the Title of Kin 
 
 ** Art all of William the Conqueror's Inheritance. 
 
 CtlMATE.]
 
 336 Prefent State of the Britifli Ifles. Part II. 
 
 Climate.] The Air of England is far more mild than in any 
 Part of the Continent under the fame Parallel ; for there the 
 Northerly Winds, blowing over a long Tract of frozen Land, 
 add to the Rigour of the Climate j and thefe are intercepted here 
 by the warm Sea, or rather qualified with a Degree of Heat be- 
 fore they reach our Shores. Nor are we in Summer fubjett to 
 exceflive Heat and Drought : But then it muft be acknowledg'd, 
 that, the Air is not fo pure and ferene as we find it on the Con- 
 tinent. The Weather is ever changing with u ; . A bright clear 
 Sky for whole Weeks and Months fucceffively, which our Neigh- 
 bours on the other Side of the Water frequently enjoy, is very 
 rarely known amongft us : We freeze and thaw alternately almoil 
 all Winter long, and fcarce ever meet with a Month of continu'd 
 fair Weather even in Summer. But it never varies fo much as 
 about the Equinox, when it frequently changes from Cold to 
 Heat, and from Heat to Cold again : As to Winds, tho' they 
 vary frequently, they blow from the Weftward two Thirds of the 
 Year. In Spring-time the Wind ufually fits North, and North- 
 eafterly, more than any other Part of the Year ; which is pre- 
 judicial to our Fruits. The greateft Storms proceed from the 
 Weft or South-weft ; and from this Quarter we expect Rain and 
 warm Weather, as we do dry cold Weather from the North and 
 North-eaft. However, this Country is generally fo fertile, and 
 produces fach Plenty of Grain, Fruits, ts'c. that it is called the 
 Granary of the Weftern World. The Face of England, in gene- 
 ral, affords a Variety of gentle rifing Hills. The Weft and 
 North, 'tis true, are encumber'd with barren high Mountains ; 
 but then the Riches of their Mines, their Tin, Lead, Copper, 
 and Iron, make ample Amends for the Unfruitfulnefs of the Sur- 
 face. The longeft Day, in the Northmoft Parts, is about 1 7 , 
 and, in the molt Southern, about 16 Hours; therefore England 
 lies in the 8th, 9th, 10th, and nth North Climates. 
 
 Government.] The King of England is Supreme in all 
 Caufes, both Ecclefiaftical and Civil : But yet he cannot enaft 
 Laws fingly and by himfelf, but muft have the Concurrence of 
 the Lords Spiritual and Temporal, and of the Commons, af- 
 fembled in Parliament. This Form of Government contributes 
 very much to the Induftry, Liberty, and Happinefs of the Na- 
 tion ; and referves enough for the Majefty and Prerogative of 
 any King, who will own his People as Subje&s, not as Slaves ; 
 and no People in the World may live more happy, if they pleafe. 
 The Kingdom of England is an hereditary Monarchy ; and the 
 Enfigns of Royalty, as Crowns, Sceptres, Purple Robes, Golden 
 Globe, and Holy Unction, have as long appertain'd to the King 
 of England, as to any other Prince in Europe. The King alone, 
 
 b/
 
 Chap. XV.. PreftHJt State of the Britifo Ides. 337 
 
 by his RoyaJ Prerogative, has Power to declare 
 War, make Peace, fend and receive Ambaffadors, Frercget- 
 make Leagues and Treaties with any Foreign Statcs> five. 
 give Commiulons for levying Men and Arms by Sea 
 and Land, or for preffiog IVAen for the Sea Service, if need re- 
 quire. His Majefty, who is fuppofed to be Judge of the Exigen- 
 cies of the Nation, may, of his mere Will and Pleafure, convoke, 
 adjourn, prorogue, remove, and diffolve Parliaments ; an<L, 
 without rendering any Reafon, may refufe his Royal Affent to any 
 Bill pafs'd by both Houfes of Parliament, without which it is of 
 no Force : He is the Fountain of all Honour in his Dominions ; 
 and has alone the Nomination of all Officers of State, of Bifhops, 
 and other high Dignities in the Church, of Commanders, and 
 other Officers, at Sea and Land, and of all Magiftrates. He has 
 the Power of determining Rewards, and of remitting Punifhments. 
 The King of England has, by his Prerogative, the Cuftody of 
 .the Perfons and Eitates of fuch, as, for want of Underftanding, 
 cannot govern themfelves. The Eftate of an Idiot goes to the 
 King's Ufe, but that of a Lunatic to the next Heir. This Mo- 
 narch is the Owner of all Gold and Silver Mines in bis Domi- 
 nions, in whofe Ground foever they are found. All Eftates, 
 when no Heir appears, or by Forfeiture, all Lands of Aliens dy- 
 ing before Naturalization, and all things whereof the Property is 
 unknown, belong to the King. Next to the King 
 and Princes of the Blood, are the great Officers of Officers of 
 the Crown, who are commonly reckon'd Nine in theCrvwn. 
 Number, viz. I. The Lord High Steward of Eng- Lord High 
 hand was aptiently the highett Officer under the King, Steward. 
 and his Power fo exorbitant, that it was thought 
 fit no longer to trull it in the Hands of any Subjett ; but, pro 
 ilia njice x as at a Coronation, or the Arraignment of a Peer of 
 the Realm for Treafon, or fuch like, this Office is conferred by 
 the King upon fome of the chief Peers, and expires 
 when the Bufinefs is over. 2. The Lord High Lord High 
 Chancellor is after the King and Princes of the Blood, Chancellor. 
 in Civil Affairs, (there being no Lord High Steward) 
 the higheft Perfon in the Kingdom, as the Archbifhop of Can- 
 terbury is in Ecclefiaftical Affairs. His Office is to keep tho 
 King's Great Seal, to judge not according to Common Law, as 
 Other Civil Courts do, but to moderate the Rigour of the Law, 
 and to judge according to Equity, Confcience, or Reafon j to 
 bellow all Ecclefiaftical Benefices in the King's Gift 
 under 20/. yearly in the King's Books. 3. The Lord High 
 Lord High Treafurer is the third great Officer, whofe Trea/urer. 
 Bufinefs is to take Charge of all the King's Reve- 
 nues kept in the Exchequer ; and has alfo. the Check of all the 
 
 Z Officers
 
 33 s Prefent State cf the Britifh Ifles. Part II. 
 
 Officers any way employ'd in colle&ing Impofts, Cuftoms, &c, 
 belonging to the Crown. This Office is frequently executed by 
 feveral Perfons conjunctly in Commiffion, term'd 
 Lord Lords of the Treamry. 4. The Lord Prefident is 
 
 Prejident. the fourth great Officer, whofe Bufinefs is to attend 
 upon the King, to propofe Affairs at Council-Table, 
 and then to report to the King the feveral Tranfattions there. 
 5. The Lord Privy-Seal, the fifth great Officer, un- 
 Zord Pri- der whofe Hands pafs all Charters and Grants of the 
 *vy-Seal. King, and Pardons fign'd by his Majefty, before they 
 come to the Great Seal of England; alfo divers other 
 Matters of fmaller Moment, as for the Payment of Money, &c. 
 which do not pafs the Great Seal. 6. The Lord 
 Lord Great Chamberlain of England, the fixth great 
 
 Chamber- Officer, on the Coronation-day, before the King 
 lain. rifeth, is to put on his Shirt, Coif, and Apparel that 
 
 Morning, to carry at the Coronation the Coif, 
 Gloves, and Linen, to be us'd by the King upon that Occafion ; 
 likewife the Sword and Scabbard, and the Gold to be offer'd by the 
 King, together with the Robe- Royal and Crown ; to undrefs 
 and attire the King with his Royal Robes, and to ferve the King 
 that Day with Water to wafh his Hands before and 
 Lord High after Dinner. 7. The Lord High Conftable of Eng- 
 Confiable. land, an Officer, whofe Power was fo great, that 
 it was thought inconvenient to lodge the fame in any 
 Subject, fince the Death of the Duke of Buckingham, in the 
 Year 1521. who was the laft High Conftable of England ; but is 
 now conferr'd on fome of the chiefeft Peers, pro ilia vice ; as 
 upon Occaiion of Coronations. 8. The Earl Marlhal 
 Earl of England, whofe Office is to take Cognizance of 
 Marjhal. all Matters of War and Arms ; to determine Con- 
 tracts concerning Deeds of Arms out of the Realm 
 upon Land, and Matters touching Wars within the Realm, which 
 cannot be determin'd by Common Law. 9. The 
 Lord High Lord High Admiral of England is the laft great 
 Admiral. Officer of the Crown, whofe Truft and Honour is 
 fo great, that this Office hath been ufually given 
 either to the King's younger Sons, or one of the chiefeft Peers of 
 the Realm. But, at prefent, this Office alfo is executed by feve- 
 ral Perfons in Commiffion, who are ftyl'd Lords of the Admi- 
 ralty. 
 
 Before the Conqueft, the Great Council of the 
 
 Pailia- King, confirming only of the Great Men of the King- 
 
 mtnt. dom, was call'd the Aflembly of the Sages ; but, af- 
 
 I ioo. ter the Conqueft, about the Reign of Hen. I. it was 
 
 call'd by the French Word Parlementum, from Parler; 
 
 f
 
 Chap. XV. Prefect State of the Britifh Ifles. 339 
 
 to talk together, ftill confuting, as 'tis faid, only of the 
 Great Men of the Nation, till the Reign of Hen. 111. 1 2 1 6. 
 when the Commons were call'd to fit in Parliament ; 
 and even long before, in the Opinions of fome Antiquaries, no- 
 thing, wherein the Lives or Eftates of the common People of 
 England were concern'd, ever pafTed without their common Con- 
 fent. This is the Supreme Court, wherein Caufes are finally de- 
 termin'd, and from which there lies no Appeal. Indeed, the 
 Lords and Commons afTembled in Parliament have oftentimes 
 left Matters of high Moment to the King and his 
 Privy-Council, as, by Secrecy and Expedition, better Privy- 
 able to tranfadt fome State- Affairs, than all the Lords Conncil. 
 and Commons together. The King and his Privy- 
 Council take Cognizance of few or no Matters that may well be 
 determin'd by the known Laws, and ordinary Courts of Juftice ; 
 bt only confult for the publick Good, Honour, Defence, and 
 Safety of the Realm. The Members of this moft Honourable 
 Privy-Council are fuch, as the King of his own Will fhall pleafe 
 to choofe ; and they are commonly Men of the higheit Rank, 
 eminent for Eftates, Wifdom, Courage, and Integrity. At all 
 Debates in this Council, the loweft delivers his Opinion firft, and 
 the King laft of all declares his Judgment, and thereby determines 
 the Matter of Debate. A Council is feldom or never held 
 without the Prefence of one of the two Principal 
 Secretaries of State, whofe Employment, being of Secretaries 
 extraordinary Truft and Multiplicity, renders them of State. 
 moft confiderable in the Eyes of the King, on whom 
 they attend every Day, as Occafion requires, the Intercourfe of 
 foreign Bufinefs between Great Britain and other Nations pafGng 
 thro' their Hands ; alfo, the Requefts of the King's Subje&s are, 
 for the moft part, lodg'd in their Hands, to be reprefented to the 
 King, and always to make Difpatches thereupon, according to 
 his Majefty's Anfwers and Directions ; likewife Affairs relating 
 to the Church, the Army, the Militia, Grants, Pardons, Dif- 
 penfations, &f c . are manag'd by the Principal Secretaries of State. 
 For the Execution of Laws, after the Houfe of Lords in Parlia- 
 ment, the higheft Court in England, at Common- 
 Law, is the Kings-Binch, fo call'd, becaufe anti- King's- 
 ently the Sovereign fometimes fat there in Perfon on Bench. 
 a high Bench, and his Judges on a low Bench at his 
 Feet, to whom the Judicature belongs in his Abfence ; or, per- 
 haps, fo call'd, becaufe this Court determines Pleas between the 
 Crown and the Subject. In this Court are handled all Things 
 that concern the Lofs of Life or Member of any Subject ; for 
 then the King is concern'd, becaufe the Life and Limbs of the 
 Subject belong to the King. Here are handled alfo all Treafons, 
 
 Z 2 Felonies,
 
 34-0 Prefent State of /kBritiHi Ifles* Part IT. 
 
 Felonies, Breach of Peace, Oppreflion, Mifgovernment, &c. 
 This Court, befides, hath Power to examine and correft Errors in 
 Faclo, and in Jure, of all the Judges and Juftices of England, 
 in their Judgments and Proceedings ; and this not only in Pleas of 
 the Crown, but all Pleas, real, perfonal, and mixed, except only 
 in the Exchequer. The Jurifdiflion of this Court is general, and, 
 extends to all England ; for the Law prefumes, that the Sovereign 
 is always there in Perfon. Next to the King's-Bencb 
 tiigh in Wejiminjler-Hall, is wifely plac'd the High Court 
 
 Court of of Chancery, to mitigate the Rigour of the other, 
 Chancery, and refcue Men out of the Hands of their Oppref- 
 fors ; to relieve a Perfon, efpecially againft Cheats, 
 unfortunate Accidents, and Breaches of Truft. Out of this 
 Court are iiTued Writs, or Summons for Parliaments and Convo- 
 cations, Edicts, Proclamations, Charters ; and here are feal'd and 
 inroll'd Letters Patents, Treaties and Leagues with foreign 
 Princes, Deeds between Party and Party, touching their Lands 
 and Eftates. The next Court, for the Execution of 
 Common- Law, is the Court of Common-Pleas, fo call'd, be- 
 Pleas. caufe there are debated the ufual Pleas between Sub- 
 
 ject and Subjeft ; in it all civil Caufes, real and per- 
 fonal, are usually tI- i e d according to the ftridt Rules of Law. 
 The next Court for the Execution of Laws, is the 
 Exchequer. Exchequer, wherein are tried all Caufes which be- 
 long to the King's Revenues or Treafury, as touch- 
 ing Accompts, Difburfements, Cuftoms, and all Fines impos'd 
 upon any Man. Befides thefe various Courts above- 
 Govern- mention'd, the King adminifters Juftice by his Iti- 
 ment of nerant Judges, in their Circuits thro' the Kingdom. 
 Counties, For the Civil Government of Counties, the King 
 &c. makes Choice of fome of the Clergy, Gentry, and 
 
 Lavyyers, commonly Men of Integrity, Wifdom, 
 'Juftices of and good Eftates, who have their ufual Refidence in 
 the Peace. the County j and thefe, by Commiffion under the 
 Great-Seal, are call'd Juftices of the Peace; and fome 
 of them are call'd Juftices of the Quorum, from thefe Words in 
 the Commiflion, Quorum A. B. unum ejfe 'volumus ; that is, fome 
 Bufinefs of more Importance may not be tranfatted without the 
 Prefence or Concurrence of one of them. The Original of 
 Juftices is from the Fourth of Edward III. 1330. Their Office 
 is to call before them, examine, and commit to Prifon, all 
 Thieves, Murderers, thofe that hold Confpiracies, Riots, and al- 
 . moft all Delinquents, that may occafion the Breach of Peace and 
 Quiet to the King's Subjects. They are alfo impower'd to put 
 many Laws in Execution, and aft in a judicial Capacity, as in 
 Cafes relating to the Poor, the Repairs of Highways, the Punifh- 
 
 ments
 
 Chap. XV. Prefent State of the Britifli Ifles. 341 
 
 ments of Vagrants, and other diflblute and diforderly Perfons. 
 The Thieves, Murderers, Money-coiners, and Rioters, com- 
 mitted to Prifon by the Juftices, are to be tried at the next AC- 
 fizes, when the Judges go their Circuits. The King 
 every Michaelmas Term nominates a Sheriff for each Sheriffs. 
 County, who is the Guardian thereof, and whofe 
 Office it is to execute the King's Mandates, and all Writs directed 
 to him out of the King's Court, to impanel Juries, to bring 
 Caufes and Criminals to Trial, to fee the Sentences both in Civil 
 and Criminal Affairs executed, to wait on, and guard the Itinerant 
 Judges twice a Year, fo long as they continue within the County; 
 every County being fubdivided into Hundreds, (fo cali'd at firft, 
 either for containing an hundred Houfes, or an hundred Men 
 bound to find Arms) or Wapentakes, which are 
 govern'd by their Bailiffs, (a very antient Office, but Bailiffs. 
 now of fmall Authority) High-Conftables, who di- High-Can- 
 fperfe Warrants and Orders of the Juftices of the ft able s. 
 Peace to each Petty -Conftable. Every City of Bug- Cities, 
 land, by their Charters or Privileges, granted by fe- 
 veral Kings, is a little Commonwealth apart, go- Mayors, 
 vern'd chiefly by themfelves. In Cities a Mayor is See. 
 chofen commonly out of twelve Aldermen. In fome 
 Corporations a Bailiff is chofen out of a certain Number of Bur- 
 gefles. The Mayor of the City is the King's Lieutenant, and 
 with the Aldermen and Common-Council (as it were, King, 
 .Lords, and Commons in Parliament) can make Laws, cali'd By- 
 laws, for the Government of the City. The Go- 
 vernment of Boroughs, which are incorporated, is Boroughs. 
 much after the fame Manner. In fome Boroughs 
 there is a Mayor, in others one or two Bailiffs, in others the 
 chief Magiftrate goes by other Names, as Alderman, Portreve, 
 &c. who have equal Power with a Mayor and Sheriffs ; and, 
 during their Offices, are Juftices of the Peace within 
 their Liberties. For the better Government of Vil- Villages. 
 lages, the Lord of the Soil hath a Power to hold a Court- 
 .Court-Baron, fo cali'd, becaufe antiently fuch Lords Baron. 
 were called Barons ; or elfe Court- Baron, i. e. Court 
 -of Freeholders. Alfo for the Government of Villages and Pa- 
 rifhes, there is another very ufeful Officer, called a 
 -Petty -Conftable ; whofe Office is to keep the Peace Petty-Con- 
 in cafe of Quarrels, to fearch any Houfe for Rob- jiable. 
 'bere, Murderers, or others that have any ways broken 
 the Peace, to feize upon them, and keep them in Cufiody, till 
 -they can bring them before fome Juftice of the Peace, to whom 
 /the Petty-Conltables are fubfervient upon all Occafions, either to 
 4>ring Criminals before them, or to carry them, by their Com- 
 
 Z 3 mand,
 
 342 Prefent State of the Britifti Ifles. Part II. 
 
 mand, to the common Prifon. Laftly, There are 
 Coroners. alfo in every County two Officers, called Coroners, 
 
 whofe Bufinefs is to inquire by a Jury of Neigh- 
 bours, how, and by whom, any Perfon came by a violent Death, 
 and to enter the fame upon Record, which is Matter Criminal, 
 and a Plea of the Crown ; and thence they are call'd Crowners, 
 or Coroners. This admirable Conftitution, which fecures the Li- 
 berties and Properties of the Subjects, may render them a very 
 happy People, if they are not indifcreet in Party Affairs. And if 
 it be confider'd, among many other Advantages, that they are 
 fubjeel to no Laws but what they confent to themfelves, by their 
 Reprefentatives in Parliament, they are far more happy than the 
 People of any of our neighbouring Nations. In fome Things 
 
 the Laws of England are, above other Nations, fo 
 Remarka- favourable to the Fair Sex, as if Women had voted 
 He Laws, at the making of them. For if a Wife bring forth 
 &e. a Child during her Husband's Abfence, tho' it be for 
 
 fome Years, yet, if he liv'd all the Time within this 
 Ifland, he mull father that Child ; and, if that Child be her firft- 
 born Son, he (hall inherit that Husband's Eftate, if intail'd, or 
 left without Will. If a Wife bring forth a Child begotten by a 
 former Husband, or by any other before Marriage, but born after 
 the Marriage with another Man, this latter muft own the Child, 
 and that Child (hall be his Heir at Law. The Wife, after her 
 Husband's Death, having no Jointure fettled before Marriage, 
 may challenge the third Part of his yearly Rents of Land during 
 her Life. The Condition of Children, in England, is different 
 from thofe in our neighbouring Nations ; for Fathers may give 
 all their Eftates unentail'd from their own Children, and all to any 
 one Child, and none to the reft. A Son at the Age of 14 may 
 choofe his Guardian, may confent to Marriage ; and at 21 is faid 
 to be at full Age, and may then fit in either Houfe of Parliament, 
 which in other Countries may not be dene till the Age of 25. 
 The eldeft Son commonly inherits all Lands ; except in fome 
 Places, as in Kent, by the Cuftcm of Ga-velkind, the Lands are 
 equally divided among the Sons, and in others, the youngeft in- 
 herits all the Lands by a Cuftom call'd Borough- EngUJb. If there 
 be no Son, the Land, as well as Goods, are equally divided 
 among the Daughters ; yet, in fome Manors, as that of Bray in 
 Berkjhlre, the eldeft Daughter fiicceeds, like the eldeft Son, to 
 the whole Inheritance. A Daughter at 1 2 may confent to Matri- 
 mony ; and if at that -Age (he diifent not, (he is bound for ever ; 
 
 and at 2 1 fhe is enabled to contract, or alienate her 
 Crifjiesand Lands by Will, or otherwife. As the Punifhment 
 their Pu- inflicled for feveral Crimes are different in moft Na- 
 r.ijhmr.ts. tion s , and thofe in England much different from 
 
 thofe
 
 Chap. XV.. Prefent State of the Britifh Ifles. 34$ 
 
 thofe of all other Countries ; a brief Account of them may not 
 be unacceptable to the young Reader. The chief Crimes in Eng- 
 land, that touch the Life of a Man, are, i. High 
 Treafon, which is an Offence committed againft the High 
 Security of the King or Kingdom, whether by Ima- Treafon. 
 gination, Word, or Deed, as to compafs or imagine 
 the Death of the King, to levy War againft the King, to kill 
 his Chancellor, &c. The Punifhment for Crimes of this Nature 
 is, the Traitor is laid upon a Hurdle or Sledge, to be drawn to 
 the Gallows, there to be hang'd by the Neck, prefently cut 
 down alive, his Entrails to be fuddenly pull'd out of his Belly, 
 and burnt before the Face of the Criminal ; then his Head to be 
 cut off, his Body to be divided into four Parts ; and, laftly, that 
 the Head and Body be hung up, or impal'd, where the King fhall 
 command. Befides all this, h^e fhall forfeit all his Lands and 
 Goods whatfoever ; his Wife fhall lofe her Dowry, his Children 
 their Nobility, and all their Right of Inheriting from him, or 
 any other Anceftors. For counterfeiting the King's Money-, 
 tho' adjudged High Treafon, the Punifhment is Hang- 
 ing and Drawing^ 2. Petit Treafon, which is when a Petit 
 Wife kills her Husband, the Punifhment for which is Treafon. 
 to be burnt alive ; alfo when a Servant kills his Maf- 
 ter or Miitrefs, or a Clergyman his Prelate, the Punifhment is to 
 be hang'd by the Neck till they are dead ; which is 
 alfo the Punifhment for, 3. Felony, or a Capital Felony. 
 Crime, next in Degree to Petit Treafon, and com- 
 prehends divers Particulars, as Murder, Sodomy, Rape, Firing 
 of Houfes wilfully, &c. If a Criminal, indifted of Petit Trea- 
 fon, or Felony, refufes to anfvver, or put himfelf upon a legal 
 Trial, then for fuch (landing Mute, and Contumacy, 
 he is prefently to undergo that horrible Punifhment The Preft. 
 call'd Peine forte iff dure ; that is, to be fent back 
 to the Prifon from whence he came, and there laid in fome dark 
 Room, upon the bare Ground, on his Back, his Arms and Legs 
 drawn with Cords, faften'd to the feveral Quarters of the Room ; 
 and then fhall be laid upon his Body Iron and Stone, fo much as 
 he may bear, and more ; the next Day he fhall have three Mor- 
 fels of Barley bread, without Drink ; and the third Day fhall have 
 Drink of the Water next to the Prifon-door, except it be running 
 Water, without Bread; and this fhall be his Diet till he die : 
 Which grievous kind of Death fome flout Fellows have fome- 
 times chofen ; and fo not being tried and convifted of their Crimes, 
 their Eftates may not be forfeited to the King, but defcend to 
 their Children, nor their Blood flain'd. But altho' this Law 
 continues, yet, of late, they are fuffer'd to be overcharg'd with 
 Weight laid upon them, that they expire prefently. In Cafes of 
 
 Z 4 High
 
 344 Trefint State of the Britifh Ifles. Part II. 
 
 High Treafon, tho' the Criminal Hand mate, yet Jadgment fhall 
 
 be given againfl him, as if he had been convifted, 
 Petit and his Eftate confifcated. 4. Petit Larceny, or 
 
 Larceny. fmail Theft, is when Goods itohi exceed not the 
 
 Value of a Shilling, the Punifhment for ^hich is, 
 Drunk- Tranfportation for a Term of Years. 5. Drunkards, 
 
 ttrds, &c. profane Swearers, Night-walkers, and the like, are 
 
 punifh'd by fetting their Legs in the Stocks for eer- 
 Scolding tain Hours, and by certain pecuniary Mulcts. Scold- 
 Women. ing Women are to be fet in a Trebuchet, commonly 
 
 called a Cucking-flool, probably from the French 
 Word Coquine, and the German Stull ; the Quean's Chair ifc 
 plac'd over fome deep Water, into which they are let down, and 
 
 plung'd under Water thrice, to cool their Choler and 
 Self-lMur- Heat. Felo de fe, that is, one who wittingly kills 
 defers. himfelf, is to be interr'd without Chriftian Burial, 
 
 with a Stake driven through the Corpfe, and to for- 
 feit his Goods. 
 
 Trade] The Trade of Great Britain with foreign Nations 
 is carried on, partly by Companies, and partly by private Mer- 
 chants. The moft confiderable Companies are, 1. The united 
 
 E aft -India Company ; 2. The Royal African Com- 
 With Chi- party ; 3. The South-Sea Company; 4. Hudfon'% 
 na, India, 'Buy Company. Britain exports to China, India, 
 and Per&a.. and Perfia, great Quantities of Bullion, Lead, all 
 
 Sorts of Englijh Cloth, efpecially Broad Cloth, Stuffs, 
 Callimancoes, Longells, &c. We import from thefe Places, 
 China-ware, Tea of all Sorts, Cabinets, Raw and Wrought Silk, 
 Muflins, Calicoes, Cotton- Cloths, Coffee, Canes, Diamonds, 
 Drugs of many Kinds, Grocery -wares of various Sorts, &c. 
 Of which, 'tis fuppofed, as much is re-exported to foreign Nations, 
 
 as repays all the Bullion carried to thefe Places, and 
 With a confiderable Balance befides. Africa takes from 
 
 Africa. Britain Linen and Woollen Manufactures, Knives, 
 
 Sciffars, fmall Looking grafts*, Strong-waters, Pew- 
 ter-difhes, Beads, and other Toys. We take in return Gold 
 JDuft, Red-wocd, Elephant-teeth, Guinea Grain, Gum, Oflridge- 
 feathers, Amber, Ebony, Cryftal, and great Numbers of Negroes 
 carried to the Plantations in America. Prom the Coaft of Bar- 
 bary we import Rice, Figs Raifms, Dates, Almonds, and Copper. 
 The great Advantage of the African Trade is, that it carries no 
 
 Money out, fupplies our Plantations with Negroes, 
 With the and brings in a great deal of Bullion for Negroes fold 
 Canary to the Spanijb Weji-Indies. We export, to the Ca- 
 
 JJletnds. nary Iflands, Bays, Kerfeys, Serges, Norwich Stuffs, 
 
 and
 
 Chap. XV. Prefeni State of the Br'mfli Ifles. 345 
 
 and other Woollen Manufactures ; Stockings, Hats, Fuftians, Ha- 
 berdafhery Wares, Tin, Hard-ware ; alfo Herrings, Pilchards, 
 faked Fifh, Grain, Linens, Pipe Staves, Hoops, and fome other 
 Commodities. Britain imports from thence, Canary Wines, Log- 
 wood, Hides, Indico, Cochineal, and fome few Coni- 
 moditisj which are the Produces of the Weft-Indies. With 
 Turky takes from us Broad Cloth, Longells, Tin, Turk/. 
 Lead, fome Iron, fome French and Lijbon Sugars, and 
 fome Bullion. Our Returns are Raw Silk, Grogram, Yarn, Dy- 
 ing Stuffs, Drugs, Soap, Leather, Cotton, Oil, fome Fruit, as 
 Currans, Raifins, Vitriol, Sulphur, Opium, Gauls, Balm, Box- 
 wood, Mohair. The Balance of this Trade is thought to be in 
 our Favours. England exports to Italy Broad Cloth, 
 Longells, Bays, Druggets, Callimancoes, Camlets, With 
 and other Stuffs ; Leather, Tin, Lead ; Fifh, as Italy. 
 Pilchards, Herrings, Salmon, Newfoundland Cod, 
 Ling, Logwood, Cffr. Our Returns are Raw, Thrown, and 
 Wrought Silk, Wine, Oil, Soap, Olives, fome Dyers Wares, 
 Anchovies, Brimftone, Carpets, fcented Gloves, Necklaces, and 
 fome other Things. The Balance of this Trade is thought to be 
 confiderably againft us. We export to Spain Broad 
 Cloth, Druggets, Callimancoes, Bays, Stuffs of di- With 
 vers Kinds, leather, Fifh, Tin, Lead, Com, Lmen, Spain. 
 fs'c. England takes from Spain Wine, Oil, Fruit of 
 divers Kinds, Wool, Indico, Cochineal, and Dying Stuffs, Tent, 
 'jr'c. The Balance is fuppos'd but very linall in our Favours. 
 
 Portugal takes from us Broad Cloth, Bays, Longells, Druggets, 
 Callimancoes, Perpets, Says, Kerfeys, Flannel, and 
 all Sorts of Stuffs ; alfo Tin, Lead, Leather, Fifh, With 
 Corn, and other Things. England takes from Por- Portugal. 
 tugal Wine, Oil, Salt, and Fruits, as Orange?, Le- 
 mons, Almonds, alfo Figs Saffron, Soap, White Marble, Liquor- 
 ice, Sumach. There is a confiderable Balance in our Favours. 
 Britain exports to France Tobacco, Horn Plates, Tin, 
 fome Lead, fome Flannels, Corn in Time of Scarcity, With 
 Wool, Coals, Alum. Our Imports are Wine, Brandy, France. 
 Linen, Fine Lace, Cambrick Lawns, Fine Cam- 
 bricks, Brocades, Velvets, Salt, Pepper, Prunes, Chefnuts, c5>. 
 There is a Balance againft us of no lefs than 500,000 /. Flanders 
 takes from Britain Serges, a few Flannels, a very 
 few Stuffs, Sugar, Tobacco, Tin, and Lead. Our With 
 Imports are fine Lace, fine Cambricks, and Cambrick Flanders. 
 Lawns, whited Linens, Threads, Tapes, Incles, and 
 divers otlier Commodities to a very great Value. The Balance 
 very much againft us, being at leaft 250,000/. Our Exports to 
 t Holland
 
 346 Pre/em State of the Britifli Ifles. Part II. 
 
 Holland are Broad Cloth, Druggets, Longells, Stuffs 
 With of a great many Sorts, Leather, Com, Coals, Su- 
 
 Holland. gars, Tobacco, Rice, Ginger, Pitch, Tar, with Eajl- 
 India and Turky Goods. Our Imports are great 
 Quantities of fine Hollands, Threads, Tapes, Incles, Whale-fins, 
 Brafs-battery, Madder, Lintfeed, Flax, Argol, Wainlfct, &c. 
 The Balance confiderably for us. Germany takes from 
 With us Broad Cloth, Druggets, Longells, Serges, Stuffs, 
 
 Germany. Tobacco, Sugar, Ginger, Tin, Lead, Eaft-lndia 
 Goods, and feveral other Commodities. Our Imports 
 are prodigious Quantities of Linen, Linen Yarn, Kid-fkins, Tin 
 Plates, and a great many other Commodities. The Balance is 
 very near as much againft us in this Trade, as in that 
 With of France. We export to Denmark, Sweden, and 
 
 Sweden, Norway Guineas, Crown-pieces, Bullion, fome To- 
 Denmark, bacco, a few coarfe Woollens, Meal, Malt, Beef, 
 and Tallow, Salt, Coal, fome Linen, Lead, Butter, Her- 
 
 Korway. rings. Our Exports are Deal-boards, Fir-timber, 
 Spars, Plank, Iron, Copper, Wire of Iron and Cop- 
 r, Tar, Wainfcot, Pipe-ftaves, Great Guns, Mortars, Bullets. 
 fe pay them a very great Balance, amounting near 390,000 /. 
 RuJJia takes from England fome coarfe Cloth, Long- 
 With ells, Worfted Stuffs, Tin, Lead, Tobacco, and a few 
 
 Raffia. other Commodities. Our Imports are Hemp, Flax, 
 
 Linen Cloth, Linen Yarn, RuJJia Leather, Iron, 
 Furs, Potalh.es, Timber, Train-oil, Tallow, isc. to an immenie 
 Value. The Balance againft us 400,000 /. Britain exports to 
 fir- r Ireland Books, Bark, Bottles, Candle-wick, Wool- 
 
 T 1 nd cards, Coals, Coffee, Wheat and Barley, Draper)-, 
 
 Drugs, Alum, Cochineal, Indico, Logwood, Iron, 
 Steel, Lead, Cambricks, Hollands, Lawns, Muflins, Millenery- 
 wares, Calicoes, Silks Raw, Thrown, and Manufacture, Salt, 
 Pewter, Tin, Whalebone, Wood, Cotton, and Cotton Yarn, 
 Grogram'," Yam, Salt-petre, Groceries of Fruits and Spice, Bat- 
 tery and Brafs Shruff, Copper-plates, Red- wood, Earthen-ware, 
 Glafs/ Sugars, Gold and Silver Thread and Lace, Hops, Slates, 
 Snuff, Camlets, Fuftians, Stockings, Pitch, Tar, Cyder, Pea, 
 Tobacco, Fan;-, Gloves, Paper, Hats, Garden-feeds, Hemp, Ap- 
 ples, Malt, Wine, and fome other Commodities, to the Value of 
 505,724/. per Annum. Our Imports are Linen and Linen Yarn, 
 Wool, Woollen and Worfted Yarn, Copper Ore, Feathers, Hair, 
 raw Hides, Sheep, Calves-fkins, Goat and Kid-lkins, Sheep and 
 Lamb-flcins, Rabbet- (kins, Tallow, Beef, Mutton, Butter, Cheek:, 
 Candles, Fifh, Flannel, Frize, Horfes, Pork, Rape-feed, Soap, 
 and fome other Commodities* to the Value of 487,272/. per Ann. 
 5 Britain 

 
 Chap. XV. Prefent State of the Britifh Ifles.' 347 
 
 Britain exports to New- England, all Sorts of Wool- 
 len Manufactures, Linen, Sail-cloth and Cordage for With 
 rigging their Ships, Haberdafhery, Hard-ware, is'c. New-Eng- 
 Our Returns are Pitch, Tar, and Turpentine, with land, 
 fome Sl<jis, Pipe-ftaves, Mails, Pine, Cedar, &c. 
 We export to Nenv-Jer/ey, New-Tor k, and Penfylva- With 
 nia, Broad Cloth, Kerfeys, Druggets, Serges, and New-Jer- 
 Manufa&ures of all Kinds. Our Returns are in (ey, New- 
 Gold and Silver, with fome fmall Quantity of Wheat, York, and 
 Flax and Hemp. Britain fends to Virginia and Ma- Penfylvania. 
 rylandzSS. manner of Clothing and Houlhold- Goods, 
 Iron, Manufactures of all Sorts, Saddles, Bridles, With Viv 
 Brafs and Copper-wares, and in lhort, a Part of all ginia and 
 our Manufactures. Our Returns are Tobacco, both Maryland, 
 for Homc-confumption and Re-exportation, Tar, Pitch, 
 Turpentine, and fome Lumber. Carolina takes the 
 lame Commodities from us as Virginia. Our Re- With 
 curns are Rice, Deer-fkins, Buck-fkins, Beaver, and Carolina. 
 fome fmall Quantity of Raw Silk and Tobacco. The 
 Sugar Plantations take from us Cloathing of all With the 
 Kinds, both Linen, Silk, and Woollen, Wrought Sugar 
 Iron, Brafs, Copper, all Sorts of HcKifhold-Furniture, Planta- 
 and a great Part of their Food. Our Imports are tions. 
 Sugar, Ginger, Rum, Melaffes, Cotton, Indigo, Co- 
 coa-nuts, Pymento, Tamarinds, Lime-juice, fome Gold and Bul- 
 lion, from Jamaica, to the Value of 539,500/. per Annum ; 
 from Barbadoes, to the Value of 246,600 /. from the Leetvard- 
 JJlands, to the Value of 642,270/. 
 
 Revenues.] At the Death of King Charles II. the Reve- 
 nues amounted to about 1,800,000/. per Annum ; and in King 
 James the Second's Reign, in the Time of Peace, it was rais'd to 
 2,000,000/. yearly. But there has, ever fince the laft Peace, 
 been rais'd upwards of 3,000,000 annually, for the Service of the 
 Government, befides 2,000,000/. more, to difcharge the Intereft 
 of a Debt of fifty Millions contracted by the late War. 
 
 Forces.] The Militia of England are at prefent computed to 
 be near 200,000 Horfe and Foot. The Lord-Lieutenant of a 
 County has a Power by his Commiffion to charge any Perfon in 
 the County with Horfe, Horfemen, and Arms, or Foot-Soldiers 
 and Arms, on Condition, that no Perfon be charg'd 
 with a Horfe, unlefs he has 300 /. per Annum, or Militia. 
 6,cco/. perfonal Eftate ; nor with a Foot-Soldier, 
 unlet he has 50/. yearly Income, or 1600/. perfonal Eftate; and 
 
 thofe
 
 34$ Prefent State of the Britifti Ifles.' Part H, 
 
 thofe who have {mailer Eftates, are to join two or three together 
 to find a Horfe and Horfeman, or a Foot-Soldier. The Horfe 
 and Foot are to Mufter once or twice a Year, and each Horfe- 
 4nan, daring the Time of the Mufter, to be allow 'd him, from 
 .whom he ferves, 2 j. a Day, and each Foot-Soldier 12^ a Day. 
 But the Militia, except thofe in and about London, are feldom 
 raisM or jnufter'd, of late Years, and very little depended on. 
 
 Beftdes thefe, there are always a large Body of ftand- 
 Standing ing Troops kept in Pay by the Government in Time 
 jirmy. of Peace : Thefe Forces amount to 35,000 and 
 
 at.prefent there are in Pay 50,000. The flrft Ge- 
 neral Officer is the Pay-mafter General of all the Land-Forces ; 
 the next is the Commiflary General, and Eight Deputy Commif- 
 faries, who have their Commiffions from the Commiflary General.; 
 and the feveral Counties in England and Wales are divided into 
 Eight Circuits, and each Commiflary is to take care to mufter all 
 fuch Forces as at any time come into his Circuit. The Royal 
 Navy of England confifts of 245 Ships of War ; whereof 7 are 
 Eirft Rates, .14 Second Rates, 41 Third Rates, 65 Fourth Rates, 
 &c. The Management of Maritime Affairs, under the Lords of 
 the Admiralty, is entrufted with the principal Officers and Com- 
 miffioners of the Navy ; mi%. 1 . The Treafurer, whofe Office is 
 to pay all Charges of the Navy. 2. The Comptroller, whofe 
 Office is to attend and comptrol all Payments of Wages, to ex- 
 amine and audit all Treafurers, Viftualers, and Store-keepers Ac- 
 counts, cifc. 3. The Surveyor, whofe Office is generally to fee 
 the Wants of Stores fupply'd, cifc. 4. The Clerk of the Ads, 
 whofe Office is to record all Orders, Contracts, Bills, Warrants, 
 &c. of the Navy. 
 
 Character] The Natives of England are generally brave y 
 generous, and fxncere ; modeft, upright in their Dealings, and In- 
 jduftrious ; ingenious, learned, and of a folid Judgment ; pafiion- 
 ate, melancholy, and difcontented ; eafily provok'd, and, when 
 Satisfaction is given, foon reconcild. Though the Votaries of 
 Bacchus and Venus are too numerous amougft us, yet it mull be 
 allow'd, that the EngUJh in general are Men of as ftridl Virtue 
 and Piety as are to be found upon the Face of the Earth. The 
 Pair Sex in general are modeft, provident, and temperate ; good- 
 matur'd, flncere and zealous in religious Devotion.; and are al- 
 low'd, by many Foreigners, to be the moft beautiful in the 
 World. The Natives of England feem in their Stature to be a 
 Mean between the Germans and French ; they partake of the 
 Strength of the one, and the Activity of the other : Their florid 
 Complexions, exal Symmetry in their Bodie3 and Limbs, are much 
 
 taken
 
 Chap. XV. Prefab State of the BritiOi Ifles. 349 
 
 taken notice of by Foreigners, that have viflxed this Kingdom. 
 The Degrees of the Nobili'.y of Engla?id are only 
 five, viz. Duke, Marquis, Earl, Vifcount, and Ba- The De- 
 ton. None of thefe Honours beftow'd by the King greesof the 
 on a Family can be loft, but for want of Male Iflue, Natives. 
 nor then neither, if the Patent extends to Iflue Fe- 
 male, as Ibmetimes it doth ; or elfe by fome heinous Crime, and 
 then that Family cannot be reftor'd to- their Blood by Parliament. 
 The Nobility of England have at all Times enjoy'd 
 many confiderable Privileges. The Peers of the Nobility. 
 Realm, being look'd on as the King's hereditary con- 
 itant Counfellors, their Perfons out of Parliament-time are pri- 
 vileg'd from all Arrefts, unlefs for Treafon, and the like. They 
 are not put to fwear they will not break the Peace, but only to 
 promifeit upon their Honour, which was ever accounted fo facred, 
 as upon no Terms to be violated. The Laws of England are k> 
 tender of the Honour, Credit, Reputation, and Perfon of No- 
 blemen, that there is a Statute on purpofe to hinder all Offence by 
 falfe Report, whereby any Scandal to their Perfons may arife, or 
 Debate and Dilcord between them and the Commons ; and be- 
 caufe it is to defend not only Lay-Lords, but Bifhops, and all great 
 Officers of the Realm, it is calPd Scandalum Magnatum. The 
 Law of England, contrary to the Laws and Cuftoms of other 
 Countries, calls none Noble under a Baron ; fo that not only all 
 Baronets, all Sorts of Knights, all Efquires ai;d Gentkmen, but 
 alio all the Sons of the Nobility are, by our Laws, reckon'd 
 among the Commons of England The lower Nobi- 
 lity then of England confifts of Baronets, Knights, Lower 
 Efquires, and Gentlemen. All in England are ac- Nobility. 
 counted Gentlemen, who maintain themfelves without 
 manual Labour. The next to the lower Nohility, and the firil 
 Degree of the Plebeians, are the Freeholders in Eng- 
 land. Befides thefe Freeholders, which are fo called Freebold- 
 becaufe they hold Lands and Tenements inheritable ers. 
 by a perpetual Right to them and their Heirs for 
 ever, there are in England z. very great Number of Copyholders,, 
 who hold Lands within fome Manors, only by Copy of Court- 
 Roll of the faid Manor. In the next Place are 
 reckon'd Tradefmen ; among whom Merchants make Tradef- 
 the firft Clafs, which is defervedly efteem'd a Support men. 
 of, and an Honour to the Kingdom. To become a 
 Merchant, has been juftly allow'd no Difparagement Mer- 
 to a Gentleman born. Amongft Tradefmen are chants, &c 
 Wholefale-mcn, then Retailers ; laft, Mechanicks or 
 HandicraftJ-men. The lower Members, the Feet of the Body 
 
 lMicick,
 
 35 Prefent State of the Britifti Ifles. Part 11. 
 
 Politick, are the Day-labourers, who generally enjoy 
 Labourers, better Diet, Apparel, and Dwellings, than the Huf- 
 bandmen or Farmers in moft other Countries. 
 
 Religion.] Chrijlianity was very early planted in England;- 
 but when, or by whom, is very uncertain ; probably in the latter 
 End of the Firft, or the Beginning of the Second Cen- 
 Beginning tury. England was, till the Fifteenth Century, one 
 of the Re- of the tameft Countries that any-where fubmitted to 
 formation, the Pope's Authority. But in Henry the Eighth's 
 Time, when Luther's Preaching, againft the Errors 
 of the Roman Church, had alarm 'd the greateft Part of the North- 
 ern Nations, many of the Englijh join'd in the ge- 
 The Re- neral Torrent. No one could have difcover'd more 
 formation Zeal for the See of Rome than Henry did in the Be- 
 forivard- ginning of his Reign : He even wrote againft Luther y 
 ed. a Book intituled, Of the Seven Sacraments ; and this 
 
 gain'd him the new Title of Defender of the Faith, 
 which Pope LeoX. beftow'd upon him by a Bull, in 1 521. in the 
 1 2th Year of Henry's Reign, being then about thirty Years of 
 Age. Arthur, Prince of Wales, Son of Henry VII. had efpous'd 
 Catharine, Daughter to Ferdinand King of Arragon ; but Arthur 
 dying a few Weeks after the Wedding, in the 1 7th Year of his 
 Age, and Henry VII. being unwilling to give back the Dowry, 
 chofe rather to give Henry, who was but twelve Years of Age, and 
 Arthur's Brother, in Marriage to that Princefs, having obtain'd a 
 Difpenfation, for that Effeft, from Pope 'Julius II. under Pre- 
 tence that their Marriage was not confum mated. Henry VIII. 
 immediately upon his firft .Acceffion to the Throne, being eighteen 
 Years of Age, wanting a few Months, celebrated the Nuptials 
 with his Brother's Widow. After he had liv'd with the Queen 
 for the Space of eighteen Years, and having had three Children by 
 her, he began to indulge the Thoughts of being divorc'd from her. 
 Some fay, that he, being of a fickle Temper, and very much 
 tired of being fo long married to one Woman, and being paflion- 
 ately in Love with Anna Boleyn, found out this Way to be rid of 
 the Queen. Some, on the contrary, will have it, that Cardinal 
 Wolfey, who fought for an Opportunity of revenging himfelf on 
 the Emperor Charles V. who had promis'd to get him elected 
 Pope, but had broke his Word, caufed a Propofal to be made to 
 Henry by his Confeflbr, to divorce Catharine, who was Aunt to 
 the Emperor. The King confented, 'tis faid, that the Cardinal 
 mould intercede with the Pope in order to obtain a Divorce from 
 Queen Catharine. Others fay that Henry began to have a Scruple 
 of Confcience, whether he could lawfully live in Wedlock with 
 his Brother's Widow ; which Scruple he pretended was rais'd in 
 
 him
 
 Chap. XV. Prefint State of the Britifli Ifles. 351 
 
 him firft by the Prefident of Paris, who was fcnt to treat con- 
 cerning a Marriage betwixt Mary Daughter of Henry, and the 
 iecond Son of Francis King of France. Whatever was the fole 
 Motive of this Divorce, the Bufinefs was brought before Clement 
 VII. who was then Pope, and was thought to be a fit Initrumcnt 
 to bring the Affair to a fpeedy IfTue, becaufe of the Refentment 
 his Holinefs fhew'd for the ill Treatment he had met with from 
 the Emperor Charles, who had imprifon'd him, after he had caus'd 
 Rome to be taken and plunder'd by his Forces. The Pope at firft 
 gave Henry fome Hopes of a Divorce, which only inflam'd him 
 the more ; but the Pope's Scruple to diiTolve a Marriage, con- 
 cluded by virtue of the Difpenfation of a former Pope, and 
 blefs'd with three Children, after eighteen Years Cohabitation, 
 together with Fear of difpleafmg the Emperor, prevail'd with him 
 to change his former Refolutions. Henry firft employ'd Flattery, 
 Intreaties, Menaces, Money, and every other Engine ; and after- 
 wards remov'd the Cognizance of the Affair to his own Domi- 
 nions ; and obtain'd Cardinal Wolfey, and Cardinal Campeius, to 
 be Commiffioners for inquiring into the Affair. Wolfey perceiv'd 
 that the King was paffionately in Love with Anna Boleyn, which 
 being likely to prove prejudicial to his Authority, he perfuaded 
 the Pope, underhand, not to give his Confent to this Divorce. 
 Henry, being inform'd what Intrigues the Cardinal was carrying on 
 againft him, and being tir'd out with' rhe Complaints that were 
 made againft him by his Subjects, and the repeated Solicitation of 
 Anna Boleyn, humbled the Greatnefs of this haughty Prelate, 
 who died the Year following in great Mifery. Henry, not being 
 able to obtain what he fo earneftly defir'd, grew tir'd with the 
 Proceedings of the Court of Rome ; and, without waiting for the 
 Sentence of the Holy See, he fent to feveral Univerfities in France 
 and Italy, to defire their Opinions in this Matter, who all unani- 
 moufly agreed in this, that fuch a Marriage was againft the Laws 
 of God ; whereupon the King had the fame adjudged in Par- 
 liament, and divorced himfelf from Queen Catharine. Nor did 
 he flop here ; for feveral Statutes were made, by which it was 
 enabled, that for the future no Perfon fhould appeal to the Court 
 of Rome in any Cafe whatever ; but that all Caufes Ecclefiaftical 
 fhould be judg'd within the Realm by the Prelates; that neither 
 Firfl-fruits, Annates, or St Peter $ Pence, fliould be any longer 
 paid; nor Bulls for Bifhopricks, nor Difpenfations of any Kind, 
 procur'd from the See of Rome ; and .that all who fhould prefume 
 to infringe thefe Statutes, fhould incur the fevereft Penalties. The 
 Pope, upon thefe Proceedings, threaten'd Henry with Excommu- 
 nication, in cafe he rcfus'd to acknowledge his Fault, by bringing 
 back all Things to the fame Foot in which they had been before 
 thefe Proceedings, and to take Catharine again. However, the 
 
 King
 
 352 Prefent State of the Britifh Ifles. Part II. 
 
 King of France interpos'd his Authority, and, in the Interview 
 which he had with the Pope at Marfeilles, he prevail'd with him 
 to fufpend the Excommunication, till fuch Time as he had em- 
 ploy'd his Endeavours, in order to make him return to the Obe- 
 dience of the Holy See. The King of France fent the Bifhop of 
 Paris to King Henry, in order to intreat him not to perfift in his 
 Refolution ; and this Prelate condu&ed himfelf with fo much 
 Prudence and Moderation, that Henry gave him forae Hopes of 
 his Submiffion, and of not feparating himfelf from the Church, 
 provided the Pope would delay the Excommunication. The 
 Bifhop of Paris went Poll to Rome in order to carry this welcome 
 News, where being arriv'd, he defir'd farther Time to work upon 
 King Henry. As the Partizans of the Emperor were not able to 
 prevail with the Pope to refufe fo juft a Requeft, they had it 
 limited to the fhorteft Time poffible, and were fo urgent to have 
 it executed, that, upon its being elaps'd, and no News coming from 
 England, Excommunication was pronounc'd in 1535, and fet up 
 in all the ufual Places. But this had no other Effect on Henry, 
 than to enrage him the more, and to throw off all Reftraint ; 
 which was very fatal to the See of Rome ; for the King had Him- 
 felf declar'd fupreme Head of the Church of England, abrogating 
 thereby all the Pope's Authority ; and procur'd tq himfelf, by 
 Parliament, the Firft-fruits and Tenths of the Revenues of all 
 Benefices, and the Power of nominating to Bifhopricks. And, to 
 make the Wound deeper, Henry feiz'd' upon all the Monafteries 
 and other Religious Houfes in England, and divided their Lands 
 amongft the Nobility and Gentry of the Kingdom, intending thereby 
 to oblige them for the future to maintain the Alterations he had 
 made. He made fome Alterations in religious Worfhip, fo that, 
 in effet, he laid the Foundation of the Reformation. Neverthe- 
 lefs, England was at that Time in a very miferable Condition ; for 
 a great many Roman-catholicks, that would not acknowledge the 
 King for the fupreme Head of the Church of England, were 
 executed ; and a great many more Proteftants receiv'd the famf 
 Punifhment, becaufe they would not own the corporal Prefence of 
 the Body of Chrift in the Sacrament. After all thefe Innovations, 
 Henry would never be prevailed on to receive the Doctrine of Lu- 
 ther, but conftantly adher'd to the Principles of the Church of 
 Rome, and that perhaps thro' the perfonal Hatred of Luther, who, 
 fetting afide all Refpeft due to a King, in his Anfwer to Henry $ 
 Book on the Seven Sacraments, had ufed a great deal of unman- 
 nerly Heat, and many bitter Reflections on his Majefly : So that 
 the Reformation went on but lamely n his Time. Under his Son 
 Edward VI. it gain'd more Ground ; and Popery was almoft en- 
 tirely abolifh'd. Queen Mary, who reign'd but five Years, brought 
 Popery in again : Bat the b'cody Executions of above $qo l J ro- 
 
 teftar.ts
 
 Chap. XV. ' Prefent State of the Britifh Ifles. ^5B 
 
 teftants in her Time, who were burned for their Faith, did (o 
 alienate the People's Affections from her, that Queen Elizabeth, 
 who fucceeded her, found it no difficult Matter to fettle the 
 Reformation again upon that Foot on which it ftill continues. 
 Bifhops were then confecrated by other Bifhops, whofe Succeffion 
 was unqueftionable from the firft Planters of Chriftianity among 
 us, and plac'd in every See where there had been Bifhops formerly. 
 The Doctrine of the Church of England is briefly fumm'd up in 
 the Thirty-nine Articles, and Book of Homilies ; and her Difci- 
 pline and Worfhip are to be feen in the Liturgy, and Book of 
 Canons. In reforming the Errors of the Church of Rome, the 
 Englijh were not fo hurry'd by popular Fury and Faction, as in 
 many other Nations, but proceeded in a more prudent, regular, and 
 Chriftian Method ; refolving to feparate no farther from the 
 Church of Rome, than fhe had wander'd from the Do&rine of the 
 Prophets and Apoftles. 
 
 There are two Archiepifcopal Sees in England, 
 Canterbury and York, to which all the Bifhopricks The Co- 
 in England and Wales are fubjeft. The Archbifhop vernmetit 
 of Canterbury is the firft Peer of England, and, next of the 
 to the Royal Family, to precede not only all Dukes, Church. 
 but all the Great Officers of the Crown. He is ftyl'd 
 Primate of all England, and Metropolitan. The next Perfon in 
 the Church of England is the Archbifhop of York, who has the 
 Precedence of all Dukes not of the Royal Blood, and of all Great 
 Officers of State, except only the Lord Chancellor, and is ftyl'd Pri- 
 mate of England, and Metropolitan. The next are the Bifhops, who 
 are Barons and Peers of the Realm, and have the Precedence of 
 all Temporal Barons under Vifcounts. After the two Arch- 
 biihops follow the Bifhop of London, next to him the Bifhop of 
 Durham, then the Bifhop of Winchefter, and all the reft accord- 
 ing to the Seniority of their Confecration. Next follow Suffra- 
 gan-Biftiops, when there are any, who, in publick Affemblies, 
 were to take Place next after the Temporal Peers of the Realm. 
 Then follow Deans, Archdeacons, Prebendaries, Rectors, Vicars, 
 and Deacons. 
 
 For the Legiflative Power of the Church, or making of Eccle- 
 fiaftical Laws, and confulting for the more weighty 
 Affairs of the Church, the King, by the Advice of Convoca- 
 his Privy-Council, as often as he calls a Parliament, tion, &c. 
 convokes a national Synod, commonly call'd the Con- 
 vocation. For Civil Affairs, that concern the Church, the high- 
 eft Court is now the Court of Delegates ; next to this are the 
 Courts of the Archbifhop of Canterbury ; and, among them, the 
 higheft Court is the Court of Arches. The other Courts are, the 
 Court of Audience, Prerogative Court, Court of Peculiars, 
 
 A a Bifhop'-.
 
 354 Prefint State of the Britifh Ifles. Part II. 
 
 Bifhop's Court, and Archdeacon's Court. Caufes 
 Gaufes be- belonging to Ecclefiaftical Courts, are Blafphemy, 
 longing io Apoftafy from Chriftianity, Herefy, Schifm, (they 
 the Courts, have not been permitted to take Cognizance of He- 
 refy and Schifm, for many Years) Ordinations, In- 
 ftitution to Benefices, Celebration of Divine Services, Rights of 
 Matrimony, Divorces, General Baftardy, Tythes, Oblations, 
 Obventions, Mortuaries, Dilapidations, Reparation of Churches, 
 Probate of Wills, Adminiftration, Simony, Inceft, Fornication, 
 Adultery, Solicitations of Chaftity, Penfions, Procurations, &c. 
 the Cognizance whereof belongs not to the Common 
 Ecclejiajli- Law of England. The Punifhments relating to Ec- 
 cal Punifh- clefiaftical Difcipline are, i . Excommunication, which 
 ments. difables a Perfon from being Plaintiff in a Suit of 
 
 Law, CSV. 2. Public Penance, when any one is 
 obligM'to cbnfefs his Fault in Public, and to bewail it before the 
 whole Congregation in the Church ; which is done in this Man- 
 ner : The Delinquent is to ftand in the Church-porch upon fome 
 Sunday, bare-head and bare-foot, in a white Sheet, and a white 
 Rod in his Hand, there- bewailing himfelf, and begging every one 
 that palfes by to pray for him ; then to enter the Church, falling 
 down, and kiffing the Ground ; and in the Middle of the Church 
 the Delinquent is eminently plac'd in the Sight of all the People, 
 and over-againft the Minifter, who declares the Foulnefs of the 
 Crime, odious to God, and fcandalous to the Congregation, tjfc. 
 But if the Crime be not very notorious, the Penance may, at the 
 Requeft of the Delinquent, be commuted into a pecuniary Mulcl 
 for the Poor of the Parifh, or fome pious Ufes, which is more 
 ufually done. There is one more Punifhment, which touches the 
 Body ; and that is, Denial of Chriftian Burial, which is inflicted 
 not in panam mortuorum, but ;';/ terrorem viventium, who natu- 
 rally defire, that, after their Death, their Bodies may be decently 
 interr'd. A Chriftian Burial is ufually denied by the Church of 
 England to Perfons dying excommunicate, or to fuch as are hang'd 
 for Felony, or that wilfully kill themfelves, and to Apoftates. 
 Befides thefe Punifhments, there are others, to which the. Clergy 
 only are liable ; as. firlt, Sufpenfio ab OJicio, when a Minifter for a 
 Time is declar'd unfit to execute his Office, Then Sufpenfio a 
 Beneficio, when a Minifter for a Time is deprived of the Profits 
 of his Benefice ; and thefe two Cenfures are ufually for fmaller 
 Crimes. Thirdly, Deprivatio a Jieneficio, when, for. a greater 
 Crime, a Minifter is wholly and for ever depriv'd of his Living. 
 Fourthly, Deprivatio ab Officio, when a Minifter is wholly and 
 for ever depnv'd of his Orders ; and this is Depofuio, or Degra- 
 datio, and is commonly for fome heinous Crime meriting Death, 
 and is perfornVd by the Bi.fhop in a folcron Manner,, pulling, off 
 
 from
 
 Chap. XV. Prefent State of the Britifh Ides. 255 
 
 from the Criminal his Veftments, and other Enfigns of his Order, 
 and this in the Prefence of the Civil Magiftrate, to whom he is 
 then delivered to be punifh'd as a Layman for the like Offence. 
 But we have very few Inftances of luch heinous Crimes among 
 the Clergy of the Church of England. And as long as Piety and 
 Virtue, Learning and Knowledge, have any Efteem in the World, 
 fo long the Clergy will have a good Title to the Honour and Re- 
 gard of all wife and good Men. If fome few of them do not aft 
 iuitably to the Dignity of their facred Character, yet a Senfe of 
 oar own Infirmities, and the ftrong Solicitations of our own un- 
 happy Paffions, ought to plead in their Behalf ; inftead of picking 
 out the Faults of a few, and charging them upon the whole fa- 
 cred Order, thereby diminifhing that Credit and Effett, which 
 their fpiritual Adminill ations ought to have upon the Minds of 
 Men, and making them lefs capable of doing that Good, which 
 their Profeffion obliges them to attempt. 
 
 The Archbifliopricks and Bifhopricks, with their 
 Extent and Jurifdiction. 
 
 9. Woreefier, containing 
 
 1 Worcefterjbire. 
 
 2 Part of Warwick/hire* 
 
 10. Hereford, containing 
 X Herefordjhire. 
 2 Part of Shropjhire, 
 
 1 1 . Litchfield 'and Coventry, con- 
 taining 
 
 1 Stafford/hire. 
 
 2 Derby/hire. 
 
 3 The reft of Warwick/hire* 
 
 4 Part of Shropshire. 
 
 12. Lincoln, containing 
 
 1 Lincoln/hire. 
 
 2 Leicefierjhire. 
 
 3 Huntingdon/hire* 
 
 4 Bedford/hire. 
 
 5 Buckingham/hire. 
 
 6 The reft of Hertford/hire, 
 
 13. Ely, containing 
 
 1 Cambridge/hire. 
 
 2 The Ifle of Ely. 
 
 14. Norwich, containing 
 
 1 Norfolk. 
 
 2 Suffolk. 
 
 15. Oxford, containing 
 2 Oxford- 
 
 Within the Province of Canter- 
 bury, which has Part of Kent 
 for its own peculiar Diocefe, 
 are the Bifhopricks of, 
 
 1 . Rochefer, containing the reft 
 
 of Kent. 
 
 2. London, containing 
 
 1 Middlefex. 
 
 2 EJfex. 
 
 3 Part of Hertford/hire. 
 
 3. Chichejler, containing Sujfex. 
 
 4. Winchejler, containing 
 
 1 Hampjhire. 
 
 2 Surry. 
 
 3 The Ifle of Wight. 
 
 4 Guernfey and Jerfey. 
 
 5. Salijbury, containing 
 
 1 Wilt/hire. 
 
 2 Berk/hire. 
 
 6. Exeter, containing 
 X Devon/hire. 
 
 2 Cornwall. 
 
 7. Bath and Wells, containing 
 Somerfetjhire. 
 
 8. Gltcefier,conth.\ti\ngGlocefier- 
 
 Jhirt. 
 
 Aa
 
 35^ 
 
 Oxfordjhire. 
 
 1 6. Peterborough, containing 
 
 1 Northampton/hire. 
 
 2 Rutland/hire. 
 
 17. Brijiol, containing Dorfet 
 
 Jbire. 
 
 1 8. St. Davids. ^1 
 
 19. zw#. I In 
 
 20. Bangor. I 
 
 21. St.Afaph. J 
 
 Pr<?^/ Sta/<? 0/ /& Britifh Ifles. Part li 
 
 i- Chefter, containing 
 
 1 Cbejhire. 
 
 2 Richmondjbire. 
 
 3 Lancajbire. 
 
 4 Part of Cumberland. 
 
 5 Part of Wefimorland. 
 
 6 Part of Flint/hire. 
 
 7 Part of Denbigh/hire. 
 Durham, containing 
 i TheBifhoprickof Durham, 
 
 2 Northumberland. 
 
 CarliJIe, containing 
 
 1 Part of Cumberland. 
 
 2 Part of Wefimorland. 
 Sodor, containing the IJlt of 
 
 Man. 
 
 Wales. 
 
 Within the Province of York, 
 which has Yorkjbire, Not- 
 tingham/hire, for its peculiar 
 Diocefes, are the Bifhopricks 
 of, 
 
 Curiosities.] In feveral Places between Car UJle and Neiv- 
 caftle, are fome Remains of the famous Picls Wall, which run 
 thro' Cumberland, and Northumberland, beginning at Tinmouth 
 Bar, and ending at Solivay Firth. This Wall was built in the 
 Time of the Emperors Adrian and Severus, in order to prevent 
 the Incurfions of the Scots and Picls. Croffing th Middle of 
 Wilt/hire from Eaft to Weft> is a mighty Ditch, commonly call'd 
 Wan/dike, or Woden/dike, (from the Saxon God Woden) and de- 
 fign'd, it feems, either as a Boundary to diftinguifh Territories, 
 or as a Fence to guard againft a neighbouring Enemy. There are 
 alfo in Cambridgejhire plain Tradls of thofe large Ditches, thrown 
 up by the Eafi-Angles, to prevent the Incurfions of the Mercians, 
 who frequently ruin'd all before them. The Peake in Derby/hire, 
 a craggy mountainous Country, is famous for its three ftrange 
 Caves of prodigious Shapes and Dimenfions, call'd the Devil'* 
 Arfe, Elden Hole, and Pool's Hole, which has been plumb'd to 
 the Depth of 800 Fathom, and yet no Bottom found. In Men- 
 dippe Hills, in Somer/itjhire, is a prodigious Cave, call'd Ochy Hole. 
 
 SECT. II. 
 
 Of North-Britain or Scotland. 
 
 Boundaries. ] CCOTLAND (formerly Caledonia, and fome- 
 times Albania, an .: the reft of Britannia) is 
 bounded on the Eaft by Part of the German Ocean, on the Weft 
 and North by the Britijh Sea, and on the South by England. 
 
 Situation.]
 
 :Kap. 3tV. Prefent State of the Brftifh Ifles. 357* 
 
 Situation.] The moll Southerly Part of Scotland, about Whithorn, is fitu- 
 e in 54 Deg. and 54 M. and the moft Northern Part in 58 Deg. 32 M.- and 
 seween 1 and 8 Deg. Weft Longitude. The Length is 278, and the Breadth 
 94 Miles. 
 
 >ivifion and Sub- 
 divifion. 
 
 Square 
 Miles. 
 
 GOTLAND 
 
 Lothian 
 . Galloway 
 
 1 Wigton 
 
 2 Kircudbright 
 . Dumfries 
 
 1 Nith/date 
 
 2 AnandaU 
 I Roxburg 
 I Teviodale 
 9. Selkirk 
 
 3 hide/dale 
 \i Berwick 
 
 I Lauderdale 
 t hlers 
 Tweedale 
 Ci'ydfdale 
 I Air. 
 
 1 Kyle and Carick. 
 
 2 Cunningham 
 Renfrew 
 K Argyle 
 
 1 -Argyle t Co ! w~ 
 
 el 
 
 2 Knapdale 
 
 3 Lorn 
 
 4 Mull IflanJ 
 
 5 yra Ifland 
 
 6 //a 
 
 7 Cantire 
 
 8 ^/Ttf* Ifland 
 
 9 2?tf/f Ifland 
 Lenox 
 
 Sterling and 
 Clackmannan 
 
 595 
 1200 
 460 
 '740 
 620 
 360 
 260 
 778 
 
 486 
 
 292 
 
 338 
 
 338 
 
 308 
 
 945 
 1024 
 
 795 
 
 229 
 
 230 
 
 2492 
 
 848 
 
 384 
 420 
 160 
 210 
 245 
 198 
 
 27 
 308 
 
 289 
 
 Chief Town in Diftance and Bearing 
 
 each Divifion. 
 
 Edinburgh 1 
 Caftra Alata J 
 
 Wigton 
 
 * Kircudbright 
 
 * Dumfries 
 
 * Annan 
 
 Jedburg 
 
 Selkirk 
 
 Hermitage 
 
 Lauder 
 
 Duns 
 
 Peebles 
 
 * Glafconn 
 
 1 
 
 * Air 
 
 * Irwin 
 \Renfrtw 
 
 Iirverary 
 
 Duiflafage 
 Duari 
 Jura 
 Dunnigrag 
 
 * Camtbel , 
 Brodicb 
 Rothfay 
 
 * Dunbarton 
 Sterling 
 Clackmannan 
 
 of each Town from 
 the laft Place found. 
 
 300 N of London 
 335 NEof Dublin 
 
 20 W of Wigton 
 
 28 E of Kircudbright 
 17 E of Dumfries 
 
 Diftance -from - 
 
 Edin- I Lon- 
 burgb. don. 
 
 42 NE of Annan 
 15 W of Jedburg 
 22 SWof Jedburg 
 
 1 5 N of Selkirk 
 1 5 E of Lauder 
 1 7 SW of Lauder 
 
 28 S of Glafcow 
 
 9 N of Air 
 
 19 NWof Irwin 
 
 42 N of Renfrew 
 
 55 SWof Inverary 
 
 50 N of Dun/1 af age 
 
 27 S of Duart 
 
 23 S of fur a 
 
 23 SE of Dunnigrag 
 
 2 2 NE of Catnpbcl 
 
 I o N of Brodicb 
 
 1 7 E of Rothfay 
 
 26 NE of Dunbarton 
 
 7 E of Sterling 
 
 8.8 SW 
 82 S 
 
 64 S 
 
 60S 
 
 35 SE 
 30 S 
 46 S ' 
 
 21 SE 
 
 23 SE - 
 23 S 
 39 W 
 
 62 SW 
 61 w 
 43 W 
 
 276 
 231 
 
 240 
 242 
 
 256 
 
 263 
 250 
 
 270 
 
 286. 
 277 . 
 
 262 
 
 247 
 249 
 
 316 
 
 74 NW 
 
 95 W 
 
 108 NW 
 107 W 
 112 w 
 97 W 
 7? W 
 66 W 
 53 W 
 32 NW 
 28 NW 
 
 360 
 
 380 
 391 
 370 
 
 35 6 
 243 
 326 
 
 377 
 
 2s& 
 
 320 
 
 3>7 
 
 ! a 
 
 in Leagues. 
 
 Divifloa 
 
 The Dijlances of theft Trv:ns from London by Sea art gii en 
 
 Aa 3
 
 $s* 
 
 Divifion and Sub* 
 divifion. 
 
 Prefent State of the Britifh Ifles. 
 
 Fife and Kinrofs 
 Angus 
 
 \ 
 
 7. Perth 
 I Mentietb 
 1 Perth 
 
 3 Stormcunt 
 
 4 Cars of Gou- 
 
 5 Strathern 
 
 6 //#] J 
 
 7 Brodalbain \ 
 Mers 
 
 Aberdeen 
 
 Bamf 
 
 Marty and 7 
 
 Nairn J 
 
 8. invemefs 
 
 1 Invernefs 
 
 2 Bardenock 
 
 3 Lochahar 
 4%*I0and 
 J?o/}and 1 
 Cromartie .3 
 Sutherland 7 
 Strathna<vem J 
 Caithnefs 
 
 9. Orkney Iflands 
 
 1 Pomona, or 7 
 Mainland ! 3 
 
 2 The other Ifles 
 
 10. Shetland 
 j Mainland 
 2 The other Ifles 
 
 Z*<h>/j Ifland 
 North r# 
 Touth T/y? 
 The other Iiles. 
 
 Square 
 Miles. 
 
 420 
 
 2478 
 450 
 
 176 
 
 35 2 
 1500 
 
 308 
 1 1 70 
 
 560 
 
 825 
 
 4078 
 1158 
 
 760 
 1260 
 
 900 
 
 2775 
 
 23-10 
 
 690 
 
 600 
 
 324 
 
 276 
 
 700 
 500 
 150 
 
 r?5 
 
 1 00 
 
 Chief Town in 
 each Divifion. 
 
 Convper 
 Forfar 
 
 Dumblain 
 
 Perth 
 
 Dunkel 
 
 Drutntifbnd 
 Blair 
 Dannoter Caftle 
 
 * Aberdeen 
 
 Bamf 
 
 Elgin 
 Nairn 
 
 Invernefs 
 Ruthtan 
 Innerlochy 
 
 Tain 
 
 * Cromartie 
 Dornock 
 Tung 
 
 * Wick 
 
 * Kirkwall 
 
 * Lerwick 
 
 Stornway 
 
 Diftance and Bearing 
 of each Town from 
 the laft Place found. 
 
 31 NE of Clack- 7 
 mannan \ 
 
 20 N of Co-Tvper 
 
 6 N of Sterling 
 24 NE of Dumblain 
 I 2 N of Perth 
 
 17 S Wof Dunkel 
 
 27 N of Drummond 
 
 56 E of Blair 
 1 3 N of Dunnoter 7 
 Caftle J 
 
 34 N of Aberdeen 
 21 Wof Bamf 
 2 1 W of Elgin 
 
 1 6 SW of Nairn 
 24 S of Invernefs 
 48 SWof Ruthvan 
 W of Invernefs 
 2 2 N of Invernefs 
 1 1 S of Tain 
 6 ^ of Tain 
 60 N of Dornock 
 5 3 NE of Dornock 
 
 Thefe Iflands (for- 
 merly Or cades) are 
 
 very fubjedt to boif- 
 terous Winds, and 
 outrageous Rains. 
 
 The common Peo- 
 ple that are Na- 
 tives, are defcend- 
 ed from the Nor- 
 
 tuegians. 
 
 S of Lexvis. 
 
 . Part II. 
 
 Diftance from 
 
 Edin- 
 burgh. 
 
 zz N 
 42 N 
 
 33 NW 
 8 N 
 40 N 
 
 38 NW 
 
 58 NW 
 
 67 NE 
 
 78 NE 
 
 107 N 
 104 N 
 102 N 
 
 104 N 
 
 80 N 
 97 N 
 
 122 N 
 1 13 N 
 128 N 
 187 N 
 167 N 
 
 228 N 
 
 344 N 
 240 NW 
 
 Cumate.}
 
 Chap. XV. Prefent State of the firitifh Ifles. $59 
 
 Climate.] The Air of this Country is generally fo very 
 wholfome, that the Inhabitants, efpecially in the mod Northern 
 Parts, frequently live to a great Age. The Face of Scotland is 
 very mountainous, particularly towards the North ; however, it 
 produces all the Neceflaries of Life. Its Seas and Rivers are won- 
 derfully ftor'd with molt Kinds of excellent Fiih. The chief Pro- 
 duces of North Britain are Lead, Ore, Iron, Train Oil, Linen 
 Cloth, Coarfe Cloths, Frizes, &c. The longeft Day in the 
 mod Northern Part is 1 8 Hours, and the Meridian Altitude of 
 the Sun is a,bout 55 Deg. the longeft Day in the Southermoft 
 Part is 1 7 Hours ^ ; therefore this Country lies in the 1 ith, 1 2th, 
 and Beginning of the 13th North Climate. 
 
 Government.] Scotland, while it continued a diftinft King- 
 dom, enjoy'd the fame Advantages which have diftinguihVd the 
 Englijh Monarchy ; having never been enflav'd to the Will and 
 Pleafurc of arbitrary Sovereigns. It was hereditary, the Crown 
 defcending from Father to Son, and to his Heirs ; and, for want of 
 Sons, to the eldeft Daughter and her Heirs ; for want of Daughters, 
 to the Brother and his Heirs ; and, for want of a Brother, to the 
 Sifter and her Heirs : Tho' fometimes the immediate Heir, or next 
 in Blood, has been fet afide, and another more remote has afcended 
 the Throne. When the next Heir was under Age, or incapable 
 of Government, the next of the Line was made King, who en- 
 joy'd the Crown during his Life ; but it did not go to his Som, 
 but to the Heirs of the former King, provided they were of Age, 
 or capable of the Adminiftration. The Kings of the Scots, before 
 the Conqueft of the Picls, amounted to 30, and after that Con 
 queft to King James VI. were 36 Monarchs. This Prince, Son 
 of Mary Queen of the Scots, was crown'd King in his Cradle, in 
 the Year 1567. But this Monarch, marrying the eldeft Daughter 
 of Henry VII. King of England, fucceeded Queen Elizabeth in the 
 Year 1603. The Parliament of England appointed Commiffionefi 
 to examine the King's Propofal concerning the Union of the two 
 Kingdoms. After the Commiffioners had confider'd the Advantages 
 and Inconveniences, they made their Report to the Houfe. The 
 Seffion of the Parliament which began the 1 8th of No<vember t 
 was chiefly employ'd in the Affair of the Union, which the King 
 ftrongly folictted. Sir Francis Bacon, the King's Solicitor, was 
 order'd to move and fupport it with the beft Arguments he could 
 devife. But tho' he was learned and eloquent, he met, in the 
 Houfe of Commons, with Perfons able to withftand him, and to 
 allege as itrong Reafons againft, as he did for, the Union.. The 
 King, hearing the Affair was not like to fucceed in Parliament, 
 fent for both Houfeato Whitehall, and endeavow'd in a lol+g 
 
 A a 4 Speech
 
 360 Prefent State of the Britifa Ifles. Pan II. 
 
 Speech to fhew the Neceffity of the Union, and the common Ad- 
 vantage it would procure. The Earneftnefs which the King ex- 
 preffed for the Union of the two Kingdoms, was not capable of 
 prevailing with the Parliament; io inconvenient was it thought at 
 thaf Time. The Union of the two Kingdoms of England and 
 Scotland was an Affair of the higheft Importance, and a Work of 
 fo much Difficulty, that all the Attempts that had been made to- 
 wards it in the laft Century, had prov'd ineffectual. But Queen 
 Anne having been impower'd in 1705. by the refpective Parlia- 
 ments of England and Scotland, to appoint Ccmmilfioners to treat 
 of a nearer Union between the two Kingdoms, this great Work 
 was begun on the 1 6th of April 1706; the Preliminaries were 
 e^fily agreed on by the Commiffioners, and the Treaty was carried 
 on generally with much Calmnefs, Candour, and Sincerity ; and 
 being forwarded by her Majefly's Royal Prefence and Recommen- 
 dation, to bring it to a happy Conclufion, the Articles were com- 
 pleted and figned, by which the Kingdoms of England and Scot- 
 land were in 1707. united into one Kingdom, by the Name of 
 Great-Britain. The chief of the Articles are, That the King- 
 doms of England and Scotland fhculd be united into one Kingdom, 
 by the Name of Great-Britain ; the faid Union to commence on 
 the iflof May 1707. That the faid united Kingdoms fhould be 
 reprefented by one Parliament : That the Subjects of the united 
 Kingdom fhould have free Trade to all Places belonging to either : 
 That the Succeffion of the Crown be fettled in the Prcteftant 
 Branches of the Ho .fe of Hanover, as it Hands limited in England: 
 That the united Kingdoms fhall be liable to the fame Excife. 
 That when 1,997,763 /. 8 s. \d.^ fhall be rais'd in England by 
 a Land Tax, the Qusta for Scotland fhould be 48,000 /. That 
 the Sum of 398,085/. 10/. fhould be paid to Scotland, as an 
 Equivalent for the Debts fhe may be charg'd with on account of 
 . the Union ; That the Coin fhould be the fame as now in England, 
 throughout the united Kingdom : That the Weights and Mea- 
 fures fhould be the fame aifo as in England: That the Trade, 
 Cuftoms, and Excife fhould be regulated as in England, through- 
 out the united Kingdom ; other Laws to remain the fame in 
 Scotland as before : That the Court of Seflion, or College of 
 Juftice, the Courts of Justiciary, and the Inferior Courts of Scot- 
 land, remain as they are, and no Caufe in Scotland to be re- 
 cognizable in the Courts of Weftminfter: That Sixteen Peers of 
 Scotland fhould fit and vote in the Houfe of Lords, and Forty-five 
 Reprefentatives of Scotland in the Houfe of Commons, of the Par- 
 liament of G eat-Britain : That the Regalia and Records of 
 Scotland fhould remain, there : That one Great Seal fhould be 
 made for the -united Kingdom, different from the Great Seal us'd 
 jo. either Kingdom ; another Seal for Scotland to be us'd in Mai- 
 
 teri
 
 Chap. XV; Prefent Slate of the Biitifh Ifles. 361 
 
 tcrs of private Right : That the Prefbyterian Church Govern- 
 ment mould remain eftablifh'd in Scotland; the Church of Eng- 
 land to remain eftablifh'd in this Kingdom : That the Sixteen 
 Peers of Scotland, to fit in the Britijh Houfe of Lords, be elect- 
 ed by the Peers of Scotland : That, of the Forty-five Reprefenta- 
 tives of the Commons, Thirty be chofen by the Shires and 
 Stewarties, and Fifteen by the Royal Burghs : That after the ill 
 of May 1708. there mould be but one Privy Council for the united 
 Kingdom. The Government of North-Britain is chiefly manag'd 
 by a Council of State, confifting of thofe call'd properly Officers 
 of State, and others of the Nobility and Gentry, whom the King 
 pleafes to appoint. The Officers of State are Eight in Number, 
 VOL The Lord High Chancellor, Lord High Treafurer, Lord 
 Prelident of the Council, Lord Secretary of State, Lord Treafurer 
 Deputy, Lord Regifter, Lord Advocate, and Lord Juftice Clerk. 
 The Adminiftration of Jultice in Civil Affairs is lodg'd in the 
 Lords of the Seffion, who are Fifteen in Number, whereof one is 
 .-'refident ; and to thefe are join'd fome Noblemen, under the 
 Name of extraordinary Lords of the Seffion. From this Court 
 there lies no Appeal but to the Parliament, which is now made 
 up of the Peers, the Commiffioners of Counties, and thofe of 
 Free Boroughs. The King's Perfon is always reprefented in Par- 
 liament by fome Nobleman, who bears the Title of Lord High 
 Commiffioner. The Diftribution of Juftice in Criminal Matters 
 is committed to the Court of Juftice, which is compos'd of the 
 Lord Juftice General, the Lord Juftice Clerk, and five or fix other 
 Lords of the Seffion, who in this Bench are call'd Commiffioners 
 of Judicatory. Befides thefe two fupreme Courts of Jultice, 
 there are many fubordinate Judicatories, both for Civil and Cri- 
 minal Affairs, through the Kingdom, as Sheriffs Courts, Courts 
 of Legality, and the like. 
 
 Trade.] The Commodities fit for Exportation are Corn, Cat- 
 tle, Hidef, Wool, Hemp, Flax, Linen, Worfted Stuffy Timber, 
 Tin, Lead, Copper, Alum, Hops, Fifh, Salt, &c. befides other 
 Commodities, that the Inland Parts afford in great Plenty, and 
 would turn to great Account, if improv'd to the belt Advantage. 
 But their Fifliing is the Branch of Trade, which may be carried 
 on with more Eafe and Profit in their own Seas, than can be done 
 by any foreign Nation whatfoever ; by reafon of the Convenicncy 
 and Flenty of their Loughs and Harbours, which are ftor'd with 
 almoft infinite Numbers of Fifh. They lie very conveniently for 
 a Trade with Denmark, Sweden, Hamburgh, Holland, Ireland, 
 and France: Spain, which is the beft Market in the World for 
 Fifh, as the Dutch experience, is not above ten Days failing from 
 them, with a favourable Wind. Many of the Natives of Scotland 
 
 have
 
 $6z Prefent State of the Britifh Ifles. Part II. 
 
 have not yet arriv'd to a fufficient Skill in Agriculture ; for which 
 Caufe many Tra&s of rich Land lie neglected, or at leaft but 
 meanly improv'd, to what they might be ; and this is the more 
 to be regretted, becaufe there are many Parcels of rich Ground 
 both in Scotland and the Iflands, which, if cultivated, would 
 maintain treble the Number of the prefent Inhabitant. 
 
 Character.] The Natives in general have a clear Under- 
 standing ; are fagacious, induftrious, and frugal ; very temperate 
 in Eating and Drinking, even in Countries where Luxury and 
 Excefs in both is too much pradlis'd. Many fhameful Vices too 
 common in other Countries are fcarcely known among the Inha- 
 bitants. The Gentlemen are well bred, and as generally learned 
 as any Country in Europe j quick at finding out their Intereft, and 
 diligent in purfuing it ; very dextrous in accommodating them- 
 felves to the Manners of the People with whom they live. The 
 Scots are zealous Lovers of their Country, fearlefs of Danger, 
 and patient under the Hardihips and Fatigues of War ; and have 
 fufficiently fhewn their Valour in the World, particularly by thefr 
 Behaviour in ftruggling for their Liberties. The Men in general 
 are well made, and of a robuft hale Conftitution. The Women 
 for the moft part are handfome, modeft, and very careful in 
 managing their Families, and educating their Children. The Na- 
 tives are generally religious, and very zealous in adhering to that 
 Sett which th&y profefs. Laftly, their Fidelity is well known in 
 
 the World. As to what relates to the Nobility of 
 Degrees of Scotland, and their different Degrees, their Privilege, 
 the Na- Precedence, &c. fee the fame in England. Among 
 fives, the Nobles of a lower Degree, are Knights, who 
 
 were formerly made here with greater Solemnity than 
 any-where elfe in Europe, by taking an Oath, and being pro- 
 claim'd publicly by the Herald, of whom the moft Honourable 
 are the Knights of the Thiftle. Knights and Bannerets are created 
 under the Royal Standard, in the King's Army, and in the Field 
 of Battle, the King hirafelf being prefent, and that Honour to 
 continue during the Banneret's Life only ; he having Precedency 
 before all of the fame Order, whofe Patents are of a pofterior Date. 
 The Order of Baronet in Scotland was firft erected for advancing 
 the Plantation of Nova Scotia in America, and for fettling a Co- 
 lony there, to which the Aid of thefe Knights was appropriated. 
 This Order was defign'd by King James VI. before his Death, 
 but was not actually founded till King Charles I. in the Year 1625. 
 who difpos'd to each of thefe Knights a certain Portion of Land 
 in Ko-va Scotia, and, for their further Encouragement, did confti- 
 tute arnd ordain that Heretable State and Style of Baronet to be 
 enjoy'd by every of thefe Gentlemen, who did hazard their Lives 
 
 for
 
 Chap. XV. Brefent State of the Britifli Ifles. 363 
 
 for the Good and Increafe of that Plantation, and their Heir* 
 Male for ever, with Priority and Precedency before all Knights 
 call'd Equites Aurati, all lefler Barons, commonly call'd Lairds, 
 and before all other Gentlemen (except Sir W. Alexander, his 
 Majefty's Lieutenant of Nova Scotia, and his Heirs, their Wives 
 and Children) $ and that to the Chrillian Name of thefe Knights 
 mould be added the Title Sir A. B. Baronet. Knights Batchelors, 
 Equitet Aurati, fucceeded in the next Place of Honour ; next to 
 them their Lairds, or Landed Gentlemen, tho' a Laird, in Effect, is 
 but the Corruption of the Word Lord. Among fuch as profefe 
 Sciences, the Rank is this ; I. Such as profefs Theology, z. Such 
 as profefs Canon Law. 3. The Civil Law. 4. Phiiofophy. 
 5. Medicine. 6. Rhetoric. 7. Poefy. 8. Hiftory. 9. Grammar. 
 10. Logic. 11. Arithmetic. 12. Geometry. 13. Mufic. 14. 
 Aftronomy. And among thefe, fuch as are Doctors precede thofe 
 that are not ; and among the Doctors the Priority goes by Age. 
 
 Ireland being formerly overftock'd, abundance of 
 Families threw themfelves into the Ebudes, or He' The anti- 
 brides, Iflands fituated Weft of Scotland, which, be- ent Inba- 
 ing fmall, were likewife in time as well peopled as bitants of 
 Ireland itfelf. ' The Hebrides being thus peopled by Scotland, 
 the Irijh-Scots, certain ftrange Ships came and offer'd 
 to land. Thefe Ships were fill'd with Pills, a German Nation, 
 inhabiting the Countries now call'd Mecklenburg and Pomerani*. 
 They were roving about, according to the Cuftom of the Northern 
 Nations, in queft of new Habitations, their Country being too 
 populous to find them a Subfiftence. They demanded of the 
 Scots fome Part of their Ifles to fettle in. The Scots replied, the 
 Soil was fo barren, that it was incapable of fupplying them all 
 with Neceffaries : But withal inform 'd them, that a large Ifland, 
 call'd Albion, lay not far diftant, where the Northern Parts being 
 thinly inhabited, they would infallibly find room enough, offering 
 them Afliftance in cafe of Oppofition. The Pills, fatisfy'd with 
 this Difcovery, fteer'd directly to Albion, and, finding but few In- 
 habitants, they landed, and fettled without much Trouble in the 
 Northern Parts. About the Year 424. the Irijh-Scots came in$o 
 Albion or Britain, and continu'd at VVar with the Pills, till in the 
 End the Scots prevailing, compell'd the former to abandon to them 
 the Weftern Parts, and withdrew themfelves into the Eallern. 
 Many of the Britains, to avoid the Tyranny of the Romans, re- 
 tir'd into the Northern Parts of the Ifland, and were incorporated 
 with the Picls. The Iri/b-Scots and the Pills afterwards growing 
 into better Terms with each other, and being willing to inlarge 
 their Dominions towards the South, they contracted an Offenfive 
 and Defeniive League againit the Britains, whom they moll 
 mifcrably tortur'd, till the Invaders were vanquifh'd and beaten 
 
 back
 
 364 Prefent State of the Britifli Ides. Part II. 
 
 back again by the conquering Saxons. Taking the Advantage of 
 the Invafion of the Danes, they got into their Hands fo much of 
 the Kingdom of the Northumbrians, as lay on the North of 
 'Tweed and Sol-way, reckon'd, from that Time forwards, as Part 
 of their Dominions. But this good Underftanding between the 
 Scots and Picls was at Iaft broken, and a long War was continu'd, 
 and after many bloody Battles, and mutual DefeatSj the Scots over- 
 power'd the Picls, who, ever after, went under the Name of Scots. 
 Thefe Scots were firft planted in Ireland, which from them was 
 call'd Scotia, Scotland, as Claudian acquaints us, and as itxtScotiJh 
 Annals manifeft. So that the modern North- Britain* were call'd 
 by the fame Name that thofe were in Ireland; but to diftinguifh 
 one from the other, thefe being call'd Scots, thofe in Ireland were 
 call'd the Irijh-Scots, at Irijh, without any Addition ; and in time 
 the Inhabitants loft the Name of Scots, by which they had been 
 call'd for many Ages ; and the Name of Scotland came to be ap- 
 propriated to the Northern Part of Britain. Theantient Inhabit- 
 ants of this Country, within the Limits of the Roman Province, 
 were, I . The Gadeni, pofleffing Tcviodale, Tiveedale, Mers, and 
 Lothian. 2. The Selgovee, pofleffing Annandale, and Nithfdale. 
 3. The Nomantes, inhabiting Galloway, Carick, Kyle, and Cun- 
 ningham. 4- The Damnii, pofleffing Clyfdale, Lenox, and Ster~ 
 ling. Without the Roman Province, among the PiSs and fjga- 
 tive Britains, were, 5. The Caltdonii, properly fo call'd, pofleff- 
 ing Strathern, Argyle, Cantire, Brodalbain, Lorn, Perth, Angus, 
 and Fife. 6. The Vermines, inhabiting Merns, and Mar. 7. The 
 Talzali, pofleffing Buchan. 8. The Pacomagi, inhabiting Locb- 
 abar, and Murray. 9. The Cant<s, pofleffing Rofs and Suther- 
 land. 10. The Contini, po fleffing Caithnefs. i\. The Cornubii % 
 inhabiting Strathnavern. 
 
 Religion.] The Chriftian Religion was preach'd very early 
 
 in Scotland; but, how foon, we do not certainly know. From the 
 
 fifth and fixth Century, down to the fixteenth, the Government 
 
 of the Church of Scotland has been by Bifhops. The 
 
 1541. Reformed had now been burned many Years in Scot- 
 land; but thefe Punifhments caus'd there the fame 
 Effects as elfewhere ; that is, they increas'd, inftead of leflening 
 the Number ; and the Clergy were obftinately bent to root them 
 out with Fire and Sword. James V. was a Prince much addicted 
 to his Pleafuies, and very greedy of Money. Befides, he had fe- 
 veral natural Sons, whom he could not enrich as he wifh'd, becaufe 
 he had exhaufted his Treafure in needlefs Expences. There were 
 two Parties in his Court, whereof the one favour'd the King of 
 England, Henry VIII. and the Reformed ; and the other, confut- 
 ing of Roman-catholics, was intirely againft Henry, and con- 
 tinually
 
 Chap. XV. Prefent Slate of the Britifh Ifles. 3^5 
 
 tinually ftrove to induce the King of Scotland to extirpate all 
 who fwerv'd from the Church of Rome. The former endeavour'd 
 to perfuade him to imitate the King of England his Uncle, and 
 fecure a large Revenue by the Suppreflion of the Abbies. The 
 latter represented to him, that, by ftri&ly executing the Laws 
 againll Heretics, he would raife by forfeited Eftates above a hun- 
 dred thoufand Crowns a Year. After fome Confideration, James 
 clos'd with the laft Advice, and, fufFering the Clergy to take their 
 own Courfe, there follow'd in Scotland a violent Perfecution. In 
 the Reformation of England, under King Edward VI. it was 
 debated, Whether fome Ceremonies and Veftments mould be 
 retain'd. The Exiles in Queen Mary's Time refum'd thofe Debates 
 at Frankfort and Geneva, in which laft Place was the famous 
 John Knox, who join'd with thofe that oppos'd the Ufe of Cere- 
 monies. Queen Mary dying, her Sifter, Queen Elizabeth, con- 
 tinu'd Epifcopacy, and the Ceremonies now retain'd in our Church. 
 Soon after, the Scotijb Reformation follow'd, in which Knox was 
 the chief Agent. By his Perfuafion, the Ceremonies were by general 
 Confent laid afide ; and the Confeffion of Faith, which he offer'd to 
 be confirm'd in Parliament in the Year 1567. has thisClaufe: 
 That as Ceremonies are but Temporal, fo may and ought they 
 to be chang'd, when they rather fofter Superftition, than edify the 
 Kirk ufing the fame. And by the fixth Ad of that Parliament it 
 is enatted, That the Minifters of the BlefTed Evangelifts of Jefus 
 Chrift, whom God of his Mercy hath now rais'd up among us, 
 or hereafter lhall raife, agreeing with them that now live in the 
 Adminiftration of the Sacraments, and the People of the Realm 
 profeifing Jefus Chrift, &c. according to the Confeffion of the 
 Faith, are declar'd to be the only true and holy Kirk of this Realm. 
 The Bilhops in that Parliament generally adhering to Popery, and 
 refufing to fign the Confeffion of Faith, were laid afide ; but in 
 their ftead Superintendents were appointed in fome Diftridls, differ- 
 ing both in Number and Bounds from the Bilhops and their Dio- 
 cefes. Other Perfons alfo, having Commiffions from the Kirk, 
 executed particular Parts of the Minifterial Function committed 
 to them. During this Time, the Queen, who was a Papift, and 
 her Popilh Servants, hinder'd the Ratification of the A&s for Re- 
 formation ; and the Great Men, that had Grants of the Church 
 Lands, were unwilling that the Minifters Maintenance fhould be 
 fettled ; and this increafed Divifions in the Kingdom. A Book of 
 Difcipline was drawn up, and figncd by many of the Nobility, 
 which was never ratify'd in Parliament. The Minifters however 
 fat ftill, out of Fear of bringing in Popery again ; and, keeping well 
 with the Body of the Nobility, Gentry, and People, waited for 
 more favourable Times, which foon happen'd. For the Murder 
 of King Henry, the Acquittal of the Earl of Bothwcl, the deny- 
 ing
 
 ^66 Frefent State of /& Bfitifli Ides. Part II. 
 
 ing to the Earl of Lenox, the murder'd King's Father, a compe- 
 tent Time to make good his Accufation, Bothwefs hafty Divorce 
 from his own Lady, and yet more hafty Marriage with the Queen, 
 and his inducing the Nobility to fign Bonds, declaring their Ap- 
 probation of that Marriage, put every thing into a Flame : The 
 Queen was forc'd to quit her Army, and leave Botbnuel to fhifc 
 for himfelf ; and foon after fhe refign'd her Crown to her Son, and 
 the Nobility and Great Men engag'd themfelves under a Bond to 
 crown the Child, and to ftand by him. This was done in 1567. 
 and Papifts. as well as Proteftants fign'd the Bond. This Affccia- 
 tion did not indeed continue long in its full Strength ; for before 
 the Meeting of the Parliament in Dicember 1567. fome fell off, 
 and, after the Queen's Efcapc from Loch-levin, many eminent Men 
 cf both Religions join'd her. In this Time the Affembly met, 
 and pafs'd feveral Atts relating to the Church ; and, at laft, a fort 
 cf a Form of Policy was fettled for the Government of twelve 
 Perfons, half Laity, and half Clergy, which Form approach'd 
 nearly to the Epifcopal Government. In the Year 1578. the 
 Affembly prefented to the Parliament a Draught of Ecclefiaftical 
 Government. It was referred to a Committee, and was not agreed 
 to in all its Articles, but was generally put in Execution by the 
 Authority of the Affembly. In 1580. the Lord Aubigne, a Pa- 
 pift, Coufin-German to the King's Father, came out of France in- 
 to Scotland, where the King foon created him firft Earl, then Duke, 
 of Lenox. This difgufted the Kirk exceedingly. The King alfo 
 in Council fufpended feveral Ecclefiaftical Cenfures and Excom- 
 munications : Many Priefts alfo, and Jefuits, arid others who were 
 relapfed to Popery, flock'd into the Kingdom. Lenox indeed pub- 
 licly renounced Popery, but the Sufpicions concerning his Reli- 
 gion ftill continued ; efpecially after fome Difpenfations from Rome 
 had been intercepted, giving Liberty to Papifts to fwear and fub-* 
 fcribe the Confeffion of Faith to be drawn up, in which all the 
 Corruptions of the Church of Rome, in Faith and Rites, were 
 particularly abjur'd, with a Declaration, that that Declaration? 
 was made without any mental Refervation or Equivocation what- 1 
 foever. This was fworn to by the King, the Council, and the 
 Court ; and this is the Declaration which was renew'd in the 
 Year 1683. by the Name of the National Covenant. In the Par* 
 foment of 1584. the King's Authority over all Perfons in all 
 Caufes was confirm'd, and the declining the Judgment of his Ma- 
 jefty and Council declar'd to be Treafon. This is faid to be the 
 firft Time in which the King's Supremacy was enacted by the 
 Parliament- in Scotland. In 1592. Prefbytery was fully fettled 
 and eilablilh'd by Aft of Parliament. In this Aft it was declar'd, 
 That the Kirk might lawfully hold and keep general Affemblies, 
 once a Year at-leaft* provided that either the King, of a Com- 
 
 njiffioner
 
 Chap. XV. Prefeni Stat* of the Britifh Ifles. 367 
 
 miffioner appointed by him, wereprefent at every Aflembly ; and 
 that, before it was diflblv'd, they nominated and appointed Time 
 and Place where the next general Aflembly ftiould be kept and 
 held, as it us'd to be in former Times. In 1603. King James 
 VI. fucceeded to the Crown of England, vacant by Queen Eli- 
 xabetb's Death. This Monarch refolv'd to introduce Epifcopacy into 
 Scotland again ; and accordingly he nominated Bifhops into every 
 See, and, by his Commiffioners to the General Aflembly, he pro- 
 cur'd their Meetings to be continu'd beyond the Year, from July 
 1604.. to July 1605. and then the Commiffioners of the Church 
 were order'd to defert the Diet, and make no Indication of an- 
 other Aflembly, till the King fhould be acquainted with it. Ac- 
 cordingly, the King's Commifhoners having intimated his Plea- 
 fure to the Aflembly, a few met in the Year 1605. at Aberdeen ; 
 and they by Warrant from the Privy Council, were difcharg'd by 
 the King's Commiffioner for meeting in an Aflembly, and he 
 commanded that Aflembly to be diflolv'd. But thofe that were 
 met, continued the Aflembly to September following. Upon this, 
 thefe Minifters were declar'd Rebels, and cited to appear before 
 the Privy Council, who imprifon'd them. But they perfifted in 
 what they had done, and declin'd the King's Authority, as incom- 
 petent in that Matter, appealing to a General Aflembly, as the 
 only proper Judges. Hereupon they were try'd for Treafon upon 
 the Statute of 1584. which eftablifh'd the King's Supremacy in 
 Caufes Ecclefiaftical. They defended themfelves upon the Statute 
 of 1592. which gives the Kirk a Right of keeping General Af- 
 femblies. Six of the Minifters were found guilty of Treafon, 
 and their Sentence of Death was turn'd into Banifhment. In the 
 Parliament held 1606. the Temporalties of the Bilhops were re- 
 ftor'd, and the King's Supremacy again aflerted. The General 
 Aflembly met that Year, appointed conftant Moderators in every 
 Presbytery, and Bifhops for the Time being, to moderate in Sy- 
 nods of the Diocefes, only accountable to the General Aflemblies. 
 The Eftablifhment of the Church, by conftant Moderators, which 
 was made by this General Aflembly, having a great Refemblancc 
 to the firft Settlement of Superintendents at the Beginning of the 
 Reformation, might have prov'd a lafting Settlement, if the Mi- 
 nifters had not entertain'd a Sufpicion, that this was only a Cover 
 to introduce fuch Diocefan Epifcopacy, as was in Ufe in the 
 Church of England, which indeed was fhortly after done. For 
 as, yet, tho' King James VI. had fill'd up the Sees, the Bifhops 
 had no Confecration, nor indeed Ordination from any other Bilhops, 
 and the Difcipline of 1592. was ftill on Foot. In 1610. a Ge- 
 neral Aflembly met at Glafcow, in which Archbifhop Spot/wood 
 was elected to prefide : The King's Prerogative in calling General 
 Aflcmbliej wat acknowledg'd, Synods were order'd to be kept 
 
 balfc
 
 26S Prefent Slate of the Britifh Hies. Part IP. 
 
 half-yearly ; and the Archbifhops, or Bifhops of the Diocefei, 
 were directed to prefide in them : The Jurifdi&ion of the Church 
 was wholly committed to their Care ; and Minifters at their 
 Admiffion were commanded to fwear Obedience to their Or- 
 dinaries. This Affembly was ratify 'd in Parliament, in 1612. 
 and the Ad of Parliament in 1592. refcinded, fo far as it was 
 confident with this new Adi. Archbifhop Spotfwood, and. the 
 Bifhops of Brechen and Galloway, were call'd to Court after the 
 Affembly was up, to, be confecrated in England, there not being 
 a fufficient Number of Bifhops in Scotland to do that Bufmefs 
 canonically, 'o that upon their Return they might confecrate the 
 reft. To fhun the Queftion of Primacy, a Commiffion was di- 
 rected to the Bifhops of London, Ely, and Bath and Wells, who 
 confecrated them in the Chapel at London Houfe, on the Twenty- 
 rft of Qcloher 16 10. The fame Year, a High Commiffion was 
 appointed in Matters Ecclefiaftical ; one Article of whofe Initruc- 
 tion was, That Ordination of Miniflers fhould only be by Bifhops, 
 affifted by two or three Prefbyters ; and another, That General 
 AfTemblies fhould always be call'd by the King, who fhould be 
 fupplicated for that Purpofe ; and that no Miniiters fhould be pre- 
 sent, but thofe that were elected by the reft ; and that they, the 
 Bifhops, Deans, and Archdeacons, fhould ever after conftitute the 
 General AfTemblies. King James began now to be very earnefl 
 with the Primate to eftablifh a Liturgy, and a Book of Canons, 
 for the Church of Scotland, by his Royal Authority, and the 
 High Commiffion. He defir'd likewife, that thefe five Articles 
 might pafs into a Law : 1 . That the Lord's Supper fhould be 
 receiv'd kneeling. 2. That fick Perfons might receive it at home. 
 3. That Baptifm might be adminillred, in cafe of Neceffity, in 
 private Houfes. 4. That Chrijimas-day, Good-Friday, Eajler- 
 day, Afcenjion-day, and Wbitfunday, mould be religioufly ob- 
 ferv T d. 5. That Children, well inftru&ed in the Principles of 
 Chriftianity, fhould be confirm'd by the Bifhop. And in 161 7^ 
 he call'd a Parliament at Edinburgh, where thefe and other Mat- 
 ters, Civil and Eccefiaflical, were to be fettled. Among the Ar- 
 ticles the King got this to pafs, That whatfoever Conclusions 
 Were taken by his Majefty, with the Advice of the Archbifhops 
 and Bifhops, and a competent Number of Miniflers, in Matters 
 of external Policy, the fame fhould have the Power and Strength 
 of an Ecclefiaftical Law. Being confident afcer that of Succefs, 
 they call'd an Affembly in 161 8. at Perth, in which the above 
 five Articles were pafs'd. They did not pafa, however, very eafily. 
 Thefe Articles were pubiifh'd in all Churches, and authoriz'd 
 by the Privy Council ; many Miniflers and Congregations, refufing 
 to comply, were call'd before the High Commiihon ; and, being 
 injoin'J Obedience, declin'd that Court, as not legally conltituted 
 
 by
 
 Chap. XVIL Prefent State of the Britifli Ifles."" 369 
 
 by an Aft of Affembly, or Parliament ; whereupon feveral were 
 confin'd, fufpended, and depriv'd. In Edinburgh, the Minified 
 being chang'd, Obedience was pretty generally given : But few Ci- 
 tizens, except thofe that were in public Places, would comply 
 with kneeling at the Communion ; tor which feveral of them were 
 banifh'd the City. Thefe Men alleged, in their Vindication, 
 that thofe Articles had been condemned by former Aifemblies p 
 that had been ratify'd in Parliament. In 1625. King James died. 
 He was fucceeded by his Son, Charles I. who furrender'd all the 
 Tythes in his Hands to the Church, and was faid to defign a Re- 
 vocation of all Kirk Lands in Lay Baronies, with an Intention. 
 of bellowing ihem upon Churchmen, that they, as Abbots and 
 Priors, might vote in Parliament. This difpleas'd the Peers and 
 Barons exceedingly, and put them upon countenancing the difaf- 
 fe&ed Miniiters, and others, who did not like the Ecclefiaftical 
 Government. This appear'd vifible in 1633. when the King held 
 a Parliament himfelf : For when he urg'd, that the Ratification 
 of his Royal Prerogative, and his Right of appointing the Appeal 
 of Churchmen, might pafs by the lame Vote, lome eminent Mem- 
 bers agreed to the Claufe of the Prerogative, but dillented to that 
 of Churchmens Appeal, as being apprchenfivc, that it would bring 
 on the Englijh Surplice. This mov'd the King fo much, that he 
 caird for the Rolls of the Members, and faid, he would mark the 
 Votes of thofe that fhould diflent from his Prerogative. The 
 Vote being then competently flated, 26 confiderable Members 
 difTented, who afterwards were very forward in the following un- 
 happy Wars. In the Year 1638. King Charles I. labour'd to in- 
 troduce the Englijh Liturgy in Scotland, but without Succefs. 
 The Oppofition made to that Attempt, ended in the Abolition of 
 Epifcopacy, and the Re-eftablifhment of Prefbytery, as it was 
 fettled in 1592. fo it continu'd till 1662. when King Charles II. 
 reltor'd Epifcopacy. But in the Year 1689. the Presbyterians pre- 
 vail'd on King William and Q^een Mary to eftab'ifh their Church 
 Government once more by Law ; which Eftablifhmcnt Hill con- 
 tinues. 
 
 The Ecclefiaftical Government of the Church of The Go- 
 Scotland is by Deacons, Ruling Elders, and Miniiters. <vcmment 
 A Deacon ihould be a Man of good Character for of the 
 Manners and Underftanding, having a Competency Church of 
 in the World, to be chefen by a Confiitory of Mi- Scotland, 
 nillers, Elders, and Deacons, to be approval of by the 
 Congregation, and fet apart for this Office by the Minifter, Co- 
 lemnly before the Congregation, after a Sermon sad Prayer for 
 this Occafion. His Bufinefs is to colled the Offerings for the 
 Poor at the Church Doors, to inquire into the Neceffities of the 
 Parishioners, to viiit and take an Account of the Condition of 
 
 b poor
 
 37o Prefent State &f the Britifh Ifles. Part II. 
 
 poor fick People, to affift at the Communion, fcsY. A Ruling El- 
 der mould be a Man of a fpotlefs Chara&er, and of the principal 
 Quality and Intereft in his Parifti. No Perfons of Quality ever 
 fit in any Ecclefiaftical Judicatories, unlefs they be Ruling Elders, 
 their Quality otherwife giving them no Title to a Vote in thofe 
 Courts. His Bufinefs is to affift the Minitter, in overfeeing and 
 correcting the Manners of the People ; to attend him in vifiting 
 and catechifing his own Diftrift in the Parifti ; in praying with 
 the Sick j in private Admonitions, and at the Communion Table. 
 Minifters, or preaching Presbyters only, can adminifter the Sa- 
 craments, catechife, pronounce Church Cenfures, ordain Deacons, 
 and Ruling Elders, affift at the Imposition of Hands upon other 
 Minifters, preach, and moderate, or prefide, in all Ecclefiaftical Ju- 
 dicatories. Befides a fpotlefs Charader, he mould be very learned 
 in the Scriptures, acquainted with the learned Languages, and all 
 Sorts of Divinity. The Ecclefiaftical Judicatures are, i. Kirk 
 Seflions, which is compos'd of Minifters, Elders, and Deacons. 
 Every Parifh is divided, according to their Extent, into particular 
 Diftrids, each of which has its own Elders, and Deacons, com- 
 pofmg the Kirk Seflion, who meet once a Week, at leaft, to confider 
 the Affairs of the Parifti, as a religious Society. This is the 
 lovveft Ecclefiaftical Judicatory in Scotland, and its Jurifdi&ion 
 goes not beyond its own Parifti. 2. Presbyteries are in all 69 ; 
 each of which confifts of feveral Parifties ; and the Minifters of 
 thefe Parifties compofe a Presbytery. Thefe Presbyteries have no 
 Jurifdiftion beyond their own Bounds. They determine all Ap- 
 peals from Kirk Seflions, but can try nothing at the iirft Inftance, 
 which is cognizable before a Kirk Seflion. They compofe all 
 Differences between Minifters and People, for which End they 
 hold Presbyterial Vifitations in every Parifti. They inquire into 
 the Repairs of the Churches. They appoint Schools in all Parifties, 
 and fee that the Funds fettled for that Purpofe be not mi fern - 
 ploy'd : And the School-mafters are fubjeft to their Cenfure and 
 Examination. 3. Provincial Synods, compos'd of feveral adjacent 
 Presbyteries. The Members that compofe this Court, are the 
 fame with thofe of the fubordinate Presbyteries, <viz. the Minifter 1- , 
 and a Ruling Elder out of every Parifti. This Synod meets twice 
 a Year at the principal Town within its Jurifdidtion. They fend 
 to, and receive Correfpondents from, the neigbouring Synods, as 
 the feveral Presbyteries do between one another, upon whom, in 
 every thing, they are a Check, Appeals lying to them from the 
 Presbyteries in all Cafes whatfoever. All Afts of the Synods are 
 fubject to the Review of general Afl'emblies ; for which Reafon 
 ;hey keep exadl Regifters of all their Proceedings. 4. General 
 Aileniiii es. The general Affembly is the Dernier Refort of the 
 Church of Scotland to which Appeals lie from every Provincial 
 5 Synod.
 
 Chap. XVII. Prefext State of the Britifli Ifles. }fti 
 
 Synod, and from which no Appeal lies to any fuperior Courf\ IC 
 confifts of Comrniffioners from Prefbyteries, Royal Burghs, and 
 Univerfities ; which arediofen yearly. I'his Aifembly meets once 
 a Year, and commonly at Edinburgh : The Sovereign, or his Com- 
 miffioner, is always prefent, but gives no Vote. The 
 Privileges of the Sctch Clergy, fince the Reforms- Pri<vilege$ > 
 tion, are as confiderable as in any other Prcteftart of the 
 Kingdom or State, in relation both to their Perfons Scotch 
 and Eltates ; for the Law has provided, that fuel) as Clergy. 
 fhall be found guilty of afTaultirig the Lives of Mi- 
 nified, or robbing their Houfes, or actually attempting the fame, 
 fhall be punilh'd by Death. And that the Law may be better 
 executed, five hundred Marks Reward is allow'd the Difcoverer, 
 and three hundred Marks to the Apprehender of the aforefaid Cri- 
 minals, to be paid out of his Majefty's Treafury. And, for their 
 better Accommodation, they are provided with convenient Par- 
 fonage-Houfes, and, where they are not fitting, the Parifh fhall 
 build complete Houfes for them, not exceeding rooo/. nor under 
 50O Marks. In the Provifion made for the parochial Clergy in 
 Scotland, one thing is very commendable, which is, that through- 
 out the whole Country there are fcarce any Benefices worth lefs 
 than 50/. Sterling fer Aitnum, which in that Country is a good 
 Maintenance. 
 
 Customs.] The Diet of the Scdts is agreeable to 
 their Eftates and Qualities : No People eat better, Diet. 
 or have greater Variety, of Flefh, Fifh, wild and 
 tame Fowl, than the Nobility and Gentry. They can furnifh 
 their Tables with ten Difhes, cheaper than the Englijh can pro- 
 vide three of the fame Kinds. The Tradefmen, Farmers, and 
 common People, are not fuch Devourers of Flefh, as Men of the 
 fame Rank are in England: Milk-meats and Oatmeal feveral 
 ways prepar'd, and Cale and Roots drefs'd in various Manners, are 
 the general Diet of the poor People ; and with this kind of Food 
 they enjoy a better State of Health than their more Southern 
 Neighbours, who fare higher. The meaner Sort of 
 People in the Loiulands are drefs'd like the Emglijk, Drefs. 
 except their Bonnets and Plaids, which they wear 
 different from the Highlanders, who are conflant in their cloathing 
 in Plaids, which are only one Piece of fovea or eight Yards long, 
 with which they cover their whole Bodies from Neck to Knee, 
 (excepting their Right Arm) and which they manage fo artfully, 
 as to fupply the Defedt of Drawers and Breeches : They cover 
 their Heads with Thrum Caps, Blue, Gray, or Sadcolour, as beft 
 
 fuits their Fancies. 
 
 B b 2 Curiosities.}
 
 372 Prefent State of the Britifh'Ifles. Part II. 
 
 Curiosities.] Towards the North-weft of Murray, is the 
 famous Lough Nefs, which never freezes, but retaineth its natural 
 Heat, even in the extremeft Cold of Winter; and, in many 
 Places, this Lake has been founded with a Line of 500 Fathoms, 
 but no Bottom found. Near this Lake, there is a large round 
 Mountain, about two Miles perpendicular Height from the Sur- 
 face of the Nefs ; upon the very Top of which Mountain, is a 
 Lake of cold frefh Water, often founded with Lines of many Fa- 
 thoms, but the Bottom has never been found. This Lake is 
 equally full all Seafons of the Year, and never freezes j nor has it 
 any vifible Current running, either to it, or from it. On the 
 Top of a Mountain in Rofs, is a vaft Heap of large white Stones, 
 moft of them clear like Cryftal ; and great Plenty of Oyfter-fhells, 
 and Shells of other Sea Animals, yet twenty Miles from any Sea. 
 In Lenox, is Lough Lomond, famous for its floating Ifland ; alfo 
 for having Fi(h without Fins ; and for being frequently tempeftu- 
 ous in a Calm. South-weft of Sxvinna (one of the Orcades) are 
 two dreadful Whirlpools in the Sea, commonly call'd the Wells 
 of Snvinna ; and another between I/a and Jura (two of the 
 Weftern Iflands) during the firft three Hours of Flood : All of them 
 are very terrible to Paflengers. Near Pai/ly and Renfrew, is a 
 Spring which regularly ebbs and flows with the Sea. In Clydif- 
 dale, are yet to be feen, for feveral Miles, the Remains of a large 
 Roman Caufway ; and in Tiviotdale, are fome Vejligia of Roman 
 Encampments, and another Military Way, commonly call'd the 
 Rugged Caufway. Near Kinrofs in Murray, is an Obelifk of one 
 Stone, fet up as a Monument of a Battle between King Malcolm, 
 and Sueno the Dane. Betides thefe, there are, in Scotland, feveral 
 other Remains of Antiquity, and natural Curiofities too many to 
 _ mention here. 
 
 SEC T. III. 
 
 The Prefent State of Ireland. 
 
 Boundaries. ] TRE LAND, an Ifland (formerly Juvema, 
 1cm x, his, &c.) lying to the Welt of Eng- 
 land, is divided from it, by what is call'd the Irifh Sea, or St. 
 George's Chanel. 
 
 Situation.] This Ifland is iituated between 51 Deg. and 
 55 Deg, 25 M. North LaStude : And between 6 and 10 Deg. 
 40 M. Welt Latitude. The Length is about 275, and Breadth 
 auout 159 Miles. 
 
 Diviflon,
 
 574 Prefint Stete of the Britifh IOes. Part II, 
 
 Cljmate] The Soil of this Country in general is very fer- 
 tile, but more proper for Pafturage, than Tillage ; it is much en- 
 cumber'd with large Bogs, and unwholfome Marines. There has 
 been indeed, in this Age, a great deal of Wood cut down, and 
 many Marfhes drained- The Air is almoft of the fame Nature 
 with that of thofe Parts of Britain, which lie under the fame 
 Parallel ; except that, in fome Parts of Ireland, 'tis of a more 
 
 frofs and impure Temper, occafion'd by the many Lakes and 
 tfarfhes, which produce great Quantities of Vapours, whereby 
 the Air is corrupted. The Produce of this Ifland is Wool, Linen 
 Cloth, Friezes, Hemp, Hides, Tallow, Butter, Cheefe, Honey, 
 Wax, Salt, Cattle, ffc. The longeft Day in the moft Northern 
 Part is about 17 Hours 4 ; and in the Southermoft Part about 
 164;; therefore this Ifland lies in the 9th, ioch, and nth North 
 Climate. 
 
 Government.] This Ifland was formerly divided into a great 
 Number of Kingdoms ; but, at length, it was reduced to Seven, 
 namely, Connaught, Cork, Leinjler, OJfery, Meath, Limerick, and 
 Ulfter. The King of Connaught, the Principal of thefe Petty 
 Sovereigns, kept the reft in a fort of Dependence, with much the 
 fame Authority as the Anglo-Saxon Monarchs formerly enjoy'd, 
 during the Heptarchy. This was the State of Ireland, when 
 Henry II. King of England, meditated the Conqucft of it. 
 For the Irijh taking fome Englijbmen Prifoners, and afterwards 
 felling them for Slaves, Henry refolv'd to form this Enterprise. 
 Others fay, the real Motive was his Defire of inlarging his Do- 
 minions, by the Conqueft of this important Ifland. However, a 
 favourable Conjuncture induced him to think of this Conqueft ; for 
 Adrian IV. a Native of England, being then Pope, he hop'd 
 eaiily to obtain his Approbation. Tho' the Outrages committed 
 by the Irijb upon his Subjects might be one Reafon of his intended 
 Expedition, that was not what the King alleg'd to the Pope to 
 obtain his Confent. The Glory of God, and the Salvation of 
 Soqls, were the Arguments he urg'd to prevail with Adrian to 
 approve his Defign ; for he pretended, that as the Irijb were Schif- 
 fqoficsi and bad Chriftians, it was neceflkry to put thenj in the right 
 Way, and oblige them to acknowledge the Papal Authority, 
 which, till then, had been difregarded by them : That the proper- 
 eft Means to that End, was to bring them into Subjection to the 
 Crown of England, which had ever been devoted to the Holy See. 
 The Pope contented, upon Condition, as Henry had promis'd, 
 that every Houfe in Ireland fhould pay the Holy See a yearly 
 Acknowledgment of one Peny, and that the Rights of the Roman 
 Church fhouid be maintain'd without the lead Detiment or 
 Diminution : That the King would fubjeft the Ifland to juftLaws, 
 
 and
 
 Chap. XVII. Prefent State of the Brltifli Ides. 375 
 
 and root out Vice, which had long flourish 'd there : That he would 
 advance the Honour of God, and the Salvation of the Natives, 
 whom the Pope charg'd to fubmit to Henrfs Jurifdiftion, and own 
 him for their Sovereign Lord ; provided always, That the Rights 
 of the Church were inviolably preferved by Henry, and the Peter 
 Pence duly paid. Among the Sovereigns then reigning in Ireland, 
 Dermot, King of Leinfier, was one of the molt confiderable, by 
 the Extent of his Dominions. From this Prince's Acceffion to 
 the Throne, he had atted fo arbitrarily, that he was grown ex- 
 tremely odious to his Subjedts. But he made flight of his People'* 
 Hatred, being at Peace with his Neighbours, who concern'd not 
 themfelves with what parted in that Kingdom. However, he af- 
 terwards gave them occafion himfelf, by carrying away the Wife 
 of O-Roric, King of Meath. O-Roric, to revenge the Affront, 
 levied an Army, and with the Help of Roderick, King of Con' 
 naugbt, attack'd Dermot, who, finding himfelf abandoned by his 
 Subjects, was forced to leave Ireland, for fear of falling into the 
 Hands of his Enemy. As he had no Refuge in the Ifland, where 
 the reft of the Kings refufed to engage in his Quarrel, he went 
 and implor'd the Prote&ion of the King of England, who was 
 then in France. Having inform'd him of the Cafe, he promis'd 
 to become his Vaflal, if, by his Aid, he was reftor'd to the Throne. 
 Nothing could be more grateful than this Propcial to a Prince, 
 who had been long meditating the Conqueit of Ireland, and want- 
 ed only an Opportunity ; for he was then at War with France, 
 and had not Forces enough to fpare. This War did not permit 
 him immediately to afljlt the fugitive King, but promis'd, as 
 fbon as the War was over, to aid him to the utmoft of his Power. 
 Ncverthclefs, he thought it his Intereft to perfuade Dermot to be- 
 gin a War, from which he hop'd himfelf to reap great Advantage. 
 To that End he advis'd him to go over into England, and en- 
 deavour to obtain what Affiftance he could from the EngUJb Barons, 
 in Expectation of greater Forces. Dermot follow'd his Advice, 
 and, relying on Henry's Word, came into England, when Robert 
 Fitz-Stcpben, and Richard Strongbo'w, Earl of Pembroke, agreed 
 with him upon certain Conditions. The former was prevail'd 
 with, in hopes of making a confiderable Fortune in Ireland. The 
 latter, who had large Poffeflions in England and Wales, was 
 gain'd by Dermot\ Promife, to give him his only Daughter in 
 Marriage, and fettle the Succeffibn upon him. Thefe two Lord?, 
 having drawn together fomc Troops among their Friends and 
 Vaffds, Fitz-Stcpben, who was firft ready, accompanied Dcrmor' 
 into Ireland, with about 490 Men. Being landed near Water ford, 
 the Kir.g of Ltinjler led them before the City of Wexford, not 
 far from thence. This City, being prefently taken, was given to 
 Fitz-Stepben, who fettled there a Colony of Englifh. Thefe were 
 
 ? t> \ the
 
 '376 Prefent Slate of the Brkifh Ides. Part II f 
 
 the firfl Evglijb fettled in Ireland, where they ftill retain our 
 antient Drefs, and much of our old Language, with a Mixture 
 of Irijh. After this Exploit, the Adventurers re -enforcing their 
 little Army to the Number of 3000 by the Junction of the Na- 
 tives, or by the Arrival (in the fame Place) of Maurice de Prcn- 
 detgejl, with ibme Soldiers and Archers in two Ship.-, march 'd 
 againit the King of OJfery. This Prince, whp did not expect to 
 be attack'd, being unpreparM for his Defence, was forced to fub- 
 rnit to fuch Terms as the Conquerors were pleas'd to impofe. In 
 the mean time, Roderick refolv'd upon a War with Dermot, and 
 the EngLfo. Indeed, it was eafy to perceive, his Defign was not 
 confin'd to the Affiftance of the King of Leinjler. But as the 
 Adventurers were now grown very formidable, he was willing, 
 before he run any Hazard, to try by way of Negotiation to get 
 them out of the Iiland. He addrefs'd himfelf firft to Fitz-Stcpbex, 
 and ofter'd him a considerable Sum to retire. His Offer being re- 
 jected, he tum'd to Dermot, raid endeavoured to perfuade him to 
 fend away the Engliih, by promifing to reftore him to his King- 
 dom. Dermot immediately clos'd with this Propofal ; but when 
 they came to perform their Covenants, miitruiiing each other, 
 they could agree neither upon the Time, nor the Manner. Whillt 
 they were employ 'd in deviling Expedients for their mutual Se- 
 curity, the Earl of Pembroke arriv'd from England with 1 200 
 Men. His firit Expedition was the taking of Waterford, and 
 putting the Inhabitants all to the Sword. This Conquelt break- 
 ing off the Negotiation, the Earl of Pembroke married Dermoids 
 Daughter, and quickly after took Poffeffion of the Kingdom of 
 Leinjier, falling to him by the Death of his Father-in-law. After 
 the Death of Dermit, the Adventurers prepar'd to carry on their 
 Conquefls. As they faw the Terror of their Arms was fpread 
 pver Ireland, they improv'd the Opportunity, and, advancing far- 
 ther, became Mailers of Dublin, and fome other Places. Roderick,, 
 and the reil of the Princes, were in fuch Confufion, that they very 
 . faintly oppos'd the Progrefs of the Foreigners. It is almofl in T 
 credible, that the Jr'Jkt wno were exceeding numerous, mould, 
 fuffcr themfelves to be thus over-run by a Handful of Ei\glijhmen. 
 The Reafon is imputed to the great Dread of the Engli/b Crofs r 
 bows, the Ufe of which, till then, was unknown to them. Upon 
 News of this extraordinary Succefs, King Henn grew jealous of 
 the Adventurers. He was in Hopes they would have wanted his 
 Affillance, and thereby given him a Pretence to paf> into Ireland 
 himfelf, and fubdue the Ifland- But, finding the faint Refinance 
 of the Irij'b render'd his Aid needlefs, he was afraid, the Con- 
 querors would become Mailers of the whole Country, which he 
 delign'd fjr himfelf. In this Belief, he thought it neceflury to 
 them to apply lo him. To this End., he forbids the Export- 
 ing
 
 Chap. XVII. Prefent State of the Britifli Ides. 377 
 
 ing of Provifions or Ammunition to Ireland ; and commanded all 
 his Subjects to return from thence. Thefe Orders, which were 
 iiiu'd on Pretence the Adventurers had engag'd in their Under- 
 taking without his Leave, fucceeded to his Expectation. As foon 
 as the Earl of Pembroke and FiizStephen were inform 'd of the 
 King's Edict, they lent Deputies to affure him of their Obedience, 
 and to tell him, all their rrefent and future Conquefls were at 
 bis Command. This Sabmiifton eafily r.ppeas'd the King, who 
 had no farther Thoughts of recalling them. Some time alter, he 
 made an Agreement with them, that he fhould have all the Sea- 
 ports, and the rclt remain in the Conquerors, to hold of him and 
 his Succeffors. Matters being thus fettled, Henry went over him- 
 felf into Inland, with a formidable Army, and landed at Water- 
 ford. The Irijh, who before could not withltand a few private 
 Perfons, and confequently faw themfelves enable to refill fo great 
 Forces, chofe a voluntary SubmhTion.. During Henry's Stay at 
 Water ford, he faw all the Kings of the Iiland arrive at his Court, 
 and with Emulation fliive who mould firll fwear Allegiance. 
 Thus Henry, without fpilling one Drop of Blood, became Mailer 
 of Ireland in lefs Time, than was fulficient to travel over it. Af- 
 ter he had plac'd frefh Garrifons at Waterford, Wexford, and 
 fome other Maritime Towns, purfuantto his Agreement with the 
 Adventurers, he came to Dublin, where he made fome Regulations 
 for the Government of his new Conquell. Shortly after, he fct 
 out for England, leaving at Dublin Hugh Lacy to govern the 
 Ifland in his Name, with the Title of Julticiary of Ireland. The 
 Government of this Country, at prefent, is by one fupreme Officer, 
 commonly call'd the Lord Lieutenant or Lord Deputy of Ireland, 
 who is inverted with great Power, and comes very near the Majelty 
 of a King in his Train and State. He has a Privy Council to 
 advifc him upon all Occafions. As for the Laws of the King- 
 dom, they owe their Beginning and Original to the Englijh 
 Parliament and Council, and mult firll pafs the Great Seal of 
 England. When the Lord Lieutenant is abfent, the fupreme 
 Power is lodg'd in Lords Juilices, who have the fame Authority 
 with a Lord Lieutenant. The Courts of Judicature, both for 
 Civil and Criminal Affairs, and their Manner of Proceeding, arc 
 much the fame here as in England. 
 
 Trade] This Country is very commodioufly fituated for 
 Trade ; having alio great Numbers of good Ports, which fa- 
 cilitate* ;hc Exportation of its Commodities. The Lip have an 
 extraordinary Trade for their Hides, Tallow, Beef, Butter, &c. 
 to Holland, Flanders, Portugal, and Spain, which enables them 
 to make large Remittances to keep their Balance with us. For 
 the Trade between L tland and England, fee Trade in England. 
 
 What
 
 37? Trefent State of the Britifli Mes. Part II. 
 
 What makes Ireland fo profitable to England is, that it is thought, 
 near one Third Part of the> Rents of the Whole belong to Englijb 
 Noblemen and Gentlemen that live in England ; befides the very 
 large Sums that are fpent for the Education of their Youth, by 
 the great Number of Nobility and Gentry, that refort to the 
 Euglifo Court, and thofe who come to folicit for Places and Em- 
 ployments. There may be added to thefe, the Sums of Money 
 that are paid to Perfons that have Places and Pennons out of the 
 IHJIj Revenues, who refide here. 
 
 Forces.] The Strength of this Kingdom confifts partly in 
 the Situation of it, being furrounded with dangerous Seas ; and 
 partly in a Standing Army, amounting to about 10 or 12000 Men, 
 maintained upon the Irijh Eftablifhment. What Forces this Ifland 
 is able to raife, we may conjefture from the vaft Armies rais'd 
 in their frequent Attempts to throw oft their Subjection to the 
 Crown of England. 
 
 Character.] The Irijb are generally Men of a good Con- 
 ftitution ; and want neither Skill, nor Courage, to attempt the moft 
 difficult Enterprizes. The Gentlemen are generally well-bred, 
 and very civil to Strangers. And, of the Natives, it may be al- 
 low'd, that no better People are to be found upon the Face of the 
 Earth, than many of them are. Indeed, thofe that are bad, we 
 may affirm, that few Men exceed them in Wickednefs of any 
 Kind, which appears in every A&ion. As for thofe between thefe 
 Extremes, whofe Lives are chequer'd with Virtues and Vices, 
 among the latter is reckon'd (in common with the worll Claf ) 
 their being implacable in Enmity, and their unmanly Refentment 
 of fmall Injuries or Affronts. The Natives, according to the 
 general Account, are People of a haughty Spirit, greedy of Glory, 
 and patient in Cold and Hunger. The firft Inhabitants of this 
 Country were call'd Scots, or Seyths, from Scytbia in Europe, 
 who fettled in Ireland not long after the Flood. About the Year 
 of the World 3380. a Colony of Spaniards came with a Defign 
 to fettle in this Ifland. The Number of thefe Foreigners not 
 b ing very confiderable, the Seyths or Scots, far from being alarm'd, 
 willingly admitted them, and aflign'd them Lands to cultivate. 
 Buchanan fuppofes thefe Spaniards to be defcended from a Colony 
 of the Celtiberians, who were fettled in Spain. The good Re* 
 ception thefe met with in Ireland, drew others thither ; infomuch 
 that, in the End, the Ifland grew very populous, and the Spaniards 
 and Scytbs, mixing together, became one People, under the Name 
 of Scots. In Procefs of Time, the Land being overftock'd, 
 abundance of Families threw themfdves into the Ebudes, or 
 Hebrides, aa was faid before. 
 
 Religion.]
 
 Chap. XVIII. Prefent State of Turkey in Afia. 379 
 
 Religion] The Inhabitants of this Country are partly Pro- 
 teftants, partly Papiits. The beit civiliz'd Parts of the Kingdom 
 are of the reform \i Religion, according to the Church of Eng land. 
 But the greater Part of the old native lrijh itill adhere to Popifh 
 Super nitrons, and are as credulous of many ridiculous Legends, as 
 in former Times. They are faid to have receiv'd Chriftianity 
 very early. What Progrefs had been made in it before the Time 
 of St. Patrick Anno 435. we have no certain Account : Probably, 
 not very much. But that Saint carried the Work on with fo much 
 Succefs and Refolution, as to convert the greateft Part of the 
 Ifland ; which gain'd him the Character of the lrijh Apoftle, and 
 mighty Commendations from all the lrijh Writers. In the next 
 Age, their Reputation was fo much advanced upon account of 
 Religion, that it was term'd Santlorum Patria ; and feat out 
 great Numbers of pious and devout Men into all Parts of the 
 World. Nor was Religion their only Character ; their Learning 
 alfo is much celebrated by Authors both antient and modern, who 
 tell us the Saxons, particularly, very commonly fent over their 
 Children into Inland, for a liberal Education. 
 
 Curiosities.] Eight Miles North-eaft of Colrain, in the 
 County of Antrim, is a wonderful Caufway, fuppos'd the Work 
 of Nature, which runs from the Bottom of a high Hill into the 
 Sea, but, how far, none can tell. ' Its Length, at Low Water, is 
 about 200 Yards ; the Breadth, where broadeft, 80, and 40 iH 
 the narroweft , 'tis very unequal in Height, being in fome Places 
 1 2 Yards from the Level of the Strand, and in others only 5 . It 
 confilts of many Thoufands of Pillars, perpendicular to the Plain 
 of the Horizon, and all of different Shapes and Sizes ; but mod 
 of them Pentagonal, or Hexagonal, and all irregularly placed. 
 A Draught of this flrange Caufway may be feen in Philofopkical 
 Tranf ail ions, N Q 212 and 222. In feveral Parts of this Kingdom, 
 are dug up Horns of a prodigious Bignefs ; one Pair, dug up fome 
 time fince, being near 1 1 Feet from the Tip of the Right Horn 
 to the Tip of the Left. 
 
 CHAP. XVIII. 
 
 The Prefent State o/Turkey in Asia. 
 
 Boundaries.] tjVRKEY 'in Afia is bounded by the Black 
 Sea and Tartary towards the North, by 
 Perjia towards the Kail, by Arabia Dejerta towards the South, 
 and by the Archipelago and the Levant Sea towards the Weft. 
 
 Situation]
 
 3 8 Prefent State of Turkey in Alk." Part D 
 
 J I !' U i TI0N] u The l e r Domin ins extend from the 29th Degree of Northern Lat 
 
 bl. J 5 T ^ f S? thc 2 ? th De S ree of Longitude to the 46th. The Leng 
 
 being upwards of 1000 Miles, and the Breadth about 960. S 
 
 Divifion. 
 
 TURKETmASIA. 
 1. Natalia. 
 
 I Katolia proper. 
 
 2 Amajfa 
 
 3 Caramania 
 
 4 Aladulia 
 
 2. Tureomania, or ./fr 
 menia major 
 
 Square Miles, 
 antient Names, 
 
 195,000. 
 Length 676 
 Breadth 390 
 Containing for- 
 merly Pontus 
 and PaphlagO' 
 nia, Galatia, 
 Phrygia major, 
 Lydia or Mao- 
 nia, Doris, Ca- 
 ria, Ionia, jo- 
 lis, Myfia and 
 Pbrygia ; alfo 
 Bitbynia. 
 
 Containing for- 
 merly Pontus 
 Galaticus, Pon- 
 tus Polemonia- 
 cus, and Pontus 
 Cappadocicus. 
 Containing the 
 old Provinces 
 of Pampbylia, 
 Pi/zdia&ndPart 
 of Cilicia. 
 Containing the 
 reft of Armenia 
 minor, and Part 
 of Cilicia. 
 55,000. 
 Length 360 
 Breadth 268 
 Part of old Ar- 
 menia major, 
 with a little of 
 Media and A/fy- 
 
 Chief Towns. 
 
 Bur/a 
 
 This City was 
 the Capital of 
 the Turkijh Em- 
 pire before the 
 taking of Con- 
 stantinople. 
 Smyrna 
 The Port of 
 Smyrna is one of 
 the fined in the 
 Levant. 
 Amafia 
 
 This City was 
 antiently the 
 Seat of the 
 Kings of Cap- 
 padocia. 
 Cogni 
 
 This City is the 
 Place of Refi- 
 dence of the 
 Viceroy. 
 Marat 
 Malimaia 
 Suvas 
 
 Arzeron or } 
 Erzerum J 
 
 The Harveft 
 here feldom 
 happens till Sep' 
 t-ember. 
 
 Diftaiice and Bearing. 
 
 45 S of Conjiantinople 
 
 iSoSWof Bur fa 
 
 300 E of Bur/a 
 
 240 SW of Amafia 
 
 242 S of Amafia 
 30 N of Marat 
 HO NW of Malimaia 
 
 T 80 NE of Marat 
 
 Divifion.
 
 hap. XVIII. 
 
 Divifion. 
 
 . Syria 
 
 l Syria proper. 
 
 2 Paleftine, or Holy- 
 Land 
 
 . Diarbeck 
 
 ;. Eyraca Arabic 
 
 Curdijlan 
 
 In this Province flood 
 he famous City of Ni~ 
 'e-veb. 
 . Mingrelia 
 
 I. Arabia Petrea 
 
 ). Georgia 
 
 lo. Chufiftan 
 
 1 1 Adirbtitxan 
 
 Prefent State of Turkey in Afia. 1 
 
 38* 
 
 ISqaarc Miles, 
 antient Names, 
 
 29,000. 
 Length 290 
 Breadth 155 
 Part of the Ro- 
 man Diocefe of 
 the Orient. 
 7,600. 
 Length 150 
 Breadth 70 
 27,600. 
 Length 240 
 Breadth 210 
 Formerly Me- 
 fopotamia. 
 50,400. 
 Length 400 
 Breadth 240 
 Formerly Chal- 
 dea and Baby- 
 lonia. 
 
 23,900. 
 Length 210 
 Breadth 205 
 Olim AJfyria. 
 
 25,520. 
 The antient 
 Colchis. 
 
 23,500. 
 Length 210 
 Breadth 190 
 
 25,600. 
 Length 240. 
 Breadth 180. 
 Part of Colchis, 
 Iberia, Albania, 
 and Armenia. 
 8,400. 
 Length 165 
 Breadth 60 
 Antiently Sufi- 
 ana. 
 
 8,800. 
 Length 120 
 Breadth 90 
 
 Chief Towns. 
 
 Aleppo 
 
 Scanderoon 
 
 Antiocb 
 
 Tripoli 
 
 Sidon 
 
 Damafcus 
 
 Jerufalem 
 
 Nazareth 
 
 Diarbeck 
 
 Moufful 
 
 Mirdin 
 
 Nejbin 
 
 Or/a 
 
 Bagdat 
 
 Bajfora, 
 
 a confiderable 
 
 Place of Trade. 
 
 See Trade. 
 
 Scberazur or 7 
 Sherafoul y 
 Amadia 
 Betlis 
 Amarchia 
 
 Habara 
 
 Tefflis 
 Gori 
 Aly 
 Melikent 
 
 Hariuze or 
 
 AhiL-az 
 
 Schonjler 
 
 Tauris 
 
 Morund 
 
 Maraga 
 
 Diftance and Bearing* 
 
 100 SW of Marat 
 
 50 W 
 
 60 SW 
 
 120 S } of Aleppo 
 
 210S 
 
 210 S 
 
 300 S of Aleppo 
 
 50 N of Jerufalem 
 
 ! 
 
 135 E of Marat 
 95 SE of "> 
 60 S of / 
 
 80S of \ Diarbeck 
 100 W of I 
 
 235 SEofJ 
 
 270 SE of Bagdat 
 
 155 NE of Bagdat 
 
 ir^NWofJ c . 
 
 iSoNWofr^^ 
 270 NE of Erzerum 
 
 110 SW of Jerufatem 
 
 I90 E of Amarchia 
 35 N W of Teffiis ' 
 5 5 N of Gori 
 105 W QfTefflis 
 
 270 SE of Bagdat 
 
 245 NE of Diarbeck 
 " No /l Tauris 
 
 35 Ncf) 
 
 I so S of J 
 
 Divifion. 
 
 ,
 
 3&2 
 
 Diviflon. 
 
 Prefent State of Turkey in Aria. 
 
 12. Eri'van 
 
 I4. IJlands 
 
 I Cyprus 
 
 Alfo calTd by many 
 
 Names by the An- f 
 
 tients. J 
 
 2 Rhodes 
 
 3 Lango olim, ds 
 
 4 Santos 
 
 5 ^Wp, 0/r'z* C^/oi 
 
 6 Metelene, slim Lejbos. 
 The other Ifles 
 
 
 Square Miles, 
 antient Names, 
 
 Chief Towns. 
 
 25,500. Erivati 
 
 Length 225 Gangea 
 
 Breadth 160 Berda 
 
 Part of Armenia SeSerec 
 
 major. 
 
 6,300. 
 Length 143 
 Breadth jy 
 
 480 
 216 
 161 
 300 
 190 
 250 
 
 Nieojia- 
 
 Rhodes 
 
 Lango 
 
 Cora 
 
 Scio 
 
 Caftro 
 
 Part 
 
 Diftance and Bearing. 
 
 13$ E of Erzerum 
 85 NE of Erruan 
 83 SE of Gangea 
 45 S of Eri<van 
 
 160 SW of Jlepp, 
 
 no S of 
 90 S of 
 30 SW of 
 50 Wof 
 6oNof 
 
 . Smyrna 
 
 Climate.] The Air of Natalia is very different ; being in fome Provinces veri 
 v / r 6 r ? o " VtT l Srofs and Peftiientious. It has been eitcemed a pleafan 
 hatoha. fruitful County, when it was well cultivated, and had feveral conffderabl. 
 A m C . ,tie n S '? * ' but gr 1 at Part of the P^vince lies unmanured at prefent, ar 
 the Towns mi Rums, as m other Parts of turkey. The Produce of Natalia chiefljj 
 confifts m Silks Goats Harr, Tw,fted Cotton, Cordovans of feveral Colours, CaK 
 cuts ; White ^and Blue, Wool for Matrefles, Tapeftries, Quilted Coverlets, Soap, Rha 
 barb, Galls, Valleneed Scammony, Opium, tfr. The Soil is fertile, aboundin, 
 _ with Oil and Wine, and moft Sorts of Grain and Fruits, furconumL 
 Turcoman*, is much encumber'd with Mountains, efpecially near the Frontiers 
 j 1 t- ^ Ut in the Mld - land Valleys the Soil is fertile and delightfuJ, pro 
 ducrng Wine, Corn, and Pailure in abundance. The Air of Syria proper is health- 
 ful and very temperate, and the Soil deep, level, and fruitful, pro 
 Syria proper, ducmg Corn, Grapes, Figs, Oranges, Lemons, Dates, Medicinal, 
 r n , ^. ' ' and other vaIuabIe Commodities. The Soil and Climat< 
 
 of Palejtinewere incomparably fruitful and pleafant, as we are informed in Holy- 
 Writ; but at prefent it is fo ill cultivated, that, except a few Figs 
 Pomegranates, Palm-trees, Oranges, and fome Vines, which grow ii 
 the Valleys, there remains none of that antient Plenty. Diarbeck in ge 
 neral enjoys a good Temperature of Air, and the Soil alfo is very rid 
 and fruitful, capable of producing the Neceffaries of Life in abundance 
 if properly cultivated The Soil of Eyraca, or Chaldea, or Babylonia, was antientli 
 5, j Ie * at ' accordin g W Herodotus, it yield 200 fold and uowards. Th< 
 Blades of Wheat and Barley were four Fingers broad, as the fame Autho, 
 affirms : And by Pliny it is faid of the Babylonians, that they mowed thei 
 Corn twice, and feeded it a third time, or it would be nothing but Blades 
 But tho 1 in general the Country was extremely fruitful, delightful, at 
 
 healthfu 
 
 Paleftine. 
 Diarbeck. 
 
 Eyraca, 
 erChal' 
 dca.
 
 Chap. XVIII. Prefent Stan of Turkey in Afia." 383 
 
 healthful, yet, in fome Places, it was cover'd with a flimy Matter, 
 which the Overflowing of the Waters, and the Nature of the 
 Soil together, produced in abundance : This flimy Matter, it 
 feems, they ufed inftead of Morter, than which nothing could be 
 more durable and binding. The Nature of this once generally 
 happy Soil is ftill fuch, that, if the like Care and Diligence were 
 ufed, it would produce the Neceflaries of Life in furpriimg Abun- 
 dance. There are numerous Herds of Cattle ftill fed in the Pa- 
 stures, and thence great Plenty of Milk and Butter. The Fruit- 
 fulnefs and Delights of this once famous Country were fuch, that 
 herein Divines have placed the Garden of Eden, or the Habita- 
 tion of the Firft Man, Adam, at his Creation. However, there 
 is no Part of the World where the Fruits of the Earth are more 
 fubjeft to be deftroyed by Locufts, than in the Territories of Baf- 
 fora, or the Southern Part of this fruitful Country. Mr. Taver- 
 ner relates, that, when he was at that City, there flew by twice 
 fuch a prodigious Number of Locufts, that they appeared at a 
 Diftance like a Cloud, and darkened the Air. They pafs over 
 Bajfora generally four or five times in a Yea*, being driven into 
 the Defert by the Wind ; they die thre, or they would deflroy all 
 the Corn and Herbage in Chaldea. Add to this, that towards 
 Bajfora the hot Winds have terrible Effe&s upon the Inhabitants : 
 For the Eaft Wind, blowing over a large Tracl of parched Earth, 
 occafions the Air to be intolerably hot, and thereupon brings fatal 
 Diftempers on the Natives. Curdijlan or AJfyria is a very pleafanC 
 and fruitful Country, diverflfied with Hills and Val- 
 leys : The Hills are adorn'd with the fineil Oaks, Curdiftan, 
 and great Variety of other Timber and Fruit-trees, or Affyria. 
 The Valleys are well water'd, and bear excellent 
 1 Grain where they are cultivated ; but, being under the Dominion 
 of the flothful Turk, or, which is the fame thing, being a fron- 
 tier Country between Turkey and Perjia, there is very little of it 
 manur'd. However there are vaft Flocks and Herds fed in this 
 Country, the Owners living in Tents like the Arabs, Galls and 
 Tobacco are the principal Produce of the Soil at prefent ; but, it 
 feems, it is lit for any thing, it being very deep: There are 
 abundance of Vineyards; however they make no Wine, but dry 
 their Grapes. 
 
 The Soil of Mingrelia is divcrfified with Hills, Mountains, 
 Valleys, and Plains, but over run with Woods, and 
 but here-and-there cultivated. The natural Produce Mingrelia. 
 is but fmall for want of Tillage ; and tho' there are 
 all kinds of Fruits that are found in England, yet, growing wild, 
 they have little Taltc, and breed Difeafes. The Vine alone yields 
 its Fruit to Perfection, tho' it be left to rear itfelf round the 
 Bodies of Trees ; and, did the People understand the true Art of 
 
 making
 
 384 Pre/em State of Turkey in Afia. Part If. 
 
 making Wine, that of this Country would be the bell in the 
 World ; for as it is, with their ordering, 'tis pleafant to the Tafte, 
 good in the Stomach, and of a ftrong Body. This Country 
 abounds with Water: Many Rivers fall down from Mount Cauca- 
 fus, which render the Ground very damp. Wheat and Barley, 
 and fome Rice, grow here, but in fmall Quantities, and is only 
 ufed by the better Sort. They have Beeves and Hogs in Plenty, 
 Wild Boars, Stags, and other Venifon, excellently good j as alfo 
 Partridges, Quails, Pheafants, and other Wild Fowl in Plenty : 
 They have alfo Falcons, and even Eagles and Pelicans come hither 
 from Mount Caucafus ; whence alfo they are fometimcs vifited by 
 Lions, Leopards, Tygers, Wolves, and Jaccalls. The Soil of 
 Arabia Petrea, too much like that of many 
 Arabia Petrea. other Parts of Arabia, chiefly confifts of fandy 
 Deferts, craggy Mountains, and rolling Sands : 
 But this Country is in fome meafure better cultivated in the in- 
 land Parts, and more travelled thro' on account of Trade. The 
 Sea-coalb and Banks of Rivers indeed afford a rich Soil, pro- 
 ducing aromatic Plants, and delicibus Fruits, as Aloe.-, Caffia, 
 Spikenard, Cardamum, Cinnamon, Pepper, Dates. Oranges, Le- 
 mon?, ic. Frankincenfe, Myrrh, and other valuable Gums : 
 They have great Plenty of Honey and Wax. The Air of this 
 Country in the Summer is exceeding hot, especially in the inland 
 Parts, r,nd towards the Eafl; the Heavens being felJom or never 
 overcaft with Clouds. 
 
 Georgia is a mountainous woody Country, which has protected 
 
 it from abfolute Conqueit. The Soil is vzry fertile 
 Georgia. in Grain ; the Fruits are excellent, and of divers Sorts ; 
 
 no Place in Europe produces better Pears and Apples ; 
 nor are finer Pomegranates feen in any Pur of Afia. There are 
 alfo abundance of Cattle, Venifon, and wild Fowl of all Sort* ; 
 alfo great Plenty of Fiih. The Wine is fo rich, that the King of 
 P'erfut has always of it for his own Drinking. Sil!v is alfo pro- 
 duced, but not in that Plenty Travellers talk of. The Air oi 
 Country is generally very pleafant, healthful, and temperate 
 Cbxjijlatt, or Sufiar.a, enjoys fo pure an Air, that, towards the 
 
 Eaftern Parts, the Stars fnine with fucfa Luitre, that 
 Chufiitart, one Man may know another very well by their Light 
 orSufiana. There are very feldom any Hurricanes or Tempefts, 
 
 and very little Thunder and Lightning ; nor is it lub- 
 jett to Earthquakes. The Air, in the moll Faitern Parts, is fo 
 extremely dry in the fair Seafon, that the leaft Dew or Moifture 
 is not found' on any Thing that is Lid abroad all Night, or even 
 on the Grafs ; and it very feldom rains in the Winter, except to- 
 wards the Southern Parts of this Province. The Province of 
 sldirbeitzan, or Media major, enjoyc a pure healthful Air, a 
 
 temj
 
 Chap. XVIII. Prefent Stale of Turkey in Afia. 3 85 
 
 temperate Climate, and a mod prolific Soil. Adirbeitzan, or 
 The Soil of Eri-van is much encumbered with Media Major. 
 Mountains; however the Valleys are fertile and 
 delightful, producing Fruits, Wine, and Corn in abun- Erivan. 
 dance ; alfo very good Pafturage. The Ifland of Cyprus 
 was formerly a rich and flouriihing Country, producing Cyprus. 
 Wine, Oil, Corn, Sugar, Cotton, Honey, Wool, Me- 
 tals, fome Silk; great Plenty of Flefh, Fiih, and Fowl: They 
 have feveral Kinds of Earth here fit for the Painters Ufe, particu- 
 larly Red, Yellow, and Black, and many other ufeful Commo- 
 dities: The Air of this Country is, for the moil; part, hot and dry, 
 and not very healthful : But the greateft Inconvenience which 
 Cyprus is fubjett to, is thofe Swarms of Loculls which vifit them 
 in the hot Seafon, appearing like Clouds at a little Dillance ; and 
 were they not driven into the Sea, by a North Wind, which hap- 
 pens about that Time, would devour all the Fruits of the Earth. 
 The Air of the Ifland of Rhodes is very healthful, and the Country- 
 exceeding pleafant, adorn 'd with Trees and Herbage al- 
 ways green ; and a Day fcarce ever happens, it is faid, Rhodes, 
 wherein the Sun does not fhine upon them. Their 
 Wines are much admir'd ; and the Country affords fuch Plenty of 
 all Things befides, which can render Life agreeable, that it gave 
 Occalion to the Fiftion of Golden Showers. Indeed they do not 
 abound in Corn, but then they are well fupplied with it from the 
 neighbouring Continent of Natalia. The Ifland of Lango affords 
 a pleafant Profpect as we approach it, being, for the 
 mod part, a fine level Country, but rifing gradually Lango. 
 into Hills towards the Eaft ; from whence there fall fe- 
 yeral little Rivulets into the Plain, which make the Soil extremely 
 fruitful. The Wines of this Ifland are much admir'd at Rome. 
 Here are alfo great Plenty of Cyprefs and Turpentine-trees, and 
 many other beautiful and medicinal Plants. The Ifland of Samas 
 in general enjoys a healthful Air, except in fome few 
 Places ; and it is obferved here, as in molt other Iflar.ds Samos. 
 of the Levant, that they feldom have any Rain, Thunder, 
 or tempefluous Weather, but in Winter ; whereas, in our Climate, 
 we have moft Thunder in Summer, and the heaviell Showers. 
 This Ifland is encumbered with Mountains, Rocks, and Precipices; 
 but the Plains are fruitful and pleafant. The Mountains are co- 
 vered with Pine-trees; and they have a fufiicient Quantity of 
 Wines, Olives, Pomegranates, Mulberry - trees, Figs, Corn, 
 Honey, Wax, Scammony, &c. Their Mufcadine Wine is much 
 admir'd by Travellers, and their Silk is fine. They have con- 
 fiderable Herds of Cattle, Oxen, Sheep, Gouts, Deer, Wild 
 Hogs, Hares, Partridges, and other Game in great Plenty. The 
 Ifland of Scio is a rocky mountainous Country, without any 
 
 C c Rivers
 
 386 Prefent State of Turkey hi Aria. Part II. 
 
 Rivers or Springs but what are dried up in a hot Summer ; 
 Scio. when lurks, Jews, and Chriftians, frequently go in Pro- 
 ceffion, to obtain Rain from Heaven ; alfo this Ifland is 
 lubjeft to Earthquakes. This -Country does not produce Corn 
 enough for the Ufe of the Inhabitants, but they have plenty of it 
 from Natolia. Scio has great plenty of Wine : VirplzxA Horact 
 mention it as the bell Wine in Greece ; and Cajar regal'd his 
 Friends with it in his Triumphs, and Sacrifices to Jupiter and the 
 other Gods. They have Olives in Scio ; and, notwithstanding 
 great Part of the Ifland is a barren Rock, yet, in fome Places, 
 there are abundance of Orange, Citron, Mulberry, Pomegranate, 
 and Turpentine-trees ; and here is the bell Maftich in the World. 
 Among their Fruits we muft not forget their Figs, of which they 
 -make Brandy, and export great Quantities to their Neighbours. 
 The Partridges of this Ifland are much taken notice of by Travel- 
 lers ; every Village has a Servant who leads a great many hundred 
 Brace of them into the Fields in a Morning; and, upon his Call, 
 they come together again in the Evening, and return to their re- 
 fpe&ive Mailers. The Ifland of Meteline not only produces good 
 Corn, but is Hill remarkable for its excellent Wine ; 
 Meteline. the Soil alfo produces very good Oil, and Figs, and 
 Pine-trees which produce black Pitch. 
 
 Government.] As Afia has been the Seat of the greateft Mo- 
 narchies that ever appear'd in the World, a brief Hiftory of them, 
 and of the Affairs of Afia fince thofe Times, will not, I prefume, 
 be unacceptable to the Reader. 
 
 The firft Monarchy of the World was that of AJfyria, which 
 had been known by various Names ; having been 
 The Aflyrian fometimes call'd the Monarchy of the Babylonians, 
 Monarchy. and of the Chaldeans. Nimrod, who was a Per- 
 
 fon of an extraordinary Stature, ambitious and 
 valiant, brought the greateft Part of his Neighbours in Subjection, 
 and then made ufe of them to futxk'e the reft. The Succeflion 
 of this Monarchy, from henceforward, is very obfcure ; but, if 
 we follow the common Account, Nuius, Grandfon to Nimrod, 
 united Chaldea and AJfyria into one Empire, and pitched upon 
 Nineveh for the Place of his Royal Refidence. This Prince, if 
 we give Credit to Diodorus Siculus, had a prodigious Army, con- 
 fifting of 1700000 Foot, 200000 Horfe, and icooo Chariots. 
 They tell us, that after he had march'd with his Army as far as 
 libya in Africa, and conquer'd all the Southern Nations, he re- 
 turn'd to make War on SabatiusSagcc, or on Barfanes, his Son, 
 and on Zoroafter, King of the Baclrians ; and was attended in his 
 Enrerprizes with fo much Succefs, that he made himfelf Mafter of 
 Afia in the Space of Seven Years. Queen S emir amis fucceeded 
 Ninus about the Year of the World 2789. Archbifhop VJber 
 5 - partes
 
 Chap. XVIII. Prefent State of Turkey in Afia. 387 
 
 paffes to the Year 3237. when, in his Opinion, Sardanapalus be- 
 gan to reign ; making no mention of the AJjfyrian Monarchs that 
 were between thefe Dates. Indeed the antient Writers who have 
 mention'd them give us but a very flight Account of them. Ar- 
 baces, General of the Troops which the Medes lent yearly to the 
 King of AJfyria, had a great Define to fee Sardanapalus, who led 
 a very fcandalous Life : To obtain a Sight of the AJfyrian Mo- 
 narch, Arbaces was fhav'd, put on a Woman's Apparel, and, by 
 Prefents, having corrupted the Officers to introduce him, he found 
 Sardanapalus in the midft of his Miftrefles. Belefus or Belejts f 
 General of the Babylonians, and the mofl famous Aftrologer of 
 the Chaldeans, being privy to Arbaces\ Admiffion, folicited 
 Arbaces to free the Medes from their Servitude ; either out of 
 Kindnefs to him, or Hopes to find his own Advantage in fuch a 
 Revolt. Belefus told him, that the Stars deftin'd him for Em- 
 pire ; and at laft perfuaded him to aflift him with all his Forces. 
 Having concerted this great Defign together, Arbaces communi- 
 cated the Affair to the Medes, and animated them to an Infur- 
 reclion, and cngag'd the Perjians on his fide ; while Belejis, on 
 his Part, brought in a Friend of his that was very powerful in 
 Arabia, and at that time Governor there. But it was too great 
 a Confpiracy to keep fecret ; and therefore Sardanapalus, having 
 Information of it, drew an Army together to oppofe that of the 
 Rebels, which confided of 40000 Men. Sardanapalus had the 
 Advantage over his Enemies in the firft Battle, and put them to 
 Flight ; and, when he faw they rallied again, he caufed a Procla- 
 mation to be made, that he would give a Reward of Two hun- 
 dred Tafents of Gold to any one that Ihould kill Arbaces or Belejis ; 
 and even double the Sum to him that fhould bring either of them 
 alive to him. The Rebels, being only exafperated with the Pro- 
 mife of this Reward, fought, and loll two Battles more ; and then 
 referring their Deftiny to Belejis, he affur'd them all, as much as 
 he could judge by the Stars, that frefh Succours fhould come to 
 them, which would decide their Fortunes : And indeed as they 
 were fome time after marching to meet the BaQrians, who were 
 coming to the Affiftance of Sardanapalus, they perfuaded them to 
 join their Army, and unanimoufly to fight for their Liberty. On 
 the other hand, the King, being elated with his three Victories, 
 knew nothing that parted, nor minded any thing now but to divert 
 himfelf with his Army. Arbaces, being inform 'd of the State of 
 Sardanapalus'* Camp, enter'd with his Forces by Night, and 
 made a horrible Slaughter among the Officers and Soldiers, who 
 were either afleep or drunk ; but the King made his Efcape. 
 Arbaces, purfuing his Viftory, laid Siege to Nineveh. Sardana- 
 palus was confident he had no Reafon to fear the ill IfTue of the 
 Siege, upon an old Prediction, that Niuevch could not be taken, 
 
 C c 2 until
 
 388 Prefent State of Turkey in Alia. Part II. 
 
 until the River Tigris became its Enemy ; but when he faw, in 
 the third Year of the Siege, that Part of the Wall was broken 
 down, by the overflowing of the River by the continual Rains, 
 he prefently concluded there were no Hopes of Safety left for him ; 
 but, that he might not fall into the Hands of his Enemies, he, 'tis 
 faid, caus'd himfelf, Miftrefles, and an immenfe Treafure, to be 
 fhut up in his Palace, and all confum'd to Afhes. Arbaces, having 
 enter'd Nineveh thro' the Breach made by the River, was at the 
 fame time proclaim'd King : And having, in Acknowledgment of 
 the Obligations he had to Belefis, made him Governor of Babylon, 
 and, according to foxne Authors, King of the AJfyrians, he re- 
 ferved for himfelf the Empire of the Medes, and that of the 
 Per/tans ; and he may be faid to be the firft Founder of the Me- 
 dia//, or Second Monarchy of the World ; of which in its proper 
 Place : But, to return a little to'that of the AJfyrians, whofe Dura- 
 tion is as uncertain as the Succeflion of its Kings. Homer having 
 brought Warriors from all Parts to Troy, and not mentioning the 
 AJfyrians and Medes ; and the Ifraelites, in the time of the Judges, 
 being reduced to the laft Extremity by the King of Mefopotamia, 
 by the Moabites, Midianites, Ammonites, Phoenicians, and Phili- 
 Jlines ; and Saul, David, and Solomon, making Wars on the 
 Kings of Zoba and Damafcus, and extending their Conquefts as 
 far as the Euphrates ; and hearing nothing in all this time of the 
 Babylonians or AJfyrians ; induces us to think, that the Foundation 
 of the AJfyrian Monarchy was laid, upon the Declenfion of the 
 Jevuijb State, by Phul AJfur. For we find, that 
 
 Phul AJfur, or Tiglath Pelefer, made War on Retzaim, King 
 of Syria, and on Peka, King of Jerufalem ; who, having prefled 
 the City of Jerufalem with clofe Siege, and being not able to take 
 it, they put 1 20000 Men to the Sword in Judea ; at which time, 
 Acbaz applied himfelf to Phul AJfur, King of Babylon, to deliver 
 him from their Cruelty. Hereupon Tiglath Pelefer, to whom 
 Achaz, had made great Prefents, march'd from Nineveh into Syria, 
 befiegcd Damafcus, Hew Retzin, tranfplanted the Inhabitants of 
 Damafcus to Cyrene, march'd again!! Peka, and, when he had 
 made himfelf Mafter of Galilee, the Countries of the Tribes of 
 Gilead and Naphtali, he carried the greateft Part of the Ifraelites 
 Captives to Nineveh. Salmanazar fucceeded tiglath Phul AJfur, 
 and in his firft War he made Hofea, King of Ifrael, tributary, 
 then imprifon'd him, and after a Siege of three Years took Sama- 
 ria, and commanded the Ten Tribes to be carried Slaves into 
 AJfyria, from whence they never return'd. The next we find, 
 that fucceeded to the Throne of the AJfyrian Monarchy, was 
 Senacherib or Sargon, who was engag'd in War with the Kings of 
 Egypt and Ethiopia ; and, tho' he had received an immenfe Sum of 
 King Hezekiab, not to march his Army againft Jerufalem, yet 
 a he
 
 Chap. XVIII. Prefent State of Turkey in Afia. 389 
 
 he bafely falsified his Word, and was preparing to invert that City, 
 when the deflroying Angel cut off Fourfcore thoufand of his Men, 
 which oblig'd him to draw off his Forces, Ajar Haddon fuc- 
 ceeded Senacberib his Father ; and was alfo fucceeded by Merodach, 
 who chofe Babylon for the Place of his Refidence ; and from that 
 time his Succeffors made this mighty City the Seat of their Em- 
 pire ; and hence it is, that we find no more mention in Scripture 
 afterwards of the Kings of Babylon. Ben Merodacb, or the Son of 
 Merodach, broke the League which his Father had made with the 
 Jenvs, and caus'd Manajfes to be put in Chains. The next Prince that 
 fill'd the Throne was Nebucbadnezar, who carried on a War with 
 the King of Media, whom he flew, and defeated his Army ; alfo 
 another War with Neco King of Egypt ; but this latter War con- 
 cerns his Son, who manag'd it, whom fome however will have to 
 be one and the fame Perfon. Nebucbadnezar was fucceeded by 
 Nebucbadonozor, furnam'd the Great. This Prince engaged him- 
 felf in feveral Wars ; he defeated the Army of Pharaoh Neco, who 
 had conquered the Country of the Pbilijlines, kiH 1 d Jofiah King 
 of Judab, carried captive into Egypt his Son laachas, Jobannan, 
 or Shallum, and eftablifh'd Eliakim on the Throne, who, purfuant 
 to his Command, took the Name of Jehoiahvn, and became tri- 
 butary to him. Joakim, King of Judab, having revolted, in 
 hopes the King of Egypt would be ftrong enough to fupport him, 
 Nebucbadnezar marched againft Jerufalem with a prodigious 
 Army, enter'd the City, feized the King's Perfon, and fubftituted 
 his Uncle in his room, who is call'd his Son in the firft Book of 
 Chronicles. This Prince, who had taken an Oath of Fidelity to 
 Nebucbadnezar, was for making an Alliance with Pfamnus, King 
 of Egypt ; of which the Babylonian had no fooner notice, but he 
 forthwith dire&ed his March to Jerufalem, tho' he was forced to 
 raife the Siege to march againft Hophrah, the Succeflbr of Pfamnus, 
 who was advancing with a great Army to the Relief of Jeru- 
 falem ; they engag'd, and the King of Babylon defeated Pfamnus, 
 and drove him into Syria ; then, returning to Jerufalem, he took 
 the City, facked and burnt it, order'd all Zedeiiah's Children and 
 Friends to be put to Death in his Sight, and then that Prince's 
 Eyes to be put out, as a Punifhment for his Revolt ; and in his 
 Perfon ended the Kingdom of Judab. Nebucbadnezar alfo fub- 
 dued Egypt, conquer'd the Ammonites and Moabites ; but at laft, 
 to divert himfelf after fo long and many Fatigues of War, he re- 
 folv'd to make Babylon the moll magnificent City in the World. 
 The Scripture makes mention of the miferable Condition he was 
 reduced to, and his Recovery from it : He died in the Year of the 
 World 3390, and was fucceeded by Evit-Merodach, his Son, who 
 was affafiinated by Regajfar, or Regliffor, his Sifter's Hufband, 
 who was alfo fucceeded by Labofardacb, according to Jofephus. 
 
 Cc 3 The
 
 390 Prefent State of Turkey in Afia. Part II. 
 
 The next Prince was Bel/hazzar or Baltafar, which is the fame as 
 Js'abonid of Jofephus, and the Labynit of Herodotus : He divorced 
 his Queen Vajhti, and married Hadaja, who was afterwards 
 caird Efiher. 
 
 Cyrus, King of Perjia, made Preparations of War againft 
 BelJba'Z'zar ; to reduce Babylon was the Height of Cyrus's Defigns ; 
 but it was not to be done almoft without a Miracle ; for Baby/on 
 was treble-wall'd, of a vaft Height, furrounded with Waters un- 
 fordable, and victualled for Twenty Years, and the Wall in Cir- 
 cumference was above Fourfcore Miles. The chief Defign of 
 Cyrus was to divert the Courfe of the Euphrates ; and therefore, 
 having caus'd feveral large and deep Trenches to be cut, he pre r 
 tended afterwards to quit the Siege ; and, as the Babylonians, 
 who thought themfelves abandon'd by the Enemy, gave thcmfelves 
 no further Trouble about Cyrus, turn'd the Courfe of the Euphrates 
 into the Chanels he had orderM to be made, and then enter'd 
 Babylon with his Army the fame Night. According to Xenophon, 
 Beljkazzar was kill'd by two Princes of Chaldea, who had gone 
 over to the Army of Cyrus, and who firft enter'd Babylon when 
 the Perjian Monarch took it. Thus fell the mighty Babylon, after 
 fhe had triumphM over many powerful Nations ; and this Con- 
 quer!: of Cyrus put an End to the AJJyrian Monarchy. 
 
 Having gone through, as well as the Obfcurity of thofe antient 
 Times would allow, with the Affairs of the AJfy- 
 7he Empire of rian or Babylonian Empire, till the final Deter- 
 the Medes. mination of them, we come now to that of the Em- 
 
 pire of the Medes. We have already given an 
 Account of Arbaces taking Nine<veh, thereby putting an End to 
 the Empire of Sardanapalus ; and, after having here added in 
 general, that this Prince and his Succeffors made great Progrefs 
 with their Arms, in conquering Chaldea, Mefopotamia, AJfyria, 
 Armenia, and Perjia, we can fay but very little particularly of 
 any of them. Among the Succeffors of Arbaces, we find more 
 a faid of Dejoces than of any of his Predeceffors ; who, tho' he was 
 no more than a private Man, according to forne Authors, was 
 elected King for having extinguifhed the Factions which were 
 form'd under the laft Reigns, and by admirable Conduct and Pru- 
 dence put an End to all the Wars that were kindled amongft his 
 Neighbours. It was not by Terror, nor by Arms, but by the 
 Obfervance of Juftice, that he made himfelf to be rever'd among 
 all his Subjects ; and, even before he afcended the Throne, he re- 
 quir'd them to build him a Palace fuitable to the Dignity they 
 defign'd for him, and to grant him a certain Number of Guards, 
 to be chofen by himfelf from amongft the Medes. He was the 
 firft that would not allow fuch a free and unawful Accefs to his 
 Perfon; cammandi-g that what Bufmeis foever any might have 
 
 with
 
 Chap. XVIII. Prefent State of Turkey in Alia. 391 
 
 with hira, it fhould for the future be difpatched by Deputies, and 
 none allow'd the Liberty of feeing him. And, as for thefe who 
 attended his Perfon, they were not to fpit, or fo much as to fmile, 
 in his Prefence ; which was afterwards religioufly obferv'd in the 
 Court of the Kings of Perjia. 
 
 He was fucceeded in the Median Throne by Pbraortes, which C< 
 Prince, as he paflionately delighted in War, invaded and fubdued 
 the Perjians ; and having done that, turn'd his Army againft the 
 AJfyrians, and was kill'd by Nebucbadnezar, who deftroyed his 
 whole Army. Cyaxeres was the next SuccefTor ; he made War (C 
 upon Halyartes, King of Lydia, which lafted five Years, and to 
 which a ilrange Occafion gave Beginning : The King had certain 
 Scytbians in his Court, who taught fome Children of Quality their 
 Language, whom Cyaxeres committed to their Care. The Scy- 
 tbians, who were great Huntfmen, ufually brought him Venifon 
 or Wild Fowl ; and, when they miffed of their Game, this Prince, 
 who was naturally choleric, rejected them with Curfes and Re- 
 proaches ; and they, being no longer able to difpenfe with this ill 
 Ufage, refolved, by common Confent, to kill one of the Children 
 under their Care, and to ferve him up to the King's Table, after 
 they had feafon'd and dreiVd him after the fame Manner they were 
 ufed to do the Wild Beafis they had kill'd. Having executed this 
 cruel Defign, they made their Efcape to Halyartes, who, refufing 
 to fend back thefe Murderers, drew upon him the whole Force 
 and Power of the Medes. Cyaxeres, who had obtain'd fome Ad- 
 vantages in this War, was jail ready to have given Battle, which 
 in all Probability would have decided the Fortune of the two 
 Kings, but he was ftrangely frighted by an Eclipfe, and refolved 
 on a Ceflation of Arms. The War continuing between the Medes 
 and Scytbians, and Cyaxeres having laid Seige to Hine-veb, the 
 Scytbians forced him to raife it. Cyaxeres, from whom thefe 
 Scytbiatu h?d taken mod of his Provinces, invited the molt con- 
 fiderable Perfons amongft them to a magnificent Feaft, and then 
 caufed them to be maflacred, purfued the reft of their Army, 
 defeated and drove them out of dfia ; after which he attacked the 
 JJyrians, befieged Nineveh, took it, deftroyed and made a Wild- 
 ernefs of it. AJiyages, or Apaneas, fucceeding his Father Cya-y 
 xeres in his Dominions, after he had dreamt, that his Daughter 
 Mandane had made fo great a Quantity of Water, that fhe fill'd 
 tne City, and cover'd all Afia with it, he would by all means 
 have this Dream interpreted to him ; and all the Magicians, 
 whom he confultei, having made Anfwer fhe fhould bear a Son, 
 who fhould difpoffefs him of his Dominions, to prevent this fatal 
 Blow, he married his Daughter to a Perfian, and had another 
 Dre^n at the very time that News was brought him of his 
 Daughter's being with Child, that a Vine fprung out of her 
 
 Cc 4 Womb,
 
 392 Prefent State of Turkey in Arm. Part II. 
 
 Womb, which overfhadow'd all AJia. This laft Dream, which 
 reviv'd and eftablifh'd the Impreffions he had before upon his 
 Spirits, made him refolve to fend for her back ; and, when his 
 Daughter was brought to Bed, he gave the Child to one of his 
 Counfellors, named Harpagus, with Orders to murder him. Har- 
 pagus committed the Execution to one Mitridates, the King's 
 chief Shepherd, whofe Wife Spaco, being at the fame time deliver'd 
 of a dead Child, having Compaffion on the poor innocent Child, 
 which her Hufband had Orders to deftroy, receiv'd him, and, 
 j) with the Confent of her Hufband, nurfed him. Cyrus, for this 
 was the Name he had given him, continued ten Years with them ; 
 and as he was one Day chofen King, at a certain Play, by his 
 young Companions, he handled a Nobleman's Son very roughly ; 
 whofe Father fpeaking of it to the King, AJlyages fent for Cyrus, 
 and, afking the Reafon of it, he anfwer'd with a wonderful Pre- 
 fence of Mind, that, as a King, he had treated him as he ought, 
 becaufe the other had refufed to obey him : AJlyages, furpris'd 
 with this Anfwer, and the Readinefs of the Lad's Wit, admir'd 
 him, examin'd all his Features, inquir'd into the time of his Birth, 
 fpoke with Mitridates ; and, making no queftion but his Dream 
 was now accomplifh'd, becaufe he had been King among the 
 Children, he own'd him frankly for his Grandfon, and fent him 
 back to his Father in Perjia. But at the fame time AJlyages, 
 highly refenting jhe Infidelity of Harpagus, order'd his Son, that 
 was thirteen Years old, to be kill'd, and barbaroufly commanded 
 him to be ferv'd up to his Table: After Dinner ztking^Harpagus, 
 whether he had not magnificently treated him? and the other 
 anfwering with a great deal of refpeft, the King then fhew'd the 
 Head and Legs of his Son all bloody ; and afking him, whether he 
 difliked what he had done ? he replied with the fame refpedt, that 
 he would make the King's Pleafure his own. But, notwithftand- 
 ing this covert Anfwer of Harpagus, he conceiv'd fuch a Horror 
 at the dreadful Spectacle, that he refolv'd to revenge it ; and that 
 which he contriv'd, tho* deferred for a time, was thus : He ac- 
 quainted Cyrus, now grown up to Man's Eftate, with the Order 
 which AJlyages had given him, what Means he ufed to fave his 
 Life, and with what barbarous Cruelty AJlyages had punifhed his 
 Compaffion ; and gave him Affurance, if he would raife an Army, 
 he would foon make him Mailer of the whole Kingdom. Cyrus 
 read his letter, and prepared for the Expedition ; of which AJly- 
 ages had Notice ; who, fatally forgetting the ill Treatment he had 
 formerly given Harpagus, made himGeneral of his Army. But he, 
 who had only fought for an Opportunity all this time to be reveng'd, 
 without any more ado went over with the Army to Cyrus ; which 
 pjt the Mede under a Neceffity of raifing new Forces, and to 
 march himfelf in Perfon againft Cyrus and his Perjians, who ob- 
 
 tain'd
 
 Chap. XVIII. Trefent State of Turkey in Afia. 393 
 
 tain'd a fignal Vittory, and took Ajlyages Prifoner. Cyrus ufed 
 him very generoufly, and gave him the Government of Hyrcania. 
 Thus Fortune tranflated the Empire from the Medcs to the Per- 
 fians, having continued with the former, according to Jufiin, 350 V 
 Y"ears. 
 
 I fhall not trouble the Reader with the different Opinions of 
 Authors, concerning the Times of the Reigns of the 
 antient Kings of Perjia, but obferve that Cyrus The Perfian 
 was the firft that laid the Foundation of the Perfian Empire. 
 Empire. This Monarch, having difpoffeffed his 
 Grandfather Ajlyages of his Kingdom, enter'd upon a War 
 with Creefus, King of Lydia, who began to be apprehenfive of 
 his growing Greatnefs, and was alfo defirous to revenge the 
 Quarrel of his Brother - in - law Ajlyages, and, according to 
 Herodotus, to reftore him to his Kingdom ; unlefs we had rather 
 believe Xenopbon, that he went to aflift the Affyrians, with whom 
 he was in League. Creefus was certainly a very potent Prince, 
 and had fo inlarg'd his Dominions, that he was inferior to no 
 King in his time, fince he commanded Pbrygia, Bithynia, Carta, 
 Myfia, and Paphlagonia. Crafus, advancing with his Army, laid 
 Seige to Pterium, a ftrong City of Cafpadocia ; which giving 
 Cyrus an Opportunity to come up with him, a Battle enfued; 
 wherein the Perfians had fomething the better of it ; and Crafus, 
 making all the Hafte he could to Sardis, his capital City, by rea- 
 fon of the Approach of Winter, fent home his^Fofces, not dream- 
 ing of any Purfuit ; but Cyrus came unexpectedly before Sardis, 
 and, after* a Seige of Fourteen Days, became Matter of it, in the 
 Year of the World 3425, the Fourteenth of his Reign, and 
 546 before the Birth of Chriji. Cyrus ufed Creefus afterwards as 
 a King and his Companion, and, according to Xenopbon, put fo 
 much Confidence in him, that, in his Expedition to Seytbia, he 
 entrufted him as a Counfellor to his Son Cambyfes in his Abfence. 
 Cyrus, after the Conqueft of lydia, carried on a War with the 
 Scythians, took King Amorges Prifoner, whofe Queen, Sarepta, 
 yet renewing the War, captivated Cyrus in his turn, and fo by 
 Exchange recovered her Royal Hufband. Having thus recover'd 
 his Liberty, the Perfian Monarch reduced the Phocians and Greeks 
 in the letter Afia, that had revolted ; and, having fettled all his Pro- 
 vinces, made Preparations againft Beljhazzar, King of Babylon, 
 and reduced that Monarchy, as we have faid before. The lafl: 
 War o" Cyrus was with the Maffagetee, a People of the Weftern 
 Afiatic Seytbia, which prov'd fatal to him. For Queen Tomyris 
 fent him a Mcfl'age by a Herald, that if he would not hearken 
 to a Peace, it was eafy for him to pafs the Araxes, and that fhe 
 offer'd to fatisfy him by a fingle Combat ; or that (lie would not 
 fail to feck him out, if he would not pafs the River. Cyrus, 
 " palling
 
 394 Prefent State of Turkey in Afja. Pare II. 
 
 palling the Praxes, quitted his Camp, leaving behind him Table* 
 furniihed with Wines and Provifions, as if he had repented his 
 Undertaking : Hereupon Tomyris ordered her Son Spargabifes to 
 purfue him with a third Part of the Army j but the young Prince, 
 knowing nothing of the Art of War, inftead of following or ob- 
 ferving the Enemy, enter'd the Camp which they had deferted, 
 and allowed his Soldiers to folace themfelves with the Wine they 
 found there. Cyrus, who wanted not Intelligence, fuddenly re- 
 turned to the Camp, furprifed it in the Night, when they were 
 dead with Wine and Sleep, cut them in Pieces, and took iparga- 
 iifes Prifoner, who made no other Ufe of the Liberty he granted 
 him than to kill himfelf. The Queen, his Mother, who medi- 
 tated no other Confolation than Revenge, to perfuade the Perjians, 
 that fhe was reduced to Defpair, pretended to retire ; and, having 
 drawn the Perjians into narrow Paries, fell upon them there with 
 fuch Fury and Succefs, that of the zoocoo Perjians which (he 
 fought with, not one efcaped to carry home the News of this 
 Defeat. Cyrus being found out among the Slain, the Queen cut 
 off his Head, according to Herodotus and 'Jujiin; but Xenophon 
 makes him die in his Bed ; and Ctejias affirms it was a drawn 
 
 i( Battle. However, Cambyfes fucceeded Cyrus his Father. Catti- 
 ly fes marched with a numerous Army againft the King of Egypt, 
 and difpofieffed him of his Dominions ; alfo made great Prepara- 
 tions of War againft the Carthaginians, which proved ufelefs, 
 becaufe the Pbenicians, their Allies, refufed to ferve againft 
 them ; and above 50000 Men, which he fent afterwards into 
 Libya, were, by a Storm, buried alive under prodigious Heaps of 
 Sand. His laft War was againft the Ethiopians, wherein he had 
 
 (f no better Succefs than in the other Two. The King of Ethiopia, 
 upon hearing of his intended Expedition againft him, fent him 
 Word, that he did not do well to difturb the World thus, and to 
 defire to make Men Slaves, who had never done him the leaft In- 
 jury : This, Monarch, in the Prefence of Cambyfes's Embaffadors, 
 bent his great Bow with two of his Fingers, and, unbending the 
 fame again, gave it them, with thefe Words, That, when the Per- 
 jians could do as much with it, they might think of conquering 
 
 (( Ethiopia. Cambyfes, incenfed with this Meffage, raifed a great 
 Army againft the Ethiopians, but with fo little Provifion for their 
 Subfiftence, that, after having entered the Country, they were 
 fhamefully forced to return into Egypt, without ever feeing the 
 Enemy, after they had eaten up the Beafts of Burden, lived on 
 Herbs, which at laft failed them in the Sands, and fed on the 
 Flefh of their Fellow-Soldi rs; for Ten were forced to draw Lots, 
 and he on whom it fell became Food for the reft. 
 
 {( Darius, furnamed Akafuerus, being fixed on the Throne, had 
 net long an undiiturb'd Pofleflion of it ; for the djjyrians, who 
 
 had
 
 Chap. XVIII. Prefent State of Turkey in Afia. 395 
 
 had fought all Ways to fliake off their Yoke, made a Revolt ; and. 
 having feized Babylon, where they expected to be befieged, they 
 took care to lay up fufficient Stores of Ammunition and Provifion ; 
 and, that they might fuftain a Siege the longer, they put then- 
 Mothers out of the City, and left but two Women in each Houfe, 
 and put the reft to Death. The Siege lafted nine Months, and 
 Darius defpair'd of Succefs ; when Zopyrus, the Son of Megabifns, 
 caufed his own Body to be lacerated with a Whip, cut off his Nofe, 
 Ears, and Lips, and prefented himfelf in this fad Condition to 
 Darius, who was much furprifed at it : He fecretly told him by 
 what means he would make him Mafter of Babylon ; into which 
 entering, and as a Deferter expofing the Cruelties of Darius, this 
 wrought in them fuch a Confidence of Zopyrus, of whofe Merit 
 they were before fufHciently i perfuaded, that they immediately 
 chofe him one of their Generals ; and when they faw, that in fome 
 Sallies he always had the Advantage of the Perjians, who, to 
 deceive them the more, fled before him, they gave him the fole 
 Command ; and a while after he bctray'd the Place to 
 Darius, who demolifhed its Walls and Gates, hung up 3462. 
 3000 Babylonians, and ordered the neighbouring People 
 to bring Women to re-people it. Next Year he turned his Arms 
 againft the European Scythians ; but of 700000 Men, which he 
 led againft this People, he loft 80000, and was obliged to retire. 
 The lonians, who had ferv'd in this War, revolted from Darius, 
 at the Inftigation of Hijleus, who was privy to all the King's 
 Counfels, but betrayed him, by foliciting Arijlagonas, who, at 
 that time, had the chief Command at Nicetum, to affert the 
 Liberty of Ionia, and to engage the Athenians on his Side ; but 
 this proving not fortunate to the Grecians, Darius was refolved to 
 be revenged on the Athenians, and was pufhed on by the exil'd 
 Athenian Hippias to it, and to make himfelf Mafter of all Greece. 
 The Management of this War being committed to Mardonius and 
 Hippias, they ravaged Thrace, and Part of Macedon ; but were ut- 
 terly defeated in the Plains of Marathon, by the Refolution of 
 Miltiades, tho' he had but 1 1 000 Men againft 200000. Darius, 
 very uneafy at this Lofs, as he was preparing to repair them, died 
 after a Reign of Thirty-fix Years. Xerxes fucceeded 
 his Father Darius, who, according to Herodotus, 3886. 
 having rtfolved to be reveng'd on the Egyptians and Ant.Chrif. 
 Athenians, and made Preparations to execute his De- 485. 
 iigns, miuie Choice of him to fucceed, fince their 
 K.ing c , according to the Law and Cuftom of the Perfians, were 
 not to go to War without naming a Succeffor ; tho' moft Hifto- 
 rians fay, that after Darius\ Death the Right of Succeffion was 
 difputed between Xerxes and Artabaxanes ; which laft being the 
 Son of Darius, by the firft Wife, before Dariuj was King, and 
 
 Xerxes
 
 396 Prefent State of Turkey in Afia. Part II. 
 
 Xerxes being born after his Father Darius was a Sovereign ; 
 during the Difpute, which was managed without Animoiity, 
 they made Prefents to one another ; eat together without a Diffi- 
 dence ; and when their Uncle Artapbames, whom the Perjians 
 chofe co be Arbitrator, gave his Sentence in Favour of Xerxes, 
 he was not a bit the more infolent orexalted ; and Artabazanes, on 
 his Part, was fo little concern 'd at it, that, after he had paid Ho- 
 mage to his Brother, he took him by the Hand, and led him to 
 the Throne ; which indeed was fo uncommon a Management, 
 that Jufiin fays it was a Miracle to have feen two great Princes 
 difpute the Poffeffion of great Kingdoms with fuch Temper and 
 Moderation. With the Crown Xerxes inherited a double War, one 
 with E;ypt, which ended by reducing that Country, and con- 
 ferring the Government of it upon his Brother Achamenes ; and 
 the other with Greece, as terrible in the Preparations, as ridi- 
 culous in the Succefs : The dying Words of his Father Darius, 
 viz. Be fure to remember Marathon, made him refolve upon it, 
 tho' his Uncle Artabanus did his utmoft to divert him from it ; 
 but the Council of the young and ambitious Mardonius prevail'd. 
 Ten whole Years were fpent in Preparations ; the Army was fo 
 prodigious, that all Greece, which he propofed to fubdue, was 
 not capable to quarter it. Hiftorians do not agree in the Parti- 
 culars. Cornelius fays, the leaft makes his Fleet to confift of 1 200 
 Ships of War, and 2000 Tranfports ; and that he had 700000 
 Foot, and 40000 Horfe, in his Land Army. Having cover'd the 
 Hellefpont with his Ships, and feeming by a Bridge of Boats to 
 have united Afia to Europe, over which his Army paffed in Seven 
 Days, which he beheld himfelf from a high Place in the Plain 
 of Abydos, they advanced to a Plain called Ibermopylte, which 
 Leonidas, King of Sparta, bravely maintained with 4000 Grecians, 
 and 3000 Lacedemonians, and here defeated near 20000 of the 
 Perjians. The Sea Fight of Salime, near Attica, proved alfo 
 fatal to them, thro' the incredible Fury of the Grecians, and the 
 Conduft of Themiftocles, they lofing 300 Ships here, without 
 reckoning thofe that were difperfed by a Storm. And Xerxes, 
 for whom they had brought a golden Throne to the Sea Coaft, 
 viewing this bloody Aciion from the Shore, faw little there but 
 what might afford him matter of Defpair ; and therefore, by the 
 Advice of Mardanius, he retired home in a Fifherman's Bark. 
 That General affuring him he did not doubt of Succefs, provided 
 he would leave with him the Reft of the Forces, which being ftill 
 3 or 400000 Men, he came to a Battle with them in the Plains of 
 Plataa in Beotia ; and tho' the Greeks had not then above 1 iooo 
 Men, they cut in Pieces 370000 of their Enemies, with Mar- 
 donius their General ; the reft were put to Flight, and Paufanias 
 had the whole Honour of the Victory. Artaxerxes fuoceeding his 
 
 Father
 
 Chap. XVIII. Prefent State 0/ Turkey in Aila. 397 
 
 Father in the Kingdom, by his Lieutenants Artabazus and Mega' 
 bizus, reduced the Egyptians, who made a Revolt. This Prince 
 was alfo engaged in a new War againft the Grecians, whofe Ge- 
 neral was Cimon, the Son of Miltiades, who had the good For- 
 tune to defeat Artabazus by Sea, and to rout Megabizus by Land, 
 and recovered the Ifland of Cyprus ; lb that Artaxerxes was forc'd 
 to conclude a Peace with the Grecians upon dishonourable Terms. 
 It is difficult to clear fome Things relating to the Succefibrs of 
 this Prince, who died in the Year of the World 3547, and 420 
 Years before Cbrijl. Xerxes the Second reign'd two Months, ac- 
 cording to Ctefias, or a Year, according to Diodorus SiciAus ; but 
 was kill'd by his Brother Sogdianus, who reigned feven Months. 
 Sogdianus defigned the Ruin of Darius, another Brother, who had 
 the Government of Hyrcania, and who, underflanding the In- 
 tention of Sogdianus, openly declar'd War againft him ; and, 
 having drawn him into a Treaty, feized his Perfon, and ordered 
 him to be llrangled, and his Body burnt to Alhes. Darius Arta- 
 xerxes, or Darius Not/jus, lolt Egypt by a Revolt ; but the Medes 
 and Perfians, who refufed to acknowledge him for their King, he 
 reduced to their Duty, and made a League with the Lacedemonians, 
 by virtue of which he affilted them againft the Athenians; and, 
 by the means of his Allies, he recover'd thofe Cities which his 
 Predeceffors had conquer'd in AJia. Darius was fucceeded by his 
 Son Artaxerxes Mnemon. This Prince having Information, that 
 his Brother Cyrus had a Dehgn to murder him, even in the Tem- 
 ple, he was leized, and fentenced to Death for the Attempt, but 
 received his Pardon. This Clemency made no Impreffion upon 
 Cyrus, who had no other Thought than the Crown. After he 
 had endeavour'd to render his Brother odious, he levied Soldiers in 
 feveral Places on falfe Pretences, engaged the Lacedemonians ou 
 his Side, march'd with his Army againit Artaxerxes, who, not 
 being willing to put his Fortune to thelffae of a Battle, retreated 
 fo far, that he gave the other an Opportunity to advance as far as 
 Babylon. The two Brothers at lalt came to a moft terrible and 
 bloody Engagement. The Army of Artaxerxes confided of 
 400000 Men ; and in this Adion Cyrus, who wanted neither 
 Courage nor Ambition, did great Things worthy of himfelf, 
 killed the Governor of the Cudufians .with his own Hands, flew 
 the King's Horfc under him, and wounded Artaxerxes in the 
 Breaft. But Cyrus himfelf, being carried away by his Horfe, 
 which was high-mettled and hard-mouth'd, was wounded in the 
 Temples by a Perfian, and kill'd by a Blow of a Partizan. Ocbus, 
 who aflum'd the Name of Artaxerxes, poflefled himfelf of the 
 Crown upon the Death of Artaxerxes. Ocbus made War on the 
 Cadufians, who lay betwixt the Euxine and the Cajpian Seas, and 
 triumphed over thefe People. I IhalJ pafs over the ne\i Reign, 
 
 iu:d
 
 398 Prefeni State of Turkey in Afia. Part II. 
 
 and come to Darius the Lefs, who was alfo named Arfach. Alex- 
 ander, King of Macedon, having made Preparations 
 A. M. againft Darius, landed his Army in Afia, which con- 
 3638. Med of 30000 Foot, and 4500 Horfe ; he marched 
 thro' the leffer Pbrygia, and arrived in the Plains of 
 Adraflia, thro' which the Granicus runs with a rapid Torrent ; 
 and notwithllanding 1 00000 Foot, and 20000 Horfe, were drawn 
 up on the other Side of it, yet Alexander parTed over it, contrary 
 to the Advice of his Officers, with thirteen Troops of Horfe. 
 Alexander bravely fuftain'd the iirft Onfet of the Enemy, who 
 charged where-ever he was, and made himfelf remarkable enough 
 by hia Armour and Actions ; and when his Infantry had got over, 
 and that the Fight grew hot, he pufh'd on with fo much Refolu- 
 tion and Vigour, that at laft he faw himfelf crown'd with Glory. 
 Of the Perfians 20000 Foot and 2000 Horfe were killed, and the 
 reft put to Flight. Darius, being acquainted with this ill News, 
 became a little too late fenf ble, that Alexander was more to be 
 fear'd than he was aware of. After this fignal Victory, which 
 open'd Alexander a Paflage into Afia, he took feveral very con- 
 siderable Places. To divert this wonderful Torrent of Succefs, 
 Memnon of Rhodes, who with great Prudence and Valour had 
 defended Halicarnajfius, railed Forces in all Parts ; and, being per- 
 fuaded that the Way to oblige Alexander to quit Afia was to 
 carry the War into Macedon and Greece, Darius gave him the 
 chief Command ; and, having firft taken the Iflands that were but 
 ill-guarded, he died fome time after before the City of Mitylene ; 
 which, not being able to get any Succours from its Allies, mull 
 have foon furrender'd. Darius was much concern 'd for the Lofs 
 of this great Man ; but as his Safety confiftcd in oppofing the 
 Enemy, who fought him, he encamped before Babylon, and 
 marched from thence into Mefopotamia, enter'd Cilicia, and fought 
 fox Alexander. The two Armies came to a general Engagement. 
 The Army of Darius confilted of 400000 Foot, and 1 00000 
 Horfe, according tajufiin; of which icoooo Foot were killed, 
 and 40000 taken Prifoners. Darius himfelf threw off his Royal 
 Robe, for fear of being dilcover'd, and fled. Every thing having 
 Succeeded thus tar to Alexander's Wifh, he detached Parmenion to 
 Damafcus, whither Darius, before the Battle, had lent an incredible 
 Quantity of Riches, and the principal Ladies of the Kingdom. 
 This City furrendering without Refinance, they took 30000 Pri- 
 foners in it, among whom where three Princefles, the Daughters 
 of King O chits Artaxerxes. After Alexander had committed the 
 Charge of the Prifoners and the Spoil to Parmenion, he marched 
 into Syria, where he deprived all that oppofed him of their Do- 
 minions ; but added Provinces to the Territories of thofe who vo- 
 luntarily fulmitred to him. At his firlt Entrance into Phenicia, 
 
 Biblos
 
 Chap. XVIII. Prefcnt State of Turkey in Afia; 399 
 
 Biblos furrender'd, and the Inhabitants of Sidon compell'd their 
 King Strato y who adher'd to Darius, to deliver up that noble 
 City to him. Tyre was taken by Storm, after it had fuilained a 
 Siege of Seven Months, with (o much Refolution, that 6000 
 Men were flain upon its Works ; and he caufed 2000 to be hanged 
 along the Sea-fhore. Having taken Gaza, he marched to Jeru- 
 salem, but the Jrzvt accommodating Matters with him, he re- 
 mitted to them all the Tribute which had been impofed on them 
 by the former Kings of Perfia. Next Year he enter'd Egypt, at 
 that time fubjeft to the Perfiuns ; but before he came to Memphis* 
 Maxaces, whom Darius had placed there for the Security of the 
 City, met Alexander to make him a rich Prefcnt in Money, and 
 all the Jewels belonging to that Crown. From Memphis he ad- 
 vanced to the utmoit Parts of Egypt ; but henceforth he bent his 
 Thoughts upon nothing but purfuing Darius, who fent him Em- 
 bafladors to offer him an immenfe Sum for the Ranfom of his 
 Family, his Daughter Sapbia in Marriage, and all the Countries 
 lying between the Hellefpont and the Euphrates ; and then added, 
 that he Ihould detain his Son, as the moll valuable Pledge of his 
 Friendfhip. Alexander anfwered the Embaffadors, that he did 
 not come into Afia to receive Prefcnts, but to make them ; that 
 Darius offer'd him thofe Countries which he had already con- 
 quer'd ; thac he would not give over purfuing him, becaufe he 
 had done his utmoft to corrupt his Soldiers to betray him, and his 
 Servants to poifon him ; and then added, that, as the Heavens had 
 but one Sun, the Earth ought to have but one King ; that their 
 Mailer might be very well content to be the Second, without pre- 
 fuming to be his Equal ; that on that Condition he might obtain 
 whatever he defir'd, but otherwife there was no longer Safety for 
 him. Thefe Conditions being rejected, another Battle was fought 
 between them at Gangamelia, where there was a moft dreadful 
 Slaughter ; and, notwithllanding the Bravery of Darius, he was 
 fore'd to fave himfelf by Flight. The Reward of this Victory 
 was the Surrender of Arbela, where they found an immenfe 
 Treafure ; from whence marching to Babylon, this City was de- 
 liver'd up to him, into which he enter'd in a kind of Triumph. 
 He then marched, but with incredible Fatigue, to Perfepslis, 
 where he found vail Riches. Now as Alexander was in quell of 
 Darius, Bejfus and Narhazanes, who had the Command of the 
 greatell Part of the Perfian Army, feized the King, and put him 
 in Chains, in hopes thereby of meriting the Favour ofaAlexander, 
 by delivering him up to him. The two Armies were near one 
 another, when thofe barbarous Traitors threw their Javelins ac 
 Du/ius, becaufe he refuied to follow them ; and, when they had 
 all'aflinatcd him, Narbazanes made his Way to Hyrcania, and 
 BeJf M s retii \i to Bailriana : Alexander, taking Advantage of the 
 
 Enemy,
 
 400 Prsfent State of Turkey in Afia. Part II. 
 
 Enemy, difordered by the Flight of the Parricides, cut near 3000 
 Men in Pieces, and put the reft to Flight ,-, and, as a Macedonian 
 turn'd afide to drink at a Fountain, he efpiedpoor Darius wounded 
 in a pitiful Waggon, who prayed him to bring him a little Water ; 
 and, as foon as he drank it, expir'd : Upon the News of which, 
 -Alexander halted to the Place, wept over his Body, lamented his 
 Misfortune, and covered him with his Cloak, ordered him to be 
 embalmed, and, in this miferable Condition, fent him to Sijiga/nbis, 
 to be buried with his Anceftors. Thus Alexander laid the Foun- 
 dation of the Greek Monarchy in the Eaft. His next March was 
 
 into Parthia, ftill purfuing his Conquefts, gaining fome 
 3643. Cities by Clemency, and reducing others by his Arms ; 
 
 and, at length, having defeated the Scythians, and fur- 
 preffed feveral Infurre&ions in divers Parts of his new Conquefts, 
 he bent his whole Thoughts on reducing of India under his Obe- 
 dience ; and, marching thither, moft of the Kings of that Coun- 
 try went immediately to meet him, and make their Submiffion to 
 him. After this Alexander marched into Patbalia, and thence 
 palled into the Iflands that are formed by the Indus, and fo failed 
 into the Ocean. When the cold Seafon was over, he march 'd 
 his Army by Land ; and, paffing thro' vaft Defarts, where he 
 found no Men to conquer, he had however Famine and Plague to 
 encounter with. Being come to the Frontiers of Gedrcfia, he 
 continued his March into Perjia, entertaining vaft Thoughts of 
 conquering feveral Kingdoms in Europe ; but died in the Year of 
 the World 3648, and before Chrift 323. The greateft Part of 
 Afia, wherein Perjia is more particularly included, after many 
 Struggles and Cornells, upon the Death of Alexander, fell to the 
 Share of one of his Generals, Seleucus Nicanor. In the Reign of 
 Seleucus Gallinicus, King of Perjia, the Partbians revolted : His 
 
 Brother Hierax was very troublefome to him, as well as 
 3712. the Gauls who had fixed in AJia ; but nothing was to 
 
 mortifying as the Defection of the Partbians, who 
 feized now on the Kingdom of Perjia, and rent it from the Domi- 
 nions of the Seleucidan Race of Kings, thereby giving Rife to the 
 Arfacid<e, fo called from Arfaces, the firft of them. Arfaces, 
 the firft of the Partbians that became King of Perjia, was fuc- 
 ceeded by Arfaces II. The next King was Pampacius, call'd alfo 
 Arfaces, who was fucceeded by Mitbridates ; the fucceeding Kings 
 were Phraates, Artabanus, Mitbridates II. who was depofed. 
 His Brother Orodes, being advanced to the Parthian Throne, laid 
 Siege to Babylon, whither Mitbridates fled ; and, forcing the Peo- 
 ple to furrender, Mitbridates fell into his Hands, who order'd him 
 to be kill'd before his Face. This Prince was courted into an Al- 
 liance with Mitbridates King of Pontus, and Tigranes King of 
 Armenia, againft the Romans under Luculhu ; but he at firft refuted 
 
 to
 
 Chap. XVm. Pf'tfent State of Turkey in Afia. jot 
 
 to take part with them, or the fohhdnt. At length breaking out 
 irnto a War again it Tigtanei, he took him Prifoner ; yet, finding 
 che Romans very powerful, they Toon came to a right Understand- 
 ing one with another. Orodes engaged in a Wa^ againit the 
 Romans : Craffus was the Roman General pitched upon ; who 
 marching direftly againit Surcna, the Perfiah Commander, was* 
 either circumvented by him, under Pretence of a Treaty, and 
 either kill'd by his Enemies, or by fome of his own Men': The 
 PerftaVs flew here 20006 Romans, befides rocoo taken 
 Pr'Tonefs. Grides, after this, engaged in a new War 39} i. 
 agairtlt the Romans ; took all Syria, except Tyre ; Pa/c- 
 Jf'i'ne, Cilicia, and the Cities of Jfta orT the Continent, almoft all 
 lubnlit^d to him ; but at lart the Roman General Tentidhfs de- 
 feated him, arid flew Pacorus, to the great Grief of Orodes his 
 father. I fhall pafs over feveral of the fucccedirig Reigns to that 
 of I'ofogefe's, who was upon very good Terms with the 
 Roiittit Emperor fefpafiari ; alid a firm Peace continued' A. D. 
 between tiie Romans and Per/tans, during the Reigns of 55. 
 'Titus, DoMiffab, ;ird' Nerva. A new War broke out 
 between the two Empires in the Reign of T?-afa, who' made 3 
 Concpieft of* Armenia; and the other Parts of the Eaft in Peribn. 
 A War between the two Nations was alio renewed in the Reign of 
 
 :<s, wherein t\\t' Per fails were twice de- 
 feased, and tile lait time had a great Overthrow at 193. 
 FJus, where Alexander overcame DaYius in Battle. 
 Some time afttr, :i famous Pcrfidn, call'd Art'dxerxes, of a mean 
 Extraft, bur of extraordinary Courage and Policy, reolted from 
 'anus, defeated him in thrice feveral Battles, and at lafl flew 
 him, whereby he recovered the antient' Kingdom of Perfia ; after 
 which he nihde Pretences of refto'ring the Pcrffatt Empire to all its 
 former Splendor, and accordingly began a - vigorous Invafion of 
 Syria axi& Wtefopotamia. The News of thefc continued Succc'fles 
 made the Emperor Alexander Scvcrus march into the 
 Raft agtrinfl A'rtaxerxes, who had drawn together an 232. 
 Army of an innumerable Company of Root, 130000 
 Hbrfe, jtfo Elephants, and 18000 Chariots arm'd with Sythes. 
 The Battle continued a whole'Day very feverc arid bloody , but 
 in' the Evening Alexander, by his Management, obtained one of 
 greatefl Victories that ever was known, Artdxerxcs ria'rrbwly 
 elcaping- with his Life. FTiftoriiflrft till us there were iocoo 
 Ferjikii Horfe* fl/rrtt, Foot without' Number, 200 Elephants, 300 
 taken, and an infinite Number of Prifoncrs cf all Qualities : This 
 dorle, the Effip<rbf, Without Rcfill.mce, recover 'd all thole Coiin- 
 
 1 from the Rctf:c?:s, and took alfo 
 the Cities of Ctcftbtot and Dith'flM. I'ul'jdh the Apellate, forte 
 rime after tif? ; , declared War . .',>, arid' afleV a very 1 otf- 
 
 D d llinate
 
 402 Prefent State of Turkey z Alia. Part II. 
 
 ftinate Battle, a Truce was agreed upon for three Days to bury 
 the Dead ; the Roman Army marched on, in which the Perfians, 
 who made the bell of every Advantage, fometimes attacked 
 them in Flank, and fometimes in the Rear, then retired ; upon 
 which Occafion Julian received his mortal Wound ; and foon 
 after Sapor, the Per/tan Monarch, attacked the Front of the 
 Roman Army with his Elephants very refolutely, put them very 
 hard to it, and at laft retir'd : Where-ever the Romans encamped, the 
 Perfians waited their Motions with much Aftiduity, and reduced 
 them to fuch great Extremities, that they were glad to accept of 
 a Peace, to continue for thirty Years, which was very advan- 
 tageous to the Perfians. Sapor was fucceeded by his 
 380. Brother Artaxerxes ; but I (hall pafs on to Ifdigerdes, 
 400. in whofe Reign the Peace between the Perfians and 
 Romans contributed very much to the Propagation of 
 420. the Chriftian Faith in Perfia ; but his Son Varanes, 
 who fucceeded him, raifed a bloody Perfecution againlt 
 the Chriftians throughout all his Dominions, that they retir'd in 
 great Numbers to Conjiantineple. Varanes demanded back his 
 Subje&s, whom he had driven out of his Country, by the Heat of 
 Perfecution ; but the Roman Emperor Theodofius the younger 
 was fo far from delivering thefe miferable People into his Hands, 
 that he declared War againft him ; and, making Ardaharius his 
 General, he defeated Narfes, Commander of the Perfian Army, 
 in the Province of Azazena, killed a great Multitude of his Men, 
 and forced him to fly. Narfes thought to redeem his loft Repu- 
 tation, by invading the Roman Frontiers, which he hoped to 
 effett on the Side of Mefopotamia, at that time unprepared for 
 Defence. But the Vigilancy of Ardaharius not only fruftrated hi! 
 Defign, but he befieged him in Nifibis, at that time in the Hands 
 of the Perfians. Varanes, having by this time received Intelli- 
 gence of his General's Defeat, and the Danger his Army was in, 
 made all the Hafte he could to its Relief, calling to his Afliftance 
 Almandurus, Prince of the Saracens. But a Difienfion firft arofe 
 among the Saracens, and then a panic Fear feized fo violently on 
 them, that, flying away in great Confufton at the very Appearance 
 of the Romans, they took to the Euphrates, wherein 1 00000 Men 
 were faid to have perifhed. Varanes, not totally difcouraged here- 
 with, approach'd with a great Number of Elephants to relieve 
 the Town ; upon which the Romans thought fit to raife the Siege ; 
 tho' in feveral Engagements, which followed foon after, they got 
 the Advantage, and very much weaken'd the Perfians. Here- 
 upon a Peace was concluded, wherein it was agreed, that the 
 King of Perfia fhould put a Stop to the Perfecution rais'd by him 
 againft the Chriftians, and reftore them to their Eftates and Privi- 
 leges. Pgofes, King of Perfia, cut out fo much Work to the 
 
 Romans,
 
 
 Chap. XVIII. Prefent State of Turkey in Afia. 403 
 
 Romans, by his continual Inroads, that they had enough 
 to do to withftand him: So far were they from at- 458.- 
 tempting any thing againft the Perjians, that they were 
 neceflitated to fee them exercife this Tyranny in Mesopotamia and 
 Armenia. Cabades fucceeded Perojes his Father, and enter 'd into 
 a War with the Romans, juftin the Emperor fent the 
 femous Belifarius againft the Perjians, who intended to 527. 
 penetrate into Syria, and attack Antiocb ; but the Vi- 
 gilancy of Belifarius, who was ready to difpute their PafTage, pre-, 
 vented their Expectations of pillaging the beautiful City oi Antiocb. 
 and they now thought of nothing but an orderly Retreat ; but the 
 Eagernefs of the Roman Soldiers to right, contrary to the Opinion 
 of their Generals, made the Perjians face about, draw up in Order 
 of Battle, and then lbnd ready to receive them : The Difpute was 
 very obftinate, and the Fortune of the Day continued doubtful 
 a long time, till at laft a Body of the moft refolute Perfians 
 charged the Right Wing of the Enemy, where Arethas commanded 
 fome mercenary Saracens, who fled at the iirft Charge. Upon 
 this the Roman Horfe, being weaken'd and wearied, quitted the 
 Field ; but for all this the Perjians could never break in upon 
 Belifarius, and the few that flood by him, fo that towards Night 
 they return'd to their Camp. In the Reign of Adefir, or Ad- 
 kefir, King of Perjia, there arofe terrible Revolutions 1 
 
 in this Kingdom. Sarbaras the General revolted againft 628. 
 Adhejir, and kill'd him ; Sarbaras himfelf reign'd but 
 feven Months ; for Baranes, Grandfon to Chojroes King of Perjia, 
 fo wrought himfelf into the Affections of the Grandees of the Coun- 
 try, that they put Sabaras to Death, and put the Adminiftration 
 into Baranes's Hands, in Conjunction with his Coufln Hormijdas 
 Jefdegerd. Baranes dying in about feven Months, Hormijdas 
 reign'd alone ; but could not hold it for above two Years and three 
 Months ; for as the Civil Wars had confiderably weaken'd the 
 Kingdom, and that on the other Side the Saracens, a People of 
 Arabia, were grown very potent, by the Conquefts they had 
 made of almoft all that belong'd to the Roman Empire in the lefler 
 AJia, their Calipb Ottoman or Ojman, who reftded at Babylon, 
 attacked Hormijdas, conquered him, and reduced the Kingdom of 
 Perfia under his Dominion ; and from henceforward govern'd it 
 in the Form of a conquer'd Province, abol'ilhed the antient 
 Heathenifli Religion, and forced the Inhabitants to embrace the 
 Mahometan Religion. Thus ended the Race of the Kings of 
 Perjia of the Line of Artaxerxes, who began it in this 
 Kingdom in the Reign of the Emperor Alexander 632. 
 Severus, having recover'd it from the Dominion of 
 the Parthian:, and continued in much Glory in the grcateft Part 
 of the Eaft, and gave the Romans a great deal of Trouble. In 
 Dd 2 the
 
 404: Prefent- State of Turkey in. Afia. Part II. 
 
 the Reign of ' 7'trzid- the Saracen, Mittar, who was Go- 
 679. vernorof Perfia, fet up for himfelf, and from him the 
 Kings of Perfia fince, otherwife called Sop/jis, are laid- 
 ta be defcended. This Mutar having made himfelf Mailer of 
 Perfia, Abimelecb, who fucceeded Tc-z.il, ftrenuoufly oppofed him ; 
 Mut a r proved at fir-lt victorious, but Fortune changing Sides, he 
 was defeated, and Perfia reduced again under the Dominion of the 
 Saracens. Perfia remained in a tolerable State of Tranquillity 
 till the Reign- of Fe&idll. who obtained thefovereign Dignity in 
 722- Some time after another Yexid took up Armi> but was de- 
 feated ; after which we meet with nothing confideVable till the 
 Reign of Marfan l'l. when great Diforders enfued : For one 
 Abumrfiin took up Arms, and defeated the King ? s Army, and 
 obliged him to retire into Egypt. Aaron was Monarch of Perfia, 
 when Nicepborus was elected Emperor of the Eaft ; and 
 Soz. foon after engaged- in a War againll the Emperor, 
 wherein Aaron had the Advantage. Wheu Cbofroes 
 fuGceeded in Perfia, Inarclms, a Phfian Lord, animated his 
 Countrymen to take up Arms againll him, and (hake of? the Yoke 
 of the Saracens. Cbofroes, having been- defeated by the Rebel, and 
 much weakened, kt at Liberty Bardas Salerus, the Greek Gene- 
 ral, and fome Thoufands of Chriilians, whom he had made Pri- 
 foners of War in a* Battle obtained from Bafiiiits II. upon Con- 
 dition-they would ferve him againft the revolted Perfians ; by 
 whofe Afliftance he got a fignal Victory over them. Cbofroes 
 dyings and being fucceeded by his Son Mahomet, he made ufe of 
 the:'Z?*7^as Auxiliaries ; bin tbefe lall- coming to'k-now their own 
 Strength, under the Conduct of Tangrolipix, turn'd 
 105 1. upon the Saracens, defeated their Armyi flew M'afomtt, 
 and broke in fuch Numbers into Perfia, that they 
 quickly made themfelves Mailers of it-, and the Country of Babylon, 
 which had continu'd in the PolTeflion of the Saracens about 418 
 Years. The Turks remained Mailers-of Perfia for 170 Years, when" 
 they were forced to give way to the more formidable Power of- the 
 Tartars, who, under Zingis, or Cangis, vulgarly called 
 1 221. the Great C'bam, paffing over Caucafus and Part of 
 Taums, carried all before them ; and, in the Reign of 
 Muceata, the Son and Succeflbr of Tiingis, conquer'd Perfia, Par- 
 thla, Media, and Mefopotatnia. In the Reign of Carbaga, the- 
 Tartarian Empire began to decline- falt ; ; and* about the 
 1350. Year 1350^ Gtmffa, Sukan of the Partbiam, fhook 
 off the Tartarian Yoke, after it had lain upon the- 
 Neck of the Perfians about izS Years-. The Tartarian Govern- 
 ment was reftqr'd.m Perfia, not many Years after, by the victo- 
 rious Arms of Tamritmti 
 
 The
 
 Chap. XVIII. Rrefrut State xf Turkey -/wAfia. 40; 
 
 The Succffion of the Princes that follow 'd Tamer/ane is uncer- 
 tain l However I fhall give the Rife of the prefent Royal Family. 
 IfmaelSefi, or Sophi, was the Son df Secaiiier, who had 
 pafTed for a Prophet in Perjta. This I/ntael Sophi, being 1604. 
 fuccefsful in feveral Battles, efbtblimed himfelf in the 
 Government, and is reckon'd the firll King of the prefent 'Family. 
 Thamas Sophy, his Son, fucceeded him, who carried on a vigorous 
 War with the Turks ; but, 'being very cruel, was depofed, and fuc- 
 ceeded by his Brother. Solyman JV. who was the Son 
 and SuccefVor of Sefi, cho'fe to live an imaclive Life 1694. 
 among hrs Women, leaving the Adininiflration of the 
 Government intirely to his 'Minifters, who plac'd and difpJac'J 
 *vhom they law fit ; oppmfted the Subjects with Taxes, tho' in a 
 Time of a profound Peaoe ; -but, after a long and indolent ^cign, 
 was depofed by the prefent famous Thomas Kmtli Kan, whofe 
 Reign has been -attended \wifh great ISuccels, This Monarch is 
 Son to the famous Ivlereiwys, who was originally a Tartar; at 
 leaft he commanded four or five 'hundred Tents on the .utmoll 
 Bounds af the Fwjlnn Empire, where they move from Place to 
 Place with tlieir Tents, as they find Provifion for their Cattle. 
 Taking Advantage of the Weaknefs, or rather Indolence, of the 
 Miniftry, and having been ill ufed by one of the Courtiers, he 
 gained over a Party, and feized on 'the Province of Candahor, and 
 let up for hiratfelf ; and, being encouraged by foreign Powers, he 
 threw the Perfian Monarch, and all his Court, into the utmoir. 
 Confternation, upon Intelligence that the Rebels were marching 
 towards the capital City. But Mereiveys, in the midft of all his 
 Projects, died; which would have been fatal to his Adherents, if 
 he had not left a Son behind him equal, if not fupexior, to him in 
 every refpeft. Upon the Approach of the Rebels towards Iftahan, 
 the Perfian Monarch left the Royal Army, aDd fled -nobody knew 
 whither. Whereupon tl>e Officer?, as well as Citizens, thought 
 of nothing elfe but making their Court to Kouli Ka?r, and inviting 
 him into the City ; which he foon after took Pofieffion of, making 
 the whole Court his Prifoners. He cut off the Head of the 
 Prime Minifter, and fome others, and gained a general Ap- 
 plaufe. 
 
 The Kingdom of Syriia more particularly comprehended the 
 Kingdoms at Tyre, and Syria firiclly fo called ; to which 
 were added Phoenicia and Palejrin*. The Phoenicians TheKing- 
 were defoended of the Sons of Canaan, and govern 'd by dom of 
 the Chiefs of Families, whom they Iwnour'd with the Syria. 
 Title of Kings ; but moft of the Canaanrtijh Kings be- 
 ing deftroyed by "J-oJhna, it is not certain who came after. Phajh, 
 a Pha-niciam King, i, mentioned in the Time the C-rrcians con- 
 cjuer'd Troy j but after Win we hear^ef no more till the Conqnelt 
 
 Dd 3 of
 
 46 Prefent State of Turkey in Afia. Part II, 
 
 of this Country by the Babylonians. Whether it were that the 
 Phoenicians were made fubjedt to the Kings of Tyre, or that the 
 Kings of Pbanicia did nothing memorable, is not eafy to deter- 
 mine. It is certain, that the Kings of Tyre, in a fhort time, pof- 
 feffed themfelves of the Coafts of Syria and Phoenicia, and a great 
 Part of Cyprus. The Names and Hiftory of the Kings of Tyre I 
 fhall briefly fubjoin here. Abibutus, or Abemalus, was cotempo- 
 
 jary with the Prophet Samuel. Saron, his Son, whom 
 A. M. David, as Eufebius fays, compelled to pay Tribute. 
 2931. Hiram, the Son of Saron, confederate with David, 
 
 to whom he fent Cedars, with Carpenters and Mafons, 
 2955. l towards his Buildings in Jerufalem, after he had ex- 
 
 pell'd the Jebujites ; as he did after to Solomon, when he 
 3004. built the Temple. I pafs on to Phelles, who was fuc- 
 
 ceeded by Ithobalus, called in Scripture Etbbaal, who 
 was the High-Prieft of the Goddefs AJiaroth ; he was the Father 
 
 oi Jezebel, the Wife of Aha.b. Mettimus, by fame cal- 
 3043. led Matgimus, the Father of Eli/a, whom Virgil cele- 
 3052. brates by the Name oi Dido. Pygmalion, the Son of 
 
 Mettimus, kill'd Sich^us, the Hulband of his Sifter 
 Eli/a, to get his Throne. Elul&us, deftended from Pygmalion, 
 defeated the Fleet of Salmanazar in the Port of Tyre. Etboba'cs, 
 or Etbbaal II. pretended to be as wife as Daniel, and to know 
 the moft fecret Thing, fays the Prophet Ezekiel', and yet was not 
 wife enough to preferve his Kingdom from Kebuchadonofor, who, 
 after a Siege of thirteen Years, took the City of Tyre, and fub- 
 je&ed it to his Empire. Baal was Son and Succeffor of Etbbaal 'II. 
 but tributary to the Babylonians. The Syrians were henceforward 
 governed by Judges, or titular Kings, fent from Babylon. When, 
 the Macedonian Empire was prevailing againft the Perfians, Alex- 
 ander took the City of Tyre, but it coft more Time than in force - 
 jng all the Cities of Afia ; after which Phoenicia was reckoned as 
 a Part of Syria. We come now to the antient Kingdom of Syria, 
 properly fo called, or Damafcus. The Kings of Damafcus, till thp 
 Time of Da'vid, are fuppofed to have been Tributaries to fome 
 neighbouring Power. The firft Exploit, afcribed to them in the 
 Scripture, is their coming to the Aid of Adad-Ezar upon his firft 
 
 Defeat by David, when they were fo broken, that they 
 A. M. did not only fuffer David to put Garrifons in the beft 
 2903. Cities of Damafcus, but patiently became his Servants, 
 
 and brought Prefents to him. The Scripture, from 
 henceforward, feldom takes notice of any Kings of Syria by that 
 Name, but of thofe of Damafcus, who, in a fhort time, had 
 fwallow'd up all the petty Kingdoms round about. Pafling over 
 fome of the fucceeding Reigns, we come to that of Benhadad, 
 the Son of Tabrimon, who pas hired by Afa King of Judah, to 
 
 aflm;
 
 Chap. XVIII. Prefent State of Turkey in Afia. 407 
 
 a (fid him in the War with Baajha King of lfrael. Benbadad, 
 the Son of the former, twice invaded lfrael in the Reign of Achab, 
 but was defeated both times. Hazael, Captain of Benbadad's 
 Army, was anointed King of Syria by the Prophet Eli/ha ; but 
 he prov'd as ill a Neighbour to the Kings of lfrael, as his Pre- 
 deceflbrs ; he made an Attempt upon Judah alfo in the Time of 
 Joas, but, bribed with the Treafures of the Temple, he withdrew 
 his Forces. Benbadad III. the Son of Hazael, was defeated in 
 three fet Battles by Joas King of lfrael. There is nothing me- 
 morable in the three fucceeding Reigns, only that in the Time of 
 one, of thefe, "Jeroboam, King of lfrael, fubdued both Chamoth 
 ad Damafcus, Refim II. was the Son of Benbadad VI. who, 
 joining with Pehah King of lfrael, againft Abaz King of Judab, 
 obliged him to call in to his Affillance Tiglath Pilefar King of 
 Affyria, by whom Rezim was taken and beheaded, and the City 
 of Damafcus taken, whereby the Kingdom of Syria be- 
 came united to the AJfyrian Empire. The Syrians con- 32 IO. 
 tinued under the AJfyrian and Babylonian Monarchies 
 as long as that laded 5 and, in their Overthrow by the Medes and 
 Perfians, became a Part of their State ; and fo remained till the 
 Battle fought by Alexander and Darius, wherein the Macedonian 
 proving victorious, gave him the Pofleflion of Syria and Phoenicia. 
 After the Death of Alexander, this Country lay, as it were, at 
 Stake between Ptolemy King of Egypt, and Antigonus the chief 
 Lord of Afia ; which laft being at length defeated and killed by 
 Seleucus, this Prince and his SuccefTors became Lords of all Afia ; 
 but keeping their Refidence in Syria, they were commonly called 
 Kings of Syria. But after this Kingdom had continued in the 
 Family of the Seleucidee, 256 Years, it was conquered by the 
 Romans, and reduced into the Form of a Roman Province, wherein 
 were kept in Pay four Legions with their Auxiliaries, for the De- 
 fence of the Country. But tho' the Conftantinopolitan Emperors, 
 who govern'd it many Years, rather increafed than 
 diminilhed any Part of its Strength, yet, when the A. D. 
 fatal Time came, it fell into the Hands of the Saracens, 636. 
 under the Conduct of Omar their third Sovereign, and 
 continued under their Dominion, till Tangrolipix the Turk, having 
 conquered Perfia, and the Provinces on this Side the Euphrates, 
 palled over into Syria, and made himfelf alfo Mailer of moll Part 
 of that Country. But Haalon the Tartar fubdued the 
 Kingdom, and put an End to the Turkijh Kingdom of 1262. 
 Syria. It did not hold long in the Hands of the Tar- 
 tars, it being recover'd from them in a Ihort time by the Mama- 
 lukes of Egypt j and from them once more regained by 
 the Great Tamerlane, who, with a prodigious Army, 1400. 
 befieged and took Damafcus, and put all the People to 
 
 D d 4 t> 2
 
 4 oS Prefix /^V/?/ Turkey k Afia. f&ajl, 
 
 the Swotd. $ut the Isiamahikes recovered it again by degrees* 
 
 and repair'd Damafcus, which continued in their Power 
 
 1516. t'\\[ 1 5 16, when SAymus, Emperor of the Turks, 4^ 
 
 featea Cym/ov Gaurus in the Fields of Ahppg ; upon 
 
 which S>/'/r7 remained to the Tar/-/'* an< J hfts continued in Jtj^eif 
 
 Ifc'nds to this Day. 
 
 The firft King of Troy, 'tis faid, was Dardq/ius, abppt the 
 Year cf the Wojld 2574, whofe Succchbrs were Erichtpvius, 
 T/os, JJia, Laomedon, and Priutnus, under whofl? Troy 
 The r.;i- was -taken and d ilroy'd by the Grecians, after ten Years 
 iient W.W- This Territory, in Procefs of Tini, became 
 
 Kingdoif frbjeft to Alexander the Great, and afterwards X9 Lyji~ 
 of Troy, mactfus King of Thrace. In the Djiiribution of the 
 Roman Empire it made Part of the Province of Hellef- 
 pontus ; after which, following the Fortune of ConfuintinopUf 
 till the taking of that 0ty by the Latines, it became 
 A. D. then fubjecl: to the Greek Emperors, but was .conquered 
 1200. after\vards by the Turks. Lydia was an antient King- 
 dom ; C reef us, the ]ajj King, was totally defeated by 
 Lydia. Cyrus King of Perjia ; and Ljdia was made a PerfiaK 
 A. M. Province. After the breaking of the Macedonian En? .- 
 34.20. pire, it fell to the .Share of the teleucidan Kings of 
 Syria ; then it became a Roman Province ; arid, upon 
 the Fall of the Greek Empire, became (ubjecjt to the Turks, who 
 are now in Poifeilion of it. Arijouius made ibnie firuggle tp re- 
 
 Sycr the Kingdom of Pergamus out of the Hands of 
 c Rowans ; but, being fubdued by them, and fettled 
 rnus. as a Province, it continued under the Roman E^nperprs, 
 
 till the Tranflation of the Imperial Seat to Lonjiunti- 
 nopl? ; and, after that, to the Emperors of the Eafl, till conquer'd 
 
 by degrees by the Turks, pontv.s was aqtiently a par-- 
 Pontus. tjcular Kmgdom, govern'd by its own Prince:-, whofe 
 
 Succefiion has been much interrupted, and very uncerT 
 taia. Mitfrridutes the Great, King of Pcn/us, renewing a War 
 with the Romans, had great Succefs at frit ; but Luadlus defeated 
 him feveral times. Not difcouraged wifh hjs Misfortunes, he 
 rajfed another powerful Army ; but was defeated by Powpey, and 
 loll all his Troops. After this, Pontus was reduced into the Form 
 
 of a Reman Province. Bitbjnia was govern'd antiently 
 Bithy- by its own Kings, but the Succcihons arp very ur.cer- 
 nia. tain. Nicomcdes IV. \y^s the lait Kirg of Rithyniq, 
 
 who was driven out of his Dominions by Mithrijates 
 King of Pont us ; but reibr'd to them again by the Romans. This 
 Prince had a great Share in the Favour of Julius Carfar ; but, 
 dying without Iifue Twenty-five Years before Chriil, lie left the 
 Rsmapj Heirs to hii Dominions, Bi!h^:ia fell in time to the 
 
 , Share,
 
 C^ap. KYI!*. Prefmt State of Turkey in Afia. 439 
 
 Share & the Eftftern E^ptfe, a^ at la# under the Power of tits 
 
 Jurkj, who gifl ijy it. Cappadxia ;bad formerly 
 
 lie Tjflf of a ^Hg^pni : Ariar&hes V'. l&|ed -<f<*9- 1 330. 
 
 cbus iying of ftr*q agaip.U tlve Romans itut. upon the 
 
 |efei of 4>:titchus, iie made bis Pe* wiah JRo/r/* Ariebar* 
 
 t^v-v,, kejng hofen fcing f Caffadocifl, was attacked by figrants 
 
 King of Armenia* and MifJ\id&tes King of /W*/ ; 
 but, fining himfelf.too weak for them, reti^'d >t0 ^ev^ * Cappa* 
 where be ila> t^, till 6>//, having defeated Tigta/ies, .dock. 
 re*iored him to his Throne > but, bjjjng .wee nwe de- 
 throned, he was re^ibiblifhed by Pmpty. After the Death of 
 this Prince, and of his brother Jrartbts, Arcbelam obtained the 
 Crown ky fhs favour of frfari dntfitty. This Kingdom held 
 aboyt 476 Year.*, and afterwards the Romans reduced it into a 
 Province, and govern \i it by Procon&Js ; after which it became 
 Part of the Eaitern Empire, and continued tUI the Encftiag of 
 tj>e new Empire pf Trebijmd.. The Latins took Con- 
 JiantinapU in j 200, and, diy*diflg the Empire among Trebir 
 them, the greatgil Part of it feJJ to die Share of Baldwin foud. 
 Earl of Hainouit and Nawtr, with the Tide of Emperor. 
 Alexis Co/nnnus, Crrandfon to the great Tyrant Andronicus Com- 
 nenut, led to Tvgbifond in Potus, and there fst up a new Empire 
 over Q(tppad>cia, GaJatia, ai>d thpfe Parts of Pontus, where hut 
 Poilerjty pre&iyed the M^ije/ty of the Empire till the Time of 
 Pa-vid, Ih4 bit Emperor of frcbi/ond, who was conquered by 
 Mahomet the Great, Sultan of the 7#>ir in 14.61. when he had 
 reigned but a ihort time : The poor f.ir.perpr himfelf was cruelly 
 murder 'd, and hja feven Sons were nil flain by the Conqueror, be- 
 caufe they would not renounce the Chrirtjan ReUgion, and turn 
 Mabpwetam ; and with them ended the noble Family of the Cm* 
 icni, aod the Empire of 'Trebifwd, after it had lafted near 260 
 Years. 
 
 I come now to fay fomething of the Origin and Hiftory of the 
 Turks, the preient Mailers of thefe fine Countries. Hiflorians 
 have aingned. Seythia to be the Country of this People ; 
 which yet being as obfeure as the Time they firri left it, The 
 which i'omc will have to be in 755 and ^44, all that Turkilk 
 tan be laid of Certainty concerning them ie, that after Empire. 
 they had plundered Georgia, and grown terrible to their 
 Neighbours in Turcomunia, they tnter'd into Pirfia in the Year 
 1000, and remained Sovereigns of it till about the Year 1260; 
 Wheji another Swarm of Tartars, or Scythians, broke into Per/ia, 
 and reduced the Turks to a very low Ebb, pollening themfelves of 
 Pcifta, AJJyria, and the letter AJia. There were, it feems, at 
 thin t;:ne, two great Turkijb Families in Perfia, vii. the Sel- 
 zuccinn, of which Tangrelipix was, and the Qgyiian. The Stl- 
 
 xuccian
 
 410 Prefent State *f Turkey in Alia." Part II. 
 
 xucciaii was intirely fuppreffed by the Tartars ; but Ottoman, wh 
 defcended from the Ogyzian Family, reftor'd his Family, and the 
 Turkifb Nation, to their former Grandeur. From him it is that 
 the Empire obtained the Name of Ottoman ; and the prefent 
 Grand Signor deduces his Pedigree from this Prince. But to 
 be a little more particular in fome of the principal Events : Ba- 
 jazet, by his Cruelty, forcM many of his Subjects to retire to- 
 Samarchand, the Court of Tamerlane ; after which a War broke 
 out between Bajazet and the Tartars. Tamerlane marched with. 
 his whole Army, confiding of 400000 Horfe, and 600000 Foot, 
 and laid Siege to Sivas in Cappadocia ; which he took, and put 
 not only all the Garrifon to the Sword, but even the Governor 
 Orthabules, Bajazefs Son : This made Bajazet, as he marched, 
 and heard a Shepherd merrily tune his Pipe, as he kept his Flock, 
 fiighingly fay, O happy Shepherd, thou haji ?teither Orthobules nor 
 Sivas to lofe / The reft of the Cities, as Tamerlane advanc'd, fur- 
 rendered to him, who ufed the Chriftians very kindly. After he 
 had (Tain 1 00000 Men in Armenia, he met with Bajazet near 
 Aagouri, at the Head of 300000 Horfe and 200000 Foot. Thefe 
 great Monarchs came to a Battle near Mount Stella j 
 1397. wherein Tamerlane, having killed 200000 of his Ene- 
 mies, gained a complete Viftory. Bajazet maintained 
 the Engagement very gallantly ; but his Men, being overpower"d 
 by the Number of his Enemies, gave way ; and this Prince him- 
 felf, endeavouring to make his Efcape, fell into the Hands of 
 Tamerlane's General, who was a Chrillian, to whom Bajazet 
 furrender'd himfelf, fuppofing him to be Tamerlane in Perfon : His 
 Son Alufa, and feveral other Commanders, were alfo taken Pri- 
 foners. Bajazet being brought before Tamerlane, and ftill retain- 
 ing his haughty Temper, and fliewing no Signs of Submiflion, the 
 Conqueror told him it lay in his Power to take away his Life ; to 
 which Bajazet anfwer'd, he might do it, for that Lofs would be 
 his greateft Happinefs : And Tamerlane afking him, What he 
 nvoulu have done to him, if it had been his Misfortune to have 
 fallen into his Hands, as it nvas notv his evun? 1 would, faid 
 Bajazet, have inchfed thee in an Iron Cage, and fo in Triumph 
 have carried thee in this Condition through all Afia. Even fo % 
 faid Tamerlane, fbalt thou be ferved: Then turning about to his 
 Retinue, Behold, faid he, a proud, cruel Man ; he deferves to be 
 chaftifed accordingly, and made an Example to all the World of the 
 jujl Difpleafitre of God againfi him. Then he was expofed upon 
 an old Mule to the View and Scorn of all his Troops ; and, his 
 Infolence not abated by his Misfortunes, he punifhed him with the 
 fame Punifhment he defigned him. Hiftorians differ about the 
 Manner of his Death : Some fay he beat out his Brains againft 
 the Bars of the Iron Cage ; others, that he fharpen'd a FifiYs 
 
 Bone
 
 Chap. XVHI. PrefetU State of Turkey in Afia. 411 
 
 Bone with his Teeth, which had been thrown at him by a Slave; 
 and, piercing his own Throat with it, fo died. When Tamerlane 
 returned home, there arofe great Contefts between Bajazefs Sons 
 about the Father's Succefiion. In the Year 1487. Bajazet II. 
 lent a ftrong Army to invade Syria, then belonging to the Saltan 
 of Egypt, but with ill Succefs : However Bajazet was not dif- 
 couraged, but fent a mighty Power, both by Sea and Land, to 
 profecute the fame War againft the Egyptians ; who, being come 
 into Ci/icia, though they knew themfelves to be much inferior to 
 the Turks, yet they gave the Enemy Battle, which was managed 
 with wonderful Conduct and Bravery on both Sides, till the whole 
 Day was fpent j when both Armies, wearied and weakened, tho* 
 not overcome, retir'd to their refpe&ive Camps. But the Mama- 
 iukes finding all their Carriages, with their Provifion and other 
 Neceflaries loft, and being made defperate thereby, renewed the 
 Battle early next Morning with more Refolution and Fiercenefs 
 than before. The Janizaries and Mamalukes, in Emulation to 
 one another's Bravery, were forced to retire to their Camps by 
 the Approach of Night. But the Turki/h Bafhas, finding two 
 Thirds wanting of 1 00000, fled in the Night, leaving their Tents 
 and much Provifion behind them ; while the Egyptians, at the 
 fame time, having loft one half of their Army, retired to Mount 
 Taurus, with the Honour of a great Victory, tho' they did not 
 at firft perceive it ; after which a Peace enfued between the two 
 Monarchs. I pafs on to Morat, or Amurath, who having thought 
 fit to make a Peace with Perjia, which was foon broken, 
 Morat; in Perfon, marched into the Eajl, entered Ar- 1635. 
 menia, and, upon a Review, found^ his Army to confift 
 of 300000 Men. He took Revan', then, marching farther into 
 Perfia, he mult miferably wafted and deftroyed the Country, tho' 
 not without frequent and bloody Rencounters with the Pc.jian 
 Horfe, and others from the Mountains ; and at laft his Army was 
 fo diftreffed for want of Refiefhments, that they were fore'd to 
 retire to the Country of Tauris ; which, being alfo harraJTed like 
 the reft, caufed a miferable Famine, and great Mortality, in the 
 Camp ; at which the Sultan was fo incenfed, that he gave up 
 Tauris to the Plunder of his Soldiers. Morat had not long been 
 returned home, but he received the unwelcome News, that the 
 Perfians had regained Bcvan ; upon which the Grand Vifier 
 having received Orders to befiege Bagdat, the Soldiers unani- 
 mously refufed to march any further than Erzervm. Tho' there 
 were Negotiations of Peace on Foot between Morat and 
 the Perfian in this Conjuncture, the Sultan refolved 1638. 
 on another Expedition into the Eaft, and to befiege 
 Babylon, which he inverted with a great Army. The Place had 
 30000 Men in Garrifon, againft which Morat fired the firft Can- 
 * fioa
 
 4-i z Prefimt Sme a/ Turkey in Alia. Part II. 
 
 Hon with his own Hand ; and,, indeed, during the whole Siege 
 jjever fpared himfelf, but every.-where performed the Pant of a 
 .General, and a private Soldier, as he fa,w Qccafion. The Ram- 
 parte were foiced, in a general AfTault, on Chriftnws-day y with 
 incredible Bravery, and as flout Reftftance. Amuratb, having 
 his Mind fweeten'd with fo noble a Conqueft, ordered the Slaugh- 
 ter fhould ceafe, and the lives of the Inhabitants be fpared ; bat, 
 when his Grand Vifier remonftrated the Danger fuch Clemency 
 might he to fo numerous an Epemy, the Sultan ordered moil of 
 the Garrifon and the Inhabitants to be killed in cold Blood ; and, 
 jnaking his Entry in.to the City j^r the warm Bodies of the Slain, 
 commanded that they mould remain unburied, that a Perfian Em- 
 hafiador, whom he expe&ed, might be terrified at the horrid 
 Spectacle of fo great a Slaughter. .However, this Expedition 
 Coil Amuratb dear ; for, in the Review he made of his Army, he 
 found he had loft iooooo Men. Having made Peace with the 
 Per/ians, he returned home, and died in 1-64.0. We come now to 
 
 Sultan Muftapka, -who made a Peace with the Chriftian 
 1699. Powers that had fo long been at War with him, and 
 
 who continued in Amity with Ji the Princes of Afia ; 
 and vvho was himfelf dethroned in 1 703. when there was the leaJl 
 Appearance .pf it. For an Infurreclion be gan at Qmftantinople by 
 2^0 Soldiers only, belonging to the Artillery ; they mutinied for 
 their Pay, and .march M with Banners difplayed to Etmeitan, where 
 the Janizaries ufually rendezvous, and whither the Rabble flocked 
 together to the Number of 5000. They difpacched thirty Perfans 
 to Adrianople, to invite the Grand Signor to come to Cotijlanti- 
 nople, and to remove from him fome Perfons whom they dilliked- 
 Not having Patience to wait for the Return of their Deputies, 
 and their Number increafing, they refolved to march to ddrianople.* 
 and not to lay down their Arms, or feparate, till they had the 
 Heads of the Mufti and Grand Vifier, which lall marched to give 
 the Rebels Battle. Accordingly he fet his Janizaries to work to 
 break up Ground, and they went about it without any murmur- 
 ing ; but the Grand Vifier retiring to his Tent to hold a Council 
 of War, the Janizaries began to afk one another, Againft whom 
 they were employed to entrench themfelves r Was it againft Ene- 
 mies ? Was it not againft their Brethren \ Upon this they threw 
 down their Spades and Pick-axes, and, taking up their Arms, ran 
 to the Grand Vifier's Tent, and fired into it.; but he, with fome 
 of the principal Officers, found means to make their Efcape. 
 The Grad Signor, who was coming to the Grand Vifier's 
 Camp, hearing what had happened, made, hafte to Adrianople j 
 and, divefling himfelf of his Imperial Dignity, refign'd it to his 
 Brother Achmet. Within a Day or two the two Armies of the 
 Mutineers join'd, and approyed and confirmed rjie Succeffion of 
 
 Acbmn
 
 Chap 1 . XVIII. Prefint Stat<r of Turkey in Afia. 41 3 
 
 Axbmet with Demonflrations of intire Satisfaction. But many 
 eminent Perfons were either put to Death, or fled. 
 
 Trade.] There is a confiderable Trade carried on at Bagdat ; 
 this City being fupplied with all the Merchandize of the Eafl by 
 way of Bojfora, which Hands towards the Mouth of the united 
 Streams of Tigris and Euphrates, and annually vifited by the 
 Caravans from Aleppo and Smyrna,- and the Weftern Part of the 
 Turkijb Empire ; whereby it is furniihed with the Produce of thofe 
 Countries. The Shipping ufually arrive at Bofibra from the 
 Beginning of July to October, when the Monfoon ferves to bring 
 them in ; and, during thefe four Months, the Town is crouded 
 with Foreigners from moil Parts of the World, who come hither 
 to trade. From Bagdat to Boffora the Tigris will carry large 
 Boats ; nor are there any Cataracts to hinder the Navigation. 
 The Vefll-ls are about ten Days going down, and there are Vil- 
 lages on the Shore, where Provisions may be had at very eafy 
 Rates. When an European Ship arrives at Scanderoon, the Factors, 
 who refide at this Port, immediately fend Advice of it to Aleppo, 
 by a Letter faitened to a Carrier Pigeon, which has been bred 
 there, and flies home in four or five Hours, which is three mode- 
 rate Days Journey for a Horfe. There are great Quantities of 
 rich Merchandizes daily tranfported to and from Perjia, Arabia, 
 and Tartary, through Turkey in Afia, by Caravans of Camel's 
 and Mules. England fends to thefe Parts, Cloth, Stuffs, Perpe- 
 tuanas, Haberdafhers Wares, Clock-work, Tin, Lead, and fomc 
 Iron ; alfb French and Lifion Sugars, and Bullion; all carried in 
 our own Bottoms ; for, as has been obferved before, the Turks 
 fend no Ships into the Ocean, or to any Nation of different Faith. 
 We take from thefe Parts Raw Silk, of the Product of Perfia, 
 Carpets, Sec. as mention'd under the Head of Trade in Chap. IV- 
 
 See the refpective Heads in Chap. XIV. 
 
 Curiosities.} In the Southern Parts of Palcfiinc is Afphaltis, 
 that noted Lake oijudea, where the Cities of Sodom and Gomorrah 
 formerly flood ; otherwife called the Dead Sea, and remarkable at 
 prclent for abundance of fulphurous Vapours. In and about 
 yerufalem are the following Particulars ; <vi%. the Judgment Gate, 
 through which our Saviour parted, bearing his Crofs to Mount 
 Cahary, (o called bceaufe Malefactors went out of it to the Place 
 of Execution. Strangers are (hewn the Palaces of Herod and 
 4 Pilate,
 
 414 Prefent State of Arabia. Part II. i 
 
 Pilate, which are but ordinary Fabrics at prefent, as alfo the 
 Houfes of Martha and Mary, and Annas the High-Prieft ; the 
 Place where St. Peter wept upon the Denial of his Matter, and 
 where Judas the Traitor hanged himlelf for betraying him. 
 Upon Mount Sion are ftill to be feen the Ruins of the Tower of . 
 David, which was once a Building of great Strength and Beauty- 
 Travellers are alfo (hewn the Tomb of Zachary, near the Brook 
 Cedron ; and the Sepulchre of Lazarus at the Town of Bethany. 
 Thefe and many more Curiofities are fully defcribed by Sandys, 
 Thevenot, and other Travellers in the Holy-Land. About four 
 Miles from Palmira In Syria is a large Valley of Salt, which is 
 thought to be that mentioned 2 Sam. viii. 1 3. where David Tmote 
 the Syrians. In Aleppo are two fair MSS. of the Gofpels, writ- 
 ten on large Parchment Sheets in Syrian Characters. In the Eafl- 
 mofl Part of Scandaroon Bay is a" ruinous old Building, known 
 commonly by the Name of Jonah's Pillar, ere&ed, as 'tis faid, 
 in that very Place where the Whale vomited him up. In Arabia 
 Petrara, is the noted Mountain of Sinai, called by the Arabians 
 the Mountain of Mofes : At the Foot of which is a pleafant Con- 
 vent, from whence there was formerly a Way up to the Top, by 
 1400 Steps, cut out of the firm Rock, at the Charge and Direc- 
 tion of the virtuous Helena, Mother of Conjlantine the Great ; 
 the Marks of which Steps are vifible to this Day. At Ephefus 
 are yet to be feen feme antient Chriftian Churches, particalarly 
 that of St. John, now converted into a Mahometan Mofque. Alfo 
 a large Heap of {lately Ruins, generally reckoned thofe of the 
 once magnificent Temple of Diana, the great Goddefs of the 
 Ephejians. About 30 Miles from Bagdat is the Sepulchre of the 
 Prophet Ezekiel, which is yearly vifited by the Jews . of Bagdat 
 with great Devotion. 
 
 CHAP. XIX. 
 
 the Prefent State of A r a b i a. 
 
 Boundaries.] /JRAB I A is bounded by Palefline, Syria, and 
 Diarbecl (or Mefopotamia) towards the North, 
 by the Ocean towards the South, by the Red-Sea towards the Welt, 
 and by the Gulph of Perjia and Eyrick Arabic (or Chaldea) to- 
 wards the Eaft. 
 
 Situation.] This Country is fituated between 12 Deg. 30. 
 Min. and 32 Deg. 30 Min. North Latitude, and between 34 and 
 
 16
 
 Chap. XIX. Piefent State of Aarbia. 415 
 
 6 Degrees Eaft Longitude, reckoning from the Meridian of London. 
 1 he Length whereof is 1430 Miles, and the Breadth 1080 Miles. 
 The Boundaries of each refpedlive Kingdom in Arabia Deferta 
 are very uncertain, or rather there are no Boundaries at all ; for 
 the inland Parts are under the Government of abundance of petty 
 Princes, who march from Place to Place, and encamp according 
 as they can find Water and Pafture for their Cattle. As to thole 
 Princes who live in Arabia Felix, their Dominions are tolerably 
 well known, and are as in the following Table. 
 
 Divifion. I Chief Towns. Diftance and Bearing 
 
 1 . Hagiaz, 
 
 a moft fruitful Soil, 
 producing many va- 
 luableDrugs,Fruits, 
 6V. 
 
 2. Tehama. 
 
 This is fuppofed 
 by many to be the 
 Country of the Sa- 
 beans, whofe Qu en 
 came to vlfaSolomon. 
 A Country remark- 
 ably rich in Frank - 
 incenfe, Myrrh, cif c . 
 
 3. Moco. 
 
 4. Hadramut. 
 
 5. Careffen , and 
 Seger, or Seer, 
 make up two King- 
 doms or Provinces. 
 
 *Mecca 
 Medina 
 Sidin 
 
 Sibit 
 
 Haran 
 
 Ghalafecla 
 
 Mocv 
 
 Aden 
 
 Abra 
 
 Sana 
 
 Hadramut 
 
 Araqui 
 
 Maculla 
 
 Haftvell 
 
 Dofar 
 
 Mirabat 
 
 700 SE ofjerufalent. 
 4 jW W } ofMw 
 
 4 1 o S of Mecca 
 180 SE of Sedin 
 65 S of Sibit 
 
 1 20 S of Sibit 
 I IO E of Moco 
 
 ivt r of Aden 
 
 120 N J 
 
 200 NE } re- 
 
 60S i san * 
 
 60 NE of Araqui 
 1 70 NE of Maculla 
 1 20 NE of Hafwell 
 35 E of Dofar 
 
 * Mecca is a moft wealthy and populous City, being the grand c taple of Trade 
 for the rich Commodities of Arabia, Egypt, Pcrfia, Mia, Sec. Medina is 
 alfo a rich City, much frequented by Pilgrims, as well as Mecca. Sibit is the 
 greateft Mart in the World for Frankincenfe, Myrrh, and other rich Drugs of 
 thii Country. Moco, a very populous trading Town, affords the Europeans 
 chiefly Coffee, which jtowj hereabouts, and no where elfc that we know of. 
 
 Diviljpn.
 
 4*6- 
 
 Pre/em Si ale 
 
 Divifion 
 
 
 Chief Towns. 
 
 6. Oman, or 
 
 Muf. 
 
 IStihan 
 
 cat, is the largeft 
 and moft confider- 
 
 Mufcat 
 Hafen 
 
 able Kingdom of 
 Arabia. 
 
 Hannin 
 Ganca 
 
 
 
 Sohar 
 
 
 
 Jtdpbar 
 EUatiff 
 
 7. yamama. 
 
 
 yamama 
 
 
 
 Httjor 
 Tuna 
 
 of Arabia. Part 1L 
 Diftance and Beating. 
 
 of Niban 
 
 60 NE of Mirahat 
 
 400 NE 
 
 70 NE 
 
 160 NE of #4/2* 
 
 120 S > c - - 
 
 130 NW \ *JfcW 
 
 130 E of S'c^ar 
 350 E oiyulpbar 
 I OO S of Ekatiff 
 
 8 5 W i rf yamama 
 
 Climate.] The Air, in the Northern Parts of Arabia, \i very 
 hot during the Summer, the Heavens being feldom overcalt ; but' 
 it is much more temperate towards the Southern Parr?, be- 
 ing qualified by refrefhing DeWs, which frequently fall there. In 
 the Northern Parts are found neither Men nor Beafts, Bird? or 
 Trees, Grafs or Palfcires; and nothing to be feen but rolling 
 Sands, or craggy Mountains ; the Rivers are but few in Number, 
 and thofe fhallow and fmall, and Rain is feldom feen there. Bur/ 
 the Sea-coafts, and Banks of Rivers, in the Sduthem Parts, or 
 Arabia Felix, afford a better Soil : There the Grourfd yield's Aro- 
 matic Plants, and delicious Fruits, Aloes, Caffia, Spikenard, Car- 
 damum, Cinnamon, Pepper, Dates, Oranges, Lemons, &*c. 
 Frankincenfe, Myrrh, and other valuable Gums. Honey and 
 Wax are alfo plentiful in this Country ; and in their Seas they 
 jfifh up the beft' Coral and Pearls ; they have likevvife Corn, Wine, 
 and Cattle, in great Plenty. The longeit Day in the Northermofi 
 Part is 14 7 Hours, and in the molt Southern Part 12^ Hours ; 
 therefore- this Country' lies in the 2d, 3d; 4th, and 5th North 
 Climates. 
 
 Government.] The Tnland Country is under the'Govemmertt 
 of abundance of petty Arabian Princes, who march from Place to- 
 Place, and encamp according^ they find Water, and Pafturefor their 
 Cattle. As to the Form of Government and Laws, what' I can 
 learn of them is, that the Princes of the Kingdoms lying upon 
 the Coafts are abfolute-j both in Spirituals and Temporals, and the 
 Succeffion hereditary ; thar they have no other Laws than what 
 are to be found in the Alcoran, and the Comments upon it. The 
 Princes lying near Turkey are tributary to the Turk ; but it is cer- 
 tain- they receive large Gratuities from this Monarch, for protect- 
 ing the Pilgrims that pafs thro' their Country : And the Grand 
 $ig*jr is always glad to have a good Undemanding with them ; 
 
 for
 
 
 Chap. XIX. Pre/tot Slate of Arabia. 417 
 
 for it is in their Power to do his Subjects a great deal of Mifchief, 
 by their Excurfions and Robberies, and very difficult to punifh 
 them for it : For tho' the Arabians are not a Match for the 'Turk 
 in open Field, yet it would deftroy the beft Armies to purfue them 
 thro' their Deferts, where there are no Towns, no Provifions, and 
 where there is fcarce any Water to be met with, and the Heat in- 
 fupportable to any but the Natives ; and this is the true Reafon, that 
 the greateft Part at Arabia was never conquer'd. We have faid, that 
 the Saracens were a People of Arabia, but there is nothing certain 
 that can be faid of the antient Hiltory of this Country ; however, 
 all Hiftorians agree, that Omar fubdued, or, at leaft, made Tri- 
 butaries, Damajcus, Pbarnicia, Mr/opstamia, Syria, Ptrfia, Egypt ; 
 and that he took the City of Jerufalem, and died about the Year 
 643. Ofman, his Succeflbr, fubdued all Africa> took Tyre> 
 Cyprus, and Rhodes, and laid all Sicily defolate. I pafs on to 
 Hifcham, Sur named Abul Walid, in whole Time the Saracens be- 
 fieged Ctcfarca in Cappadocia, and made frequent Excurfions into 
 Thrace ; but the Greeks, fome time after, recovered Armenia. 
 The Saracens, who had conquer'd Spain, invaded France - t and, 
 advancing as far as Tours, there they receiv'd a mod 
 terrible Defeat ; for 'tis faid the Saracens loft near A. D. 
 375000 Men : However, they return'd a fecond 730. 
 time into France, and received feveral other Defeats 
 and Loffes. In the Reign of Abu-Jaafer the Turks ra- 753. 
 vaged all Armenia, and defeated the Saracens in divers 
 Battles. About the Year 833, the Power of the Saracens became 
 fo broken and divided every-where, that they were now nothing 
 near fo confiderable as before ; and at laft the Turks quite became 
 their Mailers, about the Year 1008. 
 
 Tiade.] This Country is famous for Coffee, with which 
 abundance of Ships for Europe and India are loaden every. Yeat ; 
 befides a vaft Quantity fent to Turkey. The Arabians alfo trade 
 in other excellent Commodities ; fuch as Myrrh, Manna, Caffia 
 Incenfe, Aloes, Olibanum, Balm, Franklncenie, befides feveral 
 other valuable Drugs. There are likewife great Quantities of 
 rich Merchandizes tranfported to and from Arabia, thro' Turkey 
 in Afia % Perfia, and Tartary. 
 
 Revenues.] As to the Revenues, 'tis faid, the Kings command 
 the Purfes of their Subjects as the Neceffity of Affairs requires. 
 
 Forces.] It does not appear, that they have any ftanding 
 regular Forces, but the Kings command boih the Purfes and 
 Perfons of their Subjects whenever they fee fit. 1 he mod pottn4 
 Monarch by Sea, u the King of Oman or Mufcat, who is indeed 
 
 e become
 
 4i 8 Prefent State of Arabia. Part II. 
 
 become very formidable, not only to the Afiatks, but to the 
 Europeans themfelves. Mr. Lockhart informs us, there were no 
 lefs than fourteen Sail of Men of War in the Mole at Mufcat 
 when he was there, befides twenty Merchant Men : That one of 
 their Men of War carried feventy Guns, and none of them lefs 
 than twenty : There were, it feems, at the fame time, fifteen 
 or fixteen Sail of their Men of War cruifmg abroad. 
 
 Character.] The Arabians are faid to be brave, of a civil 
 and honeft Deportment to all forts of People ; but this is meant 
 tf thofe near Mufcat. For the Natives in general, of the other 
 Parts of Arabia are not more taken notice of for their Rambling 
 from Place to Place, than they are for their Thieving, which is 
 both by Sea and Land; and that not in fmall Parties only, but by 
 public Authority, in a manner, with their Princes at the Plead of 
 them. The Arabians are of a middle Stature, thin, and of a 
 fwarthy Complexion ; and black Hair, and black Eyes, are 
 common to them, with other People in the fame Climate. The 
 antient Natives were famous for their Knowledge in the Mathe- 
 matics ; but the prefent Arabians, 'tis thought, know very little 
 of the Matter. 
 
 Religion.] The fober Part of the Arabians profefs the 
 Doctrine of Mahomet, whofe Hiltory we have given in the four- 
 teenth Chapter, under the Head of Religion. This Country was 
 formerly bleffed with the Light of the Gofpel, having received it 
 in the Time of the Apoftles. 
 
 Customs.] The Habit of the roving Arabs is a kind of blue 
 Shirt, tied about with a white Sain or Girdle, and fome of them 
 have a Veft of Firs or Sheep-fkins over it. They 
 Drefs. wear alfo Drawers, and fometimes Slippers, but no 
 Stockings, and have a Cap or Turbant on their Heads ; 
 many of them go almoft naked, but the Women are fo wrapped 
 up, that nothing can be difcern'd but their Eyes. Their Food 
 is Beef, Mutton, Goats Flelh, Venifon, and Camels Flefh, which 
 they eiteem more than any other ; and they make thin Cakes of 
 Flour and Water inftead of Bread : But many of them 
 Food choofe dried Dates before them : They eat alfo molt 
 and forts of Fifh, except fuch as have no Scales. But what- 
 Liquors. ever Animals they eat, they are very careful to have 
 the Blood well drain'd out. The Natives about Mufcat 
 not only abftain from Wine, as the greateft Part of the Mahome- 
 tans do, but deny themfelves even Tea and Coffee, and other in- 
 nocent Liquors : Nor do they indulge themfelves in Smoaking 
 Tobacco. Water is their ordinary Drink, or a Sherbet made of 
 
 Oranges,
 
 Chap. XIX. Prefent State of Arabia.' 4ip 
 
 Oranges, Water and Sugar. There are no Roads laid 
 out in this Country, but the Caravans travel over fandy Travel- 
 Deferts, where there is no manner of Track, guiding ling. 
 themfelves by aCompafs, as at Sea, or elfe by the Stars ; 
 for they travel chiefly in the Night, on account of the Heats. 
 People choofe to travel with the Caravans, in which are frequently 
 two or three hundred Men, and, perhaps, aTnoufand Beafts, of all 
 Kinds, in order to fecure themfelves from the thievifh Arabs. 
 There are no Wheel Carriages in this Country ; all their Mer- 
 chandizes are Ioaden upon Camels or Dromedaries ; both which 
 will kneel down to take up their Burden, and will, upon Occa- 
 fion, travel five or fix Days without drinking. Here are no Inns 
 to bait at, but thofe who travel with the Caravans carry their 
 Provifions and Tents with them. They alfo carry Water with 
 them ; for fometimes they do not meet with any in feveral Days 
 travelling. It is an Obfervation among the Arabs, that where- 
 ever there are Trees, the Water is not far off; and when they 
 draw near a Pool, their Camels will fmell it at a Diftance, and 
 fet up their great Trot till they come to it. 
 
 Curiosities.] At Mecca is a Turkijb Mofque, fo glorious, 
 that it is reckon'd the ftatelieft of any in the World ; to which 
 every Muffulman is obliged, by the Mahometan Religion, to come 
 once in his Life-time, or to fend a Deputy. At Medina is alfo 
 a ftately Mofque, fupported by two Pillars, and furnifhed with 
 300 Silver Lamps, and call'd by the Turks, Moji Holy, becaufe 
 in it is the Coffin of their Prophet Mahomet, cover'd over with 
 Cloth of Gold, under a Canopy of Cloth of Silver, curioufly 
 embroider'd. 
 
 CHAP. XX. 
 
 The Prefent State ^/Persia. 
 
 Boundaries.] THE Boundaries of Perjia (known to the An* 
 tients by the fame Name, are generally faid to 
 be India towards the Eaft, the Ocean and Gulph ot' Perjia towards 
 the South, the Turkijb Empire in Afia towards the Welt, and the 
 Ca/pian Sea, and River Oxus, towards the North. 
 
 Situation.] This Country is fituated between 25 and 45 Deg. 
 North Latitude; and between 45 and 67 Deg. Eaft Longitude, 
 reckoning from the Meridian of London. The Length whreof is 
 1300, and Breadth 1060 Miles. 
 
 E c 3 There
 
 426 
 
 Prefent State of Perfia,. 
 
 Part II. 
 
 There are fcaree any two Geographers who agree, either in the Names, 
 Number, or Situation of the Perfian Provinces. I mall comprehend them all 
 in twelve Diftri&s, as in the following Table. 
 
 Diftance. 
 
 Antient Names. Ch. Towns 
 
 Perfia \ 
 
 I . Irack Agent J 
 The principal Pro- 
 vince in the Em- 
 pire. 
 
 t. Charaflan and 
 Afterabatox Khe- 
 
 TtfUS. 
 
 3. Salu/Ian, com- 
 prehending Gaur y 
 and Candahor. 
 
 4. Sigiflan 
 
 5. Maker an 
 
 6. Kerman 
 
 7. Farifian, com- 
 prehending Lar, 
 and Ormus. 
 
 8. Cbnfijlan, Part 
 to Turkey. 
 
 9. G Hatty compre- 
 hending Mazen- 
 deran or Tabri- 
 fan. 
 
 10. Adirbeitzan, 
 or Adirbajon, Part 
 to Turkey. 
 
 J I . Curdefian, of 
 which the Weft 
 belongs to Turkey 
 
 12. Shirvan, or 
 Scbir<wan, com- 
 prehending Da- 
 giftan , and the 
 Perfian Georgia, 
 and Armenia. 
 
 This Province was 
 the antient Par- 
 thia. 
 
 Part of the antient 
 Baclria. 
 
 This Province con- 
 tains all the antient 
 Aria. 
 
 AntientDrangiaaa 
 Antient Gedrofia. 
 A ntien t Car mania. 
 This Province was 
 formerly called 
 Perfis. 
 
 Antient Sufiana. 
 
 Containing the an- 
 tient Hyrcania. 
 
 The South Part of 
 
 antient Media. 
 
 Antiently the 
 Kingdom of AJfy- 
 ria. 
 
 Shirvan proper 
 contains a great 
 Part of antient 
 Media ; the reft 
 you have in Turkey 
 in Afia. 
 
 Ifpaban 
 
 Tefd 
 Hamadan 
 
 Herat 
 
 Afierabat 
 
 Gaz.no. 
 
 Bujl 
 
 Candahor 
 
 Sigijian 
 
 Makeran 
 
 Kerman 
 
 Scbiras 
 
 Gombron 
 
 Lar 
 
 Ormus 
 
 Scboulfter 
 
 Gilan 
 
 Ajherol 
 
 Ferabath 
 
 Sultania 
 
 Miana 
 
 Arnirva 
 Courmebud 
 
 Derbent 
 
 Schamachi 
 
 Baku 
 
 Tzentzeni 
 
 Diftance and Bearing. 
 
 C 1 440 W of Agra 
 \ 1 260 SE of Conftan. 
 
 280 Nw} ^Vp^an 
 
 260 E of Tefd 
 
 380 NW) , , 
 
 170E J**"* 
 
 1 60 S of Gazna 
 
 90S J 9 
 
 270 wH 5 '^** 
 
 272 W of Kerman 
 240 SE of Sciras 
 
 cttt r of Gombron 
 
 100 sw 5 
 
 1 40 W of Ifpaban 
 
 1 20 E of Hamadan 
 1 20 N of Gilan 
 20 SE of Afberol 
 
 1 00 N of Hamadan 
 40 N of Sultania 
 
 220 NW 7 rni 
 160W S iW aha * 
 
 240 N of Ajherol 
 50 S of Derbent 
 40 S of Schamachi, 
 5 o N of DerbenP 
 
 Climate.] Perfia extending from the 25th to the 45th Deg. of Latitude, 
 k. is very reaibnable to fuppofe, that the Air and Seafons are very different. 
 In the Middle of the Kingdom their Winter begins in November, and con- 
 
 1 tynues
 
 Chap. XX. Prefent State of 'Perfia. 421 
 
 t'naes till March, with fevere Frolb, and Snow, which fella in 
 great Abundance on their Mountains, but not fo much in the 
 Champain Country ; ffom the Month of March till May, the 
 Wind is afually high ; and from thence to September they have a 
 calm ferene Heaven, without fo much as a Cioud ; and tho' it be 
 pretty hot in the Day time, the refrefhing Breezes, which blow 
 conftantly Morning and Evening, as well as in the Night, make 
 the Summer very tolerable, especially fince the Nights are ten 
 Hours long. The Air is fo pure, and the Stars ftune with that 
 Luftre, that People travel much more in the Night, than in the 
 Day. In this Part of Perfia there are very feldom any Hurricanes 
 or Tempefts, and very little Thunder and Lightning } nor is it 
 fubjeft to Earthquakes ; and the Air is fo extremely dry in the fair 
 Seafon, that there is not the Ieaft Dew, or Moifture, on any 
 Thing that is laid abroad all Night, or even on the Grafs ; and it 
 very feldom rains in the Winter. No Country is more healthful 
 than the Heart of Perfia, as appears by the hale Complexion of 
 the Native*. The Air in the Southern Part of Perfia, particu- 
 larly about Gombron, is very unhealthful in the Spring and Fall : 
 The European Faftors fcarce ever pafs a Year without a dangerous 
 Fit of Illnefs, which frequently carries them off. The Months of 
 June, July, and Augufl, are healthful enough, but fo very hot, 
 that both Natives and Foreigners get up into the Mountains at that 
 Time. The hot Winds that blow from the Eaftward, over a 
 large Trac"t of fandy Deferts, are ready to fufFocate them ; and 
 fometimes there happens a peflilential Blaft, which ftrikes the 
 Traveller dead in an Inftant. It rains but very feldom here, any 
 Part of the Year, and the Water they fave then is \ery unwhol- 
 fome. The Air in the North ofPerfiais very dry and warm in th 
 Summer, but fubjeft to Storms and Tempefts in the Winter, and 
 as fevere Frofts, for fix Months, as any Country on the Continent 
 on the fame Parallel of Latitude : But as this Part of Perfia is 
 very mountainous, there is frequently a vail Difference between 
 the Air on the North and South Side of the Mountains, and a 
 few Miles travelling People think themfelves in a different Climate, 
 but however cold the Mountains in the North may be, they are 
 exceeding healthful. On the contrary, the flat Countries, which 
 lie upon the Cafpian Sea, are very damp, full of ftinking Morafles, 
 and unhealthful ; infomuch that the Inhabitants in the Summer 
 retire into the Mountains, all the Water they have being foul and 
 corrupted in the hot Seafon ; and here, 'tis faid, Earthquakes are 
 very common. The tenth Part of Perfia in general is not culti- 
 vated ; the Soil, in fome Parts, is a hard Gravel, and in others a 
 ftiff whitiffi Clay, almoft as hard as Stone ; but either of them are 
 fruitful enough when well water'd, and will bear often two Crops, 
 and fometimes three, in the Compafs of a Year. There are vaff 
 
 E e 3 fandy
 
 422 Prefent State of Perfia. Part H, 
 
 fandy Deferts, feveral Days Journey over, in this Kingdom, where 
 there is fcarce a Drop of Water to be found ; and the Land, in 
 general, upon the Frontiers, lies uncultivated, to difcourage their 
 Enemies, 'tis faid, from invading them : And, in fact, there is 
 not the Ieaft Subfiftence, for feveral Miles, whether you enter the 
 Kingdom from Turkey or India. There is not, according to the 
 beft Accounts, a Country in the World which has more Mountains, 
 and fewer Rivers, than Perfia ; and fome of their Mountains are 
 looked upon to be the highelt on the Face of the Earth : There 
 are, however, many fruitful Plains and Valleys, in which their 
 Cities Hand, which produce Plenty of Grain and Herbage ; and 
 no Country is more fruitful than the Provinces which lie upon the 
 Cafpian Sea. The other Products of Perfia are phyfical Drugs, 
 as Caffia, Sena, Antimony, Nux Vomica, Gum Armoniac, Gal- 
 banum, Sal Armoniac, and a kind of Rhubarb : The Perfian 
 Poppies are in great Eiteem, from the Quantity of Juice they 
 yield, and the Strength of it: They extract the Juice in June, 
 \vhen they are ripe : The Liquor, thus extracted, the Perfians 
 call Afion, and we, Opium. It is faid to have fuch an Effett on the 
 People employed in this Work, that they look as if they had been 
 buried, and taken up again ; and their Limbs tremble as if they 
 had the Palfy. Saffron grows plentifully in this Country, and 
 Aflafcetida is to be had everywhere almoft, which is much ad- 
 mir'd by the Natives, and frequently eaten with their Food : 
 That which to us is the moft ofFenfive of all Scents, by them is 
 cfteem'd a moft refreshing Perfume. They have good Mines of 
 Iron, Steel, Coppef, and Lead : Their Steel is fo full ef Sulphur, 
 that if the Filings are thrown into the Fire, they will give a 
 Report like Gunpowder. The Country alfo produces Saltpetre, 
 Sulphur, and Marble ; but the moft valuable Mines in Perfia are 
 thofe where the Turquois-ftones are found. There was formerly 
 the fineft Fifhery in the World for Pearls ; but it feems to be 
 wholly difus'd at prefent. Their other Commodities are curious 
 Silks, exquiiite Carpets, and Tiffues, with other Manufactures of 
 Gold and Silver, Seal-fkins, Linnen Cloth of all Sorts, csV. of 
 all which more particularly under the Head of Trade in this 
 Chapter. The longeit Day in the moft Northern Part is 15 
 Hours, and in the Southmoft 132; therefore this Country lies in 
 the 4th, 5th and 6th Northern Climates. 
 
 Government.] The Hiflory of this Country you have under 
 the Head of Government in Chap. XVI. The King of Perfia is an 
 abfoluxe Monarch, and has the Lives and Eftates of his Subjects 
 entirely at his Difpofal : There is no Prince in the World more 
 implicitly obey'd, let his Orders be never fo unjuft ; nothing can 
 ffcve the greateft Subject, if he determines to deprive him of his 
 
 Life,
 
 Chap. XX. Prefent State of Perfia. 42 3 
 
 Life, or Eftate ; neither Zeal for his Perfon, Merit, or paft Ser- 
 vices, will avail in the lead ; if he be in a Humour to ruin them, 
 it is done by a Word of his Mouth, or by a Sign ; and 'tis exe- 
 cuted in an Inftant, without any Form of Law, or Evidence of 
 the Fad. The Perfians, out of Confcience, 'tis faid, ob:y all the 
 Commands of their Prince without Referve, and believe that the 
 King's Orders ought to be obey'd, againll the very Laws of 
 Nature ; infomuch that, if the Son be commanded to be his 
 Father's Executioner, or the Father the Son's, it mull be complied 
 with. But, if he command any thing in prejudice of their Reli- 
 gion, they are not oblig'd to obey him, but ought to fuffer any 
 thing, rather than violate the Laws of God. Nothing makes the 
 Perfian Government appear more tyrannical, than the Cuftom of 
 executing the Governors of Provinces, and great Officers of State, 
 without giving them an Opportunity of making their Defence, or 
 being inform'd of the Crimes they are charged with. It is ufual 
 for the King, two or three times a Year, to fend every Governor 
 a Royal Veil ; and thefe are fent by luch Perfons the Court intends 
 a Favour to ; for the Governor, to whom they are fent, always 
 makes a confiderable Prefent to the Mefienger. When he comes 
 within two or three Miles where the Governor refides, the 
 Mefienger fends him Word to come and receive the Royal Veil ; 
 but, inftead of a fine Coat, the Governor is fometimes prefented 
 with a Halter, and is difpatch'd without any farther Ceremony. 
 This makes the Governor very watchful over his Conduct ; and 
 they are under difmal Apprehenfions, when they hear the Royal 
 Veil is coming, knowing how common it is to have their bed 
 Actions mifreprefented to their Prince. The King of Perfia has 
 no Privy Council, or Council of State ; but he afts as he is advis'd 
 by his Prime Minifler and Great Officers. The Crown of Perfia 
 is hereditary, but the Females are excluded : However, the Son of 
 a Daughter may inherit, tho' his Mother could not. What feems 
 moil particular in the Laws of Succeffion in Perfia is, that a blind 
 Man (hall not inherit ; and as thofe Males who proceed from the 
 Female Branches, are as capable of fucceeding as thofe who derive 
 themfelves from the Males, that cruel Policy of putting out the 
 Eyes of all that are allied to the Crown, is executed upon every 
 Male of the Royal Family, whether they proceed from Sons or 
 Daughters. The Perfon the King pitches upon to execute this 
 cruel Order, is not allowed to do it by holding a hot Iron to the 
 unhappy Childrens Eyes, but the very Eyeballs are fcoped clean 
 out with the Point of a Knife, by which the poor Children are 
 put to inexpreffible Torture, and fometimes lofe their Lives under 
 the Hands of thefe Butchers. The Perfians pretend to excufe this 
 barbarous Practice of putting out the Eyes of the Royal Children, 
 by telling us, that it prevents all Difputes about the Succeffion, 
 E e 4 and
 
 424 Prefent State of Perfia. Part It 
 
 and a great deal of Bloodfhed ; and that they are much mort 
 merciful than their Neighbours the Turks, who deftroy eveiy 
 Branch of the Royal Family. 
 
 What ts reported of the unnatural and cruel Practices in the 
 Haram is very mocking : So long as the King is without Children, 
 indeed every one of his Miftreffes is fond of having them, as they 
 are in hopes their Ifl'ue will fucceed to the Crown, on which their 
 Happinefs very much depends ; but when they find the King has 
 feveral Children already, they do all they can to prevent theit 
 being with Child, or to procure Abortion when it happens ; for, 
 except the firit happy Woman that has a Child, the reft, after they 
 have any, are confin'd to an Apartment, where they live in per- 
 petual Apprehenfions of having their Children murder'd, or de- 
 prived of Sight at leaft, upon barbarous Maxims of State, which 
 Icidom fail to be executed fooner or later, either in the Reign of 
 
 the prefent King, or that of his Succeffor. The Word 
 
 The Haram, it is did, fignifies facred, or prohibited. It is 
 
 tlaram. generally obferv'd, that there is no Part of the World 
 
 where the Women are fo ftrittly guarded as in Perjia. 
 Even in the Indies and Turkey, the neighbouring Kingdoms, they 
 live in Freedom in Comparifonof thefe. It cannot be fuppofed, 
 that even thefe poor Ladies, thus fhut up from all the World, and 
 ft unjuftly deprived of thofe Liberties which Nature deiign'd them, 
 can ever remain contented with it, but would make their Efcape, 
 if it was practicable. But the Perfians, among many others, give 
 this Reafbn for fhutting up their Women, namely, the Commands 
 of their Prophet Mahomet, in his laft Moments ; who, it feems, 
 was heard to fay, Take care of your Religion, and your Wives ; 
 and this, they think, is a fufficient Authority for keeping their 
 Women thus immured. They do not only build a fmgle Wall 
 therefore, but frequently have two or three about the Haram, of 
 an extraordinary Height. The Men are taught alfo, as they 
 value their Salvation, and the Glory of God, never to caft an Eye 
 upon their Neighbour's Women, or even the Places where they are 
 kept ; and if one meets the Camels which carry them in the 
 Streets, or in the Roads, tho' they are (hut up fo clofe, that it is 
 impoflible to fee them, yet People turn away their Faces, and pals 
 by at a Diftance, if it be poflible. And the Women are taught, 
 that their Honour and Virtue does not confift in keeping them- 
 felves chafte only, and fuppreffing all amorous Defires, but in pre- 
 venting their being feen, or feeing any Man but their Lord : And 
 they are accordingly prohibited to converfe with their Brothers, or 
 neareft Male Relations. Travellers affure us, that the Womens 
 Apartment is much the moft magnificent of any Part of the 
 Palace or Haram ; and that the Fair Sex have their feveral Pofts 
 and Employments here, as the Men in the. outward Palace : That 
 
 there
 
 Chap. XX. Prefent State of Perfia. 415 
 
 there are Stewards, Treafurers, Secretaries, Guards, &e. all 
 of the Fair Sex ; whofe Cabals frequently embarrafs and fruftrate 
 the beft-laid Defigns of the Ministers without. There are three 
 Ranks of Women in the Haram, namely, Firft, Princeffes, who 
 are born there : Second, Thofe by whom the King has any Chil- 
 dren, or who are his Miftreffe?, are called Catium: The Third 
 and lowefl Rank, whom the King has never taken to his Em- 
 braces, and many of whom he hardly knows, have the Title of 
 Ladies only. All the reft have the common Appellation of 
 Slaves, and are employed in fervile Offices. When a King dies, 
 thofe Ladies he has convers'd with as Wives, are (hut up in a 
 tjuartcr by themfelve*, from whence they are not permitted to ftir 
 out as long as they live, except the Mother of the fucceeding 
 Prince, who generally has a mighty Influence on Affairs, and al- 
 moft Sovereign Authority within the Limits of the Haram. 
 There are a vaft Variety of Beauties confin'd in the King's Haram % 
 for the Governors are continually fending a frefh Supply from all 
 Parts oi the Per/uin Dominions. If they have Intelligence of a 
 Beauty in any Family, they immediately demand her ; and the 
 Parents, 'tis faid, are proud of obliging their Prince ; for it is a 
 Means of raifing the whole Family, a Penfion being immediately 
 fettled upon the nearelt Relation. The Women of the Haram are 
 fometimes married to Subjects, to clear the Palace when they grow 
 too numerous ; but they feldom, or never, fend thofe out of the 
 Haram who have been with Child by the King i which is one 
 Reafon that they are not very fond of his Favours. Abbas the 
 Second, it is faid, caufed one of his beloved Miftrefles to be burnt 
 alive, becaufe fhe flighted his Embraces. He fent her Word, it 
 feems, one Evening, that he defign'd to have her Company that 
 Night. To which fhe anfwer'd, that fhe was very much indif- 
 pofed. The King hereupon deferr'd the Vifit, but went to fee 
 her the next Morning, and, finding fhe had deceived him, he fell 
 into a Pafiion, and, ordering a Fire to be made, caus'd her to be 
 burnt in his Prefcnte. The King is not a little diftra&ed fome- 
 times with the Women*. Contrivances to betray and fupplant one 
 another, if we may believe Report. When he is provoked, he will 
 order one to be confin'd, another to be beaten, and a third, of a 
 Favourite, perhaps, is turn'J among the common Slaves ; and 
 fometimes he proceeds to put rhem to Death ; fo ths* a Seraglio 
 is far from being that earthly Paradife People are apt to imagine 
 it. I come now to fpeak of the Royal Proclamation, for all Men 
 to get out of the Way when the King's Women are upon the 
 March. Thefe Ladies feldom fet out from the Haram, but in the 
 Night. The Guards fire their Mufkets a r little Intervals as they 
 March, to give notice, that the Ladies approach, and that the 
 Mm ttuift retire te a proper Difomcc. L'non the Report of the 
 
 Mufkets,
 
 426 Pre/em Stale of Perfia. Part II. 
 
 Mufkets, all Men fly away as fail as poffibly they can ; and there 
 are frequent Examples of Peoples being kill'd by the Eunuchs, 
 who have not been fo fortunate as to get out of the Way in time ; 
 for if a Man fhould be fail afleep, or dangeroufly ill, for aught I 
 perceive, it would not avail him much. It is reported, that in 
 the Reign of Abbas II. who was upon the March with his 
 Women, the Eunuchs found a Man afleep, whom they wrapped 
 up in the Carpet he lay upon, and buried him alive. They alfo 
 tell us of a Gentleman, who happening to be afleep not far 
 from the Road when the Signals were given, and finding that 
 there was no Poflibility of efcaping the Sight of the Guards, he 
 wrapped up his Head in his Coat, and threw himfelf on his Face 
 upon the Ground ; but the Eunuchs, notwithstanding, cut him to 
 Pieces. It is reported, that in .the Reign of Sefi I. a poor old 
 Man, who could not procure Juftice to be done him in the King's 
 Courts, and hearing that the King, with the Ladies of the Haram, 
 was to pafs thro' the Village where he lived, refolved to take the 
 Opportunity of delivering a Petition to him, imagining that hi* 
 great Age might plead for him ; but he was deceiv'd, it feems, 
 for Sefi himfelf fhot him thro' and thro' with feveral Arrows. 
 
 When a Perfon cannot, or will not, pay his Debts, he is deli- 
 ver'd into the Hands of his Creditor, who may imprifon him in 
 
 his own Houfe, fet him to work, beat him, and ufe 
 Remarka- him like a Dog, or do wht he pleafes with him, fo 
 hie Laws, he does not kill or maim him : He may alfo fell the 
 
 Debtor's Goods and Eftate, and even his Perfon, 
 Wife, and Children, towards Payment of the Debt ; but it is very 
 rare, that they proceed thus far. The Magiftrate, who has Cogni- 
 zance of criminal Caies, confines the Offender in fome Part of his 
 own Houfe, till he is brought to his Trial, which is ufually four- 
 and-twenty Hours after he is taken ; and Sentence is no fooner 
 palled, than he is executed. If a Perfon is fo unfortunate as to kill 
 another, and the FacT: be brought before the Magiftrate, the 
 Offender is deliver 'd up to the Relations of the Deceafed, to put him 
 to Death in fuch a manner as they fee fit. If a Robbery be com- 
 mitted in a City, the Watch are obliged to make Satisfaction, or 
 produce the Thief: But thofe who have refided in that great City 
 of Ifpahan tell us, that, for feveral Years together, they have not 
 heard of a Murder, or Robbery, committed in the Place ; and 
 not above once a Year, or twice, have they heard of a Robbery 
 committed on the Highway in that large Kingdom. It is cer- 
 tain, there is no Part of the World where People travel with 
 greater Security than in Perfia. 
 
 Trade.] The Staple Commodity of Perfia is Silk, raw and 
 wrought, of which great Quantities are exported to India, Turkey, 
 
 and
 
 Chap. XX. Prefent State o/Perfia. 42? 
 
 and Mufcovy ; and formerly the Englijb and Dutch took a great 
 deal off their Hands, but little or none at this Day. They export 
 alfo Camels Hair, Goats Wool, Leather, Wine?, diftill'd Waters, 
 dried and preferved Fruits, Pillachio-nuts, Dates, &c. And they 
 fupply India with abundance of fine Horfes. The Englijb Eafi- 
 India Company fends fcarce any thing to Perjia but Cloth ; nor does 
 this turn to any great Account, the Turkey Merchants being able 
 to fupply that Part of the Country, where it is vended, at a much 
 cheaper Rate. In Return for Cloth, the Company brings back 
 Goats Wool, as 'tis commonly call'd, which is the foft Down that 
 grows under the Hair next the Skin, and is chiefly ufed by Hat- 
 ters : And if they do not meet with a fuificient Return in this, 
 they take the Balance in Abaffes and Chequeens, or elfe in Gold 
 Bars : And as they have not fufficient Freight of their own, the 
 Company takes in Freight of the Armenians, Banians, and Moors t 
 and other private Traders, when they return to Surat, and gene- 
 rally a great Number of Paffengers for that Country. The Gains 
 that are made by the Company, in carrying the Effe&s of the 
 Armenians, Banians, Moors, &c. from Gombron, in the Gulph of 
 Perjia, to Surat, in India, is one great Branch of the Company's 
 Profit ; for a Ship is rarely fent from Gombron to Surat, but fhe is 
 as deep laden as fhe can fwim, full of Paffengers, and has a vafl 
 Quantity of Treafure on board, fometimes to the Value of Two 
 or Three hundred thoufand Pounds. 
 
 Revenues.] What the Revenue of the Crown may amount to 
 in the Whole, is very uncertain, it depending fo much upon Cafu- 
 alties. Thofe who have attempted to calculate it fay, that, one 
 Year with another, the Revenues amount to 4000000 Pounds 
 Sterl. which, confidering that their Troops are moft of them paid 
 by other Means, is a very confiderable Sum ; but then, as the 
 Splendor and Magnificence of the Perjian Court, is much beyond 
 any Thing we have in Europe, poflibly very little of it may remain 
 in the Treafury at the Year's End. One confiderable Part of the 
 King's Revenue arifes from the Seventh Fleece, and the Seventh 
 of the Breed of Cattle, of thofe Lands which are appropriated to 
 his Ufe ; for the Shepherds of Perf.a, like the antient Patriarchs, 
 poflefs vaft Flocks and Herds, on which they continually attend, 
 living in Tents, and removing from one Place to another, as they 
 can meet with Pafture for them : For thofe Lands which are not 
 the Property of particular Perfons, are at Liberty for all Men to 
 feed their Flocks upon, tho' they are dcem'd the King's Lands ; 
 and this Payment of the Seventh Fleece, and Seventh Breed of 
 Cattle, feems to be an Acknowledgment of his Dominion and 
 Pfoperty in them. 
 
 Forcss]
 
 428 Prefent Stats of Perfia. Part \\. 
 
 Forces.] The Army of Perfia was never large, confidering 
 the Extent of the Kingdom. Abbas the Great, who made fuch 
 confiderable Conquefts, had never more than 1 20000 Men in his 
 Service at once, in all the Provinces of his Kingdom. The Per- 
 fian Generals are perplex'd with nothing fo much as the ftu- 
 pid Conduct of the Court, in attending to the Predictions of 
 their Aftrologers. The King has no Naval Forces, or any Ships 
 or Veffels whatever, tho' he has a Sea-coaft of upwards of 300 
 Leagues to the Southward, and the Cafpian Sea on the North. 
 
 Character.] The Per/tans are generally acknowledg'd to be 
 Men of bright Parts, and abundance of Vivacity, fond of Glory, 
 and very courageous ; and as they were formerly obferv'd to be the 
 moft civil and obliging of all Men, they retain the fame happy 
 Difpofition to this Day, efpecially to Foreigners, who admire 
 their Hofpitality and Benevolence. What they feem to be the 
 molt juftly and univerfally charg'd with, is Profufenefs in their 
 Cloaths and Equipages. As to Voluptuoufnefs in Eating and 
 Drinking, this does not appear to be their Vice. Thefe People, 
 it is obferv'd, have a great Command of their Paffions : A Quar- 
 rel, tho' it feldom happens, generally ends in ill Language, and 
 perhaps feme hearty Curfes ; and, to fum up all, they call one 
 another Jews, or Chriftians. They are laid to be great Enemies to 
 Fraud, and are meek, peaceable, and modelt. Tho' it is gene- 
 rally allow'd, that Learning flourim'd molt in the Eaft in former 
 Ages, yet we find that the Sciences are not arrived to that Per- 
 fection in Perfia as in Europe. Among their Studies, Moral Phi- 
 lofoph-y feems to be more cultivated than the reft. The Perjians 
 mew a perfect Refignation under all Misfortunes, and (peak of 
 Death, and fuflfer it with great Evennefs of Temper : Molt Moral 
 Virtues feem to be deeply imprefs'd on them. They are perfon- 
 able Men, of a good Stature, well-fhap'd, clean-limb'd, and of 
 agreeable Features. 
 
 Religion.] The Inhabitants in general are ftriet Followers of 
 Mahomet's Doctrine, as explain'd and interpreted by Haly, the 
 Nephew and Son-in-law of Mahsmet, and one of his Succeflbrs 
 in the Empire. But the Perjians and Turks differ as much about 
 the Interpretation of the Alcoran, as they do about the Succeflbrs 
 of Mahomet. There are many Neftorian Chriftians in Perfia ; 
 as alfo feveral Jefuits, and many Jews. The Chriftian Religion 
 was firft planted in this Country by St. Thomas. 
 
 Customs.] The ufual Salute in Perfia is by bowing the Body % 
 little, and clapping the Right-hand to their Breaft j but they 
 
 never
 
 Chap. XX. Trefent State of Perfia. 429 
 
 never flir their Cap or Turbant : Before the King, the great Men 
 bow their Faces three times to the Ground, when they approach 
 him. As to Europeans, if they arc not clothed in the Perjian 
 Drefs, they expedl their Hats, and the fame Reverence they fhew 
 to Men of Quality in their own Country. There are no Exer- 
 cifes which the Perjians endeavour more diligently to accom- 
 plish themfelves in, than the Bow, and Horfemanfhip. Their 
 greateft Kings have thought proper to be Witneffes pf the Addrefs 
 and A&ivity of their Subjefts, and frequently themfelves have 
 contended for the Prize. They begin with teaching the young 
 Pupils to bend the Bow; afterwards he is taught to fhoot for- 
 wards, backwards, fideways, and almoft in every Pollure ; after 
 this, they bring him to fhoot at a Mark, and to deliver his 
 Arrows without (baking. The next Thing they teach the Pupil is 
 to mount a Horfe cleverly, to have a good Seat, to gallop with a. 
 loofe Rein, to flop fhort, and turn fwiftly to the Right or Left, 
 upon the leaft Signal, without being diforder'd in the Saddle. 
 They teach them alfo to play at a Game, almoft like Bandy, on 
 Horfeback ; every Gentleman has a fhort Bat in his Hand, and a 
 Ball being thrown amongft them, they ride after it, and ftooping 
 almoft to the Ground, ftrike in a full Career ; and he who ftrikes 
 it ofteneft, before it comes to the End of the Mall, wins the 
 Prize. When they have gone through their Exercifes, they' arc 
 permitted to fhoot for the Royal Prize before the King and CoQrt : 
 A high Pole, like the Maft of a Ship, is ere&ed, and upon it is 
 fet a Cup of mafly Gold : Thofe who contend for the Prize ride 
 full Gallop, with their Bows and Arrows in their Hands ; and 
 when they are got a little beyond the Pole, without flopping or 
 turning their Horfcs, they bend themfelves backward, either to 
 the Right or Left, and let fly their Arrows at the Cup ; and he 
 who brings it down, gains abundance of Honour. No Wonder* 
 then the Perfian Troops have been as much dreaded when they 
 retreat, as when they charge. 
 
 CuRiosiTirs.J About 30 Miles North Eaft of Qomlron is a 
 moft hideous Cave, which, for its frightful Appearance, is call'd 
 The Gate of Hell. There are yet to be feen the noble Remains of 
 the famous Palace of Perfetolis : Thofe Pillars now ftanding are 
 of excellent Marble, and about 15 Feet high : Even Rome itfelf, 
 as 'tis faid, has nothing comparable to thefe venerable Remains of 
 Antiquity : This glorious Palace, or Temple, with the whole 
 City of Perfefolis, the nobleft and wealthieft City in the World, 
 was burnt to the Ground by Alexander the Great. 
 
 CHAP.
 
 Part II. 
 
 +3 Pre/mi State of India. 
 
 CHAP. XXI. 
 
 the Prefent State of I N d i a. 
 fern*.....} JNDIA is bo^ t he Eaft by ciim? , he 
 
 Diftance and Bearing. 
 
 Divifion. 
 
 G 
 
 i 
 
 cc 
 
 o 
 
 <i . The Great Mo- 
 gul's Empire. 
 
 1. Indojian 
 
 2. Decan or Vifa- 
 
 pour 
 
 3. Malabar 
 
 4. Madura 
 
 5. Bifnagar and 7 
 
 Cormandel 5 
 
 V, 6. Go Icon da 
 2. Other Kingdoms 
 
 Square 
 Miles. 
 
 2 
 
 Cr 
 / 
 
 a 
 a 
 o 
 
 m 
 
 Achem or ^ 
 
 A<ua 
 
 Pegu 
 
 Arachan 
 
 Siam 
 
 Malacca 
 
 Laos 
 
 8. Cambodia 
 
 9. Cochin China 
 
 10. Ton qui n 
 
 
 1 1 1 6000 
 
 870910 
 
 61200 
 
 21840 
 16400 
 
 83550 
 
 62100 
 741500 
 
 230000 
 
 1 70000 
 48000 
 59400 
 60200 
 
 6 1 900 
 1 12000 
 
 Chief Towns. 
 
 Agra 
 
 Vifapour 
 
 Callecut 
 Madura 
 
 Bifnagar 
 
 Madras or 
 Fort StCeorge 
 Bagnagar 
 
 A-va 
 
 Pegu 
 
 Aracban 
 
 Siam 
 
 Malacca ' 
 
 Lanchang 
 
 Cambodia 
 
 Falfo 
 
 Keccio or 
 
 Cachao 
 
 1! 
 
 780 SE of London 
 H40 Eof I/pahan 
 2040 WofPeiin 
 860 S of Agra 
 
 380 S of Vifapour 
 180 NE of Callecut 
 
 220 S of Vifapour 
 
 1 60 Eof Madura 
 400 NE of Bifnagar 
 
 760 E of ^ra 
 340 S ofAva 
 260 W } 
 
 400 S } f *V 
 720 S of Siam 
 zSo Eof Pegu 
 300 SE 7 fc . 
 4 8oSE} of,W * 
 
 ^So Eof Pegu 
 
 wT r J ^ *t[ thern Part of 7 "^ is temperate; but towards the 
 tTt ^ C f TV S ^J 1 " Heats ' which would be intolerable if U were 
 not for the fee Seafons of Rain and Wind, with which the Count ies ly^n 
 
 ^M^folT C l l and k f frdh ' d - T ^ regular Winds, which I e 
 calld Man/on:, are obferv'd to blow constantly fix Months one Way, and fix 
 
 Months
 
 Chap. XXI. Prefent State of India. 431 
 
 Months another ; namely, from April to Oflober, or thereabouts, 
 they blow from the South-weft ; and from Qftober to April, from 
 the North-eaft, not exadUy from thofe Points, but vary fometimes 
 a Point or two on either Side. At the breaking up of either of 
 thefe Monfoons, or a little before they fhift, there are ufually 
 prodigious Storms of Wind, fuch as we do not experience, in this 
 Part of the World, once in a great many Years. This fhifting 
 of the Monfoons, and confequently the Storms, does not happen 
 exactly at the fame Time every Year, but fometimes a Fortnight 
 or three Weeks fooner ; and, at other times, a Fortnight ox 
 three Weeks later, than the ufual Time, which frequently occa- 
 fions the Lofs of Shipping. Befides thefe Winds we call Monfoons, 
 they have Land and Sea Breezes, which fhift once in twelve Hours, 
 when the Monfoons are not violent ; for then the Breezes give 
 way to the Hurricane. The Natives are very fenfible of the 
 Effedls of the Land and Sea Breezes ; "for the Land Winds are 
 hot, and the Sea Breezes cool and refrelhing ; and, without the 
 latter, the Southern Parts of India would be intolerable in the 
 Heat of Summer, which is reckon'd to be in May, or the Begin- 
 ning of June ; and the latter End of June the Rains begin to fall, 
 and continue till the latter End of Qftober ; and the Heavens are 
 thick with Clouds, which obfcure and cover the Natives from the 
 fcorching Sun. The other Parts of the Year are free from Storms 
 and Hurricanes ; and they enjoy fuch a pure and bright Heaven, 
 as is not to be found in thefe Northern Climates ; and all Trees 
 and Plants retain a perpetual Verdure ; and Bloflbms and ripe 
 Fruits are to be feen upon fome Tree or other all the Year round : 
 The Sight, the Talle, and the Smell, are all regaled in the delici- 
 ous Gardens. The uninterrupted long Life and Health of the 
 Natives of India, is another great Addition to their Flappinefs, 
 which is partly to be afcrib'd to the innocent Food and Liquors 
 they ufe, and partly to the Happincfs of the Climate. The Soil 
 of thefe Countries, in general, is alfo very good, producing not only 
 plenty of Corn,dcfirable Fruits, Fowl, Cattle, and Fifh ; but affords 
 alfo Silks, Cottons, Pearls, Drugs, Dates, Cocoas, Rice, Ginger, 
 Cinnamon, Pepper, Caffia, Gold, Silver, Precious Stones, Mufk, 
 Rhubarb, Alabailer, Porceline Earth, Indico, Wormfeed, Laique, 
 Borax, Opium, Amber, Sal Armoniac, Sattins, Carpets, Myro- 
 balans, Taffaties, and Callicoes, &c. The longeft Day in the 
 moft Northern Parts is 147, and in the Southmoft about iz 
 Hours; therefore India lies in the lit, 2d, 3d, 4th, and 5th, 
 Northern Climate. , 
 
 Government ] How thefe Countries have been govern'd in 
 former Times, both before, and a long time after, King Porus, 
 the Cotemporary of Alexander the Great, ii a Talk too difficult 
 
 to
 
 432 Prefcnt State of India, Part II, 
 
 to makt OiK. The great Tamerlane, King of the UJkbeck Tartars, 
 who deriv'd his Pedigree from the Moguls, is faid to have laid the 
 Foundation of this Empire about the Year ! 400 ; but, of all the 
 rail Conquefts he made, it is certain, that his Succeflbrs retain'd 
 but very little ; and tho' none of the Princes of Indofian were able 
 to (land before him, yet, upon his engaging in many diftant En- 
 terprlzes, the People generally return'd to the Obedience of their 
 own Princes. It is generally agreed, that to Miracha, the third 
 Son of Tamerlane, he afiign'd the North -eaft Part of Perfia, and 
 his new Conquefts in Indofian. Miracha did not think proper to 
 fix the Seat of his Empire in India, but chofe Herat, in Perfia, 
 for his Refidence ; and once a Year he came down with a con- 
 fiderable Force, to demand the Tribute impos'd by his Father on 
 the Indian Princes, many of whom refus'd any Submiflion to him -, 
 and one of thefe Princes, in a pitch'd Battle, made Miracha Prifo- 
 ner j but gave him his Liberty, upon Condition he would make 
 no Demands of that Nature on his Country for the future. Some 
 time after, in another Engagement, Miracha, we are told, had 
 the good Fortune to take the fame Prince ; but, inftead of re- 
 ftoring him to his Liberty, put out both his Eyes, and confin'd 
 him. I pafs on to Sec-Omor, who was a very peaceful Prince, 
 and refided generally at Samarcand in Tartary ; and was fucceeded 
 by his Son Babar, who being expelPd from Samarcand, retir'd 
 into India, and, afterwards made a Conquell of the Kingdom of 
 Pat ana, inhabited by Mahometans, fuppos'd to come from Egypt, 
 or fome other of the African or Arabian Shores. Babar, upon 
 this Viclory, making Delly the Seat of the Empire, the Tartars 
 refortcd to him in Crowds from the North, and particularly from 
 Samarcand, in Expectation of making their Fortunes under him. 
 The Perfians alfo, obfcrving.-Bafor's Succefs, came over to him in 
 Troops, in hopes of coming in for a Share of the Spoil ; and by 
 their Afliftance this Prince eftablifh'd himfelf in his new Conquefts, 
 and died in Peace in the Year 1 5 30, and was fucceeded by his Son 
 Amayum. A young Patane Lord, named Chira, who had been 
 bred up with Amayum, in his Father's Court, became his principal 
 Favourite : Such a Confidence did this Prince place in him, that 
 he made him his Generaliflimo ; but Chira, on whom Ambition, 
 or a Love to his Country, had a much greater Influence than all 
 the Favours beftow'd on him by Amayum, meditated how he might 
 depofe his indulgent Matter, and reftore the Patanes to their 
 antient Sovereignty. Amayum, being inform'd of the Defign, 
 when too late, aflembled a Body of Tartars and Perjians, with 
 which he gave Battle to Chira ; but Amayum was foon compell'd 
 to leave the Field, and fled to the Sophy of Perfia for Protection, 
 after he had reign'd eleven Years. Chira having reisn'd nine 
 Years, and leaving no Children, the Patents were divided about 
 
 fating
 
 Chap. XXI. Prefat State of India. 433 
 
 fetting up another in his room, which gave Amayum an eafy Oppor- 
 tunity of recovering his Kingdom, elpecially as he was affilted by 
 his powerful Friend the Sophy. He was fucceeded by 
 his Son Akbar, who foon perceiv'd, that the Moguls or 1552. 
 Tartars, with the Patane s and Indians, under his Go- 
 vernment were very uneafy and therefore invited the neighbouring 
 Ujhecks and Perfians to ferve under him : He preferr'd them to 
 the principal Polls, and gave them Wives, that they might, in 
 time, be a Balance for that Part of his Subjects, whom Nature 
 and Intereft inclin'd them to be difaffetted to his Government. 
 The vaft Additions this Prince made to the Empire, the Arts and 
 Sciences he introduced, the opening a Way to the Sea-coafts, the 
 Trade he eflabliuYd in his Kingdoms, the beautiful Cities and 
 Palaces he built, were evident Marks of the enterprifing Genius 
 of this Prince. This Monarch was fucceeded by this Son 
 Sba-iv Selim, who died in the Year 1627. There were 1605. 
 now three Competitors to the Crown ; Scheriar, who 
 had married the Daughter of the Sultanefs, was, by her Intereft, 
 proclaim'd in the Palace ; the Army adhered to Bolaqui, who te- 
 mg recogniz'd by the City of Agra, for fome time enjoy 'd the 
 Imperial Title. The Sultanefs and Scheriar were dcliver'd up to 
 him, whom he confin'd in Prifon, and put out the Eyes of the 
 latter. Two old Minifters, Afapb Cham and Mahomet Cham, 
 notwithflanding, had their Eyes upon Cborrom ; but the Treafure 
 and Forces of the Empire being in the Hands of Bolaqui, they 
 did not yet think proper to declare themfelves. Cborrom difap- 
 pear'd of a fudden ; and it was not only given out that he was 
 dead, but his whole Court went into Mourning for him. The 
 crafty Mabomet obtained leave of Bolaqui to bury Cborrom in the 
 Royal Sepulchre at Agra ; and accordingly a pompous Funeral 
 Proceflion was begun, fuitable to the Quality of fo great a Prince. 
 Mabomet Cham, at the Head of a thoufand Officer! of the de- 
 ceafed, attended the Hearfe, and Cborrom himfelf followed in Dif- 
 guife. Several Bodies of the Allies of Cborrom fell in with the 
 Proceflion upon the Road, under Pretence of paying their la it 
 Devoirs to the Deceafed. Afapb Cham, who had not declar'd 
 himfelf, but remain'd of Bolaqufs Council in Agra, advifed the 
 young Emperor to meet the Corps of Cborrom his Uncle, as they 
 drew near Agra ; who, thereupon, marched out with an ordinary 
 Guard, and fuch an Equipage as was fuitable to the Occafion. 
 He was furpris'd to fee fo numerous a Body of Troops attending 
 the Hearfe, and fufpefting he was betray'd, turn'd fhort on a 
 fudden, and made his Efcape, never attempting to recover Agra ; 
 and indeed he did not flop, till he found himfelf in the Perjian 
 Dominions. As for Cborrom, he threw off his Difguife, and, at 
 the Head of his Troops, made his Entry into Agra, which open'd 
 
 F f her
 
 434 Prefent State of India. Part II. 
 
 her Gates to receive him : He was immediately proclaim'd Em- 
 peror, and took upon him the Name of Cba Jehan. The unfor^ 
 tunate Scheriar was ftiut up, with his two Sons, in an Apartment 
 of the Palace, the Doors of which were order'd to be wall'd up ;. 
 where it is fuppofed they all died for want of Food, being never 
 after heard of. The Emperor Cba Jehan was taken dangeroufly 
 ill, and it was reported in Delly, and even in the remoteit Provinces 
 or the Empire, that he was dead ; whereupon the three youngeft 
 Sultans, his Sons, began to make Preparations, in their refpective 
 Provinces, to pu(h for the Empire. Sultan Sujab, Viceroy of 
 Bengal, was the firft that appear'd in Arms, bending his March 
 towards Delly, with an Army of 40,000 Horfe. The Emperor, 
 recovering from his Indifpofition, wrote his Son Word, with his 
 own Hand, that he was perfectly in Health, and that he would 
 do well to return to his Government of Bengal, and obferve a 
 more exact Obedience for the future. But Sujab receiving other 
 Letters from his Friends at the fame time, alluring him that his 
 Father could not recover, and that his Fortune depended on his 
 appearing immediately before Delly, he thought fit to continue his 
 March. The Emperor hereupon removed with his Court to 
 Agra, being a Place of much greater Strength. Dara, the eldeft 
 Son to the Mogul, follow'd his Father's Court to Agra ; but de- 
 tach'd his Son, and with him two experienc'd Generals, and a 
 gallant Army, to oppofe Sujab ; whofe Forces being much infe- 
 rior, were foon defeated, and Sujab himfelf, with much Difficulty, 
 made his Efcape to Bengal. 
 
 Dara having Intelligence that the Mogul's two youngeft Sons 
 had aflembled their Troops, and that their two Armies were 
 join'd, in order to difpute the Crown with Dara, he difpatched a 
 Trumpet, with a Letter from the Emperor, to each of them, 
 afluring them that he was in Health, and that they (hould difband 
 their Troops, on pain of his Refentment. But they continuing 
 their March, Dara detached his Generals Jaconfiing, and Cajfam 
 Cham, againft them ; but Cajfam Cham, whom Dara had for- 
 merly diioblig'd, withdrew with a Part of the Army, and left 
 Jaconfting to fight it out by himfelf; whereupon the two Brothers 
 obtain'd an ealy Victory. The Emperor finding himfelf betray'd 
 on every Side, and reflecting on his former bad Conduct, made a 
 Ceilion of the Crown, and devolv'd all his Authority on his Son 
 
 Dara ; who immediately rais'd a prodigious Army, and 
 1656. march'd to meet his Brothers. Both Armies came to 
 
 a Battle on equal Terms, which was fought with 
 great Bravery on that Side where Dara himfelf commanded; but 
 their Generals not doing their Duty, and fome of them, with 
 their whole Bodies, going over to the Enemy, the two Brothers 
 cbttin'd an imire Victory ; and, matching to Agra, which was 
 
 betrayed
 
 Chap. XXI. Prefent St&ie of India. 435 
 
 betrayed to them, they $ade their Father Prifoner, and poflefled 
 themfelves of his prodigious Treasures, which they found fufficient 
 to reward their Adherents, and fupport their Usurpation. Morad, 
 the younger Brother, who was naturally brave and undefigning, 
 and who all along had been over-perfuaded into this Rebellion, 
 was treated by Aurengzeb, the elder of the two Brothers, and the 
 whole Army, as their Emperor. Aurengzeb, before this Enter- 
 prize, feem'd fo mortified a Prince, and fo intirely devoted to 
 Religion, as to defpife all worldly Grandeur; and in this Rebellion 
 he pradifed his ufual Arts of Difhmulation, pretending he had no 
 manner of Thoughts of letting up for himfelf, but only to fee the * 
 Worfhip of God, and the Law of his Holy Prophet, eftablim'd 
 in its primitive Purity ; and to prevent Dara, whom he deem'd a 
 Heretic, mounting the Throne of Cha Jehan, their Father. 
 The Night before the Ii auguration of Morad, the pious Aureng- 
 zeb, attended by half a Dozen of his Guards, came into the Tent 
 where his Brother Morad was, and order'd him to be bound, and 
 carried off, in fo private a Manner, that the Camp had no notice 
 of it, except thofe that were in the Secret. Moft of the Soldiers, 
 in the Morning, expedled the Approach of the new Emperor 
 Morad; but a Body of Troops, devoted to Aurengzeb, furrounding 
 the Place appointed for the Ceremony, and poffefling all the 
 Avenues to the Camp, this mortified Prince, to the Surprize of all 
 that were in the Defign, appear'd in his Royal Robes, and plac'd 
 himfelf upon the Throne appointed for the unhappy Morad. 
 Aurengzeb, after having baffled the Attempts of his Sons to de- 
 throne him, and after long and bloody Wars, compeU'd the Kings 
 of Vijiapour and Golconda to become tributary to him ; and fecur'd 
 the Sovereignty of moft of the other States in the South of the 
 Peninfula, as far as Cape Comarin ; for thefe were fubjedt or tri- 
 butary to one or other of thofe Kings, before the Great Mogul 
 fubdued them. There are indeed i'ome Pagan Princes in the 
 Mountains, who ttill govern their own People, but feldcm think 
 fit to attack the Mogul, and are very well fatisfied, if he will let 
 them remain at quiet in their little Principalities. Some of them 
 are alfo his Allies : However, it may be properly enough faid, that 
 the Empire of the Great Mogul has no other Boundaries towards 
 the South, than the Ocean ; for the Sea coafts in general are in his 
 Hands j nor is any one Prince among them able to meet him in 
 the Field, tho'-fome few of them may fculk in inacceflible Moun- 
 tains, and boaft to this Day, that they have not yet fubmitted to 
 his Arms. Aurengzeb died in the Year 1708, and his fecond Son, 
 Azem Dara, affum'd the Government ; but Cha Alem, eldeft 
 Son of Aurengzeb, placed at the Head of his Army his two Sons 
 Hajfanteddin and Majboudi, who, on foveral Occafions, had given 
 Proofs of their Valour and Conduct. The Armies o{Az.em Data, 
 
 F f 2 and
 
 436 Prefent State of India. Part II. 
 
 and Cha A/em, fac'd each other, drawn up in Battalia ; Azem 
 Dara charg'd with fuch Vigour, that he certainly had won the 
 Victory, had his Troops obferv'd any Order : The Fight lafted 
 near eight Hours, tho', in little time, Azem Dara loft near 
 60000 Men j and while he endeavour'd to rally his Troops, 
 1 50000 Horfe fell upon him, and, after the firft Fire, charg'd 
 him Scymitar in Hand, arid made a great Slaughter ; fo that 
 there were left about Az.cm Dara no more than 6000 Horfe, of 
 150000 Men, of which his Army confided ; then he quitted his 
 Elephant, and mounted his Horfe to make his Efcape, but his 
 Horfe was kill'd ; he ftill defended himfelf with his Scymitar in 
 one Hand, and his Poniard in the other, and kill'd twenty Men, 
 who would have feiz'd him ; at laft, feeing Ma/boudi come up, 
 and hearing him call to his Men to take him alive, he kill'd him- 
 felf with his Poniard. Thus perifh'd Azem Dara, and with him 
 two of his beloved Sons ; and this great Battle fecur'd the Empire 
 to Cha Ale?n, who ftyled himfelf Badour Cha. 
 
 Malacca, Cambodia, and Laos, lately became Provinces, and 
 great Part of them tributary to the King of 
 Siam, Malacca, Siam j but the remote Provinces have lately 
 Cambodia, and thrown off their Allegiance, and are now fet 
 Laos. up for petty Sovereigns. Siam has fufFer T d feve- 
 
 ral Revolutions, according to Loubiere ; the 
 King's Father^ who poflefled the Throne when he was there, was 
 an Ufurper, and not fo much as of the Royal Family, this Rebel 
 having dragg'd his unfortunate Sovereign out of the Temple, 
 whither he was fled for Refuge, and afterwards ftrangled him. 
 This Ufurper reign'd thirty Years, and was fucceeded by his Bro- 
 ther, to the Exclufion of the Ufurper's Son. The Kings of Siam 
 fometimes ftarve their Relations, or put them to other Deaths : 
 Indeed they are fometimes fo merciful, that they only burn their 
 Eyes out, or cripple them, to prevent their afpiring to the Throne. 
 Tfie Government of Tonquin is one of the oddeft we have heard 
 of; for the rightful Prince, it feems, enjoys 
 Tonquin. little more than the Title of King ; the Gene- 
 
 ral, or Prime Minifter, is Mafter of all the 
 Treafure and Forces of the Kingdom, and to him the Subjects 
 make their Court ; and thus it has been for the laft hundred 
 Years. As to Pegu, Ava, Ajem, and mauy inland Parts of India, 
 yc have very imperfect Accounts of them. In the Dominions 
 belonging to the Great Mogul, fome Malefactors are hang'd, 
 others beheaded, fome impaled on fharp Stakes, 
 Punijhpients in fome torn in Pieces by wild Beafts, or kill'd by 
 the Great Mo- Elephants, and others bitten by Snakes. If an 
 guts Dominions. Elephant be commanded to diipatch a Criminal 
 immediately, he ftamps upon the Wretch, who 
 
 liei
 
 Chap. XXI. Prefent State of India. 437 
 
 lies trembling before him, with his broad round Foot, and crufhes 
 him to Death in a Moment j if it be intended he fhould feel his 
 Death, and die in Torture, the Elephant breaks firft the Bones of 
 his Legs, then his Thighs and Arms, and leaves him to die by the 
 Wounds he has given him. Sir Thomas Roe relates, that, when 
 he was at the Mogul's Court, a hundred Thieves were brought 
 before that Monarch, who order 'd the chief of them to be torn in 
 Pieces by Dogs, and the reft to be put to Death in the ordinary Way : 
 Accordingly the Prifoners were divided into feveral Quarters of the 
 Town ; and the chief of them was torn in Pieces by twelve Dogs ; 
 and thirteen of his Gang, at the fame Place, had their Heads tied 
 down to their Feet, and their Necks being chopped half off with 
 a Sword, were left naked and bloody in the Street, where they 
 became a great Annoyance to the Neighbourhood. 
 The Women of the Haram or Seraglio, as it is The Mogul's 
 ufually call'd, are either Wives or Concubines, Haram or 
 PrincefTes of the Blood, Governantes, or Slaves. Seraglio. 
 Thofe that are call'd Wives, and contracted with 
 Ceremony, feldom exceed four; the Number of Concubines is 
 very uncertain, but it is generally agreed they amount to about 
 1000. The firft Son the Great Mogul has by any of his Wives, 
 is look'd upon to be Heir to the Empire ; tho', as we have feen 
 above, the longeft Sword ufually carries it ; and whoever poffeffes 
 himfelf of the Throne, commonly deftroys all his Brothers, and 
 their Male Iffue. The Number of Jewels, and precious Stones, 
 which, 'tis faid, the Ladies of the Seraglio wear, exceeds all Be- 
 lief. The Governantes of the young PrincefTes, and thofe who 
 are Spies upon the Conduit of the King's Women, are a confider- 
 able Body in the Seraglio ; and, 'tis faid, have a great Share in 
 the Government of the Empire. If this Monarch has any Coun- 
 cil, it is compos'd of thefe Ladies ; for it is by their Influence the 
 Great OfHcers of State and Governments are difpos'd of, and all 
 Bufinefs of Confequence is effefted ; thefe Ladies having better 
 Opportunities of reprefenting Things to the Emperor, than his 
 Miniflers have without Doors. This Prince is ferv'd altogether 
 by Women in his Retirement, and has a Guard, 'tis faid, 0/ 
 Tartar Women, arm'd with Scymetars and Bows, who have the 
 Care of his Perfon. The Government of the Great Mogul is 
 very tyrannical, having both the Purfes and Perfons of his Subje&s 
 wholly at his Difpofal : His bare Will is the Law, and his Word a 
 final Decifion of all Controverfies. His Letters and Orders are 
 receiv'd with the utmoft Reverence ; for the Governor, to whom 
 they are fent, having Intelligence they are upon the Road, rides 
 out with all his OfHcers to meet the Meficnger who brings them : 
 He no fooner fees the Packet, but he alight* from his Horfe, and 
 fells down on his Face to the Farth ; then he take6 them from th 
 
 f $ Mcftengcr,
 
 438 the Prefent State of India. Part II. 
 
 Mefienger, and lays them upon his Head, whereon he binds them 
 faft ; and returning back to the Court where he ufually difpatches 
 his Bufinefs, he reads them. This mighty Monarch ftiews him- 
 felf to the People three times a Day ; the firft is at Sun-riling 
 from a Gallery, at which time Crouds of People refort thither, 
 to give him the ufual Salam, crying out, as foon as they fee him, 
 Long Life and Health to the great King. At Noon he fhews 
 himfelf again ; and, laftly, at about Sun-fet ; being always ufher'd 
 in and out with Drums, Trumpets, and other Wind-Mufic ; and 
 at any of thefe Times, if any Man, tho' never fo mean, has a 
 Petition to the Emperor, it is receiv'd. This Monarch admini- 
 liers Juflice himfelf in capital Cafes, as his Viceroys do in their 
 
 refpe&ive Provinces. The King of Siam, according 
 The King to the Cuftom of the Eaft, is an abfolute Monarch ; 
 of Siam. he gives the Land to whom he pleafes, and takes it 
 
 away when he will : Wherefore no Families can be 
 ennobled by Eftates ; nor is there any Nobility but by Offices, 
 which the King confers and takes away at Pleafure ; whence 'tis 
 not uncommon to fee the Son of a Lord tugging at the Oar. Only 
 one of the King's Women has the Honour of being call'd Queen ; 
 and for the Seraglio they take the Daughter of any Subjeft. The 
 
 Laws of Siam require an unlimited Obedience to 
 Laws. Parents ; any one who Ihould prefume to oppofe and 
 
 contradict his Parents, would be look'd on as a Mon- 
 fter. Lying is punifh'd by fewing up the Mouth. Sometimes 
 Criminals are toffed by one Elephant to another, without killing 
 them ; for this, 'tis faid, the Elephants will do upon a Sign, they 
 are fo extremely tradable. But their Punilhment is ulually 
 adapted to the Crime : One who has been guilty of Extortion has 
 melted Gold or Silver pour'd down his Throat. 
 
 Trade.] The principal Manufactures in the Great Mogul's 
 Dominions are Silks, Calicoes, and Muflins ; We import alfo from 
 thence Diamonds, and other precious Stones, great Quantities of 
 Pepper, Saltpetre, Indico, Cardamums, Opium, Affafcetida, and 
 a great Variety of Phyfical Drugs. There are not to be found 
 upon the Face of the Earth greater Merchants than the Mogul's 
 Subjects : Notwithstanding their Shipping never paffes the Cape of 
 Goad "Hope, they drive a prodigious Trade to Perfea and the Red- 
 Sea, and fupply Turkey and Perjia with all the rich Merchandize 
 of India : In Return for which they bring back Carpets, Pearl, 
 and other Perjian Commodities, but chiefly Treafure, which they 
 frequently load on board Englijh or Dutch Ships. The King of 
 
 Siam engrofles moft Part of the Trade to himfelf, 
 Siam. and even defcends to fell Goods by Retale in Shops by 
 
 his Fadlors. He fells to his Subjects all their Cot- 
 ton
 
 ^ftap. XXI. Prefent State of India.' 439 
 
 ton Cloths, which is the common Wear of thefe People ; he claims 
 all the Ore in the Mines, which he fells to Foreigners : His Sub- 
 jects are oblig'd to fell him all their Ivory and Arrack, which he 
 difpofes of to Foreigners ; Saltpetre, Lead, and Japan Wood, alfo 
 belongs to the King ; and Gunpowder, Sulphur, and Arms, can 
 be only had at the King's Magazines. He fometimes agrees with 
 the Dutch to fell them all the Skins and Furs the Country affords 
 at a certain Price ; and thereupon his Subjects are obliged to fell 
 them to him firft. Formerly not lefs than a thoufand Veflels 
 traded annually to Siam; but there are now hardly any but a few 
 fmall Dutch Barks ; for none care to deal with the King, who will 
 make his own Terms. Had the Natives of Siam the full Liberty 
 of Trade, yet they have hardly Money enongh, in many Provinces, 
 to furnifh themfelves with common Neceflaries ; but the King 
 himfelf is exceffive rich. The Tonquinefe make no 
 long Voyages, or export any Merchandize in their Tonquin. 
 own Bottoms, except Fifh and Rice to fome neigh- 
 bouring Countries. Goods imported into Tonquin are Saltpetre, 
 Sulphur, EngUJh Broad Cloth, Cloth Rafhes, Pepper, and other 
 Spices, Lead, and great Guns. The King of Tonquin, who buys 
 the great Guns, and fome Broad Cloth, is very bad Pay, info- 
 much that no Merchants care to deal with him, if they can help 
 it. The Country produces great Quantities of Silk, which are 
 chiefly bought up by the Dutch and EngUJh ; and the Merchants 
 are fore'd to wait feveral Months, till the Goods are wrought, 
 and are often obliged to advance them Money ; fo miferably poor 
 are the People kept by the great Lords, to whom the Land belongs. 
 I forgot to tell the Reader, that the Queen of Siam has her 
 Magazines, her Ships and Treafure, diflinft from the King's ; 
 and carries on a Trade upon her own Bottom. It may, I pre- 
 fume, be proper enough, in this Place, to give a fhort Account of 
 the firfl Voyages made by the Portuguefe, Spaniards, EngUJh, and 
 Dutch, to the Eajl- Indies. 
 
 The Difcovery of the Coafl of Africa, in order to the Difco 1 
 very of the Eajl- Indies, was attempted by Henry, Son to John 
 King of Portugal, about the Year 141 8. but, till the Reign of 
 John II. they, after all their Endeavours, got no farther than the 
 Coafl of Guinea. This Monarch fent out Bartholomew Diax, 
 who, in i486, difcover'd the moft Southern Promontory of 
 Africa, which the King call'd The Cape of Good "Hope, having 
 great Expectation now of finding the Way to the Indies. Don 
 Emanuel, King of Portugal, lent Vafco di Gama, in the Year 
 1497. and failing along the Coafl of Africa, he doubled the Cape, 
 and arrived at Mofambique, on the Eaft Coafl of Africa, where he 
 met with feven Sail of Ships, mann'd by Arabians. It was ob- 
 servable, that thefe Moors had the Mariners Compafs, which 
 
 F f 4 was
 
 440 Prefent State of India. Fart II. 
 
 was not known to the Europeans, till a very little before that 
 time. By the Directions of fome Pilots, whom they took in on 
 the Coafts of Mofambique and Mombazi, Vajco di Gama had the 
 Honour of Landing at Calicut, on the Coaft of Malabar, in the 
 Year 1498. The Portuguefc, under his Condu 61, and afterwards 
 that of the great Albuquerque, made all the Eait tremble by the 
 Novelty of their Ordnance. They made themfelves Matters of 
 Ormus, at the Entrance of the Perjian Gulph, and thereby Mailers 
 of the Commerce of the Pearls at Catif, and of the fineft Com- 
 modities of Perjia. They invaded Diu, Goa, Cochin, the Pearl- 
 filhing at Cape Comorin, and the fineft Ports on the Coait of 
 Coromandcl. They built Forts cvery-where j at Bengal, at Suma- 
 tra, and in all the Molucca Iflands : They conquer'd the Ifland of 
 Macao next to China : Ey which means they ufurped the Property 
 of the whole Commerce of the Venetians. They even carried it 
 on with a greater Benefit, having every thing at firft Hand ; and 
 alone fupplied Europe with the Vernifhes, China-ware, and Silks 
 of China, Tonquin, and Cochin China ; the Cloves and Nutmegs 
 of the Molucca Iflands, the Pepper of Sumatra, and of the Penin- 
 fula of India ; the precious Stones of Pegu, A<va, Golconda, and 
 Pifapour ; the Cotton, Silk-Stuffy and Carpets, of the Mogul, 
 and the adjacent Countries j the Cinnamon, or Bark of the Cin- 
 namon-tree, of Ceylon ; and chiefly all the Gold of China and 
 India. There never was a more brilliant Fortune ; for which 
 Reafon, the Reign of Emanuel, the Succeflbr of King "John II. 
 was called the Golden Reign. The next that put in for a Share 
 of thefe Riches were the Spaniards, who employed the famous 
 .Magellan to make Difcoveries Weftward : This Commander, 
 having faiPd thro' the Streights of Magellan, fo call'd from the 
 Difcoverer, pafled thro' the South-Sea or Pacific Ocean, and ar- 
 rived at the Iflands of Ladrone the 6th of March 1520. he after- 
 wards made the Philippines, where he was kill'd ; but his Ships ar- 
 rived at Ternate, the chief of the Molucca Iflands, on the 8th of 
 November 152 1, being about ten Years after the Arrival of the 
 Portuguefc here. The Portuguefe, without any Ceremony, made 
 a Prize of the Spanijh Ship that was left there foon after, and 
 ruin'd their Factory. '1 he next that vifited the Eajl-lndies were 
 the Englijh, under the Command of Sir Francis Drake, who fet 
 Sail from Plymouth the 13th of December 1577. with five Ships, 
 /$nd one hundred and fixty-four Men, among whom were Gentle- 
 men of Quality. On the 17th of July 1578. Drake left Fort 
 St. Julian, near the Streights of Magellan, which he pafs'd, and 
 the 6th of September enter'd the South-Sea ; after which he was 
 driven by a Storm into 57 Degrees South Latitude, and loft Com- 
 pany of one of his Ships commanded by Captain Winter, who re- 
 ;-;./d back to England, thro' the Streights of Magellan. Drake 
 
 afterwards
 
 fchap. XXI. Prefent State of India. 441 
 
 afterwards failed Northward, and arrived at Lima in Peru ; here 
 Jay twelve Sail of Spanijh Merchant Ships, very fecure, as they 
 thought, having never feen any Enemy in thofe Seas : Thefe 
 Drake plundered of what Treafure they had ; but having Intelli- 
 gence of a rich Ship, call'd the Cacafogo, which was laden with 
 nothing elfe but Tieafure, he fet Sail from thence, and came up 
 with her about 150 Leagues from Panama: She made little 
 Refiilance, and he took out of her thirteen Chefts full of Rias of 
 Plate, eighty Pound Weight of Gold, and twenty-fix Ton of 
 Silver, befides a great Quantity of Jewels and precious Stones. 
 Drake having faiPd into 43 Degrees North Latitude, and finding 
 the Weather very cold, he retum'd into 36 Degrees, where he 
 found a commodious Bay, and was hofpitably entertain'd by the 
 Natives : From hence he failed to the Eaji Indies, and arrived at 
 the Molucca Iflands the 14th of November 1579. where taking 
 in a good Quantity of Cloves, he fet Sail for, and arrived in 
 England the 3d of November 1580. having been out aimoft three 
 Years. In the Year 1583. Mr. Ralph Fitch, of London, Mer- 
 chant, went by Way of Tripoli in Syria to Ormus, and fo to Goa 
 in the Eajl- Indies ; from whence he fail'd to Bengal, Pegu, Siam, 
 and Malacca : He alfo vifited the lfland of Ceylon, and the Cities 
 of Cocberi and Calicut ; after which he return'd to Ormus, and fo 
 thro 1 Turkey to Tripoli, where he embarked fcr England,and arrived 
 here the 29th of April 1591. He fent before him a very parti- 
 cular Account of the Trade, Produtt, and Manufactures of the 
 Eafi-Indies, which induced feveral Merchants of London to fit out 
 Ships, to follow the Portuguefe thither by the Way of the Cape 
 of Good-Hope. The firft Voyage the Englijh attempted to the 
 Eaji-Indies, round the Cape, was with three Ships, which fet Sail 
 from England the 10th of April 1591- and arrived at the Cana~ 
 ries the 25th ; the 2d of May they made Cape Blanco, on the 
 Coaft of Africa; the 13th they were within eight Days of the 
 Equinoctial, when they met with contrary Winds : However they 
 crofs'd the Line the 6th of June, and about the fame time took a 
 Merchant-fhip of Lifion, which had in her a glorious Cargo of 
 Wine, Oil, and Olives, and other good Provifion. While they 
 were near the Line, their Men grew very fickly, cccaficn'd by 
 the Heat and Wetnefs of the Seafon ; and they had perpetual 
 Tornadoes, with Thunder and Lightning. The Wind being at 
 South-eaft, they flood over to the Coaft of Biafil, till they came 
 into 26 Deg. South Latitude, where the Wind came ;ibout to the 
 North ; and then they bore away for the Cape of Good Hope, 
 where they arrived the 28th of July. Having loft many of their 
 Men, they fent one of their Ships back to England, and purfued 
 their Voyage. The 14th of September tiny met with a furious 
 Storm, which parted them; and the Ac. ^vcr heard of 
 
 more.
 
 442 Prefent State of India. Part II ! 
 
 more. Four Days after this Storm, the Vice-Admiral Captain 
 Laneafter had a violent Clap of Thunder, which kill'd four of his 
 Men outright ; and of 94 Men this Commander had aboard, 
 there was not one untouch'd ; fome were ftruck blind, others 
 bruis'd in their Legs, and Arms, or Breads, fo that they voided 
 Blood for two Days after; and others were ftretched out at Length, 
 as if they had been extended on the Rack ; however, they all re- 
 covered. By the fame Thunder -clap their Main -mail was 
 ftrangely torn from the Top down to the Deck ; and fome Iron 
 Spikes, which were ten Inches in the Timber, were melted by the 
 Lightning. After this they took in Water at Comoro, where 
 thirty-two of their Men were cut in Pieces by the Natives, after 
 their King had been on board, and after the Engli/h had been 
 treated with great Civility by his People. They failed from hence 
 the 7th of November', and in May 1592. they doubled Cape 
 Comorin, the moft Southern Promontory of India ; and continued 
 till the End of Auguft at the Iflands of Poolo-Pifang, near the Coaft 
 of Malacca ; and failed for England, and came to St. Helena the 
 3d of April 1593. After they left St. Helena, they were reduc'd 
 to great Diftrefs, infomuch that they liv'd upon Skins and Hides 
 they had on board, till they arriv'd at St. Domingo ; where the 
 Captain, and moft of his Men, going afhore to find Provifion, 
 their Ship drove away to Sea, with five Men and a Boy on board. 
 The Captain, after he had remained a confiderable time on the 
 Ifland, got a Paflage in a French Veffel, and arrived in England 
 again the 24th of May 1594. One Reafon of this Voyage proving 
 fo unfortunate, it feems, was their fetting out at a wrong Seafon 
 of the Year. The next Voyage of the Englijh was ftill more un- 
 fortunate, not one of the Company of three Ships returning to 
 give an Account what became of the reft ; tho' 'tis fuppofed, that 
 after many Hardships, and after a Mortality had carried off al- 
 moft all the Men, the Spaniards murder'd thofe that remained 
 alive, and plunder'd them of their Treafure. But, notwithftand- 
 ing this ill Succefs, the Merchants of London were not difcourag'd 
 from fitting out another Fleet for India. However, they firft 
 form'd themfelves into a Company, and fent out four fine Ships, 
 carrying 480 Men, under the Command of Captain Laneafter, who 
 was ftyled their Admiral. They arrived in Achen Road, in the 
 Ifland of Sumatra, the 5th of June 1602. after a Voyage of 
 about thirteen Months from Dartmouth. They obtain'd very ad- 
 vantageous Conditions of Trade ; and, having taken in what 
 Pepper, Cinnamon, and Cloves, they could get, fet Sail the 9th 
 of November for Priaman, on the Weft Coaft of Sumatra, where 
 they took in more Pepper and Cloves ; and from thence fteer'd to 
 Bantam, the 16th of December 1602. where they fettled a Fac- 
 tory, and found a Sale for their Goods remaining, for which, they 
 
 took
 
 Chap. XXI. Prefent State of India. 443 
 
 took Pepper in Return, and fail'd for England the 2 2d of February % 
 and arrived in the Downs the 11th of September 1603. From 
 this time Ships were fent every Year, and Endeavours ufed to 
 fettle Trade in all Parts of the Indies ; and the Company has ever 
 fmce kept Factories in divers Parts of the Eaft-Indies, and carried 
 on a peaceable and quiet Commerce with the Inhabitants, inilead 
 of violating the Laws of Nations, to enflave and rob the Natives, 
 at the fame time, both of their Wealth and Liberty, as has been 
 the Practice of fome of our Neighbours on the other Side of the 
 Water. But to return : The Dutch, being excluded trading with 
 Portugal, as well as with Spain, from whence they ufed 
 to fetch Spices, and other valuable Merchandizes, the 1580. 
 Produces of Afia and America, fitted out ftrong Fleets, 
 and follow'd the Spanijb and Portuguefe in the Road they had 
 ftruck out to the Eaft and Weft-Indies ; and not only brought to 
 Enrope the fame rich Goods thefe Nations had for many Years 
 monopolized, but drove the Portuguefe from their belt Settle- 
 ments in India, and other Countries in AJia, as well as from thofe 
 they had in Brajil, and on the Coaft of Africa. When the 
 Dutch caft their Eye on -the Eaft-India Trade, which they fore- 
 faw would exceedingly enrich themfelves, and weaken their Enemy 
 Philip II. King of Spain, who had made the Kingdom of Portugal 
 a Spanijb Province, they at firft attempted to find out a new and 
 nearer Paflage thither by the Ndrth, along the Coaft of Norway, 
 Lapland, Nova Zembla, and Tartary ; but their Endeavours at 
 feveral times proving unfuccefsful, they were glad to fail the com- 
 mon Way to the Cape of Good Hope. The Danes and French, in 
 Emulation to other European Nations, have likewife put in for a 
 Share of the Trade of the E aft- Indies. 
 
 Revenues.] The Revenues of the Great Mogul arife from the 
 Product of the Ground ; the Labours of the People ; the Cuftoms 
 of the Sea-Ports ; the Eftates of great Men, which devolve on the 
 Crown by their Deaths; and Prefents from the Subjects, who 
 never approach their Prince empty-handed. The Viceroy of 
 every Piovince, it is faid, is obliged to anfwer the Crown a cer- 
 tain Sum, which arifes out of the Manufactures, and the Product 
 of the Soil ; this Part of the Revenues may be reckon'd to be near 
 4000000 1. Sterling ; and much the greateft Part of' the Troops 
 being maintain'd by the refpedtive Provinces, this may be look'd 
 upon alfo as a confiderable Addition to the Revenues, by faving 
 the Crown a prodigious Expence : The Diamond-mines are alfo 
 an inexhauftible Treafure. The King of Slam's whole Revenue, 
 which he receives in Money, does not amount to much ; but then 
 what he receives in Kind, and by the Product of his Demefne 
 Lands, for the Provifion of the Houfhold, and, for keeping his 
 
 Slaves,
 
 444 Prefent State of India. Part II. 
 
 Slaves, and f ach a vaft Number of Elephants, is prodigious ; and that 
 which faves him a great Expence is, that the Officers, who com- 
 pofe the Civil Lift, all maintain themfelves, as well as his Troops ; 
 and te has the Service of one half of his Subje&s annually for 
 nothing, employing them in the vaft Trade he carries on for his 
 own Account. 
 
 Forces] The Army of the Great Mogul confifts, 'tis faid, of 
 300000 Horfe, and 400000 Foot ; befide 3000 Elephants : But, 
 according to the beft Accounts, there is allow'd Pay for a Million 
 of Horfe ; not that the whole Number is ever brought into aftual 
 Service ; for the refpeftive Viceroys feldom keep up above half the 
 Number, and the Pay of the reft goes into their own Pockets. 
 Notwithltanding the Great Mogul has fuch a vaft Extent of Sea 
 Coaft, there is no fuch thing as a Man of War, or a Ship of 
 Force, to be found in India ; not but the Indian Merchants have 
 Ships of 400 or 500 Tun of their own, built after the Englijb 
 Model ; but their Sailors would make but a poor Defence, if they 
 ihould be attacked ; and their Skill in Navigation is very mean, 
 infomuch that they are glad when they can find an European Com- 
 jnander. An Englijb Sailor, with very ordinary Qualifications, 
 ferves for a Captain of one of the Mogul's Merchant-lhips. The 
 Shipping of the Siamefe is alfo very inconfiderable : The King has 
 a few Merchant-ihips, which he ufes to trade with, and mans 
 with Europeans ; %r\d fometimes he fends them to make Reprifals 
 on his Neighbours, who have irjur'd him *, but his Captains at 
 Sea, as well as Land, to kill nobody. He has alfo forty or 
 fifty Gallies, mann'd with about fixty Men each, which are of 
 Service in the Gulph of Siam, in a fmooth Sea, but of no great 
 Ufe elfewhere. They have very fine Barges in their Rivers, 
 iixteen or twenty Feet long, and yet made out of the Body of a 
 
 fmgle Tree. Every Perfon in Siam is inroll'd, that 
 Forces none may efcape the perfonal Service of his Prince fix 
 o/'Siam. Months in the Year. We need not think it ftrange, that 
 
 thefe Princes are able to bring fo many hundred thoufand 
 Men into the Field, as our Writers tell us. if our Princes were 
 to mufter their whole Pofle, no doubt but their Armies would be 
 proportionably large. But what are thefe undifciplin'd Multitudes 
 at laft ! A very fmall Number of regular Troops will eafily difperfe 
 them ; their Numbers making them more liable to Confufion. 
 The Forces of the King of lonquin in Pay, quarter'd in different 
 
 Parts of the Kingdom, amount to 1 10000 Men, molt 
 Forces of them Foot, and arm'd with Match-lccks and broad 
 of 'Ton- Swords : Thefe Soldiers are ufually good Bodies of Men, 
 quin. every Village and City being oblig'd to fend the beft 
 
 Men they can pick out: The Naval Force 1b very 
 
 trifling ;
 
 Chap. XXI. Prejent State of India. 445 
 
 trifling ; for the Tonquinefe have few Veflels that will bear 
 the Sea. 
 
 Character.] The Indians are of a good Stature, well-fhaped, 
 and agreeable Features ; and it is generally obferv'd, that there 
 are hardly any deformM or crooked People amongft them. Thofe 
 that inhabit the Northern Parts of this Empire, are o a deep 
 tawny Complexion ; and thofe in the South as black as Jet ; 
 thofe of the Mountains, in the middle Parts of the Peninfula, are 
 all Coal-black to a Man: Indeed the Indians on the Coaft, who 
 have mixed with the Portuguefe, and other Europeans, are gene- 
 rally of an Olive-colour ; but in any Part of the Country, the 
 Natives have long black Hair, and black Eyes, let their Com- 
 plexion be what it will. The Indians are to be diflinguifhed into 
 Moors or Moguls, and Pagans or original Indians. The Moors or 
 Moguls are a Mixture of Tartars, Perjians, Arabs, and almoft 
 every Mahometan Nation. Thefe having the Power in their Hands, 
 behave like Lords of the Country, and treat the antient Inhabi- 
 tants with fome Contempt, and feem to have ftill a greater Con- 
 tempt, or rather Averfion, to all Chriftians in general, tho' they 
 are ferviceable to the Moguls as Engineers, Mathematicians, &c 
 and frequently give great Pay to thofe who enter into their Ser- 
 vice. The Pagans, who are by much the greateft Number, are 
 certainly as polite and ingenious a People, and as peaceable, hum- 
 ble, and inoffenfive in their Behaviour, as are to be found on the 
 Face of the Earth ; they are alfo extremely tender and com- 
 panionate, even to Animals and the vileft Infecis : as for Courage, 
 it is true, they are not very remarkable ; however, few People 
 preferve a more equal Temper at the Approach of Death, tho' 
 they would not many of them deprive an Animal of Life for the 
 World ; and even many among them are for inflicting no corporal 
 Punilhments on Offenders. As to the Indian Women in general, 
 their fprightly Motions, their foft charming Afpedts, their amo- 
 rous Glances, and irrefiftible Mien, gain the Admiration of all 
 Foreigners ; and all this under the Difadvantage of a dark Com- 
 plexion. The Siamefe are of a fmall Stature, but 
 well - proportion'd ; their Complexions are very Natives of 
 fwarthy, and the Paces of both Men and Women are Siam. 
 of the broadeft, with high Cheek-bones, dark fmall 
 Eyes, large Mouths, and thick pale Lips, fhort Nofes, and round 
 at the End, and large Ears. The Siamefe have a ready and clear 
 Conception, and their Repartees are quick and very fmart ; they 
 imitate any Thing at Sight very well ; and are neither lafcivious 
 or intemperate, nor will wanton Difcourfe pafs for Wit, or be 
 taken for Sublimity of Genius ; drinking ftrong Liquors is counted 
 infimous amongft them, and Adultery is hardly heard of at Siam : 
 
 They
 
 44<? Prefent State of India. m Part II. 
 
 They are polite and courteous, and their Minds are as calm as 
 heir Heaven, having the good Fortune to have the Command of 
 their Paffions. They are great Lovers of their Wives and Child- 
 ren, and as well belov'd by them , their Children are faid to be 
 exceeding engaging, and of a fweet Temper. The Tonouinefe are 
 L-e : r of / T midd,e Statu , and clean-limb'd ; their Nofe 
 Natives of and Lips are proportionable and well-made, but their 
 Tonquin. Faces are a little flattifh, and of an oval Form. 
 
 ^ 11 .1 I P J e are courteous a "d obliging to Strangers, 
 especially the trading Part of them, and mighty fair Dealers 
 However the Magiitrates are faid to be proud and imperious, 
 their Soldiery mfolent ; and their Poor, who are very numerous 
 given to thieving They are reckon'd very ingenious and dili- 
 
 S h FT? u^iV Univerfall X lifted to Gaming from 
 the higheft to the loweft, from which nothing can reftrain them. 
 The French Writers charge the Native, of India with want of 
 
 r r ^ Ura ?f ' but l r n the Authofit X of fome of our own 
 
 C^rage of Travellers, thefe People have behav'd themfelves 
 the Indians with the greateft Bravery in the Face of the Enemy 
 
 and upon other Occafions. The Indians have no 
 Learning. Latin and Greek ; they are, however, Men of ftrong 
 
 Keafon and fpeak ex re nata, upon any Occafion, 
 
 exceeding well; their Books are but few, and thofe Manufcript 
 
 he Ar of Printing not being yet in Ufe amongft them. The 
 
 Court Language is the Perfan, which is fpoken by all the great 
 
 Men, and the polite World in general : The learned Language is 
 
 H-ff v u% { J hCy haVe a S reat VaIue for their 
 
 Hi/top Hiitery which is written in Verfe, and contains 
 
 n n v man >' r fabu,0 1 us delations of their Heroes and fubordi- 
 nate Deities, that formerly inhabited their Country. Their Skill 
 in the Mathematics is not extrrordinary, except in 
 praftical Arithmetic, wherein few People in the 
 
 Ar 
 
 tic 
 
 World excel them, this being their principal Study 
 
 from their Infancy. They have fome Tables of the 
 Afironomy. antient Aftronomers, for calculating Eclipfes, and are 
 
 pretty exadt in their Predictions. But the Science the 
 moft univerfal y pradifed, and by which even their Prints govern 
 
 their Affairs, is judicial Ailrology. The Mogul will 
 Apology. no t fo much as undertake a Journey, or refolve upon 
 
 trll Mm ShJ7- ? g f Confeauence > Iefs the Aitrologers 
 tell him, that it is a fortunate Hour to undertake it. The Indians 
 
 PA.* fu 1 " P A h >' flc is not very great, undemanding no- 
 
 **ffie* thing of Anatomy j however, they ufe Simples! and 
 
 whirh ,W / PP Y m Wkh SUCC( *' 3nd have fecret Recipes 
 
 which they do not communicate. 
 
 Religion.]
 
 Chap. XXI. Prefint State of India. 447 
 
 Religion.] The original Natives of India, who are by far 
 the moil numerous, are Idolaters : There are reckon'u three or 
 fourfcore feveral Tribes or Cafls among thefe Pagans, but the 
 chief are the Bramins, the Rajaputes or Rajhboots, and the Banians 
 or Cbontres. The Bramins teach, that there is but one God in- 
 finitely perfed, and that their Images reprefent fome Heroes, and 
 virtuous Perfons, who formerly dwelt on the Earth, and are now 
 exalted to Heaven, where they apprehend them to be Mediators 
 for them, which is the Reafon they give for paying their Devo- 
 tion before thefe Images. They have fome confuted Notion of 
 the Creation, and Destruction of Mankind by a Flood : They be- 
 lieve a pre-exiftent State, and that the good and bad Fortune we 
 meet with in this World, is either a Reward or Punifhment for 
 what we have done in a former ; and that thofe who behave them- 
 felves well in this Life, fhall be rewarded in another State. The 
 moral Duties requir'd by their Law, deliver'd by Brama, their 
 great Law-giver, are Charity to the Poor, not to kill, or lye, or 
 ileal, or defraud, or opprefs any Perfon. Some endeavour to do 
 more than their Law requires, thereby making feveral Divifions 
 araongft them, hoping to enjoy an extraordinary Place in Heaven ; 
 fome eat no Flefh, others eat fome kind of Flefh ; fome of them 
 marry, and others condemn themfelves to a State of Celibacy, 
 and will not fo much as look upon a Woman ; molt of them bathe 
 and wafh feveral times a Day ; others will not wafh. at all, for 
 fear of deftroying fome living Creatures ; and as they are appre- 
 henfive they may be the Death of fome imperceptible Animals, 
 by drawing in their Breath, wear a Piece of Silk or Mullin before 
 their Mouths : They burn no Wood for the fame Reafon, and 
 carry a Brufh in their Hands to fweep the Place where they fit 
 down, that they may not crufh the Soul of any Creature out of its 
 Body. The ten principal Images, which are the Objecls of their 
 Adoration, are fuch Figures as their Law relates their God 
 Mabadeu has appear'd in the World under, at feveral times, for 
 the Service of Mankind. In the firft he is reprefented with four 
 Heads, and as many Arms ; in another with a Head like a Hog, 
 with two great Tufks, and a Body like a Man's, and four Arms 
 and Hands. This Image is very common in India ; and, having 
 a dreadful Afpedt, the Europeans imagine it reprefents fome Devil. 
 There are feveral other monflrous Reprefentations of their God, 
 one of them partly Man, and partly Fifh ; but the Hiltories of 
 them are fo very trifling, that they are not worth repeating. 
 The greateft Part of their Worlhip feems to be Singing, Dancing, 
 and playing on mufical Inftruments, and in offering Rice, and other 
 Food ; not but People are fometimes feen praying before the 
 Shrines of their Gods, with all the Fervour and Devotion that a 
 2 Seafe
 
 448 Prefent State of India. Part II. 
 
 Senfe of their Wants can be fuppofed to infpire. The Banians aje 
 the mod numerous, as well as the moil wealthy, of all the Pagan 
 Tribes : Thefe are alfo fubdivided into many Tribes, who have 
 each of them their refpe&ive Tenets of Religion. One Thing 
 however they all agree in, and that is, in their Tendernefs for all 
 manner of Animals, which they do not only forbear to kill, but 
 preferve and make Provision for them. This proceeds from that 
 Opinion, that every Man animates fome noble or defpicable Ani- 
 mal after Death, according to his Behaviour in this Life. The 
 Cow is in the greateft Efteem among them, to which they pay a 
 particular kind of Veneration every Morning ; not only becaufe 
 they fuppofe the happieft Souls take up their Abode in thefe Ani- 
 mals, but becaufe, after Death, as the Banians teach, this Beaft 
 is to conduit them over a River, over which it would be impoffible 
 to paf?, without holding by the Cow's Tail. Another Reafon, 
 amongft many more, of their Veneration for this Beaft, is, that 
 their God Mabadeu, being highly provoked by the Sins of the 
 People, and refolving to deftroy the World, was appeafed by the 
 Cow. A great Part of their Religion confifts in their frequent 
 Wafhing, Bathing, and keeping themfelves undefiled from the 
 Touch of Chriftian?, and other polluted Hands, as they efteem all 
 Strangers. They never drink out of the fame Cup, or out of 
 any Yeftcl, a Stranger has touch'd ; they even carry this Extrava- 
 gancy fo far, that they will not drink out of the fame Well 
 wherein a profane Vefl'cl has been let down. The labouring Men 
 are taught to fmg fome religious Compofition in Verfe, confiding 
 of Prayers and Praifes, which they continue to do as foon as it is 
 Light in the Morning, and conclude the Day with ; and when a 
 Company of Hufbandmen are employed in the fame Work, thefe 
 facred Rhimes are repeated alternately, or by a fmgle Perfon, the 
 Feft anfwering in a Chorns, without a Quarter of an Hour's In- 
 termiflion all the Day long: The Watermen alfo, while they are 
 at the Oar, are perpetually repeating and fmging certain Stanzas, 
 like the Druids of old among us, who inftrufted their People in 
 Reijgion and Hillory by Songs. As to the Sedl of the Rajbboofs, 
 they perform the fame moral Duties as the- Bramins, but they 
 abftain from no Meat, except it be tlie Cow, and the Flefh of 
 fome other Bcafts which they look upon as facred ; for which 
 Reafon the Banians, tho' reckon'd inferior, will not eat with them. 
 There is a religions Order among the Pagans, call'd Fayrrirs, 
 (there is alfo this Order, which is fometime? call'd Dervifrs, .zmong 
 the Mahometans) who make Vows of Poverty and Celibacy, and 
 fome of tnem inflict unheard-of Tortures on themfelves, in o*dcr 
 to take Heaven by this holy Violence. Some of them maka 
 Vows to remain in one Pofture all their Lives, and will volunta- 
 rily diftort and diflecate their Bone: : Some r.rc fcen with their 
 5 Hands
 
 Chap. XXI. Prefent State of India. 449 
 
 Hands ftretch'd out to Heaven, which, by holding long in one 
 Pofture, cannot be brought down again without great Violence; 
 others ftand looking up itedfaftly towards Heaven, throwing their 
 Heads fo far back between their Shoulders, that they cannot fee 
 any thing that moves upon the Earth, as if this lower World was 
 not worth their Notice ; but, before they can bring themfelves to 
 remain conftantly in thefe Poftures, they go thro' extreme Pain 
 and Uneafinefs : There are others, who load themfelves with 
 heavy Chains, which they drag after them as long as they live : 
 Others vow never to lie or fit down, but either walk or lean ; and, 
 when they pray, are drawn up by the Heels to the Bough of a 
 Tree, and their Heads hanging down towards the Earth, as un- 
 worthy to look up to Heaven. There are others, who powder 
 their Hair with Afhes, which they let hang down to the middle of 
 their Backs j they lay themfelves down naked on the Ground un- 
 der certain Trees, without Bed or Covering, gathering the Daft. 
 and Dirt together, with which they beikiear their Bodies. The 
 People refort with much Devotion to the Places where thefe 
 Penances are performed, and the Devotees obtain the Reputation 
 of great Sanciity, being almoft ador'd in their Life-time. We 
 are not to think, that the whole Body of Faquirs, who are very 
 numerous, lead fuch very auftere Lives ; on the contrary, they 
 rove about the Country in large Companies, the moft pleafant 
 Part of the Year, and the People are j.lways very liberal to them ; 
 and look upon it as a very meritorious At to relieve them. 
 There is another fort of Idolaters, eali'd Per/ees or Gaures, Wor- 
 fhippers of Fire, who tranfplanted themfelves from Perfect, when 
 the Mahometans made a Conqueft of that Country. Thefe alfo 
 acknowledge one Supreme God, the Creator of all Things ; and 
 that Zertooji, their great Lawgiver, was caught up into Heaven, 
 where Fire was deliver'd him, which he brought down from 
 thence, and commanded his Difciples to worfhip it ; and accord- 
 ingly nothing is a greater Crime amongft them, than to extinguilh 
 Fire of any kind. They keep Fires conftantly burning in their 
 Temples, and, they fay, have burnt, without ever being extin- 
 guish 'd for many Generations : They have as much Veneration 
 fpr their Cock, as the Banian; have for their Cow, but eat in- 
 differently almoft of all other Animals, except Beef and Pork ; 
 they will not drink out of the fame Cup, or eat of the fame Difh, 
 with Strangers. As to the Religion of the Moots, it is the fame 
 with that of the Turks, already mention'd : Thefe alfo teaching, 
 that all Men ought to believe, that there is one only great God, 
 and Mahomet his Prophet ; that Abraham is the Friend of God, 
 Mo/es the Meffenger of God, and Chrift the Breath of God i that 
 every Man ought to marry, to iccreafe the Number of Believers ? 
 that all Men ought to be charitable to the. .Poor ; to pray Five 
 
 G g timi
 
 450 Prefent State of India. Part II. 
 
 times a Day j to be obedient to Parents ; to do no Murder ; to 
 do to others as they would be done by ; and to abftain from 
 Swines Flefh. As the Indian Idolaters have their Faquirs and 
 Devotees, fo have the Moors ; thefe alfo condemn themfelves to 
 very affli&ing Penances, and fome of them go perfectly naked, 
 without the leaft Covering, in that populous City of Surat ; and 
 will walk in the moll public Places, at Noon-day, as uncon- 
 cernedly as if they had their Clothes on. The Chriftians, who 
 are difperfed throughout India, are moil of them Profelytes to the 
 Popifh Miflionaries ; tho' there are fome, called Chriftians of St. 
 Thomas, who is fuppofed to have planted the Gofpel in this Part 
 of the World, whom the Miffionaries found here at their Arrival. 
 The Points wherein thefe Indian Chriftians differ'd from the 
 Roman Church, were the Adminiftring the Sacrament in both 
 Kinds, not Baptizing their Children till they were forty Days 
 old, having no Images in their Churches except the Crofs, al- 
 lowing the Priefts to marry, ufing no extreme Unftion j but the 
 Romijh Miffionaries have brought them over to the Doctrine and 
 
 Difcipline of their Church. The Siamefe believe 
 The Siamefe. the Form of the World only to be eternal ; all 
 
 vifible Objedls they look upon as fo many rational 
 Beings, who have lived and exifted in a former State, and muft 
 die and revive again ; and that the Heavens, the Earth, Plants, 
 and all Things elfe, have their Period, and will be fucceeded by 
 new Heavens, and a new Earth, ciff. They allow the Soul to be 
 material, and yet will not admit, that it is perifhable ; but that it 
 animates fome other Creature, and knows Pain or Pleafure ac- 
 cording to its deferving, till it enters a human Body again, whofe 
 Circumftances will be fuitable to the Behaviour of the Soul in its 
 feveral Tranfmigrations. They do not imagine, that Souls pafs 
 immediately into a Place of ultimate Happinefs or Mifery, but 
 into certain Spaces, differing in Degrees of Happinefs and Mifery, 
 beyond the vifible World, where they fhall be punifh'd or re- 
 warded ; and in all thefe States they are born and die ; but, after 
 feveral Tranfmigrations, in which a Soul has perform'd a Multi- 
 titude of good Works, they believe it may fo far merit, as to be 
 exalted above all mortal States ; and, being exempted from any 
 future Tranfmigration, fhall enjoy an eternal Reil, and be no 
 more liable to Pain or Grief, or any Calamity whatever ; but the 
 proper Hell of the Siamefe is an eternal Tranfmigration. The 
 Perfon they fuppofe has furpaffed all Men that ever lived in Holi- 
 nefs, and whom they worfhip with the higheft Devotion, is 
 Sommona Codom, who, they fay, exercifes his Power only over the 
 Siamefe, not concerning himfelf with other Nations, as they have 
 particular Deities prefiding over them. As they believe they 
 may contribute to the Relief of the Deceafed, fo they believe alfo, 
 
 that 
 \
 
 Chap. XXI. Prefent State of India. 451 
 
 that theDead are capable of doing them Good or Hurt; and accord- 
 ingly pray to their departed Friends, and do them all the Honour 
 they can contrive at their Funerals. They hold that they ought 
 not to kill, to fteal, commit Uncleannefs, to lye, or drink in- 
 toxicating Liquors. By killing, they underftand not only to kill 
 Men or Animals, but Vegetables, and therefore do not deftroy the 
 Seed of any Plant. The Siamefe fay, they are not the Occafion 
 of the Death of an Enemy, but their Enemies themfelves, in ad- 
 vancing upon their Shot j for they always ihoot fomething fhort 
 of them upon the full Difcharge, and then they fay, that they 
 are not the Occafion of the Death of an Enemy, but the Enemies 
 themfelves in advancing upon their Shot. The Religion of Ton- 
 quin being the lame with the Cbinefe, the Reader will find an Ac- 
 count of it in the next Chapter. The Chriftian Religion, we are 
 told by the Jefuits, has made a great Progrefs in Tonquin ; but 
 Dampier acquaints us, that when he was in this Country, the 
 King and Court were very averfe to the Chriftian Religion ; and 
 that tho' the poorer Sort of People were perfuaded to embrace the 
 Gofpel, it was for the Sake of the Rice that was diitributed 
 amongft them by the Miflionaries. 
 
 Customs.] The general Drefs of the Indians is a white Veft of 
 Calico, Silk, or Muflin, which folds over before, and is tied with 
 Strings either on the Right or Left Side ; the Sleeves are clofe to 
 their Arms, and are fo long, that they fit in Wrinkles about the 
 Wrift ; the upper Part is clofe to their Bodies, and 
 fhews their Shape ; from the Middle downwards it is Habit. 
 gather'd, and fits full in Plaits, reaching a little below 
 their Knees. Under their Veft they wear another fomething 
 fhorter, their Breeches reaching down to their Heels inftead of 
 Stockings, and they put their Feet bare into their Slippers, which 
 are never faften'd, nor pulPd up at the Heels, being ready to flip 
 off when they go into any Houfe. They wear a Safh about their 
 Middles, and Turbants on their Heads. As for the common 
 People among the Pagans, fome of them wear a little Safh about 
 their Loins, but many of them go perfectly naked, except that 
 they have a String about their Middle, to which they tie a Cloth 
 of about a Hand's Breadth. The Women, thofe of them we fee, 
 have a Piece of white Calico tied about their Middles, which 
 reaches down to their Knees ; the Remainder of it is thrown over 
 their Bodies like a Shoulder-belt, covering their Breafts, and Part 
 of their Back ; they have Jewels or Toys in their Ear?, Nofe, and 
 Hair, as they can procure. They have Bracelets or Rings of 
 Gold, Silver, Brafs, or Glafs, as they can bell afford, upon their 
 vVrift?, Ancles, Fingers, or Toes ; the Men alfo frequently wear 
 Bracelets upon their Wrifts. The ufual Difh to be met with in 
 
 G g z ' this
 
 452 Prefent State of India. Part II. 
 
 this Country is boil'd Rice, with a high-feafon'd Broth made of 
 Flefh or Fifh. The Flefli, which is feldom more than two or 
 three Ounces, is cut into little fquare Bits as big as 
 Diet. Dice, and laid on the Side of the Plate, of which they 
 eat but fparingly. A boil'd Fowl, cover'd with Rice, 
 is another great Difh among the better Sort of People ; a Fowl 
 boil'd with Butter, and {luffed with Raifons and Almonds, is an- 
 other line Difh amongft them : Another Difh, ufually ferv'd up, is 
 Beef and Mutton, cut into Pieces as big as one's Hand, very well 
 feafon'd with Pepper and Salt, and dipped into a Mixture of Oil 
 and Garlick. The ufual Compliment in India is the lifting the 
 Right-hand to the Head, and fometimes both ; and, 
 The ufual if it be to a Perfon of Diftin&ion, bowing the Body 
 Compli- a little. When the Mahometans meet, the ufual 
 ments. Compliment is, God give you Healthy or, I njuijh you 
 
 the Prayers of the Poor : The deep Compliment to a 
 Prince, is bowing the Body low, putting the Hand down to the 
 Ground, then to the Breail, and afterwards lifting it up to the 
 Head, and this repeated three times. Upon a Vifit, the Perfon 
 vifited does not move to meet his Gueft, but intreats him to fit 
 down by him on the Carpet : They are very referv'd, feldom or 
 never talking faft or loud. Tumblers and Jugglers go 
 Diverftons. from Town to Town as in other Countries, and are 
 fo dexterous in their Tricks, that fome of our own 
 Countrymen have imputed them to Magic, and the Power of the 
 Devil. One of the Great Mogul's favourite Diverfions is the 
 Fighting of Elephants, and other wild Beafls ; and the feeing Men 
 engage with Lions and Tygers. The Roads are generally a deep 
 Sand, which is fo hot in the fair Seafon about Noon, 
 Way of that it would burn their Feet, jf they were not as hard 
 Travelling, as a Shoe-fole ; and there is no fuch Thing as walk- 
 ing in the Sand with Shoes on. When a Man of 
 Subflance travels, he ufually tires ten or twelve Chairmen to carry 
 his Palanquin, which is a well-contriv'd Couch with Pillows, and 
 an arched Canopy over it : In thefe they fit or lie, as they think 
 fit ; and it is carried by four of the Men at a time, two before, and 
 two behind, who lay the Pole upon their Shoulders, and run at 
 the rate of four or five Miles an Hour, their Fellows relieving 
 them at certain times without {landing ftill. A little before thy 
 defign to bait, fome of the Men are fent to the Villages, where 
 they buy Provisions, and they drefs it as they go along. Oxen 
 are ufed to ride on, as well as for Burdens j they will trot on at a 
 pretty round rate, and fometimes they run Races with them. It 
 is very troublefome travelling in the rainy Seafon, the flat Coun- 
 tries being overflowed, and innumerable Torrents falling from the 
 Mountains j but this does not hinder the common People from 
 
 taking
 
 Chap. XXI. Prefent State of India." 453 
 
 taking Journeys at this Time of the Year ; for they will take 
 Water without any Difficulty, and fwrim with incredible Strength 
 acrofs broad Rivers, which run very fwiftly. As to the Mar- 
 riages of the Indians, the Fathers make the Bargain 
 before the young People come to the Ufe of their Marriages 
 Reafon ; nor does either the Boy or the Girl, when 
 they come of Age, ever imagine they have any Right to difpute 
 the Matter, but look upon themfelves as much obliged to obey 
 their Parents in this Particular, as in any other Command : How- 
 ever, the young Man, if he does not like the Girl his Father has 
 provided him, may take another, and have as many Concubines 
 as he pleafes ; but the Woman has no Remedy, and if fhc murmur 
 at her Hufband's Conduct, he may reduce her to the Condition of 
 a Slave. They conflantly marry into their own Tribe or Caft ; a 
 Merchant muft marry into a Merchant's Family, a Smith into a 
 Smith's, a Carpenter into a Carpenter's, and fo of every other 
 Trade or Profeflion. The Wives never bring any other Fortune 
 than their Clothes ; and among thofe who are wealthy, it is faid, 
 the Father of the Hu/band advances a confiderable Sum to the 
 Wife's Friends ; and, 'tis thought, never eats with the Hufband, 
 but waits till he has done. The Indians never fwaddle up their 
 Children, but let them go perfectly naked, both Boys and Girls, 
 till they are fix or feven Years old, and 'tis not to be imagin'd how 
 foon they will crawl about the Floor. The Moors and Mahometan 
 Indians are allowed four Wives, and as many Concubines as they 
 can keep. As to the Solemnization of a Wedding, nothing can be 
 more fplendid : The Bridegroom is carried by Night through the 
 Streets, drefled with the richeft Clothes and jewels they can pro- 
 cure ; the Streets are made as light as Day by a great Number of 
 Torches, with Flags, Streamers, and Mufic, marching before 
 them, and a Croud of their Friends and Acquaintance, who come 
 to exprefi their Joy on the happy Occafion : Being come to the 
 Bride's Houfe, where the Marriage is celebrated, he takes the 
 Bride home with him ; and, from that time, me is leldom ever 
 fuffer'd to fee her neareft Male Relations, but in the Prefence of 
 her Hufband. When a Perfon dies, the Corpfe is dreffed up in fuch 
 Clothes as he ufually wore in his Life-time; then 
 they prepare a Funeral-pile near feme River or Pond ; Funerals. 
 and if they are People of Fortune, they mix vaft 
 <^uantitie3 of fweet Wood with the reft : When the Corpfe i9 re- 
 . duced to Ames, they either throw them into the Water, or leave 
 them where they may be wafh'd away by the River ; but, if the 
 Perfon dies where Wood is not to be had, they heave the Corpfe 
 into feme River, with a Weight to' fink it ; and if they have no 
 Pod, and no Opportunity of committing the Corpfe to the Deep, 
 they bury it; but this they never choofe, imagining the Soul of' 
 G g 3 their
 
 454 Prefent State of India. Part II. 
 
 their departed Friend to be under fome Uneafinefs, till his Body be 
 reduced to Afhes, or otherways confumed : Befides, Fire and 
 Water, as they apprehend, purges it from the Drofs, or ill Habits, 
 it may have contracted. The Relations vifit the Places where the 
 Body was burnt, carrying Food thither at certain times, which is 
 devour'd by Beafts and Birds as foon as they are gone, tho' it is 
 probably intended for the Ufe of the Deceafed. The Indian Ma- 
 hometans do not burn, but bury their Dead ; the Corpfe, being de- 
 cently drafted, is carried to the Burying-place upon a Bier, with- 
 out a Coffin ; their Relations are ufually at great Expences on 
 thefe Occafions, hold a Feftival for feveral Days, and they annually 
 refort to the Tomb, and obferve a Feftival in Honour of their 
 deceafed Friend. It is reckon 'd infolent to ftand before a Perfon 
 
 of Quality, or before their Mailer?, in Siam ; and 
 Rules of therefore Slaves, iffc. fit upon their Heels, with their 
 Civility in Heads a little inclin'd, and their Hands joined, and 
 Siam. lifted up to their Foreheads ; and, in paffing by a 
 
 Superior, they bend their Bodies, joining their Hands, 
 and lifting them towards their Heads, in proportion to the Rcfpedl 
 they would pay. When an Inferior makes a Vifit, he comes 
 Hooping into the Room, then proftrates himfelf, and remains after- 
 wards upon his Knees, fitting upon his Heels, without fpeaking a 
 Word, till the Perfon he vifits fpeaks to him. If a Man of Qua- 
 lity vifits an Inferior, he walks upright, and the Mafter of the 
 Houfe receives him at the Door of the Houfe, and waits on him 
 fo far when he goes away, but never farther. When a Perfon 
 comes unexpectedly into Company, it often occafions a general 
 Remove; for every one muft fit in the Place appropriated to his 
 Quality j and the Pofture alfo is different, according to the Refpecl. 
 they are to pay : In fome Cafes they may fit ftrait, in others their 
 Bodies muft bend a little j fometimes they may advance one Foot, 
 at others both, and fit crofs-legged ; but, if the Perfon is much in 
 ferior to the Company, he muft remain upon his Knees, refting 
 himfelf upon his Heels. When they falute en pajant, it is with 
 both Hands joined together, lifted towards their Head, or the 
 Right-hand at leaft. They have a mighty Refpect for their 
 Heads, and it is a very great Affront to ftroke them ; even their 
 Caps muft not be ufed too familiarly. Wives are purchafed in 
 
 Tonquiri, and the People are not (tinted to any Number, 
 Marriages unlefs by their Poverty ; and, in time of Scarcity, the 
 of the Poor are often compell'd to fell both their Wives and 
 
 Tonqui- Children for Food. They are very profufe in their 
 nefe. Weddings ; and it muft be a poor Man indeed, when 
 
 the Feaft does not laft three Days. The Tonquinefe 
 
 bury, and do not burn their Dead. Within a Month 
 funerals. after the Corpfe is laid in the Ground, a great Feaft 
 
 is
 
 Chap. XXII. Prefent State of 'China.' 455 
 
 is made at the Grave, if the Deceafed was a Perfon of Quality ; 
 at which Solemnity the Country People refort, and find great 
 Plenty of Provilion, with which they make very merry upon thefe 
 Occaiions. 
 
 Curiosities.] In feveral Parts of the Moguls Empire, are di- 
 vers famous Volcanos, which fometimes break out in terrible Erup- 
 tions of Fire, and fulphurous Matter. In feveral Parts of Decan is 
 a Tree, call'd by Travellers, the Nure-tree, whofe Nature is 
 fuch, that every Morning 'tis full of ftringy red Flowers, which, 
 in the Heat of the Day, fall down in Showers to the Ground, 
 and, blofToming again in the Night, it daily appears in a new 
 Livery. 
 
 CHAP. XXII. 
 
 The Prefent State c/China. 
 
 Boundaries.] QH1NA (formerly the antient Sime of 
 Ptolemy) is bounded on the Eaft by the 
 Oriental Ocean, which feparates it from the Ifles of Japan ; on 
 the Weft by Tartary and India ; on the North by Tartary, being 
 feparated from it by feveral Mountains and Defarts j and on the 
 South by Part of the Oriental Ocean, and Tonquin. 
 
 Situation.] This Country is fituated between the 21ft and 
 42d Degree of North Latitude ; and between the 95th and 121ft 
 Eaft Longitude. The Length is 1400, and the Breadth 1100 
 Miles. 
 
 Gg 4 Divifion.
 
 45 6 
 
 Divifion. 
 
 China 
 1 . Pekin 
 
 2. Leaotung 
 
 3. Xanfi 
 
 4. Xenji 
 
 5. Honatt 
 
 6. Nankin 
 
 7. Xintum 
 
 8. Chekiam 
 
 9. Kiamfi 
 to. Huquam 
 
 1 1 . Suchuen 
 
 12. Queychen 
 I 3 Yunan 
 
 14. $>uamfi 
 
 1 5 . >uamtum 
 
 16. Fokien 
 
 Prefent State of Chins. 
 
 Part II. 
 
 Square Miles, 
 fcf. 
 
 1 105000 
 
 When the Ta- 
 tars expell'd the 
 Cbinefe out of Pe- 
 /, they permitted 
 them to build a new 
 City adjoining to it ; 
 To that Pekin is now 
 two Cities join'd in 
 one, as London and 
 Wejlmin/ter. The 
 French Miflionaries 
 allow Pekin to be 
 four times as big as 
 Paris, and that the 
 Inhabitants of it ate 
 much more nume- 
 rous than thofe of 
 Paris. 
 
 Chief 
 Towns. 
 
 Pekin 
 
 Xinyam 
 Tay^uen 
 Sigan 
 Scbaifung 
 Nankin 
 Cinan 
 Hamcheu 
 Nancham 
 Vucbam 
 Chingtu 
 Queyang 
 Yunan 
 2>ueiUn 
 ^uamebieu 
 Focheu. 
 
 Diilance and Bearing 
 from Pekin the Capita!. 
 
 2000 NE of Agra 
 
 3040 E of Ifpahan 
 
 3040 SE of Mofco-uu 
 
 3840 E of Conjlant. 
 
 280 NE -^ 
 
 zioSW 
 
 540 SW 
 
 340 S 
 
 480 S 
 
 200 S 
 
 600 s 
 
 680 S )of Pekin, 
 
 580S 
 
 760 S 
 
 940 SW 
 
 1050 SW 
 
 900 SW 
 
 1020 s 
 
 840 S J 
 
 . Climate.] The Air of China, in general, is very tempe- 
 rate : The Northern Provinces, indeed, have ufuaMy a very fevere 
 Winter of about four Months, <viz. from the Beginning of No- 
 vember to the Beginning of March : In the Southern Provinces, 
 they have neither Froft nor Snow ; but, as in other Countries, 
 which lie within or near the Tropics, they have ufually ftormy Wea- 
 ther, and Rains, about the Equinox, particularly in Autumn ; and, as 
 to the Heats, they are made very tolerable by the Help of their 
 Grottoes, and refrelhing Shades, which the Inhabitants retire to in 
 the Heat of the Day. China, like other Countries, confifls of 
 Hills and Valleys ; but both the one and the other are made as 
 level as.poffible, and laid out in Plots, like Gardens, by the In- 
 duftry of the Natives. The Soil, in general, is very rich, abound- 
 ing in Corn, and Wine, and all Kinds of Fruits and Provifions 
 neceflary to render Life agreeable. This Country is elteemed one 
 of the fineft and moft fruitful in the whole World ; and was a 
 great Surprize to the Europeans, in the unexpected Difcovery of fo 
 tine a Nation, and fo polite a People, which were unknown to 
 thefe Parts of the World till the Difcovery of the Eajl-fodies, as 
 we have obferved in the laft Chapter : It is exceeding populous, 
 iuppofed to contain near 70,000,000 of People : Not only the ftately 
 Cities, but even the Towns and Villages, are crouded with Inha- 
 bitants j and the Roads, as well as Streets, are continually full 
 
 of
 
 Chap. XXII. Prefent State of China. 457 
 
 of Paffengers. The chief Produces of this Country are, Quick- 
 fiiver, Silks, Porcelane Dirties, or China Ware, Cottons, Rhubarb, 
 Sugar, Camphire, Muik, Ginger, China Wood, Linen, Oil, Ebony, 
 Sandal Wood, Canes, Tea, &c . Tea is a Plant peculiar to this 
 Country : It ufually grows at the Foot of fome Mountain ; the 
 Root refembling t.hat of a Peach-tree, and its Flower that of 
 white wild Rofes. The Tree is of all Sizes, from two Feet to an 
 hundred in Height. The three Sorts of Tea, commonly brought 
 to Europe, are of the fame Plant j 3nd only the Seafons of the 
 Year when it is gather'd, and the Soil, make the Difference. 
 Bohea is the very firft Bud, gather'd in the^Beginning of March, 
 and dried in the Shade ; the Imperial or Bing Tea is the fecond 
 Growth, in April; and the common Green Tea, or Singlo, in 
 May and June, which are both dried, in little Pans, over the Fire. 
 The Chineft have Mines of Gold and Silver ; but thofe of Gold 
 are never fuffer'd to be openV.. The Gold, which they have in fuch 
 Plenty, is wafh'd down by Torrents from the Mountains in the 
 rainy Seafons, and is faid to need no refining. They have alfo 
 Mines of Tin, Iron, Copper, and fome Lead. Several of the 
 Chinefe Emperors have thought it worthy of their Royal Care, to 
 promote and teach their Subje&s Hufbandry, the Invention of the 
 Plough ; and feveral Inftruments, and Books of Hufbandry, they 
 afcribe to fome of their greateft Emperors. The longeft Day, in 
 the moft Southern Part of China, is about 1 3 \ Hours ; and, in 
 the Northmoft Part, about 1 5 Hours ; therefore this Country lies 
 in the 3d, 4th, 5 th, and 6th Northern Climate. 
 
 Government.] The Hiftories of China begin within two 
 or three hundred Years after the Flood, and fhew a Succeffion of 
 Monarchs down to this Time : But the Families of Kings have been 
 chang'd two and twenty Times, according to the bell Accounts. 
 There being great Confufion in the Hiftory of China, I fhall only 
 detain the Reader with a fhort Account of the great Revolution 
 which happen'd, whereby not only Tartary, from whence the 
 prefent Imperial Family is defcended, but many other Tartar 
 Kingdoms, came to be united with China, under one Monarch, in 
 the Year 1645. Xunchi, King of Nuiche, one of the little Tartar 
 Kingdoms, North-Eaft of China, invaded the Province of Leao- 
 tung ; againlt whom the Emperor of China fent Ufanguey, one of 
 his Generals, and the War continued fome time with various 
 Succefs. In the mean while, the Chinefe broke out into open 
 Rebellion, and a great Army was rais'd to oppofe them ; but 
 they deferted to the Rebel?, .who thereupon advanced to Pekin, 
 the capital City, and enter'd the outward Courts of the Palace, 
 before the Emperor had any Notice of their Approach. This 
 unfortunate Prince, finding hirofelf betray 'd, refolv'd to break 
 
 through
 
 458 Prefent State of China. Part II. 
 
 through the Rebels with fix hundred of his Guards, or perifti in the 
 Attempt ; but, they alfo abandoning him, he retired into a Garden 
 with his only Daughter ; and, having written a Letter to Lycungz, 
 the Commander of the Rebels, defiring him to fpare his Subje&s, he 
 firft ftabbed his Daughter to the Heart, and then hang'd himfelf. 
 The Emprefs, the Governor of the City, and many more of the 
 Court, of both Sexes, became alfo their own Executioners. The 
 Ufurper Lycungx immediately mounted the Throne, and exercis'd 
 all manner of Cruelties upon the Citizens of Pekin. Lycungz, 
 having laid Siege to a Town, where U/anguey, the late Emperor's 
 General, had Ihut himfelf up, he threatened to put his Father to 
 Death before his Face, if he would not furrender ; and foon after 
 put his Threats in Execution. U/anguey, provoked by his Father's 
 Death, and the Deftrudlion of his Prince, made Peace with the 
 tartars, and defir'd their Afliftance againft the Ufurper : Accord- 
 ingly they march'd againft him with their united Forces ; but 
 Lycungz fled to Pckin, where, having plunder'd and burnt the 
 Palace, he loaded his Followers with the Spoils, and retir'd into 
 the Province of Xenfi. The Citizens, having fuffer'd much from 
 the Ufurper, look'd upon the tartars as their Deliverers, and 
 begg'd their Protection, whom, not long before, they would have 
 been afhamed to have own'd for their Subjects. U/anguey left the 
 Tartars in Pofleflion of Pckin, while he purfu'd the Rebel Lycungz 
 into the Province of Xenfi. The Empire being diftrafted by 
 feveral potent Factions, Xunchi, who was already in pofleflion of the 
 Capital City, procur'd himfelf to be declar'd Emperor ; and invited 
 the Tartar Princes, his Neighbours, to march to Pekin; and, by 
 Force, expel the Chine/e Inhabitants out of the City. U/anguey, 
 returning from the Purfuit of the Rebel Lycungz, was amaz'd to 
 find his Confederate, the Tartar, had mounted the Throne, and 
 the Imperial City intirely poflefled by Tartars ; but nothing could 
 perfuade them to leave the delicious Country he had introduced 
 them into, and return to their barren Mountains ; and, finding 
 himfelf in no Condition, at that Time, to drive them out of 
 China, he came to an Accommodation with them ; and it was 
 agreed, that he fhould govern two or three Provinces with the 
 Title of King. At length a bloody War broke out between 
 Xunchi and U/anguey, wherein the latter was very fuccefsful at 
 firft ; and, if he had liv'd, would probably have driven the Tartars 
 out of China; but happening to die, the Face of Affairs was 
 alter'd, and the reft of the Provinces of China were reduced, and 
 Xunchi eftablifrVd in the Pofleflion of the Empire of China, and 
 Great Tartary. The Tartars, being much inferior to the Chine/e 
 in Number, oblig'd the Chine/e to cut off their Hair, and change 
 their Habits to the Tartar Falhion, that it might not be difcover'd. 
 bow inconfiderable a People they were, in comparifon of; the 
 
 Cbins/t.
 
 Chap. XXII. Prefent State of China. 459 
 
 Cbintfe. But what contributed flill more to the Eftablifhment of 
 the Tartars, was, the employing the Cbine/e to be Viceroys and 
 Governors of Provinces ; and fo made them acceffory to the fub- 
 duing their own Country. They govern'd the Cbine/e by their 
 own Laws ; and, except in the matter of their Hair and Habits, 
 the Tartars feem rather to have fubmitted to the Laws of the 
 Cbine/e, than to have impos'd any upon them ; and Tartary may 
 now be faid rather to be fubject to China, than China to Tartary : 
 For thither all the Wealth of the united Kingdom is carried, and 
 China has gain'd a vaft Addition of Strength by Tartary. 
 
 The Crown of China is faid to be hereditary by fome ; but it 
 is agreed by all, that the Emperor has a Power of 
 altering the Succeffion, and declaring any one of his Form o/Go- 
 Subjects his SuccefTor, tho 1 he has no Relation to 'venment. 
 the Royal Family; but then this mull, be pafled 
 and ratified by the Great Council, which confifts of the Princes 
 of the Blood, and Minifters of State ; and there have been Inftances 
 where the Emperor's Refolution has been oppofed, and his Defign 
 of fetting afide thofe who were looked upon to be next Heirs 
 defeated. The Concurrence of this Great Council is held fo abfo- 
 lutely neceffary, and their Advice of that Weight among the 
 People, that the Emperor never attempts to enact new Laws, or 
 reverfe or fufpend thofe in Force, without their AfTent : From 
 whence it appears, that, tho'' this Emperor is reprefented by many 
 as abfolute, he finds himfelf under a Neceflity of acling p.ccording 
 to the Laws of his Country, or he would endanger a Revolution. 
 This is farther evident, when we confider the feveral 
 fupreme Courts, thro' which all Bufinefs paffes ; for Supreme 
 the Emperor never acts but by the Mediation of fome Courts. 
 one or more of thefe ; even the Militia, or Revenues, 
 are not abfolutely at his Difpofal ; and tho' he has the greatefr. 
 Treafurc, and by much the greateft Forces of any Prince on the 
 Face of the Earth, he neither applies or commands the one or 
 the other directly, but his Rfolutions mult be confirmed by the 
 proper Courts, before they can be put in Execution. The Emperor 
 has one fupreme Council, compos'd of the Princes of the Blood 
 only, which does not affcmble but upon extraordinary Occafions. 
 There is another (landing fupreme Council, compos'd of the Princes 
 of the Blood, and great Officers, who, like our Privy Council, 
 conflantly attend Affairs of State : There are fix other Courts in 
 Pekin, fubordinate to this ; which, tho' they have their particular 
 Bufinefs affigned them, yet they are Checks upon one another ; 
 a,nd the Concurrence of feveral Courts is often neceflary to effect 
 any Bufinefs of Confequence. But, notwithftanding the Chine fe 
 Government is as regular as can be found upon the Face of the 
 fcirth, yet it h remarkable, that the Laws arc feldom put in 
 
 Execution,
 
 4-Go Prefent State of China. Part II. 
 
 Execution, there being, 'tis faid, a Circulation of Bribery from 
 
 the higheft to the loweft Officer. It is a Maxim of 
 ftlaxfms. this Government, to keep fome of the Children of 
 
 the Viceroys, and principal Governors, at Court, on 
 Pretence of Education, and that they may be in the way of Pre- 
 ferment ; but this is obferv'd to be principally as a Security for 
 their Father's Loyalty. They have another Maxim, they tell of, 
 that no Place fhall be fold ; however, this Law is fhamefully 
 evaded, it feems ; and Merit, withouc Money, will go but a little 
 way in China. Thus much indeed muft be admitted, that Candi- 
 dates for the meaneft Employments undergo fo many Exami- 
 nations, that 'tis almoft impoflible for an ignorant Man to pafs 
 mufter ; which is one great Point gain'd ; for many fufFer by the 
 
 Ignorance, as well as the Corruption, of their Magi- 
 Laius and ftrates in Other Governments. Nothing is more 
 Punijh- flriclly requir'd by the Chinefe Laws, than Submif- 
 
 ments* fion and Obedience to their Parents. If a Father 
 
 charges his Son with any Crime, before a Magiftrate, 
 there needs no other Proof of it ; the Son is fuppos'd to be guilty, 
 and fhall lofe his Life without further Evidence. If a Son fhould 
 lay violent Hands on his Parents, the Criminal is fentenced to be 
 cut into ten thoufand Pieces, and afterwards burnt ; his Houfes 
 and Lands deftroy'd, and even the Houfes that flood near him, to 
 remain as Monuments of fo deteftable a Crime. They are ftri&ly 
 commanded to honour the Magiftrate, who reprefents the Perfon 
 of their Prince ; and, to ftrike the Vulgar the more, he never 
 appears in public without the Badges of his Authority, and an 
 Equipage fuitable to his Poft. Treafon and Rebellion are punifh'd 
 with the greateft Rigour, the Criminal being fentenced to be cut 
 into ten thoufand Pieces : The Executioner ties him to a Stake, 
 and firft flays his Forehead, letting the Skin hang over his Eyes, 
 that he may not, as they fay, fee how barbaroufly he is mangled ; 
 and, having cut and tormented the Offender, what remains of him 
 is torn in Pieces by the Mob : And where the Crime is very great, 
 the Children and Family of the Offender fuffer with him. Mur- 
 der is punifh'd by Death : The meaner fort are beheaded, as being 
 deem'd the moft ignominious Punifhment ; and Perfons of Quality 
 are flrangled. Neither Theft or Adultery, unlefs fome Violence 
 is done to the Party, are punifh'd with Death, but by the Bafti- 
 nado ; or the Offender has a thick Board hung about his Neck, 
 and expos' J every Day, the Crime being written on the Board. 
 
 Courtezans are allow'd by the public Authority, 
 Seraglio, and are under the Regulation of the fame Officers, 
 or liar am, who take care of the Temples, and the Emperor's 
 
 Sacrifices. The Women entertain'd in this Prince's 
 
 Court confifl of the molt beautiful Virgins the Viceroys and 
 
 ( Governors
 
 Chap. XXII. Pre/em State of China. 40 1 
 
 Governors can make Choice of to prefent to their Emperor, and 
 indeed are no better than Slaves : They are fo very numerous, 
 that many of them are hardly known to him. 
 
 Trade.] The Chinefe hardly ever heard of any other Part 
 of the World but Afia, till the Europeans difcover'd the Pafl'age 
 thither by the Cape of Good Hope, as we have faid in the lail 
 Chapter, tho' we are affur'd they had the Loadftone, and the Ufe 
 of the Compafs, long before us ; and the Reafon they never made 
 long Voyages, is faid to be, that they looked upon the reft of 
 Mankind as little better than Brutes, and believ'd that they them- 
 felves poffeffed much the greateft, as well as the bell Part of the 
 World. When the Europeans gave them to underiland how very 
 fmall a Part of the World the Cbine/e enjoy'd, in companion of 
 the whole inhabited Earth, and that there were many Kingdoms, 
 which furpafs'd them in feveral Arts and Sciences, they flood 
 amazed ; and the Surprize, on the Part of the Europeans, was very 
 great, in discovering fo fine a Country, and fo polite a People. 
 There is a fine Communication from one large City to another, 
 for the Conveniency of Trade : For through every Province of 
 China there is one grand Canal, which ferves as a high Road ; 
 from this are cut feveral fmaller, which are again branch'd cut 
 into Rivulets, that generally end at fome Town, or Village. 
 Over the Canals are (lately Bridges, of three, five, or fometimes 
 feven Arches; the middle Arch fo high, that Yeflels may go 
 through, without taking down their Malts. Nothing can afford a 
 more agreeable Profpect, than <b many fine Canals, adorn'd with 
 noble Bridges, built chiefly with Marble ; with a prodigious Num- 
 ber of Cities, Towns, and Villages, upon the Banks; and a Multi- 
 tude of Vefiels, failing different Ways upon them, through the 
 mod fruitful Vales. Europe, 'tis faid, has nothing to boaft of 
 comparable to this : But, to return from this agreeable Digreffion, 
 to their Trade. Silks, and other rich Merchandize, are tranfported 
 upon thefe Canals, from Province to Province ; and exported to 
 India, Japan, the Philippines, Java, and other Iflarids in the 
 Indian Seas. Goods imported from China are Tea, Quickfilver, 
 Vermilion, China Root, Rhubarb, Raw and Wrought Silks, Cop- 
 per, Camphire, Sugarcandy, Fans, Pictures, -Laquer'd Ware, Porce- 
 lane, or China Ware, Soi, Borax, Lapis Lazuli, and feveral other 
 Merchandizes. The chief Goods ufually brought from Europe 
 to China are Bullion, Cloth, Cloth- Ralk, Perpetuano's, Camlets, 
 and Laid. 
 
 Revenues.] It is very difficult to compute what the whole 
 Revenues of this Empire are, becaufe a great Part of them are 
 paid in Kind, It ii laid, that there may be paid wenty<two 
 
 Millions
 
 462 Prefent State of China. Part II. 
 
 Millions of Cbinefe Crowns ; and in Silks, Rice, Corn, Salt, and 
 other Commodities, to the Value of fifty Millions more of the 
 fame Crowns ; all which, reckoning every Crown at fix Shillings, 
 amount to 21,600,000/. Sterling; which, for a Kingdom of that 
 vaft Extent, and fo rich and powerful as it is represented, feems 
 extremely moderate ; for England, many Years, during the late 
 War, raifed near half as much ; and in Time of Peace, above a 
 fourth Part of the faid Sum. But the Emperor may levy what 
 Taxes he fees fit, to fupply the Neceflities of the Government. 
 
 Forces.] The Forces of this Empire, in Pay in Time of 
 Peace, are faid to amount to 5,000,000 of Soldiers, molt of 
 them Horfe : But how the Cbinefe do to pay their Civil Lift, 
 and five Millions of Soldiers, with about twenty-two Millions 
 Sterling, is not eafily conceived. There are, it feems, near 
 150,000 Horfe quarter 'd in the City of Pekin only, arm'd with 
 Scymitars and Lances : The Horfe have no Fire- Arms, and the 
 Foot not many ; their Weapons are chiefly Bows and Arrows ftill. 
 The principal Ufe of thefe Forces is to keep the Country quiet ; 
 for they have no foreign Enemy to fear, now China and Tartary 
 are united. 
 
 Character.] It is generally agreed, that a Majority of the 
 Cbinefe are fquat, well-fet Men ; have broad Faces, black Hair, 
 little dark Eyes, fhort Nofes, and thin Beards. They were 
 antiently reverenced throughout India, Tartary, and Perjia, as 
 Oracles ; and the greateft Objection, we are told, that the Japo- 
 nefe made to the Chriftian Religion, was, that fo wife a Nation 
 as the Cbinefe had not receiv'd it. Avarice, and Ambition, it 
 feems, have a large Stroke in all Affairs in China, notwith- 
 ftanding their boaited Politenefs, and the equitable Rules they 
 pretend to be govern'd by : They ufe fuch Arts to conceal their 
 Vices, that a Stranger would be eafily deceived by them. When 
 they have an Intereit to manage, no People know better how to 
 infinuate themfelves into the good Opinion of thofe they deal with, 
 or improve an Opportunity when it offers : They continually 
 apply themfelves to difcover the Inclinations, Humours, and Tem- 
 pers of thofe they have any Commerce with ; and keep up a 
 Correfpondence even with their greateft Enemies. Trade beinj> 
 the Soul of the People, and the Spring of all their Actions, they 
 endeavuour to excel in this Particular ; nor do they much fcruple 
 to impofe on thofe they deal with : However, there do not want 
 Inftances of fair Dealing, and open generous Ufage. They arc a 
 very ingenious fort of People; ar.d the Pveafon they fall fhort of 
 the Europeans in the Speculative Sciences, does not proceed from 
 ** any Defect in their Opacities, but from their Situation, being 
 
 feparated
 
 Chap. XXII. Prefent State of China. 463 
 
 feparated fo far from the reft of the learned World. It is rather 
 to be admir'd, that they have made fuch great Advances in Arts 
 and Sciences, confidering they have had no Advantage by travel- 
 ling, or any foreign Affiftance, except what they have receiv'd of 
 the Jefuits. 
 
 Religion.] The prevailing Religion in China, is Idolatry, 
 or^Paganifm. There are three Setts of Idolaters at this Day ; 
 firft, the Followers of Li Laokum, who liv'd, as they fay, above 
 five hundred Years before Chrift. He taught, that God was cor- 
 poreal, and had many fubordinate Deities under his Government. 
 The fecond Seel is that of the Learned, who are the Difciples of 
 the fo much celebrated Confucius, who left many admirable Pre- 
 cepts of Morality, and inftrutted the People in Philofophy. He 
 fpeaks of God as a moft pure and perfect Principle, the Fountain, 
 and Eflence of all Beings ; and, tho' we are told he prohibited 
 Idolatry, he has Temples and Images eretted to him, and is wor- 
 fhiped with the profoundeft Adoration. There is a third Sett, 
 much more numerous than either of the former, who worlhip the 
 Idol Fo, whom they ftyle the only God of the World. This Idol 
 was imported from India, about thirty-two Years after the Dearh 
 of our Saviour. His Prielts, the Bonzes, teach feveral moral 
 Precepts ; and that there is a State of Rewards and Punifhments 
 after this Life. They alfo inculcate into their Followers, that it 
 is not lawful to kill any living Creature, or to drink Wine. The 
 Sanctity of the Priefts is fo great, and their voluntary Penances of 
 that Value amongit them, that they are thought fufficient to atone 
 for the Sins of the People. They will drag heavy Iron Chains 
 after them, through the Streets, fattened to their Wrifts and Lcg=, 
 and beat their Heads againft the Stones, till they run down with 
 Blood. The Cbinefe, befides many Images, worlhip the Heavens, 
 the Sun, Moon, and the reft of the Planets ; the Souls of their 
 Anceltors, and of thofe who have been the Authors of any notable 
 Invention. There are fome thoufand of Mahometan Families in 
 China ; that Religion having been tolerated there thele five or 
 fix hundred Years. The Chriftian Religion, the Jefuits inform 
 us, has gain'd Ground mightily in China of late Years, infomuch 
 that they have two hundred Churches and Chapels there, very 
 well fill'd with Converts, fuch as they are ; for the Jefuits are 
 oblig'd, it feems, to indulge thefe Converts in the worshiping the 
 God Confucius, the Souls of their Anceftors, &c. The firft Plan- 
 tation of Chriftianity in this Part of the World was undertaken, 
 'tis faid, by St. Thomas, or fome of his Difciples. 
 
 Co tTOMi ] The Men wear no Hats, but a Cap, like a Bell, 
 made of fine Mat, which docs not come fo low as their I 
 
 They
 
 464 Prefent State of China. Part II. 
 
 They carry a Fan in their Hands, to fcreen them from the Heat 
 of the Sun. They fhave their Heads, except one Lock behind, 
 which the better Sort make up in a little Roll. They wear a 
 Veil, which reaches to the Ground, and folds over their Breaft ; 
 the Sleeves are wide at the Shoulder, but narrow towards the 
 Wrift. The Veil is tied with a Silk Safh, which hangs down to 
 their Knees. Over this Veil they wear a loofe Coat, or Gown, 
 fhorter than the reft, with fhort Sleeves. They have a kind of 
 Silk Boots, quilted with Cotton an Inch thick, and Slippers beftdes. 
 The Women drefs ufually in their Hair, which is a part of it 
 
 made up in a Roll, and fallen 'd with a Bodkin ; the 
 Drefs. reft is divided into two Locks, which fall gracefully 
 
 upon the Neck. They wear, as Men do, a long 
 Veil of Sattin ; they have over this a loofe Gown, with wide 
 Sleeves, fo long, that they would reach the Ground, if they were 
 not held up. But what is moil remarkable is, their little Feet, 
 in which their principal Beauty is thought to lie : As foon as a 
 Girl is born, her Feet are bound up fo hard, that they cannot 
 grow; which makes them walk a little aukwardly, the Foot of a 
 grown Woman being no bigger than a Child's of three Years old. 
 The Chinefe are far from.fuperftitious in their Diet ; they do not 
 
 only eat all Kinds of Flelh, Filh, and Fowl, as the 
 Diet. Europeans do ; but Horfe-Flelh is in great Efteem 
 
 amongft them ; nor are Dogs, Cats, Snakes, Frogs, 
 or fcarce any fort of Vermin, refus'd : But Rice, Roots, Pulfe, and 
 Garden-ftuff, are the common Food. They ufe neither Cloth, 
 Napkins, Knives, Spoons, or Forks ; but two little round Sticks 
 of Ebony,, or other Wood, with which they take up their Meat 
 very dexteroufly. They ufe high Chairs, and Tables, contrary to 
 all the People of the Eall befides, who fit crofs-legg'd upon the 
 Floor. Every Perfon, almoft, at an Entertainment, has a little 
 laquer'd Table to himfelf, on which is fet his Treat and Rice, in 
 little China Dilhes, or Saucers ; and fometimes Plate is ufed. 
 Tea is their principal Liquor ; Wine they have none, tho' the 
 Country abounds in fine Grapes ; neither do they brew Beer of 
 .Barley, but have ftrong Liquors, which they make of Rice, or 
 
 Wheat. People generally eat their Meat cold, tho' 
 Ceremony they drink their Liquors hot. At an Entertainment, 
 at an En- . whenever a Mouthful of Meat is taken up, or a Cup 
 tertain- of Liquor drank, it occafions a hundred Grimaces: 
 went. The Mailer of the Feaft gives the Sign, when they 
 
 lit down, by taking up the two Sticks, and making 
 a Flourifli with them ; . after which, they ftrike them into the 
 Difh. They are to take as much' Care as poflible, that their 
 Mouths all move together, that one may not have done before 
 another; for either to be beforehand, or make the rell wait, is 
 
 reckon'J
 
 Chap. XXII. Prejent State of China. 465 
 
 reckon'd a great Piece of Rudenefs, and throws all into Confufion. 
 When this is done, they flourifh their little Sticks again ; and, 
 having takvn two or three Mouthfuls of a Difh, the Mailer of the 
 Houfe gives the Sign to lay down their Arms, which they do in 
 the fame Order they found them. Then comes the Liquor, 
 which is drank off with great Ceremony. The com- 
 mon Salutation is the laying the Right-hand to the Forms of 
 Breaft, and bowing the Head a little ; but when they Salutation. 
 would fhew greater Refpedl, they join both Hands 
 together, and bow their Bodies pretty low : When they falute a 
 Perfon of fuperior Quality, in the Houfe, or elfewhere, they fall 
 on one Knee ; and remain in that Pofture, till the Perfon they 
 falute takes them up, which is done in an Inftant. It would be 
 an Affront, it feems, to falute a Magiilrate when he appears in 
 public, unlefs the Perfon has particular Bufinefs with him ; but 
 People ftand up while they are carried by, with their Arms acrofs, 
 and their Eyes fixed upon the Ground. Familiar 
 Friends vifit without much Ceremony ; but for all Vijtts. 
 others there is a Form prefcrib'd. The Perfon who 
 makes the Vifit, fends a Servant to the Gentleman he intends to wait 
 on, with a Note fill'd with many refpe&ful Expreffions, fuitable to 
 the Quality of the Perfon he is going to fee. The Mefliige being 
 deliver'd, the Vifiter fets out, and is receiv'd according to his 
 Rank. If the Perfon he goes to fee be much above him, the 
 Mafter of the Houfe does not move out of his Chair ; fometimes 
 he waits for his Gueft at the Hall, at other times he goes into 
 the Court ; and if the Perfon vifited be much the inferior, he goes 
 out into the Street to bring in the Stranger : As foon as they dif- 
 cover one another, they both run, and make low Bows. There is 
 but little faid at their encountering each other ; a Set of fhort 
 Compliments are prefcrib'd ; the one knows what he is to fay, 
 and the other what he is to anfwer : At every Door they halt, 
 where the Bows and Cringes are renewed ; and they difpute who 
 fhall enter firft. They ufe but two Expreffions on this Occafion ; 
 the one fays, Pray walk in ; the other anfwers, // muft not be. 
 This is repeated four or five times, and then the Stranger fuffers 
 himfelf to be overcome, and goes on to the next Door, where the 
 Ceremony is renewed. When the Company comes to the Room 
 where they arc to be entertained, they ftand all in one Rank, and 
 bow almoft to the Ground : They never ftand oppofite to one 
 another when they falute ; then they kneel, after which they 
 ipend fome Time in offering one another the Right-hand : They 
 proceed to bow even to the Chairs, and every one dufts them with 
 his great Sleeve, which the Mailer accepts very thankfully ; then 
 somes the Difpute who fhall fit uppermoft, tho 1 every one knows 
 what Place he muit have, notwithllanding all this Cringing. 
 
 H h After
 
 466 Prefent State of China. , Part II. 
 
 After a Quarter of an Hour's Grimace, they all feat themfelves 
 one over-againft the other ; and are oblig'd to fit upright, without 
 leaning, with down-call Looks, their Hands ftretch'd out on their 
 Knees, and their Feet even : They are to look grave and com- 
 pos'd, and muft not be too talkative ; and fometimes there is not 
 a Word fpoken befides the Compliments prefcrib'd. Tea is the 
 ufual Liquor drunk upon a Vifit ; and much Ceremony there is 
 ufed in taking the Difh, carrying it to one's Mouth, letting it 
 down, or returning it to the Servants. The Chinefe are fo far 
 from putting off their Caps when they falute one another, that it 
 is reckon'd very indecent to appear before their Betters bare- 
 headed. When a Stranger is about to take Horfe, and return 
 Home, this cannot be effected without great Ceremony ; for he 
 won't be fo rude to mount before the Mafter of the Houfe ; and 
 he, on the contrary, intreats the Gueft to mount while he Hands 
 to wait on him. The Stranger then protefts, the World Ihall be 
 turn'd upfide down before he will be fo rude ; and perfifts in his 
 Refolution till the Mailer of the Houfe retires out of Sight ; but 
 the Stranger is no fooner in the Saddle, than his Friend appears 
 again, and bids him adieu : And when the Stranger is gone a little 
 Way, a Servant is alfo difpatch'd after him, to wifh him a good 
 Journey. ]f mutual Confent conilitute a Marriage, there is no 
 inch thing in China ; the Parties never fee one another till the 
 Bargain is concluded by their Parents, and that is ufually when 
 they are per'feft Children. The Girls may be well reckon 'd Part 
 of their Fathers Treafure, fmce the pooreft Man muft purchafe his 
 Wife, and be content with only one, while the Rich have their 
 Seraglio's. People of Condition caufe their Tombs to be built, 
 and their Coffins provided, in their Life-time ; and when 
 Funeral they die, their Corpfes are perfum'd, and drefs'd in the 
 Rites. beft Clothes the Deccafed wore ; and being placed in a 
 Chair, the Wives firft, and then the Children, and after- 
 wards the reft of the Relations and Friends, proftrate themfelves 
 before it, and paflionately bewail their Lofs. Upon the Day 
 appointed for the Funeral, the Corpfe is accompany'd by the 
 Relations, when feveral Pageants are borne before it, as triumphal 
 Chariots, Caftles, &c. with Tables of rich Perfumes and Meats : 
 After which follow the Priefts, with Drums, Wind-Mafic, and 
 jingling Bells : Next to the Sons, and after the Corpfe, come the 
 Women, in dole Chairs ; and, tho' they cannot be feen, deafen 
 the Company with their perpetual Howling ; and oftentimes 
 Women are hir'd to howl on this Occafion. The Deceafed being 
 interred, an Altar is erefled, on which Lights are placed : 7 he 
 Friends and Relations, at certain Seafons, proftrate themfelves 
 before it, with their Faces to the Ground, pouring out Wine, 
 offering Meats, and burning Incenfe, with the Pictures of Men 
 5 and
 
 Ch. XXIII. Prefent State of Great TartaTy . 467 
 
 and Animals on gilt Paper, which they apprehend are converted 
 into the Things they reprefent, and that they will be of fervicc 
 to the DeceaTed in the other State. The Virtues and great 
 Aftions of the Deceafed, whether real or imaginary, are engrav'd 
 on Marble, or other Stones, and placed in the Vault before the 
 Altar. The Law forbids the Sons to be at any Entertainment, 
 or be concern'd in any Bufinefs, for three Years ; infomuch that, 
 if a Man is poffefs'd of the higheft Poll in the Government, he 
 is oblig'd to leave it three Years, upon the Death of his Father, 
 and retire to his own Houfe, where it is indecent to indulge him- 
 felfin any Pleafure, or even to be feen to laugh. Great Men, 
 whofe Circumftances will allow it, ereft Temples, we are told, 
 to the Memory of their Anceftors 1 where a yearly Sacrifice is 
 offcr'd. 
 
 Curiosities.] In this Country is a large Mountain, full of 
 terrible Caverns, in one of which is a Lake of fuch a Nature, 
 that, if a Stone be thrown into it, prefently there is heard a hide- 
 ous Noife, as of a frightful Clap of Thunder ; and fometimes there 
 rifes a grofs Mill, which immediately diflblves into Water. There 
 are feveral Volcano's, which vomit out Fire aDd Alhes fo furioufly, 
 as frequently to occafion violent Tempefts in the Air. In this 
 Country are feveral Lakes, remarkable for making Copper appear 
 like Iron ; as alfo for caufing Storms, when any thing is thrown 
 into them. 
 
 CHAP. XXIII. 
 
 Tie Prefent State of Great Tartary. 
 
 Boundaries.] QREAT TARTJRT, fo called to diftirguifh 
 it from Little Tartary, is bounded by the 
 Frozen Ocean on the North ; the Eaftern Ocean and the Land of 
 Jejfb on the Eaft ; by China, India, Perjia, and the Cajpian Sea, 
 on the South ; and by the River Oby, and an imaginary Line, 
 drawn from thence to the Mouth of the ll'olga, on the Weft. 
 This vaft Country contains the antient Scytbia, Saae, Sogdiana, 
 with a great Part of Sarmatia JJtatica, and a little of Old 
 Perjia. 
 
 Situation.] Great Tartary is fituated between 28 and 75 
 Deg. North Latitude; and between 37 and i3oDcg. Eaft Longitude; 
 the Length whereof is from Eaft to Weft 2400, and Breadth from 
 North to South 2000 Miles, by late Accounts ; but, by the beft 
 Globes and Maps, thefc Dimenfions will not anfwer. 
 
 H h 2 Divilion.
 
 4 68 
 
 Prefent State of Great Tartary. Part IL 
 
 Divifion. 
 
 Square 
 Miles. 
 
 Chief 
 Towns. 
 
 Diftance and 
 Bearing. 
 
 Great Tartary 
 
 1. Mofconjite 
 
 2. Independent 
 
 3. Chineje 
 
 4,472,290 
 
 3,050,000 
 
 778,290 
 
 644,000 
 
 Toboljky 
 
 Samarchand 
 
 Chinyan 
 
 1080 E. of Mofconjj. 
 900 N W. of Agra. 
 300 N E of Pekin. 
 
 Climate] The Air of this Country is very different, as we 
 may expedt, in Co vaft a Trad of Land. The Northmoft Parts, in 
 general, are exceffive cold, cover'd with Ice and Snow the greatefl 
 Part of the Year, and fome of it fcarce habitable ; for, if the 
 North Wind fets in, there Is no enduring the open Country ; if 
 they cannot efcape to fome Cave, and fhelter themfelves till it is 
 over, they certainly perilh. The Soil towards the North is very 
 barren, and much encumber'd with Mountains, and unwholfome 
 Marfhes ; but, in the Southern Parts, it is pretty good for Tillage 
 and Grazing, efpecially the latter ; and, towards the Eaft, 'tis 
 reported to be very fertile in Corn. The Products of this Coun- 
 try are chiefly Skins of Foxes, Sables, Hyenas, Ermins, Lynxes, 
 and other Furs ; Mufks, Rhubarb, Flax, and fome Cinnamon. 
 
 Government.] For the Government of Mu/ccvite Tartary, 
 and Chinefe Tartary, fee the refpeftive Heads. The Calmucks 
 are not under any one Sovereign, but divided into 
 Independent feveral Herds, or Tribes : Some of them confider- 
 Tartary. able enough to give Apprehenfions to their Neigh- 
 
 bours of Mufcovy ; but they are, for the mod part, 
 in Amity with that Crown, and many of them tributary to it. 
 The Tartars of UJbeck, like their Neighbours, are, at this Day, 
 divided into feveral Tribes, or Herds, who have their rcipe&ive 
 Princes ; when they were united under one Sovereign, they were 
 the mod potent of all the Tartar Nations, and are ftill dreaded 
 by Perjia and India, into which Kingdoms they make frequent 
 Incurfions ; but as their Tribes are not very numerous, they con- 
 tent themfelves with ravaging and plundering the Country, and 
 do not pretend to make Conquelts. The principal Chams, or 
 Sovereigns of thefe People, value themfelves upon their being 
 defended from Tamerlane, as the Great Mogul alfo does. The 
 Mongatian Tartars, and thofe of Thibet, are govern'd by their 
 refpedlive Choms, or Princes, and are perpetually in Motion with 
 their Flocks and Herds ; and, as far as I can find, have fcarce any 
 Towns in their Country. 
 
 Trade.]
 
 Ch. XXIII. Prefent State <?/Great Tartary. 469 
 
 Trade.] The Government of RuJJia monopolize almoft all 
 Siberian Commodities ; under which Denomination are compre- 
 hended, not only fuch Things as are of the Produce of Siberia, 
 but whatever comes through that Country from China. The 
 Trade of Siberia confifts chiefly in the Skins of Siberian Foxes, 
 Sables, Hyenas, Ermins, Lynxes, and other Furs ; Cbinefe Gold, 
 and Silks, and the Teeth of a Beaft call'd Maman, not unlike 
 Elephants Teeth. The greateft Traffick of the CircaJJians feems 
 to be in young Slaves, whom they take in their Incurfions ; they 
 make no manner of Scruple of felling their own Children into 
 Turkey and Perfia, efpecially their Daughters, who will part with 
 their Parents without any Relu&ance, having been frequently 
 entertain'd with the Relations of the Preferment of thofe who 
 have been fold before them to Princes and Baflas ; and of fome 
 who have arrived to the Honour of Sultanas, in the Harams of 
 the Grand Seignior, and the King of Perjia. The Calmucks, in 
 the Reign of the late Czar, traded to AJlracan and Toboljky, with 
 Tea, and China Goods ; bringing alio with them great Quantities 
 of fine Salt, which their Country afforded, receiving RuJJia Lea- 
 ther, and Iron Ware, and fome Money, in Exchange ; but the 
 Czar commanded one of his Generals to march into the Country 
 of the Calmucks, and take Pofleffion of their Salt-works, and 
 build a Fort there ; which the Calmucks fo highly refented, that 
 they have forborn to go to the Fair of Toboljky ever fince ; they 
 alfo choak'd up the Mouth of the River Duria, which falls into 
 the Cafpian Sea, whither the Mufcovites ufed to come in fearch 
 of Gold Duft. 
 
 Character.] The North Part of Mufcovite Tartary being 
 inhabited by the Samoieds and O/liacks, I fhall give the belt 
 Account I can meet with of thofe People, from our modern Tra- 
 vellers. They are, it feems, of a fhort fquat Make, particularly 
 their Women, who have very fmall Feet ; their Complexion 
 tawny, like thofe in hot Climates ; it being obfervable, that 
 extreme Hot, and extreme Cold, in this, and many other Inftances, 
 have juft the fame Effects : They have long Eyes, high Cheek- 
 bones, broad flattifh Faces, and, in general, not very agreeable 
 Countenances. The Men have fcarce any Beards, which, as their 
 Fur Dreffcs are the fame, makes it difficult to diftinguifh the 
 Men from the Women. The OJliacks differ very little from the 
 Samoieds: Some Travellers make them to inhabit the very fame 
 Country ; but, generally, the Samoieds are reckon'd thofe People 
 who inhabit that Part of Mufcovite Tartary which lies towards the 
 Weft, in and next to Europe ; and O/liacks, the North-call Part 
 q{ Mufcovite Tartary, neareft to the Chinefian Tartary. The 
 
 Hh 3 Knmfo
 
 470 Preftnt Stat* of Great Tartary. Part II. 
 
 Kamjhy Tartars, who inhabit the River Jenfeijka, in the Road 
 from Toboljky to China, and the Bratjky Tartan, lying more 
 Eafterly than the Kamjhy Tartars, are reckon'd more fubftantial 
 than their Neighbours, and very hofpiuble : Both Men and 
 Women are of a very tawny Complexion, and better drefied than 
 mod of their Neighbours. The CircaJJians are extremely hofpi- 
 table, and will not fuffer a Stranger to pay any thing for the 
 Entertainment of himfelf, Servants, or Horfes ; but will contend 
 frequently who mail have the Honour of treating him. The 
 UJbeck Tartars, alfo the Mongalian, and thofe of Thibet, are 
 reckoned to make the bell Soldiers ; for, from thefe Countries, the 
 Great Mogul is fupplied with his belt Soldiers. 
 
 Religion.] The Samoieds fay, that they believe there is a 
 God, and that they are convinc'd nothing is greater and more 
 powerful thai) God, and that all Things depend on him ; that 
 we had one common father, and that good Men will go to Para- 
 dife. But, notwithstanding this, they worfhip the Sun, Moon, 
 and Planets, together with feveral Kinds of Beafts and Birds, from 
 whom they hope to receive fome Benefits. Images they alfo wor- 
 fhip, in human Shape ; but fo very ill carved and drefs'd, that it 
 would be difficult to difcover what they reprefented. They have 
 Priefts among them, who pretend to the Magk Art, and to fore- 
 tel future Events. As to the Religion of the Ojiiacks, I do not 
 find it differs much from that of the Samoieds ; except that they 
 have fome little brazen Idols, tolerably well caft, which 'tis fup- 
 pofed they have from their Neighbours the Chinefe, and rcprefent 
 Men and Animals : The reft are as ill made as the Images of the 
 Samoieds, every Man being his own Graver. They place them 
 upon the Tops of Hills, or in Groves, and in the plealanteft 
 Places their Country affords. They have no fet Time for 
 performing of Divine Service ; but apply to their Gods for Suc- 
 eefs in all their Undertakings. They have no particular Set of 
 Men to exercife the prieftly Office, but any one, when he grows 
 into Years, may devote himfelf to that Service; aad the Mailers 
 and Heads of Families frequently perform that Officr. The 
 Bratjky Tartars are Pagans, and worfnip an Idol, made up t f the 
 Skins of Beafts, which they hang upon their Huts. The Tartar^ 
 in the Kingdom of AJiracan, are, by Religion, Mahometans, tho' 
 under the Dominion of MuJco<vy. There are feveral Pagans 
 among the CircaJJians, and the reft of them have a . inclure of th* 
 Turkijh and Chrijlian Religions, as the Circc.Jfians Country borders 
 upon Mufco<vy and Turkey. The Religion of the UJleck Tartart 
 is that of the Mahometans ', but the Mongalian Tartars, and thofe 
 of Thibet , are Pagans. 
 
 Customs.]
 
 Ch. XXIII. Prefect State cf Great Tartary. tft 
 
 Customs.] The SamoieU eat the Flefh of Horfes, Oxen, 
 Deer, Sheep, and Fifh, indifferently ; but prefer the Entrails of 
 Animals to any other Part of them. Their Houfes are built with 
 Poles, and the Branches of Trees, and cover'd with Bark : They 
 are almoft in the Form of a Bee-hive, and have a Hole in the 
 Top to let out the Smoke ; for the whole Houfe is but one 
 Room, with a Hearth in the Middle, round which they fit or lie 
 upon Rain-deer Skins, their only Furniture, except the Horfe- 
 flefh, and other Carrion, which hangs round the Fluts ; for 
 they feldom eat it while it is fweet, which makes their Habitation, 
 infupportable to any but themfelves ; and 'tis faid, the Fumes, 
 that arife from their own unfavoury Hides, are almoft as difagree- 
 able as thole which proceed from the Carrion their Diet. The 
 Diverfions of the Samoieds and Ojli/icks are chiefly hunting the 
 Elks and Rain-deer. They will venture over high Rocks of 
 Ice, lying in the If] and of IVaigats. or Neva Zembla, in Purfuit 
 of their Game : Thefe People are (hod with wooden Scates, with 
 which they run over Mountains, with incredible Swiftnefs, upon 
 the Snow ; and, having a kind of Shovel in their Hands, faften'd 
 to a long Staff, with this they throw Snow at the wild Rain- 
 deer, to force them into the Places where they have fet their 
 Nets. They carefully obferve the Wind, which they guefs at 
 the Alteration of, by certain Signs ; for, if the North Wind fets 
 in, there is no enduring the open Country ; if they cannot efcape 
 to fome Cave, and fhelter themfelves, till it is over, they certainly 
 perifh ; from whence we may conclude, there are no conflant 
 Inhabitants about there, tho' fome pretend to have 
 feen them. The Diet of the Ojiiacks is chiefly Fifh, Diet of the 
 Venifon, Wild Fowl, and Roots : Bread they have Ofliacks. 
 none : Their Drink, for the moft part, is fair Water, 
 and fometimeo the .Blood of a Rain-deer, or of any other Beaft 
 they take ; and it is faid, they can difpenfe with a Draught of 
 Train Oil. Tobacco they are immoderately fond of; but, inftead 
 of blowing the Smoke out of their Mouths, they hold ?. little 
 Water in their Mouths, with which they fwaltaw the Smoke 
 down ; which fo intoxicates them, that tl>ey foon lofe their Senfes, 
 and throw up the Phlegm ; and this they will repeat 
 feveral times a Day. In Winter, they fet up their Houfes, 
 Huts in Woods and Foreft% where there are the 
 greateit Plenty of wild Ben Its and Game ; they dig deep in the 
 Ground, to fecurc themfelves from the Cold, laying ^ Roof of Bark, 
 orRufhes, over theii Huts, which are cover'd with Snow in the hard 
 Seafon : In the Summer, they build above Ground, on the Banks of 
 Rivers, for the Conveniency of Fifhing. The Oft- , r . 
 a(ks, like the Samoieds, purchafe their Wire* of their ' * 
 
 11 h 4 Relations,
 
 472 Prefent State of Great Tartary. Part II. 
 
 Relations, for three or four Rain-deer ; and take as many as 
 they pleafe, returning them again to their Friends, if they do not 
 like them, and their Lofs is only the Rain-deer they gave for 
 them. And, in fome Parts of the Country, they take the Liberty 
 of felling their Wives for Slaves, when they are oftended with 
 
 them. They bury the Dead in the Cloaths they 
 Funerals. wore when alive, hanging by them, on the next Tree, 
 
 their Bows, Quivers, Hatchets, and other Utenfils. 
 
 Tartars on The Tartars, who live along the River Irtis, Soiuh- 
 
 tbe Irtis. eaft of Tobolfky, are wealthy in Cattle, having vail 
 
 t Flocks and Herds. Thefe People live chiefly upon 
 
 Diet. dried Fifti, Venifon, and Barley-meal ; they drink 
 
 Mares Milk, as moft of the Tartars do, and fome- 
 times Tea, but mix it with Flour and Butter. At great Entertain- 
 ments, they ufually drefs a young Horfe, which is their moft deli- 
 cious Food. Their Drink they make of Oatmeal,and Spirits diftilled 
 from Mares Milk, with which they often get drunk, and behave 
 
 themfelves very brutifhly. Their Habit refembles 
 Drefs. that of the antient Ruffians, formerly defcrib'd ; and 
 
 the Women wear Rings in their Noftrils. Beyond 
 Barabinflcy thefe People, in the great Defert of Baraba, live 
 Tartars. certain Herds, or Tribes, called Barab'mjky Tartars : 
 
 In the Winter, they hunt in this Defert for Sables ; 
 but, in Summer, they remove to the Banks of their Rivers, and 
 
 are bufied in Fifhing. The Defert affording no other 
 Diet. Water, they drink melted Snow, and eat dried Fiih, 
 
 and Barley-meal, like their Neighbours. For a 
 little Tobacco, a Man may purchafe any thing they have; but 
 
 they fcarce know the Ufe of Money. Their Cloaths, 
 Drefs. Caps, and Stockings, are made of Pieces of Fur 
 
 patched together. The Bratjky Tartars live chiefly 
 Bratfky on Venifon, but value Horfe-flefti much more. Their 
 
 Tartars Women wear long plaited Gowns ; and the Virgins 
 
 Diet, diftinguifh themfelves, by adorning their Hair with 
 
 Drefs, &c. Brafs, and glittering Toys. They alfo purchafe their 
 
 Wives, as in fome other Parts of Siberia, with their 
 Cattle j and often give a hundred Horfes, or Oxen, for a Virgin 
 
 they admire ; and fifteen or twenty Camels, befides 
 Nagaian Sheep. The Tartars, about Aftracan, call'd Na- 
 Tartara. gaian Tartars, are conftantly moving from Place 
 
 to Place, for the Convenience of Pafture : They cover 
 their Tents with- Cloth, made of Camels or Horfes Hair: The 
 
 Floor is laid with fine Mats, or Carpets ; their Fur- 
 Tbe Circaf- niture confifts of fine Cabinets, Trunks, and Boxes, 
 fiao. Tartars The Circaffians have Plenty of Wild Fowl, Venifon, 
 Diet. Mutton, and Beef i but a Piece of a young Colt is 
 
 preferred
 
 Ch. XXIII. Prefent State of Great Tartary. 473 
 
 preferred before any of thefe. Their ufual Drink is Water, or 
 Mares Milk, like the other Tartars: They all fmoke Tobacco, 
 Men and Women, Young and Old ; they fit crofs-legged, and 
 have a Carpet, or a Piece of Ruffian Leather, fpread before them, 
 and little wooden Tables, at their Meals ; but neither 
 Linen, nor Plates, as far as I can find. The Calmucks Calmuck 
 alfo rove from Place to Place, during the fair Seafon, Tartars, 
 rot lefs than eight or ten thoufand of them fre- 
 quently in a Body, who drive large Flocks and Herds before 
 them. They begin their March ufually in the 
 Spring, when the Grafs is come up ; and, as they Manner of 
 make but eafy Journeys, leave fcarce any Herbage Life. 
 behind them in the Country they have pafs'd through. 
 In the latter End of the Year, when there is a fecond Crop of 
 Grafs, they ufually return the fame Way they came; and remain 
 in a more fubitantial kind of Houfes, during the Winter Seafons, 
 than they inhabited in the Summer ; but the People and the Cattle 
 frequently lie in the fame Room. They eat indif- 
 ferently of all Kinds of Meat almolt, except Hogs Diet. 
 Flefh ; and, for their Drink, they have commonly 
 Water ; they have alfo Tea, and Spirits extracted from Mares 
 Milk. In the Winter, they hunt Sables, Martens, Ermins, and 
 other Beafts, which afford Furs. 
 
 Before I conclude this Chapter, I fliall give the Reader a fhort 
 Account of the Sivedijb Prifoners, taken at the Battle 
 of Pulto-way, Anno 1709. and fent into Siberia. Swedifh 
 Their Number, including Officers, was about ten Prifoners 
 thoufand; and there were no lefs than eight hun- in Siberia, 
 dred Officers, Prifoners in the City of Tcboljky. The 
 Czar could not have taken a more effectual Method to civilize 
 and improve this Part of his Dominions, than by banifhing the 
 S-ivedijh Prifoners thither ; for there were, among the Officers, 
 fome of the politeit Men in Europe ; who, upon the Fame of the 
 King of Sweden 's Succefs, had enter'd themfelves in his Service. 
 The common Soldiers, it feems, receiv'd Remittances from Swe- 
 den twice during their Captivity, which amounted to no more 
 than three Crowns a Head ; and the Officers receiv'd nothing, 
 but were, however, very well ufed at firft, till fome of them, who 
 had Leave to be abfent on their Parole, did not return ; and 
 others, who had enter'd themfelves in the Ruffian Service, took an 
 Opportunity to make their Ffcape. After this, they were more 
 flridlly guarded, and were feparated, and difperfed into remote 
 Parts ; and thole who were Security for their Comrades, were 
 clofe confin'd. The Srxediffi Officers, having no Means left for 
 their Subfifknce, were oblig'd to apply themfelves to all manner 
 of mechanic Alt*, to get their Bread : And it is furprifing to fee 
 
 how
 
 474 Prefent State of Great Tartary. Part II. 
 
 how m3ny Ways thofe unfortunate Gentlemen took to fupport 
 themfelves, and to what Degree of Perfection they arrived in their 
 refpec\ive Employments. Thofe who had any Learning, fet up 
 public Schools, and taught not only the Children of the Ruffiians, 
 but thofe of their Fellow -prifoners, who had married Ruffian 
 Women : For the great Towns in Siberia are inhabited chiefly 
 by Colonies of Ruffians, whom the Czar tranfplanted thither for 
 the Security of his Dominions on that Side. The S-vcdiJb Officers 
 taught Latin, High Dutch, French, Morality, Mathematics, and 
 feveral manly Exercifes ; and fome of their Schools were grown 
 into that Reputation, that, it is faid, the Citizens of Mo/couu fent 
 their Children into Siberia for Education. Some of thefe unhappy 
 Gentlemen, who could not attain to Handicraft Trades, were 
 forced upon the laborious Employments of cutting down Wood ; 
 and there were others, who cor.defcended to become Chair-bot- 
 toroers. The Governor was very generous to the Prifoners, never 
 never letting any of them, that applied to him, go away unreliev'd. 
 The Swedi/h Officers thought they could never enough applaud 
 his Gencrcfity ; and fome of them ufed to fay, that their only 
 Misfortune was, their being banifh'd to a Country fo far from 
 their Relations. The private Soldiers, beig difperfed in Towns, 
 were many of them married either to RuffiauWoiv.cn, or the Natives 
 of Siberia, never thinking of returning to Europe j.gain ; (6 that, 
 in another Generation, probably there may be little Difference 
 between the Tartars in Siberia, and the Ruffians or Swedes, in 
 Manners and Cuitoms. 
 
 Curiosities.] For want of Curiofities, I fhall prefect the 
 Reader with the beft Account I can meet with of that prodigious 
 Wall, which feparates Tartary from China, bailt by the Chine/e, 
 to hinder the frequent Incurfions of the Tartars. This Wall 
 begins in the Province of Xenji, which lies on the North-well of 
 China, in about 38 Degrees, of Latitude, and is carried on over 
 Mountains and Valleys ; firft. towards, the North-eaft to the Lati- 
 tude 42, and then South-eaflerly to the Latitude 39 ; and ter- 
 minates at the KangSea, between the Province* of Pekin and 
 Lcotung. The whole Courfe of it, with all the Windings, is about 
 1500 Miles: It is almoft all built with Brick, and fuch well- 
 temper'd Morter, that it has now Hood above i8co Years: 
 There are no Breaches in it, except in the Province of /V/7, North 
 of the City Swven, where, inflead of the Wall, are very high and 
 jnacceffible Mountains. By the Embafiy that was fent from 
 Mufco-vy to China, and Travellers who have lately ften it, we learn 
 that it is about ten Yards high, and about five Yards thick, it is 
 fortified all along by fquare Towers at a MileDiftance, fay fome ; 
 and others, at the Diltance of two Eow-mots from one another. 
 
 it
 
 Ch.XXIV. Prefent Stateof the Afaticltics. 475 
 
 It was formerly guarded by a Million of Soldiers ; but now 
 Guards are placed only at fuch Parts of it, as are eaiieft of 
 Accefs. 
 
 CHAP. XXIV. 
 
 The Prefent State of the Afiatic Ifles. 
 
 
 Divifion. 
 
 Square 
 Miles. 
 
 Chief 
 Towns. 
 
 Diftance and 
 Bearing. 
 
 Dill, 
 from 
 Land. 
 
 v#?rtf;V ^j 
 
 811,980 
 
 
 
 
 I . Japan, and "1 
 other Ifles / 
 thereto be- f 
 
 138,000 
 Length 72O 
 
 *Jedo 
 
 H40 E. of Ptkin 
 
 495 c 
 
 i 
 
 3 
 
 longing J 
 
 Breadth 3 1 j 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 2. Formofa 
 
 17,000 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3. Anian 
 
 11,900 
 
 *Kiontchcou 1200 S. of Ptkin 
 
 43 6c 
 
 ^ "" ' ' 
 
 4. Philippine 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 I . i uconia ? 
 or Manila 
 
 58,500 
 
 * Manila 
 
 1560 S. of Pekin 
 
 440c 
 
 2. Mindanao 
 
 39,200 
 
 * Mindanao 420 SE. of Manila 
 
 43 2C 
 
 H 
 
 Other Ifles 
 
 46,000 
 
 
 
 
 
 5. Gilolo 
 
 10,400 
 
 * Gilolo 
 
 480 SE. of Mindanao 
 
 4379 
 
 * .!* 
 
 6. Ceram 
 
 5,400 
 
 Cambello 
 
 240 S. of Gilolo 
 
 
 J3 --3 
 
 si , 
 
 7. Timor 
 
 7,800 
 
 * Concordia 
 
 480 SVV. of Cambello 
 
 4200 
 
 8. F/orw 
 
 6,000 
 
 * Lnfataja 
 
 200 W. of Concordia 
 
 4120 
 
 3g 
 
 9. 7^ 
 
 38,250 
 
 Mater an 
 
 690 VV. of Lu/ataja 
 
 
 1<2 
 
 10. Amboina 
 
 4OO 
 
 * Vitloria 
 
 60 S. of CabcUo 
 
 4280 
 
 ~- 'Si ^ 
 
 1 1 . Celebes 
 
 68,400 
 
 * Macajjar 
 
 520 NE. of Mater an 
 
 4096 
 
 ^ e 
 
 I 2. Borneo 
 
 228,000 
 
 * Borneo 
 
 600N W. ofMacaffar 
 
 4.1 10 
 
 
 1 3 . Sumatra 
 
 I 29,000 
 
 * Achin 
 
 goo W. of Borneo 
 
 3802 
 
 t%t 
 
 1 4. Ceylon 
 
 27,730 
 
 Candy 
 
 900 W. of Achin 
 
 
 bn_L 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 The Moluccas, the chief of which are Ternate, Tydore, Montil, 
 Machian, Bachia ; alfo the Banda IJIands, the chief of which are 
 Banda or Lantor, Pooloivay, Pooloroon, Nero, belong to the Dutch. 
 
 Climate.] PROM the Situation of thefc Iflands, belonging to 
 
 Jl"^ the Kingdom of Japan, extending from the 30th 
 
 to the 38th Deg. of North Lat. and lome lay to the 40th, it may be 
 
 expected 
 
 The D:flance of Pbtei, with the Star, :i g vtri in Leagues iron; 1
 
 476 PreferJ State of the Afiatic Ifles. Part II. 
 
 expefted the Air Ihould be moderately warm ; but to 
 Japan the North of the Mountains, which run thro' the midft 
 Iflands. of Japan, their Winters are very fevere, and they have 
 great Quantities of Snow. The Air is reckon'd health- 
 ful, and neither Plague, Gout, or Stone, have ever been heard of 
 amongft them : But the Small-pox, and Fluxes, are very freqent. 
 The Soil of the Japan Iflands is reckon'd very fertile in Grain, 
 Roots, and divers forts of pleafant Fruits ; and though the Ground 
 is much overfpread with Foreft, and encumber'd with vail Moun- 
 tains, yet they have excellent Pafturage, and well 
 Formofa. ftock'd with Multitudes of fine Cattle. The Moun- 
 tains of Formofa, it is faid, are full of Brimftone ; 
 which makes the Ifland fubjeft to Earthquakes : This Ifland lies 
 in the Latitude of 22 North. Anion is a plentiful 
 Anian. Ifland, and has Mines of Gold and Silver, and a 
 
 Pearl Filhery ; it lies in Latitude 18 or 19 North. 
 Ihe Phi- The Philippines are a great Number of Iflands ; fome 
 lippine fay a thouiand, extending from the 5 th to the 19th 
 
 Iflands. Degree of North Latitude. The Air of thefe Iflands 
 
 is hot and moift ; but the Heat is not fo violent, as 
 in Countries of a more Northern Latitude ; which proceeds not 
 only from the many Lakes and Rivers, which water the Iflands, 
 but from the great Rains which fall annually, and overflow the 
 low Lands : 7'he Sea-breezes alfo refrefh the Air molt Part of 
 the Year, and render the Heats very tolerable ; but the Moitf ure 
 and Dampncfs, occr.fion'd by the Rains, and great Dews, which 
 fall even in the fair Weather, make the Iflands very unhea'thful 
 to European Conftitutions ; though the Natives live to as great an 
 Age as in any other Part of the World. Thefe Iflands are fubjedf. 
 to great Earthquakes ; and the burning Mountains have, 'tis 
 obferv'd, all thefe Effecls which Pliny afcribes to the Burning 
 Mountains of Italy ; namely, that they caft out their Flames, 
 fhake the Earth, driving from them the neighbouring Rivers and 
 Seas, and feathering their Afhes round the Country, rending the 
 very Rocks, which fometimes give a Report like a Cannon, 
 From thefe fubterraneous Fires proceeds a great Variety of hot 
 Baths ; and fome of the Rivers and Streams are fo hot, that they 
 immediately kill any Animal that falls into thtm. 
 Ifland of Within halt" a Mile of one of thefe hot Rivers, in 
 Manila. \ Manila, there runs another, which is execfiive cold. 
 This Country abounds not only in Rivers, but Lakes ; 
 ,the principal of which, called Babia, not far from the City of 
 Manila, k v.ell-ltor'd with Fifli. Not far from this Lake, is 
 another fmall one, upon a Mountain, which the Natives 
 Soil. could never fathom. The Soil of thefe Iflands is as 
 
 fertile
 
 Ch.XXIV. Prefent State of the Afiatic Ifles. 477 
 
 fertile as any in the World, producing great Plenty of alj Things 
 neceflary for Life, as appears by the Multitude of Inhabitants ; who 
 are fubfifted only by the Fruits of the Earth, and the Venifon they 
 take. Nor can any Country in the World appear more beauti- 
 ful ; there is a perpetual Verdure ; Buds, Bloflbms, and Fruit, are 
 found upon the Trees all the Year round, as well on the Moun- 
 tains as Gardens. This Country produces Pearls, , 
 Ambergrife, Cotton, and Civet, and is rich in j ,* p f. 
 Gold Mines, but feldom wrought; they have vaft J. . x ~ 
 Quantities of Gold Dull, which are wahYd down "" 
 from the Hills by the Rains, and found mix'd with the Sand of 
 their Rivers. There are alfo Mines of other Metals, and excellent 
 Load-ftone found here ; and fuch Numbers of wild Buffaloes, that 
 a good Huntfman, arm'd with a Spear, will kill ten or twenty in 
 a Day. Their Woods alfo abound with Deer, wild Hogs, and 
 Goats. Thefe Iflands alfo produce Ginger, Indigo, Sugar-canes, 
 Tobacco, and Potatoes, which are very nourifhing : They have 
 alfo abundance of odoriferous Flowers and Herbs ; and no Country 
 abounds more in Medicinal Herbs. The Produfts 
 of Amboina are Cloves, Oranges, Lemons, Sugar- Amboina 
 canes, Cocoes, and other Fruits ; they have alfo Cloves. 
 Potatoes, and fome Tobacco. In the Moluccas, they 
 have neither Corn or Rice, or hardly any Butchers Moluccas, 
 Meat, but Goats Flefh. Here are alfo Almonds, their Pro- 
 Orange% and Lemons, and other delicious Fruits ; duce. 
 but what is peculiar to thefe Iflands, and, iu Return 
 for which, they were once fumifh'd with the Produce of every 
 other Country, is their Cloves. The Tree refembles the Bay- 
 tree ; the Fruit grows in Clutters at the End of the Eranch, 
 where it hangs like a Bunch of Grapes ; the Bud is firft white, 
 afterwards it turns green, then red ; and, when it is 
 full ripe, brown. The Banda IJIes are as famous for Banda Tfles 
 Nutmegs, as the Moluccas and Amboina are for Nutmegs. 
 Cloves. The Nutmeg-tree is like the Peach, only 
 its Leaves are rounder, and fomething lefs : The Fruit is inclos'd 
 in a thick Rind, like a Walnut ; under this a Leaf, 
 which covers the Shell, and is what we call Mace ; Mace. 
 and within this lies the Nutmeg. It feems the Dutch 
 have rooted up all the Cloves in the Moluccas, properly fo called, 
 becaufe they lay expos'd to the Attempts of other Nations ; for 
 this Reafon they have encouraged the Planting of Cloves in 
 Amboina only, which have increafed to fuch a Degree, that this 
 Ifland alone is now fufficient to fcrve the whole 
 World with Cloves. The Air in the Ifland of Celebes Celebes. 
 is hot and moift, the whole Country lying under or 
 very near the Line, and f-bjeft to great Rains It is moft healthful 
 
 during
 
 478 Prefent State of the A fiatic Ifles. Part II. 
 
 during the Northern Monfons ; if they fail of blowing their 
 accuftomed Time, which is very feldom, the Ifland grows fickly, 
 and great Numbers of People are fwept away. They have Mines 
 of Copper, Tin, and Gold j but I do not find they are much 
 wrought : The Gold they have is found chiefly in the Sands of 
 their Rivers, and at the Bottom of Hills, wafh'd down by Tor- 
 rents. This Country produces many venomous Drugs and Herbs, 
 the very Touch or Smell of which occafions prefent Death. The 
 Cattle have that Sagacity, it is obferv'd, that they feldom touch 
 a noxious Herb ; and, if they happen to tread near one, imme- 
 diately fly from it. The Air in the Ifland of Borneo 
 Borneo Air. is not excefiive hot, confidering it is fituated under 
 the Equinoctial, being refrefh'd almoft every Day 
 with Showers and Sea-breezes, as all other Countries are under 
 the Line : But, as thofe Parts of the Iflc towards the Sea-coaft lie 
 upon a Flat, for feveral hundred Miles, and are annually flooded ; 
 upon the retiring of the Waters, the whole Surface of the Ground 
 is cover'd with Mud, or foft Oufe ; which the Sun darting its 
 P v ays perpendicularly upon, raifes thick noifome Fogs, which are 
 not difperfed till nine or ten in the Morning, and render thofe 
 Parts of the Ifland very unwholfome. The Multitude of Frogs 
 and Infefts the Waters leave behind, and are foon kiil'd by the 
 Heat of the Sun, caufe an intolerable Stench alfo at that Time of 
 the Year, and corrupt the Air : Add to this the cold chilling 
 Damps and Winds, which fucceed the hotteft Days. From all this 
 we may conclude, it mult be very unheaithfui, at leaft, to Euro- 
 pan Conftitutions ; witnefs the Lofs of our Countrymen, who 
 yearly travel thither. But Gold and Precious Stones, 
 VroduSls. which abound in this Ifland, make our Adventurers 
 flight Death in every Shape, rather than not poflcfs 
 them. As to their Monfons, or periodical Winds, they ar* 
 Welterly from September to April, or thereabouts ; during which 
 Time is their wet Seafon, when heavy Rains continually pour 
 down, intermix'd with violent Storms of Thunder and Lightning > 
 and, at this Time, it is very rare to have two Hours fair Weather - 
 together on the South Coaft of the Ifle, where the Europeans 
 principally refort. The dry Seafon begins ufually in April, and 
 continues till September ; and, in this Part of the Year too, they 
 feldom fail of a Shower every Day, when the Sea-breeze comes 
 in. This Iflaud alfo produces Pepper, and many other valuable 
 Commodities. The Air of Sumatra is generally very 
 Sumatra unwholfome ; for, from the hotteft fultry Weather, 
 Air. it often fuddenly changes to chilling Cold. The low 
 
 Grounds alfo, near the Coaft, where the Natives, as 
 well as Foreigners, principally inhabit, being one continued Mo- 
 rafs, the fame Kind of (linking Fogs arife here as in Borneo, and 
 
 render
 
 Ch. XXIV. Prefent State of the Afiatic Ifles. 479 
 
 render this Country no lefs unhealthful, efpecially to Foreigner*. 
 The principal Produce of Sumatra is Pepper, and 
 Gold Duft ; it alfo affords good Camphirc, and the Produ&s. 
 Bezoar itone is alfo found here : The chanipain 
 Country affords a rich deep Mould, of various Colours. Rice is 
 the only Grain that grows here : Next to Pepper and Rice, their 
 moft confiderable Plantations are their Sugar-canes, which arc 
 planted chiefly on account of the Arrack or Spirits which are 
 extracted from them, and found very neceflary in lb moift an Air. 
 They have moll of the Fruits, which we meet with in other Parts 
 of India, in great Perfection ; fuch as Citrons, Oranges, Pine- 
 apples, Cocoa-nuts, Limes, Mangoes, Pomegranate?, Water- 
 melons, Mangolteen, &c. of which, the latter is 
 efteem'd the molt delicious Fruit. The Monfons Ceylon, 
 and Seafons are the fame in the Ifland of Ceylon, as 
 on the neighbouring Continent, and the Rains begin to fall much 
 fooner on the We Item Coaft than on the Eaftern : The Northern 
 Part of the Ifland is fubjecl to great Droughts for fevcral Years 
 together ; which is the more fenfible Affliction, becauie they have 
 fcarce any Springs or Rivers in that Part of the Ifland, but muft 
 be fupplied, with Difficulty, with Water, as well as Food, from 
 the South : This often renders this Part of the Country very 
 fickJy, but the reft is efleem'd very healthful. The 
 Tree peculiar to this Ifland, and more valuable to Produce. 
 the Dutch, than any of the Mines of Potofi to the 
 Spaniards, is the Cinnamon : This Tree is as com- 
 mon as any other, in the Woods, on the South- weft TbeCimta- 
 Part of the Ifland ; it is of a mkJdle Size, and has a mon-tree. 
 Leaf in Thicknefs, Shape, and Colour, like the Lau- 
 rel ; the Leaves, when they hrilfpront, are as red as Scarlet ; and, 
 rubb'd between the Fingers, fraell like a Clove ; it bears a Fruit, 
 in September, like an Acorn ; bjt neither the Smell nor Tafle of 
 it is like the Bark ; however, by boiling the Fruit in Water, an 
 Oil will fwim on the Top, which fmells mighty prettily ; and, 
 when it is cold, is white, and as hard as Tallow. This Tree, 
 according to fome, has three Barks ; but two all People agree in, 
 and that it is the fecond which they llrip from Trees of a mid- 
 dling Growth, that is the belt Cinnamon. As for Mines, I don't 
 And they work any, except thole of Iron, of which they have 
 great Plenty, and make pretty good Steel. Diamonds, and Pre- 
 cious Stones alfo, 'tis faid, their Prince has in abundance, but 
 probably thefc might be imported from Golconda, when they 
 traded thither with their Cinnamon ; for, if there had been any 
 Diamond-mines in the Country, the Dutch, or Portuguejt, would 
 have dilcover'd them long before this. 
 
 Govern-
 
 480 Prefent State of the Afiatic Ifles. Part If. 
 
 Government.] The Japan Ifles are under the Government 
 of fifty or fixty petty Kings, vefted with Sovereign 
 Japan. Power in their refpective Territories, but fubjett to 
 
 one grand Monarch, who can depofe and punifh 
 them as he fees fit. Antiently, this great King was High Prieft, 
 as well as Sovereign, of thefe Iflands ; and the prefent High Prieft, 
 who is a Defcendant of the former Kings, enjoys ftill the Style 
 and State of a King, notwithstanding another Family poflefies 
 the Throne ; and it is faid, the reigning Prince is obliged to 
 marry one of his Daughters, and do him Homage once in three 
 Years, and acknowledge he holds the Crown of that Family : 
 But this feems to be done rather on a Religious, than 
 Admini- Civil Account. The King commits the Adminiftra- 
 jlration of tion of Affairs to four principal Minifters, and has a 
 Affairs. Privy Council alfo, confifting of twenty-eight Mem- 
 bers, of which four are Petty Kings. ' The Vaflal 
 Kings are obliged to attend at Court one Half of the Year. Not 
 only the Petty Kings, but every Lord of a DiftricT:, 
 Lanjos. and Father of a Family, has the Power of Life and 
 
 Death, and tries and condemns his Dependents accord- 
 ing to his own arbitrary Will, there being few written Laws, if 
 any, and no public Courts of Juftice, in this Country : The 
 fmalleft Theft, or a bare Affault, Gaming, and even Lying, it 
 is faid, is punifh'd with Death ; and for defrauding the King 
 of his Revenue, Murder, or Treafon, and fuch enormous Crimes, 
 the Offender's Relations, Parents and Children, fuffer with him ; 
 except the Female Relations, who are fold for Slaves. The Petty 
 Kings are feldom put to Death, but banifh'd to a certain Ifland, 
 where they are put to fervile Employments during the Remainder 
 of their Days. Their ufual Punifhments for great Offences, are 
 burning, crucifying with the Head downwards, tearing them to 
 Pieces with Horfes, and boiling them in Oil. A Gentleman, or 
 Soldier, conviclcd of any capital Crime, has the Favour of dying 
 by his own Hands and it is reckon'd very ignominious, if he 
 waits for the Executioner in that Cafe. The Pbt- 
 Philippine lippine Iflands, being moftly fubjecl; to the King of 
 Iflands. Spain, are rul'd by a Viceroy, or Captain General, 
 
 who keeps his Court in the City of Manila : This is 
 one of the moft profitable Polls belonging to the Spanijb Monar- 
 chy, and would be defir'd by moft of the Grandees, if it was not 
 at fo great a Diftance from Europe : He has under him twenty- 
 two Governors of Towns and Provinces, who are appointed by 
 him; and all Military Employments are in his Gift. When a 
 Captain General is recall'd, Proclamation is made for all Perfons 
 to come in, and exhibit their Complaints againft him, for fixty 
 
 Days ;
 
 Ch.XXIV. Prefent State of the Afiaticlfles. 48* 
 
 Days j and he undergoes a fevere Trial, the Succeflbr being fre- 
 quently his Judge ; and the preceding Governor, when his Trial 
 is over, is fent back into Spain, with an Account of his Conduct, 
 and the Proceedings againft him. 
 
 The Government of the Ifland of Celebes is monar- The IJJand 
 chical, and the Crown hereditary, if it may be fo o/Celebes. 
 called, where the eldeft Brother inherits, to the Ex- 
 clufion of the Children. The Reafon whereof is faid to be, that 
 the Crown may never defcend upon the Head of an Infant, unable 
 to govern or protect his People. But, though this Prince is faid 
 to be abfolute, I perceive great Part of his Power is transferred to 
 his Prime Minifter, who difpofes almoft of all Places of Truft in 
 the Civil Government ; firft giving a Lift o: them to the King, 
 who never refufes to confirm them. In criminal 
 Matters, they are frequently allow'd to do them- Laws. 
 felves Juftice : Whoever takes a Murderer, Adulterer, 
 or Robber, in the Faft, may execute him himfelf. At prefent, 
 The Ifle of Borneo is divided into feveral petty King- 
 doms ; and, when any Prince grows more powerful Borneo, 
 than the reft, he ufually brings his Neighbours into 
 a State of Dependence, and fometimes obtains the Name of 
 Sultan, or King of the whole Ifland. Thus, not long fince, the 
 King of the City of Borneo was ftyled Sultan of the whole Ifland ; 
 but his Authority is upon the Decline at prefent ; the Sultan of 
 Caytongee, whofe Palace ftands about a hundred Miles from the 
 Mouth of the River Banjar, is now become his Rival. However, 
 Travellers ufually reckon up feveral other Kings, as the Sultan of 
 Pajfeir, the Sultan of Negaree, and the Sultan of Succadana, &c. 
 The Inhabitants of the Mountains are faid to be divided into 
 numerous Clans, under their refpective Heads, and are not fubjeft 
 to any of the above Sultans ; but they ate fo little known to us, 
 that I fhall not pretend to defcribe their Form of Government. 
 The refpeftive Kingdoms and States in this Ifland of 
 Sumatra feem to be very differently conftituted ; Sumatra, 
 and moll of them have experienc'd great Alterations 
 and Revolutions in the laft Century. The Kingdom of Acben 
 takes up all the Northern Part of the Ifland : This, fomc Tra- 
 vellers tell us, is mixed ; and fome, that it is an unlimited Monar- 
 chy ; fome, that it is elective ; others, that it is hereditary ; fome, 
 that it is govern'd by a Man ; others, that none but Women 
 reign here : It feems moft likely, they are not confined either to 
 the one or other, but that they fuccced or are elected indiffer- 
 ently, and that their Sex is no Bar to the Succeflion. That Part 
 of Sumatra, which lies to the South of the Equator, is divided into 
 feveral petty Kingdoms or States ; the Princes whereof ftyle them- 
 fclves Sultans, as well as the King of Acben. Each of thefe have 
 
 I i their
 
 4$ 2 Prefent State of the Afiatic Ifles. Part II. 
 
 their Mobility, which conftitute their Council ; and every Town 
 and Village almoft has a Governor appointed by the Sultan, if he 
 fees fit ; but ufually chofen by the Inhabitants of the DiUricT:, and 
 confirmed by the Sultan ; and both thefe Orders btJng aflembled, 
 to advife with on fome Emergencies of the Government : Our 
 Factors on the Weft Coaft compare them to our Lords and Com- 
 mons, and look upon the Power of thefe Sultans to be limited, 
 like that of an Englijb Monarch. There are alfo fome free 
 Towns upon the Coaiis, govern'd by their own Magiftrates ; and 
 they do not feem to be under the Dominion of any neighbouring 
 Sultan. There is ftill a People independent of all thefe, who 
 inhabit the Mountains, and are govern'd, as 'tis faid, by their 
 feveral Captains or Heads of Clans, who, probably, find it their 
 Intereft to unite againft all others, to maintain their antient Liber- 
 ties* and thefe are the People, which the Inhabitants of the Coafts 
 have reprefented as Canibals, to deter all other Nations from 
 entertaining any Commerce with them. Thefe Mountaineers are 
 in Poflefiion of the Gold Mines, bur make little Advantage of 
 them, only exchanging this rich Metal with the Inhabitants of 
 the flat Country for Rice, &c. That Strangers may be under no 
 Temptation of penetrating farther into the Country, and en- 
 deavour to eftablifh a Trade directly with the Inland People, they 
 are reprefented to us as the moil barbarous of human Kind, as 
 Canibals, Monfters, Zsc and of all Men to be avoided : And thus 
 too they very probably reprefent Foreigners to thefe poor People, 
 to fet them at as great Diilance as pofiible from one another, that 
 they themfelves may reap the fole Benefit of this rich Trade. * A 
 particular Account of the Government, cjrV. of thefe People can- 
 not be expected, fo long as we are depriv'd of ail 
 Ceylon. Accefs to them. The King of Ceylon is abfolute, 
 
 being reftrained by no Laws or Cuftoms from doing 
 what he thinks fit. When he goes abroad, his Guards are very 
 numerous, and is preceded by Drums, Trumpets, and other Wind- 
 mufic, and with Singing-women. When his Subjects come into 
 his Prefence, they fall three times upon their Faces ; and then do 
 not Hand, but fit upon their Legs before him, and addrels him in 
 Terms little inferior to thofe they ufe in Divine Worfhip ; 
 and when they go out of his Prefence, they creep backwards till 
 they are out of Sight. His Courtiers, while they are in Waiting, 
 are not permitted to come near their Wives ; nor will he fo much 
 as fufrer their Wives to remain in the City, infomuch that if they 
 are taken with a Lady, while they are in his Service, it is capital. 
 This Prince manages molt of his Affairs by two great Minifters, 
 to whom the Subjects may appeal from inferior Judges, or Govern- 
 ors. The Cinnamon Plantations are wholly in the Power of 
 the Dutch, and they have eblig'd the King, to retire farther up 
 
 into
 
 Ch.XXIV. PrefeM State*/ Me Afatklfos. 483 
 
 into the Ceuntry, and fufFer him to entertain no Commerce or 
 Correfpondence with the reft of the World : Thi? Ifland may be 
 faid, in general, to be under the Dominion of the Hollanders. 
 
 Trade] As to the Trade of the Japonefe, they have very 
 little at prefenr, but with Jeffo, the Chintfe, and Dutch. The 
 Portuguese, it feems, about the Year 1622, being accus'd of form- 
 ing a Confpiracy againft the Government and Crown, were all cut 
 in Pieces, and a Decree made againft having any Commerce with 
 them, or any Nation that profefled Chriftianity. 
 However, the Dutch have a Seetlement there ; but Of Japan. 
 the Japonefe are fo jealous of them, that when any 
 of their Ships arrive, a Magiftrate goes on board, and takes an 
 Account of the Number of their Men, and carries their Sails, 
 Ammunition, Guns, and Rudder, afhore, till they are ready to 
 fail. The Ifland called Difnid, in Pofieffion of the Dutch, is not 
 more than two Miles in Circumference ; and no Dutchman cm fHr 
 out of it, or come into the City of Kanguafaque, (to which it is 
 join'd with a Bridge) without haiarding his being cut to Pieces by 
 the Guards, who are appointed to watch their Motions. In this 
 flavifh Condition the Dutch remain the greateft Part of the Year, till 
 the Seafon their Fleet is expedted ; and then, after fome few 
 Weeks free Trade, there is no further Communication allow'd of 
 between the City of Nanguafaque and the Dutch in the little Ifland 
 of Difnia, or with the Shipping. The Hollanders tranfport to 
 Japan raw and wrought Silks in great Quantities, Cloth, Deer- 
 fkins, raw Hides, Hemp, Linen, Wool, Quickfllver, Cloves, Pep- 
 per, Sugar, Muft, Camphire, and Borax, Siampan, and Brazil 
 Wood, China Ware, Calembac, Elephants Teeth, and fmall 
 Wares, fuch as the Chinefe ufed to bring thither. The Dutch 
 have, in Return, Gold, Silver, fine Copper, Cabinets, 
 and other Japan and laquer'd Ware. The Inhabit- Of Min- 
 ants of Mindanao trade chiefly to Manila, whither danao. 
 they tranfport Gold, and Bees-wax ; and bring back 
 Calicoes, Muflins, and China Silks : They maintain a Trade alfo 
 with Borneo ; the Dutch come hither, in Sloops, from Ternate and 
 Tidore, and purchafe Rice, Bees-wnx, r:nd Tobacco. 
 The Ifland of Manila lies fo conveniently between Manila, 
 the rich Kingdoms of the Eaft and Weft, that it has 
 been efteem'd the beft Situation for Trade in the World, efpccially 
 when the Molucca Iflands were under the fame Government ; then 
 the Spaniards might be faid to have the beft Share of the Eaft, 
 as well as Weft Indies: Hither Silver was brought from New 
 Spain and Peru ; Diamonds, and other Precious Stones, from Gol~ 
 conda ; Cinnamon, from Ceylon ; Pepper, from Sumatra and Java ; 
 Cloves and Nutmegs, from the Moluccas ; Silks, from Bengal ; 
 I i 2 Camphire
 
 484 Prefent State of the Mixiiclhzs. Part II. 
 
 Camphire, from Borneo ; China Ware, and Silks, from China, &c. 
 Two Ships fail yearly to Acapulco, in Ne<w Spain, loaded with the 
 Riches of the Eaft ; thefe Veffels are returned to Manila, freighted 
 with Silver, and make four hundred per Cent. Profit, 'tis faid. 
 
 The Goods our Merchants deal in, in Borneo, are 
 Borneo. chiefly Pepper, Gold, and Precious Stones ; though it 
 
 affords feveral other valuable Commodities. Goods 
 proper for Exportation thither (befides Dollars) are Guns, Sheet- 
 lead, fhowy Calimancoes, Knives, and other Cutlers Wares, but 
 not Forks ; Iron Bars, fmall Steel Bars, Hangers, Nails, Grap- 
 lings, red Leather Boots, Speftacles, Clock-work, Fire Arms, 
 
 Gunpowder, and Looking-glaffes. The Dutch fuf- 
 Java. fer no Europeans to trade in Java ; but there come 
 
 to Batavia fifteen or twenty Sail of Chine fe Junks 
 every Year, from three to five hundred Tons apiece, which fur- 
 nifh the Hollanders with all the Merchandize of China, at an 
 eafier Rate, than they could by fending their Fleets thither. 
 Batavia is the great Magazine of the Dutch Eaft-Indta Company : 
 . Hither they import the Merchandizes of Japan, of the Spice- 
 Iflands, Perjta, Surat, Bengal, and the Coaft of Malabar and Cor- 
 mondel, as well as every thing that Europe affords. One Sort of 
 Goods they barter for another all over the Indies ; and, having 
 ftirnifhed themfelves with what is molt valuable in the Eaft, tranf- 
 
 port it into Europe, where all is converted into Money. 
 Sumatra. The Trade of Sumatra is chiefly carried on at the 
 
 Port of Achen, where there is feldom lefs than ten or 
 fifteen Sail of Ships of different Nations. The principal Mer- 
 chandize of this Country is Pepper and Gold Dull ; and, notwith- 
 ftanding they have greater Quantities of Gold here, than in any 
 other Country in India, the great Demand for it keeps it at a 
 very high Rate. 
 
 Revenues.] The Revenues of the King of Japan arife, it is 
 faid, to an incredible Sum, far exceeding the Reve- 
 , Japan, nues of moft of the Powers of Europe put together, 
 
 if there is not a Miftake of a Figure or two in the 
 Accounts we have. The Treafure of the King of Achen is ac- 
 knowledge by all to be very great, there being fuch 
 Sumatra. Plenty of Gold in this Ifland : But what his certain 
 Revenues are, I do not find computed. The Reve- 
 nues of the Sultan6 of the Southern Provinces arife chiefly by the 
 Duties on Pepper; but what they are certain, is not 
 Ceylon. faid. As to the Revenues of the King of Ceylon, 
 three times a Year the People bring up their Rents 
 to Court ; and, every New-year's-day, all that have any Polls or 
 Offices in die Government, make Prefents to the King, confifting 
 
 of
 
 Ch.XXIV. Prefent State of the Afiatic Ifles. 485 
 
 of Gold, Precious Stones, Plate, Arms, or Calico Cloth. Befides 
 thefe annual Prefents, and Rents, the Xing fends for whatever he 
 pleafes from any of his Subjects j fo that, in Efted, he commands 
 the Revenues and Produce of all the Lands in his Dominions, 
 whenever the Exigencies of the Government induce him to call 
 for them. 
 
 Forces.] The Handing Forces of the King of Japan amount 
 to 20,000 Horfe, and 100,000 Foot, in Time of 
 Peace : In Time of War, each of the petty Sove- Japan. 
 reigns is oblig'd to furrrifh his Quota, which increafes 
 the Army to 38,000 Horfe, and 368,000 Foot, as it is faid. As 
 to the Forces of Java, all I can meet with are thofe 
 of the Dutch ; who, out of feveral Nations, have Java, 
 form'd a Body of ten or twelve thoufand regular 
 Troops, which garifon the City of Batavia, and the neighbour- 
 ing Forts, about a thoufand of whom being upon Guard every 
 Day. The Forces of the King of Macaffar have 
 amounted, in former Wars, to 12,000 Horfe, 80,000 Celebes,or 
 Foot ; of which the latter are efteem'd the beft in Macafl'ar. 
 all India, and accordingly are hired into the Service 
 of other Princes and States, as the S-wifs are in this Part of the 
 World. If we would compute the Number of Forces 
 belonging to the King of Achen, we mult reckon all Sumatra, 
 that are able to bear Arms in the Kingdom, who are 
 all bound to attend him in his Wars : But whether he has any 
 regular Troops, befides his Guards, does not appear. The Forces 
 of the Princes, in the Southern Parts, are inconfiderable apart ; 
 but we find they have united, upon certain Occafions, and expell'd 
 both Dutch and Englijb from very confiderable Settlements. 
 
 Character] The Japonefe are People of an Japonefe. 
 Olive- colour'd Complexion, and generally of a tall 
 Stature, and ftrong Conftitutions ; very fair in their Dealings ; of 
 a quick Apprehenfion, and good Underftanding ; modefl; and cour- 
 teous ; they are careful to inltil in the Minds of their 
 Children a Love of Glory and Virtue ; and are not Virtues. 
 covetous of much Riches, contenting themfelves with 
 a Competency. They obferve a Decorum in their common Con- 
 verfation, avoiding all loofe or vain Expreflions, and Detraction. 
 However, fome Travellers acquaint us, that among 
 the Japonefe are found many", who defcrve a contrary Vices of 
 Character ; being cruel, ambitious, uncharitable, the Mino~ 
 proud, and Ihamefully given up to many dcteftable ritj. 
 Vices. Their Learning confifts only in reading, , 
 writing, and underftanding the Hiftory of their own ar ' *' 
 I i 3 Country,
 
 4$ 6 Prtfent State of the Afiatic Ifles. Part II . 
 
 Country, the Tenets of their Religion, and fome few Rules of 
 Morality. They are excellent Mechanics, as appears by their 
 Cabinets, and other fine Works imported from thence. Their 
 Hiftory and Geography were fo very defective, that, before the 
 Europeans came among them, they divided the World into three 
 
 Parts ; namely, China, Japan, and Siam ; and had 
 Philip- no Notion of any thing beyond. The Natives of 
 
 pines. Mindanao are laid to be an ingenious witty People ; 
 
 but, for the moft part, very lazy, and many of them 
 very thievifh ; but this Want of Induftry may proceed chiefly 
 from the Tyranny of the Spaniards, who will not fuffer them to 
 enjoy the Wealth they acquire. They have a ftately Mien, or 
 rather proud and haughty, as fome of our Travellers interpret it ; 
 but they are civil enough to Strangers, and entertain them with a 
 great deal of Freedom, unles they are infulted or injured ; and 
 
 then, it is faid, they are implacable in their Revenge. 
 Javanefe. The Javanefe are of a moderate Stature, well fhaped, 
 
 but tawny ; they are very abftemious, eating only 
 a fmall Quantity of Rice, Fruit, and dry'd Fifh ; but have 
 the general Character of being a barbarous, proud, and fierce 
 
 People. The People of Macajfar have excellent 
 Celebes, or Memories, and are very quick of Apprehenfion 
 Macaflar. And they feem to be infpjr'd with juft Notions of 
 
 Honour and Friendfliip ; and there are Inltances of 
 Virtues. many of them, who have reliev'd and maintain'd 
 
 People in Diftrefs, and even fuffer'd them to (hare 
 their Eftates. They retain'd that Love of Liberty, that thy 
 were the laft of the Indian Nations that were enflay'd by the 
 
 Europeans ; which did not happen neither, till after a 
 Vices. long and expenfive War. They are unhappy in being 
 
 very fubject to Pafiion ; but it is foon over, and then 
 they will condemn themfelves for not conquering that Weaknefs. 
 
 There are no People more addicted to Arms, and hardy 
 yiilitary Enterprizes, enduring Fatigues as weil as any People 
 Virtues. whatever ; infomuch that they may be look'd upon 
 
 as the only Soldiers on the other Side the Bay of 
 Bengal. The Women are remarkably chafte and referved ; and 
 the Girls are bred up to write and read, and in all Kinds of 
 
 Houfewifry. The Natives are of a moderate Sta- 
 Perfons. ture, ftrong and robuft, and their Complexions fwar- 
 
 thy ; their Cheek-bones fland high, and their Nofes 
 Borneo. are generally fiat. The Natives of Borneo, who inha- 
 bit the Coafts, are, in general, a People of a quick 
 Apprehenfion, and extremely inquifitive, and will learn any thing 
 with a great deal of Eafe. They are held to be a People of a 
 wonderful peaceable Difpofition, feldom or never quarrelling amongj 
 
 them-
 
 Ch.XXIV. Prefent State of the Afiatic Ifles. 487 
 
 themfelves ; but, when they are thoroughly piqued, nothing left 
 than the Life of their Enemy, 'tis laid, will fatisfy their Revenge, 
 which they always take in a private manner. The Natives, who 
 live in the Woods and Mountains, are a robuft warlike People ; 
 they fpend their Time chiefly in hunting, and looking after their 
 Cattle; and have very little Commerce with Foreigners, which 
 makes it difficult to give a particular Account of 
 them. The Inhabitants of Sumatra are of two Sorts, Sumatra, 
 which is commonly the Cafe of molt of the Indian 
 Iflands ; thofe of the Coafts are originally defcended from Per/ta 
 and Arabia, and are generally held to be a proud, lazy People ; 
 and, like the Spaniards, have molt of their Bulinefs done by Fo- 
 reigners ; and either they have not a Genius for Arts and Sciences, 
 or they arc fo proud and lazy, that they feldom apply themfelves 
 to improve any mechanic Art They are of a fwarthy Com- 
 plexion, a middle Stature, ftrait and well-limb'd ; but their Fea- 
 tures arc not very engaging. As to the Natives, who inhabit the 
 Mountains, and inland Parts, we have a very llender Account of 
 them ; but, according to Cultom, they are reprefented to us as Canj- 
 bals, by their Countrymen inhabiting the Coaft. The 
 Inhabitants of the IHand of Ceylon do not want Cou- Ceylon, 
 rage, and are Men of quick Parts; complaifant, and in- 
 finuating in their Addrefs; naturally grave, of an even Temper, not 
 eafily moved ; and, when they happen to be in a Paflion, fooa recon- 
 ciled again ; they are very temperate in eating and drinking, and de 
 not indulge in their Sleep ; but though they commend Induftry 
 much, like the Natives of other Countries, they are a little 
 inclined to Lazinefc ; they are not given to Theft, but intolerably 
 addifted to Lying, and have not much regard to what they pro- 
 mife. They are well-fhaped, of a middle Stature, their Hair 
 long and black, their Features j_ 11, and their Complexion dark. 
 
 Religion.] The Japonefe are Idolaters, and worlhip the 
 Heavens and the Planets, with feveral morcftruous 
 Idols. They give no Account of the Creation of the Of Japan. 
 World, but generally believe the Immortality of the 
 Soul, and a State of Rewards and Punilhments ; and moft of 
 them believe Tranfmigration, or that their Souls Ihall animate 
 other Bodies after Death. Chriftianity was lirft preached in this, 
 Country, in 1552. by Ibme Portuguefe Priefts ; and the ChriAian 
 Religion fo increased, that, before the Year 1622, three petty 
 Kings, and feveral other great Men, with Multitudes of People, 
 VCO& Profeffion of the Golpel, if we may credit the Miflionaries* 
 But, about that Time, a Decree was made for extirpating all Chri- 
 ftians under the 'japonefe Government, under Pretence of Conlpi- 
 racy ; Whereupon there follow'd fo terrible a Perfecution, that 
 J i 4 there
 
 48 8 Prefent State of the Afiatic Ifles. Part II. 
 
 there is not now one Chriftian left in Japan ; nor are any People, 
 who acknowledge themfelves Chriftians, fufFer'd to come into 
 their Country, except the Dutch. However, this Extirpation was 
 not effected without alarming the Government ; for the Chrifti- 
 ans, being very numerous at that Time the Perfecution began, 
 finding that no Remonftrances againft the Injuftice of the Charge 
 had any EfFeft upon the Prince, rather than fuffer themfelves and 
 Families to be cut to Pieces, had recourfe to Arms, and defeated 
 a Body of the King's Troops ; but his Japonefe Majefty, marching 
 againft them in Perfon, with a numerous Army, engaged them in 
 a general Battle, which hfted three Days ; and, at length, the 
 Chriftians were intirely routed. This obftinate Refiftance occa- 
 fion'd all manner of Cruelties to be exercifed upon them ; and no 
 lefs than 60,000 of them perifh'd, either in Battle, or by Torture, 
 in the Space of a few Days : Nor did the Government fpare either 
 Men, Women, or Children, who had any Relation to the Chrifti- 
 ans. If a Chriftian Prieft was taken in any Houfe, not only the 
 People of the fame Houfe, but the whole Neighbourhood, we're 
 involv'd in his Ruin, for not difcovering him. It is faid, that, 
 upon the great Increafe of Chriftians in this Country, the Pottu- 
 guefe Clergy really began to preach up the Independence of the 
 Church, and that they were not fubjedt to any temporal Prince ; 
 which alarmed the King of Japan, and made him apprehend they 
 had a Defign to dethrone him. The Natives of the 
 OftheVhi- Philippine IJlands retain fome Traditions, in their 
 lippines. Songs, concerning the Genealogy and heroic Ab of 
 their God3, or antient Heroes. By thefe it appear:-, 
 they formerly worfhipped one fupreme Being, the Maker or Fa- 
 ther of all their fubordinate Deities. They adored alfo Birds and 
 Beafts, like the Egyptians', and the Sun and Moon, like the AJfy- 
 rians : And indeed there is not a Rock or Stone, Promontory or 
 River, but what they facrifice to at prefent. They worlhip alfo 
 their Fathers, Grandfathers, and Great-grandfathers, like the 
 Chinefe. The Inhabitants of Mindanao, along the Coafrs, are 
 Mahometans ; but, in the Inland Countries, they are Pagans, and 
 have receiv'd their Religion from China, or India, or, perhaps, 
 from both. The Spaniamds refiding here are the fame, in Reli- 
 gion, with thofe in Spain. The Natives of the Moluccas, Sumatra, 
 Celebes, and Java, are, for the moft part, grofs Idolaters ; and 
 there are intermixed with them many Mahometans, particularly 
 in Java, where the greateft Part of the Inhabitants, towards the 
 Sea Coafts, are zealous Profeflbrs of the Do&rine of Mahomet, in 
 feveral of its fundamental Points. The Religion of 
 Borneo. the People of the Inland Parts of Borneo is Paganifm, 
 which they receiv'd from their Anceftors the Chinefe, 
 who firft planted this Ifland ; but all the Sea Coalts are Mahomet-
 
 Ch. XXIV. Prefent State of the Afiatic Ides. 489 
 
 ansy being the Pofterity of thofe Colonies which tranfported 
 themfelves from Afric t Arabia, and Perfia, to the Oriental IJlands, 
 between three and foar hundred Years fince ; invited hither by 
 the Spices, and other rich Merchandizes, for which the Eaft has 
 been famous many Ages paft. The Natives of 
 Ceylon worlhip one fupreme God, the Creator of Ceylon. 
 Heaven and Earth ; they fall down before the Images 
 of their Saints, or Heroes, whom they iuppos'd to have liv'd upon 
 the Earth, and are now become Angels, or miniftring Spirits, to 
 the great Creator : But the principal of their inferior Deities is 
 their God Buddsu, who, they believe, came from Heaven, to pro- 
 cure the eternal Happinefs of Mankind, and afcended to Heaven 
 from the Top of a Mountain, leaving the Impreffion of his Foot 
 there in the Rock, which is now become the Obje& of their Wor- 
 fhip. They pay divine Honours alfo to the Sun, Moon, and 
 other Planets, believing they have a mighty Influence on their 
 Fortunes. And every Town, or Place, it feems, has its tutelar 
 Demon, whole Power is fuppos'd to be exercis'd only over the 
 People of that Place : Befides thefe, every particular Perfon almoft 
 has his Houfhold Gods, for whom they ereft little Chapels in their 
 Yards, placing Lamps, and ftrewing Flowers, before them, and 
 offering Rice, and other Food, to thefe little Mediators, whom 
 they addrefs every Morning at lead ; believing that the Perfon, 
 whom the Image reprefent;, has a powerful Intereft in the Court 
 of Heaven ; and every one makes choice of thofe they moft affect, 
 or, as fome fay, of fuch as they molt dread ; for they believe there 
 are wicked Spirits, whom God permits to afflitt Mankind with 
 Sicknefs, and other Misfortunes; whofe Anger, therefore, they 
 endeavour to avert by Prayers and Sacrifices. The Eurtpeans are 
 allow'd the free Exercife of their Religion ; and there are many 
 Chriitians diiperfed up and down this Country. 
 
 Customs.] The Japonefe wear feveral Vefts one upon an- 
 other, with a loofe Gown over all, not much unlike 
 the Cbinefe ; they have Drawers alfo, which come Drefs. 
 down very low upon their Legs; and Slippers with- 
 out Heels, like the Cbinefe ; but wear no Caps, though their 
 Heads are fhaved : They have Fans and Umbrellas to defend 
 them from the Weather ; they wear a fhort Dagger in their Safh, 
 and a heavy Broad-fword on the Right Side. They 
 cat little Beef or Mutton, or of the Flefli of any Diet* 
 tame Bead, but chiefly that which they take in Hunt- 
 ing : Some Seels look upon themfclves to be prohibited, by their 
 Religion, to kill any thing, or eat any thing that has Life ; and 
 will not fo much as eat Milk, Butter, or Chcefe Their common 
 Food is Rice, Palfe, and Herbs, as it is in moil Eaitern Nations. 
 
 The
 
 490 Prefmt State of the Afiatic Ifles. Part II. 
 
 The Generality of the People drink a Liquor made of Wheat, 
 and draw a Spirit from Rice ; but the ufual Liquor is Tea. They 
 eat with two little round Sticks, like the Chinefe, and ufe neither 
 Linen, Knives, Forks, or Spoons. Thefe People, it is obferv'd, 
 fpend great Part of their Night in Eating and Drinking, which 
 others fpend in Sleep : And becaufe their Manners and Cuftoms 
 are acknowledg'd to be different from the reft of the 
 Saluta- World in many Inftances, fome Writers affirm, that 
 
 tions. they refemble us in nothing ; and particularly, that, 
 
 inftead of bowing, to fhew their Refpedt. to their Bet- 
 ters, they ftand up as ftiffly as they can : But I find, by the beft 
 Writers, that they bow their Bodies as we do, and never approach 
 their Magiftrates, but upon their Knees. They de- 
 Vi<verfion$. light much in Mafquerades and Plays, at which the 
 King and Court are often prefent ; the Minifters of 
 State, and great Men, being frequently the principal A&ors. 
 When they celebrate their annual Feftival of vifiting 
 Feftivals. the Tombs of their Anceftors, every Houie is illu- 
 minated ; and they march out of the Town at Mid- 
 night, in a folemn Proceffion, to the Graves of their deceafed 
 Friends, where they eat, drink, and make merry, for feveral 
 Nights fuccefiively : At the Conclufion of the Feaft, they march 
 round the Town with Flags, Streamers, and Banners ; beating 
 upon Brafs Pans before the Temples of their Idols, and at the 
 Doors of the great Men. When a great Man makes 
 Entertain- an Entertainment, it is ufual, at the End of the Feaft. 
 ments. to call his Servants together, it is faid, and demand 
 
 which of them will kill themfelves, before the Guefts, 
 for his fake ; and thereupon they contend who fhall firft rip up 
 their Bowels : This is alfo common, it is faid, upon the Death of 
 their Mafters, or upon the laying the Foundation of a Pahce, or 
 magnificent Building. In Japan' they burn their 
 Funerals. dead Bodies, as in India. On the Day appointed for 
 the Funeral, a large fquare Pile of Wood is erefted 
 without the Town ; and, the Friends and Relations of the De- 
 ceafed being afiembled, the Women firft move forward, cloath'd 
 in White ; which is the Colour ufed in Mourning here, jrs well as 
 in China. The Women, of any Quality, are carried in Litters of 
 Cedar; after thefe fellow the Men, richly drefs'd ; then come the. 
 Priefts, cloath'd in Linen, one of them with a lighted Torch, fing- 
 ing, with his Brethren, all the Way they march : Some carry 
 Brafs Bafons, which they beat upon ; and others Bafkcts of Flowers, 
 which they ftrew in the Way, fignifying that the Soul is gone 
 to Par adife. 'Several Banners, with the Names of their ldol.% 
 and Laritens full of Lights, are carried before the Corpfe ; 
 which" is fot upright, in a fort of a Couch, cloath'd in White, and 
 
 his
 
 Ch. XXIV. Prefent State of the Afiatic Mes. 49 1 
 
 his Hands join'd together in a praying Pofture ; and is follow'd by 
 his Children, the eldeft carrying a Torch to light the Fire. 
 Having three times furrounded the Funeral-pile, about which are 
 placed Tables, with Meat and Drink upon them, the Chief Prieft 
 begins a Hymn; and, Living wav'd a lighted Torch three 
 times about hjs Head, fignifying that the Soul is without Begin, 
 ning or End, he flings the Torch away ; which the Children of 
 the Deceafed taking up, kindle the Funeral-pile, throwing on Oil, 
 and coftly fweet Woods, till the Corps is burnt to Alhes. After 
 which the Children offer Incenfe, and adore their Father, as being 
 become one of the heavenly Inhabitants. The next Day they 
 return to the Place, and put up the Bones and Alhes in a gilded 
 Urn, which is hung up in the Houfe for fome time, and after- 
 wards interred with much Solemnity. They ufe 
 neither Tables, Beds, or Chairs ; but fit on Mats Furniture. 
 when they eat, and lie on them when they flcep. 
 The Natives along the Coafts of Borneo eat chiefly Borneo 
 boil'd Rice, Fowls, hard Eggs, Fifh, and Venifon ; Diet. 
 their ufual Liquor is Water, or Tea. They fit crofs- 
 legg'd, on Mats, at their Meals, as they do at other times, being 
 feldom feen in any other Pofture. They live in a hofpitable, 
 friendly Manner, their Houfes being always open to their Acquaint- 
 ance. Both Sexes are very fond of Tobacco, which is ufually 
 mix'd with Opium : The Mafter of the Houfe ufually lights the 
 Pipe firft, Tor they ufe but one) which, after he has irnok'd two 
 or three Whiffs, he gives to his Neighbour, and he to a third, 
 till it has gone round the Company, who fit crofs-legg'd in a Ring, 
 upon Mats : When they havecontinu'd fmoking fome time, they 
 grow exceeding chearful ; but, when they fit too long at it, they 
 grow mad, or ftupid. The ordinary Way of Salu- 
 tation is by joining their Hands, and lifting them Saluta* 
 up towards their Breaft, or Head, and bowing the tions. 
 Body a little* ; but when they appear before a great 
 Man, they lift their join'd Hands to their Forehead, falling down 
 on their Faces and Knees ; and if it be before a Prince, they begin 
 to creep towards him at a confiderable Diilance ; and in the fame 
 manner they retire, after they are difpatched. And whoever has 
 Occafion to petition his Superior, lies in this humble Pofture till 
 he is fpoke ro, which is fomctimes a confiderable 
 Time. Thefc People frequently marry their Daugh- Marriages. 
 ters at eight or nine Years of Age, and they have 
 Children foon after i but are ufually paft the Peril by that time 
 they are Five-and-twenty. The ordinary Food, in 
 Sumatra, is Rice, and Fifh; but thofe who can af- Sumatra, 
 ford it, eat Mutton, Goats-flefh, Buffalo, Beef, and 
 Venifon. Their ufual Liquor is fair Water, or Tea ; Arrack, or 
 
 Spirits
 
 '492 Prefent State oftheAfmtlc Ifles. Part II. 
 
 Spirits drawn from Rice and Sugar-canes, is very common here ; 
 they have alfo Palm Wine, and a Liquor drawn from the Branches 
 of the Cocoa-tree. The ordinary Salutations are 
 Saluta- perform'd by bringing one or both Hands to their 
 
 tions. Head ; but, before any great Man, they proftrate 
 
 themfelves with their Faces to the Ground ; and, 
 like other AJiatics, fit crofs-legg'd on the Floor at their Meals, 
 and whenever they meet or converfe together. 
 Gaming. Gaming they love immoderately, both Cards and 
 Dice ; which were probably introduced here by the 
 Chinefe ', and few Days pafs without a Cock-match : They do 
 not trim the Cock for the Engagement, as in Europe, but produce 
 them with all their gay Plumage, and fallen fuch murdering Inftru- 
 jnents to their Heels, of the Shape and Length of a Pen-knife 
 Blade, that the Battle is over in an Inftant: One Stroke often 
 brings down the ftouteft Cock ; but the Conqueft is not admitted, 
 jinlefs the Viftor will ftrike or peck his Enemy, after he has dif- 
 patched him ; for, if he does not, they draw Stakes. They will 
 Hake their whole Fortunes upon one of thefe Encounters. As to 
 the Inhabitants of the Inland Country, and Mountains, we have 
 no Account ef their Cuftoms ; but, as they are defcended frcm the 
 Chinefe, they probably retain many of their Culloms. 
 Drefs of The Drefs of the Ceylonef$ is ufually a Waiftcoat, of 
 the Ceylon- blue or white Calico, and a Piece of Calico wrapped 
 efe. about their Middles, with a Safh over it, in which 
 
 they ftick their Knife, which has ufually a fine wrought 
 Handle ; they have a Hanger alfo, and ufually walk with a 
 Cane ; but the common People go naked to the Middle, 
 about which they wrap a Piece of Calico, which reaches down 
 to their Knees. The Women go in their Hair combed be- 
 hind their Heads; they have a Waillcoat flourifhed, which 
 fits clofe to their Bodies, and fhews their Shape : They wrap 
 a Piece of Calico about them, which falls below their Knees ; 
 and is longer or ihorter, according to their Quality : They have 
 Jewels in their Ears, in which they bore great Holes, and ftretch 
 them out to a great Length. When they falute their 
 Saluta- Acquaintance, it is by holding out both their Hands, 
 
 tions and with the Palm upwards, and bowing their Bodies; 
 Vijits. but one of a fuperior Quality holds out but one 
 
 Hand, or perhaps nods his Head. The Women 
 falute, by clapping the Palms of their Hands together, and carry- 
 ing them to their Foreheads. When the neareft Relations vifit, 
 they fit very referv'd and filent, and are at no time 
 Diet. addicled to talk much. The principal Food is Rice, 
 
 with fome favoury Soups, made of Flefh, or Filh : 
 The better fort will have fix or feven Dimes at their Tables, but 
 
 they
 
 Ch.XXIV. Prefent State of the A fiatic flies. 493 
 
 they are moft of them Soup, Herbs, or other Garden-fluff; fel- 
 dom more than one or two of Flcfh or Fifh, of which they eat; 
 very fparingly. The Meat is cut in little Pieces, and laid by ths 
 Rice ; fo that they ufe no Knives or Forks, but they have Ladlrt 
 and Spoons : They have Brafs and China Plates to eat on ; but 
 the poorer Sort, who want thefe, make a fhift with broad Leaves 
 inftead of them. Their ufual Drink is Water, which they pour 
 into their Mouths, holding the Bottle at a Diitance from their 
 Heads. If they have Rice and Salt in the Houfe, the Poor look 
 upon themfelves to be well provided for : Beef, I think, they are 
 prohibited to eat, if they are inclin'd to it ; and, for Pork and 
 Fowls, they choofe. to fell thefe to Foreigners amongft them ; and 
 would think themfelves hardly ufed, if they were compelled to 
 make a Meal of either. The Wife drefles the Food, and waits 
 on the Hufband while he eats ; and then fits down with her Chil- 
 dren, and takes what he leaves. They have no 
 Wheel Carriages ; nor would it be poffible to ufe Carriages. 
 them, if they had any, their Ways being fo very nar- 
 row, that two Men can fcarce go abreaft : The King directs the 
 Roads to be kept fo, it feems, as the greateft Security he has 
 againft the Dutch. When the King and his Court move, they 
 have Elephants and Oxen for their Baggage. There were no 
 Horfes in the Country till the Portuguefe brought them hither ; 
 and, it feems, the King thinks it too great an Honour to permit 
 his Subjetts, or even Foreigners, to ride on them in 
 his Country. The Marriages here are ufually made Marriages. 
 by the Parents, while their Children are very young, 
 without confulting them in the Matter ; and, though no Man is 
 allow'd but one Wife, it is a common thing, it is faid, for a 
 Woman to have two Hufbands, and thofe Brothers, who keep 
 Houfe together, and the Children acknowledge both for their 
 Father. 
 
 Curiosities.] In Japan there, is a prodigious high Moun- 
 tain, generally fuppos'd to be equal to the famous Pike oilenerife. 
 In this Ifland is a Fountain, whofe Water is almoft 
 equally hot wich boiling Oil; it beaks forth only Japan 
 twice a Day, for the Space of one Hour ; during If.ands. 
 which' Time the Eruption is fo violent, that it is faid 
 to raife up, and throw away, the greateft Stone they can lay over 
 the Mouth of the Fountr.in, and that with fuch a Noife, that it 
 frequently refembles the Report of a great Gun. Among thefe 
 Iflands are reckon'd eight different Volcanoes, whereof fome are 
 very terrible. In the City of Meaco is a great Co/ojus, of gilded 
 Copper, to which People pay their Devotions ; the Size of this 
 
 Prgod
 
 494 Prefent State of the Afiatic Ifles. Part II. 
 
 Pagod is fuch, that, being fet in a Chair, (which is 80 Fee 
 broad, and 70 high) no Iefs than 15 Men may conveniently Hand 
 on his Head. His Thumb is faid to be 14 Inches about, and the 
 reft of the Body is proportionable to it. In the Sea, about the 
 p, ... . Philippine IJIands, is frequently f en a Fifh, or Sea 
 
 Tfl- 1 1 ^ ' rnoniier, about the Bignefs of a Calf; its Head, 
 Face, Neck, and Breaft, being like thofe of the Fair 
 Sex. In thefe Iflands alfo are many Volcanoes ; and in the Mo- 
 luccas arc likewife divers of them, particularly in 
 Moluccas. Banda, which, fome Years ago, made a dreadful 
 Eruption, not only of Fire and Sulphur, but alfo of 
 fuch a prodigious Number of Stones, that they cover'd a great 
 Part of the Ifland ; and fo many dropp'd into the Sea, that where 
 'twas formerly forty Fathom Water, near the Shore, is now a dry 
 Beach. And in Ternate is another Volcano, reckon'd more terrible 
 than the former; for a particular Defcription of which, vide Phi- 
 lofopb. Tran/ad. N 9 216. In the Ifland of Java 
 Java. are Serpents of a prodigious Length and Bignefs. In 
 
 this Ifland alfo are feveral burning Mountains. 
 Here is a furprifing Tree, which puts out abundance of lovely 
 and fragrant Buds every Evening ; but when the Sun rifes, they 
 fade, and fall to the Ground. In the Ifland of 
 Borneo Borneo is a Creature, ufually known by the Name of 
 
 Savage the Savage Man. He is not, it feems, lefs than fix 
 
 Man. Feet high at his full Growth, and walks upright 
 
 like a Man ; his Arms are fomething longer than 
 a Man's ; but his Features are faid not t be fo fhocking as the 
 Hot e;itots : He is very ftrong and nimble, and will encounter thofe 
 that provoke him, with Stones, or any other miffive Wea- 
 pons, which come in his way ; but whether he will engage in a 
 dofe Fight with a Man, Travellers do not inform us. Captain 
 Beeckman fays he bought one of thefe Creatures, and that he was 
 fuch a Lover of ftrong Liquors, that he would drink heartily of 
 the Punch-bowl, if they left him in the Cabin with it ; that he 
 would alfo open his Cafe of Brandy, and drink a confiderable 
 Quantity, and then return the Bottle to its Place again : But, if 
 the Captain was angry with him, he would figh and whine till 
 he was reconcil'd : He would lay himfelf down to fleep, as a Man 
 does ; and, though he was very young when he died, he was 
 ftronger than any Man in the Ship. The Hunting of this poor 
 Crtature, in this Ifland, is efteem'd a princely Divcrfion. 
 
 CHAP,
 
 Chap. XXV. Prefent State of Egypt. 
 
 495 
 
 CHAP. XXV. 
 
 The Prefent State of E g y p t. 
 
 Boundaries.] T?GYPT formerly called by thtjenvs Mif- 
 raitn, and the Land of Ham ; by the Romans, 
 Auguftanica ; by Xenopbov, Ogygia ; by Herodotus, Potamia ; and 
 by Homer, Hepbajlia,&cc.) is bounded by the Mediterranean Sea on 
 the North ; by the Red Sea, and the lithmus of Suez, which di- 
 vide it from Ajia, on the Eaft ; by the Empire of Abyjfjinia and 
 Nubia, on the South ; and by the Defert of Barca, on the. Weft. 
 
 Situation.] This Country is fituated between 21 and 31 
 Deg. North Latitude ; and between 30 and 38 Deg. Eait Longi- 
 tude : The Length whereof is 690 Miles, and Breadth 250 Miles. 
 
 Divifion. 
 
 Square Miles, 
 
 and antient 
 
 Names. 
 
 Chief Towns. 
 
 Diflance and Bear- 
 ing. 
 
 Egypt----' 
 l.Becbria, 1 
 or Middle S 
 
 *&*> 3 
 
 2. Erife, f 
 or Louver < 
 E DP l > I 
 
 3. Sayd, or 1 
 Upper C 
 
 &P*> 3 
 
 140,700 
 Containing the 
 greatell Part of 
 Old Arcadia. 
 Containing the 
 old proper E- 
 gypt, and Au- 
 guftanica. 
 Contai'.iing Pari 
 of Old Tbe- 
 bais. 
 
 > Grand Cairo. 
 
 1 
 
 > Alexandria. 
 
 I 
 
 > Sayd. 
 
 230 SW. of Jeru- 
 falem. 
 
 90 NW. of Grand 
 Cairo. 
 
 200 S. of ditto. 
 
 Climate.] The Air of Egypt is rot healthful, the Situation 
 being very low ; and the Mud, which covers the belt Part of it, 
 afier the overflowing of the Nile, fe.iuing up a noifome Vapour. 
 The (andy Deferts, which inclofe Egypt on three Sides, render it 
 vrc hot: Nor are there more tbui two Springs in the whole 
 Country, to refrefh the parched Inhabitants. Jt feldom rains here 
 in the Summer ; but, in the Winter, modern Travellers aflure us, 
 it rains plentifully lometimes, efpccially in Lower Egypt ; notwith- 
 Aandmg it was uuiverfally believ'd formerly, that it never rain'd 
 kere at all. The Fertility of Egypt has bceu long fince obferv'd, 
 5 t
 
 496 Pnfent State of Egypt. Part II. 
 
 to be afcrib'd chiefly to the overflowing of the River Kile, which 
 leaves a fattening Slime behind it ; for the Soil is naturally a bar- 
 ren Sand, but the Fields the Water covers are, fome of them, fo 
 very rich, that the Hufbandmen are forced to mix Sand with the 
 Earth, or their Grain would be too rank. The Antients call'd 
 this Country The Granary of the World ; and it is certain, that 
 the Plenty or Scarcity of the Roman Empire depended on the 
 Harveit of Egypt. The chief Produce of this Country are Sugar, 
 Flax, Rice, Balfam, Sena, Caflia, excellent Fruits, Linen Cloth, 
 Butargio, cifc. and all Sorts of Grains in great Abundance. The 
 longeft Day, in the raoft Southern Part of Egypt, is i 3 Hours j 
 and in the Northmoil 14 Hours; therefore this Country lies in 
 the 3d and 4th Northern Climates. 
 
 Government.] The Egyptians are certainly a very antient 
 Nation ; for it is generally agreed, that Cham, the Son of Noah, 
 was the fame with "Jupiter Hammon ; and Mifraim, his Grand- 
 fon, the fame with OJiris, the great Deity of the Egyptians ; and 
 from him, 'tis faid, defcended that Race of Monarchs, 
 The Pha- who had the general Denomination of Pharaohs. 
 raohs of There are reckon'd above fixty Princes of the Line of 
 Egypt. thefe Pharaohs, and they reign'd, 'tis faid, in an un- 
 
 interrupted Succefiion to the Year of the World 
 3435- 3435 ^ e ^ a ^ ^ wnom vvas Pharaoh Pfamnicus, the 
 
 fecond Monarch of that Name. In his Reign, Cam- 
 hyfes II. King of Perjia, invaded Egypt, and laid Siege to Pelu- 
 fium, where he placed Dogs, Cats, and other Creatures, which 
 were facred to the Egyptians, before his Army ; and 
 Egyptians as the Befieged ceafed mooting, for fear of killing any 
 eonquerd of them, he took that important Place by that Stra- 
 wy the Per- tagem, which open'd the Pe>Jta?is an c?Sy Paflage to 
 fiaus. the Conquelt of the reli of that rich Country, tho' 
 
 Pharaoh Pfamnicus made a vigorous Refiftance ; but, 
 after the Lofs of a bloody Battle, he was forced to fly to Memphis, 
 wherein he was befieged, taken, and, by way of Contempt, was 
 lodged in the Suburbs. Camhyfes, to make another Trial of the 
 onhappy Prince's Patience, fent the Daughter of Pharaoh, in the 
 Habit of a Slave, with other Ladies of the bell Quality, to draw 
 Water on a Mountain, from whence they could not defcend with 
 their Pitchers, without being feen by the unfortunate Royal Prifoner. 
 The poor Princefs never pafs'd by her Father, but me wept bit- 
 terly, at which he feem'd not at all concern'd ; he alfo faw his 
 Son, and 2000 Egyptians of the lame Age, with Ropes about 
 their Necks, and Bridles in their Mouths, led to Execution, which 
 he bore with the fame Conftancy : But, feeing one of his intimate 
 Friends at aDiilance, who was ftripped of his All, and liv'd on 
 
 the
 
 Chap. XXV. Prejent State of 'Egypt. 497 
 
 the charitable Benevolence of others, the poor Prince fell prefentiy 
 into Tears, and beat his Head in a wretched manner ; at which 
 Cambyfes being furpris'd, faid, What ! the Affeclion you have for 
 your Friend hath made you fo fenjible as to draw Tears from you ? 
 But you have not bejlow'd one Sigh on thofe to whom you gave 
 Being. Thou Son of Cyrus, faid he to Cambyfes, extreme Grief 
 is always Jilent, and a pierced Heart is not capable of a Sigh ; 
 the Calamity of my Family is fuch, that all the Tears I could fbed 
 mould never be able to exprefs it ; but the Misfortune of an old 
 Friend, ozerwbelm'd with Mifery in the Decline of his Age, after 
 all the Profperity he has enjoyed, appeared to me worthy to be 
 lamented. Cambyfes, affected with this Anfwer, fent to fave his 
 Son's Life, but too Jate, and from thenceforward treated the Royal 
 Prifbner very honourably ; but, upon Information that he was 
 carrying on a Confpiracy againft him, forced Pfamnicus to drink 
 Bull's Blood, of which he died. Thus Egypt was conquer 'd by 
 Cambyfes, who united it to the Perfian Empire, under 
 which it remain'd upwards of an hundred Years ; Egypt 
 when Egypt revolted from that Crown, under the revolts. 
 Conduct of Amyrteus, whom the Egyptians eledted 
 King ; in which State it continu'd about fifty Years ; when an 
 Army of Artaxerxes Ochus, King of Perfia, being bent upon the 
 Recovery of Egypt, invaded it ; over which Forces, Neclabeus, 
 who was then King of Egypt, was victorious at firft ; but, Ochus 
 marching with bis whole Army into Egypt, the Face of Affairs 
 was quickly chang'd ; for the Confequence was the Surrender of 
 Memphis, and all the reft of the Cities, one after another, which 
 once more brought that Country under the Subjection 
 of the Pcrfians. The Egyptians were treated very Egypt 
 feverely by Ochus, who levell'd the Walls of their conquered 
 moft confiderable Cities with .the Ground, demolifh'd again by 
 their Temples, and carry'd away their Treafure. the Per- 
 Egypt continued but a few Years a Province of the iians. 
 Perfian Empire ; for the Arms of Alexander the 
 Great, King of Macedon, prevailing againft thofe of Conquered 
 Darius in Syria, Phoenicia, and Palefiine, that Prince, by Alexan- 
 after he had regulated the Affairs of thofe Countries, der the 
 marched to conquer Egypt ; which, being weary of Great, 
 the Perfian Tyranny, readily fubmitted to his victo- 
 rious Arms. After the Death of Alexander, Ptolemy, a Macedo- 
 nian, found Means to mount the Throne of Egypt, 
 and render it an independent Kingdom once again, Egypt 
 whofe Succeffors, Kings of Egypt, ever after retained again in- 
 the Name of Ptolemies ; in which Line it continued dependent. 
 between two and three hundred Years. The laft A. M. 
 King, Ptolemy Dlonyfius, according to the Cuftom of 3S99. 
 
 K k the
 
 49 Prtfent Stat* of Egypt. Part II 
 
 the Country, married his Sifter, the famous Cleopatra ; and it fell 
 out unluckily for Ptolemy, that in his Reign the Civil Wars broke 
 out between the celebrated Heroes Cafar and Pompey. After the 
 Battle of Pbarfalia, fought between thofe Generals, wherein 
 Pompey was defeated, and fled for Refuge into Egypt, fuppoiing 
 himfelf fafe there with Ptolemy, who, in a manner, held his 
 
 Crown and Sceptre from him, the Egyptian Mo- 
 *The Death narch bafely ordered him to be murdered , and 
 e/ Pom- enter'd into a kind of Alliance with Co-far , 
 pey. who, falling in Love with C/eopatra, fome time 
 
 before divorced from Ptolemy, refolved to reftore 
 her to the Throne, whatever it coft him. Ptolemy, having fecret 
 Intelligence of Ca-fars Defign, undertook to cut him oft"; and 
 accordingly went to attack him in the Caftle of Alexandria, where 
 he was lhut up fo clofe, that finding no way fo likely for him to 
 efcape, as to fet it on Fire, it was burnt down in a little time, as 
 well as the noble Library that was in it, wherein there were 
 600,000 Volumes, according to the Teftimony of Gellius. Co-far 
 had the good Fortune to make his Efcape to the Ifte of Pharos, 
 from whence he fwam to his Ships : After which, having drawn 
 his Troops together, he found it no difficult Matter to be reveng'd 
 on Ptolemy ; for he intirely defeated him in Battle, wherein the 
 
 Egyptian Monarch loft his Life. After this Expedi- 
 Cleopatra tion, Co-far gave the Kingdom to Cleopatra, who, 
 Queen of till then, had been his Miftrefs. The Queen reign'd 
 Egypt. peaceably enough till the Civil War between Brutus 
 
 and Cajfius, on the one Side, and Auguftus and 
 Antony on the other, when (he herfelf prov'd the Caufe of her 
 own Ruin ; for flie confidering how advantageous the Friendfhip 
 of the Romans would be to her, and as the Provinces of the Eaft 
 fell to the Government of Antony, after the Defeat of the former 
 at Philippi, flie undertook to captivate the Heart of Antony, and 
 accordingly omitted no manner of Carefles, and coftly Entertain- 
 ments, for that End : At length fhe charm'd him to that degree, 
 that the Roman could not be one Minute without the Sight of 
 her ; and ftie might have liv'd long enough in that fort of Feli- 
 city, if Antony had not doated upon her fo much, as to divorce 
 his own Wife Oftavia, the Sifter of Auguftus, and marry her, and 
 to aft the King in Afia. For thefe Aftions drew upon him the 
 Hatred of the People of Rome, and more efpecially of Auguftus, 
 fo that they declar'd War againft him ; and, Auguftus foon after 
 attacking him at Aiiium, he was defeated by Sea and Land, and 
 follow'd Cleopatra into Egypt, where Co-far purfu'd him the next 
 Spring. He foon after found himfelf reduced to great Streights ; 
 his Cavalry was quickly defeated ; and Cleopatra, when flie faw Mif- 
 fortunes attending him every-where, began alfo to forfeke him : 
 
 She
 
 Chap. XXV. Prefect State of Egypt . 499 
 
 She deliver'd the City of Peluftum to C<rfar, and rna.de hira very 
 valuable I'refent?, in hopes to enfr.are his Heart alfo, a\ fhe, h&l 
 done Julius dr/ar^ and Antoh/s. She caus'd it to be rumour'd 
 abroad, That me had kill'd herfelf; infomuch that, by this Stra- 
 tagem, Antony, who yet doated upon her to the highelt Extrava- 
 gancy, growing weary of his Life, after the Death of his dear 
 Cleopatra, itabbed himfelf. Ctefar, having taken 
 Alexandria, and intending jto do the fame by all A. M. 
 Egypt, at firft gave Cleopatra good Words; upon 3925. 
 which, fhe gave up herfelf, and the whole Kingdom, 
 into his Hands : But, understanding he defign'd to carry her to 
 Rome, to adorn his Triumph, fhe caufed two Afps to be brought 
 her, which fhe applied to her Breafls, and foon put an End to her 
 miferable Life ; though fome Writers fay fhe was 
 poifon'd. In the Perfon of Cleopatra ended the Egypt 
 Family of the Ptolemies, which put an End to the made q. 
 Kingdom of Egypt, that, from thenceforward?, was Roman 
 govern'd in the Form of a Roman Province, and Province. 
 remain'd fubjeft to the Romans till the Reign of 
 Heraclius the Emperor of Conftantinople, when the People, tho'' 
 Chriftians, being difguited with their Chriltian Go- 
 vernors, cail'd in Omar, the third Caliph cf the Sara- A.D. 640. 
 cens, and fubmitted themfelves to the Mahometan 'The Sara- 
 Power. The Caliphs of Babylon were Sovereigns cens reign 
 here tili the Year 870. when the Egyptians fet up a in Egypt. 
 Caliph of their own, cail'd the Caliph cf Cairo, to 
 whom the Saracens of Afric and Spain were fubjecl ; but tic 
 Governors of the Provinces, or Sultans under the Caliphs of Baby- 
 lon and Cairo, foon wrefted the Civil Power out of the H.-rids of 
 their Caliphs, or High Prices, leaving them only the Shadow of 
 Sovereignty. AJfareddin, or Saracon, General of 
 Narradin, the Saracen Sultan cf Damafcii:, fubdued 1160. 
 the Kingdom of Egypt, and ufurp'd the Dominion Egypt 
 of it ; and was fuccecded in this Kingdom by his Son again x'pq- 
 Saladin, who r duccd alio the Kingdom.8 pf Dama- quer\i. 
 fcus,Mefcpotmia, and Palejline, under In; Power, and 
 about the Year 1190. took Jtrufalem from the CbrifHans. The 
 Pofierity of AJfareddin er.jo) d the Crown till thje Year 
 1242. when the Mamnlukes depes'd Elmuta?:, and fet The Ma- 
 one of their own Officers upon the Throne, This malukcs, 
 new Succeffion of Kings, or Sultans of Egypt, the or Slaves, r 
 Mamalukes, if rightly coi.fulcr'd in all its Ciicuni' ufurf tie 
 fiances, is the oddcll and molt rcr.. to Crov.n. 
 
 be met wi(h in all the Hiftories of the World. The 
 Word Mamalukt fignifiV., it feems, properly, a Slave: And here 
 it muft be obferv'd, that the late Suljtan; of $J}pJ being free, 
 K k 2 it..
 
 500 Prefent State of Egypt. Part II. 
 
 invaded by the Chriilian Princes, and having but little Confidence 
 in the Valour of the Egyptians, they purchas'd a great many 
 Chriftian Slaves, efpecially of the poor and hardy CircaJJians, 
 antiently called Geta, or Zinthi, lying near Colchis and the Euxine 
 Sea, who were brought to Grand Cairo, and other Cities, by 
 Merchants: Of thefe Slaves the Sultans having their Choice, they 
 committed them to the Care of good Mailers, who taught them 
 to run, leap, vault, ride, and all other Feats of Activity j as alfo 
 to exercife all Sorts of Arms on Horfeback, or on Foot. At 
 length all military Affairs came to be manag'd by thefe Slaves ; 
 and, by their Valour, the Sultans obtain'd many Victories ; and, 
 at laft, they fet up one of their own Mamalukes upon the Throne, 
 'paffing an immutable Law, that, when a Vacancy happen'd, it 
 fhould be fupply'd by one chofen from among themfelves ; and 
 none of the Sultan's Children was to fucceed his Father in the 
 Kingdom, for fear they mould, in Procefs of Time, grow proud 
 of their Anceflors, and reckon them as their Slaves, and, at length, 
 introduce a more free Government among them. And tho' the 
 Sons of Mamulukes might enjoy their Father's Eilates, yet they 
 might by no means take upon them the Name and Flonour of a 
 Mamaluke, whereby they were debarred from any Hand in the 
 Government. Neither did they allow of any born of Mahometan 
 Parents, or of the Jeivijb Race, to be admitted into that Order ; 
 but only fuch, as, being born Chriflians during their Captivity, 
 were to be inflructed in the Mahometan Religion ; and, being 
 adult, abjur'd Chriflianity. The firft King of the Race of 
 the Mamalukes was Turquemenius. Thefe Sultans were engaged in 
 continual Wars with the Chriflians in Syria and 
 1291. Palejline, till Araphus, who was a Native of Ger- 
 
 many, difpoffeffed the Chriflians of the Holy Land. 
 1 501. Camp/on II. furnamed Gaums, the fifteenth Sultan of 
 the Mamalukes, enter 'd into an Alliance with lfmael, 
 the Sophi of Perjia, againll Sclimus I. Emperor of the Turks : 
 He and his Mamalukes, in feveral memorable Engagements, 
 fought with the utmofl Bravery againfl the Turks; 
 1 5 1 7. and, in a great Battle, near Aleppo, loft his Life, and 
 
 the Day, chiefly by Treachery. Tonombeius, who 
 fucceeded Camp/on, made all the Defence that was poffible againfl 
 the victorious Selimus, now advanced near Grand Cairo in Egypt : 
 He encounter'd him with all the Art and Bravery imaginable, at a 
 Village call'd Mathorea, within fix Miles of Cairo ; and, had he 
 cot been betray'd, he had in all human Probability, fav'd his 
 Country, and obtain'd a moft glorious Victory : However, he 
 fought with great Courage, broke through the main Body of the 
 Turkijh Horfe, and penetrated, even himfelf in Perfon, with great 
 . Slaughter, to the Foo,t ; and his Mamalukes here, who were then 
 4 j u ^'/
 
 Chap. XXV. Prefenf State of Egypt. 50 1 
 
 juftly reputed the beft Soldiers in the World, even exceeded their 
 ufual Performances at other Times ; his Arabs alfo afted their 
 Part very valiantly : But Tonombeius, at length, fearing an intire 
 Defeat, from the Number of his Enemies, founded a Retreat, 
 and retir'd towards Cairo ; which, after three Days great Slaugh- 
 ter, Stlimus took. Tonombeius, and many of his Mamalukes, got 
 over the Nile to the Country of the Segejia ; but feveral of them 
 afterwards, furrendering to Selimus upon a Proclamation of Mercy, 
 were raaffacred by the Turks. Tonombeius having rallied his tat- 
 ter'd Troops in the Country of Cyrenaica, Selimus fent Embaifa- 
 dors to him, promifing, upon the Word of a King, that if he 
 would fubmit, he fhould repoiTefs his late Kingdom, upon rea- 
 fonable Terms. But the Mamalukes, contrary to Tonombeius^ 
 Privity, kill'd the Embaffadors ; and Tonombeius march 'd with a 
 few Men, with fo much Secrecy and Diligence, to the Nile, where 
 the Turks had built a Bridge of Boats, and had only palled over 
 their Jftatjc Horfe, and fo unexpeftedly attack'd them, that 
 many of them were flain and drowned ; but all his Efforts to pof- 
 fefs himfelf of the Head of the Bridge proving of no Effec"t, and 
 the Turks coming over in great Numbers, he was forced to' take 
 his final Flight into the Territories of the Secufan Prince, where 
 he was clofe purfued, and taken. Being brought 
 back to Cairo, after he was tortur'd to difcover the The Turks 
 great Treafure of Camp/on his Predeceffor, he was fubdue 
 cloathed in Rags, with his Hands tied behind him, Egypt, 
 fet upon a lean Camel, and, in Derifion, carry'd thro' 
 the Streets of the City ; after which he was openly ftrangled, by 
 the Command of Selimus ; all which he bore with the utmoft 
 Conllancy. Thus ended the Government of the Mamalukes, in 
 the Perfon of Tonombeius, whofe Valour and good Qualities can 
 never be fufficiently celebrated ; and Egypt was made a Province 
 of the Turkijh Empire, as it continues to be to this Day ; and is 
 govern'd by a particular Bafia, or Beglerbeg, whofe Poll is gene- 
 rally efleem'd the molt honourable Government of any belong- 
 ing to the Turkijh Empire, having under him fifteen different 
 Governments. 
 
 Trade.] See Trade in Turkey. 
 
 Revenues] The Turkijh Government do not think proper 
 to overload the Egyptians with Taxes, for fear of a general Revolt ; 
 infomuch that, except what the Viceroy, or Baffa and his Crea- 
 tures, illegally extort from them, the whole Revenue, rais'd by 
 the Government, does not amount to a Million of our Money, of 
 which two Thirds are fpent within the Kingdom, and not more 
 than one Third comes into the Grand Seignior's Trea/ury. 
 
 * k 3 Forces.]
 
 $02 Pre/em Stats of Egypt. Part II. 
 
 Forces.] The Viceroy ha? a confiderable Body of the Spahis 
 and janizaries about Cairo, to keep in Awe the native Princes, 
 who feem to be veiled with Sovereign Power in their refpeclive 
 Diftri&s ; and who have the Command of the Militia of the feve- 
 tfal Provinces, and are many of them of the Race of the Matna- 
 Mes. 
 
 Character.] The Egyptians are Men of a low Stature, 
 tawny Complexion, and fquare Bodies. They are generally 
 reckoned luxurious, very cunning, treacherous, and cruel ; and 
 by no means famous for their Courage, or Learning, at prefent, 
 fo much are they degenerated from their Anceftors. 
 
 Religion.] As to the Religion of the Mahometans of Egypt, 
 it differs but little from that of the Turks ; only it is obferv'd, 
 that the Mo&rs, or Arabians, who at prefent make up the Bulk of 
 the People here, are much more fuperiHtious and zealous in their 
 Way, than the Mahometans of Turkey ; and have their Santa's 
 among them, for whom they exprefs an extraordinary Venera- 
 tion. Many of thefe Santa's go perfectly naked about the Streets, 
 without the leaft Rag to cover them. In this Condition they vifit 
 the Houfes of Perfons of DifHnclion, and fit down to Dinner 
 with them, without any Invitation, and leave their Tables with 
 as little Ceremony as they enter 'd ; and it is look'd upon as no 
 fmall Blefiing to a Houfe to receive a Vifit from thefe People. 
 The Pofterity of the antient Egyptians are held to be the prefent 
 Cophti Race , among whom, it is generally held, St. Mark firft 
 planted Chriilianity. Upon their revolting from the Greek Em- 
 perors, and putting themfelves under the Dominion of the Sara- 
 tens, as was obferv'd before, the Chriftian Religion fenfibly decay'd, 
 but much more fince the Conqueft of that Country by the Turks ', 
 and there are not now thought to be fifty thoufand of them in 
 the Country. They hold but One Nature in Chrift, retain the 
 Rite of Circumcifion, as well as Baptifm j and hold, that no Bap- 
 tifm is valid, unlefs adminifter'd by thePrieft in the open Church. 
 They give Infants the Sacrament of the Eucharift alfo, as foon as 
 chriften'd. In their Liturgies, they read a Gofpel written by 
 Nicodemus ; and when they fing the Paffion, and come to the 
 Place where it is faid, Judas betray d cur Saviour, the Congre- 
 gation cry Aft*/; that is to fay, Horned Beaft, or Cuckold ; and 
 when they read, that Peter tut off the Ear of the High Pri eft's 
 Servant) they all ahfwcr Afia Bcutros, or Well done, Peter ; for, 
 if we credit the Accounts the Roman MifTidnaries give both of 
 the Clergy and People, they are imo!erab'y ignorant in religious 
 A flairs. ; it wJl hot, I prrfume, be ufiCKXcptabltf to the Reader, 
 
 U
 
 Chap. XXV. Prefent State of Egypt. 50$ 
 
 to prefent him, in this Place, with a (hort Account 0/ the annual 
 Prefent the Grand Seignior fends from Grand Cairo 
 to Mecca with the Pilgrims. At the Time appointed The Pit- 
 for the Caravan to prepare for Mecca, the Place grimage 
 where Mahomet was born, the Prefents are brought from Cairo 
 with great Solemnity from the Caftle, through the to Mecca. 
 City of Cairo, to the Palace of the Captain of the 
 Caravan of Pilgrims. In the Beginning of the Proceflion march 
 the Servants of the Beys, or Lords of Cairo, follow'd by the 
 Chiaux, Azapes, and "Janizaries, and after them the Beys \x\ 
 Perfon : Then follow the Janizaries of the Divan, who are alfo 
 follow'd by Men carrying four very long Pieces of crimfon Vel- 
 vet, embroider'd with Arabic Letters of Gold, and others carry a 
 large Door-piece of Velvet, embroider'd in the fame manner ; 
 after thefe follow a Camel well harnefled, carrying a great Pavi- 
 lion, or Tent of crimfon Sattin, embroider'd with Gold ; then 
 another Pavilion, carry'd by a Man, and fome other Utenfils, 
 which are all to be employ'd in hanging and adorning the Temple 
 of Mecca : After thefe are carry'd, in Proceflion, great Numbers 
 of Banners and Colours, all the Santo' s, with Drums and Mufic, 
 attending them ; the People, in the mean time, prefling and 
 crouding to touch the facred U tenuis ; and thofe that cannot get 
 near enough, throw a Piece of Linen to touch them, holding 
 one End in their Hands, that they may draw it back again j and 
 it is not to be conceiv'd, with what Devotion they will kifs the 
 Thing that touches but a Rope employ'd in the facred Prefent, 
 which is to adorn the Place they efteem the moft holy. Thefe 
 Ornaments being lodged at the Palace of the Captain of the Cara- 
 van of Pilgrims, he marches out of Town a few Days, after 
 encamping near the City. The Cavalcade, on this Occafion, is 
 not very different from the former ; only there are carried fome 
 Field -pieces on thefe Expeditions, and feveral Camels, loaded 
 with Provifions for the Journey ; alfo a Multitude of Santa's, in 
 (Irange antic Habits, follow dancing, and fcrewing themfelves 
 into a thoufand ridiculous Shapes and Poftures. It is wonderful 
 to fee the Multitudes, which come from all Places, to perform 
 this Pilgrimage, there being no lefs than five Caravans of them, 
 ^viz. that of Cairo, which confifls of Egyptians, and all thofe 
 that come from Conjlantinople, and the Neighbourhood of it ; that 
 of Dama/cus, wherein are all the Pilgrims of Syria ; that of 
 the Magrebins, or thofe who come from the Weflward, confuting 
 of the Natives of Barbary, Fez, and Morocco, who meet at Cai- 
 ro ; and thofe of Perfia and India. Thofe who come from Fez 
 and Morocco undergo the greateft Fatigue, travelling by Land 
 over large Deferts, in which they employ a whole Year, and one 
 hajf of them ufually die in the Journey. The Caravan of Cain 
 
 K. k 4 is
 
 504 Prefent State of Egypt. Part II. 
 
 is (bmetimcs very numerous, amounting to near eighteen or twen- 
 ty thoufand Pilgrims. The Captain of the Caravan has ufually 
 fifeen hundred Camels to carry bis Baggage, and he has five 
 hundred Camels alfo to carry Water only. The Captain, having 
 encamped fome time clofe to the City, removes twenty Miles 
 further to the Birque, being a great Bafon or Refervatory of Wa- 
 ter, and is the Rendezvous of all the Caravans. They travel 
 chiefly in the Night, to avoid the Heat, which is infupportable ; 
 and, when there is no Moon, they have Men to carry Torches, 
 and either in their Camps, or on the March, that infinite Num- 
 ber of Lights, which are fpread over the Deferts, make a noble 
 Illumination. All perform this Journey with abundance of De- 
 votion, repeating or finging fome Verfes of the Alcoran all the 
 Way they go ; and bellowing their Charity, according to their 
 refpeftive Circumftances. They perform their Journey from 
 Cairo to Mecca in about forty-five Days; and find but little Wa- 
 ter in the Way, and that exceeding bad ; and frefh Provifions 
 they meet with none, but what they carry with them. What 
 incommodes them moll, is the hot Winds, which frequently fuf- 
 focate, or otherwife deftroy them : In one Day, it feems, there 
 died feveml Hundreds of Pilgrims by the hot Winds in one of 
 thefe Journeys ; and it is no uncommon thing, it feems, to hear 
 a Man finging fome Verfes of the Alcoran, and, in a Moment, 
 fee him drop down dead from his Camel ; and thofe, who return 
 alive, are fo altered and extenuated, that they can hardly be 
 known by their Friends ; notwithstanding which, there is not a 
 Year, but many Women and Children perform this Pilgrimage. 
 I fhall not detain the Reader with an Account of the Behaviour of 
 the Pilgrims, when they come to the hc!y Place, but only ob- 
 ferve, that, upon the Arrival of the rich Hangings annually pre- 
 fer.te.l by the Grand Seignior, the old ones are cut into Relics, 
 and fold to fuch pious People as will pay for them. About fix 
 Weeks after the fetting out of the Caravan from Cairo, it being 
 computed, that they are ready to return, an Aga marches from 
 Cairo, to guard the Provifions, which People fend to their Rela- 
 tions in the Caravan ; all which are fealed up, to be delivered to 
 thofe they are directed. The Jga has a great Number of Camels 
 afiigned him for this Purpofe ; and ufually meets the Pilgrims 
 half Way, being very well paid for his Trouble. Upon the 
 Return of the Caravan, feveral People from Cairo meet the Pil- 
 grims a few Miles from the City, to welcome their Friends 
 home : and, upon thefe Occafions, they falute and kifs all they 
 know five or fix times ; and, indeed, there is nothing to be feen 
 in the City but Kifling, and Congratulations, for many Days to- 
 gether; or elfe People lamenting the Death of their Relations, 
 who died in the Journey j for it has been known, that no lefs 
 
 than
 
 Chap. XXV. Prefent State of Egypt. 505 
 
 than five or fix thoufand, belonging to the Caravan of Cairo^ have 
 iied, by one Misfortune or other, in one of thefe Pilgrimages. 
 Thofe, who have made this Journey, are in great Elleem in the 
 Countries, where they live, ever after. The Captain of the 
 Caravan of the Pilgrims of Cairo amafles vaft Sums in this Com- 
 mand ; for, befides his other Profits, he is intitled to the Effects 
 of all that die in the Journey ; he is alfo fupreme Judge of all 
 the People under his Charge, during the Expedition : But the 
 other Caravans above-mentioned do not depend on him, but have 
 a Chief of their own. 
 
 Customs.] The Egyptians drefs very decently ; they wear fine 
 Calico Shirts, and, over them, long Robes of fine Cloth, 
 or Silk, narrow above, and wide below, with ftrait Drefs, 
 Sleeves. On their Heads they have a Turbant, the 
 Chriftians Red or Blue, the Jews Yellow, and the Mahometans 
 White, except Mahomet\ Race, who alone may wear Green. 
 Women of Quality are generally drefled in a white Robe, 
 and veiled. Their Diet confifls chiefly of Mutton, Fowls, Diet. 
 Rice, Garden-fluff, Grapes, Melons, and all Sorts of 
 Fruits. The poorer Sort are fatisfied with Beef, and, fometimes, 
 with Camel's Flefh. As for Fifh, it is little regarded, except 
 two or three Sorts taken in the Kile : Their Liquor is the Water 
 of the fame River; only the Chrijlians, Jews, and fome Turks, 
 drink Wine, which they have from Candia, Rhodes, and Cyprus ; 
 they alfo drink great Quantities of Coffee and Sherbet. 7'he 
 chief Diverfions of the Egyptians are, when the River Kile rifes 
 to a certain Height ; for upon this depends the Fruitfulnefs of 
 the Country. The River begins to fwell ufuslly in the Month of 
 May, and is at its Height in October; and, on the 28th of 
 June, they publifh it in Cairo, and other Towns, by a Crier, how 
 much the Water is increafed j and, when the River is .high 
 enough, the Banks are cut to let it into the Canal, which runs 
 through Cairo, and, in the dry Seafon, forms one of the finell 
 Streets in that City. It is ufual, it feems, for the Vice-roy to 
 give the firft Stroke with a Mattock, towards breaking down the 
 Banks: On this Occafion he is followed by the Mob, finging, 
 and hollowing, and exprefling their Joy, in fuch a manner as the 
 Vulgar ufually do. When the Water pours into the Canal, the 
 People, in the City, have Notice by a louder Shout than ordina- 
 ry y Men and Boys fwim in the Stream, and other merry Fel- 
 lows in Boats, attended with Mufic, round through the City. 
 The letting the Water of the Kile into the Canals was antiently 
 attended with great Rejoicings, when they ufed alfo to facrifice 
 a Boy and a Girl. When the Canal is full, there are Men, who 
 fwim in it with heavy iron Chains on, attended by Boats full of 
 
 People
 
 506 Prefent State of Egypt. Part II. 
 
 People with Drums, and Trumpets, and all kind of Mufic the 
 Country affords. The hatching Chickens in Ovens is one of 
 
 the remarkable Cuftoms related of this Country. 
 Watching They put their Eggs in Ovens, which are heated 
 Chickens with fo temperate a Warmth, and imitate fo well 
 in Ovens. the natural Heat, that Chickens are formed and 
 
 hatched in them. Thefe Ovens are under-ground, 
 and the Hearth of them covered with Cotton, or Flax, to lay 
 the Eggs upon. They begin to heat their Ovens about the middle 
 of February, and continue to heat them about four Months. 
 They will lay in fometimes eight thoufand Eggs in an Oven ; and 
 after eight or ten Days, they pick out the Good from the Bad, 
 and then put out the Fire ; and, having (hut up all clofe, they let 
 them lie ten Days longer, when the Chickens are hatched ; but 
 there are few of them, which have not fome Defect. It is ob- 
 served, that nice People can diftinguim one of thefe Pullets from 
 
 another by their Palates. The Mob, in Grand 
 Diver/ions Cairo, are entertained chiefly with Jugglers, Ballad- 
 ifth&Mbb. fingers, Fortune-tellers, or Gyfiies, and dancing 
 
 Camels. 
 
 Curiosities.] Between three and four Leagues to the Weft 
 of Grand Cairo, ftand thofe three vaft Pyramids, fo 
 Pyramids, jultly the Admiration of all that view them ; That 
 which has fuffered the lealt by Time and Weather, 
 contains thefe Dimenfions ; vile, the Side of the Square Bafe is 
 693 Feet, according to the Englijb Standard; its perpendicular 
 Height is 499 Feet; confequently the whole Area of the Bafis of 
 this Pyramid is eleven Acres and upwards. But, notwithstanding 
 the Height of this Pyramid has been fo much admired, the Spire 
 of St. Paul\ in London, before it was burnt, exceeded the Height 
 of this celebrated Pyramid ; for, according to Camden, the per- 
 pendicular Height of it from the Ground was 534 Feet. It is 
 obfervabie, that Thales Milejius, above two thoufand Years ago, 
 took the Height of thefe Pyramids by their Shadow, according 
 to Pliny and Laertius. The Dimenfions of the fecond Pyramid, 
 both as to Height, and the Area of the Bafis, are equal to the firft ; 
 but there has been no Entrance yet difcovertd into it ; nor is it 
 known, whether there be any Rooms or Apartments within, 
 though it is highly probable there are. The third Pyramid 
 ftands about a Furlong diftant from the fecond, upon an advanta- 
 geous Rifmg of a Rock, which makes it feem equal to the former 
 at a Diftance : But the perpendicular Height is only about 300 
 Feet, and the Area of the Bafis is fomething moe than 90000 
 fquare Feet. There are twenty more Pyramids difperfed about 
 the Libyan Dofert, molt of them inferior in Bulk to the former; 
 
 except
 
 Chap. XXV. Prefent State of Egypt. 507 
 
 except one, which ftands twenty Miles Sou tlv weft of thofe a^ve 
 dSbXand which is of the fame Dimenfions with the firft 
 but more decayed: It has alfo an Entrance on the North Side, 
 but blocked up, fo that there is no getting in to fee 
 the Apartments. Thefe Pyramids are fuppofed by Synvbtm 
 many, to have been built by the J/raehtes I for, bush. 
 when Time had extinguifhed the Memory of J9- 
 SS and^he Kingdom of Egypt was transferred to another Fami- 
 (f ^e W^ ufed the ifaelites with great Rigour, compel- 
 v - 1? accordine to Ww, to cut Canals for the River 
 S3 to^if ^Wais, g and{ai ; up Banks to hinder the Inunction 
 of hat RTver, and to ereft thefe ftupendous Fabrics, the Pyra- 
 A Rut this is only Conjecture ; for no Author is able to 
 TffittheT^ of tL"" Erection. However, the general Opinion 
 ftLt they were built for fepulchral Monuments of the Kings 
 ofW and, for a Confirmation of this we find, when the 
 Weft Pyramid was opened, between eight and nine hundred 
 YeCfina there was found in it, towards the Top a Chamber 
 wd ahoUow Stone, in which there was a Statue like^a Man 
 and within it, a Man, on whom was a Breaft-plate of Gold fct 
 with Jewels; upon the Breaft-plate lay a Sword of ineftimabl* 
 P oe,and ^t tL Head, a Carbuncle, of the B.gnefs of an 
 Ek mining like the Light, and, upon him, were written Cha- 
 pter which no Man underftood. Certain it , that many of 
 hefe mbalmed Bodies, or Mummies have remained intire three 
 houfand Years and upwards. Another Cunofity in %^.men- 
 ioned by antient and modern Writers is a Labyrmth nea the 
 Banks of the River Kile, towards the Upper Egypt, built by 
 Pfim*iiic*s I the greateft Part under-ground, and containing 
 ^n heCompafsof one Wall, twelve Palaces and a thou and 
 Houfes the Wdls, Pillars, and Roofs, of Marble, to which 
 th^re'vas only one Entrance, and fomany intneate Turnings and 
 
 W^d IZ "hat it was impoffible for a Stranger to find his Way 
 Wmmngs tn v ^^ ^ w|thout a 
 
 Suidf' The 8 Marble, inlaid, was laid with that Art, that 
 there was neither Wood nor Cement ufed in the 
 whole Fabric. The Mummy-pits, as they are Mummies. 
 called by our modern Travellers are feveral deep 
 Sbterranean Cavities, three or four Leagues diftant from the 
 three great Pyramids, and a little to the Weft of the Place 
 where fhe celebrated City of Memphis once flood. At the Bot ; 
 Tom ot the Pit, are fquare Openings and Paflage,, ten or fifteen 
 Feet long, which lead into fquare arched Rooms in which the 
 embalmed Bodies lie, fome of them in Cheftsor Cofhnsof Woo., 
 others in Stone Coffin* fhaped like a Man. 
 
 CHAP.
 
 5<>8 Prefent State of Barbary. Part II 
 
 CHAP. XXVI. 
 
 The Prefent State of Barbary. 
 
 Boundaries.] gARBART is bounded on the Eaft by E*w 
 
 XK, k a!?.!. V vi " t J hC N rth ^ the Mediterranean' on the 
 
 Meft by the Ocean and on the South by Biledulgerid ; contain! 
 g all or the greatelt Part of the Roman Diocefe of ^; v with 
 Wtf the Diocefe of Egypt; being the Provinces oi Mauritania, 
 Marmar'ica "*"*' ByKaena ' ^ipolitana, Cyrenaica, and 
 
 Situation] This Country is fituated between 30 and v? 
 Degrees North Latitude, and between 30 Degrees Fail, and 10 
 
 BZ*Z1^r Ude: ^ ^^ is 2 353, and 
 
 Barbary 
 1 . Barca 
 
 z. Tripoli 
 
 3. 7**;7 
 
 Square Miles, 
 
 and antient 
 
 Names. 
 
 Tolemeta 
 i Cairoan 
 
 66,400 
 Part of Z.*tya that 
 <made the Roman\Docra 
 Provinces of Cy^ Ramadan 
 renaica and A/*r- j Patriarcha 
 marica. 
 75.O0O 
 Much the fame 
 with the Roman 
 Tripoiitana. 
 54,400 
 Containing the Ro- 
 fnanA/ricaPropria, 
 (in which was the 
 famous Carthage) 
 and Byzacena. 
 4. Algiers\ 143,6000 
 
 Containing the #<7- 
 tnan Mauritania 
 Cafarienjis, Siti 
 fenjis, 8c isutnidia 
 Containing Part of 
 Mauritania Tin- 
 gitana. 
 
 118,800 
 Including the Area 
 of Fez. The reft 
 I of Mauritania. 
 
 Fez 
 
 f>. Morocco 
 
 Tripoli 
 Zcara 
 Elhama 
 
 Tunis 
 Cairoan 
 Urbs 
 Africa 
 
 Sufa 
 
 Algier 
 Bugia 
 Giglari 
 Oran 
 
 Fez 
 
 Sallee 
 
 Ceuta 
 
 Morocco 
 
 Gazula 
 
 560 W. of Grand Cairo 
 60 NE. ofTolemeta. 
 50 NE. of Cairoan. 
 
 260 E. of Docra. 
 
 no W. of Ramadan. 
 
 390 W. ofTolemeta. 
 160 W. of Tripoli. 
 90S. of Zoara. 
 
 300 NW. of Tripoli. 
 100S. of Tunis. 
 
 65 W. of Cairoan. 
 
 80 E. of Cairoan. 
 
 60 SE. of Vrbs. 
 
 290 W. of Tunis. 
 
 75 E. of Algiers. 
 
 50 NW. of *. 
 190 W. of Algiers. 
 
 470 W. of ^r.f. 
 100W. of />. 
 1 20 NE. of Sallee. 
 1 60 SW of Fez. 
 180SW. of Mora**.
 
 Chap. XXVI." Prefent State of Kxbary. 59 
 
 Climate] Barca is fcarce any thing clfe but a parched 
 barren Defert, with very little Water; there being 
 only fome foall Spot* near Villages, which afford Barca. 
 a little Corn, and. a few Dates, of which they ex- 
 change a fmall Quantity * lth their Neighbours 
 for Sheep and Camels, having no Forage to breed Tripoli, 
 them That Part of Tripoli, contiguous to Turns, is 
 tolerably fruitful ; but all the reft Batward is very barren. Thi. 
 Country produces very littiq Corn but Plenty of 
 Dates, Olives, Saffron, and exceeding fine Wool. Turns. 
 The Soil of Tunis is generally fruitful towards the 
 Weil, being watered by feveral Rivers; but very V^r jowud 
 the Ealt, for want of Water : The Southern Part is all Hills and 
 Valleys, producing good Fruits, Corn, and Sugar: : 
 
 The Air is reckoned wholfome, being cooled by the Algiers. 
 Sea Algiers is very mountainous towards the Me- 
 daerranTan Sea; but both Hills and Valleys are exceeding fruit- 
 ful where they are cultivated, abounding in Corn and Fruits; 
 fuch as Dates, Olives, Figs. Grapes, and Almonds: They have 
 alfo good Store of Wax and Honey ; and their Coafts afford great 
 Quantities of Salt. The Country, containing Fat 
 and Morouo, produces abundance of Corn, Wine, and Fez W 
 Oil Olives, Dates, Almonds. Figs, Raifins, Lemons, Morocco. 
 Oranges,^, alfo Hemp, Flax, and Copper ; and is 
 alfo finely diverged w.th Mountains, and vaft extended Plains, 
 molt of them very fruitful, and pretty well inhabited The Air 
 of Fez and Morocco is generally temperate, efpecially on the 
 Mountains, and near the Sea-coaits, where they cfcener complain 
 of Cold than Heat: It freezes fometimes in the Winter very hard, 
 and the Tons of the Mountains are covered with Snow great Part 
 of the Year: However, in the Valleys, their Winter is but inert. 
 Their Summer begins the latter End of May, and laib to the 
 middle of Augufl. This is a pretty hot Seafon; the Air all the 
 Time U wonderful clear and ferene ; and it is ufually very my 
 wholfome, if it happens to rain in the Summer-time Their 
 Winter begins about the middle of November, and ends about the 
 middle of February; during which Seafon they have hard Gales 
 of Wind and Storms, with Snow, Hail, and Thunder ; and the 
 Eaft and South-eail Winds frequently blaft their Fruits in the 
 Spring. The longeft Day in the molt Southern Part of Barbary 
 is about fourteen Hours long; and in the molt Northern about 
 fourteen and an half; therefore this Country lies in the fourth 
 and fifth Northern Climates. 
 
 Government] The next People to the Egyptian in point 
 f Grandeur, tha made a Figure in Africa, were the Fbtm-
 
 510 JPrefint State <?/Barbary\ PartJI. 
 
 cians or Canaanites. There is no Doubt but all the North Coaft 
 of Africa, as far as the Atlantic Ocean, was firft peopled from 
 #', to which it Jay contiguous ; for it is agreed by all, that, 
 when the Pbenicians arrived on the Coaft of Africa, after they 
 were driven out of their Country by Jojbua, and the Ifraelites, 
 they found Inhabitants there before them, and entered into Trea- 
 ties with that People, obtaining Leave of them to traffick, and 
 
 fettle in that Part of the Country where Carthage 
 S83 Tears afterwards was built, now called the Kingdom of 
 before Tunis, and, by the Romans, Africa Propria. By 
 
 Chnft. degrees they grew to be a formidable Nation, and 
 
 conquered all the Northern Coafts of Africa ; and 
 equipped fo great a Number of Ships to Sea, that they enjoyed 
 the Dominion of the Sea. Nor were the Conquefts of this 
 mighty State confined to the Continent of Africa ; they made 
 themfelves Matters of Sardinia, and the Baleares, or the Iflands 
 of Majorca, Minorca, and Jviea, from whence they found aneafy 
 Paffage into Spain : Thither they were firft invited bv the City of 
 Cadiz, an antient Colony of the Tyrians, their Countrymen. This 
 City, it feems, was at War with the Spaniards, and, being 
 hard-preffed, called the Carthaginians to their Affiftance, who 
 not only defended their Allies, but carried on an offenfive War 
 in the Spanijb Territories ; and that People, being divided in- 
 to feveral little Kingdoms and States, became an eafy Conqueft 
 to their Enemies. Great Part of South Spain became fubjed to 
 the Carthaginians, and even the City of Cadiz, that called them 
 IB, was obliged to fubmit to their Dominion. They were alfo 
 an Pofleftion of Part of Sicily, and, in the Year 400. after the 
 
 Foundation of Rome, they entered into a Treaty 
 353. with that City for their mutual Defence; but fome 
 
 Sicilian Rebels, afterwards feizing on the important 
 City of Mefma, and offering to deliver it up to the Romans, that 
 People did not fcruple to break through their Alliance with the 
 Carthaginians, and fent over a Reinforcement of TYoops to fup- 
 
 port thofe Rebels, which occafioned the War between 
 266. the Romans and Carthaginians, ufually called the 
 
 Firft Punic War. In this War the Carthaginians in 
 Sicily were not able to keep the Field againit the Romans, who 
 are univerfally acknowledged to have been excellent Soldiers, but 
 retired into fuch ftrong Towns as were fituated near the Sea, 
 which they could relieve from time to time with their Fleets. 
 The Romans, having yet no Shipping to oppofe them, faw it ab- 
 solutely neceflary to difpute the Dominion of the Sea with Car- 
 thage, without which they found the War was like to prove end- 
 lefs. They built or hired, in a fhort time, a Fleet almoft as nu- 
 merous as that of the Carthaginians t and engaged abundance of 
 
 foreign
 
 Chap. XXVI. . Prefeni State of Barbary . 5 1 1 
 
 foreign Mariners in their Service; and, under the Command of 
 Duilius, the Romans put to Sea with 120 Gallies, and, being met 
 by the Carthaginians, confifting of 130 VefTels, commanded by 
 Hannibal, near Myla, they foon came to a clofe Engagement, 
 wherein the Romans gained an eafy Victory, by means of the Ma- 
 chine they had contrived for grappling with the Enemy's Ships. 
 The Carthaginians were fo diipirited by this unexpected Defeat, 
 that they fuffered the Romans to lord it in the Mediterranean for 
 two Years without Controul : But, being informed that their Ene- 
 mies were about -to make a Defcent on the Coaft of Africa, they 
 exerted themfelves once more, and equipped a Fleet, confuting of 
 150 Gallies, manned by 150,000 Men, with which they put to 
 Sea, in order to recover the Dominion of the Mediterranean; 
 and, being met by the Romans, they received another memorable 
 Defeat. The Romans, after this Victory, embarked a numerous 
 Army, under the Command of M. Attilius Regulus and L. Man- 
 lius, their Confuls, who had commanded as Admirals in the Jail 
 Engagement ; and made a Defcent on the Coaft of Africa, and 
 ravaged all the open Country, and took 20,000 Prifoners, befides 
 vaft Flocks and Herds of Cattle ; upon which the Senate ordered, 
 that Part of the Army and Fleet, with L. Marthas, mould return to 
 Italy. Regulus afterwards made himfelf Mailer of near two hundred 
 Towns, and, among the reft, of Tunis, fituate within two or three 
 Leagues of Carthage: And the Numidians invading the Carthagi- 
 nian Territories at the fame time, they were reduced to the laii 
 Extremity, and offered the Roman General very advantageous 
 Terms of Peace : But he, puffed up with his Succefs, r ; cfupe :o 
 grant any other Terms, than an abfolute Submiffion to Rome,, 
 they prepared for a vigorous Defence ; and? having received a 
 fmall Reinforcement of Troops from Greece, under the Command 
 of Xantippus, a celebrated Spartan General, they took the Field., 
 and, giving Battle to the Romans, intirely defeated them. Regu- 
 lus, with 500 more, were made Prifoners; 2000 efcaped; and the 
 reft, amounting to 13,000, were killed on the Spot. The Ro- 
 man*, having received this Defeat in Africa, fent no more Force* 
 thither, notwithstanding they obtained a third Victory over the 
 Carthaginians at Sea, and took 1 14 of their Ships. The War in 
 Sicily was ftill curied on with great Vigour on both Sides ; not- 
 withftanding the Romans obtained a great Victory there, and 
 took above 1 20 Elephants from the Carthaginians in one Engage- 
 ment. They defended Lilylhvum, and fome other Seaport-Towns, 
 for feveral Years; but, finding themfelves at length overpowered, 
 Amilcar, the Carthaginian General in Sicily, was ordered to mak 
 the beft Terras he could ; and accordingly he con- 
 cluded a Peace between the two Republics. By this A.C. 242. 
 Peace the Carthaginians had an Opportunity to re- 
 duce
 
 512 Prefent State of Barbary. Part II. 
 
 duce to Obedience all the Mutineers in Africa; and appointed A- 
 milcar Viceroy of Spain, who fubdued feveral Princes in that Coun- 
 try, and brought o\'er others into an Alliance with the Cartha- 
 ginians by his infinuating Addrefs. But while he was thus em- 
 ployed in promoting the Intereft of his Country, he was unfor- 
 tunately killed in an Engagement with the Enemy. Afdrubal, 
 who iucceeded him, difcharged himfelf in this Employment ex- 
 tremely well by his obliging Temper and Addrefs, being no lefs 
 faccefsful in inlarging the Carthaginian Territories in Spain, 
 than his Predeceffor: He built the Town of New Carthage or 
 Carthagena, in Spain, almoft over-againft old Carthage. Afdru- 
 bal, having acled as General in Spain with great Honour eight 
 Years, was aflaflinated by one of the Gauls, who had received 
 fome Affront from him. Whereupon Hannibal, the Son of 
 Amilcar, now about three-and-twenty Years of Age, was appoint- 
 ed General in Spain. This great Man, for fome time, kept his 
 Army in perpetual Attion, by reducing and invading fuck of the 
 Spanijh Provinces as were not in Alliance with Rome. The Ro- 
 mans, growing jealous of the Conquefts of the Carthaginians, 
 prepared for War, from the very Moment they heard that Han- 
 nibal had taken Saguntum, in Alliance with Rome. Hannibal 
 formed a Defign of humbli g the haughty Romans, and, having 
 aflembled an Army of ico,cco Men, he declared his Intention 
 of marching through Gaul dire&ly to Italy, and accordingly, 
 leaving his Brother Afdrubal with 15,000 Men in Spain, he be- 
 gan his March from Carthagena; but fpent moil Part of the 
 Summer in making Alliances with the Princes of Gaul, or fub- 
 duing fuch of them as oppofed his Enterprize, and did not arrive 
 at the Foot of the Alps, which divide Trance from Italy, till the 
 middle of Oclober, when his Army appears to have been fo lef- 
 fened by the Detachments he had made, or the Lofles he had 
 fuftained, that it fcarce amounted to 40,000 Men ; though it 
 does not appear, that the Romans once attempted to obftrutt his 
 March. Hannibal, having pafied the Alps, which, till that 
 Time, was held to be impracticable, and muttered his Army in 
 the Plains of Piedmont, found it to be (till more diminihYd ; for 
 he had here but 1 2,000 African Foot, 8000 Spaniards, 6000 
 Horfe, moil of them Numidians ; in all, 26,000 Men ; a fmall 
 Army to invade the moft powerful Nation then in Being. Hav- 
 ing given his Army fome Refrefhment, after their Fatigues in 
 parting the Alps, he propofed an Alliance with the Gauls, who 
 then inhabited Piedmont, which being flighted, he laid Siege to 
 Turin, their capital City, and took it by Storm in three Days, 
 giving the Plunder of it to his Soldiers. Whereupon all the neigh- 
 bouring Gauls came in, and made their Submilfion, and feveral 
 of their Princes entered into a Confederacy with the State of 
 
 Carthage ;
 
 Chap. XXVI. Prejent State of Barbary. 5 1 3 
 
 Carthage, which gave Hannibal an Opportunity of recruiting 
 and increafing his Army to 40,000 Men, and upwards, and Pro- 
 vifions were afterwards brought to his Camp in great PJenty. The 
 Romans, finding the Carthaginian Army daily increafed by the 
 Addition of fredi Forces from Gaul, ordered Scipio the Conful to 
 advance with all Diligence, and give the Enemy Battle ; and the 
 other Conful Sempronius was commanded to return from Sicily, 
 whither he had tranfported his Army, in order to have made a 
 Defcent in Africa from thence. Scipio having pafled the Po, and 
 advanced within Sight of the Carthaginian Army, which lay en- 
 camped on the Banks of the lejin, a Battle foon after was fought, 
 wherein Scipio received a dangerous Wound, and had his Army 
 defeated, which the Romans imputed chiefly to the Superiority and 
 Dexterity of the Kumidian Horfe. Sempronius having joined 
 Scipio, and their united Army amounting to about 40,000 Men, 
 another Battle was fought in the middle of Winter near Placen* 
 tia ; in which the Romans were again defeated, by falling into an 
 Ambufcade, which the Enemy had prepared for them ; and the 
 Confuls, with their broken Troops, confiiling of about 10,000 
 Men, retreated into Placentia : But, by the Hardfhip of this Win- 
 ter-Campaign, Hannibal, 'tis faid, loll one of his Eyes, and great 
 Numbers of his Horfes, and all his Elephants but one, on which 
 he ufually rode. Early the next Spring, Hannibal attempted to 
 pafs the Apennine Mountains, with a Defign to have penetrated aj 
 far as Rome, before his Enemies were recovered from their Con* 
 fternation ; but the Snows were yet fo deep, and the Weather fo 
 tempeftuous on thofe Mountains, that he was compelled to return 
 with his Army to Placentia, where he fought another Battle 
 with Sempronius, in which neither Side gained any great Advan* 
 tage ; though, 'tis probable, the Carthaginians had the Snperio- 
 rity ; for Cn. Servtlius, and C. Flaminius, being chofen Confuls, 
 Hannibal foon after advanced into Tvfcany, and, having drawn 
 the Conful Flaminius into an Ambufcade, near the Lake of Thra- 
 fymene, abtained another Viftory over the Enemy, the Conful 
 Flaminius being killed upon the Spot, with the greateft Part of 
 his Forces ; only 6000 of them made their Retreat in a Body, 
 and thefe were obliged to furrender Prifoners the next Day. In 
 this Battle 16,000 Romans were fiain, and only 10,000 Run- 
 aways made a fhift to efcape, by different Ways, to Rome . A% 
 to the Latins, who were made Prifoners in this Engagement, 
 Hannibal gaye them their Liberty ; and was fo happy in cultivat- 
 ing a Fricndfliip with this People, and the reft of the Allies of 
 Rome, that he was able to fupport himfelf many Years in Italy, 
 when fcarce any Supplies or Reinforcements were fent him from 
 Carthage. Hannibal, after this Victory, marched his Troops in- 
 to the fine Country called the Campania of Rome, which he.plun- 
 
 L 1 dcrcd
 
 514 Prefent State of Barbary. Fart II. 
 
 dercd from one End to the other ; but, as he was retiring with 
 his Booty, the celebrated Fabius, now Dictator, furrounded the 
 Carthaginians in an inclofed Country, and poffeffed himfelf f 
 all the Paffes, fo that it appeared almorl impoflible for them to 
 extricate themfelves. But Hannibal furmounted this Difficulty, 
 'tis faid, by the following Stratagem : He caufed Torches and 
 Firebrands to be fattened to the Horns of 200 Oxen, and ordered 
 them to be driven up the neighbouring Mountains in the Night- 
 time. The Romans imagined, that the Enemy's Army was mak- 
 ing their Retreat that Way, and, quitting the Paffes to follow 
 them, Hannibal gained an Opportunity of getting out of thofe 
 Defiles. The next Year, being the third Campaign after Han- 
 nibal's entering Italy, the Romans determined to make one grand 
 Effort to drive the Enemy out of their Country. Terentius Varro, 
 And L. ^ mi li us Paulus, being Confuls, they raifed eight Legions 
 inlkad of four, their ufual Number, confifting of 5000 Foot, 
 and 400 Horfe each; to which were added about 10,000 Horfe, 
 and 40,000 Foot of their Allies, making in all near 100,000 
 Men ; whereas the Carthaginians were not computed to amount to 
 more than 40,000 Men. The two Armies meeting, a very 
 fierce Encounter followed, in which the Romans received a ter- 
 rible Defeat ; which is afcribed to the Goodnefs of the Cartha- 
 ginian Horfe, and the Duff, that drove in Clouds in the Faces of 
 the Romans. But to whatever Caufe this important Victory is to 
 be afcribed, Rome never received fo great an Overthrow : For 
 jEmilius the Conful was killed upon the Spot ; as were two Quas- 
 ftors, 21 Military Tribunes, feveral others that had been Confuls 
 or Praetors, 80 Senators, and between forty and fifty thoufand 
 Officers and Soldiers ; and above ten thoufand more, that had been 
 left to guard the Camp, furrendered themfelves Prifoners imme- 
 diately after the Battle. Nor was this Victory obtained without 
 Lois ; there being killed of Hannibal's Infantry 6500, of which 
 4000 were Gauls, and 15CO Spaniards and Africans; but he 
 did not lofe above 200 Horfe. Varro, the furviving Conful, 
 fled with 70 Horfe only to Fenujia, and about 4000 more 
 efcaped to other Towns. Hannibal made ufe of his prefent good 
 Fortune to influence the Allies of Rome to join him ; and, march- 
 ing to the Southward, Capua, and moft Part of what is now 
 called Naples, with feveral Towns of Sicily, declared for him, and 
 renounced their Alliance with the Romans ; which gave him an 
 Opportunity of importing Corn, and other Provifions, from Sicily, 
 for the Ufe of his Army during the Winter ; which would have 
 otherwife been reduced to great Diftrefs, all the Country about 
 Ro/ne having been deitroyed. Hannibal, expecting his Brother 
 Afdmbal with a great Reinforcement from Spain, to enable him to 
 finifh the Conqucft of Italy, the Romans fent large Detachments 
 
 - - thither
 
 Chap. XXVI. Prefent State of Barbary. $ 1 5 
 
 thither under the Command of Cneius and Publius Scipio, to put 
 a Stop to AfdrubaCs March ; which they did for fome Years, but 
 were at length both defeated by the Carthaginians, and loit their 
 Lives in that Service. Whereupon Afdrubal,in the eleventh Year 
 of the War, marched with an Army of 70,000 Men and up- 
 wards through France into Italy, pafl'ed the Alps, and advanced 
 as far as Plactntia, in order to join Hannibal; but was defeated 
 by the united Roman Forces, lofing his own Life in the Battle, and 
 had upwards of 50,000 of his Men killed, according to the Ro- 
 mans Account of the Aclion. Hannibal, who j nit before expect- 
 ed to finifti the Conqueit of Italy this Campaign, now found it 
 difficult to maintain his Ground in that Country. However, 
 fending for frefh Reinforcements from Spain and Africa, he fo 
 difpofed of his Troops, that he might be able to wait their Ar- 
 rival : And, it fcems, he took care to poft his Army in fuch a 
 Manner, and was fo much fuperior to any of the Roman Gene- 
 rals, in point of military Skill, that, though their Forces were 
 double the Number of the Carthaginians, they found the driving 
 him out of Italy impracticable. Whereupon they determined to 
 increafe their Army in Spain, and appointed Publius Cornelius 
 Scipio General of their Forces in thofe Parts, propofing to put a 
 Stop to the Carthaginians making any further Levies there, and 
 recruiting Hannibal's Army from thence. However, Scipio per- 
 fuaded the Roman: to make Africa the Seat of War, thinking it 
 the readieft Way to relieve his Country ; and accordingly tranf- 
 ported his Army thither ; and, being joined by Mafiniffa, and 
 his Numidians, gained a memorable Victory over the Carthagi- 
 nians, and Syphax their Confederate, an African Prince, who 
 was made Prifoner in the Engagement. Scipio afterwards took 
 the important Town of Utica : Whereupon the Carthaginians 
 made the Roman General fome Overtures of Peace. But Scipio, 
 elated with his Succefles, would grant them no other Terms, but 
 thofe of withdrawing their Forces out of Italy, delivering up all 
 their Shipping, except 20 Veffels, to the Romans, paying down 
 15,000 Talents, (making near 3,000,000 Pou-nds Sterl.) with 
 fome lefs Articles. And the Carthaginians feemed to acquiefce in 
 them, only defiring they might have a Truce, till they could 
 fend to Rome, and try to get fome Alteration of the Terms in 
 their Favour ; and, in the mean time, fent Orders to Hannibal, 
 to evacuate Italy, and return Home ; Which, it feems, he re- 
 ceived with the umoft Regret ; for, being joined by a great Re- 
 inforcement of Troops from Spain, he looked upon himfelf, at 
 this time, to have been in a Condition to have completed the 
 Conqueft of Italy ; and, probably, had effected it, if the Cartha- 
 ginian Army in Africa had ftood upon the defenfrve, and not 
 received that terrible Defeat, when Syphax w*i made Prifoner. 
 
 L 1 % Hannibal,
 
 5 1 6 Prefent State of Barbary . Part II. 
 
 Hannibal, however, thought fit to obey his Mailers, and return, 
 quitting that fine Country he had been contending for near fixteen 
 Years, and abandoning his Allies the Gauls, as well as the Ita- 
 lians, who had joined him, to the Mercy of the Romans ; which 
 gave him a moll fenfible Mortification, infomuch that, 'tis faid, he 
 was fcarce Matter of himfelf when he embarked his Troops. 
 At his Return to Africa he had an Interview with Scipto for a 
 Peace ; but, not agreeing upon Terms, and the Carthaginian 
 State refuting to reltore fome Ships taken during the Ceflation 
 of Arms, thefe celebrated Heroes came to a decifive Battle, where- 
 in, though Hannibal performed all that the greatefr. and wifeft 
 Commander in the World could do, yet Scipio obtained a com- 
 plete Vi&ory by the Affiflance of Mafmijfa, a potent Numidian 
 Prince. Hannibal, however, made good his Retreat to Carthage, 
 having loll 20,000 Men in the Engagement : Upon which the 
 'Carthaginians were obliged to fubmit to very mortifying 
 Terms. And thus ended the fecond Punic War, after it had lalled 
 feventeen Years. The Enemies of Hannibal charging him, fome 
 time after, with holding a Correfpondence with Antiochus King 
 of Syria, againft the Romans, the Senate of Fome fent a Deputa- 
 tion to Carthage, requiring that General fhould be delivered up 
 to them ; but he embarked fuddenly for Phoenicia ; from thence 
 he went to the Court of Antiochus, and prevented his being 
 feized ; for, 'tis faid, the Carthaginians would have deliver'd up 
 Hannibal, and half their Nobility, rather than have hazarded an- 
 other War with the Romans. Hunnibal, receiving timely Notice, 
 that Antiochus was flipulating to deliver him up to the Romans, 
 retired to the Iflandof Crete; from whence he afterwards fled for 
 Refuge to the Court of Prufias, King of Bithynia ; but, upon 
 Application of the Romans, Prufias promifed to deliver up Han- 
 nibal to them ; which when the old General underflood, he put 
 an End to his Life by drinking a Glafs of Poifon, being then 
 feventy Years of Age. The fame Year alfo died his great Rival 
 Scipio, in a kind of voluntary Banilhment, being obliged to fly 
 his Country, to avoid malicious Impeachments, notwithstanding 
 the important Services he had done the Roman State. But to 
 return : The Carthaginians, notwithstanding all Oppreflions and 
 Difcouragements, began to revive ; but the Romans, remember- 
 ing, with Horror, how Hannibal, for fixteen Years, had ravag'd 
 their Country, and brought them to the Brink of Ruin, could 
 not be eafy while Carthage was in Being : They therefore re- 
 folved abfolutely to deftroy their State, and raze the City, they 
 fo much dreaded, to the Ground. Nor were the Carthaginians 
 ignorant of what was intended againft: them. They endeavour 'd, 
 j>y the moll abjeft Submifiions, to avert their Ruin; but all to 
 ho Purpofe. For the Remans aftembled a numerous Army, 
 1 which
 
 Chap. XXV I. Prefent Stale of Barbary . 5 1 7 
 
 which was tranfported to Africa ; and Sa'pio, Grand- Carthage 
 fan, by Adoption, of the celebrated Sa'pio Africanus, deftroyed, 
 after a mod memorable Siege, took and burnt Cvr- and the 
 thage itfelf; which put an End to that famous Re- Republic 
 public. As to the reft of the Powers of Africa, ends t^6 
 who had been Tributaries to Carthage; namely, Years be- 
 
 jTa, Syphax, and their Succeflbrs, Kings of foreChrijl. 
 Numidia, and Juba, and the reft of the Princes of 
 Mauritania, who had called in, and aflided the Romans in de- 
 itroying Carthage; thefe were, for fome time, fufferej to en- 
 joy a kind of Independency ; but at length they, with 
 the reft of the then known Parts of Africa, became The Van. 
 fubjeft to Rome. But the Vandals, a barbarous dais fubdue 
 Northern People, with their Neighbours tkeSuevi //Romaa 
 and Alans, having forced their Way into France and Territo- 
 Spain, and being afterwards driven from thence by rlit in 
 the Goths, another Northern Nation, tranfported Africa, 
 themfelves from Spain into Africa, and fubdued 
 great Part of the Country poffeffed by the Romans; A.D. 4*7. 
 aud had the Dominion of it till the Year 534. when the Ro- 
 Belifarius, the Emperor Jufliman'% General, ob- mans re- 
 tained a complete Vi&ory over Gilimar, their laft <ver Africa. 
 King, and thereby recovered all the Roman Provinces. 
 In the Year 647. Of man, the third Caliph of the Sa- 647 
 racens, fubdued all the North of Africa, from the The Sara- 
 Red Sea to the Atlantic Ocean. The Saracens af- cens fub- 
 terwards conquered almoft all Spain ; and, both there due the 
 and in Africa, erecled abundance of petty Kingdoms. North of 
 Thofe in Africa were at length almolt all reduced un- Africa, 
 der the Dominion of the Emperor of Morocco, the 
 moft potent of all the Saracen Sovereigns in Africa. The Go~ 
 The prefent Government of the Empire of Morocco^ <vernmcnt 
 containing the three grand Divifions of Fez, Morocco, and Lain* 
 and Suz, feems to be in the Difpofal of the reigning e/Morocco 
 Prince, whofe Will none dares refift, on Peril of his and Fez. 
 Life. If a Moor mould turn Chriftian, or a Rene- 
 gado, after he has profefled Mahometanifm, apoflatize from it, 
 he is burnt without Mercy. Murder, Theft, and Adultery, alfc* 
 are generally punilhed with Death ; and their Punishments for 
 other Crimes, particularly againft the State, arc very cruel ; at 
 imp ding, dragging the Prifoner through the Street at a Mule's 
 Heels, till all his Flefh is torn off; throwing him from a high 
 Tower upon iron Hooks; hanging him upon Hooks till he diesi 
 crucifying him againft a Wall ; and indeed the Punifhment, as 
 well as Condemnation of Criminals, is, in a manner, arbitrary. 
 The Emperor, or his Bafhas frequently turn Executioners, 
 
 L 1 3 fhoot
 
 5 1 & Prefent State -e/Barbary. Part II. 
 
 ihoot the Offender, or cut him to pieces, with their own Hands, 
 or command others to do it in their Prefence. The 
 the Go- Government of Algiers is, in Reality, an abfolute Mo- 
 <vernment narcliy to this Day, though it has fome Appearance 
 of Algiers, of a mixt Government ; becaufe the Dey or Sove- 
 reign fometimes affembles a Divan, confifting of the 
 chief Officers of State, and the Janizaries, and demands their Ad- 
 vice in Matters of Importance : But this, it feems, is only to 
 fcreen him againft popular Difcontents ; for he acts by his fole 
 Authority, whenever he pleafes. The Dey is indeed elective ; his 
 Son never inherits by Defcent, and this Election is by the Turkijb 
 Army : Thofe who have no Relation to the Sword, have nothing 
 to do in the Elc&ion. The Sovereign fits daily, 'tis faid, ad- 
 miniftring Juftice from Five in the Morning till Noon, and from 
 One till Four, hearing, and determining all Caufes that are 
 brought before him, without any AfTociates or Affiftants but four 
 Secretaries. However, Matters relating to Lands of Inheritance, 
 to Religion, or the Breaches of their Ecclefiaftical and Civil 
 Laws, which are the fame among the Turks, are determined by 
 the Cadi's, or Ecclefiaftical Judges ; fo that the Caufes determin'd 
 by the Dey feem to relate to the Government of the State and 
 Militia, or to perfonal Debts, and other controverted Matters, for 
 which the Alchoran has made no Provifion : His Judgments are 
 arbitrary, not regulated by Lawsj nor is there any Appeal from 
 his Tribunal. But, as military Men do not only eleft their Sove- 
 reign, but depofe, or put him to Death, whenever they appre- 
 hend he does not confult their Intereft, he is obliged to be very 
 cautious in the Decree he makes. The Want of Succefs in any 
 Inftance, almoft infallibly occafions a Rebellion ; and 'tis well if 
 the Dey is not facrificed to the Fury of the Janizaries, and an- 
 other ele&ed, in whofe Hands they hope their Affairs will pro- 
 iper better. Of the Deys that have reigned within thefe forty 
 Years, four have been murdered, and a fifth refigned 
 The erefc his Government, to fave his Life. I fhould have 
 in% the taken notice, that the Moors of Spain, having been 
 
 Kingdom driven from that Country in the Year 1492. and 
 /"Algiers tranfported to the Coaft of Barbary, and revenging 
 by the themfelves on the Spaniards by plundering the Towns 
 
 Turks, on the Coafts, furprifing and carrying off Multitudes 
 
 of People into Captivity, were the Caufe oferefting 
 the Kingdom of Algiers by the Turks. For Ferdinand V. King 
 of Arragon, in order to reftrain thefe Outrages, embarked a Body 
 of Land Forces in the Year 1505. and took the Town of Oran, 
 then inhabited by Moors, who had been driven from Grenada and, 
 Valencia. The Count of Navarre, who commanded in this Ex- 
 f>editiQn, afterwards made himfelf Mailer of Bugia, and feveraj 
 
 Qther
 
 Chap. XXVI. Prefent Stale of Barbary." 519. 
 
 other Towns upon the fame Coaft, together with the little Ifland 
 that lies before the Bay of Algiers ; whereby he prevented the 
 Moors Shipping going in or out of that Port, and gave the Town 
 Apprehensions of falling fuddenly under the Dominion of the 
 Spaniards. In this Dillrefs Selim, then Sovereign of Algiers, hav- 
 ing heard of the infamous Turkijb Pirate Barbarojfa, fent to de- 
 fire his Affiltance againft the Spaniards. The Pirate was cruifing 
 in the Mediterranenn, when he received the Invitation ; and, glad 
 of the Opportunity, fent away eighteen Gallies, and thirty fmall 
 Barks, to Algiers, marching thither by Land himfelf with fuch 
 Forces as he could aflemble on a fudden. The Algerines, receiving 
 Advice of his Approach, marched out of the Town, with their 
 Sovereign at their Head, to welcome their Deliverer ; and, hav- 
 ing conducted him to Algiers, amidlt the loud Acclamations of 
 the People, he was lodged in the Prince's Palace. But their Joy 
 was not long-liv'd ; for the Pirate immediately found Means td 
 affkffinate Selim privately, and caufe himfelf to be proclaimed 
 King, maftacring all thofe he imagined might oppofe his Defigns. 
 The Natives found themfelves under the Dominion of a barbarous 
 Tyrant, who, after he had fortified the Place, and fecured his 
 Pofleffion, treated them no better than Slaves. But, after va- 
 rious Turns of Fortune, he, and his Infantry, were all cut Xs> 
 pieces by the Spanijb Forces, fent over by Charles V. King of 
 Spain. However, Cberedin, Brother so the Pirate, found Means 
 to be proclaimed King fome time after ; and met with no Dis- 
 turbance till three Years afterwards, when he underftood there 
 was a general Confpiracy of the Moors and Arabs to recover their 
 antient Liberty. Whereupon he difpatched an Exprefs to Selim, 
 the then Grand Signor, promifing to refign his Kingdoms to the 
 Porte, if he would fend him a ftrong Reinforcement of Troops, 
 and that he would aft for the future as Bafha or Viceroy to the 
 Grand Signor. The Emperor accepted Cberedins Offer, and 
 fent a Body of Janizaries to his Affiftance, publifhing a Proclama- 
 tion at the fame time, that all Turks, who fhould refort to Al- 
 giers, fhould enjoy the fame Privileges there, as the Janizaries 
 did at Conjiantinople ; whereupon all People of defperate Fortunes, 
 and whofe Crimes had render'd them obnoxious to the Government, 
 immediately entered themfelves in the Service of Cberedin Barba- 
 rojfa ; and, with thefc Reinforcements, he was foon in a Condi- 
 tion to defeat all the Confpiracies of the Moors. The Grand 
 Signor appointed him Captain Bafha, and Commander in chief 
 of all the Territories of Algiers ; but thought fit to make Haf- 
 fan Aga, the Eunuch, Bafha of the Town of Algiers, probably 
 to be a Check upon Cberedin, and prevent his fetting up again 
 for himfelf. And afterwards the Porte governed the Kingdom of 
 Algiers by their Bafhas till the 17th Century, when the Jani- 
 Ll 4 zaries
 
 ie> Prefent State of Barbary*. Part II, 
 
 zaries or Militia found Means to perfuade the Grand Signor to 
 let them eleft one of their own Officers, with the Title of Dey, to 
 be their Governor ; promifing to raife Supplies fufficient to main- 
 tain their Forces, which would fave the Porte an immenfe Sum, 
 and that they would always acknowledge the Grand Signor for 
 their Sovereign. However, the Emperor's Orders were very little 
 regarded afterwards in the Algerine Territories, which are, at pre- 
 sent, no otherwife under his Dominions, than as he is looked 
 upon to be the Head of their Religion ; for the Dey 
 TbeGovern- of Algiers acknowledges no Superior. The Govern- 
 ment of Tri- ment of Tunis, Tripoli, and Barca, is the fame with 
 poli, Tunis, that of Algiers, only in that one Inftance, that the Dey 
 and Barca. in the former is under fome Subjection to \hsTurkifb 
 Bafha. 
 Trade.] The foreign Trade of Morocco and Fez, by Sea, is 
 carried on by the Europeans ; for they have no Shipping: The 
 Europeans bring them whatever they want from abroad ; as Linen 
 and Woollen Cloth, Stuffs, Iron wrought and unwrought, Arms, 
 Gun-powder, Lead, and the like : For which they take, in Re- 
 turn, Copper, Wax, Hides, Morocco-leather, Wool which is ve- 
 ry fine, Gums, Soap, Almonds, and other Fruits. Their Trade 
 by Land is either with Arabia or Negroland; to Mecca they 
 fend Caravans, confilting of feveral thoufand Camels, Horfes, and 
 Mules, twice every Year, partly for Trade, and partly upon a 
 religious Account ; great Numbers of Pilgrims take that Oppor- 
 tunity of paying their Devotions to their Prophet. T he Goods 
 they carry to the Eaft are Woollen Manufactures very fine, Mo- 
 rocco Skins, Indigo, Cochineal, and Oftrich Feathers : And they 
 bring back from thence Silks, Muflins, and Drugs. By their 
 Caravans to Negroland they fend Salt, Silk, and Woollen Manu- 
 factures ; and bring back Gold and Ivory in Return, but chiefly 
 Negroes ; for from hence it is, that the Emperor chiefly recruits 
 bis Black Cavalry. The Caravans always go ftrong enough to 
 defend themfelves againft the wild Arabs of the Defarts in Africa, 
 and Ajja ; they are alfo obliged to load one half of their Camels 
 with Water, to prevent perifhing with Drought and Thirlt over 
 thole extenfive Defarts; and there isilill a more dangerous Enemy, 
 and that is the Sand itfelf: When the Winds rife, the Caravan is 
 perfectly overwhelmed with Dull ; and there have been Inftances, 
 both in Africa and AJia, where whole Caravans, and even Armies, 
 have been buried alive in the Sands. The hot Winds alfo, blow- 
 mg over a long Traft of burning Sand, being equal almoft to 
 the Heat of an Oven, have deftroyed abundance 
 The Trade of Merchants and Pilgrims. The Trade of Algiers ; 
 ^Algiers, by which -they principally fubfill, is Piracy and Man- 
 ftealing. In their Prizes they find all the Merchan- 
 dize
 
 Chap. XXVI. Prefint Siate of Barbary. 521 
 
 dize of Europe. The Jews are the principal Merchants at Al- 
 giers, as they are in eveTy Town on the Barbary Coaft : They 
 buy the Goods found in the Prizes, and fell them at Home, or 
 export them agsin to foreign Markets ; and there are fome few 
 European Ships that come to Algiers on account of Trade, but 
 meet with little Encouragement, unlefs there have been no Prizes 
 made in a great while. The Merchandizes imported are Wrought 
 Silks, Gold and Silver Stuffs, Damafks, Linen and Woollen 
 Cloths, Spices, Copper, Brafs, and Tin Ware; Quickfilver, 
 Arms, Powder, and other Ammunition ; Sails, and Naval Stores, 
 Cochineal, Copperas, Sugar, Cotton, Galls, Brazil-wood, Red- 
 wood, Alums, Vermilion, Wine, Brandy, Spirits, Opium, 
 Gums, and Paper : In Return for which the Europeans receive 
 Wax, Fine Wool, Oftrich Feathers, Skins of wild Beafts, Dates, 
 and Chriftian Slaves : Nor is there any kind of Merchandize but 
 what may be met with here fometimes. The Englijb Conful, it 
 feems, is the only Merchant of this Nation at Algiers, and car- 
 ries on a more advantageous Trade than any other Perfon ; for 
 he furnifhes the Dey with all manner of Naval Stores, and takes 
 Corn and Oil in Return, which are of great Service fometimes to 
 Pert-Mabon and Gibraltar ; and, 'tis faid, no other Nation is 
 fuffered to carry Corn out of the Country. The Eu- 
 ropeans trade with the People of 'Tunis and Tripoli The Trade 
 for Corn, Oil, Wool, Soap, Dates, Oftrich Fea- cf Tunis 
 thers, Skins of wild and tame Beafts ; but one of and Tri- 
 the bell Branches of their Commerce here is Slaves ; poli. ' 
 the European Chriftians, taken by their piratical 
 Ships, they fet very high Ranfoms upon. They have alfo fome 
 Trade for Negro Slaves to the Southward; but they get much 
 more by their Piracies, than by Trade ; and indeed this furnifhes 
 them with every Manufacture of Europe. 
 
 Revenues.] The Revenues of th Emperor of Morocco arife 
 from Goods imported and exported, and Prizes 
 taken; from the Labour of Hufbandmen, and Fruits Morocco. 
 of the Earth, &e. his whole Revenue being ufually 
 eilimated at 5000 Quintals of Silver, each Quintar worth three 
 hundred and thirty Pounds Sterling. As Money is pretty fcarce 
 in Algiers, I find great Part of the Taxes are taken in kind, 
 that is, in Corn, Cattle, and fuch other Goods, as 
 may be moft ufeful to the Turks at Algitrs ; and the Algiers. 
 Prizes they make at Sea, fome Years, equal the Re- 
 venues they exacl from the Natives at Land. As to the Revenues 
 of the other Kingdoms, as I find no Certainty in the Accounts, J 
 (hall detain the Reader no longer on this Head. 
 
 Porces.]
 
 522: Prefent State of Barbary. Part II. 
 
 Forces.] The Forces of Morocco would, if they were affem- 
 bled in one Place, certainly conftitute a very numerous and for- 
 midable Army. It is computed, that the Black Cavalry and In- 
 fantry do not amount to lefs than 40,000 Men ; and the Moorijb 
 Horfe and Foot may be as many ; but, being di- 
 Of the fperfed in feveral Parts of this vaft Empire, are not 
 Emperor of feen in fuch large Bodies as the Negroes, who live at 
 Morocco. Mequinez, and have the Guard of the Emperor's 
 Perfon. The Blacks are efteemed their beft Horfe, 
 and the Europeans have been fenfible of their Bravery, and military 
 Skill. They have Fire-arms, as well as . Swords and Lances : 
 Their Troopers ride very fhort, and no Men fhew more Dexterity 
 in Riding, Wheeling, or Firing : Their Horfes are very fwift, 
 and beautifully made; but not fo heavy and ftrong as ours. It is 
 their Cavalry they rely the molt upon ; their Infantry indeed car- 
 ry Fire-arms, but are not difciplined, and obferve no manner of 
 Order. Their Shipping, it feems, is not worth Notice, confift- 
 jng of only two Twenty-gun Ships, and fome few Row-boats ; 
 and yet with thefe, being full of Men, do they iffue from Sallee 
 and Meynora, which lie near the Streigbts Mouth, and make 
 Prizes of great Numbers of Chriftian Merchant-fhips* 
 Of AI- carrying their miferable Crews into Captivity. The 
 gicrs. Forces of the Dey of Algiers confift of about 1 2,000 
 
 Men, all natural Turks, or Renegado Chriflians. It 
 is certain, that the Moors have great Dread of thefe Forces, trem- 
 bling at the very Name of an Algier Turk ; for the latter have 
 defeated Armies of them, both in Morocco and Tunis, of fix times 
 their Number, and been engaged perpetually in the moft defperate 
 Services both by Sea and Land, and, dreading no Dangers, are an 
 Over-match for all their Neighbours : But, from what Caufe fo- 
 ever this Superiority proceeds, it is furprifing to obferve, that 
 lefs than io,oco of the A/gerine Turks fhould dare to march 
 through great Part of the^ Empire of Morocco, and make them- 
 felves Mailers of the Capital City of Fez one Year, and Tunis the 
 next. The Algerines are more formidable at Sea, 
 Uavy. than any other Power on the Coaft of Barbary ; hav- 
 
 ing no lefs than twenty-five Ships of War, from 
 eighteen to fixty Guns, befides a Multitude of fmaller cruihing 
 Veffels ; It feems, they never fuffer the Number of their Ships 
 of War to be diminifhed ; but, if any of them are loft, or decayed, 
 they immediately add as many more. 
 
 Character.] The Moors are faid to be a covetous, unhofpi- 
 table People, intent upon nothing but heaping up Riches ; to ob- 
 tain which they will be guilty of the meaneit Things, and ftick 
 
 ac
 
 Chap. XXVI. Prefent State c/Barbary. 523 
 
 at no manner of Fraud ; and, as they know themfelves to be fuch 
 treacherous, deceitful' Wretches, they are very fufpicious of Fo- 
 reigners. But, with all their bad Qualities, they are obferved to 
 be very dutiful and obedient to their Parents, their Princes, and 
 every Superior; and they are certainly to be commended for 
 their Reverence for God and Religion, and whatever is efteemed 
 facred amongft them : They will not fuffer thefe to be burlefqued, 
 and made a Jell of, by profane Fools ; which is too often connived 
 at among Chriftians, and fometimes encouraged by thofe that 
 ought to fet a better Example. The Arabs, amongft them, have 
 always had the Character of a thievifh, pilfering Generation ; 
 and, 'tis faid, will even rob and deftroy one another, when they 
 have nobody elfe to prey upon ; and, as they perpetually lead a 
 rambling Life, are obferved to be of a more tawny Complexion, 
 and much thinner and leaner, than the Moors. The People who 
 inhabit the Mountains, and who have had the Ieaft to do with the 
 Court, or Trade, are much the plaineft, honefteft People among 
 them ; and ftill retain a good Share of Liberty and Freedom, the 
 Government ufing them very mildly, left they fhould intirely dif- 
 own their Authority. The moft wretched and abandoned People 
 here are the Renegadoes, who have renounced Chriftianity, and 
 turned Mahometans ; thefe prove the moft vicious, treacherous 
 Mortals that the Country affords. As to the Perfons of the 
 Moors, they are generally tawny, well-fhaped, and ftrong ; live- 
 ly, and are faid to be fharp Wits, and to apply themfelves to 
 Learning. 
 
 Religion.] The eftablifhed Religion in Barbary is Mahomet- 
 mnifm; but the Inhabitants of Morocco differ from other Mahomet- 
 ans in feveral confiderable Points. There are alfo many in Al- 
 giers, who likewife differ from other Mahometans in divers Parti- 
 culars. They have their Saints, or Marabouts, that live retired 
 in the Mountains, and unfrequented Places, for whom they have 
 fuch a Veneration, that, if a Criminal can efcape to their Abodes, 
 the Officers of J uftice dare not feize him, and the Saint frequently 
 procures the Offender's Pardon : Thefe have a very great Influ- 
 ence on all Degrees of Men ; and fome of them, it feerr.s, are 
 temporal as well as fpiritual Lords. But then there are fome 
 that live the Life of Hermits, and ufe great Aufterities, going 
 about in Rag% and a negleled Drefs ; who are, however, no lefs 
 reverenced than the others. The People proftrate themfelves be- 
 fore thefe Marabouts, efteeming it a great Favour to kifs their 
 Feet, or the Hem of their Garment. The Chriftian Faith was 
 firft planted in this Country by fome of the Seventy Difciples, and 
 Saint Simon the ApofUe, furnaxned Zelotes. 
 
 Customs.]
 
 524 Prefeut State of Earbary, Part II. 
 
 Customs.] The Habit of the Moons 13 a Linen Frock next 
 the Skin, a Pair of Drawers, a Salh, and, over all, 
 Drefj. a loofe Coat, or Veil, of Silk or Cloth, with fmall 
 Buttons of Gold, Silver, or other Metal : Their 
 Arms are bare to the Elbow, as well as their Legs : People of 
 Diftin&ion fometimes wear Turky Leather Buikins, and molt of 
 them Sandals or Slippers ; they (have their Heads all but one 
 fingle Lock upon the Crown, and wear a Turbant, which is ne- 
 ver pulled of? before their Superiors, or in their Temples : They 
 never fhave their Beards, but clip them into Form, and keep 
 them very neat. The Drefs of a Woman is not very different 
 from that of a Man, except that fhe wears a fine Linen Cloth, or 
 Caul, on her Head, initead of a Turbant, and her Drawers are 
 much longer and larger than the Mens : The Women alfo, when 
 they go abroad, have a Linen Cloth over their Faces, with 
 Holes in it for their Eyes like a Mafk : Thofe of Quality wear 
 Pendants in their Ears, and Bracelets on their Arms ; but wrap 
 themfelves up in a white Cloth, feveral Ells in Length, when 
 they walk in the Streets, fo that little of them is feen : They paint 
 and colour their Hair and Eye-brows with burnt Antimony, en- 
 deavouring to make them as black as poffible, and 
 Diet. the Ends of their Fingers are painted blue. The 
 
 Moors fit crofs-legged at their Meals on the Floor co- 
 vered with Carpets or Mats. Rice feems to be a great Part of 
 their Food here, as well as in the Ealt ; though they eat alfo 
 Bread, Beef, Mutton, Veal, Fifh, and Fowls. Their Meat is 
 boiled and roalled to Rags, fo that they may pull it to pieces 
 with their Fingers, for they ufe neither Knifes nor Forks ; but, 
 having wafhed their Hands, every Man tucks up his Sleeves, and, 
 putting his Hands into the Dim, takes up, and fqueezes together, a 
 good Handful of all the Ingredients of their Difhes, as much as his 
 Mouth will hold. If they have a Difh of Soup, or other Liquids, 
 they eat with a great wooden Spoon, which is hand- 
 Sa/utation. ed round the Company. They exprefs their Reve- 
 rence both to God and Man, by putting off their 
 Slippers, which they leave at the Door of the Mofque, or Pa- 
 lace, when they enter in ; and, when they attend their Prince in 
 the City, they run barefoot after him, if the Streets are never 
 fo dirty. They fmoke pretty much, and play at 
 Diver' Draughts and Chefs; but never for Money, this 
 
 Jions. being a Prohibition of their Law. The Company 
 
 are fometimes entertained with Mufic and Dancing ; 
 but People of any Fafhion never dance themfelves ; and, though 
 their Mufic is not very agreeable to an European Ear, they feem 
 
 extremely
 
 Chap. XXVII. PrefeHtState of mcMgct'idi&c. 525 
 
 extremely pleafed with it themfelves. As the Religion of the 
 Moors in general is the fame with that, of other Ma- 
 hometan Countries, fo are their Marriages celebrated Merri- 
 in the fame Manner. A Man is allowed four ages. 
 Wives, and as many Concubines as he pleafes ; and 
 the greater the Hufband's Quality is, the greater Number of Wo- 
 men he keeps, more for Oltentation, and State, than 
 any thing elfe. Their Funerals alfo are folemnized Funerals. 
 here, as in other Mahometan Countries : Women are 
 hired to lament and howl over the Corpfe, who tear off their 
 Hair, and cut themfelves till the Blood follows. After fome 
 time, the Corpfe is carried to the Burying-place in the ufual 
 Drefs, the Prieft fmging as they go, * God is a great God, and 
 * Mahomet his Prophet ; " and, having fet the Corpfe upright in 
 the Tomb, with the Face towards Mecca, they leave it in that 
 Pofture. The Women pioufly vifit the Tombs of their Hufband?, 
 or other Relations, every Friday, their Sabbath, carrying thither 
 Meat and Fruits, which the Poor eat when they are gone. 
 
 Curiosities.] On Mount Zagoan, fix Miles South of Tunis, 
 are many Remains of an old Caftle, built by the antient Romans, 
 with feveral Latin Infcriptions, yet to be feen, upon divers marble 
 Stones. Upon Mount Guejlet, in the fame Neighbourhood, are 
 fome plain Veftigia of Roman Magnificence. 
 
 CHAP. XXVII. 
 
 The Preftnt State of Biledulgerid, Zaara, Negro- 
 Jand, and Guinea. 
 
 Boundaries.] * l V HESE Countries are bounded by Barbary 
 A on the North; ths Atlantic Ocean on the 
 Weft; the Ethiopian Sea and Ethiopia on the Seuth; and by Egypt, 
 Nubia, and Part of Ethiopia, on the Eaft. 
 
 Situation.] Thefe Dominions are fituatcl between the 
 5th and 30th Degrees of North Latitude, and between 30 Decree* 
 iiaft and 17 Degrees Weft Longitude 
 
 Divifion.
 
 526 Prefent State ^/BileduJgerid, PartH, 
 
 Divifion. 
 
 Biledulgerid t "% 
 with Tafletf 
 and Segel- r 
 
 1. Tejfet 
 
 2. Trf/frf 
 
 3. Segelmife 
 
 4. Tegorarin 
 
 5. JW^iJ 
 
 6 . Biledulgerii 
 
 7. Defart of 
 Barca 
 
 Zaara 
 
 1 . Zanhaga 
 
 2. Zuenziga 
 
 3. Targa 
 
 4. Lempta 
 
 5. Berdoa 
 
 6. J?<?r0 
 
 7. Gaoga 
 
 Negro land 
 
 1. Galata 
 
 2. Tombut 
 
 3. C<z#fl 
 
 4. Gangara 
 
 5. Mandinga 
 
 6. Guber 
 
 7. Zanfara 
 
 Guinea 
 
 1. Grain Coaft 
 
 2. Ivory Coaft 
 
 3. Gold Coaft 
 
 4. SlaveCoaft, 
 and the 
 Kingdom 
 of 2>// 
 
 Square Miles. 
 
 585,600 
 Containing that 
 Part of the an- 
 tient Libya In- 
 terior \ that was 
 called (not the 
 Roman) Nu- 
 midia ; being 
 the greateft 
 Part of the Ge- 
 tuli and Gara- 
 mantes. 
 
 ^ 739> 20 
 Containing that 
 Part of antient 
 Libya Interior, 
 called Deferta, 
 being a great 
 Part of the old 
 Getuli and Ga- 
 ramantes. 
 
 1,026,000 
 Containing Part 
 of old Libya 
 Interior , now 
 called ls,igri- 
 tia, and the 
 Land of Blacks. 
 
 510,000 
 This is com- 
 monly reckon- 
 ed Part of Ne- 
 groland, and 
 properly e- 
 nough, fince 
 it is Part of 
 old Nigritia. 
 
 Chief Towns. 
 
 Tejfet. 
 
 Taflet. 
 
 Segelmejfe. 
 
 Tegazat. 
 
 Co/ul. 
 
 Biledulgerid. 
 
 Angela. 
 
 Tegaffa. 
 
 Zuenziga. 
 
 Targa. 
 
 Lempta. 
 
 Berdoa. 
 
 Amazen. 
 
 Gaoga. 
 
 Galata. 
 
 Tombut. 
 
 Cano. 
 
 Gangara. 
 
 Mandinga. 
 
 Guber. 
 
 Zanfara. 
 
 Timan. 
 Tab: 
 
 St. George de 
 Mina. 
 
 Benin. 
 
 CUMATB.]
 
 Chap. XXVII. Zaara, Negroland, and Guinea. 527 
 
 Climate.] The Air of Biledulgerid is very Biledulge- 
 hot, but generally eiteem'd very wholfome ; the Coun- rid. 
 try is very barren, with fcarce any Towns in it : 
 However, there grows fome Corn, and great Quantities of Dates. 
 
 The Chief of their Commodities are Cattle and In- 
 digo. The Air of Zaara is much the fame as in Zaara. 
 Bilcdulgerid , only fomething hotter. The Soil is 
 generally dry and iiindy, and not very fertile either for Corn or 
 Fruit. If there happens to be any Wind, both i ere, and in Bile' 
 dulgerid, the Travellers are frequently loft in terrible Mountains 
 of Sand. The Commodities of this Country chiefly 
 confift in a few Cattle and Dates. The Air in Ne- Negro- 
 
 groland is very hot, but generally reckoned exceeding land, 
 wholfome ; and the Soil very rich, efpecially to- 
 wards the River ^iger, which overflows a great Part of the 
 Country, producing great Plenty of Rice and Millet, Palm-trees, 
 Cocoa-nut.-, and other Fruits; they have alfo Gold, Elephants 
 Teeth, and Drugs, but no great Quantities. The 
 Face of the Country, on the Guinea Coaft in gene- Guinea, 
 ral, is agreeably diverfified with Mountains and 
 Valleys, Woods and open Fields ; the Hills are adorned with 
 
 . Trees of an extraordinary Height, and the Valleys between them 
 large, rich, and proper for the Cultivation of all manner of Cora 
 and Fruits, with Villages every-where agreeably interfperfed, the 
 Country being exceeding populous. Travellers make but two 
 Seafons in this Country ; namely, Winter and Summer: From 
 April to September inclufxve, is their Winter, or rainy Seafon ; 
 and from Qdober to March inclufive, is their Summer, and their 
 hotteft, as well as faireit Weather ; though then the Sun is far- 
 theft from them on the South Side of the Equator ; whereas the 
 Coaft of Guinea lies 5 Degrees North. From the Vernal to the 
 Autumnal Equinox, they generally have exceflive Rains, attended 
 with violent Storms of Wind, as well as Thunder and Light- 
 ning ; and as the Winds at this time blow from the South- 
 ward, and as there i3 not one Harbour on the Coaft, if any Ship- 
 ping happen to be there in thefe Storms, they are infallibly rua 
 on 6hore, unlef; they can ftand out to Sea. And, it feems, there 
 always fits fuch a Surf or fwelling Sea on this Coaft, that it is 
 very difficult going on Shore at any time, even during the fair 
 Seafon : The rnolt violent Storms, or Travadoes, are in July and 
 Augufl, and come from the Southward. The Rivers in this 
 Conntry, falling from high Mountains near the Coaft, form (o 
 many rapid Torrent.*- ; in the wet Seafon, overflow the Val- 
 leys, from whence afcend thick ftinking Fogs, and make the 
 Cojntry very unwholfomc to Foreigr.cra. It may be obferved 
 
 farther.
 
 5 2S Preffnt Slate of Eiledulgerid, Parr II. 
 
 farther, that, during the rainy Seafon, though the Sun be then 
 diredtly over their Heads, the Weather is moderately cool, efpe- 
 cially in the Evening. Some relate, that in September, about the 
 End of the Rains, it is really cold ; and, though the middle of 
 the Day is exceffive hot from October to March, yet even then 
 the Evenings are cool ; and they have this further Advantage, 
 thai they have no long Days. The Produce of this Country i3 
 chiefly Corn, Fruits, Gold, Ivory, Hides, Wax, Guinea-Pepper, 
 Red- Wood, Sugar, Z5c. . The longed Day, in the moll Southern 
 Part of Guinea, is about twelve Hours and an half, and, in the 
 Northmoft Paxt of Biledulgerid, about fourteen Hours ; there- 
 fore thefe Coantries lie in the i. 2. 3. and 4. Northern Climates. 
 
 Government.] Biledulgerid has remained unconquered, ex- 
 eept a Part of it by the Romans, tiil the Year 710. 
 Biledul- when it was fubdued by the Saracas, but afterwards 
 gerid. left again ; (o that it is now under feveral Princes 
 
 and Arabian Chiefs, many of whom pay fome Ac- 
 knowledgment to the Emperor of Morocco, and fome to the 
 Grand Signor. A3 to the Hiftory and Government 
 Zaara. of Zaara, we can give very little Account of it : 
 
 However, it is at prefent, it feems, under feveral 
 petty Princes, and inferior Lords, with fome Arabian Chiefs ; and 
 many Places have very little Signs of any Government, the In- 
 habitants wandering about from Place to Place, for 
 Negro- the Conveniency of Hunting. As to Negroland, 
 
 land. we are very much in the dark concerning the in- 
 
 land Parts; for it is certain, they are perfectly un- 
 known to the Europeans, unlefs what they have gathered from the 
 Report of the Natives, who are but poorly qualified to give De- 
 icriptions, or Hiflory of their Country. Neither is the Language 
 of feveral of the Negro Nations, who come down to the Mouth 
 of the River Niger to trade with the Europeans, underftood by 
 them, or even by the Natives of the Coaft ; and confequently all 
 the Defcriptions we have of Negroland, above 300 Miles to the 
 Weftward of Cape Verd, and the Atlantic Ocean, muft be im- 
 perfect. There may be forty Kingdoms and Nations of different 
 People, for aught we know, comprehended in that vaft Tract 
 affigned to Negroland, which our Geographers continue under that 
 Name. However, we are told, this Country is fubjeft to feveral 
 King?, who are abfolute ; but all, or molt of them, 
 Guinea. are tributary to the King of lombut. In Guinea 
 there are fome Sovereign Princes, whofe Dominions 
 are very extenfive, rich, powerful, and arbitrary ; Monarehs li- 
 mited by no Laws, or any other Reftraints: And there are a 
 Multitude of others, to whom the Europeans have given the 
 
 Name
 
 Chap. XXVII. Zaara, Negroland, and Guinea. 5*29 
 
 Name of Kings, whofe Dominions do not exceed the Bounds of 
 an ordinary Parifli, and whofe Revenues and Power are propor- 
 tionably mean. But thefe are, in Reality, all fubject to fome of 
 the fuperior Monarchs firft-mentioned, and no better than their 
 Vaflals ; obliged to attend them in their Wars, to quarter their 
 Soldiers, and to fubmit to fuch Duties and Impofitions as are im- 
 pofed upon them. The moft powerful of thefe Monarchs is the 
 King of Eidab or Wbidab, who is feared and reverenced by his 
 Subjects as a Demigod ; they appear in his Prefence either 
 kneeling, or proftrate on the Ground ; when they attend him in 
 the Morning, they proftrate themfelves before the Gate of his 
 Palace, kifs the Earth three times, and, clapping their Hands toge- 
 ther, ufe fome Expreflions that look more like the Adoration of 
 fome Deity, than Compliments paid to an earthly Prince j and 
 they even tremble at the Sight of him. He has his Viceroys, 
 Governors, Generals, and other Officers, as European Princes 
 have, of whom he conftantly maintains four or five thoufand with 
 Meat and Drink ; fome of whom are permitted frequently to eat 
 and drink in his Prefence : But no Perfon whatever is permitted 
 to fee his Majefty eat, or to know in what Part of the Palace 
 he deeps, unlefs his Wives, of whom he has feldom lefs than a 
 thoufand. Thefe continually furround him : Thefe are his Life- 
 Guards, and frequently fent on Embaflies, and employed in exe- 
 cuting fuch Commands and Sentences as feem much more pro- 
 per for Men, as to punifh Criminals, pull down their Houfes, 
 and the like. When the King goes abroad alfo, five or fix hun- 
 dred of his Wives run before him, or attend him : He has not, 
 'tis faid, a fingle Man in his Train ; but he fpends the greateft 
 Part of his Time at Home in his Palace, adminiftring Juilice to 
 his Subjects, and tranfacting Affairs of State; or converting with 
 the European Factors and Merchants, who find him ufually in a 
 ftately Hall of Audience, richly drefled in Gold and Silver Stuffs : 
 His Wives alfo, when they attend him, are richly clothed, and 
 adorned with Gold, Coral, and glittering Trifles, efpecially in 
 their Hair. The eldeft Son is always intitled to his Father's 
 Throne ; the Females never fucceed, unlefs in one Kingdom upon 
 this Coaft. On the Death of a King, the Government feems to 
 be diffolved till the Succeflbr is proclaimed ; for the Populace are 
 fuffered to plunder their wealthy Neighbours, and commit all 
 manner of Extravagancies with Impunity, till the new King af- 
 fumes his Authority ; and therefore the Great Men ufe all ima- 
 ginable Diligence to inveft him with the Regal Pow- 
 er. They have particular Punifhments appropriated Punijb- 
 to certain Crimes bv Cuftom ; for they have no ments. 
 written Laws. Murder is ufually punifhed with 
 Death, if the Perfon killed was a Free-man ; but, for the Mur- 
 
 Mm dcx
 
 530 Prefent State of Biledulgerid, Part II. 
 
 der of a Slave, a Fine is only exacted. Adultery likewife is pu- 
 nched with Death, when it is committed with any of the King's 
 Wives, or the Wife of a great Man. Theft is ufually punifhed 
 with Death, unlefs the Criminal can pay a heavy Fine ; or fome- 
 times he becomes a Slave to the injured Perfon : And fo in Debt* 
 where the Party is infolvent, himfelf, his Wife and Children are 
 liable to be fold for Slaves. Upon the Gold Coaft, the Man and 
 Wife have not a Community of Goods; but thofe the Men 
 have go to his eldeft Brother, and his Children ; and thofe of the 
 Woman to her eldeft Brother, and his Iflue: Their refpective 
 Children do not inherit the Goods either of Father or Mother : 
 However, if the Father be a Sovereign Prince, or Lord of any 
 Town or Country, the eldeft Son fucceeds his Father in theie 
 Commands, but not in his Effects. 
 
 Trade.] We know very little more of Biledulgerid and Zaara, 
 than that thofe Countries are very barren, and that 
 Biledulge- the People live in Tents, ranging perpetually from 
 rid and Place to Place, and have no fettled Habitation. As 
 Zaara. to the Trade of Negro/and, the European Nations, 
 
 Negro- that are fettled on this Coaft, deal with the Natives 
 
 land. chiefly for Slaves ; though they may fometimes meet 
 
 with Gold, Elephants Teeth, and Drugs, but in no 
 Guinea. great Quantities. It has been already obferved, that, 
 during the rainy Seafcn in this Country, the Wa- 
 ter falls in Torrents from the Hills, wafhing away the Earth ; 
 and fometimes great Pieces of Rocks are undermined, and coma 
 rolling down the Stream. I fhould have taken notice, that they 
 have Mines of Copper, Iron, Siver, and Gold ; but none of 
 theie are wrought : And as to Gold, Guinea is fuppofed to contain 
 more than any other Part of the World, there being fuch 
 vaft Treafures warned down from their Mountains, and found in 
 their Rivers, while the Mines yet remain unopened : 
 Gold- And this it is, that has drawn ib many European Na- 
 
 Coaft. tions hither, though it be at the extremeft Hazard 
 
 of their Lives. But to proceed : The Pieces of 
 Rocks being thus removed, the Cavities, where the Gold before 
 lay concealed, are fometimes difcovered, and large Pieces of this 
 precious Mineral picked out of the Holes and Clefts of Rocks and 
 Mountains; but much more is wafhed down in little Particles, no 
 bigger than Sand, into the Rivers ; the former being called Rock- 
 Gold, and the other Gold-Duft. . The European Merchants, or 
 Factors, never go up into the Country to purchafe Gold j but the 
 trading Negroes come down to the Forts and Factories, and on 
 board the European Ships with it. Great Part of the Gold 
 comes two or three hundred Miles, and upwards, oat of the 
 
 Country,
 
 Chip. XXVII. Zaara, Negroland, and Guinea. 5 3 1 
 
 Country, being brought down by the Negro-Merchants, at the 
 Seafon for Trading, when they expeel Shipping on the Coaft. 
 it feems, the Chriftians have taught the Natives to be very fharp, 
 or rather roguifh Traders ; for the Negroes mix Copper, and 
 other Ingredients of lefs VI ue, both with the Rock Gold and 
 Gold Dull; and they are fuch exquifite Proficients, that they 
 frequently cheat their Matters, who inftrucled them in the My- 
 ftery. The Value of Gold, brought from the Guinea Coaft, one 
 Year with another, by all the European Nations that trade thi- 
 ther, is fuppofed to amount to the Value of 300,000 Pounds 
 Sterling, and upwards, of which the EngUJh may import one 
 Third, the Dutch another, and the French), Dane t 
 Portuguese, and PruJJians, another Third. The Slave Slave 
 Trade is carried on in much the fame manner the Trade, 
 Gold Trade is : The Negro Faftors and Merchants 
 come down to the Coaft with their Slaves, and agree with the Ew 
 ropeans for the Price of them, and the Price of the Goods they are 
 to take in Exchange. As Guinea has a Multitude of petty Sovereigns, 
 who are frequently at Wars with each other, the Slaves are gene- 
 rally fuch as are taken in thefe Wars ; not only Men, but Womeo 
 and Children ; for, when they invade a Country with any Succefs, 
 they carry all the Country into Captivity. There are alfo a 
 great many others, who are made Slaves for Debt, or for fome Mis- 
 demeanour ; and not only the Debtor or Criminal himfelf lofes 
 his Liberty, but oftentimes his whole Family, and all that are re- 
 lated to him : And 'tis faid, People fell even their Wives and Chil- 
 dren, when they have offended them, while others Ieffen their 
 Families, under an Apprehenfion, that they fhall not be able to 
 maintain them ; and, if a Famine, or great Scarcity, happens, 
 they will fell themfelves to one another for Bread. It is reported, 
 that one of the petty Princes on this Coaft, on fome fmall DiC- 
 guft, fold a Score of his Wives to a Captain of a Ship at once ; 
 parting with them with as little Reluclance, as a Graziw docs 
 with a Score of Sheep ; and, in Times of full Peace, nothing is 
 more common, than for the Negroes of one Nation to fteal thofe 
 of another, and fell them to the Europeans : There have been In- 
 itances alfo, it feems, of Children felling their Fathers and Mo- 
 thers, when they have been weary of them, and wanted to enjoy 
 what they had ; which, I fuppofe, gave Birth to the Law, by 
 which the Children are not to inherit the Goods or Eftates of 
 their Father or Mother. Thefe are the various Ways, by which 
 the unhappy Negroes are frequently reduced from flouiifhing Cir- 
 cumftances to a State of Slavery, and brought down to the Coaft 
 to be fold to the Merchants of Europe. When the Price is agreed 
 upon, (wAich, for an allc-bedied Man under thirty-five Years of 
 
 M m 2 Ag?,
 
 532 Prefent State of Biledulgerid* Part II . 
 
 Age, may be about five Pounds, the Women a fifth Part lef:, and 
 the Children in proportion to their Ages) the European Merchant 
 brands them with a hot Iron, to diftinguifh them, and locks 
 the poor Wretches up in fome Prifon, till they can be fent on 
 board. When they are ihipped oiF, their former Matters ftrip 
 them of every Rag, fo that the Merchant receives them all per- 
 fectly naked ; and thus they generally remain till they come to 
 America, when they are difpofed of, fome to the Spaniards to 
 work in their Mines, ( for the Englijh are obliged to deliver them 
 30,000 Slaves annually by the AJiento Contract) and the reft to 
 the Planters in America. It is thought, that the Englijb tranfport 
 annually near 50,000 of thefe unhappy Creatures ; the Portuguefe 
 about 100,000, and the other European Nations put together 
 about 1 00,000 more. The next great Article of Trade 
 Ivory is that of Ivory : This may be had in fmall Quanti- 
 Trade. ties from one End of the Guinea Coaft to the other ; 
 but it is met with chiefly in that Part of the Country 
 which goes by the Name of Tooth Coaft ; and probably abundance 
 of Teeth are brought fome hundreds of Miles out of the Country. 
 There are large Plains, 'tis faid, where Teeth are found in great 
 Plenty, which either belonged to Elephants that died naturally, 
 or were killed by People that did not know the Ufe of their 
 Teeth; though fome have conjectured, that they fhed their Teeth, 
 and receive them again : However, they live to a great Age, hav- 
 ing continued in fome Families for feveral Generations ; and the 
 Proprietors only know, that their Fathers and Grandfathers were 
 poflefled of them. The laft Article of Trade is the 
 Grain- Guinea Pepper, Wax, and Drugs, which are chiefly 
 Coaft. upon the Grain-Coaft. It is computed, that the Eng- 
 lljh, Dutch, French, Danes, and Brandenhurghers, 
 bring annually from Africa the Value of three Millions -, and that 
 the Portuguefe trade for as much as all the reft of the European 
 Nations put together, in Slaves and Teeth. The Goods which 
 the Europeans carry to Africa, in Exchange for Gold, Slaves, and 
 the reft of the Commodities above-mentioned, are chiefly thefe, 
 ^viz. Calicoes, Cottons, Linen and Woollen Stuffs, Serges, Per- 
 petuanas, Wrought Iron, Pewter, and Brafs; fuch as Swords, 
 Knives, Hatchets, Nails, Hammers, Pewter Difhes, Plates, Pots, and 
 other Houfhold Utenfils ; Fire-arms, Powder, Shot, Brafs, and 
 Glafs Toys, tiff. Brandy, Spirits, and Tobacco. As 
 Home to the Trade of the Negroes among themfelves, it 
 Trade confilts chiefly either in carrying the Corn, and 
 of the other Produce of the refpedlive maritime Countries, 
 Negroes, from one Place to another along the Coaft, in their 
 large Canoes, as there happens to be a Demand for 
 it, or in bartering or exchanging Goods with one another on 
 
 Shore.
 
 Chap. XXVII. Zaara, Negroland, and Guinea. 533 
 
 Shore. Thofe near the Coaft exchange the Merchandize they 
 get of the Europeans, with thofe of the more diftant Countries, for 
 Gold, Slaves, and Elephants Teeth, which Foreigners take off 
 their Hands., furnifhing them with new Supplies of European 
 Goods. I (hall conclude this Head of Trade with obferving, 
 that there have been fome, who have propofed fending fuch a 
 Force^to the Gold-Coaji, as might make a Conqueft of the Coun- 
 try, in order to open the Mines, where this precious Metal is 
 lodged. But it is imagin'd, this would require a greater Army 
 than ever it will be thought proper to fend thither j for the Na- 
 tives, looking upon thefe Mountains as facred, and therefore never 
 thinking of breaking into them, would, from all Parts, unani- 
 moufly oppofe fuch an Attempt. Betides, thofe Mines are fup- 
 pofed to lie at a good Diftance from the Coaft, and the Country 
 agrees fo ill with European Conftitutions, that Thoufands would 
 be loft by the Diftempers of the Country, before a Conqueft 
 could be effected. 
 
 Revenues.] The Revenues of the King of Fidah, the moft 
 powerful Monarch in Guinea, muft be very confiderable ; for we 
 are told, there are no lefs than iooo Officers employed in collect- 
 ing the feveral Duties and Taxes, who are difperfed through every 
 Part of his Dominions, there being fcarce any thing that is not 
 taxed. There are three Receivers-general purely upon the account 
 of the Slave-trade, the King having about a Crown for every 
 Slave that is fold. And of the Shipping, which comes upon the 
 Coaft to trade, he receives, one with another, not lefs than 400 /. 
 fieri, each, 'tis laid, and there do not come lefs than fifty Ships 
 in a Seafon. 
 
 Forces.] As to the Forces in Guinea, we find every able- 
 bodied Man is obliged to march into the Field for the Defence of 
 his Country, or at the Command of his Prince ; fo that there 
 are as many Soldiers as Men ; and tho 1 feveral of the leffer States 
 cannot raife above two or three thoufand Men, there are others 
 that can bring forty or fifty thoufand Men into the Field ; and, 
 in the Inland Countries, their Kings can raife as many more. Be- 
 fore the Arrival of the Europeans upon their Coafts, the Negroes 
 knew nothing of Fire-arms ; Bows and Arrows, Lances, Swords, 
 Darts, and Shields, conftituted a complete Set of Arms. Every 
 Chief of a Tribe or Family leads on his own People, but with 
 very little Order ; they look like fo many Crowds or Heaps of 
 Men, rather than Soldiers ; though fometimes their Heroes fir.glc 
 out each other, and fight Haad to Hand with their Country 
 "Weapons. 
 
 M m 3 Character]
 
 54 Frefent State of Biledulgerid, Part H. 
 
 Character.] The Natives of Negroland are generally of a 
 
 good Stature, and of robuft Conftituticns ; their 
 Negro- Complexions of the deepeft Black; their Hair black, 
 
 land, cifr. fhort, and curled like Wool ; their Nofes flat, their 
 
 Lips thick, and 'tis obferved, they are a plain, ho- 
 neft fort of People. The People of Zaara and Biledulgerid are, 
 moft of them, tawny. Though Isegroland lies contiguous to 
 
 them, there are few Negroes in thefe Parts. The 
 Guinea. Negroes in Guinea are generally of a good Stature, 
 
 well-proportioned, robuft, able-bodied Men; their 
 Complexion a mining Jet-black, their Nofes flat, their Lips thick, 
 they have large rolling Eyes, and exceeding even white Sets of 
 Teeth. They do not want Senfe, but employ it to the vileft 
 Purpofes ; namely, in defrauding all the Europeans they deal with, 
 is well as one another. But it is thought, the Europeans have, 
 in great meafure, contributed to make them thofe exquifite Cheats. 
 There is ftill a more abandoned Race in Guinea than the Ne- 
 groes, and thefe are the Mulattos, or mixt Breed, proceeding from 
 Negroes and Europeans, but exceed both in their Vices. Both 
 Negroes and Mulattos are faid to be very deficient in point of Cou 
 rage, and both of them extremely lazy and indolent ; and fome 
 have charged them with the moft barbarous Cruelty. They are 
 obferved to be very covetous, and yet fuch Mailers of their Tem- 
 per, or fo eafy in all Conditions of Life, that no fudden Change 
 or Alteration in their Fortune feems to difturb them. 
 
 Religion.] The Natives of Biledulgerid and Zaara are ge- 
 nerally Mahometans, being probably the Defcendants of thofe 
 Arabs, or Saracens, who over-ran all the North of Africa in the 
 Seventh Century. There are fome Mahometans, and a few Chri- 
 fiians, in Negroland, which the Portuguefe have made ProfelyteS 
 of, 'tis faid, upon the Coaft, and near the Mouths of the Rivers : 
 But all the Inland Negroes are ftill Pagans, as thofe of Guinea 
 are ; and probably their Cuftoms, Rites, and Ceremonies, not very 
 different from theirs. The Natives of Fidah, a confiderable King- 
 dom of Guinea, it feems, generally acknowledge that there is 
 one Supreme, Almighty Being, who created the Univerfe; that 
 lie is too great, and too far exalted above them, to take any No- 
 tice of poor Mortals, or to be approached and addrefled to by 
 Men ; and that he has left the Government of the World to in' 
 ferior Deities, who are ready to hear and anfwer their Prayers, 
 and therefore they pray and facrifice to a Multitude of thefe Dei- 
 ties. They have imperfect and confufed Notions of Heaven, and 
 * future State; though fome of th-m talk of a local Hell, for 
 the Punifhment of the Wicked, but feem very little to regard it. 
 The chief Deity of the Fidaians is a Serpent of a particular Spe- 
 cies,
 
 Chap. XXVII. Zaarn, Ncgroland, and Guinea. $35 
 
 ties, whofe Bite is not mortal. To this Animal they addrefs 
 themfelves on the moll important Occafions, as for the Preferva- 
 tion of their State, feafonable Weather, and other Bleffings of 
 Life. They have alfo a grand Temple ere&ed in Fidab, dedicated to 
 this Serpent j and a lefler almoft in every Village, with Priefts 
 and Prieilefies to officiate in them. In this great Temple, 'tis 
 faid, they always keep a Serpent of a monftrous Size, worship- 
 ping the Creature in Perfon, and not in Effigy. Such is the Re- 
 verence they bear to thefe adored Serpents, that, fhould any Per- 
 fon hurt one of them, or but touch him with a Stick, we are 
 afTured he would be condemned to the Flames. We have an In- 
 ftance of this in a Negro, who was a Stranger at Fidab ; for he 
 only took one of thefe Animals gently on a Stick, and carried 
 the Creature out of his Houfe without hurting it ; and yet the 
 Natives fet up their great Howl, as they ufually do in cafe of a 
 Fire ; immediately alarmed the whole City ; and it was with 
 great Difficulty, that the King of Fidab, being made fenfible of 
 the Stranger's Ignorance, faved his Life. They will not hear 
 any thing fpoken in Derifion of thefe crawling, and to us terrible 
 Animals; but flop their Ears, and run away, if any European 
 pretends to laugh at their fuperftitious Reverence for thefe Ser- 
 pents. Bo/man relates, that a Hog happening to devour one of 
 thefe Snakes, a Proclamation was immediately ifTued for deflroy- 
 ing all the Hogs in the Country, and abundance of them were 
 flaughtered on the Occafion; but at the Inflanceof fome of the 
 rich Owners, and fome Prefents made to the King, the fevere De- 
 cree was revoked. The next thing the Fidaians pay divine Ho- 
 nours to, are fine lofty Trees and Groves : To thefe they apply in 
 their Sicknefs, or any private Misfortune. The Sea is another 
 of their principal Gods, to whom they facrifice when the Winds 
 and Waves are fo tempeftuous, that no foreign Merchant can 
 vifit their Coaft. On this Occafion they throw in all manner of 
 Goods, Meat, Drink, and Cloathing, to appeafe the enraged Ele- 
 ment. But, befides thefe public Objecls of Adoration, every Man 
 has a numerous Set of Gods, of his own chufing, at Fidab. Every 
 thing they meet with on going abroad, animate or inanimate, 
 they introduce into the Number, after it has undergone the follow- 
 ing Trial: They pray to it for fomething they ftand in need of; 
 and, if they obtain their Defire by any means, they afcribe the 
 Succefs to the Influence of this new God: but, if they arc dif- 
 appointed, they conclude that it cannot, or will not, help them, 
 and treat it with Contempt. Both Priells and PrieftefTes have an 
 uncommon Refpeft paid them in the Kingdom of Fidab : Their 
 Perfons, and all belonging to them, are held facred and invio- 
 lable. Having thus given the Religion of the Fidaians, I pro- 
 ceed to give an Abftraft of that of the People of the Cold-Coaft. 
 M m 4 Hero
 
 536 Prtfent State of Biledulgerid, Part 11. 
 
 Here the Natives alfo believe in one Supreme, Almighty Being ; 
 but look upon him to be too much exalted above them, to regard 
 their Affairs ; and therefore addrefs their Prayers upon all Occa- 
 fions to fome inferior Deities. What Notion they have of thefe 
 Deities they worlhip, is uncertain, any further than that they 
 look upon them as Beings veiled with great Power, and that 
 carefully cbferve their Behaviour, and reward and punifh them, 
 in this Life only, according to their Attions. Moft of them be- 
 lieve little of future Rewards and Punifhments ; though they feem 
 generally to agree, that the Souls of good Men furvive after 
 De^th ; and fome fetv of them talk of a Paradife not unlike the 
 Elyjian Fields, whither good Spirits are fent : But thofe who 
 have been wanting in their Duty, are drowned in a certain River, 
 and a Period put to their Exiftence. They are charged with wor- 
 fhipping the Devil, and keeping a folemn Feftival, of eight Days 
 Continnance, to his Honour; but this, it feems, is a Miftake: 
 They hold indeed fuch a Feftival, but it is in order to drive tha 
 Devil out of their Country. Seven Days are fpent in Feafting, 
 Singing, and Dancing, and great Liberties are taken with Impu- 
 nity at that time: They lampoon their Superiors, and make Bal- 
 lads on them, committing all manner of Extravagancies ; and, 
 on the eighth Day in the Morning, they hunt the Devil out of 
 every Town and Village with horrid Cries and Howlings, throw- 
 ing Dirt and Stones after him ; and, when they have continued 
 the Frolick as long as they fee fit, they return home, where they 
 find the good Women employed in fcouring and cleaning all their 
 Pots, Pans, and Utenfils, and purifying them from all Unclean- 
 nefs they might have contracted by Satan's refilling among them. 
 They feem to believe the Stories of Speftres and Apparitions as 
 firmly as any Article of their Religion, terrifying themfelves and 
 others with an Apprehenfion of being difturbed by them : For 
 when a Perfon dies, efpecially if he be a Man of Figure, they be- 
 lieve he appears for feveral Nights about the Place where his 
 Soul left the Body. And, it feems, the People of Guinea fcarce 
 look upon Death to be natural, but that it is a Punifhment in- 
 flitted by the Gods for fome Offence ; and they ufually imagine a 
 Perfon may have been taken off by the Charms or Spells of his 
 Enemies. 
 
 Customs.] The Drefs of a Negro in Guinea is a Cloth about 
 his Waift about two Foot broad ; and thofe of the 
 Drefs. better fort have another Cloth of a good Length wrap- 
 ped about them, and thrown over their Shoulders, but 
 yet fo as their Arms, Legs, and a good Part of their Bodies, ap- 
 pear naked both of the Men and Women. Their Ornaments con- 
 M of a Multitude of Rings or Bracelets of Gold, Ivory, or Cop- 
 per,
 
 Chap. XXVII. Zaara, Negroland, and Guinea. 537 
 
 per, according to their Circumftances, worn on their Arms and 
 Legs, with Necklaces and Girdles of Coral one upon another ; 
 but the plaiting and adorning their Hair takes up the greateil Part 
 of their Time, efpecially of the Womens : They drefs it up with 
 little thin Plates of Gold, Copper, Tinfel, Beads, Coral, and 
 Shells, that make a glittering Shew. As to the Diet 
 of the Negroes, it feems, they eat but poorly on the Diet. 
 Gold-Coaft. The common People think they live luxu- 
 rioufly, when they add a few boiled Herbs, and ftinking Fifh, to 
 their common Food, which is Millet boiled to the Confidence of 
 Bread, or Potatoes, Yams, and other Roots : Nor do their Su- 
 periors eat better ; only they allow themfelves a greater Quantity 
 of Fifh and Herbs, than the Poor can afford. At Benin, and the 
 Sla-ve-Coaft, the better fort of People eat Beef, Mutton, and 
 Fowls ; and are fo good to their Poor, 'tis faid, that they are al- 
 ways welcome to their Tables, when they want Employment, 
 and cannot provide for themfelves. They arc alfo extremely ho- 
 fpitable to Strangers, being proud of nothing more than the Cha- 
 racter of generous, free-hearted People. Dried Fifh and Roots 
 are the common Food of the meaner fort of People at Benin. 
 But how meanly foever the Negroes live as to eating, thofe near 
 the Coalt make it up in drinking. The Chiefs of the Towns, it 
 feems, will meet the meaneft of the People in the Market-place 
 in the Evening, and, forming a Circle upon the Ground, drink to 
 a very great Excefs, being attended by their Women at the fame 
 time, who are no lefs addifted to drinking than the Men ; and 
 their Converfation is ufually as fmutty as that of a drunken Crew 
 of Sailors, which does not at all offend the Modefty of the Negro 
 Females, who maintain their Ground, aud fit drinking and fmok- 
 ing with the Men frequently till Morning. Befides Drams and 
 Wine, they have a fort of Beer made of Millet, and fome of it 
 very flrong. They have alfo the Milk of young Cocoa-nuts, 
 which is exceeding cooling and refrefhing Liquor ; but, as for 
 Cow's Milk, I perceive they never drink of it. The 
 Salutations of the Natives in the Inland County are Saluta- 
 performed by flrctching out their Hands, bending the tions. 
 Knee, or embracing each other ; and where a Subject, 
 or inferior Perfon,addrefTes himfelf to his Prince, or fuperior Lord, 
 he proflrates himfelf on his Face before him, till he is bid to rife. 
 As to the People of the Coaft, who have furnifhed themfelves 
 with Hats and Cap*:, they have learnt of the Europeans to falute 
 their Friends by pulling them off. I now proceed to 
 the Marriage- Ceremonies. The Lover, or his Friends, Marri- 
 contratt with the Father of the Virgin, and that fre- age. 
 quently before the Girl is capable of making any 
 Choice. As foon as the Bride is capable of Marriage, flic is 
 
 taken
 
 538 Prefent State of Biledulgerid, &c. Part If. 
 
 taken home by the Hufband, without any other Fortune to re- 
 commend her, than her native Charms. No Man ftands upon 
 Quality in the Choice of a Wife ; for as he defigns to ufe her 
 as a Drudge, he will as foon take the Daughter of the meaneit 
 Man, as one of their Chiefs. Thofe that live the eafieft amongft; 
 them, are the Wives of the Merchants, the Dealers in Wine, 
 and the Fifhermen, who have no Lands to manure ; whereas the 
 Men of Eftates make their Wives manure and cultivate them ; 
 and the more Wives they have, the greater is their Stock of Corn, 
 Rice, and Plants, which makes them multiply their Wives as 
 fail as they can ; tho' thofe on the Gold-Coaft are limited to twenty : 
 Yet in the Kingdom of FiJab, it feems, they takefome Hundreds, 
 and the King feveral Thoufands, who are no more exempted from 
 Hufbandry, and other Drudgeries, than thofe of private Men, 
 except fome few of his Favourites. The Multitude of Wives, 
 Concubines, and Slaves thefe People keep, is for the State 
 and Grandeur of the Matter, as well as on account of the Profit 
 of them. Here a Man is eHeemed according to the Number of 
 Women and Slaves he keeps to run before him, when he appears 
 in public. The Negroes of the Inland Country are much more 
 jealous of their Honour, than thofe upon the Coaft : If any one 
 is familiar with their Wives, nothing lefs than his Ruin will fa- 
 tisfy them. The Woman alfo pays for her Wantonnefs with the 
 Forfeit of her Life, unlefs her Relations will redeem her with a 
 great Fine. When a Perfon of any Figure dies, his 
 Funerals. Wives, his Relations, Slaves, and Dependents, im- 
 mediately fet up a difmal Howl : His Wives (have 
 their Heads, put on Rags, colour their black Skins with a white 
 Paint or Clay, running about the Streets, and bewailing them- 
 felves like fo many diftradled Creatures ; and this they repeat fe- 
 veral Days fucceffively. At length the Corpfe, being richly 
 dreffed, is put into a Coffin, with a confiderable Quantity of 
 Gold, Coral, and other valuable Effe&s, fuitable to the Circum- 
 flances of the Deceafed ; who is attended by all the Relations, 
 Friends, and Neighbours, joining in the Lamentations of the 
 Family, but obierve no manner of Order in the Proceffion. 
 When a King is buried, Bofman allures us, feveral of his Slaves 
 are facrificed, in order to ferve him in the other World j as are 
 two of his favourite Wives ; and, what is more {hocking, is the 
 Pain they endure in the Execution ; for they pierce and cut them, 
 as in Sport, for feveral Hours. The fame Gentleman affures us^. 
 he faw eleven put to Death in this manner ; and, amongft them, 
 one who had endured the moft exquifite Torture, was delivered 
 to a little Child to cut off his Head, which he was an Hour in 
 doing with an heavy broad Sword he could hardly lift. But to 
 Xjetorn : As loon as the Corpfe of a Perfon of any Figure is in- 
 
 terred t
 
 Chap.XXVIII. Prtfent Sum of Ethiopia.' 539 
 
 terred, moft of the Company return to the Houfe of the De- 
 ceafed, which is no longer a Place of Mourning ; for here thejr 
 drink and feaft for feveral Days fucceffively. Inltead of a Tomb* 
 they ufually build a Houfe, or plan: a Garden, over the Grave; 
 and, in fome Places, they fet linages of Clay upon it, hich 
 they wafh and clean every Year on the Anniverfary of the Fu- 
 neral ; when the Expence is as great as at the Time the Perfoa 
 was buned. 
 
 Curiosities.] In the Defart of Jlracan in Zaara are two 
 Tombs with Inicriptions upon them, importing, that the Perfont 
 interred there were a rich Merchant and a poor Carrier, who 
 both died of Thirft ; and the former had given ten thcufanA 
 Ducats for one Cruife of Water. In the Province of logo, in 
 Kegroland, the fandy Defart is of fuch a Nature, that dead human 
 Bodies do not in the leaft corrupt, but become hard, like the 
 Egyptian Mummies. In feveral Parts of Guinea grows a Tree, 
 tvhick, having an Incifion made in its Body, yields an excellent: 
 Liquor, proving to the Natives more pleafant, ftrong, and nou- 
 rifaing, than the bell Wines. 
 
 CHAP. XXVIII. 
 
 The Prefent State of Ethiopia. 
 
 THERE are not any two of the Learned that agree in 
 the modern Diviiion of Africa ; for fcarce any Travel- 
 ler has penetrated into the Heart of the Country, and confequent- 
 ly we muft acknowledge our Ignorance of the Geography of feve- 
 ral of the Midland Nations : But I fhall endeavour to give the 
 Reader a juft Abftradt. of the belt, though (lender Accounts we 
 have concerning them ; and fhall beg leave to comprehend the 
 remaining Part of Africa under the general Name of Ethiopia, 
 ^cording to the following Table. 
 
 Divifion.
 
 54 
 
 Prefent State of Ethiopia. Part II, 
 
 Divifion. 
 
 Ethiopia 
 
 1. Loango 
 
 2. Congo > 
 
 3. Angola 
 
 4. Benguela 
 
 5. Mataman - 
 
 6. Monoemugi 
 
 7. Monomotapa 
 
 8. C offers 
 
 9. Saffala 
 
 10. Zanguebar 
 
 1 1 . Anian 
 
 12. -r^*- 
 
 13. Abiffinia 
 
 14. Nubia-- 
 
 1 5 . Defart of Bared 
 
 16. Ethiopia Proper 
 
 Square 
 Miles. 
 
 Capital Cities. 
 
 49,400 Loango 
 172,800 St. Salvador 
 
 38,400 \Mochina 
 
 6$,oocr.Benguela 
 144,000 
 
 3 1 0,000 Chieo<va 
 222,500 Monomotapa 
 200,340 Cape Good Hope 
 
 27,500 Saffala 
 2 7 5 ,000 Mozambique 
 234,000 Brava 
 
 30,000 Erquiko 
 378 OOO Caxumo 
 264,000 Dancala 
 1 84,900 Angela 
 i,20o,ooo.Unknown Parts 
 
 Bearing. 
 
 S. of Guinea. 
 S. of Loango. 
 S. of Congo. 
 S. of Angola. 
 
 N E. of Mataman. 
 S. of Monoemuegi. 
 S. of Monomotapa. 
 NE. of Coffers. 
 N. of S^/tf. 
 NE. of Zanguebar 
 N. of Anian. 
 E. of ^*. 
 N W. of Abiffinia 
 N. of Nubia. 
 S.of Def. of Barca 
 
 Climate] Ethiopia, comprehending fo many Empires, King- 
 doms, and Sovereignties, cannot be fuppofed to enjoy the feme 
 Nature of Air in all its Parts ; and the Soil alfo muft be very 
 different. The chief Commodities of thefe Dominions (as far as 
 we know of them) are Gold, Silver, Mufk, Ambergris, Rice, 
 Millet, Cattle, Lemons, Citrons, Ivory, Oil, Sugar-canes, Flax, 
 Salt, Corn, &c. 
 
 Government.] The King of Abiffinia is, orratherwas, ab- 
 solute, and his Throne hereditary ; but as he has loft much of 
 his Power and Prerogative, which the great Men of the Country 
 have ufurped, he is now frequently controuled by his Lords : 
 The eldeft Son is alfo fometimes patted by, and a younger, or an 
 illegitimate Son, advanced by the Nobility to the Imperial Dig- 
 niry : The Civil Power, however, feems ftill to be fubjett to the 
 Military. The King is moft of the Year encamped in the Field, at- 
 tended by great Numbers ofHorfeand Foot; and,as he is follow- 
 ed by his Nobility, Officers, Tradefmen, &c. the Camp is confe- 
 quently well fupplied with Provifions, and Neceflaries of all kinds. 
 The King's Tent is always pitched in the Centre of the Camp, 
 and the Nobility, and the reft of his Subjects, encamp round about 
 
 him,
 
 Chap. XXVIII. Prefent State of Ethiopia. 541 
 
 him, thofe of the loweft Rank being at the greateft Diftance from, 
 the Royal Pavilion. If the AbiJJinians have no Laws written, 
 they have, however, certain immemorial Cuftoms, by which Of- 
 fenders are punifhed according to their refpe&ive Crimes. For 
 capital Offences Criminals are beheaded, hanged, ftoned, or drub- 
 bed to Death with Clubs ; except Murderers, and thefe are put 
 into the Hands of the Relations of the murdered Perfons, who may 
 kill, torture, or make them their Slaves, as they fee fit. For 
 Theft the Offender is whipped, and, if he is able, obliged tc* 
 make Reftitution ; but Adultery is punifhed with Death. There 
 are a Multitude of Kings, or petty Sovereigns, in Loango, Congo, 
 and Angola. There are alfo many Kings or Chiefs among the 
 Hottentots. Each King or Chiefs Authority devolves upon him 
 by hereditary Succefiion: He has the Power of making Peace or 
 War, and prefides in all their Councils and Courts of Juftice: 
 He can determine nothing without the Confent of the Captains 
 of the feveral Kraals, which is a Circle of Tents or Huts, fome- 
 times called by the Europeans a Town or Village, confuting of 
 twenty or thirty Tents or Huts, and fometimes twice that Num- 
 ber, and fometimes more. The Captain of each Kraal, whole 
 Office is hereditary alfo, is their Leader in time of War, and 
 chief Magiftrate of his Kraal in time of Peace ; and, with the 
 Head of every Family, determines all civil and criminal Caufes 
 within the Kraal; only fuch Differences as happen between one 
 Kraal and another, and Matters of State, are determined by the 
 King and Senate. As they have no Notion of Writing or Let- 
 ters, they have no written Laws ; but there are fome Cuitoms, 
 from which they never deviate. Murder, Adultery, and Robbery, 
 they conftantly punifh with Death : And if a Perfon is fufpected 
 of any of thefe Crimes, the whole Kraal join in feizing and fe- 
 curing him. When the Offender is apprehended, the Captain af- 
 fcmbles the People of his Kraal in a Day or two ; who, making 
 a Ring, and fitting down upon their Heels, the Criminal is placed 
 in the Centre of them ; the Witneffes on both Sides are heard, 
 and the Prifoner fuffered to make his Defence : After which the 
 Cafe being confidered, the Captain collects the Suffrages of his 
 Judges; and, if a Majority condemn him, the Criminal is exe- 
 cuted on the Spot : The Captain ftrikes him firft with a Truncheon 
 he carries in his Hand, and then the reft of the Judges fall upon 
 him, and drub him to Death. The King, and his Council, con- 
 fining of the Captains of the Kraals, never interpofe, unlefs in 
 Matters that concern the Public, or where the Kraals are at Va- 
 riance. In this Council the King fits on his Heels in the Centre, 
 and the Captains of the Kraals fit in like manner round about 
 him ; snd this feems to b the Hottentot Senate. 
 
 4 Trade.
 
 5*2 Prefent State 0/ Ethiopia. Part H. 
 
 Trade.] The Silks, Stuffs, Calicoes, Linen, and Carpet?, the 
 JbiJJiniuns life for Clothing or Furniture, they receive chiefly 
 from the Turks, by the Way of the Red- Sea, who take the Gold 
 and Emeralds oiAbiJfiniam Return for this Merchandize. The 
 Portuguefe. have Warehoufes at Melinda in Zangmhar, Hocked 
 with all manner of European Good .-, with which they trade with 
 the Natives &r the Produce of the Country, */'*. Gold, Elephants 
 Teeth, Slaves, Oilrich-feathers, Wax, and Drugs , fuch as Sena, 
 AJoes, Guinsa Grains, Civet, Ambergris, and Frankincenfe. The 
 Fortuguefe have alio the fole Trade at Congo : They bring from 
 thence chiefly Slaves, Elephant? Teeth, Wax, and Peltry, confuting of 
 tjieSLdn^of Buffaloes, and other Eeaits; for which they give the 
 Natives, in Return all manner of Clothing made of Cotton, Li- 
 nen, or flight Stuffs, Tools, Utenfiis, j obacco, Brandy, and other 
 fyimaoufi Liquors. The Englip and H-utcb at Angola alTo barter 
 Linen, Calicoes, Slight Stuffs, Beads, Toys, Tobacco, and Brandy, 
 for Siaves, which are tranfported from thence to America. As 
 for the inland Countries of Moxomotafa and Monoemugi, &c. all 
 that we know cf them is, that the Natives fometimes bring Gold 
 and Elephants Teeth to thofe Countries that border upon the Sea, 
 and exchange them for European Goods with the Natives on the 
 Coait The Trade of the Hcttcntots is very inconfiderable : As 
 they have no xMoney, they barter one thing for another, Apply- 
 ing the Dutch with Cattle, and take Wine, Brandy, or Tobacco, 
 in Return. It feems, that an Ox may be purchased of the Hot- 
 tmtots fbr a Pound of Tobacco, and a large Sheep for half an one. 
 They kilj abundance of Elephants, and difpofe of feme of the 
 Teeth, it is thought, to the Portuguefe, and other Europeans, who 
 touch at Terra de Natal, znd other Parts of the Eaftern or 
 Weffern Coaits. 
 
 Revenues.] The Emperor of AbiJJinia\ Revenues are paid 
 in Kind, not ia Money, of which 1 cannot find they have any in 
 their Country j but then pur* Gold is one of the Articles paid 
 in kind : Part of the Revenues anfe by the Duties on Merchan- 
 dize brought from 'iurky by way of the Red-Sea : The Farmers 
 alfo pay their Monarch the thirtieth Part of all their Grain, 
 Cattle, Fruit, and Produce of their Farms every Year, by 
 which his Table, Court, and Guards, are maintained in Plenty ; 
 and every Weaver, and other Artificer, prefents him with Part of 
 his Manufacture; whereby his Servants and Officers are furniffied 
 with Clothing and other Neceffaries. Though the Hottentots 
 fliew their Chiefs or Kings great Refpect, 'tis faid, they neither 
 allow the King nor Magiitrate any Revenue ; they fubfift, as 
 4>ther Families do, upon their Stock of Cattle, and what they take 
 in Hunting. 
 
 CUARACTIR.J 
 
 r
 
 Chap. XXVIII. Prefent Slate of Ethiopia. 543 
 
 Character.] The Abijfiniatis are generally of a good Stature, 
 their Complexion a deep Black, their Features mere agreeable 
 th.n thofe of the Negroes, having neither fuch thick Lips, nor fiat 
 Nofes : They are faid to have a great deal of Vivacity, nnd natu- 
 ral Wit ; to be- of teachable Difpofitsi'on, and fond of Learning, 
 though they have but lew ( :ies of improving them- 
 
 felves. The Stature of the i :eu is rather low than 
 
 tall; their Bodies are proportionable, and well made; they are 
 feldoui either too far or lean ; and fcarce any crooked or deformed 
 Perlons amongft them, any farther th:.n they disfigure their Chil N 
 dren themfelves, by flatting and breaking the Gritlles of their 
 Nofes, looking on a flat Nofe a> a Beauty. Their Heads, as 
 well as their hyes, are rather of the largeli ; their Lips thick, 
 and their Hair black and fliort like the Negroes. As to their 
 Complexion, (after they i.ave taken a good deal of Pains, with 
 Greafe and Soot, to darjeen their natural tawny Skins) it refem- 
 bles that of die Neurits pretty much, and they have exceeding white 
 Teeth. They, are, it feems, the lazieit Generation under the 
 Sun : They will rather flarve, or eat dried Skins, or Shoe-foles 
 at Home, than hunt for their Food ; and yet, when they do ap- 
 ply themt'elves to the Chafe, or any other Exercife, no People 
 are to be found more active and dexterous than the Hottentots. 
 They ferve the Europeans with the greater! Fidelity and Appli- 
 cation, when they contrail to ferve them for Wages : They are 
 alfo exceeding generous and hofpitable ; they will fcarce ever eat 
 a Piece of Venifon, or a Difh of Fiih, or drink their beloved 
 Drams, alone; but call in their Neighbours to partake with them, 
 as far as it will go: Nor is this generous Temper confined to their 
 own Countrymen ; fox they endeavour to ihew their Hofpitalky 
 to the Europeans aBb. 
 
 Religion.] The Religion of the Abiffinians is a Mixture of 
 Chriftianity and Judaifm ; but, in their Chriftianity, they ap- 
 proach nearer the Greek than the Latin Church : They keep 
 both the Jnvi/b and Cbrijlian Sabbath, and keep each of them. 
 more like a Fait than a Feflival. As to the Natives of Zangue- 
 bar, fome of them are Mahometans, and fome Pagans. The Hot- 
 tentots believe a. Supreme Being, Creator of Heaven and Earth, and 
 all things therein ; the famous Governor of the World, thro' 
 whofc Omnipotence all things move and live : And that this Being 
 is endowed with incomprchcnfiblc Attributes and Perfections ; 
 ftyling him Gounja Gounja, or Gounja Triquoa, God ol Gods: 
 That he is good, and does nobody any Hurt, and dwells far above 
 the Moon : And yet, it feems, pay no divine Worfnip to this Su- 
 preme God; beuuie, hy they, their ifirll Parents grievoufly of- 
 fend^
 
 544 Prefent State of Ethiopia. Part II. 
 
 fended the Divine Being, who thereupon curfed them, and all 
 their Poflerity, with Hardnefs of Heart ; fo that they now know 
 little of him, and have lefs Inclination to ferve him : However, 
 they worfhip feveral fubordinate Deities, particularly the Moon ; 
 for, when it is at full, theyafTemble in great Numbers, and dance 
 in Circles, clapping their Hands, crying Ho, Ho, Ho, Ho, raifing 
 and falling their Voices, and raving all Night long : They throw 
 themfelves into furprifing Diflortions of Body, flare wildly to- 
 wards Heaven, extend every Feature, and crofs their Foreheads 
 with a red Stone. When they are fpent with the Violence of the 
 Adlion, they fquat down upon their Heels, holding their Heads 
 between their Hands, and refting their Elbows on their Knees ; 
 and after a little time they flart up again, and fall to dancing as 
 before, with all their Might. The Moon, they fay, has the Di- 
 rection of the Weather, and therefore they pray to it when it is 
 unfeafonable. They alfo worfhip a Fly about the Bignefs of an 
 Hornet : It is fcarce poffible to exprefs the Agonies thefe People 
 are in, if any European attempts to take or kill one of thefe In- 
 fers, as the Dutch wiil fometimes feem to attempt, to put the fu- 
 perftitious Natives in a Fright : They will beg and pray, and fall 
 proftrate on the Ground, to procure the Liberty of this little 
 Creature. Whenever the Hottentots fee this' Fly approach their 
 Kraal, they all afTemble about it, and fing and dance round it while 
 it remains there; and, if it happens to light upon a Tent, they 
 look upon the Owner of it for the future as a Saint, and pay him 
 more than ufual Refpeft: The bell Ox of the Kraal alfo is im- 
 mediately facrificed, to teflify their Gratitude to the little winged 
 Deity; and, to honour the Saint he has been pleafed thus to di- 
 flinguifh, they prefent him with the Entrails, the Fat and Cawl 
 of the Ox, the choiceft Morfels of the Bead in their Opinion : 
 The Cawl being twilled like a Rope, the Saint ever after wears 
 it like a Collar about his Neck Day and Night, till it putrefies, 
 and rots off; and, with the Fat, he anoints his Body from time to 
 time, till it is all fpent. Nor are the Women lefs reverenced by 
 the Neighbourhood, or intitled to the like Privileges, when the 
 adored Fly lights upon their Hut. They alfo pay a fort of Ado- 
 ration to the Souls of celebrated Saints and Heroes among their 
 Anceflors, who, when they were on Earth, were eminent for 
 their Valour, Beneficence, or other confpicuous Virtues : They 
 confecrate Fields, Mountains, Woods, and Rivers, to their Memo- 
 ry ; and when at any time they happen to pafs by fuch confe- 
 crated Ground, they put up a fhort Prayer to the fubordinate 
 Deity of the Place ; and fometimes dance round, and clap their 
 Hands, as they do in their Adorations of the Moon. But, it 
 feems, thefe celebrated People do not only pay divine Honours to 
 good, but evil Demon- : They worfhip a powerful evil Spirit, 
 
 whom
 
 Chap. XXVIII. Prtfent State of Ethiopia. 545 
 
 whom they believe the Author of all the Calamities in Life 
 and who has nothing gracious in his Nature, but rather delight* 
 in the Miferies of Mankind : They facrifice Sheep and Oxen to 
 this Being, that he may do them no Mifchief. From the Tenets 
 above-mentioned we may juftly conclude, that thefe People be- 
 lieve the Immortality of the Soul, and future Rewards and Pu- 
 nifhments : And yet, on the firft Difcovery of their Country, and 
 even till within thirty or forty Years paft, it was fo confidently 
 affirmed by Europeans, who vifited them, that they were without 
 the leaft Appearance of Religion, that mod of our Divines knew 
 not how to deny it; and only anfwered, that the Hottentots 
 Were Monfters in Nature : That as every other People appeared 
 to have fome Senfe of God and Religion ftamped upon them by 
 Nature, this one Exception ought not to affett that general Maxim, 
 That God had imprinted the Knowledge of himfelf in the Hearts 
 all Mankind. But now the Reader may be thoroughly fatisfied, 
 that the famous Hottentots are not thofe Monfters they were repre- 
 fented to us by indifcreet Authors : And fo tenacious are thefe 
 poor Pagans of their Superftitions, that all Attempts of their 
 Converfion to Chriftianity have proved in vain. But the immo- 
 ral Lives of the Europeans at the Cape do not a little contri- 
 bute to the Prejudice of the Hottentots againft the Gofpel : Thefe 
 People are not fo dull of Apprehenfion, but they can fee, that 
 the Principles and Practices of Chriftians at the Cape are dif- 
 fimilar; for even Pagans generally admire Virtue, and deteft no- 
 torious Vices j and are apt to think that Religion belt, that makes 
 the bell Men. 
 
 Customs.] The Drefs of the better Sort of the Mifiinians is* 
 Veft made of Silk, Stuff, or Cotton, after the 
 manner of the Franks in Turkey ; but the poorer Abiffini- 
 People go almoft naked, having only a fmall Piece ans Dreft4 
 of Skin, or coarfe Stuff, wrapped about their Waifts. 
 They eat all manner of Flefh almoft as the Euro- Diet. 
 peons do, except Swines Flefh, and fuch other Meats 
 as were prohibited to the^Vccr; they alfo abftain from things 
 flrangled, and from Blood, killing their Meat in the fame Man- 
 ner the Jews do. Their ufual Drink is Mead, or Metheglin, 
 the Country abounding in Honey. They have alfo Liquors 
 made of Wheat and Rjce, and their Princes drink fome Wine ; 
 but they do not feem to be well fkilled in making this Liquor, 
 though they have the fineft Grapes in the World. 
 Their Marriages are no more than Contracts before Mar- 
 Friends, which are, however, blelTed afterwards by riaget. 
 the Prieft; but this is, it feems, where a Perfon con- 
 fines bunftlf to one Wife * for though their Religion prohibits 
 
 N a ' Poly-
 
 546 Prefent Stan of Ethiopia. Part II. 
 
 Polygamy, yet their Emperor has an Hundred at leaft ; and their 
 great Men as many Wives as they think fit, or rather as many 
 as they can maintain. They feem aftonifhed, and 
 Funerals. make great Howlings and Lamentations on hearing 
 of the Death of their Friends, or any great Man. 
 The Corpfe, being perfumed, and wrapped up in a Cloth, is car- 
 ried to the Burying-place by fome of the Clergy, who read over 
 fome PafTages out of the Pfalms on the Occafion ; after which 
 it is laid iato the Grave without a Coffin. The Relations and 
 Friends of the Deceafed mourn for fome time afterwards in Rags or 
 tattered Cloaths, imagining a poor neglefted Drefs bell exprefies 
 their Sorrow for their deceafed Friends j and this feems to have 
 been the general Cuftom of the Antients, who, upon any melan- 
 choly Occafion, rent their Cloaths, or at leaft put on fuch as were 
 fo. The Hottentot Men cover their Heads with 
 Hottonr Handfuls of Greafe and Soot mixed together ; and, 
 tots Drefs. going without any thing elfe on their Heads in Sum- 
 mer-time, the Duft fticks to it, and makes them 
 a very filthy Cap ; which, they fay, cools them, and preferves 
 their Heads from the fcorching Heat of the Sun : And, in Win- 
 ter, they wear flat Caps of Cat-fkin or Lamb-fkin, half dried, 
 which they tie with a Thong of the fame Leather under their 
 Chins. The Men alfo wear a Mantle made of a Sheep-fkin, or 
 other Skin, over their Shoulders, which reaches to the middle : 
 In Winter they turn the woolly or hairy Sides next their Flefli, 
 and in Summer the other. They wear a greafy Pouch about their 
 Necks, in which are kept a Knife, Pipe, and Tobacco, and fome 
 Dacha, which intoxicates like Tobacco, and a little Piece of 
 Wood burnt at both Ends, as a Charm againft Witchcraft : He 
 wears alfo three large Ivory Rings on his Left Arm, to which he 
 faftens a Bag of Provifions when he travels, carrying then a Stick 
 blunt at both Ends, and about three Feet long, alio a Dart, to 
 throw at an Enemy, or wild Beaft ; which he feldom miffes, if 
 he be within Diftance. There is another thing peculiar to the 
 Men ; and that is, the Bladder of any wild Beaft they have killed, 
 being blown up, is fattened to the Hair, as a Trophy of their 
 Valour. The Women wear Caps, the Crowns whereof are a 
 little raifed; and thefe are made alfo of half-dried Skins, and tied 
 ender their Chins: They fcarce put them off Night or Day, 
 Winter or Summer : They ufually wear two Mantles, one upon 
 another, made of Sheep-fkins, or other Skins, which are fome- 
 times bordered with a Fringe of raw Leather j and as thefe are 
 only fattened with Thongs about their Necks, they appear naked 
 down to the middle ; but they have an Apron larger than that 
 of the Mens, to cover them before, and another, of ftill larger 
 Dimenfions, to cover their Back-fides. About their Legs they 
 
 wrap
 
 Chap.&XVIII. Prefent State of Ethiopia." 547 
 
 wrap Thongs of half-dried Skins, to the Thicknefs of a Jack- 
 boot, which are fuch a Load to them, that they lift up their Legs 
 with Difficulty, and walk v&ry much like a Trooper in Jack- 
 boots. They ferve for Diftindtion of Sex, and Ornament > but 
 this is not all their Finery ; for, if they are Women of any Fi- 
 gure, inftead of Sheep- {kins, they wear a Tyger-flcin, or a 
 Mantle made of wild Cat-fkins : They have alfo a Pouch hang- 
 ing about their Necks, in which they carry fomething to eat, 
 whether they are at Home or Abroad, with their Ducla, To- 
 bacco, and Pipe. The Arms of both Men and Women are fome- 
 times covered with Bracelets made of Glafs or Brafs Beads, from 
 the Wrift to the Elbow. As Part of their Drefs, or Ornament, 
 we may reckon the Cultom of daubing their Bodies, and the In- 
 fide of their Caps and Mantles, with Greafe and Soot ; for, from 
 their Infancy, and almoft every Day of their Lives after, they 
 pradtife this, not only to render them of a deeper Black, but to 
 make their Limbs pliable and fupple. Nor are they 
 more cleanly in their Diet, than in their Drefs ; for Diet. 
 they chufe the Guts and Entrails of Cattle, and of 
 fome wild Beafts, with very little cleanfing, rather than the reft of 
 the Fleffi, and eat their Meat half-boiled in the Blood of the 
 Beaft, or broiled} but their principal Food confifts of Roots, 
 Herbs, and Fruits : They feldom kill any of their Cattle, unlefs at 
 a Feftival ; they only feed on fuch as die of old Age, or Difeafes, 
 or what they take in Hunting : And, when they are hard put to 
 it, they will eat the raw Leather that is wound about the Wo- 
 mens Legs, and even the Soles of Shoes j and, as the Mantles of 
 the poorer Sort are always well ftocked with Lice of an unufual 
 Size, they are not afhamed to fit down in the public Streets at 
 the Cape, pull off the Lice, and eat them. The ufual Drink of 
 thefe People is Cows Milk, and the Women fometimes drink 
 Ewes Milk ; but this the Men never touch : And, fince the Arri- 
 val of the Europeans amongft them, the Natives are 
 very fond of Wine, Brandy, and other fpirituous Li- Fumiturt, 
 quors. Their Furniture confifts of little more than 
 their Mantles, which they lie on, fome other Skins of wild 
 Beafts they have killed, or purchafed, an earthen Pot they boil 
 their Meat in, their Arms, and perhaps fome other 
 trivial Utenfils. As to the Marriages of thefe People, May 
 every young Fellow has fuch a Regard to the Advice riagei. 
 of his Father, or rather the Cuftoms of the Country 
 require it, that he always confults the old Man, before he enters 
 into any Treaty with his Miftrefs. And, when the Match is 
 approved of on all Sides, the young People retire together, and, 
 without any farther Ceremony, become Man and Wife. The 
 next Day chc Bridegroom kills a fat Ox, or more, according to 
 
 Nn a Jm
 
 54* Prefent State of Ethiopia. Part II m 
 
 his Circumftances, for the Wedding Dinner, and the Entertain- 
 ment of their Friends, who refort to them on this Occafion, 
 bringing abundance of good Wifhes for the Happinefs of the 
 married Couple, as is ufual in politer Countries. The Ox is no 
 fooner killed, but all the Company get fome of the Fat, and 
 greafe themfelves with it from Head to Foot, powdering them- 
 felves afterwards with a Duff, they call Bacbu ; and the Women, 
 to add to their Charms, make red Spots on their black Faces, 
 with a red Earth or Stone, which is thought to add to their 
 Beauty by the Natives; but, in the Eyes of Europeans, ren- 
 der them more frightful and mocking than they naturally are. 
 The Entertainment being ready, the Men form one Circle in the 
 Kraal, and the Women another , the Bridegroom fitting in the 
 middle of the Mens Circle, and the Bride in the Centre of that 
 of her own Sex. The Prieft, as he is called, enters the Mens 
 Circle, and p- s upon the Bridegroom, which the young Man 
 rubs in very joyfully : Then the old Fellow goes to the Ladies 
 Circle, where he does the Bride the fame Favour, and fhe 
 rubs in the Urine in the like manners And thus he goes from 
 the Bride to the Bridegroom, till he has exhaufted all his 
 Store, bellowing on them many good Wifhes all the time ; as, 
 *' That they may live long and happily together j that they 
 " may have a Son before the Year's End ; and that he may prove 
 " a brave Fellow, and an expert Huntfman, and the like." Af- 
 ter which the Meat is ferved up in Earthen Pots glaz'd with 
 Greafe ; and the greateft Part of them make ufe of their Teeth 
 and Claws, pulling it to pieces, and eating as voracioufly as fo 
 many Dogs ; having no other Plates or Napkins, than the {link- 
 ing Corners of the Mantles they wear. When the Feaft is over, 
 each Circle lights a Pipe of Tobacco, which is handed round, and, 
 when that is out, another : Thus they continue fmoking, and 
 talking merrily on the Occafion, till towards Break of Day, 
 when the Company difperfe. As there are no great Fortunes 
 amortgft them, they match purely for Love ; an agreeable For- 
 tune is all their greateft Men aim at ; for they intermarry fre- 
 quently with the pooreft Mens Daughters ; and a brave Fellow, 
 who has no Fortune, does not defpair of matching with the 
 Daughter of a Prince ; for, it feems, Merit is much regarded 
 here. They allow of Polygamy, but feldom have more than 
 three Wives at a time If a Woman brings a Son into the 
 World, there is great Rejoicing, and they kill a Bullock, and 
 make an Entertainment for all their Neighbourhood, who con- 
 gratulate the Parents on their good Fortune. But the firft thing 
 they do with the Child, is to daub it all over with Cow-dung ; 
 then they lay it before the Fire, or in the Sun, till the Dung is 
 dried j after which they rub it off, and wafb, the Child with the 
 
 Juice
 
 Chap. XXVIII. Prefent State of Ethiopia. 549 
 
 Juice of certain Herbs laying it in the Sun, or before the Fire 
 again, till the Liquor is dried in ; after which they anoint the 
 Child from Head to Foot with Butter, or Sheep's Fat melted, 
 which is dried in as the Juice was : And this Cullom of anoint- 
 ing their Bodies they retain afterwards as long as they live, as 
 was faid before. If a Woman has Twins, and they 
 are Girls, the Man propofes it to the Kraal, that he Children 
 may expofe one of them, upon Pretence of Poverty, expafed. 
 or that his Wife has not Milk for them both ; and 
 this they ufually indulge one another in : They do the fame when 
 they have a Boy and a Girl ; but they always preferve the Boys, 
 though they happen to have two at a Birth. The Child to be 
 expofed, is carried to fome Cave, or left in fome Thicket, or tied 
 upon the lower Bough of a Tree, where it is either llarved to 
 Death, or deftroyed by wild Beafts. A Widow, 
 who marries a fecond time, is obliged to cut off a Widows, 
 Joint of one of her Fingers ; and fo for every Huf- 
 band after the firft. The Hottentot, who kills a Lion, Leo- 
 pard, or Tyger, fingly, has the higheit Honour conferred on 
 him, and feveral Privileges, which belong only to fuch intrepid 
 Heroes. At his Return from his hazardous and important Ser- 
 vice, the Men of the Kraal depute one of the Se- 
 niors to congratulate him on his Victory, and de- Heroes. 
 fire that he will honour them with his Prefence : 
 Whereupon he follows the old Deputy to the-Affembly, whom 
 he finds, according to Cuftom, fitting upon their Heels in a 
 Circle; and, a Mat of Diltinclion being laid for him in the Cen- 
 tre, he fets himfelfdown upon it: After which the old Deputy 
 p s plentifully upon him, which the Hero rubs in with great 
 Eagernefs, having firlt feraped the Greafe oft* his Skin with his 
 Nails ; the Deputy all the while pronouncing fome Words un- 
 intelligible to any but themfelves. After this they light a Pipe 
 of Tobacco, which they fmoke, and hand one to another, till 
 there remains nothing but A(hes in the Pipe ; and thefe the old 
 Deputy ftrews over the gallant Man, who rubs them in as fall as 
 they fall upon him, not {'uttering the leaft Duft to be loll : After 
 which his Neighbours having feverally congratulated him upon his 
 Advancement to this high Honour, they difperfe, and go to their 
 refpedlive Tents. The Conqueror, from that Time, by every one is 
 efteemed a brave Man, and a Bemfaftor to his Country ; and his 
 Neighbours feem to llrive with each other, who fhall oblige 
 him mod; and are, for the next three Days, continually fending 
 him one delicious Mcrftl or other, But, what is yet more extra- 
 ordinary, his Wife, or Wives, are not permitted to come near 
 him for three Days after this Honour is conferred on him ; but 
 arc forced to ramble about the I ield^ during that Time ; and, at 
 
 In in 3 the
 
 $$o Prefent State of Ethiopia. Part II. 
 
 the Expiration of it, they return to the Tent, and are received 
 with the utmoft Joy and Tendernefs ; mutual Congratulations 
 pafs between them ; a fat Sheep is killed, and the Neighbours 
 invited to the Feaft, where the Prowefs of the Hero, with the 
 Honour he has obtained, is the chief Subject of the 
 Entertain- Converfation. At theremoving of the Kraal, or Camp, 
 ments, or which they always do upon the Death of any Per- 
 Sacrifces. fon, or for the Advantage of frefh Pafture and Wa- 
 ter, the Men facrifice a Sheep, and eat it up among 
 themfelves, allowing the Wives only the Soup ; and, when they 
 come to a new Camp, or Kraal, the Women alfo facrifice a 
 Sheep, eating it up among themfelves, fending the Hufbands on- 
 ly the Broth or Soup. When the Father of a Family is be-v 
 come perfectly ufelefs, and fuperannuated, he is obliged, it feems, 
 to affign over his Flock of Cattle, and every thing elfe he has 
 p ' in the World, to his eldeft Son, or his next Heir 
 
 xtofed MalC : Aftef Which the Heir erefts a Tent ' 0r Hat * 
 
 expoje . j p ^ ome un f re q Uentec j pi ace> a g 00( j Diitance from 
 
 the Kraal, or Camp, he belongs to j and, having affembled the 
 Men of the Kraal, acquaints them with the Condition of the old 
 Man, and defires their Confent to expofe him in the diftantHut; 
 to which the Kraal fcarce ever refufe their Confent. A Day 
 being appointed to carry the old Man to his folitary Tent, the 
 Heir kills an Ox, and two or three Sheep, and invites the 
 whole Kraal to feaft and be merry with him ; and, at the 
 End of the Entertainment, all the Neighbourhood come, and 
 take a formal Leave of the old Wretch, thus condemned to be 
 ilarved, or devoured by wild Beafts. Then the old Creature is 
 laid upon one of their Carriage-oxen, and carried to his laft 
 Home, attended to the Place, wheere he is to be buried alive, 
 by moft of his Neighbours. The poor Mortal being taken 
 down, and fet in the middle of the Hut provided for him, the 
 Company return to their Kraal, and the old Man never fees 
 the Face of a human Creature afterwards, and is no more 
 thought of by his Relations, than if he had never been. They 
 deal in the fame manner by a fuperannuated Mother, or Female 
 Relation ; only fhe has not the Trouble of affigning her Ef- 
 fects to her Son, or Relations; for, by their Cuftom, fhe has 
 nothing fhe can call her own. The Reafon thefe People give 
 for this, to us, cruel Cuftom, is, that it would be much more 
 barbarous to fuffer an old Creature to languifh out a miferable 
 life, and be many Years a dying, than to make this quick 
 Difpatch With them; and that it is out of extreme Tendernefs 
 
 they put an End to the Lives of thefe old 
 Funcrah. Wretches, in the manner above related. As to thofe 
 
 who die a natural Death, the fick MaB, having refign'4 
 
 his
 
 Chap. XXVIII. Prcfint State of Ethiopia. 551- 
 
 his Breath, is immediately bundled up, Neck and Heels toge- 
 ther, in his Sheep- fliin Mantle exceeding cloie, fo that no Part or 
 the Corpfe appears : Then the Captain of the Kraal, .with i fome 
 of the Seniors, fearches the neighbouring Country for fome Cavity 
 in the Rock, or the Den of a wild Beau, to bury It in, nevr 
 digging a Grave, if they can find one of thefe at a moderate^ 
 DTitance. After which, the whole Kraal, Men and Women; 
 prepare to attend the Corpfe, feldom permitting it to remain 
 above ground more than fix Hours. When all things are rea^ 
 dy all the Neighbourhood afiemble before the Door of the Dt*. 
 ceafed, the Men fitting down upon their Heels in one Circle, 
 and refting their Elbows on their Knees, as the Women do in an- 
 other Then they clap their Hand?, and howl, crying, bo, to, 
 bo ' lamenting their Lofs. The Corpfe is then carried to the 
 Grave, attended by the Men and Women in different Parties, 
 crying as above, wringing their Hands, and performing a thou' 
 fand ridiculous Gdlures and Grimaces. Having put the Corpfe 
 in the Cavity, and flopped it up, the Company rendezvous again 
 before the Hut of the Deceafed, where they repeat their Howl- 
 it*, and frequently call upon the Name of their departed Friend. 
 After which two of the eldeft Men get up, and, one of them 
 E oing into the Circle of the Men, and the other into the Circle 
 
 of the Women, p ft upon every one of the Company ; and, 
 
 where the Kraals are large, they appoint double ot treble the 
 Number of old Men to perform this Ceremony. The oW Men 
 go into the Tent of the Deceafed, and, having taken up fome 
 Afhes from the Fire-place, they fprinkle them upon the Bodies 
 of the People, bleffing them as they go. The Ceremony al- 
 ways concludes with an Entertainment, if the Deceafed had any 
 Cattle ; and the Relations wear the Cawls of Sheep about their 
 Necks for their Mourning, the Heir being obliged to wear his, 
 till it rots oft*. 
 
 CuaiosiTiES.] In the Mountains ofGojame is a great natural 
 hollow Rock ; oppofite to which is another fo fituated, thaf, tis 
 faid, a Word only, whifpered on its Top, is heatd at a confi- 
 derable Diftance ; and the joint Voices, of feveral Perfons, fpeak- 
 ing at once, appear as loud as a great Shout ot a numerous 
 Anny. 
 
 N 4 
 
 CHAP,
 
 $Z Prefent State of the African Ides.- Part II, 
 
 CHAP. XXIX. 
 
 The Prefent State of the African Ifles. 
 
 SiTUATioN.j'TpHE chief of the African Iflands are the Azo- 
 X res, the Madeira, the Canary Iflands, the 
 Jfland of Cape Verd, the Ifland of Afcenfon, St. Helena, St. Mat- 
 thew, Annaboa, St. Thomas, Princes Ifland, and the Ifland of 
 Fernando Po ; all thefe lie on the North-weft and South-weft of 
 Africa: Alfo Badmandal, Zocotara, the Iflands of Comorro % 
 Prince Maurice" 1 *. Ifland, or the Mauritius, the Ifland of Bourbon^ 
 and that of Madagafcar ; all which lie in the Indian Ocean Eaft- 
 ward of the Continent of Africa. But the Iflands meafured arc 
 as in the following Table. 
 
 Iflands 
 meafured. 
 
 Madagafcar 
 
 Zocotara 
 
 Bourbon 
 
 St. Maurice 
 
 Joanna 
 
 St. Helena 
 
 St. Iago 
 
 Teneriff 
 
 Madeira 
 
 St. Michael 
 
 Tercera 
 
 Square 
 Miles. 
 
 Di fiance 
 from Lond on 
 in Leagues. 
 
 ! 
 
 Longitude 
 
 68,000 
 
 2721 
 
 E 44. 20 
 
 3600 
 
 3332 
 
 E5 2 ' 35 
 
 2100 
 
 2812 
 
 E S3- 
 
 1840 
 
 676 
 
 80 
 
 2860 
 2800 
 1522 
 
 Ess- 4 
 E44. 30 
 W 6. 25 
 
 1400 
 1272 
 
 862 
 582 
 
 W23. s5 
 W 17. 19 
 
 950 
 
 500 
 
 W 16. 2s 
 
 920 
 680 
 
 480 
 510 
 
 W 25. 40 
 
 W28. 15 
 
 Latitude. 
 
 40 
 
 2 5 
 
 S ,5 
 
 N12 
 
 S 21. 
 
 S 20. 
 
 S 12. 20 
 
 S 16. 
 
 NI5. 
 N28. 
 
 N 32. 31 
 N 37. so 
 N 38. 50 
 
 Climate.] Madagafcar is a fruitful Country, abounding in 
 
 Cattle, Corn, Fifli, Fowl, Herbs, Roots, and Flow- 
 
 Mada- ers ; and almoft all manner of Animals and Vege- 
 
 gafcar. tables, that are to be found on the neighbouring 
 
 Continent of Africa, may be met with here. "As to 
 
 the Face of the Country, it is univerfally agreed, that it affords 
 
 a pleafing Variety of Hills and Valleys, Woods and Champagne, 
 
 and is well watered with Springs and Rivers ; and that there are 
 
 feveral good Harbours on the Coaft. But ftill it is found not to 
 
 produce any kind of Merchandize, which can induce any one 
 
 jLuropean Nation to attempt the Conqueft of it, or fix any con- 
 
 fiderable
 
 Chap. XXIX. Prefent State of the African Ifies. $$$ 
 
 fiderable Colonies here. Bourbon is finely diverfified Bourbon. 
 withiMountains and Plains, Forcib and champagne 
 Fields- It has Plenty of Wood and Water, and a fruitful Soil, 
 except'one Part of the Ifland, which has been burnt up, and ren- 
 dered barren, by a Volcano, or fubterraneo us Fires. I his , ifland 
 produces Black Cattle, Hogs, Goats Tortoiies, tame and wild 
 Fowls, Oranges, and Lemons, and other Jru.ts, 
 Roots and Herbs. The Mauritius abounds in Tht Mau- 
 Woods of various kinds, particularly Ebony. There ritius. 
 are alfo abundance of very high Mountains, from 
 whence their Rivers fall in Torrents The Soi Uoes no fcem 
 proper for Corn or Wine ; however, Rice and Pulfe, Sugar-canes 
 and Tobacco, are raifed here, though in no great 
 Quantities. The Ifland of Jcama, one of the Iflands Joanna, 
 of Comorro, the molt freque ,ted by the Europeans, 
 produces great Plenty of Black Cattle, and Goats , fowls, *K* 
 Potatoes, Honey, Wax, Oranges Lemons Pine-apples, Cocoa- 
 nuts, and other Fruits. Notwithftanding St. He- 
 lena, on every Side, appears to be a hard barren St.Helena. 
 Rock, yet, on the Top, it is covered with a fine 
 Earth a Foot or a Foot and a half deep, which produces al 
 manner of Grain, Grafs, Fruits, Herbs, Roots, and Garden-ituff, 
 And the County, beyond the Afcent of the Reck, is prettily 
 diverfified with ruing Hills and Plains, adorned with H-tations 
 of Fruit-trees and Kitchen-gardens, among which the Houfes 
 of the Inhabitants are interfperfed : 1 hey abound in Cattle 
 Hogs, Goats, Turkeys, and all manner of Poultry ; and their 
 Seaf are very well flored with Fifli. But the Misfortune is 
 they have neither Bread nor Wine of their own Growth i for 
 though the Soil is extremely proper for Wheat yet the Rats 
 which harbour in the Rocks, and cannot be dcttroyed, eat up 
 all the Seed, before the Grain is well out of the Ground: And 
 though their Vines fiourim, and afford them Grapes enough yet 
 the Latitude is too hot for making W.nc; for, it feems, neither 
 cold nor very hot Countries agree with this Liquor. 
 St Iavo is rocky and mountainous; but the Valleys St. Iago. 
 produce Indian Corn, Cocoa-nuts, Oranges, and fuch 
 other Fruits, Plants, and Roots, as are common to hot Countries, 
 alfo Hogs, Goats, and Poultry, in great abundance. 
 Tenerif affords Corn, Wine, and Fruits, in great Tenenff. 
 abundance, though 'tis pretty much encumbered 
 with Rocks and Mountains. Madeira confitts of fine Madeira, 
 rifing Hills, and fruitful Valleys, well watered by the 
 Rivulets, which fall from the Mountains though abounding 
 much more in Wine, than Corn. The Climate here much 
 W pre temperate than that of the Canaries ; but they do not en-
 
 554 PrefetU State cfthe African Iflcs. Part'II. 
 
 joy fo clear a Sky, or that Plenty of Corn and 
 St. Mi- Fruits. The Hand of St. Michael is pretty moun- 
 chael. tainous, but produces Plenty of Corn, Fruits, Cat- 
 
 tle, Filh, and Fowl, and they have a thin Sort of 
 Tercera. . Wine ; their greateft Wants are Oil and Salt. Ter- 
 cera is alfo pretty much incumbered with Rocks 
 and Mountains ; but affords, however, Plenty of good Corn, 
 Pafture, and an excellent Breed of Cattle ; and has alfo pretty 
 many Vineyards. 
 
 Government.] Madaga/carh divided amongft feveral petty 
 Princes, or Monarchs, who are continually at War 
 Mada- among themfelves about their Cattle and Slaves, yet 
 
 gafcar. unanimous enough to defend themfelves from the 
 
 Invafion of Strangers. However, it feems, this 
 Country would be an eafy Conqucft, did its Soil produce any 
 thing to incite the Avarice or Ambition of the Eu- 
 Eourbon. ropean Powers to attempt it. The French took Pof- 
 feffion of Bourbon in the Year 1654. and left fome 
 few People and Slaves there, who afterwards came away in an 
 Englijh Ship j however, the French ftill lay Claim 
 Joanna. to the I Hand. The Natives of 'Joanna lie under a 
 Monarchical Govcrnmet j from which, it feems, the 
 Females are not excluded. Their Kings do not take State upon 
 them, but convcrfe familiarly with their Subje&s, 
 The Mau- and Foreigners. The Dutch, who are in PofTefhon 
 ritius. of the Mauritius, found this Ifland uninhabited, and 
 
 confequently uncultivated ; nor was there any other 
 Badman- Cattle upon it but Deer and Goats. The Ethiopians 
 del. and Arabians formerly contended with great Fury 
 
 for the Poffeffion of Badmandel, commanding the 
 Entrance into the RedSm, and confequently a Place of great 
 Importance i But, fince the Turks have poffeffed themfelves of both 
 Shores, the Ifland is in a manner deferted. The 
 Cape Verd Iflands of Cafe Verd* at their firft Difcovery, being 
 IJlands. deftitute of Inhabitants, were peopled by the Difco- 
 vcrers the Portuguefe, and at prefent belong to the 
 Crown of Portugal, and are ruled by a particular Governor, who 
 Commonly refides in the Ifland of St. lago. The Canary 
 ^ Iflands belong to the King of Spain, who always 
 
 Vanary keeps a Governor in Canaria. The Madeira is fub- 
 
 4/Iaxds. j e tQ t j ie rovvn f p or t H gal t and is ruled by a 
 Madeira. particular Deputy ,, whofe Place of Refidence is com- 
 monly at PcnzaJ. The Azores^ being inhabited and 
 poffeffed by the Portuguefe, are fubjeft to the Crown of P-ortugal % 
 and ruled by a particular Governor fent from that Court* who 
 commonly refides at dngra in Tercera*. Trade. ^
 
 Chap. XXIX. Prefent State of the African Ifles. $5$ 
 
 Trade.] The Englijh, Dutch, and French, have fucceflively 
 endeavoured to difcover fomething that might turn to Account in 
 Madagafcar : They were long amufed with Hopes, that there 
 were Gold and Silver Mines in the lfland ; but there Teems to be 
 little Expectation of finding thefe tempting Minerals, or the pre- 
 cious Stones, in any Quantity, that Travellers talk fomuch of. VVe 
 purchafe fcarce any thing but Negro Slaves ; the fe- 
 vered Tribes, being frequently at War with each other, Mada- 
 make Slaves of their Prifoners, whom they barter gafcar. 
 away, and exchange with fuch European Merchants 
 as vifit their Coalt, for Clothing, Strong Liquors, and fuch 
 Utenfils and Neceffhries as they want, and Toys. Here the Ship- 
 ping, bound to and from India, fometimes furnifh themfelveS^ 
 with Water, frefh Provifions, and Fruits. The European Ships 
 formerly ufed to put in to Zocotara, when they were difappointed of 
 their Paflage to India by the Monfons : But this feldom happens 
 now, our Mariners are fo well acquainted with the Winds and 
 Seafons in this Part of the World. The lfland, among the Co* 
 mono Iflands, the beft known to the Europeans, is Joanna, where 
 Ships touch for Refrefhment, in their Paflage to Bombay, and the 
 Malabar Coafts of India. The Hollanders touch at the Mauri" 
 tins in their Paflage from the Cape to Batamia ; and as neither 
 of thefe Colonies abound in good Timber, it is probable they are 
 fupplied with it at the Mauritius. The Dutch, before they were 
 Mafters of the Cape, had no other 'Bating-place between Europe 
 and India, than the lfland of Mauritius ; which, it feems, was the 
 only Reafon for feizing that lfland, which was uninhabited, and 
 therefore uncultivated. The French alfo call at Bourbon to take 
 in frefh Provifions, fuch as Black Cattle, Hogs, Goats, Tortoifes, 
 tame and wild Fowl, tiff. St. Helena was difcovered in 1502. 
 by the Portuguese, and ftored with Hogs, Goats, and Poultry, 
 and was the Place they ufed to touch at for Water, and frefh. Pro- 
 vifions, in their long Voyages to the Eaji-Indies : The Englijb, 
 having Pofleflion of it now, ufe it for the fame Purpofe. We 
 have obferved, that the lfland, on every Side, appears tQ be ai\ 
 high fteep Rock, and that the Country, beyond the Afcent of the 
 Precipice, is prettily diverfified with rifing Hills and Plains, 
 adorned with Plantations, among which the Houfesof the Native* 
 are interfperfed. The Natives fcarce ever come down to the 
 Town, where the Landing-place is, unlefs it be when the Ship- 
 ping arrive ; then almoft every Hpufe is converted into a Punch- 
 houfe, or Lodgings for their Gueits, to whom they fell their 
 poultry, Cattle, &c. and receive of the Europeans Brandy, Wine, 
 Arrack, Malt, Beer, Sugar, Tea, Coffee, China and Japan. 
 Ware, Linen, Woollen Cloth and Stuffs, &V. It feems, there is 
 1 <*
 
 $6 Prefent State of the African IQes. Part It. 
 
 no Sailing to this Ifland dire&ly from the Northward, the Winds 
 always blowing from the South-eaft in thofe Seas. When a Ship 
 therefore is fent from England to St. Helena, it firft fails as far 
 Southward as the Cape of Good Hope, and then returns to St. He- 
 lena, there being no Anchorage any-where about the Ifland, but 
 at a Place called Chapel-Valley-Bay ; and as the Wind always fets 
 from the South-eaft, if a Ship overfhoots the Ifland never fo 
 Ettle, fhe cannot recover it again. It is, I find, an exceeding 
 pleafant Voyage from the Cape to St. Helena, and performed in 
 about three Weeks, without handling a Sail, or giving the lead 
 Trouble fo the Seamen. The Portuguefe ufually call at the Ifland 
 of Fernando Po, or fome of the Iflands in the Gulph of Guinea, 
 for Refreftiment in their Voyages to and from India, and in their 
 Paflage from Brazil to Africa. The Englijb Shipping ufually 
 refort to St. lago for Water, and frefh ProVifions, in their Voyages 
 outward-bound to the Eajl-Indie ; and are fupplied with Hogs, 
 Goats, and Poultry, in great Abundance. It may be obferved 
 alfo, that abundance of Englijb Ships call at the Iflands of Sal and 
 
 Mago, (belonging to Cape Verd Iflands) in their 
 Canary Way to our Plantations in America for Salt. As to 
 
 Iflands and the Trade of the Canary Iflands, it chiefly confifts in 
 Madeira. Wine, ufually called Sack, and fome Skins ; for which 
 
 they receive Woollen Goods, &c. for what Wine the 
 Englifo take of them, which, fome talk, is 10,000 Hogfheads an- 
 nually. The Inhabitants of Madeira ufually export to Europe, or 
 the Wejl-Indies, feveral Thoufands of Hogfheads ; and, in Return, 
 they have the Merchandize of Europe. 
 
 Character.] The Inhabitants of the Comorro Iflands are a very 
 plain inoffenfive People; but do not abound in Wealth, and fcarce 
 know the ftfe of Arms, or what War means. The Natives of 
 Madaga/car, in the Inland Parts, are generally Negroes, like thofij 
 on the neighbouring Continent; but there are both white Men 
 and Mulattoes upon the Coaft, who fpeak Arabic, and are fup- 
 pofed to come from. Arabia. The Natives of the Ifland are re- 
 ported to be but a very indifferent fort of People. There is no 
 Place out of England, where the Natives have fuch frefh, ruddy 
 Complexions, and robuft Conftitutions, as are to be met with in 
 St. Helena ; which may be afcribed to the following Caufes ; 
 They live on the Top of a Mountain, always open to the Sea- 
 breezes, that conftantly blow here ; they are ufually employed in 
 the moft healthful Exercifes of Gardening and Hufbandry, and 
 their Ifland is frequently refrefhed with moderate cooling Show- 
 ers, and there are no Fens or Salt-marfhcs about it to annoy 
 them : They are ufed alfo to climb the fleep Hill between 1 he 
 Town in Chanel-Valley, or where the Ships lie, and their plan,* 
 
 tations j
 
 Chap. XXIX. Vrefent State of the African Ifles. 55 f 
 
 tations ; fo that they feldom want good Air, and Exercife, the 
 great Prefer<vers of Health. They are faid to be the honeitell, 
 rhe molt inoffenfive, and hofpitable People to be met with, in fo- 
 reign Parts, of Englijh Extraction ; having fcarce any Tincture of 
 Avarice or Ambition. There are fcarce any rich Men amongft 
 them, and there are no Poor in the Ifland ; no Man worth more 
 that 1000 Dollars, or worth lefs than 400, and confequently not 
 obliged to undergo more Labour than what is neceflary to keep 
 them in Health. To conclude : Thefe People ftill retain the old 
 Englijh Hofpitality and Sincerity, the unaffected Simplicity and 
 Benevolence, for which our Country is remarkable. As to the 
 Character of the Inhabitants of Cape Verd Ifland?, the Canary 
 Iflands, Madeira, the Azores, fee the Manners of thole on the re- 
 fpective Parts of the Continent. 
 
 Religion.] The Religion of the Natives of Madaga/car is a 
 Mixture of Mahomet anifm, Judaifm, and Paganifm. But thought 
 they retain Circumcifion, and fome other of the Mahometan Rites, 
 thofe who have vifited the Ifland relate, they have no Mofques, 
 or Temples, or any regular public Worfliip, though they ac- 
 knowledge a Deity, and perform fome Ads of Adoration. The 
 Religion of the other Iflands above-mentioned is the fame with 
 that profefTed by the People thefe Iflands are fubjecl to. 
 
 Customs.] As to the Drefs of the Natives of Madaga/car, 
 they feldom wear any other Clothing than a Piece of Cotton, 
 Calico, or Linen Cloth, about their Waifts, adorning their Arms 
 with Bracelets, their Necks with Necklaces, and their Hair with 
 fome glittering Trifles. 
 
 Curiosities.] The Ifle of Teneriff is remarkable for its pro- 
 digious Pike, which is thought by curious Naturalilts, to have 
 been raifed by fome terrible Conflagration in Nature. It is faid, 
 that the lop of it, which is in the Form of a Sugar-loaf, may 
 be feen plainly above the Clouds at 1 20 Miles Diftance. My 
 Author affirms, that after twenty-four Hours Sail from it, with 
 a brifk Gale of Wind, he faw it with the naked Eye, as plainly 
 as if it had lain within half a Mile of him. By all Accounts it is 
 a furprifing Heap in Confufion : Broken and calcin'd Rocks he 
 three or four Miles round the Bottom of this amazing Ruin. 
 
 CHAP.
 
 5^8 Prefent State of the Britifh Part ft. 
 
 CHAP. XXX. 
 
 The Prefent State of the Britifh Empire in America, 
 
 BEFORE I proceed to the Particulars of this Chapter, X fhall 
 prefent my young Reader with a fhort Account of the Dif 
 covery of America by the Spaniards. 
 
 Chriflopher Columbus, a "Native of the State of Genoa , 
 was in fevcral Sea-Engagements againft the Turks, the Vene' 
 tians, and other Nations ; in one of which, the Ship he was 
 in being burnt near the Coaft of Portugal, he had the good 
 Fortune to efcape to Shore upon a Plank ,- and, coming to Li/bon t 
 found feveral of his Countrymen and Acquaintance 
 T>ifco<very fettled in that City } with whom he refided fome 
 of Ame- time, and afterwards made feveral Voyages with the 
 rica. Portuguefe to the North and South, and particularly 
 
 to Guinea on the Coaft of Africa. He apply'd him- 
 felf chiefly to the Study of Cofmography, Aftronomy, and Geo- 
 graphy ; and, from his Youth, appeared to have a more than 
 common Paflion to underftand the State of all Countries upon the 
 Face of the Globe, and to make new Difcoveries ; which probably 
 was his Reafon for fettling at Lijbon, no Nation having pufhed 
 their Difcoveries farther than the Portuguefe at that Time. And 
 here he was perpetually drawing Maps and Charts, in which he 
 received great Encouragement from that enterprifing People : 
 Columbus, having failed a long time in the Portuguefe Service, 
 married and fettled at Lijbon, and advanced his Fortune there. By 
 his perfifting long in the Refolution of failing in Search of a 
 Country beyond the Atlantic Ocean, and applying to fo many 
 Princes and States for their Affiftance, one would be inclined to 
 think Colum us had fome Certainty, or at. leaft a very high Pro- 
 bability, of his fucceeding in this Attempt ; otherwife for a Man 
 to fail fo many thoufand Miles upon an Ocean till then efteemed 
 boundlefs, muft have been looked upon rather as rafh Temerity, 
 than Wifdom. But, whatever Inducements Columbus had for his 
 attempting thefe Difcoveries Weftward, he propofed the finding 
 out a Way to the Eajl- Indies by the Weftern Ocean, to King 
 John of Portugal ; and gave fuch fubftantial Reafons for the At- 
 tempt, that the King feemed to think the Thing very probable, 
 though he did not like the Terms this Adventurer propofed. At 
 feveral times he made Application to the Genoefe, and Hen- 
 ry VII. King of England, to grant him fome Ships, in order to 
 make a Difcovery of thefe new Countries, and to bear the Ex- 
 pence of his Voyage; but the Courts he applied himfelf to, would 
 have treated him no better than they ufually do a common Pro- 
 jector, had he not obtained fome Reputation for his Knowledge 
 
 in
 
 Chap. XXX. Empire in America. 559 
 
 in Cofmograpby and Navigation. As he was a Pcrfon of Pro" 
 dence and Temper, he was not difcouraged either with the Refu- 
 f.l he tnet with, or difobliging Behaviour to him; but applied 
 himfelf to Ferdinand and IfabeHa, King and" Queen of Cajiile and 
 Arragon, who, in the Year 1492. provided him with Money, 
 and entr lifted him with the equipping and fitting out three fmall 
 Ships for the Expedition: He alio obtained a Grant frcm their 
 Majefties to be Admiral of the Weftern Seas, that all Civil Em- 
 ployments, as well as Governments, in the Continent or World 
 to be difcovered, mould be wholly at his Difpofal ; and, befides 
 the Revenues of the Polls of Admiral and Viceroy, he fliould en- 
 joy a tenth of all the Profits arifing by future Conquefts in thofe 
 yet unknown Lands. All things being ready, his little Squadron, 
 manned only with ninety Men, fet Sail from Polos for the Cana- 
 ries, the third of Auguji 1492. and arrived at thofe Iflands the 
 twelfth, and failed from thence the firft of September upon his 
 grand Defign. He had not {ailed a Fortnight in this wide Ocean 
 to the Weftward, before his Men began to murmur at the Enter- 
 prize ; for they obferved the Wind conftantly fet from Eaft to 
 Weil, and apprehended there would be no Poffibility of returning, 
 if they miffed the Land they were made to expect. But on the 
 nineteenth, obferving fome Birds to fly over their Ships, and, oa 
 the twenty-fecond, abundance of Weeds driving by them, they 
 began to be better fatisfied, and concluded they were not far from 
 Land. But, continuing their Courfe Hill feveral Days farther 
 Weftward, and meeting with no Land, the Seamen mutiny *d to 
 that Degree, that they had almoft agreed to throw the Admiral 
 over-board, and return Home; when, fortunately for him, they 
 faw more Birds, Weeds, Pieces of Board, Canes, and a Shrub 
 with the Berries upon it alio fwim by them, which made them con- 
 jecture there muft be fome Iflands thereabouts. It was od 
 Thurfday the eleventh of October 1492. about ten at 
 Night, that the Admiral firft difcovered a Light up- Land firjl 
 on the Iflands of Guanahania, or St. Salvador, as difcoitred. 
 the Admiral named it, in Confideration that the 
 Sight of it delivered him and his Men from their Fears of perifh- 
 ing. The Day appearing, the Ships came to an Anchor very- 
 near the Ifland ; when the Natives came down crouding to the 
 Shore, and beheld the Ships of thefe new Comers with unfpeak-* 
 able AJlonifhment. The Admiral, believing there was no great 
 Danger to be apprehended fiom them, went afhore in his Boar 
 with the Royal Standard, as did the other two Captain; with their 
 Colours flying, and took Pofftflion of the Country in the Namfi 
 of their Catholic Majefties, with great Solemnity. The Lidium, 
 in the mean time, flood g 7.ing at the Spaniards, without attempt. 
 jng to oppofe them, while they were thus taking Pofleifion of 
 their Country. The Admiral ordered fome Strings of Glaf, 
 
 Beads,
 
 $ Go Prefent State of the Britilii Part It 
 
 Beads, Caps, and Toys, to be diitributed amongft the Natives, 
 at which they feemed infinitely pieafed : The principal Ornament 
 aboat them was a thin Gold Plate, in the Form of a Crefcent, 
 which hung from the Nofe over the upper Lip. The Admiral, 
 demanding, as well as he could, by Signs, from whence they had 
 their Gold Plates, they pointed to the South and South-weft j 
 whereupon he rowed in his Boats about the Ifland, to difcover if 
 there was any thing worth his fettling there, being followed by 
 the Natives every-where, who feemed to adore him and his Peo^ 
 pie, as if they were come from Heaven. From this Ifland he 
 failed to Cuba, and from thence to Hifpaniola, and departed thence 
 towards Europe; and arrived at Pa/os in Andalujia on the thir- 
 teenth of March 1492-3. having fet out from thence the third 
 of Augujl before, making his Voyage to the New World in feveri 
 Months and eleven Days. Here the People received him with 
 a folemn Proceflion and Thankfgiving for his Return, moll 
 of his Seamen, it feems, belonging to that Port. Their Catho- 
 lic Majefties being at Barcelona, when the Admiral drew near 
 the City, the Court went out to meet him, and he was received 
 with the Honours due to a Sovereign Prince ; nor was it eafy to 
 determine, whether the Admiral had greater Satisfa&ion in relate- 
 ing, or their Majefties in hearing, the Difcoveries he had made in 
 the New World. As to the Time and Manner of peopling Ame- 
 rica, all that we know certainly is, that it has been planted many 
 hundred, or rather thoufand of Years, from the Number of People 
 found there when the Country was difcovered. It is highly pro- 
 bable alfo, that thofe Parts were planted very early, becaufe they 
 feemed Strangers to almoft every Art and Science, when the 
 Spaniards came amongft them; and, for the fam^ Reafon, we 
 may be aflured, no Adventurers arrived there in thefe latter Ages, 
 before the celebrated Columbus. Men might pafs from the Canary 
 or Cape Verd Iflands, to America in Shipping, by being driven 
 by the conftant Eafterly Winds ; but how Bealts, and other Ani* 
 mals, came hither, remains difficult to account. 
 
 Boundaries] Carolina (comprehending North -Carolina, 
 South-Carolina, and Georgia J is bounded by Vir- 
 
 Carolina. tinia on the North, the Atlavic Ocean on the 
 Eaft, Spanijh Florida on the South, and by Part of 
 
 Virginia. Florida, which is ftill in Pofleffion of the Indians, 
 on the Weft. Virginia is bounded by the great River 
 
 Patoixmack on the North Eaft, by the Atlantic Ocean on the 
 
 Eaft, by Carolina on the South, and by the Apalathian Moun- 
 tains, which feparate it from Florida, on the Weft. 
 
 Maryland. Maryland is bounded on the North by Part of Pen- 
 fyhania, on the Eaft by the Atlantic Ocean, and 
 
 another
 
 Chap. XXX. Empire in America. 561 
 
 another Part of Penjyhania, by Virginia on the South, and by 
 the Apalatbian Mountains on the Weft. Penfyl- 
 iiania is bounded by the Country of the Five Na- Penfyl- 
 tions, or Iroquois, on the North-weft j by New-York vania. 
 and Nrw-JerJ&u from which it is feparated for the 
 moil part by Delawar Bay and River, on the North Coaft ; and 
 by Maryland, on the South and Weft. New-Jerfey 
 is bounded by an imaginary Line drawn from the New- 
 River Delawar to Hudfon's River, in 41 Degrees Jerfey. 
 North Latitude, on the North; by Hud/on 's River, 
 which feparates it from New-York, and by the Atlantic Ocean, 
 on the Eaft ; by the fame Ocean on the South ; and by Delawar 
 Bay and River, which feparates it from Penfyl<vania, 
 on the Weft. New-York is bounded by Canada on New- 
 the North, Neiv- England on the Eaft, the Ocean on York, 
 the South, and the Five Nations, or Iroquois, and 
 New-Jerfey, on the Weft. New-England is bounded New- 
 by Canada on the North-weft, by AWa Scotia on England, 
 the North-eart, by the Atlantic Ocean' on the Eaft 
 and South, and by the Province of New-York on the Nova 
 Weft. New-Scotland is bounded by the Bay and Scotia. 
 River of.'/. Laurence on the North-eaft and North 
 weft, and by the Atlantic Ocean on the Eaft; by the fame 
 Ocean, and the Bay of Fundi, on the South ; and by Part of 
 Canada, and Part of New-England, on the Weft. 
 
 Situation.] Carolina is fituated between 30 Degrees 30 
 Min. and 36 Degrees 30 Min. North Latitude: the Length 
 is 350, and Breadth 300 Miles. Virginia extends from 36 to 39 
 Degrees 2 Min. North Latitude, and between 74 and 80 Degrees 
 Weft Longitude; and is about 225 Miles in Length, and in 
 Breadth about 150. Maryland is fituated between the 38th and 
 40th Degree of Northern Latitude, and between the 74th and 
 78th Degree of Weftern Longitude, as is generally computed; 
 but it mult be confefled the Weftern Boundaries are very uncer- 
 tain. Penjylvania lies between 39 and 42 Degrees North Lati- 
 tude, and between 75 and 79 Degrees Weftern Longitude. The 
 Length whereof is 218, and Breadth 118 Miles. New- Jerfey 
 is fituated between 39 and 41 Degrees North Latitude, and 
 between 74 and 76 Degrees Weft Longitude : The Length of 
 which is 175, and the Breadth about 78 Miles. The Length of 
 New-York is about 180, and the Breadth about 90 Miles. New 
 England is fituated between 41 and 45 Degrees North Latitude* 
 and between 67 and 73 Degrees Weft Longitude. New-Scotland 
 lies between 43 and 5 1 Degrees of North Latitude, and between 
 63 and 70 Degrees of Weft Longitude. The Length of New- 
 
 O o England
 
 $S2 
 
 Jamaica. 
 
 Earbadoes. 
 
 New- 
 foundland. 
 
 Prefent State, of the Britifh Part II. 
 
 England and New-Scotland is 630, and the Breadth 
 
 400 Miles. Jamaica is fituated in the Atlantic 
 
 Ocean between 1 7 and 1 8 Degrees odd Min. North 
 
 Latitude, and between 76 and 79 Degrees Weil 
 
 Longitude. Barbadoes, one of the chief of the Ca- 
 
 ribbee Iflands, is fituated in the Atlantic Ocean in 
 
 13 Degrees North Latitude, and 59 Degrees Well 
 
 Longitude. Newfoundland is fituated in the Atlantic 
 
 Ocean between 47 and 5 2 Degrees North Latitude, 
 
 and between 5^ and 60 Degrees Weft Longitude. 
 
 When we come to fpeak of the Trade of the Britijh American 
 
 Iflands, we fhall take notice of the other Iflands not mentioned 
 
 in this Place. 
 
 
 
 
 Diftance and 
 
 Divifion. 
 
 Square Milep. 
 
 Chief Towns. 
 
 Bearing from 
 London. 
 
 The Britijh Em- 
 
 
 
 pire in America. 
 
 
 
 
 I. On the Con- 
 
 
 
 
 tinent. 
 
 
 
 Weft. 
 
 1 . Carolina and ) 
 Georgia J 
 
 575 
 
 Charles Town 
 
 345 
 
 2. Virginia 
 
 20,750 
 
 James Towm 
 
 3210 
 
 3. Maryland. 
 
 12,260 
 
 Baltimore 
 
 3000 
 
 4. PenJyli'OJtia 
 
 12,500 
 
 Philadelphia 
 
 3100 
 
 5, New-Jerfey 
 
 1 0,QOO 
 
 Elizabeth Town 
 
 3040 
 
 6. New-York 
 
 8,100 
 
 New-Tori 
 
 3000 
 
 7. New - Etig- 1 
 land and Scot- > 
 
 115,000 
 
 Bofton 
 
 2790 
 
 land ) 
 
 Annapolis 
 
 2580 
 
 II. Britijh Ifles 
 
 
 
 
 in America. 
 
 
 
 
 I. Newfoundland 
 
 355 00 
 
 Placentia 
 
 2358 , 
 
 2. Jamaica 
 
 6,000 
 
 King/ion 
 
 4080 
 
 3. Providence 
 
 168 
 
 Fort NaJJaw 
 
 3900 
 
 4. Barbadoes 
 
 140 
 
 Bridge Town 
 
 37 6 
 
 5. Tobago 
 
 108 
 
 
 3861 
 
 
 6. Antegaa 
 
 100 
 
 St. Johns Town 
 
 3 6 3 6 
 
 7. St.Chriftophers 
 
 80 
 
 Bajierre 
 
 3660 
 
 8. Bermudas 
 
 40 
 
 St. George 
 
 2730 
 
 9. Long-Ifle 
 
 800 
 
 
 3180 
 
 10. Rhode- IJle. 
 
 36 
 
 
 3090 

 
 Chap. XXX. Etnpire in America. $6% 
 
 Climate.] Carolina is happily fituated between the Extremes 
 of Heat and Cold ; but the Heat is more troublefome 
 in Summer, than the Cold in Winter; the latter be- Carolina, 
 ing very fhort, and their frofty Mornings frequently 
 fucceeded by warm Days: Though, it feems, once in eight or 
 ten Years they have very fevere and long Frofts. The Air is, 
 for the moft part, ferene and clear both in Winter and Summer ; 
 yet they have their Winter Rains, and very heavy Showers about 
 Midfummer: And the Wind fometimes changes fuddenly from 
 the South-eaft to the North-weft, and blows exceeding cold, 
 which brings Diftempers on thofe who do not take care to guard 
 againft it ; but the Country is generally healthful, where People 
 live regularly, and ufe any Precaution. Thofe indeed, who, af- 
 ter an hot Day, e.<pofe themfelves to the cool Breezes of the Even- 
 ing, ufually feel the ill Eftetts of it; as others do, that indulge 
 their Appetites in eating Fruit, and drinking Liquors to Excels. 
 They are fubjett to Hurricanes; but thefe do not happen every 
 Year, and fometimes are fo favourable, as not to do Mifchief in 
 feven Years. As to the Face of the Country, it is a low, level 
 Coaft, not an Hill to be feen from St. Augufiin to Virginia, and a 
 great Way beyond : But it rifes into Hills about an hundred Miles 
 to the Wellward, and continues rifing gradually to the Afcent of 
 the Apalathian Mountains, as they call the whole Chain of Hills, 
 which run through Florida from the South-weft to the North- 
 caft, about 150 Miles from the Ocean. The Sea-coaft being 
 low and flat, the Sea itfelf is proportionably (hallow, infomuchi 
 that a Ship of any great Burden cannot approach the Shores, ex- 
 cept in fome few Places. At a Diftance Virginia appears to be 
 low Land, infomuch that the Trees feem to grow out of 
 the Water; and, for an hundred Miles up in 
 the Country, there is fcarce an Hill, or a Stone, Virginia, 
 to be met with ; only, in fome Places, Rocks of Iron 
 Ore appear ; and, in others, there are Banks of petrefied Oyfter- 
 fhells, fome of them above twenty Yards deep. The whole Coun- 
 try, before it was planted, was either Forefts, or Bogs and Mo- 
 rales ; and fuch the greateft Part is at prefent. The Air and 
 Seafons depend very much on their Winds, as to Heat and Cold, 
 Drynefs and Moifture. The North and North- weft Winds are 
 very nitrous, and piercing cold, and clear, or elfe ftormy : The 
 South-eaft and South, hazy, and fultry hot. Their Winter is a 
 fine clear Air, and dry, which renders it very pleafant. Their 
 Frofts are fhort, but fometimes fo very fharp, that it will freeze 
 the Rivers over nine Miles broad. Snow falls fometimes in 
 pretty great Quarti.ies, but rarely continues above a Day c* 
 two. In April they have frequent Rains > in May and June the 
 
 O z Heat
 
 564 Prefent State of the Brkifh Part II. 
 
 Heat incrcafes, and it is much like our Summer, being mitigated 
 with gentle Breezes that rife about nine o' Clock, and decreale and 
 incline as the Sun rifes and lets. In July and Augujl thofe 
 Breezes ceafe, and the Air becomes ftagnant, and the Heat is 
 violent and troublefome. In September the Weather ufually 
 breaks fuddenly, and there fall generally very confiderable Rains. 
 When the Weather breaks, many fall fick. Thunder and Light- 
 ning are attended often with fatal Circumftances, remarkably 
 breaking in at the Gable-end of the Houfes ; and frequently kill 
 Perfons in or near the Chimney's Range, darting moll fiercely 
 down the Funnel of the Chimney, more efpecially if there be a 
 Fire. It is alfo dangerous Handing in a narrow Paffage, where 
 there is a thorough Wind, when it thunders and lightens , or in 
 a Room betwixt two Windows; though feveral have 
 Maryland, been killed in the open Fields. The Air of Mary- 
 land is exceflive hot fome Part of the Summer, and 
 equally cohf in Winter, when the North-weft Wind blows. The 
 Natives tell us, that they are happily fituated between the Heat 
 and Cold ; that their Heats are very feldom troublefome, and then 
 only by Accident in a perfect Calm, but that this does not happen 
 above two or three Days in a Year, and then lafts but a few 
 Hours at a time; and even that Inconvenience is made very tole- 
 rable by their cool Shades, their open and airy Rooms, Arbours, 
 and Grottos; and, in Spring and Fall, the Weather is as plea- 
 fant as can be wifhed. Their Winters are not of more than 
 three or four Months Duration, and in thefe they feldom have 
 more than one Month of bad Weather ; all the reft they are hap- 
 py in a clear Air, and a bright Sun, and are fcarce ever troubled 
 with Fogs. It is acknowledged they have hard Frofts fbme- 
 times ; but they iaft no longer than while the Wind blows from 
 the North and North-weft Points, which is feldom more than 
 three or four Days. Their Rains, except in the Depth of Win- 
 ter, are very agreeable and refrefhing. In Summer they laft but 
 ew Hours, and bright Weather fucceeds. However, it is ac- 
 knowledged, that the Showers, which fall in Summer, are \ery 
 heavy while they laft ; and that Part of the Country, which lies 
 on the Bays of the Sea, and the Mouths of the Rivers, which is 
 much the beft peopled, is certainly hot and moift, and conlequent- 
 ly unhealthful : Indeed higher up the Country,, whither their 
 Plantations are now extended, the Air is much more healthful. 
 They have here, however, dreadful Thunder in che Heat of 
 Summer ; but, as it cools and refrefties the Air, they rather vvilh 
 ibr it, than fear it, they tell us; tho' it fometimes does much 
 Mifchief. As to the Face of the Country, it is 
 Penfyl- pretty much the fame as Virginia. The Air of 
 
 vania. P*nfyhania is fweet and clear, the Heavens ierene,- 
 
 Jik
 
 Chap. XXX. Empire in America. 565 
 
 like the Southern Parts of Fuance, rarely overcaft. From Octo- 
 ber to December the Seafon is nearly the fame as in England about 
 September, or rather like an Englijb mild Spring. From De- 
 cember to March they have generally fharp, frofty Weather ; not 
 foul, thick Weather , as our North-eaft Winds bring with them 
 in England; but a Sky as clear as in Summer, and the Air dry, 
 cold, piercing, and hungry ; occafioned by the great Lakes that 
 are fed by the Fountains of Canada. From that time to June, 
 they enjoy a fweet Spring, no Gulls, but gentle Showers, and a 
 fine Sky. From thence they have extraordinary Heats, yet miti- 
 gated fometimes by cool Breezes. The Soil is generally very 
 good, being proper for the Growth of all Sorts of 
 Grain. The Air in New-Jerfey and New-Tori is New- 
 colder in Winter, and hotter in Summer, than in Jerfey and 
 England : The North and North-welt Winds are ex- New- 
 ceeding cold ; but the Air both in Winter and York. 
 Summer more fettled and ferene than with us : And 
 indeed the Weather is always more variable in Iflands than on the 
 Continent, and ufually warmer in Winter. It is to be afcribed 
 to the Winds blowing over a long Tradi of Snow from the 
 North-weft, that makes thefe Countries colder than Iflands, and 
 fome other Countries, that lie much farther North. This Coun- 
 try is generally low and level j but, afcending fifteen or twenty 
 Miles up Hudfon'% River to the Northward, - it becomes rocky 
 and mountainous. The Winds in New-England are varia- 
 ble as with us, and very boifterous in the Winter Seafon : The 
 North and North-weft Winds are exceeding cold, 
 blowing over a long Traft of frozen Countries. New- 
 Their Winters are much feverer, and fome Months England, 
 longer, than ours, though they lie nine or ten Degrees 
 nearer the Sun than we do ; however, their Heaven is ufually 
 brighter, and their Weather more fettled, than in England, both 
 in Winter and Summer ; and the Summer, though fhorter than 
 with us, is much hotter while it lafts: However, the Cli- 
 mate is efteemed as healthful, and agreeable to Englijb Conftitu- 
 tions, as any of our Plantations on the Continent. The Land next 
 the Sea is generally low ; but, farther up in the Country, it rifes 
 into Hills, and, on the North-eaft, it is rocky and 
 mountainous. Notwithftanding the Ifland of New- JJIands, 
 foundland lies more to the Southward than E?tgland, <vhi. New 
 the Winters are much colder, and the Ground co- foundland. 
 vered with Snow for a great Depth for four or five 
 Months annually, infcmuch that it is fcarce habitable, when the 
 Sun is in the Southern Signs ; the Reafon of which muft be, that 
 it lies near the Coaft of New-Britain, a vait frozen Continent, 
 ver which the North-weft Wind blowing for many hundred 
 
 Op 3 Miles,
 
 $$6 Prefent State of the Britifh Part II. 
 
 Miles, makes the Countries, that lie on that Side of the Atlantic, 
 much colder than thofe on this Side that Ocean in the fame La- 
 titude : However, at Midfummer, it is faid, it is much hotter 
 in Newfoundland, than it is with us. The Face of the Country 
 is high and mountainous, covered, for the moft part, with Woods 
 of Pine and Fir; and, where it is cleared of Wood, it is all a 
 
 barren Heath, on which neither Corn or Grafs will 
 Jamaica. grow. The outward Face of Jamaica feems to be 
 
 different from what is obfervable in Europe ; the Val- 
 leys in this Ifland being very level, with little or no riling Ground, 
 or fmall Hills, and without Rocks or Stones. The mountainous 
 Part is generally very fteep, and furrowed by very deep Gullies 
 on the North and South Sides of the'higheft Hills. The Gullies 
 are made here by frequent and very violent Rains, which every 
 Day almoft fall on thefe Mountains, and, firft making a fmall 
 Trough or Courfe for themfelves, wafh away afterwards what- 
 ever comes in their Way, and make their Chanels extraordinary 
 fteep. This Ifland, being feveral Degrees within the Tropic, 
 has the Trade Wind continually there, which is on the South 
 Side of the Ifland called the Sea-breeze. It comes about Eight 
 p'Clock in the Morning, and increafes or frefhes till Twelve in the 
 Day ; and then, as the Sun grows lower, fo it decreafes till there 
 is none at Four in the Evening. About Eight in the Evening be- 
 gins the Land-breeze, blowing Four Leagues into the Sea, and 
 continues increafing till Twelve at Night, and decreafes again till 
 Four, when there is no more of it. This Courfe generally holds 
 true : The Sea-breeze is now-and-then more violent than at other 
 times, as at New or Full Moon, and encroaches very much on 
 the Land Winds ; and the North Winds, when they reign, -viz. 
 in the Months of December, January, and February, blow over 
 the Ridge of Mountains with Violence, and hinder the Sea- 
 breeze, which blows ftronger and ftronger near the Sea, than it 
 does near the Land ; and, contrariwife, the Land Wind blows 
 harder at Spani/h-Toivn than at Pajfag-Fort, or Port-Royal. The 
 Land Wind blowing at Night, and the Sea-breeze in the Day- 
 time, no Shipping can come into Port except in the Day, nor 
 go out but foon after Break of Day. The North Winds come 
 in when the Sun is near the Tropic of Capricorn, and fo far- 
 theft off, Southerly. This is a very cold and unhealthy Wind j 
 it is more violent in the Night, becaufe it then has the additio- 
 nal Force of the Land Wind with it. Thunder is here almoft 
 every Day in the Mountains ; and Lightning for the moft part 
 precedes it, as in other Places. Froft or Snow are never feen in this 
 hot Climate ; but there is fometimes Hail, and that very large. 
 The Rains are violent, and the Drops very big; generally 
 {peaking, the two great rainy Seafons are in May and Odober \ 
 5 ifl
 
 Chap. XXX. Empire in America. 56J 
 
 in which Months, at New or Full Moon, they begin,and continue 
 Day and Night for a whole Fortnight : 3d that the Country, 
 in all level Places, is laid under Water, and confequently the 
 Roads are almoft unpaflable. Earthquakes are too common here. 
 In 1692. one of thefe difmal Events happened, and, in two Mi- 
 nutes, dell royed moll of the Town of Port-Royal, and near 1500 
 Souls perifhed: The Fall of the Mountains made a terrible Crack, 
 and at the fame time dreadful Noifes were heard under the Earth. 
 This Earthquake was general all over the Ifland, and, on the 
 North Side of the Ifland, above a thoufand Acres were funk with 
 the People in them ; the Place appearing like a Lake, was after- 
 wards dried up, but no Signs of the Houfes were 
 to be feen. Barbadoes is a plain level Country for Barbadoes. 
 the moil part, with fome fmall Hills of an eafy Af- 
 cent. They have generally fine ferene Weather here; their Rains 
 fall as in other Parts of the Torrid Zone, chiefly when the Sun 
 is vertical : Their Heats are not fo exceflive as in the fame Lati- 
 tude on the Continent, being conflantly refreshed by the Sea- 
 breezes in the Day-time, which increafe as the Sun advances, and 
 abate as the Sun declines: But there being no Mountains in ehe 
 Ifland, there are no Land Winds in the Night, as in Jamaica. 
 The North-eaft is the conftant Trade Wind here, and blows from 
 Morning till Evening, except during their Tornadoes and Hurri- 
 canes, which happen ufually about Midfummer, and in July and 
 Augujl, and blow from every Quarter : The Ships, in CarliJIe 
 Bay, at fuch times, are pretty Aire of being wrecked on Shore, if 
 they cannot get off to Sea ; and therefore feldom attempt to ride 
 out thefe Storms. The Temperature of the Air, 
 and the Fruitfulnefs of the Soil, in Tobago, is much Tobago, 
 commended. The Bermudas enjoy a pure Air, and 
 temperate Climate, their Heat being moderated by conflant Sea- 
 breezes; the whole Year is like the latter End of a fine May in 
 England; and the Iflands are reforted to for Health, as the Mont- 
 felier of America ; nor are they more remarkable for their Health, 
 than their Plenty. 
 
 Government.] When .the Spaniards firft difcovered the 
 Country North of the Gulph of Mexico, they called it all by 
 the general Name of Florida ; but, having grafped more than 
 they could cultivate or defend, they in a manner deferted this 
 Part of America, and fixed themfelves in thofe Parts of it, that 
 abounded in Silver and Gold. Whereupon the Englijb, French, 
 and Dutch, thought themfelves at Liberty to fend Colonies to 
 North America. Sir Walter Raleigh was the firft Englijh Ad- 
 venturer, who attempted to fettle Colonies on this ,,.. . . 
 Cpatf ; and gave it the Name of Virginia, in Ho- l * 
 
 Q04 nour
 
 568 Prefent State of the Britiih Part II. 
 
 nour of his Sovereign, the Virgin Qneen Elizabeth. Not but 
 this Part of the Continent had been difcovered near an hundred 
 Years before that Time by Sebajlian Cabot, a Native of Brijld: 
 but it is thought, we were diverted from making any Settlements 
 there by our Wars with Scotland or France, and by the various 
 Changes that were made in Religion, which engaged our whole 
 Attention at Home, till the Proteftant Religion was eilabliflied 
 here by Queen Elizabeth, who thought the raoft effectual Way 
 to diftrefs the Spaniards was to interrupt their Trade with America, 
 and intercept the Galleons that annually brought their Plate froin 
 thence. Her Majefty accordingly fitted o.Jt ieveral Squadrons of 
 Men of War under the Command of Drake, Hawkins, Raleigh 
 and other brave Sea-Commanders, to cruife on the Coaft of 
 North -America, and furprife their Ports and Shipping there; in 
 which Expedition the Englijh became well acquainted with this 
 fruitful and beautiful Country of Florida : And Sir Walter Ra- 
 leigh, being informed there were Gold-mines in it, obtained a 
 Patent or Grant from Queen Elizabeth, in the Year 1584. of ail 
 fuch Parts as he mould difcover and plant from 33 to 40 De- 
 grees North Latitude. Sir Walter afterwards licenied others to 
 trade to Virginia ; but his Patent being forfeited by his Attainder 
 in the rirft Year of King James I. feveral Merchants and Gentle- 
 men petitioned his Majefty for a Patent to enable them to raife 
 a joint Stock, in order to fettle Colonies in Virginia. But the 
 fatal Confequences cf the Company's Male-adminiftration cried 
 fo loud, that King Charles I. coming to the Crown of England, 
 exprefTed a tender Concern for the poor People that had been be- 
 trayed thither, and loft ; upon which Confideration he diflblved 
 the Company in the Year 1626. reducing the Country and Go- 
 vernment under his own immediate Direction, appointing the Go- 
 vernor and Council himfelf, and ordering all Patents and Procefs 
 to iiTue in his own Name, referving to himfelf a Quit-rent of 
 two Shillings for every hundred Acres of Land, and fo pro rata. 
 The Virginia Settlements at that time reaching no farther than 
 the South Side of Patowmack River, the Noble Cecilius Calvert 
 Lord Baltimore, a Roman Catholic, for the more quiet and free 
 Exercife of his Religion, obtained a Grant of the Propriety of 
 Maryland, but died before he could embark for thepromifed Land. 
 Leaving his Defigns unfinished, his Son and Heir, 
 Englifh in the Year 1633. went over in Perfon to plant this' 
 
 Govern- new Colony. As to the Government of the Englijb 
 ment in in Virginia, this is formed upon the fame Model as 
 Virginia. that of England, and has a very near Rcfemblance 
 to it. The Legifiative Authority is lodged in the 
 Governor, the Council, and the Houfe of Reprefentames : And 
 the Governor has a Negative, as the King has here ; but their 
 
 Ads
 
 Chap XXX. Empire in America. 5 b 9 
 
 Arts muff be ratified afterwards by his Majefty to England: 
 Acts mj u rjVii immediately upon re- 
 
 However, they are ot t orce in * Maicfty ' s Pkafure is 
 
 ceiving the Governor's Aflent, till ms majcuy 
 
 ThV ii"r a Svrf there, and that thefe Sove,e,gn S cora- 
 m d Jofthe fevera! Rivers , and .ha. .he mod potent ^uern- 
 Iv fobdued his weaker Neighbours, and held them u, Subje&on 
 during his Life, after which every Pnnapahty ufc 
 ally returned to the original Propnetor 1 he W, Man 
 
 ookal Offences is the knocking out the Brains with Clubs. But 
 Kgh^Civil Power is lodged in the King .there is another 
 great Man, who is their General, and has the Condudl ot all 
 Military Affairs: And neither the one nor the o the of hefc 
 tranfaas any thing of Confequence without confu ing .the* 
 Priefts and Prophets, or Conjurers, as our People call he ta 
 ter Every Prince or Tribe has their refpedive Territories 
 bounded and will not fuffer their Neighbours to en- 
 croach upon them. Carolina being juftly looked Carolina, 
 upon as Part of the antient Virginia, it vvas thought 
 fif, after the Reftoration of King Charles II. .to revive ttejn^ 
 Claim to this Country, in which no European Power had then 
 any Settlements ; for both the Spaniards and the French," ho tad 
 fent Colonies to this Coaft, after many Misfortunes had forced 
 ta Eng ^Planters from thence, had abandoned them agam for 
 a great many Years. King Charles therefore, well appnfed of 
 ^arpy Situation of this^ne Country and that there was a 
 Profpedof raifing Wine, Oil, and Silk, and almoft any thing d* 
 Great Britain wanted, granted a Patent to E ^^^^ 
 rensbn, George Duke of Albemarle, and feveral other Nob emen 
 and Gentlenfen, to plant all thofe Territory in Merua I^tween 
 thirty-fix and half and twenty-nine Degrees North Latitude- 
 There have been perpetual Struggles for Superiority and fome- 
 time the People were intolerably opprefled by their Governors ; 
 at others the' People became mutinous and feditious depofed 
 tried, and bammed their Governors; and, wha was ftili 
 worfe, all agreed to enllave the Indians, which provoked them to 
 murder many of the Planters, and plunder their Settlements ; and 
 ThcMsans at length became fo formidable, that it was expend 
 the Englijh would 6 fcwe been extirpated; winch compeU d ^ the
 
 5 7 o Prefent State of the Britifh Part II. 
 
 Planters to implore the Protection of the Crown, as 
 Govern- the only Means to reftore Tranquillity to thofe Colo- 
 ment of nies, and oppofe the Outrage of the Natives. His 
 Carolina. prefent Majefty therefore, in Compaffion to thefe 
 Colonies, was pleafed to purchafe the Intereft of 
 the feveral Proprietors, about the Year 1728. whereby the 
 Colonies of Carolina are become Royal Governments, and 
 modelled now like that of England. The King had no 
 fooner purchafed the Colonies of North and South-Carolina, 
 but Sir Alexander Commins, a Scots Gentleman, was employed to 
 procure a true State of thofe Countries, by his own View of the 
 moft diftant Parts of them. After which he propofed to take Six 
 of the Indian Chiefs to England with him to do Homage to the 
 King in Perfon ; and accordingly Six of them immediately offered 
 to go with him, and a feventh joined him at Charles T<rwn, and, 
 embarking together the fourth of May, they arrived at Dover on 
 the fixth of "June 1730. The Indian Chiefs having been ad- 
 mitted to an Audience by King George, and, in the Name of their 
 refpeftive Nations, promifed to remain his Majefty^ moft faith- 
 ful Subjects, a Treaty of Alliance was drawn up, and figned by 
 the Six Chiefs on the one Side, and the Secretary to the Lords 
 Commiflioners of Trade and Plantations on the oth*r, on the 
 feventh of September 1730. A Patent pafled the 
 Georgia. Seals in 1732. in confequence of this Treaty, ap- 
 pointing feveral Gentlemen Truftees for the Plant- 
 ing of a new Province called Georgia, to be taken out of the 
 South Part of South-Carolina. In November 1732. Mr. Ogle- 
 thorpe, one of the Truftees, failed with feveral Englijh Families 
 to Georgia, and, arriving at Port-Royal in Carolina with his 
 People, thence proceeded to lay out the Town of Savannah. As 
 to the Government of the Creek Nation, their Kings can do no 
 more than to perfuade. All the Power they have is no more than to 
 call their old Men, and their Captains, together, and to propofe to 
 them without Interruption the Meafures they think 
 Govern- the moft proper ; after they have done fpeaking, all 
 msnt of the the others have Liberty to give their Opinions alfo ; 
 Carolina and they reafon together till they have brought each 
 Indians. other into fomc unanimous Refolution. Conferences, 
 in matters of great Difficulties, are always carried on 
 with great Temper and Modefty. When they are unanimous, 
 they call in the young Men, and recommend to them the putting 
 in Execution the Refolution, with their ftrongeft and moft lively 
 Eloquence: And indeed they feem to be thorough Mafters of 
 true Eloquence ; and, making Allowances for Badnefs of Inter- 
 preters, many of their Speeches are equal to thofe which we ad- 
 mire in the Greek and Roman Writings. They generally, in their 
 Speeches, ufe Similies and Metaphors. Their Similies were new 
 
 to
 
 Chap. XXX. Empire in America. 571 
 
 to us, and generally wonderful proper, and well carried on : But, 
 in their Conferences among the chief Men, they are more Laconic 
 and concife. In fine, in fpeaking to their young Men, they ge- 
 nerally addrefs to the Paflions ; in fpeaking to the old Men, they 
 apply to Reafon only. They abhor Adultery, and 
 do not approve of Plurality of Wives ; if a Man Bunijb- 
 commits Adultery, the injured Hufband is obliged ments. 
 to have Revenge by cutting off the Ears of the 
 Adulterer. In Cafes of Murder, the next in Blood is obliged to 
 kill the Murderer, or ell'e he is looked on as infamous in the 
 Nation where he lives. And the Weaknefs of the executive 
 Power is fuch, that there is no other Way of Punifhment but by 
 the Revenger of Blood ; for there is no coercive Power in any of 
 their Nations. They do not think, that any Injury, 
 except Adultery and Murder, deferve Revenge. We Maryland, 
 have obferved, that Lord Baltimore >vt\ the Year 1633. 
 went over in Perfon to plant Mary laird: But, at the Revolution, 
 the then Lord Baltimore was deprived of the Power of appoint- 
 ing a Governor, and other Officers ; and the Government of that 
 Province fell under the fame Regulations as other Plantations 
 that are immediately fubjed to the Crown: The Baltimore Fa- 
 mily alfo were in Danger of lofmg their Propriety, on account 
 of their Religion, by the Ad which requires all Roman Catholic 
 Heirs to profefs the Proteftant Religion, on pain of being deprived 
 of their Eftates: But that Family thought fit to profefs the Pro- 
 teftant Religion, rather than lofe their Inheritance ; and the pre- 
 fect Proprietor enjoys one of the nobleit Eftates belonging to the 
 Subjects of Great Britain. As to the PredecefTors of the Englijb, 
 the Indian Inhabitants, at the firft planting of Maryland, there 
 were feveral Nations of Indians in the Country, governed by 
 feveral petty Kings ; but, it feems, there are not now above 500 
 fighting Men of them in the Province, and thofe are more on 
 the Eallern Shore than on the Weft. The Caufe of their dimi- 
 nifhing proceeded, it is faid, not from any Wars from the Eng- 
 HJh, but from their own perpetual Difcords and Wars amongft 
 themfelves ; and Drinking, and other Vices, which the Englijb 
 taught them, as I am told. The Government of the 
 Indians in Penfylvania is by Kings, and thofe by Pcnfyl- 
 Succeffion, but always on the Mother's Side ; thus vania. 
 the Children of the prefent King will not fucceed, 
 but his Brother by the Mother, or the Children by his Sifter, 
 whofe Sons will reign ; but no Woman inherits. Every King 
 has his Council, which confills of all the old and wife Men of 
 his Nation: Nothing of Moment is undertaken, be it War, 
 Peace, fettling of Land, or Traffiek, without advifing with them; 
 and, which is more, with the young Men too. The King fits 
 
 in
 
 572 Prefent State of the Britifh Part II. 
 
 *n the middle of an Half-moon, the Old and Wife on each Hand: 
 Behind them, or at a little Diftance, fit the young Men in the 
 fame Figure : And it feems, he will deferve the Name of Wife, 
 that outwits thefe Indians in any Treaty about a thing they un- 
 derftand. The Juftice they have is pecuniary : In cafe of any 
 Wrong, or evil Fatt, fuch as Murder, they atone by Feafts and 
 Prefents, which is proportionable to the Quality < f the OiFence, or 
 Perfon injured, or of the Sex they are of: For if they kill a Wo- 
 man, they pay double- King Charles II. in the Dutch War, tranf- 
 ferred all thofe Countries, then in Pofleffion of the Dutch, w'z. 
 New-York, the Jer/eys, and the Northern Part of Penfylvania, 
 to his Brother James Duke of York, afterwards King James II. 
 And Sir Robert Carr was fent over with a Squadron of Men of 
 War, and a Body of Land Forces, to reduce them ; and, on his 
 Appearance before Amfterdam, now New-York, the Dutch Gover- 
 nor thought fit to furrender the Capital, and the reft of the 
 Towns in the PofTcflion of the Hollanders ; and the Swedes fol- 
 lowed his Example. The Duke of York parcelling out thefe 
 Countries to Under-proprietors, among whom William Penn, Efq; 
 Son of Sir William Penn, Admiral in the Dutch Wars, was one, 
 all the reft of the Proprietors fome time after furrendered their 
 Charters again to the Crown; whereby New-York and Ne.w- 
 Jerfey became Royal Governments, while Penn remained Pro- 
 prietor of that Part of the Country which had been granted to 
 him ; and King Charles II. making him another Grant in the 
 Year 1680. of that Part of the Country, which now conftitutes 
 the reft of Penfyl<vania, in Consideration of Money due to his 
 Father, Sir William Penn, from the Government, Mr. Penn, 
 notwithftanding the Grants he had obtained from the Crown, and 
 the Duke of York, did not look upon himfelf, it feems, to be 
 the real Proprietor of the Lands granted him, till he had given 
 the Indians what they efteemed a valuable Confideration for their 
 Intereft in them. The Colony increafed prodigioufly in a very 
 few Years; which Succefs was chiefly owing to their humane 
 and friendly Treatment of the Indians, with whom the Penfyl- 
 njanians fcarce ever had a Quarrel: This good Underftanding 
 continues even to our Times, as appears by the Indians of the 
 Five Nations agreeing with Sir William Keith, Governor of Pen- 
 jylvaxia in the Year 1722. to remove ftill further back into the 
 Woods with their Families, and to leave a Tracl of 100,000 
 Acres of Land to be cultivated by the Engli/h ; at which Con- 
 grefs one of their Chiefs made a Speech to the Governor in the 
 Name of the Indians, the prtneipal Articles of which are as 
 follow : " Brother Onas, (the Title they give the Governor of 
 Pen[yl<vania) " you have told us how William Penn, that good 
 ** Man, left it in Charge to all his Governors, who ihotdd fuc- 
 
 " ceeJ
 
 Chap. XXX. Empire in America. 573 
 
 ** ceed him, and to all the People of Penfyl<vania, that they 
 " fhould always keep the Covenant and Treaties he had made 
 '* with the Indians of the Five Nations, and treat them with 
 " Love and Kindnefs. We acknowledge, that his Governors and 
 " People have always kept the fame honeftly and truly to this 
 " Day We receive and approve of all the Articles in your 
 " Proportion to us, and acknowledge them to be good, and full 
 " of Love, becaufe we are not only made one People by the Co- 
 ** venant-Chain, but we are alfo a People united into one Head, 
 " one Body, and one Heart, by the ftrongeft Ties of Love and 
 " Friendfhip. And, Brother Onas, we defire that this Covenant 
 " and Union may laft as long as the Sun and Moon fhall continue 
 " to give Light ; and we will deliver this in Charge to our 
 " Children, that it may be kept in Remembrance with their 
 * Children, and Childrens Children, to the lateit Ages. " The 
 only Proprietary Governments are thofe of Maryland and Pen- 
 Jylvania ; and the Family of the Penns, Defendants of William 
 Penn, the original Proprietor of Penfylvania, appoint the De- 
 puty-Governor with the Concurrence of the Crown. 
 Nenu-York and Ne<w-Jerfey have ufually the fame New- 
 Governor appointed by the King, the Colonies im- . York and 
 mediately depending on the Crown ; alfo his Majefty New- 
 appoints the Council, and other Officers of State ; Jerfey. 
 and the People only elect their Reprefentatives, as in 
 England. The Five Nations, or the Country of t^e Iroquois, 
 being under the Protection of New-York, is included within the 
 Patent granted to the Duke of Tori, together with all the Lands 
 which lie North of them, as far as the River St. Laurence, or 
 Canada. I fhall fay fomething of the Form of the 
 Indian Government: The Iroquois have, for time Iroquois, 
 immemorial, been united in a Confederacy againft 
 all other Indian Nations, and are governed by their refpe&ive 
 Chiefs in time of Peace, and by their Warriors or Captains in 
 their Wars. The Poll of Sachem, or King, is hereditary ; but 
 the next Male Heir, by the Mother's Side, fucceeds the preceding 
 Sachem. By the Constitution of the Majfachufet 
 Colony, the molt confiderabje of the Ne-vu- England New- 
 Colonies, the Appointment of the Governor, Lieu- England. 
 tenant-Governor, Secretary, and all the Officers of 
 the Admiralty, is veiled in the Crown ; the Power of the Militia, 
 is wholly in the Hands of the Governor, as Captain General ; 
 all Judges, Jultices, and Sheriffs, to whom the Execution of the 
 Law is entrulted, are nominated by the Governor, with the Ad- 
 vice of the Council ; and the Governor has a Negative on the 
 Choice of Counfellors peremptory and unlimited ; and he is not 
 obliged to give a Reafon for what he does in this Particular, or 
 
 retrained
 
 574 Prefent Stats of the Britifh Part II. 
 
 retrained to any Number : All Laws, enacted by the General 
 Affembly, are to be Sent to the Court of England for the Royal 
 Approbation. By thefe Refervations, it is laid, the Prerogative 
 of the Crown, and the Dependency of the Colony, are effectu- 
 ally fecured. But we find, by a Reprefentation to the Houie of 
 Commons, anno 1732. that, notwithstanding the Power Seems to 
 be divided between the King and the People in the Maffachu- 
 fet Colony, the People have much the greateft Share : For they 
 do not only chufe the Affembly of Representatives, but this Af- 
 fembly chufe the Council, (equivalent to our Houfe of Lords) 
 and the Governor depends upon the Affembly for his annual 
 Support ; which has frequently laid the Governor of this Pro- 
 vince under the Temptation of giving up the Prerogative of ihe 
 Crown, and the Intereft of Graat Britain, 'tis faid. As to the 
 two Colonies of Connedicut and Rhode-ljland, they are diftintt 
 Governments, and indulg'd at prefent with higher Privileges than 
 the Majfacbufet Colony ; for thefe, by their refpeclive Charters, 
 are authorized annually to elect their own Governors, Deputy- 
 Governors, Council, and Affembly, with the reft of their Ma- 
 giftrates and Officers, Civil and Military ; and to make Laws for 
 the Government of the Colony, provided they are not repugnant 
 to the Laws of England. The Government of Ne<w-Ham$/bire t 
 a Colony in Netv- England, is immediately dependent on the 
 Crown ; and confequentiy the King appoints their Governor, 
 Lieutenant-Governor, Council, Magistrates, and Officers, Civil 
 and Military j but the Freemen ftiil elet their Reprefentatives, 
 as the Freeholders in England do with us. The Constitution of 
 this, and all other Colonies immediately under the Crown, there- 
 fore, refembles nearly that of old England; but, in the Charter- 
 Governments, the diffufive Body of the People feem to be vefted 
 with the Sovereign Power, having the Election of their Go- 
 vernors, Council, and Magistrates annually, and their Laws be- 
 ing made by themfelves without the King's Concurrence : How- 
 ever, their Laws are liable to be repealed, and their Conftitution 
 entirely altered by the King and Parliament. It is needlefs to 
 trouble the Reader with abundance of barbarous Names of Na- 
 tions, as they call them, of Indians, moSt of which areno longer 
 to be found, being either destroyed by the Englijh, or fled from 
 them, or perifhed in the Wars amongft themfelves. 
 New- Newfoundland was claimed as Part of the Domi- 
 
 foundland. nions of Great Britain, by virtue of Cabot's Dif- 
 covery of it in the Reign of Henry VII. and fome 
 Voyages that were made thither in the fucceeding Reigns by 
 Englif}} Adventurers ; but they making no Settlements there, the 
 Portuguefe and French ufed to fifh upon the Banks ; whereupon 
 the Englijh revived their Claim to the Country again, and actu- 
 ally
 
 Chap. XXX. Empire in America. 575 
 
 ally feized feveial Portuguefe Ships on the Coaft of Newfoundland* 
 bringing them to England as lawful Prizes. In the Year 16 10. 
 King James I. made a Grant to the Earl of Northampton, and 
 others, of that Part of the Ifland, which lies between Cape Bt- 
 namijla and Cape St. Mary's ; and the Grantees, being incorpo- 
 rated, and formed into a Company, fent a Colony thither; 
 but the Severity of the Weather, Sicknefs, and Scarcity of Pro- 
 vifions, obliged the Planters to return to England. But the 
 EngUJh Hill infilled on the fole Right of fifhing on the Coaft 
 and, having a Squadron of Meu of War fent thither for their 
 Prote&ion in the Reign of King James I. drove all others from 
 thence: But in the Reign of King Charles II. the French were 
 fufFered to fettle in Placentia, and afterwards pofTefled themfelves 
 of great Part of the Ifland. In the War that happened after 
 the Revolution, there were perpetual Skirmifhes between 
 the Englijb and French at Newfoundland, both by Sea and Land, 
 But, at the Peace of Utrecht, the Queen obliged the French to 
 yield up all that Part of the Ifland they pofTefled to Great Bri- 
 tain, allowing the French to catch Fifh, and dry them on the 
 Land, in that Part only of the Ifland, and no other, which* 
 ftretches from the Place called Cape Bonavijla to the Northern 
 Point of the faid Ifland, and, from thence running down by the 
 Weftern Side, reaches as far as the Place called Point Riche ; 
 but the French were not to fortify any Place, or erett any Build- 
 ings there, befides Stages and Huts necefiary for the 
 drying of Fifh. Jamaica was difcovered by Colum- Jamaica. 
 bus in his fecond Voyage to America, and planted 
 by the Spaniards fome few Years afterwards ; and remained in 
 the Pofleffion of the Crown of Spain till 1656. when Admiral 
 Penn, and General Venables, being fent by the Ufurper Cromivtl 
 to reduce Hifpaniola, and being difappointed in that Attempt, to 
 fave their Credit, invaded Jamaica, and made a complete Con- 
 queft of it ; and the Spaniards have yielded and confirmed it to 
 Great Britain by a fubfequent Treety of Peace. The Englijb 
 meet with fome Difturbance from time to time from the Ne- 
 groes in the Mountains ; for when the Spaniards left the Ifland, 
 their Slaves retired to the moft inaccefhble Part of the Moun- 
 tains, and there fortified themfelves, and bid Defiance to the 
 EngUJh, who were never able to reduce them intirely ; but fome 
 of them remained there till they were joined by other Fugitives 
 of the fame Complexion, Slaves to the EngUJh Planters, and at 
 length increaft-1 to fo great a Body, that they became formidable 
 to the Plantations ; in which they committed many Robberies and 
 Murders. And, notwithftanding his Majefty fent two Regiments 
 to the Affiilance of the Colony, they (till maintained their 
 Ground, it fecms ; and all the Soldiers can do is to guard the 
 
 Plantations
 
 57 6 Prefint State of the Britifh Part II. 
 
 Plantations from their Ravages. Jamaica is a Royal Govern- 
 ment; the King appointing both the Governor and Council, their 
 Aflembly of Reprefentatives has nothing to do with the Ele&ion 
 of thefe, as they have in the Charter-Government ; and this 
 Ifland, it feems, is looked upon as the moft profitable Govern- 
 ment in the Difpofal of the Crown of England, next 
 Barbados, to that of Ireland. The Government of Barbadoes 
 alfo refembles that of Jamaica, and the reft of our 
 American Iflands, which we (hall have occafion to mention under 
 the Head of Trade. They have a Governor and Council ap- 
 pointed by the Crown, which, with the Houfe of Reprefenta- 
 tives, are veiled with Legiflative Power, and make Laws for 
 the Government of the Ifland. The Caribhee Iflands, of which 
 Barbadoes is one of the chief, were firft difcovered by Colum- 
 bus in his fecond Voyage to America : But this Ifland, lying fo far 
 South, probably was not feen by him. The firit Englijhmen that 
 landed here, it is faid, were fome of Sir William Cow-teen's Sea- 
 men, that were cruifing in thefe Seas iri the latter End of King 
 James I. who reporting at their firft Return to England, that 
 the Soil was fruitful, fome Adventurers went thither with 
 ah Intent to plant it ; but, finding the Ifland covered with 
 Wood, and fcarce any other Animals upon it than Hog?, it did 
 not anfwer their Expectations a great while. The Propriety of 
 this Ifland was afterwards granted by King Charles I. to James 
 Earl of Carlijle, in the firit Year of his Reign, of whom feveral 
 Adventurers purohafing Shares, tranfported themfelves thither. 
 In the Year 1661. King Charles II. purchafed the Propriety of 
 this Ifland of the Lord Kinoivl, Heir to the Earl of Carli/le, and 
 appointed a Governor ; ever fince which Barbadoes has been a 
 regal Government. 
 
 Trade 3 As I have purpofely omitted the Produce of 
 each Country in this Chapter, I fhall infert it here, in inquiring 
 into the Trade and Importance of the fy-itifo Dominions in Ame- 
 rica. The chief Exports of South-Carolina axe. Rice, 
 Carolina. Deer-fkins, Pitch, Tar, Turpentine, Tobacco, Beef, 
 Pork, tanned Leather, Cedar Wood, Deal Boards, 
 Pipe Staves, Timber of all Sorts, Marts, Yards, &c. They 
 produce and fhip off yearly about 60,000 Barrels of Rice, each 
 containing about four Hundred Weight neat ; they have fhipped 
 off alfo about 70,000 Deer-fkins at a Medium for many Years 
 paft. They have very little Shipping of their own in Carolina; 
 however, they load about 200 Sail of Ships yearly at Charles- 
 town, and fome at other Towns, They trade with tho Indians 
 for Deer-fkins, and Bear and B.ffaloe fkins, for which they 
 give them Guns, Powder, Knives, Sciflars, Looking-glaffes, 
 
 Beads,
 
 Chap. XXX. Empire in America. ' %yj 
 
 and many other Trifles ; and fome coarfe Cloths, Strouds, Duf- 
 fields, and coarfe Calicoes, &'c. for their Women ; and they car- 
 ry them on Pack- horfes for 5 or 600 Miles to the Weilward of 
 Charles Town : Tho' they go fo far ('tis but feldom) the molt 
 of their Trade being confined within the Limits of the Creek and 
 Charoket Nations, which is not above 300 Miles. It feems, that 
 North Carolina produces a good Quantity of Tobacco, and but 
 little Rice ; and South Carolina, on the contrary, produces valt 
 Quantities of Rice, and little Tobacco; but as to the reft of the 
 Produce, they are pretty much the fame. Carolina produces 
 alfo moft Sorts of Fruits, and Variety of Englijb 
 Grain, in great Abundance. Virginia produces moft Virginia. 
 Sorts of Roots, and defirable Fruits, with phyfical 
 Plants and Herbs, in great Plenty ; but, above all, great Quan- 
 tity of Tobacco, fo much ufed all the World over. Their only 
 foreign Trade worth mentioning, is that to England ; and that 
 indeed is very great, and very profitable to England. They 
 have alfo a Trade to the Leeward IJlands, whither they fend 
 Lumber, Corn, and Flefti ; for which they take Rum, Sugar, 
 and Mclafles, in Return. England takes from them, not only 
 what Tobacco we ufe at Home, but very great Quantities for 
 Re-exportation, which may properly be faid to be the fureft 
 Way of enriching this Kingdom. They take from England their 
 Clothing, Houlhold Goods, Iron Manufactures of all Sorts, 
 Saddles, Bridles, Brafs and Copper Wares, and alfo Turners 
 Wares ; fo that it is a very great Number of People in England, 
 that are employed to provide a fufficient Supply of Goods for 
 the Tobacco Plantations. Befides Tobacco, we take from the 
 Virginians Pitch and Tar, Deer-fkins, and Furs of fsveral Sorts, 
 Snake-weed, Walnut-tree Plank, Pipe, Hoglhead, and Barrel 
 Staves, and fome Iron in Piggs. As the Province 
 of Maryland feems not to be behind, or inferior Maryland, 
 to Virginia, and as little can be faid of one Province, 
 which the other doth not deferve, or is not capable of, I will 
 fay fomething of them together ; for though they do not both 
 belong to the Crown immediately, yet they feem to be of equal 
 Value to this Kingdom. Let us fuppofe, what is within Bounds, 
 that from thefe two Colonies we receive 60,000 Hogfheads of 
 Tobacco yearly, then the Shipping employed to bring Home this 
 Tobacco will be at lead 24,000 Tons : The neat Produce of the 
 Tobacco will be 225,000 Pounds, which we will fuppofe or- 
 dered to be returned in Goods ; yet out of that there will remain 
 at lcaft Five per Cent. Commiffion and petty Charges, which is 
 11,250 Pounds. The Value of Lumber annually imported 
 from thofe two Provinces is not lefs, it feems, than 15,000 
 Pound: ; and the Skins and Furs from thence we cannot eftimate 
 
 P p at
 
 "57& Prefent State of the Britifti Part II. 
 
 at lefs than 6000 Pounds per Annum. The Produce 
 Pen- of the delightful Country of Penfyl<vania is chiefly 
 
 fylvania. Wheat, Flour, Bread, Barrel-Beef, Pork, Hams, 
 
 Bacon, Cheefe, Butter, Soap, Myrtle-Wax, Candles, 
 Starch, Hair-Powder, Cyder, Strong Beer, Tanned Leather, 
 Linfeed-Oil, Cordial-Waters, Deer-flcins, Bever, Otter, Fox, and 
 other Skins, and fome Tobacco. They export alfo Lumber, as 
 faw'd Boards, and Timber for building Houfes, Cyprefs, Pipe, 
 Hoglhead, and Barrel Staves ; Mails, Yards, cif c . Drugs, as Sa- 
 fafras, Snake-root, &c. To fliew the Advantage arifing from 
 this Province to this Kingdom, let us fuppofe, what is a pretty 
 conflant Practice : A Londoner, or any EngHJhman, lays out here 
 in our Manufactures to the Value of 500 Pounds; it will pur- 
 chafe there 6666 Bufhels of Wheat; which, fent to Lijbon at 
 four Shillings per Bufhel, will come to 1333 Pounds, four Shil- 
 lings, which is fure to be fent Home to England at laft, if not 
 immediately, and is of the fame Advantage for Remittance or 
 Exchange, as any fuch Sum produced by Goods or Merchandize 
 fent from hence direttly. It is pretty common for the Captain, 
 if the Ship be Plantation-built, to have Orders to fell the Ship, 
 if he can get a certain Price for it, which often happens ; and in 
 that Cafe, generally, the whole Produce of Ship and Cargo is fent 
 to England; and, if it was not the Property of Englijhmen re- 
 fiding in England, it is always ordered to be laid out in Goods 
 of all the Manufacture of this Kingdom, or fuch as are imported 
 here, and fent to Penjylvania. In another Branch this Province 
 is alio of fignal Advantage to us ; for all the Money they get 
 by trading with the Dutch, French, or Spaniards, or any others, 
 which are not inconfiderable Sums, are fent direftly hither. It is 
 computed, that, as many of their Sloops make feveral Trips in 
 the Year, they cannot export lefs annually than 12,000 Tons 
 of their own Commodities. Befides their own Produce, they 
 frequently fend us Logwood, Sugar, Rice, Pitch, Tar, and 
 Train-Oil ; in fine, whatever they think we want, or they can 
 fpare: And as there are in the City of Philadelphia many Mer- 
 chants of Ability, and good Capacity, they carry their Trade into 
 all Parts, where Gain and Advantage are to be made. It has been 
 computed, that 60,000 Pounds in Cafh have been annually remit- 
 ted into England, for which there were always ordered Goods 
 
 and Manufactures from this Kingdom only. What- 
 New- ever is faid above of Penfylvania, with regard to 
 
 York and its Produce and Trade, may be faid of Ne-jo-jerfey 
 New- and New-York, except that they do not build fo 
 
 Jerfey. many Ships : They fend fewer Ships to England, it is 
 
 thought, yet thofe richer, as they deal for more 
 Skin* and Furs with the Indians. Thefe Countries fend us alj 
 
 the
 
 Chap. XXX. Empire in America. 579 
 
 the Money which they can by any of their Trades; they do not 
 t3ke lefs from us than Penfyl<vania, and are, in all refpe&s, of 
 equal Advantage to us. New-England takes from 
 us all Sorts of Woollen Manufactures, Linen, Sail- New- 
 Cloth, and Cordage for Rigging their Ships, Haber- England, 
 dafhery, cif c. To raife Money to pay for what they 
 want of us, they are forced to vifit the Spanijh Coalt, where they 
 pick up any Commodity they can trade for: They carry Lumber 
 and Proviiions to the Sugar-plantations ; exchange Provifions for 
 Logwood with the Logwood-cutters at Campechey : They fend 
 Pipe and Barrel-Stave, and Fifth, to Spain, Portugal, and the 
 S freights. It is computed, that, by the New- England Trade, 
 there are not lefs than 600 Sail of Ships and Sloops employed ; 
 one half of which trade to Europe ; and alfo, that, by the Fi(h- 
 eries, and in the Shipping together, there are not lefs than from 
 Five to Six thoufand Men employed. It is prefumed, that the 
 Trade we have to New-England is advantageous and profitable to 
 England; for it feems, they take from us annually, of our Ma- 
 nufactures, and Linens imported here, alfo India Goods, cifr. to 
 the Value of 400,000 Pounds, for which they remit to us their 
 Gold and Silver ; and we alfo take from them Pitch, Tar, and 
 Turpentine, with fome Skins, cifc. Newfoundland 
 is of prodigious Advantage to us: It is computed, New- 
 that we make, one Year with another, about Two foundland. 
 hundred thoufand Quintals of Fifh there, which will 
 fell for One hundred and twenty thoufand Pounds clear of all 
 Charges, and which may be reckoned clear Gain to this King- 
 dom ; for the Oil would pay for Salt, &c. and all this Sum is 
 actually got by our Labour, and is of more Service to the King- 
 dom, by breeding ufeful Seamen, than if fo much were to be dug 
 out of the Mine by a thoufandth Part of the Labour. From 
 Newfoundland we have great Quantities of Skins and Furs, name- 
 ly Seal, Deer, Fox, Otter, Minx, and Bear-fkins, likewife fome 
 Beaver, &c. We fliall be able to form fome Judg- 
 ment of the Importance of Jamaica, by the Quan- Jamaica, 
 tity of its own Produce (hipped off annually to us ; 
 namely, in Sugar, 10,000 Tons; in Cotton, Indico, Ginger; 
 Pimento, Rum, Lime-juice, Cocoa, Mahogany- Wood, &c. 2000 
 more. By this it will appear, that there is not lefs than 1 2000 
 Tons of our own Shipping conftantly employed in that Service 
 only, over and above what is employed between that Ifland and 
 the Northern Plantations. They take from us all Sorts of Cloth- 
 ing, both Linen, Silks, and Woollen, wrought Iron, Brafs, 
 Copper; all Sorts of Houfhold Furniture, &c. The Trade of 
 the other Sugar Colonies is vaftly profitable, of which Barbados 
 
 P p 2 i
 
 580 Prefent State of the BritilV Part II. 
 
 Barbadoes, is an Inftance ; for it appeared to the Parliament in 
 and the 1730. that this Ifland exported 22,769 Hogiheads 
 other Su- of Sugar into England, valued at 340,396 Pounds ; 
 gar Plan- and that this was the net Profit, becaufe it was ad- 
 tations, mitted, that the Rum and Melafles of a Sugar Plan- 
 i>/z.Ante- tation bear the Charges of it. We may from hence 
 goa, St. conclude, that the net Product of all the Sugar Colonies 
 Chriilo- brought into the Ports of Great Britain muft be an 
 pher, Ne- immenfe Sum to England. Befides this confiderable 
 vis, Mont- Article of Sugar, thefe Iflands produce great Quan- 
 ferrat, cif c. tities of Cotton, Ginger, Indico, Aloes, &c. which 
 are 11 brought to Great Britain, where the whole 
 Profit of all our Plantation Product does and muft centre. They 
 have been, and perhaps are, equal, it is faid, to the Mines of the 
 Spanijh Weft- Indies ; and have contributed in a particular Manner 
 to the Trade, Navigation, and Wealth, of this Kingdom. It is 
 calculated, that there are 300 Sail of Ships fent from Great Bri- 
 tain every Year to our Sugar Colonies, which are navigated by 
 about 4500 Seamen; and that the Freight, from the Sugars 
 brought here, amounts' to 170,000 Pounds a Year; and the Du- 
 ties, Commiffions, &c. to little lefs than 200,000 Pounds more, 
 which, upon the Whole, is about 1,200,000 Pounds a Year Pro- 
 fit to Great Britain, befides the Profit arifing from the other Ar- 
 ticles. Thefe Sugar Plantations alfo take from England all Sorts 
 of Cloathing, both Linen, Silks, and Woollen, wrought Iron, 
 (sfc. as Jamaica; and we receive from them Sugar, Cotton, 
 Ginger, Indico, &c . 
 
 Revenues.] The Revenues of Virginia are, I. A Rent re- 
 ferved by the Crown out of all Lands granted by Patent, which 
 is called, His Majejlfs Shiit-Rent, being two Shillings for every 
 hundred Acres fo granted, and Two-pence an Acre for all 
 Lands efcheated to the Crown; which Quit-Rent amounts to 
 about 1 ;ooo Pounds Sterling per Annum. 2. A Revenue granted 
 by an Act of Aflembly for the Support of the Government, arife- 
 ing, Fir/?, by two Shillings for every Hogfhead exported. Se- 
 condly, by a Rate of Fifteen-pence per Ton for every Voyage a 
 Ship makes. Thirdly, by a Duty of Six-pence per Head for every 
 Paffenger brought into the Country. Fourthly, by Fines and For- 
 feitures impofed by feveral Acts of Aifembly. 3. Revenues arife- 
 ing by a Duty on Liquors imported from the neighbouring 
 Plantations, and upon all Slaves and Servants, not Natives of 
 England, imported. 4. A Revenue granted to the College by a 
 Duty on Skins and Furs exported. 5. The Revenue raifed by 
 Eritifb Acts of Parliament on the Trade there, being a Duty of 
 
 One
 
 Chap. XXX. Entire in America. 581 
 
 One Peny per Pound on all Tobacco exported to the Plantations, 
 and not carried directly to England. 
 
 Forces.] Every Freeman in Virginia, from Sixteen to Sixty 
 Years of Age, is lifted in the Militia, which, by a 
 Law, is to be muftercd in a a general Mufter for Virginia. ' 
 each County once a Y#ar, and, in fingle Troops 
 and Companies, four Times more at leaft. Mod People there are 
 ikilful in the Ufe of Fire-arms, being all their Lives ufed to moot 
 in the Woods. The Number of Militia in 1722. was thought to 
 be 18,000 effective Men in all. As to their Forces by Sea, they 
 are not fuffered, in any of our Plantations, to build Men of 
 War: But fmall Guard-fhips are fent from Englend, from time tat 
 time, to defend their Coafts. The Colonels, and 
 other Officers of the Militia in Maryland, are em- Maryland, 
 powered to enlift all Perfons to ferve in the Horfe and 
 Foot, from Sixteen to Sixty (except Negroes and Slaves ) ; and 
 are obliged to mufter in the refpettive Counties, in fuch Places as 
 the Governor (hall appoint. In the Colony of the 
 Maffachufets there are about Six Regiments of Foot, Mafla- 
 Fifteen Troops of Horfe, of an Hundred Men in each chufets. 
 Troop ; and, it feems, they can raife near 25,000 
 Men upon Occafion. It is thought, that the reft of the Colo- 
 nies North of Virginia and Mary/and, viz. Co>we<2icut, Rhode- 
 I/Iand, Ne-iv-Tork, the Jerfeys, and Penjylvania, can raife, upon 
 an Emergency, upwards of 60,000 Men, and fit out 1500 Sail 
 of fuch Merchant-ftiips as they ufe in their Trade, which may be 
 of great Service to an Englijb Squadron in thofe Seas, whenever 
 we happen to be at War with any European Power in 
 that Part of the World. The Militia of the Carib- Ca'ribbee- 
 hee-JJlands is regulated thus : At St. Chrijlopher'% a Iflands. 
 Regiment of Foot, containing about Seven or Eight 
 hundred Men, a Troop of Horfe of Two hundred and Twenty, 
 and another of about an Hundred and Twenty Dragoons. There 
 is at Antegoa a Troop of about an hundred and twenty Troopers, 
 and Three Regiments of Foot, in all 1 200 Men, befides a Regi- 
 ment of Foot, which his Majefty keeps there ; viz. Five Compa- 
 nies zxAntegoa, Two at St. Chrijlopbers, Two ztNevis, and One at 
 Montferrat. 
 
 Character.] The Indians in Carolina are a manly, well- 
 fliaped Race; the Men tall, and the Women little: 
 They are a good-natured generous People, very hu- Carolina- 
 mane to Strangers ; patient in Want and Pain ; flow Indians, 
 to Anger, and not eafily provoked ; but, when they 
 are thoroughly incenfed, they arc implacable > very quick of 
 P p 3 Apprehen-
 
 582 Prefint State of the Britilh Part II. 
 
 Appreheniion, and gay of Temper. Their public Conferences 
 mew them to be Men of Genius, and that they have a natural 
 Eloquence, having never had the Ufe of Letters : They feem to 
 defpife working for Hire, and fpend their Time chiefly in Hunt- 
 ing ; and are very healthy People, having hardly any Difeafcs, 
 except thofe occafioned by drinking of Rum, and the Small-pox : 
 Thofe who do not drink Rum, are exceeding long- 
 Virgi- liv'd. As to the Perfons of the Virginians in gene- 
 
 iiians. ral, their Stature is much the fame with the People 
 
 of Europe. In fome Provinces there are huge lufty 
 Fellows like the Germans, and there are others as little as the 
 French ; but all in general well-made, ftrong, and a&ive. They 
 are born tolerably white, but take a great deal of Pains to darken 
 their Complexion, by anointing themfelves with Greafe, and ly- 
 ing in the Sun. Their Characters are given us variously by dif- 
 ferent Writers j which feems to proceed from the various Cir- 
 cumftances the Indians, or our People, were in. When they 
 were Friends with the Englijb, and entertained them hofpitably, 
 then they were all that was good ; and, when in a State of Ho- 
 ftility, no Character was thought bad enough for them ; but it 
 feems, they all agree, that the Virginians did not want Wit, or 
 natural Parts. And the Engiyh, who firfl landed in this Coun- 
 try, fay, that they found the People moll gentle, loving, and 
 faithful ; void of all Guile and Treachery, quick of Apprehen- 
 iion, and very ingenious ; fome bold, fome timorous, but all of 
 them cautious and circumfpedl : That they were foon moved to 
 Anger, and fo malicious, that they feldom forgat an Injury. As 
 to Arts and Sciences, they underitood but little ; but appeared 
 
 very tractable, and capable of learning any thing. 
 Englilh. The Englijb Inhabitants are very courteous to 
 
 Strangers or Travellers, who need no other Recom- 
 mendation but the being human Creatures. A Stranger has no 
 more to do, but to inquire upon the Road where any Gentle- 
 man, or good Houfekeeper, lives, and there he may depend upon 
 his being. received with Hofpitality. This Goodnature is fo ge- 
 neral, that the Gentry, when they go abroad, order their prin- 
 cipal Servant to entertain all Vifitors with every thing the Planta- 
 tion affords. And the poor Planters, who have but one Bed, will 
 very often fit up, or lie upon a Form or Couch all Night, to 
 make room for a weary Traveller to repofe himfelf after his Jour- 
 ney. If there happen to be a Churl, that, either out of Covetouf- 
 nefs or Ill-nature, will not comply with this generous Cnftom, 
 
 he has a Mark of Infamy fet upon him, and is ab- 
 Maryland horred by all. The Stature of the Indians in Mary- 
 Indians. land is not very different from that of the Virginians-. 
 
 They are allowed to be Men of quick and fprightly 
 
 Parts,
 
 Chap. XXX. Empire in America. 58 J 
 
 Parts, like their Neighbours the Virginia ; but want, like 
 them, the Advaatage of Letters and Education. They are nimble, 
 active, and indefatigable, in their warlike Expeditions, Hunting, 
 and Journeys. There are alfo Men of Courage amongft them j 
 but they are generally timorous, revengeful, and implacable, 
 when provoked : And, when they gain a Viflory, or get Advan- 
 tage of an Enemy, they deftroy Man, Woman, and Child. Their 
 little Kingdoms and Tribes are perpetually in a State of War, 
 which very much lefiens their Numbers. Though fome of them 
 are timorous in Fight, yet when they are taken Prifoners, and 
 condemned to Death, they die like Heroes, braving the moft ex- 
 quifite Torments, and finging even upon the Rack. The young 
 Indians, educated by the Evgli/h, are found to have admirable 
 Capacities when their Humours and Tempers are perfectly un- 
 derltood : But the Misfortune is, they are too often taught to 
 become worie in their Morals, than better, by falling into the 
 worft Practices of the vile nominal Chriftians, which they add to 
 their own Indian Manners, and abfurd Cuftoms. The 
 Indians in Penfyl<vania are generally tall, ftrait, Penfylva- 
 well-built, and of fingular Proportion ; they tread nian In- 
 flrong and clever, and moftly walk with a lofty dians. 
 Chin : Their Complexion is dark, by greafing them- 
 felves with Bears Eat clarified, and expofing their Bodies to the 
 Sun from their Infancy. They excel in Liberality ; nothing is 
 too good for their Friend ; they are light of Heart, have ftrong 
 Affections, but foon fpent ; and are faid to be the moft merry 
 Creatures that live j they feaft and dance perpetually ; they never 
 have much, nor want much : Their Wealth circulates like the 
 Blood ; all Parts partake ; and yet exatt Obfervers of Property. 
 Since the Europeans came amongft them, they are grown great 
 Lovers of ftrong Liquors, Rum efpecially, and are great Con- 
 cealers of their Refentment, and revengeful. The principal 
 Men, and alfo the People in general, are faid to be Perfons of fine 
 natural Sagacity, considering them without the Help of Letters 
 or Education : For, as was obferved before, a Perfon will defer ve 
 the Name of Wife, that outwits them in any Treaty about a 
 Thing they underftand. They are impatient to be cured of any 
 Diftemper, and for that Purpofe give any thing, efpecially for 
 the Recovery of their Children, to whom they are 
 extremely indulgent There is, and always has been, Englifh in 
 a very good Underftanding between the Indians of Penfyl- 
 Ten/yl'vania and the Quakers, which is chiefly owing vania. 
 to their fair and friendly Treatment of the Indians ; 
 and indeed there feems to be a very good Harmony among all 
 Pcrfuafions of People in this delightful Province, and particularly 
 in Philadelphia, as appears by the Addrefles of the Minifter, 
 
 P p 4 Church-
 
 584 > Prefent State of the Britifh . Part II. 
 
 Churchwardens, and Veftry of the Church of England, Prejhy- 
 terians, &c. in 1732. to William Penn, Efq; the Proprietor of 
 Penfyl-vania. And we may, I prefume, juftly affirm, that the 
 Quakers, in general, throughout the World, are friendly and af- 
 fable to all Profeffions of Religion ; fober, punctual, and juit, in 
 their Dealings j peaceable Subjects, and ready to contribute to- 
 wards theExpences of the Civil Government ; confeientioufly care- 
 ful not to defraud the King of his Revenues, however obftinate 
 they appear to us in not paying the Dues to the Minifters of ;he 
 Church of England. As to the other Denominations of the 
 Englijh in this Province, they do, as far as I can learn in their 
 Behaviour, keep up the deferved good Character of their Coun- 
 trymen in Great Britain. Men of all Profefficns in Penjylmania 
 are preferred to Pofts, as they are eminent for Underitandir,g, 
 Piety, and Virtue ; for no particular Profeffion of Religion there 
 can engrofs the Offices in the Government ; but, on the con-r 
 trary, they may be enjoyed by all Perfons, as their Merit may 
 recommend them to the free Choice of the People. As the 
 Character of the Indians and Europeans, on the reit of the Con- 
 tinent belonging to Great Britain, is pretty much the fame, I 
 fhall detain the. Reader no longer on this He?.d, than juft ob- 
 serving, that the Natives of Newfoundland are of a middle Sta- 
 ture, and broad-faced; and that thofe of Jamaica, being Englijh x 
 are much the fame with thofe in England ; as alio the Natives of 
 Barhadoes, and the reft of the Britijh Ifles in America. 
 
 Religion.] The Indians in Carolina, Virginia, and Mary- 
 land, believe in One God, the Creator of ali Things, who is in- 
 finitely happy in himfelf, but has little or no Regard for the 
 trifling Concerns of Men ; having committed the Government of 
 the World to certain inferior Deities or Demons, to whom there- 
 fore the Natives pay their Devotion ; and thefe inferior Deities 
 moft of our Travellers have indifcreetly denominated Devils: 
 They expeft a Life after this, where there will be a Diftribution 
 of Rewards and Punifhments, according to their Behaviour in this 
 Life. They, have a great Veneration for their Priefts, who are 
 frequently called Conjurers, though fome think they are diftincl: 
 Offices : However, both of them fometimes perform the fame re- 
 ligious Rites and Ceremonies ; they pretend to foretel future 
 Events, to command the Elements, and do abundance of fuper- 
 natural Things, and both of them are Phyficians. The Euro- 
 peans, it feems, get very little Information in this Point from the 
 Indians, it being reckoned Sacrilege to divulge the Principles of 
 . their Religion. The Indians in Penfyl-vania believe a God, and 
 the Immortality of the Soul ; for they fay there is a great King 
 that made thera, who dwells in a glorious Country to the South- 
 ward
 
 Chap. XXX. Empire in America. 585 
 
 ward of them, and that the Souls of the Good (hall Indians 
 go thither, where they (hall live again. Their Wor- in Pen- 
 ftiip confiih of two Parts, Sacrifice and Cantico. fyl vania. 
 Their Sacrifice is their Firft-Fruits; the firft and 
 fatteft Buck they kill, goes to the Fire, where he is all burnt 
 with a mournful Ditty of him that performs the Ceremony ; but 
 wjth fuch great Fervency and Labour of Body, that he will even 
 fvyeat to a Foam. The other Part is their Cantico, performed by 
 their Round Dances, fometimes Words, fometimes Songs, then 
 Shouts, Two being in the middle that begin, and, by fmging, and 
 drumming on a Board, direci the Chorus : Their Poitures in the 
 Dance are very antic and differing, but all keep Meafure. This 
 is done with equal Earneftnefs and Labour, but great Appearance 
 of Joy. Before I give the Religion of the Quakers in Penfyliw- 
 n;a, I fhall firlt fay fomething of that in New- York, 
 Xenju-Jerfey, and New- England. As to the Religion New- 
 of the Indians in New-Tori and Nenv-Jerfey, as far York and 
 2s I can learn, they acknowledge a Supreme Being, New- 
 whom they ftyle the Preferver of the Univerfe ; but Jerfey. 
 feldom pay any religious Worfliip to him, unlefs in 
 public Calamities ; and then they offer Sacrifices of every thing 
 they poffefs, and pray for Deliverance from their Calamities : 
 They alfo offer Thank-offerings for any public Bleffing. When 
 it thunders, they take it to be a Sign of God's Difpleafure, and 
 will fay to one another, How angry he is f And often cry out, It 
 is enough ; have done. They believe a future State of Rewards 
 and Punifhments ; but they have very obfeure Notions of it, and 
 feem to think, that the Rewards of the Good will confift in the 
 Enjoyment of thofe Pleafures he was moft fond of in this Life. 
 The People of the Colony of Rhode-IJland are very 
 free People in refpeft to Religion : They confift of Rhode- 
 Epi/copalians, Pre/byterians, Anabaptifts, and Quakers; Ifland. 
 but, it feems, the Quakers are the moft considerable, 
 feveral of the Houfe of Reprefentatives, and of the Council, be- 
 ing of that Perfuafion ; and as the Colony is authorized annually 
 to eleci their own Governors and Council, I perceive the Quakers 
 fometimes enjoy that high Poft. Every Profeflion of Religion 
 that is for maintaining a Preacher, does it voluntarily by a Con- 
 tribution or Subfcription, there being no eftablifhed Maintenance 
 for the Miniftry of any Perfuafion. But to return to ~ , 
 the Religion of the Englijb in Penfylvania : As that S- p 
 Profeflion of Chriftianity, called Quakerifm, may be ( , 
 fcid to be the * National Religion of Penfylvania, y vania - 
 
 I 
 
 Th<- National Religion in Penfyhania is properly no other than tl>.>t <>t" 
 
 General Cbnjlianity j for by the Charter of Privilege! dated the :8th of Oclolvr 
 
 ' ' 1701.
 
 586 Prefent State of the Britilh Part II. 
 
 I fhall, in this Place, prefent the Reader with a fhort Account 
 of the Rife, Tenets, and Difcipline, of that People. The Con- 
 teft had been long and fharp in England, for Conformity in Re- 
 ligion amongil Protellants, when, about the middle of the laft 
 Century, Oliver and the Independents pre/ailed, who as ftre- 
 nuoufty infilled upon a Conformity to their Ceremonies, as thofc 
 they had fo heavily complained of. Thofe unhappy Times gave 
 much Uneafinefs to many fincere Chriftians, who perceived, that 
 thefe religious Contells were only to fupport a Party. 
 The Rife George Fox, of Drayton in Leicefterjhire, a Member 
 tf the of the Epifcopalian Church, and a Man of a ferious 
 
 Quakers. and religious Frame of Mind, vifited many weli- 
 difpofed People of his Acquaintance, in the neigh- 
 bouring Counties, preaching to them, that the Jecret Dictates of 
 the Grace of God, or univerfal Light of Chriji, led direftly to 
 Holinefs, or Purity of Heart, and Purity of Heart to Heaven, 
 This Teacher met with furprifing Succefs by his propagating this 
 Scripture-Dottrine ; and his Followers were at firit called Children 
 tf the Light. But the uncommon Fervency with which Fox, and his 
 Friends, preached to pioufly-difpofed People, fo affefted their 
 Minds, that they frequently broke out into Tears, and trembled ; 
 for which, in Derifion, they were called Quakers : But, as a Term 
 of Good-nature, and mutual Love, that ought to fubfift amongft 
 Chriftians, they ftyle themfelves Friends: As I look upon it to 
 be ungenerous to mifreprefent the religious Tenets of any People ; 
 therefore I fhall give the Principles of the Quakers 
 Tenets from their own * Accounts : It has been f aid, that 
 
 of the thefe People deny the Scriptures, as they deny them to 
 
 Quakers. be the Word of God. To which they anfwer : " The 
 " Quakers own and ftyle the Scriptures, as the 
 
 J701. granted and folemnly confirmed to the Inhabitants of that Proviere 
 l>y William Petm, the original Patentee, 'tis exprefly provided, that " All 
 ** Perfons, who profefs to believe in Jefut Cbrijl, the Saviour of the World, 
 *' fliall be capable (notwithstanding their other Perfuafions and Practices in 
 " point of Confcience and Religion) to ferve this Government in 'any Capacity, 
 " both legijlati-vely and executively, he or they folemnly promifing, when 
 tl lawfully required, Allegiance to the King as Sovereign, and Fidelity to the 
 *.' Proprietary and Governor. " This general Liberty was the natural Refult of 
 the Quakers Principle, which excludes no Man from fecular Advantages on ac- 
 count of his differing Sentiments in religious Matters. The extenfive Humanity 
 ef a Government fo eftabliflied was an Encouragement to many of other Per- 
 fuafions to go over ond fettle there. 
 
 * Partly from TV. Perm's Key, and partly from a well-approved Manufcript* 
 intituled, The Rife, tnojl diftinguijbing Principlet and Difcipline of the People 
 called Quakers, by -way of AbJlraB, which is defigned for the Frels : To which 
 Treatifes, with Barclay's Apobgy % I refer try Reader for a more particular Ac- 
 count. 
 
 * Scripture*
 
 Chap. XXX, Empire in America. 5S7 
 
 *' Scriptures own and flyle themfelves, viz. A Declaration of 
 ** thofe Things mod truly believed, given forth in former Ages 
 t* by the Infpiration of the Holy Spirit ; confequent- 
 *' ly, that they are profitable for Doctrine, for Re- Of the 
 *' proof, for Corre&ion, for Inftruction in Righteouf- Scriptures. 
 f nefs, that the Man of God may be perfect, 
 " throughly furnifhed unto all good Works. They are the Form 
 of found Words : We profefs to believe them, read them, and 
 v fay, It is the Work we have to do in this World, and the ear- 
 f neli Defire of our Souls to Almighty God, that we may fee 
 *i and witnefs the fulfilling of them in and upon ourfelves j that 
 ' fo God's Will may be done in Earth, as it is in Heaven. JBut 
 to call them the Word of God, (the Ground of the Charge) 
 * which they never call themfelves, but which they peculiarly 
 V denominate and call Chrifl by, in Reverence to Chrifl, and 
 " in no Slight to them, (which they believe to be of divine Au- 
 thority, and embrace as the beft of Books, and allow to be as 
 H much the Word of Gad, as a Book can be) they do, as in 
 " Duty and Reafon bound, attribute that Title to Chriji only. 
 M And yet as the Word of God may, in fome Senfe, fignify the 
 Command of God, referring to the Thing or Matter com- 
 *' manded as the Mind of God, it may be called the Word of the 
 " Lord, or Word of God: As, on particular Occafions, the Pro- 
 " pbets had the Word of the Lord to Perfons and Places ; that is 
 " to fay, the Mind or Will of God, or that which was com- 
 " manded them of the Lord to declare or do. So Chriji ufes it, 
 " when he tells the Pbarifeet, that they had made the Word (or 
 " Command) of God of none Effect, by their Traditions. But 
 " becaufe People are fo apt to think, if they have the Scriptures, 
 " they have all, ( for that they account them the only Word of 
 God, and fo look no farther ; that is, to no other Word, from 
 whence thefe good Words come) therefore thefe People have 
 " been conflrained, and they believe, by God's good Spirit, once and 
 41 again, to point them to the great Word of Words, Chriji Je- 
 " fus, in whom is Life, and that Life the Light of Men ; 
 *' that they might feel fomething nearer to them than the 
 " Scriptures, to wit, the Word in the Heart, from whence all 
 *' holy Scripture came, which is Chriji ivithin them, the liope of 
 " their Glory. And, to be fure, he is the only right Expounder, 
 " as well as the Author, of holy Scripture, and without whofe 
 f Light, Spirit, or Grace t they cannot be prof t ably read by thofc 
 " that read them." 
 
 It it faid, that the Quakers deny the Trinity. To Of the 
 which they reply : " They believe in the Holy Three, Trinity. 
 " or Trinity of Father, Word, and Spirit, according 
 V, to the Scripture ; and that thefe Three are truly and properly 
 
 " Om ;
 
 588 Prefent State cf tht Britifh Part II. 
 
 ** One; of one Nature, as well as Will : But they are very ten- 
 '* der of quitting Scripture 'Terms and Pbrafes for Schoolmen*', 
 " fuch as diftinci and feparate Perfons and Snbjlances, &c. are ; 
 * from whence People are apt to entertain grofs Ideas and Notions 
 of the Father, Sod, and Holy Ghoft. And they judge, that 
 ** a curious Inquiry into thefe high and divine Relations, and 
 7 other fpeculative Subjects, though never fo great Truths in 
 * themfelves, tend little to Godlinefs, and lefs to Peace. And 
 * therefore they cannot gratify that Curicfity in themfelves or 
 ' others ; fptculatlve Truths being, in their Judgment,- to be 
 ** fparingly and tenderly declared, and never to be made the Mea- 
 ** fure and Condition of Chriftian Communion. " 
 
 It is /aid, the Quakers deny Cbrijl to be God. To which they 
 ani'wer : " This is a moil untrue and unrcafonable 
 Of the " Cenfure: For their great and charadteriftic Prin- 
 
 Divinity " ciple being this, That Chriji, as the Divine Word, 
 of Chriji. " lighteth the Souls of all Men that come into the 
 '* World with a spiritual and jawing Light, (which 
 " nothing but the Creator of Souls can do) it does fufficiently 
 " mew they believe him to be God ; for they truly and exprefy 
 * own him to be fo, according to Scripture, viz.. In him war 
 1? Life, and that Life the Light of Men ; and he is God over all, 
 ** hlejfed for ever." 
 
 It is /aid alfo, that the Quakers deny the Human Nature of 
 Cbrijl. To which they reply : " We never taught, 
 Of the " faid, or held, fo grofs a Thing : For as we believe 
 
 Human " him to be God over all, bleffed for ever ; fo we 
 
 Nature of " do as truly believe him to be of the Seed of Abra- 
 Cbrijl. " bam and David after the Flefh ; and therefore 
 
 " truly and properly Man, like us in all Things; Sit: 
 ** only excepted. " 
 
 // is alfo affirmed, that the Quakers acknowledge no Refurretlion 
 oftheDead, nor future Rewards. To which thefe People 
 Of the Re- anfwer: "We deny not, but believe, the Refur- 
 fm-reSion, " re&ion, according to the Scripture, not only from 
 and future " Sin, but alfo from Death, and the Grave; but are 
 Rewards. " confeientioufly cautious in exprefling the Manner of 
 'i the Refurre&ion intended in the Charge, becaufe 
 ** it is left a Secret by the Holy Ghoft in the Scripture. Should 
 " People be angry with them for not expreffing or aflerting what 
 ' is hidden, and which is more curious than neceftary to be 
 '* known, and in which the Objectors themfelves cannot be pofi- 
 " tive ? Thou Fool, is to the curious Inquirer, as fays the 
 '* Apoftle : Which makes the Quakers contented with that Body, 
 ** which God lhall pleafe to give them hereafter ; being aflured, 
 ** that their. Corruptible Jhall put on Incorrupt ion, and their Mont at 
 
 * ( Jbali
 
 Chap. XXX. Empire in America. 5S9 
 
 " /ball put on Immortality ; but in fuch a Manner as pleaicth God. 
 " And, in the mean time, they efleem it their Duty, as well as 
 * Wifdom, to acquiefce in his holy Will. It is enough they be- 
 f licve a ' Refurreclion, and that with a glorious and incorruptible 
 " Body, without further Niceties ; For to that was the antieut 
 " Hope. Now as to eternal Rewards, they not only 
 " believe them, but, as the Apoflle (aid of old, above Future Re- 
 " all People, have the greateft Reafon fo to do ; for wards and 
 " otherwife, Who is fo miferable ? Do they in- Puni/b- 
 " herit the Reproach and Suffering of all that have ments. 
 " feparated, from time to time, from National 
 " Churches? That is to fay, Are the Outcries that have been made 
 " againft the Protejlants by the Papijls, and thofe of the Church 
 " of England againft the Puritans, Brownifts, and Separatifb, 
 "" fallen fo thick upon them, and {hall they hold Principles ince*- 
 " fiftent with an eternal Recompence of Reward ? By no Means. 
 " It is their Faith, their Hope, their Intereji, and what the/ 
 " wait, and have fuffered for, and prefs, as an Encouragement to 
 " Faithfulnefs, upon one another. And the contrary therefore 
 " mull b both an unjuft and an improbable Suggeftion of their 
 
 V Adverfaries. They believe that Heaven is both a Place and State 
 " of inexpreflible and endlefs Joy for the Godly ; and Hell a Place 
 m and State of inexpreflible and endlefs Mifery for the Wicked, 
 m and fuch as forget God ; an Earnell of each may be witneflid 
 " in this Life, but the Fulnefs in the World to come." 
 
 It is objeSled to the Quakers, that they hold the natural Light, 
 in the Confcience of every Man in the H'orld, is fufficient to fave 
 ell that follow it ; and fo they overthrow Salvation 
 byChrift. To which they anfuer : " Their Belief 'The light 
 " and Aflertion is, That Chrifl, who is the Word, within, $r 
 
 V that vjos with God, and was God, (and is Grace. 
 (( fo for ever) hath enlightened every Man that 
 
 " cometh into the World with his own Light, which leadeth di- 
 ,c redly to Holinefs, or Purity of Heart, and Purity of Heart to 
 " Heaven. So that they aflert the I ight of Chrijl to be fuffi- 
 *' cient to fave ; that is, to convince of Sin x lead out of it, and 
 ' quicken the Soul in the Ways of Holinefs ; and not to be a na- 
 " twal. Light, otherwife than as all Men, born into the World, 
 ** have a Meafure of Chrifl'? Light ; and fo it may, in a Senfe, 
 " be laid to be natural to all Men, becaufe all Men have it, com- 
 1* ing into the World. For this Light is fomething elfe than the 
 " bare Understanding a Man hath as a rational Creature: Since, 
 " as fuch, Man cannot be a Light to himielf ; but has only a 
 Capacity of feeing by means of the Light, with which Chrift 
 ' the Word enlighteneth him. For we can no more be a mental 
 *' or intelLftual Light to ourfelve:, than we are an external and 
 
 ** corporeal
 
 590 Prefent State of the Brkifli Part It. 
 
 *' corporeal Light to ourfelves : But as the Sun in the Firma- 
 ** ment is the Light of our Bodies, fo the Light of the Di- 
 " vine Word is the Sun of our Souls, the glorious Luminary of 
 '* the intellectual World ; and they that walk in it, will be led to 
 l * Bleffednefs. " They further fay, " That this 
 The Light " Light within is fynonymous with the Holy Spi- 
 fynonymous " rit, or Grace : For Mofes, in the Old Teftament, 
 with the " reprefents this divine Principle as the general 
 Holy Spirit, " Teacher of the antediluvian World in thefe Words: 
 or Grace. " The Lord faid, My Spirit Jhall not always Jlrive 
 " with Man, agreeable to the Prophet Micah j He 
 *' hath Jhewed thee, O Man, what is Good. And, in the New 
 '* Teftament, St. John, fpeaking of Chrift, declares, that He was 
 " the true Light, which lighteth every Man that cometh into the 
 * l World. And St. Paul, in like Manner, That the Grace of 
 " God, which bringeth Salvation, hath appeared to all Men, 
 *' teaching us, that, denying Ungodlinefs and worldly Lufts, w6 
 " Jhould live foberly, rightooujly, and godly, in this prefent World. 
 tc Here the Divinity, Univerfality, and confequently the Suffi- 
 *' ciency, of this inward Teacher is proved. And they hold, 
 " agreeable to the Tenth and Sixteenth Articles of the Church, 
 " That the Condition of Man after the Fall is fuch, that he can- 
 *' not turn, and prepare himfelf, by his own natural Strength, fo 
 ** as to have Power to do good Works without the Grace of God. 
 " And, after we have received the Holy Ghoft, ( fuppofed by the 
 " Church to be conveyed by Baptifm ) we may depart from Grace 
 " given, and fall into Sin, and by [the Renewal of] the Grace 
 ** of God, we may rife again, and amend our Lives : And, agree* 
 " able to the Church, that this Light, or Holy Spirit, leads to 
 " right Judgment in all Things, and into all Righteoufnefs. And 
 " that the Incitements of the Grace, or good Spirit, 
 Known by " of God are generally, and mod certainly, diftin- 
 EJeiJs. " guifhed by good EfFefts." 
 
 It is faid, that the Quakers affert the Spirit of 
 God fo be the immediate Teacher', and that there is no other 
 Means now to be ufed, as Minijlry, Ordinances, Sec. To which 
 they reply : " They never denied the Ufe of Means, 
 The Ufe " but to this Day, from the Beginning, they have 
 of Means. " been in the Pradice of them. But then they are 
 " fuch Means as are ufed in the / ife and Power of 
 u God, and not in and from Man's mere Wit, Will, or carnal In- 
 " novation, or Imitation, the only thing they ftrike at. For In- 
 " ftance, they cannot own that to be a Gofpel-Minijlry that is 
 '* without a Gofpel-Spirit ; or that fuch can be fent of God, that 
 *' are not taught of God ; or that they are fit to teach others 
 " what Regeneration and the Way to Heaven are, that have 
 
 " never
 
 Chap. XXX. Empire in America. 591 
 
 " never been born again themfelves ; or that fuch can ever bring 
 " Souls to God, that are themfelves Strangers to the Baptifm of 
 " Fire, and the Holy Ghoft ; never having been circumciied with 
 " the Circumcifion of the Heart in the Spirit ; which is absolutely 
 " neceffary to make a true Jew, or a real Chrijlian, and much. 
 " more the requifite Qualification of a Gofpel-Miniftry. This 
 " unexperienced and lifelejs Minijlry is the only Miniftry, and 
 " fuch the only Minifters, that the Quakers cannot <mvn and re- 
 " ceive, and therefore cannot maintain. For the Minijlry and 
 ** Minijiers, that are according to the Scripture, they both own, 
 " refped, and delight in, and are ready to afiift and fupport ia 
 " their Service for God. All are defired to take notice, that 
 ** Evangelical Means and Order they love, and deiire to keep : 
 " For they diligently affemble themfelves together to wait upoa 
 " God, to enable them to worfhip him, where they both pray 
 ** and prophefy * one by one, as prepared and moved in their 
 " Hearts by his Spirit, and as any thing is revealed to them, ac- 
 " cording to the primitive Practice ; otherwife they are filent be- 
 " fore the Lord. For they profefs this Inlargement of the Spirit 
 ' as a general Gofpel Privilege ; and that, for the Edification of 
 " the Church, it pleafes God now, as in the primitive Times, to 
 * give peculiar Gifts of the Spirit to fome, to qualify them for 
 " the Miniftry, and other Services: All which they apprehend is 
 *' no more than what the Eftablifhed Church profefles; fincea 
 " Perfon cannot enter into Deacon's Orders without firft declar- 
 *' ing, that he trufls he is inwardly moved by the Holy Ghoft 
 " to take upon him that Office and Miniftration ; and, when he 
 " advances higher into Prieft's Orders, the Service, that is thea 
 " read, feems to be chofen on purpofe to fhevv, that the various 
 " Gifts of the Spirit are ftill continued. But they fay, that Men 
 " ought to be very modeft in their Pretenfions to thefe peculiar 
 " Gifts; for that no Man has fufficient Grounds to think, that 
 " he is called to the Miniftry by the Holy Ghoft, without feel- 
 '* ing a preffing difinterefted Love to the Brethren, with a Senfe 
 " of Duty to God, like St. Peter or St. Paul, to the Satisfaction 
 " of the Congregation or Meeting he belongs to : This, to them, 
 " feems to comprehend the Subftance of the primitive Ordination 
 " in the Apoftolic Age. And by the fame Means that a Perfon 
 " can diftinguifh his location to the Minijlry at firft, he may dif- 
 " cover his Call to the Exercife of his Gift on any particular 
 " Occafion. And as there is a general Diflribution of divine 
 " Grace alike to Male and Female, what hinders why they 
 " fhould not both have the like divine Minifterial Million? 
 
 * Pr:pbrfy in thi* Place h fynonymous with Prttteh. as ipprars Orther on. 
 
 . 1 " Efpecially
 
 592 Vrefent State of the Britifh fart ft 
 
 * Efpecially as both Sexes are faid to be Partakers of the In- 
 " largement of the Spirit, peculiar to the Gofpel-times ; and St. 
 *' Paul gives indifcriminate Directions to both, how they are 
 ' to behave themfelves in their public Praying and Prophefying ; 
 * e which laft Word, by his own dired Explanation, is fynonyrr.ous 
 *' with Preaching, as both Terras equally fignify /peaking unto 
 " Men to Edification, Exhortation, and Comfort. Mull we then 
 " fay St. Paul forgot himfelf, and contradids both the Voice of 
 
 " Reafon, and clear Scripture, when he prohibits 
 Womens " Women to fpeak or teach in the Church ? By no 
 Preach- " means : The ieeming Inconfiftencv vanifhes, when 
 ing. u we recoiled, that it might eafily happen by the 
 
 " Example and Perfuafion of the JevAJh Chri- 
 " ftians, that the Gentile Churches might, by degrees, have a 
 " Mixture of the Synagogue Form of public Worfhip amongft 
 ' them, where it was ufual for any reputable Perfon to difpute, 
 " inquire, or afk Queftions ; which Privilege the Corinthian Wo- 
 ' men might think the Gofpel intitled them to, fince fome of 
 ' them were apparently favoured with the higheft Gifts of 
 * c the Spirit, as well as the Men ; but in this Paul lets them 
 " know, that they were millaken. His Phrafeology is clearly 
 * adapted to this Conftrudion, as may be feen by turning to 
 i Cor. xiv. 34, 35 and to which that Place in Timothy has a 
 " manifeft Relation. It is admitted, that fome unedifying or 
 " weak Men and Women will, in this Age, intrude themfelves 
 " upon the Church, as well as formerly. We find in the laft re- 
 " cited Chapter, that the highftly infpired Perfons of the Church 
 ** of Corinth were reproved for want of good Order ; but, agree- 
 *' able to the Example of the Apoftles then, the Quakers now do 
 " all that that is confiftent with the Peace of the Church to pre- 
 " ferve a living and unfpotted Miniftry, both by private and pub- 
 " lie Admonition at their Meetings of Minifters and Elders; 
 * where, to the utmoft of their Power, they difcountenance all 
 " unbecoming Tones or Geftures." 
 
 But, contrary to the Epifcopalian Church, and the general Opt' 
 
 nion of Chrijlians, they believe that neither Waters- 
 Water- Baptifm, nor the Eucharijl, are necejfary to Salvation. 
 Baptifm, For which they argue in this Manner: " What- 
 mnd the " ever is truly and properly a Gofpel Ordinance, 
 Supper. " they defire to own and pradife : They confefs in- 
 
 " deed the Pradice of Johns Baptifm, and the Sup- 
 ' per, is to be found there ; but Pradice only is no Inftitution, or 
 " fufneient Reafon of Continuation. That they were then pro- 
 " per, they believe, it being a Time of Infancy, when the My- 
 " iteries of Truth lay yet couched, and folded up in Figures and 
 " Shadows, as is acknowledged by Protcftants : But it is the 
 
 " Quakers
 
 Chap. XXX. Empire in America." 593 
 
 ** Quakers Belief, that no Figures or Signs are perpetual, or of 
 " Initiation under the Gofpel-Adminiftration, when Cbriji, who 
 * is the Subftance of them, is come ; though this might have 
 " been indulged to young Converts in primitive 7imes, becaufe 
 * : of the Condefcenfion of former Practices. It were to over- 
 " throw the Gofpel-Difpenfation, and to make the coming of 
 " Chrifi of none EfFeft, to render Signs and Figures of the Nature 
 " of the Gofpel, which is inward, fpiritual, and eternal. If it 
 " be faid, that they were ufed after the Coming of Chrijl, and his 
 ' Afcenfion too; they anfwer : So were many Jewi/h Cere- 
 " monies not eafily abolifhed, as Circumcifion, &c. It is fufficient 
 *' to them, that Water-Baptifm was Join's, and not Chrift's ; 
 " that Jefus never ufed it ; that it was no Part of PauPs Com- 
 " miffion, which, if it were Evangelical, and of Duration, would 
 " certainly have been ; and that there is but one Baptifm, as well 
 " as but one Faith, and one Lord ; and that Baptifm ought to be 
 " of the fame Nature with the Kingdom, of which it is an Ordi- 
 " nance, and that is fpiritual. The fame holds alfo as to the 
 " Supper, both alluding to old Jewi/h Practices, and ufed as a 
 " Signification of a near and accomplishing Work, i>iz. the Sub- 
 ** fiance they reprefented. If any fay, But Chrift commanded ', 
 " that one of them /hould continue in Remembrance of him j we 
 " allege, that he that faid fo, told his Difciples alfo, that he 
 " would come to them again ; that fome /hould not tafie of Death 
 " //// they faw him coming in the Kingdom ; and that he that 
 " dwelleth with them, /hould be in them ; and that he ivould drink 
 " no more of this Fruit of the Vine, till he /hould drink it 
 " new 'with them in the Kingdom of God: Which Kingdom is 
 " 'within, as may be read in Luke. He was the heavenly Bread 
 " that they had not yet known, nor his Flefh and Blood, as they 
 " were to know them. So that though Chrifi was come to end 
 ** all Signs ; yet till he was known to be the Subftance to the 
 ' Soul, as the great Bread of Life from Heaven, Signs had their 
 " Service in them, to/he<w forth, and hold in Hand, and in Re* 
 " membrance of Chrijl ; efpecially to the People of that Day, 
 " whofe Religion was attended with a Multitude of like Types, 
 " Shadows, and Signs of the one good Thing, and Subftance of 
 " all, Chrifi manifefted in his People. And that great Apoftle 
 " Paul fays exprefly of the Jenui/h Obfervations, That they 
 " 'were Shadows of the good Things to come, but the Subftance 'was 
 " of Chrifi. Hence it is, that the People called Quakers cannot 
 " be faid to deny them ; that is too hard a Word : But they, truly 
 " feeling in themfelves the very Thing, which outward Water, 
 " Bread and Wine, do fignify, or point forth, they leave them, 
 " off, as fulfilled in Chrift, who is in them the Hope of their Glory: 
 ** And henceforth they have but one Lord, one Faith, one Baptijm,
 
 594 Prefent State of the Britifh Part II. 
 
 ' one Bread, and but one Cup of BleJJings ; and that is the Nenu 
 '* Wine of the Kingdom of God, which is within. They farther 
 " fay, That as certain as God is infinitely Good and Wife, fo cer- 
 " tain are they, that he will oblige his Creatures to no Rules as 
 " necejfary to eternal Salvation, but what are fo plain, in all their 
 " Parts, that no thinking Man is capable of mifunderftanding 
 " them : Will our Father, which is in Heaven, lay Traps and 
 " Snares for the Perdition of his Creatures ? When God made a 
 " Covenant with Abraham, refpefting a temporal Inheritance, 
 " Circumcijton, the Sign of that Covenant, was a Prefcription fo 
 " plain, that no Man differed with his Neighbour about theSenfe 
 * of it. But as Chriftians differ widely about the Nature and 
 " Adminiftration of the Sacraments ; therefore they cannot be 
 '* necejfary to Salvation. The Benefit of thefe two Sacraments 
 " is, amongft Proteftants, fuppofed to arife from their being Signs, 
 ft or Means, of receiving fpiritual Grace, to effedt a Death unto 
 " Sin, and a new Birth unto Righteoufnefs : But this fpiritual 
 " Grace is freely communicated without them, as appears from 
 " many Places of Scripture, the Sixteenth Article of the Church, 
 
 " and divers Prayers in the Common- Prayer-Book. 
 Of Divine As to Divine Worfhip, the Quakers fay, " Since the 
 JVorJhip. " Divine Grace is fufficient, and always ready to 
 
 " open the Underftanding, and animate the Af- 
 ' fe&ions, of all well-difpofed Perfons, fo far as is needful to efta- 
 " blifh them in Holinefs ; Chriftians would want little external 
 " Affiftance in this Gofpel-day of Light and Knowledge, did they 
 '* give due Attention to the Dictates of this fill fmall Voice in 
 " their Hearts: But the Cares and Concerns of this Life fo much 
 " engage the Generality of Men, that they have but little Op- 
 ** portunity for Retirement ; and therefore (were there no other) 
 " this is a fubftantial Reafon for making (at leaft) one Day in 
 " feven a general holy Sabbath, when, by difengaging our Minds 
 a from all temporal Concerns, with the greateft Reverence and 
 " Humiliation, we may affemble, as in the All-feeing Prefence of 
 " the Divine Being, not fo much to know his Will, as to fee 
 " whether we have done it, and ftand approved in his Sight. In 
 " this compofed awful Frame of Mind, the Divine Grace clearly 
 ft fets the true State of our Souls before us, and is ready to help 
 " our Infirmities to addrefs the Throne of Grace, according to our 
 *' feveral Exigencies, and real Conditions, whether for Pardon 
 " for paft Sins, and Affiftance againft fome diforderly Paffion, or 
 " in fecret Praifes and Thankfgivings both for the Mercies and 
 ** Chaftifements of our Heavenly Father. But the Weaknefs of 
 " our Frame is fuch, that we find fome Difficulty in being at all 
 ' times fo well difpofed as we ought; temporal Objedts naturally 
 '* cloud and ftupefy our Souls ; and therefore Minifters may be 
 ^ ' "of
 
 Chap. XXX. Empire in America. ggt; 
 
 " of Service fometimes, to ftir up the pure Mind by The Ser- 
 ** way of Remembrance ; to exhort and rebuke fuch 'vice of 
 " as forget God, and rejeft the Reproofs of the in- Minifters. 
 " ivard Divine Monitor ; and alfo to promote mental 
 " and private, by public Invocation. But then they think it clear, 
 ** that this good Purpofe is more effe&ually anfwered by a fer- 
 " vent Exhortation nowand-then, from one who feels a Divine 
 " Impulfe on his Mind, feafonably and fuitably to admonifh Men, 
 " and to invoke the Divine Blefling; than to be always diverted 
 " from this inward Exercife by external Performances. Our 
 " Lord, in his Conference with the Woman of Samaria, refpect- 
 " ing public Worjhip, declares, that all outfide Devotion, confined 
 " to Place and Form, is unacceptable ; and the Worlhip of the 
 " Mind, or Spirit, injoined with this moft cogent Reafon; God is a 
 " Spirit, and they that ivorjbip him muji nuorjhip him in Spirit 
 *' and in Truth, This is apparently the true De- 
 " fcription of public Chriftian Worfhip ; and nothing Liturgy. 
 *' like a Liturgy being any-where prefcribed by 
 " Chrift, or his Apoftles, it follows, that this is the everlafting 
 " and moft acceptable Worjhip to Almighty God ; and that there- 
 " fore a fufficient Degree of the Divine Grace, for the Performance 
 " of public Devotion, will for ever be continued. 
 " They are moft heartily for univerfal Liberty of Liberty of 
 " Confcience, agreeable to Propofition XIV. in Bar- Confcience. 
 " clay, which affirms, that the Power of the Civil 
 '* Magiftrate doth not extend to Matters purely religious, and per- 
 ** taining to the Confcience. They dilapprove of 
 " War, as inconfiftent with the Nature and Perfe- Againjl 
 " ftion of the Gofpel, which moft eminently confifts War. 
 " in Peace, Love, and Forgivenefs, as predifted and 
 " defcribed by the Evaangelical Prophets Ifaiah and Micah, and 
 " confirmed by the Judgment of the primitive Church, as Bar- 
 " clay has made appear. And fince (o peaceable a State is both 
 " propheiied of, and promifed as the Happinefs of the latter 
 " Times ; let not this People be thought ufelefs, or inconfiftent 
 " with Government, for introducing that harmlefs, glorious Way 
 " to this diftra&ed World; but rather as an illuftrious Example, 
 " leading from War to univerfal Peace, and which has an appa- 
 *' rent Tendency to reduce the World to a Family of Love, even 
 " almoft to a Paradife again. Though the various Chriftian Na- 
 " tions are now fo difordered, that, in fome Countries, defenfive 
 " War feems neceflkry to them in fome important Cafes; yet 
 " the Quakers believe, that Chrift, the blejfed Shepherd of his 
 ** Flock, will ever preferve the faithful Followers of his MeeAnefs, 
 " and Difciples of his peaceable and forgiving Do&rine. They 
 
 Q_q 2 alto
 
 596 Prefent State of the Brkilh Part II. 
 
 Againji " alfo think thofe Words of Chrift, Sivear not at 
 6*vearig. " all, amount to a Prohibition of folemn, as well as 
 
 " profane Swearing : So that it is for Chrifts Sake, 
 *' that they cannot fwear, who is the Truth, and has taught 
 e( them to fpeak the Truth without an Oath. The Govern- 
 
 " ment accepting their folemn Affirmations inftead 
 Solemn Af- " of an Oath, they readily fubmit to the fame Pu- 
 firmation. " nifhment, in cafe of Untruth, that is due by Law 
 
 " to Perjury. They believe Magiftracy to be an 
 Of Civil " Ordinance of God, and that he that ruleth welk 
 Honour " is worthy of double Honour, and deferves to 
 
 and Re- *' be much valued and efteemed : And the fureft 
 fpecl. " Token of Refpeft we can fhew to Magiftra-es is 
 
 " chearfully obeying all juft Laws under their Go- 
 ' vernment, and caufing their Burden, or Charge, to fit light up- 
 " on their Shoulders. And though they do not pull off their 
 " Hats, or ufe Forms of Salutations ; yet they treat all Men with 
 " Serioufnefs and Gentlenefs, though it be with Plainnefs, and 
 " their Superiors with a modeft and awful Diftance. This is ho- 
 " nouring of Government and Governors, and not empty Titles, 
 " fervile and fantaftic Geftures, infincere or unmeaning Forms 
 *' of Salutation. And, to fhew that they are a People that love 
 
 11 Order and good Government, they carefully pra- 
 Particu- " clife it amongft themfelves: For their Monthly 
 Jar Meet- " Meetings, in the Country, are often compofed 
 mm, " of feveral fingle Congregations, called Particular 
 
 " Meetings : Thefe particular Meetings fend Repre- 
 Monthlj ** fentatives to their Monthly Meeting, who are to 
 Meetings. " report the State and Exigencies of their Meetings, 
 
 " and bring back Inftruftions to their next prepara- 
 ** tive Meeting, as it is called, from their preparing, colleding, 
 * { and putting the Affairs of each particular Meeting in fit Or- 
 " der to be laid before the next Monthly Meeting. In every par* 
 " ticular Meeting Two, or more, of the moll elderly, fenfible, 
 " and exemplary Men , are generally appointed to overfee 
 ** the Flock, to admonilh and reprove, on Occafion ; who are 
 ** therefore called Elders. Before they enter upon Bufmefs at 
 " their Monthly Meetings, they commonly fit fome time in fo- 
 " lemn Meditation, and fometimes One or more of their Mini- 
 " fters have a feafonable Word of Exhortation to the Congrega- 
 " tion. When Worfhip is concluded, after the Minutes of the 
 " laft Monthly Meeting are confidered, every particular Meeting 
 " is called upon, to declare their particular Exigencies ; which 
 M are alfo duly confidered. The general Heads of the Bufinefs of 
 " Monthly Meetings are the Poor, Orderly Walking, Integrity to 
 " their ProfeJJton, Births, Marriages, Burials, Certificates, Suf- 
 
 " feritigt,
 
 Chap. XXX. Empire in America. 597 
 
 - ferings, &c. Their Quarterly Meetings are ge- 
 
 " ncrally held at the Capital of the County. Thefe Quarterly 
 
 *' Meetings confift of the Reprefentatives fent from Meetings. 
 
 u their feveral Monthly Meetings, who are to give 
 
 u an Account of the State of thofe Meetings; after which the 
 
 *' Exigencies of every Monthly Meeting are duly confidered, and 
 
 '* proper Expedients provided. The Yearly Meet- 
 
 " ing is always held at London in Whitfun-Week, for Yearly 
 
 " no other Reafon, than becaufe it is a well-known Meeting. 
 
 ** and fuitable Time of the Year for the Brethren to 
 
 " come together from all Parts. This Meeting is compofed of 
 
 " the County Reprefentatives fent from the Quarterly Meetings, 
 
 " City and County Correfpondents and Minifters, with Deputies 
 
 ** from Ireland and Scotland. Here the Reports of the Reprc- 
 
 " fentatives "Jbe*w the State of the Society throughout the World, 
 
 *' and proper Meafures are concerted for every Emergency. This 
 
 ' is a molt edifying Time, becaufe it generally brings to thte 
 
 " City their moll eminent Minifters and Elders from all Parts. 
 
 " Their Meeting is concluded with a printed Epiftle, fetting forth 
 
 " the State of the Society, with fome feafonable Advice ; the general 
 
 " Paragraphs of which are ; Parents and Matters to excite their 
 
 " Families to the diligent Reading of the holy Scriptures ; that 
 
 " they diligently attend the Meetings for Worfhip ; that they 
 
 " wait upon the Lord in Silence, in order to have a true Re- 
 
 " lilh and Savour of the Miniftry of thofe, who are right- 
 
 " ly concerned by the fame Spirit, to labour in Word and Do- 
 
 ** drine amongft them ; that they maintain their Chriftian Tefti- 
 
 " mony againft Tythes, and forced Maintenance of Minifters ; 
 
 " that they be careful not to defraud the King of his Cuftoms, 
 
 " Duties, or Excife, and to avoid dealing in Goods fufpe&ed to 
 
 " be run ; that a Spirit of Love and Humility may more and 
 
 " more diffufe itfelf amongft them, and influence the Hearts of 
 
 " all ; they are exhorted to Peace, and mutual Forgivencfs, and 
 
 " right Conduct towards others. Diforderly Walk- 
 
 " ers and Backfliders are dealt with according to the Diforderly 
 
 " Nature of the Cafe. If neither private Admoni- Walkers. 
 
 " tion, nor the Admonition of the particular Meet' 
 
 u ing, has the defired Effedl, to reckini the Offender, he is com* 
 
 " plained of to the Monthly Meeting, where again he is intreated 
 
 " in Love, to amend his Ways. But if no fufficient Tokens of 
 
 *' Amendment appear in fome Months after, or that the Offence 
 
 be grofs, the particular Meeting he belongs to, is ufoally direcV 
 
 ' ed to draw up a Tejiimony of Denial againft him, 
 
 and prefent it to the next Monthly Meeting; A Denial. 
 
 " which, when approved of, is generally figned by the 
 
 ' Clerk in Behalf of the Meeting. Thefe Paftrs of Denial art
 
 593 Prefent State of the Btitifh Part II. 
 
 ' to be read in the Meeting the Defaulter belongs to, at the 
 " Conclusion of their Wbrlhip ; and Copies thereof difperfed, as 
 " Occafion may require, that the Public may be fatisfied, that 
 " the Society by no means approves of the Conduft of fuch un- 
 worthy Men. The following is a Copy of one againft a Per- 
 " fon for defrauding his Creditors : Since this moral Precept of 
 " our Lord, to do by others as we would be done unto, is fuch a 
 " main Part of Chriftianity, as, without the due Obfervation 
 " thereof, all the moft fpecious Shews of Religion will avail us 
 " nothing ; it becomes the indifpenfable Duty of Chrifiians in all 
 " Ages, as much as in them lies, to fee that their Affemblies are 
 " compofed of fuch Men, whofe upright Carriage in their outward 
 " Dealings demon/} rates, that they are fincere Difciples of Jefus 
 " Chrift. And inafmuch ai we find, on due Inquiry and Exami- 
 " nation, that M. N. has been di [regardful of this plain and 
 " 'principal Law of our Divine Lawgiver, by not delivering up 
 11 bis Effecls amongjl his Creditors in due Time, to their great In- 
 ** jury, and very great Difcontent, as the Wajle of his Subjlance 
 *' was intirely owing to Carelefnefs and Extravagancy ; which 
 " Conduit he perfe&ly knevj was alfo quite contrary to the good 
 " Inftruclions, and wbolfome Difcipline, Jo piou/ly and wife recom- 
 '* mended and fettled by our worthy Elders now at Reft ; we 
 *' therefore, from a juft Abhorrence of fuch Unrighteoufnejs, hereby 
 " declare, that henceforth we do not account him a Member of our 
 *' Chriftian Church, until he Jbew fuch Tokens of Repentance, as 
 *' /hall bear due Proportion to his Offence, which we fincerely 
 
 m dejire. There lies an Appeal from the Monthly 
 Appeals. " Meeting to the Quarterly Meeting, and from this 
 
 " to the Yearly Meeting ; for if a Man be denied by 
 " a Monthly Meeting, either for Diforderly Walking, or on Civil 
 " Cafes, or not fubmitting Matters in Difference with another 
 '* to Arbitration, but will, without Confent of the Meeting, go 
 " to Law ; or, if an Award be made, and one of the Parties will 
 '* not abide by it; in fuch-like Cafes the Perfon, who thinks 
 " himfelf aggrieved by the Judgment of the fubordinate Meetings, 
 " has a Right to appeal to the Yearly Meeting at London, where 
 " the Cafe comes before a Committee of Twelve, which is always 
 *' a changeable Committee, and in Which all the Counties take 
 " their Turn ; the Reprefentatives of that County, againft whom 
 ** an Appeal lies, being excluded. If either Party intimate a Dif- 
 " fatisfaftion with what the Committee has done, the Cafe is 
 " again confidered, either before a larger Committee, or the 
 *' whole Meeting, whofe Judgment is final. M 
 
 Customs.] " As a Prefervative againft Pride, Superfluity, or 
 *' Extravagancy, the Quakers think it bell to keep nearly to one 
 
 " plain.
 
 Chap. XXX. Empire in America. 599 
 
 " plain, decent Habit in their Apparel ; a Defire 
 " after Variety, and new Fafhions, being apt to en- Drefs of 
 f* gage the Mind too much about the outward ad- Quakers 
 ' orning, to the Neglect ofwhat is more worthy, in Pen- 
 *' the Cultivation of good moral Habits, fuch as the fylvania. 
 *' moll valuable adorning of a meek and quiet Spirit, 
 " which is, in the Sight of God, of great Price : Mourning. 
 " They alfo look upon Mourning-Habits to be no 
 ' better at Bottom than difguifed Pride and Pomp, frequently 
 * ufed where no real Sorrow is ; and they efleem the molt cer- 
 " tain Token of Refpett towards our departed Friends, is to 
 " love and cherifh thofe they loved, and by our whole Deport- 
 " ment to demonflrate, that we really revere their Memory. 
 ** They difapprove, for the like Reafons, of all coft- 
 " ly Furniture of Houfes, luxurious Tables, Sports, Luxury. 
 " Plays, and drinking Healths ; which laft has an 
 *' evident Tendency to exceffive Drinking, to Quarrels, and Flat- 
 " tery. When two Perfons declare their Intentions 
 " of Marriage before a Monthly Meeting, thefe Marriages. 
 ** Queftions are put : Are you clear of all others, 
 " and have you the Confent of your Parents, or Friends con- 
 " cerned? To which if they cannot anfwer in the Affirmative, 
 * an intire Stop is put to their Proceedings. And, however full 
 ** in the Affirmative their Anfwer may be, their Parents mull ei- 
 " ther perfonally, or by a duly witneffed Certificate, confirm their 
 " Anfwer. And the Meeting alfo frequently appoints two Men, 
 " and two Women, to make due Inquiry concerning their Clear- 
 " nefs frpm all others, and make Report thereof to the next 
 ' Monthly Meeting ; when, if no fufficient Reafon appears to the 
 " contrary, they have Confent to proceed, by appointing a Met- 
 " ing for the Solemnization of their Marriage when they pleafe ; 
 " and Two Perfons are nominated to attend it, to fee that good 
 " Order be kept, and make Report thereof to the next Monthly 
 " Meeting. When the Day of Marriage is come, they ufually 
 " fit in the moll confpicuous Place of the Meeting, with their Re- 
 " lations and Friends about them. After fome time for folemn 
 Meditation on the important Contract they are going to enter 
 " into with each other, and perhaps, after a feafonable Exhorta- 
 " tion and Prayer by one ox more of their Minilters, they Hand 
 " up, and, taking each other by the Hand in a folemn Manner, 
 '* the Man audibly declares to this purpofe : Friends, In the Fear 
 " of the Lord, and in the Pre/ence of this Affembly, whom 1 defer e 
 " to be my Witneffes, I take this my Friend M. N. to I e my Wife y 
 *' fromifing, through Divine Jfiijlance, to be unto her a loving and 
 * faithful Hufband, till Death feparates us. Then the Woman 
 * makes the like Declaration. After which one audibly reads a 
 Qj5 4 " Ccr^L
 
 600 Prefent State of the Britifh Part II, 
 
 ' Certificate, fetting forth the aforefaid orderly Proceedings of 
 " this Couple at the Monthly Meetings, and the folemn Words of 
 " Marriage-contract ; to which the new-married People fet their 
 " Hands firft, and then (as Witnefles) their near Relations and 
 " Friends, with as many of the Congregation as pleafe. The 
 " Original belongs to the Bride and Bridegroom ; but a true Copy 
 " is to be regiflered in the Monthly Meeting Books. 
 Births. " Parents name their own Children ; and, at London, 
 
 " they have a printed Certificate, fetting forth the 
 * Names of the Parents and Child, with the Time of its Birth, 
 *' which is figned by the Midwife, and fome of the Company 
 " prefent ; which Certificate is filed in the proper Meeting, and 
 " alfo a fair Copy entered in the Book of Births. 
 Burials. " Their Burials are alfo regiflered with like Care. 
 " In conducting a Funeral, if it be not otherwife in- 
 ' convenient, the Body of the Deceafed is frequently carried to a 
 '* Meeting-houfe, where probably fome of their Minifters preach 
 '* to the Congregation. After which, the Corpfe, which is al- 
 " ways laid in a plain Coffin, is generally carried to the Grave by 
 " fuch as come to pay their laft Office of Love to their departed 
 *' Friend. At the Ground, the Corpfe being fet down by the 
 *' Grave-fide, in folemn Silence, they paufe a while before they 
 ** interr it, that the Minds of the Spectators may be the more 
 " deeply touched with a Senfe of their approaching Exit, and 
 " their future State : And fometimes alfo here again a Minifter 
 " has a feafonable Word of Exhortation to the Auditory." As 
 to the Cuftoms of the Indians in Penjyfoania, as foon 
 Indians in as their Children are born, they vvafh them in Wa- 
 Penfyl- ter ; and, while very young, and in cold Weather to 
 
 vania. chufe, they plunge them, in the Rivers, to harden 
 
 and embolden them. Having wrapt them in a 
 Clout, they lay them on a ftrait thin Board, a little more than 
 the Length and Breadth of the Child, and fwaddle it fall upon the 
 the Board, to make it ftrait ; which is the Reafon that the In- 
 dians have flat Heads ; and thus they carry the Children at their 
 Backs. Their Children will go very young, at nine Months com- 
 monly; they wear only a fmall Clout round their Wafte, till 
 they are big ; if Boys, they go a Fifhing till ripe for the Woods, 
 which is about the Age of Fifteen when they hunt ; and, after 
 having given fome Proofs of their Manhood, by a good Return of 
 Skins, they may marry j elfe it is a Shame among them to think 
 of a Wife. The Girls flay with their Mothers, and help to hoe 
 the Ground, plant Corn, and carry Burdens ; for, it feems, Wives 
 are the true Servants of their Hufbands ; but, in all other Cafes, 
 the Men are very affectionate to their Wives. When the young 
 Women are fit for Marriage, they wear fomething upon their
 
 Chap. XXX. Empire in America. 60 1 
 
 Heads for an Advertifement, but fo as their Faces are hardly to 
 be feen, but when they pleafe. The Age they marry at, if Wo- 
 men, is about Thirteen or Fourteen ; if Men, about Seventeen or 
 Eighteen. Their Diet is Indian Corn, divers ways prepared, and 
 what they take in the Woods and Rivers ; they eat twice a Day, 
 Morning and Evening, and their Seats and Tables are the Ground. 
 When they die, they bury them with their Apparel, and the 
 neareft Relations fling in fomething precious with the Corpfe, 
 when it is put into the Grave, as a Token of their Love : Their 
 Mourning is Blacking of their Faces, which they continue for a 
 Year. The Drefs of the Indians in Virginia is only 
 a Piece of Skin about their Waift, that reaches down Virginia. 
 to their Knees ; and thofe of Condition have the 
 Skin of a Deer, or fome other Beaft, for a Mantle, and another 
 Piece of Skin ferves them for Shoes or Buikins. As to their Diet, 
 they have the fame Provifions nearly as the above Indians. On 
 Rejoicing-days they fing and dance in a Ring, taking Hands ; and 
 are much delighted with Mafquerades. To qualify any Man for 
 a Poft, either in the Indian Government, or Army, he is obliged 
 to undergo very fevere Difcipline : The Sons of fome of the belt 
 Families, at fixteen or feventeen Years of Age, are carried by their 
 Priefts into fome folitary Wood, and there fhut up for feveral 
 Months in a kind of Cage of a conic Form, not fuffered to con- 
 verfe with any Man but their Tutors, or to eat any thing more 
 than will juft keep them alive ; but they are obliged to drink a 
 certain intoxicating Liquor, which makes them rave like Mad- 
 men, and forget every thing that ever happened, if we may believe 
 them : But whatever Effet the Liquor may have, or how great 
 foever the Change may be, that is wrought in their Pupils, the 
 End of all this is, as the Indians themfelves relate, to extinguifh 
 all childifh Impreflions, and that Partiarity to Perfons and Things, 
 (o common to all Men, and to eradicate fuch Prepoffeffions and 
 unreafonable Prejudices, as they may have imbibed ; alleging, 
 that, until this is done, they are by no means fit for Minifters or 
 Magiftrates. The King's Council is always compofed of thefc 
 Gentlemen, and no others are advanced to any Poft in the Go- 
 vernment, Civil or Military. When the Indians are about to en- 
 ter upon War, or any other important Enterprize, the King 
 fummons a Convention of his great Men, to aflift at a Grand Coun- 
 cil : At thefe Affemblies it is the Cullom, especially when a War 
 is expected, for the young Men to paint themfelves irregularly 
 with black and white, and other motley Colours, making one 
 half of their Face red, (for Inftance) and the other half black, or 
 white, with Circles of a different Hue round their Eyes, with 
 monflrous Muftachoes, and a thoufand fantaftical Figures all over 
 the reft of their Body ; and, to make {hemfeives appear yet more 
 
 ugly
 
 6oi Prefent State of the Spanifh Part II. 
 
 Bgly and frightful, they ftrew Feathers, Down, or the Hair 
 of Beafts, upon the Paint, while it is ftill moift, and capable of 
 making thofe light Subftances ltick fall on. When they are thus 
 formidably equipped, they rufh into the Place where the Grand 
 Council is held ; and inftantly begin fome grotefque Dance, hold- 
 ing their Arrows, or Tomahawks, in their Hands, and all the 
 while finging the antient Glories of their Nation, and efpecially of 
 their own Families, threatening, and making Signs with their Tor 
 mahawks, what a dreadful Havock they intend to make among 
 their Enemies. Notwithftanding thefe terrible Airs they give 
 themfelves, they are fometimes timorous enough. They have a 
 peculiar Way of receiving Strangers, and, diftinguifhing whether 
 they come as Friends or Enemies, though they do not underftand 
 each other's Language, which is this : The chief Man of the In- 
 dians, to whom the Strangers come, takes Two or three Whiffs 
 of Tobacco,and then hands it to the Chief of the Strangers; and, 
 if he refufes to fmoke it, it is a Sign of War; but, if it be Peace, 
 the Stranger takes a Whiff or two of the Pipe. The Cuftoms of 
 the reft of the Britijh Dominions being, in a manner, the fame 
 with what has been already given, I fhall detain the Reader no. 
 longer on this Head. 
 
 Curiosities.] In Virginia there is a prodigious Number of _ 
 Oyfter-fhells intermixed with the Earth, at the Depth of three 
 or four Yards in many Places, and feem to make a Vein of a 
 Rock ; and, in fome Places, are found Teeth of Fifties, and Bones 
 of Whales, feyeral Yards deep in the Ground, far from the Sea. 
 The admirable Oeconomy of the Bevers in Maryland deferves to 
 be remembered : They cohabit in one Houfe, are incorporated in 
 a regular Form of Government, fomething like Monarchy, 'tis 
 laid, their Superintendent leading them out to their feveral Em- 
 ployments: Thefe Creatures have a great deal of Policy, and 
 know how to defeat all the Subtilty and Stratagems of the 
 Hunter. 
 
 CHAP. XXXI. 
 
 'The Prefent State of the Spanifh Empire in America. 
 
 Boundaries.] QLD-MEXICO, or New-Spain, is bounded 
 
 on the North by Neiv-Mexico, or Granada, 
 
 and Louijiana ; on the North-eaft by the Gulph of Mexico; on 
 
 the South-eaft by Terra-Firma, and by the Pacific Ocean, or 
 
 South-
 
 Chap. XXXI. Empire in America. 603 
 
 Soutb-Sea, on the South-weft. Nenv-Mexico, or Granada, is 
 bounded by unknown Lands on the North ; by I ouijiana on the 
 Eaft ; by Old-Mexico, or New-Spain, on the South j and, on the 
 Weft, by the Bay or Gulph of California, which feparates it 
 from California. Terra- Fir ma is bounded on the North and Eail 
 by the North-Sea, or Atlantic Ocean ; on the South by Peru, and 
 the Country of the Amazons ; and on the Weft, by the Soutb-Sea, 
 and the Province of Viragna in Old-Mexico. Peru is bounded by 
 the Soutb-Sea on the Weft ; by the Country of the Amazons, 
 Terra-Firma, and Paragua, on the Eaft ; by Chili on the South j 
 and, on the North, by the Province of Popayan, which extends to 
 the Equator. Cbili is bounded by Peru on the North ; by Paragua 
 and Magellan! ca on the Eaft ; and by the great South- Sea on the 
 South and Weft. Paragua is bounded by the Country of the 
 Amazons on the North ; by Brazil on the Eaft ; and Cbili on the 
 Weft. The Land of tbe Amazons is bounded on the North by 
 the Equator ; on the Eaft by Brazil, and the Atlantic Ocean ; on 
 the South by Paragua and Brazil; and by Peru on the South-weft. 
 Magellanica is bounded on the Eaft by the Atlantic Ocean ; on the 
 Souch by the Streights of Magellan ; on the Weft by Cbili, and the 
 Soutb-Sea ; and, on the North, by Paragua and Cbili. California 
 is bounded by unknown Lands on the North ; on the Eaft, by the 
 Bay or Gulph of California, and a narrow Ifthmus, which fepa- 
 rate it from Old and New Mexico ; and by the Soutb-Sea towards 
 the South and Weft. Laftly, Spanijb Florida is bounded on the 
 North by Georgia ; on the Eaft by the Atlantic Ocean i on the 
 South and Weft by the G ulph of Mexico. 
 
 Situation.] Old-Mexico is fituated between 7 Degrees and 
 28 Degrees North Latitude, and between the 83d and 11 6th 
 Degrees Weft Longitude. Nenu-Mexico lies between 28 and 45 
 Degrees North Latitude, and between 100 and 130 Degrees 
 Weft Longitude. Terra-Firma is fituated between o Degrees 
 and 13 North Latitude, and between 50 and 78 Degrees Weft 
 Longitude. Peru is fituated between o Degree* and 25 Degrees 
 South Latitude, and between 60 and 80 Degrees Weft Longitude. 
 Cbili is fituated between 25 and 50 Degrees South Latitude, 
 and between 71 and 84 Degrees Weft Longitude. Paragua is 
 fituated between 1 2 and 37 Degrees South Latitude, and between 
 50 and 75 Degrees Weft Longitude. The Land of the Amazons 
 lies between the Equator and 15 Degrees Souch Latitude, and be- 
 tween 50 and 75 Degrees Weft Longitude. Magellanica lies be- 
 tween 36 and 54 Degrees South Latitude, and between 57 and 
 83 Degrees Weft Longitude, California is fituated between 23 
 and half and 46 and half North Latitude, and between 1 14 and 
 I36 Decrees Weft Longitude. Terra del Fuego is fituated be- 
 tween
 
 604 prefent State of the Spanilh Part II. 
 
 'ween 53 and 57 and half Degrees South Latitude, and between 
 74 and 82 Degrees Weft Longitude. The Ifland of Hifpamola 
 lies between 18 and 20 Degrees North Latitude, and between 66 
 and 75 Degrees Weft Longitude. The Ifland of Porto- Rica is fi- 
 tuated in 1 8 Degrees North Latitude, and between 64 and 66 
 Degrees Weft Longitude. The ljland of Cuba is fituated between 
 the 20th Degree of North Latitude and the Tropic of Cancer, and 
 between the 74th and 87th Degree of Weft Longitude. Laftly, 
 Spanijh Florida is fituated between 30 and 26 and half North La- 
 titude, and between 82 and half and 86 Weft Longitude. 
 
 Divifion. 
 
 The Spanifh Em- 
 pire in America. 
 
 1. Old-Mexico, ) 
 or Newo-Spain J 
 
 2. Kew-Mexi- } 
 co t or Granada J 
 
 3. California 
 
 4. Terra-Firma 
 
 5. Peru 
 
 e. chin 
 
 7. Paragua 
 
 8. LandofAma- } 
 zons ) 
 
 9. Mage Hani ca, 1 
 er Patagonia J 
 
 1 0. Terra delFnego 
 
 1 1 . Cuba 
 
 12. Hifpaniola 
 
 1. French 
 
 2. Spanijh 
 
 13. Porto- Rico 
 
 14. Florida 
 
 Square Miles. 
 
 571,240 
 
 300,000 
 
 240,000 
 828,000 
 970,000 
 206,000 
 1,150,000 
 
 993,600 
 
 325,000 
 
 42,075 
 3 8,400 
 
 15,500 
 
 20,500 
 
 3,200 
 
 1 1 8,000 
 
 Capital Cities. 
 
 Mexico 
 Sancla Fe 
 
 Carthagena 
 Lima 
 St. lago 
 Affumption 
 
 Havana 
 
 Petit Guavas 
 St. Domingo 
 Porto- Rico 
 St. Augujline 
 
 Diftancc and 
 Bearing from 
 
 London. 
 
 4800 sw. 
 432 sw. 
 
 4320 sw. 
 5700 sw. 
 5700 sw. 
 5460 sw. 
 
 4338 sw. 
 
 3996 sw. 
 3900 sw. 
 3729 sw. 
 3690 sw. 
 
 Climate.] Mexico is very much incumbered with Moun- 
 tains, which are, for the molt part, covered with 
 Old- Woods ; but there are a Chain of Hills higher than 
 
 Mexico. ufual, than run almoft the whole Length of it, from 
 the South-well to the North-eaft; Between thefe 
 
 Hills
 
 Chap. XXXI. Empire in America. 6o 5 
 
 Hd,s*nd Mountains are many hue ^*' ^S 
 
 fhree Degrees on eachWhe * J iffia 
 tually changmg , and fom ^ J * . ^ io 
 Calms, unto the Equator .that: a p ^ J- 
 
 ^ i,U= of 3 oNo e th or sCth, there are other periodica. 
 
 ed M> i and there are, our g Hours 
 
 ^ ^T^wM^Ko^ and South Coaft of 
 
 *&" T?ha ?h S e Wnd wh eh blow from the Mountains in the 
 
 ZnhhU ctniTrt e eolder than thofe that come from the 
 
 ^1, if obfaved/'tSa, as the Sun approaches either of the 
 
 W, .carries wt Weather fo far with Us and when t s 
 
 E WvJheir fa Wiahe when the Sun is neareft them, 
 ,7wet Weah when 7t is at its greatert Diftance from them 
 
 '4 rea^ltd Hurrican; when the WW ^ws a. mo W 
 
 uJS Sel Brlto "which b.ow aKcrnatety, and **-~ 
 I akes render the Air cool, and make even the 1 omd I Zone plea
 
 6o6 Trefent State of the Spanifh Part II. 
 
 February; though the Weather then Teems very moderate to an 
 European Conftitution. The Tops of the higheft Mountains are 
 indeed fometimes very cold, being covered with Snow, even in 
 1 6 or 1 8 Degrees of North Latitude. The hotteft Time of the 
 Year is in February, March, and the Beginning ofJpril; for then 
 the Sun isfeldom obfcured by Clouds, the Waters are every-where 
 dried up, and it is very difficult then to meet with frefh Water in 
 fome Places. This Country produces feveral Kinds of Fruits^ as 
 
 Oranges, Lemons, Citrons, Pomgranates, and other 
 New- fine Fruits. We know little more of New-Mexico, 
 
 Mexico. than that it is an exceeding fruitful Country, abounding 
 
 with the fame Plants and Animals as our Plantations 
 of Virginia and Carolina do ; that it alfo abounds in rich Silver 
 Mines, and has fome of Gold. There are in Cali- 
 California. fornia large Plains, pleafant Valleys, excellent Pa- 
 ftures at all Times for great and fmall Cattle, fine 
 Springs of running Water, Brooks, and Rivers, with'their Banks 
 covered with Willows, Reeds, and wild Vine. On the Mountains 
 there are all the Year long, Mefcales, a Fruit peculiar to this 
 Country : and, in mod Seafons, Pijiacbios of feveral Sorts, and 
 Figs of different Colours. The Trees are very beautiful ; and," 
 amongft others, the Palo Santo bears a great deal of Fruit, from 
 which they draw excellent Frankincenfe. As this Country 
 abounds in Fruits, it does not lefs in Grain, of which there are 
 Fourteen Sorts : There are excellent Skirrets, or a fort of red 
 Strawberries, of which the Natives eat plentifully : They have 
 Citrons and Water-melons of an extraordinary Size : The Land is 
 fo good, that moil Plants, it feems, bear Fruit three times a 
 Year. The Heats in Summer are very great along the Sea- 
 coafts, and it feldom rains ; but the Air of the Inland Country is 
 more temperate. It is the fame in Winter in Proportion: In the 
 Months of April, May, and June, there falls, with a ftrong Dew, 
 a fort of Manna, which congeals and hardens upon the Leaves of 
 Reeds j from whence the Natives gather it, and find it as fweet as 
 Sugar, but not altogether fo white. The Climate is extremely 
 healthful, if we may judge of it by the MiJJtonary Jefuits, and 
 the Spaniards with them ; for, during Five Years they were in 
 this Country, they continued very well in Health. The Coafts 
 of California are famous for the Pearl-fifhery ; and it is thought, 
 that there are Mines to be found in feveral Places, if they were 
 
 fought for. As to Terra- Fir ma : I Terra-Firma Pro- 
 Terra- per has a very unequal Surface, confiding of exceeding 
 
 Firma. high Hills, and long deep Valleys : The Valleys are 
 
 watered with Rivers, Brooks, and Springs; fome of 
 them falling into the North, others into the Soutb-Sea, moft of 
 them having their Sources in a Ridge or Chain of Mountains, 
 
 thac
 
 Chap. XXXI. Empire in America.' 607 
 
 that furmount and overtop the other Hills, running the Length 
 of the whole IJihmus, and parallel to the Coaft, fpreading along, 
 and bending as the IJihmus bends. This vaft Ridge of Mountains 
 is neareft the Coaft of the North-Sea, feldom more than Ten or 
 Fifteen Miles diftant from it. Travellers obferve, when they paf 
 over them, that the high Hills, between thefe vaft Mountains and 
 the South-Sea, were nothing in Comparifon of them: That thefe 
 Hills did not only appear much beneath the high Ridge, but the 
 Clouds were confiderably below them, and intercepted their 
 Sight of the Country ; and all the People grew giddy with the 
 Height, when they had climbed to the Top ; but this Giddinefs 
 went off again as they defcended lower. This Province, being 
 very narrow, and lying between two great Oceans, ra. the North 
 and South Seas, is obferved to have more wet Weather, than any 
 other Place within the Torrid Zone. The Rains ufually begin 
 here in April or May ; in June, July, and Auguji, they are very 
 heavy ; and it is extreme hot at this Time, whenever the Sun 
 fhines out ; there being then no Breezes to cool the Air. In Sep* 
 tember the Rains begin to abate ; but it is November or Decem- 
 ber, and fometimes January, before the fair Seafon returns : So 
 that the Country is very hot for Two-thirds, if nor Three Quar- 
 ters of the Year. But in the wetteft Seafon there are fome fair 
 Days, with only a Tornado or Thunder-fliower now-and-then. 
 The coldeft Time of the Year is after the Rains about Cbrijlmas, 
 when the fair Weather approaches. The Soil of Terra-Firma 
 Proper, or the Ifthmus of Darien, is good in the middle of the 
 Province; but both the Shores of the North and South Seas are gene- 
 rally either a dry, barren Sand, or drowned Land, that will fcarce 
 produce any kind of Grain. The Sea-coafts of this Province are 
 commonly unhealthful ; and the Mountains, which have Mines in 
 them, produce fcarce any thing but Shrubs. 2. St. Martha pro- 
 duces almoft all manner of Fruits and Plants, which grow in old 
 Spain. They have alfo Mines of Gold and Copper in their 
 Mountains, Emeralds, Sapphires, and many other precious Stones. 
 The Sea-coafts are exceffive hot ; but their Mountains cool, being 
 covered with Snow, even in this warm Climate. 3. The Moun- 
 tains in the Provinces of Venezuela and Caracos are exceeding 
 high, and the Valleys very deep, efpecially in the Province of 
 Caracos. The Tops of the Hills are barren; but the lower 
 Part of them, and the Valleys between, have a rich Mould ; fo 
 that here is Plenty of Sugar, Tobacco, Corn, Cattle, and rich 
 Pafture. Their Plantations of Cocoa-nuts are elteemed the beft in 
 the Spanijh Dominions in America : There are alfo feveral Gold 
 Mines in this Province. 4 The Inland Part of Andalufia is 
 mountainous, and covered with Woods, intermixed with Val- 
 leys and Meadows, that produce Corn and Palhirage ; but it is 
 
 not
 
 60S The Prefent State of the SpaniiH 
 
 not near Co fruitful as the Provinces of Venezuela and Caracas, or 
 fo full of Towns and Inhabitants : This Country produces moll 
 of the fine Fruits which are found in Europe. 5. The Province 
 of Guiana, or Caribiana, is fubjedt to Inundations on the Sea- 
 coafts, they lying very low ; the Air is exceflive hot, and unhealth- 
 ful, efpecially in fuch Parts of the Country as are not cleared 
 of the Woods. 6. Ne<w-Granada affords vaft Variety of Hills, 
 and fruitful Valleys ; and is efteemed as healthful as any Part of 
 Terra-Firma: In this Province, it is faid, there are Gold-Mines ; 
 but as this is an Inland Country, and feldom vifited by Foreigners, 
 we have very imperfect Accounts of them. 7. The Province of 
 Popayan has a Chain of barren Mountains, almoft impaflable, that 
 runs through it from North to South ; feme of which are Vul- 
 canoes ; and in one of them the Loadftone is found. Towards 
 the Shores of the South-Sea the Land is low and flat ; and, as it 
 rains near three Quarters of the Year, innumerable Rivers, and 
 Torrents fall from the Mountains into the Soutb-Sea, in the Sands 
 whereof is found a great Quantity of Gold-Duft ; and there are 
 Mines of the fame precious Metal in the Mountains, which in- 
 duces the Spaniards to refide in thofe Parts, how troublefome 
 foever it may be living under or near the Equator, where the 
 Heat and Rains are extremely unwholfome, as well 
 Peru. as uncomfortable. The Face of Peru is very differ- 
 ent, as it approaches near, or is diftant from, the 
 Sea : The Country is divided into Three narrow Slips, n& 1 
 The Lanos, which are fandy Plains that run along the Sea-coaft. 
 2. The Sierras, which are Hills beyond thofe Plains, intermixed 
 with Valleys. 3. The Andes, or Cordeleros, ftill farther with- 
 in the Land, which are deep, craggy Mountains, far furpafGng 
 all the reft in Height. The Lands, which lie along the Coaft, 
 are about Thirty Miles in Breadth ; in fome Places more, in 
 others lefs; the Sierras 75 Miles in Breadth; and the Andes 
 fomething more than 75 Miles over. The Andes and Sierras 
 run parallel to each other from North to South, for above Three 
 thoufand Miles : Nor are the Lanos low Land, but an high bold 
 Shore ; and there is no landing on it, bat at the Ports, or in 
 fome particular Bays : However, thefe Plains may be called low 
 in Comparifon of the Sierras, and of the Andes, that far furpafs 
 both, and are efteemed the higheft Land in the known World. 
 The Lanos are perfectly barren, except fome few Valleys, into 
 which they turn fmall winding Streams, and that Part of the 
 Coaft, which lies within Three or Four Degrees of the Equator, 
 where they have very heavy Rains great Pai t of the Year. The 
 Sierras are alfo very barren ; but then there are very fruitful 
 Valleys between them, which yield all manner of Grain and 
 Fruits ; and thefe. being temperate between the Extremes of Heat 
 
 and
 
 Ghap. XXXI. Empire in America* 609 
 
 and Cold, are beft inhabited ; for the Lanos by the Sea are, for 
 the molt part, exceffive hot : The Andes, on the contrary, are 
 cold, barren Mountains, the Snow lying upon them great Part of 
 the Year. In what Place foever People pafs the Andes, for up- 
 wards of 1 500 Miles together, they meet with ftrange Diforders, 
 but more in fome Places than others ; and thofe are more fenfible 
 of the ill Eflfe&s, who afcend from the Sea, than thofe who afcend 
 from the neighbouring Plains. Acofta patted the Andes over one 
 Mountain, called Pariacaca, and Four other different Places; 
 and always felt the like Diforder, but not fo violently as at Pa< 
 riacata ; and the beft Remedy they found againft it, was to ftop 
 their Mouths, Nofes, and Ears, as much as poflible, and to cover 
 their Breafts ; for the Air was fo fubtle and piercing, that it pene- 
 trated the Entrails, not only of Men, but Beafts, Horfes having 
 been very much affected by it. And fuch is the Height of the 
 Andes, that the Pyrenees and the Alps were but as ordinary 
 Hills, in Comparifon of them ; from whence we conclude, that 
 the Air here was too pure and fubtle for Animals to breathe in, 
 they requiring a groffer Medium ; and this, Acofta fuppofed, oc- 
 cafioned that Diforder in the Stomach. The fame Writer in- 
 forms us, that there are other mountainous, uninhabited Defarts 
 in Peru, where a fudden Blaft of Air fometimes ftrikes a Travel- 
 ler dead in an Inftant. The Spaniards formerly patted thefe 
 Mountains in their Way to Chili ; but now either go by Sea, or 
 by the Side of thefe Mountains, to avoid the Danger, fo many 
 having perifhed in going over them ; and'others, that have efcaped 
 with their Lives, have loft their Fingers and Toes, and have 
 been lamed. The fame Gentleman afierts, that General Cojlilla. 
 marching over it with an Army, great Part of his Men fuddenly 
 fell down dead, and their Bodies remained there without Stench 
 or Corruption. And fome PLngliJb Seamen affure us, that they 
 have feen fuch Numbers of Bodies of Men, Women, and Children, 
 lying dead upon the Sands there, that a Man might have walked 
 on them half a Mile : That the Bodies, to Appearance, feemed 
 as if they had not been dead a Week; but when they were 
 handled, they proved as dry and light as a Sponge, or a Piece 
 of Cork. It is agreed on all Hands, that the Heat of the Sands, 
 and the Drinefs of the Peruvian Air, preferved thefe Bodies from 
 Putrefaction, whatever was the Caufe of their Deaths. As to the 
 Weather in Peru, it is various, according to the Situation of the 
 Land : The Lanos, or fandy Plains by the Sea-fide, never have a 
 Drop of Rain upon them, but frequently thick Mifts rife there. 
 On the Sierras, or Hills beyond, the Rains fall when the Sun is 
 in the Southern Signs, as they do in other Countries that lie be- 
 tween the Equator and Tropic of Capricorn. And on the Andes, 
 the vaftly high Mountains that arc lituated fartheft from th 
 
 K r Sea,
 
 6 io Prefent State of the Spanifh. Part II, 
 
 Sea, it rains or (hows Two thirds of the Year, and is exceffive 
 cold. It is very ftrange, that the Plains on the Sea-fhore of 
 Peru fhould have no Rains ; becaufe the Sea-coafts, in other 
 Countries, are ufually more fubjett to Rain, and cloudy Weather, 
 than either the Ocean at a great Diftance from Land, or the 
 middle of any Continent. For Inftance, the Low-Countries, in 
 Holland and Flanders, have more wet and cloudy Weather, than 
 either the middle of Germany, or France; in like Manner, 
 Seamen ufually find ferene and fettled Weather Four or Five hun- 
 dred Miles from Land, efpecially between the Tropics ; and judge 
 themfelves near Land, when they fee thick Clouds, which ufually 
 hang over it : They alfo obferve, that Hurricanes are more fre- 
 quent and violent near Land, than they are an hundred Leagues 
 out at Sea ; though in that Part of the Soutb-Sea, which bounds 
 Peru on the Weit, they know not what Storms or Hurricanes 
 mean. The Earthquakes, to which Peru is fubject, efpecially 
 about the City of Lima, mull neceffarily call a Damp on all the 
 Enjoyments of the prodigioufly-wealthy Merchants. Great Part 
 of their Towns, Cities, and vail Mountains, have been thrown 
 down by thefs terrible Events ; and the Rivers have been turned 
 out of their Courfes. In the Year 1687 the Sea ebbed fo far 
 from the Shore, that there was no Water to be feen ; and after 
 the Sea had difappeared a confiderable Time, it returned in roll- 
 ing Mountains of Water, and drowned both Men and Cattle for 
 150 Miles along the Coafls. The Ships, 150 Leagues at Sea to 
 the Weflward of Lima, were fenfible of this terrible Shock, the 
 Seamen thinking they had ftruck upon a Rock j but, after their 
 Confirmation was a little over, they cafl the Lead, and founded, 
 but could find no Ground ; though the Sea, which ufually looks 
 green, was then of a whitifh Colour, and the Water they took 
 up, mixed with Sand ; which made them conclude, that the Shock 
 was occafioned by an Earthquake; and, a little after, they 
 
 were informed there had been a violent Earthquake at 
 Chili. Lima at the fame time. The Face of Chili nearly re- 
 
 fembles that of Peru ; for all our Seamen agree, that 
 the Coafl of Chili is an high, bold Shore ; and that farther within 
 the Land there arife other Hills, which the Spaniards call 
 Sierras, and above them the Andes, the higheft Mountains in the 
 known World. Thefe Mountains are a Prodigy in Nature ; the 
 Afcent is fo prodigious, that a Traveller is three or four Days in 
 arriving to the Top of them, and as many more in the Defcent 
 only of the Mountains ; for otherwife it is affirmed, that a Tra- 
 veller begins to mount, even from the Sea-fide, becaufe all the 
 Way, which is about forty Leagues, is nothing but an exceeding 
 delving Coall; for which Reafon their Rivers run with fuch 
 Force, that their Streams are like Mill-ftreams, efpecially near 
 
 their
 
 Chap. XXXt. Empire in America. 6it 
 
 their Sources. When Travellers afcend the higheft Part of thefe 
 Mountains, they feel an Air fo piercing and fubtle, that 'tis with 
 much Difficulty they breathe ; which obliges them to fetch their 
 Breath quick and ftrong, and to open their Mouths wider than 
 ordinary, applying to them likewife their Handkerchiefs, to con- 
 denfe their Breath, and break the extreme Coldnefs of the Air. 
 Writers obferve, that thofe who pafs the Andes in Peru, fuffer 
 great Reachings and Vomitings ; but thofe who travel over the 
 Mountains in Chili, never are affected with thofe Diforders, but 
 only the Difficulty of Breathing: So that in that Part of the An- 
 des in Peru, which they call Pariacaca, there may be a Concur- 
 rence of other Caufes, and a particular Difpofition of the Cli- 
 mate, to which the Caufe of the above Effects may be attributed, 
 and not to the Height of the Mountains ; for thofe in Chili 
 are highell without Comparifon. Travellers pafs over thefe 
 Mountains, treeing, as it were, upon Clouds ; when they afcend 
 the higheft Parts, they can no longer fee the Earth for the Cloud* 
 below j but the Heavens are clear, and the Sun (nines out in its 
 full Luflre. They obferve the Rain-bow (which in the Valleys 
 they fee crofling the Heavens) extended under their Feet ; nor is 
 it lefs admirable, that, while they travel over thefe Hills, and 
 fee at a Diltance Tempefts and Storms falling into the Valleys be- 
 neath, the Air is very ferene over their Heads. There are 
 in this Chain of Mountains fixteen Vulcanoes, which, at feveral 
 times, have broken out, and caufed Effects very terrible and afto- 
 nilhing to all the Country : Among thefe difmal Events, that 
 vhich happened in the Year 1640 is very remarkable; for a 
 Mountain burnt with fo much Force, that it was broken in two 
 and call forth Pieces of Rocks all on Fire, with fo horrible a 
 Noife, that it was heard many Leagues off, juft like the going off 
 of Cannons. The Andes are fuppofed to be very rich in Mines ; but 
 the Indians endeavour to conceal them from all other Nations : 
 For it feems, if any one among them difcovers any thing of this 
 kind, his Death is infallible : Befides, the Reafon for not feeking 
 after thefe Mines is, the Natives have great Plenty of every thing 
 neceffary for Life. The Difference which Travellers obferve in 
 paffing the Andes, between each Side of the Mountain, the Eaft 
 and Weft Parts, is fo great, that they feem two different Worlds ; 
 for, on the Top, the Traveller difcovers both Horizons ; and 
 when he looks to the Eaft, all is covered with thick Vapours 
 which feem to hinder the Light, and fhadow all the Country ; 
 but, on the Weft, he obferves the Heavens fo bright, that it 
 caufes Pleafure and Joy to look on them: The Eaft-fide is full 
 of a cloudy, thick Air, which ingenders Storms and Hail, with 
 horrible Thunder and Lightnings: On the Weft there is not a 
 Cloud to be feen, but all is clear and bright. Ingoing down to 
 
 Kr 2 the
 
 6 12 Prefent State of the Spanifli Part IT. 
 
 the Eaflward alfo, there are fewer Fountains and Rivers, and? 
 thofe muddy, and the Face of the Land melancholy, without fo 
 much as one green Tree to recreate the Sight, nor any pleafant 
 Verdure : But, on the Weft of thefe Mountains, it is quite other- 
 wife ; for as foon as the Traveller begins to defcend, he meets 
 with lovely Springs ; the Trees are green, and Groves fragrant 
 and pleafant ; and the little Valleys are like fo manyRefting-places 
 in that great Stair-cafe. From the very Foot of the Mountains 
 one may feel the Mildnefs of the Sea-air, and a Traveller is 
 charmed with the Harmony of the Birds, and other delightful 
 Objefts. The Valleys alfo are full of odoriferous, beautiful Flow- 
 ers, produced by Nature without human Art or Induftry ; and 
 thore are amongft them moft extraordinary phyfical Plants. The 
 little Hills afford good Failure, and, in their Valleys, Olives, 
 Almonds, and all Sort of Fruit-trees, thrive extremely well; in 
 the Plains aifo are Vineyards, of which are made excellent Wine. 
 With the firft Rains of the Winter, which are about the middle of 
 May, the Andes begin to be covered with Snow, and continue 
 fhut up, or impaffable, five or fix Months. But, in fpeaking of 
 the Seafons in Chili, it is neceffary to have regard to the Divi- 
 fions of the Country, which are comprehended under that general 
 Name: I. Chili Proper, which lies between 25 and 45 Degrees 
 of South Latitude, and between the Mountains of the Andes and 
 the South-Sea. In this Divifion the Spring begins in the middle 
 of Auguft, and lafts to the middle of November, when the Sum- 
 mer begins, and lafts till the middle of February ; and then fol- 
 lows the Autumn, which lafts till the middle of May, when they 
 enter upon their Winter. The Trees in the Winter are all bare 
 of Leaves, and white Frofts cover the Ground in a Morning, 
 which are ufually diflblved, however, within two Hours after Sun- 
 rifing ; and 'tis very feldom that any Snow falls in the Valleys, or 
 low Grounds. Neither the Heat or the Cold are fo great here, 
 as in other Countries of the fame Latitude ; but that Part of the 
 Country which lies next the Sea, is warmer than that which is 
 contiguous to the Mountains : Nor is there fo much cloudy or 
 rainy Weather here, as in Countries that lie in the fame Latitude 
 either North or South. In Summer they have conftant ferene, 
 fettled Weather without Rain; nor have they Occafion for any, 
 the Country is fo well watered by the Rivers of melted Snow, 
 which, in the Beginning of Summer, defcend from the Mountains 
 of the Andes. 2. In the Province of Cttyo, which lies Eaft of 
 the Andes, extending from Paragua, or La Plata, to 45 Degrees, 
 on the contrary, the Winter is extreme cold ; it freezes in the 
 Houfe ; and their Cattle die, if left abroad ; and the Heats are 
 equally intolerable in Summer : Thunder, Lightning, and Tem- 
 oefts, are frequent here alfo in the Summer, and fuch Deluges of 
 
 Rain.
 
 Chap. XXXI. Etnpire in America. 613 
 
 Rain in the Spring, as overflow the Country. 3. I 
 comprehend the Country, called Magellanica, or Pa- Magel- 
 tagonia, under the general Name of Chili. This lanica. 
 is a cold, uncomfortable Country ; and, according to 
 our Seamen, the Cold is more intenfe here, than in other Coun- 
 tries in the fame Latitude in our Northern Hemifphere. Certain 
 it is, that none of our European Adventurers have been invited 
 hither by the Air or Soil, to plant Colonies, either in the Eaft or 
 Weft Side of Patagonia or Magellanica. Terra del 
 Fuego, like the Continent over-againft it, is moun- Terra del 
 tainous and woody, the Tops of the Mountains al- Fuego. 
 ways covered with Snow; but it has feveral good Bays 
 and Harbours on the Coaft, to ftielter Shipping from the Storms 
 and Tempefts that reign in thofe Seas. Paragua, or 
 La Plata, confifts of large Plains, extending Two or Paragua. 
 Three hundred Leagues in Length, without any Trees, 
 at leaft any thing that looks like Timber, and fcarce a Hill, or 
 Stone, to be feen in them; but in the Country to the Eaftward 
 of the great River Paragua, that borders on Brajil, there is a 
 Variety of Hills and Valleys, Woods and Champagne. As to the 
 Seafons, the North Part of this Country has, in November and 
 December annually, when the Sun is vertical, very heavy Rains, 
 Storms, and Tempefts. But dire&ly contrary, in th tPart of the 
 Country that lies to the Southward of the Tropic of Capricorn, 
 it is their Summer, (their fair Seafon when the Sun is neareft 
 them, viz..) in November, December, and January ; and thofe 
 Rivers which rife within the Tropics, particularly La Plata, 
 Paragua, and Parana, after the Rains are fallen within the 
 Tropics, fwell and overflow their Banks, and the flat Countries, 
 as they pafs through the South Part of this Country, rendering it 
 as fruitful as the Nile does Egypt ; and indeed this is the Cafe in 
 almoft every Part of the World, where the Rivers 
 rife within the Tropics. The Country of the Ama- Amazons. 
 tcms enjoys a cooler Air, than could be expedled fo 
 near the Equator ; which proceeds from the heavy Rains, that 
 occafion the numerous Rivers to overflow their Banks one Half of 
 the Year ; from the cloudy Weather ; from the Shortnefs of the 
 Days, which are never more than Twelve Hours long ; and from 
 the briflc Eafterly Wind, that blows frequently from the Atlantic 
 Ocean quite through the Country, fo ltrong that Veflels are en- 
 abled thereby to fail againft the Stream, and perform the Voyage 
 almoft as foon up the great River Amazon, as down it ; which I 
 perceive is a Voyage of Eight or Ten Months, where no ill Acci- 
 dents interrupt the Paflage. Travellers alfo obferve, that they 
 have moll terrible Thunder and Lightning great Part of theYear; 
 but this is no more, than what is ufual in other Countries, that lie 
 Rr 3 under
 
 6t4 Prefent State of the Spanilh Part II. 
 
 under the Equino&ial : And it may properly be faid, they have 
 two Winters and two Summers every Year ; that is, fair Weather 
 when the Sun is at its greateft Ditlance from them in either Tro- 
 pic i and foul Weather when it is vertical, as it is at the Vernal 
 
 and Autumnal Equinox. In Cuba there is a Ridge 
 Cuba. of Mountains, which runs almoft through the Ifland 
 
 from Eaft to Weft, well repleniftied with Timber ; 
 but the Land near the Shore is generally a plain Champagne 
 Country : They have no Winters here, but great Rains and Tem- 
 pefts ufually when t : e Sun is vertical in July and Auguji ; which 
 cools the Air, however, and renders the Climate tolerable. The 
 faireft Seafon is, when the Sun is fartheft from them ; and then 
 tre Morning is much the hotteft Part of the Cay; for, towards 
 Noon, the Sea-breeze begins to blow pretty brifkly, and con- 
 tinues to do fo till the Evening. From OSlober to April they 
 have brifk North or North-weft Winds in thefe Seas at the Full 
 and Change of the Moon ; and, in December and January, they 
 frequently increafe in Storms, though this be their fair Seafon. 
 
 The Trade-wind, in thefe Sea?, blows from the 
 Hifpaniola. North-eaft. As to the Face of the Country in Hi/- 
 
 paniola, there are Mountains in the middle of it 
 well planted with Foreft- trees; and other Mountains more barren, 
 in which formerly were Gold-mines, that feem to be intirely ex- 
 haufted at this Day. On the North and South Sides of the Ifland 
 are fine fruitful Plains, watered with abundance of ple^fant Ri- 
 vers, which fall from the Mountains. The Air and 
 Porto- Seafons are much the fame in this as in the Ifland of 
 
 Rico. Cuba. The Ifland of Porto- Rico is pleafantly diverfi- 
 
 fied with Woods, Hills, and Valleys 5 but there are 
 few large Plains. As to the Gold-mines that Travellers relate 
 there are in this Ifland, there are none wrought at this Day; nor 
 were there ever any that were confiderable. The Soil is very 
 
 rich, producing Variety of Fruits, and all things ne- 
 Florida. ceflary for Life. As to the Air, cifr. of Spanijb 
 
 Florida, fee Carolina. I have omitted the particular 
 Produce of the Spanijb Empire in America, in order to treat of 
 them more fully under the Head of Trade in this Chapter. 
 
 Government.] Thefirft Difcovery of America in 1492, era 
 brief Hiftory of the firft Voyage of Columbus, has 
 Tirft Voy- been already treated of in the Beginning of the laft 
 tge-of Co- Chapter: I fhall, in this Place, endeavour to give 
 lumbus. the Reader a fhort Hiitory of the Continuation of 
 the Difcovery and Conquefts of the Spaniards in 
 America. In the firft Voyage of Columbus to America, he difco- 
 vered St. Salvador, (one of the Lucayos, or Bahama Iflands, near 
 
 the
 
 Chap. XXXI. Empire in America. 615 
 
 the Coaft of Florida) Cuba, and Hifpaniola ; and was kindly en- 
 tertained by the good-natured Indians, who did not fufpedt, 
 that thefe New-comers the Spaniards had any Defign to take 
 their Country from them, or plunder them of their Wealth. The 
 Rejoicings for the Succefs of this grand Enterprize, the firft Dif- 
 covery of America, being over, their Catholic Majefties, Ferdi- 
 nand and Ifabtlla, King and Queen of Cajlile and Arragon, con- 
 firmed to Columbus the Viceroyftup of all the Iflands and Conti- 
 nent, which he either had or fhould difcover and conquer, im- 
 powering him to appoint all Governors, Civil and Military ,j and 
 Orders were given for the fitting out a Fleet im- 
 mediately to plant, and take PofTeflion of thofe Second 
 Countries. The Admiral (Columbus) fet Sail again, Voyage of 
 with Seventeen Ships, and Fifteen hundred Men, Columbus, 
 from the Road of Cadiz the 25 th of September 
 J 493. He touched at the Canaries, as in the firft Voyage , and, 
 departing from thofe Iflands the 7th of OSober, made St. Domi- 
 nica, one of the Caribbee Iflands, the 2d of November, in the 
 Night-time, when, by their Reckoning, they were near 800 
 Leagues from the Canaries. Meeting with no convenient Har- 
 bours in St. Dominica, he failed to another Ifland, which he call- 
 ed Marigalante ; where landing, and taking Pofleflion of it for 
 their Catholic Majefties, he failed to another of the Caribbee 
 Iflands, which he called St. Mary of Guadalupe. On the loth 
 of November he came to Montferrat, and, after the Admiral had 
 pafled by above 50 other Iflands, came to that which he gave 
 the Name of St. John Baptifi, and arrived at Hifpaniola the 12th 
 of November ; when he found, that all the People he had left in 
 the Fort he had built there in his firft Voyage, were dead. The 
 Natives informed him, that fome of them died a natural Death ; 
 others parted from their Company, and were deftroyed by the 
 Indians, as they ftraggled into the Country in Search of Gold ; 
 and the reft were defeated, and flain by a Cacique, or Prince, who 
 came down from the Mountains, in order to drive the Invaders 
 out of the Country, notwithftanding a Prince Columbus entered 
 into an Alliance with in his firft Voyage, did all he could to fave 
 the Spaniards. The Admiral, having vifited that Part of the 
 Country, from whence moft of the Gold was brought, and built 
 a Fort there, that might command the Natives, determined to 
 go upon new Difcover ies ; and accordingly fet Sail for Cuba, not 
 knowing yet whether it was an Ifland, or Part of the Continent. 
 I (hould have obferved, that when the Admiral and his People 
 went up into the Country of Hifpaniola, in order to difcover 
 where the greateft Plenty of Gold was to be found, the Natives 
 were under the greateft Conftemation, when they faw the Spanijb 
 Cavalry ; and though the Indians would fometimes venture to en- 
 
 R r 4 gage
 
 6i6 Prefent State of the Spanifh Part II, 
 
 gage the Spanijh Foot, in Defence of their Country and Property, 
 yet a fingle Horfeman might drive Hundreds of them before 
 him ; for, as they thought the Creature could fly, perhaps they 
 took the Horfe and Rider for one Animal. But to return : In 
 this Voyage to Cuba the Admiral difcovered the Ifland of Ja- 
 maica, which he commends as a more populous, pleafant, and 
 fruitful Country, than either Cuba or Hijpaniola; and relates, 
 that it was inhabited by a warlike People, that would not fatter 
 him to fettle, and plunder their Country : Whereupon he return'd 
 to Cuba, which, with the Afliftance of one of the powerful Ca- 
 ciques, his Ally, he reduced under the Obedience of his Catholic 
 Majefty : Though it is faid, the confederate Army of the Caciques, 
 that oppofed the Admiral, confided of about 100,000 Men ; and 
 the Spanijh Forces, that took the Field, amounted to no more 
 than 200 Foot, 20 Horfe, and 20 great Dogs. But when wc 
 confider how terrible the Fire-arms of the Spaniards, the thun-\ 
 dering Cannons, the Spanijh Cavalry, and alfo the great Dogs, 
 were to the Indians, we need not wonder at the Defeat, and hor- 
 rible Slaughter, of thefe unhappy People. And now the Spa- 
 niards had no Enemies remaining in the Ifland ; but fuffered much 
 from the Climate, and Diffractions amongft themfelves. How- 
 ever, the Admiral, having fettled the Government, and fecured 
 his Conqueft, returned to Spain; and, attending their Catholic 
 Majeflies at Burgos, prefented them with fuch foreign Plants and 
 Animals, as he judged would be mod acceptable to them ; and 
 fome Gold-plate, and Gold-duft, but in no great Quantities j and 
 was, in Appearance, gracioufly received. But the Court were much 
 difappointed, that they received little more than Trifles for all 
 the Expence they had been at : They expected to have entered im- 
 mediately on Mountains of Gold, and to have loaden their Ships 
 Home with it ; whereas they could not yet hear of any Mines 
 that were opened. This Disappointment, with the Practices of 
 the Admiral's Enemies, very much abated the Zeal of the Spa- 
 nijh Court for fupporting and inlarging their Difcoveries in the 
 New World ; infomuch that the Admiral was forced .to remain near 
 two Years at the Court of Spain, before he could obtain the Sup- 
 plies he folicited for. At length the Court ordered 
 ThirdVoy- him Six Ships, with which he fet Sail the 30th of 
 age of Co- May 1^98. for America again ; and, on the firft of 
 lumbus. Auguft, difcovered a large Tfland, near the Oronoka 
 in South' America ; and, in a Day or two after, he 
 made the Continent of Guiana, or Nenu-Andalujia, After the 
 Admiral had fpent about a Fortnight on Shore, and bartered 
 away fome Trifles for what Gold and valuable Returns he could 
 pick up among the Natives, he fet Sail for Hijpaniola', which, 
 to his great Mortification, he found in .the utmoft Diffraction, by 
 
 the
 
 Chap. XXXI. Empire in America. 617 
 
 the Divifions of the Spaniards: However, by the prudent Beha- 
 viour of the Admiral, the Country was again reduced to a tole- 
 rable State of Tranquillity. And now applying himfelf to the 
 digging of the Gold-mines, he found fuch Plenty of that precious 
 Metal, that he, and his Family, were in a fair Way of becomnig 
 immeniely rich, when an Infurreftion was raifed againit him, with 
 Ahnz.o de Ojeda, a confiderable Spaniard in Hi/paniola, at their 
 Head. The Admiral, by his excellent Conduft, once more found 
 Means to deprefs his Enemies the Spaniards in America ; but 
 they proved too hard for him in the Court of Spain, by the ma- 
 licious Stories they tranfmitted thither, which work'd him out 
 of the King's Favour. His Majefty therefore fent over a new 
 Governor, with Orders to fend the Admiral to Spain, to anfwer 
 the Accufations of his Enemies. Bovadi//a, the new Governor, 
 made the moft of his Commiflion, it feems ; for he immediately 
 took Pofleffion of all the Admiral's Effedb; and, clap:ing this 
 unhappy Gentleman and his Brother in Irons, fent them both 
 Prifohers into Spain. The Captain of the Ship, afhamed to fee 
 this great Man in Fetters, offered to eafe him of them ; but he 
 was refolved to carry them to Europe j for he could not believe, 
 that Bo*vadilla durft have ufed him in this barbarous Manner, if 
 he had not exprefs Orders for it from Court. However, their 
 Catholic Majefties no foor.er heard of the Admiral's Arrival, but 
 they fent Orders to releafe him, and invite him to Court ; allure- 
 ing him, that Bozadi//a had exceeded his Commiflion* and that 
 his Eftate Ihould be reftored, and he fliould be continued in the 
 Command of all he had difcovered in the New World ; for it 
 evidently appeared upon Examination, that the Complaints, that 
 had been brought againft him, proceeded either from Self-intereft 
 or Malice. However, the Admiral fo much refented the Injury 
 done him, that he determined to retire, and lead a private Life; 
 for he reflefted, that if what he had done for the Spanifi Nation, 
 the inexpreflible Labours, Hardfhips, and Hazards, he had gone thro* 
 to add another World to their Dominions, could not induce them 
 to ufe him well, nothing he could do afterwards, would. But the 
 King perfuaded this great Man to put to Sea again, vefted with 
 the like Powers he had conferred upon him in his 
 former Voyages. The Admiral fet Sail from Cadiz Fourth 
 with four Ships, and 140 Men, on the 9th of May Voyage of 
 1502. and arrived before St. Domingo jn Hi/paniola Columbus, 
 the latter End of June ; But he was not fuffered to 
 enter that Port, though moft of his Eftate and Effects lay there- 
 about ; and he had reprefented to the Spanijh Governor, that one 
 of his Ships was much damaged, and that he apprehended a 
 Storm. From whence 'tis too plain, that the Court of Spain had 
 given Orderi, that he mould never more refide ia Hifpanioht, 
 
 which
 
 i 8 Prefent State of the Spanifh Part II, 
 
 which he had conquered for them. The Admiral, however, had 
 had the good Fortune to get into a Creek in the Iiland, where he 
 weathered a very terrible Storm, in which Bovadi/Ia, his great 
 Enemy, and fourteen Ships loaden with Treafure, and bound for 
 Spain, perifhed. The Admiral, after the Storm was over, fet Sail 
 to the Gulph of Honduras, where he met with a Canoe as long 
 as a Gaily, and Eight Feet wide, made of one Tree ; which be- 
 ing loaden with Merchandize, and having Twenty-five Men, and 
 feveral Women and Children, on board, bound for the Coaft of 
 Mexico, he made them Prifoners. He found on board the Canoe 
 feveral large Pieces of Cotton-linen, Quilts, and quilted Waift- 
 coats, fine wrought, and dy'd of feveral Colours j all which Ar- 
 ticles were the Manufactures of the Indians. There were alfp 
 found on board the Canoe wooden Swords edged with Flints, and 
 Hatchets made of Copper : They had alfo on board Bells, Plates, 
 Plates, and Crucibles of Copper to melt their Metal in. The 
 Admiral, having taken out of the Canoe fuch Things* as he liked, 
 and given the terrified Indians fuch European Goods in Return, 
 as they had a mind to accept of, difmiffed the Canoe, and all 
 the People in it, except one old Man he detained to inform him 
 of the State of the neighbouring Continent. The Admiral failed 
 along the Coaft to the Eaftward, till he came to the Cape, which 
 he called Gracias a Dios, becaufe he was no longer obliged to 
 ftruggle againft the Winds, and the Currents, which confiantly 
 fit to the Weftward, and which had given him an infinite deal of 
 Trouble and Fatigue. The Indians, judging the Spaniards had 
 fome Defign upon their Country, came down armed in great 
 Numbers, with Bows and Arrows, Spears and Clubs, with Intent 
 to difpute their Landing : But afterwards, finding the Spaniards 
 only wanted to trade with them, they became more tradable, 
 and exchanged Cotton-linen, and Plates of Gold, for fome Euro- 
 pean Toys. On the 2d of November the Admiral, continuing 
 his Voyage Eaftward, arrived at a commodious Harbour, which 
 he called Torto-Bello. Here the Admiral underftanding that 
 there were Gold-mines in the Province of Veragua in Terra Fir- 
 ma, failed to that Coaft, where he met with fuch ftormy Wea- 
 ther, that his Ships were almoft dettroyed, and his Men reduced 
 to Defpair : But the Weather favouring him at laft, he fent fome 
 of his Men afhore, in Search of the Gold-mines he had heard fa 
 much of; and they had the Satisfaction of gathering fome Gold 
 at the Roots of Trees, and near the Surface of the Earth ; which 
 made the Admiral determine to fettle a Colony in Veragua, and 
 leave his Brother Governor of it, while he returned to Spain for 
 further Reinforcements. Accordingly he built a little Town and 
 Fort, and left a Garifon of 80 Men ; but, not depending on 
 the Friendftup of the Indians, he made the Prince of that Part of 
 
 the
 
 Chap. XXXI. Empire in America. 6ig 
 
 the Country, with his Family, and the principal Natives, Prifon-r 
 ers : But the Prince, and moil of the Prifoners, jumping into the 
 Sea, and making their Efcape raifed the whole Country upon 
 the unkind Spaniards ; and, killing fome, and wounding others, 
 obliged them to quit their new Settlement ; and it was with a 
 great deal of Difficulty, that the reft efcaped to their Ships, one 
 of which was fo eaten up with Worms, that they were obliged to 
 leave her behind. After this unfortunate Rencounter the Admi- 
 ral fet Sail, with the three remaining Ships, in a miferablc, (bat- 
 tered Condition, and arrived again at Porto-Bella ; (where he was 
 forced to leave another of his Ships, flic was fo difabled by the 
 tempeftuous Weather) and afterwards at Cuba ; and, on Midfum~ 
 pier-day, they arrived at Jamaica, their Ships being fo leaky, 
 that they found it almoft impofiible to keep them above Water 
 till they got to Shore: Whereupon they ran them both on Ground 
 in a fmall Creek dofe together, about a Mufquet-lhot from Land, 
 where they lived on board them above a Year, trafficking with the 
 Indians for Provifions; but they did not care to lie on Shore, for 
 fear of being furprifed and deftroyed by the Natives, if any 
 Quarrel (hould happen between them and the Spaniards. The 
 Admiral fent over ibme of his Crew to Hifpaniola in open Ca- 
 noes, to get Ships to carry him and his Company off. This was 
 a very hazardous Enterprize; for thele Canoes, which are only 
 Boats made out of Trunks of Trees, were to pafs the Ocean 
 about 50 Leagues, and were in Danger of being overfet in t.\trj 
 little Storm. However, they arrived fafe at Hifpaniola ; but the 
 Governor, who was an Enemy to the Admiral, delayed fending 
 Ships fo long, that the Admiral's People mutiny'd, and one half 
 of them left him, and went on Shore in the Ifland, where they 
 committed great Outrages, till the Admiral, and thofe with him, 
 gave them Battle, and reduced them to their Duty by Force, ma- 
 ny of the Spaniards being killed on both Sides in the Engagement. 
 At length the Admiral's People, that were fent to Hifpaniola, 
 having bought a Ship at his Charge, the Governor giving no Af- 
 fiftance, they came back to Jamaica, and brought the Admiral 
 off, after he had fpent a Year there in great Diftrefs, and lain 
 moft of the time Bed-rid with the Gout. He arrived at St. Do- 
 mingo in Hifpaniola the 1 3th of Augufi 1504 ; and, having fettled 
 his Affair i in the Ifland, where he had a good Eftate, and Effects 
 of Value, he returned to Spain', where his Catholic Majeliy re- 
 ceived him in Appearance very gracioufly ; but, it feems, was 
 contriving 2t the fame time, by the Solicitation of fome of the 
 Courtiers, to deprive him of moft of the Advantages he had fti- 
 pulated to allow him, on the Admiral's undertaking the Difco- 
 very of tne New World ; But, notwithstanding the ftrideft Scru 
 tiny the Malice of his Enemies could make, it does not appear, 
 
 (hat
 
 20 Prefent State of the Spani/h Part If. 
 
 that any thing was fixed upon him, that could fully his Chara- 
 cter, as Viceroy and Admiral, unlefs it was his great Zeal to bring 
 the innocent, inoffenfive Indians under the Dominion of the 
 haughty Spaniards. And what was the End of all this mighty 
 Difc .very, in regard to himfelf ? He was indeed at firft highly 
 carefied and honoured, his Family ennobled, and vaitly enriched - 
 But if we confider the infinite Hazards and Hardfhips he under- 
 went, even in his old Age, and that he faw himfelf at laft about 
 to be deprived of the Reward of fo many Years Toil and Per- 
 plexity, we cannot wonder, that it had an EfFecl upon his Health 
 which the numerous Labours he had gone through, had already 
 impaired: It is rather to be admired, that he firuggled fo lone 
 under a Train of Calamities. We find he left this perplexing Life 
 for a better on the 20th of May 1506 at Validolid, where he had 
 retired. If we confider, that the Spaniards could have no Right 
 to invade and daughter, plunder, enflave, and deprive the Indians 
 of their Country, even this Great Man, Columbus, cannot be de- 
 fended. But he, and all the Popiih World, it feems, was then of 
 Opinion, that his Holinefs had the Difpofal of all Pagan Coun- 
 tries i or that all Infidel Nations ought of Right to become Slaves 
 to the Chriftians. Thefe Notions Columbus certainly went upon, 
 or he could not, without the higheft Aft of Injuftice, have fub- 
 dued Hifpaniola, and made the Indians of this, and other Places, 
 Captives, who received him in a moil kind and loving Manner" 
 furnifhing him with whatever their refpe&ive Countries afforded! 
 If he received things in this Light, and thought he was doing* 
 God good Service, it muit plead in his Behalf, notwithftanding 
 what he did to the friendly Indians was very far from being 
 juft. And indeed, though the Spaniards frequently infmuate, 
 that their grand Defign in reducing thefe new Difcoveries, was to* 
 extend and advance the Kingdom ofCbriJl; yet nothing is more 
 evident, than that the Gold there was the principal thing they had 
 in View : For this no Labour was thought too much ; and few of 
 the chief Perfons concerned ftuck at any Pradices to gratify their 
 infatiable Avarice. But the Misfortune is, the extreme Love of 
 Riches has not only led the Spaniards to commit ftrange Outrages 
 amongft the Indians, but even many of the Protefiants, in their 
 Difcoveries, have afted the fame, firft violently feizing the Pro- 
 perty of others ; and then, to fecure their Conqueft, as they call 
 them, have been forced to make terrible Havock and Devaftation 
 amongft the unhappy Indians ; in all Cafes treating thefe People 
 as if they were no ways intitled ;o Mercy, or to the leaft Share 
 of the good things of this Life, or a better; not confidering that 
 they are our Fellow-creatures, that all of us are the Children of 
 one common heavenly Father. The Spaniards, after Columbus 
 had made a Conqueft of Hi/pauiola, Jived in great Splendor there 
 
 for;
 
 Chap. XXXI. Empire in America, 62 * 
 
 for many Years, till they had exhaufled the Gold-mines, and 
 worn out the Natives in the working of them, and in other ^ ri- 
 gorous Services, infomuch that of three Mithras of &*"'. 'J* 
 were found in the Mand, there was not one left upon it. After 
 wh ch the Spaniards, being perpetually haraffed and plundered 
 by the Englijb in the Reign of Queen EUabetb, defined the 
 Ifland, and went over to the Continent ; whereupon Wp* 
 became the Habitation of wild Beafts till a People no left la- 
 vage than thefe brute Creatures, the Buccaneers and Pirates ot 
 all Nations began to make Settlements here. The Spaniards. 
 ^ ding Tdr Commerce interrupted by thefe Free-boors 
 thought fit to fend Colonies thither again. As to C*a in a 
 the Voyages Columbus made to America hz never found, that it 
 was an Ifland; and the Spaniards fixing -firft at Uifpanida, en ac- 
 count of the Gold-mines there, this Ifland of Cuba was not m- 
 tirely conquered till afterwards. The Spaniards ^have frequently 
 been difturbed in the Pofleifion of it by their Emmies and the 
 Buccaneers. Port*-Rico was not reduced under the Obedience of 
 the Spaniards , or planted by them, till icio ; when they pre- 
 tending they only came to eilablim a Frindfh.p with the Indians, 
 the Prince of the Ifland made an Alliance with them, and treated 
 them very hofpitably, ftiewing them two^ Rivers, wherein were 
 fomeGold-fands: Whereupon they introduced a good Num f5 
 of their own People, feized the Country, and made the greateft 
 Part of the Natives Slaves; but fome of the Indians ^ ran away 
 to the Woods and Mountains, and others flood upon their Defence ; 
 yet, not being in a Condition to refill the Fire-arms Horfes and 
 Dogs, of the Spaniards, they were at length moil of them 
 compelled to fubmit to the Invaders ; and thofe who would not 
 were tortured, or torn in Pieces with Dogs. The Spanijb Writers 
 relate abundance of incredible Stories of the Sagacity of their 
 Dogs, in diilinguifhing between thofe who fubmitted to their 
 Slavery, and Thofe who refufed to obey them : However, all 
 agree, that their Countrymen hunted thefe unhappy People^ with 
 Doss in the Woods and Mountains, as they would wild Jfeatts, 
 or other Game, and frequently tore in pieces Men, Women, and 
 Children. And when Orders came from Spain, not to uie the 
 roor Creatures in that barbarous Manner, the Spamards in the 
 Ifland reprefented to his Catholic Majefly, that they were Cam- 
 bals ; and procured Leave to make Slaves of all they were pleat- 
 ed to denominate fuch. Nothing fhort of fuch Prejudices furely 
 could have induced any Chriflian Prince to have fuffered his 
 Subiefts to be tre?ted fo inhumanly, as the Indians were by the 
 Spaniards. And furely thefe American Spaniards muft have de- 
 generated much from their Countrymen in *r^; for I am 
 pcrfuaded. the Natives of Spain in general defexve a different Cha-
 
 622 Prefent State of the Spanifh Part IL 
 
 rafter ; but indeed too many of the common People of every Na- 
 tion in Europe, when they go abroad, live mocking, fcandalous 
 Lives, and differ very much in their Character from the Natives 
 of their Mother- country. Having prefented the Reader with an 
 Abftraft of the Difcoveries of Columbus, I fliall now proceed to a 
 fhort Relation of thofe who extended the Difcoveries of the Spa- 
 niards in the New World. The Enemies of Columbus having 
 
 given the Court of Spain an ill Opinion of him, it 
 Americus appears they employed Americas Vefputias, a Floren- 
 Vefputius. tine, in the Year 1497. to improve and inlarge the 
 
 Difcoveries begun by that Great Man. But how- 
 ever fortunate Americus might be in making Difcoveries, he did 
 not attempt to form Settlements ; but fatisfied himfelf with trade- 
 ing with fome of the Natives, and fighting with others. Ema- 
 nuel, King of Portugal, afterwards entertained Americus in his Ser- 
 vice ; and, in May 1 501,' he failed from Lijbon with three Ships \ 
 and, arriving againfl the Continent of South America, in five De- 
 grees South Latitude, he failed along that Coaft to the South- 
 ward, till he came in fifty-two Degrees South Latitude, when 
 the cold and tempeftuous Weather obliged him to return Home. 
 Thus having difcovered a Continent in the New World, little 
 inferior in Dimenfions to that of the Old, he had the good For- 
 tune to give his Name to the Whole ; which, from him, has evef 
 fince gone under the Name of America ; though he never attempt- 
 ed to make one Settlement in this Voyage neither, for the King 
 of Portugal, who had employed him. The next confiderable 
 
 Difcoverer, employed to profecute the Difcoveries 
 Vafco of Columbus, was Vafco Nunez de Balbao : This 
 
 Nunez de Gentleman made an intire Conquefl of Cuba, and 
 Balbao. found it to be an Ifland ; failed to the River of Da- 
 
 rien, on the Illhmus of America, where Columbus 
 had attempted to make a Settlement, but was driven from it. 
 Vafco built a Town and Fort here, and cultivated a Correfpond- 
 ence with the petty Princes thereabouts ; they fhewed him the 
 Way to the South Sea over thofe vafl Mountains that run along 
 the Ifthmus ; and though it was not more than three or four- 
 fcore Miles from one Sea to the other, yet their Way lay over 
 fuch craggy Precipices, and was incumbered with fuch thick 
 Woods, that they travelled twency-five Days before they came in 
 Sight of the South Sea: And here Vafco eretted CrofTes, and took 
 Poffcflion of the Country for their Catholic Majefties, the Indians 
 ilanding amazed at all this Formality ; as he did foon after of the 
 South Sea itfelf, and of all its Coafts and Bays in the Year 15 13. 
 He afterwards eredled the Fortrefs of Panama on the South Sea, 
 and fitted out a Fleet to make farther Difcoveries on that 
 Ocean. Vafco, haying made thefe important Difcoveries, refolv e( j
 
 Chap. XXXI. Empire in America. 623 
 
 n : not direftlv, bat took a Circuit through the 
 TeSSri "of e7e ^MteMM * of whom he fubdued 
 WFoKe and others voluntarily entered into Alliance wtth him: 
 by force, ana omen, ; Spaniard, generally 
 
 But the Conditions it laid, on w r J ft w 
 
 forded them the., hnendflnp, were .Tta * ^ ,, 
 
 deliver op the Gold they w er ; M , ^ fend after 
 
 t" '^^rTermsthXw" promifed to remain for 
 
 Refpea due to his Commiffion: But the Government was no 
 fooner furrendered to him, than he began a Profecut.on againft 
 the Man who had made all thofe important Difcovenes ; and 
 ordemi his Troops out every Way; and, without any Regard to 
 ?heTVeatie/and Alliances that Fafco h*d made with theneigb; 
 tn^nl Caches or Princes, plundered their Countries an W 
 fecred their Subjefts without Mercy ; and above all he endea- 
 
 t",ot feu f n thafs^f But the U* hnding themfelve, 
 Sa^ 
 
 ^eXveries begun on that Side, with Orders "J^ 
 furnilh him with fuch Forces as were neceffary for fuch an Expe 
 E -But Vafco, however, remained a Prifoner for fome time: 
 A length fom y e Gentlemen interpofed their good Ofcces and 
 procured a Reconciliation between the two Generals; and m 
 E to cement their Friendfhip the ftronger, Vafco married the 
 Daughter of Pedrarias : But the latter being informed by fome 
 S^ that Vafco intended to renounce aU Dependence 
 on the Crown ct Spain, and to fct up for h.mfelf, ^M ^ 
 fciou of his Innocence, threw himftlf " theH* jrfhi. 
 Father-in-law I but Matters were fo managed that the unhappy 
 Gtmlman wa, envtfted, and beheaded, to the Surpnzc o^ all
 
 624 ?he Prefent State of tbt Spaniih Part II. 
 
 Men, who were acquainted with the Service he had done the 
 Crown of Spam. Pedrarias, after this, ravaged the Country 
 f om Sea to Sea, and reduced the Provinces of Veragua and A7- 
 caragua by the Forces he fent thither under the Command of 
 Francis Hernandez. ; but, entertaining fome Sufpicion, that Her- 
 nandez, had too great a Regard for his own Intereft, he ferved him 
 as he had done Vafco, and cut off his Head, under Pretence that 
 he was about to throw off his Dependence on the Crown of Spain, 
 and fet up for himfelf. Pedrarias, expecting to be called to an 
 Account for the many Outrages he had committed, both on the 
 Spaniards and Indians, quitted Darien, and removed to Veragua* 
 where he looked upon himfelf to be out of the Reach of Juftice; 
 but what became of him afterwards, I do not find. Father Bar- 
 tholomew de Cafas, Bifhop of Chiapa, has given us a very me- 
 lancholy Account of the numerous Cruelties and Ravages com- 
 mitted by this Commander, his Officers, and private Men, in re- 
 ducing thefe Provinces under the Dominion of the Crown of 
 Spain. The reft of Terra-Firma was fubdued by private Adven- 
 turers at their own Charge . every one begged a certain Extent of 
 Country of the Conrt of Spain ; and ufed the Natives as they 
 law fit, ravaging and plundering the feveral Countries, and mur- 
 dering and enflaving the miferable Inhabitants, who were able 
 to make but little Refinance to thefe Tyrants, as the Bifhop of 
 Chiapa calls them. We have not fo large and particular an Account 
 of the Difcovery and Conqueft of Terra-Firma, as of Mexico and 
 Peru, by reafon of its being reduced under the Spanijb Yoke by 
 thefe inferior Adventurers, who, after a miferable Slaughter of 
 the Indians, fell out among themfelves, and cut one another's 
 Throats ; fcarce any of them dying natural Deaths, or by the 
 Swords of the Indians, but generally by each other's Hands. 
 The next great Difcoverer, and Conqueror, was Fer- 
 Fernando nando Cortex, who began the Conqueft of Mexico in 
 Cortez. the Year 1518. I fhall give as juft an Account of 
 
 this famous Conqueft, as I can collect from the Va- 
 riety of Authors that have written on this Subject ; but as their 
 Relations differ in many material Facts, I fhall prefent the Reader 
 with what may be relied on, and not trouble him with what 
 ought to be treated as Fiction. Diego Valafquez, Governor of 
 Cuba, appointed Cortez, to command the Forces that were about 
 to be fent to make a Conqueft of Mexico. Cortez, it feems, was 
 a Man every way qualified for fo important an Enterprize, be- 
 ing a Gentleman of Genius and Courage ; he was bred a Scholar, 
 and two Years a Student in the TJniverfity of Salamanca ; but, 
 affetting a more active Way of Life, and particularly military 
 Employmenr, he embarked, in the Year 1 504, for the Ifland of 
 Hifpaniola ; and went from thence to Cuba, where he was very 
 
 inftru-
 
 Chap. XXXI. Empire in America.' 625 
 
 inflrumental in the Conqueft of that Ifland, and obtained a great 
 Reputation for military Skill ; and was, for his Services, made 
 chief Magiftrate of St. /ago, the principal Town in Cuba : 
 Which Poft he poflefled, when the Governor, Velafquez, fixed up- 
 on him to command in the Mexican Expedition. Cortex, with a 
 fleet of 10 Ships, and about 630 Soldiers and Seamen, {et Sail 
 from the Havanna the loth of February 1518-19. The Gene- 
 ral and his Officers laid out their whole Eftates in making Provi- 
 fion for this grand Expedition ; and the Soldiers were fo trans- 
 ported with the Expectation of acquiringMountains of Gold, under 
 the Command of fo courageous and fkilful a General, that they difco- 
 vered much Eagernefs to be in Pofleflion of them. They arrived at 
 the Ifland of Cozumal, near the Eaftern Coalt of Jucatan ; where 
 the Troops having plundered fome Towns of the Indians, and 
 even their Temples, and taken feveral Prifohers, Conez, fhewed 
 his Difpleafure at thefe Ravages, and ordered every thing they 
 had taken to be reilored, endeavouring to cultivate a good Cor- 
 refpondence with the People of the Ifland. It appeared, uj on a 
 Mufter, that the Spanifb Forces, in this Ifland, confined of 508 
 Foot-fbldlers, 16 Horfe, and 109 Seamen and Mechanic?, befides 
 two Chaplains, who accompanied Cortex, in this Expedition. Be- 
 fore Cortez. left the Ifland, he exprefled his Zeal againft the Ido- 
 latry of the Natives* by breaking down their Idols ; which does 
 not feem very complaifant, after the kind Reception he met with 
 from the Iflanders. The Forces being reimbarked, Cortez. fail- 
 ed to the Mouth of the River Tobafco, or Grijal'va, in the Bay 
 of Campeachy ; where he found the Indians on Shore, ready to 
 oppofe his Defcent ; but, firing upon them with his Artillery 
 and fmall Arms, they fled, fome to the Woods, and feme to 
 the Town of Tobafco. After which he landed his Men j but, be- 
 ing obliged to pafs through fome Woods and Defiles, a Body of 
 the Indians furprifed and wounded fome of the Spaniards with 
 their Arrows; and, Cortez continuing his March to the Town 
 of Tobafcd, after fome Refiftance, the Natives fled to their 
 Friends in the Woods. And, in all thele Encounters, which the 
 Spaniards reprefent as very bloody and obflinate, there were only 
 J 4 or 15 of them wounded, and no more than two of thefe died 
 of their Wounds. For the Fire-arms of the Cbrlftians were fo 
 terrible to thefe People, that they could feldom be brought to 
 make a Stand within the Reach of them ; elpccially when the 
 Artillery thundered upon them, believing that the People they 
 engaged were rather Gods than Men. The Prince of Tobafco, af- 
 ter the taking the Town, and the Defeat of a very large Body 
 of Indians, lent a folemn Embafly to Cortez, to implore Peace, 
 attended with a Prefent of fuch F"ruits and Provifions as his Coun- 
 try afforded, together with Jewels, Plumes, and painted Cotton- 
 
 S f linen.
 
 626 Prefent State of the Spanifh Part II. 
 
 linen, and what the Prince thought mofi acceptable to the In- 
 vaders : The Embafladors approached the Spanijh General, as 
 they ufed to do their Gods, with Golden Pans, or Cenfers, in 
 which they burnt aromatic Gums, and other Incenfe. The 
 Prince afterwards came in Perfon, and made his Submiflion, bring- 
 ing with him Twenty beautiful Indian Virgins, whom he made 
 a Prefent to the General : And one of thefe, whom the Spaniard 
 caufed to be baptized by the Name of Donna Marina, ferved 
 him, it feems, during the whole Expedition, in the double Capa- 
 city of Concubine and Interpreter; for fhe was a Native of Me- 
 xico, that had been made a Prifoner in the Wars among the In- 
 dian Princes; a Female of ready Wit^and underftood the Cuftoms 
 of the Country, and the Language, perfectly well. Cortez, hav- 
 ing concluded a Peace with thefe People, or rather compelled- 
 them to acknowledge the King of Spain for their Sovereign, em- 
 barked his Forces, and failed to the Weft, till he arrived at the 
 Port of St. 'John de Viva. When the Spaniards were coming in- 
 to the Port, two large Canoes, full of Indians, came into the 
 Fleet, and exprefted themfelves to the General in a very fubmif- 
 ve Manner ; informing him, by Donna Marina, that the Em- 
 peror Montezuma had fent two of his Minifters, viz. Pi/potoe, 
 Governor of that Province, and Tontile, one of his Generals, to 
 know with what Intention the Spaniards vifited his Dominions ;. 
 and to offer them fuch Provifions and Accommodations as his 
 Country afforded. To which Cortez, anfwered, That he came a* 
 a Friend, and to treat of Matters of great Importance ; defiring a 
 Conference with the Officers Montezuma had fent to receive his 
 Propofals : And, landing his Troops, and entertaining the Em- 
 baffadors at Dinner in a very fplcndid Manner,, he informed thenv 
 That he was come from Don Carlos, the Great Monarch of the 
 Eaft, to propofe Matters of great Importance to their Emperor 
 Montezuma, and his Subjects ; but that it was abfolutely neceffary 
 he fhould deliver his Meffage perfonally to the Emperor, ac- 
 cording to the Ufage of all Nations ; and hoped he fhould be re- 
 ceived with the Refpect due to his Character. Eut they gave the 
 Spaniard to underftand, that their Emperor never admitted Fo- 
 reigners to his Prefcnce ; and therefore he mult not think of ap- 
 proaching his Court. To which the General anfwered, That ne- 
 ver any Embafladors were refufed an Audience, unlefs it were 
 with a Dcfign to affront the Prince they came from ; and that he 
 was determined not to leave the Country, till he had delivered the 
 Contents of his Embaffy to their Emperor himfelf. The Mexi- 
 can Minifters, upon this Reply, defired he would, however, re- 
 main in the Camp, till they had acquainted the Emperor with 
 his Refolutions, and receive his Commands. The Embafladors 
 returned to Cortez again in feven Days after, and brought a 
 
 magni-
 
 Chap. XXXI. Empire in America. 627 
 
 magnificent Prefcnt from Montezuma for the General; which, 
 they feid, their Emperor had fen t as a Te:li mo ny of his Refpect 
 for the King he came from; but could not r.dmit of the Spa- 
 niards reforting to Court. However, Cartez gave them to urt- 
 derftand, that he was determined to profecute his Journev to 
 Mexico at all Hazards : In which Reiblution he was confirmed 
 by the Cacique of Zempoala, a Prince in the Neighbourhood 
 of Viva, who offered to enter into an Alliance with the Spa* 
 maris againft Montezuma, complaining loudly of his Tyranny 
 and Oppreffions. The General began his March to the City of 
 Zempea/a, the Capital of his new Ally ; where, arriving in two 
 or three Days, he was received by the Prince with the higheft 
 Marks of Efteem. He informed the Spaniards, that all the Prin- 
 ces, on that Side of the Country, were ready to throw off their 
 Subjection to the Emperor Movtczama, and would infallibly join 
 the Spaniards, as foon as they durft declare themfelves. The 
 Cbrifiians, marching the next Day to ^uibifian, or f'era-Cruz, 
 were joined by Thirty Princes, who offered to affi,t the Spn??iards 
 with icOjOOO Men, provided he would take them under his 
 Protection, and enable them to throw off the Yoke, which Mm-- 
 tezuma would impofe upon them. This Corttz gladly confented 
 to; and, in his March towards the City of Mexico, he was at- 
 tended by his Allies the neighbouring Princes, and a numerous 
 Army of Indians ; and, being advifed to march through the Coun- 
 try of Tla/cala, an Indian Republic, that was ever at War with 
 Mor.tez.uma., fent Four of the Chiefs of the Zempoalians, his Al- 
 lies, as Embafladors to offer them Peace, and to demand a Paf- 
 fage through their Country. But the Tlafcalans determined to 
 oppofe the Paffage of the Spaniards through their Territories, till 
 they had made an Experiment of their Strength. Indeed they 
 durft not meet this terrible Enemy, whofe Arms they refembled 
 to Thunder and Lightning, in a fair Field ; but they frequently 
 laid Ambufcades in the Woods and Mountains, and, furroundin? 
 the Stragglers, killed and wounded fome of the Spaniards ; bv 
 which they learned they were neither invulnerable nor immortal 
 at they had been represented. However, fuch was the Advan- 
 tage the Chrijiians had in their Artillery and Horfes, that the 
 Tlafcalans, after they had loft great Numbers* were contented to 
 make a Peace with them, and became their moll faithful Allies. 
 When Montezuma received Advice, that the Spaniards had fub- 
 dued the Tlafcalans, and were about to incorporate them in the 
 Number of their Allies, he was under the utmoft Coufternation ; 
 and offered to pay a yearly Tribute to the Spaniards, confiltirt? 
 of half his Revenues, provided they would lay ande the Defian 
 of marching to Mexico. But Cor fez, refuting hisPropofal, took 
 up his Quarters in the capital City of TJaJlala, where, after he 
 
 S I 2 had
 
 628 Prefent State of the Spanifli Part IT. 
 
 had remained 20 Days, he received another Embaffy from Mon- 
 tezuma, inviting him to advance to the City of Mexico ; for, 
 finding the Spaniards were now become fo powerful, by their Al- 
 liances with fo many Princes, he thought it the lead Evil of two, 
 to receive them as Friends. The General, continuing his March, 
 arrived at the City of Cbolula, belonging to Montezuma, where 
 he was received with all the Marks of Refpeft ; only they defired 
 the Tlafcalans might quarter without the City, as they were o 
 a different Seel: in point of Religion, and their antient Enemies. 
 But the Spaniards apprehending a Plot, as they faid, to cut 
 them off, they, and the Tla/calans, fell upon the defencelefs Ci- 
 tizens of Cbolula, and cut the Throats of many Thoufands of 
 them, without the Lofs of any of their own People ; and even fee 
 Fire to their Temples, which Cortex, burnt, with great Numbers 
 of their Priefts, and others, who had retired thither, as to San- 
 ctuaries. One of their own Hiftorians charges the General with 
 barbarous Cruelty in this, and many MafTacres of the like Nature ; 
 fuggefting, that his Avarice for the Plunder of that rich City, and 
 his Ambition to render himfelf terrible, were the real Motives to> 
 this Butchery : And indeed the good Biihop of Cbiapa, who liv'd 
 upon the Spot a little after the Conqueft, has confirmed the 
 Truth of it. This terrible Slaughter had fuch an Effedl on Mon- 
 tezuma, that he immediately fent another rich Prefent to Cortez, 
 with farther Offers of Submiflion. The Spaniards, having re- 
 mained fome Days at Cholula after this horrid Maflacre, and 
 making the neceffary Preparations for their March, advanced, by 
 eafy Stages, towards the Court of Mexico, in order to gain far- 
 ther Intelligence, and fbeogthen themfclves by Alliances with the 
 Caciques, or Mexican Princes, great Numbers of them reforting 
 to Cortex, and complaining of the Tyranny and Oppreflion of Mon- 
 tezuma their Emperor. Thefe Indian Armies, that joined the 
 Spaniards, according to the Spanijb Accounts, were nearly equal 
 to thofe of Montezuma ; and the Difaffe&ion of the Mexicans 
 was fo univerfal, that the Emperor could not, without Difficulty, 
 have prevented , the Revolt of his Subjefts, and a Confederacy of 
 the Indian Princes againft him, if the Spaniards had not invaded 
 the Empire : And confequently the mighty Actions pretended to 
 be done by thefe Adventurers, could never deferve thofe great 
 A.pplaufes that have been bellowed upon them. The General, 
 drawing near the City of Mexico, in order to ftrike the greater 
 Terror into the Inhabitants, ordered his Artillery and fmall Arms 
 to be difcharged : The Nephew of the Emperor, attended by the 
 Mexican Nobulity, met the Spaniard, and bid him, Welcome; af- 
 furing him, that he would meet with very kind and honourable 
 Reception from the Emperor. Being come within three Miles of 
 the Metropolis of the Empire, they were met by Four thoufand 
 
 of
 
 Chap. XXXI. Empire in America: 629 
 
 of the Nobility, and great Officers of State, who, having paid 
 their Compliments, advanced before them to the Gates of Me- 
 xico, and then made a Lane for the Army to march through ; 
 the reft of the People appearing at the Windows and Battlements 
 on the Tops of the Houfes, which were crouded with them , 
 but they were not fuiFered to ftand in the Streets, that the March 
 of the Spaniards, and their Auxiliaries, might not be impeded or 
 difordered. The Army confifted at this time of 450 Spaniards, 
 and 6000 TIa/calans and Indians, who had no fooner entered 
 the Streets of Mexico, but they were met by 200 Noblemen of 
 the Emperor's Houfhold, clothed in one Livery, with large Plumes 
 of Feathers on their Heads, all of the fame Faftiion and Colour. 
 Thefe, after meeting and complimenting the General, fell back, 
 and, dividing thcmfelves, made a Lane for the Spaniards: Then 
 came another Body of the Nobility, of a fuperior Dignity, who 
 made a more lplendid Appearance ; and, in the midii of them 
 was the Emperor Montezuma, carried in a Chair of beaten Gold, 
 on the Shoulders of his favourite Courtiers, Four more of them 
 fuftaining a Canopy over his Head ; the Whole adorned with beau- 
 tiful Feathers, through which the glittering Gold appeared : 
 He was preceded by Three Officers with Rods of Gold, the 
 Harbingers of the Emperor's Approach, on whofe Appearance the 
 People proftrated themfelves, none daring to look up. Cortex 
 difmounting when the Emperor drew near, the Mexican Monarch 
 alighted from his Chair, and Carpets were fpread in the Streets 
 for him to tread on : He advanced, 'tis faid, with a folemn flow 
 Pace, leaning on the Arms of Two Princes, his Relations ; and 
 was met by the Spaniard with a becoming Hafte, and moil pro- 
 found Reverence ; which the Emperor anfwered, 'tis faid, by 
 touching the Ground with his Hand, and afterwards railing it to 
 his Lips ; which was looked upon as a great Condefcenfion, and 
 added to the Efteem and Veneration his Subjects already had of 
 the Spaniards. The Conference between the Emperor and Cortex 
 was fhort at this Interview i after which Montezuma commanded 
 one of his Princes to conduct the General to the Palace afligned 
 for his Refidence, and then returned to his own. It feems 
 the Royal Houfej, appointed for their Reception, was fo fpacious, 
 as to contain all the Europeans, and their Auxiliaries ; and, when 
 the General had planted his Artillery, and placed his Guards, 
 it had very much the Appearance of a Fortrefs, having thick 
 Stone Walls, and flanked with Towers, they tell us. Hither 
 Montezuma came the fame Evening, and was received by Cortez 
 in the principal Square of the Palace ; and that Monarch, having 
 entered the Room of State, and feated himfelf, ordered a Chair for 
 the fortunate Spaniard, and a Signal was made for his Courtiers 
 to retire to a proper Diltance: Whcreujoa the Spanijh Officers 
 
 Sf 3 (Li
 
 6 $6 Prefent State ' of the Spanirti Part II. 
 
 did the fame. Cortex, made a Speech to the Emperor to this Ef- 
 fei : That he came Embaffador from the moil potent Monarch 
 under the Sun, who defired his Friendfhip and Alliance, that 
 there might be a Communication and Intercourfe between their 
 respective Dominions ; and, by that means, the Cbrifiians might 
 have an Opportunity of convincing them of their Errors in Reli- 
 gion ; and, though he might claim a more abfolute Power over 
 thi: Part of the world, their King only defired to makeufe of his 
 Power and Authority, to rnftrufl them in Matters infinitely to 
 their Advantage. The Reply the Emperor made to this Ha- 
 rangue, 'tis faid, was, That he accepted the Alliance propofed by 
 the King of Spain ; but, as to the Overture that he had made con- 
 cerning Religion, he held, that all Gods were good, and the 
 God of the Spaniards might be what they reprefented him ; 
 but he faw no Reafon to withdraw that Veneration the Mexicans 
 paid to theirs. And, having made Cortex a Prefent of Gold, 
 Jewels, and other valuable Curiofities, and diftributed more among 
 his Officers, that Prince returned to his Palace. After a feeming 
 Continuation of Intimacy between the Emperor and Cortex, Com- 
 plaint was made to Montezuma, of the Violation of the Peace 
 between them, by one of the Mexican Generals falling upon the 
 Confederates of the Cbrijlians, and afterwards killing a Spaniard 
 he had taken in cold Blood. To which the Monarch anfwered, 
 That, if any thing of that Nature had been done, it was without 
 his Orders ; and he was ready to make Satisfaction for any Injury 
 that might have been done unde/ignedly, either to the Spaniards, 
 or their Allies. But Cortex gave the Emperor to underftand, that 
 nothing would fatisfy them, but his furrendering hrmfelf volun- 
 tarily into their Hands; and that, if he would not, they would 
 carry him oif by Force, or murder him, if they were oppofed. 
 The unfortunate Monarch, aftonifhed at the infolent Demand, 
 remained for fome time filent; but fubmitted to do what he found 
 was impoffible to avoid ; and gave Orders to his Officers to pre- 
 pare for his Removal to the Spanijb Quarters, whither he went 
 in the ufual State: The Spaniards alfo obliged him to take with 
 him fome of his Children, with the principal Lords, and great 
 Officers of State, whom they detained, as they pretended, for 
 their Security. The Spaniards compelled this unhappy Prince to 
 iffue out his Orders fpr apprehending his General, who had en- 
 gaged the Spaniards and Allies near Vera-Cruz ; and this Com- 
 mander, being brought, was burnt before the Gates of the Palace, 
 with the reft of the Captains that were concerned in that Enter- 
 prize. This, with the precipitate Attempts of the Spaniards to 
 deftroy the Indian Superftition, prejudiced that People againft 
 them to fuch a Degree, that we hear of nothing but Plots and 
 Confpiracies on the one Side, and cruel Butcheries and Oppref- 
 
 fions
 
 Chap. XXXI. Empire in America. 631 
 
 iions on the other. When the Invaders had fuch fair Opportu- 
 nities of poffeflirig themfclves of the Mexican Empire, had the 
 unfortunate Natives feen fome Examples of that Humanity and 
 Benevolence, which Chrijiianity infpires, and had they feen them 
 a with any Concern for their temporal, as well as eternal Hap- 
 pinefs, the Chrifiian Religion had, in all Probability, been foon 
 eftablifhed, as well as the Empire fubdued, without fhedding of 
 Blood. But when the Indians few the Spaniards deilroying their 
 Temples, before gentle Means, and the Arts of Perfuafion, had 
 been made ufe of, to convert them from their Errors, and give 
 them an Opinion of the Religion propofed to be introduced; 
 when they faw thofe they firit looked upon as Gods or Angels, 
 rather than Men, rapacious and cruel, intent upon amaffing Gold 
 and Treafure, and murdering the Natives by Thoufands and Ten 
 thoufands, extirpating them, inftead of converting them to the 
 Chriftian Faith, no Wonder they held faft their Errors, and en- 
 deavoured to free themfclves from fuch Monlters of Mankind. 
 Montezuma, receiving private Advice, that his Subjects were una- 
 nimous in their Refolution of reftoring him to his Liberty and Em- 
 pire, and to difmifs the haughty Spaniards, fummoned the Vaflal 
 Princes to Mexico ; who came thither attended with formidable 
 Bodies of their Troops : And, in this Situation, he let Cortex, 
 know, That, having acknowledged his Mafter, the King of Spain, 
 the Heir of his Empire, and that he held his Dominions of him ; 
 and that, having prepared a rich Prefent for that King, to teftify 
 his Submiffion and Dependence on him.; he expecled that Cortex 
 mould withdraw from Mexico, and return to the Prince that fent 
 him, and give an Account of the Succefs of his Embaffy. At the 
 fame time he delivered the Spaniard an immenfe Treafure, which 
 he and his Subjects had contributed, in Hopes that the Avarice 
 of the Spaniards would have been intirely fatisfied with it, and 
 that they mould enjoy the Poffeffion of their Country, and what 
 they had left, in Quiet, freed from a$y farther Outrages or Infults. 
 It feems, Cortex was under fuch Apprehenfions, that he fhould be 
 fuddenly attacked by the Forces of the whole Empire, that he 
 only defired Time to build a Fleet, to tranfport his Troops to 
 Spain ; to which the Mexicans agreed : But while Cortex lived 
 in Expectation of a friendly Squadron coming to his Afliltance, ' 
 Advice was brought him, that Eleven tall Ships, and Seven fmaller 
 Veflels, with 800 Spanijh Foot, 80 Horfe. and \z Pieces of 
 Artillery on board, were arrived near Vera-Cruz; and that they 
 were fent by Diego Velafquez., Governor of Cuba, to profecute 
 the Conquelt of Mexico, and to make Cortex, and all his Men, 
 Prifoners, that refufed to fubmit to his Authority, and obey Pam- 
 pbiiio Nar'vaez, who had the Command of the Fleet and Army 
 employed in thi3 Expedition. We mult obferve, that Governor 
 S f 4 Velaf^utK
 
 632 Prefent State of the Spanifh Part II. 
 
 Velafquex had revoked the Commifiion which he had given to 
 Cortex., and, before he left the Ifland of Cuba, required him to 
 relinquifh the Command of the Mexican Expedition, and return. 
 But Cortex, and his Friends, having embarked all their Fortune* 
 in the Defign, in Hopes of mighty Advantages that would ac- 
 crue to them in this grand Enterprize, they did not think fit to 
 obey the Governor, but fet Sail towards the Mexican Coaft. 
 Whereupon the Governor fent to acquaint the Court of Spain, 
 that Cortex, had mutiny'd, and ran away with the Ships and For- 
 ces defigned for the Reduction of Mexico. And, being informed 
 of the Succefs of Cortex, and fupported by the new Commifiion 
 he had obtained from Court, he propofed this fecond Embarka- 
 tion, to revenge himfelf on Cortex, and reap all the Advantages 
 of this important Conqueft. Cortex fent Father Bartholomew 
 to Narvaex, to give him to underlland, of what Advantage it 
 would be to the Court of Spain to unite their Arms; acquainting 
 him with the State of Affairs in Mexico ; and infinuated, that 
 they fhould have Occafion, however, for their united Strength, 
 to bring the Mexicans under Subjeftion. To which Nar-vaex, 
 'tis faid, haughtily reply'd, that the Governor of Cuba had or- 
 dered him to enter into no Treaty with the Rebel, as he termed 
 Cortex, and his Party ; but fhould compel them all, by Force of 
 Arms, to return to their Duty. The Father, finding no Good 
 to be done with Narvaex, applied himfelf privately to feveral 
 of the Officers and Soldiers, diftributing the Prefents Cortex had 
 fent them, with great Judgment: However, Cortex thought pro- 
 per to march his Forces to Zempoala, leaving 80 Spaniards to 
 keep Garifon in Mexico, and fecure the Emperor from making 
 his Efcape; and took an advantageous Polt near that City, where 
 he could either treat, or defend himfelf againft Narvaex, if he 
 fhould be attacked- He made frefh Overtures to that General ; but, 
 finding nothing but an intire furrendering himfelf up, would be 
 accepted, he refolved to attempt to furprife his Enemy in the 
 Night-time. Accordingly, in a very dark tempeftuous Night, 
 when Narvaea leaft fufpeded fuch a Vifit, Cortex fell upon his. 
 Quarters, and made him, and his principal Officers, before they 
 were well awake, Prifctners ; and the reft of the Troops flung 
 down their Arms, and moft of them entered into the Service or 
 Cortex. While this excellent Soldier was engaged in this Expe- 
 dition againft Narmaex, Alwarado, who was left to command the 
 Spaniards in Mexico, obferving the Nobility to put on their 
 Jewels, and richeft Ornaments, at a religious Feftival, aflembled 
 his Soldiers, and fell upon them, putting above 2000 of the Me- 
 xican Nobility to the Sword, and plundered whatever was valu- 
 able about them. The Mexicans, apprehending they fhould be 
 all maflacred by the infatiable, avaritious Spaniards, and nd^ 
 
 ins
 
 Chap. XXXI. Empire in America^ 63$ 
 
 ing there was no End of their Extortions, became defperate, and 
 attacked the Spanijh Quarters on all Sides, chufing rather to die 
 with their Arms in their Hands, than to be murdered in cold 
 Blood for their Wealth, and their Religion derided, and their 
 very Gods defaced and demolifhed by the impolitic Strangers. 
 And, though they were beaten off by the Artillery and Fire-arms 
 of the Bcfieged ; yet, as they had cut off all their Provifions, the 
 Mexicans had probably ftarved Aknarado, had not Cortex returned 
 fuddenly to his Relief. This laft was too much elated with the 
 Succefs of his Expedition againft his Countryman Narvaez, to 
 think of pacific Meafures : On the contaary, he refolved to give 
 the Mexicans all manner of Provocation ; and even to render 
 them more defperate, that he might have a Colour to deftroy 
 them, and feize all their Pofleffions, whether Lands or Treafure. 
 He had found, that a Garjfon of 80 Spaniards only was almoft 
 able to keep the whole Force of the City of Mexico at Bay ; and 
 he did not doubt, now he faw himfelf at the Head of 1 100 Spa- 
 nijh Horfe and Foot, with a Multitude of Confederate Indians* 
 he fhould be able by Force to reduce the Mexicans, and make 
 them Slaves. But he was very near paying dear for his Pre- 
 emption ; for fending out a Detachment of 400 Spaniards and 
 Tlafcalans, in Search of the Enemy, who was retired to the far- 
 theft Part of the City, they were furrounded, and in Danger of 
 having their Retreat cut off; and he himfelf, with the reft of his 
 Troops, efcaped very narrowly being ftarved, or cut in Pieces, by 
 the defperate Mexicans, who attacked him in his Quarters, tho* 
 defended by a numerous Garifon, and a Train of Artillery : And, 
 when at any time he made a Sally, he found Intrenchments in 
 the Stteets, and Bridges broken down, which rendered his Cavalry 
 in a manner ufelefs ; and, though he ufually came off victorious, 
 he found he had committed a very great Error, in fhutting him- 
 felf up in Mexico, from whence it was almoft impoflible to make 
 his Retreat, and where he found it impracticable to fetch in Pro- 
 vifions, the Natives being Matters of all the Caufeys that led 
 to the Town, and of all the Boats upon the Lake: So that if his 
 People were not deftroyed by the continual Attacks of the Enemy, 
 they muft certainly be reduced by a Famine. Cortez, finding 
 the Mexicans were not to be amufed by infidious Propofals, tho* 
 he had forced the Emperor, who was ftill their Prifoner, to ap- 
 pear on the Battlements of the Fortrefs, to make an Overture of 
 Peace to his Subjects in Arms, refolved to attempt a Retreat in 
 the Night-time. Having divided the Treafure therefore amongft 
 his Men, with which they were pretty well loaded, he iflued out 
 of his Quarters at Midnight, the Weather being extremely tem- 
 
 Ecftuous. But he had not advanced far upon the Caufey, before 
 e found himfelf attucked on every Side by the Mexicans, both 
 
 by
 
 ^24 Prefent State of the Spanifli Part II. 
 
 ty Land and Water, the Lake being filled with Canoes, or Boats ; 
 and, as they had broken down the Bridges, and cut the Caufey 
 through in feveral Places, the Spaniards were in great Danger of 
 being intirely cut off. The unhappy Montezuma was murdered 
 by the Spaniards, 'tis faid, in their Retreat, when they found 
 they could not carry him off. Cortex had provided a portable 
 Bridge to pafs the Breaches in the Caufey, which was of great 
 Ufe to him in feveral Places: But the Mexicans found Means to 
 deflroy this Bridge before they were all paffed over, and the 
 Rear-guard of the Spaniards, confifting of Two or Three hun- 
 dred Men, and a Thoufand llafcalans, was cut in Pieces ; lofing 
 alio their Artillery, Prifoners, Baggage, and Treafure, with fix- 
 and-forty Horfes. However, Cortex, with the beft Part of his 
 Forces, broke through ihe enraged Natives, and efcaped to the 
 other Side of the Lake ; and thought themfejves very happy in 
 being purfued no farther. This good Fortune, it feems, was ow- 
 ing to the Compamon the Mexicans expreffed for Montezuma, 
 and his Sons, wh">, when Day-light appeared, were found amongll 
 the Dead, pierced through with many Wounds ; and, deferring 
 the Purfuit of the Spaniards, to folemnize the Exequies of the 
 Emperor, and the Princes, the Spaniards continued their March 
 to T/a/ca/a, the Country of their faithful Allies ; but they had 
 not advanced many Leagues, before they were overtaken and at- 
 tacked by the injured Mexicans, at a time when they were fo 
 fatigued and haraffed, that, bad not Cortex taken Poffeffion of a 
 Temple, furrounded by a Wall of a large Extent, that very for- 
 tunately lay in ftis Way, he would have found it very difficult to 
 have repulfed the Enemy. Cortex began his March again at 
 Midnight, with great Silence, in Hopes to have got the Start of 
 the Enemy fo far, that he mould have reached the Tta/calan 
 Territories before they could have overtaken him ; but, to his 
 great Surprize, being arrived at the Top of a very high Moun- 
 tain, he difcovered die whole Forces of the Mexicans, confiiting 
 of near 200,000 Men, drawn up in Battalia, in a Valley through 
 which he was to pais. And, however great and decifive the Vi- 
 ctory is repreicnteu to be in Favour of the Spaniard, and his Al- 
 lies, it neverthelefs appears, that Cortex did not think himfelf fafe 
 till he arrived at Tlafcala. He found it very necefTary to culti- 
 vate a good Understanding with the Princes of the Country, and 
 to take their Troops into his Service ; he favv his Error alfo in 
 neglecting to poflefs himfelf of fuch Towns and PafTes, as might 
 keep op- a a Communication with his own People at V era-Cruz., 
 and with his Allies. Having taken a farther Survey of the Coun- 
 try, he n.ade himfelf Mafter of all ftch Places as might be of 
 Advantage to him in reducing the City of Mexico, which was 
 ever his principal View : And as he was feniible there was no ap- 
 proaching
 
 Chap. XXXI. Empire in America. 63$ 
 
 moachine that City by Land, but on the Caufeys, which might 
 HrSdown, he ordered Thirteen Brigantines and Sloops to 
 ^ built which would make him Mailer of the Navigation of 
 the Lake and enable him to attack the Town by Water, as well 
 Is Ld The Timbers and Planks of theft: Vends he caufed to 
 be prepared by the Spanijb Carpenters, .fifed by feveral thou- 
 trl Indians at Vera-Crux; and afterwards made the poor Na- 
 tives ca ry them on their Shoulders to the Lake of Mixta, a 
 Tourney of near 300 Mjles ; and here the Brigantines were put 
 IZZ and launched. While thefe Veftels were building Cr- 
 t aftembled an Army of 200,000 confederate Indians ; and was 
 fo happy, before he entered upon this grand Enterpnze to be 
 Led by near 300 Spaniards from Cuba and Jamaica, who came 
 with a Refolution to follow his Fortunes. Cortex began the Siege 
 of Mexico; and the firft Engagement happened upon the Water, 
 where the Brigantines, having the Advantage of the Wind, ran 
 in among the Canoes, with which the Lake was covered and 
 funk and overfet them at Pleafure ; and thofe Canoes that efcaped 
 the firft Shock, fled, with the utmoft Precipitin, towards the 
 City whither they were followed by the Brigantines, which 
 firedVeveral great Shot into the Town, to terrify the Inhabitants. 
 The Mexicans had made fuch Breaches and Intrenchments on the 
 the Caufeys, as rendered the Approaches by Land very difficult. 
 And, notwithftanding all the Precautions and Attempts of the 
 Spanijb General, the Mexicans, by their Stratagems gained feve- 
 ral Advantages of him: At one time they laid an Ambufcade of 
 Canoes among the Reeds of the Lake and were very near carry- 
 ing off fome of his Brigantines: At another time they broke 
 down one of the Caufeys, cut off his Retreat, and took him Pn- 
 foner ; but he was refcuedout of their Hands as they were carrying 
 him away. Cortex, having recruited his Army with the confe- 
 derate Indians, and the Spanijb Soldiers be.g recovered of their 
 Wounds refolved to give a general Aflault to the City ; and ac 
 cordingly, having ordered his Forces to advance, the Enemy was 
 driven into the Town, and at length repulfed on every Side ; and 
 the Emperor Guatimoftn, with the principal Nobility, being taken 
 bv the Brigantines as he was making his Lfcape the reft of the 
 Mexican Forces flung down their Arms, and fubm.t ted to the 
 Mercy of the Spanijb General, who took Poffeffion of that Capi- 
 tal on the 13th of Auguft 1521, after a Slaughter of 100,000 
 Indians, who defended the City ; befide; great Numbers that pe- 
 riled by Famine, and other Calamities. This Conqueft was at- 
 tended with the Submiffion of molt of the nc.ghbounng Provin- 
 ces ; and the reft of this Empire was foon after fubaued by this 
 fortunate General, who, to fhew himfelf impartially cruel, hang d 
 the Emperor, with two tributaiy Kings, under Pretence they
 
 63k Psefent State of Z&'Spanifh Part II. 
 
 were forming a Confpiracy againft him, though he had always 
 kept them Prifoners in his own Quarters from the Time that 
 Mexico was taken. Commifiioners came over from Spain, to in- 
 quire into the Conduit of Cortex, and his Fellow-conquerors, as 
 they called themfelves i repeated Complaints having been fent to 
 Europe of fi.eir Cruelties and Oppreflions, which were found fo 
 man)' and mocking, that Cortex was removed from the Govern- 
 ment he had found Means to obtain, his Effects leized, and he was 
 in Danger of lofmg his Head : But, by his Agents in the Court of 
 Spain, he found Means to purchafe his Pardon, to be reftored to 
 his Government of Mexico, and to have feveral new Titles and 
 Privileges conferred upon himfelf. He had acquired prodigious 
 Wealth by the Plunder of all the Provinces he became Matter of, 
 and by the rich Mines of Gold and Silver he every Day difco- 
 vered, or violently took from the Owners. In the Year 1527 
 the Complaints againft Cortex being revived;, and a fupreme Judge 
 arriving from the Court of Spain, the Adminiitration was taken 
 out of the Hands of Cortex ; and a juft Reprefentation of the 
 Outrages committed by the General, and his Officers, was fent 
 to Europe: However, he found Means, in fome meafure, to pa- 
 cify the Court, and obtained Leave to go over thither, and make 
 his Defence before the Emperor Charles V. He carried with him 
 fuch prodigious Treafure, that all his Faults feemed to be intirely 
 forgot ; his Majefty appeared to delight in his Converfation, and to 
 give Credit to every thing this furprifing Adventurer faid ; ho- 
 nouring this barbarous Tyrant, inftead of punilhing him, for the 
 many Crimes he had been guilty of: He created him Generalijfim* 
 of all the Forces of Neiv-Spain; but excluded him abfolutely from 
 the Civil Government. The General, having taken Leave of the Em- 
 peror, embarked for Nenv-Spain, and arrived at Vera-Crux in July 
 1530; and, not being fuffered to go to the City of Mexico, took 
 ap his Refidence at Texeuco, where he had a very great Court 
 of Indians and Officers. But, being unfuccefsful in his Attempts 
 of new Difcoveries in the South Sea, and having been at a vail 
 Expence in thefe naval Expeditions, he went over to Old-Spain 
 again in the Year 1539, in Hopes of prevailing on the Court to 
 icimburfe his Charges. But the Miniftry expecting to have re- 
 ceived an Increafe, rather than a Diminution, of their Treafure, 
 Cortex did not meet with fo favourable a Reception as formerly : 
 The Court began to give Credit to the repeated Complaints that 
 had been made againft him ; and though it was not thought fit 
 to proceed rigoroufly againlt the General, fince he had been in- 
 tlrumental in adding fo large and wealthy a Country to the Crown of 
 Sfaif, yet he was never fuffered to return to Mexico again ; and 
 r.e vemained a kind of Prisoner at large at the Emperor's Court, 
 v.'here he died on the fecond of December 1545, in the Sixty - 
 
 fecond
 
 Chap. XXXI. Empirt in America. " 63?; 
 
 fecond Year of his Age; and his Body was afterwards tranfportcd 
 to Mexico, and interred in the Cathedral of that City. It has been 
 related already, that Vafco Annex de Balbao firlt 
 difcovered the South Sea in 15 13. The fame Gen- Conquejlaf 
 tleman, having fitted out fome Ships, patted the ex\ifrjtbc 
 Equator, and arrived upon the Northern Coaft of Spaniards. 
 Peru, where he was folly informed of the prodi-. 
 gious Riches of the Country ; but, being recalled, and put to 
 Death by Pedrarias, as before related, the Difcovery was profe- 
 cuted by three bold Adventurers, <y/z. Pixarro, Almagra, and 
 De Lugne, who refilled in Panama, who defired Leave to attempo 
 farther Difcoveries, and the Conqueit of Peru, at their own- 
 Charge. Pixarro was to command the firft Party that went 01* 
 the Difcovery ; Aitnagro was to carry him Recruits, and to rein- 
 force him from time to time, and De Lu^ne, an Ecclefiaftic, was 
 to remain at Panama, and lay in Ammunition and Provifion to 
 fupport the Enterprize : Whatever Treafure they mould acquire, 
 after the Charges, and the Emperor's Fifths, were paid, were to 
 te divided equally amongft them : Thefe Gentlemen entered into 
 Articles, never to abandon each other for any Hazards, Hard- 
 fhips, or Difappointments they might meet with in the Enter- 
 prize, till they had made a Conquett of Peru. And though Peo- 
 ple generally lofe their enterprifmg Genius, as they grow into 
 Years ; yet had Avarice, Ambition, or Curiofity, fuch an Afcen- 
 dant over thefe three Gentlemen, notwithstanding they were,, all 
 of them, between fifty and threefcore Years of Age, and had 
 each of them Fortunes fufficient to have fatisfied any reafonable 
 Men, that they embarked their All in Search of Mountains of 
 Gold, inltead of fpending the Decline of their Days in Peace, 
 and enjoying the Riches they had already acquired. The three 
 Partners having bought a Ship, Pixarro, the moft confiderable 
 Perfon in this Triumvirate of Adventurers, and who had the Re- 
 putation of a good Officer, embarked about the middle of No- 
 vember 1525, with Eighty Men, and Four Horfes ; ar.d, after 
 infinite Labour, Hazard, and Hardfhips, arrived in the Bay of 
 (Juiaquil, where he took feveral great Floats with armed Indians 
 on board, that were going from Tumbex, on the neighbouring 
 Continent, to invade the Ifland of Puna, with which they were 
 at War : From thefe Indians he learnt, that there was a great 
 Town or Caftle at Tumbez, a magnificent Temple, and abundance 
 of Gold and Silver Veffels, and that the Country abounded with 
 Fruits: Whereupon Piz.arro treated the Indians with great Cm-' 
 lity, and gave them the Liberty to return to the Continent, 
 when they acquaint their Lords with the Wonders they had feen, 
 <vrz. the Ships, Guns, Habit, and Complexion of the Spaniards ; 
 and that thefe Strangers came to viiit the Ccaft in a friendly. 
 
 Manner. 
 i
 
 638 Prefent State of the Spanifli Part II. 
 
 Mi nner. The Princes hofpitably received the Spaniards ; and 
 as the Indians were furprifed to fee fo ftrange a People, and fuch 
 Animals and Inftruments as they brought with them, the Spa- 
 niards were not lefs furprifed to find a fine Palace, and magnifi- 
 cent Temple, and all manner of VefTels and Utenfils formed of 
 Gold and Silver, alfo Silver-fmiths at Work, forming more of 
 thefe VefTels. The Spaniards, not being prepared to make them- 
 felves Matters of thefe immenfe Treafures, returned back to Pa' 
 naoia, the latter End of the Year 1527. Pizarro^ having thus 
 fpent near three Years in Search of thefe happy Countries, and 
 having-gone through numberlefs Hazards and Hardfhips, refolv- 
 ed, by the Advice of his Partners, to go to Europe, in order to 
 procure an Authority and Recruits equal to fo great an Under- 
 taking. He arrived at To/edo in Spain, where the Court then 
 then was, and met with a molt gracious Reception from the Em- 
 peror Charles V. on prefenting his Majeity with fome Perw 
 *vians in their proper Habits, and feveral Gold and Silver Veffels 
 and Utenfils of the Fafhion of the Country. The Emreror was 
 pleafed to hear Pizarro relate the Hardfhips and Difficulties he, 
 and his Comrades, had met with in this three Years Voyage; and 
 authorized him to proceed in the Conqueft of Peru. This Gen- 
 tleman at length embarked at Panama in three Ships, taking 
 with him 185 Soldiers, and 37 Horfes; and, meeting with con- 
 trary Winds, was obliged to land above an hundred Leagues to 
 the Northward of Tumbez : and, thinking himfelf ftrong enough 
 to drive the Indians before him, he fell upon them, plundered 
 their Towns, and made many of them Prifoners. The reft of 
 thr unhappy Indians fled from the Sea-coafts up into the Coun- 
 try ; and Pizarro was afterwards fo diftrefled for want of Pro- 
 vifions, and loft fo many Men by Sicknefs, and Hardfhips, and 
 the fatiguing Marches through Bogs and Thickets, in this ex- 
 ceffive hot Climate, that his Forces were exceedingly diminifhed. 
 He took molt of the Treafure he had plundered the Indians of, 
 and fent his Ships back with it to Panama, to raife more Re- 
 cruits ; and, with infinite Labour, marched as far at Tumbez, in 
 the Bay of Guiaquil, over the Mouths of abundance of rapid 
 Streams, that fall into the South Sea, under the Equator. In the 
 mean time Almagro fent Pizarro a confiderable Reinforcement, 
 with which he hoped to make a Conqueft of the Country, efpe- 
 cially as he found the Peruvians engaged in a Civil War,one Part 
 of them adhering to their lawful Prince Huafcar, and the other 
 to Atabilipa, the Baftard Son to the preceding Emperor Huana 
 Capac, who had made Atabilipa King of Shiitto, and the North- 
 ern Provinces of Peru, in his Life-time. The Forces of King 
 Atabilipa were put into fuch Confufion by the Spanijb Horfe and 
 Artillery, when they made a Defcent, that they fled ; and, after 
 
 the
 
 Chap XXXI. Empire in America. *39 
 
 E U ;i wh" ^ found t^lvesio fuddenly pollened ofn It 
 f~ms The Forces that refilled Piw's Landing, were thote oe- 
 tS 2%. to that Province, on purpole to , oppole the 
 InVafion of the laniards ; but fuch was the Combination o 
 XtC and his whole Court, when the Fugmve, related *M 
 ^uehwr' the Thunderers Ordnance made amongft them and 
 bow^poffble it was to efcape the Spanijb Kor.es, to which Am- 
 mals theTr Fears had added Wings, that they concluded, rf the 
 ^traneer were rot Gods, as they firft contoured, they were 
 ~ tainly Devils; and that it was not poffibie for any human 
 Fo " dVfend heir Country again* them T* .fortunate A- 
 Zro receiving Intelligence of this, refolved to take Advan- 
 tage o the Tfrror and Confufion they were in, and march 
 SStly KAtMpa, while he remained under that Delufion; 
 and ino^er to foment the Civil Wars, and prevent t he Peru- 
 It; unitg their Forces againft him he declared that he w 
 come in the Name of the Great King of Spain, to ^^ 
 nreffed and to do Juftice to thofe that were injured. Ttoi , he 
 prened, ami to uo j Adherents of the Em- 
 
 TnZ"crt the r Prince from Captivity, and : reftore hi* J the 
 Throne of his Anceflors. Atabilipa, apprehending he ^>u d foon 
 be driven from theThaone he had ufurped, endeavoured alio by 
 SlSeW. , to gain the Favour of Pnarro alluring .him, 
 that he was ready tofubmit to the Commands of that great Pnnce 
 from whom he came. The Spaniard, finding there was but little 
 O^ofitln^aed from either Side beg : his March > t< ^ 
 
 nation >ncreanng J f Submiffion, to P/^m, together 
 
 3Lm2 SfSCa PU. .* Emerald, Corn, 
 F uit ?** Sheep and Goats, Venifon, tame and wild Fowl, 
 fine Couon and Woollen Garments of various Colours, and what- 
 ^rthlcontry afforded. The rW~ ^f dor ^ being 
 dMniftcd PUarl, to return the Compliment difpatched wo, 
 ";, auended by forty Ho*, as Mtoir^ * * 
 i/**i7^> i and the tka, being informed 4 ft* ^^"i
 
 640 The Prefent State cf the Spaniih Part II. 
 
 dered a Detachment of his Army to advance, and meet the Spa- 
 niards on the Way, and conduct them to his Prefence. This Bo* 
 Ay of Peruvians, being come within a little Diftance of the Em- 
 bafladors, fell down and adored them ; and, having acquainted 
 them, that the Inca waited their 'Arrival with Impatience, at- 
 tended the Embafladors to one of ihe Palaces near Caxamalca ; 
 where, upon their alighting, they were conducted to the Inca t 
 whom they found fitting in a Ghair of Gold, in the midit of his 
 Officers and Courtiers. The Emperor arofe from his Seat to re- 
 ceive them j and faid, they were welcome to his Dominions, and 
 Golden Chairs were fet for the Embafladors } and imme- 
 diately two Royal Virgins brought in each of them two Golden 
 Cups, filled with the Liquor uiually drank by the Inca ; and, 
 bowing, delivered one of the Cups into the Hand of AtabiUpa, 
 and another to Hernando Pizarro ; and the Spaniard was told, 
 that the Inca defired to drink with him ; which, according to the 
 Cuftom of the Country, teftified great Refpeft : Then the Inca and 
 Hernando drank, and gave away their Cups ; the other Virgin 
 delivered one cf her Cups into the Hand of the Inca, and the 
 other to Soto, the other Spani/b Embaflador, who had the He* 
 nour alfo to drink with the Emperor. Then they were pre- 
 fented with dry Fruits ; but the Spaniards were amazed to find 
 fo much Civility and Politenefs amongft a People they had been 
 taught to look upon as barbarous. The Embafladors were af- 
 terwards difmifled with large Prefents of Gold and Silver Plates, 
 the Inca telling them, he would fpeedily go to Caxamalca ; 
 and accordingly, the next Day, he began his March towads 
 the Cbrijlians : Of which Pizarro having Notice, made Prepa- 
 rations to receive him ; and, when the Inca and his People enter d 
 the City, after a Conference between that Pirnce and a Frier 
 concerning Religion, Pizarro made the appointed Signal for the 
 great Guns to fire among the thickeft of the unhappy Indians, and 
 his Horfe to attack and trample them under their Feet, and the 
 gfeat Dogs to be let loofe at them, while he, at the Head of his 
 Infantry, marched up to the Throne, and made the Emperor 
 Prifoner. In this Maflacre about 5000 poor Indians loft their 
 Lives ; and the Spoils, when collected, were prodigious, confiding 
 of large Gold and Silver Veflels and Utenfils, fine Garments of 
 various Colours, Jewels, and Ornaments. And though all Man- 
 kind muft look upon this Action as one of the molt treacherous 
 and barbarous Maflacres that ever was committed, yet the cruel 
 Pizarro had the Confidence to command a folemn Thankfgiving 
 to God to be obferved that very Day, being the Third of May 
 1533, and in the very Place where the Ground was covered with 
 the dead Bodies of the miferable Indians they had thus murdered 
 and plundered. The Emperor, obferving the in&tiable Thirft of 
 
 the
 
 Chap. XXXI. Empire in America. 641 
 
 l he Spaniards after Gold and Silver* promifed to give them as 
 much of thofe precious Metals, as a great Room in the Caftle of 
 CaxamaUa would hold, provided the Spaniards would let him 
 have his Liberty. The three Spanijb Officers, that were fent 
 with fome noble Indians to Cufco, to bring in the Treafure pro- 
 pofed, happening to pafs through the Town where Huafcar, 
 the lawful Emperor, was Prifoner, went to fee that unfortunate 
 Prince ; and, acquainting him with what Atabilipa had promifed for 
 his own Ranfom, Huafcar acquainted them, how unjuftly his 
 Brother Atabilipa had depofed and imprifoned him ; and that if 
 they would releafe him from his Captivity, and reftore him to 
 his Dominions, he would furnifh them with more Treafure than 
 the Ufurper Atabilipa could poffibly do; for his loyal Subjects 
 had buried moft of his Gold and Silver Plate and Jewels after 
 the Battle, wherein he was made Prifoner, to conceal them from 
 the Rebels, but would readily produce it again, and pay it to the 
 Spaniards for his Ranfom, if he, the Emperor, required it. The 
 Spanijb Meffengers feemed to litten to thefe Overtures, and pro- 
 mifed the Inca Huafcar, that Juftice fhould be done him ; but left 
 that Prince, however, in Prifon, and continued their Journey 
 to Cufco, where they were adored by the People, as the true De- 
 fendants of the Sun. The moft valuable Treafure, confifting of 
 Gold, Silver, and Emeralds, was lodged in the Temple of Pa- 
 xha Comae, the invifible God, at Cufco ; but the Indian Priefts, 
 lofing their Efteem for the Spaniards, and afflicted to find fo vi- 
 cious and profligate a Race of Men, who trampled on every thing 
 that was facred, and whofe Avarice exceeded all Bounds, fent 
 away 400 Men, loaden with Gold, Silver, and Jewels, before 
 the Meffengers arrived, and buried thefe Treafures where the 
 Spaniards could not difcover them. However, the Indians hav- 
 ing amaffed a confiderable Quantity of Treafure, they loaded it 
 on the Backs of their Porters, and conveyed it to Caxamalca in 
 Hopes of procuring the Releafe of Atabilipa j but, inflead of 
 purchafing his Liberty, Pizarro made no Difficulty to condemn 
 him to be burnt, pretending that the unhappy Prince encouraged 
 the Indians to cut off the Spaniards. Almagro being arrived, and 
 joining Pizarro, there was diftributed as much Gold and Silver 
 Plate amongft the Soldiers, as amounted to more than 15,000,000 
 of Crowns at this Day, confidering the Value of Gold and Sil- 
 ver then. The Soldiers, being poffeffed of this prodigious Wealth, 
 fell into all manner of Exceffes, railing the Price of every thing 
 to a very great Rate, by offering any Sums to gratify their Ap- 
 petites or Fancies, and never was Gaming at an higher Pitch ; 
 which, 'tis faid, their Officers connived at, or rather encouraged, 
 that the Soldiers, having loft their Money, might be more under 
 Command. Pizarro, conjecturing that nothing could tend to 
 
 T t eftablifh
 
 64.2. Prefent State of the Spanifh Part II. 
 
 eftablifh the Spanifh Dominions in Peru, more than his poflefling 
 himfelf of the capital City of Cufco, began his March thither with 
 all his Forces, confiding of near 4.C0 Men, befides confederate 
 Indians: Pizarro difcovered how deteftable the Murder of Ata- 
 bilipa rendered the Spaniards among the Natives ; for the two 
 Factions immediately united againft him, under the Emperor 
 Huana Capae, the Brother and Heir of the Emperor Huafcar, 
 who had been murdered by the Orders of Atabilipa. Atauchi, 
 Brother to Atabilipa, being determined to be revenged of Pi- 
 zarro, joined his Forces with feveral other Peruvian Generals, 
 and furprifed the Spaniards on their March to Cufco, killed fome 
 of them, and made feveral Prifoners. Pizarro, continuing his 
 March, was again attacked by feveral Parties of the Indians, at 
 fome difficult Pafles in the Mountains: but, finding themfelves 
 unable to refill the Fire-arms and Horfe of the Chrijiians, they fled, 
 after a faint Refiftance, to Cufco; where they declared, that it was 
 in vain for any human Force to oppofe the Spaniards, who were 
 armed with Thunder and Lightning, and could kill their Enemies 
 at fo many hundred Yards Diftance. Whereupon the Inhabitants 
 of the Capital City of Cufco fled, with their Wives and Children, 
 and what was moft valuable to them, to the Woods and Moun- 
 tains ; and the Spaniard entered the City without Oppofition, 
 in Oclober 1532 ; where he met with a prodigious Booty, not- 
 withftanding the Citizens had fo much Time to carry off their 
 beft Goods and Treafure. The Inca, fome time after this, dif- 
 patched Exprefles to every Province of the Empire, requiring the 
 refpettive Governors and Officers to raife what Forces they could, 
 and, in one Day, endeavour to furprife the Spaniards in their 
 Quarters ; and Three great Armies were accordingly aflembled ; 
 one whereof was intended to cut off Almagro, and his Forces that 
 were in Cbiii ; a fecond inverted the City of Lima ; and the 
 third, confifiing of 200,000 Men, commanded by the Emperor 
 in Perfon, attacked the City of Cufco, took the Caftle, and drove 
 the Spaniards into the grand Square, in the middle of the Town ; 
 but here the Artillery, being pointed to the feveral Streets, 
 mowed them down by Hundreds and Thoufands ; and the Horfe 
 charging them while they were in this Confufion, the Indians 
 were forced to retire j Viclory declaring for the Spaniards, and 
 their Confederates. The Inca, finding himfelf not able to drive 
 the Spaniards out of Cufco, determined, 'tis faid, to abandon the 
 Government, and lead a private Life ; for he heard his Army 
 before Lima alfo was repulfed ; and that frefli Supplies of Spa- 
 niards arrived daily from Mexico and Panama. Though the 
 Spaniards are by no means to be juftified in their Invafions of 
 this Country ; yet the Wars, which were, after this Time, car- 
 ried on by the King of Spain for reftoring the Natives to their 
 
 Liberty,
 
 Chap.XXXI. Empire in America. 643 
 
 Liberty, and refcuing them from the Oppreflions of thefe Con- 
 querors, or firft Planters, muft be approved of by all the World. 
 The King of Spain may be faid to have been in the peaceable 
 Poffeffion of Peru in 1554, in the Reign of Philip II. for the 
 fubduing thefe firft Adventures, who afted with the utmoft In- 
 humanity to the Indians, and who endeavoured to render them* 
 fclves independent of the Crown of Spain, proved a more diffi- 
 cult Talk, than the Conqueft of the Indians by Pizarro, and his 
 Partners. Don Diego de Almagr* was the firft of the 
 Spani/b Generals, who, after the Reduction of Expedition 
 Cufco, the Capital of Peru t undertook an Expedi- into Chili, 
 tion into Chili. This Gentleman fubdued fome of 
 the more Northern Provinces, and probably would have extended 
 his Conquefts farther, if he had not been obliged to return to 
 Peru, on account of the Troubles there. Baldivia was the next 
 Spani/b Commander', that attempted to extend their Conquefts in 
 Chili, endeavouring to grafp more than he could poffibly hold 
 with the Spanijb Forces he commanded. The brave Chili/ians 
 had never been vanquifhed by the Spaniards in fo many Encoun- 
 ters, if they had not been terrified and aftonifhed at the firing 
 their Artillery and fmall Arms, which they imagined to be real 
 Thunder and Lightning, and that thofe, who difcharged them, 
 were father Gods than Men: The Horfemen, armed Cap-ape, 
 feemed alfo invulnerable : Not being able to pierce their Armour 
 with their Spears and Darts, rendered the Spaniardi ftill more 
 terrible. But the Dread of the Spanijb Ar/ns and Horfes being 
 now more worn off, and the Indians being extremely haraffed, by 
 being compelled to dig in the Mines, and fuftering many more 
 Hardihips, the Chili/tans refolved to make the laft bold Pufli 
 for the Recovery of their Liberties, and to expel the Strangers 
 out of their Country, who had fo unjuftly enflaved them; The 
 whole Country was engaged in a Confpiracy againft the Spaniards, 
 and the celebrated Indian, Caupolican, was chofen fbr their Ge- 
 neral. Baldivia, receiving Intelligence of the intended Infur* 
 reftion, attacked near 15,000 of them with his Horfe, and ob- 
 liged them to retire into the Woods and Inclofures, as often as the/ 
 appeared; but was not in a Condition to difperfe them intirely ; 
 they frequently rally'd, and attack'd his Troops; and thus they 
 continued to encounter him for feveral Days in a fort of a Run- 
 ning-fight. The Chili/tan General, obferving that his engaging 
 the Spaniards with fuch great Numbers, only occafioned Confu- 
 fion among his People, thofe in the Front frequently giving Way 
 to the Spanijb Cavalry, and difordering the reft of his Forces be- 
 fore ever they were engaged, divided his Army into Battalions 
 of a Thoufand each, ordering to charge the Enemy by Turns. 
 He reprefented to them, that the Spaniards were but 150 Horfe \ 
 
 T t 2 and
 
 644 Prefent State of the Spaniih Part II. 
 
 and that iobd of his brave Countrymen might eafily maintain 
 their Ground for fome time againft fo fmall a Number, notwith- 
 ftanding the Advantage the Enemy had in their Arms and Hor- 
 fes. However, he only defired they would make their utmoft 
 Efforts : He had no Expectation, that the firft Battalion fhould 
 gain the Viclory ; but, when they found themfelves obliged to 
 retire, he required them to take care, in their Retreat, not to 
 diforder the other Bodies j but rally themfelves, and draw up in 
 the Rear, that they might be ready for a fecond Charge : And 
 the fame Commands he gave to the Officers of the other Batta- 
 lions. In purfuance of thefe Orders, the firft Battalion engaged 
 the Spanijh Horfe with great Refolution , and, having held them 
 in Play for fome time, leifurely retired, being fucceeded by the 
 fecond Battalion, and that by the third, and fo on, till the Spa- 
 niards had continued the Engagement for Seven or Eight Hours 
 without Intermiffion, and both Men and Horfes began to faint 
 with the Labours of the Day, for want of Refrefhment ; which 
 Sa/divia too late obferving, made a precipitate Retreat, ordering 
 his Troops to take Poffeffion of a Pafs about a Mile from the 
 Field of Battle, where he did not doubt he fhould yet be able to 
 defend himfelf againft all the Power of the Enemy. But a Chi^ 
 UJian, who had been Page to Baldi-via, hearing his Mafter give 
 Orders for their Retreat, deferted at that Inftant to his Country- 
 men, and directed them to take Poffeffion of the Pafs, before the 
 Spaniards could arrive there : The Spaniards, finding Death in- 
 evitable, called upon Jefus Cbriji, the Blejfed Virgin, and the 
 teft of the Saints, to (ave them ; but were all cut to Pieces on the 
 Spot, except the unhappy General, who was making his Confef- 
 fion to a miferable Prieft in the fame Circumftances ; the latter 
 they killed direttly, but brought the unfortunate Baldivia, with 
 his Hands tied behind him, before Caupolican, by whofe Order 
 he was put to a cruel Death. The War between the Spaniards 
 in all Parts of Chili, and the Natives, was carried on, with great 
 Obftinacy and Cruelty, for upwards of 50 Years, when it ap- 
 peared, by the Spaniards own Relation, they were driven, with 
 great Slaughter, from moil of their Settlements in that Country. 
 Thus the hardy and valiant Chili/tans fubdued the Spaniards, and 
 are their inveterate Enemies to this Day ; however, they have 
 Baldivia, and fome other Places, on the Coaft. As to the pre- 
 fent Government of Mexico, in general, it is by a Viceroy, com- 
 monly refiding in Mexico ; and to him is entrufted the Overfight 
 of the Governors of the various Provinces belonging to the King 
 of Spain in North-America. It muft be confefled indeed, many 
 Nations of the Inland Indians, in the Spanijh Empire in America, 
 ftill retain their original Freedom, Religion, and Cuftoms, and 
 own no Subjection to any Power, being governed by their own 
 
 Princes
 
 Chap. XXXI. Empire in America.' 645 
 
 Princes, or Caciques. The Province of Peru is alfo governed by 
 a Viceroy, to whom is intrulted the Government of Chili and 
 Paragua. 
 
 Trade.] The Value of the Merchandize in the City of 
 Mexico is not to be computed; this City being the great Mart for 
 all Goods brought from the Eaft-Indies, or Europe: Thofe of the 
 Eaft-Indies they receive from Acapulco, a Sea-port in Mexico, on 
 the South Sea ; and thofe of Europe from La Fera-Cruz, iituated 
 in the Bay of Mexico, or the North Sea : And their own native 
 Treafures, Gold, Silver, Precious Stones, cff<\ added to the for- 
 mer, make the Shops ar.d Markets of Mexico the richeft that are 
 to be found in any Town upon the Face of the Earth. It feems, 
 the Spaniards employ but two Ships annually in the rich Trade 
 between Acapulco and the Philippine Iflands near the Coaft of 
 China ; they do not go together in Company, but make the Voy- 
 age alternately : One of them fets out from Acapulco the latter End 
 of March, or the Beginning of April ; and arrives at Manila, in 
 the Philippine Iflands, fome time in June, when the other is ready- 
 to fail from Manila to Acapulco. It is reckoned about 8000 
 Miles from Acapulco to Manila ; and thefe the Spaniards fail in 
 ten Weeks, or three Months, in going from Mexico to Manila, 
 having a conftant Trade-wind from the Nbrth-eaft, and ferene 
 Weather in 10 or 12 Degrees of North Latitude, which they 
 get into as foon as they can, and have fcarce any Occafion to al- 
 ter their Sails till they arrive at the Ladrone Iflands, about 400 
 Leagues (hort of the Philippines, where they touch, and take in 
 frefli Provifions and Water. And, in this Latitude, the South Sea 
 may well be ftyled Pacific, for they fcarce ever meet with 
 Storms, or bad Weather, all the Way. The Cargo of this Ship 
 confifts chiefly of Silver. The Voyage from Manila to Aca- 
 pulco is performed with incredible Hazards and Hardfliips, which 
 no Gain would induce a wife Man to undertake twice ; for, when 
 they leaye Manila, they are forced to abandon the pacific Part of 
 the Ocean, and ftand away to the North, till they come in about 
 35, or, perhaps, 40 Degrees, before they can meet with Weft- 
 erly, or even variable Winds : And here they are tofled by the 
 mountainous Waves, and their Patience tried by unconftant Wea- 
 ther. This Voyage may be looked upon as the longeft and moft 
 dreadful of any in the World ; as well becaufe of the vaft Ocean 
 to be crofled, the Wind always a-head, as for the terrible Tem- 
 pefts, which happen one upon the Eack of another, in the 
 Courfe they are obliged to take, and for the defperate Difeafes 
 that feize People, and many other fhockihg Calamities. The 
 Spaniards, in failing from the Philippine Iflands to America, al- 
 ways take Advantage of the Southerly Monfoon, which fets-in 
 T t 3 about
 
 646 Prefent State of the Spanifh Part II. 
 
 about May or June, on the Coaft of China, and blows till Septem- 
 ber or Oclober ; this carrying them as high as Latitude 30 Deg. 
 North, where they begin to meet with variable Winds, it being 
 very difficult for them to fail Eaft : And, it feems, they ufually 
 arrive at the deured Port of Acapulco about Chriftmas. The Mer- 
 chants, 'tis faid, ufually get 150, or 200 per Cent, by this 
 Voyage ; the Pilot may make about 20,000 Pieces of Eight 
 (4 j. 6d. each); his Mates 9000 each ; the Captain of the Gal- 
 leon 40,000; the Boatfwain, who has the Privilege of taking 
 feveral Bales of Goods on board, gets an Eftate in one Voyage ; 
 and the Wages of every Sailor is about 370 Pieces of Eight, 
 amounting to about 84 /. Sterling. The Cargo of this Ship from 
 Manila confifts of Diamonds, Rubies, Sapphires, and other pre- 
 cious Stones, found in the Eajl-Indies; Cinnamon, Cloves, Mace, 
 Nutmegs, and Pepper ; rich Carpets of Perjia, the Camphire of 
 Borneo, the Benjamin and Ivory of Pegu and Cambadia ; Silks, 
 Muflins, and Calicoes of the Eajl-Indies ; the Gold-duft, Tea, 
 China-ware, Silk, Cabinets, &c. of China and Japan : All which 
 amount to a prodigious Sum ; this one Ship having more Riches 
 in it than fome whole Fleets. Thefe Ships, employed to carry on 
 this rich Trade, are ufually Ships of good Force, and com- 
 monly 800, or 1000 Tons Burden. At the time this Ship ar- 
 rives at Acapulco from Manila, there come in two or three Ships, 
 from Lima in Peru, very little inferior to the former in Value, 
 being laden with Silver, Quickfilver, Cocoa-nuts, and other rich 
 Merchandize of South America, with which they purchafe the 
 Merchandize of Europe, and the Eajl- Indies: For, in the Months 
 of January and February, a great Fair is held at Acapulco ; and 
 a vaft Concourfe of Merchants come from Mexico to vend the 
 Goods of Europe, and buy thofe of China, the Eajl-Indies, and. 
 Peru- There is very little Trade carried on by the Coaft of 
 Mexico; all Goods are carried from Acapulco to the City of 
 Mexico, by Mules and Pack-horfesj and from thence to Vera- 
 Cruz in like manner, in order to be fhipped for Europe. This 
 laft Town is of great Importance, on account of the Flotilla re- 
 forting thither, to receive the Gold and Silver found in the Mines 
 of Mexico; and its being a Mart of all manner of rich Mer- 
 chandize, that are brought hither from China, the Eajl-Indies, 
 Peru, and Europe ; which brings me to fpeak of the Trade be- 
 tween Mexico and Old-Spain. Thirty or Forty large Ships carry 
 on the Trade between Spain and their Dominions in America ; 
 and thefe are almoft all of them their own Veffels, no Trade be- 
 ing fuffered to be carried on in foreign Bottoms, or any Foreigner 
 to vifit their Coafts, unlefs the South-Sea Company in England, 
 who furnifh them with Slaves, and that under feveral Reftriftions : 
 and his Catholic Majefty, on condition that the Company fhall 
 
 not
 
 CJiap. XXXI. Empire in America. 647 
 
 rot carry on any clandeftine Trade, grants them the Privilege 
 of lending out a Ship annually to trade to the Indies. The 
 Veflels ufed by the Spaniards in tranfporting Merchandize from 
 Spain to America, are generally large, and of good Force, and 
 called Galleons : They fail in Fleets annually from Caditc, laden 
 with Goods of many different Nations ; but the English, French, 
 Dutch, and Italians, are Proprietors of the greateft Part of their 
 Cargoes, and the Spaniards are, in a great meafure, their Fa- 
 ctors; for, when the Galleons return from America, with the 
 Treafure for which the Goods have been fold, it is, mod of it, 
 diftributed amongft the Merchants and Factors belonging to thofe 
 Four Nations. The Spaniards, employed in this Affair, are Men 
 of fuch ftrict Honour, that thofe, in whofe Names thefe Effects 
 are fent over, and the Returns made, fcarce ever abufe the Con- 
 fidence that is placed in them, or betray their Principals; for, by 
 the Laws of Spain, no Stranger can, directly or indirectly, trade 
 to the Spanijh Wejl-lndies, but he forfeits his Goods. However, 
 it cannot be fuppofed but the Government of Spain is very well 
 apprifed, that this Trade is, in a manner, carried on by Fo- 
 reigners, and, for very good Reafons, connive at it : They know 
 their own People are not able to freight thefe Fleets ; and, if 
 they were not enabled to do it by Foreigners, their American 
 Dominions muft want all manner of Neceffaries almoft for Cloth- 
 ing and Furniture. It muft be confeffed, that it would be much 
 more for the Advantage of the Kingdom of Spain, to encourage 
 Manufactures at Home, and trade more with the Product of their 
 own Country : But, fince they are not to be brought to this, the 
 next beft thing they can do is, to turn Factors and Carriers for 
 their Neighbours ; for, befides the Advantages of thefe Effects 
 palhng through their Hands, the Revenues of the Spanijb Crown 
 muft be vaftly increafed, by the Importation and Exportation of 
 them. The greateft Part of the Galleons fail to Porto-Bello, and 
 are called the Flota ; the other Part, called the Flotilla, or little 
 Fleet, fail to Vera-Cruz. in Mexico. The Flota fell their Mer- 
 chandize chiefly at the Fair of Porto-Bello, where they take on 
 board Gold, and Silver, and other rich Treafures of Peru and 
 Chili, in Return for their Effects. The Flotilla fell their Cargoes 
 at the Fair of Vera-Cruz. ; to which Place is brought the Gold 
 and Silver of Mexico, with the Gold-duft, Precious Stones, and 
 other Treafures of China, and the Eaft-lndies ; and with thefe 
 the Flotilla is freighted on its Return to Europe. The Galleons, 
 when they go from Spain, fail to the South- weft, and get into 
 the Way of the Trade-wind as foon as they can, which carries 
 them into 11 or 12 Degrees of North Latitude ; then, bending 
 their Courfe directly Weft, they leave the Charibbee Iflands on 
 the Right, or Starboard-quarter, and continue their Courfe to 
 
 T t 4 the
 
 648 Prefent State of the Spanifh Part II. 
 
 l he Weftward, till they arrive at Rio de la Hacba, where they 
 come to an Anchor, and Exprefles are immediately fent to Car- 
 ihagena, Panama, Porto-Bello, Vera-Cru-z, &c. to prepare the 
 King's Treafure for the Galleons, to take on board at their Re- 
 turn : At which the greateft Part of the Fleet fails to Cartha- 
 rena, and Porto-Bello, and the reft to Vera Crux. All the Gal- 
 leons ufually join together, in their Return, at the Hwvanna, it\ 
 the Ifland of Cuba ; and, failing from thence to Spain in Com- 
 pany, take a very different Courfe from that by which they came 
 from Europe ; for, in their Return, they fail North through the 
 Gulph of Florida ; and, continuing their Courfe to the North- 
 eaft, till they come into the Latitude 36 or 40, where they meet 
 with variable Winds, they then fhape it as near to the Eaft as 
 the Winds will permit them, till they come upon the Coaft of 
 Spain ; and are ufually fix or eight Weeks in their Paflage. 
 Thefe Fleets have fometimes, 'tis faid, broughtHome near the Vaiue 
 of 1 5,000,000 /. Sterl. in Gold and Silver only ; of which the King 
 has a Fifth. There is alfo a Trade carried on between Mexico and 
 Cuba, Hifpaniola and Porto- Rico, as likewife between Mexico and 
 Terra Firma, by the Bar lament Fleet, or Guar da Cofias, confid- 
 ing of Six or Seven Sail of Ships, of good Burdens and Force, 
 that ferve both as Men of War, and Merchant-men ; for they are 
 ordered to viiit all the Spanijh Sea ports in the North Sea every 
 Year, as well to fupply one Place with what another produces, 
 or can furnifh, as to prevent Foreigners trading in their Ports, 
 and to clear the Seas of Pirates. This Fleet goes to Vera-Cruz. in 
 Odober, or November, and remains there till March ; from thence 
 they fail to the Hanjanna, where they difpofe of the Merchandize 
 they bring from Mexico ; after which they fland to the North- 
 ward, through the Gulph of Florida, till they come into the La- 
 titude of 30 or 40 ; then they ftretch away to the South-eaft, 
 till they make the Ifland of Porto- Rico ; and, having difpatched 
 their Bufinefs there, they continue their Courfe to the South- 
 waid, till they arrive at Trinity- IJland, near the Mouth of the 
 River Oronoko: From thence the Guarda Cojlas fail to Marga- 
 rita, another considerable Ifland near the Main, coafting along 
 to Comana, and fo to Caracos ; then they double Cape La Vela, 
 and coaft along by Rio de la Hacha, St. Martha, and Cartha- 
 gena; on which Coaft they frequently meet with Englijh, French, 
 and Dutch Trading Sloops, and make Prizes of them : And, hav- 
 ing ftaid fome time at Carthagena, they proceed to Porto-Bello ; 
 whence, having vifited the Bay oiCampcachy, they return at length 
 to V era-Crux, again. The Smuggling, or Clandeftine Trade, 
 carried on by the Englijh, French, and Dutxh, is very beneficial 
 to thofe Nations ; fpr the Goods carried over in the Galleons, are 
 bought up at extravagant Rates at the Fair of Porto-Bello, to be 
 
 tranf-
 
 Chap. XXXI. Empire in America. 649 
 
 tranfported again by the South Sea to Peru ; which extravagant 
 Prices for Clothing, and Furniture, tempt the Engliftj, Sec. to fit 
 out Sloops with what Neceffaries are wanting on the Coaft of 
 Mexico, &c. in order to trade with the Spaniards on thofe Coafts, 
 who are no lefs ready to receive the Goods of thefe Foreigners, 
 than they are to fell them, giving Pieces of Eight for what they 
 buy. But, as was obferved before, if the Barlavento Fleet, or 
 Guarda Coftas, meet with fuch Trading Veflels, they never fail 
 to make them all Prize ; and even fometimes feize on Ships that 
 have never been concerned in this clandeftine Trade, on Sufpi- 
 cion ; and, rinding Pieces of Eight on board, have frequently 
 procured them to be condemned ; which has been the Caufe of 
 the many Complaints our Merchants have made, and the Ground 
 of the prefent War with the Crown of Spain. For it is highly 
 neceifary, that our Trade and Navigation, in the Weft-Indies, 
 be carried on without Interruption ; and the fair Trader be 
 brought under no fuch Hardfliips, as may difcourage him from 
 carrying on a Trade to our Plantations ; which is fo advan- 
 tageous to the Crown of Great Britain, and its Subjects, as 
 was obferved in treating of the Trade of the Britijb Dominions 
 in America. The Logwood-Trade, carried on by the Englijh, 
 has occafioned many Difputes between Britain and Spain ; this 
 Bufmefs of cutting Logwood in the Bay of Campeachy, the 
 Englijh have followed for a great many Years, in a Part of the 
 Country deftitute of Spanifb or Indian Inhabitants ; and looked 
 upon it, that this long Poflcffion had given them at leaft as good 
 a Right to that Part of the Country, as the Spaniards feem to 
 have to any of the reft : And, in fome Treaties, we are told, 
 the Spaniards feem to have yielded this Trade to the Englijb. 
 However, they have thought fit, of late Years, to fall upon our 
 Logwood-cutters, killed many of them, and carried the rell into 
 perpetual Imprifonment, not fufFering them to be exchanged or 
 ranfomed. As to the Trade of Paraguay, the City of Buenos 
 Ayres is a great Mart ; for hither European Merchandize is 
 brought, and fent from hence to Peru and Chili ; and hither 
 great Numbers of Negroes are brought by the Englijh, by virtue 
 of the AJftento Contract. From Buenos Ayres are exported to 
 Europe Part of the Gold and Silver of Peru, with vaft Quantities 
 of Hides, and Tallow, and other Merchandize. 
 
 Revenues.] The Revenues the King of Spain receives from 
 the Viceroyalty of Mexico, arife principally from three Branches ; 
 viz.. 1. The King's Fifth and Tenth of the Treafuie dug out of 
 their Mines. Gemelli Careri informs us, that his Majdty has 
 but a Tenth of the Silver in Mtxico, though he has a Fifth of 
 
 the
 
 %o Prefent State of the Spanifh Partll. 
 
 the Silver of Peru; becaufe the Mexicans are at a very ereat 
 ^gempurchaftng Quickfilver to refine their Silver; wlfeTea 
 the Peruwans have Mines of Qyickfilver in their Country Gold 
 however, pays a Fifth to the King, both in Mexico and Peru 
 The fame Gentleman relates, that, when he was at Mexico in the 
 Year ,698, the King's Part, for that Year, came to 7s much as 
 make, of our Money near 1,200,000 Pounds ; and that Ae Af! 
 fayer affured him, that the King's Share was near 1,600 000 
 Pounds in the Year ,691 : And the King's Part of the Plate of 
 Peru comes to Four times as much at lfaft. " TheCuftoms 
 and Excife muft raife a great deal of Money ; for thelame 
 Writer informs us, that the King's Duty, paid by the Man7a 
 Sh.p, m ^ which he came from the Eafr-ldies, Amounted to 
 80,000 Pieces; and thofe Ships, which arrive from Pe U and 
 *,</, annually, alfo pay very high Duties to the Crown. The 
 fame Gentleman tells us that the Excife on a fpirituou Liquor 
 amounted to,,, op 000 Piece, ; of Eight per Annum in the Ci?y of 
 Mexzco. The third general Branch of the Revenue is, the Rens 
 and Services due ta the Crown , and this, it feems, s equal f 
 not fuperior, to either of the former Branches ; for we are in- 
 formed, that the pooreft married Indian pays Four Six and 
 >n fome Places Eight Rials (Four Shilling) per Annul\ t 
 Crown ; and others ,n proportion to their Eftates: There are alfo 
 Lands held immediately of the Crown, that pay very great Rents 
 The Sum Total of the King's Revenues, arifn/g fronAll n Do" 
 minions m Amenca, muft be prodigious; but then there are a 
 Multitude of Salaries and Perquifites, &c. deduded. 
 
 . F u RCE f S L The Regdar ForCes the fiords have in the Vice- 
 2Vr are c V , e / y nfiderable; in the Metropolis 
 
 here are fcarce 500 Soldiers; and at Fera-Cruz, the Por? of 
 thegreateftConfequence on the North Sea, they have not 2 ro; 
 and it feems their Fortifications areas contemptible as their 
 Ganfons. The King of Spain maintains 600 Horfe in Nen 
 
 to 3* Mi ^ A11 r anCe / 450 Pieces of Eight per Annum 
 to each Man. The Forces of the other Parts of the Spanitb Em- 
 Vvrem America ^cannot be very confutable ; for a Thoufand or 
 fifteen hundred Bucanneers have, in a manner, defied all their 
 Land Forces in thofe Parts : Though thefe Rovers have frequent- 
 In ^T^ I ? n gh ^ thdr C Untr y for the fiords 
 to raife their whole Forces ; yet they have generally carried of 
 their Booty in fpite of them. . , (> 
 
 Ju! A l ACT ' R ] 7u e Indiam 0f Mexic0 are g en erally of a 
 middle Stature, and their Complexions a deep Olive, darker than 
 that of the Portuguefe: The Men have ftrait clean Limbs 
 
 are
 
 Chap. XXXI. Empire in America. 651 
 
 arebig-bon'd, and well- fhap'd, fcarce a crooked or deformed Per- 
 fon Uto be found among them: They are nimble and a&ve, 
 and run very fwiftly : The Women are moderately fat, and well- 
 ftiapcd ; and the Faces both of Men and Women are naturally 
 round : Their Eyes large, either black or grey, lively and fpark- 
 ling: Their Foreheads are high, their Nofes fhort, their Mouth 
 of a moderate Size, their Lips thin, the.r Chins and Cheek 
 well proportioned, and all of them have fine Sets of Teeth. As 
 to the Genius and Temper of the Mexican,, it feems, there is a 
 wide Difference between what they were, when the Spaniards ar- 
 rived amongft them, and what they are found to be at this 
 Dav They are far from being improved either in Morals, or 
 Arts ' The firft Adventurers inform us, that they were a won- 
 derful ingenious People, inoffeniive, and hofpitable They do 
 not feem to have been defedive either in point of Temperance, 
 Fortitude, or Military Skill: Both their Policy and Stratagems 
 were admirable, confidering the Difadvantages they laboured un- 
 der ; and that they had an Enemy to oppole, who were pollened 
 of Artillery, Horfes, Ssfc. which the Indians had never heard of 
 or feen till then. The Mulattoes, the I flue of a Spaniard by 
 a Female Indian, have a ftill worfe Character than the In- 
 dians; being in general greater Cheats and Thieves than the for- 
 mer Nor have many of the Spaniards themlelves a better Cha- 
 racter ; for, it feems, the Generality of the common Sort are 
 idle, flothful Vagabonds, and turn Sharpers to get a Livelihood ; 
 they are above working, .though not above thieving tis faid, 
 notwithftandmg all are well paid for their Labour. Gemelli re- 
 lates that he law the Viceroy of Mexico fitting on his Tribunal, 
 aflifted by five other Judges ; and that no lefs than 400 Spaniards 
 were brought before him for Theft ; and that, though a Stranger be 
 never fo much upon his Guard, it is difficult for him to get out 
 of the City of Mexico without lofing either his Money, or his 
 Effeds The Indians in the open Country, that do not live in 
 or near the Spanijb Towns, and have ftill preserved their Liber- 
 ties, of which there are great Numbers, are People of great Hu- 
 manity, brave, generous, adive, and unacquainted with the fordid 
 Vices of thofe that live in Towns, whom the Europeans have 
 corrupted. They are admired by Travellers for the mutual Love 
 and Kindnefs, that feems to reign in their Famil.es. The -Lah- 
 fomians have a great deal of Vivacity, and are naturally addided 
 to Raillery, as the Popijh Miffionaries found, when they began 
 firft to inftruft them ; for, if they committed any Error in their 
 Language, they jelled and made Sport with the Reverend lea- 
 ther!; fnd if at any time they explained any Point of Religion 
 or Morality, not conformable to the Opinion of the Cahfomians 
 they would wait for the Preacher after Sermon, and difpute with
 
 6 52 Prefent State cf the Spanifh Part II. 
 
 him with a great deal of Force and Wit. If the Miffionaries 
 could give them good Reafons for it, they would fubmit, and ac\ 
 accordingly. The Indians of Darien refemble thofe in the Eafterh 
 Provinces of Mexico ; only 'tis obferved, as they approach the 
 nearer to the Equator, their Complexions are darker. There are, 
 it feems, among the d irk-complexioned Indians, fome that are of 
 a pure milk-white; thele People are lefs in Stat u re than the 
 other Indians ; their Eyelids bend like the Ho: ns of the Moon ; 
 from whence, and their feeing fo well by Moon light, the Bucan- 
 neers called them Moon-eyed. They cannot fee at all in the Sun- 
 fhine; and therefore fcarce ever go abroad in the Day-time, un- 
 lefs in dark, cloudy Weather : In Moon-fhining Nights they are 
 all Life and Activity, it feems, flcipping about like wild Bucks : 
 They are contemned by other Indians, who look upon this white 
 Complexion as monftrous, and to proceed from fome Infirmity or 
 Defect. The Natives of Terra-Firma, when the Europeans firil 
 went among them, were a very good Sort of People ; but, we are 
 told, they are not at prefent fo deferving of that Character. The 
 Stature and Complexion of the Peruvians are pretty much the fame 
 with thofe cf the Indians in Mexico ; but, near the Equator, they 
 are of a perfect Copper-colour ; and feemed furprifed at the Black - 
 nefs of the Negro Slaves the Spaniards carried with them : They 
 could not believe this to be natural, having never feen a Black in 
 America : They defired the Spaniards to let them try, if they could 
 wafh the Paint off, as they took it to be, after they were reco- 
 vered from their firft Surprize ; which Experiment made the Spa- 
 niards and Negroes exceeding merry. As to the Genius and 
 Tempers of the Peruvians, when the Spaniards arrived among 
 them, they exceeded moft Nations in the Werld in Quicknefs of 
 Wit, and Strength of Judgment ; and fuch of them as have 
 fmce had the Advantages of Mailers, become greater Proficients 
 than the Spaniards themfelves ; and imitate any thing they fee fo 
 exaclly, without being taught, that it furprifed the European 
 Artifts. And, with regard to their Military Skill and Conduct, 
 making Allowance for Circumftances, they appeared alfo fuperior 
 to the Spaniards ; for whenever the Indians and Spaniards were 
 equally armed, the latter were commonly defeated. It is obferv- 
 ed, that, as they defended their Country as well as could be ex 
 pected, confidering them without thundering Cannons, Horfes, 
 cifr. yet when any Province was conquered, and had fubrhitted 
 to the Spaniards, they remained faithful to them, however hardly 
 they were ufed ; being perfuaded, that they ought to remain 
 faithful Subjects to thofe they had fubmitted to, how unjuflly 
 foever they were invaded, and might nor attempt the Recovery 
 of their Liberties afterwards. The Spaniards fay, they found the 
 Peruvians extremely hbfprtabk and- kind; courteous in Corrver- 
 
 fction,
 
 Chap XXXI. Empire in America. ^53 
 
 .Leuons, oiuu^, *" _i .i,v onnear to nave de- 
 
 not differ much from ^^^^SRUle of the 
 jeaedCoun^nances rhe^a^calledjhe fa th( . 
 
 t^t" t^s t the Invaders, -aft Advantage of 
 w^ \tL\ was their being divided under fo many petty Prin- 
 ce th H^of their CUns ; but the Dread of the Fire-arms 
 
 U SS^^S^S" u y p to Hardships from 
 "heir M-y: They are reckoned ^F^jn^ 
 
 ^^^^^^"^^^^ 
 
 ^^^^^^^^^ 
 derabl Bodies of Spaniards, when they firft invaded then -Coua- 
 
 try It was a great many Years before the Spaniard, could fix 
 
 hemfe lvelin th! Plains. Several of thefe Indians are become fuch 
 
 excellent Mechanics, that they make Organs and other mufical 
 
 Le Watch-makers, Painters, and Muficians, all which Arts 
 Jneyhave been inftruOed by thc7^Miffionaries,whoare taught 
 he MccLic as well as Liberal Arts, before they are ^b^d 
 that they may have an Opportunity of rendering themfelves ufeiul 
 and alreLbWo every Clafs of Men: The Indian, here, notwith- 
 fending Uiey are fnch excellent Mechanics by Imitation are faid 
 Votdulla/lnvention; and, in general, are extremely lazy and 
 ndolent. The Natives, called Arr.azons, are o the ordm J S 
 ture of Men : They have good Features, long, black Hair, ana 
 h rlm^exion is'a Co/per-colour ; whereas t ** 
 Africa in the fame Latitude on the oppofite Side of the Aslant* 
 Ocean are all Nerroes. As to the Nation of Amazons, or te- 
 m ale Warrior thfy are now no-where to be found, any more 
 Than the cl///and Giants the firft Adventurers mentioned. 
 The People are generally acknowledged now to have as much Hu- 
 m^ or mofe, than" the Europeans, who invaded them, and 
 have a Genius for Painting, and fome mechanic Arts. 
 
 Religion 1 The Mexicans, before the Spaniards arrived 
 anig SUnowledged, that the World was governed^
 
 654 Prejtnt State df the Spanifh Part It. 
 
 feveral Gods ; and therefore built Temples, and paid their Devo- 
 tions, to them. But they had the greateft Veneration for the 
 Sun ; as is evident from their afcribing whatever was great and 
 wonderful, to the Direction and Influence of that glorious Pla- 
 net. They had, however, no Image of that heavenly Body in 
 the Temples of Mexico; for they imagined it unneceflary to make 
 any Refemblance of that Luminary, which appeared to them 
 every Day ; or rather they fuppofed he governed the World by 
 the Mediation of inferior Deities, to whom they built Temples, 
 and paid their Devotion, as Mediators for them to that mighty 
 Being they did not think themfelves worthy to approach direftly. 
 As to the human Sacrifices, with which the Spaniards charge the 
 Mexicans, making thefe a Colour for all the Outrages they com- 
 mitted in America; for aught I can learn, they neither facrificed 
 Beafts, or Men, conftantly, but only in the Time of fome great 
 Calamity ; fuch as Famine, or ill Succefs in War, to appeafe 
 their angry Gods, as the Pbenicians and Carthaginians did. As 
 to the Cbrijlian Religion, which the Spaniards have introduced 
 into this New World, it appears, that many Thoufands of the In- 
 dians have been baptized by the Popi/h Miflionaries, and have 
 embraced the Gofpel. The Peruvians, when the Spaniards ar- 
 rived amongft them, - acknowledged one God, the Maker of all 
 Things, who fuftained the Univerfe ; that he was invifible, but 
 offered him no Sacrifice : However, they fhewed the profound 
 Reverence they had for him in their Hearts, by bowing their 
 Heads, lifting up their Eyes, and by other outward Geftures, 
 whenever his facred Nam* was mentioned. They had alfo a 
 great Veneration for the Sun ; fome looking upon this Planet to 
 be the Viceroy, or Lieutenant, of the One invifible God: Others 
 made two Gods of them, the one vifible, and the other invifible : 
 And fome of the lncas, or Emperors, of Peru, manifeftly looked 
 upon the Sun as a mere Creature, directed and governed, in all his 
 Motions, by the Supreme God ; for had he (fay they) a Will of 
 his own, and was not under a Neceflity of performing his annual 
 Courfe, he would fometimes reft, or vary, and not always move 
 in one Sphere: if it was but to fhew Liberty of Action. The 
 Peruvians, it feems, did not fuffer any human Sacrifices; but, on 
 the contrary, bad the greateft Abhorrence of them, though moft 
 of the Spanijh Writers charge them with it : But we cannot give- 
 intire Credit to their Relations concerning Religion ; and I am 
 willing to hope, their Charge on the Mexicans, in this Affair, 
 might be a Miflake. The Peruvians believed another State after 
 this, where they were to live, and enjoy their Friends, to all 
 Eternity ; and that they were to be clothed with Flefli and 
 Blood. As to the Religion of the other Parts of the Spanijb Em- 
 pire in America, 'tis, in general, pretty much the fame with that 
 1 of
 
 Chap. XXXI. Empire in America. 655 
 
 of Mexico and Peru : I (hall detain the Reader no longer on this 
 Head, but pafs on to the Cufloms and religious Rites of the Indians. 
 
 Customs.] The Mexican Indians that live in the Spanijb 
 Towns, wear, in general, a fhort Waifkoat, and wide 
 Breeches, with a fhort Cloak of various Colours over Dre/s. 
 all ; and fome of them have Sandals on their Feet, but 
 go bare-legged : And the Women wear a Waiitcoat of Cotton- 
 linen, over which they have a Frock or Shift, and a ftrait Pet- 
 ticoat of various Coloujts ; and, when they go abroad, have an- 
 other Garment wrapped about them. Their princi- 
 pal Food is Indian Corn, parched and ground into Diet. 
 Flour, and made into thin Cakes j Fruit, particu- 
 larly Plantains, Roots, and fometimes Fifh, wild Hogs, Deer, 
 or other Venifon. They have a great Variety of Liquors ; the 
 moil common Drink is Water, with the Flour of Indian Corn 
 infufed into it ; but, againft an Entertainment, they frequently 
 deep twenty or thirty Bafkets of their Corn, and, after the Wa- 
 ter is impregnated, the Women chew more of the fame Corn, and 
 fpit into it, which ferments and works the Liquor like Yeaft j 
 and this Drink proves very intoxicating, but taites pretty much 
 like f>ur Small-beer. They make Liquor of all manner of 
 Fruits almoft, as well as Grain, adding Honey to them at 
 their Feafts. As to Wine, their Country affords none ; for 
 their Grapes will not ripen kindly in the rainy Scafons, and 
 the Heats, at other times, make the Liquor four ; and this, it 
 feems, is the Reafon that fcarce any Country, between the Tro~ 
 pits, afford good Wine. The Men, we are told, drink to one an- 
 other at Meals, as the Europeans do ; but never to the Women at 
 an Entertainment ; they always fland by, and wait upon their 
 Hufbands, while they are eating and drinking ; and, even when 
 they are at Home, the Wife does not eat till the Hufband has 
 done. However, the Females fe^ft in their Turns, and are as 
 merry as the Men among themfelves : They are not afraid of be- 
 ing very drunk neither, 'tis faid. The Indians fcarce undertake 
 any Bufinefs of Confequence without making an Entertainment. 
 If they propofe entering into a War, either with he Spaniards, 
 or any Indian Nation, their Chiefs are fummoncd to a Confuta- 
 tion ; where they eat and drink plentifully, before they enter on 
 their Debates. An Hunting-match, which ufually lafts fome 
 Weeks, is preceded alfo by a drunken Bout. At Weddings, and 
 other joyful Occafions, they have their Feafls too, where they 
 continue drinking and fmoking two or three Days, or till the 
 Liquor is out : But, in fome Provinces of Mexico, the Natives 
 are contented with the Smell of Tobacco only, inilead of fmoke- 
 i! % ; for a Boy, having lighted the End of a Roll of Tobacco, 
 
 which
 
 6 6 Prefint State of the Spaniih Part II. 
 
 which they made with one Leaf, goes round the Company, and 
 blows the Smoak in their Faces. As to their Diver- 
 Diver- fions, they have theft Dances, and their Mufic too, 
 
 fans. fuch as it is, Wooden Drums of the Form of a Ket- 
 
 tle-drum, and a kind of Pipes or Flagelets, made of 
 a Cane or Reed, but very grating to an European Ear. They 
 dance 30 or 40 in a Circle, ftretching out their Hands, and lay- 
 ing them on each other's Shoulders: They itamp and jump, and 
 ufe the molt antic Geftures for feveral Hours, till they are hear- 
 tily weary ; and one or two of the Company fometimes ftep out 
 of the Ring, to make Sport for the reft, fhewing Tricks and 
 Feats of Activity, throwing up their Lances into the Air, catch- 
 ing them again, bending backwards, and fpringing forwards) 
 with great Agility; and, when they are in a moft violent Sweat, 
 will frequently jump into the Water, without taking any man- 
 ner of Cold. The Women have their Dances and Mufic too, by 
 themfelves, but never with the Men. The Mexi- 
 Marrtages. cans were married by their Priefts in the Temple ; 
 the Bride and Bridegroom ftanding before him, he 
 took each of them by the Hand, and demanded, If they were 
 agreed to marry ? And, on their anfwering in the Affirmative, 
 he tied a Corner of the Woman's Veil to a Corner of the Man' 
 Mantle 3 and, leading them in this Manner from the Temple to 
 the Bridegroom's Houfe, he made the Bride furround the Fire, 
 in the midft of the Room for that Purpofe, Seven times : After 
 which the Man and the Woman fat down by the Fire ; ,and thus 
 the Marriage was concluded without farther Ceremony. If the 
 Man had no Objection to the Virtue of his Wife, he gave an hand- 
 fome Entertainment to her Friends the next Day, made them 
 Prefents according to his Ability, and Sacrifices were offered to 
 the Gods on this joyful Occafion. According to the Relations 
 of Writers, their Kings, and great Men, had a great Variety of 
 Women, both Wives and Concubines ; and even the common 
 People had probably more Wives than one ; for neither Polygamy 
 nor Concubinage were deemed any Offence again ft their Law : 
 However, the being concerned with another Man's Wife was a 
 capital Crinw. The Mexican Indians, that are fubject to the 
 Spaniards, and obliged to profefs themfelves Cbriftians, are forced 
 by the Priefts to be married, when the Lads are 14, and the 
 Girls at 1 2 ; and if they are not then provided with a Spoufe, 
 the Popijb Priefts find one for them ; and in this, it feems, the Ci- 
 vil Government concur, looking upon it, that a Wife and Fa- 
 mily are the fureft Pledges of a Man's Fidelity; and that an In- 
 dian feldom leaves his Wife to retire to his unconquered Coun- 
 trymen in the Mountains. The marrying them fo young, alfo, ren- 
 ders the Country the more populous, which was impoliticly 
 
 deprived
 
 Chap. XXXI. Empire in America." 6$y 
 
 deprived of its Inhabitants by the firft cruel Adventurers. Th 
 Mexicans were exceeding careful of the Education of their Chil- 
 dren ; they had Schools and Academies belonging to almoft every 
 great Temple, where thtfir Matters ftudied the Genius of the 
 Children under their Care, and the particular Bent of Mind to 
 each particular Clafsof Life, the Church, the State, or the Army, 
 &c. They fuffered them to take but little Sleep, obliged them 
 to live abftemioufly. The young Ladies alfo, who 
 lived in the Convents, or Religious Houfes, when Education, 
 the Spaniards firft arrived among them, it feems, 
 were inllrufted in Virtue, and in the Principles of the Pagan Re- 
 ligion, as well as to paint, and match beautiful Feathers, and fuch. 
 other Work as might render them ufeful and agreeable, when 
 they entered into the married State. Both Sexes were taught to 
 i ng and dance, and to repeat the heroic Adlions of their An- 
 ceftors, and other remarkable Occurrences in their Hiflory. As 
 to the Funerals cf the Mexicans, the Corpfe was 
 drefled in the Mantles the Deceafed ufually wore in Funerals. 
 his Life-time ; and, being upright, all his Friends 
 and Relations came, and took a folemn Leave of him : The 
 Corpfe, after that, was carried to the Place of Interrment, attend- 
 ed by the Priefts, who fung mournful funeral Songs, and played 
 upon their Wind-mufic. And where a Prince was to be interred, 
 the Nobility, and Officers of State, attended the Proceflion : They 
 were buried with their Arms, and in their Habits. In fome 
 Places abundance of precious Moveables and Treafure were thrown 
 into the Grave with them ; and, the Spaniards fay, a great Num- 
 ber of Sla\ es and Officers killed, to bear their Great Men Com- 
 pany. The feveral Nations of the Peruvians were 
 diftinguifhed chiefly by their Head-dreffes : Some The Dre/s 
 wore whole Pieces of Cotton-linen, wrapped about of the Pe- 
 their Heads like Turbants : Others had only a Angle ruvians. 
 Piece of Linen tied about their Heads : Some wore a 
 kind of Hats, others Caps, in the Form of a Sugar-loaf, and a 
 Multitude of other different Fafhions j and thofe they never al- 
 tered, but continued in their refpe&ive Tribes from Generation to 
 Generation : But this is chiefly to be understood of the better Sore 
 of People. Their Holiday Drefs was a fort of Shirt, and a 
 Veft without Sleeves, and a Mantle : They had alfo Shoes, or ra- 
 ther Sandals, on their Feet, made of the Skins of Beafts untan- 
 ned ; but the common People ufually went almoft naked. The 
 principal Ornaments of the Peruvians were their Rings and Jewels 
 in their Ears, which they ftretched to a monftrous Size : They 
 had alfo Chains of Jewels and Shells about their Necks ; but I 
 do not find the Peruvians wore Gold Plates or Rings in their 
 Nofcs like the Mexicans. The general Food of the Peruvians, 
 
 U h before
 
 6$$ Prefent State <?//&? Spariifh Part II. 
 
 before the Spaniards came among them, was In- 
 Diet, dian Corn, of which they made Cakes, and a fort 
 
 of Hafty-pudding : They eat alfo Potatoes, and 
 other Roots ; nor was there fcarce an Herb that grew, but 
 what ferved them for Food, not as Sauces, or Sallads, as we ufe 
 them, but as fubitantial Diflies. As to Flelh, they eat very little; 
 for their Incas, and great Lords, were Matters of all the Cattle, 
 wild and tame, and all the Game of the Country, which the 
 common People were not fufferea to take, or kill, under the fe- 
 vereil Penalties. But there was a general Hunting-bout appointed 
 by their Princes once a Year ; wherein a great deal of Venifon and 
 Game was taken, and diftributed to the People, who cut it in 
 thin Slices, and dried it ; and this, with the Flelh of the tame 
 Cattle, which was alfo given them annually, ferved for the whole 
 Year : The Flefh, being Hewed and feafoned, they eat as Saufe, 
 as we do Anchovies or Pickles, to reliih our Flelh. However, 
 they were not altogether fo abftemious in Drinking, as in Eat- 
 ing : Their Gentry, and principal Men, fat drinking great Part of 
 the Day ; and of the fame Corn they made their Bread, they 
 brewed good llrong Liquor ; and they made a fort of Wine of al- 
 moft all manner of Fruits: Their common Drink, notwithftand- 
 ing, is Water, in which is infufed a little Flour. The Peruvians, 
 
 like the Cbine/e, are courteous and ceremonious to a 
 Ceremo- Fault, in their Vifits and Commerce with each other; 
 nies, always addreffing their Superiors, and even their Equals 
 
 and Inferiors, in the moft obliging and complaifant 
 - Language: And yet thefe were the People that the firft Spanijb 
 Adventurers repreiented as brutifh and barbarous, and made this 
 the Pretence for invading and taking away their Country, plun- 
 dering, enflaving, and maiTacring the unhappy Natives, as if they 
 were no ways intitled to the good things of this, or a better Life. 
 
 The exercifing their Arms, the Lance, or Spear, the 
 Exercifes throwing Darts, and mooting Arrows, were Parts of 
 and Di- the Peruvian Recreations and Diverfions ; to which 
 merfions. all the better Sort of People were bred. Their 
 
 Princes and great Men, at their Feafts, were enter- 
 tained with Tragedies and Comedies, in which the great Officers 
 and Nobility adled the principal Parts. Hunting was another of 
 . their Diverfions : After Breeding-time was over every Year, the 
 Jnca, or Prince, afligned a certain Part of the Country for this Di- 
 verfion, appointing fometimes 30,000 Indians to encompafs a certain 
 Space of Land, and beat 20 or 30 Leagues round by the Sides of 
 Rivers, and through Woods and Mountains ; and they marched 
 along, whooping and hollowing, till the Game came to be fo 
 ftreightened on all Sides, that they could not get away, and were 
 eauly taken or killed. As to Lions, Bears, Foxes, Mountain- 
 Cats,
 
 Ghap.XXXI. Empire in America. 659 
 
 cats, Serpents, and all venomous Creatures, thefe they killed as 
 they went along, and did not drive them into the Circle with 
 the Game, which confifted chiefly of Red and Fallow Deer, the 
 Country Sheep and Goats, of which there was fuch Plenty, that 
 they frequently took Thirty or Forty thoufand at one Hunting- 
 match. The being fwift of Foot was efteemed a very great Ac- 
 complifhment, and Prizes given thofe that excelled at their Foot- 
 races by public Authority ; for if a diflant Viceroy, or Gover- 
 nor, had any thing to communicate to the Emperor at Cufco, 
 it was done by Word of Mouth, and that not by one Exprefs, but 
 perhaps by Forty or an Hundred : For, at every Quarter of a 
 League, on the great Roads, were little Houfes, or Guard-rooms, 
 where Seven or Eight of the Emperor's Meflengers, or Purfui- 
 vants, always attended, who were of the better Sort of People, 
 and capable of receiving and telling a MefTage very exactly. One 
 or more of thefe having delivered their Exprefs at the next Stage, 
 fome of thofe ran and delivered it to the next, and fo on till they 
 reached the Courr. And fo fwiftly did thefe Expreffe3 run, that 
 the Court received the Intelligence in Twenty-four Hours, tho* 
 the Governor, who fent it, was at 150 Miles Diftance. As to 
 the Marriages of the Peruvians, it appears, that their 
 Princes and Nobility were allowed a Plurality of Marriages. 
 Wives and Concubines, and the Ceremony much 
 the fame as in Mexico. If the common People were not allowed 
 more Wives than one, they had a Liberty, however, to enter- 
 tain a Commerce with infamous Women, who were obliged to 
 live in the Suburbs of great Towns, or in the Fields, not being 
 fuffered to dwell or appear amongft honell People. 
 As to the Funerals of the Peruvians, the Emperors Funerals. 
 were embalmed, and placed in the Temple of the Sun, 
 where divine Honours were paid them ; but their Hear- s and Bowel* 
 were folemnly interred in a Country Palace of the Incas, where 
 magnificent Tombs were erected, and abundance of Treafure and 
 Jewels buried with them. At the Death of the Emperors, or 
 great Lords, their principal Wives, Favourites, and Servants, ei- 
 ther killed themfelves, 'tis faid, or made Intereft to be buried 
 alive with them in the fame Tomb, that they might accompany 
 them to the other World, and renew their Services in the other 
 Life, which, as their Religion taught them, Was a corporeal, and 
 not a fpiritual State. The firft Month after the Death of their 
 Prince, the whole City of Cufco bewailed their Lofs with loud 
 Cries and Lamentatione ; and every Ward or Divifion of the 
 City aflembled, and marched out into the Field inProceffion, car- 
 rying the Trophies of their late Sovereign with them ; namely, 
 his Shield, his offenflve Arms, his Clbaths, and the Treafures 
 that were to be buried with his Bowels; and in Songs repeated 
 
 U u a his
 
 66o Prefent State of the Portuguefe Part If, 
 
 his heroic Aftions in the Wars, the moft remarkable Inftance of 
 his J u (lice, and other Virtues. Nor were thefe Proceffions only 
 in Cu/co, but likewife in every chief Town of every Province, how 
 far diftant foever, they, in mournful Songs, recited his great 
 A&ions, and bewailed their Lofs alfo. The Habit, Food, Ex- 
 crcife, and other Cuftoms, being nearly the fame in the other 
 Parts of the Spanijh Dominions on the Continent of America, I 
 fhall not weary my Reader with the Repetition of thefe Ar- 
 ticles. 
 
 Curiosities.] On the Weflern Coaft of Mexico is" a great hol- 
 low Rock, which, having a large Hole on its Top, makes a 
 frightful Noife at every Surge of the Sea, and fpouts up Water 
 like a Whale, to a prodigious Height. And, 'tis faid, the Lake 
 of Mexico is famous for having two Sorts of Water, frefh and 
 fait; the frefti is ufually calm, and abounds with Fifties; where- 
 as the Salt is, for the moft part, boifterous, and breeds none : 
 Alfo, in the middle of this Lake is a pleafant Rock, out of 
 which iffues a confiderable Stream of hot Water. In theWeftem 
 Parts of Tucuman, in Paraguay, is a terrible fubterraneous Paflage, 
 through which runs a confiderable Stream of Water, with fo> 
 many Turnings and Windings, that, from the Time of its En- 
 try under the Mountain, to its iffuing out on the other Side, ia 
 almoft the Interval of 30 Hours, according to the Computation 
 of fome Portuguefe, who were hardy enough, 'tis faid, to make* 
 the indifcreet Experiment, by hazarding their Lives upon a Rafe 
 made of Canes. 
 
 CHAP. XXXII. 
 
 The Prefent State of the Portuguefe Empire in 
 America. 
 
 Boundaries.] J^RASIL is bounded on the Eaft, North, and 
 South, by the Atlantic Ocean ; on the Weft, 
 
 by the Land of th$ Amazons, and Paraguay. 
 
 Situation.] Brafil is fituated betvveen the Equator and 35 
 Degrees South Latitude; and between 35 and 58 Degrees Weft 
 Longitude. The Length whereof is zzzq j and the Breadth 900 
 Miles : The Square Miles are 940,000 
 
 Climate. J
 
 Chap. XXXII. Empire in America. 66 1 
 
 Climate.] A3 to the Face of the Country, the Land is ra- 
 ther low than high near the Coaft, but exceeding pleafant, diver- 
 sified with Woods, and Meadow-grounds, and Trees, for the moft 
 part, Ever-greens: But on the Weft Side of it, far within Land, 
 are high Mountains, which feparate it from Paraguay ; and, in 
 thefe, are innumerable Springs and Lakes, from whence iflue abun- 
 dance of Rivers, that flow into the greater ones of Amazon and 
 La Plata, or run from Weft to Eaft, and fall into the Atlantic 
 Ocean. That Part of Brajil, which lies near the Equator, like 
 other Countries in the fame Situation, is fubjeft to great Rains, 
 and variable Winds, particularly in the Months of March and 
 September, when they have Deluges of Rain, with Storms and 
 Tornadoes, the Country overflowed, and the Air unhealthful. 
 The Winds and Seafons,from five Degrees to about 23 and an half 
 South, are the very' reverfe to what they are in other Parts of 
 the World in the fame Latitudes; for, whereas the dry Seafon 
 comes on in other Places South of the Equinoctial, when the Sun 
 goes to the Northward of the Equator, and the wet Seafon be- 
 gins when the Sun returns to the Southward, here the wet Sea- 
 fon begins in April, when the South -eaft Winds fet in with vio- 
 lent Tornadoes, Thunder, and Lightning : And in September, 
 when the Wind fhifts to Eaft-north-eaft, it brings with it a clear 
 Sky, and fair Weather. There are but two Winds that blow 
 upon this Coaft, 'viz. the South-eaft, from April to September, 
 and the North-eaft from September to April again : But 30 or 
 40 Leagues out at Sea, they meet with the conftant Trade-wind, 
 which blows in the Atlantic Ocean all the Year round from the 
 Eaftward, with very little Variation. There is no Country be- 
 tween the Tropics, where the Heats are more tolerable, or the 
 Air more healthful, than this, being conftantly refrefhed with 
 Breezes from the Sea, and abounding in Lakes and Rivers, which 
 annually overflow their Banks : And, in the Inland Part of the 
 Country, the Winds from the Mountains are ftill cooler, than 
 thefe that blow from the Ocean. The Southerly Part of Brajil, 
 quite from the Tropic of Capricorn, appears to be one of the moft 
 defirable Parts of the World, having a greater Share of fair Wea- 
 ther, and a more temperate Air, than thofe Countries that are 
 nearer, or thofe that are removed farther from the Equator \ 
 and is generally blefled with a moft fruitful Soil. 
 
 Government.] We have already obferved, that the Coaft of 
 Brajil was firft difcovered by Americas Ve/putius, an Italian. Se- 
 veral private Portugueje Adventurers, foon after, went over to 
 Brajil with their Families ; but were, moft of them, deftroyed by 
 the Natives ; and no Settlements were made, to any purpofe, till 
 the Year 1549, when John, King of Portugal, fent a great Fleet 
 
 U u 3 thither,
 
 ^ 662 Prefent State of the Portuguefe Part II. 
 
 thither, with 1000 Soldiers on board. The Portuguefe, finding- 
 the Brajilians divided into feveral petty Kingdoms and States, at 
 War among themfelves, joined with one Nation againft another ; 
 and, by this means, fubdued firft their Enemies, and then their 
 Allies, making Slaves of all without Diftin&ion, They tell us, 
 for a J unification of their invading this Country, that the Na- 
 tives devoured human Flefh, and that they were without any No- 
 tion of God ; and that therefore fuch, Wretches ought not to be 
 fufFered upon the Face of the Earth. And indeed this is what 
 both Spaniards and Portuguefe have affirmed of all the American 
 Nations, one time or other, though without any fure Founda- 
 tion for fuch Relations. The Dutch, having PofTeflion of Part 
 of this fine Country, were driven intirely out of it again by the 
 Portuguefe in tbe Year 1 654 : However, the Hollanders ftill con- 
 tinuing their Pretenfions to Brajil, and committing continually 
 Depredations on the Portuguefe, making abundance of rich Prices, 
 the latter agreed, at a Treaty of Peace, by the Mediation of 
 England, in the Year 1661, to pay the Dutch 80 Tons of Gold y 
 to relinquish their Intereft in that rich Country ; which was ac- 
 cepted, and the Por uguefe have remained in the peaceable PofTef- 
 fion of all Brajtl from that time to this. The Country being 
 divided into certain Prefectures, a particular Governor is fet over 
 each of thefe ; and thefe Governors are all accountable to the 
 Viceroy, whofe Place of Refidence is ufually at St. Sahadore. 
 
 Trade.] The European Ships commonly arrive in Brafil in 
 February or March, and they have generally quick Paffages ; 
 finding, at that time of the Year, brifk Gales to bring them to 
 the Line, little Trouble then in croffing it, and brifk Eaft-north- 
 eaft Winds to carry them thither. The chief Commodities thefe 
 Ships tranfport from Europe, arc Linen-cloths, both coarfe and 
 fine , Woollens, as Bays, Serges, Perpetuanas, &c. Hats, Stock- 
 ings, both of Silk and Thread ; Bifcuit-bread, Wheat-flour, 
 Wine, Oil-olive, Butter, Cheefe, ciff. Iron, and all Sorts of 
 Iron-tools, Pewter VefTels of all Sorts, as Difhes, Plates, Spoons, 
 tffc. Looking-glafTes, Beads, and other Toys. The Ships com- 
 monly return from Brajil about the latter End of May, or in 
 June. They bring to Europe Sugar, Tobacco, either in Roll or 
 Snuff, never in Leaf. Thefe are the flaple Commodities ; be- 
 fides which are Dye-woods, as Fuitic, tsfc. with Woods for other 
 Ufes, as fpeckled Wood, Brafil, Sec. They alfo bring Home 
 Raw-hides, Tallow, Train-oil of Whales, cjfr. Monkeys, Par- 
 rots, Parroquets, &c. great Quantities of Gold, Diamonds, 
 and other Precious Stores. There have been fometimes at St. 
 Sahadore near 30 great Ships from Europe, with two of the 
 King of Portugars Ships of War for their Convoy; befidcs two 
 
 Ships
 
 Chap. XXXII. Empire in America. 6% 
 
 ,; that tra ded to Africa only, either to Angola Gamba, or 
 v, P Pl!L on the Coaft of Guinea, which carry from Braftl 
 
 Rum S^.S^-^.B^'- ^fP^ inRetU d rn p r o 
 S Sat 'adore Gold, Ivory, and Slaves, making very good Pro- 
 Si ThetmalUrafts, tha't Wong to this City, -"^T, 
 wd in carrying */* Goods from thence, the Centre ot 
 fSw/S^Se, to other Places on the Coaft, bnngmg back 
 thither the Merchandize of the Country. 
 
 t- i t. ; c fjid the Portueuefe are fo ftrong in Braft!, 
 
 jTcy r/ aiet* m'JX tLWion of .hat Country 
 ,L other Power It fcems. in Si. Salvuhrt there are 
 r;^"^^ /rGariron, and, befides thefe, the Vtceroy 
 can fool have Come Tho .lands of Men up in Arms npon that Oc- 
 cafion. 
 
 Character.! Tit Indians, that inhabit the Northern Part, 
 fB^/ar Men of a good Stature; and, as they live near 
 
 ^^a 1 ^^^"^ d -V ?7 ] Th^ 
 *s heirNorthern Neighbours, who lie nearer the Line. The 
 
 ^^^^^-^^^ 
 
 Sit and Uke noX 5 fo kindly of the i>j* Miffionanes as 
 :-nVer r Children; wh y ich has given the Father^ 
 Opportunity of making great Numbers of Converts. As ney 
 fc*T feveral Sorts of Liquor, which have a good Body, tiiey 
 Wun^eTeet v y drunk? fitting whole Days and Nights over 
 Adr cTp A. for Letters, Chancers, or Arithmetic, they 
 we e it feems, before the Europeans arrived among them, per- 
 f fl r . e ' . ll , ' r rhem They had fome Knowledge of the Vir- 
 ^TT/H*ZJ^V, which they frequently adnu- 
 
 asg ^succefs j^j^ts&-oi. t S2; 
 
 SI L : C Nu JeU "dTA a Handful of To- 
 
 bacco. 
 
 Religion! As to Religion, the Portuguefe will not allow 
 
 H r #*&3B 
 
 Eljfiam, or Paradife , and mean and cowardly Souls to a PUcc ot 
 Torment The fame Authors admit, that Indian Priefts dirett 
 the Skives to bring their Offerings to them ; and affure them, 
 hat on thei doing this, thofe invifible Beings, who gave them 
 Onfall Osgood Thing, they enjoy, w.ll profpe^heir 
 
 Uu 4
 
 664 Prefent State of the Portnguefe, &c. Part II. 
 
 Affairs; and, if they negleft this, they muft expert fome dreadful 
 Calamity will overtake them: They inform us alfo, that they 
 believe their Souls furvive their Bodies, and are converted into 
 Spirits, or Demons, after Death, and rewarded and punifhed ac- 
 cording to their Defervings. From all which it is evident, that 
 thefe People were not without Religion. 
 
 Customs.] The Natives in this Country go almoft naked ; 
 the Men wear a Cap, or Coronet of Feathers ; but. I do not find 
 the Women have any Covering on their Head. 
 Drefs. Their Ornaments are glittering Stones, hung upon 
 
 their Lips or Noftrils, and Bracelets of Feathers 
 about their Arms. Some of them paint their Bodies all man- 
 ner of Colours ; and others rub their Bodies with Gums, and 
 beautiful Feathers upon them, which make them look more like 
 Fowls, than human Creatures, at a Diftance. The 
 Diet. general Food of thefe People was Cakes made of 
 
 Mandioka-root ground to Powder, like our Bifcuit, 
 before the Europeans carried Corn thither, Venifon, Fifh, and 
 Fowl : The general Liquor was Spring-water ; however,' they 
 have a kind of Liquor, made of Fruits, of a good Body. Their 
 Diverfions are chiefly Singing, Dancing, and Drink- 
 Marriages. ing. In their Marriages they are not confined to 
 one Woman, but enter into a Con trad, however, 
 with their Relations to ufe them well ; in which they are ufually 
 as good as their Words ; and, when the Bridegroom takes Home 
 the Bride, there are frequently great Rejoicings ; but no other 
 Ceremony, it feems. The bell Account we have 
 Funerals. concerning their Funerals is : Upon the Death of 
 ' any Perfon, the Friends and Relations aflemble, and 
 fet up a Howl, repeating, by turns, the Praifes of the Deceafed, 
 admiring his Wealth, Strength, Beauty, and excellent Parts, the 
 Multitude of his Friends, Servants, and Cattle, concluding with 
 Words of the following Tenour : " He is dead; we fhall fee 
 v him no more, until we dance with him beyond the Moun- 
 " tains : " For it was their Belief, that, after Death, they fhould 
 vifit their Friends and Anceftors beyond certain vaft Mountains at 
 a great Diftance from them. Thefe Lamentations having conti- 
 nued-near fix Hours, they prepare to bury the Corpfe, digging 
 a Grave like the Mouth of a Weil, in which th'cy place the De- 
 ceafed in a fitting Polture; and, building a little Tomb, in the 
 Form of a Dome, over him, they leave at the Place all manner 
 of Meat and Drink, his Arms, and whatever was ufeful to him 
 when alive. 
 
 Curiosities.]- The principal Rarities are reckoned the Mon- 
 keys ; -Serpents, the chief of which is the Rattle-fnake : Birds, 
 
 of
 
 Chap. XXXlll. Prefetit State of the French, csV. 665 
 
 of which the Humming-bird is the mod taken notice of; Fifties, 
 principally the Globe fifti, armed with long, round, and fharp 
 Spikes and Needles all over his Body ; and the Remora, a Fifti 
 very famous formerly for the falfe Report of Hopping a Ship un- 
 der Sail. 
 
 CHAP. XXXIII. 
 
 The Prefent State ef the French Empire in America ; 
 the Dutch Dominions, Terra de Laborador, &c. 
 
 Sect. I. Of the French Empire in America. 
 
 Boundaries.] J OUISIANA is bounded by New-France 
 on the North, Carolina on the Eaft, the 
 Gulph of Mexico on the South, and New-Mexico on the Weft. 
 New-France is bounded by Louijiana and Carolina on the South, 
 by New-Mexico, and unknown Part?, on the Weft, by the Briti/h 
 Empire on the Continent of America on the Eaft, and by Hudjon'% 
 Bay on the North. The French Colonies in South America, or 
 Fquinoclial France, are bounded by the Atlantic Ocean on the 
 Eaft, by the River Cayenne on the North, by the Mouth of the 
 River of Amazons on the South, and by Part of Terra-Firma o* 
 the Weft. 
 
 Situation.] Louijiana is fituated between 25 and an half and 
 38 Degrees North Latitude, and between 85 and 107 Degrees 
 Weft Longitude. New-France is fituated between 38 and about 
 52 Degrees North Latitude, and between 75 and 106 Degrees 
 Weft Longitude. The Length of Louijiana is about 1200, and 
 the Breadth 645 Miles ; and the Length of New-France is near 
 1450, and the Breadth about 790 Miles. Equinoclial France ifc 
 fituated between the Equator and 5 Degrees North Latitude ; ly- 
 ing in 50 Degrees Weft Longitude, and ftretches along the Coaft 
 only. French Iflands are chiefly, 1. Cayenne, fituated in 5 De- 
 grees North Latitude, and 52 and an half Degrees Weft Longi- 
 tude. 2. Martinico, fituated between 14 and 15 Degrees North 
 Latitude, and in 61 Degrees Weft Longitude ; the Length where- 
 of is 26, and Breadth 20 Miles. 3. Guadalupe, fituated in 16 
 Degrees North Latitude, and in 61 Degrees Weft Longitude; 
 The Length of which is 27, and the Breadth 15 Miles. 4. Bre- 
 ton, fituated between Latitude 45 three-fourths and 47 and half 
 
 Degree*
 
 666 Prefent State of the French, &e. Part II. 
 
 Degrees North, and in Weft Longitude 6 1 and an half: The Length 
 is about 1 1 2, and Breadth 5 5 Miles. As to the Ifland of Hif- 
 faniola, Part of which belongs to the French, that has been de~ 
 fcribed. 5. Anticofte, fituated in about North Latitude 50 and 
 and half, and Weft Longitude 63 and an half: The Length where- 
 of is 107, and the Breadth 32 Miles. 
 
 Divifion. 
 
 Trench Empire in 
 
 America 
 I. / ouifiana , 
 
 Florida 
 
 or 
 
 II. New-France, 
 or Canada 
 
 III. Ifles 
 
 i. Part of Hifpa- 
 
 niola 
 
 2. Martinico 
 
 3. Guadalufe 
 
 4. Breton 
 
 5. Anticofte 
 
 Square Miles. 
 
 1,596,621 
 516,000 
 
 1,059,100 
 
 21,521 
 
 1^,500 
 
 260 
 
 180 
 
 4000 
 
 1581 
 
 Chief Towns. 
 
 Mobile, or 
 Fort-Louis 
 
 Quebec 
 
 Petit Guauas 
 
 Fort St. Pierre 
 Fort Hoyal 
 Louijburg 
 French Faclory 
 
 Wrench Iflands unmeafured, in the Atlantic Ocean, are Mart- 
 galant, Granada, Dejirada, and other leis considerable Iflands. 
 
 Climate, "1 As Louifiana refembles Carolina in thefe 
 
 Government, I Articles ; and as New-France refembles 
 Trade, I New- England, New-York, and New-Scotia, 
 
 Religion, | which lie contiguous to it ; therefore I fhall 
 Character, I not repeat them here, but refer my Reader 
 Customs. J to thefe Heads in the refpeftive Countries. 
 As to the Trade of the French Iflands in America, they export 
 
 Erodigious Quantities of Sugar j which Commodity the French 
 ave cultivated with great Application of late Years ; and, it 
 feems, have had enough of it to furniih themfelves, and all Eh* 
 rtfe. 
 
 SecL
 
 Chap. XXXIII. Prefent State of the Dutch, &'c. 66 7 
 Sea. II. Of the Dutch Dominion in America. 
 
 T HE chief of the gig Settlement W <*** 
 
 the Northward of ^-/""-.Mdamon^tn Cw; .^ w , 
 
 1* the Wines Cr^ and W.. J he uch elleemed for 
 containing about 342 Square MiK not . ^1 
 its Produce, as its Situation fo J* wt ^ver without 
 jrifo: Formerly;the Hartour oFCj^ w the ^^ 
 
 Ships from Cr/W- a "L e tfhf Place fending Ships of 
 have ftill a very extenfive Trad J* / Goods> g 
 
 good Force from H* /W. ^J profitable Returns. The 
 This Coaft, from whence theyj mk^ ^ pr Mi!es . the >** 
 Ifland of Bonalr ato^ .6 Square M ^^^ 
 havefeven or eight Sold ers "^^lookm*. after their Goat. 
 Hans, whofc chief Employment he lookin ^^ 
 
 for their Matters, of which the ^AUUP^g 
 every Year. Add to thefe the Wand ofO^ta ^ 
 
 Leagues to the Weftward of Curafow , wnicn are 
 fitions of the Dutch in ^-ic. 
 
 Sea. III. Of Terra de Laborador, or New-Britain. 
 
 fBR*J * UUra da r is feparated *g$^ 
 
 & ^^^ This unhofpi^ Country w* * 
 
 about the Year ,498. *< X/ ', who ha5 communicated hit , 
 Others ; but *F * * & Salmon the whole Coafts. 
 NametotheBayandSreights iurrou from W, in
 
 668 Prefent State of Terra de Laborador. Part II. 
 
 Water, through which he paffed between two Promontories, in 
 Latitude about 64 or 65 North. And now coming into a fpa- 
 cious Sea, where he failed 1 op Leagues, he afTured himfelf he 
 had found the fo much defired Paflage into the South Sea ; but, 
 at length, finding himfelf embay'd, he was extremely difturbed ; 
 for there was a Neceffity now of remaining all Winter in this 
 inhofpitable, frozen Country ; there being no Poflibility of re- 
 turning through the Streights till next Summer, on account of 
 the Ice. He brought his VefTel therefore to an Anchor in a fmall 
 Creek on the South-weft Part of the Bay. The Captain was fo 
 intent upon^ completing the important Difcovery, that he left 
 his Men to take and fait up Fifh, and vidua! the Ship, while 
 he and his Officers fearched every Creek and Corner of the 
 Shore, in his Sloop, for a Paflhge to the South Sea. During his 
 Abfence, his Men negle&ed to catch Fifh, when it was in their 
 Power ; for which the Captain, 'tis faid, threatened to fet Part 
 of the Crew on Shore: Whereupon the Men entered into a 
 Confpiracy to run away with the Ship, and leave him, and the 
 reft of his Officers, behind : Which Piece of Barbarity the Vil- 
 lains actually put in Execution, forcing the unhappy Captain, 
 and eight more, into a Boat ; and they were never heard of 
 from that Day to this. The Mariners brought the Ship to 
 Digges's Ifhnd ; where Green, the Captain of the Mutineers, 
 and three or four more of the Ring-leaders, going on Shore, 
 were furprifed by the Natives, and cut in Pieces. Whereupon 
 one Pricket, whofe Life the Mutineers had fpared, in order to 
 procure their Pardon, took the Charge of the Ship upon him, 
 and brought her Home, on the 6th of September 161 1, the Crew 
 being all fo weak, that they were not able to manage their 
 Sails, without the Affiftance of fotne Fifhermen they met with, 
 at Sea; and Part of them were aftually ftarved to Death in the 
 Paflage. The next Year Si. Thomas Button purfued the Difeo- 
 very, and paffing Hud/on s Streights, entered the fame Bay, and, 
 3eaving the South Part of it, which Hud/on had vifited, he failed 
 fome Hundreds of Leagues to the Weft ward, till he arrived at 
 a large Continent, which he named New-Wales ; and here he 
 Joft his Ship, coming Home in a Sloop that he built in that 
 Country. The next Adventurer was Captain James, in the Year 
 163 1, who failed to the Bottom of the Bay, and wintered in 
 Charlton Ifland, in 52 Degrees odd Minutes North Latitude ; 
 hut, at his Return, he gave fe dreadful an Account of the 
 Hazards he had fuftained, in this Voyage, from the Ice, that 
 nobody attempted it again till the Year 1667, when Captain 
 Gillam entered the Bay, failing to a River near the Bottom of 
 it, in 51 Degrees North Latitude, which he judged to be a 
 proper Place for fettling a Factory, and called it Prince Rupert's 
 
 River*
 
 Chap. XXXlII. Prefent State of Groenlarid. 669 
 
 River. On his Return^ his Owners applied to King Charles II. 
 for a Patent to plant the Country ; which they obtained in 1670, 
 Prince Rupert being the chief Proprietor : And this Hudfons Bay- 
 Company have carried on a fmall, but profitable, Trade thither 
 ever fince. During the laft War, the French reduced all our 
 Settlements in thole Parts, except Albany j but they were yielded 
 to Great Britain by the Peace of Utrecht ', Anna 171 3, Commif- 
 fioners, on the Part of Great Britain and France, fettling the 
 Limits of the Country, by an imaginary Line drawn from a Pro- 
 montory, fituate on the Atlantic Ocean, in 58 Degrees 30 Mi- 
 nutes, and running from thence South-weft to the Lake Mifcofink, 
 or Miftafin, and from thence South-weft indefinitely to the Lati- 
 tude 49 ; all the Countries to the North being alfigned to Great 
 Britain, and all on the South between the Line and the River 
 St. Laurence to France. From the Difcoveries already made, on 
 the North-weft Parts of America, the general Opinion is now 
 very ftrong, that there is a Paftage to the South Sea by the NorU^* 
 weft Part of Hud/on^ Bay. 
 
 Sect. IV. Of Groenland, or Weft-Greenland. 
 
 XM EST Greenland is a Traft of Land, lying four or five Day 
 Sail to the Northward and Weftward of Iceland. This 
 Country is generally rocky and mountainous, and the Hills Co- 
 vered with Snow i the Shores are frozen up great Part of the 
 Year, as thofe of Iceland are ; fo that there is no coming near 
 them. The Coafts of this Country, 'tis faid, were formerly in- 
 habited by Colonies from Korivay in 982 ; however, for fome 
 Ages, this Country ceafed to be known, till Adventurers came 
 upon the Coaft, in Search of a Paftage to the South Sea. The 
 Air, in this Country, is very cold three Parts of the Year, and 
 the Fogs are almoft as troublefome to the Mariners as the lee. 
 Their Summers are expofed to dreadful Tempefts } and the Moun- 
 tains of Ice, with which the Inland Country is intirely covered, 
 render the Nights, where they have any, very cold, even when 
 the Sun has greateft Power: Their Winters begin in Augu/t, 
 and are not over till May ; and, in Latitude 68, Spirits of Wine 
 freeze. But what Travellers take moft Notice of, is the Aurora 
 Borealis : It appears regularly after New-moon, and ftiines fo 
 bright, that one may read by its Light : It is a Fire that difFufes 
 itfelf with aftonifhing Swiftnefs over all the Horizon, and con- 
 tinues, without Intermiflion, till Break of Day, which is of An- 
 gular Advantage to thofe Places of this inhofpitable Country that 
 hav long Nights. Thji* Aurora Bortalis is frequently feen in 
 
 Norway,
 
 6 jo Prefent State of Eaft-Greenland. Part II. 
 
 Norway, Iceland, and other Northern Countries ; is of the fame 
 .kind with that which has been, of late Years, vifible in England. 
 The King of Denmark claims the Dominion of Greenland ; but 
 what Sort of Government the Natives had, before Strangers came 
 amongft them, or even have at prefent, we find no fatisfa&ory 
 Account. Some talk of a mighty Emperor beyond the Moun- 
 tains ; others pretend to find out abundance of petty Monarchs ; 
 and fome will have them to be without Kings or Laws ; but, 
 according to the lateft Accounts, they have no King, nor Laws, 
 but what are natural to all Mankind: Though they are without 
 Society, yet they abhor Theft, Murder, and even Cruelty ; and, 
 as to Religion, the Sun is fuppofed to be the fupreme Objeft of 
 their Worfhip, and they talk of the Immortality of the Soul. 
 It feems, they do not want Courage, having engaged our Men 
 with Slings, and Bows, and Arrows, when we have fired both 
 great and fmall Shot ; and in this only they differ from the Sa- 
 moieds and Laplanders, who are a timerous Generation : Their 
 Habits, Way of Living, and other Cuftoms, being thexefore much 
 like theirs, need not be repeated here. 
 
 Seft. V. Of Eaft-Greenland. 
 
 "PAST Greenland lies direttly to the Northward of the North 
 Cape of Norway ; the molt Southerly Part of it is in the La- 
 titude 76, and extending Northwards, for aught appears, as far 
 as the Pole. Eaft and Weft Greenland may poflibly be upon the 
 feme Continent, notwithftanding there lies a prodigious Traft of 
 Land between them. The firft Defign of the Northern Difco- 
 veries was to find a PafTage to India and China by the North- 
 aft, and to come in for a Share of that rich Trade with the Por- 
 tvguefe, by a fhorter Way than by the Cape of Good Hope ; or at 
 leaft they hoped to difcover fome Countries, where they might 
 eftablifh a Trade of equal Advantage to them. The Company 
 of Englijb Merchants, incorporated in the Reign of King Ed- 
 Kvard\I. and ftyled, The Merchants- Ad-venturers for difcovering 
 if Lands unknown. Sec. fent out three Ships, in May 1553, of 
 which Sir Hugh Willoughby was Admiral ; who, being feparated 
 from one of them, doubled the North Cape of Norway with the 
 other two ; and, fleering North and North-eaft from thence for 
 fome Weeks, as appeared by a Note found in his Cabin,difcovered 
 Land, which, 'tis faid, was Eajl-Greenland: The Admiral after- 
 wards fleered South again, and came upon the Coaft of Mufco'vite 
 Lapland, in September following ; and, being embay 'd with the 
 Ice, he, and all his Company, died. However, the Ship, called 
 
 the
 
 Chap. XXXIII. Prefent State of Eaft-Greenland. 671 
 
 the Edzuard-Bonaventure, Capt. Chancellor, which had been fe- 
 parated from the unfortunate Admiral, doubled the North Cape, 
 and difcovered the Bay of Archangel; whereby he fettled a 
 Trade dire&ly with RuJJia, as has been obferved in treating of 
 that Empire. The Company fitted out another Ship, which 
 failed beyond the Bay of Archangel, to the North-eaft Part of 
 RuJJia, and Samoieda, difcovering Nova-Zembla, and the Streights 
 of Waigats, which divide Nova-Zembla from the Continent of 
 RuJJia ; after which the Ship returned Home. Our Adventurers, 
 wearied with endeavouring to find a Paffage this Way, which 
 might lead them to the Chineje Seas, next attempted to find a 
 Way to the Indies by the North-weft ; in which they employed 
 Sir Martin Forbijber. Bit, after three Years fruitlefs Labour, to 
 find their Way into the South Sea, he was obliged to defift from 
 that Enterprize. In the Year 1 5 80, the Company fitted out two 
 Ships, under the Command of Captain Pttt, and Captain Jack- 
 man, to endeavour to find a North eaft Paffage to China again : 
 They paffed the Streights of Waigats, running as far Eaftward as 
 they could for Ice ; and then returned back again through the 
 Streights ; but Captain Pet was fuppofed to be loft in his Paf- 
 fag Home, being never heard of more. The Dutch fitted 
 out four Ships, in the Year 1596, to find a North-eaft Paffage, 
 William Barnets being their chief Pilot, who failed to Nova- 
 Zembla, paffed the Streights of Waigats and fleered to the Eaft, 
 till he was obliged to return back. The fame Captain Barnets 
 failed to the Streights of Waigats, the following Year, with 
 feven Ships, in order to force a Paffage through to the Eaftern 
 Ocean ; but was again prevented by the Ice. On the Return of 
 thefe Ships, the Dutch, being ftill confident there muft be a 
 North-eaft Padage, fent out' Captain Barnets, with two Ships, 
 who now flood to the Northward, and came as high as Latitude 
 8o, and faw Eaft-Greenland, called by them Spitsbergen ; and, 
 failing back again to the North-eaft of Nova-Zembla, till they 
 came into Latitude 76, anchored in Ice-Haven, as they called it ; 
 where they were blocked up with Ice in September ; fo that there 
 was no getting out ; and, after fuftaining many Hardfhips till the 
 14th of June, they ventured to Sea in two open Boats. It was 
 with a great deal of Difficulty they made their Way through the 
 Ice ; in fome Places they were forced to hale the Boats two or 
 three hundred Paces (each two and an half Foot) over the Ice : 
 After many Hardfhips and Dangers they croffed the White Sea* 
 having failed about 1000 Miles in their Boats, and arrived fafe in 
 Holland in November, having loft Barnets in the Voyage. Not- 
 withstanding thefe H-zr.rds and Difficulties, the Engiijh Company 
 determined to attempt it again ; and accordingly fitted out Captain 
 Hud/on with one fmall Ship, who failed from England the firft of 
 
 May
 
 tfl ' Prefetit State c/Eaft-Greenland. Part ft. 
 
 May 1667, and arrived the 20th of June on the Coaft of Green- 
 land, in the Latitude of 78 : The 1 2th of July he found himfelf 
 in 80 Degrees ; but the Ice and Fogs made it very dangerous and 
 troublefome Sailing ; and, finding no Paffage, he was obliged to 
 return Home. Captain Hud/on was fent out again ; and, arrive- 
 ing in Latitude about 73, he faw the Sun on the North Meridian, 
 on the 29th of May, 5 Degrees 35 Minutes above the Horizon: 
 They met with the firft Ice on the 9th of "June, being then in 
 . Latitude 75 and an half Degrees, and held a North-eaft Coaft, 
 endeavouring to make their Way through the Ice, till they were 
 got 4 or 5 Leagues within it j but found the Ice a-head of them 
 fo firm and thick, that they were forced to return the fame Way 
 they went in ; and, with great Difficulty, at length freed them- 
 felves from it, and returned Home. This Gentleman relates, 
 that, in Nova-Zembla, there was much high Land with no Snow 
 upon it ; and, in fome Places, the Land appeared green, with 
 Herds of Deer feeding upon it. Captain Wood was fitted out by the 
 Duke of York, afterwards King James II. on purpofe to attempt 
 a North-eaft Paffage ; and fteer'd dire&ly North-eaft from the 
 Cape of Norway, in order to fail between Greenland and Kova- 
 Zembla ; but he could find no Sea or Inlet between thofe Coun- 
 Countries ; on the contrary, the Ice adhered immoveably to the 
 Coaft of No'va-Zembla, in Latitude 76 ; and was fo thick, that 
 it would require fome Centuries to thaw. This Gentleman con- 
 cludes, that Greenland and Nova-Zembla muft be the fame Con- 
 tinent ; and as he fuppofes Nova-Zembla to join to Geeenland on 
 the North, fo he feems to be of Opinion, that Nova-Zembla 
 joins to Tartary on the South ; but if it does not, he fays, the 
 Streight, that parts them, is fo narrow, and choked up with 
 Ice, that it is unnavigable. In the Purfuit of the North-eaft 
 Paffage to the Eajl-Indies, the Englifi obferved great Numbers of 
 Whales in the Northern Parts ; afterwards they made Voyages 
 on purpofe to take thefe mighty Creatures, making Oil of their 
 Pat, or Blubber. The ufual Length of the Whale is from 6<5 
 to 80 Feet ; but there are fome, 'tis faid, of more than twice 
 that Length. There are of feveral Kinds and Sizes, fome of 
 them white, and others black : Of the black Sort fome have one, 
 and fome have two Holes in their Heads, out of which they fpout 
 the Water to a great Height, and may be heard, 'tis faid, at a 
 League's Diftance. When the Seamen fee a Whale fpout, or 
 hear him, every one haftens down from the Ship to his Boat, fix 
 or eight Men being appointed to each Boat, and there are four 
 or five Boats belonging to each Ship: When they come near the 
 Whale, the Harponier, who fits in the Head of the Boat, ftrikes 
 him in the molt convenient Place ; and the Monfter, finding him- 
 iclf wounded, darts fwiftly towards the Bottom of the Deep, draw- 
 ing
 
 Chap. XXXIII. Prefe*t State of EaA-Grcenbnd. 6j$ 
 
 ing the Rope after him with fuch a Force, that would certainly 
 carry the Boat with him, if they did not give him Line enough ; 
 but, after he has run fome hundred Fathoms deep, he is forced 
 to come up again for Air ; and then he makes fuch a terrible 
 Noife with his Spouting, that fome have refembled it to the firing 
 of great Guns : So foon as he appears upon the Surface of the 
 Water, they ftrike him again ; whereupon he plunges into the 
 Deep a fecond time ; and, when he rifes again, they make ufe of 
 their fmall Spears, or Pikes, which are darted at him, till he is 
 fo wounded and tired, that they can approach him, and pufh at 
 him with their Spears, endeavouring to wound near his Fins, 
 where they find him moil fenfible ; and, inflead of Water, when 
 his Vitals are touched, he fpouts out Streams of Blood as high as 
 a Mali : Whereupon the Seamen defift, and the mighty Fifh, 
 finding himfelf defperately wounded, rages moft furioufly, beat- 
 ing the Sea with his Tail and Fins, till it is all on a Foam, and 
 the Noife of it may be heard at a great Diftance. When the 
 Whale has loft his Strength, he turns on one Side ; and, when he 
 is dead, they drag him to Shore, if they are near it ; and, if at 
 a Diftance from Land, they hale him to their Ship. Every Fifh 
 is computed to yield from 60 to 100 Barrels of Oil, of the Va- 
 lue of three or four Pounds Sterling ; but that alters, as other 
 things do, by a fcarce or plentiful Seafon : Sometimes a Ship 
 takes eight or ten Whales in one Voyage ; but, at others, they 
 return perfectly empty. Before I conclude this Chapter, I fhall 
 give the Reader an Extract of the Hardfhips eight Englijhmen un- 
 derwent, who were left afhore in Greenland all the Winter : 
 Three Englijb Ships being fitted out for Greenland, in the Year 
 1630, one of them being {heightened for Provifion, the Captain 
 fet eight Men afhore there to kill Venifon, leaving them a Boat, 
 and Orders to follow the Ship to Green- Harbour, which lit s a 
 little to the Southward of the Place where they went afhore. 
 Thefe Men, having killed 14 or 15 Deer, propofed next Day to 
 have gone on Board the Ship ; but a great Quantity of Ice, driv- 
 ing towards the Shore, obliged the Ship to ftand fo far. out to 
 Sea, that, when they came to Green-Harbour, fhe was out of 
 Sight : However, the Ships being to rendezvous in Bell/bund, 
 and being to leave Greenland within three Days, the poor Crea- 
 tures began to be very anxious, left the Shipping fhould be gone 
 from thence too before they arrived. They thought it proper to 
 fling the Venifon into the Sea, in order to lighten the Boat and 
 make the belt of their Way to Bellfound, difiant from thence 
 about 1 6 Leagues to the Southward ; but none of them know- 
 ing the Coaft very well, they overfhot the Port above ten 
 Leagues ; when, being fenfible of their Error, they returned to 
 the Northward : But one of the Company being pofitive, that 
 
 X x Bell/ound
 
 674 Prefent State of Eaft-Greenland. Part II, 
 
 Bellfound lay further to the South, they failed to the South again, 
 till they were a fecond time convinced of their Miilake ; and then, 
 they turned their Boat about to the North again, and at length 
 arrived at Bellfound; but had fpent fo much time in rowing 
 backwards and forwards, that the Ships had actually left the 
 Coaft, and were gone for England, to their great Aftonifhment j 
 being provided neither with Clothes, Food, Firing, or Houfe to 
 fhelter themfelves from the piercing Cold they were to expeft in 
 fo rigorous a Climate. Thefe unhappy Wretches flood looking 
 On one another, as Men amazed at the Diftrefs they were on a 
 fudden reduced to; but their Confternation being a little abated, 
 they began to think of the properelt Means to keep themfelves 
 alive during the approaching Winter, in a Country within twelve 
 Degrees of the Pole, being the firlt that ever did inhabit it the 
 Year round, and may be the laft that ever will. And perhaps 
 there is no Inftance in Hiftory of a Company of Men in fo exqui-, 
 fite a Diftrefs, that fhevved more Courage and Patience, or made 
 a wifer Provifion for their Prefervation, than thefe poor Men did. 
 They agreed, in the firft Place, to go to Green-Harbour, where 
 they arrived in twelve Hours ; and, having provided themfelves 
 with near twenty Deer, and four Bears, returned to Bellfound. 
 Here happened to be (et up a large Booth, which the Coopers 
 worked in at the fifhing Seafon, 80 Feet long, and 50 broad, co- 
 vered with Dutch Tiles, and the Sides well boarded. Within 
 this they built another, whofe Length was 20 Feet, and the 
 Breadth 16 Feet, and the Height 10; and fo contrived, that no 
 Air could get in } they provided themfelves alfo with Wood, 
 which they flowed between the Beams and Roof of the greater 
 Booth. But, taking a flight Survey of their Provifions, they 
 found there was not half enough to ferve them the whole Win- 
 ter ; and therefore they ftinted themfelves to one Meal a Day, 
 and agreed to keep Wednefdays and Fridays as F'afting-days, put- 
 ting their Confidence in Heaven, who alone could relieve them in 
 their great Diftrefs, and redoubling their Prayers for Strength and 
 Patience to go through the difmal Trial By the 10th of ' Oclober 
 the Nights were grown long, the Weather very cold, and the Sea 
 frozen over ; aw J , having now no Bufinefs to divert their gloomy 
 Thoughts, as hitherto, they began, more than ever, to reflect on 
 their miferable Condition ; but received great Satisfaction from 
 their fervent Devotions : And now, having more narrowly fur- 
 veyed their Provifions again, they agreed to have three Meals a 
 Week of Venifon and Bear, and four Meals a Week of Fritters, 
 r Greaves, which is a very loathfome Food, being only the Scraps 
 of the Feet of the Whales, flung away after the Oil is gotten out of 
 them. And, left they Ihould want Firing hereafter to drefs their 
 ^tfeat, they thpught it proper to roaft more at a time, and flow it 
 
 up
 
 Chap. XXXIII. Prefent Slate of Eaft-Greenland. 6j$ 
 
 up in Hoglheads. It being now the 14th of Oclcber, the Sun 
 then left the poor Wretches ; but they had the Moon both Day 
 and Night, though much obfcured by the Clouds and foul Wea- 
 ther ; there was alfo a glimmering kind of Day-light for eight 
 Hours the latter End ot October, which fhortened e very Day till 
 the firll of December ; from which time to the 20th of the 
 fame Month, they could perceive no Day-light at all, being now 
 one continued Night. As for Light within Doors, they made 
 them three Lamps of fome Sheet-lead they found upon one of the 
 Coolers, and there happened to be Oil enough to fupply them 
 left in the Cooper's Tent ; for Wicks they made ufe of Rope- 
 yarns ; and thefe Lamps were great Comforts to them in that 
 long difinal Night. But Hill their Mifery was fuch, that they 
 could not forbear fometimes uttering halty Speeches againft the 
 Mailer of the Ship, who had caufed all this Diltrefs ; at other 
 times, reflecting on their former ill-fpent Lives, they looked upon 
 this as a juft Punilhment of their Offences ; and, at other times, 
 they hoped they were referved as a wonderful Inltance of God's 
 Mercy in their Deliverance ; and continued conitantly to fall down 
 on their Knees two or three times a Day, and implore the Pro- 
 tection of the Almighty. On the firft of January they found 
 their Day a little to increafe; and, with the new Year, the Cold 
 alfo increafed to that Degree, that it railed Bhflers in their Fiefh, 
 as if they had been burnt, and the Iron they touched, lluck to 
 their Fingers. On the third of February they were cheared again 
 with the bright Rays of the Sun, which fhone upon the Tops of 
 the fnowy Mountains, and which afforded them the mofl delight- 
 ful Scene that ever was beheld, after a Night of many Weeks or 
 Months. As an Addition to their Joy alfo, the Bears began to 
 appear again, one of which they killed at their Door ; but the 
 Cold being fo intenfe, they could not flay to flay her there, but 
 dragged the Beaft into the Tent, and there went to work, cutting 
 her into Pieces; upon which they fed twenty Days. Afterwards 
 other Bears came about their Booth frequently, to the Number of 
 forty, and more, of which they killed feven, one of them being 
 fix Foot high, roafting their Flefh ; and, eating heartily two or 
 three Meals a Day, they found their Strength increafe very fait. 
 It being now the 1 6th of March, and the Days of a reafonable 
 Length, the Fowls, which, in the Winter-time, fled to the South- 
 ward, began to refort to Greenland again in great abundance. The 
 Foxes alfo, which had kept clofe in theirHoles under the Rocks all 
 Winter, came abroad, of which the Englijhmen took 50; and, 
 roafting them, found them to be good Food. The Weather be- 
 ginning to grow warm, being the Month of May, and the Seafoa 
 for the Arrival of the Shipping coming on, they went, fome of 
 fhem every Day almofl, to the Top of a Mountain, to fee if they 
 
 could
 
 6j6 Prefent State of Eaft-Grecnland. Part II, 
 
 could difcern any Ships. But, on the 25th of this Month, none 
 of them happening to go abroad, and one of them, being in the 
 outward Booth, heard fome Body hail the Tent ; to which the 
 Man, in the outward Booth, anfwered in Seamens Terms : They 
 were then juft going to Prayers, and ftaid but for their Companion 
 in the other Tent to join with them : The Man, who hail'd 
 them, was one of the Boat's Crew that belonged to an Englijh 
 Ship juft come from England; which the reft within no fooner 
 underftood, but they ran to meet their Countryman, with fuch 
 Tranfports of Joy that cannot be exprefled. One of the Ships, 
 which now .arrived, was commanded by the fame Mafter, which 
 left thefe poor Wretches alhore : And he, barbarous Brute ! in 
 order to excufe his own Inhumanity, began to revile and curfe 
 them, calling them Rogues and Runaways. And this fame Man, 
 itfeems, had left feven or eight Men in Green/and two Years 
 before, that were never heard of afterwards. But, notwithstand- 
 ing the Barbarity of their own Captain, the Commanders and 
 Officers of the other Ships, took care they fhould be kindly ufed, 
 and brought to England; where they received a Gratuity from 
 the generous and humane Merchants, and were alfo well provide*? 
 for by them. 
 
 FINIS.
 
 ERRATA. 
 
 fN ihtlntroJuBhn^ Pagc3, Line 17, for 3, read 2 ; 1. 26 and 27, 
 A f. 4, r. 24. P. 5, 1. 22, f 1, r. S. P. 6, Ex. 2, f. 6347, r. 637a. 
 P. 95 1. 10, f. 2, r. 3. P. 10, 1. 3,f. *>, r. /o be. P. 19, Prob. 4. r. 
 
 4-*P.2o,l. 1 5,f.=*,r. *; I.20, f. !fr. ff; P.24, f. 12.130% 
 
 z, 5 1 
 
 r. 15.13d P. 25, f. 92.712031, r. 92.412051. P. 31, Maft but 
 ne,f./or,r.or. P. 34, 1. laft,f.* 4 , r. u % . p. 44, 1. 18, f.^j, r . , 
 
 and for , r.=s. P. 45, 1. 2, f. -f- ^Z^ r . a 4- JZ^ ? j. j a ft but one 
 
 2 2 ' 
 
 f. ft r. =/>. P. 47,1. i,r. tfXio. P. 48, 1. 30, f. 4, r. 4*. P. 49, 
 1. 5, 6, 7, and 11, f-4~ 5 *, r. 5*. P. 55, at Seep 13, f. 339, 
 
 r -393- 
 
 In P*r* 1, p. 16, Theor. 3. f. obftufc r. o^/?. P. 26. 1. i* 
 
 f. TitfO, r. FAfO. P. 38, Cafe 5. r. BC: R:: AB: x, C. 
 P. 76, 1. 25, f. Recbercb, r. Refearch. P. 153, i. 17, f. Il^w. 
 Vi. r. 7*. XVI. 
 
 And fome few others, which the candid Reader is defired to cop- 
 reft) and excufe. 
 

 
 iff >)
 
 LTOWW* 
 
 y L mRARY FACILITY